America: Being the Latest, and Most Accurate Description of the Nevv VVorld / Containing the Original of the Inhabitants, and the Remarkable Voyages Thither. The Conquest of the Vast Empires of Mexico
Date: 2019-06-13T00:00:00+00:00
Keywords: America

The Project Gutenberg eBook of America: Being the Latest, and Most Accurate Description of the Nevv VVorld

This ebook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

Title: America: Being the Latest, and Most Accurate Description of the Nevv VVorld

Author: John Ogilby

Release date: June 13, 2019 [eBook #59745]
Most recently updated: January 24, 2021

Language: English

Credits: Produced by Richard Tonsing and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
produced from images generously made available by The
Internet Archive)

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AMERICA: BEING THE LATEST, AND MOST ACCURATE DESCRIPTION OF THE NEVV VVORLD ***

Transcriber’s Note:

The cover image was created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.

AMERICA:
BEING THE LATEST, AND MOST
ACCURATE DESCRIPTION
OF THE
NEVV VVORLD;
CONTAINING
The Original of the Inhabitants, and the Remarkable Voyages thither.
THE CONQUEST OF THE VAST
EMPIRES
OF
Mexico and Peru,
AND OTHER LARGE
PROVINCES and TERRITORIES,
WITH THE SEVERAL EUROPEAN
PLANTATIONS
IN THOSE PARTS.
ALSO
Their Cities, Fortresses, Towns, Temples,
Mountains, and Rivers.
Their Habits, Customs, Manners, and Religions.
Their Plants, Beasts, Birds, and Serpents.
WITH
An APPENDIX, containing, besides several other considerable Additions, a brief Survey of what hath been discover’d of the Unknown South-Land and the Arctick Region.

Collected from most Authentick Authors, Augmented with later Observations, and Adorn’d with Maps and Sculptures, by JOHN OGILBY Esq; His Majesty’s Cosmographer, Geographick Printer, and Master of the Revels in the Kingdom of IRELAND.

LONDON,

Printed by the Author, and are to be had at his House in

White Fryers, M. DC. LXXI.

A Catalogue of the Authors, which are either mention’d, or made use of in this Volume of America.

Abraham Mellinus
Abraham Mylius
Adriaen vander Donk
Ælian
Albertus Magnus
Aldrete
Ælius Lampridius
Alexander Aphrodiensis
Alexander ab Alexandro
Alexander Guaginus
Alonso Garcia
Alonso de Ouagli
Andræas Cæsariensis
Angrin Jonas
Antonio de Herrera
Apuleius
Aristonicus Grammaticus
Aristotle
Athanasius Kircher
Augustinus
Augustin de Tarcate
Augustus Thuanus
Ayton of Armenia
Balthazar de Amizquita
Barnaba Cabo
Bartholomæo de las Casas
Benjamin Tudalensis
Caspar Barlæus
Castaldus
Charles Rochfort
Christopher Arcisseuski
Cicero
Claude de Abbeville
Clemens Alexandrinus
Conradus Gesner
Cornelius Nepos
Cornelius Witfleet
Ctesias
Curtius
Cyrianus
David Ingran
David Powel
Diodorus Siculus
Dionysius Halicarnassæus
Dirk Ruiters
Dithmar Blefken
Duarte Mendez Seraon
Egydius Fletcher
Emanuel de Moraez
Erasmus Stella
Erick Roothaer
Everhard Reid
Eusebius
Euthymius Zibagenus
Festus Avienus
Francisc. Burmannus
Francisc. Delapuente
Francisc. de Gomara
Francisc. Lopes de Gomesa
Francisc. Raphelingius
Francisc. Soarez
Francisc. Tirolmonte
Francisc. Xaverius
Fullerus
Galenus
Garcilasso de la Vega
Genebrardus
Gerardus Joannes Vossius
Guido de Brez
Guilielm. Piso
Guilielm. Postellus
Harmannus Moded
Henrick Haelbos
Henrick Hawks
Hernando de Leon
Herodotus
Hesychius
Hieronim. Benzo
Hieronim. Cardanus
Homer
Hugo Grotius
Hugo Linschot
Jacob Bontius
Jacob Panensis
Jacob Rabbi
Inca Garcilasso
Joannes Ardenois
Joannes Bertius
Joannes Chilton
Joannes Gysius
Joannes Johnstonus
Jean de Laet
Joannes de Ledesma
Joannes Leonclavius
Joannes Lery
Joannes Mariana
Joannes Nieuwhof
Joan. van de Sande
Joseph. Acosta
Joseph. Anchieta
Joseph. Scaliger
Isaacus Pontanus
Isaac. du Verne
Isidorus Mendes Sequera
Julius Cæsar
Julius Cæsar Scaliger
Lactantius
Lauren. Ananias
Lauren. Bikker
Lauren. Guascus Gerascius
Lauren. Keymis
Levinus Lemmius
Lieven Aizma
Lopez Vaz
Lucan
Lucretius
Lodowick Leo
Lysander
Manethon Persa
Marcus Zeno
Martin del Barco
Martin Perez
Matthæus van den Broeke
Matthiolus
Melchior Soiterus
Mich. Lithower
Michovius
Miles Philips
Moses
Nicolaus Zeno
Olympiodorus
Paulus Venetus
Pedro de Ancieta
Pedro Pizarro
Pedro Fernandez de Quir
Pedro Maria
Peter Martyr
Pedro Ordonnes de Cevallos
Peter van Gendt
Philo Judæus
Philippus Cluverius
Philippus Mornæus
Phylarchus
Piere Moreau
Pinedas
Plato
Pliny
Plutarch
Pomponius Mela
Proclus
Procopius
Quarterius
Rabbi Simeon
Robertus Comtæus
Sam. Purchas
Sebastiaen Schroten
Simplicius
Salust
Sigismond Baro
Strabo
Theodosio
Theopompus
Thevet
Tertullian
Trigaut
Vegetius
Virgil

THE
CONTENTS
of the several
CHAPTERS and SECTIONS.

The first Book.
America unknown to the Ancients | Fol. 1
Of the Original of the Americans, whence they came, when, how, and from what People Planted | 11
First Discoverers of America, with Christopher Colonus his Expedition | 43
Pedro Alphonso Nigno his Voyage | 56
The Voyage of Vincent Agnes Pinzon | 58
The Expedition of Americus Vesputius | 60
The Expedition of Alphonso Fogeda, Diego Nicuesa, Ancisus, and Roderick Colmenares | 65
Peter Arias his Expedition, and the remarkable Passages of Vascus Nunnez | 69
The Expedition of Francisco Fernandez, Lupo Caizedo, Christophero Morantes, Bernardo Igniguez, and Juan Grisalva | 76
The Expedition of Ferdinand Magaglian, commonly call’d Magellan | 79
Ferdinando Cortez his Voyage | 81
Diego Gottierez his Expedition | 92
The Expedition of Pedro Alvarado, Francisco and Gonzalvo Pizarro, and Diego de Almagro | 95
The Expeditions of John Stade and Nicholas Durando Villegagnon | 103
The Expedition of John Ribald, Renatus Laudonier, and Gurgie | 105

Four English Expeditions, under the Command of our famous Sea-Captains, Martin Forbisher, Sir Francis Drake, Thomas Candish, and John Smith

108

A Netherland Expedition, by Jaques Mahu and Simon de Cordes | 110
The Expedition of Oliver van Noord | 113
The Expedition of George van Spilbergen | 115
The Expedition of Corneliszoon Schouten and Jacob Le Maire | 117
The Voyage of the Nassavian Fleet, under the Command of Jaques le Heremite and Hugo Schapenham | 120
Henry Brewer his Voyage | 122
The Second Book.
Of the Bounds of America, and of the Division of the Mexican, or Northern part thereof | Fol. 125
Estotiland | 126
Terra Laboratoris | 128
Canada, or New France | 129
Accadia, or Nova Scotia | 133
Norumbegua | 138
New England | 139
New Netherland, now call’d New York | 168
A new Description of Mary-Land | 183
Virginia | 192
The Relation of Captain Smith’s being taken Prisoner by Powhatan, and his deliverance by his Daughter Pocahonta | 202
Carolina | 205
Florida | 213
Jucatan | 222
Guatimala | 224
Vera Paz | 227
Honduras | 229
Nicaragua | 232
Costarica | 235
Veragua | ibid.
Guatimala, properly so call’d | ibid.
The Kingdom of Mexico, or New Spain | 238
Mechoacan | 261
Tlascalla | 264
Guaxata | 268
Panuco | 270
Tabasco | 273
New Gallicia | 281
Guadalajara | 284
Xalisco | 285
Chiametla | ibid.
Couliacan | 286
Cinoloa | 288
Zacatecas | 289
New Biscay | 290
New Mexico | 291
Cibola, Tontonteac, and Nova Granada | 298
Quivira | 301
Terra Nova, or New-found Land, with the Island of Assumption | 304
The Bermudas, or Summer-Islands | 311
Hispaniola | 314
Porto Rico, and Monico | 327
Cuba | 331
Jamaica | 337
The Islands call’d The Lucaies | 344
The Caribbee-Islands | 345
Anegada and Sombrero | 362
Las Virgines | 363
Anguilla | ibid.
Saba | 364
St. Crux | ibid.
St. Martin | 365
St. Bartholomew | 367
Barboude | 368
Rotonda | ibid.
Nevis | ibid.
Eustathius | 369
Antego | 370
Montserrat | ibid.
Guadalupe | 371
Deseado | 372
Marigalante | ibid.
Todos Sanctos | 373
De Aves | ibid.
Dominico | 375
Martinico | 376
St. Lucia | 377
Barbados | ibid.
St. Vincent | 380
Bekia | 381
Granada | ibid.
Tabago | 382
St. Christophers | 383
The Islands Sotavento, and the Isle Trinidado | 387
Cubagua | 388
California | 389
The Third Book.
A Description of Peruana or, Southern America | Fol. 393
Castella Aurea, otherwise call’d Terra Firma | 394
Panama | 395
Darien | 399
New Andaluzia | 400
St. Martha | 403
Rio de la Hacha | 405
New Granada | 406
Granada | 408
Popayana | 409
Peru | 412
Quito | 441
Los Quixos | 446
Lima | 450
Cusco | 456
Los Charcas | 462
Collao | 466
Chile | 471
Chile, properly so call’d | 472
Magellanica | 473
Paraguay, or Rio de la Plata | 475
Rio de la Plata, properly so call’d | 476
Tucuman | ibid.
La Crux de Sierra | 477
Brasile | ibid.
St. Vincent | 495
Rio de Janeiro | 496
De Spirito Santo | 497
Porto Seguro | 498
Los Isleos | 501
Bahia de Todos los Sanctos | 502
Pernambuco | 505
Parayba | 508
Maragnan | 511
The Lordships Tamarica, Rio Grande, Siara, and Para | 517
A Relation of the Proceedings of the Netherland West-India Company in Brasile, to the Year 1658 | 518
The Journey of Rodulphus Baron, with the Description of the Customs and Manners of the Tapuyans | 595
Grave Maurice his Account of Brasile, so far as it concern’d the West-India Company | 600
The Councellor Dussen’s Relation of so much of Brasile as concern’d the West-India Company | 601
A Description of the Palace Freyburgh, two Bridges, and a Banquetting-house, all built by Grave Maurice | 605
Guiana | 607
A Relation of the Journey of Francisco Orellana | ibid.
Paria, or New Andalusia | 620
Cumana | 621
Venezuela | 624
The Islands Margareta, Cubagua, and Coche | 627
Of the Islands of Southern America | 628
In the Appendix.
Rio de la Plata | Fol. 631
Chili | 634
A View of the Chilesian Language | 635
Magellanica | 649
The Unknown South-Land | 653
Terra Borealis, or The Arctick Region | 661
Several Attempts for the discovery of the North-West Passage | 672

A brief View of what Places are possess’d at this day in the West-Indies, by the English, Spaniards, French, Portuguese, and Dutch

674

AN
ACCURATE DESCRIPTION
OF
AMERICA.

CHAP. I.
America, unknown to the Antients.

Description of the Ocean.

The Sea, that takes several Denominations from the Countreys which it washeth, and surrounding the dry Land, cuts out, and shapes so many winding Bays, Creeks, and Meandring Inlets, seems no where so much confin’d and penn’d into so narrow a Channel, as the Straights of Magellan: From whence again, soon expatiating, it spreads it self into two immense, and almost boundless Oceans, that which opens to the North, gives terminaries to the four Regions of the Earth; that to the South, onely to Asia and America; both which, indeed, are but one continu’d Sea, extending it self round the Universal Globe.

This watry part of the World, that almost through all Ages lay Fallow, hath in these later times been Furrow’d by several Expert and Stout Captains, who now by their Art and Industry, have given a good Account of, and made clear Discoveries from East to West, where-ever the Sun rises or sets.

The Northern Bounds under the Artick-Zone, have been hitherto so obstructed with Ice, that the undertakings of such as adventur’d either to find by the North-East or North-West a Passage to India, have been utterly frustrate. Of the Southern, no such pains hath as yet been taken in the Discovery, so that for the most part it is yet unknown how far the Water, either deep or shallow, overspreads the Earth, onely thus much Experience hath made out, that the Antartick needs lesser Line to Fathom, than the Artick-Ocean.

The Ancients had little knowledge in Navigation.

The antient Greeks, Phenicians, and Romans, or whosoever that were Renown’d by Antiquity, and Listed in the number of their famous Navigators, were no less Timerous than Ignorant concerning Maritim Affairs, and are not fit to stand in the least degree of competition with our later Voyagers.

Navigation is very ancient.

Of old, by an inviolable Law, made by Custom, according to Pliny, Vigetius and others, the Sea was lock’d up, from the eleventh of October, to the tenth of March, no Ships daring to venture forth, dreading short Nights, and foul Weather; neither in Summer, did they so much as once offer, unless driven by Storms, to attempt the Offin, or loose sight of Land; yet there is no question, but that several Nations in former Ages, made it their business, spending their whole time, and wearying themselves in the Practical Art of Navigation.

Geograph. lib. 1.

Hist. Nat. lib. 2. cap. 67.

Ultima Thule, suppos’d by some to be Ireland. Vide Georgic.

The Voyage of Hanno.

Of Eudoxus, Strab. l. 2.

The Sacred Scripture testifies, That the Kings of Judea, Solomon, Jehosaphat, Ozias, and others, prepar’d several Fleets that Sail’d through remote Seas, freighting themselves with Gold from Ophir, and other Rarities, which were Imported to supply and enrich the Holy-Land. And Strabo also tells us, That King Solomon being contemporary with Homer, then discover’d India. And Pliny relates, That the Romans, in the Reign of Augustus, passing the Straights of Gibraltar, and sleighting the Ne plus ultra, Coasted Spain, France, and Belgium, leaving not at the Promontory of the Cimbrians (now call’d Shager-Riff) but also ventur’d into the Northern Ocean, which washes Norwey and Lapland: But long before this, as Athenæus relates, Phileas Taurominites, a Grecian Captain, and several others pass’d the Herculean-Pillars, penetrating the Northern Seas as far as Britain, and adventuring, made the first Discovery of Thule: And to the Southward the African Coasts without Gibraltar, and beyond Atlas, were now and then explor’d by several expert Captains. But more remarkable is the Voyage of Hanno a Carthaginian, who out-sail’d these, and inspected the Coasts of Africa, as far as the Gorgades: And Eudoxus Cyzicenus, flying from King Lathyrus, set Sail from the Arabian Gulph, and passing the Great-Cape, came to an Anchor at last in the Mouth of Gibraltar, having discover’d all the Eastern, Southern, and Western parts of Africa.

Strange Voyage of some Indians.

Of Menelaus.

Moreover, it deserves special observation, That an antient Swedish King, as Cornelius Nepos relates, sent as a Rarity and great Present to the Roman Consul Metellus Celer, some Indians, who loosing their course, hatter’d up and down with perpetual Storms and stress of Weather, were at last driven into the Northern Ocean, where they suffer’d Shipwrack; yet saving themselves, Landed on his Coast: Aristonicus Gramaticus relates, That Menelaus Sailing from the Sack of Troy, became so great a Voyager, that leaving the Straights, he surrounded Africa, and discovering India, after eight years re-measuring the same way he went, return’d with great Riches in safety to his own Kingdom: Which is consentaneous to Homer, who saith, Odyss. l. 4.

——None must compare
Mansions with Jove, his Seats Celestial are:
But with me any may, who eight years tost
Through Worlds of Miseries from Coast to Coast,
’Mongst unknown Seas, of my Return small hope,
Cyprus, Phœnicia, Ægypt,[1] Æthiope,
Sidon, Erembos found, and Lybia, where
Their Lambs are horn’d, their Ews teem thrice a year.

——Ἤτοι ζηνὶ βροτῶν οὐκ ἄντις ἐρίζοι.
Ἀθάνατοι γὰρ τοῦ γε δόμοι καὶ κτήματ ἔασιν.
Ἀνδρῶν δ’ ἤκεν τίς μοί ἐρίζεται ἠὲ, καὶ οὐκὶ
Κτήμασιν; ἠ~ γὰρ πολλὰ παθὼν, καὶ πόλλ’ ἐπαληθεὶς
Ἠγαγόμην ἐν νηυσὶ, καὶ ὀγδοάτω ἔτει ἦλθον
Κύπρον, φοίνικην τε καὶ ἀιγυπτίους ἐπαληθεὶς,
Ἀιθιοπάς θ’ ἱκόμην, καὶ σιδονίους καὶ ἐρεμβοὺς
Καὶ Λιβύην, ἵνα τ’ ἄρνευ ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελετ/ὁυσι,
Τρὶς γὰρ τίκτει μῆλα τελευφόρον εἰς ἐνιαυτὸν.

1. The Commentators on Homer have been very inquisitive to find out Menelaus Voyage into Æthiopia. Crates suppos’d that he pass’d out at the Straights, doubled the Southern Cape, and so arriv’d thither. Eratosthenes conjectures, that in the time of Homer the Straights Mouth was an Isthmus, and the Ægyptian Isthmus overflow’d by the Sea, which afforded him a shorter passage. But that is most probable which Strabo delivers, that he then went to the borders of Æthiopia, when he pass’d up Ægypt to the City of Thebes; the Borders of Æthiopia being not far distant from thence in Strabo’s time, probably very near it in Homer’s.

Remarkable Voyage of an Indian into Egypt,
Of Ptolemy
And also of Cleopatra.

That which the Grecian Geographers relate concerning Ptolomy Euergetes, King of Egypt, is not to be forgotten, That sending Pilots, Commission’d to take the Soundings, and settle the Land-marks in the Arabian Gulph, they found by chance a forsaken Vessel, onely in it one Man half dead, lying among several other breathless Bodies, of whom, being refresh’d with convenient Cordials, they enquir’d his Fortune, but he being unable to give them any present satisfaction, neither understanding what the other said, they sent him to the Court, where soon having got a smattering of Greek, he inform’d Euergetes, that he was a Native Indian, driven from their course into the place where they found him by stress of Weather, and that his company were famish’d, all their Provision spent in their Wandrings from their intended Voyage; Thus being kindly entertain’d, he also promis’d the King to open his Passage (if so he pleas’d) into India. The King slept not upon this Intelligence, but immediately prepar’d a Fleet Freighted with such Commodities as were advis’d; with which setting forth by the Conduct of this their Indian Pilot, they Anchor’d in their desir’d Port, and brought the King in return from thence a rich Cargo of Silk, Spices, costly Drugs, and precious Gems. Cleopatra, about sixty years after, intending not to lose the advantages reap’d by the former discoveries, equipp’d another and greater Navy; which passing through the Red-Sea, found the Stern of a Ship, on which was Presented a Horse, whereby some of the more knowing Sea-men judg’d, that it had been a Gibraltar Vessel, and Sailing about Africa, there by sad accident suffer’d a Wrack. This Stern was afterwards set up, and fix’d as a Memorial in the Market-place of Memphis.

The Venetians were the first that drove a trade from Europe to the East-Indies.

How they went their journeys.

In these later times, the first that endeavor’d to drive an European Trade in Africk, and held Commerce with India, was the State of Venice, who Sail’d from thence through the Adriatick, into the Mediterranean-Sea: So Steering for Alexandria, where unlading their Goods, from thence they carry’d them over Land, and Shipping again in the Arabian Gulph, Sail’d directly for India. Thus by Land and Water, were exchang’d several Commodities, and the Indian Growth and rich Products of the Oriental World plentifully Transported to Venice, and from thence, all Europe had ample Accommodation, until an Egyptian Sultan suffer’d the Way to be infested by Thieves and Murdering Robbers, that so they were enforc’d to remove thence, and Discharge their several Cargoes at Aleppo; from whence, on Mules and Camels, they carry’d their Goods to Babylon, so to Balsarum, and then to Ormus, where they Re-ship’d thence, directly standing for India.

Thus they enjoy’d the benefit of so great a Trade and Commerce, until the Portuguese found a Passage by Sea, saving the Expence and trouble of carrying Goods so far by Land to India; Of which here we will a little inlarge.

By what means the Portuguese came first to discover the Coasts of Africa and India.

Why Africa was no further discover’d.

John, the first King of Portugal, who took from the Moors, by force of Arms, Septa, an African City, having five Sons; Henry his fourth behav’d himself so gallantly in the Leaguer of Septa, that after he became Master of the place, this Prince made many bold Excursions in several Parties against the Enemy, bringing in daily great store of Booty; so growing rich, he Rigg’d out two new Vessels to make farther Discoveries along the Coast of Africa. Yet this his Expedition went on but slowly, being much taken off in Building there a new City, then call’d Tarzanabala, and since Villa Infantis; but being Admonish’d by a Dream, and Check’d for his laying thus aside his first Design of Navigation; he soon after, Anno 1410. set forth the Ships that he intended, which he the more accelerated, being inform’d by some of his Prisoners Natives, that Africa spread from the Basis of Mount-Atlas, very far towards the South: This Mountain then was the Terminary of Navigation that way, because thereabouts a long Ridge or Shelf of Sands thrust its Point under Shallow Waters so far out into the Ocean, that none durst venture to Sail into the Offin, being out of sight of Land to double this conceal’d Cape.

Who first ventur’d into the Offin.

Madera’s, by whom peopled.

The first that attempted to find Deep Water, and get round about, discovering several unknown Coasts, and Uninhabited Isles belonging to that Region, were Joannes Gonsalves, Tristan Varseus, and Ægidius Annius; amongst which were the Madera’s, and St. George de Picho, which Prince Henry first Planted with Portuguese, and others since with Netherlanders. He also obtain’d a Grant from Pope Martin the Fifth, of all the discover’d Territories East-ward from the Canaries, for ever to be the undoubted Right, and belonging to the Crown of Portugal.

By whom Genny was discover’d.

After Henry’s Decease, Anno 1460. the business of Navigation and Discoveries of new Countreys, lay neglected, because King Alphonso turmoyl’d in a Civil War, his Crown being at stake, had not leisure to think or look after uncertain improvements by Sea; yet at last having quell’d his Enemies, he ventur’d forth some Ships, who Sail’d as far as the River Zenaga, and came to Anchor before the City of Genny, famous since for Trade, which gave its denomination to the Countrey and Coasts of Guiny, where they dealing, Barter’d for Ivory, Gold, Slaves, and also got so much footing into the Countrey, that they suddenly rais’d up a Fort, and Man’d it with a strong Garrison, Shipping their Slaves for Lisbon.

John the Second succeeding his Father Alphonso, had a great design upon Arabia and India, and if possible, was ambitious to open a Passage from the Atlantick, to the Oriental-Seas. But the difficulty lay in Steering so often from sight of Land, venturing into the Main Ocean, obstructed by so many dangerous Shoals that lay so far out into the Offin.

For the Northern Constellations the Astrolabe was in use long before.

At that time flourish’d three famous Mathematicians, Rhoderick, Joseph, and Martin Bohemus, Pupils bred up by Joannes Monteregius; with which the King consulting, perswaded, that they would by their Art invent some Instrument, that by Southern Constellations, the Pole being depress’d, the Navigator might know where he was, and in what height; so guessing what distance they were from this or that Countrey; they accordingly Club’d Learning, and by their great Study, found out what since hath prov’d so useful and beneficial to Seamen, the Astrolabe; which help having obtain’d, the Sailers encourag’d, more frequently ventur’d into remote and unknown Seas.

Remarkable passage of Jaques Cano.

Discovery of Congo.

John the Second, seeks to discover India by water.

After these, King John of Portugal sent Jaques Cano with a Fleet, who Sailing, found the River Zaires, where he erected a Pillar with an Inscription, Latin and Portuguese, signifying by whom, and in what Kings Reign these African Coasts were discover’d: Here he also met some of the Natives, who more civiliz’d than the rest, told him, That they had a mighty King, who Raigning over them, kept his Court some few days Journey up in the Countrey, to whom Cano sending his Agents, detain’d four Africans as Pledges, which he carry’d with their free consent to Portugal, promising to bring them back in fifteen Months, who before that time having got some smatterings of their Tongue, inform’d them, that their Native Soyl was call’d Congo, whither returning by the appointed time, they were according to their agreement, exchang’d for the Portuguese, and Cano address’d himself with rich Presents to their King, whom he found sitting in their manner on an Ivory Throne, being from the middle upward Naked, his nether parts cover’d with long Silken Skirts, a Golden Armlet on his left Arm, athwart his Shoulders hung a Horses Tail, their Badge of Royal Dignity: Cano humbly laid the Presents down at the Kings feet, amongst which was a Gilded Flag, or Pennon with a Cross, which Pope Innocent the Eighth had Consecrated with great Ceremony. After this, many of that Nation became Christians, and the King himself receiv’d Baptism. But in short time, by the Instigations of their Diabolical Priests, and others, Christianity loosing ground, grew out of countenance: Mean while, King John the Second vigorously Prosecuted the business of Discovery, sending Jews and Christians by Land from Alexandria and other parts of Egypt to India, and from thence to explore the Coasts on the Eastern side of Africa, to the Great-Cape; if so a way might be found fit for Navigators, having doubled that Point, to Traffick with the Oriental parts of the World.

Vasques de Gama, his expedition.

After this Princes Death the Work lay sill a while, but in short time, King Emanuel his Successor freshly undertook the business once more, sending Vasques de Gama with four Ships, who passing through many Dangers with great Difficulties, Anchor’d at last before Calecut, and was the first of the Europeans that found a way to the East-Indies.

Christopher Columbus’s.

Dividing of the earth.

But Christopher Columbus, five Years before Gama’s Expedition to the East, had been employ’d in Western Discoveries, which prov’d so very successful, that he found no less than another World; which soon after, from Americus Vesputius, was call’d America: So that the Division of the World by the Antients, (concerning which they had so long err’d, and were utterly mistaken) was now made manifest by Experience, and undisputable Demonstration; for formerly the whole World was known by no other names than Asia, Africa, and Europe, but now, those three are found to make but one Part of what incircles the Universal Globe; because in the South lies a second, known no further than by its Coastings and Superficial Margents; the third part being the New-World, our America.

A query, if America was known to the Ancients.

Atlantica. Plato in Crisis & Timæo.

Here it will not seem amiss, having prov’d that Africa was more than Coasted by the Ancients, to ingage and search with some scrutiny concerning this America; First, Whether at any time ’twas known by the Ancients? And next, by what People, and when first Inhabited? About the former, the Learned of these later times Jangle amongst themselves, for some of them will needs ascribe so much Honor to Antiquity, declining the Worthy Praise of those that made so wonderful a Discovery, as if they of old, and many Ages before, had done the same, or at least, that this New-World to them was not unknown, maintaining this their bold Assertion from the Authority of what they find, both in Ancient Greek, and Latin Authors: First, especially in the Learned Plato, who, as you know at large, describes a New Atlantis, lying beyond the Straights of Gibraltar; whose Coast is surrounded with two vast Seas that are Sow’d thick with scatter’d Islands. By these Seas they understand the Atlantick and Southern-Sea, by the many Isles, Cuba, Hispaniola, Jamaica, California, and others, which lie sprinkled along the Coasts of America. But it cannot be made out, that Plato describes ought but a Fancy, his own Idea, not a Countrey that ever was, is, or shall be, though he sets it forth so Accurately, and with such Judgment, as if he had taken a Survey of the place, and found such a Land indeed.

Diod. Sic. lib. 6.

Arist. de Mirandis in Natura auditis.

In like manner, Diodorus Siculus undertakes to prove, That America was known to the Antients; telling a Story, how the Phenicians were driven by a Storm from the Coasts of Africa West-ward, falling at last upon a great and altogether unknown Island, which our late Expositors take for America; Must it therefore be so? Surely not, for it is onely a bare Story, without any Proof or the least Testimony. They endeavor to make Aristotle bolster up their opinion that he had a knowledge of this New-World, which with no small pains they pump from these Words: “Beyond the Herculean Pillars, certain Carthaginian Merchants penetrated the Atlantick Ocean so far, that at last they found a vast, yet un-inhabited Island, producing nothing but Herbage, Plants, and Wild-Beasts, yet interlac’d with many Meandring Rivers, abounding with several sorts of Fish, lying some days Sail from the Continent; they Landing, found a Soyl so fertile, and Air so temperate, that there they setled, and were the first Planters of that Isle. But the Carthaginians having intelligence thereof, Prohibited all Persons whatsoever, upon Pain of Death, to go thither, fearing the place being so much commended, all the People would be ready to flock thither, and desert their own, and so utterly unfurnish and debilitate their then growing Common-wealth.”

Æneid. lib. 6.

But how could the Carthaginians find America, without the use of the Compass? How happen’d it, that they were so taken with the fertility of this their New-found-Land, when the Adjacent Countreys and Fields about Carthage are every where Flourishing, and most Luxurious? So that it may better be suppos’d, that what Aristotle found so long since, may rather be the Canary-Isles, or Great-Brittain, than America. The Greeks having then also made some Inspection into the Brittish-Isles. They would also make you believe, that Virgil the Prince of Latin Poets, had known the New-World in these Verses; Æneid. lib. 6.

There, there’s the Prince, oft promis’d us before,
Divine Augustus Cæsar, who once more
Shall Golden Days bring to th’ Ausonian Land,
Kingdoms that once old Saturn did command,
And shall His power to India extend,
Beyond the Annual Circle, and beyond
The Sun’s long Progress, where great Atlas bears,
Laden with Golden Stars, the glittering Sphears;

Hic vir, hic est, tibi quem promitti sæpius audis,
Augustus Cæsar, divûm genus, aurea condet
Sæcula, qui rursus Latio, regnata per arva
Saturno quondam, super & Garamantas & Indos
Proferet imperium. Jacet extra sidera tellus,
Extra anni Solisque vias, ubi cœlifer Atlas
Axem humero torquet stellis ardentibus aptum.

America was not known to the Ancients.

But what of all this? Who finds in any of these Writings, any Marks of America, or the least Description thereof? Though we cannot deny that the Antient Sages and Wise Philosophers of former times might easily make out, and no question did, that the Earth and Sea made the perfect Figure of a Globe; first from the round Shadow of the Earth that Ecclipses the Moon; the different Risings and Settings of the Celestial Luminaries; and the still Variation of the Pole; so that the Earth and Sea making one Ball, they might easily conjecture, that the South-side of the Equinoctial might be Inhabited as well as the North: But all this was more grounded upon Natural Reason and Right Judgement, than any Experience of theirs, or the least certain knowledge thereof, which since these later times had the first happiness to obtain; so laying these Conjectures aside, there have been none more grosly erroneous, and so utterly mistaken in this Point, than some of the Ancients, and especially the Fathers of the Church.

Lactant. l. 3. c. 24.

Lactantius Firmianus, and St. Austin, who strangely jear’d at as ridiculous, and not thinking fit for a Serious Answer the Foolish Opinion of Antipodes, or another Habitable World beyond the Equator: At which, Lactantius Drolling, says, What, Forsooth, here is a fine Opinion broach’d indeed; an Antipodes! heigh-day! People whose Feet tread with ours, and walk Foot to Foot with us; their Heads downwards, and yet drop not into the Sky! There, yes, very likely, the Trees loaden with Fruit grow downwards, and it Rains, Hails, and Snows upwards; the Roofs and Spires of Cities, tops of Mountains, point at the Sky beneath them, and the Rivers revers’d topsi-turvy, ready to flow into the Air out of their Channels!

Lactant. error concerning our Antipodes.

As also St. Austin. de Civit. Dei l. 16. c. 9.

But these seeming witty Observations of Lactantius, though they may serve for a Jest, yet are not grounded on any serious Reasons; for the Earth and Sea being Globular, making one Universal Ball; all Materials whatsoever that belong to this great Body, sink by a natural Propensity towards its Center; so that where-ever we Travel, our Feet are downwards, and our Heads upwards, the Sky above, and the Earth beneath; neither need they fear, that any where the Earth should Moulder and drop into the Clouds: But St. Austin Reasons better, admitting that the Earth and Sea make a Universal Globe; yet it no way follows, that inhabited Countreys should lye opposite to our Northern, nay, altogether impossible, seeing that side which is our Antipodes is all nothing but Sea; and should we allow, that there were Land and Water mixt as ours is, who could prove, that they were Peopled? or how could any get thither, over such Vast and Immense Seas? or possibly pass the extream heat of the Torrid Zone, not to be endur’d by any living Creature? And what then becomes of Sacred Scripture, which says positively, That all Men were deriv’d from Adam, and after the Floud, from Noah and his three Sons? Therefore the Nations of the Antipodes must be of another Abstract, there being no possibility (as they suppos’d) of passing from this World to that: But since the Discovery of the East and West-Indies, Experience, the best Mistress, hath taught, that in the South are mighty Lands and vast Territories, and that as far as they have been Penetrated, are found to be full of People, extending their Dominions from East to West. And though St. Austin deny’d this now well-known Truth, yet long before his time, Cicero, Pliny, and others amongst the Greeks and Romans, divided the Earth under five Zones; which Virgil describes thus:

Five Zones the heav’ns infold, hot Sun-beams beat
Always on one, and burns with raging heat.
The two Extreams to this on each hand lies
Muffled with Storms, fetter’d with cruel Ice.
’Twixt Cold and Heat, two more there are, th’ aboads
Assign’d poor Mortals by th’ Immortal Gods.

Quinque tenent cælum zonæ: quarum una corusco
Semper Sole rubens, & torrida semper ab igni:
Quam circum extremæ dextra, lævaque trahuntur
Cærulea glacie concretæ, atque imbribus atris.
Has inter, mediamque, duæ mortalibus ægris
Munere concessæ divum: via secta per ambas,
Obliquus qua se signorum verteret ordo.

Macrob. in Somnio Scipionis. l. 2. c. 5.

Vide Carpent. Geograph.

With Virgil, Pliny, and the Prince of Latin Orators agree, who saith, “You see, that those that inhabit the Earth dwell in Countreys so separated one from another, that it is impossible they should have any Commerce; some of them are our Antipodes, walking with their Heads downwards, some their Feet against our sides, others, as we, with their Heads upright. You see how the same Earth seems to be Swath’d about with Rolls, of which, two separated by the other three, are at utmost distance one from the other, lying equi-distant under the Vertick Points of Heaven, always cover’d with Snow and Ice; but the middlemost and greatest is scorch’d by the violent heats of the Sun: Two Tracts are Habitable, one to the South, our Antipodes, the other North, which we Inhabit.”

Pliny lib. 2.

And Pliny also affirms, though against the Vulgar Opinion, this truth, “That the Earth is round about inhabited, and that people walk Foot to Foot in most parts thereof; though every one be ready to ask why our Antipodes drop not into the Sky; which question, our Antipodes may also ask concerning us.”

But although the Ancients upon these and the like Demonstrations well understood, that there was a Habitable World towards the South under our Horizon, yet they could not make out or believe, that there was any possibility to pass thither; And, according as St. Austin conceiv’d, That the Earth produc’d nothing under either Pole, by reason of excessive cold, and that the Equinoxs or Middle-Zone, was not to be penetrated, because of the insufferable heat.

Macrob. in Somno Scip. lib. 2.

And Macrobius saith, “That the Equinoctial Circle, the Artick and Antartick Lines, bind the two Habitable Zones, and make Temperate by the excessive Neighboring Heats and Colds; and these Countreys onely give Animation, and comfortable Enjoyment to all Living Creatures.”

Moreover, St. Austin in some places seems to clear his own Doubts, saying, “That People, if they could find a means to Sail those Vast and Undiscover’d Seas, might make Land, raising new Stars under another Sky.”

How beasts came on remote Islands.

A Learned Father, searching after the Original of all sorts of Beasts which multiply by Generation, concludes, That they must derive themselves from those that were sav’d with Noah in the Ark. But how came they to the Isles? To those adjacent and near the Main Land, they might easily Swim; to the remoter, they were Transported.

And chiefly the wild.

Austin is contradicted.

How men came to new Countreys.

But this Doubt is not altogether clear’d, for the Domestick and other Creatures fit for Humane use and Sustenance were thus brought thither: Yet how comes it to pass, that Voracious and Wild Creatures are also found there, such as Wolves, Tigers, Lions, and other Beasts of Prey? This puzzle putting St. Austin to a stand, he had no other means to get off, but by saying, that by God’s Commands or Permission, the Angels convey’d them thither; If so, why might not God please to Plant Men there in like manner, and the rather, the Earth being created for Humane use? But what needed this, when Men can in Ships Transport themselves, either of their own accord for curious Inquest, to find new Countreys, or else enforc’d by stress of Weather, to far remoter, and altogether unknown Lands: Besides, though the Earth is here and there divided by large Bays and vast Seas, yet nevertheless, in other places it is all continu’d Land, or at least parted by some narrow In-let or Sea; so that there was no difficulty for a crouded Plantation to go over, and so ease themselves in another Countrey, till then not Inhabited; therefore none need to question, but that from Adam, or nearer, from Noah’s three Sons, Sem, Ham, and Japhet, those, as well as we, were extracted, that Inhabit this our other World.

Reasons why America was so long unknown.

Who first sail’d on the Ocean.

Several opinions of the Antients concerning it.

Brittains amongst the first Inventors of Navigation.

But one question is to be observ’d, How first after the expiration of so many Ages in these our later times, a New-World was discover’d, altogether unknown to the Antients, when they in the greatness of their Parts and Undertaking, Prowess and Prudence, were no ways inferior to the Modern, and every way as fit for great Designs and grand Exploits? We need not scruple or make the least doubt, but the Sea hath been Navigated of old; but the first attempters set forth unexperienc’d, in as pittiful and ill-contriv’d Vessels. The Heathens ascribe the Art of Navigation, first to the Cretans, who under the Conduct of Neptune, set forth a Navy to explore Foraign Countries. But Pliny long before gives the Invention of this Art to Erythra, King of Egypt, who upon Pieces of Timber, conjoyn’d and brac’d together, crept along the Shores, and ventur’d to Discover the Isles in the Red-Sea. But others give that honor to the Trojans, and Micians, when with a Fleet by Sea, they Invaded Thrace: Others, to the Brittains, who made little Vessels of Leather, and were the first that by this Invention found how to Float upon the Waters: Some plead, that the Samothracians were first; Others, that Danæus before all, found a way by Sea from Egypt to Greece. But without all Contradiction, Noah’s Ark was the Pattern or Sample, that succeeding Ages imitating, built their Ships by; and the more probable, because his Offspring multiplying so fast, that they were enforc’d to inlarge their Colonies, by passing Seas, and other broad Rivers, to settle their Super-numeraries there.

The first Inventers of several things belonging to Shipping.

So Jason Invented a Ship, which he call’d Argos, which Sesostris King of Egypt took as his Pattern. Next, the Biremis, a Galley with double Banks of Oars, was made by the Erythreans; with treble Banks, by the Corinthian Amocles; the addition of the Quadruple, the Carthaginians boast; of the Quinqueremis Nesichthon, Alexander the Great, brought them to twelve Banks; Ptolomy Soter, to fifteen; Demetrius, Antigonus Son, doubled them to thirty; Ptolomy Philadelphus, to forty; and last of all, Philopater rais’d them to fifty Banks of Oars. Hippus a Tirian, was the first that set Ships upon the Stocks; the Rhodians a Ketch, and the Batavians a Boat; the Copes made the first Oar; Dedalus the Mast and Boltsprit; Piscus the Beak; the Tyrrheans the Anchor; Tiphys the Rudder; taking example from the motion of a Kites Stern; Icarus found Sails, fancy’d by the Poets for Wings, though some ascribe that honor to his Father Dedalus.

Why in former Ages no remote Countreys were discover’d.

Minos was the first that Ingag’d in a Sea-Fight, whereby we may easily conjecture, that of old none adventur’d far into the Offin, or to remote Countreys, not daring to trust their so sleight contriv’d Vessels. But these later times have strangely and suddenly improv’d this growing Art of Navigation, yet pitch’d not to that height at first, as boldly to adventure, and loose sight of Land.

The manner of the Antients Sailing.

Of the Romans.

Why America was so lately known.

The Tyrians first understood how to Steer their Course by the North-Star, and when dark and foul Weather had Clouded the Sky, that they could neither see Heaven or Earth, but onely Sea, they directed their Course by the Wind; and if they doubted the change thereof, they let some Birds flie, whom they follow’d, supposing that they stood directly to the nearest Land. But these are but poor helps, and blind Guides to shew you Land from the middle of the boundless Ocean. It is certain, that the Romans in the time of Julius Cæsar and Augustus, stretch’d the Bounds of that Empire Eastward to Euphrates, the Rhyne, and the Danube, and Westward to the Ocean and Mount Atlas, Sailing up and down the Mediterranean, with great Fleets, which stoutly endur’d the violence both of Waves and Weather; but all this made them not so hardy, as once to think or look after new Worlds. But after the Roman power decreas’d, by several Eruptions of the Goths, Vandals, Huns, Normans, Lumbards, and other Northern Countreys, which swarm’d with People, that overflow’d all places like a Deluge, so that Europe was every where puzzel’d and Imbroyl’d, their whole business consisting in conjoyning Forces to withstand such bold Invaders, and so vexatious an Enemy.

And farther East, Asia was at the same time little better, still trembling at the daily Alarms and Incursions of the Scythians, Persians, and Saracens; and afterwards the Turks growing upon them more than any of the former, expected no other than a sad Catastrophe, so that the known World had too much work cut out for them by these Distractions and Alterations of Government, then to go in Quest of uncertainties, to find they know not where, another.

Hieron. in c. 2. Ephes.

Here also is added by St. Jerom, what an antient Writer saith, Great care hath been taken in Computing the Age of this World, and if there be another which Commenc’d not with ours, (as Clemens mentions in his Epistles) where are scituate those Seas and Lands that make that second World? Or is a part of that, in which Adam was Created? Or may it not rather Metaphorically be taken for Worldly Affairs, govern’d by the Prince of the Air, ruling in the Hearts of the Children of Disobedience?

The Antients opinion of an unknown world.

But Pliny, Cicero, and Virgil, the best in their kind of Latin Writers, concur, That there may be a habitable World under our Horizon, in the temperate Southern Zone, beyond the extream heat, and on this side of the Antartick colds.

In Comment. super Obad. v. 19, 20, 21.

And they of the south shall possess the mount of Elau, and they of the plain, the Philistines: and they shall possess the fields of Ephraim, and the fields of Samaria, and Benjamin shall possess Gilead. And the captivity of this host of the children of Israel shall possess that of the Canaanites, even unto Zarephath, and the captivity of Jerusalem, which is in Sepharad, shall possess the Cities of the south. And saviors shall come upon mount Zion, to judge the mount of Esau, and the kingdom shall be the LORDS.

But what signifies all this to the Discovery of America, which lies not onely under the scorching Heats of the Equinox, but under the Frosts and Snows of the Artick and Antartick-Poles? Yet less probable is that which Lodowick Leo, an Augustine Frier takes out of Obadiah; as if that Prophet in the three last Verses of his Prophecy should speak of the Spaniards, which should not onely discover and Conquer America, but also Convert the Inhabitants to the Christian Faith, because those that are in Sepharad, should Inherit and Possess the Cities of the South, And Saviours shall arise from the Mountains of Zion, to judge the Mount and Wealth of Esau.

If America is known in the Scripture.

But certainly, Obadiah meant no other than the Restauration of the Jews from the Captivity of Babylon, who after their return, should grow more powerful than ever, and they, led by their Messias, obtain the height of all felicity, who would send his Evangelists and Apostles to declare Salvation to the utmost Borders of the Earth. It is true, that the Rabins Expound Sepharad to be Spain, and therefore he concludes, that Obadiah Prophesi’d of the Spaniard, and their Conquests in America; so they would prove, that America was long known before Christ.

Solomon’s Fleet sail’d not to Peru.

And lastly, It signifies as little what Pineda and Levinus Lemnius drive at, That Solomon first finding the use of the Compass, Rigg’d a Navy at Ezion-Geber, which from the Red-Sea had no indirect Course to the Straights of Magellan; from whence he might Lade his Vessels with the Gold of Peru. In whose Description it shall be manifested, that Peru is not Ophir, as some without any shew of Reason or Truth would make us believe.

Solomon did not find the Compass.

But as concerning King Solomon’s finding out the use of the Magnet, it is soon said, but not easily proved; for though that Prince exceeded all Man-kind in Wisdom and Learning, and was perfect in the Operations, and knew the Occultest Secrets of Nature, understanding what e’re belong’d to Plants, from the Cedar of Libanus, to Hysop, and the meanest Shrub that grows upon the Wall; yet it nothing makes out, that he knew the Mystery of the Navigable use of the Load-Stone: But suppose he did know, there is no where any mention of it; and if this excellent thing, the Compass, had been found in Solomon’s time, how came it afterwards so utterly to be lost?

Load-stone, by whom found.

Strange operations of the Loadstone.

De subtilitate l. 7.

Variance of the Compass.

Genebrad. Chron.

When, and by whom the Compass was found.

Albertus Magnus mistakes, when he ascribes the knowledge of the Compass to Aristotle, of which he himself makes not the least mention; neither Galen, Alexander Aphrodisiensis, Pliny, Lucretius, nor any of the Roman, Greek, Arabian, or other Countrey Writers whatsoever. Some give the honor thereof to an Indian, others to a Shepherd in Mount Ida, whose Clouted Shooes being full of Hob-Nails, the Iron sticking fast to the Stones on which he stood, stopt his motion. And although the Antients found out many Secrets of Nature, amongst which this of the Load-Stone, Attracting Iron, as being its proper Food; and the three sorts of the Magnet, of which some will not draw Steel, found by Theamedes a Greek Author, and other since, well known Properties: Yet they never attain’d that knowledge, that the Load-Stone would ease Pain, and stop the effusion of Blood, though the edge piercing the Skin, open’d the Vein: as Hieronimus Cardanus experienc’d on himself and others, which he had from Laurentius Guascus, a great Chyrurgeon. Much less, that the Needle of the Compass being touch’d by the Load-Stone on the Northside of the Equinox, respects the North; but depressing the Artick, and raising the Antartick Pole, it looks as stedfastly towards the South: But far less dreamt they of its several variations, according to the Coasts that are nearest; as when you come from the Island del Cuervo, the Point varies more West; but Sailing towards the Equinox, it varies Eastward; by which we may absolutely conclude, that without this use of the Load-Stone, first found by Flavius Melvius a Neapolitan, in the Year 1303. it was altogether impossible to reach America. So that Joseph de Acosta mistakes, who gives the honor of the finding so great a benefit to Navigation, to some Mahumetan Sea-men which Vasques de Gama met with near Mosambique, who had Sail’d those Seas by the use thereof; whereas Gama’s Expedition was above a hundred years after Melfius, who liv’d in such a juncture of time for Mathematical Learning, that few Ages boasted the like: For then flourish’d in England, and were Contemporaries, besides others abroad, Richard Wallingford, Nicolas de Lynna, John Halifax, Walter Britte, John Duns, and John de Lignarys, all eminent in Astronomical Arts, belonging to Navigation, and doubtless, no small helps to Melfius in this his happy Invention.

Lastly, We will relate what hath been held as a seeming Testimony, (that America was known to the Europeans before the Birth of our Saviour) by an antique Meddal of the Emperor Augustus, digg’d out of the Ground in Peru, and sent to his Holiness at Rome, which may well be reckon’d with the like Cheat contriv’d by Hermicus Cajadus, Anno 1505. near Syntra, a Town in Portugal, where three Marbles Ingraven with antient Characters, concerning a Prophecy of discovering the East-Indies by the Portuguese, in the Reign of King Emanuel, were privately bury’d under Ground, and not long after, by a pretended accident digg’d out, which made such a bustle amongst the Learned, that several tired themselves about the explanation of the suppos’d Sibylline Prediction.

CHAP. II.
Of the Original of the Americans, whence they came, when, how, and from what People Planted.

The original of the Americans much disputed on.

About the Original of the Americans, the Learned Dispute so much, that they find nothing more difficult in Story, than to clear that Point; for whether inquiry be made after the time, when the Americans first settled themselves where they now inhabit, or after what manner they came thither, either by Shipping or by Land; on purpose, or accidentally; driven by Storm, or else forc’d by a more powerful People, to remove from their old Plantations, and seek for new? or if any one should be yet more curious, asking the way that directed them out of another Countrey to this New World? or else enquire for those People, from whom the Americans deriv’d themselves? He will find several Opinions, and the Learned still Jangling.

Voyage l. 1. c. 8.

The time when America was first Peopled.

The first Doubt is concerning the time: Mr. Purchas, where-ever he had the Hint, endeavors to prove, that America hath been but lately Planted; for which he thus argues, “That if Asia, or Europe furnish’d America with People in Abraham’s time, or at least before the Birth of our Saviour; then it must upon necessity, by the Expiration of so many Ages, have been much more Populous, then the Spaniards found when first they discover’d it. Besides, the vast Territories yet unhabited (says he) are sufficient testimonies, that this New World hath been Planted but scatteringly, and not many Ages since, else the Countrey would have more abounded with Inhabitants, because the fertility of the Soyl was able plentifully to maintain Millions more, then were there when first discover’d: And what Marks are better to know a new People by, in any Countrey, than a rude Life and unsettled Government? just like a Family removing to another House, which takes no short time to settle their Goods and Houshold-stuff in a handsome and convenient Order.

The condition of the first World after the Floud.

“When Noah went out of the Ark on Mount Ararat, and not long after, saw his Seed spread over Armenia and Assyria, the new Generation of People consisted in Shepherds and Husbandmen, that setled themselves near Lakes and Rivers. Villages, Cities (and much less) whole Kingdoms, were scarce found on the Face of the Earth, and as little of Trade or Commerce; Riches, Division of Lands, costly Garments and Furniture for Houses, were not then in use, but the works of long settlements in happy Peace. To curb growing-Wickedness, and the Pride of Libertines, who incroach’d upon their weaker Neighbors, Laws were invented, by which Bridle, the unbroke or wild World grew tamer: And first, the Assyrians were brought to endure the Bit, and answer the Reins of Government; then Egypt, next Greece, and after that the Romans, who spreading their Power by Arms and Martial Discipline, first civiliz’d the Gauls, Spain, Brittain, and lastly Germany.

“But because a Countrey or Pastoral Life, knowing no Commerce, but mean Hovels, and to dwell in Huts, priding in poor and no Habits, despising all greatness, unlimited by Laws, and all things else, (which the People observ’d presently after the Flood) is now found among the Americans, who will take them for ought else, but new Comers to that Land, as themselves acknowledge? For the Mexicans boast, that they are the eldest there, and that from them, Peru, Chili, Chika, and other Countreys towards the South, had their Colonies, and yet the oldest Chronicles of Mexico reckon not above a thousand Years.” Thus far Mr. Purchas.

America was Peopled many Ages ago.

Purchas contradicted.

But certainly, all this Muster of appearing Reasons, is not able to vanquish single Truth; For, grant that America was not very Populous when the Spaniards first arrived there; must this needs prove, that it was never well inhabited before? Perhaps the Civil Wars, which have been always destructive to this Nation, have much hindred the increase of People; and the more, because their Salvage Nature is such, that in several places they account Man’s Flesh Broil’d a very great Dainty. And suppose such Prodigal Excess of their Humane Bankets were not us’d in America, as indeed they are, Is it wonder, that such a great part of the World, not onely exceeding Europe in bigness, but Asia also should here and there have a Tract of Land uninhabited? These might, by reason of their Barrenness, be useless, as many such places are found in the midst of the most Populous and fertile Countreys. But above all this, it is certain, that America to this day (notwithstanding almost innumerable thousands of Indians formerly Slain and Massacred by the Spaniards) is so well inhabited, that it may stand in Competition with either Asia or Europe. And how could such vast multitudes Plant the far-spreading Countrey of America, without the help of many Ages? Moreover, This truth is not without sufficient Testimonies; when any one looks on the Islands with which America lies incompass’d, he may suppose they did not willingly go from the Main Continent to the Isles, but were driven thither by Wars among themselves, or as most times it happens, because of the vast increase of the Natives, the Countrey must discharge its burden.

Hereto is added, the several Languages us’d in America, as in Europe or any other part of the known World; whereby we may easily guess, that America was Peopled presently after the Confusion of Tongues at Babel. Furthermore, If the Americans live a Rude Life, go meanly Habited, be without stately Houses; such Customs are even among us observ’d by several People; as the Tartars, Numidians, and others, which made their Antiquity be call’d in question. He also must needs have no knowledge of the Arts and Mechanick Sciences us’d by the Americans, who concludes, that they setled but lately in America. One Argument at present will be sufficient to contradict them all; and in the further Description, the contrary will be more manifest.

American Gold-Smiths.

Hieronimus Benso relates, That he stood amaz’d at the Gold and Silver Smiths in the Territory of Chito, who without any Iron Tools, made Images, and all manner of Vessels: Which work they perform’d thus, First, they made an Oval Crucible of a good Lock, round about Pasted with Earth, embody’d with the Powder of Wood Coals; which Crucible being Bak’d very hard in the Sun, they fill with Pieces of Gold or Silver, and put in the Fire; about which standing with five, six, or more Pipes made of Canes, they blow the Fire so long, till the Mettal melts, which others sitting on the ground, run it into Moulds of black Stone, and so with little trouble, Cast into what shape they please. Lastly, Though Mexico can reckon but a thousand years, must it therefore follow, that the Inhabitants are no older? How many famous places (even among our selves) have no longer Registers, and if they have, they are commonly Fabulous, few Nations boasting truly their own Original; which Argument, not onely contradicts (as we suppose) Mr. Purchas, but all others ascribing the Plantation of America to our later times.

Sect. I.

After what manner the Inhabitants of America came thither.

¶ In the next place, let us enquire, how the Americans were transmitted thither, whether by Sea, or Land? Both which are feasible two several ways; if they made an Expedition thither, as Discoverers, or were driven on those Coasts by stress of Weather.

The first is most unlikely, and not seeming possible, for how could they Steer thorow so vast an Ocean, to Countreys they never heard of, without the Compass, and other Necessaries for such a Voyage? for when first discover’d, their want of experience in Shipping for so long a Voyage, knowing no further than the use of small Boats or Canoos, plainly explode, that they willingly Steer’d from a known World, to an unknown, with no better accommodation; but some probable reasons may be made out, to induce us to believe, that they were rather driven thither by Storm.

But some will say, How liv’d the little Boats, and how indur’d they in such a continual Tempest, and were not either swallow’d up amidst the Waves, or starv’d for want of Provision, which their hollow Troughs could not contain?

The first doubt is the least, for there are Examples enough by which appear, that oftentimes great Ships Bulging, are over-set or sunk in the Sea by foul Weather when the Mariners escape in their Cock-Boat; and if they were but thinly Victual’d for so long a Voyage, questionless, that little which they had, they spun out, and made it last, while the impetuous Storm shortned the passage, which fair Weather would have made much longer.

Plin. l. 5. c. 22.

Strange voyage of a Roman Slave.

Pliny tells us of Annius Plocquius, General of the Red-Sea, That one of his Slaves being Enfranchiz’d, Sailing down towards the Arabian Gulf, was carry’d by a violent Tempest from the North, beyond Caramania, and on the fifteenth day came to an Anchor in Hippuros, a Haven of Taprobane, which Ortelius judges to be Sumatra; but Mercator and Cluverius, on better grounds, Zeylon, which is no less than three thousand English Miles.

In like manner, Joseph de Acosta tells us, That in fifteen days time, he got with a Northerly Wind from the Canaries to America, and his Voyage had been shorter, durst he have born more Sails, which may partly clear the former doubts.

The Peruvians opinion concerning antient Sea-Voyages.

Acosta. Histor. Nat. l. 2 c. 12.

Ridiculous opinion of the Americans.

Moreover, the Peruvians themselves give some small Testimony (in their antient Records) of a few that Landed of old upon their Coasts, which were (as they say) mighty and cruel Giants, committing much Bloodshed, Slaughtering the Natives every where; and having subdu’d the whole Countrey, built stately Edifices, of which remain yet the Ruines of some Foundations, very Artificial and Costly. They also shew near Manta, and Puerto Viejo, many huge Bones, as they believe of Giants, three times longer and thicker than an ordinary Mans. They also tell us, that many Ages since, one Ica and Arica Sail’d Westward thither upon Sea Wolves Skins, blown up like Bladders: But however, without contradiction, the Americans never knew, much less built any such Vessels, with which they durst venture to the Offin, out of sight of Land: their Balsas, Periagos, and Canoos, will not all amount to the Bulk of one of our small Barques; wherefore the Inhabitants of Tumbez, when they descry’d the Spanish Fleet, sent to discover Peru, were amaz’d at the high Masts, spreading Sails, and bigness of the Ships, judging them first to be Rocks, cast up out of the Sea; but observing them to approach their Coast, and that they were full of Bearded-Men, thought the Gods were walking in them; by our Modern Poet, Mr. Dryden in his Indian Emperor, thus Elegantly describ’d.

Guyomar to Montezuma.

I went in order, Sir, to your Command,

To view the utmost Limits of the Land:

To see that Shore, where no more World is found,

But Foamy Billows, breaking on the ground;
Where, for a while, my Eyes no Object met,
But distant Skies, that in the Ocean set:

And low-hung Clouds that dipt themselves in Rain

To shake their Fleeces on the Earth again.
At last, as far as I could cast my Eyes
Upon the Sea, somewhat, methought did rise

Like Bluish Mists, which still appearing more,

Took dreadful Shapes, and mov’d towards the Shore.

Mont. What Forms did these new Wonders represent?

Guy. More strange than what your Wonder can invent.

The Object I could first distinctly view,

Was tall straight Trees, which on the Waters flew;

Wings on their sides, in stead of Leaves did grow,

Which gather’d all the Breath the Winds could blow:

And at their Roots grew floating Palaces,

Whose out-blow’n Bellies cut the yielding Seas.

Mont. What Divine Monsters, O ye Gods, were these,

That float in Air, and fly upon the Seas!

Came they alive or dead upon the Shore?

Guy. Alas, they liv’d too sure, I heard them roar.

All turn’d their sides, and to each other spoke,

I saw their Words break out in Fire and Smoke.

Sure, ’tis their Voice that Thunders from on high,

Or these, the younger Brothers of the Skie.

Deaf with the noise, I took my hasty Flight,

No Mortal Courage can support the Fright.

Spaniards carry Oxen, and Sheep to the American Isles.

But the resolving these Doubts, starts a harder Question, viz. Grant that the Americans were by Tempest driven thither, How then came the Beasts thither? It is certain, that those which are beneficial for humane use, as Dogs for to Hunt, great Cattel, Sheep, for Food, and other Necessaries, might easily be carry’d thither, for so the Spaniards brought Cows, Horses, Swine, and other Cattel; and also Poultery from Spain, to the new-discover’d Isles, Cuba, Hispaniola, Jamaica, Margaretta, and La Dominica, when at their arrival, formerly no four-footed Beasts were found there, whose fertile Soyl hath so multiply’d their increase, that the Doggs running Wilde, and breeding as fast, do great hurt to the Grazing Herds, which they onely shoot for their Skins, leaving their Flesh, the best of Meats, onely to Manure the Ground on which they lie.

The Transporting of tame and profitable Cattel might easily be allow’d of, but who would load their Ships with Lions, Tygers, Bears, Wolves, Foxes, and other Serpents and Voracious Beasts? it is certain that some may be tam’d before they were Ship’d.

How wild Beasts came in America, and the Isles.

In vita Heliogabali.

Lib. 2. cap. 17.

Strange Hunting.

Strange accident of two Leopards.

Adv. Jovin. l. 2.

Lampridius relates, That Heliogabalus the Roman Emperor, took great pleasure in Domestick Lions, and Leopards, to frighten his Guests withal; for with the third Course, they were all brought in, and sate betwixt the Invited, a Man and a Beast. The great Cham, as Paulus Venetus an Eye-witness attests, Rides on Hunting, attended in couples with tame Leopards. The King of Camboja in like manner is serv’d with Panthers: Scaliger adds also, That they went not unprovided of a Lamb or Goat, to give the Panther, lest falling into his natural ferocity, provok’d by hunger, he should make the Huntsmen his Quarry, if he had no other Prey. But notwithstanding some wilde Beasts seem to forget their Voracious Nature, yet there ought great care to be taken in the Transporting of them, because they oftentimes grow wild again, which France can witness, where two Leopards, a Male and a Female being tam’d, presently after the death of King Francis, whether negligently or on purpose, let loose, ran into the Woods, and near Orleans devour’d a great number of People, and Cattel: Gesner saith, That some Womens bodies were found, who were untouch’d, onely their Breasts eaten by the Leopards, as if they took them for the daintiest part; which is not unlike the antient Jeres, who according to Saint Hierom, entertain’d their Guests as a most delicious Dish, with Womens Breasts, and Mens Buttocks Roasted. Besides, the devouring nature of these Wilde Beasts, what profit could Tygers, Lions, Wolves, Bears, and the like advantage the Transporter? And how came Serpents, Adders, and other Reptiles, thither over the Ocean, that with no Art whatsoever can be made tame? Were the small Vessels just laden with such terrible Creatures, when against their wills, they were by Storm driven on a new Coast? By these impossibilities we may easily judge, that the Americans came thither by Land, and no other way, but how, and upon what occasion must be our next enquiry.

Sect. II.

Two reasons wherefore the people remove from their Countreys.

¶ Histories generally gives us onely two accounts, Why People remov’d from one Countrey to another, either not, or thinly inhabited; whether driven by force, or of their own accord, so to unburthen and give ease to their too Plethorick Countreys.

The Flood acknowledg’d by the Americans and other Heathens but mysteriously.

Thus the banish’d Japanners forsook their Native Countrey, and setled themselves in a desolate Soyl, since a flourishing Empire, shining with Riches, and Crown’d with stately Cities: So the Batavians took possession of the uninhabited Isle, lying between the Rhyne, and the Wael, being driven out of Hessen by Civil-Wars, and preserv’d the memory of the place, from whence they had their Original on the utmost Point of the Island, in the Villages of Cattenwyck; for the Hessens formerly went by the name of Catti; others that remov’d did not onely fall upon their Neighbors, but made a way by force of Arms, chosing their Habitations under a temperate Climate, and in a fruitful Soyl. After which manner the Franks enter’d Gaul, and afterwards the Normans set upon France; so that the Conquer’d Countreys, have ever since from the Conquerors been call’d France and Normandy: But although it cannot punctually be said, how the Inhabitants of America remov’d, yet it is without contradiction, that they first found an empty Countrey. The Opinions which they have themselves concerning it, are full of idle Fancies; First, they question their Original from the Floud, which is so well rooted in the memory of all Nations, that the blindest and most ignorant know something of it, though deformedly alter’d and vary’d, tack’d up with additional fabulous Stories, the truth it self known onely to us, but to all others lost in Oblivion.

Who hath not heard of Deucalion’s Flood, how his Wife Pyrrha and he only escap’d in a little Boat, and (as ’tis Fabl’d) landing on a Mountain, from thence Peopled the World again, by throwing Stones backwards over their Heads? Something of this seems to hint the true Story of Noah, his Wife, and Children, from whom the desolated World was replenish’d.

Prometheus and Noah are the same.

The same they relate of Prometheus, concerning whom, thus Diodorus Siculus: “They say that the Nyle breaking through his Dams, and over-flowing his Banks, drown’d all Egypt, especially that part where Prometheus Rul’d, where all the Inhabitants were swallow’d by the Deluge.” None can imagine but that Diodorus by this makes mention of a particular Flood, and not the general one in Noah’s time; for as the Greeks ascrib’d all things to their Heroes, so the Egyptians in like manner did the same to theirs: Therefore they have of the general Flood, made a particular one in Egypt, though perhaps it never was: So that what is Fabled of Prometheus, is nothing but a Part of the Universal Deluge; which the Name Prometheus proves, because it signifies, Sprung from Heaven, and is the same with Noah, whom they hold to be the first Father of all Mankind since the Flood, born of, or regenerated from his Wife Asia; and Asia signifies Earth, or The Mother of all things; and so espousing Noah, being sprung from God, to Ararat, from whence descended the Generations of Mankind, and by degrees spread over the whole surface of the Earth.

Acosta, l. 1. c. 25.

Strange Opinion of the Americans concerning the Flood.

Original of the American Kings, and their Custom.

The Chineses, East-Indians, Japanners, and other People of Asia and Africa, have also some knowledge of a very ancient Flood; but hood-wink’t under many idle Fancies, not unlike that which the Americans relate, from whom several Learned Persons find no obscure Confessions of the Deluge, which thus mystically they have wrapp’d up, That one Viracocha came out of the great Lake Titicaca, and setled his Residence upon Tiaguanaco, where yet remain the Ruines of ancient Walls, built after a wonderful manner: At length removing from Tiaguanaco to Cusco, he began to multiply the Generation of Mankind. They shew in the foremention’d Lake a small Island, under which, the Americans say, the Sun sav’d himself from the Flood; wherefore in ancient Times they superstitiously observ’d that place, heightning their Bloody Sacrifices with Humane Slaughter. Others relate, That six Persons leap’d through a Hole out of a Window, from whence all Men were since Extracted; and from that new Increase, the place (after the Inhabitants of the Old World were all drown’d) got the Denomination of Pacari Tampo; and therefore they hold the Tampo’s to be the most ancient Families: From hence Mangocapam deriv’d, being the Primogenitor of the Ynca’s or Kings; from whom sprung two Generations, Hanon Cuzco, and Urim Cuzco. They tell us also, That their Ynca’s, when they make War upon any People, say that the occasion, as they pretend, was, because all Territories are Tributary to them justly, from whom they were deriv’d and restor’d, being the first Planters of the New World; and withal, That the true Religion was declar’d to them from Heaven.

Americans Flood is taken out of the Scripture.

This Relation, though mix’d with Fables, shews (but very darkly) that they have some knowledge of the Flood: For who are those six else that leap’d out of a Window to replenish the Generations of Mankind, but Shem, Ham, and Japhet, with their Wives?

Peruvians Opinion.

And also the Mexicans, of their Original.

Lib. 1. cap. 7.

The Americans can give but a little better Account of their first Original; and indeed it is no wonder, because for want of Books they can relate nothing certain, but only what they have Registred in their usual Quipocamagos, which is not above four hundred years old. Acosta asking what Original they judg’d they were of, and from what Countrey and People deriv’d? receiv’d no other Answer, but that America only was their native Countrey, and that they were deriv’d from no other elsewhere. But though the Peruvians are of this Opinion, yet the Mexicans are of another mind, giving the Spaniards a far better Account when first they came thither, wherein we must a little deviate, viz. How they were remov’d from some other place, as Robert Comtæus relates, who with many Learned and seemingly true Arguments affirms, That the Original of the Americans must be sought for either among the Phenicians, Sydonians, Tyrians, or Carthaginians, being indeed all one People. Herodotus saith thus of the Phenicians, “They liv’d formerly, according to their own Relation, along the Shore of the Red-Sea; from whence removing, they planted the Sea-Coast of the Syrians.” Festus Avienus the Latin Poet agrees with this Opinion, where he saith,

On the Phenicians Coasts the Ocean beats,

Who through the Red-Sea Sailing, chang’d their Seats.

They were the first that ventur’d through the Seas,

And freighted Ships with richer Merchandize:

Fair or foul Weather, They without controule!

Sought Foreign Trade, directed by the Pole.

Original and Habitations of the Phenicians, of whom, according to several Learned, the Americans are extracted.

Aristotle from a Greek Word calls them Phenicians, from their being red or bloody with the Slaughter of all Strangers that Landed on their Coast; but rather, and so indeed they are call’d Phenicians, or Erythreans, from Esau, or Edom, from whom they are deriv’d; for these two Words, or Denominations, signifie in Greek, Red; the two last, the like in Hebrew. Phenix himself first planted all the Countrey lying between the River Eleutherus, and the Egyptian City Pelusium; and afterwards Damiata, wash’d by the Mediterrane: But since, these Boundaries are alter’d, on the North, by Judea; Westward, by the Mediterrane; Southerly, by Egypt; and towards the East, by the Desart Arabia.

The chiefest Cities are Ptolemais, otherwise call’d Acon, Sidon, Arad, Great Cana, Sarepta, Biblis, Bothris, Berithus, and their Princess Tyre, formerly scituate in an Isle, but since joyn’d to the Main-Land by Alexander the Great.

Herodot. lib. 1 .

Salust in Igurtha.

Wonderful Power of the Phenicians.

None can disown, but that the Phenicians have every where been Admirals of the Sea; so that they were formidable to the greatest Princes. When the Persian King Cambyses came with a vast Army against the Carthaginians, he was forc’d to give over his Design, because the Phenicians refus’d to help him with their Fleet, being allied to, and the City founded by them: But they not only built Carthage, which strove with Rome to be the Empress of the World, but also the famous Cities Leptis, Utica, Hippo, and Adrumetum in Africa, with Cadiz and Tartessus in Spain; nay, they sent Plantations of People into the Heart of Iberia and Lybia. It will not be amiss to add Q. Curtius his Relation, who tells us, “Where-ever the Phenicians came with their Fleets, Landing their Men, they subdu’d whole Countreys, and by that means spread their Colonies over the known World; Carthage in Africa, Thebes in Boetia, and Cadiz near the Western Ocean.” Aristotle relates, “That they made such rich Returns of their Merchandize, and chiefly of their Oyl, in Spain, that their Anchors, Pins, and all Iron Materials belonging to a Ship, in stead of that Metal, were Silver.”

Testimonies that the Americans are deriv’d from the Phenicians.

First Testimony.

Is contradicted.

Lib. 3. Geogr.

Flemmish Islands.

Lib. 17.

But to return to our Discourse, and disprove the former Testimony, That the Phenicians found America. The formention’d Comtæus saith thus; “None can justly doubt, but that since the Phenicians took the Command of the Sea from the Rhodians, they more and more increas’d their Fleets, and growing experter in Navigation, passing the Gibraltar Northward, became Masters of Cadiz, and still prepar’d new Fleets, which searching beyond Atlas Southward, discover’d the Coasts of Africa, and the adjacent Isles, driving a great Trade to the Canaries, and to those which lay scatter’d along Cape de Verd, formerly call’d the Gorgades. This way of Trade also was not unknown to the Greeks, Iberians, and other People; but after the Phenicians assum’d it wholly to themselves, without any respect or difference of Countreys, they sunk all whomsoever they could catch.” Curtius further adds, saying, “I believe that the Phenicians, sailing into the Main Ocean, have discover’d unknown Countreys.” And which are those? Not the Gorgades, or Canary Isles; for those were sufficiently known before; but a Main Land, far beyond. But though the Phenicians were most expert, yet not skilful enough to make out such Discoveries. They indeed were the first that before any other sail’d out of the Mid-land Sea; nay, they ventur’d a good way into the main Ocean, beyond the Straights of Gibraltar, or the Herculean Pillars: But how far? Not to the Gorgades, above half way betwixt Spain and America; but to the Cassiterides, or Flemish Islands, which to the number of nine lie in sight of Spain. Strabo affirms this Truth, saying, “The Cassiterides are ten, lying in order close by one another: One remains uninhabited; on the rest live a swarthy People.” This way the Phenicians sail’d first, when they were in quest for Trade, from Cadiz. And though he reckons ten, there are indeed but nine, viz. St. Michael, St. Mary, St. George, Tercera, de Pico, or Tenariff, so call’d from the Mountain which vomits Fire, Fayal, Las Flores, Del Cuervo, and Gratiosa. Moreover, the same Strabo relates, “That the Carthaginians did not throw over-board the Traders on the remote Gorgades, but those especially that came from Sardinia or Cadiz.”

Salt-Islands how long known.

Joan. Mariana de Reb. Hispan. lib. 1. cap. 20.

Very remarkable Voyage of Hanno the Carthaginian, along the Coast of Africa to the Salt-Islands.

Strange Vision.

The Ancients believ’d Baboons to be Men.

Mean while, we cannot deny, but that the Gorgades that lye before Cape de Verd were frequented by the Carthaginians, long before the Birth of our Savior; but with so much admiration, that Hanno their Captain in that Expedition was listed amongst the number of their Heroes, hapning thus: The Carthaginians sailing for Cadiz, to assist the Phenicians against the Spaniards, made that the Seat of War, which soon drew on a greater Design; for Hamilco and Hanno being impowr’d by the Senate at Carthage, manag’d the War in Spain. Both of them were ambitious to discover new Countreys. Hamilco sail’d along the Coast of Spain and Gaule, reaching to Batavia. Hanno steer’d Southerly, carrying thirty thousand Men of all Trades in his Fleet, purposing to build a new City in some place or other, and got beyond the Promontory Ampelusium, now call’d Cabo Spatil; the River Ziloa, which washeth the City Arzilla; and the Stream Lix, now Lusso, where the Poets place the Gardens of the Hesperides, in the custody of a waking Dragon: From thence proceeding on his Voyage, he came to an Anchor in the Mouth of the River Subur, at this day call’d Subu; and afterwards before the City Sala, now call’d Salle, at that time made very dangerous by the voracious Beasts in the neighboring Woods: At last the Fleet reach’d the Foot of the lesser Atlas, which ends at the Point Chaunaria, by the Modern Navigators call’d Cabo Non, because it was judg’d, that none could scape with Life, that durst adventure to steer beyond Chaunaria; yet Hanno sail’d between Palma, one of the Canary-Islands, and the Promontory Bojadoris, towards the pointed Coast call’d then Cornu Hesperium, but now Cape Verd, in the River Asama, by Castaldus call’d Omirabi: Here he found horrible Croccodiles, and Hippopotami or Sea-Horses. Atsama is held to flow from the same Fountain whence the Nyle hath its Original. In this Latitude Hanno descried those Islands which he call’d Gorgones (from the three deform’d Sisters Medusa, Sthenio, and Euryale, whose Heads were Periwig’d with curl’d Serpents) because they found as illfavor’d Women on these Islands, which at this day the Hollanders call the Salt-Islands; amongst which, the chiefest is St. Jago, a Colony of The Portuguese; but the Mountains opposite to the Gorgones, on the main Coast of Africa, rising aloft with spiring tops near the River Masitholus, Hanno call’d the Chariots of the Gods, now nam’d Sierra Liona, lying in eight Degrees Northern Latitude. When Hanno and his Armado, either provok’d by an undaunted Courage, or covetous of fame, if they proceeded in their so wonderful Adventure, went forward, where they reported, that they saw Rivers of Fire falling into the Ocean, the Countrey all about burning, and the tops of the Mountains dazleing their Eyes with continual Flashes of Lightning, intermix’d with terrible Thunder; adding further, That the Natives all the Summer shelter’d themselves from the excessive Heat, in Caves under Ground; and coming forth in the night, run abroad with lighted Torches over their Ground, so gathering in their Harvest, and Officiating all other Affairs of Husbandry: Yet Hanno no ways daunted at such strange Sights, sail’d from Sierra Liona Southerly to the Æquinox, where he discover’d an Island not far from the African Coast, inhabited by a rough and hairy People, to take some of whom, he us’d all possible means, yet could not; onely two Women, being incompass’d by Soldiers, were taken, and carried aboard; but being very salvage, and barbarously wild, could not be tamed, or brought to any Complacency; so they kill’d them, and carried their stuff’d-up Skins to Carthage, where they were a long time gaz’d upon with great admiration.

The Island St. Thomas.

This Island which Hanno then found, can be no other but that which we call St. Thomas, and hath a very unhealthy Air for Strangers, but else very fruitful, and abounding with Sugar-Canes; and the hairy People which he makes mention of, were Babeons, or Baboons, which Africa in this place breeds large, to the amazement of the Beholders, in great abundance; because those deform’d Monsters, more than any other Beast whatsoever, represent Humane shape.

Hanno’s Return.

Is for his Voyage plac’d amongst the Gods.

Here Hanno stopp’d his Voyage, being hindred from going further for want of Provision. Five years he spent in this Expedition, before he Anchor’d again at Cadiz, from whence not long after he steer’d to his Native Countrey Carthage, where he was receiv’d with no less Wonder than State, insomuch that none before or after him ever gain’d greater Honor, seeming to oblige his Countrey with the hopes of future Profits from these new discover’d Regions: Nay, he receiv’d a Name, and was plac’d amongst their Gods in the Temples, which he being ambitious of, promoted after a strange manner, teaching several Birds to cry, The great God Hanno; which when they could speak perfect, they were let fly in the Air, where to the admiration of all People, they every where repeated their well-taught Lesson.

This the most remarkable Voyage which hapned in the time of the Ancients, considering they wanted several Mathematical Instruments belonging to Navigation, and especially the use of the Compass; and also considering the length of the Voyage to Sierra Liona, whither never any durst venture before: Nay, in so many Ages after Hanno, the famousest Navigators which were set out by the King of Portugal, fear’d a long time to cut their Passage through the Æquinoctial-Line; however in long Process of time, divers Experiments were made, which have now so much improv’d the Art of Navigation.

Testimony that America was not known to the Ancients.

Hanno’s Voyage was four hundred years before the Birth of our Savior; therefore if none have been further than Hanno, until the time the Portuguese sail’d beyond Cape de Bona Esperanza, how could America be discover’d by Sea? How did they steer from the Salt-Islands, or St. Thomas, out of sight of Land, through the Main Ocean, to an unknown World? Hanno himself, who was the stoutest of all Ancient Navigators, not only crept along the African Coast, which made him spend so much time; but not daring to cross over those wide spreading Bays he found, left not his hold of the Shore, and measur’d and search’d every winding Inlet and Creek: And if he found a New World, why was it not known? The more, because his Ambition carry’d him on to get a Name and Reputation by such Naval Discoveries. And how true the Relation of this Expedition is, Pliny tells us, saying, The Journal-Books were then to be seen which Hanno writ in that his African Expedition: Though many of the Greeks, and also of our Moderns, following Hanno, have found several things contrary to his Observations, wherein he makes mention of several Cities built by him, which none ever since heard of, or any have seen, neither is there the least Marks of their Ruines to be found.

This large Relation serves for nothing else, but to shew that they seek in vain herein to give the Honor of the Discovery of America to the Ancients; And as little do those Testimonies signifie that are taken out of Diodorus Siculus, Pliny, Pomponius Mela, and Ælian. It will be worth our time to hear every one of them particularly.

Lib. 6. cap. 7.

Second Testimony, that the Americans are deriv’d from the Phenicians.

First, Diodorus saith, “Beyond Lybia, in the Ocean, lies a very great Island, several days sailing in Circumference, having a very fruitful Soil, and pleasant Meadows, distinguish’d by Hills, and moistned by Navigable Rivers, unknown in Ancient Times, because it seems to be separated from the other World, and was thus found: The Phenicians sailing along the Lybian Coast, were several days and nights toss’d with perpetual Tempests, and at last driven to the foremention’d Island, where Anchoring, and observing the pleasant Scituation thereof, made it known to their Magistrates.”

Is contradicted.

But how comes this nameless Island to be America? What Man would take that for an Island, which far exceeds the main Continent of Asia? And have the Phenicians ascrib’d the finding of this New World to any? Whence then proceeds such great silence amongst all the Ancient Writers of a whole World, who otherwise us’d to give Denominations to the least remote Village, or Mountain, or River?

Lib. 5. cap. 1. Description of Atlas.

Pliny speaks after the same manner, saying, “The Writers make mention, that Atlas rises out of the middle of the Sands, with a Shrubby and Bushy top towards the Sky, on the Shore of the Ocean to which he gives his Denomination; That it is full of Woods, and water’d by several Fountains on that side towards Africa, by which means it bears all manner of Fruit. In the Day-time none of the Inhabitants appear, all things being in silence, as in the middle of a Desart; the Approacher is struck with sudden amazement. And besides its excessive high Crown, reaching above the Clouds, and neighboring, as they say, the Circle of the Moon, appears in the Night as if it were all in a Flame, resounding far and near with Pipes, Trumpets, and Cymbals; and the Journey up thither, very long and dangerous.”

I cannot understand that Pliny can mean America by this, because himself, in the first Division of his Fifth Book, makes his beginning with the Description of Africa: And as to what further concerns the strange Relation and danger thereof, is a little before related in Hanno’s Voyage; and it is but a slight Argument to prove it America, because it seems to resound with those sorts of Instruments which the Americans were observ’d to use when discover’d.

Lib. 1. cap. 4.

Strange Men.

Pomponius Mela being the third, hath no greater Arguments than the former. “We hear (says he) that utmost People towards the West, being the Atlanticans, are rather half Beasts than Men, cloven-footed, without Heads, their Faces upon their Breasts, and naked, with one great Foot, like Satyrs or Goblins, which range up and down, without any Artificial Shelters or Houses.”

Lib. 3. cap. 18.

Discourse between Midas and Silenus concerning the Unknown World.

Lastly, Ælian seems to say something, when he sets down the Discourse between Midas and Silenus, out of Theopompus, where Silenus relates, “That Europe, Asia, and Lybia are Islands; and that a vast Countrey lyes beyond this his tripple-divided World, mighty Populous, and abounding with all other Living Creatures, as big again as ours, and living twice as long: That they are wondrous rich; their Religions, Laws, and Customs, founded upon another Morality and Reason, quite different from ours. They boast especially of two great Cities, Machimus and Eusebes; the Inhabitants of the first maintaining themselves by driving altogether a Trade of War, mustering up, and filling their numerous Regiments with several valiant Nations. The Listed Citizens amount in their Muster-Rolls, all bred to Soldiery, to two Millions, of whom few but scorn either dying bravely by Wounds receiv’d With Flint-edg’d Laths, and Staves, in stead of Spears, pointed with Stones, not knowing the use of Iron or Steel, but so over-stock’d with Gold and Silver, that they account it a Drug of less Value than our basest Metal. Some Years since they march’d into our World, a hundred thousand strong, as far as the Hyperborean Mountains, where being inform’d, that all the Nations of our World, compar’d with them, liv’d in a poor and despicable condition; as not thinking them worth their Conquest, they return’d. But the second City Eusebes, deals altogether in Peace, and its Citizens are not rapacious, but exercise Justice, so much affecting Morality and Divine Worship, that they conquer Heaven by their Piety and Meekness, and the Gods themselves are pleas’d to descend, and advise with them concerning their Celestial Affairs.”

Who observes not this to be a Poetical Relation, shewing how much better the Acquirements of Peace are, than those of War; the one conquering only Men, the other, the Gods? Nor can more be taken out of Ælian’s Discourse, but that the Ancients believ’d there was another Habitable World to be our Antipodes.

Inquiries whether the Constitutions of the Phenicians agree with the Americans.

Thus far hath been disputed concerning the Original of the Americans, whose Plantations from Tyre or Carthage by Sea, are found altogether invalid: Yet we will search a little further, to see whether the People Analogize, either in their Religion, Policy, Oeconomy, or Customs.

It is certain, that the ancient Phenicians liv’d in Tents, and sometimes exchang’d eaten-up Pastures for fresh, which the Americans to this day observe; by which it might appear, that they are of a Phenician Extract. But why not as well deriv’d from Numidia, Tartary, or the ancient Patriarchs, who all liv’d such an unsettl’d wandering Life? Besides, the Phenicians had a long time given over Pastoral Business, for Maritime Affairs of greater consequence, not only Merchandizing through all the World, but sending great Colonies in Ships to new Plantations: And moreover, the Americans could not so strangely degenerate from their Ancestors, but would have built great Cities like them; of which many were found in Phenicia, but none of Antiquity in America.

As also both their Religions.

As to their Religion, if it agreed with the Phenicians, it was the same that all the World profess’d at that time, and therefore may as well be extracted from any other, as them: ’Tis true, we find them inclin’d to Sorcery, and dealing with Evil Spirits, as the Phenicians, in which they were not only guilty, but all other Nations at that time.

The Known World formerly full of Witches.

De Nat. Dæmon. l. 3.

Lucan. lib. 6.

Nay, why not as well transported out of Asia or Europe, where were formerly many the like Tamperers, and those that dealt in such Diabolical Sciences? And why not from Salmantica, where, as Laurentius Ananias relates, Magick-Arts were publickly taught, and they commenc’d Doctors, and took their Degrees according to their Learning? The Devil also hath publick Worship amongst the Americans, and so he had with the Phenicians: yet not only they, but the whole World had dedicated Temples to him. Here began Humane and Infernal Sacrifices, supposing that Evil Spirits were delighted, and so feasted with the Steam of Humane Offerings, whose sweetness made them milder, and so intoxicating, lull’d them into less mischief.

Devil-worship formerly us’d in all the World, and now by the Americans.

Lev. 17. 6.

Idols in Ships.

How famous is Zoroaster, and the whole School of the Eastern Magicians? In Moses’s time this Wickedness had already took place: Nor can it be deny’d but that the Phenicians carry’d their Idols in their Ships, as Herodotus testifies, saying, “The Image of Vulcan much resembles the Phenicians Patacoioi, which they plac’d on the Fore-castle of their Ships.”

In like manner, the Americans when they go to Sea, carry their Idols with them; and the Ships took Name from the Image, which was either painted or carv’d on the Stern, or plac’d elsewhere upon the Deck.

The same Custom the Chineses observe to this present: Francis Xaverius relates, “That he sail’d in a Chinese Vessel from Goa to Japan, which bore an Idol in its Stern, before which the Master lighted Candles, perfum’d it with Aloe-wood, and offer’d Birds and other Food, inquiring of it the Event of his Voyage. Sometimes he judg’d from the Statues immovable Looks, that it would fall out successfully; and other times, not.”

De abstinent. Animal. l. 2.

Prepar. Evang. lib. 1.

Lastly, Porphyrius relates, “That the Phenicians upon any great Exigency, as War, excessive Heat, or Mortal Distempers, by order selected one of the most comely and beautiful of their Children, to be offer’d up to Saturn.” And Eusebius saith also out of Porphyrius, “That Saturn, whom the Phenicians call Israel, the Learned Vossius and Hugo Grotius read Il, or El (one of the ten Names of God in Hebrew) which they also give to the Planet Saturn, who when he Reign’d in Phenicia, having one only Son born by the Nymph Anobret, and was in danger to lose his Kingdom, being worsted in an unlucky War, he dress’d him in Royal Robes, and placing him on an Altar built for that purpose, sacrific’d him with his own Hands.”

Men and Children used for Sacrifices by the Phenicians and other People.

Who forbade the sacrificing of Men.

And although such like cruel Oblations are us’d in America, must it therefore follow, that they are deriv’d from the Phenicians, when several other People are guilty of the same? Nay, there is scarce one Countrey, which hath not at some time or other perform’d such inhumane Acts, seeming to them Zeal in their Religion; for the most eminent of the Heathens scrupled not at it, which certainly are held to be the Persians, Greeks, and Romans; and yet they were not abhorr’d, though committing Humane Slaughters.

This holy Butchery and Religious Slaughter of Mankind began in Rome in the Emperor Adrian’s Reign, so continuing till the time of Tertullian, Lactantius, and Eusebius. The Greeks which inhabited the utmost part of Italy, employ’d themselves daily in Sacrificing Strangers to Saturn, and sometimes one another. But at last this formal Cruelty became a ridiculous Custom; for the Romans by severe Edicts strictly forbad all such Humane Offerings: Yet that they might retain some memory of their former Sacrifices, they order’d thirty Images to be made of Rushes, which every year on the fifteenth of April, were by the Roman Priests and Vestal Nuns, to be thrown from the Milvian Bridge into the Tyber.

Lib. de Superstit.

Moreover, Manethon relates, “That the Egyptians in Heliopolis us’d to offer three Men at once to Juno; which Custom was observ’d till King Amasis order’d, That in stead of Men, they should serve her with Wax Candles.”

Amestris, Queen to the famous Xerxes, caus’d twelve Men to be burn’d alive, as an Oblation, to pacifie and oblige Pluto to maintain them in their present Grandeur.

Rer. Persic. l. 1.

Procopius relates of the People about the Arabian Gulph, “That they oftentimes Sacrific’d Men to the Sun.”

Lib. 3. sect. 8 Geogr.

“The Indians, saith Pomponius Mela, kill their nearest Relations and Parents, before they decay by Sickness or Age, and judg’d it fit and most Religious to Feast and Banquet themselves with the Entrails of the slain.”

Lib. 11. Geog.

The Albanians, as Strabo relates, offer yearly one of their Priests to the Moon.

The same Mela relates of the Tauri, That they us’d to cut the Throats of Strangers, whenever they came near to the Place of their Sacrifice.

Lib. 2. cap. 1.

The Egyptian Idol Typhon, as you may read in Manethon, was daily made red-hot, and living People put in, and broyl’d to death.

Bell. Gall. Comm.

But to pass by several other People guilty of such bloody Idolatry, How did the Altars erected in the Woods in Gaul and Germany, for Taran, Hesus, Teutates, and Woden, continually smoke with the Blood of Humane Expiations? Of which Cæsar saith thus in his Commentaries; “The Gauls are a very Devout and Superstitious Nation; and therefore when any were dangerously sick, or likely to be worsted in Battel, they vow’d to feast their Gods that sav’d them with Humane Flesh, and if need were, would make themselves a thankful Sacrifice to those that help’d them off in such an Exigence. Concerning these bloody Rites, they consulted and imploy’d the Druydes, by whose advice they all believ’d that no Victim was so acceptable to the Numens, as pour’d-out Humane Blood, but especially that of Malefactors; which Dainty if they could not procure, their Gods must be treated with the Lives of the Innocent.”

2 Reg. 3. v. 26, 27.

Lastly, the Holy Scripture saith thus, When the King of Moab saw that the Battel was too sore for him, he took with him seven hundred Men that drew Swords, to break through even to the King of Edom; but they could not. Then he took his eldest Son, that should have reigned in his stead, and offered him for a Burnt-offering on the Wall.

These Testimonies are sufficient Witnesses, That the Ancient Heathens express’d the height of their Devotion, and fury of mad Zeal, in such execrable Rites, as to this day the like is practised by the Indians, Chineses, Japanners, and others: Wherefore it can no ways be a sufficient ground to prove, that the Americans are deriv’d from the Phenicians, because of their Humane Sacrifices, for that they were usual Customs in all Places.

Third testimony, That the Americans are deriv’d from the Phenicians, because their Language agrees

Is contradicted.

The third Proof they offer us, is borrow’d from the similitude and likeness of the Phenician and American Languages: Comtœus sets down some Words, viz. the Phenicians call’d a Mountain, Abila; Blood, Edom; a Mother, Anech; a Maid, Hellotia; Water, Heni, and Jam: With the first agrees the American Anthla; with the second, Holedonch; with the third, Anam; with the fourth, Hellotie; with the fifth, Ame, and Jame. But those that will thus corrupt the Words, may as well make the unseemliest Comparisons. It is certain, that the Phenicians and some of the Americans call a Cup Asur, and Red Wine, Belàsa; But does it therefore follow by this, that the one is extracted from the other? How many Names do signifie all one, amongst People that never had any Conversation together? This proceeds only from meer accident; Or else if some Words of one, sound like the same Words us’d in a remote Countrey, and be of one signification, must they therefore be deriv’d from one another? Then upon necessity the Greeks, Latins, and Germans had their Original from the Hebrews, or the Latins from the Greeks, or the Germans from the Latins, or the Persians from the Germans; or, on the contrary, the last owe their Extract to the first. I will as a Testimony, and to give you a Pattern, pick out a few from a greater number.

Greek and Hebrew agree

Also the Hebrew and Latin.

How little difference is there in many Words between the Greek and Hebrew? The Hebrews call a Church-Congregation Sanhedrim, the Greeks Συνέδριον; the Greeks for I advise, use πείθω, the other פתה; the Hebrews call Wise-men Zophei, the other Σόφοι: And less difference there is between Symphoniah and Συμφονία, A well-set Lesson; or Psanterin and Ψαλτέριον, A Spiritual Hymn: And who also will not find a near resemblance in the consonating of divers Latin and Hebrew Words? For there is little difference betwixt Mesurah and Mensura, a Measure; Shekar and Saccarus, a sweet Moisture; Levya and Leæna, a Lioness, Sabbeca and Sambuca, a Chopping-board; Pesa and Passus, a Pace.

Likewise the Teutonick, the great Language of Germany, Britain, the Low-Countreys, and other Northern Nations.

Then starting over the Greek and Latin, the Teutonicks would likewise produce many Words which have the same sound and signification with the Hebrew; as Chobel, a Cable; Ethmol and Etmael, Watching; Sothim and Sotten, Fools; the Hebrew Arets, is in Dutch, Aerde, or as we in English, Ear’d Lands; Phert and Peert, a Horse; Levyah and Leeuw, a Lion; Shad and Schadea, Damages; Kisse and Kussen, in our Dialect the very same, Kisse; Shaken and Schenken, a giving, whence we derive our English Skinker, from serving of Drink; Bel and Beeld, an Image; for Bel properly signifies Lord, perhaps because the Images of Heroes or Lords were worshipp’d by them, or else because Ninus first erected an Image for his Father Belus, or Bel, to be worshipp’d.

Greek and Latin Tongues agree.

Abrah. Milii, Ling. Belg. c. 5, 6, 7, 11.

It would make a large Volume it self, to reckon up the Consonancies of the Hebrew, Greek, and Latin, and their scatterings among all Languages where ever their Empire spread, the one being indeed borrow’d from the other, as all Languages that deal or have any converse together: For not only the Words, with some small Alterations of Letters, signifie the same in both Languages; but also without the least alteration. Both Greeks and Latins express I do, by Ago; the Number Eight, by Octo; an Arm, by Brachium or Brachion, in English, Branches, and Braces; I eat, by Edo; a Cup, by Phiale; a Curtain, by Cortina, or Cortine; Merry, by Hilaris, or Hilaros; a ratling Noise or Sound, by Clango; a Camel, by Camelus, or Camelos; a Knee, by Genu, or Gonu; a Bowl or Chalice, by Calix; a Mouse, by Mus; Deceit, by Dolus, or Dolos; a House, by Domus, or Domos; I carry, by Fero, or Phero; the Pronoun I, Ego; a Lion, by Leo, or Λέων; Flax, by Linum, or Linon; a Mother, by Mater, or Meter; now, by nunc, or nun; the Night, by Nox, or Nux; a Rock-stone, by Petra; a Nick-name, by Scomma, or Skomma; a Boat, by Scapha, or Skaphe; a Treasure, by Thesaurus, or Thesauros; Father, by Pater; I tremble, by Tremo; an Hour, by Hora; the Evening, by Vespera, or Hespera; and an innumerable many Words more, that are of one signification in both.

Phenician and American Tongues have no similitude.

Americans much divided in Speech and People.

Now if there is not the hundredth part of the resemblance found between the American and Phenician Tongues, as there is between the Hebrew, Greek, Latin, and Dutch, according to the foremention’d Examples, which notwithstanding cannot be observ’d to be deriv’d from one another, what testimony can there be in five or six Words, which only have a few Letters that do not differ? But suppose that the agreeing of the Phenician and American Tongues could serve for a testimony; that these last People had their Original from the first, then there remains another doubt, viz. To know what Americans acknowledge the Phenicians for their Fathers; because their Countrey is so big, that it may almost stand in competition with all the other three parts of the Known World, being divided by so many Nations, which differ not only in their various Customs, but also in their several Languages, most of them not having the least likeness one with another: Nay, often times the Inhabitants of one Province differ so much in Dialect, that, according to Petrus de Cieca, the one cannot understand the other.

In America one Tongue is not at all like the other.

Decad. 3.

De Laet. Orig. Amer. obs. 5.

John de Laet observes out of Peter Martyr, and other Writers concerning the West-Indies, That there are several Languages and strange Words spoken among the divers Inhabitants of America; for the Hurones call a Head Sionta; the Mexicans, Tzontecontli; the Inhabitants of New-Netherland, Anonsi; the Brasilians, Acanga; the Jaos, Boppe: the Figures One, Two, Three, and Four, the Hurones tell thus, Escate, Teni, Hachin, Dac; the Mexicans, Ce, Ome, Yei, Nabuy; the Sankikanders, Cotte, Nysse, Nacha, Wyve; the Brasilians, Oyepe, Mocoy, Mocapir, Oirundi; the Jaos, Tewyn, Tage, Terrewaw, Tagyne; the Natives of New-Netherland, Onsat, Tiggani, Asse, Cayere. Moreover the Hurones call a Father Aystan; the Mexicans, Tathli; the Canadensers, Notaovi; in New-Netherland, Ragina; in Brasile, Tuba: And so it is generally with all other Words, which agree not in the least one with the other; so that every Territory hath not only a several Dialect, but in many Places they use besides two, three, or more distinct Speeches, not relating in the least one to another, in one Province, by which the People inhabiting Towns and Villages are distinguish’d. The Islanders discover’d by the Spaniards, and destroy’d, have left few Words behind them; yet Peter Martyr sets down some of them, which were formerly us’d in Hispaniola: They call’d Heaven Tures; a House, Boa; Gold, Cauni; a good Man, Tayno. It is worthy of observation, that they pronounce no H in their Language, but what is spoken with a Vowel, and then give it a strong Aspiration, like the warbling guttural ע Ghain of the Hebrews.

Gen. 9. v. 25, 26, 27.

Gen. 10. v. 15.

Last Testimonies of the Americans Extract from the Phenicians.

Is contradicted.

Franc. Burman. in Gen. 25. 30.

Phenicians deriv’d from Esau.

Our last and chiefest Testimony is Moses, who says thus in Genesis, Cursed be Canaan, a Servant of Servants shall he be unto his Brethren. Moreover he said, Blessed be the Lord God of Shem, and Canaan shall be his Servant: God shall inlarge Japhet, and he shall dwell in the Tents of Shem; and Canaan shall be his Servant. And in the next Chapter, Canaan begat Sidon. These Scriptures are explain’d as a Testimony of the Americans Extract from the Phenicians, which they ground on these following Reasons: The Phenicians are Canaan’s Successors from Sidon, who gave name to their chief City. Tubal the Issue of Japhet, whose Tents God promis’d to enlarge, and that Canaan should be his Servant, planted Spain. The Phenicians, descendants from Sydon, (say they) Peopled America; the Spaniards sprung from Tubal, of Japhet, have subjected the Americans, descended from Sydon, of Canaan; wherein is fulfill’d that Prophecy of Moses, That Canaan should be Servant to Japhet; but it seems a great mistake, so to derive the Phenicians from Canaan, for they are Extracted from Shem, Heber, Abraham, and Esau, sirnam’d Edom, from his saying, Adom, Adom, when he ask’d of Jacob, That Red, That Red, because he knew not how to call the prepared Pottage by its proper Name; And Edom setling himself on Mount Seir, a part of the Stony Arabia, and on the Coast of the Red-Sea, gave denomination to it, because that Sea was much frequented and Navigated by his Successors. The Greeks call it Erythreum, from Erythros, who is the same with Esau, and likewise signifies Red. Hereto is added, That Phænix and Erythros have the same signification in the Greek; So then, these Idumeans taking the name of Phenicians, from the great Phœnix, spread themselves far and near under mighty Kings, by Navigation in the Red-Sea, and from thence Planted several Coasts and Islands, removing at last to Syria.

Gen. 36. 39.

Com. in Jer. l. 4. c. 25.

In Ps. 136. Voss. Orig. Idol. l. 1. c. 31.

Punick Tongue.

Hebrew.

The seventh King of Edom, Moses reckoneth to be Baal-hanan, which name, by transposing the Syllables, the famous Carthaginian General Hannibal bare. Moreover, it may easily be demonstrated, that the Phenicians Extracted from Heber, have formerly spoke Hebrew, and since Arabick; for they dwelt before their removing, in the Stony-Arabia. St. Jerom saith, the Punick Tongue agrees for the most part with the Hebrew: And St. Austin tells us, that many, nay, most of the Carthaginian words are Hebrew. Elisa, Dido, the first Foundress of Carthage proves this, for Elisa or Elissah, with the Hebrews, denotes A Lamb of my God; and Dido, A Lover. But who can find the least likeness, between the Hebrew or Arabick Tongue with the Americans? Lastly, Since the Phenicians acknowledge Esau for a Father, what then concerns the Americans, the curse of Canaan, since they are no more Extracted from Canaan, than the Phenicians? Thus much concerning the Phenicians.

If the Americans were deriv’d from the Jews, or the ten Tribes of Israel.

Is contradicted.

Some would derive the Americans from the Jews; others, from the ten Tribes of Israel, carry’d into captivity. The ground of which Opinions is, That the Jews and Israelites were scatter’d amongst all Nations; therefore they conclude, that America was also Peopled by them, the rather, because the antient Jews and Americans were of one Complexion, and went a like Habited, both going without Shooes, onely wearing Sandals, and an upper Coat over a shorter Linnen Vest. Both are humble, quick of apprehension, and obliging, yet Valiant: But it is certain, they cannot be like the Jews, because the Americans change their Habit, according as they live in cold or hot Countreys, and go not in the least like one another.

Father Immanuel relates, That he saw a Brasilian, not onely stoutly make his party good against three Portugal Soldiers, but had it not been by meer chance, worsted them.

Lastly, What Ceremonies of Religious Rites are observ’d by the Americans, which are used in Judaism? The Jews indeed have transplanted their Circumcision amongst divers Eastern People, and have they onely forgot the first Ceremony and signal Badge of their Religion in America, which yet not onely they, but those Mahumetans and other Sectaries punctually observe?

Jews distribution.

1 Pet. 1. 1. Scaliger in Notes ad N. T.

Joh. 7. 35.

L. de Idolo. vanitate.

This makes evident their scatterings about the Face of the Earth, but will not bring them to reach America. The Sacred Text sets forth a two-fold description of the Jews; The one before the Birth of our Saviour, when they liv’d as strangers in Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia, and Bythinia. Jerusalem was their Metropolis, although others had their chief residence in Babylon, and Alexandria; for there was an Asiatick and a European dispersion; those of Asia had Babylon for their chief City, and us’d in their Synagogues the Chaldean Translation of the Bible. The Europeans kept their Seat at Alexandria, where they had a Temple like that of Jerusalem; and whilst they employ’d themselves in the Greek Version of the Holy Scripture, by the seventy two Interpreters, under Ptolomeus Philadelphus, they were call’d Wandering Greeks: Therefore, certainly the Americans are not deriv’d from these Jews, and with as little reason from those, which by Titus Vespasian, after the destruction of Jerusalem were driven into several Countreys, for they were never permitted (that I may borrow the words of St. Cyprian) to set forward one step, though but as Pilgrims, towards their Native Countrey, but strictly forbidden not to assemble or meet together in any considerable number, which would have been necessary, if they intended to Plant a new World.

2 Reg. 17. 5.

4 Esd. 13. 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46.

A small seeming Testimony is added, being taken out of the fourth Book of Esdras, that the ten Tribes of Israel that were carry’d away by Salmanassar with their King Hosea to Nahalah, Habor, the River Gozan, and the Cities of the Medes, might be acknowledged for the first Planters of America: Concerning which, Esdras saith thus, The ten Tribes brought over into another Countrey, consulted that they should forsake the multitude of the Heathens, and travel to a remoter Countrey, where no Generation of Mankind had ever liv’d before, there they would maintain their Laws, which they had not observ’d in their Countrey: Whereupon they went thither thorow the narrow entrances of the River Euphrates, for the Almighty stopt the Vains of the River, till they were past over; for thorow the Countrey was a way of a year and halfs Journey: wherefore that Tract of Land is call’d Assareth, then they liv’d there till the last time.

But since these Books of Esdras were not Written by a Prophet, either in the Hebrew Tongue, or allow’d by the Jews to be the Word of God, or any where taken notice of in the New Testament; wherefore then is Assareth more America than any other remoter Countrey?

L. 5. in Ezek. & l. 6. in Jerom.

4 Esd. 6. 49, 50. & 14. 21. & 4. 41.

St. Hierom (who certainly had a peculiar knowledge of the condition of the ten Tribes of Israel, because he liv’d in Asia, and held Correspondence with the Jews, that he might perfectly learn the Hebrew Tongue,) relates, “That the ten Tribes (St. Hierome liv’d about the Year four hundred, under the Emperor Theodosius) underwent great slavery in the Cities of Medes and Persians; so that this strange Voyage to Assareth, which must have happen’d long before St. Hierom’s time, may be Recorded amongst the other Legends of the Rabbies, concerning their Behemoth and Leviathan, who lock’d up the Souls of those that sleighted their Laws, in Caves under ground, as Esdras.”

Antient condition of the Persians.

Melchior Soiterus de Reb. Turc.

And how little opportunity the Israelites had to remove since his time, may appear by the horrible Destruction that was made for several Ages together in Persia and Media; for although the Persians became Masters again of the Realm, Conquer’d by Alexander the Great, whilst Alexander’s Successors invaded one another, yet they were continually in War, either against the Romans, or else the Indians, and other Eastern People; nay, the Saracens wrested the Scepter out of their hand, though but for a small time; for soon after, breaking out into Factions amongst themselves, Muchumet Subictigenes, Imbrael’s Son, establish’d his Throne on their Ruines, and incourag’d by such success, Arm’d himself against the Indians, and made use of the Turks assistance, with which he subdu’d the Babylonian Arabians: After which, the Turks, not without great slaughter see the Persian Crown on their Head, which, immediately totter’d by bloudy Commotions; for Tangrolipix being King of Persia, clashing with his Brother Cutlumuses, made Persia swim in the Blood of a Civil-War, till at last Zengis Chan brought from Tartary so great an Army, Anno 1200. that none durst stay to make opposition; for the Turks forsook Persia after a Conquest of six Ages, and made their own way for new Quarters into Carmania, Phrygia, and Bithynia, whence they made such incursions on the Greek Empire, that at last they became sole Masters thereof. Who cannot but easily judge by this, how little opportunity the ten Tribes had, to be assembled together from remote Countreys, and to go long Journeys through untrack’d ways, and full of Enemies, to travel to America?

Mora’s opinion concerning the Americans Extract.

Immanuel de Moraes, who had gotten peculiar knowledge of the Americans by his long Conversation with them, judgeth that they are not deriv’d from one People, but from the Carthaginians and Jews, and that at several times, and places, they Landed in this New World; for the Carthaginians Sailing thither, found the Soyl so fertile, that many forsook their Native Countrey to dwell there: Whereupon, it was forbidden upon pain of Death, to send no more thither, lest if Carthage should be invaded by a foraign Enemy, it should want People for a Home-defence: From this occasion it happen’d, that those that were already Transported, became rude, and of a Salvage Disposition, and spreading their Families, planted the desolate Countreys in a ranging manner, without acknowledging any Supreme Head or Governor.

Thus being scatter’d up and down, every one invented to himself a new Language, which should neither agree with the Carthaginians, or any other: But this Opinion is before at large contradicted.

Customs and Constitutions of the Brasilians are several.

Moreover, Moraes endeavors to shew, that the Brasilians are of a Hebrew Extract, because that according to the example of the Jews, they might not Marry, but in their own Tribes; they also call their Unkles, Fathers, and their Aunts, Mothers; both mourn for the Dead a Moneth together, and wear long Garments down to their Ankles. But these Arguments seem to us of small consequence, for indeed the Brasilians differ in their Marriages from the Jews, for they not onely Marry in their own Tribes, but frequently commix with their Sisters, and Daughters, or other their nearest Relations. Moreover, the Jews call’d them Fathers, from whose Loyns they sprang many Ages before, as well as their Unkles, which the Americans do not.

The Mourning for the Dead hath been an old Custom, and is not observ’d by many People, but the time of a Moneth was not setled amongst them, but was observ’d after a more unusual manner, seventy days, as in the Fields of Moab for Moses, and elsewhere for the Patriarch Jacob. Lastly, all people know, that the Romans and Persians girt themselves about with long Clothes. Besides, the Jews were strictly bound to observe Circumcision, without which they were not accounted Jews, which the Brasilians use not, as neither their Language or Letters. How is it possible, that in America they should at once have forgotten their Extract, Laws, Circumcision, Language, and other Ceremonies, when the rest of them observ’d nothing more strictly in all parts of the Earth?

Grotius is of opinion that the Americans belong’d to Norway.

The Learned Hugo Grotius, in his Enquiry after the original of the Americans, brings them with many Circumstances to belong to Panama, situate opposite to the Northern Parts of Norway, because something of their Languages agrees, and the Way thither easie and nearest to be found: for first they travell’d from Norway to Ysland, over which the Norwegians Rul’d above a thousand years since; so from Ysland through Friezland to Groenland, and from thence to Estotiland, being a part of the Main Continent of America.

This Opinion is largely contradicted.

From Friezland some Fishers went thither (as he says) two Centuries before the Spaniards touch’d that Shore; which John de Laet contradicts. And indeed what Reasons can be given, Why the Americans of the Straights, between Panama and Nombre de Dios, lying Northerly, should have another original than those that live to the South, seeing the same Straights are neither divided by Mountains nor Rivers; and the Spaniards found no alteration in the Customs and Languages betwixt them that liv’d above or below these Straights. And who will believe that Norway, which was but indifferently peopled, could afford such numerous Colonies as could plant the Northern America, which far exceeds the South, and chiefly, when the great Islands that lie near the East and West, are added to it? Moreover it is certain, (if the Yslander Angrim Jonas is to be credited) that some Families fled out of Norway from their enraged King to Ysland in the Year 874. which at that time was but meanly inhabited.

Isaac Pontanus de Reb. Danicis.

Forty years before, Lewis the Just put the Yslanders under the protection of Pope Gregory the fourth, who gave the Government of the Ysland Church to Ansgar Archbishop of Hamburgh. But how comes it that there is not the least spark of Christianity found amongst the Northern Americans, if they are deriv’d from the Ysland Christians? and why did the Yslanders remove to colder Countreys than Groenland and Friezland, or their own native Soil, and for the most part not inhabited?

Concerning Groenland and Friezland, it is known by our English Navigators, that they are joyn’d together, and both to the Northern America; but not without vast Bays and Inlets, which betwixt Groenland and America are obstructed with floating Castles of Ice; so that the Passage is very dangerous. And full as troublesom, if not altogether impossible, would the Journey be by Land, because the Earth lies so thick cover’d with Ice and Snow, especially the Valleys, that no Traveller is able to get through.

The Voyage of two Zeno’s.

Relatio Marc. Zenonis.

Moreover, that which Grotius says farther of the Fishers which first discover’d Estotiland, is grounded on the Relation of the Venetian Knights, Nicholas and Marcus Zeno, two Brothers. Anno 1380. Nicholas Zeno suffer’d Shipwrack on the Friezland Coast; Marcus inform’d thereof, steer’d his Course thither; fourteen years they spent before they came to Estotiland: at last they return’d again to Friezland, where Nicholas died: But Marcus returning home publish’d his Journal, wherein he relates, That Estotiland is above a thousand Leagues distant from Friezland, and was discover’d by Friezland Fisher-men that were driven thither by Storm. But he hath set down many things that have little resemblance of truth, according to what is since found by credible Navigators; and therefore we cannot depend on Zeno’s Discovery.

The American Tongue is nothing like the Norwegian.

John de Laet accounts it a great mistake in Grotius, that as a testimony of the Americans original out of Norway, he compares their Languages. He reckons up some Places to be Northward of Panama, which end their words with the syllable Lan instead of Land, because the Spaniards have left out the Letter D at the end thereof. It is certain, that in the Northern America lie Cimatlan, Coatlan, Guescolan, Artlan, Quaxutatlan, Icatlan, Tapatlan, Cinacatlan, Tenuchitlan, Comitlan, Metzitlan, Guatitlan, Necotitlan, Curcatatlan. Besides, that most of these Names are not of Countreys, but of Towns and Villages, and therefore no ways fitting to have the termination of Land: and it is well known that many American words end with Lan, which signifie nothing less than Land: for the Mexicans say Puertatitlan, which signifies At the Gate below; Ochachitlantzitlan, Yet lower; Tenoxtitlan, (this City is also call’d from her Founder Mexis, Mexico) that is, Rests on a Rock. Moreover, it may not without reason seem strange to any, that the Northern Americans have remembred but three Cities out of all the Teutonick Tongue, viz. Lan in stead Land.

Groenland when discovered.

Serm. 3. Antiq. Danic.

Concerning Groenland, through which the Norwegians are thought to have travell’d to America, Lysander witnesseth, That it was accidentally discover’d by one Eric Rauder, Anno 987, and planted thirteen years after.

Olaus, King of Norway, plac’d two Bishops over the new Inhabitants, as Substitutes to the Archbishop of Dronthen. For four Ages they Sail’d frequently to Groenland; but since their King was impoverish’d by War, they left off that Trade.

We find not in any Author, that the Norwegians which liv’d along the Sea-shore, ever went to seek a Way over the inaccessible Snowy Mountains of Groenland, to this our New World.

Besides, Grotius stands for the Norwegians as Planters, upon testimony of the Mexicans themselves, who told the Spaniards, That their Ancestors which planted there came from the North, first setling themselves on Estotiland, where to this day there are not improbable proofs by several remarks, that they were a Norwegian Colony.

The opinion concerning the City Norumbega in America.

In the American City Norumbega, live a People that speak the same Language, and observe the same Customs with the Mexicans.

In this by-Corner are found also some Alavards, or Longobards, or Lombards, as they say. Now the Spaniards call that New Mexico because last discover’d, though indeed the old, cramm’d with People eight hundred years since: for the Mexicans of New Mexico do not lie so far Northerly, as to the North-west: for this Mexico lies in sight of California, which is believ’d to border on Tartary, or at least separated from it by a narrow Channel. But Norumbega (if ever such a Place was) must, according to the West-Indian Records, have been situate where a part of New France lies, now planted by the English: between which and New Mexico lies an almost unmeasurable vast Tract of Land. Mean while here is not the least sign of this City Norumbega to be found: neither do the Inhabitants dwell in Cities, but live in Tents, or moveable Villages, which change their Names as oft as their Governors. Moreover, the Norwegians could not get to this Norumbega by Land through Ysland and Groenland to Estotiland, because of the vast Bays, and great Midland-Sea, discover’d by the English in their North-western Discoveries; so that leaving Estotiland, it was altogether impossible for them to come to Norumbega.

Chichimecen.

Hereto may be added what the Mexicans say of themselves, who acknowledge, That travelling from the North, they did not find an un-inhabited Countrey before them, but were forc’d to make their Way by a long and bloody War with the Chichimecen, a salvage People, that knew neither Laws or Religion.

The People also dwelling opposite to California, differ from the Customs of the Mexicans, being divided into several People of contrary Constitutions, and as different Languages.

Customs and Constitutions of the Mexicans.

Grotius scrues up his Arguments from the likeness of the American Speech and Customs with the Norwegian: for (says he) there is little difference between Pagod and by-God, or like God; Guaira and Waeijer, that is, A Fan; Ilama and Lam, in English, Lamb; Peko and Beke, a Brook or Rivulet. Both Customs and Constitutions have also great resemblance. The Mexicans relate, that their Predecessors onely follow’d Hunting; that they divided and reckon’d the Time, not by Days, but by Nights, and wash’d their Children as soon as they were born in cold Water.

They are so much inclin’d to Gaming, that they venture their Liberty at it. Every one is satisfi’d with one Wife, except some of the Nobility, which oftentimes have more. They throw up high Banks in several places to damm out the Sea; believe the Immortality of the Soul; every one eats at a peculiar Table; most of them go naked, onely cover their Pudenda with a Cloth; some Sacrifice and eat Mans-flesh: all which, according to Tacitus, Pliny, Lucan, and other Roman Writers, was observ’d by the antient Germans; from whom those that inhabit between the Norwegian Mountains were extracted.

These Allegations, to make the Norwegians to be the Parents of the Northern Americans, John de Laet thus contradicts: “It no ways follows that one People take original from the other, because here and there are several words found, that have the same signification and found in divers Countreys; much less when they must either add, change, or diminish several Letters. Moreover, there is no small mistake in the compar’d words: for Pagod is not us’d all over America; the East-Indians about the River Indus, call their Idol-Temples Pagod, or Pagode, the word Guaira is no where us’d in America, but by the Peruvians, and with them not signifying a Fan, but a little Oven; neither is Ilama a Lamb, (for before the coming of the Spaniards thither, neither Sheep nor Lambs were ever seen in Peru) but a Wool-bearing Beast, thus describ’d by Joseph de Acosta:

A description of the strange Beast Ilama in Peru.

“Ilama (says he) a four-footed Creature, furnishes its Master with Meat and Clothing, and supplies the office of a Beast for Burthens, and at no charge for Hay nor Provender, well satisfi’d with what he finds in the Ways or Mountains. But the Ilama’s are of two sorts, either woolly, or shorthair’d: the first go by the Name Pacos, the other Moromoro, being not much less than a Calf, with a long Neck like a Camel, but of several colours; for some are white, some black, and others speckled, having an odd Look, especially when they are ty’d, and stand still without any motion, staring with goggle-eyes on their Owners: Sometimes in a moody humor, upon a sudden taking a freak, they run up to the top of almost inaccessible Mountains, where both the frantick Beast and his Burthen are lost. The Pacos sometimes likewise takes sudden Pets, and fustian Fits, often doing the forward Supersalt, tumbling over and over with their Goods, and will not be rais’d, their moodiness continuing, with beating, nay though they cut them to pieces: but the best way is to sit down by them, and wait some hours till their humor being spent they rise again of their own accords. These Beasts are much inclin’d to a Disease call’d Carashe or the Mange, of which they generally die: and because the Disease is very catching, they straight bury the infected alive, so the better to preserve the rest.”

Grotius also mistakes, when he compares the Mexican Peke with the Dutch Beke; for though many Mexican Places, Mountains, and Rivers, terminate in Peke, yet it signifies not a Brook or Rivulet, for that they call Atlauhtli.

De Orig. Gentium Americ.

John de Laet tells also, That with great diligence he found a Mexican Dictionary, Printed by the Spaniards in Mexico, to find if there were any words in it which agreed with any of those European Languages that he understood, but found not one.

It is the same case with the Customs and Constitutions between the Norwegians and Northern Americans: for what concerns Hunting, how many People have formerly liv’d by it? The antient Germans, and to this day the Tartars make it their whole business, excelling in that Art all other Nations. Besides, that the more serious sort of the Mexicans many Ages since scorn’d to derive themselves from a Hunting Ancestry, but affirm that they found the Chichimecen in those Countreys, who were great Venators.

Customs of the Americans.

Their Clothing.

The accounting of Time by the Nights, extracted from the Hebrews, is observ’d by divers Eastern People: and although the Germans dipt and wash’d their children in cold Rivers, or Brooks, so soon as they were born, yet the Mexicans never did it, but the Mother lays the Child on the fourth day after its Birth, in an open place of the House, in the middle whereof stands a Pot full of Water cover’d with Broom, in which they wash the Infant. Neither are the Americans so much addicted to the Vice of Gaming as other Nations, so that Grotius taxeth them too severely as to that point: as on the contrary, he too much clears them of Polygamy, whereas the Mexicans Marry as many Wives as they please, or are able to maintain. Father Martyn Perez relates the same of the Cinaloans, and other Americans; as also Quarterius of the Natives in Nova Francia, which lie nearest to Norway. And what need the Americans have the Germans their Teachers, to make Dams and Banks against Floods, since Nature and Necessity it self instructs it? and where are any People so ignorant, as to ascribe the same event to Men and Beasts after death? ’Tis true, their manner of eating in America is several, because the People do not much converse together: but they did not go naked; for the Spaniards found them not onely neatly Habited, but had a proper Name for every thing they wore. The Virginians us’d long Shirts; the Floridans Skins of wild Beasts; and towards the North they cover’d themselves from Head to Foot in hairy and undress’d Hydes. The sacrificing of Men was in former Ages spreading far and near over the World, and how far it was practis’d here, hath been already declar’d at large. Lastly, all the Americans are not guilty of eating of Man’s-flesh, but that salvageness is confin’d to the Southern America.

Thus much we have said, to prove that the Norwegians had no hand in planting the Northern America, we shall now proceed to enquire who planted the Southern Parts, from the Straights between Panama and Nombre de Dios, to the Straights of Magellan.

The Peruvians, possessing a large Tract of Land along the Coast of the South-Sea, Grotius would thus derive from China:

Relation of Mancocapacus.

“The Peruvians, being of a subtile Wit, and quick of Apprehension, argue sufficiently that they are not extracted from the more Northern Americans, but rather from the Chineses, which the several Wrecks of Chinese Ships found on these Coasts sufficiently evidence: and no wonder, if curiosity or accident brought the Chineses expert Navigators to this Countrey, separated onely by one Sea from them. To this we may add their Rites of Religion; for both worship the Sun, and call their King the Son of the Sun; they write no Letters but make Characters downwards. Mancocapacus was a Chinese of strange Policy; who being inform’d that his Countrey-men inhabited fruitful Countreys on the other side of the South-Sea, but without Laws or Government, Sail’d over thither, and gather’d the scatter’d Multitudes in a Body, and establish’d an hereditary Kingdom after the Chinese manner, to him and his Successors.”

The Americans are not extracted from China.

To which John de Laet answers thus: “Though the Peruvians exceed the other Americans in Policy, and at the arrival of the Spaniards liv’d in a handsom Order of Government, yet they can no ways be compar’d to the sharp-witted, and noble-spirited Chineses; nay, there are in no Place of Peru found such Artificers as those of China, that bear the praise of all the World; no where such manner of Buildings or Cities, nor the least likeness of the Chinese Curiosities. As concerning the Wrecks found in Peru, I find no credible Author that gives an account thereof: for certainly the Chineses could much easier, and a nearer way have come through the Atlantick Sea to the Coasts of America, lying to the East of Peru, than steer along the vast, and much greater South Sea, and endure the horrible Storms and vast Waves, which the European Ships are scarce able to endure, much less the Chinese Vessels, which are not so good. The Spaniards which Sail yearly from Acupulco to the Philippines are sensible of the great danger which they endure, chiefly by the great gusts of Wind near California. Besides, the Peruvians before the arrival of the Spaniards, were utterly ignorant of great Ships, and the use of Sails. How could they at once have forgotten that Art, which they brought with them thither, Moreover, it is easier to Sail from Peru to China, than from China to Peru, because the Winds under the Equinoctial Line commonly blow Easterly. And it is the greater wonder, that the Chinese Jonks accidentally by Storm should be driven to Peru, because they were never stor’d with Provisions but for a short Voyage, whereas this ask’d nine Moneths. But if any one will suppose, that they purposely directed their Course thither, how came the Chineses to Sail just to Peru, and not to New Spain, which is much closer to China? why were there no Merchandises of the Chineses found in Peru, since they went thither for Trade? how came they to neglect that Navigation they had once found? Nor is their Sun-worship (which was formerly practis’d in most Parts of the World) of any validity to derive them from China? But the contrary is most apparent, for the Peruvians worship for their chief God, Viracocha, that is, God Almighty, or The Creator of all things.

“The Chineses, if Confutius an eye-witness may be credited, are divided into three Sects of Religion: The first follow the Learn’d Trigantius, and acknowledge a King of the Heavens, which must onely be serv’d as the Chineses sole Governor; to which purpose, two Temples are built in the Royal Cities Nankin and Pekin, one Consecrate to Heaven, and the other to the Earth. The second Sect hath the name of Sciequia, and serve the Idol Omyto. The third nam’d Lanzu, imploy themselves in Magick and Exorcisms, Conjuring up, and laying Evil-Spirits, whose horrid representations, when they have stuck upon the Walls, they make an artificial and dreadful noise, as if Hell were broke loose, and the House full of Devils; sometimes also force the Evil-Spirits to enter into Images, from whence they receive no impertinent answers to their questions: Therefore, who will compare this Superstition of the Peruvians worshipping of the Sun, to the Chinese Religion, which do no such things?

Embassy to the Cham, l. 2. c. 2.

“The Peruvians call’d their King, A Lord of the Realm, and not The Son of the Sun, as in China: Though the Mexicans otherwise worship the Sun, and in their manner of adulation, styl’d Hernando Cortez, their Conqueror, Son of the Sun: As to what concerns the manner of writing, it is very well known, that the Chineses words are all Monosyllables, so that they have as many Letters as Words, which they joyn so together, that they reckon eighty thousand, but with ten thousand they are able to express themselves in most matters. These Characters are contain’d in their Halpien or Dictionary. The antient Chineses us’d seventeen several sorts of Characters in their writing, some consisting of Serpents, that by several Wreathes and contortious Windings, signify’d several things; others, of all sorts of agrestick Tools belonging to Husbandry; some Characters of the Feathers of the Bird Fum-hoar; others of Oysters and Worms, or of Roots, of Herbs, or Birds Claws, or of Turtles, or of Herbs and Birds Feathers mingled, or of Planets, and such like; but what manner of Writing or Hieroglyphick of theirs resembles those, who by their own testimony know neither Pen, Paper, Ink, nor any manner of Writing, but reckon the antiquity of time by strung Beads, which was observ’d many ages since among several Nations.”

Original of the Americans very obscure.

What we may believe concerning them.

The Americans are derived from several people.

Hitherto we have discover’d the several Opinions concerning the Original of the Americans, or first Plantation of America, from all which, having receiv’d no clear or demonstrative satisfaction, we must open our way to a further scrutiny: But first, we must needs confess, that contradiction is not difficult; but it is something of Work, when we have beaten down a well-fortifi’d Opinion, to set up somewhat in stead thereof, to stand a permanent and undeniable truth, which will be the harder, in regard the Inhabitants of this new World have no old Chronologies concerning their Antiquities, and first settling there; yet if we cannot go so far absolutely to assert, yet some probabilities, grounded (as we suppose) upon better reasons, may give more satisfaction; for none will deny, but that the Generations of Mankind being strangely multiply’d after the Flood, they then living five times our Ages, and Wars not beginning till the known part of the Earth was over-stock’d, justling for Territories, and some thrust quite out, at last found America; which spreading it self to a vast extent, and now found almost every where well inhabited, may be guess’d, that it was not onely Planted from the first, but several times replenish’d since by various Nations; Why may not several Planters, and at several times make room for their Colonies, incroaching one upon another, either by force or compact; as the French themselves upon the Gauls, the Normans upon them, the Goths among the Spaniards, and the Saxons among the Brittains, and the Normans again upon them?

Several people may easily Sail over thither, the Azores or the Canary Isles lye so, that they are ready (as if design’d) for Transportation to America; from whence Acosta made a Voyage in fifteen days. Also Pliny gives us an account, that these Islands lay uninhabited in his time; yet is it well known, that after Pliny’s time, Ruins of Buildings were found there, signifying, they had been formerly Planted; and why might not those ancient Inhabitants Sail thence to the neighboring America?

Marian. de Reb. Hisp. l. 1. c. 18.

Tercera lying half way between Spain and America, was frequented by Navigators before the Birth of our Savior; and it seems as easie to Sail from thence to America, as from the Main Land of Spain thither: Add this, that necessity forc’d the Spaniards to look about them from other Countreys, for since they lost their Victorious Champion Baucius Gapetus, they were every where beaten, being tired out by the Phenician Forces, and that oppression over, suffer’d as much under the Roman Yoke: Wherefore it seems not strange, if a considerable number remov’d from thence, that they might live some where else in quiet; for which purpose they wanted no conveniencies to Rig and set forth stout and sufficient Vessels, able to live in those Seas, having had long experience from the Phenician Voyagers, whose Fleets Sail’d daily to and again in several Expeditions, from Cadiz and Gibraltar towards these Western Countreys: Nay, Hanno himself their first Navigator that way, who gives an account of the Gorgons, or the Isles of Cape Verd, a good part of the way to America.

English famous Sea-men.

Barat-anac, or, Tinland, the Phenician name, and Brittania the Greek name of Brittain.

And though Brittain, Ireland, and the Brittish Orcades lay further from America, yet something may be said particularly to prove, That many Ages since, Expeditions had been made from thence to the New World; and that the Inhabitants of these our Isles, in former Ages, were peculiarly famous for their skill in Navigation; insomuch, that the Cretans and Phenicians emulous of their skill, and jealous of their danger, made several Attacques and Invasions upon these Isles, which is the more probable, many remarks of the Phenician and Greek Language, remaining in the denominations of the Countrey: Of which, take first this account:

Old Voyage of Madok to America; for which see Vet. Hist. Brit.

Anno 1170. When Owen Guyneth, Prince of Wales, having Raign’d long and happily in his setled Dominions, dying, left several Sons, who quarrelling, their elder Brother, as not contented with their shares of the Principality, nor to be under him, having gotten no mean Interests and Claims to the whole by their struglings, so weakned one another, that they open’d a way to the loosing of all.

David Powel in Historia Cambriæ.

Amongst these Brothers, Madok, a Prince of a milder disposition, weary of such unnatural Dissentions, threw up his share, better contented to seek new Fortunes abroad; whereupon there were many soon perswaded to venture their lives with him, where ever he would please to Transport: So Rigging a small Fleet, he Sail’d Westward, far beyond Ireland, where at last he discover’d an unknown and un-inhabited Countrey, but wondrous pleasant, the Air being temperate, and the Soyl most fertile: Glad of this good success (as the Story says) he returning, spreading the Fame of this his New-Found-Land, which they might exchange for a barren Soyl, hatter’d and harass’d with an endless Civil-War.

No small number flock’d to these Summons, as a most acceptable Undertaking; so that soon after he was able to send forth ten good Ships, Freighted only with Men, Women, and Children, and all other Materials fit for a new Plantation; which not long after Landed in Acuzamil, a Countrey in the North of America, as Francis Lopez de Gomara believes, because there he onely found some remaining Tracks of Christianity, a People that worshipp’d the Cross, but knew no reason why or wherefore they ador’d that sign of our Redemption. Now, some will say, that this Worship of the Cross is no argument to prove, that the Brittish Christians first Planted in the North of America; but what will not time and change of place do, where Transplanted People keep no Records, so they forget not onely Religion, Laws, and Customs, but who they were, and from whence they came, Oblivion first mutilating, and at last swallowing up all; of which, take this one late president.

Strange occasion of De la Roche.

Anno 1598. The Duke De La Roche obtain’d leave of the French King, to transport a Colony of Volunteers to New France; in his way he Landed fifty Men on the Island De Sable, to rest his Passengers, and that he might the better, and with more ease explore the Countrey, and when resolv’d where to settle, then to fetch them off; who accordingly, as design’d, soon after, returning thither, was met with so violent a Storm, that not being able to Weather the Isle of Sable, where he left his People, he lost his whole Expedition, and was driven back to a French Harbor, where no sooner arriv’d, he was so highly charg’d, that he was cast into Prison, when those he had left neglected upon the Isle, were not once so much as thought of; in this interim, they never expecting to hear more of their Captain, liv’d in a wild and miserable condition, feeding upon Fish, and sometimes wild Swine, without Bread, Drink, or Salt.

When the Baron of Leri went with Letters Patents, to be Governor of Nova Francia, and by stress of Weather in his Voyage, was forc’d to put in at Sable, where he found the remainder of La Roches People, who being from fifty reduced to twelve, having clad themselves in Sea-Wolves Skins, they had not onely lost their former French Civilities, but forgot in a manner their Religion, much of their Language, and what they were, being as if Metamorphos’d into bestial Salvages.

If some did not come accidentally to America.

And although we have already controverted the improbability of Peopling America, either by accident of Storm, or set purpose; yet it may be possible that so it might happen, for as the several vertues of Plants, Herbs, Precious-Stones, and Minerals, though strangely occult, and so altogether unknown, that what could never be found by Art, meer chance hath brought to light, and their wondrous qualities, some casual accident hath made apparent; so strange and remote Countreys never to be found in our Charts, or Maps, nor Registred in any Story, Seamen bound to their intended Harbors, have stumbled on by chance, either Hood-wink’d by blind Mists, or forc’d upon by pertinatious Weather; of which America may be her own witness, for how was Columbus stirr’d up, but by incitations of the Journals of a Sea-Captain, dying in his House, driven on the American Islands by foul Weather.

America was Peopled presently after the Flood.

Giants in America.

Conjurati fratres, Virg. Georg.

The Flood acknowledg’d there.

Although from the foremention’d places, and after the same manner, America might be furnish’d with Inhabitants; so it also gives us a more certain assurance, that the Planting of America was not onely soon after the Flood, but that they came also thither by Land: And how strangely would it be against the Majesty and Wisdom of Divine Providence, to leave half the Universal Globe, a World fully supply’d with all sorts of Creatures, fit for Food and Service, Plants, Herbs, and the richest Minerals, like a House new built, and well furnish’d, without a Master or any Inhabitant, viz. Man, who being of Celestial Extract, should be able to acknowledge and glorifie the Creator, by admiring the Creature in his great Works: Besides, the confus’d Notions and Fables of Giants, Perpetrators of all manner of Crimes, and wallowing in all kind of sensual Debaucheries, are always remembred among the Antiquities of the Americans, and that they had some slender hints of antient Truth, not onely of the Giants before the Flood, but of those that soon after the rank fatness of the Earth, produc’d and fed to that pitch of Arrogance, that the covenanting Brethren defi’d God, fortifying themselves to fight him by the advantage of that their long congested Pile, Babel, which in a short time was transverted by the Heathen Poets into their Gigantomachia, heaping Hills on Hills, like the American Traditions: From which we may conjecture, that they came thither in the time of Noah; for why may not any believe, when Noah liv’d three hundred years after he Landed on Mount Ararat, that he took care to People the World? And who will make him ignorant of this New World, who living five hundred years before, might not improbably by his own industry and the help of the former long-liv’d Patriarchs, been well able to make a general Survey of the Old; and he could better furnish America, it being nearer Mount Ararat, than supply Italy, Spain, Germany, or any Northern Territories in Europe, so that America might be known to the first people after the Flood, nay, inhabited by them, though since that, the knowledge was lost.

Pliny complaining of the Supine negligence, and stupendious sloth which reign’d then and long before as he had observ’d, among all people, and in every place, who were so far from making inquiry after discoveries of Lands for new Plantations, that they lost the old, when they had begun to settle, though under the greatest serenity of Peace; The Sea by that means lying open beyond what any juncture of former times could be proud of.

Canary Islands, by whom discover’d.

Hesperian Gardens, what they signifie.

Yet the Fortunate, or Canary Islands were in the first ages after Noah, frequented with Vessels, which in later times were altogether neglected, till Guillaum Betancourt, a Gentleman of Picardye, brought them again to be taken notice of by a fresh Trade. The Fable of the Hesperian Gardens, and the Dragon that kept the Golden Fruit, with constant Vigils, is nothing but an allusion to the Sea, which with Serpentine Embraces, not onely secur’d these scatter’d Isles, but swallow’d up several Adventurers that too hardy made their unhappy approaches for discovery.

Another Allegation for the Planting of America by Land, both whose sides are wash’d on the East and West, by the South and Atlantick Ocean, may be thus probably made out: The Atlantick rowls over with almost Fathomless Waters, three thousand Leagues of Ground; the South-Sea not much less, which well may be, being indeed but one continu’d Sea, encompassing, till meeting there, the Universal Ball; whence springs a more likelyhood, that America might be Planted from the Southern parts, from the Straights of Magellan, and Le-Mayr.

Relatio de Terra Australe.

The Description of the unknown South.

Peter Fernandes de Quir relates, That he and a Commander, Lodowick Paes le Torres saw a part of the South Countrey, and in it innumerable Inhabitants, Whites, Blacks, Sallows, with long, black, curl’d, Woolly, and yellow Hair. They know no Walls or Fortresses for Defence, Laws or Kings, but are divided into Tribes: They use indeed Bows, Arrows, Clubs, and a kind of Spears: Their Houses are cover’d with Palm-Tree-Leaves; their Housholdstuff consists onely of a few Earthen Pots, and such Trinkets; yet they have some little skill in Weaving, and though they go naked, pride themselves in Neck-Laces and Bracelets, made of Mother of Pearl: But these for their Complexions and Constitution of Body, Customs, and manners, are rather deriv’d from the Americans, than they from them, and therefore we must seek for their Original from the North; from which are but two ways, one from Ysland and Groenland, which Grotius endeavors to prove, but contradicted; the other out of Tartary, which certainly was the first Nursery, from whence the Americans were Transplanted.

Description of Tartary.

Tartary or Tattary, so call’d from the River Tatter, which runs thorow the Countrey Mongul into the Northern Ocean, covers a great part of the Terrestrial Globe; the lesser Tartary makes out a considerable part of Europe; the greater is Asia.

This great Tartary, which is a thousand Leagues long, and six hundred broad, reckons five chief Provinces, viz. the wild Tartary, inhabited by Herdsmen; Sagatai, of which the Metropolis is Samarcand, famous for the mighty Tamerlane; next Turkestan; then Kitai, which the great Cham Commands; and lastly, Old Tartary, according to Andreas Cæsariensis, the habitation of Gog and Magog.

Now we must enquire from what Tartars the Americans are Extracted:

Thrian l. 67.

If the Israelites were Tartars.

Mornæus, Postellus, Genebrardus, Poterus, and others are of opinion, That the Tartars, which about the year 1228. under the Command of Zingis Cham overspread the Earth like a deluge, were the Successors of the ten Tribes of Israel, which were carry’d into captivity to Assyria by Salmanazar. The name Tartary, or rather Tattaria, seems to be some testimony thereof, because it signifies in the Syrian or Hebrew Tongue, Remnants or Remainders, as seemingly, because these Tartarians were remainders of the foremention’d Tribes; nay, the Northern Tartary Herdsmen preserve to this day the Names Dan, Zabulon, and Naphthali: Wherefore we need not to admire, why so many Jews are found in Russia, Sarmatia, and Liefland; nay, the nearer to Tartary, the more Jews there are.

Circumcision hath a long time been observ’d among them, before Mahomet brought in his new Law; it seems, that Mahomet order’d the Circumcision and other Laws, according to Moses, to be observ’d by the Northern people, because that in his time, they began to Rebel, that so they might the better be kept in awe by their new Religion.

Pand. Hist. Turcica.

Joannes Leonclavius relates, That in Liefland near Riga, he heard the wilde Natives call’d Letti, not without great admiration, go crying along the High-Ways and Fields, with a doleful voice, Jeru, Jeru, Masco lou: It is believ’d that they mourn for Jerusalem and Damascus; but by their long continuance in the vast Wildernesses, they have forgot their Religion and Laws, and what else might enable to tell us who they were. Several learned Authors question this removal of the Israelites out of Assyria to Tartary, though to our Judgement their Arguments are too weak, to take from them of the footing they have gotten there; yet nevertheless, the Israelites are not to be taken for the Planters of America, for why else is not Judaisme as well found in America as in Tartary. But it is already shewn, that America was inhabited long before the dispersion of the Israelites.

Americans are not deriv’d from Africa nor Europe.

But Asia, and chiefly out of Tartary.

Now to shut up all, it is evident, that the first Planters of America were not Europeans from the dissimilitude of the People, both in their Complexions, Language and Persons; nor Africans, because that in all the far-spreading Countrey of America, not one Negro is to be found, except a few near the River Martha, in the little Territory Quarequa, which must by Storm be drove thither from the Guinny Coast: So that Asia, the Mother of all People, onely remains to be Implanter of our America, whose Western Coast, opposite to Asia, is more inhabited than to the East, where it respects Europe.

Tartary is not parted from America by the Straights of Anian.

Moreover, Armenia, out of which, by Noah’s Progeny, the whole Earth was re-peopled, borders on Scythia, now call’d Tartary, and Tartary faces America, separated onely by the Straights of Anian; though some are of opinion, that out of the South into the Frozen Sea, there is no passage thorow these Straights, else (as we have already prov’d the contrary) how came all those Voracious and Poysonous Beasts into America, if it be clearly separated from Asia by Sea?

It deserves here to be related, what happen’d to Henry Cornelison Schaep, and William Byleveld, Sailing from Batavia to discover the Tartarick River Polysange, but were taken and carry’d Prisoners to the Japan Court at Jedo; being Commanded there by Order of the Councel to give an account of a Japan Map or Card, which was laid before them, and contain’d the Provinces of Japan, Amboina, the Molucca Islands, Manilha, the South-Sea, Borneo, Celebes, Malacca, Tartary, Formosa, Corea, and the vast and Mountainous Countrey or Desart of Jesso, separated from Japan by the Straights of Sungar; though toward the North, it joyns to Japan in the Province of Ochio; and beginning in forty seven degrees, run North-East towards America, but they could not possible find the Straights of Anian; but on the contrary, the Promontory of Tartary, viz. the Province Kataya or Katui lay in the same parallel with the Northern America.

Ennead 9. l. 6. Testimonies that the Americans are Tartars.

Hereto may be added, that Asia hath no Territory any where, which may more easily with numerous Colonies supply America than this part of Tartary, as well for the vastness of the Countrey, to which no other can compare, as for the increasing of the Inhabitants: Who doth not admire, that according to Michalon Lithouwer, there is scarce a City in Tartary that boasted less than a thousand Temples? and to see Canguista first King of Tartary, about the Year 1200. in Arms; and his Successor Hoccata following his Fathers bloody Footsteps, whilst he prepar’d his Sons with three vast Armies? The eldest Son, Jachis, March’d Westward with thirty thousand Horse; Batho drew with as great an Army towards the North; Tagladais being the youngest fell into the Moores Countrey above Egypt. Hoccata himself March’d victoriously into the North America, subdu’d great part of the Persian Kingdom, and beat the Turks, led by the General Goniata with a great Army, Anno 1241. as Jacob Planensis and Benedictus Sarmata, two Monks, sent by Pope Innocent to Hoccata, witness: The great number of the Tartars or Scythians, may appear by the several people, spread far and near over Tartary; Pliny reckons some of them, viz. Auchetes, Neuri, Geloni, Thussagetes, Budini, Basilides, Agathyrsi, Nomades, Anthropophagi, Hyperborei, Arimphei, Cimmerij, Cicianthi, Georgi, Sacores, and others: What number would the Inhabitants make up that live in America, in Teneneuf, Virginia, Florida, New Spain, Guadalaiara, Guatemala, Terra firma, New Granada, Peru, Chili, Rio de la Plata, Brasil, Guaiana, New Andaluzai?

It will be worth our time, to compare the likeness between the Scythians and Northern Americans; both of them are differenc’d with special Marks of a more than ordinary and natural distance between the Eyes, which much alters the whole Air of the Face, and the plumpness and swelling of their Cheeks summits above the Cheek-bone; most of these are of a middle stature, having downy Hair upon their Chin, like the Callow Feathers of an unfledg’d Bird. Lastly, as the Tartars, they differ amongst themselves in their Customs, yet in several things they agree one with another, according as they are govern’d by others, and yet other Princes, some powerful, and some weaker, according as every ones power be more or less. The Inhabitants of Lucaja bear so great a respect, and stand so much in awe of their Governor, that if commanded to leap from a Rock, and break their Necks, they instantly obey.

The same is observ’d by the Tartars; the first King Canguista Commanded the seven Princes of his Realm to Murder their Sons with their own Hands, which they all readily perform’d.

Constitutions of the Tartars and Americans agree.

In Popaina they live to this day like some Tartars, without Laws or Law-givers, who change their places by turns, from the great increase of the Tartars, the Americans no ways differ.

Bartholomeus de las Casas writ to Charles the Fifth, That the Spaniards in few years, onely on the Islands Cuba, Hispaniola, Naco, Hondures, in Venezuela and New Spain, destroy’d above 2600000. Men, besides the slaughter that was made in Peru, Brasil, Rio de la Plata and other places, which far exceed the foremention’d numbers.

Polygamy is still in use, both among the Tartars and Americans; both acknowledge the Immortality of the Soul, both like Cannibals, Eating and Sacrificing Mans flesh. How famous amongst the Antients was the Altar of Diana in Taurica Chersonesus, where several Men were daily Sacrificed? How delicate, according to Sabellicus, did the Tartars account their Dishes, Sauc’d and serv’d with humane Gore?

Geogr. l. 11 q. 7.

Strabo relates, That the antient People account it an honourable Death to be chop’d in pieces, and their flesh serv’d up in Commons. Those that die by Age, a natural death, are despis’d like Malefactors, and as a punishment according to their Demerits, left in the open Fields, a prey to Birds and Beasts; some delight in that loathsome gorging themselves with Mens flesh, others on the contrary, not onely detest humane, but all manner of flesh: And just so the Americans are distinguish’d, for although the Caribes, Brasilians, the Inhabitants of New Spain, New Granada, St. Martha, and others, Sacrifice and eat Men, yet as many abhor and detest that odious Diet and abominable Custom.

Giles Flesher Queen Elisabeths Agent in Muscow relates, That Anno 1588. Kinach Morsey, Grandson to the Governor of the Chrim Tartars, made his entrance there with a Retinue of three hundred Noblemen, and two Ladies, of which one was the Widow of his deceased Brother. The great Prince inform’d of their coming, sent him two slaughter’d Horses, whose sides and Hanches they feasted on, as we on Fallow Deer.

Devil-worship in Americ.

Most of the Tartars use no manner of Letters or Characters; in the Voyage made into Persia, they first learn’d to make Letters; just so it is in America; their bemoaning of the dead ends in one Moneth, both by the Tartars and Americans; with a Person of Quality, the Tartars bury a live Servant; the same Custom is observ’d by some of the Americans; and so much do they agree in a salvage and rude life, that Merchandizing and Mechanicks are little regarded. Ayson the American acknowledges the Tartars for a rude People in their Religion, Habits, and Dwellings, and yet in all these the Americans differ but very little. Lastly, How common is it amongst them to worship the Devil? Along the River Sagadahoc, the Inhabitants are every new Moon miserably tormented by an Evil Spirit call’d Tanto. In the Temples in Virginia remain yet the horrible Images of the Devils Oka and Menetto. Not a House in Mexico, but hath a peculiar Chappel, set apart for this their suppos’d holy, but damnable Adoration of the Devil. Others in Virginia believe, That there is a great and supreme Deity, which is Everlasting, and for ever. The Tartars also are of the like perswasion.

Tartarian Horses.

But this Opinion Grotius hath laid a strong and dangerous Battery against, that America could not be Peopled by the Tartars, because the Americans before the Spaniards coming thither, had never seen any Horses; whereas the Tartars use no Beast more, either in Peace or War, nor can less want: For the Tartarian Forces do not only consist in Horse; but the Wealth of this Countrey is reckon’d up in the numerous Breeds of Horses, and several Studs of Mares. Some of the Nobless keep a thousand Horse; none, though never so poor, but keep two or three; and Beggars there mounted crave Alms and Charity of the People. When they remove their Habitations, their Horses carry their Provisions and Tents: If Provisions grow short, they eat Mares Milk, high gusted with Garlick, which satisfies Hunger and Thirst; and the red Liquor which they tap warm from their Veins, serves them to help Digestion, and heighten their Humor, instead of the Blood of the Grape, our sweet Wine. The swiftest Rivers, though raging and precipitated with Land-floods, they dare adventure swimming their Horses over, hanging naked by their Manes, and guiding them by a slipp’d Rein whither they please: To their Tails they tie their Saddles, and other Necessaries, bound up in Rushes. When a Person of Quality prepares to cross any River, they tie two Horses Tail to Tail, and athwart both their Backs fasten a Mat pleited of Rushes, to sit on. When they are stopp’d at any broad River, or standing Lake, they kill and flea their worst Horses; then turning the Skins inside out, and well Liquoring, they stretch them open with the Ribs, which stand like the Bayles of a Tilted Wherry, and thus furnish’d, serves them for a Boat to carry eight Persons. When they take the Field, going to War, not any but musters three Horses; which makes their Armies, when drawn out in Campain, shew much bigger than indeed they are: And though many of them are kill’d in the Wars, or slain for Food, yet the European Tartars pay yearly forty thousand Horses to the Russians; from whence Grotius thus argues, “If America joyns to Tartary, then the Horses which run wild at Grass might easily have found America themselves, seeking to improve their Pasture, and have gone from one Countrey into the other, as it appears, that since the Spaniards transported Horses to America, they are dispers’d over the highest Mountains, out of one Province into the other: Or if the Straights of Anian run between both, the Tartars never were Navigators; and suppose they had been, they would not have cross’d without Horses, without which they knew not how to subsist.” To which we only say thus, That although Tartary now, and in former times, abounded in Horse, yet must we grant, that it hath been always so? or that the ancient Scythians, who we avouch first planted America, had such frequent use of them as the Tartars now. This may be controverted, for that these Scythians planting there in the Non-age of Time, presently after the Flood, the use of Horses was unknown, which the Ancient Poets testifie by their Fiction of Centaurs, who when first seen, the Horse and Rider were taken for one Creature. The like mistake the Mexicans had, when they saw the mounted Spaniards, a thousand running away from one Cavalier.

As to their coming thither of themselves, it may easily be confuted: Who knows not, that there is no Countrey a continu’d Pasture, but luxurious Vales separated with inaccessible Mountains, Lakes, and vast Wildernesses. But David Ingram relates, “That he saw some Horses in the Northern America, which the Mexicans, and other Conquests of the Spaniards never heard of:” Whereupon we may conclude, and we suppose without all peradventure, That the Americans have absolutely their Original from Tartary, which bordering Armenia, where Noah’s Ark first rested, hath a convenient way, though beyond the Artick Circle, through a temperate Climate betwixt Heat and Cold, to Cathay, in the same Parallel with the neighboring America.

CHAP. III.
First Discoverers of America. Christopher Colonus his Expedition.

Pet Bizari Res Genoan. lib. 16.

Christopher Colonus, generally (though by mistake) call’d Columbus, was Lib. 11. Hist. Georg. born in Arbizolo, a Village in the Dominion of Genoa, near Savona; his Christoph. Colonus’s Birth. Father liv’d by Fishing in the Midland-Sea: So that Sebastian Schroter, and others besides him, are mistaken, saying, Colonus was born in the City Cucureum, and descended of the Noble Family Pilistrelli: For Peter Bezarus, Colonus his Countrey-man, gives unquestionable Proofs of his mean Extract; and amongst other things, That the Common-wealth of Genoa refus’d to receive the great Legacy which Colonus left them in his Will, because they fondly thought it a derogation to their Honor, being so great a Republick, to take any thing of Bequest from a Fishers Son: Yet his Majesty of Castile thought otherwise, not onely enriching him with Wealth, and a fair Revenue for his Discovery of the West-Indies; but also, though of a low derivation, rais’d him to great Honor, Ennobling him the first of his Family with Dignities, Titles, and Escutcheon, which rank’d him in place among his Prime Nobility.

His Life.

Strange Accident. Hist. Peru.

Makes his Address at Genoa.

To the Portuguese,

English,

And Castilian King, concerning a New World.

Sails from Cadiz to discover New Countreys.

His People rebel.

Discovers Hispaniola.

Trades with the Natives.

Colonus, whom we shall henceforth call Columbus, spent his Youth near the Sea, where he was busie exploring the Winds, considering their Natures, and the Quarters whence they rose, especially with the setting of the Current from the Atlantick to the Mediterrane. The Western Winds, which often, as well as the Levant, blow several days together from the great Ocean, much amusing him, hinted at last some Notions, that there might be another World, and new Places to be discover’d, beyond the setting of the Sun; and that the Ne plus ultra should not be, if he could help it, the commanding Terminary of the Earth that way. He also spent much time, being of a solid Judgment, in the Emendations of Charts and Maps, then very much improvable: And the Portuguese, who at that time had got the start in Navigation from all other People, being then busie to find a way by the South of Africa to the East-Indies, not contented to go by hearsay, he went himself in Person a Voyage with them. Soon after Columbus settled himself in the Island Madera, where an Accident hapned, which Francis Lopez de Gomesa relates thus: “The Master of a Ship, whose Name and Countrey lies buried in Oblivion (though some would have him to be of Spain, some an Andalusian or Biscayner, and others a Portuguese) Trading the Canaries and Flemmish-Isles, was surpris’d by a hideous Tempest from the East, which hurried him nolens volens through dreadful Waves, where at last he found himself ingag’d upon a Western Coast, altogether unknown. The Storm ceasing, without making further Discoveries, he pick’d his way homeward, at last Landing in the Haven of Madera: All his Crew but three and himself, with hardship, want, and the long Voyage having perish’d, himself dangerously sick, was carried into Columbus his House; where lying on his Death-Bed, he bequeath’d to Columbus his Maps, Journals, and other Observations of this his unfortunate Voyage.” Columbus being by these Papers more confirm’d than ever in his Opinion of a New World in the West, declar’d what he verily believ’d, to the States of Genoa; but they look’d upon him as a vain and idle Fellow; yet Columbus full of his great Project, thus slighted and scornfully rejected, sate not so down, but address’d himself to the King of Portugal, where they wearied him, spending long time with dilatory Answers, to no effect; the Opinion of a whole Court of expert Navigators having cast his Declaration out, as a Chimera or meer Fancy. Soon after Columbus sending his Brother into England, to move the Business to King Henry the Seventh, he being taken Prisoner by the way, and lying long er’e his Release, came too late to the English Court, prevented by the News of Christopher’s return with Success from his intended Voyage: For mean while Ferdinando and Isabella King of Castile, having finish’d his Wars with the Moors, had furnish’d him out for the Expedition; which he effected by the favor of Alfonso Mendotio and Alfonso Quintavilia, both great Ministers of State under Ferdinand and Isabel, and obtain’d so much at last, that he was sent with a hundred and twenty Souldiers, besides Sea-men, in two Ships, and one Pinnace. Thus supplied, he set Sail from Cadiz upon the Kings account the fourth of August, Anno 1492. and first reach’d the Canary-Islands, and from thence steering South-West, the Wind in thirty three days scarce varying one Point: But though the Weather blew so constant, yet the Sea-men chang’d their Minds, and Storm’d quite contrary, crying, That Columbus was guilty of all their Deaths: For (said they, after they had lost sight of the Canaries so many days, nothing appearing but Sea and Sky) Who can hope for any Success or happy conclusion of so desperate a Voyage, so rashly undertaken, and found now so full of eminent danger? Yet Columbus bore bravely up, and weather’d all their Exclamations, although they threatned no less than his Murder: At last Articling, they came to this Agreement, That if after sailing forwards three days more, no Land were discover’d, they should return: But about two a Clock the next Night, Columbus saw a glimmering like Fire in the Sky, and in the Morning found himself close aboard a most pleasant Coast, where Landing with twelve Men, he erected a Cross cut out of a Tree. Thence he sail’d over to Cuba, where the Sea was so rough, that he was forc’d to stand off, fearing Rocks and Shallow Water. Soon after he got to the Northward of the Island Haytin, which he call’d Hispaniola: Here his best Ship was bulged upon a Rock, on which they had all perish’d, had it not been flat on the top, so that the Soldiers and the whole Crew of Sea-men were sav’d by the two Vessels. The Inhabitants stark naked, seeing these Strangers, fled to the Woods; but the Spaniards overtaking a Woman, they entertain’d her with Sweet-meats and Spanish Wine, and putting her on a white Shirt, sent her again to the rest of the Natives, where return’d, she told what good Entertainment she had had to her Companions; whereupon divers of the Islanders came aboard of the Spaniards, in Boats made of one piece of Wood, where they barter’d Gold for Beads, pieces of Glass, Knives, Shells, and other Trifles. The King of Guaccanarillo gave testimony of peculiar inclination to the Spaniards, helping them to Fish up the remaining Goods of the Wreck, and inform’d them, That some Rivers flowing from the tops of high Mountains, wash’d down the Gold amongst the Sand: notwithstanding a strange Prophecy had been told to these Islanders, namely, That Bearded Men out of remote Countries should destroy their Goods, take their Land, and massacre their Children. He also told them what made them fly, and betake them to their Heels at the arrival of the Spaniards, because they were oftentimes surpris’d by the Cannibals, who snatch’d up all they could lay hold on: Their Boys and Striplings they gelded, cooping and cramming them up, as we our Capons, for Feasts: The young and well-grown Men they chopp’d to pieces, salted, and Barrel’d up: Young Women they preserv’d for breed, and old ones they made Slaves. These Cannibals were so terrible to the Inhabitants of Haytin, that a thousand of them durst not venture to engage against ten, but would run every way, dispers’d like Flocks of Sheep before the Wolf.

Lastly, Their King permitted the Spaniards to build a Lodge or Hovel, wherein thirty or forty of them might shelter; but indeed so taking possession in right of the King of Spain.

Returns to Spain.

Is highly honor’d.

Goes with seventeen Sail a second time to Hispaniola.

Mean while Columbus return’d in safety to Spain, and was receiv’d with great joy, King Ferdinand making him Admiral of the Sea, and sending his Brother Bartholomew Governor to Haytin, now call’d Hispaniola. The Gold, Parrots, Mastick, Aloes, the strange Bread Jucca, whose extracted Juyce is rank Poyson, but the Body makes good Meal, which kneaded and bak’d, yields a fine Manchet and wholesom Food, they look’d upon with great delight and admiration; but two of the Natives being naked, with Gold Rings through their Noses and Ears, Ornaments with them of high esteem, and signifying their no mean Quality, the People old and young came in Throngs to wonder at, never weary of gazing upon them. But the King, encourag’d by this Success, took no dilatory Course, but suddenly, and before any could expect, built fourteen stout Carvels, and three Frigats, and as soon mann’d them with twelve hundred Soldiers, besides a great number of Artificers of all sorts, with their Wives and Children, freighting them with Horses, Swine, Goats, Cattel for Breed, all sorts of European Corn to sow, Fruit-Trees and Vines to plant, and some Priests to instruct and convert the Natives to their Religion.

The Barbadoes, St. Christophers, &c.

The Huts of the Cannibals.

The second of September, Anno 1493. they set sail from Cadiz, and Anchor’d before Ferreo, the last and furthest of the Canary-Islands, where they could get no Water, but what dropp’d from the Dew hanging on Trees into Troughs. After that, Columbus came on the one and twentieth day amongst the Caribby-Islands, where he dropp’d Anchor before one, which he call’d Dominico; but finding it desolate, set sail further, and discover’d several other Coasts, where he likewise found nothing but very great Porcupines or Hedg-hogs, and sweet-smelling Trees. Steering forward, he found the Coasts of the Cannibals, which inhabited along the Shore in little Huts or Hovels, built round of Wood, and stak’d about on the out-side with long Poles, like Palisado’s: They have also Posts within, which are shorter, pleited and fastned together with Cotton, or long Roots of Trees, plyant like our Osiars, over which they hang Cloths painted with horrible Figures and strange Representations: The Roofs rise like our Canopy’d Tents, highest in the middle, cover’d with Palm-Tree Leaves to keep off the Rain: At the Entrances hang two Hairy Images on Poles, not for Religion sake, but Ornament: Their Bed-steads being high from the Ground, are fill’d with a kind of Straw; and in long Hovels fitted for that purpose they store their Sugar.

Island Guadalupe.

Columbus landing here, found all the Cannibals fled; but their Houses full of Stone Vessels, Cruises, Pans, and Pots, boyling with Mens Flesh, Parrots, and Wild-foul; the Hanches and Sides of young Men, on Spits roasting at the Fire, with the Splinters of whose broken Bones they headed their Arrows. This Island by the Inhabitants call’d Carucueria, Columbus chang’d to Guadalupe, because the Mountains rise up with their tops not unlike Estremadura in Spain, famous there for the wonderful Representation of our Lady, as that of the Lady of Loretto in Italy. Thirty Women which he had taken from the neighboring Isles, he sent with Presents to the fled Canibals, which the next day returning, made a great appearance near the Shore; but when they had gaz’d a while upon the Spaniards, looking stedfastly on one another, they suddenly ran back again, sheltring themselves in the Covert of the Woods. Columbus thinking it not worth his while to expect their return, seeing their barbarous Life, burnt and destroy’d all their Boats, and spoiling whatever he could, sail’d to Matanino.

Strange Women in Matanino.

The releas’d Women in Guadalupe, that came back again, inform’d the Spaniards, That Matanino was an Isle onely inhabited by Women, which at accustom’d times row’d over to these Cannibals, where a while they drove a Trade and Commerce of Love, the Product of which, if Girls, they kept; but the Boys they sent over to their Fathers. They live in Caves, the Mouths and Entrances of which they maintain and stoutly make good with their Bowe, shooting Arrows as thick as Hail at the approach of Men, after their impregnating by the Cannibals.

Remarkable Passage of Columbus.

Salvageness of the Indians.

From hence the Fleet pass’d by several other fruitful Islands, Columbus giving them the Names of Montseratto, Rodondo, St. Martin, Santa Cruz, formerly by the Inhabitants call’d Ayaya. On this last Island he landed thirty Men, who took four Women, which held out their Hands before them, as if Petitioners that begg’d Quarter, or praying, and then conceal’d themselves in Ambuscade, the better to surprize more; when by chance they spied an Indian Canoo at Sea, with eight Men, and as many Women; whereupon those in Ambuscade made a Signal to the next Ship, which immediately sent off some Boats well Mann’d; but before they drew near them, or expected an On-set, one of the Spaniards was kill’d, and another wounded with their Arrows; amongst whom a Woman, to whom all the rest shew’d greatest Respect and Reverence, aim’d very exactly. Their barbed Shafts were poyson’d; whereupon the Spaniards enrag’d, stemm’d the Canoo, and oversetting, row’d quite over; which little or nothing avail’d; for they all swam, and though separated, shot their Arrows at them, as if the Boat had been a But. At last the Indians got upon a blind Rock, cover’d with Shole Water, which gave them fresh Courage; but the Spaniards having more aid sent them from the Fleet, took them all Prisoners; but the Queens Son being wounded in the Scuffle, and dying soon after, was thrown overboard. The Prisoners being brought before Columbus, foam’d at the Mouth for raging madness; and being afterwards carried to Castile, so retain’d their fierce and salvage Nature, that they scar’d away and frighted the safe Beholders.

Columbus comes to Hispaniola.

Finds the Spaniards slain.

His Discourse with the King Guaccanarillo.

Strange gathering of Gold.

Decas 1. De Orba Novo.

Mean while the Spanish Fleet proceeded on their Voyage, between several Islands, to Hispaniola, of which some appear desolate and barren, others green and Woody; the small Vessels sailing close under the Shore, and the great ones standing further off at Sea, which was very turbulent, and beat exceedingly against the Shole Rocks. The Island Burichema, Columbus call’d St. Johns, to which belong’d some of the Women sent forth in Guadalupe, who inform’d them, That Burichema was well inhabited by a kind and hospitable People, who when the Cannibals landed there fought them, and if Conquerors, were so much exasperated with their inhumane Barbarisms, that they seiz’d on them like Mastiffs open-mouth’d, and tore them piece-meal with their Teeth; yet themselves abhorring the Custom of eating Mens Flesh. Here the Spaniards found onely a large House, surrounded with twelve lesser ones, all deserted; for the Inhabitants with their King Chiasichio were then retir’d into the cool and more sheltring Woods, from the mid-day Heat. All this the Indians told him, which he brought back with him from Spain. Coming to an Anchor at Hispaniola, he sent one of the Indians ashore, that he might tell what brave things he had seen in the Spanish Court; but the remaining three took the advantage of the following Night, and leaping over-board, swam to Shore. But this Accident he not much regarded, trusting to have a sufficient Account from his eight and thirty Spaniards which he had left in the Fort upon the Island; and the more, because King Guaccanarillo’s brother, in sign of Friendship, had presented him with two Golden Images: But all these Conjectures fail’d him, so that hearing nothing, he landed, where he found the Spanish Garrison utterly destroy’d, and the Royal Fort burnt down to the Ground, and lying in a heap of Ashes. Then they fired several Guns, to give notice, that if any of them had conceal’d themselves, and lay sculking in the Woods, or otherwise, they should discover themselves, and come to the succour of their Friends: But all in vain, for none came; for as they were afterwards inform’d, the Inhabitants had slain them, because of their insupportable behavior, insolently committing Robberies, Rapes, and Murders: Hereupon he sent Messengers to the King Guaccanarillo, to inquire why they had fired his Fort, and what they had done with his Men, who brought him this Return, That over that mighty Island were many Princes, of which two being provok’d by the reports of the Strangers that were entertain’d in the Island, came marching upon them, each with their Armies; but that he endeavor’d what he could, and came with a Power to assist the Strangers; yet all he got for his Kindness, was a Wound in his Leg, which had been so sore and troublesom, that forc’d him to keep his Bed, and no less than seven Concubines to attend him, and dress the Wound: But he told his Tale so ill, and feign’d his Lameness worse, that Sibilius, one of the Messengers sent by Columbus, lifting up the Coverlet, saw that he ail’d nothing, which soon confirm’d his doubt, that he was confederated with the rest, and alike guilty of the Slaughter. At last Guaccanarillo being desir’d, came in Person to Columbus, in whose presence he held a long Discourse with an Indian Woman, which they had brought from the Island of Santa Cruz, there Christned by the Name of Catharine: At length Guaccanarillo was dismiss’d, and the Night following this Catharine, with seven more of the Indian Women, leap’d over-board, and swom almost a League to Shore, so going thence directly to their King Guaccanarillo. This Accident gave more suspicion to Columbus, who thereupon sent three hundred Men, commanded by Melchior, Hoieda, and Gorvalano, to march through the Island three several ways, and with special Commission to secure as their Prisoner Guaccanarillo. Melchior discover’d a wide River, full of Reaches and winding Bays, gliding between high Hills cover’d with Woods, resounding with the ecchoing noises of harmonious Birds, and disemboguing his Waters, enlarg’d by two other Rivers, into the Sea, so making a convenient Harbor for Ships. Here a hundred of the Islanders, well Arm’d after their manner, met them, crying aloud, We are no Cannibals, but Taynos, that is, a People more civil than they are cruel. The Spaniards making Signs of Peace, the Taynos approach’d, and joyn’d their Forces in a friendly manner. Near the place of this Meeting appear’d a House built in an Oval fashion, being thirty two Paces in the Circumference, the Roof curiously pleited of divers colour’d Rushes, round about which stood thirty lesser Dwellings. Mean while, in his March Hoieda discover’d a River that descended from a high Mountain, where the Inhabitants gather’d much Gold after this manner: They dig a Hole about two Foot deep; then taking up their left Hand full of Sand, with their right Hand they cull out the precious Ingots, which little accounting of, as they gather’d, they dealt away to the Spaniards. Most of the Pieces were as big as Pease, yet some so large, that they weigh’d nine Ounces. Peter Martyr, Councellor to the Emperor Charles, tells us, That he hath seen of them in the Spanish Court, that were brought over thither by Columbus. Moreover, Hoieda was inform’d here, That this Gold-River took its Original in the Province belonging to Cacicus Caunaboa, signifying, The King of the Golden Palace.

Columbus builds a City.

Strange fruitfulness there.

Mean time Columbus selected a piece of Ground on a rising Hill, on the North part of the Isle, where he intended to build a City, because close by the Hill on one side rises a Mountain, pregnant with Stone and Chalk; on the other, a Plain, so exceeding fruitful and pleasant, that the Sun scarce shines upon a more delightful and fertile Soil, which they found afterwards by experience. Here Melons are set and ripe in thirty six days; Corn, in two Months; twice a Year the Trees and Plants bring forth their several Products; the Vines come to maturity, and are loaden with Clusters of Grapes, in two Years, and Sugar-Canes grow as thick as a Mans Arm in fifteen days. On this pleasant Soil, accommodated with a convenient Haven, Columbus afterwards built the City Isabella, fortified with Walls and Trenches against all Invasions, over which he made his Brother Bartholomew Columbus first Governor.

Mean while the Admiral Columbus himself march’d up into the Countrey with three hundred Men, in quest of the Gold Mines. Seventy two Leagues the Valley Cibava lies distant from Isabella, to which Columbus pass’d over swift Currents and high Mountains, where he built a Fort, which he call’d St. Thomas; and exchang’d with the Inhabitants Toys and Trifles, for Pieces and Ingots of Gold, which the Inhabitants, as before-mention’d, found in the Sand of their Rivers: And besides, they inform’d him, That about half a days Journey further, greater Quantities of Gold were to be found, in a browner colour’d Soil: Whereupon Luxanus, one of his Officers, was sent with a sufficient Party thither, who march’d through a delightful way, cool with shady Boughs, and pleasant with the prospect of spacious Meadows, where they mow’d Grass for their Horses, which in four days time grew up again higher than our tallest Wheat.

Goes to Sea to discover new Countreys.

Mean time Columbus being return’d with great Riches to his new City Isabella, went soon after by Sea, with three Vessels, to discover new Countreys more remote; which his Design fell out also successfully; for he fell first upon Jamaica, where he found more stout Opposition than elsewhere, by the Natives, at his Landing; but finding themselves over-power’d, they came to Agreement, and accepting an amicable Composure, presently struck up a Peace. From thence putting to Sea, he next discover’d Cuba, which sailing round about, he found also to be an Island; where Landing in a convenient Harbor, on each fenc’d with a high and jutting Rock, he espied two little Hovels, wherein was abundance of Fish, besides two great Snakes or Serpents, each having eight Feet, spitted, and ready to be laid to the Fire to be roasted; but neither Man, Woman, nor Child to be seen, they being gone with part of the Fish they had dress’d, into the adjacent Woods; whither the Spaniards following, saw hanging by small Strings, on the Branches of Trees, abundance of Snakes, some of which had their Mouths tied together, others their Tongue and Teeth pull’d out. Hence marching on, a little beyond they saw a Company of the Natives, which they judg’d to be about seventy Men, covering the top or summit of a Hill, to whom the Spaniards made Signs, and to entice them near, shew’d several of their gawdy Trifles; but in vain, till at last one adventur’d, descending from the Hill, to whom one of the Natives (who in the first Voyage that the Admiral made, was taken from the Island Guanabaini near Cuba, carried to Spain, and there Christned) call’d aloud, telling him they need not fear, they should have no harm done them; which said, they came down all together, and inform’d them, That they were sent by their King to catch Fish for another King, which was with him at Dinner; and if they had not eaten the Serpents, they gave them many thanks; for they were provided for the second Course, and very scarce to be got, being a greater Dainty than any Fish.

Discovers not without great Accidents, several New Countreys.

Columbus from hence proceeding on further Westward, discover’d a fruitful Coast, verging the Mouth of a River, whose Water runs boyling hot into the Sea. Somewhat further he saw very strange Fishes, especially the Guaican, not unlike an Eel, but with an extraordinary great Head, over which hangs a Skin like a Bag. This Fish is the Natives Fisher; for having a Line or handsom Cord fastned about him, so soon as a Turtel, or any other of his Prey, comes above Water, they give him Line; whereupon the Guaican, like an Arrow out of a Bowe, shoots towards the other Fish, and then gathering the Mouth of the Bag on his Head like a Purse-net holds them so fast, that he lets not loose till hal’d up out of the Water.

Here the Spaniards having Din’d on delicate Fish, went on still Westward, and came to an uninhabited Isle, but well stor’d with Geese, Pelicans, and ugly Dogs that could not bark. Here they came amongst so many Shoals, that the Keels of their Ships raked upon the Ground almost forty Leagues together, the Water thick and white like Milk. Lastly, they came again into deep Water, and Landed at the Foot of a high Mountain, on the Island Cuba; where they found two Springs of very sweet Water. A Musqueteer going into the Woods whilst the rest fill’d their Vessels with Water and cut Wood, he spied a tall Man in a Coat like a white Fryer’s Frock; behind whom came two more, and soon after thirty more follow’d, all alike Habited: the Musqueteer running away, they beckned him to stay, but he march’d off; and informing Columbus of his Adventure, he sent a Party well Arm’d to see farther into the Countrey; but they neither saw nor heard any Men, onely found on the other side of the Wood a great Plain, but so overgrown with deep Grass, that it was impossible to get through: The next day he sent out twenty five more, which found nothing else than the Prints of the Steps of great Beasts and Lyons, and also abundance of large Grapes, which hung on the Branches of Vines, clasping about the Bodies of the great Trees.

Hence Columbus again putting to Sea, and Sailing Westerly, found a Shore overflow’d with Water, and abounding with Pearl-Mussles, and after that the whole Countrey full of Mountains, whose tops smoaked. By this time the Fleet was much damnified by the Shole-water; where, as we mention’d before, they often struck, and their Keels rak’d upon the Ground; so that having sprung several Leaks, and their Provisions growing mouldy with the Damp, they were forc’d to return; and Tacking about they ran against Turtles, which lay as thick in the Sea as if they had been sow’n.

Columbus now on his return home, and Landing once more on Cuba, found an antient Man stark naked, who speaking to him (Didacus interpreted, the Language in some part agreeing with that of Hispaniola) to this effect:

You have to all admiration come to see this Countrey from another World, my advice to you is, That you hurt none; for the Souls of evil-doers go to dark places: But on the contrary, they shall enjoy the heighth of all Pleasures that are Friends to Peace.

Columbus reply’d, That he came a Scourge for the cruel Cannibals, but a Shield to protect the quiet and well-meaning Indians.

Great disturbance in Hispaniola.

After this, returning to Hispaniola, much contrary to his expectation, he found all things which he had setled there turn’d topsie-turvy: for first the Governors at Isabella jangled, and were at private contentions amongst themselves, and the Benedictine Monk Boilus and Peter Margarites were return’d to Spain; there to make their complaints at Court: and besides, the Spaniards had dealt very inhumanely with the Natives, by their frequent Rapes, Thefts, and Murders; wherefore the Indians, not unjustly incens’d, destroy’d all the Spaniards they found stragling in any part without the Lines of their Fortification. Caunaboa also lay about the Fort St. Thomas, and closely besieged Hoieda; but receiving intelligence of Columbus’s arrival, he broke up his Siege, and march’d from thence, but soon after was taken Prisoner by the Spaniards. Mean while upon Design (a Plot none of the wisest) the Natives of Hispaniola had neither Till’d or Sow’d the Ground, or us’d Agriculture the year before, contriving by want of Provisions (not considering themselves) to starve out the Spaniards; but the mischief fell upon the Contrivers: for so great a Famine hapned, that spreading over the whole Countrey, in a few Moneths fifty thousand were starv’d to death; but the Spaniards made a saving, though hard shift with their own store, then, though too late, the Islanders repented of their folly, for they saw the Spaniards making an advantage of their misery, not onely built more Houses in their City Isabella, but prepar’d their Weather-beaten Vessels, with which Sailing to the Gold Mountains of Cipangi on the Hill, whence sprung several Fountains, they rais’d the Castle of the Conception. Great benefit they reap’d by this Fort, to which they carry’d daily abundance of Amber, Brimstone, mix’d Ore of Silver and Gold, and Brazile-wood, besides great store of Gold: and they might have gotten ten times more, had they not been so much inclin’d to slothfulness, and minding other vain pleasures: yet notwithstanding all, the Fleet carry’d that year above one thousand two hundred pound weight of Gold to Spain.

Spaniards tyrannise there.

In the mean while the Natives complain’d to Columbus of the Spanish Soldiers, which under pretence to seek for Gold, committed many insufferable Outrages; therefore they desir’d that they might be retain’d in their Forts, and not straggle so much abroad, and they would willingly bring them every three Moneths a certain weight of Cotton, Amber, Brazile-wood, and Gold, more than equivalent to what they snatch’d; but Columbus (whose Soldiers, notwithstanding his severity, and using Martial Law upon some of them for their Crimes, and proud with their success) yet prevail’d at last, that they consented thereto; but the Inhabitants never perform’d their promise, who being almost famish’d, had much to do to preserve themselves alive, spending their time in picking Sallads.

Their Conquest.

Whilst the Business remain’d in this ill posture, or rather confusion, Cibanus, Brother to the imprison’d Caunaboa, rais’d an Army of five thousand Men: the Spaniards, divided into five Companies, march’d to meet him; and their Enemies being naked, and having no other Arms than Bowes, Arrows, and Clubs, after some little resistance, were soon dissipated and put to flight, but overtaken by the Spanish Horse, many of them were taken Prisoners, and others forc’d to skulk and hide themselves on the tops of Mountains.

Horible Tempest.

A remarkable passage concerning Bartholomew Columbus.

Brave reception of a King in Hispaniola.

Shortly after this Battel hapned a Huricane, mix’d with Thunder-claps, renting great pieces from the Rocks, and the Wind blowing out of the East, threw down Houses and Trees, some of which were carry’d a vast heighth into the Air; three Ships that rode in the Harbor, broke their new Cables, and split against the Rocks. The Spaniards expected nought else, but that with this excessive Tempest the Day of Judgment was at hand. And on the other side, the Islanders ascribed this raging of Heavens to the Spaniards wickedness. This Storm past, and the Air setled, Columbus gave order for the building of two new Ships there, with which in March, Anno 1495. he return’d to Spain; where in Medina del Campo he gave an account at the Court about the discover’d Countreys; where also Sentence was pass’d on several Spaniards, and chiefly concerning the Benedictine Monk Boilus, who out of meer malice pass’d by him at Mass with the Host, while he gave it to others, without any distinction. Then he gave a further account, that his Brother Bartholomew had found, sixty Leagues beyond Isabella, several deep Pits, the uppermost Ground of which Sifted, produced abundance of Gold. Moreover, that he had built the Castle Aurea there in three Moneths time with little trouble: but because Provisions grew scarce there, he found himself necessitated to remove, but left ten Men in the Garrison, and had sent three hundred of the Islanders with their Governors to Spain. He also built the Castle Dominico, on the South-side of Hispaniola; from whence he had travell’d into the Countrey to the River Naiba: where, upon this Shore the King Beuchio Anacauchoa Encamp’d himself against the Naibans, to bring them, besides several other People, under his subjection. That Bartholomew demanded Tribute of Anacauchoa, which he immediately promis’d to pay, and disbanded his Forces, conducting Bartholomew above thirty Leagues on his Way, along a Path on both sides sown with Hemp, and planted with Cotton-Trees, to his Palace Xaraqua, in the West of Hispaniola, where he was received in great state: Thirty of the Kings Wives walk’d before, carrying in their Hands Boughs of Palm-trees, and both Sung and Danc’d very strangely; behind these came a considerable number of naked Virgins, very handsom; at last Bartholomew entring the Palace with the King, found a Table furnish’d with all manner of Dainties, and a very courteous Entertainment. The next day walking forth to a large Plain, and looking about he saw two Parties that deeply engag’d in Fight behind a Hill, with great slaughter on both sides, and had not he desir’d that they might be parted, there had been much more Blood shed. After he had been several days friendly entertain’d, he return’d to the Forts Isabella, Sperancia, Catharina, St. Jago, Turrita, Conception, and Dominico; where he found above three hundred Spaniards starv’d of hunger, besides many that were sick.

At that time Guarionexius having been oppress’d by the Spaniards, and a long time watching for an opportunity, now thinking he had found it, rais’d an Army of fifteen thousand Men, with which he was resolv’d to try his fortune against Columbus; who privately receiving intelligence thereof, fell upon him so on a sudden and unexpectedly, that he spoil’d his Design, and took all his Commanders Prisoners: But to oblige the Inhabitants, who begg’d for their King, Columbus set him at liberty, advising him to be careful of raising a War against him any more. But he not being able to endure the oppressions of Roldanus Ximenez, a Spanish Commander, fled to the wild Ciquano’s, descended from the Canibals, and living on steep Mountains: Of these he desir’d aid against the Spaniards, and obtain’d not onely their Promise, but some Men; with which he robb’d and pillag’d the Countrey round about, and what Spaniards he met with he kill’d, and with his Men did eat, as if a Venison Feast. Mean while Ximenez made himself Leader of seventy Rebels, which like raging blood-hounds fell upon the Natives after a terrible manner.

Columbus Sails the third time to Hispaniola.

Description of the City Angra.

Whilst all things were thus in disorder at Hispaniola, the Admiral Christopher Columbus set Sail a third time with eight Ships from the Haven Barrameda, in the Year 1498. To shun the French Pyrates, which watched for the Indian Treasures, he directed his Course to Madera, a fruitful Island of Corn, Wine, Sugar, Wax, and Cattel, desolate till Anno 1420. Here coming to an Anchor, he sent six Ships away to Hispaniola, which himself afterwards followed with the remaining two, steering by the Flemish Islands, or Acores, first so call’d from the Flemings, the first Planters: Here he dropt Anchor before the City Angra on the Isle Tercera, which is sixteen Leagues in circumference, and very Mountainous; the tops whereof are like Spires, and abound with Grapes: the Plain Countrey produces great store of Corn, but it will not keep above twelve Moneths. The Ground is oftentimes terribly shaken by Earthquakes, and between several sulphurous Places, both Flames and Smoak ascend up to the Sky. Near the City Angra is a Fountain which turns Wood into Stone. The Winds in this Place blow so fierce and strong, that they not onely beat down Houses, but wear out Iron, and all manner of Stone-work. In Angra the chief Commander of all the Flemish Isles hath his Residence. The City, surrounded by steep Rocks, lies towards the Sea like a Crescent, or Half-Moon; for at both ends thereof the Mountains extend with deep Points into the Ocean. The uppermost part towards the West stands likewise fortifi’d by a high Rock, as also by another on the East: on both are continual Watches kept; whereof those on the first can discover Ships fifteen Leagues off at Sea, coming either from the East or West-Indies; and on the other, all those that come from Europe: When they see above fifteen Sail, they put out the Kings great Flag upon the top of all the Rock.

This City of Angra is divided into several Streets: the Governor and Archbishop live each in a stately Palace; five handsom Churches are no small ornament to it; the Sea before it abounds with Fish, but are not to be taken in December, by reason of the turbulent Waves.

Christopher Columbus having refresh’d at Angra, Sail’d along the African Coast between the Hesperides: under the Equinoctial he was so miserably tormented by the Heat, that his Vessels seem’d to burn, the Hoops sprung from the Casks, so that the Water run about the Hold; and they could expect nothing but death from the insufferable Heat, and want of Water: eight days they had endur’d this hardship, when they met with a fresh Gale out of the South-East, so that they made great Way towards the West. On the last of July he discover’d three high Mountains; and approaching near the Shore, he smelt as in a Posie, all the sweet breathings of fragrant Flowers commix’d, and at last saw a convenient Haven; where going ashore he found cultivated Grounds, and steps of Beasts, but not a Man appear’d: the next day they spy’d a Boat with twenty young Men come rowing from the Shore into the Ocean. The Admiral hal’d them in vain to come aboard, for they made the greater hast ashore, still looking about continually with great admiration on the Ships: whereupon he commanded them to beat their Drums, and sound their Trumpets, that they might by that means entice them aboard; but they rather taking it as a sign of War, made themselves ready for resistance: mean while the Spaniards overtook the Indian Boat, into which they threw a Hat, and other trifles; the Islanders amaz’d thereat, made signs to them to row ashore; but soon after they fled.

Abundance of Pearl.

Columbus proceeding on his Journey came to Paria, where he found a Fishers Pink loaden with Oysters; which opening and taking out the Meat, were found full of Pearls, which because of their abundance were not regarded there; for a broken Dish and a rusty Knife, the Spaniards had four long Strings of Pearl.

Columbus is in great danger.

From thence anchoring in the River of Cumana, several naked Men came aboard, adorn’d with Golden Armlets, and Strings of Pearl, These inform’d him, that they gather’d their Gold from the Mountains and Rivers, and caught their Pearl-oysters in the adjacent Seas. Some of the Spaniards were nobly entertain’d by the King and his Son, who leading them into their Palace, placed them on Benches of Ebony-wood, curiously wrought, and on a sudden several Servants came in with variety of Dainties, and well-tasted Wine. But because Provisions grew scarce amongst the Sea-men, and their Meat tainted, Columbus thought it convenient to leave the Pearl-trade till some better opportunity. Then setting forward, the farther he went, the shallower he found the Sea, insomuch that his Ship scarce had Water enough to swim. This inconvenience was followed by a second; for the Sea being full of Weeds and Grass, scarce suffer’d any Passage. A River thirty Yards deep, and twenty Leagues broad, came rushing out betwixt two Shores into this Sea with such force, that the Waves went high like Mountains, which made Columbus judge himself in the greatest danger imaginable, and withall Tack about; so that he came on the eight and twentieth of August Anno 1498. to an Anchor before Hispaniola, where all things were still in a sad confusion, as we before related.

Roldanus Ximenes opposes Columbus.

Strange Indians.

Roldanus Ximenes refus’d to follow Christopher Columbus’s, order and writ Letters to the King of Spain, in which he exceedingly aspersed both the Admiral Columbus and his Brother; who were not backward in giving an account quite contrary by their Letters, of the horrid Villanies perpetrated by this Ximenes, and desir’d aid, that so great an Offender might receive condign punishment. Mean while the Ciquano’s came marching down with six thousand Men, which Bartholomew went to meet with eighty Foot and some few Horse: The Indians which he was to encounter with, rather seeming like Furies than Men, for all of them were daub’d over with black smuts on their bare Skins from Head to Foot, and their hard Hair pleited in terrible, not in Lovelocks, hung playing, or dangling over their Shoulders. When the Spaniards in their March drawing up to a River where it was best fordable, had no sooner left the Bank, and taken the Water, endeavoring to wade over, but the Salvages rush’d forth out of the Woods, and let flye a showre of Arrows, that had they not been provided with Shields and Targets, to keep off such a deadly Storm, so thick they flew, and so well aim’d, most of them had perish’d there: but having recover’d the opposite Bank, the Enemy play’d all hid, and in a thought shelter’d themselves under the protection of the Woods; where the Conqueror pursuing, found the Service very difficult and dangerous, for their Armes, especially their Shields, stopping and intangling them as in a Net, among the shrubby and twining Branches; which they passing, rigled themselves, and made their way, like questing Spaniels following their Game, and still gawling them with their Arrows: whereupon they left their vain pursuit, marching another way to intercept Mayobanexius, who with eight thousand Ciquano’s were then coming down against them; which prov’d a harder task than was expected: for e’re he could reduce him and his stubborn Party, he spent three Moneths in the Service.

Sect. III.

Hath very bad success in his fourth Expedition.

But the great and worthy Service of these two excellent Brothers deserving Fights with Poresius. rather Statues and Trophies of everlasting Honor, Monuments never to be Dies. demolish’d, in their due praise, who had found out after so many baffled Ages, a new World, richer, and not much less than the old, by the aspersing calumniations of one malicious Person, lost his whole Interest and Credit in the Spanish Court, quite out of favour with his Prince, who by his insinuations had hinted so much the matter of Gain among the Courtiers, that every one studied no less than to get a Commission, and so going a Commander to the Indies, make up his Mouth, and become suddenly rich. First Francisco Bombadilla prevailing, was sent with full Commission to succeed Columbus in Hispaniola; where no sooner Landing, but he exercis’d the extremity of his Authority, and seizing the Admiral and his Brother, fetter’d their Hands and Feet, and put them aboard on two several Ships for Spain: where no sooner arriv’d, but the King, not altogether forgetting former Services, commanded them to be unmanacled, and waited on, not as Prisoners, with a civil Retinue to his Court; where they were well entertain’d three years. But they being active Persons, weary of so long repose, got a second Grant to make farther discoveries, and set forth the ninth of May, Anno 1504. with four Sail well appointed from Cadiz, and had a fair Passage from thence to Hispaniola, where begun the Storm, for Bombadilla, who had by the Kings Commission so evil treated Columbus and his Brother, as aforemention’d, would not suffer him, though reconciled to the King, so much as to Land, and there refresh themselves and their Men; so he was forc’d to steer on to the Islands Guamixa and Veragua, where a Huricane, or sudden stress of Weather sunk two of his Vessels; the other two standing off to Sea escap’d bilging, but so shatter’d and leaky, having also shipp’d abundance of Water, they were resolv’d to put in at Jamaica; where weary with the long Voyage, and hatter’d with the Tempest, many of his Sea-men, spent with sickness, after their Landing, died. To these his sufferings from Wind and Weather, and his Enemies abroad, a greater and intestine mischief hapned: Francisco Poresio, one of his chief Commanders, absolutely rebell’d, and deserting him, with another Party of his Sea-men went into Hispaniola: which the Islanders observing, resolv’d to famish him, keeping from him both Water and all other Provisions; which had not Columbus stav’d off by a handsom Invention, they had compleated their Design, which was this: He told them that he was the offspring of the Moon, and if they refus’d to supply his want, the Moon, in vindication of her Son, would famish them, by spoiling what e’re they had planted or sow’d; and that this would prove true they should know by a sign, that on such a Night, she rising in her full glory, should first look red, and afterwards by degrees lose a great part of her light; which indeed so hapned, being Ecclips’d, as he could well prognosticate; and after that, they being ignorant of the cause, suppli’d him with all Necessaries. But Poresio, not able to endure the Sea with his small Boats, resolv’d to surprize one of the Ships that lay before Jamaica; but Columbus so much prevented him, that meeting him in his return, after a hot dispute made him his Prisoner. But thus ended not his misfortunes; for the Vessels which he fought in soon after sunk, and no ship to be found in Jamaica to transport him thence. Lastly, he agreed with some Indian Fishermen, to carry Didaco Mendoza to St. Dominica, that there he might hire two Vessels to carry him back to Spain: which Design taking effect, he arrived there in safety: where after he had refresh’d himself at the Spanish Court, after his so long and unfortunate a Voyage he fell sick, and died on the eighth of May 1506.

Mean while, the Affairs of Hispaniola grew more out of order: for Bombadilla joyning with Ximenes, resolv’d to hoard up a huge Treasure of Gold, though with the infinite oppression of the Natives: of which King Ferdinand having intelligence, sent Nicholas Olanda thither with thirty Sail; who being nominated Vice-Roy, anchor’d in forty days before Hispaniola. No sooner arriv’d, but Bombadilla and Ximenes fled, leaving their vast Treasure, amounting to ten hundred thousand Ducats; which guarded with four hundred Spaniards in twenty four Ships was sent to Spain: but so it hapned, that they were all swallowed up in the main Ocean, none knowing to this day in what Latitude they were lost.

Sect. IV.
Pietro Alponso Nigno his Voyage.

Description of Curiana.

Pietro Nigno, encourag’d by some of those that had been with Columbus at the Isles of Pearl, Rigg’d out a Ship at his own charge, with special order in his Commission, that he should not touch on any Coast within fifty Leagues of any Place Columbus had formerly discover’d. But he little observ’d his Orders, and what he was commanded; for Sailing into the Haven Curiana, he barter’d Shells, Needles, Glass, and such like Trifles, for abundance of Pearls, which the Islanders brought aboard, for he himself having but thirty Men, durst not venture ashore. Twenty days this bartering Trade continued, Orient Pearls for Toys; but finding at last, that they were a civil and hospitable People, he Landed, where they entertain’d him in Hovels built of Wood, and cover’d with Palm-Leaves; before their Doors lay great Hills of Oyster-shells, the Fish being eaten, and the Pearls us’d for an ornament; Conies, Hares, Pheasants, Pigeons, Geese, Ducks, Deer, and wild Swine, are their usual Food; and their Bread is made of the Roots of Trees. Moreover, Curiana abounds with thick and shady Woods, which resound in the night with the cries and roarings of wild Beasts: but though they are terrible fierce and voracious, yet the Natives stoutly venture in amongst the thickest of them, arm’d onely with Bowes and Arrows. The Inhabitants are of Complexion tawny, their Hair long and curl’d; their Teeth they keep white with an Herb, which they continually hold betwixt their Lips. The Women perform their business of Husbandry, Ploughing and Sowing. The Men are Soldiers, following the business of War: but in Peace their Exercises are Hunting and Dancing. They keep annual Fairs, where from all Parts of the Countrey they bring their Commodities to buy and barter. They have their Gold from Cauchieta, six days Sail Westward from Curiana.

Thither Nigno next directed his course, and came to an Anchor there on the first of October, Anno 1500. The Inhabitants entred aboard without the least shiness, or fear of danger, and brought with them to barter, Gold, Civet-Cats, Parrots, and Cotton.

These People, though so civil, are extreamly jealous of their Wives: for when a Spaniard made address to one of them, and coming something close, her Husband stept in suddenly between, and seem’d to forbid the Banns. But coasting onward along the Shore from thence to another Isle, he found Natives far more wild and salvage: for two thousand in a Body well Arm’d, stood ready to intercept their Landing; wherefore he thought it his safest course to Tack about, and return to Curiana whence he came.

Nigno Fights with the Cannibals.

In his Way not far from thence, he fell amongst eighteen of the Cannibals Boats, which according to their custom had been a Man-stealing, and now were so hardy, that setting upon the Spanish Ship, they suddenly clapt him aboard with their Canoos on all sides; but being beaten back by the terror of their Guns, they soon retir’d: yet the Spaniards took one of the Boats with two Men, all the rest saving themselves by swimming. One of the two Men lay bound Hand and Foot, who told them, that he was to have been kill’d the next day and eaten, as he saw his Companions, with whose Flesh they banquetting kept a jovial Feast. Nigno unbinding the Prisoner, gave him leave to do what he pleas’d with the taken Cannibal, who falling upon him, cudgel’d and whipp’d him to death.

Strange Salt.

Then Nigno in his Way to Curiana touch’d upon the Coast of Paria, where he found a strange kind of Salt, which the Sea in tempestuous Weather casts on the Shore, which afterwards hardens by the Sun. This Salt must be taken up before any Rain fall, else it melts and soaks away into the Ground; yet sometimes grows so hard as a Stone, insomuch that they make Pots and other Vessels of it; which the Parians barter for foreign Commodities.

Strange Corps.

Nigno not making here any stay, return’d a second time to Curiana, where he spent twenty days in pleasant Pastimes, being Lodg’d in a Noble-mans House, at whose Door was fix’d a Cannibals Head, as a Trophy of his Victory. He saw there also the dead Bodies of divers eminent Persons set drying at a Fire, so hardned to be set amongst their Idols.

Nigno put in Prison.

Cruel dealings in Curiana.

At length Nigno set Sail homewards, and carried with him an invaluable Treasure in Pearls to Spain: but by the way fell out with his Sea-men, because he kept most of the Purchase to himself, and would not give them their shares, nay more than that, kept back the fifth part from the King; whereupon being complain’d of by Ferdinando de Vega, Governor of Gallicia, he was put in Prison, and at last sent to the Court, where the Pearls were declared free Prize, because Nigno had barter’d for them at Curiana, contrary to the Kings Orders, not to touch at any Coast, within fifty Leagues of what Columbus had discover’d. But since he had no way regarded those Commands to preserve that Pearl-Trade, King Ferdinand sent Governors to Curiana, who in his Name should look after, and employ Men for the catching the Pearl-Oysters. These, accompanied with a considerable number of Soldiers, besides six Monks, forc’d the Inhabitants to furnish them with abundance of Pearl: which oppression grew to such a heighth, that one Morning a great Party of them conspiring together, fell suddenly upon them, most of them being massacred: after they had a while insultingly triumphed over the dead Bodies, and finish’d, as they thought, their good work (feasting on their Flesh at a joyful Banquet) those few that escap’d Sail’d to the Island Dominic, the Governor of which Didacus Columbus, Son to the famous Christopher, being incens’d, immediately sent Captain Ocampo with three hundred Men to Curiana; where in his first fury, without distinction of Sex or Age, he slew all he met with. But because they themselves could not follow the rich Oyster-catching, he spar’d some for that purpose, whom he commanded to build twenty five little Houses, or Hovels, on the Shore, which he call’d New Toledo. After this they went on afresh in their Pearl-fishing.

Sect. V.
The Voyage of Vincent Agnes Pinzon.

The first of December, Anno 1499. Vincent Pinzon set Sail with four Vessels out of the Haven Palos: he had been Commander of a Ship under Columbus in his first Expedition, by which means he got great experience in Navigation. When he came a little beyond the Hesperides, he was surpris’d by a great Storm, which in three days drove him before a plain Coast; where Landing, he found nothing but the Footsteps of Men; and in the night he saw great Fires, such as are generally made in Camps; about day-break twenty Spaniards march’d thither, whom thirty two Men, arm’d with Bowes and Arrows, made ready to encounter; but as they approached, the Spaniards proffer’d them Peace, but they refused all Composition; yet having faced one another a while, they retreated without fighting.

Pinzon’s strange Fight.

A remarkable Beast.

After this Pinzon discover’d a wide, but shallow River; where Landing, on a Hill he met a great company of Americans: He, to invite them to Trade, threw them a Shell; in return for which they cast him a lump of Gold; which when the Spaniard went to take up they all fell upon him; and indeed he could not have defended himself long, had not some of his Company quickly come in to his speedy rescue, which occasion’d a bloody Conflict, wherein several Spaniards were wounded, eight kill’d, and one of their small Boats sunk; for the Americans fought so valiantly, that they pursu’d the Spanish Ships into the Sea. Pinzon being at last freed of these Assailants, got into a fresh-water Sea, caus’d by the confluence of many Rivers falling in there: from hence he got sight of the Parian Coast, and with admiration beheld a Tree which sixteen Men could not compass: Between these Trees he saw as strange a Monster, the foremost part resembling a Fox, the hinder a Monkey, the Feet were like a Mans, with Ears like an Owl; under whose Belly hung a great Bag, in which it carry’d the Young, which they drop not, nor forsake till they can feed themselves. Pinzon caught one of them with three Young, which died in the Voyage, but the Dam he presented alive in Granada to the King.

Great Storm.

This Captain having Sail’d six hundred Leagues along the Parian Coast, in a great Tempest two of his Carvils in his view were overset, their Keels turn’d upward; the third driven from her Anchor, and the fourth so shaken, and full of Leaks, that ready to sink they ran her ashore to save their lives; and though he escaped himself the danger of drowning, then being ashore, yet he was no ways freed from far greater inconveniences; for he saw nothing but death either for want of Provisions, or barbarousness of the Inhabitants: whereupon they resolv’d to free themselves of their miseries by self-slaughter, killing one another; but some better advised to spend their Lives like Christians upon the unbelieving Salvages: Whilst they were in this desperate condition, the Storm ceased, and Providence presented their safety, the Ship driving in before the Wind; at which every one taking fresh courage, they mended the two shatter’d Ships as well as they could; wherein venturing to Sea, and setting Sail, they came on the last of September, Anno 1500. into the Spanish Haven Palos.

Sect. VI.
The Expedition of Americus Vesputius.

Americus Vesputius a Florentine, Commanded four Ships, fitted out at King Ferdinand’s Charge, set Sail the twentieth of May, Anno 1497. and refreshing at the Canaries, from thence he steer’d to Paria; where he so much gain’d upon the Inhabitants, that for Pins, Bells, Looking-glasses, and other Trifles, they daily brought aboard in Barter great store of Gold, the best of Merchandise.

The manner of the Inhabitants in Paria.

Their strange Customs.

These People, both Men and Women go stark naked, not so much as covering their Pudenda; their Complexion swarthy; they shave off all their Hair, onely some Women leave a Tuft on their Heads. From their Faces, being broad and flat, one may judge them to be deriv’d from Tartary; they much exceed the Europeans in Running and Swimming, insomuch that the Women oftentimes without any Boats, or floating pieces of Timber, venture two or three Leagues into the Sea; they have so great skill in Shooting, that they exceed almost all other Nations, having Arrows headed with sharp Fish-bones; they also use Lances and Clubs. The Women follow the Men in the Wars, and serve in stead of Horses to carry Ammunition and other Necessaries; to which Labor they are so us’d, that they will bear on their Shoulders forty, nay fifty Leagues together, such Luggage, as three Spaniards are scarce able to lift from the Ground. They acknowledge no Commander or Superior either in Wars or Government; they keep up old Feuds, fighting with an inveterate hatred against their Neighbors, upon antient scores and revenges, still kept in memory of their Relations slain in former Battels, and also still creating fresh animosities upon their Losses in later Engagements. Their Language is smooth and pleasing, being spoken with a kind of lisping, and absolutely different from the neighboring Nations. When they eat they sit upon the Ground, and sleeping lie in Hammocks, each end whereof being fastned to a Post; underneath they kindle a Fire; over them they hang Fish-nets and Hooks, Fish-baskets and Calabashes. When they have occasion to ease Nature by evacuation, they retire into some private Place; but the Women think it no immodesty to make Water, even in the presence of strange Men. They observe not single Matrimony; for every Man takes as many Women as he pleases, under bonds of Wedlock such and so sleight, that he turns them off at his pleasure: and Women take the same liberty in casheering their Husbands when not pleasing them. They bring forth Children with little or no pain, and wash them in a River so soon as born; which done they return to their usual work and business. When they are incens’d against their Husbands, they revenge themselves by poysoning their Children. Their Houses are built in the fashion of a House-clock, with a Roof rais’d from the Wall upon four Pillars like the Bell, and cover’d with Palm-Leaves; some of which are so big, that they afford room for six hundred Men: every seventh or eighth year they remove, because (as they say) the Air is oftentimes infected by Mens Breaths, by their long continuance in one place. Their Riches consist in Feathers of divers colours, Strings of Fish-bones intermingled with green and white Beads, with which they adorn their Heads, Arms, Legs, Ears, and Cheeks: Gold and Pearls they make little account of; and as to Trade and Commerce with other People, they know not what belongs to it. Their greatest Friendship consists in prostituting their Daughters or Wives to one another. Their Dead they bury in moist Grounds, and put with them both Meat and Drink into the Graves: When any Person grows very weak by lingring Sickness, they carry the Diseased into a neighboring Wood, where they lay him in a Silk Hammock, tied between two Trees; then dancing the whole day about him, at night they set Bread and Water enough by him to last four days, and then departing look no more after him, who thus neglected seldom escape: but if so it happen that one recover, all his Relations for the future honour him as a god. When any one falls into a Fever, his Friends immediately bathe him in cold Water, and afterwards set him before a great Fire, then drive him before them till he falls down almost breathless, and at last put him to Bed. They neither Let blood in the Arms nor Feet, but in their Sides and Calves of their Legs. Sometime they fast four days together, which they suppose a great means to preserve their Health. Their Bread consists of a sort of Fruit call’d Jucha, Chambi, or Igname. Lastly, no Lyon devours his Prey with more voracious eagerness, than they their taken Enemies.

A very strange Village built on Poles.

Strange Fight.

Vesputius being fully inform’d concerning the Situation of Paria, weighed Anchor, and on the sixth day after entred a convenient Harbor, where going ashore, he found twenty Houses built in the middle of a Lake on great Posts: every House had a Draw-bridge, over which they pass’d from one to the other. So soon as the Inhabitants set eye on the Spaniards, they immediately drew up their Bridges: yet some of them in twelve little Canoos came towards the Spanish Ships, but amaz’d to see their Looms so big, durst not, though hal’d with signs, to come aboard, but hasted away to a high Mountain; yet seem’d to signifie that they would return, as indeed they did, bringing sixteen Maids along with them, of which they put four into a Spanish Boat, themselves in the interim rowing between the Ships from one to another, shewing all tokens of friendship, when on a sudden a Company of old Women came running to the Shore, and tearing the Hair from their Heads, made a terrible noise and exclamation, expressing the greatest sorrow they could possible: whereupon the four Indian Maids suddenly leap’d over-board, and the Men shot abundance of Arrows out of their Boats at the Ships; nay, some of them swimming under Water, endeavor’d to sink the Cock-boats which were made fast behind their Ships. Upon this sudden Onset the Spaniards making use of their Guns, quickly lessen’d the number of the Assailants, insomuch that they fled to the Shore; yet five of them being overtaken, were carry’d Prisoners aboard.

Vesputius observing these their misdemeaning Carriages, judg’d it no way convenient to stay any longer among such barbarous and deceitful Salvages: but having weighed Anchor, and Sail’d eighty Leagues along the Coast, he ran into another convenient Haven, whose Shore swarm’d with People, which on a sudden running away, hid themselves in a neighboring Wood.

Serpents strangely prepar’d for Food.

Here the Spaniards Landing were amazed, when in their Huts they saw Snakes and Serpents roasting before a Fire, whereof one had Wings, and another whose Mouth was tied together with a Rope, stared with open eyes in a frightful manner.

Here they left several Trifles to entice the fled Natives to correspond with them. And this their Design prov’d successful; for the next day the Americans came aboard without the least fear, and offer’d to shew their hospitable kindness to the Spaniards, if they pleas’d to travel three days Journey with them up into the Countrey, telling them, they had onely rais’d those few Huts by the Sea-side for a small time whilst they Fish’d in those Parts.

The remarkable reception of twenty three Spaniards.

About twenty of the Spaniards well Arm’d resolv’d to undertake the Journey; and travelling over Hills, Dales, and Rivers, they came at last into a Village consisting of nine of the foremention’d Houses, but mightily peopled, where they were in a wonderful manner received by their glad welcomes, by Dancing, Singing, Hunting, and other joyful Acclamations, presenting their Wives and Daughters, as the chiefest part of their hospitality, to caress the Strangers at their pleasure. The news was no sooner spread, but the adjacent Villages came in throngs to gaze upon, and salute the Strangers, inviting them also to their Towns. The Spaniards taking it in good part, spent nine days among them, highly treated with all manner of jollities, but especially at their choice with the varieties of Venus: from thence then returning to their Fleet, accompanied with thousands of the Natives, every one carrying Presents to the Admiral Vesputius; of whom as many as they could at once receive, they entertaining aboard, then dismiss’d them, and admitted others; but the Guns going off, they suddenly leap’d from the Decks, and div’d like Ducks under Water: But afterwards being inform’d, that such thunder-claps were sent them from Heaven to destroy their Enemies, they were somewhat better satisfi’d, and call’d the Spaniards, Charabi, that is, Wise Men.

A cruel Fight with the Cannibals.

This Island lying in the Mexican Bay, in twenty Degrees of Northern Latitude, Vesputius left on his Starboard, and Sail’d along a Meandring Coast (which he always kept in sight) eight hundred and sixty Leagues, and at last entred a Haven, the like whereof he had not seen before. Here he spent a Moneth in repairing his Ships, to which the Inhabitants freely gave their assistance; and among other things complain’d, that a salvage People came yearly thither from an Island about a hundred Leagues distant, who fell upon them with horrible rage, and whomsoever they took they eat, but first inflicted all manner of tortures upon them, sparing none, but together murthering aged People and sucking Infants; wherefore they crav’d assistance to be reveng’d, which if the Spaniards would grant, they would follow the Fleet with their Boats. Vesputius promis’d his aid to destroy such a blood-thirsty People; and to assure them that he would perform his Word, he order’d seven of them to go in Canoos before and shew them the Way. On the seventh day they came to an Anchor before the Island Hy, where the Shore was guarded with naked Men, whose Bodies being strong and brawny, were painted, and their Arms, Legs, and Head, adorn’d with divers colour’d Plumes, having not onely offensive Weapons, as Bowes, Arrows, and Launces, but also defensive, huge Targets, and square Shields. So soon as they judg’d the approaching Spaniards to be within reach, they shot a great flight of Arrows at them; but Vesputius lying close along the Shore with his Ships, fir’d upon them with Chain-shot, which did great execution: yet notwithstanding about forty Spaniards leaping ashore out of their Boats, found themselves in no small danger; for the Cannibals upon the sound of Horns flocking together, so press’d upon them that they were forc’d to lay aside their Guns, and fall to Blows, and had not timely assistance come to them, they had undoubtedly been all slain: two hours the Victory was doubtful on whose side it would fall; yet at last the Cannibals quitting the Field, left the Spaniards Victors; who the next day pursu’d their gotten Victory with such success, that they drove their Enemies before them, burnt their Villages and Boats, and carry’d two hundred and two and twenty of them Prisoners to Spain, where they safely arriv’d the 15. of November, Anno 1498.

Vesputius Second Expedition.

This good success so encourag’d Vesputius, that having stay’d scarce seven Moneths ashore, he obtaining the Command over six Ships, with which he set Sail from Cadiz, and touching upon the Canaries, Steer’d from thence Southerly; and having Sail’d five hundred Leagues, he discover’d a Countrey overflow’d and made Marishy by great Rivers, and abounding with Trees, but saw no sign of any Inhabitants; yet not long after, coming before an Island, he took a Boat with two Prisoners, newly guelt, and sent as a Present to feast the Cannibals, which refus’d to Treat on any other account whatsoever; wherefore he Sail’d eighty Leagues forward along the Shore of an unknown Island, where he Barter’d for some Gold, and got five hundred Pearls for one single Shell; these Pearls the Inhabitants said were not found there, but taken from their Neighboring Enemies, which liv’d Westward, and had abundance of them.

Strange constitution of a salvage people.

Nothing worthy of remark happen’d in this Voyage, onely the strange constitutions of a wild People, living on a barren Isle, deserve to be mention’d.

About their Necks hung two hollow Vessels, the one full of white stamp’d Worts, and Herbs; and the other, full of Grass, which they greedily cram’d into their Mouths, feeding like Cattel; then a Stick wetted with Spittle, they put into the bruis’d Herbs, taking upon the end of it, as upon the point of a Knife, some of the bruis’d to their Mouths, which (as if chawing the Cud) turning therein, then taking out again, and strowing more of the same Herbs out of the Vessel upon it, swallow’d it down. No fresh Water was to be had amongst them, but what they gather’d from the Dew in great Leaves: Neither had they any Houses, but dwelt under great Trees, and fed on dry’d Fish.

Strange adventure of nine Spaniards, meeting with great Giants.

The next remark in this Voyage, was the discovery of an Island not far from the former, where he found the Footsteps of a Gigantick People, upon which nine Spaniards went a League to search the Countrey, where they saw five great Huts, standing in a spacious Valley, and in them two old, and three young Women, each of them being twice as tall as an ordinary Man: The old ones invited the Spaniards to eat, who when they were sat down, consulting how they might take and carry one of these Giantesses to Spain, there to shew her for Money, thirty six Giants came in to them, (never did the Sun shine on a more terrible People) which so amaz’d the Spaniards, that their Hair seem’d to stand an end at the fear thereof: Every Giant was arm’d with a Bow and Arrows, and a Club: They wondering at the nine strangers, stood talking very earnestly one to another, which gave the Spaniards time to think of making their escape; some judg’d it convenient to discharge their Guns upon them, and in the Smoke to run away; others thought, that it would be better to take a milder course, which they all agreed on; and taking their leave, went out of the Hut, but were follow’d by the Giants, who kept a Stones cast behind them, and went faster or slower, as the Spaniards slacken’d or mended their pace; who at last getting to the Shore, and from thence into their Boats, they suddenly put off; but the Giants then pursu’d them with eager speed, all of them leaping into the Water, and Swimming, shot abundance of Arrows after them; but frighted by the Thunder of two great Guns that were discharged from the Ships, return’d ashore, and fled into the neighboring Hills.

Description of the Pearl-Oysters.

Vesputius third Expedition.

Vesputius at last began to consider of returning home, his Provisions beginning to grow scarce, and his Sea-men faint, having continu’d in the Equinoctial heats a whole year; wherefore he directed his course towards Spain, in his Voyage, driving along the Coast an advantagious Trade, by bartering Shells and Glass for Pearls. The Inhabitants presented him with Oysters, of which some inclos’d one hundred and thirty Pearls; when they attain to their full growth, they fall out of the Shells themselves, but those that stick, decay. So upon the tenth of November, the Fleet came safe to an Anchor before Cadiz. After which, Vesputius retired to Sevil, with intent to settle himself there, but he had not long repos’d, when Emanuel King of Portugal sent for him to Lisbon, and gave him the Command of three Ships, to discover new Countreys; between the Canaries and Africa, they pass’d thorow so many Fishes (not unlike a Bream) that in an hours time they loaded their Boats with them; this Fish hath a round thin Scale, sharp Teeth, Stones in their Brains or Foreheads, a sharp pointed Heart, a Bladder full of Wind, red Tail and Fins, feeds on Sea Weeds, Gurnets and Oysters, and is of a delicious Taste.

Cruel deed of some Indian Women.

From thence, five degrees Southward of the Equinox, he found a naked People on the top of a high Rock, that beckon’d the Spaniards to come towards them; upon which, two of them resolv’d to venture thither, having order not to stay at the most above five days: The first incounter they had was of some Women, who offer’d their bodies to prostitution; but a Youth, as if affrighted with some sudden danger, came running amongst them, whom, whilst they stood gazing upon, and wondering at, an old Woman with a great Club, running down the Hill overtook, and knock’d him down dead upon the ground; which done, the Women that were making Court to the Spaniards, took him by the Heels, and dragg’d up the Hill, where soon after they saw him chop’d in pieces, Broyl’d, and eaten: They also made signs to the Spaniards, that they would devour them also in the same manner. The Shore was crouded with Men, which showr’d upon them several flights of Arrows; wherefore they thought it best to Weigh Anchor, so taking Aboard their two Men, and having Sail’d 150. Leagues, they got sight of the Coast of Brasile, along which he Sail’d Southerly to fifty two Degrees, where three Brasilians came Aboard of their own accord, and were easily perswaded to go with him to Portugal; but the Weather growing very bad, and the Cold intollerable, the Storms swelling the Waves into the bigness of Mountains, Vesputius left the Coast des Patagones, and the Streights, afterwards call’d Magellan, behind him, burnt one of his Ships before Cape Sierra Leona, and brought two safe to Lisbon.

Vesputius fourth Expedition.

Sea-Spiders, and Dragons.

His fourth Expedition happen’d, May 10. Anno 1503. at which time he Steer’d directly with six Sail to Sierra Leona, and approaching the Coast, could not come to an Anchor, because of the strong eddying Currents: Three Degrees beyond the Equinox appear’d a rising Island, two Leagues long, and one broad, destitute of Inhabitants; his best Ship being six hundred Tun, split here against a Rock, and nothing of her was saved, but the Sea-men: But Vesputius Rowing ashore with a Boat, found a convenient Haven, with abundance of sweet Water, high Trees, Sea-Spiders, and horrible Dragons, which have a sharp Head, round fiery Eyes, and wide Mouths, Wings not unlike a Bats, a speckled Breast, curl’d Tail, blew Back, and two Bags like a drawn Satchel Triangular, were under their Bellies: No less strange are the Sea-Spiders, by their hard Feet, long upper Teeth, two long Sheers or Pinchers, and double Belly; between the Head and the Belly lies a black Skin, with which they darken the Water; when any one goes to take them in the night, they make a great shadow; they feed on Fish, the Female lays little white Eggs, not unlike ordinary Hail-stones.

Vesputius having left this desolate Isle, three hundred Leagues a Stern, enter’d a Haven, to which he gave the name of St. Abdy, where he stay’d two Months, expecting the return of those which he had sent into the Countrey; but seeing it in vain to wait any longer, he proceeded on his Journey, and Sailing in between the Abrelhos, in the River Curubabo, he built a strong Fort, Garrison’d it with twenty four Men, twelve pieces of Ordnance, and Provisions for six Moneths: Five Moneths Vesputius had spent in the building this Castle; when he return’d home with one Ship, laden with Brasill Wood, where approaching Lisbon, beyond all expectation, the Inhabitants of the City ran to Congratulate his happy return. And from this Americus Vesputius, the New World is to this day call’d America.

Sect. VII.
The Expedition of Alphonso, Fogeda, Diego Nicuesa, Ancisus, and Roderick Colmenares.

Wonderful Tree on Codego.

Americus Vesputius was scarce fitted out in Lisbon, when Fogeda set Sail with three hundred Men from Beata, the chiefest Haven of Hispaniola, to the Island Codego, inhabited by Naked People, but of comely Personage, and withal expert and most excellent Archers: Here he found a very strange Tree, which bears a Fruit not unpleasing to the Palate, yet deadly Poyson, and besides, whoever chances to sleep under their shadow, loose both their understanding and Eye-sight, and never attain to their former Sences, except they take some Opiates, as dangerous, and so by long sleep, recover.

Fogedo’s cruelty and destruction.

Famine.

Strange accident.

Ancisus escapes great danger.

Colmenares Expedition.

His strange reception.

Here Fogeda set upon a poor Village near the Sea-side, where without mercy he put them all to the Sword, except a few Youths which were onely saved, that they might inform Fogeda, what was become of the slain and taken Spaniards; Who told him, that according to their Custom, they had Roasted the dead, and also their living Prisoners, and feasted on their Flesh. Here having burnt the Houses, and sifting the Ashes, Nicuesa found some Gold. But now they began to be distress’d for Provisions; for prevention of which, Nicuesa had given order to Ancisus, Marshal in Hispaniola, that he should follow with a Ship of Victual, for the Army to Codega. But he being kept back by inconveniencies, most of the Spaniards were famish’d, so that the three hundred Men which Codega brought from Hispaniola, were reduced to sixty. And he was already under-Sail to Hispaniola, when Ancisus Anchor’d in the Haven of Codegoos, and sent some Men ashore to mend his Boat, and fetch fresh Water, which whilst they were doing, the Natives came flocking about them: Three days they fac’d one another, using no Hostility, when at last a Spaniard that understood the Codegan Tongue, adventuring to fetch Water, he was immediately encompassed; when speaking to them, and informing them in their own Language, That he was none of Fogedas or Nicuesas People, which not long since had committed so great slaughter, they left him, and the rather, because he told them, that Ancisus would take revenge on them, if they did any wrong to him. Thus quieted, they brought all sorts of Provisions Aboard. Mean while, Ancisus Sail’d to the Main Continent Uraba, where in the Mouth of a Haven he ran his Vessel aground, which was bilg’d; the Sea-men taking some Arms along with them, sav’d their lives by swimming ashore; where, their first sustenance they found was store of Peaches and Cherries, which was a great refreshment in those hot Countreys, but yet had undoubtedly been starv’d, but that in searching the Wood for Fruits, they found Wild-Swine, which preserv’d their lives; yet they were not free from apparent danger, having to deal with a Salvage People, into whose hands they were so unfortunately cast by Shipwrack; however Ancisus set a good face on the business, marching with a hundred Men up into the Countrey, where some of the Urabanners from an ambuscade unawares, with their Arrows wounded several of his Men, hereupon they retreated to the Shore of the River Daria, whither also they had brought the small Boats, sav’d from the Wreck; where whilst they were in consultation how to return to Hispaniola, the Inhabitants having muster’d themselves, and making a Body of five hundred Men, set upon them, who after a sharp Conflict, made them retreat, and at last to flie, whom Ancisus pursuing, found in a Thicket of Canes or Reeds a great Treasure of Gold. Mean while, Nicuesa Sail’d to the plentiful Golden Countrey Veragua with three Ships, of which he lost two, the one Commanded by Lupus de Olana, and the other by Peter Umbria Olana, which was stranded in the River Veragua, which gives name to the whole Island, but he built a new Carvil, whereas that of Lupus Olana was bilg’d among the Rocks. Little better success had Nicuesa, whose Ship over-turning with a Tempest, he with a few of his Men made land upon Veragua, where he rang’d up and down in a miserable condition, on a barren, and in a manner desolate Shore seventy days: All that time, finding no other Food than Wild Roots, who wandring up and down, at last met with Olana, a little before cast away on the same Isle, whom he secur’d, because he presum’d to usurp the Title, and be prime Commander of that Countrey. Upon which, the Spaniards being divided, some for Ancisus, some for Olana, the difference more and more encreasing, would not be reconcil’d, till the Famine over-powering, master’d both, so that not being able to handle their Arms, the Salvages flew them at their pleasure, by this means in a short time, of seven hundred eighty five, remain’d scarce ninety; yet did not all this misery work any thing upon the ambitious humor of Vasques Nunnez, who rebelling against Ancisus, split that small remainder of Men, and with the help of those he had drawn over to his Party, made himself Governor of Uraba, not possible to be long enjoy’d without speedy supply, which soon after they receiv’d; for Colmenares Sailing from Hispaniola with Provisions, arriv’d there the 15. of October, Anno 1510. having been toss’d twenty three days at Sea; then making into the River Gaira, to furnish himself with fresh Water, he lost forty seven Men; for whilst they were filling their Casks, seven hundred of the Salvages came down upon them, and with their Poyson’d Arrows wounded and kill’d most of them. Colmenares came in a good time to the remainder under Ancisus Command, being in danger of death for want of Provisions, and finding the factions that were among them about Superiority, he thought it fit, consulting with some of the chiefest of them, to find out Nicuesa, who was indeed the Governor that had the Grant from the King: This agreed, Colmenares went to search, and at last lighted upon him, building a Fortress against the assaults of the Enemies on the Promontory. Mormor, he was glad to find him, but griev’d to see the misery and hardship they endur’d, most of his Men being kill’d, partly by the excessive Heats, partly by Famine, and partly by the cruelty of the Natives, so that he had onely sixty remaining, and those many of them also sick and weak.

Colmenares having deliver’d his Message, Nicuesa broke up his Quarters, and sleighting the Fort, went with him, but both himself and his Men were oppos’d from Landing by Nunnez; wherefore Nicuesa was necessitated to Steer for Hispaniola; whom, or what became of him was never known.

Nunnez having thus quitted himself of Nicuesa, and now, more than ever, wanting Provision, he resolv’d to take out his own Commission at large, and setting up for himself, make no discrimination of Persons, Spaniards, or Natives, but to make out his Fortune.

And first, he fell upon Careta King of Coita, whom he took Prisoner, Plundering him of all his Treasure and Provisions; yet this sufficed not long, for soon after, King Poncha invading Careta, Nunnez took hold of that opportunity, and pretending to assist Careta, being well recruited with his Forces, set upon Poncha, who immediately fled, and left all to the spoil of his Enemies.

Remarkable Pallace of King Comogrus.

This News so amaz’d Comogrus, another King, that he proffer’d Peace; whereupon Nunnez going thither, was nobly entertain’d in his Palace, being one hundred and fifty Paces long, and eighty broad, the Floors Pav’d with Stone, and the Roofs Vaulted, his Cellars were stor’d with Wine, made of the Root Jucca, Ages, and Mais; the Privy-Chamber was hung round with dead bodies, Mummy’d artificially with Lent Fires, and were the Corpses of Comogrus Ancestors, and others of the Royal Blood, and nearest Relations, of whom some dy’d at least four hundred years before; each of these fasten’d by Cordage made of Reeds, were Habited in Cotton, richly adorn’d with Pearls and Gold. Mean while, a Hurricane happening, terrible with Thunder and Lightning, and hideous Gusts, swell’d and so enrag’d the Sea, that breaking its bounds, over-running, drown’d the whole Champain; thus the hopes of a fruitful Harvest being utterly lost, they suffer’d under a great Famine.

Nunnez Exploits.

The Spaniards which Encamp’d near the River Daria, on Uraba, perceiving this, and knowing they had no manner of supply from Hispaniola, and having already Pillag’d the Neighboring Kings, that they had nothing left. Nunnez marching thirty Leagues up the River, Plunder’d the Village, of which Daibaiba was King, where he found an unvaluable quantity of Gold, but little or no Provision. Here were many Flitter Mice, or Bats, bigger than Turtle Doves, whose biting was mortal, unless immediately wash’d with Salt Water, according to the information of the Prisoners.

Now as Nunnez Uraba Pillag’d towards the South, so did Colmenares, setting up also for himself, make prize of all, to the East with sixty Men, Rowing against the Stream up the River Daria, above twelve Leagues, where he found in several Villages and Hamlets, and at King Turvi’s Palace, abundance, both of Provision and Gold; from thence he March’d to the mighty Province Abenamchei, which though making some resistance, at last they subdu’d.

A strange Pallace built on Trees.

Turning the low Land into a Sea.

A Plot on the Spaniards, strangely discover’d.

And the neighboring King Abibeiba narrowly escap’d the like fortune, whose Pallace was built on the tops of Trees, Plash’d, and Pleited together, Timber Beams lying athwart; necessity forcing them to choose such high Habitations, partly to avoid the Inundations of Rivers, swoln above their bounds by sudden and almost assiduous Showres from the Mountains; and partly, to be free from the excursions of sculking Robbers; also being better able to defend themselves in these Castles in the Air, and also secur’d by their heighth from their Shot, being above the reach of their Indian Arrows: The bodies of the Trees downwards, upon which the Houses are built, are generally twenty four Fathom thick, so that they cannot easily be cut down, nor fired; but Colmenares against these, as they suppos’d, impregnable Forts, having made a Gallery with several great Hurdles, set his Men to work under that safeguard, with Axes on the Tree whereon Abibeiba’s House stood, who seeing his imminent danger, wondring at this new manner of Storming, came down, promising to furnish him with Gold out of the neighboring Mountains, notwithstanding it would be with the danger of his Life; because the Cannibals generally kill those that adventur’d to dig in the Mines: To this promise, Colmenares hearken’d, and having set him at liberty, for the performance, he in stead thereof, on the contrary, stirr’d up, and joyn’d with all the Conquer’d Kings, to destroy him and his Men: Nor were they slack to have executed their design, five thousand of them being already drawn together at the Village Tirichi, the appointed place of Rendezvous, and so privately carry’d, that undoubtedly it had been effected, if not happily discover’d by this accident.

Nunnez, amongst his other Slavesses, had one exceeding beautiful, on which he was much Enamour’d, and she likewise seem’d to bear as great an affection towards him, which she manifested, by declaring the secret to Nunnez which her Brother had imparted to her, being an intended general Massacre the night following, that so she might the better make her escape the day before; yet so much she prefer’d the safety of her Lover, before the liberty of her Native Countrey, that she discover’d the Plot. Nunnez not sleeping on this advice, on a sudden set so fiercely upon the Conspirators, that he utterly broke their design; yet the Feuds and Contests for Superiority still continu’d amongst them, which look’d with so bad a Face to the ruine of all, that news thereof arriving in Spain, it was judg’d fit to send for Colmenares, and John Quicedo to the Court, there to render an account of all their Transactions, Both going Aboard a small Vessel, were by Storm driven on the Coast of Cuba, where they were inform’d from a Prisoner, that Valdivia and Zamudio, driven ashore by Shipwrack, and not able to defend themselves, were surpriz’d by the Natives, kill’d and eaten; that Fogeda driven up and down along the Coast, had lost most of his People by hunger, and other hardship, and himself with much ado getting to Hispaniola, dy’d as soon as Landed of the Wound which he receiv’d by a Poysonous Arrow, near the River Daria.

Ancisus Voyage.

A Temple dedicated to the Virgin Mary on the Island Cuba.

But much happier was Ancisus, who soon after Fogeda coming to Cuba, found a King, who suffer’d himself to be Christen’d, and call’d Commendator; and building a Church, Consecrated it to the Virgin Mary; in it he erected an Image of Clay, resembling a Woman, which he clothed in a Cotton Garment; round about were plac’d Pots with Meat and Water, according to their old Idolatrous fashion, otherwise, they believ’d their Idols would devour the Souls of the Dead, and this, though Christians, they did not forget.

Nay further, when he went to War, he carry’d the Image of the Virgin Mary with him in the Front of his Army, often saying, Ave Maria; and this was the end of that Voyage: But afterwards Ancisus complain’d against Vascus Nunnez in the Spanish Court, where he receiv’d a Sentence very prejudicial to him. Colmenares and Quicedo had also Audience there, whereupon matters being settled, a firm Government was establish’d in Uraba.

Sect. VIII.
Peter Arias his Expedition, and remarkable Passages of Vascus Nunnez.

Nicuesa suffers hunger.

Peter Arias Knight, accompany’d with his Wife, Elizabeth Boadilla, set Sail Anno 1514. but surpriz’d by a violent Storm, lost two Ships, and return’d to Spain, yet not long after began his Voyage afresh, notwithstanding he had lately had such bad success, and heard of the great hardship which Nicuesa suffer’d, having not onely kept himself alive a considerable time by feeding on flesh of Dogs, and other such like Creatures; a great Frog being sold in Veragua for a lump of Gold.

Dogs us’d in the Wars.

Sodomy horribly punish’d.

Nunnez first discovers the South Sea.

Is in great danger on the South-Sea.

But Vaschus Nunnez inform’d of Arias arrival, the chief Governor of Uraba, afterwards call’d New Andaluzia, minding to inrich himself before he should depose him, and hearing that several Gold Mines lay Southward from Uraba, march’d thither with a hundred and ninety Men, thorow great Rivers, Thickets, and Woods full of Wild Beasts, deep Vallies, and broad Rivers, not without many hazards and difficulties. In the Mountainous Territory Quarequan, the Inhabitants ingag’d him valiantly, with Bows, Arrows, Clubs, Woodden Swords, Pikes and Launces, but frighted with the meer report of their Musquets, like flocks of wild Fowl, dissipated and fled, but not so fast, but that six hundred of them fell by the hands of the Spaniards, or were worry’d by their Dogs, train’d up on purpose for the American Wars. Soon after, coming into the Palace, there sate his Brother dress’d up in Womens Apparel, whom the King kept to abuse, as if a Concubine, whereof Nunnez being inform’d, in detestation of Sodomy, set the Dogs upon him, who suddenly tore him in pieces. Amongst the slain were found several Negroes, which suffering Shipwrack had been cast on the American Shore, and maintain’d a continual War with the Quaraquanen, so that it seem’d the Blacks which were found dead amongst them were their Slaves: Yet Nunnez was forc’d to leave a considerable number of his Men here, who being half starv’d, and quite tired out, were not able to follow him; but with the remaining party he march’d on, and at last came to the high Mountains, from whence he saw the great South-Sea, and going thither, was met by King Chiapes, leading an Army of thirty thousand Men, which great Body stood not long to make resistance, being terrifi’d with the Vollyes of Shot, whose Report the ecchoing Valleys presented to their Ears, double and trebble: And that which most amaz’d and disanimated them in the rout, were the Dogs, who fiercely pursu’d and seiz’d the flyers, tearing away great morsels of Flesh. After the Battel, the Conqueror proffer’d Peace, which was agreed on, upon the delivery of several great Presents of Gold. After that, Chiapes the King, accompany’d with Nunnez the Spanish Commander, and March’d with him over a broad River to Coquera, where at first some Forces made resistance, but were routed; whereupon, they also suddenly struck up a Peace, upon conditions, that the Prince, nam’d also Coquera, should return him a great quantity of Gold. Here he found a handsome Bay running up in crooked Reaches, above sixty Leagues, which Nunnez call’d St. Michael, being sprinkled with Islands, and treacherous with hidden Rocks. There Nunnez, (though disswaded by Chiapes, because he knew the South-Sea at that time being the three last Moneths of the Year, was exceeding turbulent, that no Vessel could hardly live in it, yet) ventur’d with nine Indian Boats, and eighty Men from the Shore into the Offin; where, notwithstanding the high rolling of the Waves, he got to an uninhabited Island, on which, being necessitated to stay a night, the Tide flow’d so much, according to the property of the South-Sea, that the highest Ground thereon, lay almost cover’d with Water, every one of the Spaniards having enough to do to save themselves from being wash’d away. Day approaching, discover’d a second inconveniency, for the Indian Canoos either were extremely Leaky, or else so shatter’d, that they were unfit for service; yet notwithstanding all this, they ventur’d to return, rather choosing to be devour’d in the Waves, than die of that hunger, whose misery they had sufficiently tasted, during the small time they had been out. Not long after, Nunnez Conquer’d the King Tamaccus in a Field Battel, who thereupon purchas’d his Peace with great Presents of Gold and Pearl. He also shew’d the Spaniards an Island, whose spiring tops were seen from the Main Land, which so abounded in Pearls, that in no place were either more or fairer to be found: But the King who liv’d on it was exceeding powerful.

Manner of Fishing for Pearls.

Nunnez immediately resolv’d to Sail thither, notwithstanding it was the middle of October, when the South-East Winds make such a turbulent and hollow Sea, as many times wash’d away Trees and pieces of Rocks: Besides, the Weather was more terrible, by continual Lightning and great Thunder-Claps; the Nights very cold, the Days exceeding hot; yet all these difficulties could not prevail, for Nunnez would not stay to expect fairer Weather, but went on, and coming thither, he saw how the Indians Fish for Pearls, which was Diving for Oysters; but the Weather being rough and foul, they durst not venture for the best which lay far from the Shore.

Nunnez returns.

But Nunnez leaving his sick and weary’d Men with Chiapes, March’d quite another way back than he came; and crossing a great River, was receiv’d by Prince Teaocha, who furnish’d him with Gold, Pearls, Provisions, and Guides, which carry’d his Luggage and Goods.

Pacra a tyrannous King, his horrible death.

Pacra, a great Oppressor of all his Neighbors, hearing of the approach of Nunnez, fled, but terrifi’d with threats, return’d with three other Princes, which were all so Deform’d, that more horrible Monsters were never seen, scarce any part about them resembling those of a Man: The Guides which Teaocha had provided for the Spaniard desir’d that he might be put to Death, for the Cruelties which he had long committed; whose Request being granted, he with the other three Princes, were given as a Breakfast to the Spanish Doggs. Mean while, the Spaniards were in danger to have perish’d for want of Water; yet at last, in a Thicket of Brambles, they found a small Brook, but none of the Indians durst venture to go to it, for fear of Tygers, and other Wild Beasts; relating, That the Tygers took many people in the nights out of their Huts, if they were not careful in making fast their Doors.

Strange relations of a Tyger.

John Ledesma had himself eaten part of a Tyger, which for six Moneths together, had every night feasted on Mans flesh, or Beasts, which they caught in this manner: In the Path along which he pass’d, coming out of his Den to seek for Prey, a deep Pit was digg’d, and cover’d very sleightly on the top, into which the Tyger fell; yet though taken, so fiercely withstood the Pikes, Darts, and Stones thrown at him, that every one was amaz’d to see the fury of the Beast. After that they sought for the Female, but found onely two young ones without a Dam, which taking along with them, they put Iron Collars about their Necks, intending to carry them to Spain; but seeing no likelyhood of breeding them up, they brought them back again, purposing to fetch them away when grown somewhat older, and accordingly coming afterwards to look for them, they found the Den empty, so that it was supposed they had been devour’d by their Dam.

Nunnez further Journey into the Countrey, very remarkable.

In the Province of Bononiama, the Spaniards inrich’d themselves with Chains, and Breast-Plates of Gold, which in great plenty hung on the Walls in every House: At the River Comogrus, they discharg’d Teaocha’s Guides, and made use of Cotog and Ciuriza, two Governors of a barren Tract of Land, full of Hills and Mountains, which they left on their right Hand, and wandred three days over a Morasse, in which they often sunk to their Knees.

In all these Travels, Victual was so scarce that they were much weaken’d by their wants; and though they took fresh courage when they got footing on King Buchebua’s Jurisdiction, yet they found nothing but empty Huts; and the like in the Countrey of Chiorisus, both having a little before been pillag’d by their more powerful neighboring Enemies. But although they could not furnish Nunnez with Provisions, they presented him with weighty Ingots of Gold: but this rich Metal not able to purchase the least morsel of Bread, drove them into a great strait; and indeed they had without doubt been all famished, had not Pocchorosa, another King, fed them forty days together with stamp’d Roots. Thus refresh’d, and instigated by Pocchorosa, they broke by night in Tubunama’s Palace, and took him Prisoner with eighty Concubines, who fearing to be put to death, gave an incredible Treasure of Gold to purchase his Ransom.

Nunnez thus enriched came at last to his People which he had left on the River Daria, where two Ships sent from Hispaniola rode at an Anchor.

Peter Arias his Voyage, and Fight in the Haven St. Martha.

Whilst things were thus carry’d in America, Peter Arias Sail’d with fifteen Ships, Mann’d with fifteen hundred Men, to New Andalusia, by the Islands Martinina, Guadalupe, and Galanta, all in America: a considerable time he Sail’d through the Sea overgrown with Weeds. Afterwards anchoring in the Haven St. Martha, he receiv’d a great repulse from the Natives, who no ways daunted at the bigness of the Ships, waded up to their Breasts in the Sea, and shot many great flights of poisonous Arrows at the Spaniards, or whom two being wounded immediately died. Arias sending some of his Men ashore, they found many Boats lying full of Nets, made of tough Weeds, and Ropes pleited of Rushes.

In the Haven St. Martha, being three Leagues wide, are abundance of Fish, which may be seen under Water twenty Fathom deep.

But now the Spaniards that were ashore breaking into the Houses, and taking Women and Children Prisoners, the Americans prepar’d for another Fight, which at the beginning was very fierce; but at last they were forc’d to quit the Field.

Strange Houses and Houshold-stuff.

Their Houses and Furniture in them are worthy of observation: their Cielings being cover’d with Shells strung on small Thred, which make a pleasing noise, when mov’d by the least breath of Wind. The Walls are hung with fine Stuffs, woven full of Imagery, as Cranes, Lyons, Tygers, and some Figures of Men; the Floors are cover’d with parti-colour’d Mats, made of Sea-Reeds, and several tough Roots; and their Carpets beset with Pearl add also a great beauty to their Rooms.

In the Valleys the Spaniards found several precious Jems, as Saphires, Jasper, Emeralds, and great pieces of Amber, and in some Huts, Baskets, and Chests full of dry’d Locusts, and Crabs.

Here also grows the Root Yuca, as also on several other West-Indian Coasts, of which they make their best Bread, and is call’d in Hispaniola and Angola, Yuca; by the Brasilians, Mandiba and Mandihoka; by the Mexicans, Quauhcamotli: it grows with a thick or midling Body, according to the fruitfulness or barrenness of the Soil; the Leaves are like those of a Tulip, and have small Flowers and Seed, but no ways useful; the Root, not unlike Horse-Raddish, hath a milky Juice, which swells it exceedingly; the Sprigs, which in the eighth and tenth Moneth shoot out of the Root, serve for new Plants; and if at any time it happen, that either by a moist Season, or by Worms, or Pismires, the Plant is spoil’d, then it occasions such an inconvenience amongst the Inhabitants, that half of them in that year die of Famine.

What use the Americans make of the Root Mandihoka.

The Leaves of the Mandihoka serve them for Sallads. Out of the Root, which they lay soaking five days in Water, they make Meal, which the Portuguese call Farina fresca, but the Americans, Vipeba. Moreover, Mandihoka serves them to make Bread, which they bake over the Fire; and mix’d with Water, Pepper, and the Flour Nhambi, makes an excellent Pudding, by them call’d Mingaude Carima, no less pleasing to the taste than wholsom Food: and with Orange-Flour, Water, and Sugar, it makes that excellent Julep Tipioca. The Powder of Mandihoka put into a Wound, cures very speedily. It is very pleasant to see the Americans eat this Bread; for they toss it by handfuls at a pretty distance from their Mouthes without letting fall the least Crum. Lastly, it requires great art and trouble to make the Mandihoka fit for Bread: first they must peel off the Shell, then put into a Mill turn’d by two Indians it falls, being Ground, into a square Trough. The Juice proceeding from it is mortal, if eaten when raw, but wholsom if boil’d: the Meal they put in a Press, and when all the moisture is drawn from it, they strow it in an Oven to dry. But the wild Mandihoka, by those that live on the Sea-shore call’d Cuacu Mandiiba, and up in the Countrey, Cuquacucuremia, differs both in shape and goodness from the first.

Arias’s Exploits in New Andalusia.

But to return to our matter: Arias coming to an Anchor in the River Daria, was cheerfully receiv’d by Nunnez; his first Business which he undertook was the building of three Forts, to secure the Passages to the South Sea; to which purpose Joannes Aiora received the Command over four hundred Workmen. Moreover, Arias took great dislike in the Place call’d Maria Antiqua, which the Spaniards were forc’d by necessity first to Plant in: it lay in a deep Valley between high Mountains, so that it not onely wanted the benefit of the rising and setting of the Sun, but when in or near the Meridian, it shin’d down upon them, and scorch’d all their Plants, and the tepifi’d Morassy Grounds about the same infected the Air, and the Water which they took up to wash their Houses, immediately bred Frogs, the River Daria overflow’d the Grounds with his muddy Water three Leagues distance from the Sea; the Passage thither also was very troublesom, because of the uneven Ways; and besides, the Tygers and Lyons devour’d many People and Cattel.

A strange Accident.

The first Night that Arias lay in Maria Antiqua, the House wherein his Chirurgion Lodg’d was fir’d with Lightning, who running out with his Wife, being both scorched by the Flames, saw a very great Crocodile, which snatching up his Dog ran away with him towards the River.

Remarkable Trees.

The neighboring Territory Coiba produced Trees, whose Timber us’d for Shipping never breeds Worms, because of its acerbity; whereas on the contrary, all other Vessels in that Countrey are very subject to that inconvenience. Here also grow those famous Plague-Trees, whose very Leaves, if but falling upon one, are like Gods Arrows, mortal, and immediately kill, unless the Place whereon they light be straightway anointed with fasting Spittle: and the Coibensers say, that they know another poysonous Wood, which they use to destroy their Enemies withall.

Remarkable Journey of Moralis to the South Sea.

Whilst Arias was consulting about the beforemention’d Affairs, he sent several Comanders to divers Places, to take a survey, and give him an account of their Return of all their Discoveries. Amongst others Gasper Moralis was order’d to march towards the South Sea, to confirm the Peace which Nunnez had begun with the Kings Chiapes and Tumaccus; and chiefly to go to the Pearl-Island with sixty Men, which Nunnez was forc’d to leave, being stress’d by tempestuous Weather. Chiapes and Tumaccus were according to their promise, to prepare an Army ready for his assistance against his coming; which indeed they perform’d, so that they wanted nothing but Vessels, for the biggest of theirs could not carry above three or four Men; yet they undertaking their Enterprise, Landed seventy Men on the Island; upon which the Inhabitants under their Kings Conduct ran to meet the new Landed Forces, and crying out aloud Guazzavara, Guazzavara, they ran in amongst the Musqueteers with their woodden Swords; but the report of the Guns, mix’d with Fire, Smoak, and Bullets, soon amaz’d them: the King flying, thought by alarm to raise all the Islanders; but they being inform’d, that no People whatsoever could withstand the fire-spitting People, made Articles of agreement with Moralis, and Condition’d to deliver a hundred pound weight of the choicest Pearls to the use of the King of Castile; and as a testimony of his Friendship he was Christen’d Peter Arias, from the Governors Name of New Andalusia.

Strange Pearl.

How great the Treasure was which Moralis brought from the Pearl Island may appear by one of the Pearls, for which Pope Leo the tenth gave forty four thousand Ducats to a Venetian Merchant.

Solisius his miserable end.

Amongst the Commanders which were sent out by Arias, was also Johannes Solisius, who Sailing six hundred Leagues Southerly, along the Coast of the Caribbies, beyond Cape St. Augustine, he found the Inhabitants of Pernambuck to be no less cruel than subtile; for being invited ashore, he with some of his Men Row’d thither, where no sooner Landing, but were all kill’d and eaten in the sight of the other Sea-men aboard; at which being amaz’d they weighed Anchor, and Sail’d away, Freighted onely with Brasile Wood, to Cadiz.

Also in an unhappy hour did Johannes Pontæus put some of his Laundresses ashore on the Island Guadalupa, to wash some Linnen for him; for the Islanders coming on a sudden out of the Woods surpriz’d them, and forthwith killing without mercy, cut them in pieces, and carbonadoing, eat their broil’d Flesh hot from the Coals, while Gonsalus Badajocius Sail’d with eighty Men Westerly, and having gone sixty Leagues he went ashore, and spent some days in vain, to Court the Americans to a friendly correspondency; which whilst he was doing, he was recruited with fifty Men from Daria, Commanded by Lodowick Mercado: so both agreed together to travel over the Mountains to the South Sea.

Strange Slaves.

Great Booty.

The Governor Juana, whose Jurisdictions abound in Gold, flying with most part of his Treasure, was never heard of, onely they took some of his Slaves, whose Faces were strangely Carv’d with sharp Fish-bones, the Wounds fill’d with red and black Powder, which so discolour’d the Flesh that it could never be got out. After that they travell’d through the Wilderness five days together, being onely met by some Indians carrying Maiz, who signifi’d to them, that King Periguete liv’d along the Sea-shore, and up into the Countrey the blind Totonoga; of both which they got an unvaluable Treasure of Gold. Amongst other Pieces of that rich Metal was one which weighed two pound.

Taracura rais’d in this Expedition eighteen thousand weight of Gold: and little less did they take out of the Territories belonging to the Princes Pananome, Tabor, Cheru, and Scoria: The Prisoners serv’d them in stead of Horses, they not being able to carry all the Gold themselves, the meanest Soldier having above three thousand Pounds Sterling for his share.

Destruction of the Spaniards.

They were now got to Panza’s Kingdom, not without leaving sad remarks, of their avarice and cruelties. When Pariza surrounding this Party thus loaden with Gold, Charged so fiercely, that at the first Assault seventy of them were slain; those few that escap’d brought the tidings of their sad misfortune to Peter Arias. Amongst those that escaping return’d, was Franciscus Delapuente, whose observations concerning catching Parrots and wild Fowl, we will briefly relate, the digression being but short.

A strange way to catch Parrots.

The Indian where the Parrots are most frequent climbs into a Tree, and chattering like them, with his Voice imitating their Notes, allures his fellow-prater to draw near, and suffer him to take them in his Hands. But more belongs to the taking of wild Fowl, as Geese, Ducks, Swans, and the like: From the bottom of their standing Pools and Lakes in that Countrey grow Weeds, which spreading upon the Water ripen, and rotting breed Water-Flies, Spiders, and Frogs, upon which the Fowls feed. Near these Pools in the Gardens grow Cabbages as high as Trees, which often dropping into the Water serve the Birds both for Nests and Food: but the skilful Fowler finds it his best way to take one of these Cabbages, and making it hollow in the middle, claps it on his Head like a Helmet, then going into the Water up to his Chin, and passing softly along in such manner, that nothing is seen but the floating Cabbage, and coming near the Birds, he takes them one after another by the Legs, and puts them into a Bag ty’d about his middle for that purpose.

Strange Bird Toucan.

But what is more worthy observation is the American Bird Toucan Xochitenachate, having a fleshy Bill, like a Mouth full of Teeth, which continually opens and shuts to draw Breath, having no Nostrils; the Back, Neck, and Wings, are black, the Breast yellow like Gold, the Belly and end of the Tail of a Vermillion colour.

Evacuated Pepper.

This Bird Toucan feeds for the most part on Pepper, which tarries not long with them, but muted almost as soon as swallowed: which Pepper thus evacuated the Natives value above their common, because the unpleasing sharp acidity, or biting quality is thereby much mitigated.

But to return: Whilst the Expeditions under the Command of Peter Arias had such bad success, Arias himself and Vaschus Nunnez hapned to clash: Nunnez, who since his discovery of the South Sea was held in some repute at the Spanish Court, had built four Ships on the Shore of the same Ocean, to make farther inspections along the Coasts thereof: but being commanded to come to Arias the Governor, he was committed to Prison, and accused of high Treason, as if he had intentions to settle himself in Peru, and absolutely to have left Daria: all which though he disown’d, and utterly deni’d with great protestations when brought to a Trial, and no witness to affirm the contrary, yet was by Arias’s special Order Beheaded.

Not long after which Lupus Sosa, Governor of the Canary Islands, was sent to succeed Arias in New Andalusia.

Sect. IX.
The Expeditions of Francisco Fernandez, Lupus Caizedus, Christophero Morantes, Bernardo Igniguez, and Juan Grisalva.

Original of the Name Jucatan.

Fernandez, Caizedus, and Morantes, antient Planters in Cuba, obtain’d a Licence from the Governor Diego Velasques, to Rig out three Ships with a hundred and ten Men to discover new Lands. Velasques thought fit to add one more to their number upon the Kings account; which Trust he committed to Igniguez: all of them consulted with the experienc’d Navigator Antonio Alamines. Six days the Fleet had been at Sea, when they discover’d Land, which by a mistake was call’d Jucatan, because the Inhabitants being ask’d what was the Name of the Coast, answer’d Jucatan; which, as the Spaniards were afterwards inform’d, signifi’d, We understand you not.

Stately City.

Upon the Shore they found a City, whose Stone Buildings, with stately Fronts and high Turrets, shew’d most magnificently. Fernandez call’d this City for its wonderful bigness, Cairo, from the Egyptian Metropolis, famous through the World.

Campechium a City.

Remarkable Images, and strange Stage.

The Spaniards coming to Land were courteously receiv’d, and conducted into the City; the neatness of whose Market-places, and exactness of their Streets, they beheld with admiration; as also the costly Stuff Garments both of Men and Women: but their wonder increas’d when they beheld very artificial Crosses, concerning which upon inquiry they related, That a Man more glorious than the Sun, being busie in erecting the Crosses, died. But these People, though so courteous and civil at first, seem’d in few days to be weary of their company; which the Spaniards observing sounded a Retreat, and Sailing Westerly, proceeded on their intended Design, and soon after anchor’d before Campechium; the King of which conducted Fernandez and Morantes, with some others, into the City, consisting of three thousand Houses. In his Palace they were entertain’d with all manner of Fowl roasted: After which refreshment they survey’d the City; in which, amongst other curious Buildings, was a high, but square Theatre of Marble, on which stood the Image of a Man, on all corners assaulted by four wild Beasts, which were of a no less strange than horrible shape. Not far from this Image they saw a Serpent fashion’d up of Chalk and little Stones, whose coyl’d up Tail was forty seven Foot long, and of a proportionable thickness. This Serpent, sprinkled with Mens Blood yet warm, seem’d to prey upon a Marble Lyon: both these were inclos’d with a Stone Rail, within which Malefactors were daily executed. Bloody Bows and Arrows broke in small pieces lay between the Bones and dead Bodies. Igniguez call’d the King Lazarus, because he discover’d his Countrey on St. Lazarus’s Day.

Moscobo a City.

Spaniards slain.

Mighty Island Cosumella.

Making no long stay here, they return’d to their Ship, and weighing Anchor Sail’d fifty Leagues more Westerly, the Fleet got sight of Moscobo, in the Territory Aguanil, whose King assaulted the Spaniards with so much fury, that two and twenty of them were slain, and scarce one escap’d which was not wounded: wherefore they return’d with bad success to Cuba. Yet Velasques no ways discourag’d thereat, not long after fitted out four Vessels, Manning them with three hundred Men under the Command of Juan Grisalva and Alamines; who having Sail’d seventy Leagues, discover’d the fruitful Island Cosumella; along whose Shore stood fair Stone Edifices, intermix’d with Temples, whose Steeples appear’d above the Houses. Grisalva being led up into one of these Steeples by a Priest, saw at a distance off at Sea the Territory Jucatan: and in the Place where they were, there were spacious Halls, full of Marble and Stone Images of deformed Men and Beasts, which with a murmuring noise, and burning of incense they religiously worship. The Spaniards call’d this Island Sancta Cruz.

Spaniards fight with the Campechiums.

Sailing from hence they directed their Course to Campechium, where the year before they had been so civilly treated; where arriving, and without any fear coming ashore, they found the Campechiums quite of another humor than they were the former year, telling them, They would not suffer any Strangers to be amongst them; and placing a burning Torch between theirs and the Spanish Forces, threatned, That if they did not depart in quiet, they would force them: which accordingly they endeavor’d, making a fierce Onset upon the Spaniards; who being now come under their Battlements, when they saw their advantage, pour’d what they had kept as a reserve, whole Volleys of small Shot amongst them; which struck so much terror, that they all ran away, shifting for themselves, and crowding into the City.

The Spaniards found afterwards Jucatan to be but a Peninsula, and came before a River which fell with so strong a Current into the Mexican Sea, that it retain’d its sweetness for the space of two Leagues.

Strange passages on Tabasco.

This River, flowing out of the Province Tabasco, was call’d Grisalva: upon whose Banks stood above six thousand Americans; and in the Water appear’d a hundred Boats with Armed Men, which Row’d aboard the Spanish Ships. The Interpreters of Cuba, whose Language agrees for the most part with the Tabascers, prevail’d so much, that the King himself came to the chief Commander Grisalva, and bartering with him, gave him as much Gold as his Iron Helmet, Breastplate, and other Armor weighed.

Sacrifice Island.

Soon after they Landed on the Island of Sacrifice, so call’d from the horrid Sacrifices which the Inhabitants made daily.

Exceeding horrible Sacrifices.

Amongst other strange Images, there flood a great Lyon of Marble, seeming almost decollated with a great gash; into which Wound they pour’d humane Blood warm, which was receiv’d into a Stone Trough set for that purpose underneath; then the Figure of a Man Carv’d in Alabaster, bowing forward, as if looking into the Trough upon the Blood. Those which were sacrificed were Prisoners taken on the neighboring Coasts, whom bringing before their Idols, they ripping open make no farther inspection, but onely to whip out the Heart; with which having smear’d the Lips of their Idols, they throw it into the Fire: the Heads and Corps they let lie unburi’d; whose fleshy parts, especially their Cheeks, they feast upon.

Maiden-Island.

The next Island is inhabited by Women; to which Annually their Neighbors go, pretending merry kindness, but upon amorous inclinations: and Plough and Till their Ground, and Weed their Gardens.

Pontenchianum a City.

The chief City of Tabasco is Pontenchianum, and contains above fifteen hundred Houses, all built of Stone hardned with baking after their manner; which in some Places, besides their Turrets and Temples, yield a pleasant Prospect at a great distance. Fourteen eminent Towns more did the Spaniards also see in Tabasco.

Strange making of Obligations.

When in conversing with them they observ’d their strange manner of Sealing their Bargains and Contracts one with another, they were amaz’d, for not using Wax, they usually Seal’d their Compacts with their own Blood, commonly drawn with a Stone Knife, either from their Tongue, Hand, or Arms.

Their Priests live single, and if found to be Unchast, are punisht with Death. An Adulteress is sold for a Slave: Unmarry’d People may not frequently converse with Marry’d: Thirty five days in the year makes their Lent, in which they abstain not onely from Flesh, but Fish also, feeding onely upon Roots and Herbs. In this place the Spaniards were receiv’d in great state, Canopy’d with green Palm-Tree-Branches, and in like manner conducted aboard again, not without many Presents, viz. the Effigies of a Man curiously wrought in Gold, wherewith they return’d to Cuba.

Sect. IXa.
The Expedition of Ferdinand Magaglian, commonly call’d Magellane.

Bishop Casis sad effect concerning the Pearl catching.

The Bishop Bartholomew de Casis, living a considerable time in Hispaniola, in the City Dominico, being inform’d of the abundance of Pearls which were caught before Cubagua, and the unsupportable cruelty of the Spaniards there under Ocampus, us’d against the Inhabitants, went to Spain, with a design to obtain of the Emperor Charles the Fifth, the Government over Cumana and Cubagua, under pretence, to draw the ignorant Natives from their Idolatry, to Christianity; which his request was especially promoted by William of Nassaw, the Emperors prime Favorite; so that having his Letters Patents granted to that purpose, he took Ship, and arriv’d with three hundred Spanish Gentlemen of Quality in Cumana: And that they might have the greater respect shown to them there, they had each a Red Cross given them, such as the Knights of Calatrava generally wear. Yet little did Ocampus, the old Governor of Cumana, regard either them or their Authority; for in stead of receiving and submitting, he kept the Bishop de Casis out by force of Arms; who then made complaint to the Vice-Roy of the West-Indies in Hispaniola, and in the mean time, put his Cargo into a new Store-house.

But whilst he made his Addresses, Ocampus having sufficiently inrich’d himself departed, which incourag’d the Cumaners, who already were incens’d, and weary of their former sufferings, to venture on a design, whereby they might revenge themselves of the Spaniards, which their undertaking prov’d so successful, that very few escap’d the Massacre: Of which, de Casis being inform’d, and much discontented thereat, betook himself to a Dominican Cloyster in Hispaniola.

Cruelty of Castellio in Cumana.

Yet not long after, the Cumaners paid dear for that slaughter, for one Castellio, though not without several Engagements, with various success, lasting forty days together, having at last utterly vanquish’d them, put to an ignominious Death, Hanging up seventy of their Princes, and to them of meaner quality, shewing as little mercy.

Lampagnano discontented.

As little success had Lodowick Lampagnano, sent out by some Spanish Merchants, with Letters Patents from the Emperor to Fish for Pearl, before the same Cubagua; to which purpose he carry’d peculiar Nets and other necessaries with him. But the Cubaguan Spaniards unanimously withstood him; so that not being able to effect his design, overpower’d with a Melancholly Distemper that broke his Heart, he dy’d.

Magellanus Expedition, how it happen’d.

In the interim, while these scarce considerable Voyages turn’d to so small account, Ferdinand Magaglianus (for so Peter Martyr calls him, and not Magellanus, which herein deserves to be credited, because they were intimately acquainted, and great friendship between them,) undertook to Sail round about the World; the occasion of which we will here relate at large:

This Magaglianus, or Magellanus, a Gentleman of Portugal, having perform’d things of great importance for his King, in Africa, although with no less trouble than Charge, desir’d an addition of half a Ducket a Moneth added to his Annual Pension; an inconsiderable Sum to make a Request for, yet though so little, was as niggardly deny’d: Whereupon, highly incensed, he study’d no little revenge; to which effect, soon after an opportunity was presented, by means of Franciscus Serranus, who writ from Ternata to him, that he should speedily come thither, which he soon after did upon this account:

Strange Giant.

Pope Alexander the Sixth, having fixt Terminaries between the Kings of Castile and Portugal, both busie at that time in discovering new Countreys, Order’d, That Castile should possess all the Coasts lying to the West of the chief Meridian, and Portugal to the East: By vertue of this partition, the rich Spicy Molucca Islands fell absolutely to the Portuguese: Now Magellanus perswaded Charles the Fifth, that they might be Sail’d to with a Westerly Course, and therefore belong’d to Castile; Which advice, Charles the Fifth considering, and approving, Rigg’d out five Ships, with which Magellanus set Sail from Sevil, the tenth of August, Anno 1519. five Moneths he ply’d up and down the Coast inhabited by the Patagones, where he found none but one single Person, or rather a Monster, a Giant ten Foot high, who coming Aboard his Ship, devour’d a great Hamper full of Biskets, and at one Draught drunk up nine Pottels of Water. He also saw several Trees which had been Hew’n with Axes, and Crosses made on the tops of them. Whilst he lay in that Harbor, which was call’d St. Julian, he Cashier’d his Vice-Admiral, John Carthagena, with his Father Confessor, and sparing their lives, set them ashore, and there left them to seek their Fortunes, though they had Conspir’d to Murther him.

Straights of Magellan, how found.

Magellanus from thence Sailing afterwards Southerly along America, to forty two Degrees Southern Latitude, was engag’d with the eddyings of a very strong Current, which driving one of the Ships into a Bay, split against a blind Rock, but the Men being sav’d in their Boat, were driven farther and farther into a Channel, between high and Snowy Mountains; whereupon he immediately judg’d (as the famous Negromancer Roderick Talerus had often told him) that there was the Passage, through which the Northern Ocean flow’d into the Southern; wherefore he resolutely adventur’d to Sail into those Sraights, which in some places narrow, and in others broad, is an hundred and twenty Leagues long, and full of small Isles and dangerous Rocks. Whilst he still Sail’d on, the Ship call’d Antonio, Tacking about, return’d to Cadiz.

But Magellanus enter’d the great South-Sea with three Sail, on the 25. of October, where the Sea-men suffer’d extremely by excessive Heat, Drought, and Famine, three Moneths and twenty Days, without sight of Land: And now, their Shooes, and the Leather which cover’d their Shields, began also to grow scarce (which before had been counted a Dainty) when they discover’d two Islands lying two hundred Leagues distance one from another, yet both Desolate and Barren, wherefore they were call’d the Unfortunate Isles: After that, they came amongst a great number of Islands, whose Inhabitants were much inclin’d to Thievery; for which cause they Denominated them Ladrones, the chiefest Island call’d Borneo, hath two hundred fifty four Leagues in Circumference, whereon a Tree grows, whose Leaves when faln off, seem to be alive and creep like Worms. The King of this Island entertain’d the Spaniards very courteously, two Elephants bringing his Presents to them on the Shore, out of a City consisting of twenty thousand Houses.

Magellanus slain.

Spaniards murdered.

An end of the Voyage about the world.

Near Borneo are two lesser Islands, call’d, Zubo and Matan; The King of Zubo freely submitted himself to the Spaniards, and Magellanus leaving his Fleet at Anchor in the Haven, went with his own and other Indian Boats, and attended with some of the Zubensers to Matan, where setting a Village on Fire, he carry’d great Riches from thence: This not satisfying, he resolv’d within eight days to set upon the Royal Head-City; but the King in his own Defence, Encountering with Magellanus, slew him, and seven Spaniards more, besides twenty two dangerously wounded; those which escap’d by flight, got to Zubo, where being invited to Dinner by the King, they were all of them (in stead of a second Course) Murther’d at Table. The occasion of this was out of Revenge, because the Spaniards had fall’n too foul upon their Women and Maids, Devirginating, and forcing them to their Pleasure, than which rudeness nothing was among them more Detestable. The Sea-men weakned by these Misfortunes, were necessitated to burn their third Ship, call’d, St. Jago; but Sailing to the Molucco Islands with the other two, they Freighted them both with Cloves; with which the Ship Trinitas Sail’d to New-Spain through the South-Sea, and the Victoria, Commanded by John Sebastian de Lano went the same way which the Portuguese us’d, and so to St. Lucar de Barrameda, near Sivile, where he came to Anchor with his Ship and eighteen Men.

Sect. X.
Ferdinando Cortez his Voyage.

Sottus cruelty.

Although several Expeditions of the Spaniards to America prov’d very unsuccessful at the first, yet they still undertook them afresh, and with renewing Courage: Ferdinando Sottus, though he Landed five hundred Men in Florida, yet brought no Treasure from thence, onely he cut off the Hands of fifteen Princes, because they would not discover their Mines of Gold.

Miserable end of Narvaez.

Yet far worse success had Pamphilus Narvaez, who lost both his Fleet and Men, saving onely ten out of six hundred, in the River Palma, and they also afterwards dy’d there, or eat one another to satisfie their raging Hunger.

Cortez his Voyage.

Remarkable delivery.

But much better was the fortune of Ferdinando Cortez, Sailing from Spain to America, in the Year 1519. who having the Command given him over ten stout Ships, and three Frigats with five hundred Foot, and an additional Force of sixteen Horse, rais’d by the new Spanish Inhabitants on Cuba; with which Forces Landing on the Island Cozumella, he prohibited Humane Sacrifice to their Idols, and Erected a Cross with the Image of the Virgin Mary, in one of their Temples, and releas’d Hieronimus Aquilaris, after a seven years Slavery, having suffer’d Shipwrack with Valdivia; at which time some that sav’d themselves in the Boat, were by the Current in thirty days driven to Jucatan, in which time seven dy’d of Hunger; the rest going ashore, were no sooner Landed, but Sacrific’d by the Natives to their Gods or Zemes. Among the six that remain’d, yet left alive, and to be offer’d after the same manner the next day, was this Aquilaris, who with his Companions, breaking Prison, in the following night fled to a Neighboring Prince their Enemy, and one that maintain’d a continual War against these Cannibals.

Strange Battel.

Potanchanum, a City.

Colvacan Books, of what fashion, as also their Temples.

Here Cortez sent Articles of Peace to Taxmarus the King of the Countrey, but he sleighting his proffer, came down upon him into the Field with forty thousand Men, drawn from the City Potanchanum, which contain’d above twenty thousand Houses, all built of Stone: And indeed the Spaniards had here seen their last day, had not Cortez drawn by a seeming advantage the Enemies under his Canon, and sent his small Party of Horse to attend the motion of the Rear; when so soon as they had fir’d their Canon, making great Execution, the Front routed, and the Rear terrifi’d with the noise and smoke of the Guns, they also broke, being at the same instant Charg’d with the Horse, which were so terrible to them that never saw Horses, nor such Service on Horseback before, that in a short time the whole Body of so great an Army was utterly dissipated, and the triumphing Conquerors took possession of the empty City Potanchanum, where Solacing, they staid a whole Moneth. Then from hence they Sail’d to Colvaca, where, upon the request of the Natives, they settled a Colony. Amongst the Presents which were there given to the Spaniards, were some of their own Volumes, Books, whose Leaves were made of the innermost Rind of a Tree, and a kind of Paste, made of their Meal, glew’d together; the Characters stood at some distance one after another, rang’d like our Christ-Cross Row, or A, B, C.

Here Cortez was amaz’d to behold their stately Temples, the Floors whereof were cover’d with Embroyder’d Tapestry, beset with Precious Stones, to which great multitudes flock’d, being very zealous to perform their Devotions.

When their Seed is put into the Ground, or come to its full growth, they offer young Children to their Zemez, richly Cloth’d, having been fatten’d some Weeks before: When they want Children they kill their Slaves, and in default of them, they pacifie them with Dogs.

Strange Sacrifices.

The Victims that go to be Sacrific’d, they Worship with all Adoration, Bowing and Congying before them.

Strange Idol-Worship.

Their Zeal in this their Idol-Worship may appear from a strange Custom, observ’d by them when they enter their Temple, viz. they either draw Blood out of their Tongues, Lips, Ears, Breast, Knees, or Palm of their Hands, which they throw into the Air, supposing thereby to be pardon’d by their indulgent Gods.

Zempoal, a City.

In the City Zempoal, Cortez found five Slaves, who being kept close Prisoners, were to be Sacrific’d the next day; but he releasing them, did upon the importunate request of the Quines, or Priests, and promises of great ransoms, and their telling of him that the Zemez would spoil all their Seed and Plants that year, if they did not go on with these Offerings, restor’d the Prisoners again; who, though the enjoyments of all happinesses in the other World were promis’d them by their Priest, and great assurance given thereof; yet they were not forward, but return’d, unwilling to suffer, though by so gainful a Sacrifice.

Zemez wonderful Idols.

At the Zemez Feet hung abundance of Mens Bones bundled up together, and under them were Written the Names of their Enemies, whose Flesh had been either Sacrific’d or eaten.

Cortez his Exploits.

Twelve Leagues beyond Zempoal, Cortez built a new City near the River Grisalva, and call’d it Vera Crux, which Diego Velasques resented so ill, it being done without his knowledge, that he petition’d the Council of Cuba to give Sentence of Death against the Founder: But whilst Cortez expected an answer from the Embassadors (which were sent to the Spanish Court to give account of the necessity of building a City there) he travell’d eighty Leagues Westerly. The Zempoalensers accompanied him in great Troops, hoping by that means to shake off the yoke of the mighty King Montezuma, against whom they were then design’d. Cortez coming into the Territory of Sincuchimalar, was in the Name of Montezuma, by one of his Princes, courteously entertain’d in a great Village, scituate on a steep Mountain, without any Path or Way leading to it, but by two high Ladders. Sincuchimalar lies surrounded with Hills, whose tops seem to touch the Clouds. Coming down from the Village, they travell’d through a barren and cold Valley, where they suffer’d such great Inconveniences by want of Provisions and Water, and exceeding coldness of the Weather, that many of them perish’d. After that, they ascended a pleasant Hill, on whose summit stood a Chappel, with a handsom Steeple, and hedg’d about with great heaps of Wood, brought thither by the Inhabitants for the use of their Sacrifices. At the foot of this Mountain was a fruitful Valley water’d by a pleasant River, on whose Banks a certain Prince nam’d Cacataminus had a Palace, built of Stone, and containing many Rooms, and convenient Lodgings. Somewhat higher to the Land, appear’d more of the like Structures, which were all under Montezuma’s Jurisdiction; but the neighboring Countrey Tlaxcalla, whose Inhabitants were famous for their Valor, would never receive any Laws from Montezuma.

Remarkable War in Tlaxcalla.

Cortez no sooner set footing in this Countrey, but he was set upon by a thousand of the Inhabitants, who at the first Assault kill’d two of the Spanish Horse, yet after this bold Charge, the Assailants fled, and on the next day desir’d Peace; whereupon the Spaniards march’d quietly into the Countrey, when a confus’d Company, or Forlorn-Hope, making a horrible Noise, set upon them; but after a slight Skirmish, they fled to their Main Body, which immediately drawing up, being at least a hundred thousand, hemm’d in the handful of Spaniards, and so were ready to swallow them, leaving them no Angle to escape at. Thus invironed, they were assailed on every side, fighting till Sun-set, and had undoubtedly been utterly destroy’d, had not Cortez ply’d his six Pieces of Cannon, discharging continually Volley after Volley upon them; and though the Execution was very much, yet the Sound and report of their Ordinance was more terrible to them that were out of the reach of the Bullet, and made more to the gaining so great a Victory, Fear conquering more than Slaughter; so that by the Evening, despairing either of their Safety or better Fortune, the whole Army disbanding fled: But the pursuing Conquerors firing five of their Villages, remain’d Masters of the Field; yet they, though thus totally routed, taking fresh Courage (a wonderful thing!) reinforc’d them, and set upon the Spanish Camp, with no less than 150000 Fighting Men: Yet notwithstanding so vast an Army, Cortez so well order’d his small parcel of Men, and so valiantly led on upon all Advantages, that he in like manner defeated this, as they thought, Invincible Preparation. Thus flesh’d with so much Blood of the Natives, he raged every where, giving no Quarter where-ever he went.

Mean while Quesitangal, a neighboring Prince, having also raised an Army with which he design’d, being assisted by darkness, craftily to fall into the Spanish Quarters by Night, subtilly dissembling, sent Embassadors the day before, with several Presents, and Overtures of Peace, which indeed were onely Spies, to take notice where they might best break in upon them; which Cortez mistrusting, and soon being inform’d of the whole Design, he cut off the Spies Hands, so sending them back to Quesitangal with Defiance: Hereupon the Indians immediately setting forward, took advantage of the ensuing Night, and with great fury fell upon the Spaniards, who preacquainted with the Design, were in so good a posture to receive them, that not able to endure such hot Service, they quickly retreated, and utterly gave over the Enterprize: But Cortez as much encourag’d by these Victories, pursu’d them, and the same Night Storm’d Tlaxcalla, a City containing above twenty thousand Houses, which in few Hours he carried. This City was curiously built, of bak’d Stones, and a place of great Trade; insomuch that the Market-places swarm’d with Buyers and Sellers, bartering one with another all manner of Provisions, as Fish, Flesh, and Bread, also Plumes of Feathers, Pearls, imbroyder’d Tapestry, Chalk, Stones, Timber, and Herbs.

Twenty days Cortez staid here to refresh his Army, and then march’d to the neighboring City Chiurutical, with the Auxiliary Forces of the Tlaxcallans, to the number of above a hundred thousand; they told him, That the People of Chiurutical had barricado’d up their Streets, laid upon the tops of their Houses great heaps of Stones, that their upper Rooms were cramm’d with Archers, and all things made ready both for Offence and Defence; which Advertisement he not much hearkned to, because he was conducted into the City with all their State-Formalities of Singing and Tabering upon their Tamboes, and every where courteously entertain’d.

A Plot strangely discover’d.

Strange Martial Affairs.

Mean while Montezuma had rais’d a great Army, which were in their advance, not onely to the defence of his Border, but to surprize them while they staid in that City, the Townsmen having invited him thither to their rescue and his own defence, had not the Plot been accidentally discover’d by a Chirutecan Woman, who giving advice to one of her Friends that follow’d Cortez, that he should immediately make his escape, because that all the Strangers would be destroy’d within few Hours, who came and inform’d Cortez thereof; whereupon he desir’d all the Magistrates of the City to come and speak with him, who no sooner entred the Hall where he was, but his Men by Command immediately shot them to death, which terrible Rumor spreading, and alarm’d with the report of the Executing Musquets, the City was suddenly in an Uproar, gathering thither Arm’d from all Places, and began a sharp Conflict, which lasted five Hours; but then wearied out, and despairing of Success, loosing their Courage, they desir’d a Cessation, and at last concluded Peace with the Spaniards.

Now Mexico.

This News of his discover’d Intention, so startled Montezuma, that he suppos’d it better to desist, and procure the Favor of Cortez by Presents; wherefore he sent him 15000 Cotton Habits, trim’d up very richly, ten great Chargers of Gold, and some Vessels of Wine, desiring him for a while to forbear his Intentions of marching to Tenustitan his Chief City, and that he would in the mean while treat with him for an Accommodation. But Cortez, though he accepted of the Presents, yet nevertheless held his Resolution of marching on.

Wonderful Mountain Popocatepeque.

Resolution of two Spaniards.

Eight Leagues from Tenustitan he saw the double-spired Mountain Popocatepeque, so call’d from the Smoke which continually ascends from its top; for Popoca signifies A Smoke, and Tepeque, A Mountain. The Smoke rises upright, and with so much strength, that by the greatest Wind it deviates not one jot from mounting upwards in a direct Line, to whose forked Head ten Spaniards resolv’d to climb; but having got scarce half way up, they were forc’d to return, the Ashes lying knee-deep; yet at last two more resolute conquer’d all those Difficulties, and got to the top, where the mouth of the Cave, as they guessed, measur’d four Miles in Circumference: The shaking of the Mountain, and roaring of the Flames, frequently bursting forth, so much terrified them, that they staid not long there; for, as we said, the Ground not onely trembled under them, but the Fiery Gulph ejected great Stones, which falling down on all sides of the Mountain, rolled to the bottom; and without doubt they had there perish’d, had they not speedily run to a hollow neighboring Hill, from whence they came at length to the rest of their Company, where they were admir’d by the Indians for their undaunted Resolution, and presented with several rich Gifts. These Indians had a Tradition, That for wicked Princes, and such as had not govern’d the People well, this was the Tophet appointed for their Torments.

Strange Cities in America.

A very strange Cawse-way.

Cortez being got through the poor Territory of the Guazazingers, and having suffer’d great Cold upon the Mountains, discover’d Amaquameca, the chief City of the Province Chialco, seated in a great Lake, to which he row’d in a kind of Boats, by the Inhabitants call’d Acales. Passing from thence, he was courteously receiv’d in Iztapalapa, another City, which boasts above eight thousand Stone Buildings, besides admirable Palaces, with spacious Rooms, delightful Gardens, and Ponds full of Fish, and almost cover’d with Fowl; from whence a Wall or Cawse-way of a great breadth, that cross’d over both Land and Water, led from Iztapalapa to Tenustitan. This Cawse-way hath many Bridges, which are drawn up in time of War, under which the Water runs out of a Salt Lake into a Fresh, that ebbs and flows, although lying between high Mountains, and seventy Leagues from the Sea.

On both sides this Wall, being ten Leagues in length, appears three great Towns, viz. Mesiqualisingo, Colvacana, and Vuichilabusco, all Populous, and well-built.

How they make Salt.

Colvacana is supplied by the Salt Lake, to its no small benefit and inriching; for the Water being by Pipes convey’d into the City, in all the Places and Cisterns for its reception makes a Scum, which being coagulated by the Sun, and after boyl’d, becomes Salt, with which they drive a great Trade; for no Salt being to be had in any place but here, all Foreign Merchants come thither for Supply.

Remarkable Passage of King Montezuma.

Cortez being in his March within a League and a half of Tenustitan, Montezuma, preceded with a thousand of his Nobless, came to meet and salute him, all of them rather like Pilgrims, bare-footed, and congying, kissing their right Hands, with which they first kiss’d the Ground: After them appear’d Montezuma himself, who put a Chain of Gold, imboss’d with Pearls, about Cortez his Neck, and immediately conducted him to the City, where having entred, and being come into the Palace, Montezuma plac’d Cortez on a Golden Throne, and surrendred up his Right to his Catholick Majesty of Spain, in the presence of all his Peers, to their no small amazement.

But whilst all things had a good face, and went on thus fairly beyond their expectations, Cortez was inform’d, That King Coalcopoca had a Design on the new City Vera Crux, and had treacherously murder’d two of the Garrison, and wounded two more: Whereupon Cortez having such fair beginnings, who had swallow’d already in his Hopes the whole Empire and Wealth belonging to Montezuma, laid hold of this Occasion, pretending Treason, and breach of Contract; wherefore he put Montezuma under Custody, notwithstanding he had clear’d himself of the Conspiracy, by bringing Coalcopoca, with his Sons, and fifteen of his Peers, Prisoners to Tenustitan, who by the command of Cortez suffer’d a lingering death, being all burnt with Green Wood. But in vain did Montezuma think to reconcile himself with Cortez, since all he did could render no manner of satisfaction; however he continu’d to oblige him by fresh Favors, whose Relation we will be more particular in, as meriting the same.

Description of the Royal City Tenustitan.

Cacaos, what manner of Fruit.

Stately Temple.

Horrible Images.

Montezuma’s Grandees seem’d to be much discontented, because he had without the least resistance or consideration setled a handful of Strangers to domineer over his whole Dominions, by which his weakness and pusillanimity, he was now a Prisoner, like a common Malefactor, who had formerly govern’d so mighty Territories. Amongst several Princes which seem’d thus to be concern’d, was Catumazin Governor of the Province Hacolvacan who had he not been surpriz’d and attaqu’d the Night before by the information and discovery of Montezuma himself, he would have hazarded the ruine of all Cortez his Successes: But now Fortune still daily more smil’d, giving wonderful Advantages to the Spaniards; Silver and Gold continually flowing like Rivers from all Quarters, that their onely trouble and puzzle was where and how to dispose it: but yet for all this, they were not free from jealousie, that Montezuma’s Forces might swallow theirs, though he was secur’d; of which you may judge by the vastness of his Imperial City Tenustitan, seated in the Province of Mexico, where a Salt Lake mixes its Waters with a fresh River, both which in circumference contain, as we said, seventy Leagues, and distant from the Main Land five or six Miles; the Water about it continually cover’d with small Boats rowing up and down. It hath four Stone, besides DrawBridges in several Places, and strengthned with Gates no less artificial than costly, which lead from the City to the Main Land. The Fresh Water is convey’d through the Salt in a Wall’d Channel, out of which none may take up Water, except they pay Excise to the Kings Farmers. This City boasts above sixty thousand Houses, all divided into Islands, but joyn’d with great Wooden Bridges: The Market-place surrounded with Galleries, drives a quick and constant Trade, being always full of Buyers and Sellers. In every Street they have a publick Inn, in each of which they keep Ordinaries, wherein the Tables are stor’d with well-dress’d Flesh and Fish, not wanting plenty of Wine. Their Trades are divided into several Companies, and they have their peculiar Places to dwell in. They deal very much in Cacaos, a Fruit not unlike an Almond, which beaten to Powder, and prepar’d with several other Ingredients, gives name to that excellent Drink now in use with us, call’d Chocolate: They grow onely on moist and warm Grounds, and are us’d so currently in Trade, that they go in stead of Money. Amongst many beautiful Edifices, their Guild is very magnificent, wherein twelve Judges, attended by a considerable number of Officers and Servants, sit daily, hearing and determining all manner of Causes. The next is their Chief Temple or Minster, built quadrangular, all of Free-Stone, having four Portals, opening into the four principal Streets or Triumphs, that end at the four Stone Bridges. On the Walls, being of an exceeding height, stand several Turrets, so high, that they seem to hide their Spires in the Clouds; and have Apartments, wherein the Priests Diet, Lodge, and Study, which are ascended by Marble Steps. These Religious Persons are generally of Noble Extract, which at seven years old are carried thither, where leading a very strict Life, they never come forth to see the World, till they enter the State of Matrimony. The famous Colossus, that stood over the Rhodian Haven, between whose Legs all Ships did Sail, that came in or went out of the Harbor, cannot stand in competition with the stupendious Idol Vuichilabuchichi, whose Head touches the Arch’d Ceiling of the high Temple. Near his stand several lesser Images, made of Meal and all sorts of Herbs bak’d together, and kneaded with Mens Blood. Along the Walls are exceeding dark Vaults, in which the Priests onely walk; over them are large Halls, full of Presentations of their Gods, which serve for the Burying-places of their Kings.

Whilst Cortez and Montezuma were viewing the Temple, two Spaniards rush’d suddenly into one of the Cells, where they found abundance of Lamps and Torches burning, and the Walls bedaub’d two Inches thick with Humane Gore: Over-head hung vast numbers of their Sacrificing Knives; and the stench of the place was intollerable.

Grandeur of the Kings in Tenustitan.

Strange Garden-houses.

But Cortez going on, Montezuma and his Attendants resented it very hainously, that he pull’d down some of their Idols, and durst presume to look in the Kings Face; for those People bear so great Reverence to their Kings, that none dares so much as once look up in their presence: His Council stand bare-footed, stooping with their Faces bow’d almost to the Ground before him: Four times a day they change their Apparel; and a Suit which they have once worn, is put to no other use, but presented to such Soldiers as have done some eminent Service. Whatever manner of Chargers, Dishes, Pots, Cups, and other Vessels the Emperor is serv’d in at his Table, are every Meal new. The King hath in Tenustitan three great Structures, whose Magnificence, for Cost and rare Architecture, can hardly be parallell’d. The first is the Residence for all deform’d People: The second, an Aviary for all manner of Birds and Fowl, being a spacious open place, Roof’d with Nets, and surrounded with Marble Galleries. The third, being a Den for Wild Beasts, was divided into several Rooms, wherein were kept Lions, Tygers, Wolves, Foxes, and all manner of Four-footed Animals.

Spaniards beaten afresh.

Remarkable Exploits of Cortez.

Tenustitan, or Mexico, taken.

But whilst Cortez having staid waiting eight Months in Tenustitan, for the return of the Messengers sent to the Spanish Court, receiv’d Tidings, That Pamphilo Narvaecy, by order of Velasques, was come with eighteen Sail, Mann’d with eight hundred Foot, and eighty Horse, from Cuba, and now riding before the Mexican Coast; from whence soon after he receiv’d unexpected Command, to come presently aboard unarm’d, and resign up his Authority: But he in stead of submission, compell’d Narvaecy in a short time to relinquish his Title, and own him for Superior. Mean while the Spaniards which remain’d in possession of Tenustitan, ran the hazard of a general Massacre; for the Citizens much stomacking the Oppressions of the Spaniards, who grew very insolent, inslaving their King, bringing their inveterate Enemies the Tlaxcallans and Guazuzingans into their City, exacting them to pay Tributes, pulling down their Gods, and demolishing their ancient Idols, they brake out from all Parts in a tumultuous manner, ran to Arms, and besieg’d them Day and Night in their Fort, although Montezuma endeavor’d to perswade the contrary. Cortez, hearing of it, came to their relief with the New Forces Landed from Cuba; but he fighting his way ere he could get in, was so roughly entertain’d by the Mexicans, that they kill’d him forty Men, wounding as many more; and notwithstanding fifteen Field-pieces with continual Shot made foul Breaches, lessening the number of the Assailants, yet they suddenly fill’d up their Vacancies again with fresh Men, which clamber’d over the Heaps of those that lay slain. Three Days the Battel had continu’d very fierce, when Montezuma being with the Spaniards in the Castle, went to a low Window, to see if he could command his Subjects to retreat; but a continual Cry so deafned their Ears, and showres of Arrows and Stones so took away their sight, that he did nothing: Then Montezuma, thinking to be more easily either heard or seen, went to a higher Window, where looking out, he was unfortunately hit with a Stone, of which he died three days after. Besides their Enemies, the Spaniards suffer’d extremely by Famine; and though they had beaten down a Tower, which had done the Castle great mischief, and set five hundred Houses on fire, yet they could discern no likely issue thereof, but judg’d it best to make their escape by Night over the nearest Bridge: Cortez therefore dividing his gotten Treasures, which amounted to above seven hundred thousand Duckets, amongst his Soldiers, carried Montezuma’s Son, and two Daughters, Prisoners with him, though not without infinite danger and loss; for the Tenustitans assail’d him on both sides, and falling in also upon his Rear, spar’d not to kill Montezuma’s own Children. In this last Fight the Service was so hot, that Cortez lost forty two Horse, a hundred and fifty Spaniards, and two thousand Auxiliaries; and although gotten over the Lake, they were still pursu’d by the Mexicans, who would then undoubtedly have made a general Slaughter, had not Cortez amused the Enemies, by leaving in the Night great Fires in several Places, his suppos’d Camps, whilst he silently stole away: Yet the Tenustitans would have pursu’d the Spaniards, had they not wanted Provisions: But Cortez sending his Treasure before him, through the Countrey Colva, to Vera Crux, with a Convoy of five Horse, and forty four Foot, were all cut off by the Colvaans, and feasted upon in a Thanksgiving Sacrifice. The same misfortune befel twelve Spaniards in Tepeacu, which great City surrendred it self up to Cortez, being assisted by a mighty Army of Tlaxcallans and others. But after all these Losses, he took Guaccachiulla, and Izzuca, both fortified with strong Walls and Gates; in which last he burnt above a hundred Temples, built for Humane Sacrifices. All the Countrey through which he thus ransack’d, he call’d New-Spain. From the City Tazuco, which he had newly taken, intending to besiege Tenustitan, he digg’d through the Lakes a broad Trench, of above three Leagues in length, to bring up thirteen new Ships to Tenustitan; and the neighboring People envying, that that City should not be conquer’d, as well as theirs, rais’d an Army of above a hundred and fifty thousand Men, making Cortez their General: Himself incamped on one corner of the City, appointing the other two sides to be invested by Gonsales Sandovalo, and Pedro Avarado; but the Besieg’d resolutely broke out, and made a fierce Sally with five thousand Boats, setting upon the thirteen Ships; but the great Guns made such execution and havock amongst them, that they retreated with great damage. Whoever were taken Prisoners in this Fight by the Spaniards, the Tlaxcallans, being Commission’d by Cortez, feasted upon. On the seventh day the City was taken, but not without great Slaughter, and the new King imprison’d.

Sad accident occasion’d by a Tyger.

After this mighty Conquest, Cortez resolv’d to discover those Territories that lay Southward; and whilst he was making all things ready for the Voyage, he sent two Ships with an invaluable Treasure to Spain, who fearing to be taken by the French Pyrats, ran in at Tercera, where a miserable Accident hapned to the Seamen of the biggest Ship, wherein were carried two Tygers, which though taken young, and bred up amongst men, yet had not so quite forgotten their natural ferocity, but that one breaking loose in the Night, tore seven of them in pieces, hurting a far greater number, of which some had the Brawns of their Arms, the Calves of their Legs, and fleshy parts of their Thighs bit out.

Strange Battel with Baboons.

Several Places in America breed Tygers, that far exceed Lyons in fierceness; so that where any considerable number of them frequents, though the Soil be never so fruitful, yet it is left desolate and forsaken. But the Baboons that frequent the Woods are more pleasant, and less dangerous. Peter Arias relates, That his whole Army incountred with these Beasts, which climb’d from one Tree to the other, shrieking, and making very strange Gesticulations to those that were gone before, and gathering their Mouths and Hands full of Stones, which they threw as exact and strongly as a Man. When one of these Baboons, shot by a Musquet, fell to the Ground, the rest gave such a horrible shriek, that the Woods resounding with the noise, strook a terror into the Spaniards. Amongst several things that hapned in this Counter-scuffle, take this one: A Spaniard taking aim with his Musquet at an old Baboon, which sate pearch’d up in a Tree, and being now just ready to give Fire, the Baboon Soldier, at the very instant, to break the Shot, taking a Stone out of his Mouth, threw it exactly into the Mans Mouth, with such force as beat out some of his Teeth; with which sudden blow surpris’d, he lost his Mark; and the proud Foe, shewing signs of Triumph, went his way.

Great destruction.

The unfortunate Expedition of Garajus.

Spaniards rosted.

Cortez his Ambition.

But whilst Cortez staid in the Countrey of Tenustitan (now call’d Mexico) Franciscus Garajus sail’d out of the Haven of Jamaica, with eleven Ships, to the River Panucus, there, according to the Command of the Emperor Charles, to plant a Colony: Whereupon he went ashore, ordering his Fleet to sail along in sight of Land: So wading through the River Montaltus, which glides between high Mountains, he came to a Morassy Ground, in which he and they often sunk almost up to the Middle, and lost his way in a Thicket of young Trees; yet at last being come to the River Panucus, he found several high Walls, being the Ruines of Fortresses, Temples, and Towers, destroy’d by Cortez; so that the City lay quite desolate. Twenty Leagues further, upon the Banks of the same River, Cortez had in like manner sack’d and destroy’d Chiglia, a Town which before its burning reckon’d above twenty thousand Houses, besides many fair Palaces, Walls, Towers, and Temples: Which Cruelties and Spoil had bred so great an Odium in the Inhabitants against the Spaniards, that they immediately sent an Army against Garajus, who had only a few half-starv’d Men with him; yet he receiv’d the Enemy twice in his Retreat to the new Colony St. Steven, rais’d out of Chiglia’s Ruines; but finding no Provisions where-ever he came, he judg’d it fittest to send his Horse into the Countrey to Forage; which Cortez meeting, took Prisoners, under pretence that Garajus came to take Possession, where he had neither Authority nor Right. Cortez also made himself Master of Garajus Ship and Fleet, commanding him withal to appear in Tenustitan, which not knowing how to avoid, he obey’d: His People mean time ranging up and down without a Head or Commander, either died by Famine, or were murther’d and eaten by the Natives; for at one time the Americans made a general Feast with two hundred and fifty rosted Spaniards: But their days of Triumph lasted not long; for Sandovalus, one of Cortez his Prime Officers, set with so much fury upon those Cannibals, that he kill’d several thousands of them, and burnt sixty Persons of Prime Quality, all Commanders, in the sight of their Friends and Relations. But Garajus, whose Son was married to Cortez his Daughter, liv’d not long after the Wedding, which occasion’d a murmur as if Cortez had poyson’d him, to rid himself of a Partner in his Government; for it had been generally observ’d, that his Ambition suffer’d no Equal. The Americans fell all down before him; all were Servants alike: The Court which he kept swarm’d with Attendance, on which he spent vast Sums of Money; yet his Incomes were able to bear such excessive Disbursements. He kept in constant Pay five thousand Soldiers, and several Ships ready rigg’d and prepar’d on all occasions, to hold in awe the enslav’d People, or else for the Discovery of New Countreys: Yet after all these extraordinary Charges defray’d, to shew his Wealth and Greatness, he caus’d a Piece of Cannon to be cast all of massie Gold: for the Kings which formerly acknowledg’d Montezuma for their Sovereign, gave him a yearly Revenue, most of which were valu’d to be worth twenty three Tun of Gold; for so much the King of Tescuscus, a stately City, paid, whose Houses Plaister’d with White-Lime, seem’d afar off to be rather a Chalky Hill or Mountain, cover’d with Snow: Full as much did the King pay which reigned in Otumba, notwithstanding he had receiv’d with his Christianity the Name of Ferdinand Cortez; yet others gave less: The King Guacinalgo, with his Mother, and some Slaves, bringing Gold, came to present it to Cortez; and entring the Palace, through a Guard of five hundred Horse and four Hundred Foot, which were always ready Arm’d for fear of Insurrections, he fell down prostrate on the Ground. Thus all things even out-went whatever he could desire, hope for, or imagine. And Alvaredo, one of his Commanders, being sent Eastwardly, brought great Treasures back with him, which the conquer’d Kings were forc’d to raise.

His Misfortunes.

But Fortune, who seldom continues her Favors long, at last began to frown; for Cortez having sent an unvaluable Treasure of Gold and Pearls to the Emperor Charles the Fifth, Floryn the French Pyrate met with and took it, which went so much to his Heart, that for a considerable time he sent no Advice to the Spanish Court, which made them grow jealous of him, doubting that he intended to make himself King over New-Spain; and this Suspicion was not a little augmented by his Enemies.

A Plot of two Spanish Officers.

In the Neck of these, follow’d another Misfortune; for Christopher Olitus, sent out by Cortez to discover new Countreys, rebelling, took up Arms against him, being then in the Haven Figueras, five hundred Leagues beyond. Notwithstanding the Spaniards, although amongst a new-conquer’d People, which without doubt long’d for Revenge, were not to take notice of their danger, but to go on with undaunted Resolution; whereupon Cortez drawing out a strong Party, march’d a long and troublesom way to meet Olitus, making great Slaughters where-ever he came. Francisco de las Casas was commanded to go upon the same Account by Sea, and arriving first, found him setling his new Colony, which he nam’d Triumph de Sancta Crux; and notwithstanding the Water with a Northerly Wind was very rough and boysterous in the Haven Figueras (which the Spaniards call’d so, because they found Trees there, which growing at the Foot of the Mountains, bore a Fruit not unlike a Fig) yet they came to a present Engagement, wherein Casas worsting Olitus, having sunk one of his Ships, stood out again to Sea; but surpriz’d by a violent Storm, and driven on the Shore, fell into Olitus’s Hands, who had a little before also taken Egidíus or Giles Gonsales. These two Prisoners consulted together how they might poyson or murder Olitus, which fell out according to their desires, because the Servants of the House where they lodg’d sided with them; so taking hold of the first opportunity, as they were at Supper together, they stabb’d him with their Knives in several places; yet the Wounds were not so great or mortal, but that he retain’d strength to escape in the dark to a neighboring Hut; but the Assassinates immediately sent out Messengers, publishing, That he who did not, knowing where Olitus was immediately bring him to them, should receive condign punishment; which terrifying Olitus, he discover’d himself, and was immediately beheaded.

Mexicans Apparel.

During the time that the Spanish Officers had these Civil Broyls one against another, Lodowick Pontæus, a Man well experienc’d in the Law, came from Spain to America, there in the Emperors Name to settle all things in good order; having also particular Instructions, to shew great kindness to Cortez, and to make him a Knight of the Order of St. James, that by that means the Emperor might be the more esteem’d for his Noble Subjects and Servants, amongst the Mexicans, who are themselves of a proud and ambitious spirit, and chiefly the Nobility, which doth manifestly appear by their Apparel, more gorgeous than the meaner sort of Americans; and though the Slaves go stark naked (having onely a Cloth tied about their Privities) and with a Bowe and Arrows walk before their Lords, yet the Better Sort go very costly Habited; for about their Necks they wear Strings of Pearl; on their Heads, a Cap, from whence hang down two Scarfs, one longer than the other; then a party-colour’d Cotton Coat covers their whole Bodies to their Knees, under which they wear a Vest girt about their Middle.

But at last, after all these Services, Cortez disagreeing with the Vice-Roy Don Antonio Mendoza, being about that time sent over, went male-contented into Spain.

Sect. XI.
Diego Gottierez his Expedition.

Gottierez contests with Contreras.

Anno 1540. Gottierez being chosen Governor of New Carthage, weigh’d Anchor Is forsaken of all. from Cadiz, and sailing to Nombre de Dios, upon his Landing clash’d with Great Tempest. Roderick Contreras, in whose Place he was sent to succeed. Two Years he spent Village Francisco. without effecting any thing; but at last coming to Agreement with Contreras, Strange manner of eating. he took the Governorship upon him, having first forewarn’d him not to depend Unsatisfied Covetousness of Gottierez. too much upon his Authority; for the Countrey being full of Woods and Mountains, might hide many of his Enemies: But he not regarding the Advice, went a Journey from New Granada, and having march’d fifty Leagues Easterly, he cross’d into the River Suere, with sixty Spaniards, and was presented by the Princes of the Countrey with as much Gold as amounted to seven thousand Duckets. Here he spent some Weeks, effecting little; but now all things growing scarce, though he was very earnest with the Natives for Provisions, yet he could get little; which kind of Life the Soldiers disliking, and growing weary of, went away in the Night to Nicaragua. Gottierez thus left alone, got into a Boat, with intent to follow them; and being just put off from the Shore, was met by Captain Barjanto, who brought new Forces and fresh Provisions with him: This wrought upon him to stay there. Not long after Alphonso de Pisa went with twenty seven Men from Nombre de Dios to the same River Suere; but it being then very rough at the Entrance, he was necessitated to pass on to a small uninhabited Isle, where whilst he lay at an Anchor, the Weather began to grow worse and worse; the Gusts of Wind, mix’d with Showres of Rain, Thunder, and Lightning, seem’d to threaten a general Destruction; for in the Ship two Spaniards and one Moor were kill’d by the Lightning: In seventy two Days, the Sun did not shine four Hours: At last weighing Anchor, he sail’d over to the Main Land, where he saw nothing but vast Mountains and Wildernesses. Here for a time they liv’d upon Cockles found on the Shore, and wild Fruits in the Woods: At length coming to Gottierez, he sent him with his People in five Boats to fetch new Forces from Nombre de Dios. In his way thither he saw a House built of Canes, cover’d with Palm-leaves, forty five Paces long, and built after an Oval fashion: Round about it stood several lesser Hovels, all which making up a Village, the Spaniards nam’d Francisco, because they came thither on St. Francis Day. About half way they met with the Lords of Suere and Chiuppa, going to attend Gottierez, to whom being admitted, and sitting with him at Table, he gave them, as a Dainty, rosted Chickens and fresh Pork; but they gave it to their Servants, not delighting in the taste of such Victuals. Gottierez, by means of an Interpreter, told them concerning the Christian Religion, at which they bow’d their Heads, without making any Answer: But how little mind they had to embrace it, quickly appear’d; for not long after, they set their Villages on fire, and all the Provisions which they could not carry with them, they spoil’d, and so retiring, hid themselves upon inaccessible Mountains. Another Incentive leading them to this Fight, was, because the Governor Camachiren, and his Deputy (notwithstanding he had given Gottierez as much Gold, when he came first into the Countrey, as amounted to seven thousand Duckets, as we mention’d before) yet was put in Prison by his Order, contrary to all Promises: Nay, Gottierez threatned to burn him not regarding, that he had besides receiv’d of him several Pieces of Gold, resembling all manner of Beasts, as Tygers, and others; and also Fishes and Fowls curiously wrought, which were valu’d at two Tun of Gold; yet this Present seemed too little for him, whereupon bringing the Prisoner to a Chest, he swore that he would rost him by degrees, if in four days time he did not furnish him with four times as much more Gold as that Chest would hold: Whereupon Chamachiren’s Servants went away to get the requir’d Gold; but he, through carelesness of the Watch, made his escape in the Night, so that Gottierez lost his Booty. But the other Prisoners, though threatned to be torn asunder with Dogs, remain’d firm, disowning that they had any Gold; and among the rest, one speaking boldly to the Spanish Officer said, That he stood amaz’d at his treacherous dealings, why did he keep him Chain’d against Law and Promise, and often threaten’d him with death, but yet would not kill him, for he, said he, had rather choose to die, than live so miserable a life.

Gottierez’s Conscience troubling him, he would willingly have releas’d the Indian, and the rather, because he promis’d to procure a great ransome of Gold; but the inferior Commanders would not consent to it. After this they march’d six days through great Wildernesses, and over high Mountains, finding no Footsteps of any People. Lastly, They came down a very dangerous and steep Mountain, where had not the Shrubs and jutting Stones serv’d them to hold by, they had all broken their Necks.

Dangerous Mountains.

Strange Huts.

Fifteen Leagues, the hanging of this Mountain spread it self along a sweet River, on whose opposite Shore stood strange Huts full of dead Tygers, Deers Heads, and Legs; here they staid two days to rest themselves, where the Trees Mamei and the Cazabi Plants yielded them good Food.

Valiant fight.

Travelling forward, Gottierez ask’d an Indian which was the nearest way to a Village, but he pretending not to know any near hand, had his Head immediately cut off. In like manner, and for the same reason the Indian Prince should also have been Executed, had not Gottierez given order to the contrary; seeing his resolution, that with no less Patience than undaunted Courage, stretch’d forth his Neck to the Executioners. Mean while, their Provisions decreasing, they suffer’d extreme hunger; insomuch, that some fainted quite away. The Souldiers also rebelling against Gottierez for Food, he commanded them to kill their Dogs, and stamp the Barks of Trees; two days they travelled much discontented in this manner, and at last came to the entrance of a Wood, where they espy’d an Indian standing behind a Tree, which on a sudden ran away with incredible swiftness: early the next morning, above four thousand Indians came Marching against the faint Spaniards, making a terrible noise with Horns and Drums; they were all except their Princes Painted black and red; some wore Plumes of Feathers on their Heads, and Collars of the same about their Necks; the fight began very fiercely, by casting abundance of Stones, and shooting of Arrows, wherein, though Gottierez was at first Wounded, yet after half an hour the Assailants fled, but recruited with fresh Forces renew’d the fight, breaking into their Ranks, and making so great slaughter amongst them with Woodden Swords, and Palm-Tree Clubs, knocking down, and dealing such deadly Wounds, that of the Spaniards, three onely escap’d, saving themselves by flight, who two hours after, much amaz’d and terrify’d, came to their reserve, consisting onely of twenty four Men, which Alphonso de Risa Commanded; the insulting Enemy at their Heels, waving over their Heads the Swords, Shields, and Cross-Bows which they had gotten from the slain Spaniards; and some withal crying in the Spanish Tongue, Come Christians, come, and take Gold. But de Risa, for all their pride, set them going with some Volleys of Shot; after this, escaping innumerable other dangers, he came to Nombre de Dios, without having effected any thing of Note.

Sect. XIa.
The Expeditions of Peter Alvarado, Francisco and Gonzalvo Pizarro, and Diego de Almagro.

Pizarro’s and Almagro’s remarkable exploits.

In the City of Panama, in New Spain, liv’d three eminent Spaniards, call’d Francisco Pizarro, Diego de Almagro, and Ferdinand de Luque a Priest, which joyntly design’d to discover farther Southerly along the rich Gold and Pearl Coast, and inspect the Southern Ocean. De Luque was to look to home-affairs, and Pizarro set Sail first with a Ship Man’d with one hundred and fourteen Men, which Almagro follow’d with seventy more, yet both were valiantly repuls’d by the Peruvians; but although they return’d the first time with bad success, yet they undertook their business once more, but with no better fortune; whereupon discouraged, the undertaking seem’d to be totally laid aside, and the American Vice-Roy, Peter de Rios forbad any to attempt a farther Discovery concerning Peru.

The former difficulties with this Edict easily wrought upon Pizarro’s men, all but twelve, to leave him, for the rest went over with the Ship fitted out by Rios with succors to the Island Gallo, where Pizarro resided, having also fail’d in his second Expedition. But although he had made two bad Voyages, yet having an inclination to a third attempt, he went to Spain, desiring of the Emperor to be Governor of Peru, which he had discover’d; for besides his Plea of Merits he had taken possession of the Country twice by Landing there, intended for the use of his Imperial Majesty; one of his Sea-men to that purpose flourishing his two-handed Sword over his Head, the glittering of which Sword so frighted the Natives, that none of them durst come near him.

Pizarro’s fight on Puna.

His request being consulted upon, was at last granted, the Government of Peru being conferred upon him; but Almagro took it very ill, that Pizarro went to the Emperor on such a design for himself; yet by the mediation of his Friends the difference was reconciled, then Pizarro setting Sail with one hundred and fifty Foot besides Horse, and Landing at the Island Puna, at first was courteously entertain’d; but the Spaniards by extravagant hunting and searching every where their Houses for Gold, and committing several other outrages, incensing, chang’d the humor of the Inhabitants so much, that they fell upon them. In stead of Ensigns, Standards, and Warlike Trophies, they used long Canes, at the end whereof were ty’d the Bones of their antient Hero’s, honor’d by them after their death: But these Reliques sav’d not the Indians from slaughter, so well as the coverts of a neighboring Wood.

Comes to Peru.

Peruvian Temple.

From this Isle, lying three degrees Southward of the Equinoctial, Pizarro passed over to the Main Continent, where they were all in a great confusion, upon the report of the Spaniards cruelties committed in Puna; yet all the preparations of the Indians to withstand, stop’d not Pizarro from his intended course; for first, having the success to master Tampez, thence he made nothing to march his Forces over the River Ambato, there burning a Temple Dedicated to the Sun. The Portico stood towards the East, the rising of their God, before which hung a Curtain of their fine Cotton Stuff, within stood the presentations of two Golden Rams, shaded with Black, and as many Dragons, before which the Fire never went out, continually supply’d with Offerings of burnt Incense; on the Pillars hung several Men flead, their Flesh kept firm, and free from all Putrifaction, with the infusion of a sharp Juyce.

Here Almagro coming to Pizarro with fresh Forces, they made no little penetration into Peru, satisfying every where their thirst of Gold, and slaughtering the Toothless Tombezes, a people who having offended their King, had by his order the upper Teeth of the whole Nation beaten out.

Alvarado’s Exploits.

Notable Stratagem of the Peruvians.

Wickedness of a Woman.

Guatimala destroy’d by a flood.

Velasques’ Journey.

Peter Alvarado inform’d concerning the Riches of Peru, and well knowing how to insinuate with the Emperor in his fawning Letters, at last by his Friends so prevail’d, that he also got leave to go thither; in pursuance of which, Anno 1534. he Weigh’d Anchor with seven Ships from Guatimala, a City built by him between two Mountains. But Landing at Puerto Viejo, and Marching Easterly over Snowy Mountains, he was met by Almagro, between whom a bloody incounter was like to have happen’d, but after some time, a Treaty being set a Foot, they came to a Composition on these Articles: That Alvarado upon the receipt of a hundred thousand Duckets, should leave his Men with Almagro, and depart from Peru; with which sum, being inrich’d, he soon after fitted out fourteen Sail to discover new Countreys to the West; but being busie in his preparations, was sent for to Mexico by Don Antonio Mendoza the Vice-Roy, to undertake a Voyage with him to the new-discover’d Countrey of Sibolla, abounding in Gold and Saffron, according to the report of four Dominican Monks; and having already rais’d seven hundred Men, news came to Mexico, that Peter Zunica had receiv’d an overthrow by the Indians of Salisco; to whose assistance Alvarado March’d with all speed, and found the Indians incamp’d on a high Mountain, fortifi’d with conjoyn’d Trees, and great Stones ty’d together with Rushes, behind which they were secure from Shot. The Spaniards climbing up the Mountain, approach’d their Works, when on a sudden the Defendants giving a great Shout, cut the Cords which held their Fortification together, whereupon the Stones and Trees tumbled down with such force, that they kill’d both Men and Horse, few escaping alive: In this conflict Alvarado himself was lost. His Wife Beatrix Cuova made a stately Funeral for her Husband, and caus’d her House to be Painted black, refusing either to Eat or Drink for a set time, yet notwithstanding, all her pretence of sorrow, she so minded her business, that she took the Government of Guatimala into her own hands; but her Dominion lasted not long, for on the eighteenth of September, Anno 1541. happen’d a hideous Tempest of Wind and Rain, mixt with continual Lightning, and horrible claps of Thunder, and what was more terrible, was answer’d with roars and horrid bellowings from the caverns of the Mountain, at whose foot Guatimala stood. About midnight the Mountain was deliver’d, whose Birth was the irruption of an Inundating River, a precipitate torrent tumbling down full of Rocks and Stones, which carry’d all before it, so that in few minutes Guatimala was utterly swept away, not the least mark remaining, nor any left alive except Alvarado’s Bastard Daughter by an Indian; and in the adjacent Fields, some few, and they maim’d, with broken Arms or Legs; after this utter destruction, they re-built another Guatimala, three Leagues more Easterly. But though Alvarado was lost in this Enterprize, yet the Voyage to Sibolla was not laid aside, for Francisco Velasques March’d thither with eight hundred Men, of which most were Horse, but found nought else but Snowy Mountains and barren Plains, insomuch, that his Men and Horses were starv’d for want of Provision; wherefore he return’d without success to Mexico, having onely burnt some Villages, and had several Rencounters with the Natives.

Attabaliba’s message to Pizarro.

But Attabaliba a Peruan Prince, inform’d of Pizarro and Almagro’s coming, commanded them both to depart out of his Kingdom; but they not regarding it, march’d directly to Caxamalca, where Attabaliba kept his Court, who again sent other Messengers to them with command to leave his Dominions. Pizarro made answer, that he could not obey any Commands but those of his Master the Emperor, who had order’d him to speak with the King himself at his own Palace.

Attabaliba hearing that Pizarro resolv’d to come forward, sent him a pair of Painted Shooes and Armlets, that he might put them on when he appear’d before his Throne: Captain Ferdinand Sotto march’d before with twenty Horse, passing close on the Flank of Attabaliba’s Army: The Indians amaz’d at the prauncing of their Horses, retreated into their Fortifications, but were for their cowardize immediately slain by the King’s Order.

His discourse with a Spanish Bishop, and his apparel.

Sotto sent a Message to Attabaliba, That the Spaniards desir’d peaceably to Treat with him, to which he receiv’d answer, That no Peace could be made, unless they restor’d the Gold and Silver to the Owners, which they had Plunder’d from them, and forsook his Territories; which so doing, they should have Audience the next day: Hereupon the Bishop Vincent de Villa Viridi was conducted into the Royal Palace, in the City of Caxamalca, and brought before Attabaliba, who came thither in great State, with a Guard of twenty five thousand Men; he was carry’d on the Shoulders of his prime Nobles in a Sedan, about which hung Garlands of Gold, and divers colour’d Feathers; himself was cloth’d in a white loose Vest, without Sleeves; his Temples were bound with a red Ribbon, with a long Tassel on his left Cheek; on his Fore-head stuck three curious Feathers; before him March’d three hundred of his Life-Guard, all in one Livery, who clear’d the way through which the King was to pass. The before-mention’d Bishop carry’d in one Hand a Cross, in the other a Book, discoursing with the King to this effect; That God is the Trinity, Adam the first Man; Christ Born of a Virgin, dy’d on the Cross; the Pope God’s Vice-Gerent, who according to the Power he had from Heaven, had given Peru to the Emperor Charles, as also all other Countreys in America; and if he should prove obstinate, and resist, he must expect nothing less than utter ruine. Attabaliba reply’d, That he serv’d Pachamaca, being the Creator of all things; and next to him the Sun and Moon: How glorious do they appear (said he) in comparison of a Crucifi’d God? To make Peace and Alliance with mighty Princes, was the true Foundation of wise Government: But the Pope must needs be senseless, devoy’d of all reason, and withal highly unjust, to give away what was none of his own, viz. other mens Kingdoms, in which he never had the least or smallest concern. Moreover, he would not desert that Religion which he and his Ancestors had maintain’d so many Ages, and the rather, because there are no apparent or sufficient Testimony of the truth of Christianity. The latter clause was thus answer’d, saying, This Book, O King, which I hold in my hand, proves and declares all that you question. Attabaliba looking upon it, turn’d it over Leaf by Leaf, then look’d more intentively upon the Print, which done he clap’d it to either Ear, and at last as altogether unsatisfi’d, in disdainful manner threw it away.

But Pizarro gaining time while the King and Bishop thus discours’d, had drawn his Men in Battel-Array, his sixty Horse he divided into three Wings, Commanded by his three Brothers, Ferdinand, John, and Gonzalvo Pizarro, left the Captains Sotto and Bavalcazar in an Ambuscade; Peter de Canada march’d in the Van, and he himself in the main Body, leaving Sotto in the Rear.

Pizarro fights with Attabaliba.

Attabaliba taken prisoner.

Bids for his ransom an unvaluable treasure.

So soon as the Bishop could acquaint them in what scornful manner Attabaliba had thrown his Holy Book, The Word of God, upon the ground; both Armies were Engaged, whilst their Trumpets sounded, their Drums beat, their Canons roar’d, the Horses neigh’d, and the Dogs bark’d, they made a speedy march up against the Walls of Taxamalca, which dreadful mixture of terrible noises struck such a Pannick fear into the hearts of the Indians, that they all presently broke, in their flight crowding one another to death at the Gates of the City, which being too narrow to receive them, they themselves made breaches in their own Walls to enter; which opportunity the Spaniards no ways neglected, but entering with them, shot and kill’d all they could reach; their Dogs also having no little share in the slaughter; whole companies of Indians were trode under the Horses feet, yet near Attabaliba’s Chair was the greatest resistance, for no sooner fell one of the Bearers, but immediately another supply’d the place; so that the King was surrounded with heaps of his own slain Subjects, to whom Pizarro himself Charg’d up so close, that having seiz’d him by his long Hair, he pull’d him out of his Throne, and having gotten him under him, secur’d immediately in Fetters; whereupon all his Life-Guard forsook him, and fled: But the loss of the Battel, which was Attabaliba’s utter ruine, was laid upon Runninagui, a Captain appointed to lie in Ambush, so to fall in the Rear of the Spaniards with five thousand men; but was so far from performing his Orders, that terrifi’d at the uncouth noise of the Guns, and the rest, that he fled one hundred and fifty Leagues Southerly, before he stopt, or scarce ever look’d behind him in so long a flight. Mean while, Attabaliba compounded with Pizarro for his Ransom, viz. to pay him as much Gold as that Hall in his Court (where they made the Agreement) could hold to the top; they first measur’d the heighth, then the length, which was found to be fifty four Foot, and the breadth nine: In pursuance of this composition, Gold was brought thither from all places, according to Attabaliba’s order; yet he could not raise so much as would perform his bargain, which made the Spaniards to grumble: But Attabaliba desiring some longer time to perform it, telling Pizarro, that most of the Gold was brought on Slaves Shoulders, a long and troublesome way, of two hundred Leagues long, from the City Cusco, and if this would not satisfie, Pizarro might send some of his own people thither, to inform him, that he need not fear the least danger, as long as he was Prisoner with his Wife and Children.

The two Captains, Sotto, and Peter del Baro being sent away to that purpose, met after some days Journey with one of Attabaliba’s Leaders, who was bringing the King’s Brother Guascar with a Party, Prisoner to Caxamalca.

Burns his Brother Guascar alive.

Guascar had now a fair opportunity to crave assistance of the Spaniards, telling them, that he and Attabaliba were the Sons of Guaynacava, so that the Kingdom was to be divided betwixt both. But Attabaliba had by force made himself Master of all, whereas he being the youngest, ought to be satisfi’d with that share which Guascar, being the eldest, would assign him; for the right of Inheritance belong’d justly to him, and yet he was carry’d away bound to slaughter: But if Pizarro would do justice in delivering him out of his Brothers bloody Hands, he would raise him thrice as much Gold as Attabaliba had promis’d: To which purpose he desir’d Sotto and Baro to put off their Journey to Cusco; which they not daring to do, went on their way, and Guascar descending the Valley Sucsuhuana, was burnt alive by Attabaliba’s Soldiers.

Mean while, Almagro came with fresh Forces to Taxamalca, which occasion’d no small trouble in Pizarro, who was onely thirsty after Gold: On the other side, Almagro as greedy, grew jealous that Pizarro should keep the promis’d Hall full of Gold for himself, and he should have no share, because Attabaliba was his Prisoner; therefore he earnestly desir’d that Attabaliba might privately be made away, and that the Booty might be divided to one as well as the other.

An incredible sum of Money given to the Soldiers.

Attabaliba strangled.

Pizarro to prevent all inconveniencies that might happen from his dissenting, gave in the presence of the King to every private Soldier a thousand Duckets in Gold, and six thousand five hundred twenty five Silver Crowns; the inferior Officers receiv’d four and thirty thousand Crowns, and the others sixty thousand; the fifth part of the Booty he reserv’d for the Emperor: And notwithstanding Attabaliba perform’d his promise in filling the Hall full of Gold, yet he had the sentence of Death pronounc’d against him; neither would his excuse of Innocency serve, or his Requests to be sent to Spain, there to clear himself before the Emperor; but sighing, and lamenting his misfortunes, was ty’d to a Post, and Strangled in the presence of Pizarro. For whose Death, though a Heathen, Divine Vengeance pursu’d these cruel and unjust Arbitrators that thus made their Will a Law, none of them dying a natural Death.

Moreover it was observ’d, that a few days before this Execution a blazing Star appear’d, which Attabaliba seeing, presaging sadly of himself said, That a great Prince would die in a short time; but Pizarro’s chief pretences for the Kings just suffering was, that he had cruelly murder’d his Brother Guascar: But this was a meer blind, for that that incens’d them against Attabaliba, was, that he knowing where the unvaluable treasure lay, which Guascar had bury’d, would not discover it to them.

Cruelty of Ruminagui.

Pizarro puts Quizquiz to flight.

And takes Cusco.

Unvaluable Treasures taken.

Remarkable passage of a Dog.

Attabaliba, before his death, desir’d that he might be bury’d in the Territory Quito, by his Father Guaynacava, whom the Peruvians for his great Justice and Prudence in Government, believed that he would arise, and settle the World so troubled and full of disorder in peace and quiet: The Corps was accordingly carry’d thither in great State after their manner, attended by his Brother, whom Illescas Ruminagui which ran from Attabaliba in the Battel, where he lay in ambush when he might have done them good service; in the way to his entertainment, receiv’d with all shews of sorrow; but when they were feasted to excess, bury’d in sleep and Wine, he Massacred and flea’d Illescas the Kings Brother alive, and made a Taber of his Skin. Whilst Attabaliba’s Funeral was thus bloodily solemniz’d, his General Quizquiz rais’d a great Army, which Pizarro encountring after a valiant resistance, totally routed; then marching victoriously to Cusco, he saw great Fires in the City, and the Citizens fighting with the Spaniards, sent before; but the Horse breaking in upon them, most of them fled the next morning to the Mountains: Thus the Spaniards became Masters of the City, where they inflicted the most cruel tortures on all Sexes, by that means to force them to discover, if they knew of any hidden Treasures, being not satisfi’d with what they found there, although they had gotten a greater Treasure in Cusco than that that they had extorted from Attabaliba before: Nay, they gave those that were murther’d for Food to their Dogs: Among the rest, Didacus Salazar having a very fierce Dog call’d Bezerril, had also an old Indian Woman his Prisoner, to whom he gave a Letter to deliver to the General Pizarro; the Woman had not gone many Paces before she was set upon by Bezerril, whom Salazar let loose, that he might delight himself in seeing the Dog tear the poor old Woman; but she observing him come running at her with so great fierceness, fell down upon her Knees, and holding forth the Letter, cry’d, Good my Lord, good my Lord Dog, I must carry this Letter to General Pizarro, whereupon the furious Curr having more compassion than the Spaniard, stood still a little, and at last lifted up his Leg in a scornful manner, Urin’d upon her, and return’d satisfi’d; at which sportive behavior of the Cur and the Chrone, Salazar laughing, was so well pleas’d, that he gave the Woman her life.

Almagro’s unhappy Journey.

King’s Town.

After Cusco had been sufficiently Plunder’d, Pizarro made Almagro Governor thereof, with the Territories belonging to it, and built near the River Lima a Town, which they call’d Los Reyes. Mean while, Almagro receiv’d Letters Patent from the Emperor, in which he was nominated Marshal of Peru; encourag’d by that honor, he took a great design in hand, for the Peruvians had reported, that the Golden Chili lay to the South; and Almagro being encourag’d, and assisted by Pizarro, March’d inquest thereof with two Troops of Horse, and five hundred Foot: But mean while there happen’d so great Rains, and such foul Weather, that the Ways were almost unpassable, so that the Expedition grew very troublesome; yet however he went on, in which hard March he lost both Horse and Men.

Mango Inga takes Cusco.

Contest between Almagro and Pizarro.

Almagro strangled.

Whilst Almagro was upon this undertaking, Francisco Pizarro receiv’d Letters Patent from the Emperor, in which he was Intitul’d Duke of Peru, but with a Salvo for the honor before given to Almagro; yet these balanc’d honors bred great dissention between the Duke and Marshal, which Mango Inga another of Attabaliba’s Brothers observing, laid hold of the opportunity, and setting upon the Spanish Garrison in Cusco, took the City. Whereupon Pizarro immediately sent his Horse thither, under the Command of Alphonso Alvarado, and Gomes de Todoya, against whom the Indians fought very valiantly, insomuch, that the Battel was a long time doubtful; yet at last the Spaniards got a bloody Victory, and regain’d Cusco; hither after some time, Almagro returning with ill success, having effected nothing, was kept out by Ferdinand Pizarro, under pretence that he could not open the Gate without Order from his Brother the Duke. Almagro much offended thereat, yet saying little, was so privately let into the City, that he surpriz’d the Governor Ferdinand Pizarro, and his Brother Gonsalvo, with Alphonso Alvarado Prisoners; swearing that he would not rest before he had rooted all the Pizarro’s out of Peru. But whilst he was passing the intended Sentence of Death upon them, Gonsalvo and Alvarado broke Prison; and got away to the Duke, who troubled for his Brother Ferdinand there in custody, and in danger of his life, came to Composition; whereupon Ferdinand was also releas’d: But this was no sooner done, and he had got his Brother safe there, but the Duke regarding nothing less than the keeping of the new-made Peace, sent to Almagro, that the Emperor having given him the prime Command over Peru, he requir’d him to leave Cusco, or else he would force him. Almagro sent answer, That if he could see the Emperor’s Hand, he would immediately obey, otherwise not; whereupon both Parties prepar’d for War, wherein they had many sharp bickerings in a short time: But Almagro being too weak fell into the Dukes hands, who order’d him to be strangled in the Gaol, and his body afterwards to be drawn to the Market-place, and there publickly Beheaded.

Ferdinand Pizarro being not long after sent to Spain, with the fifths of the gotten Treasure for the Emperor, was Imprison’d in the Castle Motto, for Almagro’s Death: But what further happen’d to him there, or became of him, hath never been Recorded by any Pen.

Ferdinand Pizarro never obtains his liberty.

Young Almagro stabs the Duke.

But young Almagro, instigated by his Guardian John Rada, resolving, to be reveng’d for his Fathers Death; to that purpose he went to Los Reyes, where by the help of some hir’d Male-contents, he design’d to Murder the Duke upon St. John’s day, in the Church at high Service: But this business was not so closely carry’d, but the Duke had some inkling thereof, who therefore stay’d at home, and went not to Mass that day. The Conspirators doubting the event, hearing that their Plot was discover’d, though defeated in their purpose, yet not fail’d in their Courage, ran at noon day to the Palace, crying, Kill the Tyrant, kill the Traytor. But Pizarro being so much forewarn’d, had lock’d up the Gates, and arm’d himself, which when they could not enter, yet they went back through the City, and waving a bloody Sword, cry’d, Pizarro is slain; this being believ’d, above two hundred private Friends to Almagro appear’d, who all ran to the Palace, crouding about the Gates: And Francisco de Chares coming out at a private Door, hoping to pacifie the Mutineers, was immediately Stab’d; but they rushing in the way he came, found some stout opposition, for seven Halberdiers of his Guard fought till they were all kill’d in the Dukes presence; but Pizarro was taken alive, and being brought before Almagro, he Savagely Butcher’d him with his own hands; which done, they ran crying along the Streets, Long live the Emperor, and Didacus Almagro.

Great slaughter in Los Reye.

But after all this, Pizarro’s Party joyning together, valiantly withstood the Conspirators, so that a considerable number were slain on both sides, yet Almagro at last getting the better, confiscated the Goods of all those that were against him; and now every one shew’d him the respect of Chief Governor, till the Emperor should either settle him, or send another.

From hence Marching to Cusco, he had like to have paid for all, but prevented by private intelligence thereof; which happen’d thus,

Strange Transactions between Alvarado, Sotello, and Almagro.

Fight between Castro and Almagro.

Castro’s Cruelty.

Garcias Alvarado and Christopher Sotello were Joynt-Governors of Cusco; but quarrelling, and coming to Blows in like manner, Sotello was slain: This Almagro took very hainously, as being his intimate Friend, giving forth threatning Speeches of Revenge; which Alvarado inform’d of, and intending some way or other to prevent all Dangers, and save himself, he invited Almagro to a Feast, but privately resolving to make it a Bloody Banquet, by his Death at the Table. Of this he being inform’d, as we mention’d before, staid at home, and privately sent for some Soldiers that had belong’d to Sotello, sending word that he was indispos’d: Alvarado, under a shew of Kindness, goes to Almagro, hoping to perswade him to come to his prepar’d Treat; but so soon as he was enter’d the Hall, they clapp’d to the Gate, and the Soldiers falling upon Alvarado, slew him: But soon after Almagro was call’d in question, and not long enjoy’d this his usurp’d Authority; for the Emperor Charles sending the Learned Vacca de Castro with full Authority to Peru, to settle that disturb’d Kingdom, Almagro now us’d to Govern, had no Ears to become a Subject; therefore he march’d with an Army to meet Castro, by whom, after a bloody Fight, being beaten and put to flight, having four thousand Men, he fell into the Victors Hands near Cusco, where he was treated very severely; for shortly after he was condemn’d to be Beheaded; others were strangled, and some torn in pieces with Horses.

Vela Vice-Roy of Peru.

Murders Xuarez.

Is taken and put in Prison.

Not long after this great Execution, Blasco Nunnez Vela came to Peru, and being appointed Vice-Roy, had four Councellors assign’d him, with whom he was to consult in all Affairs; and especially to set the Indians at liberty, which till then had suffer’d much misery under the Spanish Tyranny: To perform which, the Emperor had given an Order under his Great Seal, which was to be publish’d and proclaim’d in all Places. Vela at his arrival faithfully perform’d all his Commands, seiz’d upon Vacca de Castro, because he had Executed Almagro without any Examination or Tryal; yet by this means he got the hatred of all, so that most of the Spaniards chose Gonsalvo Pizarro for their Chief, whereby Affairs grew daily more and more out of Order. Nunnez Vela laid all the blame thereof upon William Xuarez, Governor of Lima, whom he sent for in the Night, and correcting over-severely, gave him also two mortal Wounds, of which he presently died: The Body was in the Morning drawn along the Streets, which caus’d so great a murmuring amongst the Inhabitants, that soon after they seem’d to make a general Insurrection: Wherefore Nunnez Vela fearing the worst, resolv’d to convey himself from thence incognito, and pass to Truxillo: But his four Councellors advis’d him to the contrary; yet he took his own way, causing all his Treasure to be sent aboard; and having made ready his Horses to depart, the Common People in a tumultuous manner set upon the Palace, catching, snatching up, and carrying away all the Silver they could find, and meeting the Vice-Roy, seiz’d, and thrust him into a Dungeon; which done, they fell at variance amongst themselves; for some would have him executed, but others insisted to have him sent Prisoner to Spain; which last being the more moderate, getting the upper Hand, Vela was put aboard, and committed to the custody of Didacus Alvarez, who Anchoring in the Mouth of the River Tombez (kindness growing betwixt them) releas’d the Vice-Roy his Prisoner, and set him ashore, who not long after got some Forces together.

Is Beheaded.

Mean while Pizarro was every where acknowledg’d for Supreme Governor, who having Intelligence of the Vice-Roys Design, sent Francisco Carvayales thither, between whom and Vela was a sharp Encounter; but at last being worsted, and retaken by Carvayales, he was soon after executed, and his Head plac’d on a Pole near the Gallows.

The Emperor Charles turmoil’d with Wars at home, saw no likelyhood to settle the confus’d Affairs of Peru; yet at last he thought it convenient to send one Peter Gasca thither, an Ecclesiastick, of a subtile and ingenious Wit, who landing Anno 1546. in Lima, with no other Title than Chief Councellor to the Emperor, took quite another course than Vela, perswading them all, that Affairs should be setled in order, according to their own desires, and former Miscarriages never be remembred, being utterly deleted by an Act of Oblivion.

Gasca’s murderous Exploits.

Gonsalves Pizarro strangled.

Cruelty us’d on Carvayales.

The News of this General Pardon spreading it self far and near, wrought a great change; for Pizarro’s Intimates, and those nearest of Concern, shrunk daily from him; which Gasca observing, march’d against him; and that they might make the more haste, they loaded several Peruvians, chain’d, with their Arms, whom when they lagg’d, they switch’d and whipp’d before them. And now both Armies being met, and discharging their Cannons at one another, with considerable loss to each side, whole Regiments came running over to Gasca; so that Pizarro being quite forsaken, yielded himself to the mercy of the Conqueror, who accus’d him of High Treason, and caus’d him to be strangled in a Dungeon, and fix’d his Head on a Marble Pillar in Lima, environ’d with Iron Rails, and inscrib’d with a brief Account of all his Offences. But Gasca not thus satisfied, hang’d up several Commanders, and whipping and stigmatizing others, condemn’d them after to the Gallies: But his greatest spight was against the Field-Marshal Carvayales, a Person of the Age of fourscore years, whom tying to a Horses Tail, he caus’d a whole Hour to be drawn up and down the Market-place, scorn’d and derided of all People; which done, he was quarter’d alive.

Not long after Gasca surrendred the Command of Peru to the Learned Cianca, and carried an unvaluable Treasure to Germany, for the Emperor Charles, who gave him in requital for his faithful Service, the Bishoprick of Valentia.

Sect. XII.
The Expeditions of John Stade, and Nicholas Durando Villegagnon.

Stade taken by the Cannibals.

About the same time that Gasca arriv’d in Spain, John Stade had the Command His strange Entertainment amongst them. over a small Fort rais’d of Stone and Earth, on the Island Maro, adjacent to Brasile, because the Salvage People of Tupin Imba sail’d twice a year from the Countrey of Brikioka, to Maro, at the time when the Plant Abbati was ripe, of which they made the Liquor that they generally drink at their Humane Banquets: They also landed on Maro about the Bratti-Fishing. This Bratti is a Fish of a very delicious taste, either caught in Nets, or shot by the Tupin Imba, and carried to their several Habitations. Against these People Stade kept a continual Guard, when Heliodorus Hesse, Son to Eobanus Hesse, the famous Latin Poet in Germany, came to visit him. Stade to entertain his Guest the better, went into the Woods to hunt for Venison, where he was taken by the Tupin Imba, of which the King march’d in the Rear with a great Palm-Tree Club, and carried him towards the Sea side, that he, with others that waited on the Shore, might make up a Kawewipepicke (that is, A Feast of Rosted Men) But because Stade being a German of a large Body, well-skinn’d, young, plump and fat, they all concluded to spare this Dainty, and carry him alive to Brikioka, that with such a Banquet they might highly caress their Wives: But the Journey being long, and a just melancholy possessing him with fear, and the terror of certain death, and to be Food for such ravenous Cannibals, so macerated and consum’d him, that he was almost dwindled away to Skin and Bone; whereupon thinking him thus lean to make but few savory Morsels, they chang’d their resolutions, and growing better acquainted, he having learn’d their Tongue, and being able to discourse with them, they lik’d his company so well, that they let him live amongst them. Nine years Stade had been a Slave amongst these Man-eaters, when the French coming thither, bought him for a few Trifles, and carried him to Normandy, where landing Anno 1555. he went from thence to Hamburgh, being his Native Countrey.

Durande’s Expedition.

Dissention in the new Colony.

Wickedness of Cointak against the Ministers.

Durande drowns three Religious Men.

Nicholas Durande a Frenchman set Sail from Havre de Grace, at the same time when Stade came thither. This Durande having lost a Castle in Brittain, to the great prejudice of the French, out of a pretence of advancing their Affairs, and to fill up their almost exhausted Treasury, reported, That the Spanish and Portuguese Forces were driven out of India, where they had gather’d so much Wealth; and it would certainly redound to the Honor and Profit of France, if they could become Masters of the Gold and Silver Mines. King Henry the Second approving of the Proposal, and the more because the Admiral Gasper Coligni was also very earnest, looking upon it as a safe Retreat for the Protestants, at that time cruelly persecuted: and Durande, sensible of the Admirals thoughts, privately inform’d him, That in his American Design he chiefly aim’d to plant a True Church of God in America, where the Professors might enjoy themselves peaceably. This Report being spread amongst those that call’d themselves Protestants, (fled from Switzerland in great numbers to France) made many of them venture upon the Design; who having fitted themselves, and setting sail with three Ships, after some time arriv’d on the Coast of Brasile, and landed on the Rock-Island, in the Haven Januario: Here Durande built several Watch-houses, and the Fort Coligni, which he fortified with a considerable number of Guns: Not long after he writ to John Calvin, That he would please to furnish this new Plantation in Brasile with good and able Teachers of the Gospel; which Request being immediately taken into serious consideration by the Classes, one Philip Corguileray, a Gentleman near Geneva, set Sail out of the Haven Honfleurs, with three Ships, freighted with some Provisions, several Persons of divers Trades, and two Ministers, Peter Richer, and William Chartier: But he had scarce made Africa, when they began to have a scarcity of Victuals; wherefore they turn’d their Design of setling the Gospel in America, to Pyracy, where they made small scruple or difference, whether Friends or Foes, but made Prize of all they could light upon, though indeed their Ministers both preach’d and perswaded the contrary, amongst whom a Controversie happening, put other Business into their Heads; for one John Cointak, formerly a Parisian Sorbonist, was also amongst those that remov’d from Geneva, who pretended that Coligni had promis’d him a Ministers place, so soon as he landed at Brasile; but Richer and Chartier, not satisfied that there was any such Promise, and consequently thinking themselves not obliged by his bare Assertion, told him, That themselves being able, under God, to perform the Work, they needed no such Coadjutor: This bred so great a Rancor between them, that Cointak accus’d them for teaching false Doctrine, and chiefly that they did not mix the Wine at their Sacraments with Water, which Father Clemens had strictly commanded. Durande, being prevail’d on by the Cardinal of Lorein, joyn’d with Cointak, and thereupon so sharply persecuted the Protestants, that he starv’d several of them, which others to escape fled to the Brasilians: Nay, he took John Du Bordell, Matthias Vermeil, and Peter Bourdon, out of their Sick-Beds, and tying their Hands and Feet, threw them headlong from a Rock into the Sea: Soon after which, the bloody Persecutor return’d with ill success to France, where he wrote a Book against the Reform’d Religion; but all the Honor which he gain’d was, that all Parties on both sides accounted him a distracted Person.

Sect. XIII.
The Expeditions of John Ribald, Renatus Laudonier, and Gurgie.

Florida unhappily discover’d.

Florida being upon the Continent of America, and so call’d by John Pontæus, Ribald’s Voyage. who landed there upon Palm-Sunday, though Sebastian Gaboto a Venetian, imploy’d The Garrison in Florida in great want. by Henry the Seventh King of England, landed there before, may well be Unheard-of Hunger. term’d the Europeans Bloody Stage, Pontæus being slain here: But Ferdinand Sotto exercis’d against the Inhabitants inhumane Cruelty five years together; yet at last died of a deep discontent, because he could not reach his Aims, having condemn’d so many Floridans fruitlesly to dig for Gold in the Mines. However, since that, Julian Sumanus and Peter Ahumada undertook the Work anew, but with the like bad Success. Anno 1545. one Lodowick Cancello, a Dominican, thought to effect great things with four of his Associates; but landing on Florida, was destroy’d by the Natives. But Gasper Coligni the Marshal, neither discourag’d by these miserable Proceedings, nor the former Treachery of Durande, prepar’d for a new Expedition thither; and accordingly John Ribald was fitted with two Ships from Diep, at the Charge of Charles the Ninth King of France, wherewith having sail’d thirty Degrees Northern Latitude, he came before the Promontory of Francisco, where he ran up into the Mouth of a wide River, to which he gave the denomination of Dolphin, upon whose Banks were whole Mulberry-Woods, which nourish’d Silk-Worms in strange abundance. From hence he sail’d by the Wolves Head (a Point so call’d, because great numbers of Wolves breed there) and leaving the Cedar-Island, landed on Florida, where he built a Triangular Fort, and having furnish’d it with Men, Guns, and Provisions, sail’d back for more Supplies to France; but coming thither, found all things in disorder, occasion’d by a War amongst themselves; so that the French which guarded and dwelt in the Fort, waited in vain for Relief, and their Provisions growing scant, thought it fittest and their best way to build a Vessel, and sail from thence; which having effected, and being gone about the third part of their Voyage there hapned such a Calm for twenty Days, that they made not the least way, which drove them to so great extremity, their Provisions being spent, that they drank their own Urine, and fed upon their old Shoes, which also in a short time failing, they agreed amongst themselves to kill and eat one of their Sea-men, call’d Henry Lacher, on whose Flesh they liv’d some days; but being again driven to the greatest want imaginable, in this extremity of Desparation, their Condition being altogether hopeless, an English Frigat discovering them, and observing by their manner of Sailing that they were in some great want, drawing near, sent their Long-boat aboard, and found them so weak, that they were not able to handle their Tack; whereupon generously taking pity of them, they reliev’d them, and conducted them to the Coast of England, and then brought them to Queen Elizabeth, who had formerly design’d to rig a Fleet for Florida.

Laudonier’s Voyage.

Remarkable difference in the French Fleet.

Mean while, no News having been heard of the foremention’d French Plantation in Brasile, and Coligni’s Difference with the King being decided, he prevail’d so much, that Renatus Laudonier should with three Ships sail to relieve the Garrison in the late deserted Fort. Laudonier landing in Nova Francia, found a Stone with a French Inscription, plac’d on the Shore by Ribald, and hung full of Laurel Garlands: Then he visited the King Saturiona, whose Son Atorcus had several Children by his own Mother, according to a Salvage Custom observ’d in that Countrey. Whilst they stay’d here, a Fiery Meteor appear’d in the Sky, with such fervor, that some Rivers boyl’d with the heat of it, and the Fish parboyl’d, died; nay more, it scorch’d all the Plants far and near: The Natives ascrib’d this Plague to the French Cannons, by which means they stood in great fear of the French, who might have done great things had not they differ’d amongst themselves; For a Sea-man nam’d Rubel Patracon, pretending to have skill in Necromancy, would undertake to shew the Places where the Gold and Silver Mines were, which the rest of the Sea-men believing, rebell’d against Laudonier, and though sick, imprison’d him, forcing him to sign a Writing to this effect, That the two Ships, of which the Rebels made Vassar and Trincant Commanders, should with his leave and permittance sail to New Spain for Provisions. Whilst they were preparing for their Voyage, Rupiferrir having been sent to the King Utina, came back with many rich Presents, and withal brought Information of the Gold and Silver Mynes Apalatica; but Vassar and Trincant taking no notice thereof, set forth, and took a Spanish Carvel, richly laden before Havana, whose Commander they agreed to release on the payment of a great Ransom; but the Masters Son being sent ashore to fetch the Money which they had agreed for, in stead thereof, made his Fathers Mischance known; whereupon two great Frigats and a Galley were the next Morning very early sent to attaque the French, between whom was a sharp Encounter; but in a short time the two Pyrats were sunk, and the Prisoners sold for Slaves, excepting a few that escap’d in their Long-boat.

Great cruelty of the Spaniards against the French.

Gurgie’s valiant Exploits against the Spaniards.

In this interim Laudonier receiving no Supply from France, was brought to great extremity; for the Rebels had carried great part of his Store with them. In these straights he was forc’d by those that staid with him, contrary to the Articles of Peace lately made with King Utina, to take him Prisoner, in hopes that for his Liberty he would procure them some Provisions; but the Inhabitants incens’d at the baseness of so unexpected an Action, could not be wrought upon by any means to give them Relief; but grown more perverse than before, appointed a general Meeting to elect another King; so that out of all hopes, they utterly gave themselves over for lost. In this desperate condition, John Haukins, a great Sea-Captain, came thither with four English Ships, who pitying their misery, furnish’d them with Necessaries, and having onely four Vessels, lent them one, because Laudonier was at that time too weak to endure the Sea; but not long after recovering strength, and all things ready to set Sail, Ribald came to an Anchor before Charles-Fort, with seven Ships from Diep: Within few days after, the Spanish Admiral Peter Melandez arriv’d with eight Frigats, whereof the French having Intelligence, cut their Cables, and stood out to Sea, whom the Spaniards chac’d, but could not reach; whereupon leaving them, they landed in the Mouth of the River Dolphin, where by help of the Moorish Slaves they began to intrench themselves; of which Ribald having notice, immediately sail’d thither, at least to disturb, if not absolutely drive them from their Work; but surpriz’d in the way by a great Storm, lost most of his Fleet, ingag’d among the Rocks; yet the Men were most of them sav’d. In this Storm the Spaniards also suffer’d great damage, yet made an Advantage of the Frenchmens Misfortune, marching with all speed to Charles-Fort, in which were onely two hundred weak Men, Ribald having taken the primest Soldiers along with him. In the Morning before Sun-rise the Spaniards made a fierce Assault, and in a short time became Masters of the Place, which Laudonier seeing, fled in a Boat; others leaping from the Walls into the Moat, sav’d themselves by swimming: Whoever fell into the Victors Hands, was without mercy slain; nay, such was the Spaniards inveterate malice to the French, that wanting living Bodies, they exercis’d their Cruelty upon the dead, pulling out their Eyes, and cutting off their Members, carrying them in Triumph on the Points of their Swords. In the interim, the Storm ceasing, Ribald approach’d Charles-Fort, with his shatter’d Fleet, but was so amaz’d when he saw the Spanish Flag set upon the Walls, and Vallemond marching towards him with a Squadron of Spaniards, that although a River lay between them, yet he presently came to a Treaty, and deliver’d up all his Men, being above four hundred, upon promise of good Quarter; but the Spaniards in stead of keeping their Agreement, bound them, leading them all to the Castle, where, both against their Articles, and the Law of Arms, they massacred them, and burnt their Bodies; but Ribald being quarter’d, they fix’d his Limbs upon Poles about the Walls, sending his Head to Sevil. When Charles the Ninth, King of France, receiv’d notice hereof, he was not in the least concern’d at the Spanish Cruelty us’d to his Subjects, out of a particular hatred to Coligni, the first Promoter of the Voyage. But though the French Crown so little regarded the inhumane Usage committed by the Spaniards in Charles-Fort, yet Dominicus Gurgie shew’d himself so highly concern’d thereat, that turning all his Goods into Money, he levied two hundred Soldiers, and fourscore Sea-men, which he put aboard three small Ships, pretending that he would onely touch at Brasile; but sailing beyond Cuba, he stood directly for Florida, where after his Landing he was kindly receiv’d by Saturiona the King, who complaining much against the Spaniards Oppressions, sent to joyn with him his Kinsman Olotocara, having the Command of a great Army.

Is ungratefully rewarded.

The Spaniards by this time had not onely strengthned Charles-Fort, but also rais’d two others on each side of the River Mayo, in which three Holds lay Garrison’d above four hundred choice Soldiers. Those in the new Forts made little resistance; but quitting the same, and flying into a neighboring Wood, fell into an Ambuscade of Indians, who slew thirty of them, and preserv’d ninety for a Publick Execution. Thus they march’d on victoriously to Charles-Fort, where by the way sixty Spaniards sallying out, were every one cut off, which much facilitated the Frenchmens Work. The Governor Melandez, seeing a certain ruine attend him, fled into the Woods; but met there by the Floridans, return’d to the French, of whom he begg’d Life for himself, and some of his People: Yet Gurgie deaf to all intreaties, would hear nothing, but pressing on, took them all Prisoners, and as a just Reward of their Cruelty to his Countrey-men, hang’d them on the next Trees: After which Execution, it can scarce be express’d how kindly the Natives entertain’d the French, because they had freed the Countrey from the Spanish Oppressions. Thus having accomplish’d his Design, and returning home, he was nobly receiv’d at Rochel, but had not the least Countenance for all his trouble from the King; the Cardinal of Lorein telling him, That for his good Service he ought to suffer death, because he had fitted out three Ships upon his own Account, without Authority.

Sect. XIV.
Four English Expeditions, under the Conduct of our Famous Sea-Captains Martin Forbisher, Sir Francis Drake, Thomas Candish, and John Smith.

Forbisher’s Expedition.

Captain Forbisher sailing to the Northern Parts of America, Anno 1576. chusing a bad time, the Year being too much spent, and the Ocean so full of Ice, that it forc’d him to return to England: Not many Months after, he renew’d his Voyage, Queen Elizabeth having rigg’d out, and sent under his Command one Frigat and two Ketches, Mann’d with a hundred and forty Men: The twenty sixth of May he weigh’d Anchor, and sail’d to the Orkenies, lying to the North of Scotland, where landing, he found the poor Islanders fled out of their Huts, into Caves and Dens among the Rocks. From thence he steer’d North-North-West, through abundance of floating Pieces of Timber, which oftentimes gave him great stops. The fourth of July he made Friezland, where he met with a great Storm of Hail, mix’d with Snow: Before the Shore lay a great Ridge of Ice, which hindred for a while their Landing: Here he saw several Wild People, but could not come to speak with them; for upon the least approach they fled; yet when they saw any advantage, made resistance: At last, three of them came unarm’d to the Shore, beckoning Forbisher to come to them; which he had done, had not great numbers of the Natives appear’d too soon from an Ambuscade in a Wood, and behind a Hill, who seeing themselves discover’d, march’d up into the Countrey, three onely staying on the Shore, of whom the middlemost feigning to be lame, at last fell down, whom his Companions took up, and carried a little way, but then forsook, by which the English observing their Design, shot that the Sand flew all about him; whereupon forgetting his Lameness, he ran as swift as a Deer up a Hill.

Forbisher’s Men had by this time fill’d two Barrels with a Mineral not unlike Gold, but was afterwards found to be of little value. Nothing else of Remark did he find here, except great long-hair’d Men, who being exceeding salvage, subtilly plot nothing else but to murder, lurking for Men, like Wild Beasts for their Prey, whom, when caught, they tear in pieces. Close fitted to their Bodies, they wore the Skins of several Wild Beasts, priding in the Tails which hung down betwixt their Legs. Their Tents are of conjoyn’d Whalebones, cover’d over with the like Skins, the Entrance always facing the South. They use Bowes, Arrows, Slings, and two sorts of Boats: In the biggest they can carry seventeen Men, which are made of several Wooden Planks clinch’d together, and cased on both sides with Leather: The smallest ones are cover’d just in the same manner, much resembling a Weavers Shuttle, having in the middle a Hole, wherein a Man sits, who drawing the Cover of the Boat about his Waste by Strings, with one Oar makes swift Passage.

The Countrey it self is barren, yet feeds abundance of Deer, Hares, Wolves, Bears, and Dogs like Wolves, whose Flesh serves the Inhabitants for Food.

This Countrey seems to be exceedingly troubled with great Earthquakes, because several pieces of Rocks, and whole Mountains rent asunder, may be seen in divers places.

The fourth of August, Forbisher having elevated the Pole to sixty eight Degrees, beyond what Sebastian Cabot, the first Discoverer of those Parts, and set out by Henry the Seventh, had done (for America Northward never before had been so far penetrated) and laden with a sort of shining Sand, which he believ’d might contain much of a Golden Oar, having with him three of the Natives, viz. a Man, a Woman, and a Child, set Sail for England, and the seventh of September came to Milford-Haven, and not long after arriv’d in London, where in short time the Salvages died.

Sir Francis Drake’s Expedition.

At the same time when Forbisher sail’d Northerly, Sir Francis Drake also, fitted out by Queen Elizabeth, steer’d another Course, sailing by Cape Blanko and Cape Verde, along the African Coast, to Brasile, where he caught several Sea-Wolves, and Anchoring in the River La Plata, furnish’d himself with Fresh Water: Then proceeding on his Voyage through the crooked Straights of Magellan, he came to an Anchor before Moucha, wash’d by the South Sea. The Islanders receiv’d him very courteously, because they were inform’d that the English were at great Wars with the Spaniards, to avoid whose Cruelties, they had deserted the main Continent, and setled on Moucha. One of these Mouchaners going aboard, serv’d them for a Pilot to the Haven Valparizo, where Drake burnt the St. Jago, a small Village, and plundring all the Countrey about it, got together a great Treasure of Gold and Silver. Before Arica he took three Spanish Ships, richly laden; and before Lima, four more, having an unvaluable Treasure of Pearls and Gold aboard them. Thus inrich’d, he steer’d his Course Northerly to forty two Degrees; but the Cold forcing him to fall four Degrees to the Southward, he discover’d a very pleasant and inhabited Coast, the People whereof shew’d him great kindness: The King himself coming aboard with a great Train, set a Crown of Gold upon Drakes Head, and gave him a Golden Scepter, and an Ivory Chain. After this he inspected the Islands Tidor, Ternata, Java, Zeilon, and Cape de Bona Esperanza, from whence, after a three Years Voyage, having encompass’d the World, he came safe to London, where he rested not long; for sailing Anno 1585. to America, he took great Prizes from the Cities St. Jago, St. Domingo, St. Augustin, and Carthagena, setting them all on Fire. Thus again returning home victoriously, and after the famous defeat of the Spanish Armado, he rigg’d out a new Fleet, having for his Vice-Admiral Captain Hawkins: Their Design was to have sail’d to Panama; but both dying, and so the Commission ceasing, the expected great and golden Project also died with them.

Candish his Expedition.

A Year after the death of these famous Navigators, Captain Thomas Candish Mann’d with a hundred and twenty Men, and Provisions for two Years, setting sail in a lucky Hour, a second time encompass’d the World, passing the Straights of Magellan; in which Voyage having got above ten times the value of his Charge, by taking the Spanish Carrack St. Anna, valued at twenty Tun of Gold; and at last freighted with a Mass of Treasure, he came safe into the River of Thames.

Smith’s Voyage.

But much worse success had Captain John Smith, who weigh’d Anchor Anno 1614. with two Ships, fitted out by several Merchants in London, for New-England, and on the Island Monachigga to load Copper, Gold, and other Minerals that were to be had there, and also to fish for Whales: But there were no such Minerals to be found there, nor any Whales to be taken on the Coast, because the time of the Year was past; so that he return’d home without Success. However, not long after, they undertook the same Expedition a second time, but with worse Fortune; for being gotten in sight of Virginia, he was treacherously set upon, and taken by the French, who accus’d him, that he had destroy’d the Plantations in Nova Francia, and unless he would make satisfaction for the Damage, they threatned him with death. He was carried Prisoner to Rochel, in a French Ship; but not far from thence surpris’d by a mighty Storm, Smith finding an opportunity, leap’d into the Boat, and driving betwixt the Waves, at last, half dead, was thrown upon the Island of Oleron, whom afterwards, having lost all, an English Ship took in, and brought to his Native Countrey.

Sect. XV.
Netherland Expedition by Jaques Mahu, and Simon de Cordes.

Mahu’s Voyage.

Five Ships being fitted out at Rotterdam, the Command of them was given to Jaques Mahu and Simon de Cordes, who on the twenty seventh of June, Anno 1598. weigh’d Anchor from the Goree, and sail’d on an immense Voyage; at last landing at the Island St. Jago, they won a strong Castle there, and took two Barques; but at last Articled with the Portuguese, that they might undisturb’d supply themselves with Fresh Water, yet they, as if they minded no Agreements, whilst the Dutch were filling their Casks, came down upon them with two hundred Horse, each having a Foot-Soldier behind him; but the Hollanders made so stout resistance, that they put them all to flight.

The City of St. Jago, which gives Denomination to the whole Island, is built long-wise, having a convenient Haven, like a Crescent: Through the City glides a River, on both sides of which, beyond the Town, arise several high Mountains: That part which faces the Sea, hath Fortifications, defended with strong Bulwarks. The Portuguese had brought all their Guns to bear towards the Sea, to sink the Holland Ships, which they invited thither under pretence of kindness; but a great Storm hindred the Fleet, that they could not Anchor at the appointed place; onely two of the Ships sail’d pretty near, but not within Shot.

From hence steering to the Desolate Island Brava, they saw nothing but five ruin’d Houses, the Door of one stopp’d up with great Stones, which being taken away, was found full of Turkish Wheat, which prov’d a great kindness to the Sea-men.

Mahu dies.

Cordes his Voyage.

Mean while the Admiral Mahu died, and his Body put into a Chest fill’d up with Stones, was thrown over-board; so that Simon des Cordes carrying the Flag, steer’d his Course to Guinee, there to refresh himself; for most of his Men were so weakned by the Scurvey, that they were scarce able to hand the Sails.

Strange King in Guinee.

Arriving at their intended Port, the Sick were carried ashore; and the Vice-Admiral Beuningen, being conducted by a French Guide, went to the Vice-Roy of that Countrey, who sat on a low Bench, with a Sheeps-skin under his Feet, in a Violet-colour’d Cloth Suit, without any Linnen, Shirt, Shoes, or Stockins; on his Head a Cap made of yellow, red, and blue Eastern Cloth; his Face whitened with Ashes, shew’d in several places its natural blackness, appearing through the Colours; about his Neck a Collar or Chain of Glass Beads: Behind him sat his Nobles, with Cocks Feathers on their Heads, and their Skins painted Red.

Beuningen plac’d by the King on a Mat, complain’d to him, That the Guineans fled from him where-ever he came, though in Friendship, to barter European Commodities with them, against Fruits, Poultrey, Sheep, and other Provisions: Whereupon the King promis’d to furnish him therewith, and invited Beuningen to Dinner. After some stay, the Kings Wives entred the Palace, a very mean and ill-favour’d Building, more like a great Barn than a Kings House, and plac’d a kind of nasty Trough on the Ground, in which lay nothing but some wild Herbs, and a piece of a smoak’d Sea-Calf; and though he was a Person of the largest size, and corpulent, yet he eat sparingly. Beuningen, though exceeding hungry, found little rellish in such kind of Meats; wherefore spreading a Napkin, his Attendants brought him some Bisket and Spanish Wine, whereof after the King had tasted, he lik’d so well the rellish, that it rock’d him asleep, whilst Beuningen walk’d to the Sea-side to refresh himself; but the Guineans coming about him, he was forc’d to return to the King, who waking at the noise, appear’d highly incens’d at his People, and took Beuningen into his House: However the Subjects, notwithstanding the Kings Commands, when Beuningen was sent into a neighboring Hut, kept Watch about it all Night: The next Morning early an old Woman entred, muttering to her self, and went out and in to Beuningen three times one after another, knocking on a Box not unlike a Pair of Bellows, out of which flew abundance of Dust about Beuningen, which caus’d a great Laughter amongst the Guineans. The King also coming to him, presented him with two Goats, and four Hens, and so conducted him back to the Ships.

Bloody Sea, very strange.

Salvages in the Straights of Magellan.

Beuningen seeing that there was no good to be done, set sail from thence, and coming before the River La Plata in America, it appear’d Blood-red. Out of the Water which was taken up in Buckets, started a sort of Insects like Fleas, which caus’d a strange and sad Distemper amongst the Sea-men, that when any Meat was offer’d to them, so soon as ever they put it to their Mouths, they would fall down backwards in a swoon, foaming and frothing at the Mouth, and turning up the White of their Eyes, die distracted. Suffering under this Disaster, they hasted from thence with all speed, and sailing into the Straights of Magellan they kill’d above fourteen hundred Penguyins, which is a Bird that preys on Fish, and lives in Holes under Ground; they somewhat resemble a Goose, onely they stand more upright, and are double-crested, with two plumy Combs. Coming to an Anchor in the Green-Bay, there arose a great Storm, which continued several days, so that they were forc’d to moor their Vessels with four Anchors, extremely afflicted both with Hunger and Cold, preserving themselves alive by eating young Grout, at that time not above a span high from the Ground; but this course Food bred an incurable Dropsie, that posted them on to a sudden death. Afterwards, when the Weather grew more pleasant, the Inhabitants being Gyants, most of them eleven Foot high, grew more troublesom, oftentimes assailing them, and throwing Darts pointed like Harping-Irons, at which they were very expert. Their Salvage Natures may appear by their Dealings with the dead Hollanders, cutting off their Heads, and bruising them to pieces, sticking Darts through their Hearts, and cutting off their Privities.

A wild Woman.

At last the Fleet getting into the South Sea, were by stress of Weather separated one from another: Two Ships, being the Faith, and the Good Tydings, were driven back into the Straights of Magellan, where they suffer’d the uttermost extremity of Hunger: Here they took a wild Woman, and two Children, who being of a sallow Complexion, had a great hanging Belly, a wide Mouth, crooked Legs, long Heels, and Breasts like Cows Udders; about her Neck a String of Snail-shells, and upon her Back a Beasts Skin, fastned about her Neck with the Sinews of it; her Food nought else but live Fowls: The same Diet the Children fed upon: The youngest being but six Months old, had his Mouth full of Teeth, and ran without any help: The eldest they carried to Amsterdam; but having kept the Woman aboard two Nights, they gave her several Trifles, and set her ashore. Here they found old Ice in the middle of Summer, four Foot thick.

Beuningen lingred in the Straights of Magellan, and being tired out with Hunger, Cold, and Storms, return’d home; and had they not by accident taken abundance of Coneys, they had all perish’d. Above two Years had this unhappy Voyage lasted, when they arriv’d at their Native Countrey, with six and thirty Men, being all that remain’d alive of a hundred and five.

Sect. XVI.
The Expedition of Oliver van Noord.

Porto Desire.

Two Months after Mahu, Oliver Van Noord set sail with four Ships, and two Sea-Dogs. hundred forty eight Men, from the Maes. Having reach’d the Princes Island, he lost seven of his Men by the Treachery of the Portuguese; and Anchoring before the City Javeiro, he was no better entertain’d by the same Nation: Here having a Rencounter, and both Sides receiving considerable Loss, he steer’d for St. Sebastian, a fruitful Island, producing an Herb very wholesom against the Scurvey: Here the Sea-men found great store of Sea-Mews, and Parrots, besides several sorts of delicious Fish. The approaching Winter advis’d them from entring the Straights of Magellan so late; wherefore they judg’d it best to seek a convenient Harbor, to put their Sick ashore to refresh themselves. The Island St. Hellen, for its fruitfulness, seem’d to be the most convenient for this purpose; but a great Storm preventing them, they came to St. Clara, where taking in Fresh Water, they cast Anchor in Porto Desire. In this Haven they saw a kind of Sea-Dogs, whose fore-parts being overgrown with long Hair, seem’d like a Lyon, and the Feet like Mens Hands; over their Eyes and Upper-lips grew black and white Hair, which in Stormy Weather stands staring upright, but in Calm, lies flat and smooth; they Urine backwards, sleep very soundly, and cast their Young every Month: Their Flesh well-boyl’d prov’d a savory Dish.

Strange Tombs.

Van Noord going ashore here, saw not a Man; but only Burying-places on high Rocks, built of red Stones, and adorn’d both within and without with Bowes, Arrows, and other strange things: Under the Heads of the Dead lay four-square Shells, and other things artificially carv’d. Curiosity made them desirous to make a further search into the Countrey; wherefore he rowed during a whole Tide up a River; and when their Boat ran aground at the time of Ebb, he walk’d several Leagues up into the Countrey, where he saw nothing but Deer, Buffles, and Ostriches: and because he saw no People, he judg’d the Coast to be uninhabited; but returning again, he found it otherwise; for the Sea-men, though commanded to stay in the Boat, which lay in the middle of the River, went ashore, where they were so fiercely set upon by thirty of the Natives, that three of them were kill’d, and another wounded in the Leg. These People are very strong and Salvage, with painted Faces, and long Hair; but after this Encounter, they saw no more of them.

But Van Noord having spent fourteen Months in search, and lost a hundred Men, set sail again with three Ships; for one of them, being the Unity, he burnt at the Island Clara, where he Winter’d, because of a great Leak which could not be stopp’d. Here they brought five thousand Fowls aboard, which much increased their Stock of Provisions.

From hence parting the Wide Ocean, into the Straights of Magellan, four times the Fleet attempted to go into the South-Sea, and was as often driven back by cross Weather into the Straights; but the fifth time prov’d more successful; for having got through, and left the Straights a handsom way astern, they discover’d two Islands, from one of which the Sea-men going aland, brought four Boys and two Girls; who afterward instructed in their Tongue, inform’d them concerning the scituation of the Countreys thereabout.

Philip-Stadt forsaken through famine.

After that, the Fleet Sail’d into Hungers Haven, where they found the ruines of the deserted Philip-Stadt, which Captain Thomas Candish had seen fourteen years before, fortifi’d with four Bulwarks; but now onely some Houses, a Church, and a Gibbet were standing: Four hundred Spaniards built that City, as a Key to the Straights of Magellan. But all their Provisions being spent in three years time, and no relief coming from Spain, and what they Sow’d expecting the hopes of a Harvest, the Salvages coming down by night destroy’d; which caus’d so great a Famine to rage amongst them, that many dy’d, not so much as putting off their Clothes, who lying in the Houses unbury’d, occasion’d such a stench in the City, that the remainder fled into the Field; where they liv’d a whole year by the Fruits of the Trees, Herbs, and Roots: At last, three and twenty of them, amongst which were two Women remaining yet alive, resolv’d to travel to the River La Plata and accordingly set forward, but what became of them could never yet be heard, only one Ferdinando that was of that company, accidentally wandring from the rest, happen’d to light upon Candish’s Fleet.

Mocha, what kind of Island.

Here Van Noord set on Shore the Vice-Admiral Jacob Claeszoon Ilpendam, for some crimes which he had committed; and leaving him behind, Sail’d from thence thorow the South-Sea along the Coast of Chili and Mocha; which Island, of a considerable bigness, rises in the middle with a forked Mountain, from which a convenient River comes flowing down into the Countrey.

Cica, a strange Drink.

The Inhabitants conducted the Hollanders to their Village, consisting of about fifty Houses built of Straw, but were forbid to go into their Huts: Upon the Mens call the Women appear’d, which being divided into three parties, humbly kneel’d down before them; and soon after an old Woman brought an Earthen Can full of Cica, a Liquor made of Mays, whose extracted Juyce, boyl’d and put into Tubs, ferments like our Beer or Ale, with a cap of Barm, with which they treated the Hollanders, who drinking moderately, were well refresh’d; but the Natives will ply this Liquor, till they make themselves Distracted, and are mad Drunk.

Van Noord takes a Spanish Ship.

From hence Van Noord steer’d his course to Sancta Maria, where in his way he took a Spanish Ship, call’d Buon Jesus, that is, Good Jesus, and receiv’d intelligence from the Prisoners, that the Admiral Simon de Cordes, with twenty three Men was kill’d by the Americans on the Promontory Lavapia, being the head Land or Point opposite to St. Maries; that a year since, tydings were brought to Lima of his Fleet; so that they had made all things ready to withstand him. But Van Noord hinder’d by strong contrary Winds, not able to reach Sancta Maria, stood directly for St. Jago, in whose Haven lay a great Spanish Ship full of Indians, and two other going in, which two he set on Fire, and the third he Tow’d towards his Fleet; repenting extremely that he had given liberty, and set Francisco de Ivarro Commander of the Buon Jesus ashore; because he afterwards understood from the Spanish Pilot, that Ivarra threw ten thousand two hundred pound weight of Gold, pack’d in fifty two Cases, over-board, when he observ’d that he was like to loose his Ship.

The Fleet Sailing forward came to an Anchor before the Thieves-Island, whose Inhabitants are very light Finger’d, go stark naked, and are of great strength; they found the Women much Disfigur’d, their Noses, Lips, and Cheek-bones eaten by the French Pox.

Performs great things.

In the Bay La Baya, the Dutch Admiral, with a Spanish Flag on his top-Mast, sent one of his Sea-men in a Fryers garb ashore, if possible under that disguise, to get Provisions; which falling out according to their Design, they were supply’d with all manner of Victuals: After that, the Hollanders burnt five Villages on the Island Capull; took a Chinesy Vessel, one Spanish Barque, and a Carvel Laden with Brandy from Cocos; and after a great and bloody Fight sunk the Admiral of the Manilla’s, and so at last with various fortunes arriv’d at Rotterdam, having in three years encompass’d the World.

Sect. XVIa.
The Expedition of George Van Spilbergen.

Anno 1614. the eighth of August, the East-India Company of the United Netherlands set out seven Ships under the Command of George Spilbergen, who coming to Cape St. Vincent, and engaging with the Portuguese, took one of their Ships, and so proceeded on his Voyage to the Straights of Magellan, but by a huge Storm, the Fleet was separated. Amongst those that were scatter’d was the good Ship call’d Meruw, in which some of the crew had conspir’d to have kill’d the Master, and seiz’d the Vessel; but he having some inkling thereof, set so stoutly upon two of the chief Contrivers with his drawn Hanger, that he forc’d them to leap over-board, and as stoutly ordering the rest, set all to rights.

Strange Corps.

But Spilbergen Landing on one of the Penguyn Islands, found two Dead Bodies just cover’d with Earth, about their Necks was a Chain of glistering Snail Shells neatly strung; the Grave stuck full of Bowes and Arrows, was pleasant to look upon, between several high Mountains, whose tops lay bury’d in Snow: The Fleet came out of the Straights of Magellan, but not without great danger, for the South-Sea much disturb’d by tempestuous Weather, seem’d to raise its Waves up to the Sky, so that they had enough to do, from being ingag’d among the Rocks: But at last with great difficulty, wonderfully escaping all danger, they Anchor’d before La Mocha, an Island which on the North side lies low, and on the South defended by Rocks.

Spilbergen in great danger.

Strange sheep.

Spilbergen seeing abundance of Men standing on the Shore, Row’d thither to Barter for Merchandize, amongst them was a Sheep with a long Neck, bunch-Back’d like a Camel, a little Mouth, and long Legs; which Beast serves them in stead of Horses, to carry their burthens, and perform their Tillage. The Americans breed up these Sheep every where, by reason of the extraordinary benefit they receive from them, some of them keeping no less than eighteen hundred. Their Shepherds ride upon a Beast almost like an Ox, and carry in their hands Copper-plates, hung round about with Bells, which they shake, making a different noise when their Sheep shall go in or out; and on their Heads wear Feathers like Coronets, standing upright.

St. Maries burnt.

And also Val Parysa.

From thence, Spilbergen departing, Landed at last on the Island of St. Mary, where he burnt all the Spanish Villages; as he did also in Val Parysa.

After going ashore, in the Haven Quintero, he saw abundance of Wild Horses drinking out of a Rivulet, supply’d with fresh Water from an adjoyning steep Mountain; so soon as they espy’d Men, they instantly running away, were seen no more.

Bloody fight between the Hollanders and Spanish Fleet.

Having left Quintero, and spent a Moneth in Sailing farther, they discry’d eight great Ships; whereupon the Prisoners inform’d them, that it was the Spanish Fleet, of which Roderigo de Mendoza was Admiral, fitted out on purpose to fight Spilbergen, whose coming (as we said) was known a year before. At midnight Mendoza Boarded Spilbergen, but was so roughly receiv’d, that he was forc’d to Retreat with the loss of the Ship St. Francisco. At Day-break, the Holland Admiral fir’d at Mendoza, who answering with equal courage, occasion’d a smart Engagement, wherein the Spaniards were so hard beset, that they put forth a White Flag; but it was immediately taken in again by the Commanders aboard, choosing rather to die, than surrender, because they had mock’d at Mendoza, when he hinted the difficulty of the Enterprize in the Grand Peruvian Councel, saying, They went out, onely to take a few disabled Hollanders, and tying them hand and feet, carry them to Execution. Yet their high and proud Stomachs prov’d very fatal to them, for afterwards totally routed and put to flight, most of them sunk by the way.

Calyow de Lima.

This done, the Hollanders victoriously Sail’d to Calyow de Lima, having a convenient Haven: The City adorn’d with curious Houses and Temples, is strengthen’d by a Platform, Planted with great Guns towards the Sea, and the Shore was guarded by eight Troops of Horse, and four thousand Foot; whereupon Spilbergen, who was yet to go so great a Voyage, judg’d it no way convenient to adventure the loss of all on the good or bad event of a Battel, especially being so much over-power’d by the number of the Enemy: Wherefore seeing no hopes of Victory, setting forward to Guarma, he got some fresh Provisions.

Peyta burnt.

Against the City Peyta, he play’d his Cannon with such fury, that the Townsmen deserted the place, which he observing, set it on fire, and Sail’d to Aquapulque, where from the Fort at first the Spaniards fired some Guns at them; but soon after changing humor, they came to an Accommodation, furnishing the Hollanders with convenient Provisions. Passing on, and coming to Selaques, both Natives and Spaniards having suffer’d some of the Hollanders to Land; after set upon them treacherously in a Thicket, but to their little advantage, for they made so good a Defence, that the Assailants not able to bear the brunt, fled with great loss.

Spilbergen Sailing from hence to the Manilla’s, waited there for the Spanish Admiral Juan de Silva, who had made (as was reported) great preparations for him long since; but seeing it was in vain, at last he return’d to Zealand where he came to an Anchor, loaden with Riches, in the middle of Summer, Anno 1617.

Sect. XVII.
The Expedition of William Corneliszon Schouten, and Jacob Le Maire.

Mabrabomma, what manner of Isle.

Some Merchants that were call’d the Austrian Company, fitted out one Schouten in great danger. Ship with sixty five, and a Ketch with two and twenty Sea-men, giving Incredible many Eggs. the Command thereof to the Captains Schouten and Le Maire: Anno 1615. they Great Corps. Weigh’d Anchor from the Texel; the first took a view of one of the three Ketch burnt. Islands, call’d Mabrabomma, lying before Cape Sierra Leona. This Island appearing Strange Horn. a great height out of the Sea, was not inhabited, they seeing onely three Wild Buffles, many Wild Cats, Birds which bark’d like Dogs, Wild Palm-Trees, Lemon-Trees, Turtles, Crocodiles, Partridges, and Storks: From hence, passing by the dangerous Shelf Abrolhos, they ran into Porto Desire, where on the Rocks they found abundance of Eggs, and Spierings, or Smelts, and Spiregrass sixteen Inches long, wherefore they call’d that Inlet Spierings-Bay. Their Sloop also brought two Sea-Lions, and one hundred and fifty Penguins from the Penguin Isles, having Sail’d two Leagues up the River; in the interim, the ground being meer Stone, and their Anchors coming home, the great Ship drove against a Rock, and at Ebbing Water, broke off the outermost Planks and Iron-Work, and the Ketch also striking on a high Shelf, was at low Ebb two Fathom with her Keel above the Water, and had without peradventure been overset, and bilg’d, but a fresh North-West Wind kept her upright, yet at last, the Weather growing calm, she lean’d, but the Tide coming in very fast, set her afloat, so that she was miraculously sav’d; then setting Sail again to King’s-Island, they found so many Eggs of black Mews, that one without stirring from his place, might reach above fifty Nests, and in each of them at least three Eggs, which they carry’d aboard by thousands. Their Boat Rowing Southerly down the River, found some Ostriches, and Beasts not unlike Stags, but with exceeding long Necks. On the Hills lay Stones heap’d one upon another, which removing, they found Dead Bodies of eleven Foot long; here they spent their time in cleansing their Ships, and new Sheathing the Ketch, but as they were Tallowing, the Flame accidentally got between the Crevisses which immediately taking Fire, in a short time consum’d it to Ashes: The great Ship had gotten a Horn in her Bow, seven Foot under Water; this Horn being firm without any hollowness, and not unlike a great Elephants Tooth, struck thorow two Ashen and one Oaken Plank, sticking in a Rib of the like Wood, and yet above half a Foot remain’d out to be seen.

Great Mews.

At length Schouten Weighing Anchor from Porto Desire, and Sailing to four and fifty Degrees Southern Latitude, met whole Shoals of Whales, insomuch, that he was fain to Tacque to and again to shun them. Sea-Pies, bigger than Swans, came flying in great numbers aboard, suffering themselves to be taken with the hand. On the North-side they spy’d a high and scraggy Coast spreading it self to the East South-East, which they call’d, The States Countrey, that which lay to the Westward of it, Maurice of Nassau, the Islands in fifty seven Degrees Barnevield’s Isles, and the sharp Point in which lay the Snowy Mountains, Southward of the Magellan Straights end, the Cape of Hoorn.

Straights Le Maire.

Schouten had now gotten the height of fifty nine Degrees, when he enter’d the South-Sea, through the new passage between Mauritius and the States-Countrey, which was call’d from his Partner, The Straights of Le Maire.

Isles in the South-Sea.

Near the two Isles Juan Fernando, they found great store of Fish, after that they view’d these Islands, that lay scatter’d up and down the South-Sea, each of them they nam’d according to their several occasions, calling the first, The Isle of Dogs, because they have abundance of Dogs there that could not bark: Another, The Bottomless Island, because the Sea was so deep about it, that they could not come to an Anchor. The Inhabitants who go naked, with their Skins pounced full of strange shapes, of blue Snakes, Dragons, and such like Creatures, Salli’d out of the Woods upon the Hollanders with great Clubs, to which was fasten’d the Sword or Snout of a Sword-Fish, and also with Slings.

Somewhat further they came to Water-Land, and Flyes-Island, the first so nam’d, because the Shore round about was planted with Trees, but in the middle all lay cover’d with Salt-Water; the other from the Flyes, which with incredible numbers troubled the Sea-men four days together.

Strange entertainment at the Horn Islands.

Moreover, the Reception or Entertainment which Schouten was welcom’d withal, at the Hoorn-Islands, being very remarkable, we will in brief relate:

Anchoring in nine Fathom Water, Shelly ground, before a fresh Rivulet, three Hollanders sent to the King were by him courteously entertain’d, who with strange humility, not bow’d, but kissing their Feet fell flat on the ground, and put the Hollanders Feet upon his Neck; and after this manner of Salutation, waited upon them aboard: Yet although this King fawn’d so much, and seem’d so humble, yet he was very severe over his Subjects, for finding one that had filch’d a Sword, he not onely brought and restor’d it, but immediately Executed the Thief before their Faces.

Le Maire and Arias Claeszoon were much honor’d here, for the old and young King put their Crowns on their Heads, curiously Wrought of fine White Feathers, and the end adorn’d with small Red and Green Feathers; they gave also to each of them a Pigeon, White to their Wings, the hinder part Black, and under their Bellies Red.

In the interim, the King of Water-Island visited the other, by whom Le Maire was treated: When they met, they made strange shews of Honor to each other, but at last shew’d their Salvageness by eating raw Fish, and rudely Dancing before the Hollanders. Le Maire going into the Countrey, and climbing up a high Mountain, saw nothing but Morass Wilds, and Vallies, lying under Water: The King and his Retinue here kept him company, during his stay there, when weary with walking, they sate down together under Coco-Nut-Trees; the young King tying a String about his Leg, climb’d with exceeding dexterity up a high Tree, bringing several Coco-Nuts down with him, which he open’d very expeditiously.

Arias Claeszoon, Rowing ashore one night, found the King sitting under a Roof, resting on four Pillars, where several Naked Women Danc’d before him according to their Musick, which was Taboring upon a hollow Piece of Wood, which yielded a murmuring sound without any distinct Tune.

Cava a strange Liquor.

Impudent Women.

But the two Kings meeting again, the next day Complemented one another with more antick and ridiculous Postures, sitting side by side under the Roof, imploring their God, with their Hands folded, and their Heads bow’d to the ground: At this interview, four Holland Trumpeters and Drummers stood playing before the King, to the great admiration and amazement of the Islanders, which were near ten thousand gather’d together upon the News of the strangers to attend the two Kings. Soon after a great company of Rusticks came running thither, which had a green Herb call’d Cava, ty’d about their middle; on a sudden they began all to chaw this Cava, throwing that which they had chaw’d into a large Woodden Trough, then putting Water to it, they Kneaded it together; which done, brought the Liquor on their Heads to the two Kings, before whom they kneel’d when they gave them any: Yet notwithstanding they receiv’d such honor from their Subjects, they shew’d servile respects to the Hollanders, for every King presented them with a Pig, which they first laid on their Heads, then kneeling, put it down at Le Maire’s Feet, and bowing their Heads to the ground, rose again. They wear their Hair long, which Brayded, hung on the left side of their Heads down to their Hips, ty’d at the end with two Knots; but the Nobility had two such Locks: All of them went naked, their Privities onely cover’d. The smallest of the Men exceeded the biggest of the Hollanders in tallness. The Women had long Breasts hanging like Satchels down to their Bellies, and so unshamefac’d, that they prostituted themselves to any, in sight of all Men; and still at low Water, their business was to catch Fish, which they greedily eat raw.

Strange wild men.

Deform’d people.

After all this Entertainment, Weighing from hence, Schouten Sail’d along the Coast of New-Guiny, where three Boats full of Negro’s came Rowing towards them, Slinging very fiercely Stones at them, and hovering about, attended their motion all night. Next morning, seven Boats more coming to their assistance, they set upon the Hollanders, but soon fled from their Bullets; yet two of the Negro’s were taken, that in each Nostril wore a Ring. Sailing further, several Boats came aboard of them, whereof those that Row’d, breaking their Assagays or Launces over their Heads, enter’d the Ship; the Hair of their Heads and Beards bedawb’d with Lime, flew about, whilst they Danc’d on the Decks, after they had eaten a good Meal: But they endeavor’d to reward this their kind Entertainment with Treachery, for going ashore, they soon after return’d in greater numbers, and sat upon the Anchors which lay over the Bows of the Ship, and there being a great calm, endeavor’d to Towe the Ship towards the Shore, whilst others threw Stones and Arrows. But so soon as the Hollanders firing their Guns Wounded several of them, they all fled, except some which they took Prisoners, whereof one whom they afterwards call’d Moses, did them great service.

But Le Maire was amaz’d at nothing more, than when on the next Coast he saw several little Houses built about nine Foot high, out of which many People issu’d, which were all deform’d, either having Wry Noses, Bow Legs, Squint Eyes, or crooked Backs, and all in one part or another mis-shapen.

At last, Anchoring before Jacatra, the Ship was stopt there by order of the East-India Company, and the Men divided and put aboard those Ships that Sail’d from India to Holland, and arriv’d in safety at Flushing, after they had Sail’d about the World, in two years and eighteen days.

Sect. XVIII.
Voyage of the Nassavian Fleet, under the Command of Jaques L’Heremite, and Geen Huigo Schapenham.

Remarkable Exploits of L’Hermite.

The United Netherlands, to abate the Spanish Greatness, set out a considerable Fleet, which they sent to try their fortune, in making Prize of what ever they could light upon in any of their Havens wash’d by the South-Sea.

Jaques L’Hermite had ten Ships under his Command, Mann’d with sixteen hundred thirty seven Men, and two hundred ninety four Brass and Iron Guns, with which he set Sail from Goree, Anno 1623. and coming before Cape Vincent, he discover’d eleven Turkish Pirates, whom fighting, he beat, and re-took the Holland Ships they had made Prize of.

At Roxents Head, L’Hermite gave chase to fifteen Spanish Ships, and coming up with them, sunk eleven, and took four laden with Sugar. Afterwards Anchoring at Safia, he sent the Ship Over-yssel, and a Frigat call’d the Gray-Hound, to Convoy home the Prizes; afterward being inform’d, that thirty Spanish Ships were making to them, Sailing into the Haven St. Vincent, the Spring Water that he supply’d his empty Cask with being brakkish, caus’d an excoriation of the Guts, which brought the Bloody-Flux, whereby he lost many of his Sea-men; being well entertain’d by the Salvages of Antonio, they went on to Sierra Leona, a Mountainous Point full of Lime-Trees, here they found the Names of Sr. Francis Drake, and other English cut in a Rock.

After that he put in at the fruitful Island Annabon, where he caus’d his Chirurgeon to be Beheaded.

Vegar a wicked man.

This wicked Man being brought to the Torture, would confess nothing concerning the Crimes objected against him, but being strip’d for Execution, they found a small Bag hanging on his Breast, in which lay a Serpents Skin and Tongue, with which he had Poyson’d several Men, but he confess’d nothing.

The first of February, the Fleet came to Cape de Pemias, which they know at a great distance, by its high Mountains cover’d with Snow.

In short time after, Sailing by the Mouth of the Straights of La Maire, they met with very tempestuous Weather, and seventeen of their Men going ashore, were devour’d by the Cannibals of Terra del Fuogo. These People being all Whites, and of a large Stature, Paint themselves Red, and go stark naked, except some of highest quality who tie a Deer Skin about their Necks; and the Women cover their Nakedness with a piece of Leather: They live in Bowers made of the Branches of Trees, Stak’d three Foot deep, in a round at bottom, and above like our Tents, Canopy’d, the top of which open, to carry out the Smoke like a Chimney; and have no other Houshold-stuff than some Baskets, in which they lay their few Fishing Implements. They go continually Arm’d with Clubs, Arrows, Slings, and Stone-Knives: Their Boats being only the Trunk of a Tree made hollow, rise up before and behind like a Half-Moon, and are fourteen, and some sixteen Foot long, and two broad, and Row swifter than a Pinnace with many Oars. Lastly, they are so Salvage, that they seem rather to be Beasts than Men, knowing no Religion, ill Natur’d, cruel and Treacherous.

From hence, passing on, L’Hermite refresh’d at the desolate Isle Fernando, and so Steer’d his Course to Calla de Lima, on whose Coast, taking a Spanish Vessel, the Prisoners told him, that their Plate-Fleet had Weigh’d Anchor, and were gone to Panama; only the Admiral which carry’d forty Brass Guns, with fifty Merchant-Men, lay close under the Shore, Guarded by three Stone Bulwarks, Fortifi’d with fifty Guns.

L’Hermite having a design upon these, took three Spanish Vessels that were going thither, and at midnight, sent Captain Adrian Tol, Peter Slobbe, and Meindert Egbertszon, with twelve well Mann’d Boats, furnish’d with Brass Drakes, and Hand-Granado’s, to Attaque the Spanish Fleet that lay hard by; and whilst some gave a false Alarm on the North of Callao, the Boats Rowing from Ship to Ship, in short time fir’d forty of them; although the Spaniards from the Shore endeavor’d by their Shot to drive back the Enemy, neither the Fort or Admiral sparing Powder nor Ball.

In this valiant Exploit the Hollanders had onely seven Men kill’d, and fifteen Wounded: About break of day, seven of the Spanish Ships floated, burning towards the Dutch Fleet, which were as terrible as now Fire-ships, which forc’d them to Weigh Anchor to shun them.

After that, L’Hermite took two Ships laden with Wine, a third full of Wood, and a fourth with Wheat: One of these Prizes he fitted and prepar’d for a Fire-ship, and sending her to Board the Spanish Admiral, it ran aground within shot of him; whereupon being batter’d by the Admirals Guns, and those from the Bulwarks, and at last taking Fire gave but a small blow, because most part of the Powder had taken Wet.

In this interim, while thus their design went prosperously on, their Admiral L’Heremite dy’d, whom they Bury’d on the Island Lima, and Schapenham, in defiance of the Vice-Roy in Callao, caus’d one and twenty Spaniards to be hang’d at the Yard-Arm, because he had sent him a scornful Answer on the Proposals concerning the delivery of the Prisoners.

Vershoor’s Exploit.

Schapenham’s remarkable Exploits.

Schapenham dies.

Cornelius Jacobszoon Sailing to Pisco with four Sail from the Fleet, could do no good there, for he not onely found the City to be surrounded with a Wall of fifteen Foot high, but having also many Earthen Redoubts, behind which lay above two thousand arm’d Men, wherefore he deserted the same after some Rancounters: But the Rear-Admiral, John Williamszoon Vershoor, who was sent to Gainquil, had much better luck; for he not onely took that Metropolis, but also burnt a new Royal Gallion, and two lesser Vessels; carry’d a conquer’d Vessel to Lima; slew above a hundred Spaniards, and threw seventeen overboard, because they had shot Poyson’d Bullets against the Law of Arms; of which Conquest Captain Engelbert Shutte had the greatest honor: But the Sea-men grew weaker and weaker by the Scurvy, and all of them would have perish’d, had they not found a soveraign Herb on the highest Mountains of Lima. Schapenham being chose Admiral in L’Heremites place, Weigh’d Anchor from Callao, and ran into the Inlet Piscadores, where on the shore he rais’d a Sconce; yet not long after departed from thence without any effect, but lost twenty eight Men, through the bad Conduct of their Commanders; the like number he lost also at Aquapulque, on the side of which City stands a Castle with four strong Bulwarks; the Holland Fire-ship lay just without the reach of the shot, the rest lay along the shore in a row, there to seize upon the Vessels expected thither from the Manillaes: But because the Scurvy raged amongst the Sea-men, and disabled them, they waited in vain, Schapenham Sail’d through the South-Sea to the Ladrones, where he found store of Provisions. Anno 1625. in March, he drop’d Anchor before Maleye, and from thence went with Herman Spiult, the Governor for the East-India Company in Amboina, to Ceram, where they Conquer’d the Fort Lochoe, and soon after Cambella; then the Fleet being divided, Schapenham carry’d home two Ships from Batavia, and the remainder return’d at several times, they being hir’d to serve the East-India Company to Surratta, Malacca, Coromandel, and the Molucco Isles: Schapenham Deceasing near Bantum, and being Bury’d on Pulo Boftok, the Ships arriv’d at the Texel in July, Anno 1626.

Henry Brewer his Voyage.

Anno 1643. Brewer set Sail with four Ships from Reciffo, and ran close along the States-Isle, so dangerous and Rocky, that he durst not put in to the Land; from which flew great abundance of Party-colour’d Ducks, with sharp Bills, about the Ships, and under the Keels swam also Whales.

Sea Lions.

Brewer’s Haven.

Remarkable Exploits.

On the West side of the Straights Le Maire, Brown ran into Valentine’s Inlet, where he was much troubled by the Winds which came whistling through the hollow Mountains with great and sudden gusts: The shore afforded red and black Strawberries, Carville and Muscles, to the great refreshment of the Sea-men, who daily saw Sea-Lions, but could not come to shoot one of them, for no sooner they perceiv’d any body, but they Diving under Water, swam away; and though they saw Mens Foot-steps of eighteen Inches long, yet they never found any Men. Thence Sailing into the South-Sea, along the Coast of Chili, they enter’d a Bay which they nam’d Brewer’s-Haven; where Landing, they walk’d towards a great Smoke which they saw afar off, but coming near it, found only two Houses within a large Plain, full of Sheep, Oxen, and Horses; before the Houses stood Woodden Crosses.

Ter Bergen’s Exploit.

Castro a City.

Stream Chili.

Brewer Dies.

Strange accident.

Baldivia, a brave City.

The Dolphin Pink and a great Boat being sent to the Inlet, lay the following Night at an Anchor near a high Mountain; from whence, in the Night, two great Guns were fir’d, whereupon, Lieutenant William Ter Bergen Landed with sixteen Musqueteers, and climbing up the Mountain, found a Village behind the same, where all things were in Alarm, Drums beating, Trumpets sounding, Bells ringing; the Villagers suddenly firing their Guns on Ter Bergen, who being supply’d with thirty four Men, Encounter’d the Enemy so Valiantly, that he fled into the Woods, not without the loss of Men and Horses: The Guns with which they had shot in the Night lay onely on a Redoubt: Ter Bergen persuing this Victory, March’d into the Woods, and shot the Spanish Commander Andreas Munes Iserrera from his Horse, got great store of Treasure which lay hid under the Tree, being brought out of Carelmappa, which Village he set afire, and kill’d all the Horses, and Weigh’d Anchor with the Admiral Brewer to Michael de Cabuco where not being able to Land, because of the many obscure Rocks and Shoals, they set Sail to Castro, which they conquer’d and burnt without the least resistance: This City situate on a Mountain is stately built among Flowry Meadows, delightful Orchards, and brave Fountains; the Sea before it flows daily fourteen Foot. Brewer also burnt a Spanish Ship, and set some Houses afire, took three Spaniards Prisoners on Las Bahias, who inform’d him, that the Winter Season was almost over, but that it was never known by any to pass over so mildly, ill Weather generally using to blow down Houses, Trees, and rend Rocks asunder; that there was much Gold in Osorno and Baldivia, which last they had some years since deserted for hunger, but it was since Garrison’d by three hundred Castilians, that none could get at the Fort Conception (which lay a League Westerly from thence) but in a small Boat, that there were on the place near two thousand Inhabitants. Moreover, an ancient Matron call’d Lovysa Pizarra, from Quintian, one of the Isles in the Chilean In-Land-Sea, being fetch’d from thence, gave information, that forty years since, before the Indians took up Arms, the Spaniards were quietly setled in Osorno, and in so good a condition, that an ordinary Planter had at least three hundred Slaves, of which, every one was to procure a certain quantity of Gold; that the Isles Chiloves were divided into above a hundred Colonies or Plantations, the Chileses serving the Castilians as their true Governors; those that do good Service the King of the Colony makes them Commanders, and that the Chileses had Rebell’d in several places. Brewer on the Chileses request took some of them, with their Wives and Children into his Ship, furnish’d with Arms, he digg’d a Chest of Silver and a Brass Gun out of the Earth, and soon after being sick, dy’d. His Successor Elias Herkmans prosecuting those Publick Affairs, sent the Pilot of the Unity out of Brewer’s Haven, and some Sea-men, with two Chilean Casiques with a Boat to Carelmappa; but being surpriz’d by a violent Storm, stood in for Horse-Island, where he and the Casiques Landing, he order’d seven Sea-men to carry the Boat to a safer Harbor; but being driven from the shore by strong Winds it took in so much Water as fill’d and sunk it, so that all of them were drown’d. Horse-Island being destitute of Provisions and Lodgings, those that were Landed expected nothing but Death, till they found out a small Hut, and in the same six brave Sheep, and a good quantity of Potatoe Roots, which serv’d for Bread: But when this their new-found Store was almost spent, they happily were fetch’d off by the Boat belonging to the Ship Amsterdam, and with the whole Fleet came to an Anchor before Baldivia. This City built by the Castilians, consisted formerly of five hundred and fifty fair Houses, and was divided into Streets and cross Ways, with two large Markets, and as many costly Churches.

Why the Chileses grew strange to the Hollanders.

The Chileses unsufferably oppress’d, slew all the Spanish Garrison, and into the Governor’s Mouth and Ears pour’d melted Gold; of his Skull they made a Drinking-cup, and of his Shin-bones, Trumpets; after this, the City fell almost to decay, onely a great part of the Wall remain’d yet standing: The Chileans hereupon flock’d hither by thousands, some on Horses, others on Foot, all Arm’d with Lances of a Foot long: Herkman hereupon informing them by an Interpreter, that they being mortal Enemies of the Spaniards, would joyn with the Chileans against that common Foe; and desir’d, that they might build a Fort on the Market-place in Baldivia, for a defence against all Invasions, and that they might be supply’d with Provisions which the Fleet wanted; all which the Chileans granted, and accordingly brought in store of Sheep, Hogs, and Cattel: But so soon as Herkman began to make the least mention of Gold, they were all abash’d, and said, that they knew of no Gold Mines, nay, their Hair stood an end, when they heard the name of Gold; so horribly the Spaniards had dealt with their Parents: After this, the Chileans growing more and more strange, did not in the least countenance the building of the Fort, and the longer the Fleet staid, the less Provisions they brought aboard; upon which, the Ships were necessitated, without any remarkable Exploits, to set Sail and return to Reciffo.

The Second Book,
CONTAINING
A DESCRIPTION
OF
NORTHERN AMERICA

CHAP. I.
Of the Bounds of America, and of the Division of the Mexican or Northern part thereof.

The Bounds and Division of Northern America.

Having in the first part of this Volume discours’d at large concerning the original of the Americans, and whether that part of the World call’d India Occidentalis, or America, were known to the Ancients, or own its Discovery wholly to the Moderns, as also of all the Discoveries that have been made of the several parts thereof, and by whom, we shall now pass on to the Topographical part, describing every particular Province or Region, by giving an account of their Situation, Temperature, Productions, Nature of the Soil, and Quality of the Inhabitants. America, lying Westward of the Azores, and the Worlds Meridian, is by some suppos’d to consist of one vast Island, and several lesser ones, scatter’d about it: Nor can this supposition be thought vain, if, as many think, it be inviron’d on the North-side, as toward the East, South, and West it is known to be; East and South, by the Atlantick Ocean; and West, by Mar del Zur: But because the North-West Passage, though attempted by many, as Nelson, Davis, Forbisher, Button, Smith, Hudson, and others, hath not yet by any been fully discover’d; so that it is not certainly known whether America be joyn’d to Greenland, and the Arctick Region, by a continu’d Tract of Land, or sever’d by the Ocean: We shall follow the method of those Geographers, who, reputed sufficiently Authentick, have divided this new World into Islands, and two grand Peninsula’s joyn’d together by an Isthmus, or Neck of Land, call’d The Straight of Darien, by some The Straight of Panama, lying almost under the Equinoctial Line, and extending in length from Nombre de Dios Southward above a hundred Miles, and from East to West seventeen Miles over in the narrowest place. Of these two grand Peninsula’s the Northern is generally call’d America Mexicana, from Mexico the chief City of the Province, properly call’d Mexicana; which was heretofore without doubt the most potent, rich, and flourishing of all the Kingdoms of the Indians, at least on the North-side of the Isthmus. In the division of the several Provinces of America, as well those of the Northern as of the Southern Continent, we find so various an account among the several Geographers that have written of them (not any two of them agreeing in one and the same order) that to reconcile the differing methods of so many disagreeing Authors would be an endless work: wherefore we shall pitch upon the surest course, and not omitting the mention of any of the Provinces taken notice of by the said Authors, hereby endeavor to take in whatsoever material hath been observ’d by all of them, and by the way take occasion to shew how one differs from another in the distribution of them. Those therefore of the Northern America (that as near as can be we may bring the design of many into one) seem most fitly describ’d in this following order: 1. Estotiland; 2. Terra Laboratoris, or Nova Britannia; 3. Canada, or Nova Francia; 4. Nova Scotia; 5. New England; 6. New Netherlands, now call’d New York, as being in the possession of the English; 7. New Holland; 8. New Swedeland; 9. Apalchen, now call’d Virginia; 10. Florida; 11. Jucatan; 12. Honduras; 13. Nicaragua; 14. Veragua; 15. Costarica; 16. Anien; 17. Nova Hispania; 18. Guacatimala; 19. Nova Gallicia; 20. Nova Biscaia; 21. Nova Mexico; 22. Cibola; 23. Nova Granata; 24. Tontonteac; 25. Quivira; 26. Nova Albion; to which by most Authors is added California; which being an Island we thought fit to reserve to be spoken of amongst the Islands, as also Terra Nova, or New-found Land; which last lies utmost West, as the other East of Northern America. Some there are also (and particularly Monsieur de Martini) who among the above-mention’d Provinces have inserted Greenland, though doubtless with little reason, since though it be granted that it is not divided by any Sea, yet it is evident, if any credit may be given to all modern Maps and Globes, that the greatest part of Greenland lies in the Hemisphere of the known World; and therefore we have judg’d it most convenient to refer the particular mention thereof to the Description of the Arctick Region.

The Islands of Northern America are 1. Terra Nova, or New-found Land; 2. The Island of Assumption; 3. The Bermudas, or Summer-Island; 4. Hispaniola; 5. St. John Porto Rico; 6. Cuba; 7. Jamaica; 8. The Lucayes; 9. The Caribes, or Antillæ; 10. Margarita; 11. Cubagua; 12. La Trinidad; 13. Tabago; 14. California, the biggest of all the American Islands.

The length of the West-Indies is generally computed to be from the utmost South of Terra Magellanica, to the farthest North of Estotiland, about six thousand English Miles, reaching from six Degrees of Northern, to fifty three of Southern Latitude; the breadth from St. Michael or Piura Westward, to Parabaya, a Town on the Coast of Brasil Eastward, three thousand nine hundred Miles, and the whole compass thirty thousand.

Sect. II.
Estotiland.

That the English have been very great Undertakers of Voyages and Discoveries toward the North-West, appears by the denomination of divers places, both from the Persons which have Sail’d thitherward, and also from such of our own Countrey Names as were thought fit to be there fix’d, as beyond the Arctick Circle are Sir James Lancaster’s Sound, Sir Dudley Diggs’s Cape, Queens Annes Foreland, Cumberland Isles, Davis’s Straight, &c. on this side toward the Arctick Circle, Button’s and Brigg’s Bay, Hudson’s Sea, otherwise term’d Mare Christianum, out of which more Westerly runs a narrow Sea call’d Hudson’s Straight: beyond Hudson’s Sea towards the Arctick Circle is a place call’d New North-Wales; and on this side answerable to it, between Button’s Bay and the Christian Sea, lies New South-Wales; all which places we find generally set down in the American Hemisphere, but in the Geographical Discourses thereof little is said of them, if so much as nam’d. The farthest part of Land Northward, between Hudson’s Gulph and Hudson’s Straight, betwixt fifty seven and sixty Degrees of Northern Latitude, goes generally by the Name of Estotiland, I mean that properly so call’d (for Estotiland is by some as largely taken as Canada, by Cluverius, Golnitzius, Peter du Val, and others, namely for all that Tract of Land extending from that supposed Straight of Anian, which divides America from Asiatick Tartary, as far as the utmost point of Land that shoots toward the Atlantick Ocean) which Southerly towards Terra Laboratoris is bounded with a River vulgarly call’d Rio Nevado, or The Snowy River. Estotiland seems to have deriv’d its Name from its lying more Easterly than the rest of the Provinces, and, according as Nova Britannia is plac’d in some Charts, might very well be taken for the same, though it hath not been so term’d by any Author, but rather Terra Laboratoris, Cortereatis, and Nova Britannia are generally receiv’d to be all one.

First discovery of Estotiland.

The Nature of the People.

This Province is affirm’d by Matthias Quadus, and J. Antonius Maginus, to have been the first discover’d Countrey of the new World, and that by Antonius Zeno, a Patrician of Venice, in the Year of our Lord 1390. which was long before the Expedition of Columbus, through the encouragement of Zichmus, King of the Isle of Friezland; but by whomsoever found out, or at whatsoever time, it is commonly affirm’d to be not ill furnish’d with Provisions of all sorts, as Beasts, Birds, Fish, Fowl, and Fruits, having a Soil indifferent fertile, in respect of the coldness of the Climate. The People in general (for some there are that live wild and salvage up and down the Woods, and go naked, whereas the Clothing of the Countrey is the Skins of Beasts and of Sea-Calves, call’d Morses) are reported not onely tolerably civil, but also ingenious and expert both in mechanick Arts, and other necessary Faculties, insomuch that the first Voyagers to this place are said to have observ’d of them upon this first Discovery, That they sow’d Corn, brew’d Beer and Ale, and Traded by Sea to Greenland, Friezland, and other places, to the distance of fifteen hundred Miles; and that they were not altogether void of the use of Letters, but that their Character was onely proper to themselves and not intelligible by any other Nation: Moreover, there is a certain Tradition, that there was here and there some little knowledge of the Latine Tongue amongst them, and that there were found divers Latine Books in a Library of one of their Kings; the reason of which, if true, is conjectur’d to be from certain Europeans who understood that Language, having in Ages past suffer’d shipwrack upon those Coasts, where chancing to abide either through constraint or choice, they might haply at their Decease leave behind them some Books and other Monuments of the Latine Tongue. They were observ’d to use such a kind of Javelin or short Dart, as was known to be us’d by the People of Java, and some other Islands of the East-Indies; whereupon it seems not wholly improbable, that they might for a long time have entertain’d Traffick and Correspondence with them.

Description of the Morses.

The Morses, or Sea-Calves before mention’d, are about the bigness of a young Heifer, the Hunting of which by the Natives, who take them in great numbers, is to them in the stead of Whale-fishing, which is not there so good, for they draw a great quantity of Train-Oyl out of them. On each side of the Jaw of this amphibious Creature (for it is said to live very much on the Land, as well as in the Water) there sticks out a crooked Tusk, winding downward like an Elephants Proboscis, above a Cubit in length, and as white and hard as Ivory: It is esteem’d of great vertue, at least it passes for such among those who take it for other than what it is, for it is frequently vended for Unicorns-horn; of which imposture Dr. Brown takes notice, and gives a Caution against in his Vulgar Errors.

This Countrey is suppos’d, and that probably enough, to have store of Brass and Iron Mines; but for the Mines of Gold and Silver, which some have imagin’d there, the Northerly Situation of the Countrey, and by consequence the coldness of the Climate, give sufficient cause to question the truth of any such assertion. What chief Towns, Cities, Rivers and Mountains there are in this Province, is not yet deliver’d by any, onely Maginus and Quadus make mention of four principal Rivers, which disperse themselves through the Countrey, and take their source out of a great Mountain in the midst thereof.

Sect. III.
Terra Laboratoris.

Situation.

Terra Laboratoris, by some call’d Nova Britannia, by others Corterealis, (though there are some who make Laboratoris and Corterealis two distinct Countreys, comprehended, according to Peter du Val, under Nova Britannia, as the more general Province; or, according to Cluverius, under Canada) lies from about fifty four to fifty seven Degrees of Northern Latitude, between Estotiland and the River Canada, which Maginus and some others, though for what reason is not express’d, name Fretum trium Fratrum, The Bay of the three Brethren; others, The River of St. Laurence, and is, according to the said Author, of so vast a bigness, that the Mouth of it extends it self thirty five Italian Miles wide; likewise of such a length, as to have been navigated a continu’d Voyage of eight hundred Miles. The denomination of Terra de Laborador, or Laboratoris, seems probably enough conjectur’d to be from the cultivability (if one may so term it) of the Soil, or its aptness for Cultivation or Tillage; that is, because by the painful Hand of the Labourer or Husband-man it may be rendred so fertile, as to yield all sorts of Grain and Fruits; haply in allusion to that fruitful Countrey of Campania in Italy, vulgarly known by the Name of Terra di Lavoro. As for the Appellation of Terra Corterealis, it need not be question’d, but that it derives it self from Gaspar Corterealis, a Portuguese Gentleman, who about the Year of our Lord 1500. is thought by some to have made the first discovery of these Parts; though Sir Sebastian Cabot a Venetian, is more generally believ’d to have been the Man that (under the favour and countenance of Henry the Seventh, King of England) first discover’d them, at least the adjoyning Island Terra Nova, or New-found Land; but just onely discover’d, being hinder’d the farther prosecution of that Design, by the important Affairs in which the said King was about that time involv’d; neither did Corterealis, whether he was the first, or came after, do any more, for returning within a year after his first setting out, he was never heard of; nor, as Osorius a Portuguese Historian writes, any of his Company, being all suppos’d to have been drown’d by Shipwrack; and in like manner Michael Corterealis, who the year following set forth with two Ships in quest of his Brother Gaspar. Upon which series of Misfortunes the Portuguese being wholly discourag’d, and giving over this Design, the French of Armorica or Bretany succeed them in it with somewhat better success about the Year 1504. whereupon it came to be term’d Nova Britannia, or New Britain. The ancient Inhabitants of this place were formerly of a Nature, like the generality of the American People, somewhat bruitish and salvage, but by long conversation with the French, are said to have cast off their original wildness, and become more civilly manner’d: they are very jealous of their Wives, by report much addicted to Soothsaying, though otherwise having little of Religion, or of any other kind of Learning; they dwell for the most part in Caves under Ground, feed chiefly upon Fish, and are accounted most expert Archers. Whatever places the French have built here besides, those of chiefest note are St. Maries, Cabo Marzo, and Brest.

Sect. IV.
Canada, or New France.

Situation.

Canada, as it is taken for one and the same Province with New France, contains New France, properly so call’d, Nova Scotia, Norumbega, and some adjoyning Islands, as the Canada of Cluverius, lying more North-Westerly, comprehends (as we have already intimated) Estotiland, Laboratoris, and Corterealis, and, according to the most modern Division (for that of Cluverius neither consents with the latest Authors, nor agrees with exact Survey, it being nam’d Canada, in respect the River Canada runs through it) hath on the North Terra Corterealis, on the South New England, and on the East the Ocean, and hath between forty five and fifty two or fifty three Degrees of Northern Latitude. The River Canada is judg’d to be the largest of all the Rivers of America, as those Rivers generally the largest of all in the World besides; it rises in the Western parts of this Province which remain yet undiscover’d, and in some places spreads it self into huge Lakes, some of them a hundred Miles in compass, with many little Islands dispersed up and down in them, and so running from the West about a hundred Leagues, falls at last into the North part of St. Lawrence Bay, being that wide Emboucheure of thirty five Miles breadth already mention’d. This River is extraordinary full of Fish, among which there is one sort more remarkable than the rest, call’d by the Inhabitants Cadhothuis, having Heads resembling the Heads of Hares, and Bodies as white as Snow; they are taken for the most part before the Isle de Lievres. The Countrey on both sides of the River is pleasant and indifferently fertile, especially towards the South-West, where upwards from the River the Ground rises into many little Hills, invested most of them with Vines, with which and several other sorts of Trees this Countrey abounds, being well water’d with a great many lesser Streams, all of them falling into the River Canada.

First discovery.

That this Countrey is term’d New France, from having been discover’d by the French, at least more fully than before, there needs no question to be made; but whether Joannes Verrazanus, under Francis the First of France, or Sebastian Cabot before spoken of, were the first in this Discovery, may admit of something of dispute: the Cabots indeed, (for John the Father is by some mention’d to have accompanied his Son) who by all are own’d the first Discoverers of New-found-Land and Terra de Baccalaos, are also commonly reputed to have first found out the Province of New France, together with some parts adjacent, though perhaps it might be upon this Ground that Terra de Nova, or New-found-Land, not being known at first to be an Island, New France and that might be taken for one continu’d Province; and it appears so much the more probable, because Canada, or Nova Francia, is by some call’d Terra Nova; however it be, or whoever were the first Adventurers, Quarteri and Champlain are the two French-men that have gain’d so much fame by making a more ample and particular search into these parts, that this Province may seem from thence to have sufficient claim to the Title of New France, whereof that part more especially so call’d, lies on the North-side of the River Canada, and Southward to Terra Corterealis. The Winter is here very long, and so much the more severe by reason of a cold North-West Wind which blows most part of the Winter Season, and brings with it so thick a Snow, that it continues upon the Ground most commonly till after May. The Countrey is for the most part wooddy, but in the Champain parts thereof very fruitful of Corn, and all sorts of Grain, especially Pulse: It hath also Fish, Fowl, wild Deer, Bears, Marterns, and Foxes in abundance, and of Hares such plenty, that one of the little Islands belonging to this Province, is by the French nam’d L’Isle des Lievres, or The Island of Hares: But the most peculiar Commodity belonging to this Countrey is the Esurgnuy, a kind of Shell-Fish, extraordinary white, and approv’d of singular vertue for the stanching of Blood; to which purpose they make Bracelets of them, not onely for their own use, but also to vend them to others; but John de Laet and others have observ’d no other than a superstitious use of them amongst the Salvages, in their Funeral Rites for the Dead: the manner of their taking it is very remarkable; for when any one is condemn’d to die, or taken Prisoner, they cut off all his fleshy parts in long slices, and then throw him into the River, where they let him lie twelve hours, and at last pulling him out again find his Wounds full of Esurgnui. Quadus and Maginus make mention of three ancient Towns, namely Canada (denominated as the Province, from the River) Hochelai and Hochchelaga, giving Name to a Territory about it, which Geographers either take no notice of, or make some question of the being of such Towns; however, a late Describer of the West-Indies, not mentioning the other two, gives this description of the last, viz. Hochchelaga:

“This City (saith he) said to be the Seat and Residence of a King of this Country whom the Natives, at least some of them, acknowledge and reverence, carrying him sometimes in great pomp upon their Shoulders sitting upon a Carpet of Beasts Skins, is situate far within Land, at a distance of six or seven Leagues from the River Canada, and is a kind of fortifi’d place, encompass’d about with a threefold Range of Timber Ramparts one within another, of about two Rods high from the Ground, with cross Planks, or pieces of Timber jutting out, on purpose to hinder an Enemy’s Scaling or getting up; towards the top there is as it were a Scaffold or Gallery fram’d, from whence they may throw down Stones of which there is always good store ready, or what else to annoy the Assailants: It hath one onely Gate for Entrance, and that likewise well fortifi’d after their manner: There are guess’d to be in it fifty or sixty great Houses, built (as the maner of the Americans that live in Houses usually is) in a square Figure, each side being about fifty Foot long, or more, and sixteen or twenty broad, but not many Stories high; and in the midst of the Court or void space, a place to make their Fire, and do other necessary work about it. Moreover the Territory round about this Town is both rich in Soil, and pleasant in Prospect.”

Besides these three above-mention’d Towns there are several others, which are not untaken notice of in the most modern Descriptions and Maps, viz. 1. Stadac, or Stadacone, somewhat Westward of a small Isle call’d The Isle d’Orleance; 2. Quebeque, which being made a Colony of the French, and the Natives expell’d, came to be Entituled St. Croix; 3. Tadoussac, which lies in that part of the Countrey denominated from the River Saguenay, and by some call’d at this day Nouvelle Biscaye, a delightful place, and full of stately Trees, and hath likewise a good and safe Haven, capable of receiving twenty Ships; 4. Trois Rivieris, or three Rivers; 5. Monreal; 6. Sillery; 7. Richelieu; besides two strong Castles or Forts, Franceroy and St. Lewis; the First built by Monsieur Robeval at his Landing here, about the Year 1540. the other design’d for a Colony, in the Year 1611. by Monsieur Champlany, but hinder’d by the Invasion of the Iroquois. The smaller Rivers that run out of the Gulph of St. Lawrence, and the grand River Canada towards the North, on which side chiefly lies this Province, are, 1. Chichesedec, 2. St. Margarite, 3. Lesquemin, 4. Saquenay, before-mention’d, 5. Montonne; and on the South side, the River Mary. The principal Tribes of the ancient Natives of this Countrey were; on the North side of Canada the Canadans, the Betisiamites, the Hurons, the Algoniquins, the Quenongebins, the Algoingequins, the Attagopantans, the Atticameques, the Nipisiriniens; and on the South side, the Etechemins, and the chief Heads or Princes of these Tribes were call’d Sagamores.

Strange Fish nam’d Chaousarou.

Jaques Quartier Complementing their King Agouthanna, took up his Quarters a whole Winter at St. Croix, a Sandy Promontory, overflow’d by the River Canada, into which falls the Lake de Champlain, grown round about with Chestnut Trees; in it breeds the strange Fish call’d Chaousarou, generally ten Foot long, with Heads like Sharks, and two rows of Teeth in their Mouths, their Skins full of strong Scales, which are sufficient Shields against Swords and Lances, are great devourers of other Fish and Fowls, which they take after this manner, viz. they swim amongst Reeds or Canes, and lie still with their Mouths open; whereat the Birds sitting down upon them, are immediately swallow’d.

The Natives of Nova Francia anoint their bodies with Oil; in the Summer they go naked, and in the Winter mantle themselves in Furs. Their Warlike Accoutrements are Darts and Clubs, but chiefly great Shields. They are revengeful, cruel, and fraudulent; their Women common to all Men, from fifteen to twenty, after which, Marrying, they become very Chaste. Their Diet is Indian Corn, fresh and salt Fish, Venison, Buffalo’s and Beavers flesh; wiping their Fingers (when greasie) on their Heads, or their Dogs backs, which wait for the Scraps.

Strange proof of Valor.

Wonderful opinion of God.

Flood.

Sorcerers.

They boast their Extract from Heaven.

Their strange Relation concerning it.

As also of the Creation, and Souls of the Deceased.

Strange Rock.

Thunder.

Thakabech an Idol.

Funeral-Feast.

At that season when the Corn covers the ground, to any heighth, they eat Cockles, Dogs, dead Caryon, and the Skins wherewith they Clothe themselves. When they have eaten their fill, they tabering on their Bellies, cry, Tapoue Mikispoun, that is, Verily I am satisfi’d. They give their Sick a speedy Cure, either immediately killing them, or inhumanely exposing them to the Woods, to be devour’d by ravenous Beasts, but if they die suddenly, they in howling tone pronounce Ove, Ove, thereby to chase the Souls of the Deceas’d out of their Huts; they stick the bodies on Woodden Prongs, cover them with Bark, and lay their Clothes and Arms by them; all what remains of the Funeral Feasts is burnt, whereas at other times, what e’re is brought on their Table they eat, though ready to burst. They make the first Proofs of their Valour by undergoing a most prodigious Torment, in this manner; Two by consent tie their naked Arms together, on which they suffer burning Sulphur to be pour’d, till the flesh starts from the bone; if either of them shrink, or pull back his Arm, he is accounted by them ever after as an ignominious and base Coward. They call God Atahocan, and believe that one Messou first drowning the world by a general Deluge, restor’d it again after a wonderful manner, viz. Messou hunting with Wolves, they scented a Deer which being closely pursu’d, leap’d into a neighboring Pool, the Wolves following it, were drown’d; Messou coming thither, stood amaz’d at a Bird, which inform’d him, that the Wolves were pluck’d down, and held fast in the bottom by horrible Monsters, whereupon he diving, the Pool immediately began to swell, and at last the whole surface of the Earth to be overflow’d. Messou afterwards let a Raven flie to fetch a Clod of Earth, but in vain, for all the Land lay drown’d in Water; at last a Rat diving to the bottom, brought a lump of Earth, out of which Messou restor’d the World; shot Arrows into Trees, which became fruitful Branches. Here also reside an innumerable many Sorcerers, call’d Pillotoa’s, which sometimes being possess’d with a Frenzy, scourge themselves in a terrible manner, insomuch that the Blood runs down by their sides: These People are held in great esteem, for they boast themselves to have their Original from Heaven upon this occasion, viz. Ataensic, a certain great Queen or Goddess, residing above the Stars, had a sick Husband, who Dreamt that he should be restor’d to his former health so soon as he could but taste of the Fruits which grew on a Tree, whereby the Family of Heaven were kept alive, but that the Tree must needs be cut down, which Ataensic obeying, gave onely two blows, when the Tree, to her great amazement, fell out of Heaven down to the Earth; there being by this means nothing more left to eat in Heaven: Ataensic follow’d the fallen Tree, and being big with Child, bare a Daughter, which growing up to years, was Deliver’d of two Daughters, viz. Taoviscaron and Jouskeha, the eldest of which slew the youngest: By these Fables we may discern their obscure knowledge of Noah’s Flood, Eve’s Fall, and Cain’s Murder. No less ridiculous is that which they believe concerning the Creation, viz. That the Waters were inclos’d within a Frog, which Jouskeha causing to be cut open, all Streams and Rivers issuing out, had their Original from thence: This done, Jouskeha open’d a Pit, out of which came all sorts of Beasts; they ascribe a Bodily shape to the Soul, as also Immortality, but that they live together in a great Village towards the West; from which removing sometimes, they knock at the Doors of their former Friends in the Night, and sow deserted Grounds: That the Journey towards the Village in which the Souls reside is very strange; the Highway thither beginning at a Rock nam’d Ecaregniendi, where they first Paint their Faces, which done, they go to a Hut inhabited by an old Man, nam’d Osotrach, who takes the Brains out of the Souls Head; after which they walk to a broad River, which they cross on a narrow Plank or Bridge, on which a Dog encountring, forces them to leap into the Water, which carries them down to the foremention’d Village. They acknowledge one Oki for the Governor of the Sea, and seasons of the Year: They also Religiously Worship the Rock Tsankchi Arasta, which they believe some ages ago was once a Man, but afterward Transform’d into a Rock, in which a Dæmon resides, who can make their Journies either successful or dangerous, wherefore they offer him Tobacco. Their opinion of Thunder is likewise very ridiculous, for they say that the Devil endeavoring to vomit a horrible Serpent, by straining to evacuate the same, rents the Clouds, and occasions Thunder. Lastly, They relate of a Dwarf call’d Thakabech, who climb’d on the top of a Tree, which by his blowing thereon grew so high, that it touch’d the Clouds, and Thakabech easily stept into them, where he found all sorts of delight and pleasure; but having a Sister on Earth, descended again along the Tree, and fetching his Sister, conducted her above the Stars; mean while, Thakabech going in the Night to see if he had taken any thing in his Net which he had pitch’d, found it full of Fire, and observing the same very narrowly, saw that he had taken the Sun, but durst not approach the same, by reason of its great heat; but making a Mouse, sent her to gnaw the Net in pieces, and set the Sun at liberty. Every twelfth year they keep an extraordinary great Funeral-Feast; for on the Set-time they flock from all parts to the appointed place, every one carrying thither the Bodies or Bones of their Deceas’d Friends, wrapt up in Clothes, and hang them over their Meat, which they eat singing; such fond and Superstitious Conceits make up the Religion of these poor deluded People.

Sect. V.
Accadia, or Nova Scotia.

Nova Scotia, or New Scotland, formerly call’d Accadia, is commonly accounted a part of New France, (viz. that part which lying on the South side of the River Canada, and shooting South-Easterly into a bosom of the Sea, forms it self into a Peninsula, between the Gulph of St. Lawrence, and the Bay Francoise) nevertheless, because of the different concernments of this part of the Countrey, in regard the right of claim to several places in this district, most especially of all Nova Francia besides, hath been long in dispute between Us and the French, it will be most convenient to Treat of it apart; and because the Series of Affairs, from its first discovery, till of late years, appears faithfully represented on the English part, in a Remonstrance Address’d to the King and Council by Sir Lewis Kirk, and his Brother John Kirk Esquire; it will not be amiss (onely adding some few things upon occasion) to follow exactly the Narration of Affairs, deliver’d in the said Remonstrance to this effect.

“1. The whole Tract or Space of Land in America, lying on either side of the River Canada, which a long time since were known by the Names of Nova Francia, and Nova Scotia, were at first discover’d and found out by the English, in the time of Henry the Seventh, King of England; which Expedition was first undertaken at the Command and Charges of that King; afterwards further’d and carry’d on by the favorable Aspect of Queen Elizabeth; so that in process of time, for many years together, the said Tract of Ground, with absolute Priviledge of free Commerce, fell under the Jurisdiction and Power of the Crown of England: Neither was it unto any other Christian Princes, or their Subjects more clearly known or discover’d, untill about the year 1600. some of the French understanding the benefit arising by Traffique in the River of St. Lawrence, having formerly seiz’d upon that Tract of Land, situate on the North side of the said Floud or River Canada, did afterwards, in Anno 1604. (under the Conduct of Peter de Gua, Lord of Monts, who in the year 1606. was follow’d by Monsieur de Pourtrincourt) Possess themselves of L’Accadie, lying on the South side of the said River, naming the whole Nova Francia, challenging to themselves for many years, at least de facto, the Possession thereof, with sole liberty of Commerce there.

“2. In Anno 1621. King James of England looking upon the Possession gotten there by the French, as upon an Invasion, did by his Letters Patents Grant unto Sir William Alexander a Scotchman (Created afterwards Earl of Sterling, by King Charles the First) L’Accadie, by the Name of Nova Scotia; who in the year 1622, and 1623. after Sir Samuel Argal had driven out Biard and Masse, and demolishing their Fort, carry’d them Prisoners to Virginia; having obtain’d the Possession thereof, they Planted a Colony therein, and kept Possession for about two years after, until such time, as upon the Marriage of his Majesty King Charles the First, with the Lady Henrietta Maria, the said L’Accadie, or Nova Scotia, was by Order of the King of England return’d into the Possession of the French.

“3. Afterwards a War arising between his Majesty King Charles the First, and Lewis the XIII. Anno 1627. and 1628. Sir David Kirk and his Brethren and Relations of England, did by vertue of his Majestie’s Commission, send to Sea (at their great charge) first three, afterwards nine Ships, with Warlike Preparations for recovering of the Possession of the said Lands, lying on either side of the said River Canada, and to expel and eject all the French Trading in those Parts, wherein they had good Success; and in Anno 1627. did there seize upon about eighteen of the French Ships, wherein were found a hundred thirty five Pieces of Ordnance, design’d for relief of the Royal Fort in L’Accadie, and Quebeck in Nova Francia, under the Command of Monsieur de Rocmand, and Monsieur de la Tour, Father of de la Tour, Governor of the said Royal Fort, whom, together with the said Ships and Guns, they brought into England; and in the year 1628. they Possess’d themselves of the whole Region of Canada or Nova Francia, situate on the North side of the River, together with the Fort or Castle of Quebeck, Sir Lewis Kirk being then constituted Governor of the place, the French being then either expell’d or convey’d into England, and the Arms of the King of England being publickly there erected, and every where plac’d; and before the year 1628. it was brought to pass by the said Sir William Alexander, (assisted both by the advice and charge of the said Kirk) that in the parts of L’Accadie, or Nova Scotia, on the South side of the River Canada, the whole place, with the Forts thereon built, being by him subdu’d, presently came under the Power of the King of England; that Region on the South side falling into the Possession of the said Sir William Alexander, and that on the North side, into the Possession of the Kirks.

“4. On March 29. 1632. a Peace being concluded between King Charles the First, and Lewis the XIII. it was amongst other things on the part of the King of England agreed, That all the Forts, as well in L’Accadie as in Nova Francia, should be restor’d into the Possession of the Subjects of the French King, which was exactly perform’d on the part of the English, though to the great damage of the Kirks; but on the part of the French, although it was agreed, as in the fourth and fifth Articles of Peace is set down, (to which reference is had) yet nothing was ever perform’d of their parts; so that the Kirks did thereupon suffer loss, to the value of five thousand Pounds Sterl. which were to be paid them by Monsieur de Cane a French-man, but remain unpaid to this day.

“5. Anno 1633. the King of England taking notice, that although the Forts and Castles, according to the League, were deliver’d up into the Possession of the French, (especially such as had been erected during their Possession thereof) yet that his English Subjects were not to be excluded from Trade or free Commerce, in those Regions that were first Discover’d and Possess’d by his Subjects, did, with the advice of his Council, by his Letters Patents, Dated May 11. 1633. upon consideration had of the Expences, which the said Kirks had laid out upon the reducing of that Countrey with the Fort of Quebeck, to the value of 50000lb.; and also of their ready obeisance in resigning up the same on his Royal Command, Grant unto Sir Lewis Kirk, and his Brother John Kirk and his Associates, for the term of thirty one years (not yet expir’d) full Priviledge, not only of Trade and Commerce in the River Canada, and places on either side adjacent, but also to Plant Colonies, and build Forts and Bulwarks where they should think fit.

“6. By vertue of which Commission, Sir Lewis Kirk and his Brother John Kirk, and his Associates, in the Moneth of February next following, viz. in 1633. set forth a Ship call’d The Merry Fortune, Laden with Goods of a considerable value, consign’d to those parts, where during her Trading there, without any just offence given; and in time of Peace, she was by the French forceably seiz’d on, and carry’d into France and her Lading, as if she had been lawful Prize, Confiscated; whereupon the Kirks suffer’d loss, to the value of twelve thousand Pounds. And although the Lord Scudamore, Ambassador in France, by the King of Englands special Command, and the said John Kirk being there in Person, by the King’s Command, did often earnestly urge, that the Moneys due to the said Kirks, and the said Ship, with her Lading, might be restor’d, which for no other cause had been seiz’d upon and sold, but only for that by the King’s Commission she was found Trading at Canada; yet he could obtain nothing, but after some years fruitless endeavors return’d into England without accomplishing his desires.

“7. In the year 1654. Cromwel, although an unjust Usurper of the Government, yet upon consideration of the Premises, taking a just occasion for requiring the Possession of L’Accadie, sends forth several Ships under the Command of one Sedgwick, who by vertue of the Authority granted him by Cromwel, assaulted and subdu’d the aforesaid Forts in Nova Scotia, and restor’d them into the Possession of the English: And although in the year 1655. a League of firm Peace and Amity being concluded between Cromwel and the French King, the French Ambassador did often urge the Restitution to the Possession of the French; yet for the same causes aforesaid, which had mov’d Cromwel to seize upon them, it was thought fit still to retain the Possession of them; and although according to the purport of the twenty fifth Article of the Peace, Commissioners on both sides were to be appointed for the deciding and determining that Controversie; yet nothing was done therein, neither did the Commissioners ever meet within three Moneths, as in the twenty fourth Article of the Treaty was provided and agreed: So that now the case is very clear, that the Possession to the English remains firm and just, and that the Forts and Bulwarks before specifi’d, are without all peradventure under the Power and Jurisdiction of the King of England.”

Since the Restauration of his present Majesty, the French Ambassador representing unto the King the Pretensions of the French unto the several Forts and other places in Accadie, and urging the non-performance of the Articles of Agreement between Oliver Cromwel and the French King, mov’d the King of England, As a profess’d Enemy to all Violence, for a Restitution of all the Forts and other places which were then in the possession of the English: Not long after which, whether upon the Ambassadors request, or upon other important Affairs intervening, or upon what other ground soever it were, the French were suffer’d to re-enter on the foresaid places, and do yet keep Possession of them, till such time as the English claim under the just Title of the Kirks, shall meet with some fit occasion of being reviv’d.

That which we suppose gives the French so much the more confidence in their claim of this Country, is their presumption upon the Expedition of James Quartier, whom they will have to be the first Discoverer, if not Possessor, not onely of the Isle of Assumption, but also of this Coast of Nova Francia, not taking notice it seems of Sebastian Cabot, under Henry the Seventh.

The chief places of Note in this Countrey, are, 1. Port Royal, a Colony of French, said to have been Planted there by Monsieur de Montz in 1604. by report, capable of receiving a thousand Ships; and in 1613. (the French being driven out by Sir Samuel Argal, Governor of Virginia, who took Prisoners Biard and Masse, and demolish’d the Fort at Port Royal) given by Patent, as aforemention’d, to Sir William Alexander; afterwards by him sold again to the French; then in the time of Oliver Cromwel re-taken by Major Sedgwick; lastly, re-possess’d by the French. 2. St. Luke’s Bay, or Portua Mouton. 3. Gaspe, or Gachepe. 4. The Haven of Passepay. 5. The Bay de Toutes Isles. 6. The Fort de la Heve. 7. The Cape of Sable. Within the Southern Point Forchu, lies the Isle Longu, which boasts of a Silver Mine.

The most noted People of the ancient Inhabitants of Accadie were the Iroquois, lying most South-Westerly upon the Sea Coast, who us’d to drive a great Trade in Beavers and other Commodities.

Westerly before the River Chovacoet lies Bacchus Isle, full of Vineyards.

Remarkable manner of living.

The Inhabitants thereof differ very much from other Salvages, for they shave all the Hair from the Crown of their Head, wear long Locks behind, pleited together, and stuck full of Feathers, Paint their Faces black and red, and go arm’d with Clubs, Bows, Pikes, and Arrows pointed with Fish-bones: They Till their Ground very handsomly, and divide their Fields with Hedges; they Plant Tobacco, Vines, Cabbages, Maiz, and divers Colour’d Beans; the stalks of the Maiz serve in stead of Poles for their Beans to run up upon.

Beyond Cape de Rocher lies the brave Harbor Beauport, which is secur’d from all Winds by an Isle which lies in the midst of it. The Countrey Manur’d in most places, and Fruitful, feeds store of Men and Cattel.

The Haven of Malabar is surrounded in a manner with little Huts, cover’d with Mats, which in the Middle of the Room have a hole for the Smoke to go out at. The Southern shore is Sandy, and very dangerous.

For the more full exemplification of what concerns this part of Nova Francia, we shall conclude with an account of all Material Passages relating to the French, from their own Narrations as followeth.

Quartier’s Expedition.

Scurvy, when known.

Exploit of de la Roque.

The first discoverer of this Coast was Jaques Quartier, sent out Anno 1534. by the French King, Francis the First, in which Expedition he spent five Months; and going from thence to St. Male, discover’d the Inlet Lawrence, Terreneuf, and Natiscotec. The following year prosecuting his Voyage, he Sail’d into the great River Canada, and Winter’d near St. Croix, where he lost divers of his Men by the Scurvy, a Distemper till that time altogether unknown; and such was his condition, that none of his Men had escap’d with life, had not the Inhabitants taught him to cure the same with the Bark and Leaves of the Tree Annedda; with which many recovering, Quartier Weigh’d Anchor, and treacherously carry’d the King Donnacona with many of his Nobles, Prisoners to France; but most of them dying, Quartier brought only a few of them back with him in his third Voyage, six years after the first, when arriving in the Haven St. Croix, he cast up a strong Fort, which he nam’d Charlesbourg Royal, where he staid a whole Winter. Joan de la Roque, whom the French King had made Governor of Quartier’s new-discover’d Countries, Sailing thither with three Ships, met with Quartier’s Fleet near Terreneuf; from whence he was then going home, because he saw no hopes of subduing the Salvages with so small a Force as he had brought with him from France. But de la Roque endeavoring to make a further discovery of Canada, Sail’d up the River Saguenay, where spending both time and Money, he was Commanded home by the French King, and the fruitless Expeditions lay dead till about 1604.

Of de Monts.

Of Poutrincourt.

When Peter de Monts obtaining Letters Patents to Trade for Furs in the foremention’d Countries, Sail’d with two Ships beyond Accadie, up St. Lawrence Bay, where he Landed on the Isle St. Croix, where of ninety seven Men, with which he staid there a whole Winter, he lost thirty five; but having fresh Supplies sent him from France, he remov’d to Port Royal, where leaving forty Men, he return’d home; these forty being reduc’d to twenty three, and in great want, walking along the Sea-shore in a despairing condition, espy’d a Ship coming up with full Sail, which upon nearer approach, prov’d a French Vessel, of which Poutrincourt was Commander, who receiving his wretched Countrey-men with great joy, took them with him to Port Royal, being sent thither on purpose to settle a Plantation in Accadie: Meanwhile the Letters Patent granted to Monts, being call’d in, the first Planters in Port Royal were forc’d to desert the same, and return home; and also Poutrincourt returning, came back again three years after to Port Royal, where finding the Houses standing as he had left them, he Manur’d the Countrey all about, and endeavoring to Plant Christianity among the Natives, Christen’d among others an Accadian Lord, who was above a hundred years old; all which Poutrincourt Sailing back to France, related at the Court.

Remarkable Transactions of some Jesuits.

The Jesuits being also inform’d thereof, obtain’d leave of the Queen to send Peter Biard and Euemond Masse thither, on pretence, that Henry the Fourth had himself promis’d them the same Priviledge in his Life time. But the Merchants at Diep, which were concern’d in the new Plantations with Poutrincourt, opposing the going over of the foremention’d Jesuits, express’d themselves very violent against them, and laid to their charge the Blood of the late King, which they said was yet reaking in Paris: What assurance (alleadg’d they) had their Goods which were in the Custody of Men inclin’d to the Spaniards? Must the Christian Religion be promulgated? There are so many Orders of Monks which may easily produce two Men; but if the Queen was resolv’d to send Jesuits thither, they desir’d restauration of the Monies which they had disburs’d: To which Biard and Masse harkening, gather’d up the demanded Monies, under pretence of being requir’d towards the Preaching of the Christian Religion amongst these remote Heathens; by this means getting great Sums, they bought out the foremention’d Merchants, so that the new Plantations fell half to the Jesuits, who setting Sail, and arriving at Port Royal, turn’d all things topsiturvy, and so thwarted Poutrincourt in his designs, that he was forc’d to complain to the French Court of the Jesuits oppression, whose aim it was to get all things into their own Possession; whereupon they Excommunicated Poutrincourt’s Son (who serv’d in his Father’s place at Court), and gain’d the Duke Guereheville in France to be of their Party, by promising him, that he should share in the new Plantations for a contracted Sum of Money: After this they receiv’d all sorts of Arms and Ammunition, with several Brass Guns, of the then King Lewis the XIII. and other gifts Collected and gather’d out of their several Societies, for two new Accadian Apostles. Gilbert du Thet, a subtile man of the same Order, transported their Necessaries.

At this time all things going favorably with the Jesuits, they made themselves Masters of Port Royal, and began to raise a Fort on the River Pemtagovet; but there their happy Proceedings were stop’d, for Captain Argal before-mention’d, Sailing thither in vindication of the English, was encounter’d by du Thet, (who firing the first Gun on Argal, was by him taken off with Chain-shot) and taking Biard and Masse, carry’d them Prisoners to Virginia, and dismantled the Fort built at Port Royal, after which it was by King James given by Patent to Sir William Alexander, as hath been already related, together with what of most remarkable hath happen’d since.

Sect. VI.
Norumbegua.

Whence denominated.

Norumbegua, lying between Nova Scotia Northward, and New England Southward, is so utterly not taken notice of by many as a distinct Province, that it might seem to be swallow’d up and lost in the two Countreys between which it lies, or at least to be thought a part of Virginia or New England (for Virginia largely taken is said to contain New England, Novum Belgium, and Virginia, especially so call’d) and that so much the rather, because the Bessabees, accounted by Sanson d’Abbeville an ancient People of New England, are written to have liv’d near the River Penobscot, which is reckon’d to be the same with Pemtegovet, or (as some will have it) Norumbegua, from which, or from a certain great City of that Name, the Country for fancy’s sake must needs be denominated; but since most commonly we find it nam’d and treated of apart, it will not be improper to follow that method, carrying the Bounds of New England no farther Northward than the River Quinnebequi or Sagadahoc, and so determining the main part of this Countrey to that space between the aforesaid River and Pemtegovet, excepting a small Southerly portion upon the Banks of the River Chovacovet; so that it appears chiefly situate under the forty third Degree of Northern Latitude.

Towns and Cities not certainly known.

As for the Towns or Cities of this Province, there is but a very uncertain account to be given, forasmuch as the pretended great City Norumbegua, from whence the Province should take its Appellation, is not acknowledg’d by any of the most authentick modern Writers, nor in any late Voyage or Discovery any mention made either of that or any other considerable Town or City. Dr. Heylin supposeth it to be no other than Agguncia, a poor little Village, that seems compos’d of a company of Hutts or Sheaves, cover’d with the Skins of Beasts, or the Barks of Trees. But the most favourable conjecture is, that it might haply be the Ruines of an ancient Town, which the Natives call’d Arambeck, and had probably deserted it long before the arrival of the Europeans in those parts; however, it is not very probable that the Name of the Countrey should be deriv’d from this City, if ever there were any such, or from the River, which appears to have been term’d Norumbegua on purpose to make way for this derivation, whereas Pemtegovet is the ancient Appellation that properly belongs to it; nor hath any modern one been apply’d to it but that of Rio Grande, by Buno in his Comment upon Philip Cluverius, upon what ground is hard to tell, since it is observ’d by Heylin and others, to be neither large, nor otherwise much to be commended, being Navigable not above twenty or thirty Miles, in respect of its many great Cataracts and Falls of Water, an Inconvenience with which many other Rivers of America are prejudic’d, and rendred impassable.

Before and about the Mouth of this River, which is judg’d to be about eight or nine Miles broad, lie many small Islands, or rather Hills, inviron’d with Water, the chiefest of which is by the French call’d La Haute Isle, from the high and Mountainous appearance of it to those that see it from afar off at Sea.

The aforemention’d Buno, though he names, as belonging to Norumbega, these several places, viz. Porto del Refugio, Porto Reale, Paradiso, Flora, and Angolema, from some obscure French testimonies, without particularising any Author, yet he afterwards confesses, that the Names given by the French, and those apply’d by the Spaniards, are so various and disagreeing, and breed such a confusion, that no Charts or Descriptions had concluded upon either.

As for those who will have Norumbega deriv’d from Norwegia, in respect of a Colony brought thither from Norwey, if the Etymologie be not a little too much forc’d, the Invention may pass well enough till a better be found out.

The temperature and nature of its Soil.

In this Countrey the temperature of the Air is not bad, nor the Soil unfruitful, if it were well cultivated, chiefly towards the Rivers, and where it is not either overgrown with Woods, or craggy with Hills and mountainous Rocks: neither are the Woods unprofitable, for they afford good Timber, and all kind of necessary and useful Wood, especially Beeches, Fir-trees, Wallnut-trees, and other Nuts: The Plains are very pleasant, and yield good Pasturage, onely the Maritime Coasts are so shallow and full of Sands, that the Sailing near them is accounted somewhat dangerous; and this may be imagin’d to be the reason that no Authors have yet met with any Ports or Havens belonging to this Countrey, which they have thought worthy their notice.

CHAP. II.
New England.

As Canada is by some accounted a general Province, containing New France, L’Accadie, Norumbega, and other places, so under Virginia largely taken, are comprehended New England, New Netherlands, and Virginia properly so call’d; however, since that part which vulgarly goes under the Name of Virginia and New England were possess’d, if not discover’d, at several times, and their Plantations promoted and propagated upon several occasions, and by distinct Interests, and since New England hath been look’d upon as a place considerable enough for Persons of very eminent quality to concern themselves in it, we rather are induc’d to consider this Countrey as a principal part, than as any way depending on, or being any Branch or Portion of Virginia.

Situation of New England.

It lies between Norumbega, which it hath Northward, and New Netherlands Southward, from forty one to forty five Degrees of Northern Latitude, in the midst of the temperate Zone, and paralell to France and some part of Italy in the Western Hemisphere, so that one would think it should enjoy the same temperature of Air; but the contrary is found, for that part which borders upon the Sea is colder, partly by reason that the Sea-waves break the reflexion of the Sun-beams, partly by reason of the abundance of Vapors, which mounting upward, abate the ardor of them; but the more Inland parts of the Countrey are indifferently warm: Moreover it hath been found by certain experience, that those Countreys which look towards the East, or Sun-rising, are colder than those which lie towards the West, or Sun-setting, and those that have the Evening Winds on them, warmer than those which have the Morning Winds; which being so, it should follow, that the temperature of the Air in those Regions is peculiar to the Bodies of those of our Nation, who being accustom’d to a Climate somewhat temperate, are neither able to endure extremity of Cold, nor immoderate Heat: Yet there are who affirm, that New England, though situate in the midst of the temperate Zone, nevertheless feels both extremities of the two opposite Zones, in the Summer the heat of the Torrid, and in the Winter the cold of the Frigid.

First discovery.

As for the first discovery of this Countrey, it is not to be expected otherwise than that of the discovery of those other Countreys hitherto discours’d of, that is to say very uncertain; but because the French boast of Joannes Verrazanus (who though an Italian, was employ’d by the French King Francis the First) as the first Discoverer, not onely of Nova Francia, as hath been already intimated, but also of this Countrey and the adjoyning Coast and Regions, we shall not think it impertinent to give from their own Relations, a brief view of his Voyage, and afterwards a particular Description of the English Plantations there, and of their Transactions, both one with another, and between them and the Nations. The Narration of Verrazanus’s Voyage is as followeth:

Remarkable Voyage of Verrazanus.

“On command of the French King Francis the First, John Verrazanus, Anno 1524. setting Sail Westward from the Canary Isles, discover’d a low American Coast, in thirty four Degrees North Latitude, inhabited by naked People, which behind the sandy Hills facing the Sea, Manur’d many fruitful Plains. Then Sailing a hundred Leagues along the Shore Northerly, he view’d a Countrey full of Vines, which grew up amongst the Boughs of high Trees; and Sailing up a pleasant River, Landed on the Island Clandia, full of woody Mountains: thence he stood for the main Continent; where after having visited a King, Clad in wrought Deer-skin, he Sail’d by a Bay, at whose Mouth appear’d a Rock in an Inlet, twenty Leagues; where appear’d five small Isles, all of them exceeding fruitful. After this (being got a hundred and fifty Leagues to the Northward) he found very salvage People, whose Heads appear’d through Bear-skins and Sea-Calves. By this time having Terreneuf on his Starboard, he return’d back to Diepe.”

Thus far Verrazanus made some discovery of the Coast, which hath since not onely been farther inspected by the English, but also by them Planted and call’d New England.

The setling of Plantations.

This Countrey, whether first discover’d by the said Verrazanus, or together with the rest of largely-taken Virginia, by Sir Walter Raleigh, or, as some say, by Captain Gosnald, in the Year 1602. was so well known to the English in the beginning of King James’s Reign here, that the setling and carrying on of Plantations in this part of America, was vigorously promoted by many of the most eminent Persons in England: whereupon it was about the Year 1606. being the fourth Year of the said King, granted by Patent to several Lords, Knights, Gentlemen and Merchants, under the denomination of The Plymouth Company, both in favour of those generous Spirits, who studied and endeavor’d the good of the Publick by foreign Plantations, and indulgence to those, who not well satisfi’d with the Government of Church and State, and willingly transporting themselves and Families thither, as to their Asylum, could more conveniently be spar’d than the better affected part of the People: And although the Colonies at first sent over succeeded not according to expectation, yet in a short time there Plantations were brought to very great perfection. Captain Weimouth, who had been employ’d there by the Lord Arundel of Warder, for the discovery of the North-West Passage, falling short of his Course, hapned into a River on the Coast of America, call’d Pemmaquid; from whence he brought five of the Natives for England, three of whose Names were Mannida, Skettwarroes and Tasquantum, and Landing at Plymouth, presented them to Sir Ferdinando Gorges, whom he made use of as Instruments for the farther advancement of these Plantations: they were all of one Nation, but of several parts, and several Families; he kept them with him three years, and observing in them an inclination to vertuous Designs, and Spirits above the Vulgar, he gain’d information from them what great Rivers ran up into the Land, what Men of note were seated on them, what Power they were of, how Ally’d, what Enemies they had, and the like; and taking some light from thence, sent away a Ship, furnish’d with Men, and all kind of Necessaries convenient for the Service intended, under the Command of Captain Henry Chaloung, a Gentleman of a good Family, and very capable for Undertakings of this nature; and giving him sufficient Instructions what to do, sent along with him two of the said Natives for his better Conduct and Direction, ordering him by all means to keep the Northerly Gage as high as Cape Briton, till they had discover’d the Main, and then to beat it up to the Southward as the Coast tended, till they found by the Natives they were near the place to which they were assign’d. By that time they were about a hundred Leagues off the Island of Canara, the Captain fell sick of a Feaver, and the Winds being Westerly, his Company shap’d their Course for the Indies, and coming to St. John de Porto Rico, the Captain went ashore for the recovery of his Health, whilst the Company took in Water, and such other Provisions as they had present need of, and spent some time in Hunting, and other Recreations; after which steering their intended Course, they were met with by the Spanish Fleet that came from the Havana, taken Prisoners and carried into Spain, the Ship and Goods being confiscated, the Voyage overthrown, and the Natives lost.

Not long after the setting out of Chaloung, Thomas Haman was sent by Sir John Popham, Lord Chief Justice of England, towards the River of Sagadehoc, to the succour of Chaloung, if need were; but not finding him, after he had scowr’d the Coast all about, he return’d back into England.

Captain Prinne was likewise sent from Bristol, who arriving happily in those Parts, brought back with him at his return the most exact Discovery of that Coast that ever had been gain’d till then.

A while after, at the Charge of the said Sir John Popham, a hundred Men were sent to settle a Colony at Sagadehoc, under the Command of George Popham, Raleigh Gilbert, Master of the Ship, who seated themselves in a Peninsula, at the Mouth of this River; which attempting to discover, they met with a Wood near to an Island, distant from the Line about forty five Degrees, and some odd Seconds, where they easily went on Shore. In the Year 1608. the Commander of the Colony deceasing, and not long after him the Lord Chief Justice, who had been the chief that had furnish’d them with fresh Supplies, they return’d for England in those Ships that had been sent them with Succours: At which unexpected return, the Patrons of the Design were so offended, that for a certain time they desisted from their Enterprizes. In the mean while the French making use of this occasion, Planted Colonies in divers places, when Sir Samuel Argal from Virginia disturb’d their Designs, and brought away Prisoners all he could lay hold on.

Suddenly after Captain Hobson and divers others were set out with very great Preparations, and with them two of the Natives which had been detain’d for some time in England, whom they thought to have made use of, the better to draw the rest of the Natives to their Commerce; but because a little before twenty four of them had been treacherously dealt with by one Hunt, they contracted from thence so great an animosity towards the English, that Captain Hobson was constrain’d to return without effecting any thing.

In the Year 1614. Captain John Smith being sent to Fish for Whales, and seek after Mines of Gold and Silver, Landed upon the Island of Monahiggan, where he found some store of Whales, but not such as those by whose Oyl they use to make so much profit.

About the same time (two of the Natives being recover’d, Erpenow of Capawick, that had escap’d from Captain Hobson, and Assacumet of Pemmaquid, one of those that had been taken Prisoners with Chaloung) Captain Harly, with Necessaries convenient for such a Voyage, was dispatch’d away by Sir Ferdinando Gorges, the Earl of Southampton favouring the Design, and furnishing him with some Land-Soldiers under the Command of Captain Hobson, who not discourag’d with his former ill Success, resolv’d upon a second Adventure.

In the Year 1615. Sir Richard Hakings undertook a Voyage into those Parts by authority of the Council of the second Colony, but by reason of the great Wars among the Natives, his Observations could not be such as might give any farther light than what had been already receiv’d.

Soon after which Captain Dormer coming for England from New-found-Land, and Landing at Plymouth, apply’d himself to the Governor, by whom he was dispatch’d away, with Direction to meet Captain Rocroft, sent away a little before; but Rocroft being dead by that time Dormer could come after him to Virginia, where he heard he was, he returning to Capawick, was there set upon by Erpenow, the foremention’d Salvage, and other Indians that were Conspirators with him; and within a short while after at Virginia, whither he went to be cur’d of the Wounds he receiv’d in that Assassination, he fell sick and died.

About the Year 1623. Captain Robert Gorges, newly come out of the Venetian War, was employ’d by the Council of New Englands Affairs as the Lieutenant-General, to regulate the Abuses of divers Fisher-men and other Interlopers, who without License frequented those Coasts: for which Service he had assign’d to him all that part of the main Land situate upon the North-East side of the Bay of the Messachasets.

By these several Colonies sent so thick one after another, both a full Discovery of the Countrey came to be made, and a large gap open’d to the free possession thereof; yet in regard of the many disappointments and misfortunes the several Companies sent over met with, and counting the vast Charges their setting forth cost the Undertakers, which would have been still increas’d by the need of continu’d Supplies, in all probability New England would have been but thinly peopled to this day, had not a great Tide of People, possess’d with an aversion to the Church-Government of England, and fled into Holland for Liberty of Conscience, eagerly taken hold of this opportunity to make themselves Masters of their own Opinions, and of a Place where they might erect a Government suitable thereunto: and though at first there were some Exceptions taken, as if this Countrey was to be made a Receptacle of Sectaries, and such as condemn’d the Ecclesiastical Government of the Nation, insomuch that Sir Ferdinando Gorges, to whom they apply’d themselves, desiring him to mediate for them to the Council of New Englands Affairs, when they perceiv’d the Authority they had from the Virginia Company, could not warrant their abode there, had enough to do (notwithstanding his Apology, That these things hapned contrary to his expectation) to wipe away the jealousie which was entertain’d of him, it being Order’d, that no more should be suffer’d to pass into New England, but such as should take the Oaths of Allegiance and Supremacy: yet at last there was little notice taken who went, perhaps upon consideration, that the vast resort of People thither would be of greater advantage to the Plantations, than their different Opinions, at so remote a distance, could be prejudicial, so long as they acknowledg’d Obedience to the King and Civil Power: However, Sir Ferdinando, to clear himself the better, mov’d those Lords that were the chief Actors in the Business, to resign their Grand Patent to the King, and pass particular Patents to themselves of such part of the Countrey along the Sea-Coast, as might be sufficient for them: To this Motion there being a general Assent given by the Lords, and a Day appointed for the conclusion thereof, an Act was made for the Resignation of the Patent, alloting to each Man their several Bounds. From the uttermost parts began the Limits of the Lord Mougrave, and ended at Hudson’s River. To the Eastward of which River, for the space of sixty Miles in length, was placed the Duke of Richmond’s Assignment: Next to him was setled the Earl of Carlile: Next him the Lord Edward Gorges: Next the Marquess of Hamilton: Then Captain John Mason: And lastly his own, which extended to the great River Sagadehoc, being sixty Miles, and so up into the Main Land a hundred and twenty Miles, which he was pleas’d to call by the Name of The Province of Main.

The Landing of the English in Plymouth Plantation was very much facilitated by the great Mortality that hapned amongst the Indians about that time, amongst the Pecods, Narragansets, Nianticks, Tarantines, Wippanaps, and those of Abargini, Agissawang, and Pockanekie, their Powwows, or Doctors, seeing with amazement their Wigwams, or Streets, lie full of dead Bodies, and in vain expecting help from Squantam their good, or Abbamoch their bad God. Not long before, that blazing Comet, so much talk’d of in Europe, apppear’d after Sun-setting in their Horizon South-West for the space of thirty Sleeps, (for so they reckon their Days). They Landed at first with little or no resistance, a handful of Men onely being sent before to keep possession for their Companions, who arriv’d eight days after; when the Natives appearing with their Bowes and Arrows, let flie their long Shafts amongst them; whereupon one Captain Miles Standish with his Fowling-piece shot the stoutest Sachem amongst the Indians, as he was reaching an Arrow from his Quiver; which the rest seeing, fled into the Woods and Thickets.

The same Year the Merchant-Adventurers in England sent forth store of Servants to provide against the Wants of that place; amongst whom came over a mix’d Multitude, who setled themselves in the Bosom of the Cape now call’d Gloucester.

About the Year 1631. there fled to the English at Water-town the Indians that dwelt thereabouts, for protection against the Tarratines, a sort of cruel and salvage Cannibals, by whom near the Town of Saugust, in the very dead time of the Night, one Lieutenant Walker being on a sudden alarm’d, was shot through his Coat and Buff Jacket with two Indian Arrows. That Night the English stood upon their Guard, and the next Morning sent word to other parts; who gather’d together, and taking counsel how to quit themselves of these Indians, agreed to discharge their great Guns; whose redoubled noise, ratling in the Rocks, struck terror into the Indians, and caus’d them to betake themselves to flight. The Autumn following, others of the Indians, who till then had held a good correspondence with the Planters, began to quarrel about the Bounds of their Land; but a great Mortality, by the raging of the Small-Pox, breaking out amongst them, put an end to that Controversie: There died amongst the rest one of the chief of the Sagamores of the Mattachusets, call’d Sagamore John, who before his Death had been instructed in the Christian Faith, and took care that his two Sons should be nurtured therein.

In the Year 1635. there arrived several Ships with great plenty of Provisions, and many Persons of good Quality, and amongst the rest Sir Henry Vane.

The same Year the People of Cambridge, otherwise call’d New-town, hearing of a fertile place upon the River Canectico, remov’d thither, and erected a new Corporation by the Name of Banectico, being encourag’d thereunto by the Lord Say and the Lord Brooks, and planting a Forrest at the mouth of the River, call’d it Saybrook Forrest.

About the Year 1638. the Pequods, a stout and Warlike Nation, lying to the South-West of the Mattachusets, were discover’d upon their March within some few Miles of Hartford: Their coming very much terrifi’d all that inhabited thereabouts; but they took onely three Women and return’d; one of whom making a violent resistance, had her Brains beaten out; the other two they carried away with them, without abusing their Persons, as it was suppos’d they would, for they esteem’d their own Shaws, being black, beyond our Women. Their chief Design was to learn to make Gunpowder; which seeing they could not effect, they look’d upon their Prize as nothing so precious as they imagin’d.

A little after another Indian War threatning the English, they resolv’d together to send an Ambassador to Cannonicus, chief Sachem of the Naragansits, endeavoring to prevent him from confederating with the Pequods, who (as they had Intelligence) were about sending to him to joyn with them: Cannonicus being grown old, had resign’d the Government to his Nephew Mantinemo, a stern Man, and of a cruel Nature. The Ambassadors arriving at his Court, which was about eighty Miles from Boston, the Indian Prince assembled his chief Councellors, and having Entertain’d the Ambassadors Magnificently, and Feasted them Royally, gave them Audience in his State-house; where the Sachem, to manifest his greater State, lay along upon the Ground, with all his Nobility sitting about him, with their Legs doubled up, and their Knees touching their Chin: The English Interpreter having made his Speech in the Name of the rest, both Cannonicus and the young King gave discreet Answers, signifying their Resolutions to keep a fair Correspondence with the English, and yet not to fall out with the Pequods: Who a little after making also their Addresses to the same King, he disswaded them by many Reasons from making War with the English, and to deliver into their hands those Persons that had murther’d any of them. The Pequods nevertheless, though they seem’d inclinable to his Counsel, yet they acted as Enemies; for when the English sent a Company of Soldiers into their Countrey to treat with them about delivering up the Murtherers, they made shew of willingness, but spying their advantage, betook themselves to their Heels; and whomsoever they took stragling by surprise, they revil’d and insulted over in a most cruel manner, vilifying the Christian Religion, and uttering all the Blasphemies they could invent. Whereupon they rais’d fresh Souldiers for the War, to the number of fourscore, out of the several Towns in the Mattachusets, and with some Indian Guides came to their Fort, within which they had pitch’d their Wigwams, the Entrance being on two sides, with intricate Meanders to enter; at which were plac’d Indian Bowe-men, who shot the foremost of the English; yet they had little to boast of in the end, for the English rushing in through the winding Ways, and placing themselves round the Wigwams, made a very prosperous Shot, by directing the Muzzles of their Musquets against the Indians which lay sleeping on the Ground: In the midst of which rouzing terror and confusion they were defeated with little ado, most of them being either wounded, kill’d, or taken. The English thus animated with the first Victory, send their Prisoners to the Pinnaces, and prosecute the War in Hand, marching against the next Body of the Indians, which lay Encamp’d on a Hill about two Miles distant, where they gave them a second Overthrow, slaying many more than in the first Engagement; the rest flying to a very thick inaccessible Swamp or Bog, were there besieg’d by the English; and skulking up and down, as they saw their opportunity they would Shoot at them with their Arrows, and then suddenly fall flat along in the Water; at last the English finding out a Passage into the Swamp, utterly defeated them, and put an end to the War with the loss of few Mens Lives, and not many wounded.

In the Year 1640. there came over a fresh Supply of People into New England, and finding no place to settle in within any of the former erected Colonies, they repair’d to a place call’d Long Island, sever’d from the Continent of New-Haven, about sixty Miles off the Sea.

The Year following the four Colonies, namely the Massachusets, Plymouth, Canectico, and New-Haven, taking into consideration the many Nations that were on all sides of them, as the French, Dutch, Jews, and native Indians; as also how the three first went to lay claim to Lands they never had any right to, and the last to be continually quarrelling and contending, where they saw any hopes of prevailing, by Commissioners chosen from the respective Colonies, concluded a firm Confederation to assist each other in all just and lawful Wars; upon which there came in certain Indian Sachems, as Pomham, Miantonemo, Soccanocoh, and Uncas, who not onely submitted to the English Government, but also, if occasion were, in matters of Controversie submitted to their Arbitration: But the Contest between Miantonemo and Uncas was too hot to be appeas’d, (though the English were not wanting to interpose) unless by the Blood of one of them, as will appear by the Consequence: Uncas was a Prince of For, whose Life Miantonemo, though a much more potent Prince, sought to take away by treachery, hiring a young Man of the Pequod Nation to murther him, as the following Story renders suspected; for one dark Evening this Sachem passing from one Wigwam to another, was Shot through the Arm with an Arrow; but recovering the Palace, had the Arrow pull’d out, and his Arm cur’d: the young Man that was suspected being examin’d, how he came by that great store of Wampompeage which was found about him, and being able to give no good account, it increas’d the suspicion, and induc’d Uncas to complain to the English at a General Court held at Boston: Whereupon the young Man was Examin’d in the presence of Miantonemo, who came thither with his Attendants; but the young Man tutor’d, as suppos’d, by Miantonemo, pretended that Uncas had enjoyn’d him to feign that he was hir’d by Miantonemo to kill him: To which Tale of his little belief being given, it was concluded upon farther Examination of him in private that he had done the Fact: nevertheless they let him depart with Miantonemo, advising him to send him home to Uncas; but he in stead of returning him cut off his Head, and forthwith gather’d an Army of a thousand Men to fight with Uncas; who met him with half the Men: the Battel being joyn’d, the Narragansets, though the far greater multitude, were beaten by the Wawhiggins, through the Valour of Uncas their Prince; who perfected his Victory by possessing himself of the Person of Miantonemo, whom, having put his Life-guard to flight, he carried away with him in triumph to the Town of Hartford, desiring to have the advice of the United Colonies what to do with his Prisoner: Whereupon the Commissioners having had sufficient proof of Miantonemo’s treachery towards this Prince, advis’d Uncas to put him to death, but not to exercise that barbarous kind of cruelty which is usual amongst them in these Cases. The Sachem, upon this advice, not long after pretended to remove him to a safer place, but by the Way caus’d him to be Executed: His Subjects and Kindred were troubled at his Death, but the little Princes his Neighbors, over whom he had tyranniz’d, rather rejoyc’d.

In the Year 1645, the Sons of old Canonnicus, their Father being dead, began to fall into hot Contentions with their Neighbors, and being forbidden by the United Colonies, they did not stick to threaten Wars to the English also. Whereupon the Commissioners rais’d an Army of Horse and Foot, and made Major General Edward Gibbons Commander in Chief over them. But the Indians hearing of this Preparation, sent some of their chief Nobility to the Commissioners of the United Colonies, who were assembled at Boston, to Treat about Peace; to which the Commissioners agreed, upon condition they should pay a part of the Charges of the War; and that they should send four of their Sons for Hostages till the Sum was paid; and the Hostages being sent back before the Wapom was all paid, the two Princes, Pesicus and Mexanimo, upon the sending a Company of Armed Men to demand it, sent the remainder of the Money.

In the Year 1647. divers Persons of Quality ventur’d their Estates upon an Iron Mill, which they began at Braintree, but it profited the Owners little, rather wasting their Stock, the price of Labor in matters of that nature, being double or treble to what it is in England.

These are the most material Transactions we find deliver’d by any one which hapned from the first discovery till the Year before mention’d: what hath hapned from that time to this, chiefly relates to the several Revolutions that have been in England, and shall be therefore taken notice of when we come to speak of the Government of these Plantations.

The Commodities of this Countrey, together with the Trees and other sorts of Plants.

Though there are, who having remain’d some time, and been concern’d in those Parts, affirm the Soil of New England to be nothing so fruitful as it is believ’d and commonly deliver’d to be, yet we think it not improper to give a brief account of the Trees and other Plants; also the Beasts, Birds, Fishes, and other Commodities which most Writers will have to be the production of this Countrey, especially since we find them compactly summ’d up by an unknown Writer in the Language of the Muses. The recital of the Plants and Trees, which (excepting the Cedar, Sassafras, and Dyers Sumach) are all of the same kind with those that grow in Europe, onely differing in nature, according as the Epithets of many of them declare, is as follows:

Trees both in Hills and Plains in plenty be;

The long-liv’d Oak, and mournful Cypress Tree;

Skie-towring Pines, and Chesnuts coated rough;

The lasting Cedar, with the Walnut tough;

The Rozen-dropping Fir, for Mast in use;

The Boat-men seek for Oars light, neat grown Sprewse;

The brittle Ash, the ever-trembling Asps;

The broad-spread Elm, whose Concave harbors Wasps;

The Water-spungy Alder, good for nought;
Small Eldern by the Indian Fletchers sought;
The knotty Maple, pallid Birch, Hawthorns;

The Horn-bound Tree, that to be cloven scorns;

Which from the tender Vine oft takes his Spouse,

Who twines embracing Arms about his Boughs.
Within this Indian Orchard Fruits be some;
The ruddy Cherry, and the jetty Plumb;
Snake-murthering Hazle, with sweet Saxafrage,
Whose Leaves in Beer allay hot Feavers rage;
The Dyers Shumach, with more Trees there be,
That are both good to use, and rare to see.

Beasts.

The Beasts peculiar to this Countrey are the Moose, the Rackoon, and the Musquash; the two first Land-Animals, the last Amphibious, which with others common to them with us, are thus versifi’d by the abovesaid Author:

The Kingly Lyon, and the strong-arm’d Bear;

The large limb’d Mooses, with the tripping Deer;

Quill-darting Porcupines, that Rackoons be
Castled ith’ hollow of an aged Tree;
The skipping Squirrel, Rabbet, purblind Hare,
Immured in the self-same Castle are,
Lest red-ey’d Ferrets, wily Foxes should,
Them undermine, if Ramper’d but with Mold;

The grim-fac’d Ounce, and rav’nous howling Wolf,

Whose meagre Paunch sucks like a swallowing Gulph;

Black glittering Otters, and rich Coated Beaver;

The Civet-scented Musquash smelling ever.

Of such of these as are altogether unknown to us, take these brief Descriptions.

The Moose.

The Beast call’d a Moose, is not much unlike red Deer, and is as big as an Ox, slow of Foot, Headed like a Buck, with a broad Beam, some being two Yards wide in the Head, their flesh is as good as Beef, their Hides good for Clothing; if these were kept tame, and accustom’d to the Yoke, they would be a great Commodity: First, because they are so fruitful, bringing forth three at a time being likewise very uberous: Secondly, because they will live in Winter without any Fodder. There are not many of these in the Massachusets Bay, but forty Miles to the North-East there are great store of them.

The Rackoon.

The Rackoon is a deep Furr’d Beast, not much unlike a Badger, having a Tail like a Fox, as good Meat as a Lamb: These Beasts in the day time sleep in hollow Trees, in a Moon-shine night they go to feed on Clams at a low Tide, by the Sea side, where the English hunt them with their Dogs.

The Musquash.

The Musquash is much like a Beaver for shape, but nothing near so big; the Male hath two Stones, which smell as sweet as Musk, and being kill’d in Winter, never lose their sweet smell: These Skins are no bigger than a Coney-skin, yet are sold for five Shillings apiece, being sent for Tokens into England; one good Skin will perfume a whole house full of Clothes, if it be right and good.

Birds.

The Birds both common and peculiar are thus recited.

The Princely Eagle, and the soaring Hawk,

Whom in their unknown ways there’s none can chawk:

The Humbird for some Queens rich Cage more fit,

Than in the vacant Wilderness to sit.

The swift-wing’d Swallow sweeping to and fro,

As swift as Arrow from Tartarian Bowe.

When as Aurora’s Infant day new springs,

There th’morning mounting Lark her sweet lays sings.

The harmonious Thrush, swift Pigeon, Turtle-dove,

Who to her Mate doth ever constant prove:

The Turky-Pheasant, Heath-cock, Partridge rare,

The Carrion-tearing Crow, and hurtful Stare,
The long-liv’d Raven, th’ominous Screech-Owl,
Who tells, as old Wives say, disasters foul.

The drowsie Madge that leaves her day-lov’d Nest,

And loves to rove, when Day-birds be at rest:

Th’Eel-murthering Hearn, and greedy Cormorant,

That near the Creeks in morish Marshes haunt.

The bellowing Bittern, with the long-leg’d Crane,

Presaging Winters hard, and dearth of Grain.

The Silver Swan that tunes her mournful breath,

To sing the Dirge of her approaching death.

The tattering Oldwives, and the cackling Geese,

The fearful Gull that shuns the murthering Peece.

The strong-wing’d Mallard, with the nimble Teal,

And ill-shape’t Loon, who his harsh Notes doth squeal.

There Widgins, Sheldrakes and Humilitees,

Snites, Doppers, Sea-Larks, in whole million flees.

Of these the Humbird, Loon, and Humility are not to be pass’d by without particular observation.

The Humbird.

The Humbird is one of the wonders of the Countrey, being no bigger than a Hornet, yet hath all the Dimensions of a Bird, as Bill, and Wings with Quills, Spider-like Legs, small Claws: for Colour, she is as glorious as the Rain-bow; as she flies, she makes a little humming noise like a Humble-bee, wherefore she is call’d the Humbird.

The Loon.

The Humility, or Simplicity.

The Loon is an ill-shap’d thing like a Cormorant, but that he can neither go nor flie; he maketh a noise sometimes like Sowgelders Horn. The Humilities or Simplicities (as we may rather call them) are of two sorts, the biggest being as large as a green Plover; the other as big as Birds we call Knots in England. Such is the simplicity of the smaller sorts of these Birds, that one may drive them on a heap like so many Sheep, and seeing a fit time shoot them; the living seeing the dead, settle themselves on the same place again, amongst which the Fowler discharges again: These Birds are to be had upon Sandy Brakes, at the latter end of Summer before the Geese come in.

Fishes.

No less Poetical a Bill of Fare is brought of the Fish on the Sea-Coasts, and in the Rivers of New England in these subsequent Verses.

The King of Waters, the Sea shouldering Whale,

The snuffing Grampus, with the Oily Seale,
The storm presaging Porpus, Herring-Hog,
Line-shearing Shark, the Catfish and Sea Dog,

The Scale-fenc’d Sturgeon, wry-mouth’d Hollibut,

The flounsing Salmon, Codfish, Greedigut:

Cole, Haddock, Hage, the Thornback, and the Scate,

Whose slimy outside makes him seld in date,

The stately Bass, old Neptune’s fleeting Post,

That Tides it out and in from Sea to Coast.
Consorting Herrings, and the bonny Shad,
Big-belly’d Alewives, Mackrills richly clad

With Rainbow colours, Frostfish and the Smelt,

As good as ever Lady Gustus felt.
The spotted Lamprons, Eels, the Lamperies,
That seek fresh Water-Brooks with Argus Eyes,
These watery Villagers, with thousands more,
Do pass and repass near the Verdant Shore.

Kinds of Shell-fish.

The luscious Lobster, with the Crabfish raw,
The brinish Oyster, Muscle, Periwigge,
And Tortoise sought for by the Indian Sqaw,

Which to the Flats dance many a Winters Jigge,

To dive for Cocles, and to dig for Clams,

Whereby her lazie Husbands guts she crams.

The Seal.

To speak of the most unusual of these sorts of Fish; First the Seal, which is call’d the Sea-Calf, his Skin is good for divers uses, his Body being between Flesh and Fish, it is not very delectable to the Palate, or congruent with the Stomack; his Oil is very good to burn in Lamps, of which he affords a great deal.

The Shark.

The Shark is a kind of Fish as big as a Man, some as big as a Horse, with three rows of Teeth within his Mouth, with which he snaps asunder the Fishermans Lines, if he be not very circumspect: This Fish will leap at a Mans hand if it be over board, and with his Teeth snap off a Mans Leg or Hand if he be Swimming; these are often taken, being good for nothing but Manuring of Land.

The Hollibut.

The Hollibut is not much unlike a Pleace or Turbut, some being two yards long, and one wide, a Foot thick; the plenty of better Fish makes these of little esteem, except the Head and Finns, which Stew’d or Bak’d is very good; these Hollibuts be little set by while Basse is in season.

The Basse.

The Basse is one of the best Fishes in the Countrey, and though Men are soon weary’d with other Fish, yet are they never with Basse; it is a delicate, fine, fat, fast Fish, having a Bone in his Head which contains a Sawcerful of Marrow, sweet and good, pleasant to the Palate, and wholsom to the Stomack: When there be great store of them, we only eat the Heads, and Salt up the Bodies for Winter, which exceeds Ling or Haberdine: Of these Fishes some are three, and some four Foot long, some bigger, some lesser; at some Tides a Man may catch a dozen or twenty of these in three hours; the way to catch them is with Hook and Line: The Fisherman taking a great Cod-line, to which he fasteneth a piece of Lobster, throws it into the Sea, the Fish biting at it, he pulls her to him, and knocks her on the head with a Stick.

Alewives.

Alewives are a kind of Fish which is much like a Herring, which in the later end of April come up to the fresh Rivers to Spawn, in such multitudes as is almost incredible, pressing up in such shallow Waters as will scarce permit them to Swim, having likewise such longing desire after the fresh Water Ponds, that no beatings with Poles, or forcive agitations by other devices, will cause them to return to the Sea, till they have cast their Spawn.

Clamms or Clamps.

Clamms or Clamps, are a Shell-fish not much unlike a Cockle, they lie under the Sand and have every one of them a round hole to take Air, and receive Water at. When the Tide ebbs and flows, a Man running over these Clamm banks will presently be made all wet, by their spouting of Water out of those small holes: These Fishes are in great plenty in most places of the Countrey, which is a great Commodity for the feeding of Swine, both in Winter and Summer; for being once us’d to those places, they will repair to them as duly every Ebb, as if they were driven to them by Keepers: In some places of the Countrey there be Clamms as big as a Peny white Loaf, which are great Dainties amongst the Natives, and would be in great esteem amongst the English, were it not for better Fish.

Other Commodities which this Countrey is said to yield, are, in down-right Prose, Furrs, Flax, Linnen, Iron, Pitch, Masts, Cables, and some quantity of Amber; so that if what many Authors have consented to assert concerning New England be not a meer Fiction, what e’re hath been affirm’d of the unfruitfulness of the Country will demonstrably be found invalid.

Noxious Creatures.

There are also to be found here some hurtful Creatures, of which, that which is most injurious to the Person and Life of a Man is the Rattle-Snake, which is generally a yard and a half long, as thick in the middle as the small of a Mans Leg; she hath a yellow Belly, her Back being spotted with black, russet, yellow, and green colours, plac’d like Scales; at her Tail is a Rattle, with which she makes a noise when she is molested, or when she seeth any approach near her; her Neck seems to be no thicker than a Mans Thumb, yet she can swallow a Squirril, having a great wide Mouth, with Teeth as sharp as Needles, wherewith she biteth such as tread upon her, her Poyson lyeth in her Teeth, for she hath no Sting. When any Man is bitten by any of these Creatures, the Poyson spreads so suddenly through the Veins, and so runs to the Heart, that in one hour it causeth Death, unless he hath the Antidote to expel the Poyson, which is a Root call’d Snake-weed, which must be champ’d, the Spittle swallow’d, and the Root apply’d to the Sore; this is present Cure against that which would be present death without it: This Weed is rank Poyson, if it be taken by any man that is not bitten; whosoever is bitten by these Snakes, his flesh becomes as spotted as a Leopard, until he be perfectly cur’d. It is reported, that if the Party live that is bitten, the Snake will die, and if the Party die, the Snake will live. This is a most Poysonous and dangerous Animal, yet nothing so bad as the report goes of it in England; for whereas it is said to kill a Man with its breath, and that it can flie, there is no such matter, for it is naturally the most sleepy and unnimble Creature that lives, never offering to leap or bite any Man, if it be not trodden on first; and it is their desire in hot weather to lie in Paths, where the Sun may shine on them, where they will sleep so soundly, that I have known four Men stride over one of them, and never awake it; five or six Men have been bitten by them, which by using of Snake-weed were all cur’d, never any yet losing his life by them. Cows have been bitten, but being cut in divers places, and this Weed thrust into their flesh, were cur’d; A small Switch will easily kill one of these Snakes. In many places of the Country there be none of them, as at Plymouth, New-town, Igowamme, Nahant, &c. In some places they will live on one side of the River, and swimming but over the Water, as soon as they are come into the Woods, they turn up their yellow Bellies and die. Up into the Countrey, Westward from the Plantations, is a high Hill, which is call’d Rattle-Snake-Hill, where there are great store of these Poysonous Creatures.

There are likewise troublesome Flies.

First there is a wild Bee or Wasp, which commonly guards the Grape, building by Cobweb habitation amongst the Leaves: Secondly a great green Flie, not much unlike our Horse-Flies in England; they will nipp so sore, that they will fetch Blood either of Man or Beast, and are most troublesome where most Cattel are, which brings them from out of the Woods to the Houses; this Flie continues but for the Moneth of June. The third is Gurnipper, which is a small black Flie, no bigger than a Flea; her biting causeth an itching upon the Hands or Face, which provoketh scratching, which is troublesome to some; this Flie is busie but in close Mornings or Evenings, and continues not above three Weeks; the least Wind or heat expels them. The fourth is a Musketor, which is not unlike to our Gnats in England; in places where there is no thick Woods or Swamps, there are none or very few. In the new Plantations they are troublesome for the first year, but the Wood decaying they vanish: These Flies cannot endure Wind, heat or cold, so that these are only troublesome in close thick Weather, and against Rain, many that are bitten will fall a scratching, whereupon their Faces and Hands swell.

The nature of the ancient Inhabitants.

As touching the Nature of the ancient Inhabitants, they are to be consider’d according to their several Shires or Divisions; those that inhabit to the East and North-East bore the name of Churchers and Tarrenteens; those in the Southern parts were call’d Pequods, and Narragansets; those Westward, Connectacuts and Mowhacks; to the North-West, of whom were the Aberginians.

The nature of the Mowhacks.

The Mowhacks were ever accounted a cruel bloudy People, which were wont to come down upon their poor Neighbors, with more than bruitish Savageness, spoiling their Corn, burning their Houses, slaying Men, ravishing Women, yea very Canibals they were, sometimes eating on a Man one part after another before his Face, and while yet living; insomuch, that the very Name of a Mowhack would strike the Heart of a poor Aberginian dead, till they had the English on their sides to succor them; for these inhumane Homicides confess that they dare not meddle with a white Fac’d Man, accompany’d with his hot-mouth’d Weapon.

These Indians are a People of tall Stature, long grim Visages, slender Wasted, and having exceeding great Arms and Thighs, wherein they say their strength lieth; which is such, that one of them hath been known to kill a Dog with a fillip of his Finger, and afterwards to have flead and sod him, and eat him to his Dinner. They are so hardy, that they can eat such things as would make other Indians sick to look upon; being destitute of Fish and Flesh, they suffice Hunger and maintain Nature with the use of Vegetatives; but that which they most hunt after, is the flesh of Man: Their custom is, if they get a stranger near their Habitations, not to Butcher him immediately, but keep him in as good plight as they can, feeding him with the best Victuals they have.

These Indians are more desperate in Wars than the other Indians, which proceeds not only from the fierceness of their Natures, but also in that they know themselves to be better Arm’d and Weapon’d; all of them wearing Sea Horse Skins and Barks of Trees, made by their Art as impenetrable, it is thought, as Steel, wearing Head-Pieces of the same, under which they March securely and undantedly, running, and fiercely crying out, Hadree Hadree succomee succomee, We come to suck your Blood, not fearing the feather’d shafts of the strong-arm’d Bow-men, but like unruly headstrong Stallions, beat them down with their right-hand Tamahawks, and left-hand Javelins, being all the Weapons which they use, counting Bowes a cowardly fight. Tamahawks are Staves of two Foot and a half long, with knobs at one end as round and big as a Foot ball; a Javelin is a short Spear, headed with sharp Sea-Horse Teeth; one blow or thrust with these sharp Weapons, will not need a second to hasten death from a Mowhacks arm.

The nature of the Indians inhabiting Eastward.

The Tarrenteens saving that they eat not Mans flesh, are little less Salvage and cruel than these Cannibals; our Indians do fear them as their deadly Enemies, for so many of them as they meet, they kill. Take these Indians in their own proper and natural disposition, and they are reported to be wise, lofty-spirited, constant in friendship to one another, true in their promise, and more industrious than many others.

The nature of the Pequods and Narragansets.

The Pequants are a stately Warlike People, just and equal in their dealings; not treacherous either to their Country-men, or English, to whom (except in time of War) they were not any ways uncivil. Their next Neighbors the Narragansets, are the most numerous People in those Parts, the most rich also, and the most industrious; being the Store-house of all such kind of wild Merchandize as is amongst them. These Men are the most curious Minters of their Wampompeage and Mowhakes, which they form out of the inmost Wreaths of Periwinkle-shells. The Northern, Eastern, and Western Indians fetch all their Coyn from these Southern Mint-Masters. From hence they have most of their curious Pendants and Bracelets, from hence they have their great Stone Pipes, which will hold a quarter of an Ounce of Tobacco, which they make with Steel Drills and other Instruments; such is their Ingenuity and dexterity, that they can imitate the English Mold so accurately, that were it not for matter and colour, it were hard to distinguish them; they make them of green, and sometimes of black Stone; they are much desir’d of our English Tobacconists, for their rarity, strength, handsomness, and coolness. Hence likewise our Indians had their Pots, wherein they us’d to seeth their Victuals before they knew the use of Brass. Since the English came, they have employ’d most of their time in catching of Beavers, Otters, and Musquashes, which they bring down into the Bay, returning back loaden with English Commodities, of which they make double profit, by selling them to more remote Indians, who are ignorant at what cheap rates they obtain them, in comparison of what they make them pay, so making their Neighbors ignorance their enrichment: They were never known to be desirous to take in hand any Martial Enterprize, or expose themselves to the uncertain events of War; wherefore the Pequants call them Women-like Men, resting secure under the conceit of their popularity, and seeking rather to grow rich by industry, than famous by deeds of Chivalry.

The nature and complexion of the Aberginians.

Most of these Northward Indians are between five and six Foot high, straight Body’d, strongly compos’d, smooth Skin’d, merry Countenanc’d, of Complexion more swarthy than the Spaniards, black Hair’d, high Foreheaded, black Ey’d, out-Nos’d, broad Shoulder’d, brawny Arm’d, long and slender Handed, out Breasted, small Wasted, lank Belly’d, well Thigh’d, flat Kneed, with handsome grown Legs, and small Feet: In a word, take them when the Blood skips in their Veins, when the Flesh is on their Backs, and Marrow in their Bones, when they frolick in their antique Deportments and Indian Postures, they are more amiable to behold (though onely in Adam’s Livery) than many a trim Gallant in the newest Mode; and though their Houses are but mean, their Lodging as homely, Commons scant, their Drink Water, and Nature their best Clothing, yet they still are healthful and lusty. Their smooth Skins proceed from the often anointing of their Bodies with the Oyl of Fishes, and the fat of Eagles, with the grease of Rackoons, which they hold in Summer the best Antidote to keep their Skin from blistering with the scorching Sun; it is their best Armor against the Musketoes, and the surest abrasour of the hairy Excrement, and stops the Pores of their Bodies against the nipping Winters cold. Their black Hair is natural, yet is brought to a more Jetty colour by Oyling, Dying, and daily dressing; sometimes they wear it very long, hanging down in a loose dishevel’d Womanish manner, otherwise ty’d up hard and short like a Horse Tail, bound close with a Fillet, which they say makes it grow the faster; they are not a little Phantastical in this particular; their Boys being not permitted to wear their Hair long till sixteen years of Age, and then they must come to it by degrees; some being cut with a long foretop, a long lock on the Crown, one of each side of his Head, the rest of his Hair being cut even with the Scalp; the young Men and Soldiers wear their Hair long on the one side, the other being cut short like a Screw; other cuts they have as their Fancy leads them, which would torture the Wits of the most exact Barber to imitate. But though they are thus proud of the Hair of their Head, you cannot wooe them to wear it on their Chins, where it no sooner grows, but it is stubb’d up by the roots, for they count it as an unuseful, cumbersome, and opprobrious excrement, insomuch as they call him an English Mans Bastard that hath but the appearance of a Beard.

The Apparel, Ornaments, Paintings, and other artificial Deckings of the Indians.

The Cloathing of the Indians is only a pair of Indian Breeches to cover their secret Parts, which is but a piece of Cloth a yard and a half long, but between their Groins, ty’d with a Snakes Skin about their middles, one end hanging down with a flap before, the other like a tail behind. In the Winter time, the more Aged of them wear Leather Drawers, in form like Irish Trouses, fasten’d under their Girdle with Buttons: They wear Shooes likewise of their own making, cut out of a Mooses Hide; many of them wear Skins about them, in form of an Irish Mantle, and of these some are Bears Skins, Mooses Skins, and Beaver Skins sew’d together, others Otter Skins, and Rackoon Skins; most of them in the Winter having his deep Furr’d Cat Skin, like a large Muff, which he shifts to that Arm which lieth most expos’d to the Wind. Although they are poor, yet is there in them the sparks of natural Pride, which appears in their longing desire after many kind of Ornaments, wearing Pendants in their Ears, in form of Birds, Beasts, and Fishes, Carv’d out of Bone, Shells, and Stone, with long Bracelets of their curious wrought Wampompeage and Mowhackees, which they put about their Necks and Loins; these they count a rare kind of Decking; many of the better sort bearing upon their Cheeks certain Pourtraitures of Beasts, as Bears, Deers, Mooses, Wolves, &c. some of Fowls, as of Eagles, Hawks, &c. which is not a superficial Painting, but a certain Incision, or else a raising of their Skin by a small sharp Instrument, under which they convey a certain kind of black unchangeable Ink, which makes the desir’d form apparent and permanent. Others have certain round Impressions down the outside of their Arms and Breasts, in form of Mullets or Spur-rowels, which they imprint by searing Irons: Whether these be Foils to illustrate their unparallel’d Beauty (as they deem it) or Arms to blazon their antique Gentility, cannot easily be determin’d: But a Segamore with a Humbird in his Ear for a Pendant, a black Hawk on his Head for his Plume, Mowhackees for his Gold Chain, good store of Wampompeage begirting his Loins, his Bowe in his Hand, his Quiver at his Back, with six naked Indian Lacquies at his Heels for his Guard, thinks himself little Inferior to the great Cham.

Their Diet, Cookery, Meal-times, and Hospitality at their Kettles.

In Winter time they have all manner of Fowls and Beasts of the Land and Water, Pond-fish, with Cathaires and other Roots, Indian Beans and Clamms; in the Summer they have all manner of Sea-fish, with all sorts of Berries. For the ordering of their Victuals, they Boil or Roast them, having large Kettles which they Traded for with the French long since, and do still buy of the English as their need requires, before they had substantial Earthen Pots of their own making. Their Spits are no other than cloven Sticks, sharpen’d at one end to thrust into the ground; into these cloven Sticks they thrust the Flesh or Fish they would have Roasted, behemming a round fire with a dozen of Spits at a time, turning them as they see occasion. They seldom or never make Bread of their Indian Corn, but seethe it whole like Beans, eating three or four Corns with a mouthful of Fish or Flesh, sometimes eating Meat first, and Corns after, filling the Chinks with their Broth. In Summer, when their Corn is spent, Sqoutersquashes is their best Bread, a Fruit like a young Pumpion: But as all are fellows at Foot-ball, so they all meet Friends at the Kettle, saving their Wives, that Dance a Spaniel-like attendance at their Backs for their Fragments. If their occasions cause them to Travel, the best of their Victuals for their Journey is Nocake, (as they call it) which is nothing but Indian Corn parch’d in the hot Ashes; the Ashes being sifted from it, it is afterwards beaten to Powder, and put into a long Leathern Bag, truss’d at their Back like a Knapsack, out of which they take thrice three Spoonfuls a day, dividing it into three Meals. If it be Winter, and Snow be on the ground, they can eat when they please, making use of Snow for their Drink; in Summer, they must stay till they meet with a Spring or Brook; with this strange viaticum they will travel four or five days together. They keep no Set-Meals, their Store being spent, they champ on the Bit, till they meet with fresh Supplies, either from their own endeavors, or their Wives industry, who trudge to the Clam-banks when all other means fail. Though they are sometimes scanted, yet are they as free as Emperors, both to their Countrey-men and English, be he stranger, or near acquaintance; counting it a great discourtesie, not to eat of their high-conceited Delicates.

Of their hardiness.

Their hardiness is much to be admir’d, no ordinary pains making them so much as alter their countenance; beat them, whip them, punch them, if they put on a resolution, they will not winch for it; whether it be their benumm’d insensibleness of smart, or their hardy resolutions, is hard to resolve; It might be a Perillus his Bull, or the Rack might force an out-cry from them, but a Turkish drubbing would not move them, the unexpected approach of a mortal Wound by a Bullet, Arrow, or Sword, striking no more terror, nor causing no more exclamation in them, than if it had been a shot into the body of a Tree; such Wounds as would be sudden death to an English Man, would be nothing to them; whether it be, that by their rare skill in the use of Vegetatives, or by Diabolical Charms, they cure them; nevertheless, the very name and thoughts of death is so hideous to them, or any thing that presents it so terrible, that a hundred of them will run from two or three arm’d with Guns. In the Night they need not to be feared, for they will not budge from their own Dwellings, for fear of their Abamacho (the Devil) whom they much fear, specially in evil enterprizes, they will rather lie by an English fire than go a quarter of a Mile in the dark to their own Dwellings; but they are well freed from this Scare-crow since the coming of the English, and less care for his delusions.

Of their Kings, Government, and Subjects obedience.

Now for the matter of Government amongst them; it is the custom of their Kings to inherit, the Son always taking the Kingdom after his Fathers death. If there be no Son, then the Queen rules; if no Queen, the next to the Blood-Royal; who comes in otherwise, is but counted an usurping Intruder, if his fair carriage bear him not out the better, they will soon Unscepter him. Some say the chief Powahe is next in Dignity and Authority to the King, and when he dies, Marries the Squasachem, or Queen.

The Kings have no Laws to Command by, nor have they any annual Revenues; yet commonly are they so either fear’d or beloved, that half their Subjects estate is at their Service, and their Persons at his Command, by which Command he is better known than by any thing else; for though he hath no Kingly Robes to make him glorious in the view of his Subjects, nor daily Guards to succor his Person, nor Court-like attendance, nor sumptuous Palaces; yet do they yield all submissive subjection to him, accounting him their Soveraign; going at his Command, and coming at his Beck, not so much as expostulating the cause, though it be in matters thwarting their wills; he being accounted a disloyal Subject that will not effect what his Prince Commands. Whosoever is known to Plot Treason, or to lay violent hands on his lawful King, is presently Executed. Once a Year he takes his Progress, accompanied with a dozen of his best Subjects, to view his Countrey, to recreate himself, and establish good Orders. When he enters into any of their Houses, without any more Complement, he is desir’d to sit down on the Ground, (for they use neither Stools nor Cushions) and after a little respite all that are present come in, and sit down by him, one of his Seniors pronouncing an Oration gratulatory to his Majesty for love, and the many good things they enjoy under his peaceful Government. A King of large Dominions hath his Vice-Roys, or inferior Kings under him, to agitate his State Affairs, and keep his Subjects in good Decorum. Other Officers there are, but how to distinguish them by Name is something difficult. For their Laws, as their Vices come short of many other Nations, so they have not so many Laws, though they are not without some, which they inflict upon notorious Malefactors, as Traitors to their Prince, inhumane Murtherers, and, some say, Adulterers: for Theft, as they have nothing to steal worth the Life of a Man, therefore they have no Law to Execute for Trivials, a Subject being more precious in the Eye of his Prince, than, where Men are so scarce, to be cast away upon so sleight a matter. A Malefactor having deserv’d Death, and being apprehended, is brought before the King, and some other of the wisest Men, where they enquire out the original of the thing, after proceeding by aggravation of Circumstances he is found Guilty, and Cast by the Jury of their strict Inquisition, he is Condemn’d and Executed in the following manner: The Executioner comes in, who blind-folds the Party, sets him in the publick view, and Brains him with a Tamahauke, or Club; which done, his Friends bury him.

Of their Marriages.

Now to speak something of their Marriages, the Kings and the Powwows, or great Doctors, may have two or three Wives, but seldom use it, Men of ordinary Rank having but one; which disproves the report, that they had eight or ten Wives apiece. When a Man hath a desire to Marry, he first gets the good will of the Maid or Widow, after, the consent of her Friends for her part; and for himself, if he be at his own disposing, and if the King will, the Match is made, her Dowry of Wampompeage paid, the Sagamore or King (who for every Marriage hath a Fathom of Wampompeage, which is about the value of seven or eight shillings) joyns their Hands, never to part till Death, unless she prove a Whore, for which they may put away their Wives.

Of their Worship, Invocations, and Conjurations.

As it is natural to all Mortals to worship something, so do these People, but exactly to describe to whom their Worship is chiefly bent, is very difficult: They acknowledge especially two, Ketan, some say Tantum, their good God, and Hobamocco, some say Squantum, their evil God; to Ketan they Sacrifice (as the ancient Heathens did to Ceres) after their Garners be full with a good Crop. They likewise Invocate this God for fair Weather, for Rain in time of Drought, and for the recovery of their Sick; but if they do not hear them, then they verrifie the old Verse, Flectere si nequeo Superos Acheronta movebo, their Powwows betaking themselves to their Exorcismes and Necromantick Charms, by which they bring to pass strange things, if we may believe the Indians, who report of one Pissacannaw, that he could make the Water burn, the Rocks move, the Trees dance, and metamorphose himself into a flaming Man. In Winter, when there is no green Leaves to be got, he would out of the Ashes of an old Leaf, calcin’d and put into the Water, produce a new green Leaf: And of a dead Snakes Skin, a living Snake, both to be seen, felt and heard. The manner of their action in their Conjuration is thus: The Parties that are sick or lame being brought before them, the Powwow sitting down, the rest of the Indians giving attentive audience to his Imprecations and Invocations, and after the violent expression of many a hideous bellowing and groaning he makes a stop, and then all the Auditors with one voice utter a short Canto; which done, the Powwow still proceeds in his Invocations, sometimes roaring like a Bear, other times groaning like a dying Horse, foaming at the Mouth like a chased Boar, smiting on his naked Brest and Thighs with such violence, as if he were mad: Thus will he continue sometimes half a day, spending his Lungs, sweating out his Fat, and tormenting his Body in this diabolical Worship. Sometimes the Devil, for requital of their Worship, recovers the Party, to nuzzle them up in their devillish Religion. But since the English (upon whom, and in whose presence it is said the Powwows could never work their Witchcrafts) frequented those Parts, they daily fall from his Colours, relinquishing their former Fopperies, and acknowledge the Power of the English-man’s God, as they call him. And it is reported of them, that at the very first they were so tractable to the Christian Religion, that they would say King James was good, and his God good, but their Tanto nought, though of their two Gods he was accounted the good one.

Of their Wars.

They use no other Weapons in War than Bowes and Arrows, saving that their Captains have long Spears, on which, if they return Conquerors, they carry the Heads of their chief Enemies that they slay in the Wars, it being the Custom to cut off their Heads, Hands and Feet, to bear home to their Wives and Children, as true tokens of their renowned Victory. When they go to their Wars, it is their Custom to paint their Faces with diversity of Colours, some being all black as Jet, some red, some half red and half black, some black and white, others spotted with divers kinds of Colours, being all disguis’d to their Enemies, to make them more terrible to their Foes, putting on likewise their rich Jewels, Pendents, and Wampompeage, to put them in mind that they Fight not onely for their Children, Wives and Lives, but likewise for their Goods, Lands and Liberties. Being thus Arm’d with this Warlike Paint, the antique Warriors make towards their Enemies in a disorder’d manner, without any Soldier-like Marching, or Warlike Postures, being deaf to any word of Command, ignorant of falling off or on, of doubling Ranks or Files, but let flie their winged Shaftsmen without either fear or wit: Their Artillery being spent, he that hath no Arms to Fight, finds Legs to run away.

Their Games and Sports of Activity.

They have two sorts of Games, one call’d Puim, the other Hubbub, not much unlike Cards and Dice, being no other than Lottery. Puim is fifty or sixty small Bents of a Foot long, which they divide to the number of their Gamesters, shuffling them first between the Palms of their Hands; he that hath more than his Fellow, is so much the forwarder in his Game: Many other Whimsies be in this Game, which would be too long to commit to Paper. He that is a noted Gamester hath a Hole in his Ear, wherein he carries his Puims in defiance of his Antagonists. Hubbub is five small Bones in a small smooth Tray; the Bones be like a Die, but something flatter, black on the one side and white on the other, which they place on the Ground, against which violently thumping the Platter, the Bones mount, changing colours with the windy whisking of their Hands to and fro; which action in that sport they much use, smiting themselves on the Breast and Thighs, crying out Hub, Hub, Hub; they may be heard play at this Game a quarter of a Mile off: The Bones being all black or white make a double Game; if three of one colour, and two of another, then they afford but a single Game; four of a colour, and one differing, is nothing; so long as the Man wins he keeps the Tray, but if he loose the next Man takes it. They are so bewitch’d with these two Games, that they will lose sometimes all they have; Beaver, Moose-skins, Kettles, Wampompeage, Mowhacks, Hatchets, Knives, all is confiscate by these two Games. For their Sports of action they have commonly but three or four, as Football, Shooting, Running, and Swimming; when they play Countrey against Countrey, there are rich Goals, all behung with Wampompeage, Mowhacks, Beaver Skins, and black Otter Skins: Their Goals are a Mile long plac’d on the Sands, which are as even as a Board; their Ball is no bigger than a Hand-ball, which sometimes they mount in the Air with their naked Feet, sometimes it is sway’d by the multitude, sometime also it is two days before they get a Goal, then they mark the Ground they win, and begin there the next day. Before they come to this Sport they paint themselves, even as when they go to War, in policy to prevent future mischief, because no man should know him that mov’d his patience, or accidentally hurt his Person, taking away the occasion of studying revenge. Before they begin, their Arms are put off, and hung upon some neighboring Tree, after which they make a long scrowl on the Sand, over which they shake Hands, and with loving Hearts scuffle for Victory. While the Men Play, the Boys Pipe, and the Women Dance and Sing Trophies of their Husbands Conquests; all being done, a Feast summons their departure.

Such is their dexterity in Shooting, that they can hit a running Hind, or flying Pigeon, without a standing pause or left-ey’d blinking; they draw their Arrows between their Fingers and the Thumb, their Bowes are quick, but not very strong, not killing at above six or seven score distance: Shooting at one another, they have a trick with swift conveyance to shun the Arrow; this they do to make them expert against time of War. They are train’d up to their Bowes even from their Childhood; for little Boys with Bowes made of little Sticks, and Arrows made of great Bents; will hit down a piece of Tobacco-pipe every time a good way off. As these Indians are good Marks-men, so are they well experienc’d where the very Life of every Creature lieth, and know where to smite him to make him die presently. Their Swimming is not after our English fashion, of spread Arms and Legs, which they hold too tiresom, but like Dogs, their Arms before them, cutting through the Liquids with their right Shoulder: In this manner they will Swim very swift and far, either in rough or smooth Waters, sometimes for their ease lying as still as a Log; sometimes they will play the Dive-doppers, and come up in unexpected places.

Of their Huntings.

For their Hunting, it is to be noted, that they have no swift-footed Greyhounds to let slip at the sight of the Deer, no deep-mouth’d Hounds, or scenting Beagles, to find out their desired Prey; themselves are all this, who in that time of the year when the Deer comes down, having certain Hunting-houses in such places where they know the Deer doth usually frequent, in which they keep their Rendezvouz, their Snares, and all their Accoutrements for that Employment: when they get sight of a Deer, Moose, or Bear, they study how to get the Wind of him, and approaching within shot, stab their Mark quite through, if the Bones hinder not. The chief thing they Hunt after is Deer, Mooses and Bears: It grieves them more to see an English-man take one Deer, than a thousand Acres of Land. They Hunt likewise after Wolves, wild Cats, Rackoons, Otters, Beavers, and Musquashes, Trading both their Skins and Flesh to the English. Beside this Artillery they have other devices to kill their Game, as sometimes Hedges, a Mile or two Miles long, being a Mile wide at one end, and made narrower and narrower by degrees, leaving onely a Gap of six Foot long; over against which in the day-time they lie lurking, to shoot the Deer which come through that narrow passage; so many as come within the circumference of that Hedge, seldom return back to leap over, unless they be forc’d by the chasing of some ravenous Wolf, or sight of some accidental Passenger: In the Night, at the Gap of this Hedge, they set Deer-traps, which are Springes made of young Trees, and smooth wrought Cords, so strong, that it will toss a Horse if he be caught in it.

Of their Fishings.

In the Trade of Fishing they are very expert, being experienc’d in the knowledge of all Baits for several Fishes, and divers Seasons; being not ignorant likewise of the removal of Fishes, knowing when to Fish in Rivers, and when at Rocks, when in Bays, and when at Seas: Since the English came they are furnish’d with English Hooks and Lines, for before they made them of Hemp, being more curiously wrought, of stronger Materials than ours, and hook’d with Bone-Hooks; but laziness drives them to buy, more than profit or commendations wins them to make of their own. They make likewise very strong Sturgeon-nets, with which they catch Sturgeons of twelve, fourteen, and sixteen, and some eighteen Foot long in the day-time, and in the night-time they betake themselves to their Birchen Canoos, in which they carry a forty-fathom Line, with a sharp-bearded Dart fastned at the end thereof; then lighting a Torch made of Birchen Rinds, they wave it to and again by their Canoo side, which the Sturgeon much delighted with, comes to them tumbling and playing, turning up his white Belly, into which they thrust their Lance, his Back being impenetrable; which done, they hale to the Shore their strugling Prize. They have often recourse into the Rocks whereupon the Sea beats, in warm Weather, to look out for sleepy Seals, whose Oyl they much esteem, using it for divers things. In Summer they Fish any where, but in Winter in the fresh Water onely, and Ponds; in frosty Weather they cut round Holes in the Ice, about which they will sit like so many Apes with their naked Breeches upon the cold Ice, catching of Pikes, Pearches, Breams, and other sorts of fresh-Water Fish.

Of their Arts and Manufactures.

Their Arts and Manufactures are divers, as first their dressing of all manner of Skins, which they do by scraping and rubbing, afterwards painting them with antique Embroiderings in unchangeable Colours; sometimes they take off the Hair, especially if it be not kill’d in season. Their Bowes they make of a handsom shape, strung commonly with the Sinews of Mooses; their Arrows of young Elder, feather’d with Feathers of Eagles Wings and Tails, headed with Brass in shape of a Heart or Triangle, fastned in a slender piece of Wood six or eight Inches long, which is fram’d to put loose in the pithy Elder, afterwards bound fast for riving: Their Arrows are made in this manner, because it might shake from his Head, and be left behind for their finding, and the Pile onely remain to gaul the wounded Beast. Their Cordage is so even, soft, and smooth, that it looks more like Silk than Hemp. Their Sturgeon Nets are not deep, nor above thirty or forty Foot long, which in ebbing low Waters they stake fast to the Ground where they are sure the Sturgeon will come, never looking more at it till the next low Water. Their Canoos are made either of Pine-trees, which before they were acquainted with English Tools, they burn’d hollow, scraping them smooth with Clam-shells and Oyster-shells, cutting their out-sides with Stone Hatchets. These Boats are not above a Foot and a half, or two Foot wide, and twenty Foot long. Their other Canoos be made of thin Birch Rinds, close Ribb’d, and on the in-side with broad thin Hoops, like the Hoops of a Tub; these are made very light, a Man may carry one of them a Mile, being made purposely to carry from River to River, and from Bay to Bay, to shorten Land-passages. In these cockling Fly-boats, wherein an English-man can scarce sit without a fearful tottering, they will venture to Sea, when an English Shallop dare not bear a Knot of Sail, scudding over the over-grown Waves as fast as a wind-driven Ship, being driven by their Paddles, being much like Battle-doors; if a cross Wave (which is seldom) turn her Keel up-side down, they by swimming free her, and scramble into her again.

Of their Language.

Their Language, is onely peculiar to themselves, not inclining to any of the more refined Tongues. Some have thought they might be of the dispersed Jews, because some of their words are near unto the Hebrew; but by the same rule they may conclude them to be some of the gleanings of all Nations, because they have words which sound after the Greek, Latine, French, and other Tongues. Their Language is hard to learn, few of the English being able to speak any of it, or capable of the right pronunciation, which is the chief grace of their Tongue: They pronounce much after the Diphthongs, excluding L and R which in our English Tongue they pronounce with as much difficulty, as most of the Dutch do T and H, calling a Lobster a Nobstann. Every Countrey doth something differ in their Speech, even as our Northern People do from the Southern, and Western from them; especially the Tarrentine, whose Tongue runs so much upon R that they wharle much in pronunciation. When any Ships come near the Shore, they demand whether they are King Charles’s Torries, with such a rumbling sound, as if one were beating on an unbrac’d Drum. In serious Discourse our Southern Indians use seldom any short Colloquies, but speak their minds at large, without any interjected Discourses from any, the rest giving diligent audience to his utterance; which done, some or other returns him as long an Answer: They love not to speak multa, sed multum; seldom are their words and their deeds strangers. According to the matter of their discourse, so are their acting Gestures in their Expressions.

Of their Deaths, Burials and Mourning.

The Indians are of lusty and healthful Bodies, not experimentally knowing those Diseases which are incident to other Countreys, as Feavers, Pleurisies, Calentures, Agues, Consumptions, Convulsions, Apoplexies, Dropsies, Gouts, Pox, Measles, or the like, but spin out the thred of their Days to a fair length, numbering sixty, eighty, some a hundred years: But when any one lies a dying, the doleful cries, and throbbing sighs of the Friends and Relations, express unspeakable sorrow; and when the Party is dead and laid in the Ground, they not onely weep and howl for a good space over the Grave, but also keep Annual Solemnities of Mourning, rubbing their Faces with black Lead all about the Eye-brows, and part of their Cheeks; yet do they hold the Immortality of the Soul, in which their Indian Faith jumps much with the Turkish Alchoran, dreaming of a certain Paradise, or South-West Elysium, wherein they shall everlastingly abide, solacing themselves in odoriferous Gardens, fruitful Corn-fields, green Meadows, bathing their tawny Hides in the cool Streams of pleasant Rivers, and sheltering themselves from Heat and Cold in the sumptuous Palaces fram’d by Nature, concluding, that neither care nor pain shall molest them, but that Natures bounty will administer all things with a voluntary contribution from the Store-house of their Elysium; at the Portal whereof, they say, lies a great Dog, whose churlish snarlings deny admission to unworthy Intruders: wherefore it is their custom to bury with them their Bowes and Arrows, and good store of their Wampompeage and Mowhacks, the one to affright that affronting Cerberus, the other to purchase more immense Prerogatives in their Paradise. For their Enemies and loose Livers, whom they account unworthy of this imaginary Happiness, they say that they pass to the infernal Dwellings of Abamocho, to be tortur’d according to the Fictions of the ancient Heathen.

Dispositions, Employments, Usage by their Husbands, Apparel, and Modesty of the Women.

The drudgery of all laborious sorts of Work, and the management of all domestick Affairs, lies wholly upon the Indian Women, who are made meer Slaves by their Husbands; they build the Houses, sowe and reap the Corn, provide Lobsters for their Husbands to bait their Hooks when they go a Fishing for Basse or Cod; and for these Lobsters they are many times forc’d to dive in the extreamest Weather, then lug home a great weight of them upon their Backs, as also all the Fish which their Husbands catch for pleasure, from the places where they were caught: They dress all the Meat, serve it up to their Husbands, and waiting till they have fill’d their Bellies, are glad of their leavings. In Summer they gather Flags, of which they make Mats for Houses, and Hemp and Rushes, with Dying Stuff, of which they make curious Baskets, with intermixed Colours and Pourtraictures of antique Imagery. These Baskets are of all sizes from a Quart to a Quarter, in which they carry their Luggage. In Winter they are their Husbands Caterers, trudging to the Clam-banks for their Belly-timber, and their Porters to lug it home. They likewise sew their Husbands Shoes, and weave Coats of Turky Feathers, besides all their ordinary Houshold drudgery which daily lies upon them, insomuch that a great Belly hinders no business, nor doth a Child-birth take much time, but the young Infant being greas’d and footed, wrapp’d in a Beavers Skin, bound with his Feet up to his Bum, upon a Board two Foot long and one Foot broad, and his Face expos’d to all nipping Weather, this little Pappouse travels about with his bare-footed Mother to paddle in the Icy Clam-banks, after three or four days of Age have confirm’d her recovery. For their Carriage, it is very civil, Smiles being the greatest grace of their Mirth. Their Musick is Lullabies in Rocking their Children, who generally are as quiet as if they had neither Spleen or Lungs. Their Voices are generally both sweet and well order’d, so far as pure Nature teacheth them. Their Modesty drives them to wear more Clothes than the Men, having always a Coat of Cloth or Skins, wrapp’d like a Blanket about their Loyns, reaching down to their Hams, which they never put off in Company.

Towns built by the English in New England.

There are to be reckon’d up forty five chief Towns, besides what others there may be of less note, built or made habitable by the English since their first arrival in New England, till about the Year 1650.

St. Georges Fort.

First, St. Georges Fort, where the first Plantation was setled, at the Mouth of the River Sagadebock, in a kind of Peninsula, or half Island.

New Plymouth.

The second, New Plymouth, seated no less commodiously upon a large Bay, call’d by the Natives Pautuxed; where they first setled that went over out of dissatisfaction to the Church-Government of England.

Salem.

The third, Salem, call’d by the Indians, Mahumbeak; which stands on the middle of a Neck of Land very pleasantly, having a South River on the one side, and a North River on the other side. This Town seems to have been built in the Year 1628. by a part of that Company, who, being sent over by the Merchant-Adventurers, setled themselves in this Cape.

Charles-town.

The fourth Mashawmut, or Charles-town, situate on a Neck of Land on the Northside of the River Charles. The form of this Town, in the Frontispiece of it, resembleth the Head, Neck, and Shoulders of a Man; through the right Shoulder whereof runs the Navigable River Mistick, which by its near approach to Charles River in one place, makes the chief part of the Town a Peninsula: It consists of a hundred and fifty Dwelling-houses, many of them beautifi’d with pleasant Gardens and Orchards: Near the Water-side is a large Market-place, forth of which issue two fair Streets; and in it stands a large and well built Church.

Dorchester.

The fifth, Matapan, or Dorchester, a Fronteer Town, standing over against the Island near the Sea-side: It is water’d with two small Rivers, and is built in the form of a Serpent turning its Head Northward; it hath Orchards and Gardens full of Fruit-trees.

Boston.

The sixth is Boston, anciently Accomonticus, the Center and Metropolis of the rest, built in the form of a Heart, and fortifi’d with two Hills on the Front-part thereof, the one having great store of Artillery mounted thereon, the other having a strong Battery, built of whole Timber, and fill’d with Earth: At the Descent of the Hill lies a large Cave or Bay, on which the chief part of this Town is built, over-topp’d with a third Hill, all three like over-topping Towers, keeping a constant Watch to foresee the approach of foreign Dangers. The chiefest part of this City-like Town is crowded upon the Sea Banks, and wharf’d out with great Industry and Cost, the Edifices large and beautiful, whose continual enlargement presageth some sumptuous City.

Roxbury.

The seventh, Roxbury, situated between Boston and Dorchester, water’d with cool and pleasant Springs issuing from the Rocky Hills, and with small Freshets watering the Valleys of this fertile Town: The form of it resembleth a Wedge double pointed, entring between the two above-mention’d Towns; and in the room of those Swamps, or tearing Bushes which were there before, they have now goodly Fruit-trees, fruitful Fields and Gardens.

Lynne.

The eighth is Lynne, or (according to the Indian Name, Saugus) situated between Salem and Charles-town, near a River, whose strong Freshet at the end of Winter fills all her Banks, and with a violent Torrent vents it self into the Sea. This Town is almost square, consisting many years ago of above a hundred Dwelling-houses, having also an Iron Mill in constant use. The Church being on a level Land, undefended from the North-West Wind, is made with Steps descending into the Earth.

Water-town.

The ninth is call’d Water-town, anciently Pigsgusset, situated upon one of the Branches of Charles-River, water’d with many pleasant Springs and small Rivulets, running like Veins throughout her Body. This Town began by occasion of Sir Richard Saltingstall, who arriving with store of Cattel and Servants, Winter’d in these Parts.

New-town.

Harverd Colledge.

In the Year 1633. there was erected between Charles-town and Water-town, a Place call’d New-town, and by the Indians, Amongcangen, since nam’d Cambridge, being the tenth in order: It is in form like a List of Broad-cloth, reaching to the most Southerly part of Merrimeck River; it hath comely and well order’d Streets, and two fair Colledges; the first call’d Harverd Colledge, from Mr. John Harverd, who at his Death gave a thousand Pounds to it; to the other Mr. John Harnes was the chief Benefactor. This Town was appointed to be the Seat of the Government, but it continu’d not long.

Ipswich.

The eleventh call’d Ipswich, or Sawacatuc by the Indians, is situated on a fair and delightful River, issuing forth from a very pleasant Pond, and afterwards breaking its Course through a hideous Swamp of large extent; it lies in the Sagamoreship, or Earldom of Aggawan, now by the English call’d Essex.

Newbury.

Twelve Miles from Ipswich, near upon the Streams of Merrimeck River, is situated the twelfth, call’d Newbury.

Hartford.

The People of New-town, or Cambridge, upon their removal of the Plantation of Canectico, passing up the River, built a Town, which they call’d Hartford, the thirteenth in number, divers others coming in the room of those that departed from Cambridge.

Concord.

The fourteenth, seated upon a fair fresh River (whose Rivulets are fill’d with fresh Marsh, and her Streams with Fish, it being a Branch of that large River of Merrimeck Allwives) is built in the Inland Countrey, and call’d Concord: It consisted at first of above fifty Families: Their Buildings are for the most part conveniently plac’d on one streight Stream under a Sunny Bank, in a low Level. The People that first set forth to build this Town, sustain’d great hardship and misery, by reason of the uncouth Ways, and extremity of the Weather, it being the first Inland Town that was built.

Hingham.

South-East of Charles-River, upon the Sea-Coast, is situated the fifteenth Town Hingham; the form whereof is somewhat intricate to describe, by reason of the Seawasting Crooks, where it beats upon a moultring Shore; yet in some places the Streets are compleat: It consisted at first of about sixty Families.

Dukesbury, or Sandwich.

The sixteenth is in Plymouth Government, situate upon the Sea-Coast, first nam’d Dukes-bury, afterwards Sandwich.

Newhaven.

About the year 1617. a new Supply coming over into these Parts, and not finding in the Mattachusets Government any commodious place to settle in, they after much search took up a place somewhat more Southerly, near the Shalles of Capecod, where they found a commodious Harbor for Shipping, and a fit place to erect a Town in, which they built in a short time, with very fair Houses and compleat Streets; and shortly after several others: Amongst which they erected a new Government, which from their first Fronteer Town, being the seventeenth, was call’d Newhaven.

Dedham.

The eighteenth is in the Government of the Mattachusets, and call’d Dedham, being an Inland Town, situate about ten Miles from Boston in the County of Suffolk, well water’d with many pleasant Streams, and abounding with Gardens and Fruit-Trees: It consisted at first of about a hundred Families, being generally given to Husbandry.

Weymouth.

The nineteenth being also in this Government is call’d Weymouth, batter’d on the East with the Sea Waves; on the South-West Rocks and Swamps make it delightful to the Deer, as the ploughable Meadow-Lands to the Inhabitants.

About the Year 1638. Printing was brought over into New England.

Rowly.

About six Miles from Ipswich, North-Eastward, was erected another Town call’d Rowly, being the twentieth.

Hampton.

About the Year 1639. began the one and twentieth Town Hampton, in the County of Norfolk, to be built: It is situate near the Sea-Coast, not far from the River of Merrimeck: The great store of salt Marsh did entice the People to set down their Habitations there.

Salisbury.

Not far from this Town of Hampton, was erected the two and twentieth, call’d Salisbury, seated upon the broad swift Torrent of Merrimeck-River: It lieth on the Northern side, over against the Town of Newbury, the River between them being about half a Mile broad, but hath an Island in the midst thereof, which makes it the more easily passable. The situation of this Town is very pleasant, the Skirts thereof abounding in fair and goodly Meadows, with good store of stately Timber in many places upon the Uplands.

Long-Island, Southampton.

About the Year 1640. by a fresh Supply of People that setled in Long-Island, was there erected the twenty third Town, call’d Southampton; by the Indians, Agawom.

Sudbury.

The same Year also the Town of Sudbury, being the twenty fourth, began to be built in the Inland Countrey: It is furnish’d with great store of fresh Marsh, but lying very low, it is much endammag’d with Land-floods.

Braintree.

About this time there was built at Mount Wollestone, by some old Planters and certain Farmers of the great Town of Boston, a Town nam’d Braintree, being the twenty fifth, within the Mattachusets Government: It is well peopled, and hath great store of Land in Tillage.

Gloucester.

In the Year 1641. Mr. Richard Blindman coming from Green Harbour, a Place in Plymouth Patent, with some few People of his acquaintance, setled in Cape Anne, where they built the twenty sixth Town, and nam’d it Gloucester.

Dover.

There is also situate upon Puscataque River, to the North-East of Boston, a Town call’d Dover, being the twenty seventh, the People by voluntary resignation being under the Mattachusets Government.

Wooburn.

In the Year 1642. was erected the eight and twentieth Town, call’d Wooburn.

Reading.

In the Year 1644. Reading the nine and twentieth Town was built, being in the Government of the Mattachusets; it is well water’d and situated about a great Pond, having two Mills, a Saw-Mill, and a Corn-Mill, which stand upon two several Streams.

Wenham.

A little after was built the thirtieth Town in this Colony, call’d Wenham, situate between Salem and Ipswich; it is very well water’d, as most Inland Towns are, and the People live altogether on Husbandry.

Spring-field.

About the Year 1645. one Mr. Pinchin, having out of desire to improve his Estate by Trading with the Indians, setled himself in a place very remote from any of the Towns of the Mattachusets Colony, yet under their Government, and great store of People still resorting to him, they at last erected a Town upon the River Canectico, calling it Spring-field, being the one and thirtieth Town; it is very fitly seated for a Beaver Trade with the Indians, in regard it is situate upon this large Navigable River, and upon some Rivulets of the same.

Haverhill.

In the Year 1648. was founded the Town of Haverhill, being the two and thirtieth, about a Mile or two from the place where the River of Merrimeck receives into it self the River Shawshin, which is one of her three chief Heads.

Malden.

Not long after, the Town of Malden, being the three and thirtieth Town, was built by certain People that came out of Charles-Town; these two Towns being sever’d the one from the other by the large River of Mistick.

The rest we shall onely name, as 34. Berwick, alias Chawun. 35 Oxford, alias Sagoquas. Falmouth, alias Totam. 36. Bristol. 37. Hull, alias Passataquack. 38. Dartmouth, alias Bohanna. 39. Norwich, alias Segocket. 40. Taunton, alias Cohannet. 41. Greens-Harbour. 42. Yarmouth. 43. Northam, alias Pascataqua. 44. Exeter. 45. Weymouth.

The chief Rivers of New England are, Pascataway, Sagadahoc, Pemmaquid, Agamentico, Merrimeck, Tachobacco, Mistick, Narraganset, Mishuwin, Connectacut, Newichwavoch, Kynebequy.

The present state of the Natives.

The Indian Natives are now become so weak in number, and in some measure reduc’d to a dread of the growth of the English, that of late years they have not practis’d any thing against them, or at least, not justifi’d them by numbers in open Hostility, willing rather to purchase their Peace and buy off Injuries committed by them at the Price of their Lands and Possessions.

And although care and expence hath been many years apply’d to the Conversion of Indians to the Faith, however inclinable they seem’d at first to the imbracing thereof, not then so well discerning the insincerity of its Professors; yet there are so few of late who do imbrace it or persevere in it (wanting a good Foundation for instruction in Moral Honesty, and perhaps the example of it in those that undertake to instruct them in Religion;) that Christianity to them seems a Chimera, Religion a design to draw them from the libidinous Pleasures of a lazy Life; however, some there are who make Profession of Christianity, and some who are educated in the Schools of New Cambridge, to entitle them to Preach the Gospel in their own Language.

One great hindrance to the Propagation of the Faith amongst those Heathens, is the diversity of their Languages; for it is commonly known, that the Natives themselves do not understand one another, if their Habitations are but at forty Miles distance.

Church-Government among the English.

Their Church-Government and Discipline is Congregational and Independent, yet in some places more rigid than others, for in many Towns there yet remains some leaven of Presbytery, from which Sects our Independency had its Original; insomuch, that one of the most remarkable Opposers of Episcopal Government, Doctor Bastwick (who, spoil’d so much Paper in railing at the Church Government of England, and crying up Liberty of Conscience) finding the Apostacy of his own Brethren of Boston from their first Principles, and his, generally prevail over them, even to the denying that liberty to others, which they seem’d only to aim at, did write a large and vehement Dehortatory Epistle to them from their New Lights or Paths, saying, That according to their present Tenents, they could not pretend to be, or other than a Christian Synagogue.

Their Civil Government and Laws.

Their Laws and Methods of Government are wholly of their own framing, each Colony for themselves, makes an Annual choice of Governor, Deputy Governor, and a certain number of Assistants, by the plurality of Suffrages collected from their several Towns, the Electors are only Free-men and Church-Members; for he that is not a Member of their Church, can neither chuse, nor be chosen a Magistrate, nor have his Children Baptiz’d; besides the loss of many other Priviledges, and liable moreover to frequent, if not constant Mulcts for absenting themselves from Divine Worship (so call’d) in their Meeting-houses.

Since the transmitting of the Patent in New England, the Election is not by Voices, nor erection of Hands as formerly, but by Papers, thus:

The general Court-electory sitting, where are present in the Church, or Meeting-house at Boston, the old Governor, Deputy, and all the Magistrates, and two Deputies or Burgesses for every Town, or at least one; all the Freemen are bid to come in at one Door, and bring their Votes in Paper for the new Governor, and deliver them down upon the Table, before the Court, and so pass forth at another Door; those that are absent, send their Votes by Proxies. All being deliver’d in, the Votes are counted, and according to the major part, the old Governor pronounceth, That such an one is chosen Governor for the year ensuing. Then the Freemen, in like manner, bring their Votes for the Deputy Governor, who being also chosen, the Governor propoundeth the Assistants one after another. New Assistants are, of late, put in nomination, by an Order of general Court, beforehand to be consider’d of: If a Freeman give in a Blank, that rejects the Man nam’d; if the Freeman makes any mark with a Pen upon the Paper which he brings, that elects the Man nam’d: Then the Blanks and mark’d Papers are number’d, and according to the major part of either, the Man in Nomination stands elected or rejected; and so for all the Assistants. And after every new Election, which is, by their Patent, to be upon the last Wednesday in Easter Term, the new Governor and Officers are all new Sworn. The Governor and Assistants chuse the Secretary. And all the Court consisting of Governor, Deputy, Assistants, and Deputies of Towns, give their Votes as well as the rest; and the Ministers and Elders, and all Church-Officers, have their Votes also in all these Elections of chief Magistrates: Constables, and all other inferior Officers, are sworn in the general, quarter, or other Courts, or before any Assistant.

Every Free-man when he is admitted, takes a strict Oath, to be true to the Society or Jurisdiction.

There are two general Courts, one every half year, wherein they make Laws or Ordinances: The Ministers advise in making of Laws, especially Ecclesiastical, and are present in Courts, and advise in some special Causes Criminal, and in framing of Fundamental Laws.

There are besides four Quarter-Courts for the whole Jurisdiction, besides other petty Courts, one every quarter at Boston, Salem, and Ipswich, with their several Jurisdictions; besides every Town, almost, hath a petty Court for small Debts and Trespasses, under twenty Shillings.

Actions and Causes.

In the general Court, or great quarter Courts, before the Civil Magistrates, are try’d all Actions and Causes Civil and Criminal, and also Ecclesiastical, especially touching Non-members: And they themselves say, that in the general and quarter Courts, they have the Power of Parliament, Kings-Bench, Common-Pleas, Chancery, High-Commission, and Star-Chamber, and all other Courts of England, and in divers Cases have exercis’d that Power upon the Kings Subjects there, as is not difficult to prove. They have put to death, banish’d, fin’d Men, cut off Mens Ears, whip’d, imprison’d Men, and all these for Ecclesiastical and Civil Offences, and without sufficient Record. In the lesser quarter Courts are try’d, in some, Actions under ten Pounds, in Boston, under twenty, and all Criminal Causes not touching Life or Member. From the petty quarter Courts, or other Courts, the parties may appeal to the great quarter Courts, from thence to the general Court, from which there is no Repeal.

Grand-Juries.

Twice a year, in the said quarter Courts held before the general Courts, are two Grand-Juries sworn for the Jurisdiction, one for one Court, and the other for the other; and they are charg’d to enquire and Present Offences reduc’d by the Governor who gives the Charge.

Trials.

Matters of Debt, Trespass, and upon the Case, and Equity, yea and of Heresie also, are try’d by a Jury.

The Parties are warn’d to challenge any Jury-man before he be sworn; but because there is but one Jury in a Court for trial of Causes; and all Parties not present at their Swearing, the liberty of challenge is much hinder’d, and some inconveniences do happen thereby. Jurors are return’d by the Marshal, he was at first call’d The Beadle of the Society.

The Parties in all Causes, speak themselves for the most part, and some of the Magistrates where they think cause requireth, do the part of Advocates without Fee or Reward.

Though among the several Colonies which were founded here by the confluence of dissenting Zealots, this Government is exercis’d, differing from that of the Church and State of England: yet in those Provinces which are granted by particular Persons, the Government is much more conformable to that of England; but as the Mattachusets or Bostoners were from the beginning the most Potent and Predominant of all the rest of the Colonies, (insomuch, that Boston may well be accounted the Metropolis of all New England,) so of late years they have still usurp’d more and more Power and Authority over the rest; and especially have not stuck to give Laws to the foresaid Provinces allotted to particular Persons, and have gone about wholly to subjugate those places to themselves, intrenching upon the rights of the true Proprietors; and that, even contrary to the Kings express Commands by his Officers, there, and as it were in open defiance of his Majesty and Government, as is evident from this following Narration, of their behavior upon a business of this nature.

Proceedings of the Mattachusets against his Majesties Commissioners.

In the Year of our Lord 1665. his Majesties Commissioners for the Affairs of New England, being in the Province of Mayne, the People being much unsetled in Point or Government, by reason the Mattachusets Colony, or Boston Government, did usurp compulsively a Power over them contrary to their wills; and the right of Sir Ferdinando Gorges Heir, who had his Commission then in the place, did unanimously Petition to his Majesties Commissioners to settle the Government; upon which the said Commissioners examin’d the Bounds and Right of Mr. Gorges Patent, with all the Allegations and Pretensions on both sides, and so according to their Instruction from his Majesty, did settle a temporary Government under his Majesty’s immediate Authority, until such time as his Majesty should give his final determination thereof; and for that end did Institute Justices of the Peace to Govern the Province according to the true Laws of England. Also his Majesty was pleas’d by his Mandamus in April 1666, to the Governors of Boston, to signifie that it was his will and pleasure, That the Province of Main should stand good as his Commissioners had setled it, until he had more leisure to determine it; yet notwithstanding, after three years quiet possession, and exercising of Government by the Kings Justices, according to their Commission granted by his Majesty’s Commissioners, the Bostoners, without any Conference with the said Justices, did in a hostile manner oppose the King’s Power, July 1668. which was as followeth:

The General Court of Boston sent their Warrants to keep Court at York under their Authority, and for that purpose Commissionated Magistrates by their own Authority, namely Major General John Leveret, Mr. Edward Ting, Captain Richard Walden, and Captain Robert Pike: Whereupon the King’s Justices did oppose their Warrants, and sent Post to New York, with an Address to General Nicholas, for Advice what to do therein; who forthwith dispatch’d away to the Governors of Boston, informing them of the danger of their Proceeding, it being an open breach of Duty, to subvert the Government establish’d by his Majesty’s Power; also sent the King’s Mandamus, April 1666. that will’d to the contrary. Notwithstanding the Boston Magistrates in July 1668. in order to their Boston Commission, came to York Town in the said Province, with several Armed Men, Horse and Foot, to keep Court under their Authority; Opposition was made by the King’s Justices, and his Majesty’s Power was urg’d, but little regard thereunto shewn; his Majesties Mandamus was likewise much insisted upon, and produced by the Justices, who ask’d the Bostoners what they thought of it? and how they durst act so contrary to the King’s Will and Pleasure? Major General Leveret told them, That he believ’d it might be the King’s Hand, but he had a Commission from the general Court at Boston, which he would follow and observe by the help of God. The same day in the Afternoon the said Major General Leveret, with the rest of the Boston Magistrates, seiz’d and imprison’d the Province Marshal in doing his Office, and then forthwith went in warlike posture to the Court-house, where the King’s Justices sat in Judicature, and putting them from their Seats, sat down themselves in their Places, and Executed their Boston Commission. The King’s Justices drew a Protest against their Proceedings, and so left the Decision to God’s Providence, and his Majesty’s good Pleasure. Then they turn’d out all Officers, both Military and Civil, and Swore others in their Places under their Authority; they forc’d the whole Record of the Province out of the Recorders House contrary to his Will, by vertue of a Special Warrant from that Court. They imprison’d the Mayor of the said Province about three weeks, forcing him to give in five hundred Pound Bonds, not to act according to his Commission; which with some Reservations he was forc’d to deny for the security of his Estate.

These riotous Proceedings thus acted with such a precipitate fury, so incens’d his Majesty, that speedy care had been taken to reduce them to reason, had they not upon mature consideration bethought themselves afterwards to yield Obedience to his Majesties Orders.

Having treated at large of all that concerns New England in general, both in reference to the Natives and the English Planters, we shall conclude with a brief view of the Provinces of Laconia and Main, as they are truly Describ’d (among other ingenuous Collections and Observations of the Affairs of America, and especially these Parts) by Ferdinando Gorges Esq; Heir to the above-mention’d Sir Ferdinando, and thereby sole Lord of the said Provinces, onely contracting what hath been by him deliver’d more at large.

A brief Description of Laconia, a Province in New England.

Among divers Plantations of the English happily Founded in New England, is a Province to the Landward, nam’d Laconia, so call’d by reason of the great Lakes therein, but by the ancient Inhabitants thereof it is call’d The Countrey of the Troquois: It lies between the Latitude of forty four and forty five Degrees, having the Rivers of Sagadehock and Merrimeck on the Sea-Coast of New England, Southerly from it; into each of which Rivers there is a short Passage, frequented by the Salvages inhabiting near the Lakes. Also it hath the great Lakes which tend towards California in the South Sea on the West thereof: On the North thereof is the great River of Canada, into which the said River disgorgeth it self by a fair large River, well replenish’d with many fruitful Islands: The Air thereof is pure and wholesom, the Countrey pleasant, having some high Hills, full of goodly Forrests, and fair Valleys and Plains, fruitful in Corn, Vines, Chesnuts, Wallnuts, and infinite sorts of other Fruits, large Rivers well stor’d with Fish, and inviron’d with goodly Meadows full of Timber-trees.

One of the great Lakes is call’d The Lake of Troquois, which together with a River of the same Name, running into the River of Canada, is sixty or seventy Leagues in length.

In the Lake are four fair Islands, which are low and full of goodly Woods and Meadows, having store of Game for Hunting, as Stags, Fallow-Deer, Elks, Roe-Bucks, Beavers, and other sorts of Beasts which come from the Main Land to the said Islands.

The Rivers which fall into the Lakes have in them good store of Beavers; of which Beasts, as also of the Elks, the Salvages make their chiefest Traffick.

The said Islands have been inhabited heretofore by the Salvages, but are now abandon’d by reason of their late Wars one with another: They contain twelve or fifteen Leagues in length, and are seated commodiously for Habitation in the midst of the Lake, which abounds with divers kinds of wholesom Fish.

From this Lake run two Rivers Southward, which fall into the Eastern and Southern Sea-Coast of New England.

Into this Lake there went many years since certain French of Quebeck, who sided with the Algovinquins, with the help of their Canoos, which they carried the space of five Miles over the Impossible Falls, to Fight a Battel in revenge of some former Injuries done by the Troquois to the Algovinquins, who had the Victory; for which cause the French have been so hated ever since by the Nation of the Troquois, that none of them durst ever appear in any part of that Lake. But their Trade, said to be sixteen thousand Beavers yearly, is partly sold to the Dutch, who Trade with the Westend of the said Lake over Land by Horses, from their Plantation upon Hudson’s River: and another part is conceiv’d to be purchas’d by the Hiroons, who being Newters, are Friends both to the one and the other; and these Hiroons bring down the greatest part of all by the River of Canada.

The Way over Land to this great Lake, from the Plantation of Pascataway, hath been attempted by Captain Walter Neale, once Governor, at the Charges of Sir Ferdinando Gorges, Captain Mason, and some Merchants of London, and the Discovery wanted but one days Journey of finishing, because their Victuals was spent, which, for want of Horses, they were enforc’d to carry with their Arms, and their Clothes, upon their Backs: They intended to have made a settlement for Trade by Pinnaces upon the said Lake, which they reckon to be about ninety or a hundred Miles from the Plantation over Land.

The People of the Countrey are given to Hunting of wild Beasts, which is their chiefest Food.

Their Arms are Bowes and Arrows. Their Armor is made partly of Wood, and partly of a kind of twisted Stuff like Cotton-Wool.

Their Meat is Flour of Indian Corn, of that Countreys growth, sodden to Pap, which they preserve for times of Necessity when they cannot Hunt.

This Province of Laconia, however known by a distinct Name, is included within the Province of Main, which offers it self next to our consideration.

Of the Province of Main.

All that part of the Continent of New England, which was allotted by Patent to Sir Ferdinando Gorges and to his Heirs, he thought fit to call by the Name of The Province of Main. It takes it beginning at the entrance of Pascatoway Harbor, and so passeth up the same into the River of Newichwavoch; and through the same unto the farthest Head thereof; and from thence North-Westwards for the space of a hundred and twenty Miles; and from the Mouth of Pascatoway Harbor aforesaid, North-Eastward along the Sea-Coast, to Sagadehock; and up the River thereof to Kinibequy River, even as far as the Head thereof; and into the Land North-Westwards, for the space of a hundred and twenty Miles.

To these Territories are also adjoyn’d the North half of the Isles of Sholes, together with the Isles of Capawick and Nautican, as also all the little Islands lying within five Leagues of the Main, all along the Sea-Coast, between the aforesaid Rivers of Pascatoway and Sagadehock.

He no sooner had this Province setled upon him, but he gave publick notice, That if anyone would undertake by himself and his Associates, to Transport a competent number of Inhabitants, to Plant in any part of his Limits, he would assign unto him or them such a proportion of Land, as should in reason satisfie them, reserving onely to himself some small High-Rent, as 2 s. or 2 s. 6 d. for a hundred Acres per Annum: and if they went about to build any Town or City, he would Endow them with such Liberties and Immunities, as should make them capable to Govern themselves within their own Limits, according to the Liberties granted to any Town or Corporation within this Realm of England. And as for others of the meaner sort who went as Tenants, that they should have such quantities of Land assign’d them as they were able to manage, at the Rate of 4 d. or 6 d. an Acre, according to the nature or situation of the Place they settle in.

And for the Division of the Province, and the Form of Government which he intended to Establish, he first divided the Province into several Parts; and those again he subdivided into distinct Regiments, as East, West, North, and South; those again into several Hundreds, Parishes and Tythings, and these to have their several Officers to Govern, according to such Laws as should be agreed upon by publick Assent of the Free-holders, with the approbation of himself or Deputy, and the principal Officers of the publick State.

The setled Government for the general State, to whom all Appeals were to be made, and from whom all Instructions for the welfare of the Publick were to issue, were to consist of himself or his Deputy, who was to be chosen every three year by himself, with the advice of his Council: Next a Chancellor for the determination of all Causes; A Treasurer, to whom the care of the publick Revenue was to be committed; A Marshal, whose Office was to oversee the Regiments, and to provide Men for publick Service; An Admiral, to take care of all Maritime Affairs, to whom a Judge of the Admiralty was to be joyn’d to determine all Maritime Causes; A Master of the Ordnance, to look to the publick Arms and Ammunition; A Secretary, to receive Intelligence, and to acquaint himself or Deputy therewith. To these belong all their several Officers and Ministers for the Execution of all Matters proper to their several Places.

The chief Town of this Province is call’d Gorgiana, which is Govern’d by a Mayor, the rest are onely inconsiderable Villages or scatter’d Houses; but through Encouragement given to Adventurers and Planters, it may prove in time a very flourishing Place, and be replenish’d with many fair Towns and Cities, it being a Province both fruitful and pleasant.

Sect. II.
New Netherland, now call’d New York.

That Tract of Land formerly call’d The New Netherland, doth contain all that Land which lieth in the North parts of America, betwixt New England and Mary-Land; the length of which Northward into the Countrey, as it hath not been fully discover’d, so it is not certainly known: The breadth of it is about two hundred Miles. The principal Rivers within this Tract, are Hudson’s-River, Raritan-River, Delaware-Bay-River. The chief Islands are the Manhatans-Island, Long-Island, and Staten-Island.

The first which discover’d this Countrey was Henry Hudson, who being hir’d by the East-India Company to seek a Passage in the Northern America to China, set Sail Anno 1609. in the Half-Moon Frigat; coming before Terre-neuff, he stood about towards the South-West, where Sailing up a great River, he found two Men Clad in Ruffelo’s Skins; and from thence arriv’d safe at Amsterdam.

New Netherland thus discover’d, invited many Merchants to settle a firm Plantation there; to which purpose they obtain’d Letters Patents in 1614. granted them by the States in the Hague, That they might onely Traffick to New Netherland; whereupon they earnestly prosecuting the Design, sent out Adrian Block and Godyn, who discover’d several Coasts, Isles, Havens, and Rivers.

The Countrey, as they said, being then void, was therefore free for any body that would take possession of it: Notwithstanding which pretence, they were scarce warm in their Quarters, when Sir Samuel Argal, Governor of Virginia, having first spoil’d the French in Accadie, as we said, disputed the Possession with these also. And although they pleaded Hudson’s Right (who by Commission from King James, and upon an English Account, had lately discover’d those Parts) and pretended they had not onely bought all his Cards and Maps of the Countrey, but all his Interest and Right also, and had fully contented him for all his Pains and Charges in the Discovery; yet the said Hudson being an English-man, and acting all that he did by Commission from the King of England, upon Debate it was concluded, That the Land could not be alienated after Discovery without the King of England’s consent, especially it being but a part of the Province of Virginia, already possess’d by the Subjects of England: So that they were forc’d to wave that Title, and the Dutch Governor submitted his Plantation to His Majesty of England, and to the Governor of Virginia, for and under him: Upon which Terms for a good while they held it. Afterwards, upon confidence, it seems, of a new Governor sent from Amsterdam, they not onely fail’d to pay the promis’d Contribution and Tribute, but fell to fortifie themselves, and to entitle the Merchants of Amsterdam to an absolute Propriety and Dominion of the Country, independent of any other; building Towns, as New Amsterdam; raising Forts, as Orange Fort, near the Branch of the Nordt River, which they call Hell-Gate. Complaint whereof being made to King Charles, and by his Ambassador represented to the States, they disown the business, and declare by Publick Instrument, that it was onely a private Undertaking, viz. of the West-India Company of Amsterdam. Whereupon a Commission was granted to Sir George Calvert, made Lord Baltimore in Ireland, to Possess and Plant the Southern parts thereof, lying towards Virginia, by the name of Mary-land; and to Sir Edmund Loyden, to Plant the Northern parts towards New England, by the name of Nova Albion: Which makes the Dutch the second time seem willing to compound; and for the Sum of two thousand and five hundred Pounds, they offer to be gone, and leave all they had there. But taking advantage of the troubles in England, which then began to appear, and soon after follow’d, they not only go back from their first Propositions, and make higher Demands, but also most mischievously (as some report) furnish the Natives with Arms, and teach them the use of them, as it may be thought, expecting to use their help upon occasion, against the English.

After His Majesties Restauration, His Majesty being truly inform’d of his just Pretences to all that Usurp’d Territory call’d New Netherland, (the same having been formerly part of New England) and of how great prejudice to the Act of Navigation, and how dangerous Intruders the Dutchmen are generally upon other Princes Dominions, what mischief might ensue to all our English Plantations in time of War, if the Dutch were permitted to strengthen themselves in the very heart of His Majesties Dominions, being Masters of one of the most commodious Ports and Rivers in America: His Majesty resolv’d to seize upon the same, as his undoubted Right, and in May 1664. having design’d four Commissioners to the perfecting of Affairs in New England, Collonel Richard Nichols, Sir Robert Carr, George Cartwright, and Samuel Mawrick Esquires, with three Ships of War to convey them to Boston: The matter was so order’d, that the same Ships serv’d for the reducing of the Town and Fort of New Amsterdam, upon conditions, advantageous to His Majesty, and easie to the Dutch.

Now begins New Netherland to lose the Name, for His Majesty having conferr’d by Patent upon his Royal Highness the Duke of York and Albany, all the Acquisitions made upon Foraigners, together with Long-Island, the West end whereof was wholly setled and Peopled by Dutch-men; his Royal Highness impower’d, by Commission as his Deputy-Governor, Colonel Nichols, Groom of his Bed-chamber, to take the Charge and Direction of Reducing and Governing all those Territories; it was by him thought fit, to change some principal denominations of Places, viz. New Netherland into York-shire; New Amsterdam into New York; Fort-Amscel into Fort-James; Fort-Orange into Fort-Albany; and withal, to change Burgomasters, Schepen, and Schout, into Mayor, Aldermen, and Sheriff, with Justices of the Peace; so that all the Civil Policy is conformable to the Methods and Practise of England, whereas New England retains only the name of Constable in their whole Rolls of Civil Officers.

It is plac’d upon the neck of the Island Manhatans, looking towards the Sea; encompass’d with Hudson’s River, which is six Miles broad; the Town is compact and oval, with very fair Streets and several good Houses; the rest are built much after the manner of Holland, to the number of about four hundred Houses, which in those parts are held considerable: Upon one side of the Town is James-Fort, capable to lodge three hundred Souldiers and Officers; it hath four Bastions, forty Pieces of Cannon mounted; the Walls of Stone, lin’d with a thick Rampart of Earth; well accommodated with a Spring of fresh Water, always furnish’d with Arms and Ammunition, against Accidents: Distant from the Sea seven Leagues, it affords a safe Entrance, even to unskilful Pilots; under the Town side, Ships of any Burthen may Ride secure against any Storms, the Current of the River being broken by the interposition of a small Island, which lies a Mile distant from the Town.

About ten Miles from New York is a Place call’d Hell-Gate, which being a narrow Passage, there runneth a violent Stream both upon Flood and Ebb; and in the middle lie some Rocky Islands, which the Current sets so violently upon, that it threatens present Shipwrack; and upon the Flood is a large Whirlwind, which continually sends forth a hideous roaring, enough to affright any Stranger from passing farther, and to wait for some Charon to conduct him through; yet to those that are well acquainted, little or no danger: It is a place of great Defence against any Enemy coming in that way, which a small Fortification would absolutely prevent, and necessitate them to come in at the West end of Long-Island by Sandy Hook, where Nutten Island forces them within the Command of the Fort at New York, which is one of the best Pieces of Defence in the North parts of America. It is built most of Brick and Stone, and cover’d with red and black Tyle, and the Land being high, it gives at a distance a pleasing prospect to the Spectators. The Inhabitants consist most of English and Dutch, and have a considerable Trade with Indians for Beaver, Otter, and Rackoon-Skins, with other Furrs; as also for Bear, Deer and Elke-Skins; and are supply’d with Venison and Fowl in the Winter, and Fish in the Summer by the Indians, which they buy at an easie Rate; and having the Countrey round about them, they are continually furnish’d with all such Provisions as is needful for the Life of Man, not onely by the English and Dutch within their own, but likewise by the adjacent Colonies.

Manhattans River.

The Manhattans, or Great River, being the chiefest, having with two wide Mouths wash’d the mighty Island Watouwaks, falls into the Ocean. The Southern Mouth is call’d Port May, or Godyns Bay. In the middle thereof lies an Island call’d The States Island; and a little higher the Manhattans, so call’d from the Natives, which on the East side of the River dwell on the Main Continent. They are a cruel People, and Enemies to the Hollanders, as also of the Sanhikans, which reside on the Western Shore. Farther up are the Makwaes and Mahikans, which continually War one against another. In like manner all the Inhabitants on the West side of the River Manhattan are commonly at Enmity with those that possess the Eastern Shore; who also us’d to be at variance with the Hollanders, when as the other People Westward kept good Correspondency with them.

On a small Island near the Shore of the Makwaes, lay formerly a Fort, provided with two Drakes and eleven Stone Guns, yet was at last deserted.

Wholesom Waters.

This Countrey hath many removable Water-falls, descending from steep Rocks, large Creeks and Harbors, fresh Lakes and Rivulets, pleasant Fountains and Springs, some of which boyl in the Winter, and are cold and delightful to drink in Summer. The Inhabitants never receive any damage by Deluges; neither from the Sea, because the Water rises not above a Foot; nor by the swelling Rivers, which sometimes, for a few days covering the Plains, at their deserting them, leave them fat and fruitful. The Sea-Coast is Hilly, and of a sandy and clayie Soil, which produces abundance of Herbs and Trees.

Trees.

The Oak grows there generally sixty or seventy Foot high, and for the most part free from Knots, which makes it the better fit for Shipping.

The Nut-trees afford good Fuel, and a strange Prospect when the Wood is set on fire, either to hunt out a Deer, or to clear the Ground fit to be Till’d.

Some Plants brought hither, grow better than in Holland it self, as Apples, Pears, Cherries, Peaches, Apricocks, Strawberries, and the like.

Vines.

Their Vines grow wild in most places, and bear abundance of blue, white, and Muskadine Grapes: Sometime since the Inhabitants made a considerable advantage by the Wine of them, which is not inferior to either Rhenish or French.

Water Lemmons.

All manner of Plants known in Europe grow in their Gardens: The Water-Lemmons, no less pleasing to the Palate than healthful when grown ripe; they are about the bigness of an indifferent Cabbage: the English press a Juice out of them, which if it did not turn sowre in a short time, might well be compar’d with Spanish Wine.

The Calabashes which grow there, made hollow, serve for Water-cups.

Pumpions are also there in great abundance.

Wheat.

Their Wheat though Set six Foot deep, grows very speedily: Kidney-Beans being planted amongst it, they will wind about the Stalks thereof.

Pease.

Gray Pease grow here so fast, that they gather them twice a year.

In one Field Physical Herbs and Indigo grow wild in great abundance; and Barley springs above a Mans heighth.

Moreover, there are divers sorts of sweet-smelling Flowers.

Soyl of the Mountains.

The Hills are most of a fat and clayie Soil, fit to make Pots, Tobacco-pipes, or any other sort of Earthen Ware.

Gold and Silver-Mines.

In some places also is store of Mountain Crystal, and that sort of Mineral which we call Muscovia Glass: Others afford Marble, Serpentine Stone, and other sorts of hard Stone. And though the Natives did not think it worth their while, or were not in a capacity to dig for Minerals themselves, yet it remains without contradiction, that the Mountains inclose both Gold and Silver.

When Captain William Clieff, Anno 1645. us’d the Indian Interpreter Agheroense (to decide the Differences which arose between the West-India Company and the wild People call’d Makwaes,) he observ’d him to paint his Face with a yellow glittering colour, which he judg’d to be of some rich Mineral: whereupon buying some of the said Agheroense, he put it into a Crusible, and gain’d two small pieces of Gold out of the same, valu’d at six Shillings; but keeping it private, and purchasing a great quantity of the said Mineral from Agheroense (who had show’d him the Mountain which produced the same) extracted good store of Gold out of it; which possessing Clieff with a belief of having found out a business of great consequence, he sent Arent Corsen of New-haven with the fore-mention’d Mineral to Holland; but the Ship being never heard of afterwards, and the Princess Pink, in which Captain Clieff was himself, with store of the new-found Mineral, being cast away, the Business came to nothing.

Paint after a strange manner.

The Inhabitants, though divided into several Nations, yet agree in many things, as in painting their Bodies, Shields, Clubs, and other Utensils in their Houses. The Colours wherewith they paint themselves they press out of Plants, or make them of certain Stones grownd into very fine Powder. The chiefest Plant is not unlike the Myrtle, onely it hath more Boughs, and bears red Berries; the Juice of which being dry’d in the Sun, is afterwards preserv’d in little Bags. The Natives temper their Colours with Water, and paint their Bodies with the same: It is as good a Purple as can be found. They also draw Ships, Trees, and Beasts after a very rough manner: In stead of Feathers they wear pleited Hair, which being colour’d red, hath an excellent gloss, which never fades though it Rain on the same.

Horses.

The Horses bred in this Countrey, being either brought thither from England or Utrecht, far exceed those of English breed; but are both of them subject to a strange Disease, of which many die in few hours. The same Distemper also seizes on Cattel if they go into Forrest Pasture: But the onely thing to cure the same, is Hay from salt Marshy Grounds.

Hogs.

The Oaken Woods have store of Hogs, which if taken and fatned with Turkish Wheat, are most delicious Meat.

Sheep.

The Sheep, though they breed well there, yet are very scarce, because the Planters not being able to spare Men to watch them, they are often devour’d by Wolves.

There are also abundance of Deer, all sorts of Fowls, Turkies, Geese, Ducks, Pigeons, and the like.

Lyons.

The Lyons, whose Skins the Indians bring to Market, are taken on a high Mountain fifteen days Journey South-West from thence.

Black Bears.

There are likewise many black Bears, fearful of humane kind, but if Hunted, they run direct on those that pursue them: they sleep all the Winter, lying six Weeks on one side, and six on the other, and sucking their Feet all the time: They generally lurk among Brambles, or in the Concavities of some hollow Mountain.

Strange Beasts.

On the Borders of Canada there is seen sometimes a kind of Beast which hath some resemblance with a Horse, having cloven Feet, shaggy Mayn, one Horn just on their Forehead, a Tail like that of a wild Hog, black Eyes, and a Deers Neck: it feeds in the nearest Wildernesses: the Males never come amongst the Females except at the time when they Couple, after which they grow so ravenous, that they not onely devour other Beasts, but also one another.

Towards the South of New York are many Buffles, Beasts which (according to Erasmus Stella) are betwixt a Horse and a Stag: though they are of a strong Constitution, yet they die of the smallest Wound, and are subject to the Falling-sickness: they have broad branchy Horns like a Stag, short Tail, rough Neck, Hair colour’d according to the several Seasons of the Year, broad and long Ears, hanging Lips, little Teeth, and Skin so thick, as not easie to be pierced: The Females differ from the Males, for they have no Horns; both may easily be made tame: when Hunted, they vomit out a sort of scalding Liquor on the Dogs: they have great force in their Claws, for they can kill a Wolf with the same at one blow: their Flesh, either fresh or salted, is a good Diet: their Claws also cure the Falling-sickness.

Harts.

But no Beasts are more plentiful here than Harts and Stags, which feed up and down in great Herds: when they are Hunted by Wolves or Men, they immediately take the next River, where they are caught several together, by being cross’d in their Swimming, and affrighted by the Eccho which comes from the Mountains, made by the Hunters hollowing on the other Shore, which makes them fearful of Landing: whilst the Huntsmen joyning several pieces of Wood together get upon them, and Rowing towards these Deer, intercept them, being tir’d and out of breath.

Musk-Cats.

Moreover, this Countrey breeds many Musk Cats, especially in Marshy Grounds. These Beasts are beautiful to the Eye, having black speckled Skins, their Mouths, full of sharp Teeth, and their Tails being long trail after them.

Many of the Learned maintain a Dispute concerning Civet, Whether it be the Seed of the Civet-Cat? the Affirmative, which Cardanus maintain’d, is contradicted by Julius Scaliger. Matthiolus, an Author of no little credit, supposes that Civet is the Sweat of the Cat, because it is most chiefly taken when these Beasts are exceedingly vex’d and wearied: But since the Sweat runs from all parts of the Body, which nevertheless do not all produce Civet, it is impossible that Sweat should be Civet. Others account Civet to be the Dung of the Cats; which last seems to come nearest to truth: for certainly it is nothing else but an Excrement in the fleshy parts about their Pizzle, or near the Fundament. The Cats being in pain to be discharg’d of this Civet, free themselves from it by rubbing a Tree; and also fawn on those which take it from them with a Spoon.

Plin. lib. 32. cap. 3.

Besides all other wild Creatures, the Countrey according to Adrian Vander Donk, produces yearly eighty thousand Beavers. Pliny relates, that these Beasts bite off their Pizzles and throw them to the Hunter, which are an exceeding good Medicine to help Abortion, stop the Monethly Flowers, Giddiness in the Head, Gout, Lameness, Belly and Tooth-ach, Rhumes, Poyson, and the Evil. But Pliny makes a great mistake herein, for the Beavers have a small Pissel fasten’d to their Back-bone, in such a manner, that they cannot loose them but with hazard of their lives: They live in the Water, and on the Shore, in great companies together, in Nests built of Wood, which deserve no small admiration, being made after this manner: The Beavers first gather all the loose Wood, which they find along the Banks of the Rivers, of which, if there be not enough, they bite the Bark off from the Trees in the neighboring Woods, then with their Tusks, of which two grow above, and two below in their Mouths, they gnaw the main body of the Tree so long, till it drops asunder: Their Nests very artificial, are six Stories high, cover’d on the top with Clay to keep out Rain; in the middle is a passage which goes to the River, into which they run so soon as they perceive a Man; to which purpose one of them stands Sentinel, and in the Winter keeps open the Water from freezing, by continual moving of his Tail, which is flat without Hair, and the most delicious Meat that can be had. The Beavers go big sixteen Weeks, and once a year bring forth four young, which suck and cry like young Children, for the Dam of them rises on her hinder Feet, and gives her Teats, which grow between the fore-legs to two of her young, each of them one; the foremost legs of a Beaver resemble those of a Dog, the hindermost those of a Goose; on each side of the vent are two swellings within two thin Skins; out of their vent runs generally an Oily moysture, with which they anoint all the parts of their body which they can reach, to keep them from being wet; within they are like a cut-up Hog; they live on the Leaves and Barks of Trees; they love their young ones exceedingly; the long Hairs, which shining, stick out on the back, fall off in Summer, and grow again against Harvest; they have short Necks, strong Sinews and Legs, and move very swiftly in the Water, and on the Land; if incompass’d by Men or Dogs, they bite most severely; the right Castoreum, so highly esteem’d by Physicians, is a long Vesica, not unlike a Pear, within the body of the female Beaver, the Indians mince the Cods of the Male Beavers amongst their Tobacco, because they produce no Castoreum.

Fowls in New York.

This Country abounds also with Fowls; for besides Hawks, Kites, and other Birds of Prey, there are abundance of Cranes, of several sorts, some grey, some brown, others quite white; all of them have firm Bodies, and Bones without Marrow, Claws of a finger long, strong and crooked Bills, their Brains dry, their Eyes little and hollow, hard Features, the left Foot lesser than the right, both deform’d, their Blood thick, and the Excrements of a horrid smell; they breed most in old Woods, whose ground is without Brambles, and also near the Water, for they feed on Fish, and devour all sorts of Fowls, nay, snatch up Hares, Rabbets, Tortels, and several other sorts of Animals, which they carry away with them in the Air; nay, when hungry, they seize on one another; some of them fly abroad for their prey about noon, others at Sun-rising; they fall like Lightning on what e’re they pursue; they drink little, except the Blood of those Creatures which they devour; they are very libidinous, coupling above thirty times a day, not only with their like, but also with the Hens of Hawks, and other Birds; they lay their biggest Eggs in thirty days, and the lesser in twenty days; they generally bring forth three young; those of them that cannot endure to look full against the Sun, are thrown out of their Nests; the young ones when they begin to be fledg’d, are by the old carry’d into the Air, and let flie, but supported by them; their sight is wonderful quick; for though they flie as high as ever they are able to be discern’d, yet they can see the least Fish that is in the Water, and a Hare lying in the Bushes: their Breath stinks horribly, wherefore their Carcases suddenly rot; though they are libidinous, yet they live long; most of them die of hunger, because their Bills when they grow old, grow so crooked, that they cannot open the same, wherefore they flie up into the Air against the Sun, and falling into the coldest Rivers, loose their Feathers and die.

Pigeons.

Besides the foremention’d Birds of prey, there are abundance of Storks, Ravens, Crows, Owls, Swallows, Gold-finches, Ice-birds, Kites, Quails, Pheasants, and Winter Kings, and which are most remarkable for their rich Feathers, the Spechtes, they pick great holes in Trees, and make a noise as if a Man were cutting down a Tree. The Pigeons flie in such flocks, that the Indians remove with them to the place where they make their Nests, where the young ones being taken by hundreds, serve them for a Moneths Provision.

Pretty Birds.

Moreover, New York breeds a strange Bird about a Thumb long, full of glistering Feathers; it lives by sucking of Flowers like a Bee, and is so tender, that it immediately dies if water be spirted upon it; the Carcase being dry’d, is kept for a Rarity.

Turkies.

But this Countrey abounds chiefly in Turkies, whose plenty deserves no less admiration than their bulk, and the delicious taste of their Flesh, for they go feeding forty or fifty in a flock, and weigh sometime forty or fifty pound apiece; the Natives either shoot them, or take them with a Bait stuck on an Angle: In March and Harvest the Waters swarm with Geese, Teal, Snites, Ducks, and Pelicans, besides many strange sorts of Fowls not known in Europe.

Fish.

The Rivers and Lakes produce Sturgeon, Salmon, Carps, Pearch, Barbils, all sorts of Eels, and many other Fish which are taken near Water-falls: The Sea affords Crabs with and without Shells, Sea-cocks, and Horses, Cod, Whiting, Ling, Herrings, Mackrel, Flounders, Tar-buts, Tortels, and Oysters, of which some are a Foot long, and have Pearl, but are a little brownish.

Rattle-Snake.

Amongst the Poysonous Creatures which infest New York, the chiefest and most dangerous is the Rattle-Snake, whose description we have already had at large in New England.

Constitution of the Inhabitants.

Their Diet.

The Inhabitants have their Hair black as Jet, harsh like Horse-hair; they are broad Shoulder’d, small Wasted, brown Ey’d, their Teeth exceeding white; with Water they chiefly quench their Thirst: Their general Food is Flesh, Fish, and Indian Wheat, which stamp’d, is boyl’d to a Pap, by them call’d Sappaen: They observe no set time to Eat, but when they have an Appetite their Meals begin. Beavers Tails are amongst them accounted a great Dainty: When they go to Hunt, they live several days on parch’d Corn, which they carry in little Bags ty’d about their middle; a little of that said Corn thrown into Water swells exceedingly.

Hudson’s adventures remarkable.

Henry Hudson relates, That Sailing in the River Montains, in forty Degrees, he saw the Indians make strange Gestures in their Dancing and Singing; he observ’d farther, that they carry’d Darts pointed with sharp Stones, Sodder’d to the Wood; that they slept under the Sky on Mats or Leaves; took much Tobacco, and very strong; and that though courteous and friendly, they were very Thieves. He Sailing thirty Leagues further, went in his Boat to an old Indian Commander of forty Men and seventeen Women, who conducted him to the Shore, where they all dwelt in one House, artificially built of the Barks of Oak-trees; round about it lay above three Ships load of Corn, and Indian Beans to dry, besides the Plants which grew in the Fields. No sooner had Hudson enter’d the House, but he was receiv’d on two Mats spread on the ground; and two Men immediately were sent out to shoot Venison or Fowls; and instantly returning, brought two Pigeons; a fat Dog, whom they nimbly flea’d with shells, was also laid down to the fire: They also made other Preparations for Hudsons Entertainment, but not willing to venture himself amongst them, that Night, tasted not of it, notwithstanding the Indians breaking their Darts, threw them into the fire, that thereby they might drive away all fears and jealousies from him.

New Netherlanders Apparel.

The Habits of the Natives, especially of the Men, are few; the Women go more neat than the Men; and though the Winter pinches them with excessive cold, yet they go naked till their thirteenth year: Both Men and Women wear a Girdle of Whale-fins and Sea-shells; the Men put a piece of Cloth, half an Ell long, and three quarters broad, between their Legs, so that a square piece hangs behind below his Back, and another before over his Belly. The Women wear a Coat which comes half way down their Legs, so curiously wrought with Sea-shells, that one Coat sometimes costs thirty Pounds. Moreover, their Bodies are cover’d with Deer-skins, the lappets or ends of which hang full of Points; a large Skin button’d on the right Shoulder, and ty’d about the middle, serves for an upper Garment, and in the Night for a Blanket: Both Men and Women go for the most part bare-headed; the Women tie their Hair behind in a tuft, over which they wear a square Cap wrought with Sea-shells, with which they adorn their Foreheads, and also wear the same about their Neck and Hands, and some also about their middle. Before the Hollanders were Planted here, they wore Shoes and Stockings of Buffelo’s-skins; some likewise made Shoes of Wheaten-straw, but of late they come nearer to our Fashions: The Men Paint their Faces with several Colours; the Women only put here and there a black Spot; both of them are very reserv’d.

Their houses.

Remove.

Their Houses are most of them built of one fashion, onely differing in length; all of them agree in breadth of twenty Foot: They build after this manner, they set Peel’d Boughs of Nut-Trees in the ground, according to the bigness of the place which they intend to build, then joyning the tops of the Boughs together, they cover the Walls and top with the Bark of Cypress, Ashen, and Chest-nut-Trees, which are laid one upon another, the smallest side being turn’d inwards: according to the bigness of the Houses, several Families, to the number of fifteen dwell together, every one having his Apartment. Their Fortifications are most of them built on steep Hills, near Rivers; the access to them is onely at one place, they are built after this manner: They set great Poles in the Ground, with Oaken Pallisadoes on each side, cross-ways one amongst another; between the crosses they set other Trees, to strengthen the Work: Within this inclos’d they generally build twenty or thirty Houses, of which some are a hundred and eighty Foot long, and some less, all of them full of People: In the Summer they pitch Tents along by the River side to Fish; against Winter they remove into the Woods, to be near their Game of Hunting, and also Fuel.

Many Wives.

Marriages.

Whoring permitted.

Strange Marrying.

Child-bearing Womens strange actions.

Funerals.

Mourning over the dead remarkable.

To take many Women is not customary here, only amongst Military Officers, who Marry three or four Wives, which so well agree, that there is never any difference betwixt them; those that are not of Age, never Marry but with the consent and advice of their Parents: Widows and unmarry’d Men follow their own opinion and choice; only they take Cognizance of their Estates and Extraction: The Bridegroom always presents the Bride; for the least offence, the Man after having soundly beaten his Wife, turns her out of Doors, and Marries another, insomuch, that some of them have every year a new Wife: On breach of Marriage, the Children follow the Mother, from whom they account their Generation: They account Adultery, if committed under the bare Canopy of Heaven, a great Sin: Whoring is Licenc’d to single Women, if they receive Money for it, and no Man scruples to Marry them; nay, those that are Marry’d, boast how many they have enjoy’d before their Marriage: She that is inclin’d to Marry, covers her whole body, and sets her self wrapt up in the middle of the way, where a Batchelor passing by sees her, and makes up the Match blindfold: When impregnated, they take great care that their Fruit receives no hindrance nor prejudice: When the time of their Delivery approaches, (which they know exactly) they go to a Melancholly place in the Woods, though in the coldest Weather, where they raise up a Hut of Mats, and bring the Child into the World without any help or Company, wash the Child in cold Water, and wrap it up in Mats; then a few days after going home, they bring up the Infant with great care, none putting them out to Nurse: So long as a Woman gives suck, or is quick with Child, she will not admit of Copulation; one who hath the Flowers, never comes abroad: In time of sickness they faithfully assist one another: When any die, the nearest Relations shut their Eyes; and after having watch’d them some days, they are Interr’d after this manner: The Corps is plac’d sitting with a Stone under its Head, near it they set a Pot, Kettle, Dish, Spoons, Money, and Provisions to use in the other World; then they pile Wood round about it, and cover it over with Planks, on which throwing Earth and Stones, they set Pallisadoes, and make the Grave like a House, to which they shew Veneration, wherefore they account it a great piece of villany to deface any thing of it: The Men make no shew of sorrow over the Dead, but the Women mourn exceedingly, and carry themselves very strangely, beating their Breasts, scratching their Faces, and calling night and day on the name of the Deceas’d: The Mothers make great Lamentation at the Death of their Children, especially Sons, for they shave off the Hair of their Heads, which at the Funeral is burnt in the presence of all their Relations; which is also perform’d by the Women when their Husbands die; besides, they black all their Faces, and putting on a Hart-skin Shirt, mourn a whole year, notwithstanding they liv’d very contentiously together.

Conjurers.

On some occasions they go a Worshipping of the Devil, to a certain place where the Sorcerers shew strange Feats of Activity, tumbling over and over, beating themselves, and not without great noise leaping in and about a great Fire: at last they make a great Cry all together; upon which (as they say) the Devil appears to them in the shape either of a tame or wild Beast: the first signifies bad, and the other good fortune; both inform them of future Events, though darkly; and if the business fall out contrary, they affirm that they have not rightly understood the Devil’s meaning. Moreover they bewitch some in such a manner, that they foam at the Mouth, throw themselves into the Fire, and beat themselves severely; and so soon as they whisper in the Ear of those whom they have bewitch’d, they immediately recover their former health.

Language of the New Netherlanders.

The Language of this Countrey is very various, yet it is divided into onely four principal Tongues, as the Manhattans, Wappanoo, Siavanoo, and Minqua’s, which are very difficult for Strangers to learn, because they are spoken without any Grounds or Rules.

Money.

Their Money is made of the innermost Shells of a certain Shell-fish, cast up twice a year by the Sea: These Shells they grind smooth, and make a Hole in the middle, cutting them of an exact bigness, and so put them on Strings, which then serve in stead of Gold, Silver, and Copper Coin.

Vices and Vertues.

Strange Stoves.

Now to say something of the Vices and Vertues of the Inhabitants. They are in the first place very slovenly and nasty, stubborn, covetous, revengeful, and much addicted to filching and stealing. Some appear reserv’d, using few words, which they utter after serious consideration, and remember a long time. Their Understandings being improv’d by the Hollanders, they are quick of apprehension, to distinguish good from bad: they will not endure any Oppression, but are very patient of Heat, Cold, Hunger and Thirst. They have a strange way of using Stoves, which are set in the Ground and cover’d with Earth, into which they go through a little Door. A sick Person coming into the same, sets himself down, and places hot Stones round about him; which done, and having sweat a considerable time, he leaps into cold Water, by which he finds ease of all his Distempers.

Arms.

Remarkable actions of some Prisoners.

Laws.

Council-Assembly.

Though these People know no great distinction between Man and Man, as other Nations, yet they have noble and ignoble Families amongst them; superior and inferior Offices, which they enjoy by Inheritance; but sometimes the Martial Offices are bestowed according to the Valour of the Persons: Their Generals seldom give their Enemies a Field-Battel, by drawing or dividing their Men into Regiments or Companies, but make it their whole Design to defeat their Enemies by sudden Sallies from Ambuscado’s; for they never stand out a close Fight, unless compell’d to it, but if encompass’d round, they fight to the last Man. When any danger threatens, the Women and Children are convey’d to a secure place. Their Arms formerly were Bowes and Arrows, and Battel-axes, but now they use Musquets, which they have learn’d to handle with great dexterity. Their square Shields cover all their Bodies and Shoulders. About their Heads they tie a Snakes Skin, in the middle of which sticks either a Fox’s or Bear’s Tail. They cannot be known by their Faces, they are all over so besmear’d with Paint of divers colours. They seldom give Quarter to their Enemies, except Women and Children, which the Conquerors use as their own, that by that means they may increase and strengthen themselves: and if any Prisoner is not kill’d presently after the Battel, but falls into the Hands of one whose Relations have formerly been slain by his Party, he is Roasted three days by degrees before he gives up the Ghost. It deserves no small admiration, that the Sufferer during the whole time of his Torture, Sings till he breathes his last. They have few or no Punishments for any Offence, committing few Crimes which are by them accounted Capital. If any one steal, and the Goods be found in his custody, the Governor of the place where he resides commands him onely to restore the same to the Owner. If any one murther or kill the other, the Relations of the slain, if they can take the Malefactor in twenty four hours, may without Examination or delay put him to death also; but that time being once expir’d, the Revenger is liable to be kill’d in the same time by his Relations whom he slew. All Obligations have their power and vertue from certain Presents deliver’d upon the making of a Contract, which is done thus: They dry as many Sticks as they have Articles, which if they agree upon, every Man on the concluding of the Discourse lays a Present before the others Feet. Sometimes they hang up the Presents, because they are often three days in Consultation before they resolve; after which if the Presents be taken down, it is a certain sign of their Agreement; but if not, they proceed no farther, unless the Articles and Presents are alter’d. On Businesses of consequence the Commonalty repair to their Governor’s House, there to hear and enquire what the Nobility there assembled have concluded or resolv’d on; at which the best Orator standing up, tells them their Intentions. It happens sometimes that a turbulent Person making a Mutiny, and refusing to hearken to reason, is immediately beheaded by one of the Nobility; in contradiction of which none dare presume to speak the least word.

Religion.

Diabolical Worship.

Their ridiculous Opinion of God.

As also of the Creation.

There are scarce any steps of Religion found amongst these People, onely they suppose the Moon to have great influence on Plants. The Sun, which over-looks all things, is call’d to witness whene’re they Swear. They bear great respect, and stand much in fear of Satan, because they are often plagued by him when they go a Hunting or Fishing: wherefore the first of what they take is burnt in honor of him, that he to whom they ascribe all wickedness might not hurt them. When they feel pain in any part of their Body, they say that the Devil sits in the same. They acknowledge that there resides a God above the Stars, but troubles not himself with what the Devil doth on Earth, because he continually recreates himself with a most beautiful Goddess, whose original is unknown: She on a certain time (say they) descended from Heaven into the Water, (for before the Creation all things were Water) into which she had instantly sunk, had not the Earth arose under her Feet, which grew immediately to such a bigness, that there appear’d a World of Earth, which produc’d all sorts of Herbs and Trees; whilst the Goddess taking to her self a Hart, Bear, and Wolf, and Conceiving by them, she was not long after deliver’d of several Beasts at one time: and from thence proceeded not onely the diversity of Beasts, but also Men, of which some are black, white, or sallow; in nature fearful like a Hart, or cruel and valiant like a Bear, or deceitful like Wolves: after this the Mother of all things ascended up to Heaven again, and sported there with the Supream Lord, whom they say they know not, because they never saw him: wherefore they shall have less to answer for than Christians, which pretend to know him to be the Punisher of things both good and bad, which are daily committed by them: and for this ridiculous Opinion they can hardly be brought to embrace the Christian Faith.

Of the Immortality of the Soul.

Concerning the Souls of the Deceased, they believe, that those which have been good in their life-time, live Southward in a temperate Countrey, where they enjoy all manner of pleasure and delight; when as the Wicked wander up and down in a miserable Condition. The Eccho which resounds from the Cries of wild Beasts in the Night, they suppose to be the Spirits of Souls transmigrated into wicked Bodies.

Their Canticas, or Dancing.

At their Canticas, or Dancing-Matches, where all Persons that come are freely Entertain’d, it being a Festival time. Their Custom is when they Dance, for the Spectators to have short Sticks in their Hands, and to knock the Ground and Sing altogether, whilst they that Dance sometimes act Warlike postures, and then they come in painted for War with their Faces black and red, or some all black, some all red, with some streaks of white under their Eyes, and so jump and leap up and down without any order, uttering many Expressions of their intended Valour. For other Dances they onely shew what antick Tricks their ignorance will lead them to, wringing of their Bodies and Faces after a strange manner, sometimes jumping into the Fire, sometimes catching up a Firebrand, and biting off a live Coal, with many such tricks, that will affright rather than please an English-man to look upon them, resembling rather a company of infernal Furies than Men.

Their sitting in Council.

When their King or Sachem sits in Council, he hath a Company of Arm’d Men to guard his Person, great respect being shewn him by the People, which is principally manifested by their silence. After he hath declared the cause of their Convention, he demands their Opinion, ordering who shall begin: The Person order’d to speak, after he hath declar’d his mind, tells them he hath done: no Man ever interrupting any Person in his Speech, nor offering to speak, though he make never so many long stops, till he says he hath no more to say. The Council having all declar’d their Opinions, the King after some pause gives the definitive Sentence, which is commonly seconded with a shout from the People, every one seeming to applaud and manifest their Assent to what is determin’d.

If any Person be condemn’d to die, which is seldom, unless for Murther or Incest, the King himself goes out in Person (for you must understand they have no Prisons, and the guilty Person flies into the Woods) where they go in quest of him, and having found him, the King shoots first, though at never such a distance, and then happy is the Man that can shoot him down; for he that hath the fortune to be Executioner, is for his pains made some Captain, or other Military Officer.

They grease their Bodies and Hair very often, and paint their Faces with several Colours, as black, white, red, yellow, blue, &c. which they take great pride in, every one being painted in a several manner.

Within two Leagues of New York lieth Staten-Island, it bears from New York West something Southerly: It is about twenty Miles long, and four or five broad, most of it very good Land, full of Timber, and producing all such Commodities as Long-Island doth, besides Tin and store of Iron Oar; and the Calamine Stone is said likewise to be found there: There is but one Town upon it, consisting of English and French, but it is capable of entertaining more Inhabitants.

Betwixt this and Long-Island is a large Bay, which is the coming in for all Ships and Vessels out of the Sea.

On the North-side of this Island After-skull River puts into the Main Land, on the West-side whereof there are two or three Towns, but on the East-side but one. There are very great Marshes or Meadows on both sides of it, excellent good Land, and good convenience for the setling of several Towns. There grows black Walnut and Locust, as there doth in Virginia, with mighty, tall, streight Timber, as good as any in the North of America: It produceth any Commodity which Long-Island doth.

Hudson’s River runs by New York Northward into the Countrey, towards the Head of which is seated New Albany, a Place of great Trade with the Indians, betwixt which and New York, being above a hundred Miles, is as good Corn-Land as the World affords, enough to entertain hundreds of Families, which in the time of the Dutch Government of these Parts could not be setled by reason of the Indians, excepting one Place, call’d The Sopers, which was kept by a Garrison, but since the Reducement of these Parts under His Majesties Obedience, and a Patent granted to his Royal Highness the Duke of York, which is about six years, by the care and diligence of the Honorable Collonel Nichols, sent thither as Deputy to his Highness, such a League of Peace was made, and Friendship concluded betwixt that Colony and the Indians, that they have not resisted or disturb’d any Christians there, in the setling or peaceable possessing of any Lands within that Government, but every Man hath sat under his own Vine, and hath peaceably reap’d and enjoy’d the Fruits of their own Labors, which God continue.

Raritan-River.

Westward of After-skull River before mention’d, about eighteen or twenty Miles, runs in Raritan River Northward into the Countrey some scores of Miles; both sides of which River are adorn’d with spacious Meadows, enough to feed thousands of Cattel: The Wood-Land is very good for Corn, and stor’d with wild Beasts, as Deer, Elks, and an innumerable multitude of Fowl, as in other parts of the Countrey. This River is thought very capable for the erecting of several Towns and Villages on each side of it, no place in the North of America having better convenience for the maintaining of all sorts of Cattel for Winter and Summer Food.

Upon this River is no Town setled, onely one at the Mouth of it; but next to it, Westward, is a Place call’d Newasons; where are two or three Towns and Villages setled upon the Sea-side, but none betwixt that and Delaware-Bay, which is about sixty Miles, all which is a rich Champain Countrey, free from Stones, and indifferent level, having store of excellent good Timber, and very well water’d, having Brooks or Rivers ordinarily, one or more in every Miles travel. This Countrey is peopled onely with wild Beasts, as Deer, Elks, Bears, and other Creatures, so that in a whole days Journey you shall meet with no Inhabitants except a few Indians. It is also full of stately Oaks, whose broad-branch’d tops serve for no other use, but to keep off the Suns heat from the wild Beasts of the Wilderness, where is Grass as high as a Man’s Middle, which serves for no other end, except to maintain the Elks and Deer, who never devour a hundredth part of it, than to be burnt every Spring to make way for new. How many poor People in the World would think themselves happy, had they an Acre or two of Land, whilst here is hundreds, nay thousands of Acres that would invite Inhabitants.

Delaware-Bay.

Delaware-Bay, the Mouth of the River, lieth about the mid way betwixt New York and the Capes of Virginia.

The best Commodities for any to carry with them to this Countrey is Clothing, the Countrey being full of all sorts of Cattel, which they may furnish themselves withal at an easie Rate, for any sort of English Goods, as likewise Instruments for Husbandry and Building, with Nails, Hinges, Glass, and the like. They get a Livelihood principally by Corn and Cattel, which will there fetch them any Commodities: Likewise they Sowe store of Flax, which they make every one Cloth of for their own wearing; as also Woollen Cloth, and Linsey-woolsey; and had they more Tradesmen amongst them, they would in a little time live without the help of any other Countrey for their Clothing; for Tradesmen there are none but live happily there, as Carpenters, Blacksmiths, Masons, Taylors, Weavers, Shoemakers, Tanners, Brickmakers, and so any other Trade: Them that have no Trade betake themselves to Husbandry, get Land of their own, and live exceeding well.

We shall conclude our Discourse of this Countrey with a notable Character given thereof by a late Writer, as to the great advantage of happy living in all respects, for whosoever shall be pleas’d to betake himself thither to live.

The Character of a happy Countrey.

“If there be any terrestrial happiness (saith he) to be had by any People, especially of an inferior rank, it must certainly be here. Here any one may furnish himself with Land, and live Rent-free, yea, with such a quantity of Land, that he may weary himself with walking over his Fields of Corn, and all sorts of Grain, and let his Stock amount to some hundreds; he needs not fear there want of Pasture in the Summer, or Fodder in the Winter, the Woods affording sufficient supply, where you have Grass as high as a Man’s Knees, nay, as high as his Waste, interlac’d with Pea-Vines, and other Weeds that Cattel much delight in, as much as a Man can pass through: And these Woods also every Mile or half-Mile are furnish’d with fresh Ponds, Brooks, or Rivers, where all sorts of Cattel, during the heat of the day, do quench their thirst, and cool themselves. These Brooks and Rivers being inviron’d of each side with several sorts of Trees and Grape-Vines, Arbor-like interchanging places, and crossing these Rivers, do shade and shelter them from the scorching beams of the Sun. Such as by their utmost Labors can scarcely get a Living, may here procure Inheritances of Lands and Possessions, stock themselves with all sorts of Cattel, enjoy the benefit of them whilst they live, and leave them to their Children when they die. Here you need not trouble the Shambles for Meat, nor Bakers and Brewers for Beer and Bread, nor run to a Linnen-Draper for a supply, every one making their own Linnen, and a great part of their woollen Cloth for their ordinary wearing. And how prodigal (if I may so say) hath Nature been to furnish this Countrey with all sorts of wild Beasts and Fowl, which every one hath an interest in, and may Hunt at his pleasure; where, besides the pleasure in Hunting, he may furnish his House with excellent fat Venison, Turkies, Geese, Heath-hens, Cranes, Swans, Ducks, Pigeons, and the like; and wearied with that, he may go a Fishing, where the Rivers are so furnish’d, that he may supply himself with Fish before he can leave off the Recreation. Here one may travel by Land upon the same Continent hundreds of Miles, and pass through Towns and Villages, and never hear the least complaint for want, nor hear any ask him for a Farthing. Here one may lodge in the Fields and Woods, travel from one end of the Countrey to another, with as much security as if he were lock’d within his own Chamber: And if one chance to meet with an Indian Town, they shall give him the best Entertainment they have, and upon his desire direct him on his Way. But that which adds happiness to all the rest, is the healthfulness of the Place, where many People in twenty years time never know what Sickness is; where they look upon it as a great Mortality, if two or three die out of a Town in a years time. Besides the sweetness of the Air, the Countrey it self sends forth such a fragrant smell, that it may be perceiv’d at Sea before they can make the Land: No evil Fog or Vapor doth any sooner appear, but a North-West or Westerly Wind immediately dissolves it, and drives it away. Moreover, you shall scarce see a House, but the South-side is begirt with Hives of Bees, which increase after an incredible manner: So that if there be any terrestrial Canaan, ’tis surely here, where the Land floweth with Milk and Honey.”

A
NEW DESCRIPTION
OF
MARY-LAND.

SECT. III.

Before We proceed to the Description of this Countrey, it will be first requisite to relate the true occasion and means, whereby this part of America came to be erected into a Province, and call’d Mary-land.

The situation.

In the Year of our Lord 1631. George Lord Baltemore obtain’d of King Charles the First, of Great Brittain, &c. a Grant of that part of America, (first discover’d by the English) which lies between the Degrees of thirty seven and fifty Minutes, or thereabouts, and forty of Northerly Latitude; which is bounded on the South by Virginia; on the North, by New England, and New Jersey, part of New York, lying on the East side of Delaware Bay; on the East, by the Ocean; and on the West, by that part of the Continent which lies in the Longitude of the first Fountains of the River call’d Patomeck.

In pursuance of this Grant to his said Lordship, a Bill was prepar’d, and brought to His Majesty to Sign, who first ask’d his Lordship, what he should call it, there being a Blank in the Bill designedly left for the Name, which his Lordship intended should have been Crescentia; but his Lordship leaving it to His Majesty to give it a Name, the King propos’d to have it call’d Terra-Mariæ, in English, Mary-land, in honor of his Queen, whose Name was Mary; which was concluded on, and inserted into the Bill, which the King then Sign’d; and thereby the said Tract of Land was erected into a Province by that Name.

His Lordship somewhat delaying the speedy passing of it under the Great Seal of England, dy’d in the interim, before the said Patent was perfected; whereupon a Patent of the said Province was shortly afterwards pass’d to his Son and Heir, (who was Christen’d by the Name of Cœcil, but afterwards confirm’d by the Name of Cœcilius,) the now Lord Baltemore, under the Great Seal of England, bearing Date June 20. 1632. in the eighth Year of His said Majesties Reign, with all Royal Jurisdictions and Prerogatives, both Military and Civil in the said Province, as Power to Enact Laws, Power of pardoning all manner of Offences, Power to confer Honors, &c. to be held of His said Majesty, His Heirs and Successors, Kings of England in common Soccage, as of His Majesties Honor of Windsor in the County of Berks in England; yielding and paying yearly for the same to His Majesty and to His Heirs and Successors for ever, two Indian Arrows of those parts, at the Castle of Windsor aforesaid, on Tuesday in Easter Week, and the fifth part of all Gold and Silver Oar, which shall happen to be found in the said Province.

The Bounds.

“By the said Patent is Granted to his Lordship, his Heirs and Assigns, all that part of a Peninsula, lying in the parts of America, between the Ocean on the East, and the Bay of Chesapeack on the West; and divided from the other part thereof by a right Line drawn from the Promontory, or Cape of Land call’d Watkin’s-Point, situate in the aforesaid Bay, near the River of Wigcho on the West, unto the main Ocean on the East, and between that bound on the South, unto that part of Delaware Bay on the North, which lies under the fortieth Degree of Northerly Latitude from the Equinoctial, where New England ends; and all that Tract of Land between the bounds aforesaid, that is to say, passing from the aforesaid Bay call’d Delaware Bay, in a right Line by the Degree aforesaid, unto the true Meridian of the first Fountains of the River of Patomeck; and from thence stretching towards the South, unto the furthest Bank of the said River, and following the West and South side thereof, unto a certain place call’d Cinquack, near the Mouth of the said River, where it falls into the Bay of Chesapeack, and from thence by a streight Line unto the aforesaid Promontory, or place call’d Watkin’s-Point, which lies in thirty seven Degrees and fifty Minutes, or thereabouts, of Northern Latitude.”

Title.

By this Patent his Lordship and his Heirs and Assigns are Created the true and absolute Lords and Proprietaries of the said Province, saving the Allegiance and Soveraign Dominion due to His Majesty, His Heirs, and Successors; so that he hath thereby a Soveraignty Granted to him and his Heirs, dependant upon the Soveraignty of the Crown of England.

The first Seating.

His Lordship, in the Year 1633. sent his second Brother Mr. Leonard Calvert, and his third Brother Mr. George Calvert, with divers other Gentlemen of Quality, and Servants to the number of two hundred Persons at least, to settle a Plantation there; who set Sail from the Cowes in the Isle of Wight in England, on Novemb. 22. in the same Year; having made some stay by the way, at the Barbadoes and St. Christophers in America, they arriv’d at Point Comfort in Virginia, on February 24. following; from whence shortly after they Sail’d up the Bay of Chesapeack, and Patomeck River. And having review’d the Country, and given Names to several places, they pitch’d upon a Town of the Indians for their first Seat, call’d Yoacomaco, (now Saint Maries) which the then Governor Mr. Leonard Calvert, freely Purchas’d of the Natives there, for the Lord Proprietaries use, with Commodities brought from England.

That which facilitated the Treaty and Purchase of the said place from the Indians, was a resolution which those Indians had then before taken, to remove higher into the Countrey where it was more Populous, for fear of the Sansquehanocks, (another, and more Warlike People of the Indians, who were their too near Neighbors, and inhabit between the Bays of Chesapeack and Delaware) there being then actual Wars between them, insomuch, that many of them were gone thither before the English arriv’d: And it hath been the general practice of his Lordship, and those who were employ’d by him in the Planting of the said Province, rather to purchase the Natives Interest, (who will agree for the same at easie rates) than to take from them by force, that which they seem to call their Right and Inheritance, to the end all Disputes might be remov’d touching the forcible Incroachment upon others, against the Laws of Nature or Nations.

The number of Inhabitants.

Thus this Province at the vast Charges, and by the unweary’d Industry and endeavor of the present Lord Baltemore, the now absolute Lord and Proprietary of the same was at first Planted, and hath since been supply’d with People and other Necessaries, so effectually, that in this present Year 1671. the number of English there amounts to fifteen or twenty thousand Inhabitants, for whose Encouragement there is a Fundamental Law establish’d there by his Lordship, whereby Liberty of Conscience is allow’d to all that Profess to believe in Jesus Christ; so that no Man who is a Christian is in danger of being disturb’d for his Religion; and all Persons being satisfi’d touching his Lordships Right, as Granted by his Superior Soveraign, the King of Great Brittain, and possess’d by the consent and agreement of the first Indian Owners, every Person who repaireth thither, intending to become an Inhabitant, finds himself secure, as well in the quiet enjoyment of his Property, as of his Conscience.

Mr. Charles Calvert, his Lordships onely Son and Heir, was in the Year 1661. sent thither by his Lordship to Govern this Province and People, who hath hitherto continu’d that Charge of his Lordships Lieutenant there, to the general satisfaction and encouragement of all Persons under his Government, or otherwise concern’d in the Province.

The precedent Discourse having given you a short Description of this Province from its Infancy to this day, together with an account of his Lordships Patent and Right, by which he holds the same; we will here speak something of the Nature of the Countrey in general, and of the Commodities that are either naturally afforded there, or may be procur’d by Industry.

The Climate is very healthful, and agreeable with English Constitutions; but New-comers have most of them heretofore had the first year of their Planting there in July and August, a Sickness, which is call’d there A Seasoning, but is indeed no other than an Ague, with cold and hot Fits, whereof many heretofore us’d to die for want of good Medicines, and accommodations of Diet and Lodging, and by drinking too much Wine and Strong-waters; though many, even in those times, who were more temperate, and that were better accommodated, never had any Seasonings at all; but of late years, since the Countrey hath been more open’d by the cutting down of the Woods, and that there is more plenty of English Diet, there are very few die of those Agues, and many have no Seasonings at all, especially those that live in the higher parts of the Country, and not near to the Marshes and Salt-water.

In Summer, the heats are equal to those of Spain, but qualifi’d daily about Noon, at that time of the Year, either with some gentle Breezes, or small Showres of Rain: In Winter there is Frost and Snow, and sometimes it is extremely cold, insomuch, that the Rivers and the Northerly part of the Bay of Chesapeack are Frozen, but it seldom lasts long; and some Winters are so warm, that People have gone in half Shirts and Drawers only at Christmas: But in the Spring and Autumn, (viz.) in March, April, and May, September, October, and November, there is generally most pleasant temperate Weather: The Winds there are variable, from the South comes Heat, Gusts, and Thunder; from the North or North-West, cold Weather; and in Winter, Frost and Snow; from the East and South-East, Rain.

The Soyl is very fertile, and furnish’d with many pleasant and commodious Rivers, Creeks, and Harbors.

The Country is generally plain and even, and yet distinguish’d with some pretty small Hills and Risings, with variety of Springs and Rivulets: The Woods are for the most part free from Underwood, so that a Man may Travel or Hunt for his Recreation.

The ordinary entrance by Sea into this Country is between two Capes, distant each from the other about seven or eight Leagues; the South Cape is call’d Cape Henry; the North, Cape Charles; within the Capes you enter into a fair Bay, Navigable for at least two hundred Miles, and is call’d Chesapeack Bay, stretching it self Northerly through the heart of the Countrey, which adds much to its Fame and Value: Into this Bay fall many stately Rivers, the chief whereof is Patomeck, which is Navigable for at least a hundred and forty Miles: The next Northward, is Patuxent, at its entrance distant from the other about twenty Miles, a River yielding great Profit as well as Pleasure to the Inhabitants; and by reason of the Islands and other places of advantage that may Command it, both fit for Habitation and Defence: Passing hence to the Head of the Bay, you meet with several pleasant and commodious Rivers, which for brevity we here omit to give any particular account of: On the Eastern Shore are several commodious Rivers, Harbors, Creeks, and Islands; to the Northward whereof you enter into another fair Bay, call’d Delaware Bay; wide at its entrance about eight Leagues, and into which falls a very fair Navigable River.

The natural Commodities of the Countrey.

This Countrey yields the Inhabitants many excellent things for Physick and Chyrurgery; they have several Herbs and Roots which are great Preservatives against Poyson, as Snake-Root, which presently cures the bitings of the Rattle-Snake, which are very Venomous, and are bred in the Countrey; others that cure all manner of Wounds; they have Saxafras, Sarsaparilla, Gums and Balsoms, which Experience (the Mother of Art) hath taught them the perfect use of.

An Indian seeing one of the English much troubled with the Tooth-ach, fetch’d a Root out of a Tree, which apply’d to the Tooth, gave ease immediately to the Party; other Roots they have fit for Dyers, wherewith the Indians Paint themselves as Pacoone (a deep red,) &c.

The Timber of these parts is good and useful for Building of Houses and Ships, the white Oak for Pipe-staves, the red for Wainscot; there is likewise black Wall-Nut, Cedar, Pine, and Cypress, Chest-nut, Elme, Ash, and Popelar, all which are for Building and Husbandry: Fruit-trees, as Mulberries, Persimons, with several kind of Plumbs, and Vines in great abundance.

Of Strawberries there is plenty, which are ripe in April, Mulberries in May, Rasberries in June, and the Maracok, which is something like a Lemon, is ripe in August. In Spring time there are several sorts of Herbs, as Corn-sallet, Violets, Sorrel, Purslane, and others which are of great use to the English there.

In the upper parts of the Countrey are Buffeloes, Elks, Tygers, Bears, Wolves, and great store of Deer; as also Beavers, Foxes, Otters, Flying-Squirils, Racoons, and many other sorts of Beasts.

Of Birds, there is the Eagle, Goshawk, Falcon, Lanner, Sparrow-hawk, and Marlin; also wild Turkies in great abundance, whereof many weigh fifty Pounds in weight and upwards, and of Partridge great plenty: There are likewise sundry sorts of singing Birds, whereof one is call’d a Mock-Bird, because it imitates all other Birds; some are red, which sing like Nightingales, but much louder; others black and yellow, which last sort excels more in Beauty than tune, and is by the English there call’d the Baltemore-Bird, because the Colours of his Lordships Coat of Arms are black and yellow: Others there are that resemble most of the Birds in England, but not of the same kind, for which we have no names: In Winter there are great plenty of Swans, Cranes, Geese, Herons, Duck, Teal, Widgeons, Brants, and Pidgeons, with other sorts, whereof there are none in England.

The Sea, the Bays of Chesapeack and Delaware, and generally all the Rivers, do abound with Fish of several sorts; as Whales, Sturgeon, Thorn-back, Grampuses, Porpuses, Mullets, Trouts, Soules, Plaice, Mackrel, Perch, Eels, Roach, Shadd, Herrings, Crabs, Oysters, Cockles, Mussels, &c. but above all these, the Fish whereof there are none in England, as Drums, Sheeps-head, Cat-fish, &c. are best, except Sturgeon, which are there found in great abundance, not inferior to any in Europe for largeness and goodness.

The Minerals may in time prove of very great consequence, though no rich Mines are yet discover’d there; but there is Oar of several sorts, viz. of Tin, Iron, and Copper, whereof several trials have been made by curious Persons there with good success.

The Soyl is generally very rich, the Mould in many places black and rank, insomuch, that it is necessary to Plant it first with Indian Corn, Tobacco, or Hemp, before it is fit for English Grain; under that is found good Loam, whereof has been made as good Brick as any in Europe: There are store of Marsh-grounds for Meadows; great plenty of Marle, both blue and white; excellent Clay for Pots and Tiles: To conclude, there is nothing that can be reasonably expected, in a place lying in the same Latitude with this, but what is either there found naturally, or may be procur’d by Industry, as Oranges, Lemons, and Olives, &c.

Commodities which are, or may be procur’d by industry.

We need not here mention Indian Corn, (call’d Mayz) Pease and Beans of several sorts, being the peculiar products Planted by the Indians of that part of America.

All sorts of English Grain are now common there, and yield a great encrease; as Wheat, Rye, Barley, Oats, Pease, Beans, &c. good Beer of Wheat or Barley Malt, after the English Mode, is made, even in the meanest Families there; Some drink Beer of Indian Corn, others of the Stalks thereof, or of the Chipps of the Pockykerry-Tree, all which make a sort of fresh and pleasant Drink; but the general Diet of the Country is now English, as most agreeable to their Constitutions.

There are few able Planters there at present, but what are plentifully supply’d with all sorts of Summer and Winter Fruits; as also of Roots and Herbs, of all sorts out of their Gardens and Orchards, which they have Planted for their Profit as well as Pleasure: They have Pears, Apples, Plumbs, Peaches, &c. in great abundance, and as good as those of Italy; so are their Mellons, Pumpions, Apricocks, Cherries, Figgs, Pomegranates, &c. In fine, there is scarce any Fruit or Root that grows in England, France, Spain, or Italy, but hath been try’d there, and prospers well.

You may have there also Hemp, Flax, Pitch, and Tar, with little labor; the Soyl is apt for Hops, Rape-seed, Annice-seed, Woad, Madder, Saffron, &c. there may be had Silk-worms, the Country being stor’d with Mulberry-trees, and the superfluity of the Wood will produce Pot-ashes.

There is a great quantity of Syder made there at present, and as good as in any other Countrey; good Perry and Quince-drink is there likewise made in great plenty: The Ground doth naturally bring forth Vines in great quantities, the quality whereof being something corrected by Industry, (as there have been several trials thereof already made there) may no doubt produce good Wine, to the great encouragement and advantage of the Undertakers.

Brave Ships may be built there with little charge, Clab-board, Wainscot, Pipe-staves, and Masts for Ships, the Woods will afford plentifully; some small Vessels have been already built there: In fine, Beef, Furrs, Hides, Butter, Cheese, Pork, and Bacon, to Transport to other Countreys, are no small Commodities, which by Industry, are, and may be had there in great plenty, the English being already plentifully stock’d with all sorts of Cattel and Horses; and were there no other Staple-Commodities to be hop’d for, but Silk and Linnen (the materials of which apparently will grow there) it were sufficient to enrich the Inhabitants.

But the general Trade of Mary-land at present depends chiefly upon Tobacco, it being the Planters greatest concern and study to store himself betimes with that Commodity, wherewith he buys and sells, and after which Standard all other Commodities receive their Price there; they have of late vented such quantities of that and other Commodities, that a hundred Sail of Ships from England, Barbadoes, and other English Plantations, have been usually known to Trade thither in one Year; insomuch, that by Custom and Excize paid in England for Tobacco and other Commodities Imported from thence, Mary-land alone at this present, hath by his Lordships vast Expence, Industry, and Hazard for many years, without any charge to the Crown, improv’d His Majesties, the King of Englands Revenues, to the value of Forty thousand Pounds Sterl. per annum at least.

The general way of Traffick and Commerce there is chiefly by Barter, or Exchange of one Commodity for another; yet there wants not, besides English and other foraign Coyns, some of his Lordships own Coyn, as Groats, Sixpences, and Shillings, which his Lordship at his own Charge caus’d to be Coyn’d and dispers’d throughout that Province; ’tis equal in fineness of Silver to English Sterling, being of the same Standard, but of somewhat less weight, and hath on the one side his Lordships Coat of Arms stamp’d, with this Motto circumscrib’d, Crescite & Multiplicamini, and on the other side his Lordships Effigies, circumscrib’d thus, Cæcilius Dominus Terræ-Mariæ, &c.

The Government.

The Order of Government and settled Laws of this Province, is by the Prudence and endeavor of the present Lord Proprietary, brought to great Perfection; and as his Dominion there is absolute (as may appear by the Charter aforemention’d) so all Patents, Warrants, Writs, Licenses, Actions Criminal, &c. Issue forth there in his Name: Wars, Peace, Courts, Offices, &c. all in his Name made, held, and appointed.

Laws are there Enacted by him, with the advice and consent of the General Assembly, which consists of two Estates, namely, the first is made up by the Chancellor, Secretary, and others of his Lordships Privy-Council, and such Lords of Mannors, and others as shall be call’d by particular Writs for that purpose, to be Issu’d by his Lordship: The second Estate consists of the Deputies and Delegates of the respective Counties of the said Province, elected and chosen by the free voice and approbation of the Free-men of the laid respective Counties.

The Names of the Governor and Council in this present Year 1671. are as followeth, Mr. Charles Calvert, his Lordships Son and Heir, Governor; Mr. Philip Calvert, his Lordships Brother, Chancellor; Sir William Talbot Baronet, his Lordships Nephew, Secretary; Mr. William Calvert, his Lordships Nephew, Muster-Master-General; Mr. Jerome White, Surveyor-General; Mr. Baker Brooke, his Lordships Nephew; Mr. Edward Lloyd, Mr. Henry Coursey, Mr. Thomas Trueman, Major Edward Fits-Herbert, Samuel Chew Esq.

His Lordship, or his Lieutenant there for the time being, upon due occasion, Convenes, Prorogues, and Dissolves this Assembly; but whatsoever is by his Lordships Lieutenant there, with the consent of both the said Estates Enacted, is there of the same Force and Nature as an Act of Parliament is in England, until his Lordship declares his dis-assent; but such Laws as his Lordship doth assent unto, are not afterwards to be Alter’d or Repeal’d but by his Lordship, with the consent of both the said Estates.

Their chief Court of Judicature is held at St. Maries Quarterly every Year, to which all Persons concern’d resort for Justice, and is call’d The Provincial Court, whereof the Governor and Council are Judges: To the Court there doth belong several sworn Attorneys, who constantly are present there, and act both as Barristers and Attorneys; there are likewise chief Clerks, Bayliffs, and other Officers, which duly attend the Court in their respective places.

The Province is divided at present, so far as it is inhabited by English, into Counties, whereof there be ten, viz. St. Maries, Charles, Calvert, Anne Arandel, and Baltemore Counties, which first five lie on the West side of the Bay of Chesapeack; on the Eastern side whereof, commonly call’d The Eastern-Shore, lies Sommerset, Dorchester, Talbot, Cæcil, and Kent Counties, which last is an Island lying near the Eastern-shore of the said Bay.

Besides the Provincial Court aforenam’d, there are other inferior Courts, appointed to be held in every one of the Counties six times in the year, for the dispatch of all Causes, not relating to Life or Member, and not exceeding the value of three thousand weight of Tobacco; the decision of all other Causes being reserv’d to the Provincial or higher Court before-mention’d, and there lies Appeals from the County-Courts, to the Provincial Court.

There are Sheriffs, Justices of the Peace, and other Officers appointed by the Lord and Proprietary, or his Lordships Lieutenant for the time being, in the said respective Counties; and without four Justices, of which one to be of the Quorum, none of the said respective County-Courts can be held; any of his Lordships Privy Council may sit as Judge, in any of the said County-Courts, by vertue of his place.

These Courts are appointed to be held at convenient Houses in the said Counties, which commonly are not far distant from some Inn, or other House of Entertainment, for accommodation of Strangers; one of the said six County Courts in each County is held for settling of Widows and Orphans Estates.

There are Foundations laid of Towns, more or less in each County, according to his Lordships Proclamation, to that effect Issu’d forth in the year 1668. In Calvert County, about the River of Patuxent, and the adjacent Cliffs, are the Bounds of three Towns laid out, one over against Point Patience, call’d Harvy Town, another in Battel-Creek, call’d Calverton, and a third upon the Cliffs, call’d Herrington, and Houses already built in them, all uniform, and pleasant with Streets, and Keys on the Water side. In the County of St. Maries, on the East side of St. Georges River, is the principal and original Seat of this Province, where the general Assembly, and Provincial Courts are held, and is call’d St. Maries, being erected into a City by that Name, where divers Houses are already built: The Governor hath a House there call’d St. John’s; the Chancellor Mr. Philip Calvert, his Lordships Brother, hath another, and in this place is built and kept the Secretaries Office, where all the Records are kept, all Process, Grants, for Lands, Probates of Wills, Letters of Administration are issu’d out: the Plat of a Fort and Prison is lately laid there, upon a point of Land, term’d Windmil-Point, from a Windmil which formerly stood there, the situation is proper, for that it commands the breadth of the said River of Saint Georges; so that when it is finish’d, all Shipping may safely Ride before the Town, without the least fear of any sudden Assault, or Attempt of Pirats or other Enemy whatsoever. This City has formerly been the usual place of abode for his Lordships Lieutenants, and their Retinue; but of late years the present Governor, Mr. Charles Calvert, hath built himself a fair House of Brick and Timber, with all Out-houses, and other Offices thereto belonging, at a place call’d Mattapany, near the River of Patuxent before-mention’d, where he and his Family reside, being a pleasant, healthful, and commodious Seat, about eight Miles by Land distant from St. Maries.

Of the Indians in Mary-land.

The Indians in Mary-land are a People generally of streight, able, and well proportion’d Bodies, something exceeding the ordinary pitch of the English, their Complexion Swarthy, their Hair naturally long and black, without Curle, which generally they cut after some strange Fantastical Mode; nay, sometimes they Dye it with red and other preposterous Colours: They Liquor their Skins with Bears Grease, and other Oyls, which renders them more tawny, and less apt to receive injury from the Weather: They are subtile from their Infancy, and prone to learn any thing their Fancy inclines them to, in other things slothful.

There are as many distinct Nations among them as there are Indian Towns, (which are like Countrey-Villages in England, but not so good Houses) dispers’d throughout the Province: Each Town hath its King (by them term’d Werowance) and every forty or fifty Miles distance differs much from its Neighbors in Speech and Disposition: The Sasquahanocks, though but few in number, yet much exceed the rest in Valor, and Fidelity to the English; the rest being generally of a more Treacherous Spirit, and not so stout, and the number of the English do already exceed all the Indians in the Province.

The Werowance is assisted by Councellors, call’d Wisoes, who are commonly of the same Family, and are chosen at the pleasure of the Werowance: They have Captains in time of War which they term Cockorooses.

Most of their Governments are Monarchical, (except the Sasquahanocks, which is a Re-publick) but for succession they have a peculiar Custom, that the Issue of the Males never succeed, but the Issue-Male of the Female succeed in Government, as the surer side: They all submit to, and are protected by the Lord Proprietaries Government; and in case of any Assault or Murder, committed on any English, the Party offending is try’d by the Laws of the Province; and in case of any new Election of King or Emperor among them, they present the Person so Elected to the Governor for the time being, who as he sees cause, either alters or confirms their Choice.

In the Year 1663. at the Indians Request, the present Governor Mr. Charles Calvert, and some others of his Lordships Privy-Council there, went to Pascatoway, in this Province, to be present at the Election of a new Emperor for that Nation: They presented a Youth nam’d Nattawasso, and humbly Requested to have him confirm’d Emperor of Pascatoway, by the Name of Wahocasso; which after some charge given them in general, to be good and faithful Subjects to him, the Governor accordingly did, and receiv’d him into his Protection.

They pay great Respect and Obedience to their Kings and Superiors, whose Commands they immediately Execute, though with an apparent hazard of their Lives.

The Mens chief employment is Hunting, and the Wars, in both which they commonly use Bowes and Arrows; some of late have Guns and other Weapons, by a private Trade with some English Neighboring Plantations: They are excellent Marks-men, it being the onely thing they breed their Youth to: The Women Plant and look after the Corn, make their Bread, and dress what Provisions their Husbands bring home. Their way of Marriage is by agreement with the Womens Parents or Friends, who for a certain Sum of their Money, or other Goods, deliver her to the Man at a day appointed, which is commonly spent in jollity.

Their Money.

There are two sorts of Indian Money, Wampompeage and Roanoack, these serve among them as Gold and Silver do in Europe, both are made of Fish-shells, which they string like Beads; Wampompeage is the largest Bead, sixty whereof countervails an Arms length of Roanoack, which is valued at six Pence Sterling; with this they purchase Commodities of the English, as Trading-Cloth, &c. of which they make themselves Mantles, which is something shaggy, and is call’d Dutch Duffels; this is their Winter Habit; in Summer they onely wear a narrow slip of the same to cover those parts, which natural modesty teaches them to conceal; the better sort have Stockings made thereof, and pieces of Deer-Skin, stitch’d together about their Feet in stead of Shooes: The Womens Apparel is the same, but those of the best Quality among them bedeck themselves with Wampompeage or Roanoack, or some other toy.

Manner of habitation.

Their Houses are rais’d about the height of a large Arbor, and cover’d with Barks of Trees very tite, in the middle whereof is the Fire-place, they lie generally upon Mats of their own making, plac’d round the Fire, a Woodden-bowl or two, an Earthen Pot, and a Mortar and Pestle, is their chiefest Houshold-stuff; he that hath his Bowe and Arrows, or Gun, a Hatchet, and a Canoo, (a term they use for Boats) is in their minds rarely well provided for; each House contains a distinct Family, each Family hath its peculiar Field about the Town, where they Plant their Corn, and other sorts of Grain afore-mention’d.

Civility to the English.

They are courteous to the English, if they chance to see any of them coming towards their Houses, they immediately meet him half-way, conduct him in, and bid him welcome with the best Cates they have: The English giving them in like manner civil Entertainment, according to their Quality.

The Werowance of Patuxent having been Treated for some days at St. Maries, by the then Governor, Mr. Leonard Calvert, his Lordships Brother, at his first coming thither to settle that Colony, took his leave of him with this Expression, I love the English so well, that if they should go about to kill me, if I had so much breath as to speak, I would Command my People not to revenge my death; for I know they would not do such a thing, except it were through my own default.

In Affairs of concern, they are very considerate, and use few words in declaring their intentions; for at Mr. Leonard Calverts first arrival there, the Werowance of Pascatoway being ask’d by him, Whether he would be content, that the English should sit down in his Countrey? return’d this answer, That he would not bid him go, neither would he bid him stay, but that he might use his own discretion. These were their expressions to the Governor at his first entrance into Mary-land, whom then they were jealous of, whether he might prove a Friend or a Neighbor, but by his discreet Demeanor towards them at first, and friendly usage of them afterwards, they are now become, not only civil, but serviceable to the English there upon all occasions.

The Indians of the Eastern shore are most numerous, and were formerly very refractory, whom Mr. Leonard Calvert some few years after his first settling the Colony, was forc’d to reduce, and of late the Emperor of Nanticoke, and his Men were deservedly defeated by the present Governor, Mr. Charles Calvert, who reduc’d him about the year 1668. which has since tam’d the ruder sort of the neighboring Indians, who now by experience, find it better to submit and be protected by the Lord Proprietaries Government, than to make any vain attempt against his Power.

These People live under no Law, but that of Nature and Reason, which notwithstanding leads them to the acknowledgement of a Deity, whom they own to be the Giver of all good things, wherewith their Life is maintain’d, and to him they Sacrifice the first Fruits of the Earth, and of that which they acquire by Hunting and Fishing: The Sacrifice is perform’d by their Priests, who are commonly ancient Men, and profess themselves Conjurers; they first make a Speech to their God, then burn part, and eat and distribute the rest among them that are present; until this Ceremony be ended, they will not touch one bit thereof; they hold the Immortality of the Soul, and that there is a place of Joy, and another of Torment after Death, prepar’d for every one according to their Merits.

They bury their Dead with strange expressions of Sorrow (the better sort upon a Scaffold, erected for that end) whom they leave cover’d with Mats, and return when his flesh is consum’d to Interr his Bones; the common sort are committed to the Earth without that Ceremony; but they never omit to bury some part of their Wealth, Arms, and Houshold-stuff with the Corps.

Sect. IV.
Virginia.

Situation of Virginia.

The most Southerly part of Virginia (for all that Tract of Land, reaching First Discovery. from Norumbega to Florida, and containing New-England, New-York, Mary-land, and this part we are now about to Treat of, was by Sir Walter Rawleigh term’d Virginia, in Honor of our Virgin-Queen Elizabeth) lies between Mary-land, which it hath on the North, and Carolina, which it hath on the South, from thirty six, to near thirty eight Degrees of Northern Latitude; and with the rest of those Countries which were comprehended under the same Denomination, was by the Encouragement, and at the Expence of the said Sir Walter Rawleigh, first Discover’d (as some say) by Captain Francis Drake, for his many notable and bold Exploits, afterwards Knighted by the Queen: But upon examination we find little reason to ascribe the first Discovery thereof to Sir Francis Drake, whose chief performances, from the time he first made himself Eminent at Sea, were against the Spaniards, and for the most part in the Spanish-Indies; as his taking of Nombre de Dios, and Vinta Cruz, with an infinite mass of Treasure; his taking of Santo Domingo in Hispaniola, and of Carthagena in Castella Anna; and that which seems to have given occasion of attributing to him the first Discovery of these parts, was his touching upon the North part of the Isle of California, where being nobly Entertain’d by Hioh, a King of that Countrey, and having a Surrendry thereof made to him, in behalf of the Queen of England, he upon a Pillar erected, Inscrib’d the Arms of England, with the Queens Name and his own, and call’d the place Nova Albion: Certain indeed it is, that Sir Walter Rawleigh was the first Promoter of this Discovery; for, after Mr. Martin Forbisher had been sent by Queen Elizabeth to search for the North-West Passage, which was in the year 1576. and for which he also was by the Queen advanc’d to Knight-hood, and nobly rewarded; and Sir Humphrey Gilbert obtaining the Queens Letters Patents, for attempting a Plantation, had reach’d New-found-land (though perishing in his return) he upon these Relations and Inducements undertook by others (for his employments would not permit him to go in Person) to gain Discoveries to the Southward; and accordingly in the year of our Lord 1584. obtain’d a Commission from the Queen, to discover and Plant new Lands in America, not actually possess’d by any Christians, who, with the assistance of Sir Richard Greenvil, and others, provided two small Barques, under the Command of Captain Philip Amidas, and Captain Arthur Barlow, who setting Sail the 27. of April, fell the 2d of July following with the Coast of Florida, and made Discovery of the Isle of Wokokon, Roanoack, and the Continent of Wingandacoa, which they left; and arriving in England about the midst of September following, Her Majesty upon the relation of their Discoveries, was pleas’d to call this Countrey Virginia.

April 9. 1585. Sir Richard Greenvil, with seven Sail, and several Gentlemen, left Plymouth; and on May 26. Anchor’d at Wokokon, but made their first Seat at Roanoack on August 17. following, which lies in thirty six Degrees of Northerly Latitude, or thereabouts, where they continu’d till June 1586. during which time they made several Discoveries in the Continent and adjacent Islands; and being endanger’d by the treachery of the Salvages, return’d for England, and Landed at Portsmouth on July 27. following.

Sir Walter Rawleigh and his Associates, in the year 1586. sent a Ship to relieve that Colony, which had deserted the Countrey some while before, and were all return’d for England as is before-mention’d.

Some few days after they were gone, Sir Richard Greenvil, with three Ships, arriv’d at the Plantation at Roanoack, which he found deserted, and leaving fifty Men thereto keep Possession of that Countrey, return’d for England.

The year following, Mr. John White, with three Ships, came to search for the fifty English at Roanoack, but found them not, they having been set upon by the Natives, and dispers’d so, as no News could be heard of them, and in their room left a hundred and fifty more to continue that Plantation.

In August 1589. Mr. John White went thither again, to search for the last Colony which he had left there; but not finding them, return’d for England in Septemb. 6. 1590.

This ill Success made all further Discoveries to be laid aside, till Captain Gosnol on March 26. 1602. set Sail from Dartmouth, and on May 11. following, made Land at a place, where some Biscaners, as he guess’d by the Natives information, had formerly fish’d, being about the Latitude of forty eight Degrees Northerly Latitude; from hence putting to Sea, he made Discovery of an Island which he call’d Marthas Vineyard, and shortly after of Elizabeth’s Isle, and so return’d for England, June 18. following.

In the Year 1603. the City of Bristol rais’d a Stock, and furnish’d out two Barques for Discovery, under the Command of Captain Martin Pring, who about June 7. fell with the North of Virginia in the three and fortieth Degree, found plenty of good Fish, nam’d a place Whitson-Bay, and so return’d.

In the Year 1605. the Right Honorable Thomas Arundel the first, Baron of Warder, and Count of the Roman Empire, set out Captain George Waymouth, with twenty nine Sea-men, and necessary Provisions, to make what Discoveries he could; who by contrary Winds, fell Northward about one and forty Degrees and twenty Minutes of Northerly Latitude, where they found plenty of good Fish; and Sailing further, discover’d an Island, where they nam’d a Harbor, Pentecost-Harbor; and on July 18. following, came back for England.

In the Year 1606. by the sollicitation of Captain Gosnol, and several Gentlemen, a Commission was granted by King James of Great Brittain, &c. for establishing a Council, to direct those new Discoveries; Captain Newport (a well practic’d Marriner) was intrusted with the Transportation of the Adventurers in two Ships, and a Pinace, who on Decemb. 19. 1606. set Sail from Black-wall, and were by Storm, contrary to expectation, cast upon the first Land, which they call’d Cape Henry, at the Mouth of the Bay of Chesapeack, lying in thirty seven Degrees, or thereabouts, of Northerly Latitude: Here their Orders were open’d and read, and eight declar’d of the Council, and impower’d to chose a President for a year, who with the Council should Govern that Colony: Till May 13. they sought a place to Plant in, Mr. Winkfield was chose the first President, who caus’d a Fort to be rais’d at Powhatan, now call’d James-Town: In June following, Captain Newport return’d for England, leaving a hundred Men behind him; since which time they have been sufficiently supply’d from England, and by the indefatigable Industry and Courage of Captain John Smith, (one of the Council at that time, and afterward President of the Colony) they made several Discoveries on the Eastern shore, and up to the Head of the Bay of Chesapeack, and of the principal Rivers which fall into the said Bay.

Virginia being thus Discover’d and Planted, King James by his Letters Patent bearing Date April 10. in the fourth year of his Reign, 1607. Granted Licence to Sir Thomas Gates, Sir George Summers, and others, to divide themselves into two several Colonies, for the more speedy Planting of that Countrey, then call’d Virginia, between the Degrees of thirty four and forty five of North Latitude, that is to say, taken in that large extent, mention’d in the beginning: The first Colony to be undertaken by certain Knights, Gentlemen, and Merchants, in, and about the City of London: The second to be undertaken, and advanc’d by certain Knights, Gentlemen, and Merchants, and their Associates, in, or about the City of Bristol, Exon, Plymouth, and other parts.

At the first Colonies Request, in the seventh year of the same King, a second Patent was Granted to several Noblemen and Gentlemen, (including Sir Thomas Gates, and some of his former Fellow-Patentees) bearing Date May 23. 1610. whereby they were made a Corporation, and Body Politique, and stil’d, The Treasurer, and Company of Adventurers and Planters of the City of London, for the first Colony of Virginia: And by this Patent, there was Granted to them, their Successors and Assigns, two hundred Miles to the Southward, from a Cape of Land in Virginia, call’d Point Comfort; and two hundred Miles to the Northward of the said Cape, along the Sea-shore, and into the Land from Sea to Sea.

And on March 12. 1612. the said King, in the ninth year of his Reign, Grants them a third Patent, of all Islands lying in the Sea, within two hundred Miles of the Shore of that Tract of Land on the Continent, granted to them by the said former Patent, Jac. 7.

In the Year 1615. Captain Smith procur’d by his Interest at Court, and the King’s Favor, a Recommendation from His Majesty, and divers of the Nobility, to all Cities and Corporations, to Adventure in a standing Lottery, which was erected for the benefit of this Plantation, which was contriv’d in such a manner, that of 100000. Pounds which was to be put in, 50000. onely, or one half was to return to the Adventurers, according as the Prizes fell out; and the other half to be dispos’d of for the Promotion of the Affairs of Virginia, in which, though it were three years before it was fully accomplish’d, he had in the end no bad Success.

In the eighteenth Year of the said King’s Reign, at the Request of the second Colony, a Patent was Granted to several Noblemen and Gentlemen, of all that Tract of Land lying in the parts of America, between the Degrees of forty and forty eight of Northerly Latitude, and into the Land from Sea to Sea, which was call’d by the Patent New England in America: For the better Government whereof, one Body-Politick and Corporate was thereby appointed and ordain’d in Plymouth, consisting of the said Noblemen, Gentlemen, and others, to the number of forty Persons, by the Name of The Council establish’d at Plymouth in the County of Devon, for the Planting, Ruling, Ordering, and Governing of New England in America.

The Patent of Virginia made void.

The Miscarriages and Misdemeanors of the aforesaid Corporation for the first Colony of Virginia, were so many and so great, that His said Majesty was forc’d, in or about October 1623. to direct a Quo Warranto, for the calling in of that former Patent, which in Trinity Term following was legally Evinc’d, Condemn’d, and made Void, by Judgment in the Court of the then Kings-Bench; as also all other Patents, by which the said Corporation claim’d any Interest in Virginia. Thus this Corporation of the first Colony of Virginia was dissolv’d, and that Plantation hath been since Govern’d and Dispos’d of by Persons Constituted and Impower’d for that purpose from time to time, by immediate Commissions from the Kings of England.

The Patent of Mary-land granted to the Lord Baltemore.

In the Year of our Lord 1631. the Right Honorable George Lord Baltemore obtain’d a Grant of King Charles the First of Great Britain, &c. of part of that Land to the Northward, which is now call’d Mary-land; but this Patent of Mary-land was not perfected till 1632. as you may understand more fully by the precedent Discourse of Mary-land, which by express words in the said Patent is separated from, and thereby declar’d not to be reputed for the future, any part of Virginia.

The Patent Carolina granted to several Noble Persons.

And in the fifteenth Year of the Reign of King Charles the Second of Great Britain, &c. on March 24. 1663. Edward Earl of Clarendon, then High-Chancellor of England, George Duke of Albemarle, William, now Earl of Craven, John Lord Berkley, Anthony Lord Ashley, Sir George Carterett Knight and Baronet, Sir William Berkley Knight, and Sir John Colleton Knight and Baronet, obtain’d a Patent from His Majesty, of the Province of Carolina, which lies to the Southward of Virginia, in which is included some part of that Land which formerly belong’d to the said dissolv’d Company of Virginia. So that Virginia at present extendeth it self onely, and is situated between thirty six and thirty seven Degrees and fifty Minutes, or thereabouts, of Northern Latitude, and is bounded on the North, by Mary-land; on the South, by Carolina; on the East, by the Ocean; and on the West, by the South-Seas.

Rivers of Virginia.

The Entrance by Sea into this Countrey is the same with that of Mary-land, between Cape Henry and Cape Charles, plac’d on each side of the Mouth of the Bay of Chesapeak; on the West side whereof you first meet with a pleasant and commodious River call’d James-River, about three Miles wide at its Entrance, and Navigable a hundred and fifty.

Fourteen Miles from this River Northward lies York-River, which is Navigable sixty or seventy Miles, but with Ketches and small Barques thirty or forty Miles farther.

Passing hence to the North you discover a third stately River, call’d Rappahanock, which is Navigable about a hundred and thirty Miles—from whence following the Shore to the North you enter into Patomeck-River, which is already describ’d in the precedent Discourse of Mary-land, to which Province this River belongs, whose Southerly Bank gives Bounds to that part of Virginia and Mary-land.

To these Rivers many other Inland Branches and Rivulets are reduc’d, the chief of which are hereafter specifi’d.

Nature of the Countrey.

The Countrey is generally even, the Soil fruitful, the Climate healthful, and agreeable with English Constitutions, especially since the increase of Inhabitants, and accommodation of good Diet and Lodging, which the first Planters found great want of heretofore. For many years, till of late, most New-comers had the first Year in July and August, a Disease which is call’d A Seasoning, whereof many died, like to what is mention’d before in the Description of Mary-land, though more mortal and common than in Mary-land, because Virginia is a lower Countrey, and somewhat hotter, insomuch that formerly divers ill of that Distemper have come purposely from Virginia to Mary-land, to recover their Health; but now, since the Countrey is more open and clear from Wood, few die of it, and many have no Seasonings at all.

This Countrey affordeth generally all such Roots, Herbs, Gums, and Balsoms, as are express’d before in the Relation of Mary-land.

Trees

All sorts of Trees for Building and Husbandry, Fruit-Trees, Vines, &c. are found in both Countreys, equal in goodness and quantity, onely in such things as require more Sun, and that may be produc’d by Industry, there may be some little difference, because Virginia is somewhat more to the Southward of Mary-land, as in Vines, Oranges, Lemmons, Olives, Silk, &c.

Silk-Grass.

There is a Plant grows naturally in this Countrey, and in Mary-land, call’d Silk-Grass, which will make a fine Stuff with a silky Gloss, and better Cordage than Hemp or Flax, both for strength and durance.

Fruits peculiar to Virginia.

The wild Beasts, Birds, and Fish, are much the same also in this Countrey as are before describ’d in the precedent Description of Mary-land: Nevertheless we shall think it proper not to omit some Fruits, Plants, Beasts, &c. mention’d by the most authentick Describers of New England, as peculiar to that Countrey. The Fruits are, their Putchamines, which are a kind of Damsons; Messamines, a kind of Grapes; Chechinquamins, a sort of Fruit resembling a Chesnut; Rawcomens, a Fruit resembling a Goose-berry; Macoquer, a kind of Apple; Mettaquesunnauks, a sort of Fruit resembling Indian Figs; Morococks, resembling a Straw-berry, besides a Berry which they call Ocoughtanamnis, somewhat like to Capers.

Roots.

Their peculiar Roots are Tockawaugh, good to eat; Wichsacan, of great vertue in healing of Wounds; Pocones, good to asswage Swellings and Aches; Musquaspen, wherewith they Paint their Targets and Mats. Also they have in great request a Pulse call’d Assentamen, and the Plant Mattouna, of which they make Bread.

Beasts.

Their peculiar Beasts are, the Aroughena, resembling a Badger; the Assapanick or Flying-Squerril; Opassum, a certain Beast having a Bag under her Belly, wherein she carrieth and suckleth her Young; Mussascus, which smelling strong of Musk, resembleth a Water-Rat; Utchunquois, a kind of wild Cat.

Their peculiar Fish are Stingrais.

Rivulets.

On the West side of the Bay of Chesapeak, between Cape Henry and the Southerly Bank of the River of Patomeck, are three fair Navigable Rivers, as is before mention’d, into which the other small Rivulets fall, which here we will give some account of, as also of the Indian, or antient Names by which these three principal Rivers were formerly known. The first whereof is Powhatan (now call’d James-River) according to the Name of a large and considerable Territory that lieth upon it. The Rivers that fall into this Southward, are Apamatuck; Eastward, Quiyonycohanuc, Nansamund, and Chesapeak; and Northward, Chickamahania.

The second Navigable River is Pamaunkee, by the English now term’d York-River. The Rivulet that falls into this is Poyankatanck.

The third (which is before describ’d, and usually known by the Name of Rappahanoc) was formerly term’d Toppahanoc.

This we thought fit here to insert, to the end no colour of mistake might remain to after Ages concerning the derivation or original change of such proper Names, especially being Places of great advantage to the Colony.

Several People of the ancient natives of Virginia.

The chiefest of those Tribes or Divisions of People among the Indians, that were by Name known to the English at their first arrival, were upon the River Pouhatan the Kecoughtans, the Paspaheges, (on whose Land is seated James-Town) the Weanocks, the Arrohatocks, the Appametocks, the Nansamunds, the Chesapeacks, &c. On the River Pamaunkee, are the Youngtanunds, the Mattapaments, &c. On the River Toppahanoc, the Manahoacks, the Moraghtacunds, and the Cuttatawomens. On the River Patawomek, the Wighcocomocans, the Onawmanients, and the Moyanances. On the River Pawtuxunt, the Acquintacsuacs, the Pawtuxunts, and the Matapunients. On the River Bolus, the Sasquesahanoes: Southward from the Bay, the Chawonocks, the Mangoacks, the Monacans, the Mannahocks, the Masawomeks, the Atquanahucks, and the Kuscarawaocks, besides a number not material to be nam’d, as having had little of Transaction that we hear of with the Planters.

Number of Inhabitants.

The number of English Inhabitants in this Country are in this present Year 1671. about thirty or forty thousand, who are plentifully stock’d with all sorts of tame Cattel, as Cows, Sheep, Horses, Swine, &c. and all sorts of English Grain; great store of brave Orchards for Fruit, whereof they make great quantities of Cyder and Perry.

They have been much oblig’d by that worthy Gentleman Mr. Edward Digges, Son of Sir Dudley Digges, who was Master of the Rolls, and a Privy Councellor to King Charles the First, of Great Britain, &c. For the said Mr. Digges at his great Charge and Industry, hath very much advanc’d the making of Silk in this Countrey, for which purpose he hath sent for several Persons out of Armenia to teach them that Art, and how to wind it off the Cods of the Silk-worms; and hath made at his own Plantation in this Colony for some years last past, considerable quantities of Silk, which is found to be as good Silk as any is in the World, which hath encourag’d divers others to prosecute that Work.

The Commodities of Virginia.

Though this Countrey be capable of producing many other good Commodities, yet the Planters have hitherto imploy’d themselves for the most part in Planting of Tobacco, as they do in Mary-Land; whereof there are two sorts, one which is call’d Sweet-scented, and the other call’d Oranoack, or Bright and Large, which is much more in quantity, but of lesser price than the former; and the Plantations upon York River are esteem’d to produce the best of that sort of Sweet-scented: There is so much of this Commodity Planted in Virginia, and Imported from thence into England, that the Custom and Excise paid in England for it, yields the King about fifty or threescore thousand Pounds Sterling, per annum: With this Commodity the Planters buy of the Ships that come thither for it (which are above a hundred Sail yearly from England, and other English Plantations) all Necessaries of Clothing, and other Utensils of Houshold-stuff, &c. which they want, though they make some Shoes, and Linnen and Woollen Cloth in some Parts of Virginia, of the growth and Manufacture of the Countrey; and if they would Plant less Tobacco (as it is probable they will e’re long find it convenient for them to do, it being now grown a Drug of very low value, by reason of the vast quantities planted of it) they might in time provide themselves all Necessaries of Livelyhood, and produce richer and more Staple-Commodities for their Advantage.

Their usual way of Trafique in buying and selling is by exchange of one Commodity for another; and Tobacco is the general Standard, by which all other Commodities receive their value; but they have some English and foreign Coyns, which serve them upon many occasions.

The Government is by a Governor and Council, Appointed and Authoriz’d from time to time by immediate Commission from the King of Great Brittain: And Laws are made by the Governor, with the consent of a General Assembly, which consists of two Houses, an Upper and a Lower; the first consists of the Council, and the latter of the Burgesses chosen by the Freemen of the Countrey; and Laws so made are in Force till His Majesty thinks fit to alter them.

The chief Court of Judicature is call’d The Quarter-Court, because it is held every quarter of a Year, where all Causes Criminal and Civil are heard and determin’d, and the Judges of this Court are the Governor and Council: The present Governor in this Year 1671. is Sir William Berkley, who was made Governor by King Charles the First, of Great Brittain, &c. in the Year 1640. And those of the Council are Sir Henry Chichesly, who is one of the greatest and most considerable Planters there, and Mr. Edward Diggs before-mention’d, Mr. Thomas Ludwel Secretary, Major-General Robert Smith, and divers other worthy Gentlemen.

That Part of the Country where the English are Planted, is divided into nineteen Counties, viz. Northampton-County in Acomack, on the Eastern shore; and on the Western shore, Corotuck, Lower-Norfolk, Nansemund, Isle of Wight, Surry, Warwick, Henerico, James, Charles, York, New-Kent, Glocester, Middlesex, Lancaster, Northumberland, Westmoreland, Rappahanock, and Harford-Counties.

In every one of these Counties there are inferior County-Courts kept every Month; these take no Cognizance of Causes relating to Life or Member, or exceeding a certain limited Value, such being refer’d to the Quarter-Courts only, to which likewise there lie Appeals from their Inferior Courts.

There are Sheriffs, Justices of the Peace, and other Officers in every respective County, appointed by the Governor, for the Administration of Justice, who sit there according to his Order, and whereof these County-Courts are chiefly compos’d.

There are few Towns as yet erected in this Colony; the Principal Seat of the English there, is at a Place call’d James-City, in Honor of King James of Great Brittain, &c. This is situated in a Peninsula, on the North-side of James River, and has in it many fair Brick and other good Houses: In this place are held the Quarter-Courts, General Assemblies, the Secretaries Office, and all other Affairs and greatest Concerns of the Colony are here dispatch’d. On the same side, nearer the Mouth of this River, stands Elizabeth-City, containing also several good Houses of Brick and Timber.

Sir William Berkley, the present Governor resides at a place somewhat distant from James-City, call’d Green-spring, a fair Brick House, which he himself caus’d to be Built.

The other Towns of Note belonging to the English, are only Henricopolis, or Henry’s-Town (so nam’d from Prince Henry then living, built in a very convenient place, more within Land, about eighty Miles distant from James-City) and Dale’s-Gift, so nam’d from Sir Thomas Dale Deputy-Governor of the Countrey, about the Year 1610.

The Indians of Virginia far exceed those of Mary-land, in Treachery and Cruelty to the English there, as will appear by this following Relation of their Proceedings towards them, since the first Seating of that Colony, wherein nevertheless, the Civility of some particular Persons at their first Landing is not to be omitted.

Transactions between the English and the Natives.

Upon the first arrival of Captain Amidas and Captain Barlow in Wingandacoa, now Virginia, they were accosted by Granganimeo (the King’s Brother of that Countrey) who, attended with a Train of forty or fifty Men, came in a very civil manner to Treat about a Commerce of Trade and Traffique, which immediately began between them, and several Barters were made: Granganimeo, who was very just of his word, and always kept his promis’d Day of meeting, fancying most a Pewter Dish, gave twenty Deer-skins for it, and boring a Hole therein, hung it about his Neck for a Breast-plate; afterwards he, with his whole Company, and his Wife and Children, frequently and familiarly did eat and drink aboard the English Ships, the King himself call’d Wingina, lying sick at his chief Town, six days Journy off, of a dangerous Wound which he had receiv’d from a neighboring King his mortal Enemy. Some of the English going to Land upon the Isle of Roanoack, were met by Granganimeo’s Wife, who, her Husband being absent, commanded her Servants some to draw their Boat ashore, some to carry them on their Backs to Land, others to carry their Oars into the House for fear of stealing; and having caus’d a great Fire to be made to warm them, and to dry those that had been wet in their Voiage, she afterwards entertain’d them with a plentiful Feast or Banquet after that Country fashion; and when they took alarm at the coming of two or three of her Men with Bows and Arrows, she caus’d the Bows to be broken, and the Men to be beaten out of the House, besides several other demonstrations of extraordinary civility; and when not withstanding all this they could not be perswaded to Lodg any where but in their Boat, she us’d all means imaginable to make them quit their Jealousy, and accept of a Lodging in the House.

In the Year 1585. a Company that went over with Sir Richard Greenvil, burnt the Town of Aquascogoc, for a Silver Cup that was stoln by some of the Indians, took Prisoner Menatonon, King of Chawonoc, who gave Relation of a King about three days Journy off, who possess’d an Island rich in Pearl, which was taken in a deep Water that inviron’d it. Going towards the Countrey of the Mangoacks (among whom in the Province of Chaunis Temaotan, they heard of a Mine of strange Copper call’d Wassador, with Skiko, the King of Chawonock’s Son, and Manteo, a faithful Salvage, for their Guide) they were treacherously dealt with by Wingina, alias Pemissapan (for so, his Brother Granganimeo being lately dead, he had alter’d his Name) who endeavor’d to stir up a Confederacy of the Chawonocks, Moratocks, and Mangoacks against them; yet by the urgent perswasions of Ensenore his Father, the truest Friend the English had, after the death of Granganimeo, and seeing them safe return’d from their Journey, wherein he thought they had all perish’d, and especially upon Menatonon’s sending Messengers to them with Pearl, and Okisco King of Weopomeock, to yield himself Vassal to the Queen of England, his Hatred was somewhat cool’d; but Ensenore deceasing soon after, he return’d to his old treacherous Practices again, and in the end, while he was contriving Mischief against the Planters, he himself was shot, taken Prisoner, and beheaded.

After the Company left upon Virginia by Sir Richard Greenvil, (for he himself was return’d) tir’d out with hunger, hardship, and the many extremities they were at last reduc’d to, had deserted the Place, and obtain’d passage for England, through the civility of Sir Francis Drake, pitying their distress, fifty Men more were Landed upon Roanoack-Isle, by the same Person, who how they were surpris’d and destroy’d by the Natives, was discover’d at large to the Supply that was sent over in the Year 1587. by Mr. White.

A small Party under Captain Smith going down the River to Keconghean, were very fiercely assaulted by sixty or seventy Indians, but their Musquet-shot did such Execution amongst them, that they fled into the Woods and left behind them the Image of their God, which had been carry’d before them as their Standard, and not long after sent one of their Queiongcasocks to offer Peace, and to redeem their Okee; which Smith granting, on condition six onely of them would come unarm’d and load his Boat with Provisions; and promising more over to become their Friend, and furnish them with Beads, Copper, and Hatchets: They accepted the Condition, and brought him Venison, Turkies, wild Fowl, Bread, and what else they had, Singing and Dancing in sign of Friendship till they departed.

In his next Voyage for the discovery of the Head of Chickamahania River, he was, through the neglect of his Sea-men who were sent to watch the Booty, taken Prisoner; in which condition he was kept a whole Month: then being releas’d, he got Provisions for the People in James-Town; which had they not timely receiv’d, they had all abandon’d the Place, and return’d to England.

King Powhatan.

James-Town burnt.

While Affairs stood thus in a mean condition, Captain Newport arriving there with a Ship and sixty Men to strengthen the Plantations, he went to Weromocomoco, where King Powhatan kept his Court, and found him sitting on a Bed of Mats, and an Embroider’d Leather Cushion, Cloth’d in Deer-skins; at his Feet sat a young Maiden, and on each side of the House twenty Concubines; his Head and Shoulders painted red, and a Chain of white Beads about his Neck. Newport to oblige him, gave him an English Youth; for which he receiv’d Powhatans Friend Mamontak; with whom returning, he found a sad accident, for the Fire had not onely burnt the Houses of the new Planters, but also the Pallisado’s about James-Town, made for a Defence against the Enemies Assaults, and most of their Store; which was so much the worse, because it hapned in the Winter, and indeed had prov’d very fatal, had not a Ship, which was suppos’d to be lost, happily arriv’d there with a considerable quantity of Provisions.

Smith’s Voyage.

His remarkable Exploits.

Whilst the Town was rebuilding, Smith set Sail in an open Barque with fourteen Men, and discover’d two Isles before Point Charles, to which he gave his Name; then ran into the Inlet Chesapeack, in the midst of which lay several Islands, by the Sea-men call’d Russels. Before the River Wighcomoco they found a disturbed Sea, and more Northerly a Bay with fresh and hot Water, and at last he met with two Virginians, which conducted the English along a Creek to Onawmoment, where some hundreds of them lay in Ambuscade, according to Powhatan’s appointment, to cut off Smith; who leaping forth on a sudden appear’d like Devils, all painted; but the Bullets flying about made them all run away. Smith, whose Design was onely to discover the Countrey, and the Silver Mine of Patawomeck, ten Leagues up into the Countrey, found the Metal to be of little value, so that he return’d with little Success, being newly cur’d of a poysonous Wound in the Arm, which was given him by a Fish not unlike a Shark, whilst he lay aground near Toppahanock.

A while after being inform’d of Powhatan’s Design to destroy the English, (though he had been lately Presented by Newport with a Silver Basin, a rich Chair, Bed, and Furniture belonging to it, with other things of value) he, to prevent him, chose forty eight out of two hundred Men which were Garrison’d in James-Town, then going to Werowocomoco, Landed with much trouble, the River being frozen above half a Mile from the Shore.

A German Soldier amongst Smith’s Company giving private notice to Powhatan of the Design of the English, made his Escape by flight: But Smith going on to Pamaunke, found King Opechancangough with seven hundred Men in Arms, threatning a fierce Battel; but Smith making directly up to him, set his Pistol on his Breast, and forc’d him to lay down his Arms. Powhatan by this time provided with Swords and Musquets by two Dutch-men, also began to bestir himself afresh; but his Intentions being too soon known, he was again quieted, and forc’d a second time to send Smith a String of Pearl; after which a Peace was concluded between all the Natives and the English.

Many other Quarrels and Encounters there were in the Infancy of the Plantation between the Indians and the English, wherein it would be endless to recount all the Treacheries and Ambuscades of the Salvages, some of which had prov’d very pernicious to the Planters, had they not been betray’d to Captain Smith by Pocahonta, King Powhatan’s Daughter, who upon all occasions shew’d her self a great Friend to the English, having sav’d the Captain’s Life, when, being her Father’s Prisoner, he was just brought to Execution.

This Lady was afterwards brought into England, Christned by the Name of Rebekah, and Married to one Mr. Rolf, and died at Gravesend in an intended Voyage back to her own Countrey.

Nor did their Cruelties and Treacheries end when the Plantation came to be more setled, for on the two and twentieth of March about the Year 1621. in the time of Sir Francis Wyat’s Government, they generally combin’d to destroy all the English there; and carried on this devilish Design with such dissimulation and dexterity, that in one day they cut off seven hundred Men, Women, and Children, there being at that time not above fifteen hundred in the Countrey.

Since which time, in the Year of our Lord 1643. there hapned another bloody Massacre, wherein near five hundred English were in one Night miserably butcher’d by those barbarous and perfidious Salvages: whose Blood the present Governor, Sir William Berkley, nobly and justly reveng’d the Year following, utterly destroying most of them, and taking Prisoner their chief Emperor, Opichancono, who died not long after in Prison.

Having given but a small hint, in its proper place, of the Story of Captain Smith’s Imprisonment by Powhatan, and his deliverance from Death by Pocahonta; we have thought not improper to reserve the Story of it, being very remarkable for a particular Relation, before we conclude our Description of Virginia, since otherwise we should have interrupted the Series of our former Discourse.

The Relation of Captain Smith’s being taken Prisoner by Powhatan, and of his being deliver’d from Death by his Daughter Pocahonta.

The Salvages having drawn from one George Cassen, whither Captain Smith was gone, prosecuting that opportunity, they follow’d him with three hundred Bowe-Men, conducted by the King of Pamaunkee, who in divisions, searching the turnings of the River, found two of his Men by the fire side, whom they shot full of Arrows, and flew. Then finding the Captain, who, as is said, us’d the Salvage that was his Guide as his Shield, (three of them being slain, and others sore gall’d) the rest would not come near him: Thinking thus to have return’d to his Boat, regarding them as he march’d, more than his way, he slipp’d up to the middle in an Osier-Creek, and his Salvage with him, yet durst they not come to him, till being near dead with cold, he threw away his Arms: Then according to their composition, they drew him forth, and led him to the Fire, where his Men were slain; diligently they chaf’d his benumm’d Limbs, he demanding for their Captain, they shew’d him Opechankanough, King of Pamaunkee, to whom he gave a round Ivory double compass Dyal. Much they marvel’d at the playing of the Fly and Needle, which they could see so plainly, and yet not touch it, because of the Glass that cover’d them; but when he demonstrated by that Globe-like Jewel, the roundness of the Earth, and Skies; the Sphere of the Sun, Moon, and Stars, and how the Sun did chase the Night round about the World continually; the greatness of the Land and Sea; the diversity of Nations, variety of Complexions, and how we were to them Antipodes, and many other such like matters, they all stood as amaz’d with admiration: Notwithstanding, within an hour after they ty’d him to a Tree, and as many as could stand about him prepar’d to shoot him; but the King holding up the Compass in his Hand, they all laid down their Bowes and Arrows, and in a triumphant manner led him to Orapaks, where he was after their manner kindly Feasted, and well us’d.

Their order in conducting him was thus; Drawing themselves all in Fyle, the King in the midst had all their Bowes and Swords borne before him. Captain Smith was led after him by three great Salvages, holding him fast by each Arm; and on each side six went in Fyle with their Arrows nocked. But arriving at the Town (which was but onely thirty or forty Hunting Houses made of Mats, which they remove as they please, as we our Tents) all the Women and Children staring and gazing at him, the Souldiers first all in Fyle wheel’d off to the Rear in good Order; on each Flank were Officers, like Serjeants to see them keep their Postures: A good time they continu’d this Exercise, and then cast themselves in a Ring, Dancing in such several Postures, and singing and yelling out such hellish Notes and Screeches; being strangely Painted, every one his Quiver of Arrows, and at his Back a Club; on his Arm a Fox or an Otters-skin, or some such matter for his vambrace; their Heads and Shoulders Painted red, with Oyl and Pocones mingled together, which Scarlet-like colour, made an exceeding handsome show; his Bowe in his Hand, and the Skin of a Bird with her Wings abroad dry’d, ty’d on his Head, a piece of Copper, a white Shell, a long Feather, with a small Rattle growing at the Tails of their Snaks ty’d to it, or some such like Toy. All this while Smith and the King stood in the midst, guarded, as before is said, and after three Dances they all departed. Smith they conducted to a long House, where thirty or forty tall Fellows did guard him, and e’re long, more Bread and Venison was brought him than would have serv’d twenty Men, I think his Stomack at that time was not very good; what he left, they put in Baskets and ty’d over his Head. About midnight they set the Meat again before him; all this time none of them would eat a bit with him, till the next Morning they brought him as much more, and then did they eat all the old, and reserv’d the new as they had done the other, which made him think they would feed him for slaughter: Yet in this desperate estate to fend him from the cold, one Maocassater brought him his Gown, in requital of some Beads and Toys Smith had given him at his first arrival in Virginia.

Two days after a man would have slain him (but that the Guard prevented it) for the death of his Son, to whom they conducted him to recover the poor man then breathing his last. Smith told them, that at James-Town he had a Water would do it, if they would let him fetch it, but they would not permit that; but made all the preparations they could to assault James-Town, craving his advice, and for recompence he should have Life, Liberty, Land, and Women. In part of a Tablebook he writ his mind to them at the Fort, what was intended, how they should follow that direction to affright the messengers, and without fail send him such things as he writ for, and an Inventory with them. The difficulty and danger, he told the Salvages, of the Mines, great Guns, and other Engines, exceedingly affrighted them, yet according to his Request they went to James-Town, in as bitter weather as could be of Frost and Snow, and within three days return’d with an Answer.

But when they came to James-Town, seeing Men sally out as he had told them they would, they fled; yet in the night they came again to the same place where he had told them they should receive answer, and such things as he had promis’d them, which they found accordingly, and with which they return’d with no small expedition, to the wonder of them all, supposing that he could either Divine, or the Paper could speak: then they led him to the Youthtanunds, the Mattapanients, the Payankatanks, the Nantaughtacunds, and Onawmanients upon the Rivers of Rapahanock, and Patawomek, through intricate ways, and back again by divers other several Nations, to the Kings Habitation at Pamaunkee, where they entertain’d him with most strange and fearful Conjurations. Not long after, early in the Morning, a great fire was made in a long House, and a Mat spread on each side thereof; on the one they caus’d him to sit, and all the Guard went out of the House, and presently there came skipping in a great grim Fellow, all Painted over with Coal, mingled with Oyl; and many Snakes and Wesels-skins stuff’d with Moss, and all their Tails ty’d together, so as they met on the Crown of his Head in a Tassel; and round about the Tassel was a Coronet of Feathers, the Skins hanging round about his Head, Back, and Shoulders, and in a manner cover’d his Face; with a hellish voice, and a Rattle in his Hand. With most strange gestures and passions he began his Invocation, and environ’d the fire with a Circle of Meal; which done, three more such like Devils came rushing in with the like antique Tricks, Painted half black, half red; but all their Eyes were Painted white, and some red strokes like Mutchato’s, along their Cheeks: round about him those Fiends Danc’d a pretty while, and then came in three more as ugly as the rest, with red Eyes, and white strokes over their black Faces; at last they all sate down right against him, three of them on the one hand of the chief Priest, and three on the other; then all with their Rattles began a Song, which ended, the chief Priest laid down five Wheat Corns, then stretching his Arms and Hands with such violence, that he sweat, and his Veins swell’d, he began a short Oration: at the conclusion, they all gave a short groan, and then laid down three Grains more; after that, began their Song again, and then another Oration, ever laying down so many Corns as before, till they had twice incircled the Fire; that done, they took a bunch of little Sticks, prepared for that purpose, continuing still their Devotion, and at the end of every Song and Oration, they laid down a Stick between the Divisions of Corn: till night, neither he nor they did either eat or drink, and then they feasted merrily, with the best Provisions they could make: Three days they us’d this Ceremony, the meaning whereof they told him, was to know if he intended them well, or no. The Circle of Meal signifi’d their Countrey, the Circles of Corn the bounds of the Sea, and the Sticks his Countrey. They imagin’d the World to be flat and round, like a Trencher, and they in the midst. After this they brought him a Bag of Gun-powder, which they carefully preferv’d till the next Spring, to Plant as they did their Corn, because they would be acquainted with the nature of that Seed. Opitchapam, the King’s Brother, invited him to his House, where, with as many Platters of Bread, Fowl, and wild Beasts, as did environ him, he bid him wellcome, but not any of them would eat a bit with him, but put up all the remainder in Baskets. At his return to Opechancanoughs, all the Kings Women, and their Children, flock’d about him for their Parts, as a due by Custom, to be merry with such Fragments.

At last, they brought him to Meronocomoco, where was Powhatan their Emperor. Here more than two hundred of those grim Courtiers stood wondering at him, as he had been a Monster; till Powhatan and his Train had put themselves in their greatest Braveries. Before a Fire, upon a seat like a Bedsted, he sat cover’d with a great Robe, made of Rarowcun-Skins, and all the Tails hanging by. On either hand did sit a young Maid, of sixteen or eighteen years of Age, and along on each side the House, two rows of Men, and behind them as many Women, with all their Heads and Shoulders Painted red; many of their Heads bedeck’d with the white Doun of Birds, but every one with something, and a great Chain of white Beads about their Necks. At his entrance before the Emperor, all the People gave a great shout. The Queen of Appamatuck was appointed to bring him Water to wash his Hands, and another brought him a bunch of Feathers, in stead of a Towel to dry them: Having Feasted him after their barbarous manner as well as they could, a long consultation was held, but in conclusion, two great Stones being brought before Powhatan, as many as could, laid Hands on him, dragg’d him to them, and thereon laid his Head, when being ready with their Clubs, to beat out his Brains, Pocahontas, the Emperors dearest Daughter, seeing no intreaty could prevail, got his Head in her Arms, and laid her own upon his to save him from death; whereat, the Emperor was contented he should live to make him Hatchets, and her Bells, Beads, and Copper; for they thought him a Man of all Occupations like themselves; for the King himself will make his own Robes, Shoes, Bowes, Arrows, Pots, Plant, Hunt, or do any thing as well as the rest.

Two days after, Powhatan having disguis’d himself in the most fearful manner he could, caus’d Captain Smith to be brought forth to a great House in the Woods, and there upon a Mat by the Fire to be left alone. Not long after, from behind a Mat that divided the House, was made the most doleful noise he ever heard; then Powhatan, more like a Devil than a Man, with about two hundred more as black as himself, came unto him, and told him, That now they were Friends, and presently he should go to James-Town, to send him two great Guns and a Grindstone, for which he would give him the Countrey of Capahowosick, and for ever esteem him as his Son Nantaquoud. So to James-Town with twelve Guides Powhatan sent him. That Night they Quarter’d in the Woods, he still expecting (as he had done all this long time of his Imprisonment) every hour to be put to one Death or other, for all their Feasting: but Almighty God (by his Divine Providence) had mollifi’d the Hearts of those stern Barbarians with compassion. The next Morning betimes they came to the Fort, where Smith having us’d the Salvages with what kindness he could, he shew’d Rawhunt, Powhatan’s trusty Servant, two Demi-Culverins and a Milstone, to carry to Powhatan: they found them somewhat too heavy; but when they saw him Discharge them, they being loaded with Stones, amongst the Boughs of a great Tree loaded with Isickles, the Ice and Branches came so tumbling down, that the poor Salvages ran away half dead with Fear. But at last we regain’d some Conference with them, and gave them some Toys, and sent to Powhatan’s Women and Children such Presents, as gave them in general, full content.

Sect. V.
Carolina.

Situation and Description of Carolina.

Carolina is that part of Florida which lies between twenty nine and thirty six Degrees and thirty Minutes of Northern Latitude: It is wash’d on the East and South, with the Atlantick Ocean; on the West with Mare Pacificum, or the South Sea; and on the North, bounds on Virginia. A Countrey wherein Nature shews how bountiful she can be without the assistance of Art, the Inhabitants (excepting a little Maiz which their old Men and Women Plant) depending meerly on the natural and spontaneous Growth of the Soil for their Provisions, the Woods furnishing them with store of Fruit and Venison, and the Rivers with plenty of several sorts of wholsom and savory Fish.

This Maintenance, which without forecast or toil they receive from the natural fruitfulness of the Countrey, will, if we consider either the largeness of their Growth, or the duration of their Lives, be thought neither scanty nor unhealthy, their Stature being of a larger size than that of English-men, their Make strong and well proportion’d, a crooked or mis-shapen Person being not to be found in the whole Countrey; and (where the chance of War, which they are almost continually engag’d in one against another in their little Governments, spares any of them) they live to an incredible old age; so that when the English came there, they found some of their Kings, who saw descend from them the sixth Generation.

Productions of the Soil.

The Soil is very rich and fertile, producing naturally Walnuts, Grapes (of which the English who are there Planted have made very good Wine) Apricocks, Bullys, with a multitude of others; besides the Woods also are full of very good Peaches, and all the Season of the Year strew’d all over with Strawberries. Mulberry-Trees are the common growth of the Woods; and to assure you they are the natural Offspring of the Place, and grow to an incredible bigness, one whereof the English (who are new Planted at Albemarle Point on Ashley River) made use to fasten the Gate of their Pallisado to, was so large, that all who came from thence say, they never saw any Oak in England bigger, which is but the ordinary size of the Mulberry-Trees of this Countrey, which is so sure an Argument of the richness of the Soil, that the Inhabitants of Virginia enquiring of the Seamen who came from thence, concerning the Quality and Product of the Countrey, when they were inform’d of the large Mulberry-Trees it produc’d, were so well satisfi’d with it, that they made no farther Enquiry. There are also other Trees, as Ash, Poplar, and Bay, with several sorts unknown to us of Europe; but those which make it almost all one general Forrest of large Timber-Trees, are Oak, both red and white, and Cedar. There are also here and there large Groves of Pine-Trees, some a hundred Foot high, which afford a better sort of Mast than are to be had either in Mary-Land or Norway. These larger Trees weaving their luxuriant Branches into a close Shade, suffer no Under-wood to grow between them, either by their Droppings, or else the Heads of Deer which loosening all the tender Shoots, quite destroy it; so that a great part of the Countrey is as it were a vast Forrest of fine Walks, free from the heat of the Sun, or the incumbrance of Shrubs and Bushes, and so clear and open, that a Man may easily ride a Hunting amongst the Trees, yielding a Prospect very pleasant and surpassing. On the Skirts of these Woods grow lesser Trees and Shrubs of several sorts; amongst them are sundry Dying Materials, which how well the Inhabitants know how to make use of, appears in the Deer-Skins that the chief of them wear, which are Painted, or rather Dy’d, with several lively Colours. But amongst their Shrubs, one of most note and use is that whose Leaves make their Casini, a Drink they frequently use, and affirm to be very advantageous for the preservation of Health; which, by the description our English give of the size, colour, and shape of the Leaf, the sort of Tree it grows on, and the taste, colour, and effects of the Drink, which is nothing but the Decoction of the Leaf, seems to be the very same with the East-India TEE, and by those who have seen and tasted both, affirm’d to be no other, and may very probably be a spontaneous and native Plant of this Place, since those who give us an account of it, tell us, that this so much valu’d Leaf grows most plentifully in Nanking, a Province in China under the very same Latitude, and very much agreeing in Soil and Situation with this of Carolina.

What Herbs else the Countrey produces, the English Enquirers (who by minding their Plantations and Settlement there, have been taken off from such unprofitable Actions) give us but little account, onely they say, that those Plats of Ground which have been formerly clear’d off by the Indians for the Planting their Corn, they found thick cover’d with three-leav’d Grass and Dazies, which the fertility of the Soil thrusts forth, whenever the Natives remove their Tillage to some other place, and leave the Earth to its own production; and in other parts they found plenty of Garden Herbs growing wild. The low and Moorish Grounds are for the most part overgrown with Sedge and Reeds, and such other Trash, which usually incumbers rich and uncultivated Lands; those they call Swamsas, which with a little Husbandry would prove very good Meadows. There are also some large and pleasant Savanas, or grassy Plains.

These are a part of the Trees and Plants best known to us, that Nature of her self produces, in a Soil which contrives and nourishes any thing. The English who are now Planted in the most Northern parts of it, at Albemarle, bordering on Virginia, have Apples, Pears, Cherries, Apricocks, Plumbs, and Water-Melons, equalling, and if you will believe the Inhabitants, both in largeness of size and goodness of taste, exceeding any in Europe. And they who are Setled farther South on Ashley River, have found that the Oranges, Lemmons, Pomegranates, Limes, Pomecitrons, &c. which they Planted there, have thriven beyond expectation; and there is nothing which they have put into the Earth, that through any defect in the Soil, hath fail’d to prosper.

Commodities of the Countrey.

Besides those things which do serve to satisfie Hunger, or provoke it, the Land doth with great return produce Indigo, Ginger, Tobacco, Cotton, and other Commodities fit to send abroad and furnish foreign Markets; and when a little time shall have brought those kind of Plants to maturity, and given the Inhabitants leisure to furnish themselves with Conveniences for ordering those things aright, the Trials that they have already made of the Soil and its fitness for such Plantations, assure you, that besides Silk, enough to store Europe, and a great many other considerable Commodities, they shall have as great plenty of good Wine and Oyl, as any part of the World.

The Mould is generally black, mellow, and upon handling feels soft, and (to use their Expression who have been there) soapy, and is generally all over the Countrey just like the fine Mould of our well order’d Gardens. Under this black Earth, which is of a good thickness in most places that they have try’d, there lies a Bed of Marle, and in some parts Clay.

Fish and Water-Fowl.

The Rivers are stor’d with plenty of excellent Fish of several sorts, which are taken with great ease in abundance, and are one great part of the Natives Provision, who are never like to want this Recruit, in a Countrey so abounding in large Rivers, there being in that one small Tract between Port Rasal and Cape Carteret, which are not one Degree distant, five or six great Navigable Rivers, that empty themselves into the Sea. These Rivers are also cover’d with Flocks of Ducks and Mallard, whereof millions are seen together, besides Cranes, Herons, Geese, Curlews, and other Water-Fowl, who are so easie to be kill’d, that onely rising at the discharge and noise of a Gun, they instantly light again in the same place, and presently offer a fresh Mark to the Fowler. At the Mouths of the Rivers, and along the Sea-Coast, are Beds of Oysters, which are of a longer Make than those in Europe, but very well tasted, wherein are often found good large Pearls, which though the unskilful Indians by washing the Oysters do commonly discolour, and spoil their lustre, yet ’tis not to be doubted, but if rightly order’d, there will be found many of value, and the Fishing for them turn to some account.

Besides the easie Provisions which the Rivers and Sea afford, their Woods are well stock’d with Deer, Rabbets, Hares, Turtle-Doves, Phesants, Partridges, and an infinite number of Wood-Pigeons and wild Turkies, which are the ordinary Dishes of the Indians, whose House-keeping depends on their Fishing and Hunting, and who have found it no ill way of Living in so fertile a Countrey, to trust themselves without any labor or forecast, to the Supplies which are there provided to their hands, without the continual trouble of Tillage and Husbandry. Besides, these Woods are fill’d with innumerable variety of smaller Birds, as different in their Notes as Kinds.

Temperature of the Climate.

The Temperature of this Province is agreeable to a Countrey, whose Position is on the warmer side of the temperate Zone, but yet the Heat is not so sultry nor offensive, as in Places under the same Latitude in the Old World; to which moderation of Heat, as well as the healthiness of it, the vast Atlantick Ocean, lying to the East and South of it, may perhaps not a little contribute, an instance whereof some think China to be; to which deservedly admir’d Countrey Carolina exactly answers in its Position and Latitude, the trending from North-East to South-West of its Coast, and the lowness of its Shore, and wants nothing but Inhabitants, to make it equal, if not excell, in all conveniences of Life, as it doth in richness of Soil, that flourishing Empire. The healthiness of the Air is such, that it is not onely benign and favorable to the home-bred Indians, and Constitutions accustom’d to it, but the English-men who first Planted on Ashley River, though for some other Conveniences they Planted on the side, or almost middle of a Morass, and were encompass’d with a salt Marsh, where the Air, pent up with Woods that surrounded them, had not that freedom it hath in open and cultivated Countreys, yet lost not in a whole years time, of a considerable number, any one Person, of any Disease to be imputed to the Countrey, those few that dy’d in that time sinking under lingring Distempers which they brought with them, and had almost worn them out before they came thither. The Bermudians (who being accustom’d to the pure Air of their own Island, cannot without hazard of their Lives put themselves into any other Place) assur’d of the healthiness of this Place, which is the next Land to them, and under the same Latitude, venture hither. And generally all the English Planting in the West-Indies, are so taken with the Conveniences of this Countrey, which, as some of the most considerable of the English in those Parts say of it, promises all that the Heart of Man can wish, that they send the overplus of their People hither; to which the Inhabitants of Barbados, a skilful and wary sort of Planters, well knowing in all the parts of the West-Indies, have been found to remove the Hands they could spare. As the Summer is not intolerably nor offensively hot, so the Winter is not troublesom nor pinching, but enough to correct the Humors of Mens Bodies, the better to strengthen them, and preserve their Healths, and so far to check the growth of Plants, that by this stop they may put out more regularly, and the Corn and other Fruits the better ripen together, and be ready seasonably at the Harvest, the want whereof in some Countreys hinders the beneficial Growth of several valuable Commodities, the continual Spring all the year long making that their Crops are never ready, their Trees being laden with green and ripe Fruit at the same time, which is to be seen in the Vines growing between the Tropicks, where, though they bear excellent Grapes, yet they cannot make any Wine, whilest the mixture of ripe and sowre Grapes upon the same Branch, renders them unfit for the Press, which from Grapes so blended, though of a good kind, would squeeze out a very crude and useless Liquor. This also is the reason why many Parts where our Wheat will grow very well, do yet lose the benefit of it, whilest the several Ears ripening unequally, never make the Crop fit for the Sickle. But this Countrey hath Winter enough to remove that Inconvenience, and to put such a stop to the Rise of the Sap, and the Budding of Plants, as to make the several kinds of Fruits Bud and Blossom in their distinct Seasons, and keep even pace till they are fit to be gather’d.

Nature, Constitutions, and Manners of the Inhabitants.

To this happy Climate the native Inhabitants are very well suited, a strong, lusty, and well shap’d People, who to their well knit and active Bodies, want not stout and vigorous Minds; they are a People of a good Understanding, well Humor’d, and generally so just and Honest, that they may seem to have no notice of, as their Language hath no word for, Dishonesty and Cheating; and the worst Name they have for ill Men is, that they are not good. They are a stout and valiant People, which appears in the constant Wars they are engag’d in, not out of covetousness, and a desire of usurping others Possessions, or to enrich themselves by the Spoils of their Neighbors, but upon a pitch of Honor, and for the glory of Victory, which is their greatest joy, there being no parts of their Lives wherein they enjoy so much satisfaction, and give themselves so wholly to Jollity, as in their Triumphs after Victory. Valor therefore is the Vertue they most esteem and reward, and he which hath behav’d himself well in the Wars, is suffer’d to wear the Badges of Honor, and is advanc’d beyond others with some Marks of his Courage; which amongst some is blacking the Skin below his Eyes with black Lead, in fashion something of an Half-Moon; which Mark of Courage is not suffer’d to be worn by any, but those who by some brave Action, as killing the Enemy’s Leader, &c. hath signaliz’d himself in their Encounters. They are faithful to their Promises, fair and candid in their Dealings, and so far from Dishonesty, that they want even the Seeds of it, viz. Forecast and Covetousness; and he will be very little apt to deceive you to Day, who troubles not himself much about to Morrow, and trusts for the Provisions of the Day to the Day it self; which proceeds not in them for want of Wit, but desire of Content and Quiet, or by the help of their natural Reason they enjoy that Happiness which the Philosophers could not by their Study and Reading attain to, whilest these Men cut off those Desires which Learning could never help the other to Govern; and which if once permitted to run out beyond the present, are capable of no Rest nor Bounds. In their Conversation they are courteous and civil, and in their Visits make Presents to one another; when they meet, their way of Salutation is stroaking on the Shoulders, and sucking in their Breath; and if he be a great Man whom they Salute, they stroak his Thighs too; as civil an Address, as those Patterns of good Breeding, the Hero’s, us’d to their Princes, who in their greatest Courtships, we are told, embrac’d their Knees: After their Salutation they sit down; and it is usual with them to sit still almost a quarter of an hour before they speak, which is not an effect of stupidity or sullenness, but the accustom’d Gravity of their Countrey; for they are in their Tempers a merry, frollick, gay People, and so given to Jollity, that they will Dance whole Nights together, the Women sitting by and Singing, whilest the Men Dance to their Ayrs, which though not like ours, are not harsh or unpleasing, but are something like the Tunes of the Irish: So that if we will not let our selves too fondly admire onely the Customs we have been bred up in, nor think Men are to be valu’d for making Legs after our Mode, or the Clothes they wear, which, the finer and gayer they are, always the more to be suspected of Luxury and Effeminateness; if we will allow but these Men to follow the Garbs of their own Countrey, and think them fine enough in a shape onely to hide their Nakedness before, or a Deer-skin hanging loosely on their Shoulders, and their Women not ill Dress’d in Garments of Moss, and Necklaces of Beads, whilest the Fashion of their Courts require no other Ornaments; if, I say, a long and pleasant Life, without Distemper or Care, be to be valu’d, without the incumbrance of unnecessary Trinkets; if Men are to be esteem’d for Valor, Honesty, Friendship, Humanity and good Nature, though Strangers to the ceremonious Troubles we are accustom’d to, the Natives of Carolina will as little, or perhaps less, deserve the Name of Miserable, or Salvage, as those that give it them. ’Tis true, the French and Spaniards who have Planted amongst them, or with little Armies travell’d their Countrey, have been ill handled by them; but yet the Indians never did them any harm, or treated them otherwise than Friends, till those Europeans by their breach of Faith and several Outrages, had provok’d their just Revenge; and they did nothing but what most virtuous and generous sort of Men are apt to do, to revenge those Affronts, which did not agree with their Tempers tamely to endure. That this did not proceed from treachery and inconstancy in their Natures, is apparent in the contrary Correspondence they have had with the English Setled amongst them, to whom they have been all along very kind, as they were at first very covetous of their Company; for after that some of their King’s Relation had been at Barbados, and had seen and admir’d the Temper, Fashions and Strength of the English there, and had been very civilly Treated in that Island, they were so well satisfi’d with them, that at the coming of the English to Settle there, the several little Kingdoms strove with all the Arts and Arguments they could use, each of them to draw the English to Plant in their Dominions, by commending the richness of their Soil, conveniency of their Rivers, the healthiness of their Countrey, the disparagement of their Neighbors, and whatever else they judg’d might allure the English to their Neighborhood. Nor was this onely the first heat of Men fond of Novelties, and as soon weary of them again, but ever since the English first Planted at Albemarle Point, on Ashley River, they have continu’d to do them all manner of friendly Offices, ready on all occasions to supply them with any thing they have observ’d them to want, not making use of our Mens Necessities, as an opportunity to enhance the Price of their Commodities, a sort of fair Dealing we could scarce have promis’d them amongst civiliz’d, well bred, and religious Inhabitants of any part of Europe; and though they are much frighted with our Guns, both small and great, yet like innocent and well-meaning People, they do not at all distrust our Power, but freely, without suspicion, trust themselves, both Men and Women, even their Kings themselves, in our Town, Lodging and Dancing there frequently whole Nights together, upon no other Pledges but the bare confidence of our mutual Friendship; nor do our Men use any greater caution in Conversing with them, stragling up and down, and travelling singly and unarm’d through their Woods for many Miles about, and are so far from receiving any injury or ill treatment from them, that on the contrary they are kindly us’d and Entertain’d, and guided by them in their Way whenever they desire it; and when any of our Men meet them in their Walks, the Indians all stand still till they are gone by, civilly Saluting them as they pass. Nor doth this Assurance of theirs bound it self within their own Homes, they of their own accords venturing themselves aboard our Ships, have gone voluntarily with our Men to Virginia and Barbados. Nor have the English been wanting on their parts in any thing that may preserve this Amity, being very cautious of doing them any injury, bartering with them for those things they receive of them, and buying of them even the waste Land they make no use of.

Besides the simplicity of the Indians Diet, it is very remarkable, that they have a general aversion to those two things which are most acceptable to our Palates, and without which few of us either eat or drink with any delight; for in their Meats they cannot endure the least mixture or rellish of Salt; and for their Drink, they utterly abominate all manner of strong Liquor; to the latter whereof, their large Growth and constant Health, is perhaps not a little owing.

Their manner of Government.

Every little Town is a distinct Principality, Govern’d by an Hereditary King, who in some places is not Son, but Sisters Son to the precedent King, the Succession of the Blood-Royal being continu’d by the safer side. The great Business of those Princes is to lead their Men out against their Enemies in War, or against the Beasts in Hunting; for unless it be to appoint them where to Hunt, or else to Consult about making some Attempt upon their Enemy, he hath but small trouble in the Government of his Subjects, who either through their own Honesty, or the few occasions they have for Controversies in their extempore way of Living, need few Laws, and little Severity to keep them in order; but yet they Govern their People without Contract, and fail not of a ready Obedience to their Commands; so that when some of them have bought things of such of the English, who by the Orders made amongst our selves were not to Traffick with the Indians, they have, upon Complaint made to their Casiques, been restor’d again, though in strict Rules of Law they were neither bound by, nor oblig’d to take notice of the Rules which were made onely to Govern our own People, and had at just Prices bought what they carry’d away; such is the Honesty of Men, whose Principles not being corrupted with Learning and Distinction, are contented to follow the Dictates of right Reason, which Nature has sufficiently taught all Men for the well ordering of their Actions, and enjoyment and preservation of humane Society, who do not give themselves up to be amus’d and deceiv’d by insignificant Terms, and minding what is just and right, seek not Evasions in the Niceties and Fallacies of Words.

Carolina granted by Patent to several Noble Persons by His Majesty.

The same is to be said of the first Discovery of this Countrey, as hath been formerly said of Virginia and Florida, of both which it partakes; but as to the present Interest and Propriety, the English, besides all Virginia intirely, have also so much of Florida as makes up this considerable Province of Carolina, which soon after the happy Restauration of His present Majesty King Charles II. from whom it receives Denomination, was granted by Patent to Edward Earl of Clarendon, L. Chancellor of England, George Duke of Albemarle, William Earl of Craven, John Lord Berkley, Anthony Lord Ashley, Sir George Carteret, Vice-Chamberlain of His Majesty’s Houshold, Sir William Berkley, Knight and Baronet, and Sir John Colleton, Knight and Baronet.

Their care for Setling and Improving of this Plantation.

The Lords-Proprietors of this Countrey, for the better Settlement of it according to their Patent granted unto them by His Majesty, and for the enlargement of the King’s Dominions in those parts of America, have been at great Charge to secure this so rich and advantageous a Countrey to the Crown of England, to whom of ancient Right, by the Discovery of Sir Sebastian Cabott in the time of Henry the Seventh, it doth belong, and for its Situation, Fertility, Neighborhood to our other Plantations and several other Conveniences, of too valuable consideration to be negligently lost: By the Care therefore and Endeavors of those Great Men, it hath now two considerable Colonies Planted in it, the one of Albemarle, on the North side, bordering on Virginia, where are some hundreds of English Families remov’d thither from New England, and some of our other Plantations in the West-Indies; and another towards the middle of the Countrey, at Charles-Town, or Ashley-River, a Settlement so hopeful, for the healthiness of the Land, and convenience of access by a large deep Navigable River, and so promising in its very Infancy, that many of the rich Inhabitants of Barbados and Bermudas, who are now crowded up in those flourishing Islands, and many in our other American Plantations, are turning their Eyes and Thoughts this way, and have already remov’d part of their Stock and Servants thither. Nor is it to be doubted, but that many, following the Example of those who went to Albemarle, will be drawn to this better Plantation at Ashley-River, from New-England, where the heat of their Zeal, and the coldness of the Air, doth not agree with every Man’s Constitution; and therefore it is to be thought, that many well temper’d Men, who are not much at ease under such Extreams, will be forward to remove hither.

Fair Terms propos’d to whomsoever shall remove thither.

The Lords-Proprietors, for the comfortable subsistence, and future enrichment of all those who shall this Year 1671. Transport themselves and Servants thither, allow every Man a hundred Acres per Head, for himself, his Wife, Children and Servants, he carries thither, to him and his Heirs for ever, paying onely one Peny an Acre, as a Chief-Rent; which Peny an Acre is not to be paid these nineteen years; and those Servants who go along thither with their Masters, shall each also have a hundred Acres upon the same Terms, when he is out of his Time. But though these Conditions are very advantageous, and the Countrey promises to the Planter Health, Plenty and Riches at a cheap Rate, yet there is one thing that makes this Plantation more valuable than all these, and that is the secure possession of all these things with as great certainty as the state of humane Affairs, and the transient things of this Life are capable of, in a well continu’d Form of Government, wherein it is made every Man’s Interest to preserve the Rights of his Neighbor with his own; and those who have the greatest Power, have it limited to the Service of the Countrey, the Good and Welfare whereof whilest they preserve and promote, they cannot miss of their own, the Lords Proprietors having no other aim, than to be the greatest Men in a Countrey where every one may be happy if it be not his own fault, it being almost as uncomfortable, and much more unsafe, to be Lord over, than Companion of a miserable, unhappy, and discontented Society of Men.

With this Design the Lords-Proprietors, who are at great Charge for carrying on this Plantation, have put the framing of a Government into the Hands of one, whose Parts and Experience in Affairs of State are universally agreed on, and who is by all Men allow’d to know what is convenient for the right ordering Men in Society, and setling a Government upon such Foundations, as may be equal, safe, and lasting; and to this hath a Soul large enough to wish well to Mankind, and to desire, that all the People where he hath to do might be happy. My Lord Ashley therefore, by the consent of his Brethren, the rest of the Lords Proprietors, hath drawn up, to their general satisfaction, some fundamental Constitutions, which are since, by their joynt approbation, confirm’d to be the Model and Form of Government in the Province of Carolina; the main Design and Ballance thereof (according to the best of my memory, having had a Copy thereof) in short is as followeth:

The Model drawn up by the Lord Ashley for the Government of Carolina.

1. Every County is to consist of forty square Plots, each containing twelve thousand Acres. Of these square Plots each of the Proprietors is to have one, which is to be call’d a Signiory. Eight of these square Plots are to be divided amongst the three Noble-men of that County, viz. a Landgrave, who is to have four of them; and two Casiques, who are to have each of them two apiece; and these square Plots belonging to the Nobility, are to be call’d Baronies. The other twenty four square Plots, call’d Colonies, are to be the Possession of the People: And this Method is to be observ’d in the Planting and Setting out of the whole Countrey; so that one Fifth of the Land is to be in the Proprietors, one Fifth in the Nobility, and three Fifths in the People.

2. The Signories and Baronies, that is, the hereditary Lands belonging to the Proprietors and Nobility, are all entirely to descend to their Heirs, with the Dignity, without power of alienation, more than for three Lives, or one and twenty years, or two Thirds of their Signiories and Baronies, and the rest to be Demesne.

3. There will be also some Mannors in the Colonies, but none less than three thousand Acres in a Piece, which, like the rest of the Colony Lands, will be alienable, onely with this difference, that it cannot be parcell’d out, but if sold, it must be altogether.

4. There is to be a Biennial Parliament, consisting of the eight Proprietors, the Landgraves and Casiques, and one out of every Precinct, that is the six neighboring Colonies, for the People, chosen by the Freeholders; these are to sit and Vote altogether for the making of Laws, which shall be in force no longer than sixty years after their Enacting, the great mischief of most Governments, by which not onely the People are mightily entangled by multiplicity of Rules and Penalties, and thereby laid open to the Malice and Designs of troublesom Men and cunning Projectors; but, which is far worse, the whole frame of the Government in tract of time comes to be remov’d from its original Foundation, and thereby becomes more weak and tottering.

5. There are eight supream Courts for the dispatch of all publick Affairs; the first consists of the Palatine, who is the eldest of the Proprietors, and hath power to call Parliaments, and dispose of publick Offices. The other seven supream Courts are, 1. The chief Justices for the determining of Controversies of Meum and Tuum, and judging of Criminals. 2. The Chancellors, for passing of Charters, and managing the State Matters of the Province. 3. The High-Constables, for Military Affairs. 4. The Admirals, for Maritime Affairs. 5. The High-Stewards, for Trade. 6. The Treasurers, for the publick Stock; and 7. The Chamberlains, for Ceremonies, Fashions, Marriages, Burials, &c. These are the seven supream Courts, to whom lies the ultimate Appeal in all Causes belonging to them. Each of these Courts consists of one Proprietor, and six other Councellors, whereof two are chosen by the Nobility, and two by the People. All the number of these eight Courts joyn’d together make the Grand Council, which are in the nature of a Council of State, and are entrusted with the management of Affairs of greatest concernment. There is also in every County a Court, and in every Precinct another; from the Precinct Court there lies an Appeal to the County Court, and from the County Court to the Proprietors Court, to which the Matter in question belongs, and there is the last decision and determination thereof, without any farther Appeal. And to keep the People from the Charges and vexation of long Suits, to the enriching of Men cunning in Words, care is taken, that no Cause shall be Try’d more than once in any one Court, and that profess’d Pleaders for Money shall not be allow’d.

Liberty of Conscience is here also allow’d in the greatest latitude, but yet so, that neither Atheists, or Men of no Religion, are permitted; Atheism, Irreligion, and vicious Lives being condemn’d, as disagreeable to humane Nature, inconsistent with Government and Societies, and destructive to all that is useful to, or becoming of Mankind; as on the other hand, rigorous Imposing of, and hot Contentions about the Ceremonies and Circumstances of Religion, is an occasion of perpetual Strife, Faction and Division, keeps Men from sedate and temperate Enquiries after Truth, eats out the great Cement of humane Conversation, Charity, and cannot be found in any one, who hath but modesty enough to think himself less than a Pope, and short of Infallibility.

There is also to be a Register of all Grants and Conveyances of Land, to prevent even the occasions of Controversies and Law-Suits.

There are several other less considerable Particulars in this Government, all contriv’d and design’d for the good and welfare of the People; all which are so well put together, and in such equal proportion ballance each other, that some judicious Men who have seen it, say, it is the best and fairest Frame, for the well-being of those who shall live under it, of any they have seen or read of.

CHAP. III.
Florida.

Situation and Bounds.

South-West of Virginia lieth the spacious Countrey of Florida, remarkable hitherto rather by the great pains which the Spaniards have taken, and the ill Successes they have met with in the discovery and search of this Province, than by any thing else they have discover’d in it answerable to their desires. On the East it hath the Atlantick Ocean, or Mare del Nordt; on the South, and South-West, the Gulph of Mexico and Mare Virginium; and full West, part of New Gallicia, and some other Countreys, not yet perfectly known.

Ponce’s Expedition.

Water to make old People look young.

This Countrey is also one of those, said to have been first of all discover’d by Sir Sebastian Cabot, at the Charges of the King of England, about the Year 1497. but afterwards more throughly search’d into by John Ponce de Leon, a Spaniard, who in the Year 1512. set Sail with three Ships out of the Haven St. German in Porto Rico, North-West to the Isles Del Veio, Caycos, Yaguna, Amaguyao, Manegua, and Guanahani, first discover’d by Christopher Colonus, and call’d St. Salvador: After that Steer’d North-West by a Coast, which (because of its pleasant prospect) was call’d Florida or (according to the more common Opinion) because it was on Palm-Sunday, which the Spaniards call Pascha de Flores, (or Pascha Florida) that he Landed here: And to find out a Haven he kept sight of the Shore, which appear’d South-West from him. Here the Ships met with so strong a Tide, that notwithstanding they had a fresh Gale of Wind, yet could they not stem it; one of the Ships was driven to Sea out of sight; the other two casting Anchor, which raking, drove toward the Shore; whither, being beckned by the Indians, they immediately went; when no sooner he Landed, but they ran in great Companies to make themselves Masters of the Vessels, kill’d one Spaniard, and wounded two more: the Night approaching put an end to the Fight. From hence Sailing to the River La Cruix for Wood and Water, they were resisted by sixty Natives, which they put to flight with their Guns, and took one Prisoner; after which they erected a Stone Cross. The Promontory, by which glides the strong Current, lies in twenty Degrees North-Latitude, and call’d Cabo de Corrientes, as the Row of Isles, before the Main Land Los Martyres, because the Cliffs at a distance appear like Men standing on Poles. Lastly, after some small Encounters with the Floridans, Ponce return’d home, being onely inform’d falsly by the Indians, that in Florida was a River, and on the Isle Bimini a Fountain, whose Waters made old People young.

Vasquez’s Expedition to Florida.

Habit of a Floridan King.

But after this Florida remained not unvisited; for eight years after the foremention’d Voyage, Lucas Vasquez de Aylom weighed Anchor with two Ships from Hispaniola, to fetch Slaves from the adjacent Isles for the Gold-Mines, which Labor the Natives were not able to perform: therefore steering his Course Northwardly, he Sail’d along the Coast of Chicoa and Gualdape, by them call’d Cabo de St. Helena, and Rio Jordan, where the Natives look’d upon the Ships as Sea-Monsters, and seeing Bearded Men in them, fled: the Spaniards pursuing them, overtook one Man and a Woman; who being well Entertain’d, and Clad in Spanish Habits, made the Strangers so acceptable to their Countrey-men, that their King sent fifty Men Aboard of them with Provisions, and to invite the Sea-men to his Dominions. The King sat with a great Cloth about him, made fast on his Shoulders, covering his Belly, Breast and Back with the Lappet thereof, and being long, was held up by one of his Servants; over one of his Shoulders hung a String of Pearl that came three times about, and reach’d down to his Thighs; on his Head he wore a Cap full of Ribbonds; his Arms and Legs were also surrounded with a double Chain of Pearl; in his right Hand he held a very rich Staff: But the Queen went almost naked, onely a piece of a wild Beasts Skin hung down before her from her left Shoulder to her mid-Leg, and a double String of Pearl about her Neck hung down between her Breasts, and her Hair Comb’d behind reach’d down to the Calves of her Legs; about her Wrists and Ancles hung also Strings of Pearl.

Treachery of Vasquez.

Indians misused.

On the King’s Command, the Spaniards were permitted to make inspection into the Countrey, in which they were every where courteously Entertain’d, and not without Gold and Silver Presents. Returning Aboard, Vasquez invited the Indians to go with him, under pretence of returning them thanks for the Favours which they had bestowed upon him; but no sooner had he gotten a considerable number in his Ships, but he set Sail, and losing one Ship, arriv’d with the other safe at Hispaniola with a few Indians, for most of them with grief and hunger died at Sea, and those that remain’d alive, liv’d on dead Carrion.

Vasquez defeated by the Floridans.

Some few years after, Vasquez receiving Letters Patent from the Court of Spain for the Government of Florida, fitted out a Ship thither in 1620. which brought a good Return of Gold, Silver, and Pearls; whereupon he himself went not long after, and coming into the River Jordan, lost one of his Ships, which proved not the worst Accident; for Landing two hundred Men, they were all of them either slain or wounded by the Inhabitants; so that Vasquez was forc’d to sound a Retreat: And after that the Spaniards were less willingly drawn to that Coast, and the rather, because the Inhabitants seem’d poor, and had little Gold but what they procur’d from the Otapales and Olugatono’s, sixty Leagues Northward up in the Countrey.

Narvaez his Expedition.

Strange Booty.

He is in great extremity.

Cabeca is Stranded.

His strange Entertainment at Malhado.

Notwithstanding these unsuccessful Expeditions, Pamphilus Narvaez retain’d so much Courage, that obtaining Letters Patents from the Emperor Charles the Fifth, he fitted out four Sail and a Brigantine, weigh’d Anchor from Cuba with six hundred Men and eighty Horse, in the Year 1528. On Florida he Landed three hundred Foot and forty two Horse; they found many empty Huts, but in a great House a golden Bell hid amongst the Nets, Chests full of Merchandise, and in each a dead Body cover’d with Beast Skins, and painted; Pieces of Linnen Cloth, and Wedges of Gold, which they had from the remote Countrey Apalache. Narvaez, though against the Opinion of Nunnez Cabeca, march’d up into the Countrey, whilst the Fleet was to stand along the Shore, and travelling fifteen days saw neither House nor Man, onely here and there some Palmito-Trees: Crossing a River on Floats, they were Encountred by two hundred of the Natives; of which the Spaniards, having routed them, took six Prisoners, who furnish’d them plentifully with Indian Wheat. After this they march’d fifteen days farther, without discerning the least foot-step of a Man; but at last they met an Indian Lord with a considerable Train, before whom march’d several Pipers: being told by Narvaez that his Journey was for Apalache, he conducted the Spaniards with a Canoo over a River, and Landing again, walk’d with them to his Village, where he Entertain’d them with great civility. Narvaez, after a long and troublesom Journey, came at last in sight of Apalache, a Village which contained two hundred and forty Straw Houses, built between the Mountains on a Moorish Soyl, full of Nut, Pine, and Savine-Trees, Oaks, Laurel, and short Palmito’s, besides the Trees, which blown down in several places by a strong Wind from between the Hills, and lying cross, cumber the High-ways: There are many deep Pools, and also Bears, Lyons, and other ravenous Creatures, which make the Ways very dangerous. Narvaez falling suddenly on the Village, took the Casique Prisoner, as also store of Wheat, Mortars to pound it, Hides, and Thred-spun Cloaks. Here he rested twenty five days, during which time some of his Men Journey’d farther into the Countrey, yet found none but poor People, troublesom Ways, and an unfruitful Soyl: twice they were set upon by the Natives, who kill’d some of the Horses and Men: They being a very strong People run stark naked, and as swift as a Deer, Diving under Water from the Spaniards Bullets; which not a little amazing Narvaez, he thought it convenient to set upon the Village Aute, lying on the Shore: Nine days he was in a miserable condition before he got any Wheat, Pease, or other Provisions from this Village; the getting whereof cost him very dear, for the Villagers behav’d themselves so valiantly, that they kill’d many Spaniards, and some of their Horses, which since they left the Haven of St. Cruce had travell’d two hundred and eighty Leagues; so that being tir’d and out of heart, they could not carry the Sick and Wounded, who not able to go, fell down dead in the Way: whereupon it was judg’d convenient to make five Barques, in which they made their Shirts serve for Sails, the Horses Tails and Mayns for Ropes, their Skins to hold fresh Water; with which putting out to Sea, they saw no Land in seven days; and running through the Straights of St. Miguell, Steer’d along the Coast of Rio del Palmes; where they suffer’d great Drought, insomuch that some drinking salt Water, died thereof: at last Landing, they were in the Night set upon by a Casique, who having given Narvaez a great Wound in the Face, fled, leaving behind him a Sable Cloak, scented with Amber; three days they rang’d again along the Sea-shore, when the Barque of Nunnez Cabeca being behind, was by Storm driven on the Shore, where a hundred Indians waited to cut them off, but were pacifi’d with some Trifles: Thus being bereav’d of Arms, Provision, and all manner of Necessaries, they found themselves on an Isle, by the Inhabitants call’d Malhado, where they were lodg’d and maintain’d so long as they had any thing left; but Famine grew at last to such a heighth, that they devour’d one another, and in a short time of eighty Men there remain’d onely four alive, viz. Nunnez Cabeca, Castillo, Orantes, and Estevanico, who at last by Land reach’d to New Gallicia, and soon after to Mexico, having escap’d a thousand Dangers. Of Pamphilus Narvaez never any tydings being heard, it is suppos’d he was drown’d.

Sottus’s Expedition very remarkable.

Strange dealing of the Cofachiquians.

A Maid Governs the Countrey.

Great Treasure of Pearls.

Great Tempest.

Sottus’s farther Journey very remarkable.

The City Mavilla.

Cruel Fight.

Sottus dies.

Strange Fight.

After this miserable Adventure, the Business of Florida lay dead for eleven years, till Ferdinandus Sottus, chosen Governor of Cuba, obtain’d so much of the Emperor Charles the Fifth, that he ventur’d one Expedition more for Florida: Besides Seamen he carried five hundred Foot, and three hundred and fifty Horse; with which Landing in the Bay Del Espirito Santo, he march’d against the Casique Vitacucho, whom he took Prisoner, with a thousand of the Natives, whom he either put to the Sword, or caus’d them to be torn in pieces by Dogs; and staying all the Winter in Apalache, fortifi’d that place, and furnish’d himself with Provisions; he was inform’d, that thirteen days Journey from thence lay the Kingdom of Cofachiqui, abounding with Gold, Silver, and Pearls, which made every one of the Spaniards very desirous to go thither, notwithstanding the Way was very dangerous; for the valiant Floridans lying in Ambuscade in the Corn-Fields, wounded and kill’d many of them by Shooting from thence. Sottus, so soon as March approached, set forward on his Way. In the poor Province of Achalaqui he found a few young People, and the old most of them blind. From Cofachiqui he was follow’d by four thousand Natives, who carried the Spaniards Luggage, and serv’d them as Guides through Woods and Wildernesses. The seventh day they stopp’d at a great River, whither Sottus sent four Companies to seek out a Passage over, whereof three return’d without any effect, but the fourth, Commanded by Captain Annasio, and a Colonel of a thousand Cofachiquians, came to a Village built along the River; in which they made a miserable Rout, killing all they lighted on, and hanging the Sculls of the Dead by their sides: this done, they march’d back. Sottus at last espying a Village on the other side of the River, beckned to the Natives to come over to him; whereupon six came immediately; who understanding that he desir’d their friendly Assistance and Trade, promis’d to acquaint their Governess, being a young Maiden: who soon after came over to Sottus, and presented him with a String of Pearl: he complain’d to her for Provisions, which she promis’d in part to store him with. Crossing the River he found a brave Countrey, where were Pearls as big as gray Pease, Copper of a golden colour, but no Gold. Out of the Tombs of their Princes the Spanish Officers, with the leave of the fore-mention’d Maid their Governess, got an incredible Treasure in Pearls. In the Village Tolomeco they did the like. But here their Provisions growing scarce, the Army was divided into two Bodies, Balthasar de Gallegos leading one, and Sottus the other; yet the Design of them both was on the Province of Chalaque; whither marching, they were surpris’d by such a violent Storm, that few would have been left to relate their Adventures, had not the Trees bore it off from them; for it not onely Thundred and Lightned as if Heaven and Earth would have met, but also Hail-stones fell down as big as Eggs, which beat down the Boughs of Trees. In the pleasant Valley Xualu, belonging to the Kingdom of Cofachiqui, they rested fifteen days, and then march’d through Countreys of Guaxale, Acostes, and Coza, where above a thousand Indians, adorn’d with Plumes of Feathers and rich Furr Cloaks, came to meet and welcom them, and to desire them from the Casique to stay there all the Winter; but Sottus resolving to go to the Haven Achusi, refus’d the same. After this he view’d Talisse, fortifi’d with woodden and earthen Bulwarks; where the Casique Tascalusa, a Man as big again as an ordinary Spaniard, receiv’d Sottus with great civility, and conducted him to Mavilla, lying in a pleasant place. The City, surrounded with double Pallisado’s, fill’d up with Earth between, (where also at eighty Paces distant from one another, stands a Tower to contain eighty Soldiers) hath two Gates, eighty Houses, in every one of which dwell a thousand Men, and a large Market-place in the middle; where whilst the Spaniards were in the midst of their Mirth, they on a sudden heard a great cry of Arms; the first Assault was made by seven thousand, which still increased by fresh Supplies; but the Spaniards at last setting the City on fire, broke through them, and left above eleven thousand slain, either by the Smoak and Flame, or by their Bullets, Swords, Horses Heels and Dogs; the Spaniards also lost eighty three Men and forty three Horses. Thence going to Chicora they were stopt by the Natives before a deep River with high Banks, which at last crossing, not without great trouble and blood-shedding, they Winter’d in the Village Chicora, where the Inhabitants let them rest very quietly for two Moneths; at the end of which, joyning together in the Night, they shot fire into the Straw Roofs, and maintain’d a Fight of two hours long, in which the Spaniards lost forty Men, fifty Horses, and all their Hogs, which were burnt in the Houses. From thence going to Chicacolla they were resisted in most places, and in the Fort Alibamo Engag’d by four thousand Floridans, who waited for their coming; but those were so shrewdly handled, that half of them were slain, and Sottus became Master of the Fort, as also of Chisca, which he Storm’d and took unawares. With no less trouble and danger did he get over the River El Grande, where he discover’d a Village that contain’d above four hundred Houses, and many delightful Fruit-Trees. The Casique Casquin, maintain’d the Spanish Army six days in this place, and taking five thousand of his Subjects, march’d with them to Capaha, which hath a deep and broad Moat on three sides thereof: the fourth was fortifi’d with strong Pallisado’s, through which the Spaniards breaking, made way for Casquin, who put all to the Sword, the Governor onely escaping in a Canoo to a neighboring Isle. The Entrance being thus taken by the Spaniards, Casquin return’d home. After which Sottus concluded a Peace with Capahaes the Governor, and took up his Quarters in the Village Vitangue, where he receiv’d continual Sallies; but taking fifteen Casiques Prisoners, threatned to burn them alive, unless they would procure them some Gold; yet not being able to get any, they had only their Hands cut off and were sent away. Moreover, Sottus help’d the Guachacoya’s, to ruine those of Anilco; which Design prov’d successful, yet not according to Sottus’s desire, for he found not the Gold-Mines which he expected, but spent in this five years Progress the great Treasure which he took out of Atibaliba’s Palace; and the Pearls which he got in Florida, for the Oysters being open’d against the Fire, and the Pearls drill’d through with a hot Iron, lost much of their lustre, neither would his People consent to build a City in the Haven Achusi. In the midst of these Transitions Sottus died of the Bloody-flux, and his Body was Interr’d in the River El Grande. After which his Successor Ludovicus de Alvarado had worse success, for half of the Army being wasted by the excessive heat, the rest resolv’d to desert Florida, utterly despairing to be ever able to resist the valiant Natives. In the Province of Auche they procur’d a Guide, whom, because he mis-led them in their Way, they caus’d to be torn in pieces by their Dogs: after which they march’d without a Guide through such bad Ways, that they lost a hundred of their Men and eighty Horses, besides many Floridans that carried their Luggage: At last coming to the River El Grande they conquer’d two Villages; which fortifying, they took up their Winter Quarters in them. But this being the fourteenth year, in which the River us’d generally to overflow and drown all the adjacent Countreys, on a sudden, to their great amazement, the Wood which they had gather’d for the building of Barques to carry them home, was wash’d away, their Provisions spoil’d, and their Habitations drown’d: and to this Inconvenience was added another yet greater; for the Governors round about rais’d all the Forces they could possibly, to revenge themselves on the Spaniards for their great oppression. But Alvarado being inform’d of this Design by the Casique Anilco, caus’d thirty of the Abettors of the Plot to have their Hands cut off. Not long after this the Spaniards set Sail, when a thousand Canoos that came to Engage them lay sixteen days amongst them, killing and wounding several of the Seamen, and sunk a Barque with forty eight Men, and also kill’d many Horses which were yet on the Shore; the Prisoners they took were strappado’d to death, and the Horses shot: yet some of them got safe from Panuco to Mexico.

Expedition of Ahumada and Samano.

These above-mention’d Expeditions to Florida, notwithstanding they fell out unfortunately, nevertheless by the permission of Philip the Second, King of Spain, Peter Ahumada and Julius Samano, with five Dominican Monks, made another Attempt, and Landed with several great Crosses, that thereby they might reduce the Floridans, whose Language they understood not, to their Faith: But they fearing treachery, resisted them, and kill’d the Monks with Clubs, flay’d them, and hung their Skins in their Temples.

The Expedition of Menendez.

Notwithstanding these and many worse Accidents that hapned, yet the Spanish King ventur’d once more, and sent Peter Menendez to Florida; whither he was follow’d by three Jesuits from Rome, viz. Peter Martinius, Joan Roger, and Francis Villaregius: The Master of the Ship in which they went being ignorant where he was, judg’d it convenient to Land; whereupon nine Netherlanders and four Spaniards, amongst which was Martinius, went ashore on Florida, whilst a Storm arising drove the Ship to Cuba; by which means those that were Landed were left in a miserable condition, having no Food but wild Herbs, on which they fed twelve days: so that this Expedition also came to nothing.

Voyage of Ribald and Laudoniere.

At last the French following the foot-steps of the Spaniards, John Ribald and Rene Laudoniere having Sail’d several times to Florida, discover’d several Coasts; but their Men were often set upon by the Spaniards, and cut off.

The Expedition of Dominicus Gurgius.

Valiant Exploit of Gurgius.

Anno 1567. Dominicus Gurgius set Sail thither with three Ships, which carried two hundred Soldiers and eighty Sea-men; with which entring the River Tacatucouru he Landed, and found a Youth call’d Peter du Bre, who escap’d when the Spaniards cruelly massacred the French in the Garrison Carolina; after which du Bre ranging up and down, at last serv’d Saturiona, Governor of Florida; whom deserting, and now meeting with the French his Countrey-men, he brought several Casiques to joyn with them against the Spaniards, whom they drove out of three Forts, which were all by the Command of Gurgius dismanteled.

City Augustine.

Florida is call’d by the Natives, Irquasa. The Spaniards have built two Forts on the same, the one erected on the Promontory Helena, is Consecrated to the Apostle Matthew. The City and the Fort Augustine lies near the River May. Both City and Fort stand on a Hill, which is pleasant and well set with Trees. Between the Foreland is a deep and wide Channel, which washes the City and Fort; it is eight-square, at each corner there stands a round Tower, in which the Soldiers keep Guard; the Countrey is water’d by two Rivers, which gliding between the Main and the Foreland, are great Safeguards to the Fort. The City is almost square, onely against the Fort it is much closer built than in any other place, and divided into four Streets. The Church stands without of the City, and before it the Augustine Cloyster.

Constitution of the Floridans.

Their strange Consultation.

Their Food in time of War.

Their Priests are Sorcerers.

Strange actions.

Cruelty on the conquer’d.

Remarkable Mourning for the Dead.

The Inhabitants of Florida are an Olive colour, tall, and without any deformity; their Skins generally painted, and their Bodies naked, onely a Deer’s Skin about their middle, their Hair long and black, hanging down to their Hams, but most of them tie it in a Knot on the top of their Heads; two small Boards cover their Breasts, and six lesser hang on their Arms, two Bells at each Ear, and a Cap on their Head, with a Feather: Their Quivers, which are always full of Arrows, sharpned with Fish Bones, hang by their Sides; In their left-Hand they hold a great Bowe, with which they go to War, the King walking before with a Club. They Consult daily about warlike Affairs in the King’s Palace, where he himself sits on a high Seat; the Grandees salute him first with their Hands lifted over their Head, crying Ha, He, Ya, at which the rest cry Ha, Ha; then every one sits down on a Stool round about the Room. If they have any Business of Consequence to debate, then the King sends for the ancientest Persons and Priests, call’d Jawas; this done, they give a Cup of Cassine (which is a hot Drink made of Herbs) to the King; after which every one drinks in order out of the same Cup. This Liquor occasions Sweat, quenches Thirst, and satisfies the Appetite for twenty four hours. When they March against their Enemies they live on Indian Wheat, Honey, smoak’d Fish, and divers sorts of wild Roots, amongst which they mix Sand and Cinders, to preserve them the longer. No sooner are the two Armies come within sight one of another, but the Kings of both Parties roll their Eyes about in their Heads, mutter something to themselves, and make strange Gestures and Exclamations; which is answer’d by a general Cry of the whole Army: then each King turning himself with great Reverence to the Sun, takes a woodden Platter with Water, which he throws over his Army so far as he is able, and begs of the Sun to grant him, that he may spill his Enemies Blood in like manner; then throws another Dish-full into the Fire, wishing that his Soldiers may thus Offer the Bodies of their Foes to the Flames; then step forth the Priests, who are always skill’d in the Art of Necromancy, and seating themselves on a Shield in the midst of the Army, draw a Circle, in which they make many strange Gestures, not without muttering to themselves, and seemingly say a Prayer of a quarter of an hour long; during which they deport themselves so strangely, that they rather seem to be Devils themselves, than Charmers of the Devil: They turn their Eyes quite round, and their Bodies as if without Joynts; at length being wearied they leap out of the Circle, and inform the King of the number and condition of the Enemies Army. Those whom they take Prisoners they flay alive, and drying their Skins at the Fire, tie them to long Poles, and carry them home as Trophies of their Victory, and afterwards set them up in some Field or spacious place, putting both Men and Women to watch them; then comes the Priest with a woodden Image, and utters Execrations against the slain Enemies; at a corner of the Fields kneel three Men, one of which striking with great force on a Stone, gives as many Blows as the Priest pronounces Curses, whilst the other two shake their Calabashes fill’d with Stones, and Sing many strange Songs: No sooner is this ended, but the Women whose Husbands are slain in the Battel, walking to the King, cover their Faces with their Hands, make many strange Gestures, and desire liberty to take what revenge they can, and licence also to Marry at the limited time; all which the King permitting, they return thus comforted home crying. Not long after they go to the place where their Husbands lie buried, where they crop their Hair up to their Ears, and throw it on the Grave, as also the Arms and Drinking-Cups which the Deceased us’d in their life-time; after which they may not Marry before their Hair be grown again to their Shoulders. The same Custom is also observ’d when their King is buried but then also all his Subjects Fast and Howl three days together, stick his Grave full of Arrows, and burn his House and all his Goods.

Floridans differ amongst themselves.

The Floridans differ amongst themselves very much, for those that inhabit the Province Panuca, which borders upon New Spain, are valiant and cruel People, Offering their Prisoners to their Idols, and eating them. The Men pluck up the Hair of their Beards by the Root, make holes through their Nose and Ears, and Marry not till their fortieth Year.

Next to these follow the Realms of Aranaris and Albardaosia, inhabited by a People, which exceed all others in subtilty.

The Natives of Jaquazia run faster than a Deer, and tire not though they travel a whole day.

Hermophrodites.

The best Swimmers are found in Alpachia, Authia, and Someria, where the Women Swim through deep and great Rivers with their Children in their Arms. Here also are many Hermophrodites, which carry all the Luggage when an Army is upon a March.

Their manner of taking Crocodiles.

As also their Deer.

We find mention’d also two other Provinces of note, viz. Colas (which lies near the Point call’d Cape Florida) and Tegista, or Florida properly so call’d, being that long Peninsula, which pointing upon the Isle Cuba, by the Cape Los Martyres, stretcheth it self North and South about a hundred Leagues in length, but not above thirty in breadth where it is largest. In this Province is the Rio de lo Spirito Santo. The Soyl, though it produces Indian Wheat twice a year, yet it is never Dung’d, but when the Corn (which is planted in March and June) is in, they burn the Weeds; the Ashes of which serves them in stead of Soil. The King divides the Corn according to every Mans Family. In the Winter they dwell four Moneths in the Woods, where they build small Huts of Palm-boughs, feed on Venison, smoak’d Fish, and Crocodiles, which have pure white Flesh, and are caught after this manner: On the Shore of the Rivers they build little Houses full of round Holes, in which they place a Watch, who is to give notice to ten or twelve Associates, cover’d all over with Boughs full of little sharp Prickles, which they thrust into the Crocodiles Throat, who with open Mouth comes running at them, and so throwing him on his Back, stick his Belly full of Arrows, and kill him with Clubs. But with more subtilty and art they take their Deer, viz. They hide themselves under a Stags Skin, so cunningly, that it seems as if living, which they place near the Rivers where the Deer generally come to drink, when on a sudden they shoot them.

Floridans, though libidinous, yet live long.

Their Priests serve in stead of Chirurgeons, wherefore they always carry a Bag full of Herbs about with them, which are chiefly good against venereal Distempers; for these People are exceeding libidinous; nay, Sodomy and defiling of young Children is accounted no sin: Yet though they are much inclin’d to Women, they attain to a great Age.

Rene Laudoniere Landing not far from the City Augustine, situate on the Banks of the River May, met with the Floridan Governor Saturiona, who conducted him to the French King’s Court of Arms, erected two years before, which Saturiona, as a testimony of his zeal to the French, had Crown’d with Laurel and Flowers. Saturiona had with him also his Son Atoreus, who had begotten divers Children on his Mother; whom his Father after that time no more acknowledging, resign’d her up wholly to him: At which time also his great Grandfather being then living, was above a hundred and fifty years old, and saw his Childrens Children to the fifth Generation.

Their horrid Religion.

The Religion in Florida is abominable, wicked, and cruel: When they return Conquerors from a Battel, the old Women rake off the dry’d Hair from the fore-mention’d Poles, hold it aloft, and thank the Sun for their Victory. But the Offerings of their first-born Sons are terrible, for they knock out their Brains with a Club in the presence of the King. Their annual worshipping of the Sun is also very ridiculous; for filling the Skin of a Stag full of sweet-smelling Herbs, they hang the Horns and Neck with Garlands, and carry it with the noise of their kind of Vocal and Instrumental Musick, to a high Trunk or hollow Body of a Tree, on which they place the stuff’d Stag, with his Head towards the Sun; which done, they falling down, desire that he would please to afford them plenty of all such Fruit as they Offer to him; after which taking their leave, they let the fore-mention’d Skin remain there till the following Year.

The Spaniards since their Defeat in the Fort Carolina, and their Engagement with Sir Francis Drake, Anno 1585. have had little disturbance on Florida.

Drake’s Exploit on Florida.

Drake having burnt and plunder’d Domingo and Carthagena, steer’d along the Coast of Florida, and discover’d a Beacon on the same; whereupon he sent out Spies, who sail’d a League up a River, on whose Banks they saw a Fort, and somewhat higher the Town Augustine, built full of woodden Houses; all which being related to him, he steer’d thither, fir’d his Guns twice against the Fort St. John; which the Spaniards answering onely with one Volley, fled, with their Commander Peter Menendez; when the English prepar’d to Storm, a Prisoner, being a French-man, came in a Boat from them to Drake, and inform’d him that the Spaniards had left the City Augustine and Fort St. John; to which Drake going, found there Pallisado’s of pleited Boughs, cover’d with Earth, and a Chest with two thousand Pound, for the payment of the Soldiers, and fourteen Brass Guns, with which he set Sail from thence.

The Mountains of this Countrey are onely the Apalatei, suppos’d by the Natives to have rich Mines of Gold in them, and which the Spaniards saw, but had not time, nor other accommodation to stay and search them, by reason they were so much wearied and wasted with a long March before they gat thither, and found the People so stout and obstinate thereabouts, that in stead of entertaining them with their Hens and Fowl, as other places had done, they were welcom’d with Blows, and made to return, leaving not a few of their best Soldiers behind.

Rivers there are many, and those very large and commodious, as 1. Rio Secco, or The Dry River, so call’d by the Spaniards (as some think) because they could find no Gold in it. 2. Rio Grande, or The Great River. 3. Ligeris. 4. Garunna. 5. Sequana, &c. These last, so nam’d by the French, who, after the Spaniards, for some time had, but never held any long possession of the Countrey. There are also Rio de Flores, Rio de Nieves, and Rio de Spirito Santo, lesser Streams, yet all of them, with the rest, falling at several places into the great Lake of Mexico; and some of them not a little haunted by the Caymans or West-Indian Crocodiles, a Creature, as hath been said before, dangerous both at Sea and Land.

The Natives, who as yet hold Possession and Command of it for the most part, are themselves generally sorted into certain Tribes or great Families; all which are Govern’d severally by Chiefs of their own, whom they call Paracoussi, and by reason thereof are almost continually in Feud and War one with another.

The Towns and Places most known in this Province, are 1. St. Helens, seated on or near unto a Promontory of the same Name, where this Countrey bordereth on Virginia. 2. Fort Charles, or Arx Carolina, built and so nam’d by the French King, but afterwards ruin’d by the Spaniards. 3. Port Royal, a well frequented Haven, at the Mouth of a River which beareth the same Name. More within Land there is, 1. Apalache, an old Town of the Natives, formerly a Place of great resort, but now a poor thing of about forty or fifty Cottages; and yet as poor as it is, Pamphilius Narvaez, as before related, when he search’d the Countrey, found the Natives not willing to part with it: for though he took it from them, it was not without some resistance, and they quickly recover’d it again: and at the 2. nam’d Aute, another old Town of theirs, nine days March from the other, they overtook him, and fell so resolutely upon him, that he left not a few of his best Soldiers dead upon the place, and was content himself to march quietly away with the rest. 3. Ochalis, a Town consisting of about five or six hundred Sheds and Cottages likewise of the Natives. 4. Vittacuche, a Burrough of two hundred Houses.

There is also on the Eastern Shore of this Peninsula, St. Matthews, a Place possess’d and well fortifi’d by the Spaniards; and St. Augustines on the same Shore, but lying somewhat more Southerly than the other, at the Mouth of a River of the same Name, taken and sack’d by Sir Francis Drake in the Year 1585.

Sect. II.
Jucatan.

Jucatan is a Peninsula, or half-Island, being encompass’d with the Sea on all sides, save onely to the South-West, where it is joyn’d to Guaxata, its farther and more Easterly Point looking towards Cuba. The knowledge of, when, and by whom this Province was discover’d, is included in that of New Spain, of which some will have it to be a part. The whole Province contains in compass nine hundred Miles or more, and lies between eighteen and twenty two Degrees of Northern Latitude, or thereabouts, the Air somewhat hot, and the Soil not altogether so fertile as some other parts of New Spain are; but in recompence thereof the People are so much the more industrious, living for the most part by Handicraft Trades. Neither is it altogether unstor’d with Corn and divers sorts of Fruits, besides what it hath of Fowl and Beasts, as Geese, Hens, Deer, &c. particularly it yieldeth plenty of Wax and Honey, by reason of its frequent Swarms of Bees. They report some special things of this Province, as namely, that the People of the Countrey us’d generally, and long before the Spaniards came thither, a certain Ceremony of Religion, not much unlike to our Baptism, and which they call’d by a Name that in their Language signifi’d Regeneration, or A Second-Birth; that they observ’d it so diligently, that few or none amongst them omitted to initiate themselves by it, believing, that thereby the Seeds and Ground-work of all Goodness was laid in them, and that they were fortifi’d by it against the assaults and temptations of evil Spirits; that after they were three or four years old, till they came to twelve, they usually thus Wash’d and Baptiz’d themselves; and that none were permitted amongst them to Marry, that were not first initiated after this manner; that they chose likewise a solemn Day upon which to do this; and that the Friends and Relations (especially the Father and Mother) of the Parties to be initiated, as well as the Parties themselves, always Fasted three days before the said Initiation; and that a great many of the Natives had a Tradition, or general Report amongst them, that of ancient time this Province of Jucatan was possess’d and cultivated by a certain People which came thither from the East, after a tedious long wanderring, and many hardships endur’d at Sea, having escap’d the Hands of their Enemies onely through the power of the Deity they worshipp’d; who help’d them, and made them to pass securely, even through the Waves of the Sea. All which, if true, seems not a little to confirm the Report which goeth for currant in the Welsh Chronicles, of one Madoc ap Owen, the Son of Guineth, a Prince of that Countrey, who is said to have fall’n upon a far Countrey this way in his Travels; which he lik’d so well, that having secur’d to his Companions their safe abode there during his absence, he return’d himself into Wales for more Men; and that he transported thither as many as he could carry in ten Barques full fraught. This he is said to have done about the Year of our Lord 1170. but neither he nor any of his Men were ever heard of since; and the success of the Expedition, it seems, little enquir’d after by the Welsh. However, the Relation seems not altogether incredible.

The chief Towns of the Province are, 1. Merida, in the Navel of the Countrey, and the Seat of the Governor, twelve Leagues distant from the Sea on either side. 2. Valladolidt, thirty Leagues distant from Merida. 3. Campeche, a great Town, consisting of about three thousand Houses or more, when first conquer’d by the Spaniards; who found such Monuments of Art and Industry in it, as did clearly argue, that the Place had been once possess’d by some People that were not barbarous. It is now call’d St. Francisco, and was surpriz’d in the Year 1596. by Captain Parker, an English-man, who took the Governor himself and some other Persons of Quality with him, together with a Ship richly laden with Gold and Silver, besides other Commodities of good value. 4. Tabasco, by the Spaniard now call’d Villa de Nuestra Sennora de Victoria, and commonly Victoria onely, in memory, as ’tis thought, of the first great Victory which Cortez obtain’d over these People at the Battel of Potonchan, as hath been said. 5. Cintla. 6. Potonchan. 7. Salamanca.

All along the Coast of this Countrey there lie certain Islands, some within the Bay or Gulph call’d Honduras, pertaining to the next Province, as 1. La Zarza. 2. La Desconescida. 3. Vermeia. 4. Los Negrillos; and some without it, as 1. Zaratan. 2. Pantoia. 3. De Mugeres, or The Island of Women; so nam’d by the Spaniards, who at their first Discovery of these Parts, for a long time together could meet with none but Women. The chief of them is call’d Acusamil, commonly Cozamul, and is fifteen Leagues in length, and about five in breadth, and was as it were the Thorow-fare, or Common Road of the Spaniards, when they first discover’d the Countreys of New Spain: For first here Landed Ferdinando de Corduba; after him John de Grialva, and others; and last of all the fortunate Cortez. It is now call’d St. Crux.

CHAP. IV.
Guatimala.

Its Situation and Bounds.

Guatimala stretcheth to the Isthmus, or Neck of Land, which, as we said, joineth the Northern and Southern parts of the New World together.

This Countrey is bounded Northward with the Peninsula of Jucatan abovesaid, and part of the Gulph or Bay of Honduras; on the South, with Mare del Zur; on the East and South-East, it hath Castella Aurea; and on the West, New Spain. The length of it lieth upon the Coast of Mare del Zur, and is said to be little less than three hundred Leagues; but the breadth not half so much, and in some places very narrow. It is generally a fertile and good Countrey in all respects, but especially abounding in Cattel and good Pastures; it is subdivided into seven inferior Provinces or Countreys, which are 1. Chiapa. 2. Verapaz. 3. Honduras. 4. Nicaragua. 5. Veragua. 6. Costa Rica; and 7. Guatimala, specially so call’d: all differing in Language and Customs one from another.

The Bishoprick (as it is now call’d) of Chiapa is border’d on the West with New Spain; on the East with Vera Paz; and on the South with Mare del Zur. It is a Countrey much shaded with Woods, and those replenish’d with many fair and goodly Trees, of divers sorts, and of the largest size, as Oaks, Pines, Cedar, Myrtle, and Cypress-Trees, besides others which yield them a good kind of Rozen, precious Gums, &c. also several sorts of Balsom, as white, red, green, and black, not onely pleasant to the Scent, but an excellent Remedy for all manner of green Wounds: the best of it drops out of the cut Bodies of the Trees; and the worst is press’d out of the Wood and Leaves.

Trees and Plants.

There are also proper to this Countrey several other kinds of Trees and Plants, as that whose Fruit tastes like Pepper and Cloves, being of a great heighth; a Tree whose Leaves cure all ulcerated Sores, or the bitings of any poysonous Beast.

There is a sort of Cabbage call’d Ilantas, which grows to the heighth of a Tree, so that Birds make their Nests in them; they are eaten likewise like other common Cabbages.

There is also an Herb with narrow Leaves, which is no sooner touch’d, but it shrinks up to nothing; but at the going away of those which touch it, it obtains its former vigour.

Birds.

Here are likewise Quails, Ducks, Geese, Pheasants, Parrots, Turtle-Doves, Pigeons, and the like, in great abundance.

Amongst the several sorts of Falcons which breed in this Countrey, there is one sort which hath one Foot proper to its kind, the other like that of a Goose; it feeds on Fish along the Rivers.

The Bird Toto-Queztall, which is somewhat smaller than a Pigeon, with green Feathers and a long Tail, is taken onely for its Tail, which when the Indians have pull’d out, they let the Bird fly again, there being a Law amongst them, that whosoever kills one of them, is to suffer death.

The Cranes here are of a dark Gray; the biggest of them have a tuft of Feathers like a Crown upon their Heads.

Birds.

The Birds Guacamayes, which are red and blue, are like a Peruan Goose.

Beasts.

Moreover, the Countrey yields brave Horses, Goats, Sheep, Rabbets, and Foxes; also wild Dogs, Leopards, Lyons, and Tygers.

The wild Hogs which breed here have their Navels on their Backs, and have no Tails, they smell exceeding strong, and feed together in great Companies.

The Taquatrin, a certain Beast proper to those Parts, hath a Bag under its Belly, in which it generally carries seven or more young ones, and hath also a bald Tail; it creeps into Houses in the Night to steal Hens.

Here is also a certain Beast (whose Name we find not) about the bigness of a Rabbet, and like a Rat, and carries its young ones on its back whensoe’re it comes abroad.

The Serpents, which are very numerous here, trouble the Inhabitants exceedingly, especially near the Village Ecatepeque, where there are such an abundance on two little Hills, that none dares approach them; some of them are very poysonous, for if touch’d with a Stick, the Poyson runs up the same: and whoever are anointed with the Blood of a dead Serpent, die a lingring Death. John de Laet relates, that the Indians took one which carried thirty young ones, which being a Finger long, crep up and down immediately; and the old one, being above twenty Foot long, serv’d the Natives for Venison.

Amongst other Beasts is also the Teuthlacokauhqui, or Fortress of the Serpents; it hath a Head like an Adder, thick Belly, glittering Scales, a black Back, sprinkled with white Crosses; at its Tail there grows yearly a Bone, with which it makes a noise when it stirs; its poysonous Teeth destroy those which are bit therewith in twenty four Hours, unless the part which is wounded be held in the Earth so long till the pain be over. Notwithstanding the noise, terrible aspect, and gestures of this Animal, the Indian Hunters make nothing to take the same by the Tail, and wrap it up in Linnen, and carrying it home make it tame. It is able to live a whole Year without either Meat or Drink; its Head when cut off grows to the bigness of a Man’s Thigh in ten days time.

No less resolute are the Indians in taking the Ibitobaca, which is an Ell long, of a crimson Colour, full of black and white Specks, the Bones whereof they wear about their Necks in stead of Chains.

The Serpent Iquanna.

The Iquanna is a Serpent which doth no manner of hurt, though terrible to look upon to those which know it not, having a Bag under its Chin, a glittering Comb on its Head, and on its Back sharp Bones, which stand like a Saw, and a long Tail: It lays fifty Eggs at a time as big as Acorns, of a very good taste, and fit to eat when boyl’d: It also lives both in the Water and on the Land.

Baboons.

Here are also many Baboons, which are big and heavy, with ugly Heads, short Legs like a Man, and Tails standing upwards; they eat all sorts of Fruit, but chiefly covet after Wine and Bread; and are so lascivious, that they often set upon Women: The Females generally bring forth two, one Male, and the other Female. There is also another sort, whose Skins, being red, are full of little Spots.

The ancient Inhabitants of Chiapa (divided into the Chiapaneca’s, the Zeques, the Zeltates, and the Quelenes) are very Civil and Witty, also skilful in Painting, Singing, Breaking of Horses, and many other Trades.

Towns and Villages of Note.

The Places of more principal note in this Countrey, inhabited by the Spaniards, are 1. Ciudad Real, pleasantly seated in the midst of a round Vale or Plain, and almost encompass’d with Hills representing the form of an Amphitheatre; also at the Foot of one which stands in the midst of the rest, the City is built. It is a City specially Priviledg’d by the King of Spain, having a Court of Justice, Cathedral, and Dominican Cloyster; of a pure and temperate Air, and the Countrey round about plentifully abounding both in Corn and Fruit, onely somewhat too cold to produce Lemmons and Oranges; but for Pears, Apples, Peaches, Quinces, Cherries, and the like, they grow here in great abundance.

2. Chiapa, which giveth Name to the Valley aforesaid; It is a Bishop’s See, and famous, if but for one of its Prelates, viz. Bartholomeo de las Casas, of the Order of Predicants, who was Bishop of this City, and his Memory justly precious amongst the poor Americans at this day, for his Charity towards them, and for the stout and zealous opposition which he made against the Spaniards cruel and inhumane dealings with the Natives at the beginning of their Conquests: by which at last, notwithstanding much difficulty and resistance made by interested Persons of the other Side, he procur’d them liberty, and an Edict from the Emperor in favor of them; whereby they were declar’d to be a Free People, and not Slaves, and the Spaniards forbidden to use them any longer as such, or to force them to any kind of Labour against their wills, or otherwise than by agreement with them, which Liberty they enjoy to this day; and though the Spaniards are said to give them very small Wages in some places, and for their Work in their Sugar-Mills (which is no small Labor) not above five Reyals, or Two shillings six pence a Week, for the Maintenance of themselves, their Wives and Children, yet by reason it is with Consent, and in a Countrey where all things are plentiful and cheap, their Condition is much better than it was, and the favor which that good Bishop did them, never to be forgotten. It is at present a great and populous City, and lieth almost in the mid-way betwixt the Cities of Mexico and Guatimala.

3. St. Bartholomews, in the Countrey of the Quelenes.

4. Tecpatlan, the chief of twenty five Villages, said to belong to the Zoques. Here the Dominicans have another Cloyster.

The Zeltates possess a fruitful Countrey, have thirteen Villages planted with Trees that yield Cochenile, being under a Common-wealth Government.

The chief Place of the Quelenes is Copanavatzla, where there is good Cheese, and store of brave Cattel: The River Chiepa gliding through the midst thereof, loseth it self in the Northern Ocean. In this part of the Country are Beasts not unlike Apes, with long Tails, which they wind about the Legs of those whom they find swimming and so pull them under Water; wherefore they that go to Swim take Axes along with them, to cut off their Tails.

The Water of the River Blanco is clear and wholsom, running for the most part through Rocky Grounds, which nevertheless are overspread with Trees.

In the highest Ground of Chiapa, a League and a half from the City Reall, spring clear Fountains, whose Water ebbs and flows every six hours.

Near the Village call’d Afixa is one which runs three years together, though in the driest Season, and is dry three years, though it Rain never so much.

Not far from the Village Cinacatan is another Spring, whose Water cures several Sicknesses, but kills all Birds and Beasts which drink of the same.

Here are likewise divers Baths.

The Rivers which run out of the Valley Chiapa, fall into two great Pits.

Near the Village Bartholomew, in the Province Quelenes, is a strange Cavern, out of which by the throwing of a stone into the same, are heard mighty noises like claps of Thunder.

Not far from the Village Chicomucolo, appears a Cavern, in which is a great Plain on one side, and a standing Lake, whose Water is like Sand, on the other.

The Spaniards, if they wanted not Slaves, might dig good store of Gold, Silver, Copper, Lead, Tin, and Quicksilver, out of the Mynes on the Mountain Ecatepeck, which is in nine Leagues compass: The Wind blows so strong after Sun-rising, that no Man is able to travel for it, but in the Night.

Sect. II.
Vera Paz.

Situation and Bounds.

Vera Paz, or The Countrey of True Peace, was so nam’d by the Spaniards, as they say, because it was never conquer’d by the Sword, but reduc’d to Obedience onely by the Preaching of the Dominican Fryers. It is bounded on the West and South-West with Chiapa; on the East with some part of Guatimala and Honduras; and on the North with Jucatan. It contains about thirty Leagues in length, and almost as much in breadth, being a woody and mountainous Countrey for the most part, yet well distinguish’d with Valleys and lower Ground. It is much subject to Rain, which ’tis said to have for nine Moneths of the Year almost continually; by reason whereof the Countrey, being otherwise hot, is much annoy’d with a kind of Mosquit, or great sort of Gnats, which spoil the Fruit very much, and are otherwise not a little trouble to the People. Moreover, there happen oftentimes terrible Earthquakes and Storms, with Thunder and Lightning.

Commodities of the Countrey.

The chief Commodities of this Countrey, are a kind of Amber, which some call Liquid Amber, which drops from divers of their Trees, and is said to be a Commodity very precious, and of much use; Mastick, Sanguis Draconis, Gum Anime, Sarsaparilla, China-Wood, and divers other Medicinal Drugs, which it affordeth in great plenty. The Woods afford a sweet smell, and the Trees in the same grow a wonderful heighth.

The Canes which grow here, being a hundred Foot long, and proportionably thick, serve for Timber.

There is also a hard Wood call’d Iron-Wood, either from its hardness or colour, or both, which never rots.

The abundance of Flowers which grow here afford nutriment to innumerable swarms of Bees, which are about the bigness of small Flies. Their Honey, which is somewhat tart, they hide in the Roots of Trees, or in the Earth. Another sort, which is made by the Wasps, bereaves those that taste of their Senses.

Beasts.

The noted’st Beast in this Countrey is the Danta, which resembles a Mule, hath no Horns, but Ash-colour’d long Hair, short Neck, hanging Ears, thin Legs, with three Claws before and two behind, long Head, narrow Forehead, little Eyes, a Nose hanging over its Mouth, little Tail, sharp Teeth, and a Skin which is six Fingers thick, and scarce penetrable by any Weapon. This Beast is taken in Traps, Holes, or else with Dogs, which he often kills when hunted towards the Water. They say that this Beast taught Men first to Let-blood; for if it be too full of Blood, it pricks it self against a sharp Cane, and stops up the Orifice again very carefully. The Flesh thereof is good Meat, as also that of the Ross-Lyons, which in the day-time sleep on a high Tree, where they are shot by the Indians.

The Tygers are much more dangerous to be taken; yet the Indians Hunting them, eat them in stead of Beef; and also through all New Spain.

The Bears, which make the Ways very dangerous to travel, have black frizled Hair, broad Tails, Feet like Mens Hands: but since the Indians have made use of Guns, which they learn’d from the Spaniards, they have much lessen’d the number both of Bears and Tygers.

There are likewise many Leopards, Apes, and wild Goats (whose Skins serve the Natives for Drums) Hogs, and Armadillo’s.

Amongst their Fowls, are Eagles and Parrots.

The Countrey is so well stor’d with Water, that in three Leagues space are above thirty Rivulets, and as many Fountains.

Medicinal Plants.

On the Mountains grow great quantities of Sarsaparilla, Mechoacan, and the China-Root, which being yellowish hath several Saffron-colour’d Knobs on the top. The Sarsaparilla grows with many Stalks, creeping along over the Ground; the Body thereof is tough and full of Prickles, the Leaves broad and sharp at the ends, and are of a bluish colour on one side, and green on the other, and bear Clusters of Flowers, which close like Buds, and are first green, next vermilion-red, and lastly blackish: within are two hard Stones, which inclose a white Kernel, by the Indians call’d Juapecanga.

The Bay Golfo Dulce, which pours its muddy Water into the Sea, feeds the great Fish Monati, and a great number of Crocodiles.

Several Rivers abounding with Fish fall also into the same, having their Banks set all along with Trees, in whose Boughs, joyn’d together on the top, those sort of Birds make their Nests which prey on Fish.

The Women in this place are much shorter Liv’d than the Men, so that there are often thirty Widowers to one Widow. Women with Child are Deliver’d by themselves in the High-way; and from thence they go to the next River to wash themselves and the Child.

Places of note.

As for any Towns or Places of much Traffick or Note, inhabited by the Spaniards, we find not any nam’d, save onely St. Augustines; near unto which there is said to be a Cave and Fountain within Ground, which converts the Water that falleth into it out of several lesser Springs, into a kind of Alabaster or Stone, perfectly white, and fashions it likewise into Pillars, Statues, and other artificial Forms of very curious Workmanship, as Laet reporteth.

Sect. III.
Honduras.

Situation and Bounds.

Honduras hath on the South, Guatimala abovesaid; on the West, a certain Bay, or Arm of the Sea, which they call Golfo Dulce, from the abundance of fresh Waters which run into it from all Parts; on the North and North-East, the Atlantick Ocean; and somewhat to the South-East, Nicaragua. It contains in length, viz. from East to West, Coasting along upon the Sea, about a hundred and fifty Leagues, and in breadth eighty. The Countrey is rich both in Corn and Pasturage, being said to be very much advantag’d that way by the constant overflowings of the Rivers, which are very many, about Michaelmass-time, and which the People order so well, that they water their Gardens, and exceedingly fertilize the whole Champain, or lower part of the Grounds by them.

The fruitful Valleys of this Countrey were anciently very well inhabited, till vast multitudes of the Natives were destroy’d by the Spaniards Cruelties, of which the Bishop Bartholomeo de las Casas, in his Letter to the Emperor Charles the Fifth, gives this Relation:

Cruelties of the Spaniards.

“The young Children (saith he) they murder’d, beating out their Brains against the Stones; the Kings and Princes of the Countrey they either scorch’d to death, or threw them to the Dogs to be torn in pieces; the poor People they drove into their Houses, and then set them on fire; those that remain’d were condemn’d to the greatest slavery imaginable, being us’d in stead of Mules and Horses, and having greater Burdens laid upon them than they were able to carry, insomuch that thousands of them fell down dead under them; some out of despair running into the Woods were famish’d, after they had kill’d and eat their Wives and Children for Hunger. In this one Province onely they massacred above twenty hundred thousand Men, and amongst others, Persons of Quality, which had civilly Entertain’d them: nay, they tortur’d the poor innocent Natives all the ways they could possibly invent, onely to know of them where their Gold lay; particularly Diego de Valasco spar’d none that ever fell into his hands; insomuch that in a Moneths time above ten thousand were slain by him: He hang’d thirteen Noble-men, to twelve of whom he gave the Denomination of The twelve Apostles; and the chiefest of them he call’d in a derision, Jesus Christ. Some they suffer’d to starve to death, with their Heads compress’d between the cloven Barks of wild Vines; some also they buried alive, and leaving onely their Heads to appear above Ground, bowl’d Iron Bullets at them, and forc’d them to eat one another; besides infinite other hellish Cruelties, too horrid and dreadful to be recounted.”

Commodities of the Countrey.

This Countrey produces much Maiz, Wheat, Honey, and great Calabashes, from whence the first Discoverers call’d that Sea Golfo de las Ybueras, because they met with abundance of Calabashes, floating on the Water, which at Santo Domingo bear the Name of Ybueras.

This Countrey is water’d by three Rivers, the first Chamalucom, which glides by the City San Pedro; the second Ulva, inhabited on both Shores; the third Haguaro, the Grounds adjacent to which would prove very fruitful, were the Inhabitants not too lazy. In stead of a Plough they use a long Pole, with two crooked Staves at the end, one bent downwards and the other upwards, with which they cut and turn the Earth. The Natives feed on several Roots, Flesh, and Vermine.

At their Feast they make themselves Drunk with a Drink made of Honey, Noble-men heretofore onely drinking the Liquor of Cacao; of late it is common, and made by all People, though never so mean. They speak several Languages, the chiefest whereof is that of the Chontales, a salvage People. They divide their Year, call’d Joalar, that is, Passing, into eighteen Moneths, and each Moneth into twenty Days. They formerly measur’d the Year by the Nights, and began the Year forty days sooner than the Europeans.

New Valladolid.

The Towns in this Province are 1. New Vallodolid, by the Indians nam’d Comayagua, lying in a pleasant Valley under a temperate Climate. The Cattel brought hither from Spain increase exceedingly. The Silver-Mynes are also so well stor’d, that they keep the Melting-house in the Town always employ’d.

The Governor of this Place hath his Residence next to the Treasury-Chamber.

Anno 1588. the Bishop’s See was translated hither from Truxillo: Nineteen years before which Francisco de Monteio sent his Lieutenant Alphonso de Cacenes thither, to build a Village half way between the Southern and Northern Ocean; who accordingly erected the Town Santa Maria de Camoyagua, near a River Navigable for Canoos, which disembogues in Puerto de Cavallos. The remaining part of the Way to the Haven Fonseca being passable for Carrs (which was a means to prevent many Inconveniences which us’d to happen to Travellers on the Way between Panama and Nombre de Dios) the Spanish King was so much concern’d at the first proposal hereof, that he sent the famous Surveyor Baptista Antonello thither, and he rather, because he received information, that the new Way, along which they carried the Merchandise from Peru, Mexico, and other Countreys along the South Sea, lay very pleasantly, by reason of the brave Vineyards, Corn-Fields, Fruit-Trees, Pastures, Streams abounding with Fish, Herds of Deer, and Cony-Warrens; yet Antonello meeting with many troubles, would not undertake the Business.

New Valladolid is adorn’d with a great Church, a Cloyster, belonging to the Monks De la Merced, and handsom Streets.

Gratias a Dios.

2. Thirty Leagues Westward from this City lies another call’d Gratias a Dios, begun by Captain Gabriel de Royas, Anno 1530. that so he might be near the Gold-Mines: But because the Natives kept the new Inhabitants in continual alarm, and daily Storm’d the unfinished Fortifications, Royas was necessitated to leave off building any farther, the rather, because none came to his assistance from the neighboring Garrison.

Six years after Gonzales de Alvarado undertook this Work, and built the City on a Rocky Mountain; which, though otherwise barren, produc’d lusty Horses and strong Mules.

St. Pedro.

3. San Pedro, though lying under a hot and unwholsom Climate, us’d formerly to be a brave City of Trade; but it is gone much to decay since Golfo Dolce hath been discover’d, because from that Bay the Commodities are carried in Barques up into the Countrey.

Juan de Puerto de Cavallos.

4. The Village Juan de Puerto de Cavallos, inhabited by Factors and Moors: It receiv’d that Denomination, because not far from it several Horses were forc’d to be thrown over-board in a Storm. Though it be but ill fortifi’d, yet it hath an exceeding large Haven. Captain Christopher Newport arriving here Anno 1591. found two hundred Houses, and in them a considerable Booty left, notwithstanding four Ships richly laden had lately set Sail from thence.

Six years after Newport, Capt. Ant. Sherly re-took the Place, and leaving the Haven open for Pyrats, Alphonsus Coriado judg’d it convenient to remove the Trading Place to Amatique; he built the Village Thomas de Castilla, and fortifi’d the same against all manner of Assaults.

Behind Cavallos lies the Valley Naco, which is exceeding fruitful, being situate between high Mountains, where formerly was found plenty of Silver.

Truxillo.

5. Eastward from Cavallos appears the famous City Truxillo, near a large Bay; secur’d from all Storms by two Cliffs, full of Trees; the Mouth of the Haven call’d Joan Gil, is above two Leagues broad, and receives two Rivers, one from each side of the City: The Stream Quaimarotte flows Eastward, and the River Antonio Westward, both abounding in Fish. The Countrey round about produces abundance of all sorts of Provisions, and chiefly abounds in Grapes, which are gather’d twice a year: Eight days after August they cut their Vines, which afford them ripe Grapes again in October; they have two Harvests of Corn; also Lemons and Oranges are very plentiful: The Cattel brought hither from Spain are exceedingly increas’d to an incredible number.

Truxillo it self lying on a steep Mountain, is defended on that side which respects the Sea, with a thick Wall of six Foot high; between which and the Haven are many brambly Bushes, which prevent the access to the Wall, onely a narrow and steep way leading up to the City, which hath a strong Gate, guarded with two Brass Guns, and sufficiently Fortifi’d to oppose an Enemy. The Eastern Cliff, which bends before the Haven is call’d Punta la Rye, on which stands a House with a high Beacon: Beyond the Wall Eastward, near the Haven, is a Ship-yard, before which stands a large Woodden Cross: The Castle in which the City Store is kept, joyns to the Wall, near unto which, within the Town appears St. Francis Church; but the Cathedral call’d Eglesia Major, is seen above all other Buildings: The Houses cover’d with Palmito-Leaves, have Walls of Pleited Bushes, Plaister’d over within and without: Behind the City, where it lies open, are exceeding high Mountains.

Attempts upon this place by the English and Dutch.

Anno 1576. the English falling on this strong Place, carry’d a rich Booty from thence; after which, Capt. Anth. Sherly and Capt. Will. Parker ventur’d once more on the same, but being discover’d by the Centinel, were forc’d to Retreat, not without a considerable loss: When not long after, Captain John Van Hoorn a Hollander, attempting the same, had much better success; for he Weighing Anchor for Pernambuc, with four Frigats, three Ketches, and a Sloop, set Sail to Truxillo, where arriving, lay close before the City with his four Frigats, which fired very fiercely on the Town; the Inhabitants of which not being idle, kill’d three Men in one Ship, forc’d her to fall farther off from the Castle: Whilst the Ketches and Sloop went about a Gun shot Westward beyond the City, towards the River Antonio, where they Landed two hundred and fifty Soldiers, which march’d with all speed up the Hill, where the Castle lay which they Scal’d at Noon-day; the Besieged being provided with seven Guns, shot, and threw Stones continually amongst them, yet were forc’d to Retreat from the Dutch Hand-granado’s: During the storm, the Admiral himself Landed, but before he came out of the Boat, the foremention’d Soldiers had made themselves Masters of the Fort, with the loss of onely eight Men, and were busie Pillaging all places they came at, and carrying their gotten Booty to a Watch-house near the Castle on the Shore; when on a sudden a Fire happen’d in the East part of Truxillo, which increas’d in such a manner, that in few hours two third parts of the City lay in Ashes; every one then had enough to do to save themselves, yet for all the haste they made, several Hollanders were kill’d at the blowing up of the Magazine, and most of the Booty lost by the Fire; insomuch that they carry’d but two hundred thirty nine Skins, six Bales of Indigo, eight hundred and twenty Pounds of Sarsaparilla, seven Brass, and three Iron Guns, four Clocks, and some few trifles with them; having before made an agreement for twenty Pound of Silver, with the Governor Joan de Miranda, who inform’d them, that they had not the least knowledge of the Hollanders Fleet, till the Evening, when the Beacon on Punta La Rye was fir’d: Moreover, that the City was inhabited by two hundred Spaniards, and as many more Mulatoes and Moors; and that the Trade thereof was much gone to decay, because there had been no Gallies there in two years before.

Twenty seven Leagues from this City lies the Village Jorgo de Olancho, where four thousand Spaniards force Tribute from sixteen thousand Indians, who possess much Gold.

Sect. IV.
Nicaragua.

Situation and bounds.

Nicaragua is a County of this Province, border’d Northward with Honduras; on the East, with the Atlantick Ocean, and part of Veragua; on the South, with Mare del Zur; and on the West, with Guatimala, being call’d by Diego Lopez de Salzado, The New Kingdom of Leon, and comprizing several little Territories, as Nicoya, Nequecheri, Mabyth, Deria, Masaya, Mandigua, Cacoloaque, Cepeoco, Los Micos, Madira, and the Contales. It hath few Rivers in it, the want whereof is supply’d by the benefit of a great Lake, in the midst of the Countrey, call’d by the Spaniards, Laguna de Nicaragua, containing, as is suppos’d, above one hundred Leagues in compass. It empties it self by the Port of St. Juan into the Atlantick or North-Sea, but reacheth as far as the South or Mare del Zur, at least within a very few Leagues; and from whence some Spanish Captains are said to have made a passage, though with much difficulty, into the Lake, and from thence to the North-Sea. It is abundantly well stor’d with good Fish, but withal much haunted with Crocodiles; and the Countrey about it so plentiful in all things, especially Cattel, Cotten-Wool, Sugars, and all kind of Fruits: Amongst which, the chiefest is the Zeiba, which is of so great a thickness, that fifteen Men holding Hand in Hand, can scarce encompass the same. The Callabashes ripen here in fourteen days time: The Sea along the Coast, breeds Whales and other Sea-Monsters, which are often seen above Water.

Nature of the Inhabitants.

The Inhabitants of this Countrey, (except the Chontales, which live on the Mountains, and maintain their old Salvage Customs) have for the most part learnt the Spanish Tongue and Manners, and exercise themselves in all sorts of Arts and Siences, especially in Working of Silver, making of Clothes, Wax-Work, and the like: From the Mountains they gather Balsom, Liquid-Amber, Turpentine: They also drive a great Trade in Cotton, Skins, and several sorts of Provisions, to Panama, and Nombre de Dios.

The Lake Laguna de Nicaragua, which hath a hundred and seventeen Leagues in Circumference, and round about inhabited, is by three Leagues of Land separated from the South-Sea; and discharges its Waters into the River Desaguadero, which falls into the Northern Ocean. Alphonsus Calera, and Diego Machuca de Zuaso, were the first that Sail’d out of the foremention’d Lake into the Sea, not without many dangers, by reason of the great Water-falls, call’d Rondales, which fall into the River Desaguadero, and forc’d them often times to draw their Barques over the Land.

Cities.

The chief City is, 1. Leon, which is surrounded with Woods, and lies close by the Lake; hath a great Church, five Cloysters belonging to the Monks, de la Mercede, several Houses for the King’s Officers, and a hundred and twenty thousand Families of Indians which pay Tribute. Three Leagues beyond Leon appears a high spiry Mountain, from whose top, both Morning and Evening, rises a mighty smoke, and sometimes casts out great sulphurous Stones over the neighboring Fields, and on a sudden mighty Flames. A Dominican Monk, in hopes to get some melted Gold out of its burning Mouth, went up the same with four of his Fraternity, and carry’d an Iron Chain and a Kettle, which were no sooner let down into the hole, but they were immediately melted; yet not so discourag’d, they resolv’d to venture a second time with stronger Materials, which nevertheless had the same, or rather worse event; for the Fire flew out in such a manner, that the Dominicans sadly scorch’d, had enough to do to escape with Life, since which none durst presume to approach the same.

But besides the Episcopal City Leon, Erected by Franciscus Fernandez, 2. Granada acknowledges the same Builder, and lying also on the shore of Laguna de Nicaragua, is adorn’d with a Castle, Church, and several Sugar-Mills: Not far from it lie the small Lakes Masaya and Lindiri; the first which is inclos’d between exceeding high Mountains, covers the Foot of the burning Mountain Masaya; the other falls into Laguna de Nicaragua, near which is the smoky Mountain Munbacho, surrounded with Fruit-Trees.

3. & 4. The Towns Jean, and Neuva Segovia, which are not far from thence, are of little consequence.

5. Realeio, this is, as it were, the Chattam of America, being a place on the South-Sea, where the King of Spain hath all his Ships built that are made of American Timber, and inhabited by few or none but Shipwrights, Mariners, and Men of that kind of Profession.

6. & 7. Nicoya, Avarines.

8. Cartago, forty Leagues distant from Nicoya, and lying almost in the midst of the Isthmus, or Streight of Darien, equally distant both from the North and South Sea; on both which it is said likewise to have a convenient Port or Haven for Shipping.

Strange manner of Dancing.

The Spaniards, when first they Landed here, call’d this Countrey Mahomets Paradise, because of its exceeding Fruitfulness. The Cacao which they use here in stead of Money, is not unlike the Stone of an Almond. The Inhabitants, in stead of using a Steel and Flint to strike Fire withal, rub two pieces of Wood together so long, till one of them is kindled; and burn the Boughs of Pine-Trees in stead of Candles. Amongst the several Languages which they speak, the Mexican is the chiefest: Amongst their Recreations, Dancing is principal, which is perform’d after a very strange manner, for they meet sometimes two or three thousand together, according to the bigness of the Province, in a spacious Field, which is made clean before for that purpose: He that leads the Dance goes backward, and with many strange Gestures, turns himself about, which the rest, following four and four together in a row, imitate, whilst their Tambores beat on hollow Instruments, and sing Songs, which are first answer’d by the Ring-leader of the Dance, and then seconded by the whole Company, each of them waving a Fan or a Callabash, and being all adorn’d with Plumes of Feathers on their Heads, and Strings with Shells about their Arms and Legs; they also act several antick Tricks, the one, the blind Man, the other, the Cripple, one feigns himself to be deaf, the other makes a wry Mouth, one cries, and another laughs, whilest others drink healths in Chocolate, which continues till Midnight.

The Fish Manati.

A King of this Countrey in former times us’d to feed the Fish Manati with Bread, in the Lake Guainabo, where it would appear at its being call’d Matto, Matto, which signifies Noble-minded, and oftentimes carry eight or ten Boys on its Back from one side of the Lake to the other; but being shot by a Spaniard with an Arrow, never appear’d again.

There is likewise a black Beast in this Countrey call’d Cascu, resembling in some things a Hog; it hath a hard Skin, little Eyes, open Ears, cloven Feet, short Nose, and makes such a terrible noise, that it affrights those which hear it.

No less strange and wonderful is the Fox-Ape, which hath two Bellies one under another; in the lowermost of which it carries its Young, which are never brought into the World till they are able to shift for their own Food. It hath the Body of a Fox, Feet like a Man’s Hands, and Ears like a Batt.

It will not be amiss before we conclude with this Province, to give you a Relation of the Discourse which hapned Anno 1527. between the Spanish Commander Francisco de Monteio and the Nicaraguan Casique Alquinotex, who being a hundred and ten years old, told him, “That before the Spaniards arrival there, great numbers of his Soldiers perish’d after a strange manner; for after having vomited abundance of Worms, they fell down dead on a sudden: those that escap’d the Contagion differing amongst themselves, made two Parties, which twice Engaging with one another, each of them lost above a hundred and fifty thousand Men. Yet both these Plagues were no ways to be compar’d to the Slaughter which the Spaniards had made amongst them.”

About the same time an Italian, call’d Hieronymo Bonzo, Lodging with a Nicaraguan Noble-man that understood the Spanish Tongue, was thus set upon by him: What do not (Oh Christ) the Christians do! they no sooner get their Foot into an Indian’s Hut, but they commandingly call for Maiz, Honey, Winter-Clothes, Gold, Silver, and a Woman to cool their lustful desires: Certainly there is nothing more vicious on Earth. To which Bonzo gave him this Answer: The wicked Spaniards commit oftentimes unseemly things. The Indian again suddenly retorted, saying, Where are any such Men to be found as good Spaniards? I have never known any but wicked Villains. To which Bonzo said, Why have you made place for them on Nicaragua? Which was thus reply’d to by the Noble-man: “All People round about took Oath on the first News of the Christians arrival, to hazard all, and fight to the last Man, before they would be under the insupportable Yoke, with which they had heard other Countreys were oppress’d with by them. To which purpose they made ready Bowes, Arrows, Lances, Stones, Clubs, and other Weapons of War: But when it came to the trial, the Spanish Horse, of which they had never seen the like, struck such a terror into the Indians, that they fled, and sent two Agents to Monteio to desire Peace; but their Design was onely to gain time, that they might gather new Forces, to venture a second Encounter; which prov’d as fatal to them as the first. Then desiring Peace once more, they gather’d all that were able to bear Arms, and swore one to another not to stir a Foot; and withal made a Law, That whosoever did shrink should be kill’d immediately: But the Women being inform’d hereof, begg’d that they might rather suffer under the Spanish Yoke, than be torn in pieces by their Dogs, or kill’d by their Bullets and Swords, alledging, that they were not able to resist the Spaniards; and entreated them, that if they were resolv’d to go on with their first Design, they would first send their Wives and Children to the other World, that so they might not fall into the hands of the merciless and bloody Christians: Whereupon most Voices judg’d it convenient to make use of the Opportunity, and to submit to Monteio. But his cruel dealings made some to contradict that Determination, for which they paid dearly; for not onely they, but their little Infants, were put to the most cruel Deaths imaginable; which made many of them also to lay violent hands on themselves.”

Sect. V.
Costarica.

Bounds and Nature of the Countrey.

Costarica borders on the East with Veragua; on the South and East, with the Sea; and on the North, with Nicaragua. The Countrey it self is barren and mountainous; whose Inhabitants were valiant enough to Encounter with the Spanish Forces, being unwilling to lose their former Priviledges.

This Coast was discover’d full by Christopher Columbus, who Anno 1502. Sailing up the Rivers Belen and Veragua with Barques, took much Gold out of the Mynes Urira, but chiefly from between the Roots of Trees which were grown together.

Sect. VI.
Veragua.

Bounds and Nature of the Country.

Veragua is bounded on the West with Costarica; on the East it hath the District, or Countrey of Panama, being otherwise wash’d on all sides by the Sea. It hath its Name from a River of great note in this Tract, by which it was first discover’d. The Countrey is for the most part mountainous, and the Soil outwardly barren, but recompencing all defects with the abundance of its more inward Wealth, that is to say, in the richness of its Mynes, of which it is said to afford many, and so inexhaustibly rich and good, that the Spaniards here know no end of their Wealth; although by the stoutness and untameableness of the Natives, it was a long time, and they met with many difficulties, before they could make themselves Masters of the Treasure.

Its chief Towns.

The chief Towns they have here are 1. La Conception, lying at the Mouth of a River so nam’d, and the Seat of the Governor.

2. La Trinidad, upon the Banks of the same River likewise, but down towards Port Beleno, and about six Leagues Eastward of Conception.

3. St. Foy, twelve Leagues more to the South, where the Spaniards melt their Gold, and cast it into Bars or Ingots.

4. Carlos, a Town they have upon the Coast of Mare del Zur.

5. Philippina, another on the West of Carlos; both of these seated upon a large capacious Bay; before which there lie certain little Islands, to the number of thirty or more, which the Spaniards are said to have wholly dispeopled long since, by forcing the Natives over into the Continent to work in the Mynes, as usually they did before the Emperor’s Prohibition: but now they use Slaves or Negro’s, which they buy for that purpose from Guinee and other Parts.

Sect. VII.
Guatimala, properly so call’d.

Bounds of the Country.

Guatimala, specially so call’d, hath on the West the River Xicalapa, which divides it from Vera Paz; on the East it is bounded with the Countrey of Nicaragua; on the North, with Honduras; and on the South, with Mare del Zur.

This Countrey was conquer’d by Peter de Alvarado, Anno 1525. It is, by reason of its neighborhood with Vera Paz, not altogether clear of Mountains, but otherwise well water’d with Rivers, and enrich’d with fair and fruitful Valleys, which afford not onely good Pasturage, and many great Herds of Cattel, but likewise good store of Wheat, Maiz, and other Fruits of the Earth. Great plenty of Cotton-Wool is generally both here and in the other Provinces, viz. Vera Paz, Chiapa, &c. some Medicinal Woods likewise, and Liquors, and absolutely the best Sulphur in America. The People are generally tractable and well dispos’d, both in point of Religion and civil Government.

Towns of note.

The Towns of chief note are 1. Guatimala, now call’d St. Jago de Guatimala since the re-building thereof; for about the Year 1586. it was almost buried in Ashes, which one of the neighboring Mountains, for the space of six Moneths together, continually belch’d out in such fearful quantities, that many People were slain, the old City deserted, and a new one built in another place. The day before this sad Accident hapned, the neighboring Mountains were observ’d to shiver, and a great noise was heard from under Ground; which amazing the Indians, the news thereof was carried to the Bishop, Franciscus Moroquin, who narrowly enquiring into the Causes of these Accidents, and what they might portend, found that a sad Event would suddenly follow, as accordingly it did; for about midnight on the eighth of August, Anno 1541. such a mighty store of Rain fell, as if the Clouds had been all dissolv’d into Water, which came rowling from the Rocky Mountains with such violence, that it wash’d down great Stones, which carried on by the strength of the Water against the Houses, beat them down; and none could have seen how they were ruin’d, had not the mighty flashes of Lightning, follow’d by terrible claps of Thunder, lighted the Night. Some instantly deserting this miserable place, fled up into the Countrey, and there built a new Guatimala (as above-mention’d) sur-nam’d St. Jago, three Leagues farther towards the East, in a Valley through which flow two Rivers, between two Vulcans, or smoaking Mountains, which sometimes vomit forth terrible Flames, mix’d with dreadful Thunder-claps, Ashes, and great Stones, insomuch that the Ground all about it, which is exceeding fruitful, seems to move. There are many of these Vulcans in several parts of America, as namely at Arequipa in the Kingdom of Peru, at Puebla de los Angelos, in the Province of Tlascalla abovesaid, a Mountain of so great heighth, that they are fain to go little less than thirty Leagues turning and winding before they can reach the top of it, and others in several other places. They are generally Mountains of great heighth, and running sharp upwards, but at the top containing some quantity of plain and level Ground; in the midst whereof is a Pit or Hole, out of which abundance of Smoak and fiery Sparkles are vomited almost continually, and so deep, that they are suppos’d for the most part to reach to the very bottom of the Mountain. Some of these Vulcans cast forth neither Fire nor Smoak, yet are clearly seen to burn at the bottom with a quick Fire, and which is so extreamly hot, that it instantly melteth Iron, or any other Metal that is cast into it, as by experience hath been found: for some conceiving that the Matter which maintains these Fires within the Bowels of the Earth so long together, can be nothing else but melted Gold, have endeavor’d several times to extract and draw it forth in certain Vessels of Iron and Brass, which they have caus’d to be let down into the bottom of the Vulcan or Pit, by long Iron Chains made on purpose: but, as we said, the extream heat and force of the Fire below always melted them before they could be drawn up again, and by that means hath rendred all such Attempts frustrate. In this Town, now call’d St. Jago, reside above six hundred Spanish Commanders, and more than twenty five thousand Indians which pay Tribute. They have also a brave Church and two Cloysters, one belonging to the Dominicans, and another to the Order La Merced, and likewise a noble Hospital. Not far from thence is a place call’d Yzaleos, where there are Orchards of Cacoa two Leagues in square, each of them producing yearly as much as fifty thousand Men are able to carry. They reckon the Cacao by Contels, which is the number of four hundred; by Xequipiles, of eight thousand; and by Carga’s, of twenty four thousand. In this County is a Mountain, whose top smoaking continually consumes by degrees, and oftentimes covers the neighboring Countrey with Ashes. The Water which flows from the same differs very much, for some of it is wholsom and fit to drink; some foul and stinking, and some turns Wood, if laid in the same, to Stone. Here is also the Beast whose Head is highly esteem’d for the Bezoar-Stone, which it carries in the same. Here is likewise a little Bear, which in stead of a Mouth, hath a long Nose with a round Hole in it, and a hollow Tongue, with which it sucks Honey, and disturbs the Nests of Pismires. The Women in this Place make curious Earthen Ware, colour’d either red or black with the Mud of two several Brooks. The Indians call’d the boyling Fountains in this County Hell, because they bubble up a Bowes-shot high, and make the River Caliente, which, notwithstanding it hath pass’d half a League through a wide Channel, retains its exceeding heat. Not far from it lies a Stone, which having a Crack in the middle, sends forth a thick Damp, and against bad Weather a thundering noise. On the Mountains grow exceeding large Trees, especially Oak. Here Pismires which are of an extraordinary bigness, are brought to Market amongst other Provisions.

2. St. Salvador, forty Leagues distant from Guatimala Eastward, and seated upon the River Guacapa, and having about it a small Territory, which by some is accounted a distinct Countrey or Province.

3. Acaputla, a Town of the Natives, situated at the Mouth of the River, and being as it were, the Port-Town to St. Salvador.

4. Trinidad, a Town of great resort, being the greatest Empory and Place of Traffick for all sorts of Commodities, betwixt the People of New Spain and those of Peru.

5. St. Michaels, two or three Leagues distant from the Bay Fonseca, upon the South Sea.

6. Xeres de la Frontera, on the Confines of this Province, towards the Borders of Nicaragua, besides several Villages which we shall have occasion to mention.

In the middle of a Lake within this Territory is an Island, on which the Indians had a Tradition, That a Man no sooner set his Foot but he died immediately: Which Opinion of theirs was chang’d when the Spaniards went thither in Boat-fulls and return’d safe again, with Relation that they had seen a large Stone Image, resembling a Woman; before which lay the Ashes and Bones of slain People.

Round about the Village Guaymoco grow great Balsom-Trees, which afford Timber of fifty five Foot long. From this Village leads a Way to the City Salvador, near which the fore-mention’d River Guachapa runs with so many windings, that the Traveller is forc’d to cross the same several times before he can come to the Foot of a Mountain which formerly cast out terrible Flames; but now the combustible Matter being consum’d, there appears onely a great Hole on the top, with Ashes in a large compass round about it. At the Foot of the same are two Pits, one of which smoaks continually in such a manner, that it stifles all those that approach it; yet the Mountain is well overspread with Cedars and Pine-Trees.

Three Leagues farther lies the Village Nixapa; and not far from thence the Hill Elmal Pais, which consists of great Stones and Ashes, wonderfully mixt together: No less wonderful is a Brook which flows in the Night till Morning, and then sinks into the Ground: And in the Countrey Choluteca is another, which hides it self at Noon, and appears again towards Night. The Cavern which formerly produc’d Fire and Smoke, now affords good Water to the Village Curcatan, and City Salvador: Near the Village Yztepegve are five Springs, which cast up Allom and Sulphur. The Natives Chontales which speak several Languages, flock to the Village Mimilla, to make Offerings; not far from hence are two Pits, one of which is full of boyling Water, and the other as cold as Ice: Moreover, Cocori lies near a high Mountain, on the top of which is a very turbulent Lake.

Havens.

The chiefest Haven of this Countrey, which lies along the South-Sea, is Bahia de Fonseca, Discover’d by Gonsalves Davila, Anno 1522. and so nam’d from Joan Rodrigas de Fonseca, Bishop of Burgos; In the middle thereof appears the Island Petronella, with nine others, of which four are inhabited by Indians.

The good conveniency of the Haven Fonseca, induc’d some of the Spaniards to make a new Passage from the side of the Southern Ocean, to the Northern, viz. from Panama to Nombre de Dios, designing it to reach from the said Haven Fonseca, unto Puerto de Carellos, which are distant one from the other forty five Leagues; most of it good way, except some over-grown Mountains, which might be made passable with little trouble; to which purpose they built the Town Buena Esperanca, yet nevertheless the Work remain’d unprosecuted.

There are moreover reckon’d as appertaining to Guatimala, the small Provinces Soconusco, Suchitepec, and Chilulteca, the chief of them being Soconusco, to which belongs the Town of Gevetlan, where the Spanish Governor hath his Residence; the rest seem to be onely small Territories about Towns of the same Name, in like manner as St. Salvador, and St. Miguel before-mention’d.

CHAP. V.
The Kingdom of Mexico, or New-Spain.

Bounds of New-Spain.

New Spain, the chiefest part of the Northern America, reckons in length from the East-Point of Yucatan, to the place where Mechoacon juts against Guadalajara three hundred and sixty Leagues; and in breadth from the Northern parts of Panucos, to the Southern Ocean, a hundred and eighty Leagues; besides a great part which lies to the Northward, behind inaccessable Mountains and Wildernesses; inhabited by the Tepecuaenes, Guachucules, Cacatequas, Tecaxquines, and others; and was, before the Spaniards Conquer’d and Dismember’d it, much larger than now it is; for as much as it comprehended the whole Province of New-Gallicia, and reach’d from the furthest Point of the Peninsula of Jucatan Southward as far as New-Biscay, and the Confines of California Northward; containing in length seven hundred Leagues and more, and about half as much in breadth: But since the Conquest by Hernando Cortez and his Followers, the whole Countrey of New-Gallicia is taken from it, and made a distinct Government or Audiencia, as the Spaniards call it, of it self.

The Original.

The Natives of the Countrey are of the Race of the Chichimecæ, a Salvage and Wilde sort of People, of the Province of New-Gallicia, especially in the Parts of New-Biscay, living in Forests and in deep Caves under Ground; whose Posterity do still at this day much trouble and annoy the Countrey thereabouts; notwithstanding all the endeavors of the Spaniards, and the Garrisons which they keep in those parts on purpose to destroy them. About five hundred years ago, or more, according to the account of the Mexican Annals, divers Hoards, as they are call’d, of these Chichimecæ, weary, it seems, of their Woods and subterraneous dwellings, issu’d out into the more open Air, and fell down in huge multitudes into these Southerly parts of America, which are now call’d Mexico and New-Spain; not all at once, but at several times, and under several names, viz. of the Suchimilci, Chalcæ, Tepanecæ, Tlascaltecæ, and others, who subduing or driving out the People they found in those parts, Seated themselves in their room: And though at first every Nation or Company of them, as they came, seiz’d upon some Province apart by themselves, and held it, as it were, in Soveraignty to themselves, without acknowledgement of any dependance or subjection to their Neighbors, or those that were there before them; yet in Tract of time, and by fortune of the Wars, which they made one upon another, they fell under the Government of one King, viz. the King of Mexico, which was the chief City of the Province.

The state of the Mexican Kingdom before the Spaniards arrival.

This Kingdom, at the time that the Spaniards first Discover’d the Countrey, was Govern’d by a Prince, nam’d Motezuma; one, who by his Valor and good success in the Wars, had in a few years of his Reign, before the Spaniards came thither, subdu’d the better part of a hundred Cities and great Towns to his Dominion; and held in actual submission to his Government, and Tributary to him, no less than thirty several Casiques or petty Princes; every one of which paid him Tribute, and were able upon occasion to bring into the Field an hundred thousand Men: He is said to have been, for his Person, a wise and good Prince, just, affable, and tender of his Subjects good: but by reason of some heavy exactions, which his own power, and the Practise of his Ancestors before him, gave him the confidence to Impose upon the Conquer’d People, a great part of his Subjects liv’d but unwillingly under his Obedience, and rather by constraint than otherwise: being also further exasperated against him by one barbarous Custom, which the Mexicans frequently us’d, viz. the Sacrificing of Men. Their manner was, whensoever they had any solemn occasion of doing Honor to their Devil-god Vitzilopuchtli, as they call him, to send out an Army of Men from Mexico, into some of the subdu’d Provinces, (in case they had no Enemies nearer Hand) and to fetch in as many Men as they thought good, to be Sacrific’d; whose flesh likewise afterwards they did eat in a solemn Banquet. This being a business of their Satanical Religion, and Motezuma a Prince extremely Superstitious and Devoted to the Service of his gods, it is said, that he Sacrific’d commonly, one year with another, twenty thousand Men, and some years, upon extraordinary occasions, not less than fifty thousand: So great and grievous a Tyranny, by the just Judgement and Permission of Almighty God, for their great and unnatural sins, did the Enemy of Mankind exercise upon them. He was likewise much given to Women, but it was onely to such as were counted his Wives; of which he is said to have had no less than a hundred and fifty with Child by him at one time.

The bounds of the Mexican Kingdom.

Riches of Mexico.

The Bounds of this Kingdom at present are thus; on the East it hath a large Arm of the Sea, which they call The Bay of New-Spain, or The Gulf of Mexico; On the West, it hath some parts of New-Gallicia, and Mare del Zur; on the North, the rest of New-Gallicia, and part of Florida; and on the South, Mare del Zur again, and part of Guatimala. It extendeth it self in length from Jucatan South-East, to the Borders of New Gallicia Northward, above eight hundred Italian Miles, and in breadth, from Panuco to the South Sea, about half so much. It lieth wholly under the Torrid Zone: nor is it a Countrey generally so mountainous or high seated, as some others of America are but for the most part level or low; yet is it so fann’d, (for three parts at least of four, by the cooling Blasts of the Sea, and the Heats otherwise so moderated with frequent Rains, which it hath constantly three Moneths in the Year, viz. June, July, and August) that the Air is rendred thereby exceeding temperate, and the Climate not unhealthful, especially to temperate Bodies, and such as are never so little us’d to it. A goodly Countrey it is, of inexhaustible Wealth and Riches, whether we regard the Mynes of Gold, Silver, Brass, Iron, &c. of all which it hath many, and very good; or the Fruits of the Earth, abundance of Cattel, plenty of Corn and Grain, of which they have two Harvests; or any other Commodities and Endowments of Nature, which serve for the enriching of the World. Amongst other things, it affords Cassia, the Fruit whereof is a thing well known, and much commended by the Apothecaries for its use in Physick, especially in Purgations, and removing of all Obstructions of Phlegm, Choler, &c. Such store of Balm, Amber, all sorts of Gums and precious Liquors, as no Countrey in the World is better furnish’d with excellent Perfumes and Physick, than the Kingdom of New Spain.

Tunas-Tree.

Among the many other sorts of Trees which this Countrey produces, the most remarkable is their Tunas, of which, there being five kinds, one is call’d Cumbeba, from whence proceeds that admirable Tincture, commonly known by the Name of Cochinele, which is thus made: On the top of this Tree is found a Worm, which hath the bigness and shape of a great Louse, which so increases, that in one years time a hundred Trees shall be stock’d from the seed of one of these Animals. The Worm it self being white, after the Skin is carefully pull’d off, put in cold Water or Ashes, and so dry’d, becomes Cochinele. The best sort of it is to be had in Tlascala, and that in so great a quantity, that no less than five or six hundred Arrobes of Spanish Measure (each Arrobe is as much as five English Bushels) is yearly Transported thence. The other sort, which grows on the Mountains, and that which is not so carefully gather’d, call’d Chichimecas, Dyes not so well as the right Cochinele. The Tunas also bears a Fruit long and whitish, with a smooth Shell, and full of little Seeds like Figs: The red, which are inferior in taste to the white, colours the Urine red.

Pine-Apples.

The Pine-Apples which grow here differ from the Spanish, for the Pulp is not inclos’d in a Shell: They have a pleasant smell, and a Pulp, which if eaten much of, causes an Appetite, it being of a tartish taste; they keep good a long time when Salted.

Fruit Cacao.

But much more beneficial is the Cacao, with which Fruit New Spain drives a great Trade; nay, serves for Coin’d Money. When they deliver a Parcel of Cacao, they tell them by five, thirty, and a hundred. Their Charity to the Poor never exceeds above one Cacao-Nut. The chief reason for which this Fruit is so highly esteem’d, is for the Chocolate, which is made of the same, without which the Inhabitants (being so us’d to it) are not able to live, notwithstanding it causes Phlegm and Vomiting to those that are strangers thereto. When the English Commander Thomas Candish coming into the Haven Guatulco, burnt two hundred thousand Tun of Cacao, it prov’d no small loss to all New Spain, the Provinces Guatimala and Nicaragua not producing so much in a whole year. The Trees on which this Fruit grows are divided into four sorts, differing in bigness and shape: all of them are very tender, for they will not onely grow in no place but on their usual Ground, but cannot endure the cold Nights Storms, or excesses of Heat; wherefore the Cacao-Trees which grow out of the Fruit that falls off, come to no perfection, except in shady and warm Valleys; which is also the reason why the Planters of New Spain plant the great Leafy Tree Cacaoquanthly (that is, The Mother of the Cacao’s) near the Cacao-Tree, that it may the better grow under the Shadow thereof; in which manner whole Woods are planted: In the second year it bears Fruit, which is first ripe in January, and again in the midst of Summer. Amongst the four sorts the chiefest is Quathuitl, of an indifferent heighth, and full of sharp-pointed Leaves, which are fast to the Boughs without Stalks, and bears a great Flower of a yellowish colour, which falling off, leaves long, tough, and hairy Threds behind them, out of which grows the Cacavently, a Fruit which is oval, heavy like a Melon, of a Saffron-colour, of a fat and thick Juice, a bitterish, yet pleasant taste, and very cooling; being dry’d in the Sun it is thereby made fit to keep; it is likewise highly esteem’d, because the Chocolate is made of the same. Before the Spaniards made themselves Masters of Mexico, no other Drink was esteem’d but that of the Cacao; none caring for Wine, notwithstanding the Soil produces Vines every where in great abundance of it self. But besides the Quathuil, New Spain hath three other sorts of Cacao-Trees, viz. Mecanal, pleasant to behold for its heighth, large Leaves and Fruit; the next is the Xochucaual, which is less than the former; and lastly the least sort, which is call’d Halcacahual. The Fruit of these four sorts of Trees, though differing in shape, yet is all one in power and operation.

The Spaniards to make Chocolate mix Maiz (by the Mexicans call’d Tlaolli) either whole or Ground, or boyl’d before with Chalk. Moreover, they put the red Kernels also in the Drink, which grow in the Fruit of the Achiote-Tree. Of the Kernels, which are dry and cooling, boyl’d in Water, and stirr’d till it comes to a Pap, they make Cakes, which mix’d with the Chocolate, gives it a cleansing power, and takes away all tastes that cause vomiting.

The Pepper Mecaxochite, which grows creeping along the Earth, with long and fragrant Leaves, round Stalks, hairy Roots, and three long Cods which shoot upwards. This Pepper tempers the over-cooling property of the Chocolate. Lastly, it consists also of Xochinacatlis, Tlilxochitle, and the Rozenish Gum, Holli. The Xocinacatli is a Tree with small Leaves, and great Flowers hanging on long Stalks that bend downwards, within of a purple, and without of a dark-green colour, of a sweet smell, and resembling an Ear; and this Flower also gives a pleasant taste and wholsom operation to the Chocolate. The Tlilxochitle runs up to the tops of Trees like Ivy; the Flowers, of a darkish brown colour, cleanse the Nerves, strengthen the Brain, and take away the rawness of the Stomach. The Holli drops out of the Holquabuytle, a smooth barky Tree full of Moisture, which at first appearance is white, then yellowish, and lastly black, which kneaded into round Balls and Roasted, is a remedy against a Loosness and soreness of the Bowels.

Nature of the People.

The Natives of the Countrey are very ingenious in divers mechanical Arts, especially in making of Feather-Pictures, a piece of Curiosity wherein they are held to be incomparably, or rather inimitably excellent; and so industrious at it, that although the Americans generally are not a People over-much addicted to any kind of Labor or Study, yet at this they will sit a whole day together, without either Meat or Drink, onely out of a natural affection they have to the Work, and a desire to be excellent in it; The Countrey indeed affords them great variety of Birds and other Fowl, of most rare and exquisite Colours, which is a great advantage to their Skill, and helps much to the accomplishment of their Work. They Paint likewise very curiously upon their Cottons; and are held to be generally the best Goldsmiths in the World; of most perfect skill in the purging and refining of all sorts of Metals, but especially of Gold and Silver: And yet in other things so strangely stupid and ignorant, that when the Spaniards first appeared amongst them, not a few of them (as ’tis reported) took the Horse and Man both for one Creature; and when the Horse Neighed, they would enquire very seriously what he said.

Lakes of New-Spain.

There are likewise many fair Lakes in this Province, but the principal are those of Chapala and Mexico: the former of which is in the more Northern parts of the Kingdom, towards the Borders of New Gallicia, and is chiefly famous for the abundance of good Salt that is yearly made and Transported thence. The other of Mexico is one of the largest and goodliest in the World, of circular form (as some say) little less than nine hundred Miles in compass, environ’d with the main Land, the Peninsula, or Cape of Florida, Jucatan, and the Island Cuba, having two onely Passages in and out, and both of them well fortifi’d: the one betwixt the Point of Jucatan and the Isle Cuba, where the Tyde violently enters; and the other betwixt the said Island and the Cape of Florida, where it goeth as violently out: upon which Gulf the King of Spain hath always some good Ships in readiness for all occasions; and by them, ’tis suppos’d, he doth more assure his Estates in those parts of America, than by all the Garrisons besides.

The whole Kingdom of Mexico, or New Spain, is subdivided into these Inferior Provinces:

The several Provinces.

1. The Arch-bishoprick of Mexico. 2. The Bishoprick, Mechoacon. 3. Los Angelos, or Tlascale. 4. Guaxaca. 5. The Lordship Panuco: And 6. the Province Tabasco.

Mexico, the chief Province of New-Spain, so denominated from Mexico the chief City, not only of the Province, but of all America; lying between Tlascale and Mechoacan, extends in length from North to South, a hundred and seventeen Leagues; and in breadth along the Southern Ocean, seventeen, but up in the Countrey, fifty four Leagues: In which circumference lie to the North-East, Lateotlalpa, Mextitlan, Xilotepeque, and Panuco; Westward, Matalzingo, and Cultepeque; Eastward, Tuzcoco; South-East, Chalco; Southward, Suchimilco, Tlaluc, Coyxca, and Acapulco.

Bounds of Mexicana.

It is bounded on the East, with the Gulf of Mexico; on the West, with Mechoacan; on the North, with Panuco, and some parts of New-Gallicia; and on the South, with Tlascalla.

Nature of the Countrey.

This Countrey is both large and rich, containing not much less than one hundred and thirty Leagues, both in length and breadth; and if it yields any thing to Peru in the plenty of Gold and Silver, ’tis certain it much excels it in many other Commodities; as namely, in all sorts of Fruits, abundance of Cattel, plenty of Corn and Grain; in all which, the advantage this Countrey hath, not only of Peru, but of all the other Provinces of America beside, is well known: Not to speak any thing of the great plenty and variety of good Fish, which both the Rivers and Lakes of this Countrey afford, which is very great; insomuch, that the very Tribute of the one Lake of Mexico is said to yield an Income of above twenty thousand Crowns yearly, one with another.

The People of the Countrey are generally Industrious and Active, especially since the Spaniards came among them; rich Merchants, if they apply themselves to it; and they say likewise good Soldiers, when they are train’d and imploy’d that way.

Chief Towns of Mexicana.

The chief Towns and places of the Province are, 1. Mexico, both anciently and at present, the Metropolis and Capital City; being the Seat of an Archbishop, and the ordinary Residence of the Vice-Roy, and chief Governors of New-Spain.

Description of the City Mexico.

This City, by the Indians was formerly call’d Tenustatan, lies in nineteen Degrees and a half to the Northward of the Equinoctial-Line, rais’d out of a brackish Lake, full of muddy Water; whose circumference along the Mountains is seventy Leagues: This Lake swarms continually with Boats, which carry the People to and again from one inhabited Island to another; four Stone-bridges, no less costly than artificial, with Arches and Gates in several places, lead from the City to the Main Continent.

The fresh Water which they have in the City Mexico, is led into the same through Pipes that lie in the bottom of the Lake; but none are to enjoy the benefit thereof, before they have paid a certain Sum of Money to the King’s Collectors.

Moreover, the City divided into Islands, contains above sixty thousand Houses, which being built on several Isles, have large Bridges, which reach from one to another; some that lie in the middle of the Lake, they approach in little Boats; round about the Lake, especially where the way leads from the Continent into the City, lie several Suburbs, all inclos’d with Walls; between which stand strong Towers, cover’d on the top: To keep off the force of the Water, the Tenustatans have with great labor and charge, made a Bank through the Lake, half way along the City: But the Lake Laguna, from whose bottom Mexico is rais’d, is divided in two parts, the Sweet Lake, which is higher than the Salt, falls in to the same through Sluces, with Bridges built on the Bank that leads from the City to the main Land: The Salt-Lake, which hath brackish and bitter Water, ebbs and flows according as the Wind blows; no Fish is able to live in the same, because the Water which in the sight of Mexico falls into the same out of the Mountains, hath a sulphury Ground: All along the shore, much Salt is made, with which the Citizens drive a great Trade: There are continually above a hundred thousand Boats (by the Indians call’d Acales, and by the Spaniards, Canoos) going off and on from one shore to another: The fresh Water Lake, which is bigger than the salt, and feeds small Fishes, hath above fifty Suburbs about the same, of which, some boast five thousand, and others ten thousand Houses: Nay, the Suburb Tescuco, in former times was no way inferior to Mexico in bigness; since the Spaniards have been Masters of this City, they stopt up many Moats, to inlarge their narrow Streets.

Besides three publick Markets, every open place affords all sorts of Provisions daily; the Indians call the Markets Tianguystly, and the Spaniards, Tianguez; the first and chiefest stands in Tatelulco, adorn’d with Galleries on three sides; in the middle of this Square, which is accounted the biggest in the World, stands next to the place of Execution, a stately Fountain; the Tents which are every Week pitch’d up here for Trade, amount to above thirty thousand. The second Market call’d St. John’s, is in Mexico, and swarms continually with People. The third is call’d Hipolito, from the Guardian-Saint of the City, whither every Wednesday and Thursday comes such a multitude of People, that this spacious Market is too little for them; for the sale of every Commodity, a peculiar corner is allotted; but great Packs are left to be dispos’d of in Boats, which lie near the shore.

At the four corners of the City, at present call’d St. John, St. Maria la Rotonda, St. Pablo, and St. Sebastian, are above four thousand Spanish Families, and thirty thousand Indians, besides what inhabit Tatelulco, now St. Jago.

The Temperature of the Air.

The Air in this place is very strange; in the day time, the Sky is generally Serene; the North Wind against the Evening brings Rain, of which the Mountain Tepeaquilla lying a little League beyond the City, gives certain Testimonies; for when a black Cloud appears on the top thereof, it is certain to be blown from thence over Mexico with Rain: After a moist Evening follows a Star-light Night, and a pleasant Morning: From September till May, it is generally dry Weather here, but if it chances to Rain, the Rain is attended with a Storm, which occasions a sulphurous Fogg, very unwholsom, and so dark, that one Man cannot discern another, and causes a pain through all the Limbs, nay sometimes Death it self; wherefore, whensoe’re it approaches, every one keeps close in his House, or goes into the Countrey.

Moreover, it is worthy of observation, how strangely this City is alter’d since its being Conquer’d by the Spaniards, and especially when Anno 1629. it was overflow’d by a mighty Deluge; which alteration by Barnabe Cabo, in a Letter to the Jesuite Hernande Leon, is thus set forth:

Barnabe Cabo, his Description of Mexico.

Mexico overflow’d.

Mexico, says he, lying in a Valley between high Mountains, hath seventy Leagues in circumference: The Valley being Oval, is for the most part interspers’d with Lakes, which the Indians, and after them the Spaniards have digg’d, only the Lake which washes Mexico is natural; and to stop the Water-falls, there are Banks and Sluces every where: The Flood before Mexicalcingo flows a Fathom and a half higher than before Mexico. The four other Lakes to the Northward have much more Water than the Mexicalcingo, of which, some have scarce four, others but three Leagues in circumference; when as Mexicalcingo’s Lake reckons fifteen, and Mexico’s sixteen. On the breaking of the Banks, Mexico hath often suffer’d great damage, wherefore the Vice-Roy de Valesco took special care to make a vent for the Water through the lowest Mountains; whereupon the Countrey being Survey’d, the Northern Coast near the Village Gueguenoca, was found to be the most convenient. But about the manner of letting the Water out, the Surveyors could no ways agree; most of them were of opinion to dig Channels, into which the Lakes might discharge their Waters; others, thought best to make a Gutter under Ground, which last Valesco put in hand with unhappy success, because the Laborers who under-min’d the Ground, were choak’d with the falling in of the Sand, or stifled with the sulphurous Vapors rising out of the Earth: Nevertheless, they gave not over the Work, though they began it quite another way, for a French-Man, call’d Henry Martin, advis’d to deepen the River Quaiotitlan, which falls into the Laguna, and by that means make it a Bay, into which the Laguna might pour her over-charg’d Waters: Which design, though contradicted by the Jesuit John Sanchez, was put in practice; by which means the Water fell in a short time so much, that they could walk dry to the Cliff El Ponnel, lying a League from the City; wherefore they continually labour’d on this Work, till such time Conde de Getues came over for Vice-Roy, who judg’d the Charge to be unnecessary, nay Commanded the Ditches to be broken down, which stopt the Water along the Silver Mines of Pachuca, that he might see exactly how much it would over-flow Mexico: After which the Flood rose yearly higher and higher; till at last, Anno 1629. a mighty Rain falling, swole the Laguna in such a manner, that it over-whelm’d all Mexico, wash’d down the Houses, all Merchandizes which could not endure the Water, were spoil’d, and had not they had innumerable Boats to help them, thousands of People might have perish’d in this Deluge: But at last, Henry Martin restor’d again the fore-mention’d Channel to its former Perfection, and brought the Flood which fell down out of the Mountains within the Banks of the River.

Stately Palaces.

Quantitlan digg’d also a Channel of eight thousand Fathom long, and made an Arch’d Sewer under Ground of the same length, which Sewer hath at every two hundred Fathoms distance, Vent-holes, and a hole of sixty Fathom deep, and by this means, diverting abundance of Water, they dry’d Mexico in a short time: When the Banks and Streets began no sooner to appear, but they fell to work to raise the Ground, and to lay Bridges, and also to build more Boats. The Citizens likewise found it convenient to make another deep Sewer for the carrying away of more Water, notwithstanding it requir’d twenty years labor. The River, which in a manner runs through the middle of the City, is curb’d by a Wall; a crooked Bridge, with many Arches, and of a long extent, leads to the City, in which stand many brave Palaces, with pleasant Walks of Trees about them; the Cloysters of several Orders of Fryers, appear with high Spires and Turrets, above all other Buildings.

And Monasteries.

The Franciscans have here four very sumptuous Buildings: The first, Consecrated to St. Francis, stands in the uppermost part of Mexico, within a large square Court, and on each a pleasant Walk of Trees: The Cloyster it self is very high, and trebble Wall’d, with Towers and Galleries about it: In the middle of the City stands another Tower’d-Cloyster, call’d St. Jago. The third lies a little distance from it, which being built long, hath a stately Turret, and is call’d Maria de Rodonda. The fourth, not far from the first, but much smaller, is nam’d San Diego; these belong to the Franciscans. The Augustin Monks are also no way inferior to the Franciscans, for magnificent Structures, with spacious Halls, high Towers, and rich Balconies: The first is denominated from St. Augustine, just behind which appears San Pabla, less stately than the rest. St. Sebastian, near the Laguna, is built in manner like a Church, whose Tower ends like a Pyramid. The Cloyster San Cruz, belonging also to the Augustines, built square, stands near the Market, in the middle of which stands a stately Fountain: The Court within inviron’d with thick Walls, amazes the beholders by the pleasantness of its situation.

Moreover, the Dominicans inhabit two brave Cloysters; the chiefest Dedicated to St. Dominic, is eight square; to which is adjoyning a pretty large Church, with a Steeple: The second, which stands on one side of St. Jago, and consists of three several Structures, is call’d Collegio de Porta Cœli. Opposite to St. Jago, near the great Market the Jesuits have a stately Colledge, or High-School, where many are brought up in the Latin and Greek Tongues, whence it is call’d, Casa Professa Les Estudios.

There is also another Habitation of Religious Men, call’d Illefonse Sanna Noviciad, which for State, may vie with any Royal Palace.

Cloysters belonging to the Monks of La Merced.

The Monks of La Merced dwell in two Cloysters, both Consecrated to the Virgin Mary, yet Sirnam’d Montseratte, and Carmel: The first lying not far from the River, is a mean Structure, in comparison to the last; the uppermost Tower of whose Temple appears above all other Buildings, in the upper part of Mexico near the Cloyster of St. Francis.

Womens Cloysters.

The Women have also fourteen Cloysters here, the chiefest whereof is Dedicated to Catharine of Siena; but much more splendid is that of Santa Teresa, built like an Imperial Palace; famous for its stately Gardens, and round Fountain, which continually spouts Water. The rest, which we shall onely name, are La Encarnacio, Santa Ines, Jesus-Maria, Laurenso, Las Des-calcas, Santa Clara, Juan de la Penitentia, Regina Cœli, Santa Monica, las Rocogidas, Jeronymo, and Conceptione; besides the Almshouses, Real de los Indios, and Nostra Senora del Amor: There are likewise eight Hospitals, viz. de Dios, del Spiritu Santo, Juan de Doys, de la Misericordia, de san Hippolito, and de san Lazaro. The three chief Churches bear the Name of Catharine, Martin, and Vera Cruz; and the Clergy-men thereto belonging, enjoy many stately Palaces, amongst which are Juan de Lateran, de Christo, and las Nivas.

The Vice-Roy’s Palace and Arch-bishop’s Seat.

The Residence of the Vice-Roy which lies near the Dominican Cloyster, Porto Cœli, is so sumptuous a Structure, that it may stand in competition with any of those Edifices which were so much cry’d up by the Ancients; nevertheless, it is not to be compar’d to the Arch-bishop’s Seat, built round like a Theatre, whose Luster expresses the Quality of him that inhabits the same, he being Governor of the Bishopricks of Fascala, Guaxaca, Mechaocan, New Galicia, Chiapa, Yucatan, Guatimala, Verapaz, and the Philippinas. This marvellous Structure was begun by Ferdinand Cortesius, but was finish’d by Sebastian Ramires de Fuenleal; and not much inferior thereunto is the Casa de Cabildo Alameda.

The gallantry of Mexico at this day.

At present, Mexico is thought to be one of the richest Cities of the World, abounding (if reports be true) in all kind of voluptuous gallantry and bravery, even to excess: It is suppos’d to contain about six or seven Miles in compass, and to consist of above an hundred thousand Houses or Families, whereof not the tenth part Spaniards, but those that are, all Gentlemen, at least as to their garb and manner of living; for they live most splendidly in all respects, both for Diet and Apparel.

For the first, we have spoken so much already of the general plenty of all things in the Kingdom of New-Spain, that pertain to this part of pleasure, that it is not to be doubted: And for the second this may be some instance, viz. that it is no extraordinary matter to see an Hat-band or Role all of Diamonds, in some ordinary Gentlemans Hat; and of Pearl among the common Citizens and Tradesmen. The Coaches (which most Gentlemen keep) almost cover’d with Gold and Silver, richly beset with Precious Stones, and within ordinarily lin’d with Cloth of Gold, or the best China Silk that can be gotten; of which Coaches, in time of year, at the Alameda, as they call it, which is, as it were, The Hide-Park of Mexico, and a place made of purpose for recreation and delight, a Man shall observe not seldom, above a thousand or two thousand Coaches, full of Ladies and Gallants coming thither onely to take the Air, and their Pleasure, both the one and the other attended with a numerous Train of Servants and Mulattoes of both Sexes. In la Plateria, which is but onely one Street in Mexico, nigh to the Vice-Roy’s Palace, in less than half an hours space: with the turn of an Eye, you may see Millions of Wealth in Gold, Silver, and Precious Stones, in the Goldsmiths and Jewellers Shops thereabouts. In a word, there is nothing hinders Mexico from being the most absolute City in the World for delight and bravery, but onely two Inconveniences to which it is subject: The one is the danger of the Lake, with the Infalls whereof it may seem to be almost continually threatned, and in the Year 1629. did actually suffer a very great calamity, the Waters breaking through the Banks, and drowning a great part of the City, with the destruction of much People, and the loss of all their Goods intirely, through the avarice (as is suppos’d) of the Vice-Roy that then was, and some other of the King’s Officers, who diverted the Money that should have been employ’d for the fortifying and repairing of the Banks, to their own proper uses: The other is from the nature of the Soil and Ground it self on which it standeth; which is found to have a tincture of Sal Nitre in it, somewhat strong; and the Winds partly from the Lake it self, and partly from the Hills about it, raising the Dust of this Earth constantly every Evening, for many Moneths of the Year together, so violently, that the Air is even darkned therewith for some time: The Inhabitants are much annoy’d by it, and made subject to divers Hypocondriacal Pains and Infirmities, and sometimes kill’d with it, especially such as either cannot, or care not much to avoid it.

The City lieth about sixty Leagues, or a hundred and fifty Miles distant from the Atlantick or North Sea, from whence by the Port of St. John d’Ullua, or Vera Crux, (which are the usual Landing-places) there is a fair and easie March to Mexico, by the Cities of Xalabar, Perotta, Puebla de los Angelos, and Tlascalla, all of them open and unfortifi’d Places, (as likewise Mexico it self) and the Countrey round about very rich and well accommodated with all things.

City Chulula.

The next City of note in ancient times was Chulula, which being built in a fruitful Plain, had above twenty thousand Dwelling-houses, and as many more Banquetting-houses. The number of the Temples and Turrets were equal with that of the days in the Year: The Government thereof belong’d to a Mayor and six Aldermen, and one chief Priest; for they never went upon the least Design before they had been at their Devotion; in which the Priest’s Office was onely to perfume the Idols four times in twenty four hours, viz. in the Morning, at Noon, after Sun-set, and at Midnight; at which times none durst be absent, but they us’d also a cruel Exercise on themselves, and one much more cruel on others, for on usual Feast-days they abstain’d from Meat, Drink, and Sleep, scourg’d their Bodies with knotted Cords after a miserable manner, evacuated their Seed, that so they might curb all fleshly Desires, and met every Night in a spacious place, where sitting down they wounded themselves with Lances in their Legs and Arms, so long till the Blood gush’d out of the same; which gathering in a Cup, they anointed their Temples therewith, and dipt the Lances in the same, and then hung them up before the Temple in Bundles of Straw. Of these were a great number, and the more, because they never us’d their Lances but once. But on these Days, which were Consecrated to the Idol Tezcatlipuca, every one besides the Priests wore a new Rope made of the Hemp Mangey, of a Fathom long, and a thick Knot at the end, with which they beat themselves so miserably on their Backs, as if they intended to have broken them: After which the Priests stay’d five days in the Temple, in which they us’d the like cruelty, eating scarce once in twenty four hours.

Their Prisoners they us’d after a most horrid manner, viz. in their Temples stood a round Stage of Stone; to the top of which they ascended by a Square Scaffold, supported by twenty eight Pillars; behind which appear’d thousands of Mens Heads, and amongst them the Prisoners that were to be Offer’d sat stark naked, and guarded by several Armed Men; three Foot from the Steps which led up to the top of the Scaffold, stood a pyramidical Stone, (by the Indians call’d Quauxicalli) and behind it two round Chappels, cover’d on the top like Mitres, each had four Holes in a large Gate, in which sat a horrid Representation, worshipp’d by six Priests call’d Chackalmua, whereof one call’d Papas, or Topilzin, whose Office was to pluck out the Hearts of the Prisoners, being in greatest esteem, wore a red Mantle about his Body, not unlike a long Coat, with broad Fringe, which trail’d after him upon the Ground, and also a Crown of green and yellow Plumes on his Head; his Ears and under Lip were likewise adorn’d with Precious Stones: The other five appear’d in like manner with their Hands and Faces painted red, but having Leathern Fascia’s about their Heads, and white Coats stitch’d with Black on their Bodies, they might easily be distinguish’d from the Topilzin; who on a sudden ran down the Stairs to the Prisoners, and shew’d each of them an Image, (saying, This is your God) made of Bledo Paste, Maiz and Honey, green Beads for Eyes, and Grains of Maiz for Teeth: whereupon the Prisoners were led up, and laid with their Backs on the sharp Stone Quauxicalli; then the five Priests took hold of their Leggs, Arms and Head, put woodden Collars about the Sufferer’s Necks, whilst the Topilzin shew’d Reverence to the Idol; which done, with a sharp Stone he cut open the Breasts of the Prisoners, who in a deplorable condition lay on the pyramidical Stone, and pulling their Hearts out of their Bodies, shew’d the same reeking to the Sun, and at last threw them toward the Idol, and the dead Bodies down the Stairs, where some appointed for that purpose carried the same away; but every one taking his own Prisoner, and roasting and boyling him, serv’d him up to his Friends as a great Dainty.

This kind of Murdering was not onely us’d amongst the Mexicans, but also by all the other neighboring Indians, and especially in the City Chulula, which (as we have said before) signifies The Sanctity of all the Gods: for in this Town six thousand Children were yearly Offer’d.

The Citizens hereof us’d to drive a great Trade, especially in Cochinele.

Their Habits were several; for Persons of Note wore Cotton Coats, about the Edges of which hung Feathers and pieces of Cony-skins: the meaner sort went in Nequons, or a sort of Linnen Coats made of the hairy Leaves of the Tree Maguey.

3. The City Tezuco, full of handsom Streets and fair Houses, is built near the salt Mexican Lake, yet hath no want of fresh Water, with which it is supply’d by Gutters from the Mountains under Ground, according to Anthony Herrera, it twice exceedeth in bigness the famous City Sivill in Spain.

4. Quitlavaca, by the Spaniards call’d Venezuela, (because it is, like Venice, surrounded with Water, and divided into several Isles,) boasted formerly above two thousand Families: From the Town a Cawsey of twenty Foot broad, and half a League long, leads through the Lake to the Main Continent.

5. Yztacpalapa, a very populous Place, and lying part of it in the salt Lake, and partly on the Main Land; where several fresh-water Pools afford store of Fish, two Leagues distant from Mexico, to which leads a broad Way; in the middle of which stands a Fountain, surrounded with high Trees, which produces excellent Water.

6. Mexicaltzingo, situate upon the Lake Laguna, a Town consisting of four thousand stately Houses.

7. Cayocan, in a fruitful Plain, containing six thousand, being but a League and a half from Yztacpalapa: to which the neighboring Village Houcilopucho was not much inferior.

These three Places, before they were subdu’d by the Spaniards, boasted many brave Temples and high Towers, whose lustre appear’d at a great distance, but now being turn’d into Cloysters, they are inhabited by Monks and Nuns.

The Salt made here of Earth, though not white, and onely fit to make Pickle of, is Transported to many Places.

Towns and pleasant Villages about Mexico.

About Mexico there are also several Villages, the chiefest of which are 1. Mastitlan, a Town pleasantly seated upon the top of an huge Mountain, in the midst of most delicate Groves and shady Woods, and reckon’d to contain no less than thirty thousand Inhabitants in all, dwelling either in the City, or upon the sides of the Mountain.

2. Antepecque; this is a Town belonging to the Marquess de Valle, who is of the Posterity of Cortez, and said to be seated in the most delicious place of all New Spain.

3. Acapulco, a Town seated upon the South-Sea, or Mare del Zur, yet belonging to this Province. It is a haven-Town, and one of the most frequented upon the South-Sea, situate upon a large and capacious Bay of about a League broad at the Entrance, and affording many convenient Stations and Docks for Shipping. At the bottom of the Bay Westward lieth the Town, with a strong Castle very opportunely built, both for the command and security of the Port, well wall’d and fortifi’d with Bulwarks, and having a constant Garrison of four hundred Soldiers in it, or thereabouts. The reason whereof, I suppose, may be chiefly this, viz. that from this Port there is the greatest Traffick and Entercourse held betwixt the East and West-Indies, together with the Philippine Islands.

Silver Mynes.

The Countrey hath many rich Mynes of Silver in it, and some of Gold; the chief of which are by Herera reported to be these, viz. 1. Those of Puchuca, fourteen Leagues distant from Mexico. 2. Of Tasco. 3. Talpuiana. 4. Cultepeque. 5. Zacualpa. 6. Zupanguo, and divers others.

The rest of the Villages are Guatitlan, Tenyauca, Escapusalco, Tacuba, and Suchimilco.

Strange Fountain.

The neighboring Province Xilotepeck, which is exceeding fruitful, is also famous for two Fountains, whereof one near the Village Queretaro produces boyling Water, which when cool’d, is a wholsom Drink for Cattel: The other for four years is full of Water, and for four years after it is empty; in great rainy Seasons it is quite dry, and in droughty Weather it overflows.

Between the Villages Queretaro and San Juan, is a Plain which extends it self seven Leagues in breadth, and seven in length, besides two Leagues farther beyond Quartero, where a hundred thousand Head of Cattel, and ten thousand Horses, find plentiful Pasture.

The wonderful Mountain Nevada.

The Mountain Nevada, near the City De los Angelos, deserves no small admiration; for it begins at thirty Leagues end to rise exceeding high, and being flat on the top, hath a wide gaping Mouth, whose bottom is fathomless; from which at Sun-rising and setting rises a Smoak up directly towards the Skie, but immediately after spreading like a Plume of Feathers, it is dispers’d by the Wind, and no more seen till it appears in a dusky Cloud. With the Smoak are also Ashes vomited up; yet the Mountain is very pleasantly planted with lofty Cypress, Cedar, Oak, and Pine-Trees. The neighboring Fields abound likewise with Wheat, Cotton, and Maiz. There seldom appears any Rain here.

At the Foot of this Mountain lies the Village Tepecco, famous for the Crystal and Allom gotten there. The Village Ocotlan is also maintain’d by the same: But Tuculala by Gold-Mines, and fruitful Lands, which are twice a year shaken by Earthquakes; wherefore the Inhabitants live not in Stone Houses, but in little Straw Huts.

South-Eastward from Nerada is excellent Sugar to be had, and on the Mountain it self the famous Gum Anime, which drops out of a Tree call’d Jetaiba, which is always green, with hard white Wood, a pale yellow speckled Bark, three long soft Leaves hanging one over another on one Stalk, and the Fruit on the middle of the Body. After the rainy Season is past in October, then they cut a Hole in the Body of the Tree, out of which the Gum drops: it hath a pleasant smell, and is exceeding good against the Head-ache occasion’d by Colds.

Not far from hence appears the Valleys Matalzingo and Atzompam, which have excellent Pastures, in which Diego Nunnez de Camargo bred forty thousand Sheep out of two in ten years time.

And these are the chiefest Towns, Villages, and Countreys, which surround the famous City Mexico.

The first Foundation of the City of Mexico.

Concerning the erecting of this City, the Indians relate thus: That the seventh Family of the Navatlaca’s, Extracted out of the Countrey Aztlan, rang’d up and down not without thousands of Inconveniences, from one Countrey to another, according to the Information which their Sages had given their Spirit Viztliputli, till at last some of the Priests straying from the Army, or rather Multitude, got into a Wilderness, full of Brambles and Thorns, and came at length to a Place where was a Spring of clear Water, in which the Fishes glitter’d like Silver; where taking up their repose that Night, their Spirit inform’d the oldest of them in a Dream, that they should find thereabouts a Tunal Tree (whose Leaves grow out of one another) under which, on a Stone, lay the Heart of the famous Sorcerer Copil: This Tunal Tree should be discover’d by a Crane on the top of it, which in one Foot should hold a Bird, and in the other a Bough of the Tree, near which they were to build a City: The old Priest waking, and relating his Dream, every one endeavor’d to find out the fore-mention’d Tree; at last they found it, by discovering on the top a Crane, with spread-out Wings looking up towards the Sun, and holding in his Claws a small Bird, invested with curious Feathers: Whereupon they with all speed built a Chappel of Turf and Clods of Earth, and cover’d the same with Canes, to keep their Idol from the Weather, resolving, so soon as they could, to build him a better Temple.

The Lake on whose Isles they setled, abounded with Fish and Fowls, which they exchang’d with the neighboring People for Stone and Mortar for the building of a Temple for Viztliputzli, and a new City; to which they made a Cawsey in the Lake Laguna, and divided it into four great Wards or Divisions, and subdivided them again into lesser; over which they plac’d peculiar Idols, and order’d a Crane like that which they had seen on the Tunal Tree to be their City Arms. The dividing of the Wards occasion’d great dislike amongst the Grandees, judging those to whose lot they fell, not to be worthy of them; wherefore deserting the same, and travelling along the Lake Laguna, they setled themselves at last in a sandy Soil, which they call’d Tlattellulco, and entertain’d a bitter hatred against their Countrey-men who kept the four Wards of the new Tenustitan, doing them all the mischief they could; wherefore the Assaulted were necessitated to chuse a King, that they might be the better able to oppose their Enemies: But that they might not raise a Discontent amongst themselves about electing a Governor, they judg’d it fittest to take a Foreigner; amongst whom they found none so capable of so great an Office as Acamapixtli, Grand-son to the King of Culhuacan, whereupon sending Ambassadors thither, they obtain’d their desires.

The new King was no sooner Crown’d, but he settled all things in order with great Prudence, insomuch, that Mexico grew daily to be more famous and fear’d: But this sudden growth rais’d a jealousie amongst the Neighbors, who dreaded their growing Power and Valor.

Proceedings between the Tapuneca’s and Mexicans.

The Tapunecans who were also a valiant People, being the nearest to them, and having Azcapuzalco for their chief City, made it their main design, utterly to root out the Mexicans, before they grew to be more Populous and Potent; notwithstanding they had hitherto receiv’d Tribute from them, for delivering the Lake Laguna to them, which was a quantity of Timber and Plants; yet they demanded not only more Tribute than formerly, but also in such a manner, as was thought impossible to have been perform’d, which was, that those Plants which were formerly brought to them, as growing on the Land, should be set in the Water, so as to come floating to them, as they grew, to Ascapuzalco, which if they did not pay, they should expect to be all put to the Sword. The Mexicans much amaz’d hereat, and not knowing how to produce the demanded Plants, Viztliputzli inform’d the oldest Priest, that the demands might be satisfi’d; and commanded him to throw Earth on the Water, and to Sow Seed on the same, which at the usual time produc’d Maiz, Azi, Chias, Tomates, and the like, with which the Tapunecans being satisfi’d, demand next a Goose, and a Hen which laid Eggs, out of which the young ones should appear, when on the floating Clods of Earth, the Nests came opposite to Azcapuzalco, which by the advice of Viztliputzli, they perform’d fifty years one after another. Mean while, Acamapixtli (who had inlarg’d Mexico with Streets, Palaces, Temples, and Markets) dying, would not name any one to succeed him, but left the choice of the Election to the Commonalty, who Crown’d his Son Vitzilovitli, and Marry’d him to the King of Tapunecans Daughter, that by that means they might gain his friendship, and be eas’d of their strange Annual Tribute: Whereupon Ayauchigual, the King of Tapunecans Daughter being Marry’d to Vitzilovitli, was within twelve Moneths deliver’d of a Son, which the Grand-father call’d Chimalpopoca, which signifies A Gun which gives Smoke, and afterwards was satisfi’d with two Geese, and some Fish yearly from the Mexicans, onely as an Acknowledgment that they inhabited his Countrey. Chimalpopoca loosing his Parents, in his tenth year was Crown’d King, with a Bowe and Arrows in his left Hand, and a Woodden Sword in the right: Soon after he oblig’d his Mothers Father to be kind to the Mexicans, for they being in great want for fresh Water, he had leave by Channels to bring the same out of the Mountain Chapultepec, a League distant from Mexico; to which purpose they made a Pipe of Planks, and hollow Trees joyn’d together with Clay, quite through the Lake; but this Pipe not being teight and durable, and the fresh Water by that means mixing with the Salt, they sent Agents to Azcapuzalco, to request Stones, Mortar, and Work-men to make a substantial Sewer: This message was ill resented by the Council of Azcapuzalco; What, (said they) do the Mexicans think, shall a rambling company of people, which on Charity live in anothers Countrey, Command those that Govern them to be their Servants? This grudge went so far, that at last they took a Resolution without the King’s knowledge, (for he was suspected, because of his Grand-chil’d Chimalpopoca) to forbid all manner of Trade with the Mexicans; nay, to endeavor utterly to root them out; yet some judg’d, that they ought to spare Chimalpopoca, while others on the contrary said, That he ought to be destroy’d, because his Father being a Mexican, he would to the utmost of his Power defend his People; which last being approv’d of, so troubled the King of the Tapunecans, that he dy’d of grief; for the Design being soon after put into execution, and the Tapuneca’s breaking in the Night into Chimalpopoca’s Palace, Murder’d him; which Murder made the Mexicans thirst for revenge; whereupon, setting themselves wholly against the Tapunecans, they enter’d into a League with Vezcuco, and Culhuacan, and chose Izcoalt, for his great Valor, for their King; notwithstanding Acamapixtli had begotten him on a Slave.

Izcoalts success against the Tapanecas.

Izcoalt was no sooner Crown’d, but he made great preparation for a War, though against every ones Opinion, because of the Populousness of the Tapunecans; yet it was concluded on, that they should request Peace, and a place to inhabit on the main Continent, that so they might remove from the Isles: This Request they thought could not be deny’d them in Azcapuzalco, provided the Mexicans brought their Gods thither, and wholly conform’d themselves to the manners of the Tapunecans, for otherwise they could expect nothing but utter Ruine: Yet though every one else imbrac’d the Proposal, Tlacaellel, the King’s Nephew, stiffly oppos’d it, alleging, that it did not agree with the Mexicans quality, to make so mean and slavish a Proffer; and that they had best consider, first if there were no other means to be found: and that he would willingly venture his Life in going to Azcapuzalco, as a Spie, to pry into their whole Designs and Intentions, which was perform’d accordingly; and soon after returning, he brought information, that the Tapunecans were making great preparations for War, and made no mention at all of Peace; which news struck a general fear into all Peoples Hearts; many desiring that they might save themselves by flight; but Izcoalt putting fresh courage into them, made an agreement with the People, that if he was beaten by the Tapunecans, they should eat him up; but if he prov’d Conqueror, they should all be at his Command; to which all consenting, they boldly march’d with their King to the City Azcapuzalco. The Front of the Army consisting of the prime Nobility, was led by Tlacaellel, and the Rear Izcoalt brought up, who was also to give the sign on a Drum, when they should fall upon the Enemies; who having ten Men to the Mexicans one, suddenly Sally’d out of the Gates, where they were so briskly entertain’d by Tlacaellel, that in a confus’d manner they soon ran back into the City, whither the Conqueror pursuing them, got within the Gates, where he put all to the Sword which he could meet with; some fled to a steep neighboring Mountain, whither being also follow’d, they threw down their Arms, and begg’d Quarter, to serve the Mexicans as Slaves, which was granted them, whilst Izcoalt found an unvaluable Mass of Treasure in Azcapuzalco, and distributed the Conquer’d Countrey amongst those who had behav’d themselves best.

This Conquest made the neighboring People jealous of the Mexicans, whose Success and growing Power they dreaded.

The Cuyoacans utterly subdu’d by Tlacaellel.

The Towns Tacuba and Cuyoacan, though they had Governors of their own, yet were subject to the Tapunecans, whose General advising those of Azcapuzalco to try another Encounter, they took up Arms again; but before it came to a Battel, the Cuyoacans play’d a subtile trick with the Mexicans, for inviting them to an Idolatrous Feast, after they had Eat, Drunk, and Danc’d, they forc’d them to put on Womens Apparel, to their no small disgrace and ignomy; which remain’d not unreveng’d, for the Mexicans made a Poysonous Fume in the Gates of Cuyoacan, which made Women with Child to Miscarry, and many to fall dangerously sick; yet lastly, both Parties march’d into the Fields, where whilst Izcoalt was elsewhere ingag’d, Tlacaellel marching about, came upon the backs of the Cuyoacans with such eagerness, that they fled to a strong Temple, which soon after was set on fire by Tlacaellel, who pursu’d the Enemy ten Leagues.

This Conquest stir’d up the Suchimilcos, the first Family of the Navatlaca’s, to stop the proceedings of the Mexicans, that they might not, as they had already done to others, fall upon them; to which purpose they thought to surprize the Conquering Army; but Tlacaellel who led the Van, march’d in good Order to meet the Suchimilcos, fell resolutely upon their whole Army, and after a short conflict, put them to flight, and took the City Suchimilco for Izcoalt, who being Crown’d King there, Commanded the Conquer’d to make a direct Road betwixt Suchimilco and Mexico, of four Leagues long, both, that a Trade might the easier be drove between these two Cities, and to keep them the better in awe: Notwithstanding these examples, Cuytlavacan, a City built at the Lake Laguna, trusting to the abundance of Boats, which the Citizens knew how to use with great dexterity, daily molested Mexico with them by Water, whereupon Izcoalt resolv’d to send his Victorious Army thither, but Tlacaellel opposing the same, promis’d to subdue the Rebelling City with a considerable number of Boys, which had skill in the managing of a Canoo, which being permitted him, he accordingly made himself Master of Cuytlavacan, from whence the Boys brought a great Booty, and divers Prisoners, whom they sent as an Offering to Vitzlipultzli.

Tezcuco submits to the Mexicans.

These unheard of Victories being spread far and near, mov’d Tezcuco after several Skirmishes and Conflicts with Tlacaellel, to submit to the Mexican King, who chose the Governor thereof for his Prime Councellor. Izcoalt Deceasing, after having Reign’d twelve years, his Son Muteczuma was chosen his Successor; the Election and Coronation being perform’d after the following manner.

Coronation of Muteczuma.

The new King mantled in Tygers Skins, was led into the chief Temple before a Hearth, on which burnt Fire both Night and Day; not far from which stood the Throne, where sitting down, he Offer’d Blood, which was taken from his Cheeks, Ears, and Legs; after which, an Orator Congratulated him, in the name of the Nobility; which done, they ended the Solemnity in a great Dinner, Fire-Works, and Dancing: At the same time it was establish’d, that all Future Coronations should be kept with an Offering of Provisions, fetch’d by the King out of the Enemies Countrey: wherefore Muteczuma going to the Countrey Chalco, took several of the Natives, whose reaking Hearts he Offer’d to Viztlipuztli: Which done, the Coronation follow’d, to which an innumerable company of People came flocking from all the neighboring Provinces: Those which were Tributaries, brought Presents with them, before which the Heralds carry’d the Coats of Arms belonging to the Nobility of Mexico, in a good order.

Muteczuma’s Brother taken Prisoner by those of Chalco.

An example of great Fidelity.

Soon after the King’s Coronation, he march’d and fell upon Chalco, the Inhabitants of which defended themselves very Valiantly, took Muteczuma’s Brother, among several other Prisoners; to whom the Conquerors proffer’d the Government; which at first he refus’d, but at last accepted of on this condition, that a high Mast should be erected with a Scaffold on the top, which made every one suppose, that Muteczuma’s Brother did in that manner aim at a high Election, but he at the appointed time, getting on the top of the Mast, call’d with a loud voice, and spake to the taken Mexicans which were there present to this effect: Chalco seeks to set me on the Throne, the Heavens will not permit it; learn by me rather to die, than to live and be guilty of Treason to your Countrey: which he had no sooner said, but with some Flowers which he held in his Hand, threw himself down from the Scaffold, which so inrag’d the Chalcoans, that they immediately slew all the other Mexicans that were there present; which not long after was reveng’d by Muteczuma, who not onely subdu’d Chalco, but several other Provinces, leaving onely Tlascala unattempted, that the Mexicans might have a neighboring Enemy to fetch Prisoners from for their Offerings, and also by Skirmishing with them, train up their Youth in Martial Discipline.

Thus his Predecessors and he, having Conquer’d divers Provinces, insomuch that he was now become absolute Emperor over a vast Tract of Land, he resolv’d to settle the same in good order; to which purpose he erected Courts of Judicature, with good Laws; built a stately Palace and Temple; ordain’d several Customs to be observ’d in Religion; which done, and having Reign’d twenty eight years, he Deceasing, left Ticocic for his Successor.

Description of the Temple Cu.

The foremention’d Temple was call’d Cu, being built of Stone, in form like a Serpent, of an exceeding bigness, in the middle thereof there was a spacious open place, and round about it Habitations, two Stories high, the lowermost for the Inferior Priests, and the uppermost for the High Priests; in this place also above ten thousand People Danc’d in a Circle, on all high Feasts; four great Gates fac’d the like number of broad Streets, each two Leagues long: On the outmost Gate stood large Images, the Front of black Stones, Painted between each Lay with red and yellow Colours, no less Beautiful than Artificial: On each corner of the Temple were plac’d two Marble Statues of Indians, sitting with their Arms stretch’d out, and holding a Candle, and on their Heads Plumes of Feathers: Thirty high steps led up to a round place, set about with Deaths-Heads, which was a Stage appointed for the slaughter of those, whose Hearts were to be Offer’d to the Diabolical gods, and whose Heads, their Bodies being eaten, were brought back to the Priests, who hung them under the Stage, where every Head hanging till it dropp’d off, the vacant place was immediately supply’d with a fresh Head. At the end of the Stage stood two Chappels, cover’d like a Cardinal’s-Cap, in one of which sate the Image of Tiztlputzli, and in the other Tlaloc, to which led a hundred and twenty Stone steps.

But besides this stately Temple Cu, Mexico boasted nine more, standing not far asunder in a large Plain, all adorn’d with curious Imagery, and set out with large Pillars, each being Dedicated to a peculiar Idol, and built with magnificent Apartments, for the Priests to lodge in; the chiefest of them Dedicated to an Idol call’d Tezeatlipuca, or Lord of the Humble. This Temple was ascended to by eighty steps, and had before it a spacious Court; within a low and broad Gate appear’d a high Vail, which open’d into a spacious square Hall, hung with Tapestry, at the end whereof stood large Images, and beyond which were several Rooms, in which Assemblies met, Scholars were taught, Judges sate, and Priests Resided.

Tlacaellel resigns the Kingdoms to Ticocic.

Axayacan chosen King.

But to return again to Muteczuma, his Funeral was no sooner finish’d, but the four Prime Councellors were attended by the Commissioners of Tezcuco and Tacuba, in order to the Election of a new King: Tlacaellel being the chief amongst the Dukes, was by a general Vote Saluted King, as being most worthy thereof, for his special Services shown in behalf of the Empire of Mexico: But he humbly refusing the same, was desir’d to Nominate another, whereupon he making choice of Ticocic, Muteczuma’s eldest Son; the Council immediately bor’d a hole through his Nose, and hung an Emrauld in the same. But before he receiv’d the Crown, he was forc’d, according to the Custom, to fetch in some of his Enemies for an Offering, which though he perform’d, yet he lost more Mexicans than he took Prisoners, not without sufficient testimony of Cowardise; which being ill resented by the People, he was Poyson’d in the fourth year of his Reign, and succeeded by his Brother Axayaca, by the appointment of Tlacaellel; who having attain’d to a great Age, and left the Charge of his Children to the new King, departed this Life, to the great sorrow and grief of the whole Empire; by the States whereof he was Bury’d with great Solemnity.

His Victory against the Teguantepecks.

In the mean time, Axayaca went with a considerable Army to the remote Province Teguantepek, to fetch Prisoners to be Offer’d at his Coronation; and marching before alone, Challeng’d his Antagonist, the King, to a single Combat, which he refus’d, and chose rather to fall upon Axayaca with all his Forces; whereupon, the Mexicans cunningly feign’d flight, ambuscaded themselves till the Enemies pursuing them, gave them their desir’d advantage, for rushing out of their Ambuscade, they set upon the Teguantepecks, so disorder’d, that they easily put them to flight, and had the pursuit of them as far as Guatulco, a noted Haven upon the South-Sea; from whence Axayaca returning Victor, receiv’d a Crown for a Reward; yet notwithstanding these Proofs of his Valor, the Lord of Tlatellulco Challeng’d him; whereupon he sent Agents thither, with proffers, that since the Citizens of Tlatellulco were of one Blood with the Mexicans, whom they deserted upon the dividing of the Wards and Towns, just before the Election of the first King Acamapixtli, they should, if they pleas’d, be receiv’d anew into fellowship and alliance with the Mexicans, acknowledging one and the same King for their Supreme Head and Governor: But the Ambassadors being scorn’d and laugh’d at for their proffers, returning, related the same to Axayaca, who immediately marching thither to take revenge, sent part of his Army to fall on the Enemy by Water; whilst himself falling upon them by Land, put the Lord of Tlatellulco, with his whole Army, to flight, which was so closely pursu’d, that they forc’d their way into the City with them, put the Governor to Death, and laid the Town in Ashes; those which went by Water, having had no less success.

Autzol succeeds him.

Axayaca, after eleven years Reign, Deceasing, bequeath’d his Crown to Autzol, who sought to promote his Election by ingaging with the mighty Province Quaxutatlan, whose Inhabitants, though but a little before, they had been so bold as to demand Tribute of the Mexicans, yet terrifi’d at the approach of Autzol’s Army, fled over an Arm of the Sea, where they had been secure, had not Autzol invented a floating Isle of Planks, by which he got over his whole Army; upon which the amaz’d Quaxututlans immediately submitted themselves to the Mexicans, who pursuing their Victory, extended their Dominions to Guatimala, over a Tract of three hundred Leagues.

Autzol’s Generosity and Magnificence.

The new King having now subdu’d all his Enemies, and made himself glorious by his Victories, was also ambitious to be as much extoll’d for his Generosity and Magnificence; to which purpose he distributed all the Wealth which was brought unto him from the neighboring Countreys, amongst the Poor and the Nobility; to the first he gave Clothes and Provisions; to the last, Plumes of Feathers and Arms. Moreover he caus’d all mean Houses to be pull’d down and new ones to be built in their places. Lastly, he consulted how to bring fresh Water into Mexico, which was plac’d in a brackish Soil: Upon this Design he was so bent, that when one of his Sages disswaded him from it, alledging, That the Water would drown the City, he, in stead of following his Advice, banish’d him his Presence, and upon his flying to Cuyaocun, caus’d him to be fetch’d from thence and Executed. Then prosecuting his Design, he cut the Ditch before Cuyaocun, by which means great store of fresh Water came flowing into the Lake Laguna, which the Priests welcom’d with strange Ceremonies; for some perfum’d the Water, others Offer’d Quails Blood, whilst others play’d on several Musical Instruments, with many other Ceremonies, which are at large describ’d in the ancient Mexican Chronicles, kept in the Vatican Library at Rome. But the Prophecy of the Executed Sorcerer was in a manner fulfill’d; for the Water overwhelm’d a great part of Mexico, and divided the City into Isles: But to prevent farther Mischief, Autzoll caus’d Banks to be rais’d, and Channels digg’d; and not long after, in the eleventh Year of his Reign, he deceas’d: After which the Mexican Kingdom tended towards its period, as the ensuing Story will declare.

Amongst the Mexican Nobility, Mutexuma, a melancholy Man, yet very prudent, who resided in a stately Apartment near the great Temple Cu, that there he might the better converse with Viztlipuztli, was elected King; which he no sooner heard, but fled from hence: but being found out, he was against his will led to the Grand Assembly, and from thence to the holy Hearth, where for an Offering he drew Blood out of his Cheeks, Ears, and Legs; and, according to an ancient Custom, the Council of State boring a Hole in his Nose, hung an Emerauld in the same; after which the Lord of Tescuco saluted him with a Speech; which (since it is mention’d by Joseph d’ Acosta, together with several other Speeches of Congratulation to their Kings, which were taught to Schollars, to make them expert in their Language) it will not be amiss to be annexed here, that of many this one may serve for a pattern of the Mexicans Eloquence, which is as followeth:

The Lord of Tescuco his Speech to Muteczuma.

“The great happiness, most noble Muteczuma, which is befall’n this Realm by your Election, may easily be conjectur’d from the general joy, none besides your self being able to undergo an Office, in the management whereof so much Prudence is requir’d: It is a most certain testimony that God loves Mexico, that he hath given its Inhabitants understanding to make such a Choice. Who can doubt, but that you who have expatiated through the Heavens, and convers’d with Viztlipuztli, may easily Govern us Mortals on Earth? Who can despair, but that the Vertue inclos’d within your Breast, will extend to the Widows and Orphans? Therefore rejoyce, O Mexico; the Heavens have granted us a Prince without Vice; Merciful, and not a Violator of the Laws; Affable, not despising common Conversation. And you, O King, let not this great Preferment occasion any alteration in your so long known Vertues: The Crown breeds care for the publick good; the troubles thereof must extend over the whole Realm, and every one in the Realm.”

Preparation for the Coronation of Muteczuma.

His Grandeur.

The ruine of the Mexican Empire prognosticated.

Muteczuma having heard out the Speech, would willingly have answer’d the same, but could not utter a word for Tears, which gush’d from his Eyes. Before he went out to fetch Prisoners for Offerings at his Coronation, he first setled his Houshold Affairs. And whereas till this time the Kings had been serv’d in their Palaces by ordinary Citizens, he took Knights, and the chiefest of the Nobility, intending thereby to make a distinction between the Nobility and the common People, and add more Majesty to the Royal Dignity. This done, Muteczuma marching against a certain rebellious Province, fetch’d a considerable number of People to be Offer’d to Viztupuztli. At his Return the Coronation-Day was appointed, against which thousands of People came to Mexico; even their very Enemies of Tlascala, Mechoacan, and Tepeaca, which were never conquer’d by the Mexicans, flock’d thither in great numbers. All those Countreys which were under Tribute bringing unvaluable Treasures, came in vast Multitudes, which so throng’d the City, that the very tops of the Houses were fill’d with Spectators, no King in Mexico ever going to the Throne in such splendor; nor was ever any King so much fear’d by his Subjects, none of the common People daring to look in his Face; neither did he ever set Foot on the Ground, but was always carried in a Chair on the Shoulders of his prime Nobility; he never wore a Suit of Clothes but once, nor ever us’d a Cup or Dish after it was once foul’d; he strictly maintain’d the Laws which he had made, and often went himself in a Disguise, to make a strict enquiry after all Affairs whatsoever; by which means the Mexican Power was now arriv’d to the highest top: but, as other Realms, grown top-heavy with good Fortune, turn at last topsie-turvy, just such a Misfortune befell Mexico; but not without several fore-running signs of its destruction: for in the City Cholola their God Quezalcoalt inform’d them, that a strange People were coming to take possession of the Mexican Dominions; and their Soothsayers prognosticated the same, for which Muteczuma committed them all to Prison, and doubtless had put them all to death, had not they escap’d with the help of the Master of their diabolical Art; and though they escap’d themselves, yet their Wives and Children were all put to death upon the King’s Command: Soon after which appear’d a mighty Comet, or blazing Star for a whole year together; the great Temple Cu was set on Fire, and burnt to the Ground none knew how; the Water which was thrown on the same to quench it, burnt like Brimstone; in the Skie appear’d three fiery Heads at noon-day, and out of a long Tail shot Sparks on the Earth; the Laguna, between Mexico and Texcuco, began to swell into a Tide, which turn’d some Houses topsie-turvy; a shrill Voice was heard in the Night crying on the Water, Children, your ruine is at hand; whither shall I carry you that you may not be lost?

A miraculous story of a Bird.

No less strange is what d’ Acosta relates of a Bird presented to Muteczuma, not unlike a Crane, which the Fishermen had taken on the Laguna; on the shining Forehead of which there appear’d the resemblance of two Armies Engag’d, and one defeated by the other, and that whilst the Sages, call’d to interpret the meaning hereof, sat in Consultation, the Bird vanish’d.

Another of a Country-man.

Moreover, there goes a Tradition, That a Countrey-man being at his Labor, was taken up by an Eagle, and carried through the Air into a gloomy Cave, where a Man lay fast asleep snoaring, when on a sudden he heard a Voice afar off, saying, Do you know that Man? whereupon the Countrey-man taking special notice of the dormant Man, knew him, by the Royal Apparel, to be Mutexuma; after which the Voice was heard again, saying, How soundly doth he sleep: the time is coming which provides Punishments for many Crimes; burn the Snoarer with the Torch which he holds in his Hands, he will feel no pain: Not long after he being inform’d hereof, and looking on his Thigh, found the same burnt, to his no small amazement.

News of the arrival of the Spanish Fleet.

Having now possess’d the Throne fourteen years, he receiv’d news of a Fleet, and therewith a Draught of the Men and Vessels painted on Cloth. This startling him, he immediately advis’d with his Council, who judg’d it convenient to secure the Coast along the Southern Ocean with strong Watches; yet nevertheless Ferdinand Cortesius Landed with five hundred Foot and sixty Horse, took the City Potanchanum, march’d through the Countrey Sicuchimalar to Tascalleca, where they had a sharp Conflict, in which the Spaniards were in great danger; and had not they had six Field-Pieces with them, which did as much affright as hurt the Indians, they had without doubt been cut off there. In Chiurutecal they were in as much danger; for certainly the Spanish Army had been set upon in the Night, had not a Woman inform’d them of it.

Muteczuma committed to Prison by Cortesius.

Mean while Muteczuma consulted with his Sorcerers to destroy Cortesius by Charms, who then was marching through Chalco, whereupon a considerable number of Sorcerers went thither to the top of a high Mountain, where, as they were beginning their Incantations and Charms, their Idol Tezcalipuca appear’d to them; and in an angry manner told them, That Muteczuma should lose his Crown and Life; and to confirm his words, he shew’d them a dreadful spectacle; for looking about, they saw the City in a light flame. This being told to Muteczuma, he resolv’d to make himself as secure as he could, and went to meet Cortesius with costly Presents, delivering him the Crown in the presence of all his Council; to which purpose he took one Marina, experienc’d in the Castilian Tongue, with him for his Interpreter; all things then seeming to end in Friendship. But they continu’d not long in that state; for Cortesius, whose whole Design was to bring Mexico under the Spaniards Subjection, not long after accus’d Muteczuma, that Coalcopoca had on his Commands storm’d the new Spanish City Vera Crux, which he could no way excuse; and notwithstanding Muteczuma deliver’d him Coalcopoca, with fifteen of his Nobles Prisoners, who were all burnt with green Wood; yet he was committed Prisoner, to the great discontent of the Mexicans, who said, “That they were now come to a fine pass, to be thus fool’d by a few Strangers, who had imprison’d their King, trampled upon their ancient Images, endeavor’d to murther them all, and in despite of them brought their mortal Enemies, the Tascaltecans and Guazuzingans, into Mexico.”

Cortesius marches against Velasquez’s Party.

About this time there were certain Ships come to Vera Crux, which was a new Port-Town of this Countrey, that the Spaniards had built since their coming thither, and had Landed near upon a thousand Men; which was an Accident that had like to have spoil’d the Design of Cortesius and all his Company at Mexico, these Men being sent by James Velasquez; Governor of Cuba, expressly against Cortesius and his Men, upon pretence that they had acted not conformably to the Commission which they had receiv’d from him, and gave him no account of their proceedings; which in a great measure was true: for it must be confess’d, that Cortesius and his Men finding themselves to have fall’n upon an Adventure that was certainly rich and good, and having got such footing and interest in the Countrey already, by their Success and Victories, and chiefly by their Confederacy with so many of the Natives and People of the Countrey, revolted to them, did almost at first, by a general consent, renounce their Commission, and dependency upon Velasquez, and profess’d to act immediately from and for the King of Spain. What pretences they had for such a Resolution, seemingly at least irregular, is not so well known. Whatever they were, they proceed in it, and the whole Company (excepting onely some few, who yet went along with the rest) chuse Cortesius anew for their Commander in chief, and appoint likewise by common consent, all other Officers of Justice, both Civil and Military, among themselves: and to give the better colour at Court to their Proceedings, they send Portocorrero and Monteio, two of their Principals, into Spain, with a rich and noble Present to the Emperor, both to make report of the State of the Countrey, and to procure immediate Commission from his Majesty, to proceed; after which they advance towards Mexico, as hath been said. Velasquez, being at Cuba, and understanding their Proceedings, labor’d to intercept both their Messengers and Present, but could not; and therefore sent Pamphilius Narvaez with eleven Ships, and about nine hundred or a thousand Men to apprehend Cortesius, and oppose his Proceedings. This hapned about the time that the Differences were but newly calm’d betwixt the Spaniards and the People of Mexico; and though it oblig’d Cortesius to leave the City in a wavering and unsetled condition, yet he took such order, that Muteczuma still remain’d under the Guard of the Spaniards as before, assisted with thousands of their Friends of Tlascalla, and he himself taking the rest, and some few Spaniards along with him, with undaunted courage and resolution marches against Narvaez: and such was his good fortune, that not onely Narvaez became his Prisoner without much blood-shed, but likewise all his Men joyn’d with him in his Design, through the favour of the Chancery or supream Court of St. Domingo, and by the procurement of the Licentiat Vasquez de Ayllon, a Judge of it, who was sent with Narvaez to accommodate the Differences. With this Recruit Cortesius marches back again to Mexico; but at his coming finds things in a very bad condition; for the Citizens, gather’d together under the Command of one Quicuxtemoc, had recourse to Arms, and for three days and three Nights vex’d the Spaniards with continual Stormings, notwithstanding what-ever Commands they had to the contrary from their imprison’d King, who at last, looking out of a Window, endeavoring to appease them, was hurt with a Stone, of which he soon after died, as they say, who would not have the Spaniards thought to have murder’d him, as the Mexicans say they did, with divers other Noble-men, and some of his Children, the very Night they fled. However it were, not long after his Death, out of extream necessity, and chiefly for want of Victuals, the Spaniards were forc’d to leave the City in the night-time, and with the loss of four hundred and fifty of their Men, who were either slain or taken Prisoners at the passing of a Draw-bridge, the rest making a heavy Retreat to their Friends at Tlascalla. There is standing at this day in Mexico, upon the place where so many of them were kill’d, a certain Hermitage, which they call Los Martyres, or The Hermitage of the Martyrs, though but improperly, if upon that occasion, as one of their own Writers confesses, though he alledges no other reason.

Mexico taken by the Spaniards.

This Retreat of the Spaniards out of Mexico hapned to be upon the tenth of July after mid-night, in the Year 1520. which the Spaniards at Mexico call The Doleful Night. Nevertheless the undaunted Cortesius being got, though with much difficulty and trouble, by reason of the pursuit of the Mexicans for a good part of the Way, to his sure Friends of Tlascalla, neither lost his Courage, nor gave over his Resolution of yet gaining Mexico, especially the way being now laid open, and sufficient occasion given by the Death of Muteczuma, and the provocations of the Mexicans themselves, to make himself absolute and sole Lord of the Place: wherefore having sent for, and procur’d a competent Supply of fresh Soldiers from Santo Domingo, or Hispaniola, Almeria, Cuba, and other places, being in all nine hundred Foot, eight hundred Horse, and seventeen Pieces of Ordnance; he joyns himself with the Auxiliary Forces of Tlascalla, which were no less than a hundred thousand Men, Arm’d with Bowes and Arrows: and with this Army marches again towards Mexico, and Besieges it both by Land and Water, viz. with the help of thirteen Brigantines or Galliots, which he had built upon the Lake, and six thousand Canoos, or little Boats, which his Friends and Confederates had procur’d him. By which means, and by his Army on Land, in a short time he cut off all Provision from the City, and after a Siege of full three Months or more, and a most stout and obstinate resistance made by the People within, in which they are said to have lost above a hundred thousand Men, beside those which perish’d by Famine, Sickness, or otherwise, he took it by Storm upon Tuesday the thirteenth of August 1521. Sackt it first, and then burnt it to the Ground; yet afterwards he caus’d it to be Re-built again, far more Beautiful than at first it was; as in due place we shall further see. They speak not of above fifty Spaniards slain during the whole Siege, six Horses, and not many Tlascaltecans.

Cortez advanc’d to Honors.

In this manner, and with so little Charges to the Conqueror, there fell to the Crown of Spain the richest and goodliest Kingdom (one of them) of the whole World, viz. the Kingdom of Mexico, which the Conquerors presently nam’d New Spain; and in reference to which name, the Catholick King hath ever since stil’d himself in the plural number Hispaniarum Rex, or King of both Spains; and all by the Valor, Prudence, admirable Resolution, and happy Conduct of Cortez; who was at first but a private Adventurer in the American Plantations and Discoveries, though otherwise a Gentleman of a good Family in Spain, born at Medellin in the Country of Estramedura. The Emperor Charles the Fifth, who was also then King of Spain, for his great Services, endow’d him deservedly with many great and rich Territories in the Provinces of Tlascalla, Mechoacan, and other parts thereabouts, made him Marquess of the Valley, viz. of Guaxata, (which is his chief Title) a rich and flourishing Province of that Countrey, Captain General, or Commander in Chief, of all the Military Forces of New-Spain, and General Discoverer of all the Maritime parts and Coasts of America towards the South-Sea, assigning him in propriety the twelfth part of whatsoever should be discover’d, to him and his Heirs for ever; but deny’d him the Government of Mexico out of reason of State, though ’tis said, he much desir’d it.

The grand Haven Acapulco.

Among the famous Havens which lie along the South Sea, and Northern Ocean the chiefest is Acapulco before-mention’d, whither all Merchandize is sent to be transported to China, which is above two thousand Leagues distant from thence; in which Voyage they generally spend fourteen Months; four Sail, each of eight hundred Tun, appointed for this Trade; generally two of them set Sail to China in March, and returning in Summer, have no sooner drop’d their Anchors, but the other two set out from Acapulco, from whence the way by Land to Mexico, is seventy two Leagues over steep Mountains, dangerous Rocks, and several Rivers; the chiefest whereof are, first, Del Papagayo, or De las Balsas, which runs exceeding strong, which the Indians cross on bundles of Canes ty’d upon Callabashes: Next San Francisco, which though the biggest, yet hath many shallow places to wade over. The Mustichoes are no small Plagues to those that travel this way, for their Poysonous Stings are the occasions of many Ulcerated Wounds, and oft-times Death it self.

In this way lies also the Countrey del Valle, from which Ferdinand Cortesius receiv’d the Title of Earl.

The Mouth of the Haven Acapulco gapes a full League North and South, and within exceeding large, hath a nook call’d Boca Grande, where the Ships Ride safe at an Anchor: More Easterly appears a Land Inlet, (by the Spaniards call’d Puerto del Marques) secur’d against all Winds; near which is the City of San Diego, to which belongs a Fort, with six Bulwarks, lying on a Promontory; the main of the City is one large Street, consisting of fair and stately Houses, and leading directly to the Haven; the Church which is of an oblong square, hath a high Steeple in the middle.

Spilbergen’s Expedition.

A Dutch Admiral, one Joris Spilbergen, after he had done the Spaniards all the mischief he could along the South Sea, ran with five Sail under the Fort Acapulco, which fir’d ten Guns at him; whereupon, the Dutch Admiral Manning a Boat, with a white Flag, they agreed upon a Cessation, and the Spaniards went aboard of the Admiral, to whom Pedro Alvares, and Francisco Menendus, having been a considerable time in Holland, and speaking the Language of that Countrey very perfect, promis’d that all his Demands should be satisfi’d; yet Spilbergen was suspicious that the Spaniards had a design upon him, wherefore he came and lay close under the Castle with his five Sail, and made ready his Guns: But this suspicion was soon clear’d, when Alvares and Menendus proffer’d to stay as Hostages, till the Governor of the Town sent the Admiral thirty Oxen, fifty Sheep, some hundreds of Poultry, Coals, Oranges, Cittrons, and the like fresh Provisions; as also Wood and Water; during which time, the Prisoners being set at liberty, several Persons of Quality came to visit the Admiral, amongst whom was Captain Castilio, one that had serv’d twenty years in the Low-Countrey Wars; and Melchior Hernando, Nephew to the Vice-Roy of New-Spain, who desirous to see the Ships that durst set twice upon Rodrigo de Mendose, Admiral of the King of Spain’s mighty Fleet, stood amaz’d that such little Frigats durst Ingage with so many great Spanish Ships; and carry’d the Admiral’s Son to the Governor of the City, call’d Georgius Perro, who civilly entertain’d him: Eight days Spilbergen spent here at Acapulco, admiring the courteous Entertainment of the Spaniards, and the more, because that having News but eight Moneths before of the Dutch Fleet setting out, they had in that short time made all things ready for resistance, the Fort having seventeen Brass Guns, and four hundred Soldiers, besides many Noblemen and Reformades, whereas at other times there us’d not to be above forty Men, and four Guns in the same.

Sect. II.
Mechoacan.

Bounds and Description of Mechoacan.

The next Province of New Spain is the Bishoprick of Mechoacan, which hath on the North-East, Panuco; on the East, Mexicana, properly so call’d; on the South part, Tlascalla; on the West, the Main Ocean, or Mare del Zur; and last of all, more directly Northward, Xalisco, which is a Province of New Gallicia: The Name signifieth in the American Language, as much as A Fish Countrey; and so it is, having many fair Lakes and Rivers in it, abundantly well stor’d with Fish. The Countrey so exceedingly pleasant and healthful, that ’tis usual for sick Persons of other Provinces to come hither to recover their health, only by the benefit of a good Air. The Soil so abundantly fertile of all sorts of Grain, that of four measures of Seed, it hath been often observ’d, they have reap’d the next Harvest, more than so many hundred measures of the same Grain. Very well Wooded; and by reason of its many Rivers and fresh Springs, equally rich in good Pasture: and besides great plenty of Medicinal Herbs and Plants, it affordeth good store of Amber nigh the Sea Coasts, Mulberry-trees, and consequently Silks; much Honey, Wax, and divers other Commodities, both for necessity and pleasure. The People of the Countrey are generally tall, of a strong active Body, and a good Wit, especially in comparison of other Natives; not unskilful in divers curious Manufactures, the most excellent Feather-Pictures, afore-mention’d, being said to be found in this Province. They seem more generally inclin’d to the Humors and Customs of the Spaniards, than any other Americans; and receiv’d the Preaching of Christian Religion, when time was, with much willingness; so that the Countrey is now entirely Christian, and divided into several Parishes.

Languages belonging to the Mechoacans.

The Languages which are spoken in Mechoacan are several, as the Otomian, Chihcimian, and the Mexicans, which is common through all New Spain, and the Tarascan, a neat and brief Language, which properly belongs to this Countrey.

Tygers.

The Lions and Wilde Dogs of this Countrey devour great numbers of Cattel yearly, yet the greatest mischiefs happen from the Tygers, which often fetch People out of their Houses, notwithstanding the Doors are lock’d, for they break in thorow the Walls and Roofs, with much eagerness and strength: Of the greatness whereof, Jacob Bontius tells us this story, That the Governor Peter Carpentier set a Trap without the Walls of Batavia, of great Timber, Pleited with Iron, Baiting it with a Goat; which taking effect, the Tyger that was caught therein, impatient of such close Imprisonment, rent the Timber, and getting out, left the Goat untouch’d.

Hugo Linschot relates, That the Tygers in the West-Indies hurt no Spaniards, exercising their cruelty onely on Indians; and that finding a Black and a White Man sleeping together, they devour the Black and not the White: How far these assertions deserve to be credited, may appear by an evident contradiction of the first, for it is well known, many Spaniards in the West-Indies have been eaten by the Tygers.

General Fedreman marching in this Countrey at the Head of his Army, was assaulted by a Tyger, which in despight of them all killing a Spaniard, and three Indians, escap’d from them; no Trees serve for a refuge against their fury, for they climb up to the top thereof, and fetch down their Prey; their Claws are so exceeding Venomous, that whoever is scratch’d with the same, is never to be cur’d; there is no Beast but they will venture upon, wherefore they lie in the Bushes, from whence they rush out upon them; but this disadvantage they have, that most other Beasts are too nimble Footed for them, for they are a very heavy Creature, whatever hath been deliver’d by the Ancients concerning the Tygers swiftness.

As to the difference which they make in Humane Flesh, it is thus far true: That they find more sweetness in Womens Breasts than other parts, and chose a Black Man before a White: Concerning the first, France gives a sufficient testimony, when two Tygers, in the time of King Lewis the Twelfth, breaking loose, left a great number of Women lying Breastless in the Road. The second is confirm’d by John Johnston’s Relation of a strange accident that happen’d in Bengale, viz. A Moor dreaming that a Tyger fetch’d him out of the Ship, hid himself the next Night between Decks, of which the Master asking the reason, was inform’d concerning his Dream, which prov’d prophetick, for about Mid-night a Tyger leapt into the Ship, and devouring the Moor, went away without touching any one of the Hollanders, of which there were thirty: But a Sea-man walking on the shore escap’d more wonderfully, for a Tyger setting upon him behind, and a Crocodile before, he leaping from betwixt them, discover’d to the Tyger the Crocodile, to whom the Tyger directly running, and ingaging with the Crocodile, spar’d the Sea-mans life: Notwithstanding the cruelty and mischief of these Tygers, the Indians are led by their sottish Superstition to worship them; because, as they say, the Devil often appears to them in that shape.

Squerrils.

Besides the Tygers, the Inhabitants of Mechaocan are exceedingly molested with Squerrils, which not only carry much Fruit into their Holes, but also under-mine the Houses, so that they often sink or fall on one side, the mischief being the worse, because they increase daily. Most of them bear four young at a time, which on the third day run about for Prey, and can scarce be taken, because of their exceeding swiftness, leaping a great distance from one Tree to another; their Tails serve them on divers occasions; for leaping they use it like a Wing, and at their crossing over a River, for a Sail; in tempestuous Weather, they stop their holes therewith, to keep out the Wind.

Several kinds of them.

There are six several sorts of these Squerrils; the first call’d Tlilic, cover themselves with their Tails; the second Quapatchli, is as big again, and can never be made tame; the third Techallotl, with a bald Tail and great Eyes; the fourth Talmototly, hath a thick Head, and a Tail full of black and white streaks; the fifth Quimitchpatlan, hath a little Head and long Legs, and leaping from one Tree to another, seems to flie; the last sort call’d Yztactechalotl, is whitish.

Foxes.

The Foxes do also great mischief here, their Urine smells so horribly, that forty days after, none are able to abide near the place where they have urin’d, and on whatsoever Stuff or Cloth a drop thereof chanceth to light, the stink can never be wash’d away.

The Bird Auras.

Here breeds also a sort of Birds, call’d Auras, which are not unlike Moore-Hens; they flie exceeding high in the Air, feed on nought but stinking Carrion, which they scent at a great distance; they have a hairy Head and Neck, and ugly Face: Some of the Fowls of this Countrey stay here all the year long, others go away, and return at certain times.

Ingenuity of the Natives.

The Natives, since the Spaniards coming thither, have gotten their Habits and Language, learn’d all sorts of Trades; their Tables, Chests, and Cupboards made of Brasile-Wood, are no way inferior to the best that are made in Europe. Painting is also in great esteem amongst them: They make handsom Clothes, Shooes, and strange Copper Locks. They have a peculiar Art in Tilling their Ground: They teach the Spanish Dogs several tricks, but not feeding them well, they cause them to run from them, and turn wilde, whence they are call’d Cimarrones, because they do much hurt to the Cattel.

The Inhabitants, when a Feaver or Ague is upon them at the highest, leap into cold Water: against other Sicknesses they use Herbs, whose soveraign Power Experience hath long since taught them.

Since the Spaniards made Mechoacan a Bishoprick, they have built ninety four Schools, fifty Churches, several Hospitals and Cloysters, inhabited by Franciscan and Augustin Monks.

There are said to be in this Bishoprick a hundred and fifty Towns or Burroughs (besides many scatter’d Villages) most of which have Free-Schools erected in them, for the Training up of Youth in the Christian Religion, good Literature and Arts; and few of them without an Hospital for the Sick: of which Towns the principal are as followeth:

Principal Towns.

1. Zinzoutza, the Seat of the ancient Kings of Mechoacan. 2. Pascuar, a City forty seven Leagues distant from Mexico, once a Bishop’s See. 3. Valladolid, the Metropolis or chief City of the Province, since the Episcopal Chair was remov’d from Pascuar thither. It lieth upon a great Lake, equal almost for bigness to that of Mexico, and is about seven Leagues distant from Pascuar, towards the East. 4. St. Michaels, a good Town, forty Leagues Westward of Mexico, and in the Way to the Zacatecas, but lying in a Road that is somewhat dangerous, being not a little infested with Salvages on both sides of it. 5. St. Philips. 6. La Conception de Salaya, seventeen Leagues distant from Valladolid, and a convenient Stage for Travellers, being indeed, with the two last mention’d, built chiefly for the defence and securing of the Countrey against the Salvages. 7. Guaxanata, a Town on the Borders of Panuco, where there are very rich Mynes of Silver. 8. Leon, another Town likewise of very rich Mynes, twenty four Leagues distant from Valladolid, and threescore from Mexico. 9. Zamorra. 10. Villa de los Lagos, and others.

Towards the Sea there is 1. Acatlan, but two Miles distant from the Sea-Coast, and a small Town, yet by reason of a safe and very good Harbor which it hath for Shipping, a Place of no little Trading. 2. Natividad, another well known and convenient Haven upon Mare del Zur, pertaining to this Province, and from whence they usually set Sail for the Philippine Islands. 3. St. Jago de buena Speranza, so call’d by the Spaniards, perhaps from the abundance of good Pearls they found upon this Coast. 4. Colyma. 5. Zacatula, and some others.

This Province, as we said, was at first a distinct Kingdom of it self, yet subordinate and Tributary to that of Mexico; the King whereof nam’d Tamgaiva, or Bimbicha, (as Laet reporteth) at the first coming of the Spaniards thither, after the Conquest of Mexico, voluntarily submitted himself to them, and was Baptiz’d. Nevertheless afterwards, upon a pretence of I know not what Treason intended by him against them, and which the Spanish Writers themselves professedly think to have been feigned, by command of Nunnez de Gusman, President of the Chancery of Mexico, he was most inhumanely burnt alive, and his Kingdom seiz’d upon by the Spaniards.

Sect. III.
Tlascalla.

Situation and Description of Tlascalla.

The Bishoprick of Tlascalla, formerly call’d Tlascalteca, Tlaxcala, and Tlascalan, is a Province of New Spain, which extendeth it self entirely from one Sea to another, viz. from the Atlantick to Mare del Zur, with which it is bounded on the East and West Parts, lying otherwise, and for the most part betwixt the Provinces of Mexicana, last spoken of, and that of Guaxata, which followeth, containing in length from one Sea to the other, not much less than an hundred Leagues, and in some places fourscore in breadth; but towards the South Sea growing much narrower. It is a Countrey exceedingly plentiful both in Corn and Cattel, full of rich Pasturage, and so plentifully stor’d with Maiz, Wheat, and other Grain, that it is accounted as it were the Granary of America; besides Deer, all manner of Venison, and great store of Fowl. There is likewise Copperess, Allom, Silver-Mynes, Manna, Anime, and Liquid Amber, with a sweet smelling Gum which drops out of a Tree. The Rivers feed no Fish, because they fall with exceeding force from the Mountains; onely near Topoyanco, is a deep Lake of fresh Water, inhabited round about by Indians, enjoying the pleasure and profit of the many Cumbeba-Trees, which yield Cochinele, producing yearly above two hundred thousand Duckets worth of that Commodity. In this Lake swim black Hedge-hogs, whose Flesh is good and wholsom to eat.

The ancient State of the Tlascallans.

The People of this Countrey, when the Spaniards came first amongst them, liv’d in the form of a Common-wealth, or Free-State, refusing to be subject to the King of Mexico, with whom they had almost continual War; and upon that account, as hath been said, assisted Cortesius in the Conquest of the Kingdom, without whose help ’tis most certain he had never been able to do any thing. They enjoy therefore many special Priviledges and Immunities more than other Americans do. They pay no Tribute, but onely a handful of Wheat yearly for every Person, by way of acknowledgment, otherwise living, under the Protection of the Spaniards, wholly in the Form of their ancient Government. In former times they were great Man-eaters, and not onely eat the Flesh of their Enemies, but also of one another, insomuch that Man’s-flesh hung in publick to be sold.

River Zahuatl.

The River Zahuatl, which rushes out of the Mountain Xicoleucalt, oftentimes overflows all the Countrey near it, and washes away divers Houses. Zahuatl signifies Scabby Water, because all those, especially Children, that wash in the same, are sure to be Scabby. On its Banks the Spaniards have built many Houses, the fashion whereof is now also imitated by the Indians of this Province, who formerly built quite after another manner; for they made low Houses of Earth, Wood and Stone, with large and strange Chambers; some a Stones-cast one from another, others close together, had narrow crooked Streets that ran betwixt them.

Tlascallans Language.

In this Province are two sorts of Languages spoken, viz. the Mexican, and that of the Ottomons, who formerly deserting Mexico, chose the Tlascallans for their Protectors: They are a toilsom and painful People.

To the Northward of Tlascalla are Mountains, which all the year long, except three Moneths, are cover’d with Mist; and the Woods on the tops of them are a great shelter to Lyons, Tygers, Wolves, and wild Dogs, call’d Adives, and other wild Beasts, which do much hurt to the small Cattel. Here are also many Serpents and Adders.

The whole Province is said to contain two hundred good Towns and Burroughs, and more than one thousand Villages, all of them exceedingly populous, and suppos’d to contain in the whole above a Million and half of Natives, besides Spaniards, who have some few Colonies in the Countrey for securing of it.

Towns and Villages.

The chief Towns of the Province are 1. Tlascalla it self, which denominates the whole Countrey as the Metropolis, and where the Bishop’s See was at first, till in the Year 1550. it was remov’d to Puebla de los Angelos. It is a fair Town, and commodiously seated in the midst of a large and fertile Champain of threescore Miles in compass. It consisteth of four large and beautiful Streets or Quarters, and in the midst of them where they all meet, hath a Piazza, or Market-place, equal to that of Mexico, and able to receive twenty or thirty thousand Persons conveniently, to Buy and Sell in it; and whose Shambles seldom shew less than fifteen thousand Sheep, four thousand Oxen, and two thousand Hogs.

2. Puebla de los Angelos, or The City of Angels, a Town built by Sebastian Ramirez, a Church-man, and he that was the first President, or chief Governor of Mexico, under the Crown of Castile. It was built in the Year 1531. almost in the Road-way from Vera Crux to Mexico, and seated in a very delicate and fertile Countrey, and of a good Air. It is a Bishop’s See, and valu’d at twenty thousand Ducats of yearly Rent, the City it self suppos’d to contain about fifteen hundred Families; where there is abundance of excellent Cloth made, and for fineness not yielding to the best of Spain. Its chief Edifices are, the Cathedral and four stately Cloysters, belonging to the Dominicans, Franciscans, Augustines, and Capuchins; as also a Free-School for five hundred Indian Children, endow’d by Ramirez with a yearly Revenue.

3. Zempoallan, seated upon a River of the same Name.

4. Napalaca, in the Valley Ocumba, ows its original to an Indian call’d Juan, who at first had onely one House, and a Herd of Hogs there, till upon his invitation, all the neighboring People came from the tops of the Hills; insomuch, that in a short time, the place was Peopled by thousands of Families.

5. Guaxacingo, all hitherto great and ancient Towns of the Natives.

6. Segura de la Frontera, a Spanish Town, built by Cortez presently upon the Conquest of Mexico, for the securing of the Confines, as the Name importeth.

7. Vera Crux, a Town built by Cortez and his Companions, at their first Landing, and where afterwards, by a Stratagem, and out of a resolution either to Conquer or Die in the Countrey, he caus’d all his Ships to be burnt, that his Soldiers might not so much as think of returning back from whence they came. The Town was at first built five or six Leagues up within Land; but the place being found not to be so healthful, the Inhabitants in a short time deserted it, and seated themselves upon a Bay of the Sea, right over against St. John D’ Ullua.

8. Medellin, another Spanish Town, built likewise by Cortez, in memory of his own Birth-place, which was Medellin, a small Town of Estramadura, a Province of Spain, but was afterwards destroy’d by some Spanish Commanders, out of malice to Cortez.

Lastly, St. John D’ Ullua, a noted, and the most usual Port to all this Province, and likewise to the City of Mexico it self, from the North Sea: but of difficult entrance, especially to such as are not well acquainted with the Passage, or want Guides, by reason of certain Rocks and Quicksands, wherewith the Mouth of the Haven is said to be bar’d; but within, the station is more safe. It hath likewise two strong Bulwarks or Forts rais’d, on either side of the Entrance one, to defend the Passage; besides a strong Castle, built since Captain John Hawkins surpris’d twelve Ships richly Laden within the Haven, and thirteen others that arriv’d with a new Vice-Roy from Spain, valu’d at near sixty Tun of Gold, of which he might easily have made Prize, had he not trusted to the Vice-Roys Promise, to give him all satisfaction he should require, by which being deceiv’d, he lost all his Fleet but two Ships.

Great increase of Crocodiles.

Between Tlascala and Los Angelos are the Fountains, out of which the River hath its Original, which gliding by Machaocan and Zacatula, falls into the South Sea: This River is so exceeding full of Crocodiles, that they have made several places which formerly were Inhabited on its Banks, utterly desolate; for the Females laying generally Eggs as big as those of a Goose, increase prodigiously; and were it not that the Indian Mice, call’d Ichneumones, destroy’d them, they would grow still to greater numbers: But this Animal creeping in at the Crocodiles Mouth, eats his way out of the Belly again; Water-Serpents, Hawks, Buffeloes, and especially Tygers, are also their mortal Enemies, for they throwing the Crocodiles on their Backs, rend open their Bellies: They are more desirous of Mans flesh here than in any other place, because the River of Tlascala hath but small store of Fish; in the day time they lie cover’d in the Mud, from whence they rush forth, and set upon those that happen to pass by them; they pursue the Canoos in the Water, and strike down the Rowers with their Tails.

Burning Mountain Popatepeck.

Eight Leagues beyond Tlascala, appears the Mountain Popatepeck, which for ten years ceas’d smoaking, till Anno 1540. it broke forth in such a manner, that the Countrey all about was terrifi’d therewith; for it vomited not onely a black Smoak, but also horrible Flames, which sometimes being blow’d downward, burnt the Corn in the Fields, and the Ashes thereof flying as far as Guaxocingo and Chulula, burnt a great deal of the Town to the Ground; every one endeavor’d by flight to secure themselves, with intention never to return thither again; but the Flame and Smoak abating, Captain Diego de Ordas went up to view the place, whence the Fire was cast forth; which curiosity and presumption of his, had like to have cost him his Life, for the sulphury Smoak breaking forth on a sudden, had almost stifled him.

Rivers of Mexicana.

Moreover, the Bishoprick of Tlascala, is on the North Coast wash’d by the River Papoloava, since call’d Alvarado, from a Spanish Commander, who first Steer’d his Course thither: The next Stream nam’d Banderas, is so call’d, because the Natives held white Clothes on Poles, to invite the Spaniards ashore. The third is Almeria, on which, Cortesius, a year after the taking of Mexico, built the Town Medellin, as aforemention’d.

Along the Tlascallan shore, wash’d by the Northern Ocean, lie the Isles Blanca, Verde, and Sacrificios: The first receiv’d its denomination from White Land, the other from Green Trees; and the third, because Joan de Greyalve, who first Discover’d New Spain, Landing on this Island, found a Bloody Altar there, with Sacrific’d People with open’d Brests, chopt off Arms and Legs.

The River Almeria falling into the Ocean opposite to the Sacrificios, the Spanish Ships came often to an Anchor there; but in these latter times, they have forsaken the same, because the Northern Winds us’d to blow very hard against the shore, and spoil’d many Vessels: But Henry Hawks gives this reason, That a dreadful apparition of Spirits frighted the Spaniards from thence.

The Province Tepeaca.

In the Bishoprick Tlascala, is also compriz’d the Province Tepeaca, whose Metropolis was built by Cortez, when with great Loss he was sent from Almeria. The Soil thereabouts is barren and stony; the Water which they have in the City, is brought in Pipes from a River which flows out of the Mountains into the Market place. The plain Countrey hath many good Pastures. The Inhabitants thereof speak four sorts of Languages; of which, the commonest is the Mexican; others use the Popolucan or Otoman Tongues.

Alyoxuan.

The Village Alyoxucan appears afar off on a high Mountain, on whose top is a Lake of a hundred and fifty Fathom in circumference; the Water whereof is very cold, and of a bluish Colour, and neither Ebbs nor Flows, to which the Villagers climb along a narrow Path.

Not far from thence, in the Plain, are two other very deep Lakes: The first call’d Tlacae, is a League in circumference, and breeds delicate white Fish, not above a Fingers length: The second nam’d Alchichican, about the same bigness, which in stormy Weather is very turbulent.

Strange sort of Bird.

Amongst the Fowls of this Countrey, the most noted is a little Summer Bird, with a long crooked Tail, speckled Feathers; feeds on nothing but Flowers and the Dew; about Harvest time, when the Rain ceases, it hangs fast with its Bill on a Tree, and as soon as the first Rain falls, it revives again.

In this Countrey Tepeaca are five Villages, in each of which is a Franciscan Cloyster and convenient Hospital.

In this Countrey they gather the Water in the time of the Rainy Moneths, in a digg’d Pool, which every Morning produces little Toads with long Tails, which in few days fall off; but these little ones growing to be great, make a most dreadful noise in the Night: From October till March, not one drop of Rain falls in this Countrey; during which time, the Northern Winds make a dry and wholsome Air, yet oftentimes a tempestuous Sea, to the loss of many Ships.

Farther up into the Countrey, between Vera Crux and Los Angelos, lies the Village Rinconanda; and also Xalapa and Perota built of Straw Houses in the middle of a Wood of Cedar and Pine-Trees, inhabited by the Spaniards, for the accommodating of Travellers: To which purpose there are likewise Inns built near the Spring Fuente de Otzumba, which gushes out of a high Rock.

Not far from hence is the Populous Village Chetula, where a small number of Spaniards dwell amongst thousands of Indians, who chiefly make use of Mules to carry their Loads.

Sect. IV.
Guaxata.

Situation and Description of Guaxata.

Between Los Angelos and Guatemala, lies the Bishoprick of Antiquera or Guaxata largely taken; it hath on the North, the Bay of Mexico; on the South, Mare del Zur; on the East, Jucatan and Chiapa which is one of the Provinces of Guatimala; on the West, Tlascalla.

Division.

The Countrey extendeth it self upon the South Sea about an hundred Leagues in length, but from the Sea to the Borders of Tlascalla, one hundred and twenty; Eastward not above half so much; having a good Air, and a Soil no less fruitful, especially in Mulberry-Trees, and abundance of Silks, which the Countrey affordeth, more than any other Province of America besides; nor is it less rich in Mines of Gold and Silver, there being scarce a River in the whole Countrey, but the Sands of it are said to be Tinctur’d more or less with that yellow Metal; also Crystal and Copperess. It yieldeth likewise great plenty of Cassia and Cochinele, two rich Commodities; and the People generally, if they would take pains, might be the wealthiest, ’tis thought, of any other in America: But whether it be through any voluntary contempt of Riches, or through any natural sloathfulness, as yet they seem to Pine in the midst of plenty, living, for the most part of them, little better than from Hand to Mouth; nevertheless, exceeding liberal of what they have, especially to such as bear the Habit of Religion, and attend the service of their Souls; maintaining in a plentiful and good manner, as ’tis said, no less than one hundred and twenty Convents of Religious Men, of several Orders, in this onely Province; besides Hospitals, Schools for the training up of Youth, and other places of publick Charity; it is said also to have three hundred and fifty Villages, and near as many brave Countrey Houses. It is subdivided into many particular Provinces; which, because they are many and but small, in comparison of some other, we may call Wapentakes, or Hundreds, rather than Provinces: The principal whereof are these that follow, viz. 1. Misteca. 2. Tutepecque. 3. Zapoteca. 4. Guazacoalco. 5. Gueztaxatla: and 6. the Valley of Guaxata, from whence Cortez, after the Conquest of Mexico, had his Title given him by the Emperor, Marquess of the Valley. It is the richest and most pleasant part of the whole Province, extended in a continu’d Tract together, full sixteen Leagues or more, lying about fourscore Southward of Mexico, and wanting neither Mines of Gold and Silver, nor any other of the prime and best Commodities of the New-World.

Languages.

In this Countrey they speak thirteen sorts of Languages, of which the Mexican is most us’d.

Poisonous Herb.

Amongst the Plants which grow here, is an exceeding Poysonous Herb, which kills those whosoe’re pluck it, though a long time after, that is to say, if it be of a Years growth, it kills not before the Years end; if a Moneth old, at the Moneths end; if a Day, on the same.

This Countrey formerly suffer’d also many inconveniencies by Earthquakes, but of late they are somewhat abated, which the Spaniards ascribe to Martialis, Protector of the Cathedral at Antequera.

Misteca is divided into Alta and Baxa, both of which have Rivers and Brooks that afford Gold, whither the Indian Women taking Provisions, go for several days, and gather Gold in Troughs, which they exchange at the Spanish Markets for Provisions.

Strange Cave.

Not far from the Village Cuertlavaca, lies a high Mountain, remarkable for a strange Cave, whose Entrance is very narrow, at the end whereof appears a square Place of fifty Foot; upon one side whereof stand Pits with Steps; near which begins a crooked Way of a League long; at the end of which is a spacious Place with a Fountain of good Water; from the Foot of which flows a small Brook: But because none have made any farther discovery of this Cave, the other parts of it remain yet unknown.

On the top of St. Antonio, the Indians live with their Families in Caves between the Rocks.

Not far from hence appear two Mountains, whose tops, though they lie at a great distance from one another, at the bottom they are so near, that a Man may step from one to the other.

The six Rocks Pennoles, formerly Garrison’d by the Kings of Mexico, have Gold, Lead-Mynes, and a Root which is us’d in stead of Soap.

In the Village Totomachiapo, is a Cave of half a Mile long, at the end whereof the Water prevents a farther discovery.

The Rocky Countrey Zapotecas formerly bred very salvage Inhabitants, Mantled in Furrs, but now Civiliz’d, clad after the common manner.

Americans, whether Extracted from the ten Tribes of Israel.

The People spread over Guaxacualco, Yluta, and Cueztxatla, observe Circumcision, according to an ancient Custom; from whence some have in vain sought for a testimony, that these Americans should be originally extracted from the scatter’d Tribes of Israel; but the Tartars more immediately, who at last crossing the Straits of Anian, furnish’d the desolate Countrey of America with Inhabitants: But this Opinion is without any probability of truth; for it will never follow from their Circumcision, that the Tartars, the greatest People on Earth, must owe their original to a few Israelites, Prisoners, since that Ceremony was never thought on by them till they embrac’d the Mahumetan Religion. And though they had been Circumcis’d before Mahomet’s time, this would be no testimony that they were extracted from the Israelites: for how many People embrac’d Circumcision, which were never extracted from Abraham’s Seed? It is affirm’d by Diodorus Siculus, that the Cholchians; by Philo Judæus, the Egyptians; by Herodotus, the Moors; by Strabo, the Troglodytes; by Cyprian, the Phœnicians and Arabians Circumcis’d themselves from all Antiquity, which is to this day observ’d by some of them. It also plainly appears by the Prophet Jeremiah, that the Egyptians, Edomites, Ammonites, Moabites, and Ishmaelites, had the same Custom anciently amongst them.

Towns and chief Villages of Guaxaca.

The Towns of principal note inhabited by the Spaniards in this Province, are 1. Antequera, in the Valley aforesaid, a stately City, and beautifi’d with a fair Cathedral Church, built with Pillars of the finest Marble, of great heighth and bigness. The River which glides by the Walls, springing out of the Ground, runs to the Mountain Coatlan. Not far from thence lies the Village Herrera, which boasts four hundred Spanish Families, though some say that the greatest part of them are Indians, who pay the Spaniards Cotton Cloaks and Nuts for Tribute.

2. Illephonso de los Zapotecas, lies on a Mountain belonging to the Mixes, anciently a salvage, strong, and long-bearded People, who speak a gross Language, and in former times went naked, onely a white Deer-skin, Tann’d in Man’s Brains, about their Middle. They maintain’d continual War against the Zapoteca’s, and could never have been subdu’d by the Spaniards, had it not been for their Dogs, which kept them in such awe, that thirty Spanish Soldiers ventur’d to live in Illephonso amongst thirty thousand Mixes, who now drive a Trade in Cotton, Maize, and Gold.

3. San Jago de Nexapa appears at a great distance on a high Mountain, where also twenty Soldiers with their Dogs were wont to awe the cruel Natives.

4. The last Place, built by Gonzales de Sandovall, Anno 1522. is Villa del Espiritu Santo, Commands fifty Indian Villages, which with great difficulty were brought to submit to the Spaniards.

The River Aquivicolco affords a convenient Harbor, the Mouth thereof being a hundred and ninety Paces broad.

Upon the Southern Ocean is the Haven Guatulco, where the Ships that Sail to Honduras and Peru take in their Lading. The Custom-house belonging to this Place was first plunder’d by Sir Francis Drake, and nine years after burnt by Candish.

The River Ometipu, which springing out of the Mountain Cacatepec, falls into Tepoanteque, abounds with divers sorts of good Fish, especially Cra-Fish. There are also reckon’d of the Natives of this Province, no less than fifteen thousand Persons that pay Tribute to the Spaniards, besides Women and Children, and also a great number of Spaniards.

Sect. V.
Panuco.

Bounds and Description of Panuco.

Panuco is the most Northerly Province of New Spain, by some call’d Guasteca, bounded on the East with the Gulf of Mexico; on the West with Uxitipa, a Countrey of New Gallicia; on the North with some undiscover’d Countreys of Florida, from which it is divided by the River of Palms; on the South with Mechoacan and Mexicana. It is call’d Panuco, from a River of that Name, which turning from the Mountains Tepecsuan in New Gallicia, and dividing New Biscay from the Province of Zacatecas, passeth through the midst of this Countrey also, and at last empties it self into the Gulf.

This Countrey is reckon’d to be about fifty Leagues in length, and not much less in breadth; of a fruitful Soil, having some Mynes of Gold in it, and once very populous till the Spaniards, about the Year 1522. dispeopled it by their insatiable cruelty.

Conquest of it difficult.

Before Ferdinand Cortesius, Francis de Garay attempted to Conquer this Province, but after much pains to no purpose, he return’d with but a small remnant of those he carried with him; and though Cortesius subdu’d the Countreys Ayotetextetlatan and Chila, yet it was not without many considerable Losses; for the Inhabitants being valiant and cruel, not fearing the Spanish Bullets, ran in amongst them, and made great slaughter, and (according to an old Custom in New Spain) drank their Blood.

Barbarous Customs of the People.

These People, on their Festival Days call’d Raeaxipo Veliztli, which signifies A Flaying of Slaves, us’d to pull off the Skins of a certain number of Slaves, with which they walkt about begging Alms from Hut to Hut, and whosoever deny’d them, was sure of a Blow in the Face with the bloody Skin; of which so long as there was but one Lappet remaining, they went a Begging; and whatsoever they got, was employ’d in Uses and Necessaries belonging to their Idolatry. On the foremention’d Days they also us’d other barbarous Customs, amongst which this was one: The Priest challenging the Slave which was to be Offer’d, to Fight for his Life, he had one of his Feet ty’d to a great round Stone, and having a Sword to offend, and a Shield to defend himself, Encountred with the Priest, who was Arm’d after the same manner, whom if he conquer’d, he not onely preferv’d his Life, but gain’d the Name of a valiant Man.

Strange usage of Prisoners.

They also dealt strangely with Persons that were yearly to be Offer’d to their Idols: for after having wash’d them, they put on them the Clothes of the Idol, and gave them the same Name, every one honouring them as a God; were permitted to walk up and down, but guarded by twelve Men, that they might not escape; for then the chiefest of the Guard was to supply the others place: Moreover, they resided in the chiefest Apartments of the Temple, eat of the best, were serv’d like Princes, and attended through the Towns by Persons of the greatest Quality, who led them through the Streets; where they no sooner play’d on a little Pipe, but all People came running to them, fell at their Feet and worship’d them: In the Night they lock’d them up in a Cage, secur’d with Iron Bars, and at the appointed time flay’d them alive.

Towns and Villages.

The chief Towns now remaining, and inhabited by the Spaniards, are 1. St. Lewis de Tampice, a Colony of Spaniards situate on the Northern Bank of the River Panuco, at the very Mouth of it; where it hath a very large Haven, but so barr’d with Sands, that no Ship of any great Burden can enter or abide in it with safety; and yet the River otherwise so deep, that Vessels of five hundred Tun, might Sail up threescore Leagues at least within Land, and thereby visit the rich Mynes of Zatatecas on the one side of it, and of New Biscay on the other, at pleasure, and without fear of much opposition.

2. St. Stevan del Puerto, on the South side of the same River, eight Leagues distant from the Sea, or Gulf of Mexico, at present the Metropolis or chief Town of the Province, built by Cortesius in the place where stood old Panuco, which was likewise the Metropolis, or Head Town of the Natives, before the Spaniards burnt and destroy’d it.

3. St. Jago de las Valles, which is a Fronteer Place, and enjoyeth certain special Immunities, and some fair Possessions also for defence of the Countrey against the Salvages. It is twenty five Leagues distant from St. Stevan del Puerto, lying in an open or Champain Countrey, and is fenc’d about with a Wall of Earth.

Miles Philips his Voyage.

Miles Philips, an Englishman, put ashore by Captain John Hawkins, in the Bay of New Spain, Anno 1568., suffer’d great hardship before he came to Panuco, from whence returning, he made mention of a City lying along a River of the same denomination, (which is there not above two Bowe shoots-broad,) in a pleasant Countrey, containing two hundred Spanish Families, beside the antient Inhabitants and Negro’s, which all drive a great Trade in Salt, which is made in Pans Westward from the River: Philips travelling from Panuco to Mexico, saw by the way the Villages Nohete, by the Spaniards call’d Santa Maria, and a Cloyster of white Monks: Next he view’d Mestitlan, where some grey Monks had a House, and the Town Puchuen.

Chilton’s Journal.

Another account of this Province is taken from a Journal kept by John Chilton, four years after Philips’s Voyage; he having a Spaniard for his Convoy, left Mexico to find out Panuco; in three days time they reach’d the City Mestitlan, where he observ’d, that twelve Spanish Families liv’d amongst thirty thousand Indians. The City built on a high Mountain, full of Woods, is surrounded with Villages, through which run many brave Springs; and the Air about them is no less wholsom than the Ground fruitful; the High-ways are shaded with all sorts of Fruit-Trees.

The Village Clanchinoltepec, four times more Populous than Mestitlan, belongs to a Spanish Nobleman, who built a Cloyster there for nine Augustin Monks, of which Order there also reside twelve in the City Guaxutla.

Moreover, they travel’d over the plain Countrey Guastecan, to the Village Tancuylabo, inhabited by a tall People, with blue Painted Bodies, and Pleited Hair, hanging down to their Knees, going stark naked, but never without a Bowe and Arrow. They esteem nothing more than Salt, as being the onely Cure against certain Worms that grow between their Lips. From hence they travel’d to Tampice, in which Journey they spent nine days; and coming thither, were inform’d, that of forty Christians which dwelt in the same, the Indians had slain twelve, whilst they were gathering of Salt. From hence they came to Panuco, then in a manner deserted, because of the Indians oppressing the Spaniards, of which, at that time, there were but ten, and one Priest. Chilton falling sick here, resolv’d nevertheless to change that unwholsom Air and barren place for a better; to which purpose, getting a Horse, he took an Indian behind him for his Guide, but loosing his way in a thick Wood, happen’d amongst a Company of wild People, which dwelt in Straw Huts, twenty of them immediately surrounding him, brought him some clear sweet Water to drink, out of a Gilt Venice Glass, which having drunk, two naked Men led him into the high-way; which ended at the Gate of the Wall’d City Santo Jago de las Valles, inhabited by twenty five Spanish Families, who inform’d Chilton of the great danger which he had been in, for the People which gave him the Water were Man-eaters, who not long since, had burnt an Augustine Cloyster, built on a Mountain, had taken away, and eat the People, of which they had in all likelyhood gotten the Venice Glass; and had they not observ’d Chilton to be sickly, he had without doubt been eaten by them, and his Skin, with some of his Hair, (that being a great Ornament amongst them) been hung about their middle.

During Chilton’s stay in St. Jago, Frans de Page came thither with forty Soldiers from the Vice-Roy Henry Manriques, and took five hundred Indians, good Bowe Men out of the Neighboring Villages, Tanehipa and Tameclipa, with which he design’d to go to the Silver Mines at Zacatecas: Chilton joyning with this Company, came to the great River De las Palmas, which separates New Spain from Florida, where they spent three days in vain, seeking to find a passage over; wherefore they at last took pieces of Timber, which joyning together, and standing upon, they were Tow’d over by Swimming Indians; being gotten on the other side, they March’d over steep Mountains, and thick Wildernesses, and came at last to Zacatecas, on whose Silver Mines, the richest in all America, work’d above three hundred Spaniards daily.

Sect. VI.
Tabasco.

Bounds and Description of Tabasco.

The last Countrey belonging to New Spain is Tabasco, bounded on the North by the Northern Ocean, and on the East with Jucatan; and however some account it a distinct Province, yet others make no mention of it, letting it pass for that part of Jucatan which lies about the City Tabasco, from which it seems to be denominated: The Ground level and without Mountains, hath many great Woods of Cedar-Trees, Brasile, and others. Here are also many good Indian Fruits, as the Manmeyes, Zapotes, Aguacates, and Guajabos. For three Moneths they have continually dry Weather, the rest of the year being for the most part rainy; which vicissitude of Moisture and Heat makes the Countrey exceeding fruitful, insomuch that they have three or four Harvests of Maiz in a year.

Vines, Figs, Lemmons, Oranges, Rice, Barley, and all sorts of Garden-Herbs grow here also in great plenty.

The Pools, Brooks and Lakes, abound likewise with all manner of Fish: and for Sea-Fish, besides the Tortugas, and Yguanras, the Manate, or Sea-Cow, is of principal note.

The Fish Manate.

This Fish is terrible to behold, having a Head like an Ox, little Eyes, two Feet near the Head in stead of Fins, two round Holes in stead of Ears, round bones like Balls in its Brains, a short Tail, and bristly Skin: The Females have two Dugs, with which they suckle their Young.

Birds.

Peacocks, Pheasants, Parrots, Quales, Hens, Pigeons, with several sorts of Birds altogether unknown to the Europeans, are here in great abundance.

Beasts.

The Woods also abound with Tygers and Lyons, which do no little hurt to the Inhabitants, Wild Hogs, Deer, and Rabbets, are likewise here in great plenty; and Turtles of an exceeding bigness: Likewise Apes, Polecats, and Squerrils, which do very much hurt to the Fruit-Trees, especially the Cacao. The Musticho’s are a great annoyance to the People, and disturb their rest at Night.

Languages of the Natives.

Since the Spaniards have conquer’d Tabasco, they have forc’d the Inhabitants to observe their Laws and Customs. They speak three sorts of Languages, amongst which that most us’d, call’d Chontal, is copious of Words. The second, Zoques, is spoken on the Mountains which divide Chiapa and Tabasco. The Mexican Tongue was first brought thither by the Garrisons which Muteczuma plac’d there in the Forts Zimatlan and Xicalango, and is the most spoken, in regard it hath not onely its Accents, but is also of great use, partly because it is understood in most places of America, and partly because the Priests have made Songs in that Tongue, with which the Tabascans are much delighted.

The chief City Nostra Sennora de la Vittoria, already mention’d in Jucatan, was so call’d by Ferdinand Cortesius, from the great Victory which he obtain’d over the Indians when he march’d first towards Mexico.

Thus far of the Description of the several Parts and Divisions of New Spain, differing in Customs and Languages, though most of them have some affinity with the Mexicans, who by force of Arms had made a way to the supream Empire. All of them acknowledge a Creator, but have no Name to express the Word God. But besides the Creator of the World they have made to themselves Gods of many other Creatures; amongst which are the Sun, Moon, Stars, and the Manes of the Deceased, the care of whose Burial they committed to the Priests, which was sometimes in the Fields, sometimes in their Houses; others carried their dead Bodies to the Mountains, some buried them in Temples; and as they either burnt or buried the Body, so they buried or burnt their Clothes and Riches with them, especially of Persons of Quality, whilst those that accompanied the Corps sung a mournful Song; after which they Feasted. The Heirs of Noble-men that had been at the Funeral put themselves all into Mourning. A Person, after he is dead, is stretch’d out upon the Floor, where he lies till all his Friends come to Present and Complement him, as if living: But at the death of an eminent Person they not onely bring him Presents, but proffer him his Slaves, Steward, Butlers, Dwarfs, and Houshold Priest, (all which a Lord must keep) that they may serve him in the other World. The Priests which perform’d the Funeral Ceremonies, walk’d before the Corps with the Image of the Idol which the Deceased had appropriated to himself, (for every Lord, according to the greatness of his Quality, bore the Name and Apparel of some Idol or another;) other Priests beat on Drums, play’d on Pipes and singing Dirges, perfum’d the Way with Myrrh, whilest the Servants and Relations made a doleful cry; a Herauld also carried the Coat of Arms and Trophies of the Deceased, artificially painted on Cloth; at last they pyl’d sweet Wood about the Corps, which being lighted, and the Body burnt to Ashes, a Priest in a frightful Dress, Vizarded with a gaping Mouth, long Teeth, and fiery Eyes, came on a sudden, and with a long Stick stirr’d the Ashes about, and gathering it in an Urn, buried the same with the fore-mention’d things.

The Idols in New Spain are represented in terrible Figures, to which they Offer humane Sacrifices.

The Priests, divided into higher or lower Orders, acknowledge a supream Head, which they call Papas. Each Idol had a peculiar sort of Priests: Those that serv’d Viztlipuzli, obtain’d their Places by Inheritance; but others were chose by the Commonalty, unless they had been bred Priests from their Infancy.

Cloysters dedicated to the ancient Mexican Religion.

The Mexican Cloysters in the time of Heathenism were generally built in the chiefest Temples, in a great Piazza, or square Court, where for the most part two Monastical Houses stood one against another, the one inhabited by a Fraternity of Recluses, and the other by a Sisterhood; which last being Maids of twelve or thirteen years of age, call’d The Penitential Daughters, swept the Temple, prepar’d Meat for the Idols and Priests, which was plentifully supply’d from the Alms and Offerings that were daily brought in to the Priests, consisting of little Cakes made like Hands and Feet, besides other strange Meats, which being set before the Idols, was soon after taken away again, and eaten up by the Priests: They were under a Governess, who employ’d them in making Embroideries to adorn the Temple; and sometimes rose up with the Priests at Mid-night, and play’d on Pipes, perfum’d the Temple, and scourg’d themselves till the Blood ran down their Backs, besmearing their Faces therewith, and leaving it on a whole year; then going into a large Chamber, where a Cistern stood for that purpose, they wash’d it off again; after which, if they committed the least uncleanness, they were put to a most miserable Death; which was judg’d upon seeing a Rat run through the Nuns Chamber, or a Batt flying by it, or finding any piece of Cloth gnaw’n by a Mouse or Rat; for they suppose that the fore-mention’d Creatures dare not come into a hallow’d place, unless defil’d. In this recluse manner they were onely confin’d to live a year, which being expir’d, they had free leave to Marry.

The House opposite to the Nuns in the same square place of the Temple, was inhabited by Youths of eighteen and twenty years of age, whose Heads were shaven like Monks, and pleited Tufts hung from the Crown down to their Backs; they liv’d also mean and chaste, kept the Priests Clothes and Perfuming-Vessels, carried Wood for Offerings, and kept always burning Lamps before Viztlipuztli’s Altar. Amongst them were also Boys of a less Age, whose Office was to gather Flowers and Herbs to strow the Temple with, to sharpen the Priests Lances, which they Let themselves Blood with every Night in the Legs, and carry them Water. These Youths, Cloth’d in Nets, fell on their Faces on the Ground when they met with a Woman, and went four and four, or six and six together to beg Alms, and by turns watch’d the fore-mention’d Fire; in the Morning they drew Blood out of their Thighs, with which they anointed their Temples down to their Ears, and when the Blood look’d black, wash’d it off again in a consecrated Bath, which their strict and severe Life endur’d a whole Year.

Mexican Religion abhorr’d by the neighboring People.

The particular Religion of the Mexicans, compos’d of cruel slaughters and butcheries of Men, reign’d a long time against the minds of the other Indians that were under their Dominion, every one beginning more to abhor the cruel flaying of living People, and tearing out the Hearts of Men for Offerings; and the rather, because they were forc’d to fetch them out of their Enemies Countrey with the hazard of their own Lives, insomuch that they were ready long before to have embrac’d another Doctrine, if any other Teacher had but appear’d amongst them; which was the chief reason why they so easily receiv’d the Roman Religion: for when Cortesius had conquer’d the City Mexico, the Mechoacan Agents entreated him to send them Teachers to prescribe them Laws, according to which they might live, because their Idolatry, which had long oppress’d them, was not to be suffer’d any longer, because of the Cruelties which were requir’d of them in the performance thereof.

Their Processions.

Their Processions were stately, and after this manner: The chiefest Nuns raising a Paste of Bledoi-Seed and parched Maiz, kneaded it with Honey, of which they made an Idol resembling their Deity Viztipuztli, across whose Nose and Forehead they drew a blue Stroke; his Head they adorn’d with a Plume of Feathers, and in the left Hand plac’d a round Box, in the right a crooked Staff like a Serpent, and Wings behind on his Shoulders; at the appointed Feast-day the Nuns meet before Sun-rising, in new white Apparel, with Garlands of Maiz about their Heads and Necks, which hung down below the left Shoulder, their Faces painted with several colours, about their Arms hung Parrots Feathers from their Elbows down to their Hands: Thus adorn’d, they carried the kneaded Idol to a Court, where the Youths that inhabited a Cloyster in the same Temple, fetching the Idols blue Throne, with great Reverence set it down at the lower Step of the Temple, at which the People threw Dust on their Heads; which was no sooner done, but the Boys ran with all speed to the Mountain Chapultepec, a League from Mexico, whither the Multitude following them in manner of Procession, made all short Prayers and Offerings there; from thence hastening into the Champain Fields Atlacuavaya, they perform’d the like Service as before; which done, they went to the Village Cuyoacan, a League farther; from whence they came back in all haste with their Idol into Mexico: Wherefore this Processioning for its expedition was call’d Ipaina Viztliputli. The Idol being brought into the Temple, was by four Cords made fast to his Throne, hoised up to the Cieling with the noise of Drums and Trumpets, whilst the fore-mention’d Youths strow’d the Temple both within and without full of Roses; after which the Nuns gave the Boys the resemblances of Bones made of the same Dough with the Idol, with which they were to cover the Floor of the Chappel; then appear’d the Temple-Priests, with Scarfs about their Bodies, Garlands on their Heads, and Strings with Flowers about their Necks, each going in order according to his quality to the place where the Bones lay; which being Consecrated with Songs and Dances, were religiously worshipp’d for Bones of the Idol; after which six of the Priests went down to the Stone Quauxicalli, on which the Prisoners lying upon their Backs, had their Hearts pull’d out; which being finish’d, the Maids and Boys before-mention’d went to meet one another, Dancing to the sound of Pipes, Drums and Songs; which their nearest Relations answering, Danc’d round about them, whither the whole City and Countrey People all about came flocking in great numbers.

During this high Feast none, upon great Penalties, durst eat any other Food but the Cakes made of the same Dough of which the Idol was made; neither were they permitted, though Children, to drink till the Afternoon.

Lastly, the Priest climb’d up to a Chappel strow’d with Roses, in which the Idol sitting, they disrob’d him, broke his holy Arms and Legs into little pieces, which they distributed amongst the common People, who receiv’d them with great Reverence, and with tears in their Eyes, imagining they eat the Body of their God; for which honour every one paid a tenth part of the Charge which had been spent in this high Feast. Then a Priest admonish’d them how they should lead their Lives, since they were united with their God; which ended, they all went to their several Habitations in a wonderful good order from the Temple.

Ancient Attire of the Mexicans.

Concerning the Mexicans Apparel, it is a sufficient testimony, that they are no way of the same original with the several barbarous Nations, that run up and down naked in New Spain: for the Inhabitants of Mexico went antiently Cloth’d in Cotton: On their Heads they wore a high Plume of red Feathers; about their Necks, over their Shoulders, Breast and Back, a kind of large Thorax of Feathers curiously pleited; each Arm adorn’d with Armlets, and their Middles girt with broad white Girdles full of red Streaks; in stead of Garters they wore Laces of Feathers, as also a little above their Ancles. Their Priests besmear’d all their Bodies, especially the Head, with an Ointment, whose special vertue was to make their Hair grow exceeding long, which they braided with broad Cotton Strings; they also smutch’d themselves with a kind of blacking Stuff; when they went to make Offerings to their Idol in Caves, Woods, or on high Mountains, they bedawb’d themselves with an Ointment made of Spiders, Salamanders, Adders, Scorpions and Toads, which the Temple-Boys caught for them in great abundance. This Ointment they made with many Circumstances; for having roasted the fore-mention’d Vermine on the Hearth of the perpetual Fire before Viztlipuztli’s Altar, and stamp’d the same in a Mortar with Tobacco, living Scorpions, the Seed Ololuchqui, (to which they ascrib’d a power of representing Visions) hairy Worms, and Soot, they kneaded all together, put the Ointment in Pots, and plac’d it before the Idol, thenceforth reputing it a sanctifi’d Medicine, that would prove good against all manner of Diseases; wherefore the Priests being always sent for to the Sick in stead of Doctors, perfum’d the Patient, shav’d his Hair, hung Snakes Bones about his Neck, and order’d him at a certain Hour to bathe himself, and in the Night to watch before a Fire-hearth, and to eat no Bread but what had been Offer’d to their Idol. Moreover, the said Ointment is thought to have another power, viz. to make those that anointed themselves with the same, valiant and strong; which the common People believ’d, because the Priests would go through Woods and Wildernesses that abounded with ravenous Beasts.

These Heathens also seem’d to have something of Circumcision and Baptism; for they not onely cut off a piece of the Infant’s Ears and privy Members, which they Offer’d to their Idols, but also wash’d them as soon as they came into the World, putting into their Hands such Tools as were of use in their Fathers Profession.

Their Nuptial Solemnities.

Their Marriages also were celebrated with great solemnity: The Priest having ask’d the Bride and Bridegroom, If they would joyn together in Matrimony? if they both consented, he ty’d the Brides Scarf, and Bridegrooms Coat together, and so accompanying them home, led them nine times about the Fire-hearth: If the Bride had no Impediments, then the Bridegroom made Presents to her Father and Mother, Offerings to the Gods, and a brave Dinner to the nearest Relations; after which an Inventory was drawn of what each of them had brought, that upon their being Divorc’d, (which was very common amongst the Mexicans) each might have his share; and if they had Children, the Man was to keep the Sons, and the Woman the Daughters; nor were they permitted, on pain of death, being once parted, to joyn together again.

The Feast Texcoalt.

On the ninteenth of May they kept the Feast Texcoalt, Consecrated to the Idol Tezcatlipuca, before whom they Offer’d a Slave, which was done after this manner: Towards the Evening the Multitude coming into the Temple, the Priests pulling off the Idols old, put on new Apparel, hung him full of Precious Stones and Armlets, set Plumes of Feathers on his Head; which done, the Curtains behind which he stood, were drawn, and a Priest Cloth’d exactly like the Idol coming forth, turn’d himself round, blow’d a kind of Trumpet towards the four Winds, and ate Earth, which all the People imitated: whereof those which had committed any hainous Offence, Offer’d Incense to the Idol, and weeping, begg’d forgiveness of their Sins. Those that were Soldiers besought him to grant them store of Prisoners, and strength to conquer their Enemies; for which they would return him thanks with Offer’d Prisoners.

This Feast of Texcoalt lasting ten days, ended on the twenty ninth of May with peculiar Ceremonies; for in the Morning a company of Priests, black all over, carried on their Shoulders a large Chair of State richly adorn’d; in which sat their Idol Tezcatlipuca, and Priests with long pleited Hair, and Clad in the same Apparel with the Idol, which they set down at the Foot of a pair of Stairs which led up to a Chappel; whither the attendant Youths and Virgins came and spread Carpets before it, and green Boughs of Manghey; after which two Priests carried the Idol into a spacious Court in the Temple, several others walking before, each with a perfuming Vessel; when they threw their Perfumes on the Consecrated Hearth, they held their Hands towards the Idol, desiring him that he would send their Prayers to Heaven: Next follow’d the Multitude, who scourg’d themselves till the Blood ran down from their Backs. So soon as the Procession was ended, the represented Tezcatlipuca was hoised up to the Cieling, and abundance of Flowers strow’d before the Altar; which done, every one went home to Dinner, whilst the Youths and Virgins adorn’d the Idol, and plac’d Meat before him: Lastly, the Votaresses came two and two with Baskets of Bread, and Dishes of Meat: their Governess in a white Sur-Coat over a red Vest, with Wings on her Shoulders, and broad Girts, at which hung Calabashes fill’d with holy Reliques and Flowers: Moreover, she conducted the Votaresses to the Steps of the Altar on which the Idol sat; where having eaten Bread they came back, and the Temple-Servants went in their places, and carried the Meat which stood on the Altar to the Priests Cells, who by that time were to have Fasted five days: this done, the People came all to the Temple again, to be present at the end of the Feast: then a Slave, who had represented the Idol a whole year, appear’d, to whom everyone having shew’d Reverence, the chief Priest cutting open his Breast, tore the Slave’s Heart reaking out of his Body, and shew’d it to the Sun; then the Consecrated Youths and Maids made a great noise with Drumming, Singing and Dancing about the Body till Sun-set; after which the Virgins going up to the upper Chappel, plac’d Bread and Fruit, made up like dead Mens Bones and Heads, before the Idol, where, after it had stood a little while, the Servants went up and fetch’d it down, whilst the Youths and Maids went to their several Cloysters.

Much after the same manner, and with such like brutish Ceremonies, not worth mentioning, was also celebrated the Feast of Quetzatcoalt.

In the inner part of the Temple stood a Stage, on which upon Festival Days the People Acted Drolls; in which they sometimes feign’d themselves deaf, blind, lame, and the like, and begg’d to be cur’d of their Idols; sometimes were dress’d like Serpents, Adders, Crocodiles, or other ravenous Beasts, in which postures they fought one with another.

Computation of Time amongst the Mexicans.

Those Feasts were all kept on certain times, according to the Mexican Almanack, in which the Year was divided into eight Moneths, and each Moneth into forty five Days, which together made three hundred and sixty: The five remaining Days, to compleat the Year, they kept apart, on which all Affairs whatsoever were laid aside, as Selling, Buying, Offerings, &c. nothing else being thought on but Feasting one another for the passing away of the time. The first Day of their Year was on the twenty sixth of February. Each Moneth had a peculiar Name and Sign. Moreover, they divided the Year into four parts by as many Representations, viz. a House, a Rabbet, a Cane, and a Flint to strike Fire with; and Figur’d it out by a Wheel with four Spikes jutting out round about it, colour’d green, red, blue, and yellow, and in the middle thereof a Sun; each Spike signifi’d thirteen years, wherefore it had thirteen Divisions, distinguish’d by the four fore-mention’d Representations: At each Division of the Wheel they set down what remarkable things should happen that year by certain Characters; as, a Man in red Apparel typifi’d that Year when Ferdinand Cortesius, clad in Red, conquer’d Mexico. When the Wheel was fill’d with fifty two years Prognostication, then on the last Night they broke all their Pots and Vessels in pieces, and blew out their Candles, because they believ’d, that at the end of the said fifty two years the World would be at an end, and therefore they had no need of Housholdstuff, or ought else: But so soon as the Day appear’d again, they play’d on Pipes, Trumpets, and Drums, rejoycing that God had deferr’d the destruction of the World fifty two years longer; then they bought new Utensils and Candles, and made solemn Processions.

Art of Writing.

Concerning the Art of Writing amongst the Inhabitants of New Spain, Joseph Acosta tells us, That some old Books, containing ancient Passages, the Course of the Heavens, nature of Beasts and Plants, were found in Jucatan, according to the Relation of a Learned Indian, but were all burnt by Command of a Spanish Bishop, because he suppos’d them to be full of Matter touching the Black Art. Their Histories they describ’d with the Representations of the Things. Rhetorick and Poetry the Children were taught by Rote in the Schools, so that they never forgot what they had once learnt; But at present they use Spanish Letters or Characters.

Ancient Government.

Moreover, the Government of Mexico hath ever been kept in a good Order, the King’s Power being exactly limited, that nothing might be lost of the common Priviledges. The fourth King Icoath made Earls, who next to the Lords of Tezcuco and Tacuba, had right to the Crown; which was like a Mitre turn’d up behind, and rising before with a Point. According as they increas’d in Power, so they advanc’d in Royal Dignity; in which Muteczuma the Second exceeded all others: And to manifest his splendor, his House for all sorts of Creatures, and many other things, might serve for a sufficient testimony: for in it he kept Sea-Fish in salt Water, River-Fish in fresh Water, and all manner of Beasts in peculiar places: The Birds were kept in great Aviaries, surrounded with golden Rails. Next to the Kings follow’d four Earls call’d Atlacohecalcatl, which signifies Princes of the Throne Launces, a Weapon much us’d amongst the Mexicans. The next in Degree were the Tlacatecatl, or Man-cleavers; Esauahuacatl, or Blood-shedders; Tsallancalqui, or Lords of Blackness, without all which the King durst not take any Business in hand. High and lesser Courts of Judicatory, where Matters of Life and Death were try’d, were in most Cities; and other Courts also for petty Quarrels, Controversies, and the like. The Collectors brought their Revenues to the Court every Moneth. The chief thing which preferr’d both Rich and Poor to Places of Honor, consisted in Valour and heroick Exploits. Their Arms were chiefly sharp pieces of Flint made fast to a Stick, with which they could at one Blow chop off a Horses Head. They also us’d Pikes, Clubs, and Lances, and sometimes Slings: For defensive Armour, they had Helmets and Shields, made of Tygers, Leopards, and Lyons Skins. They always fell upon their Enemies unawares, their Design being generally to take Prisoners rather than to kill them; for they reserv’d them for Offerings to their Idols. Muteczuma made several Commanders over his Armies, giving them a Power one above the other, which were to be distinguish’d by several Marks; for the chiefest ty’d the Hair on the top of their Heads with a red String, betwixt which stuck a brave Plume of Feathers; at the end whereof hung as many Tassels as they had done noble Exploits. To this Order belong’d also the King, who wore one of the same Marks, with which King Muteczuma and his Son stand Carv’d on a Rock. The Ayulas, or The Order of the Eagle, consisted of valiant Men. The Grey Knights were of less Quality, and wore Collars which reach’d up to their Ears, the lower part of their Body being naked. Persons of greater Dignity, when going to the War, were Arm’d from Head to Foot: Which Order was also permitted to wear Cotton-Clothes, and Shoes richly embroider’d with Gold and Silver; they us’d painted Vessels, and had Lodgings provided for them at Court.

Their Education of Youth.

Moreover, it is worthy of observation, what great care the Mexicans took in the bringing up of their Children; to which purpose they had Schools near to their Temples, in which Youth was taught to Sing, Dance, Morality, Obedience, and also Martial Discipline. Children of noble Extract had Learned Men for their Tutors. Their Punishments for Transgressions were very severe, the Masters forcing their Scholars to Fast and Watch, carry great Burthens of Provisions to the Army, and be in the midst of Engagements. Others, whose Fancy led them to a holy Life, willingly embrac’d the Services of the Temple.

Their manner of Dancing.

Their manner of Dancing in New Spain was very strange and differing; they us’d pretty Instruments, and Songs which contain’d antique Passages, according to the Times; they in their Motions imitated Shepherds, Fisher-men, Plowmen, Hunters, and the like: Sometimes they Danc’d in Mascarades, with a Man on their Shoulders, making the same Motion with his Hands in the Air, as the other with his Feet on the Ground. They had also Tumblers and Dancers on the Ropes, which shew’d strange Tricks on an erected Pole. But above all Dances, the Mitotes was the chief, which was generally Danc’d in the King’s Palace, or inner Court of the Temple; in the middle of which they plac’d a great Drum and a hollow Tub on a large Image; round about which the most eminent Persons made a Ring, Sang sweetly, and Danc’d leisurely, when on a sudden two that are more nimble, with divers Motions came into the midst of them, and Danc’d exactly after the sound of the Drum and hollow Tub, which was seconded with the noise of Flutes and Pipes.

CHAP. VI.
New Gallicia.

Bounds and Extent of New Gallicia.

New Gallicia, by some call’d Guadalajara, from the chief City. This whole Province is the most Northern Countrey of all America, that is inhabited to any purpose by the Spaniards. Here, ’tis true, they are scatter’d up and down in all the parts of it, but it is at a huge distance, and for the most part onely where the Mines are. It is bounded on the East and to the South, with the Kingdom of Mexico or New Spain; on the West, with the Gulf or Bay of California; Northward, for so much as is yet discover’d, with Quivira and Cibola, lying between eighteen and twenty eight Degrees of Northern Latitude, that is, from La Natividad, a Port so nam’d by the Spaniards, in the Confines of New Spain, to the most Northerly Borders of Cinoloa, a part of this Province, containing, as is suppos’d, not much less than three hundred Leagues in length, and in breadth much more; and whereof not a tenth part is either us’d or frequented by the Spaniards.

Temperature and Nature of the Countrey.

The Air is generally here very temperate, inclining rather to Heat than Cold, and subject now and then to sudden Storms of Rain, and great Claps of Thunder, which yet do not hinder, but that the Countrey is held to be reasonably healthful, and the People observ’d to live generally to a good old Age. The Soil, by reason of the Climate, would be a little inclining to Drought, but that, besides the frequent Rains which it hath, it is constantly moistned with fresh Morning Dews, which make it for the most part wonderfully fruitful, almost beyond belief, yielding for every Bushel of Wheat that is sown, threescore; and of Maiz, two hundred for one; besides great plenty of Sugar-Canes and Cochinele; both which nevertheless the Spaniards are said to neglect in some sort, employing themselves wholly about richer Commodities: for the Countrey affords them good store of Mines of Silver and Brass, but of Gold or Iron, not many as yet have been found. The Rivers abound plentifully with Fish, and the Woods with Venison, and some other wild Beasts. The Countrey is generally more mountainous than plain, frequently shaded with Woods, and whole Forrests of the stateliest Pine-Trees and Oaks that are to be seen; amongst which breed abundance of Wolves, which do great mischief to the People, as also Scorpions and Mustiecho’s. The Hurts receiv’d from Scorpions, are heal’d with the Juice of the Fruit call’d Queon; those from the Mustiecho’s, by Vinegar and the Juice of Lemmon. Here is likewise a green Stone, accounted a soveraign Medicine against the Gravel.

Several sorts of Tunas-Trees.

The Trees peculiar to this Countrey, are, the Tunas, already spoken of in Guatimala, and thought to be the same we vulgarly call Indian Fig-Trees, and are distinguish’d into six sorts.

The first, by the Portuguese call’d Cardon, hath sharp Prickles, thick Leaves, full of slimy Juice, an odoriferous Flower, oval Fruit, cover’d with an Orange-colour’d Rind, and small Roots: The Fruit within consists of a white juicy, and well tasted Pulp, full of black Seed.

The second hath a round Body full of Boughs, with Star-like Prickles hanging downwards, the Flower white, and the Fruit very like that of the Cardon, onely smaller.

The third is the Caxabra, which shoots up to a great Tree full of prickly Cods; at the utmost end grows a large white Flower; the Fruit, which is as big again as an Egg, is pleasant and cooling.

The fourth sort hath a straight Body full of Prickles, runs lesser and lesser to the top; at the end of the small Boughs, each thick Leaf produces another; the Wood, if kindled, burns like a Candle.

The fifth, nam’d Cumbeba, grows out of small Roots, with three or four corner’d thick Leaves, full of Prickles, the Flower somewhat less than the former, the Fruit oval, hard and red, having a white and juicy Pulp: The Prickles of this Cumbeba-Tree are so sharp, and stick in so deep, that they can scarce be pull’d out. This is that sort of Tunas that produces Cochinele, which is a Worm that grows under the Leaves, and is cover’d with a Skin, which being neatly taken off and dry’d in the Sun, as formerly mention’d, becomes a rich Commodity. Joseph de Acosta tells us, that the Spanish Fleet, Anno 1578. carried so much Cochinele to Spain, as amounted to two hundred eighty three thousand seven hundred and fifty Ryals.

But the last sort of the Tunas is the Unirumbeba, which hath a straight Body full of Prickles, on the top whereof grow divers prickly Leaves, not unlike those of the Palm-Tree: It is onely found in barren places, remote from the Sea.

Moreover, all kind of Fruits transplanted hither from Spain thrive very well, as Apples, Pears, Granats, Figs, Peaches, Apricocks, Muskmelons, &c.

The Root Castanuela.

The Batata.

The Root Castanuela affords a much better Feeding for Swine than Acorns. But amongst many other Roots which are found here, as the Xiquimas, Taca, Cochuco, Cari, Totora and Mani, the chief is the Batata, which is fat, sweet, and windy; it runs over the Ground with a tough green Sprig, the new Fibres taking Root dispersedly up and down, being yellow without, and within full of milky Juice; the Leaf resembling a Heart, is of a pale yellow colour on the top, and douny underneath; roasted in Ashes, it eats better than a Turnip: It is divided into three sorts.

The first, call’d Omenapo yeima, when boyl’d, shews like red Betel, but Dyes of a Skye-Colour; the innermost Skin, which is of a dark Red, yields an Ink-like Juice.

The second sort, call’d Parro, differs little from the first, onely the Body, Root, and Veins of the Leaves, are of a Purple colour.

The third sort Jetiope, being white, hath a very good rellish, and cures the Ague.

The Pepper, which is here call’d Axi, grows in the warmest Valleys, and the more by being often water’d: there are of it divers kinds, differing in colour, smell, and taste one from the other; for one sort is green, yellow, or red; another sort yields a strong musky scent; and one sort is sharper, another milder: the Veins and Kernels thereof are eaten with Salt.

The Herb Cevadilla cures all manner of Sores.

Beasts.

This Countrey also breeds an innumerable company of Deer, Hogs, Goats, Sheep, Oxen, and Horses; and of hurtful Creatures, Pismires, which do great mischief to the Plants, and Locusts, which fall in huge swarms on the Corn, and cannot be frighted from the same by any means whatsoever. The want of Water is also no small prejudice to the Fields.

The biggest River, call’d Guadalajara, with many windings runs North-westward into the Southern Ocean; and four Leagues from the City of the same, falling down from a steep Rock, it makes such a horrible noise, that it deafens those which approach the same.

The Lake Mechoacan opens here also with a wide Mouth.

Two sorts of Hedge-hogs.

The River before mention’d, produces all manner of Fish in great abundance; and also a sort of Hedge-hogs, call’d Iguana, which live both in the Water, and on the Land, and are of two sorts: The first, call’d Senembi, is four Foot long, of a deep green colour, with black and white Spots, hath a scaly Skin, white Spots on each side of the Head, a row of sharp Prickles from the Head to the Tail, wide Nostrils, great black Eyes, and little Teeth. The second sort, call’d Tejaguacu, differs from the first, in having white Spots on a brown Skin, a longer Tail, and a red Tongue, which is slit. Both sorts are reported to fast eight Moneths together; and though often terribly wounded, and dead to all imagination, yet live a great while after; and though they swim up and down in Rivers, yet they Lay their Eggs in the Sand: their Flesh boyl’d is both wholsom, and of a good relish.

The manner of the Spaniards living.

The Spaniards which inhabit New Gallicia, drive a considerable Trade in Merchandizing, Husbandry, breeding of Cattel, and working in the Mines: They use Wayns and Carrs, drawn by Oxen, Mules, and Horses, to carry their Loads, as also Spanish Weights and Measures. They are little troubled with any other Mischiefs but what may happen from the treacherous Natives, who take all opportunities to run into the Woods, that there they may exercise their Pagan Religion in freedom; in which having spent some time, they gather a considerable number together, and oftentimes fall unawares on the Spaniards, who use Leather Shields and Helmets, and furr’d Cotton Clothes, to secure them from the Arrows which the Indians, lying in Ambuscades, shoot at them out of the Bushes.

The Nature, Habits, and Customs of the Natives.

The Natives, though subtile, are lazy, and will not work, unless for great Rewards. They wear Cotton Shirts, square Cloaks of the same Stuff, made fast with two Buttons on their Breasts; Drawers, and soal’d Shoes: Flag-Matts serve them for Beds, on which they lie under Cotton Clothes: About their Necks, Arms, and Legs, they wear green Stones, and Snale Shells for an Ornament. Their greatest Recreation is Dancing, their Musick being nothing else but the noise or sound of a piece of hollow Wood. Horse-flesh, and Bread made of Maiz, is by them accounted a great Dainty. The Drink Cacao is also highly esteem’d amongst them; but much more the Wine that they make of Maquey, which is the wonderful Tree that affords many necessary things, viz. Syrrup, Honey, Oyl, Vinegar, Yarn, Needles, Water, and Wine; every Man making it his Business to plant and preserve the same with great care near his House, notwithstanding they grow in several places of the Fields; they have broad thick Leaves with sharp ends, out of which is drawn a Thorn, which serves them for a Needle or Pin. These Leaves have a hairy Filament about them, which serves in stead of Thred: the young Sprout being cut, produces a sweet Juice, which boyl’d, makes good Wine; when grown sowre, serves for Vinegar; but being twice boyl’d, becomes a Syrrup; and being hung over the Fire a third time, a perfect Honey: Also the Wood being spungie, keeps Fire as well as Match. Moreover, the Inhabitants when they travel, carry Leather Bags with them full of Cacao, Maiz, and Pepper, mix’d together.

Over each Village in this Countrey the Spaniards have plac’d an Indian Casique, Alcalde, and Alguazil, where all sorts of Provisions are sold at a Set-price.

The Casiques are succeeded by their Heirs, who resent nothing worse than Affronts, and take pride in nothing more than their Valour.

The Moors or Negro’s which are brought hither from Guinee, do all manner of hard Labour.

The Guachichiles and Guamares area valiant People, and have each their peculiar Language, utterly different from the Mexican.

Division of Nova Gallicia.

This Countrey comprehends these inferior Provinces: 1. Guadalajara; 2. Xalisco; 3. Chiametta; 4. Couliacan; 5. Cinoloa; all of them on the Western Shore. 6. Zacatecas, to which some add Nova Biscaia and Nova Mexico, though others treat of them as distinct Countreys apart from the rest.

Sect. II.
Guadalajara.

Bounds of Guadalajara.

Guadalajara is bounded on the West, with Xalisco; on the South and South-West, with New Spain; and on the North, with Zacatecas. It is a Countrey exceeding pleasant, and rich in all kind of Commodities, but especially in its Mines of Silver. It is well water’d with the River Barania, which runneth through the midst of it, and with divers other Streams: yielding abundantly both Wheat, Maiz, and some other Grain. In a word, there is nothing said of the properties of New Gallicia in general, either for Soil, Climate, or People, but is peculiarly verifi’d of this Province.

Towns and Cities.

The chief Towns are 1. Guadalajara, which gives Name to the whole Province. It is seated on the Banks of the River Barania, in a most delectable and sweet Air, and a rich Soil, by advantage whereof it is become the Metropolis of New Gallicia, honour’d with an Episcopal See, which was translated thither from Compostella in the Year 1570. with the Courts of Judicature, and the Residence of the King’s Treasurers for that Province. This City was built on the Plain Molino, by Nunnez de Guzman, in the Year 1531. The neighboring Mountains afford store of Timber. All manner of Spanish Plants grow here likewise in great plenty. In the City is a Cathedral, several Cloysters, inhabited by Augustine and Franciscan Monks. The Bishop of this City belongs to the Arch-bishop of Mexico. The Air very temperate, neither molesting the Inhabitants with too great Cold, nor excess of Heat.

2. St. Maria de los Lagos, a Town thirty Leagues Eastward of Guadalajara, being a Fronteer Place, and built on purpose to secure the Countrey against the Chichemecæ, which are a barbarous and unreduc’d People of the North-East parts of this Countrey who harbouring themselves in Caves under Ground in the thickest huge Woods and Forrests, do oftentimes issue out, and make foul spoil in the Countrey where they come, having first intoxicated themselves with a Liquor made of certain Roots, and would do much more harm, if it were not for this Garrison.

3. Del Spiritu Santo, built by the Founder of the other two, viz. Nunnez de Gusman aforesaid, in a part of the Countrey which they call Tepeque.

Sect. III.
Xalisco.

Bounds and Description of Xalisco.

Xalisco, or Galesco, as some call it, is bounded on the North, with Couliacan; on the South, with some parts of New Spain; on the East, with the Province of Guadalajara; and on the West, with the Gulf or Bay of California.

The Countrey is chiefly fertile in Maiz and Mines of Silver, not altogether so apt for Herbage and Pasture as some other Countreys about it. The People were Cannibals before the Spaniards came amongst them, eating Man’s-flesh; were much given to quarrelling and Contentions amongst themselves, but by this time, ’tis suppos’d they are reasonably well reclaim’d both from the one and the other.

Towns of chief note.

In this Countrey, besides many other goodly Streams, is the great and famous River Barania, on the Banks whereof are seated most of their principal Towns, as 1. Xalisco, which gives Name to the whole Province, and to a large Promontory or Foreland on the Western Coasts, which shoots it self out into the Bay of California, right over against certain Islands, which the Spaniards call The Three Maries. This was an ancient City or Town of the Natives, but sack’d and taken by Nunnez de Gusman, in the Year 1530.

2. Compostella, built by the aforesaid Gusman, and so nam’d from the City in Spain, so famous for the Grave of James the Apostle, who (according to the Roman Writers) was buried there, lies near the South Sea on a barren Soil, within the Torrid Zone; yet the Ground breeds many sorts of Vermine, besides other noxious Creatures; amongst which the Capybara roots up whole Trees and other Plants in the Night. This Beast, resembling an indifferent large Hog, hath short Legs and Claws, thick Head, with a Beard, wide Ears, and on each Jaw-bone twenty four Teeth, besides two Tusks, but no Tail; it goes slow, but swims exceeding fast, and dives under Water for a considerable time together; they often feed together in great Herds, and make a terrible noise.

3. La Purification, a small Town on the Sea side, towards the Confines of New Spain.

Sect. IV.
Chiametla.

Situation of Chiametla.

Against Xalisco juts Chiametla, along the South Sea, where the Inhabitants wear short cloaks, and Deer-skin Shoes; and in the Wars use Shields made of strong Twigs twisted together. The Women, which are indifferent handsom, are clad down to their Feet.

Towns of principal note.

The chief Town of this Province is Sant Sebastian, call’d from the River upon which it stands; it was built by Captain Franciscus de Yvarra, Anno 1554. who discovering many Silver Mines, hath made several Melting-houses, in which the Silver being melted swims upon the Lead.

Sect. V.
Couliacan.

Bounds of Couliacan.

Next to Chiametla, Westward and Southward of Cinoloa, lies Couliacan, Coasting all along the Bay of California, which it hath on the West; on the East it hath New Biscay; and on the South, Xalisco. The Countrey is not defective in any kind of necessary Provision, but more especially it aboundeth with Fruits of all sorts. But the Spaniards look onely at the Mines, of which they have some few in this Countrey. The People were generally Cloth’d with Cotton-Wooll when the Spaniards came first amongst them, but yet never a whit the more modest, being exceedingly given to Venery, and that in a more shameless and beastly manner than many other Americans who went naked.

Towns.

The Spanish Towns are these, 1. Hiustula, seated on the Banks of a fair River, distant about a days Journey from the Sea. 2. Quinola. 3. Quatrobarrios, an old Town of the Natives, but new nam’d by the Spaniards. 4. El Leon, an old Burrough. 5. Couliacan, the chief Town of the Province. 6. St. Michael, in the Valley of Arroba, two Leagues distant from the Sea, in a rich and plentiful Countrey, both for Corn and Fruit, whither it was remov’d from the Banks of the River Orala, where it first stood; it was built by Nunnez de Gusman in the Year 1531. after he had burnt the Towns, and destroy’d a great number of the Natives, Inhabitants of the Countrey.

Nunnez de Gusman first Discoverer of this Countrey.

Serpents worshipp’d by the Natives.

This Countrey was first discover’d by the aforesaid Nunnez de Gusman (after he had built Guadalajara) after this manner: Marching from Chiametla to Piatzala, he ruin’d this Province with Fire and Sword: he likewise conquer’d the Countreys of Zapuatun and Piaztla; the first being a Plain, lay inclos’d within high Mountains, where the Spaniards met none but Women, till they came to a great River call’d De la Sall, whose Banks on each side were well inhabited; the second juts against the Ocean, and is water’d by a River of the same Denomination. Here, within the Houses, (which are built after a strange manner) lay thousands of Serpents mingled together, with their Heads sticking out on the top and at the sides, and hissing with open Mouth at those which approached them. The Inhabitants shew’d great Reverence to these Serpents, because (as they said) the Devil often appear’d to them in that form. And this seems to be a Custome amongst them from the Tradition of Eves being tempted by the Devil in the shape of a Serpent: Nor was this Superstition peculiar onely to these Indians, forasmuch as divers Nations of the ancient Heathens of other parts of the World, worshipp’d the Likeness of a Serpent. And even amongst the Greeks, according to Plutarch, Hesychius, Clemens Alexandrinus, and others, it was no unusual thing in their religious Worship to call on Eva, and at the same time to shew a Serpent. Plutarchus and Ælianus say, That the Egyptians honour’d a Serpent for their God. The same saith Erasmus Stella of the old Prussians; Sigismund Baro, of the Liflanders; and Alexander Guaginus, of the Sarmatians and Samogethes. Moreover, some write, that in the Province of Calecut are Serpents with exceeding great Heads, and weighing as much as a great Hog, to which the King shews great Reverence; so that it seems the Devil takes delight to be worship’d in that shape wherein he work’d the Fall of Man-kind.

Gusman leaving Piaztla march’d to Bayla, where he found the great River De Mugeres, and the Countrey full of Woods and Pastures: thence travelling upwards along Mugueres, they ascended to the top of a Mountain, where they were assaulted by the Inhabitants of the aforesaid Village Quinola, whom nevertheless they soon put to flight; but not long after receiv’d a shrew’d Repulse at the Entrance into a Wood built full of Houses; yet nevertheless being at length Conquerors, though not without sufficient loss, they march’d farther in amongst the Mountains, till their Provisions beginning to grow scarce, and they seeing no likelihood of getting to an end of this troublesom Journey, at last their Necessities forc’d them to retire.

The Fish Guarapucu.

The Piracarba.

Flying Fishes.

The Flood which comes out of the Sea up to the City St. Michael, through the River Cignatlan, abounds with Fish, and especially the Guarapucu, which is seven Foot long when it comes to its full growth; it hath no Scales, but smooth Skin of a Silver colour mix’d with Green: from the Head to the Tail runs a crooked Line of thin Scales on each side; it swims exceeding swift, feeds on lesser Fishes, and spawns in the Sea: the Flesh being wholsom and good to eat, is salted up against Winter. At the same Place is also the Piracarba, which shines exceedingly, having Silver-colour’d Scales, a broad slit Tail, a long white Beard, four great Fins, and a little Head. Farther into the Sea are a sort of flying Fish, call’d Pirabebes, which rise by thousands up out of the Water, so escaping the Dolphins and other Fish which prey on them; yet sometimes they are snatch’d up by the Birds, or else by the Fishes, when they dive down into the Water to wet their own Wings, which consist of a thin Skin, distinguish’d in length by tough Fins. These flying Fish also differ much one from another, for most of them are like Herrings; others have a thick Head, round before like the Dolphins.

Moreover, the Countrey about St. Michael was always well inhabited. The Houses, being artificially built, were adorn’d on the top with many obscene Images, and venereal Representations: But since the Spaniards have conquer’d this Countrey they have destroy’d them, and built other Houses in their stead, and also bestow’d much cost and labour on the Silver Mines De las Virgines.

Sect. VI.
Cinoloa.

Bounds of Cinoloa.

Cinoloa is the most Northern part of New Gallicia, bounded on the West, with some part of the Gulf or Bay of California; on the East, with a long Ridge of Mountains, which they call Tepecsuan; on the North, with Cibola; and with Couliacan on the South. This Country, besides the general fertility of the whole Province of New Gallicia, yields great store of Cotton-Wool, by reason whereof both Men and Women here are better Apparell’d, for the most part, than elsewhere the Americans are; is exceedingly well water’d with Rivers, which descend from those Mountains Tepecsuan, not above thirty or forty Leagues distant from the Sea; and which, with the variety of their Streams and Meandrous glidings, do divide the Countrey into many and good Pastures, which are likewise stor’d with abundance of Kine, Oxen, and other Cattel.

Towns.

The chief Towns possess’d by the Spaniards are 1. St. Philip and Jacob, seated towards the Sea side, on the Banks of a fair River, about thirty or forty Leagues distant from the Town of Couliacan.

2. St. John de Cinoloa, an ancient Colony of Spaniards, setled there by Francisco de Yvarra, in the Year 1554, which is all they have in this Countrey, except some few old Forts of the Natives, which they found, after their manner, poorly furnish’d; but have since repair’d them for Defence against the Natives of those Parts, which as yet remain unreduc’d.

Nunnez de Gusman’s Travels.

This Province was also discover’d by Nunnez de Gusman, who having rested some Weeks in St. Michael, proceeding on his Way, he Ferried over the River Petatlan, which receiv’d that Denomination because the Houses were cover’d with Mats, by the Indians call’d Petat.

The People hereabouts were generally Man-eaters.

Eighteen Leagues farther runs the River Tamochala, which hath many Villages on both sides thereof.

Between Petatlan and Tamochala lie several desolate Wildernesses, and Woods of the Brasile-Tree.

But Gusman travelling up twenty seven Leagues along the fore-mention’d River Tamochala, came to the Province Cinoloa, where they stay’d six Weeks, by reason of the abundance of Rains; during which time the Villagers provided them Turtle-Doves, Hares, Rabbets, and all sorts of Fowls; but at last deserted their Habitations in the Night: after which the Spaniards crossing Tamochala went along a barren Desart, where (had they not found Water in certain Wells, and likewise store of Juice out of the Tunas-Trees) they had without doubt perish’d; at last getting over the River Yaguinu, they found a deserted Village, out of which a broad Path led along the Stream; whither Gusman marching, he came into a Plain, where he spy’d several Indians, which after some resistance were routed by the Spanish Horse.

The Villages built on the Banks of the River Yaguinu, as also the Language of the Inhabitants differ little from the former.

Not far from hence a Ridge of Hills runs into the Sea, and also extend themselves a hundred Leagues towards Xalisco.

Sect. VII.
Zacatecas.

Bounds and Description of Zacatecas.

The Zacatecas, as they call them, are bounded on the South, with Guadalajara; on the North, with New Biscay; on the West, with Couliacan and some part of Xalisco; and on the East, with New Spain. The Countrey, especially the more Western part of it, is very rich in Silver Mines, no Province of this part of America richer; but not so apt either for Wheat or Maiz. But the Eastern parts of it are abundantly stor’d with all sorts of Fruits, the Woods every where replenish’d with Deer, the Fields no less with Corn, and every Tree almost giving Entertainment to some Bird or other.

Towns and Villages.

The Towns are 1. Las Zacatecas, forty Leagues distant from Guadalajara, and fourscore from Mexico, but neighbor’d with most rich Mines, and therefore both Garrison’d and well peopled by the Spaniards; for ’tis suppos’d there are no less than five hundred Families of them in the Town, and about the Mines.

2. St. Martins, twenty seven Leagues distant from Zacatecas, and as rich a Place, having a Colony of four hundred Spaniards at least.

3. St. Lucas de Avinno. 4. Erena, lesser Towns, but both of them rich, and seated in the midst of excellent Mines.

5. Nombre de Dios, in the most Northerly part of this Countrey, sixty eight Leagues distant from Guadalajara, and founded by the aforesaid Francisco de Yvarra; who having subdu’d and quieted the Natives, and thereby gain’d to himself the Government of these Countreys, granted the propriety of some Silver Mines both to the Spaniards and to the Natives, and by that means drew so many of them thither, that in a short time it became the chiefest and best peopled town of the whole Province.

6. Durango, in the Valley of Guadiana, eight Leagues distant from Nombre de Dios, and built by Yvarra.

7. Xeres de Frontera, a Place built on purpose for the repressing of the Chichemecæ aforesaid, and other Salvages that infested the Borders of Guadalajara, in the Regency of the Marquess of Villa Manrique.

8. Last, St. Lewis, built by Alonso Pacheco, in that part of the Countrey which is call’d Uxitipa, and peopled by him with a Colony of Spaniards, being distant about twenty Leagues from Panuco in New Spain, to which the whole Countrey of Uxitipa once belong’d.

Several Mines discover’d by the Spaniards.

The aforesaid Franciscus de Yvarra, Anno 1554. discover’d the Mine call’d Sant Martin, and since also Lucas Avinno, the Mine Del Sombrereto, lying near the City Del Erena: but the Mines De los Ranchos, Chalchuites, De las Nieves, and Del Frisuillo, would produce much more Silver, if the Mine-works were stor’d with Quicksilver. The Vice-Roy of New Spain, nam’d Lodowick de Velasco, order’d a certain number of Soldiers, Slaves, Horses and Mules, for every Mine, to defend the Workmen from the Assaults of the Natives, which oftentimes Sallied out upon them. Moreover, Velasco sent Priests through all the Countrey to Preach the Gospel: But Yvarra having the care of the Priests, guarded them with a company of Soldiers, and in his Way discover’d the Valley San Juan, and the River De las Nacos, where he conquer’d the rebelling Natives.

Near the Silver Mine Sant Martins the Monks built a Cloyster; after which Yvarra gave free leave to all that would, to dig in the Mine at Avinno, which he had bought, on condition they should pay the real fifth part of what they got, to the Spanish King: which Priviledge stirr’d up many, insomuch that Avinno in a short time grew very populous. Yvarra, though having brought his Business to this pass, could not rest, but sent Antonius Pacheco to a Valley in Guadiana, to build the foremention’d City Durango, where several Rivers make a convenient and delightful place for Habitation, whither Yvarra follow’d three Moneths after, and finish’d the new Town. But the chiefest Silver Mines, which borrow their Denominations from the Province Zacatecas, are continually guarded by five hundred Spaniards, and as many Slaves.

CHAP. VII.
New Biscay.

Bounds of New Biscay.

New Biscay, by some accounted a Province of New Gallicia, hath on the South, Zacatecas; on the West, the Countrey of Cinoloa; Northward it is bounded with New Mexico; the Eastern Borders of it looking towards Florida, not yet well discover’d: so call’d by the Spaniards, onely from its neighborhood to New Gallicia. It is, as the other Provinces, exceeding rich in Silver Mines, and hath some also of Lead; which serve principally, as some say, for the refining or purging of the other Metal. The People generally are of a stout and resolute Disposition, and with much difficulty submitting to the Yoke; yea, the Spaniards themselves confess, that there remain yet to this day four great Towns unreduc’d, though they lie, as it were, in the mid-way, betwixt the Zacatecas aforesaid, and the Mines and Town of St. Barbara of this Province: The Spaniards call them Las Quatro Ceinegas, or The Four Quagmires, as lying, perhaps, in the Marshes, or in some Fenny and lower parts of the Countrey.

Towns and Cities.

The Towns which themselves hold, are, 1. St. Barbara, famous for the rich Mines about it.

2. St. Johns, equal to the other, and not above three or four Leagues distant from it.

3. Ende, the most Northerly Town which the Spaniards have in this Countrey, distant about twenty Leagues from the other.

These be all Colonies of the Spaniards, and built on purpose for securing the Mines; which when they were first discover’d by Yvarra, he order’d Roderigo del Rio to guard the same, and took up his Winter Quarters at St. Juan in a strong House, stor’d with all manner of Provisions, and erected there by him, as a place of defence against the Chichimecæ, who (though the Spaniards kept the place with strong Guards) kill’d above four hundred of their Horses and Mules; which loss no way daunted him, so as to change his Resolution of going to Topia: whither travelling, he found many snowy Mountains, and suffer’d extream Cold, which kill’d most of their Horses; being seen fifteen days after to stand so stiffly frozen, as if still alive: at last getting within the Borders of Topia, after he had suffer’d many inconveniences, he was oppos’d by the Inhabitants, till he pacifi’d them with Presents.

Sect. II.

Convenient Havens of New Gallicia.

This Countrey hath many convenient Havens, viz. San Jago, Navidad, Malacca, Chacalla, below the Promontory Corientes, the Bay Xalisco, the Road Massatlan, and Chiametla, so call’d from a Town about eleven Leagues from the Ocean.

Here, and in several places of New Gallicia, grow Lillies, Roses, Violets, Jessamins, and many other Flowers; amongst which the Floripondium deserves peculiar observation, because it flourishes the whole Year; and its white Blossoms, which are bigger than Lillies, opening in the Morning, yield an exceeding sweet smell.

The Flower Granadilla.

In no less esteem is the Murucuia, by the Spaniards call’d Granadilla, which will not grow, if bereav’d of any of its Leaves: it bears a Flower from the resemblance of our Saviour’s Suffering, call’d The Passion-Flower, which exceeds the biggest Rose in circumference; the uppermost Leaves green, those underneath of a purple colour; on the top hangs a round Bush of a thousand interwoven threds of divers colours, distinguish’d by white and red Specks; the pale Stalk which sticks in the middle of the Flower, is divided into five others, that bend downwards with a yellow Button-like Knob; on the middlemost Stalk stands a pale yellow Flower, which appears three hours after Sun-rising, and closes again a little before Sun-set; the Fruit, which is very round, smooth, and of a pale Green, hath white Specks, a thick Rind, Saffron-colour’d Pulp, which is wholsom, of a good rellish, and hath abundance of black Seeds inclos’d in little Husks.

CHAP. VIII.
New Mexico.

Bounds of New Mexico.

New Mexico (as ’tis call’d for distinction’s sake) is bounded on the South-West with New Biscay; more directly Westward, with some parts of Quivira; the Countreys Northward of it not yet discover’d; Eastward it extends it self as far as Florida.

This Province doubtless for largeness may compare with New Gallicia, having been search’d and discover’d by the Spaniards above a hundred, some say two hundred Leagues directly Eastward, and to the North-East: and they report Wonders of it, if we may believe them, at least in respect of what was generally found in these Northern parts of America at their first Discovery; as namely, That they have Towns fairly and well built of Lime and Stone, Houses of four Stories high, and most of them provided with Stoves for the Winter Season, as well as any in Europe; the Streets fair and broad, and the People as curious and expert in divers Arts and Manufactures as any of theirs. More particularly they tell us of a Town call’d Chia, of the Province of Cuames, so big, that it is said to contain eight several Market-places. Another call’d Acoma, a great Town, but seated on the top of an high Rock, without any ordinary way of access to it, but by a pair of Stairs hewn out of the hard Stone, or else by certain Ladders, which the Inhabitants let down and take up as they please. And likewise of a third, which they call Conibas, containing, as they say, no less than seven Leagues in length, and about half so much in breadth, seated upon a Lake, but scatteringly built, and much of the space taken up with Mountains and many fair Gardens, in the midst of which the Town standeth; of all which more hereafter. This is certain, that the Countrey to which they give the Name of New Mexico, is of a vast extent, reaching from the Mines of St. Barbara in New Biscay Eastward, and to the North-East, above two hundred Leagues already discover’d, but doubtless taking up no small part of those Countreys which are sometimes assign’d to Florida, if not of the Confines of Virginia also.

Travels of Ruyz, Espejus and others.

This Countrey was first, Anno 1581. discover’d by a Franciscan Monk, nam’d Augustine Ruyz, who with two other Monks of his Order, got eight Soldiers of Conde de Coruna, Vice-Roy of New Spain, for his Companions; with whom he travell’d from the Valley Sant Bartholomew, to the Province De los Tiguas, where one of the two Monks was kill’d by the Natives, which occasion’d such a fear amongst the Souldiers, who judg’d themselves too weak to make any resistance, that they resolv’d to return, notwithstanding all the arguments which Ruyz us’d to disswade them from it; yet nevertheless he and his Brother Franciscus Lopez and four Indians, went onward of their Journey; which news the Souldiers carried back to the Franciscans in Sant Bartholomew; who fearing their Brethren would be destroy’d, sent several Souldiers and a Monk, call’d Bernardyn Beltran, after them, who were also accompanied by Antony Espejus, who spent a great part of his Estate in raising of Men, providing Arms and Provisions, loading therewith a hundred and fifty Horses and Mules; with which he travell’d direct North from the fore-mention’d Valley, and after two days Journey found a People call’d Conchi, who went naked, and liv’d in Huts built together like a Village: They were Govern’d by Casiques, fed on Hares, Deer, Rabbets, Maiz, Calabashes, and Melons. Several adjacent Rivers afford them plenty of Fish. They were amaz’d at the Crosses which the Spaniards there erected, till they were inform’d of a Crucifi’d Saviour. Espejus being every where kindly Entertain’d amongst them, and conducted twenty two Leagues farther, came amongst the Indians call’d Passaguates, of the like Constitution with the Conchi’s; who had skill in Minerals, and judg’d that there were many Silver Mines in that Countrey. From whence the Passaguates travell’d with the Spaniards to the Borders of the Los Tobosos, who no sooner saw them, but they fled, because a few years before they had been miserably dealt with by the Spaniards; but being inform’d by the Interpreters, that they needed not be afraid of any thing, they all appear’d, and conducted Espejus to the Borders of the Patarabueyes; which People possess a large Countrey, Stone Houses and Villages built in good order. Great Rivers which come out of the North, and others that disembogu’d into the North Sea, afforded them all sorts of Fish; as also the Woods plenty of Venison, Fowls, and wholsom Plants. In some Pools also the salt Water afforded Salt.

The Valour of the Inhabitants may sufficiently appear by the rough Entertainment which the Spaniards met withall the first Night; for the Patarabueyes fell so fiercely upon them, that had not the Watch given notice thereof in time, none had escap’d with Life; nevertheless five Horses were kill’d, and a considerable number of Men wounded: after which retreating, they went upon a neighboring Hill, whither Espejus sent his Interpreter, and an Indian the same Countrey, to inform them, That the Spaniards came not to molest them, and if they pleas’d to come to them, they should meet with none but Friends; which was the more easily credited, because the Casiques receiv’d some Presents; after which being reconciled, they conducted the Spaniards twelve days Journey up a long River, whose Banks were inhabited in several places. From thence they reach’d to a Place, inhabited by a People richly Cloth’d, who also seem’d to have some knowledge of God; for in their Discourse they pointed up to Heaven, call’d the Creator and Preserver of all things Apalito, and signifi’d that they had receiv’d that Knowledge formerly from those that were left of Pamphilius Narvaez’s Army, who having rang’d through Florida were driven hither.

These People also Presented Espejus many tann’d Skins, with which he went to a great Village, the Inhabitants whereof were very courteous, and barter’d them for brave Plumes of Feathers and Cotton Cloaks, streak’d with blue and white: but Espejus having no Interpreters whom they could understand, could not learn by what Name they were known; yet by signs they express’d what time of the year they had Precious Stones brought to them; and also what their Countrey produced; and also that abundance of those Riches was to be found in a Province about five days Journey Westward from thence, whither they freely offer’d to conduct the Spaniards, which accordingly they did, bearing them company one and twenty Leagues to the next Province, inhabited by a People whose Name also they could not be inform’d of, yet staying three days amongst them, they were Entertain’d with Presents and Dances both Night and Day. The Countrey afforded them also store of Venison and Fruits: Those that understood Minerals, judg’d that there were likewise several Gold Mines.

Leaving this Province, they entred into a great Wilderness of Pine-Trees, in which they travell’d twelve Leagues in fifteen days, without seeing either Man or House; but at the end of the Wood they spy’d a Village of Straw Huts, where there were great quantities of white Salt, and Deer Skins neatly dress’d. The People of the Place courteously Entertain’d the Spaniards, and conducted them along the River Del Norte, to New Mexico: The Banks of the River on each side was planted with Nut-Trees and Vines, which spread themselves out above three Leagues; through which they had scarce pass’d three days together, when they saw ten populous Villages pleasantly seated on the said River, from whence came many thousands of the Natives to meet Espejus, who was not so much amaz’d at the great number of People, as at their extraordinary Civility and decent Habits; for they Entertain’d him with well dress’d Meat, roasted Poultrey, and pleasant Fruits: Their Garments were Cotton Cloaks, Deer-skin Breeches, Shoes and Boots of good Leather. The Women wore their Hair neatly Comb’d and Pleited. Their Houses were almost four Stories high, handsomely built, and divided into fair Chambers, had Stoves or Cells under Ground against the Cold in the Winter. Every Village was Govern’d by a Casique, whose Commands were publish’d by the Alguaziles. Each House had a peculiar place in which their Idol stood, before whom they set Meat twice a day. Near the High-ways stood Temples very curiously painted, wherein their Deity, as they say, diverted himself in his Progress from one Village to another. At certain Distances near their Plough’d Lands, stood Portico’s, supported on four Columns, under which the Husband-man us’d to eat, and take his Noon-sleep. Besides their Swords, which were strong enough to cut a Man through the Middle, they us’d Bowes and Arrows: Their Shields were made of Deer Skins.

Espejus having stay’d here four days, went to the Province De las Tiguas, which had sixteen Villages; in the chiefest whereof, call’d Poala, Augustine Ruyz and his Brother Monk Franciscus de Lopez had been slain, besides four others; wherefore the People being conscious of this Crime, and fearing that Revenge would follow, fled to the Mountains, from whence they could not be enticed, whilst the Spaniards found their Houses full of Provisions and some Minerals.

Now those being dead whom they sought for, some thought it convenient to return; but Espejus and Beltran perswaded the contrary, alledging, That farther up, according to the Indians information, lay several Provinces which were worth the discovery, and advis’d that the chiefest part of their Forces might stay there, whilst they and some few resolute Men went farther upon the Discovery, which accordingly was perform’d. Espejus having travell’d two days, came into a fruitful Province, jutting against Cibola, in which he found eleven Villages, inhabited by above fourteen thousand People, who were clad in Skins and Cotton, worshipp’d many Idols, and receiv’d the Spaniards with great Civility.

The like Entertainment they met withall in the Countrey Los Quires, wash’d by the River Del Norte; near which stood five Villages, inhabited by about fifteen thousand People.

Thirteen Leagues farther they found De los Cunames, having also five Villages, the chiefest of which being Cia, boasted (as above mention’d) eight Market-places: The Houses, made of Lime, were neatly Painted, and compris’d in all above twenty thousand Persons, all civil People, who presented Espejus and his Company with handsom Cloaks, set good boyl’d Meat before them, and shew’d them rich Minerals, and the Mountains out of which they got the same.

Of the like Constitution were the Inhabitants De los Amires, which being thirty thousand in number, resided in seven well built Villages, lying North-West from Cunames.

After this they march’d Westward, and found the eminent Village Acoma, mention’d before, built on an exceeding high Rock, to which led onely a narrow Path up a pair of Stairs cut in the Rock; as also many Wells to receive Rain, besides what they have out of a River, led by Moats round about their Plough’d Lands. The Spaniards staying here three days, were Entertain’d with all sorts of good Meat, Dances and Drolls.

From hence travelling twenty four Leagues more Westerly, they entred the Province of Zuny; where the erected Crosses which had remain’d there till that time, were sufficient testimonies of Cornaro’s having been there, after he was deserted by Andreas de Cuyocan. Casper de Mexico, and Antonius de Guadalajara, being setled on Zuny, (otherwise call’d Cibola) and speaking the Indian Tongue better than their Native Language, inform’d Espejus, that sixty days Journey farther lay a great Lake, whose Shores were crown’d with many brave Villages, inhabited by a People which wore Golden Armlets and Ear-rings; whither Franciscus Vasquez had gone a second time, had not Death prevented him. This Information so encourag’d Espejus, that notwithstanding it was so great a Journey, yet he resolv’d to venture thither, though the Monk Beltran and most of his Company perswaded him to the contrary; whereupon Beltran return’d: After which Espejus went on to the said Lake; whither he was accompanied with a hundred and fifty Indians. Having gone twenty six Leagues, he found a populous Province, whose Borders he no sooner approach’d, but he was told, That if he was willing to lose his Life, he and his Party might enter into a forbidden Dominion; yet notwithstanding this threatning Message, he wrought so much upon the Casique by the Presents which he sent him, that he was permitted to come in freely; nay, the Inhabitants of Zaguato strow’d Meal on the Earth for the Spaniards to go over, and presented Espejus at his departure with forty thousand Cotton Cloaks, and a considerable quantity of Plate, which he sent with five of his Soldiers, and all the Cibolan Indians, back to Cibola, keeping onely four Companions and one Guide, with whom he travell’d forty one Leagues Westward; where he found a Mountain, to the top whereof led a broad Path; which ascending, he took up Silver Oar with his own Hand. The several sorts of People that inhabited here were all civil and courteous, living in good fashion, in pretty large Houses, built on the Banks of a pleasant River, shaded with Vines and Nut-Trees, and thick planted with Flax: They inform’d Espejus, that near a River which runs eight Miles towards the North Sea, were such stately Palaces, as could not be beheld without great admiration. But Espejus going back a plain Road to Cibola, found not onely those whom he had sent from Zaguato, but also Beltran, with the other Soldiers, who having been detained there by the Civilities and kind Entertainments of the Indians, were now upon returning home; so that Espejus was left alone with eight Soldiers, who resolv’d to venture their Lives and Fortunes with him. They travell’d along the River Del Norte, through the Provinces De los Guires and Habutas, whose Mountains, over-spread with Pine-Trees and Cedars, have many rich Mines. The Natives wore painted Cotton Cloaks, and dwelt in stately Houses five Stories high. At the Borders of the Realm Los Tamos they were stopt, and not permitted to come on farther; wherefore being but few in number, and several of them sick, they judg’d it convenient to cross the River De las Vaccas (so call’d from the abundance of Cows that were thereabouts) to the River Conchos and the Village Bartholomew, where Espejus was inform’d, that Beltran was long before his arrival gone to Guadiana.

And now that we may have the better Account of New Mexico (which Ruyz, Espejus, and Beltran endeavor’d to discover) it will be necessary to begin with the first original thereof, according as several ancient Histories make mention.

First original of the New Mexicans.

The most ancient Possessors of that part of Northern America call’d New Spain, were for their fierce and salvage Nature call’d Chichimecæ, who dwelling in Caves, fed on Moles, Rabbets, Hedghogs, Serpents, Roots and Herbs. Whilst the Women accompanied their Husbands in their Travels, the Children were put into Baskets, and hang’d in a Tree. No manner of Government was to be found amongst them. They never Till’d their Ground till the Navatlacans came from New Mexico (which was anciently divided into two Countreys, Aztlan and Teuculhuacan) to New Spain; after which they Sow’d their Lands.

The Navatlacans (who us’d to dwell in Houses, worship Images, plough their Lands, and obey their Governors) were divided into six Tribes, each Tribe possessing their limited Bounds: and there goes a Tradition, That out of six Pits that are to be seen in New Mexico, the Navatlacans had their original. The time when they deserted New Mexico, as their most authentick Histories or Records declare, was (according to our computation) Anno 940. and they farther affirm, that they spent forty years in a Journey, which might have been travell’d in a Moneth: The reason of which tediousness was, because they rested in all places where they found a fruitful Countrey; but as they had advice from their diabolical Spirits, which (as they say) appear’d visibly to them, they still went on farther and farther, yet left behind those that were aged, sick, and decrepid, building convenient Houses for them, and appointing Overseers to look after them. The Ruins of the Houses are yet to be seen on the Way along which they pass’d.

The six Tribes divided themselves after this manner: Four of them setled round about the great Lake of Mexico. The Sichumilans taking the South part, built, besides two other Towns, a Metropolis of their own Name, as the Chalcans on the North. The Tapunecans built Azcapuzalco in the West, which signifies A Pismires Hole, because of the abundance of Inhabitants. The Eastern part was taken up by the Chalhuans. And all these Names have a peculiar signification; the first signifies People of Flowry Fields; the second, People of Mouthes; the third, People of Bridges; and the fourth, Crooked People. Not long after, the Tatluicans, a strong People, went over the Mountains on the other side of the Mexican Lake, where they built several Towns on a hot, yet fruitful Soil, the chiefest whereof they call’d Quahunachua, that is, A Place where an Eagles Voice is heard. The Tlascaltecans went near the Snowy Mountains, one of which, being between Mexico and De los Angelos, vomits horrid Flames and Smoke up into the Skie. Here scattering up and down, they built several Villages, besides the City Tlascalla; the Inhabitants whereof assisted the Spaniards, as hath been related in the taking of Mexico, for which good Service they live free, without paying any Tribute.

When these six Tribes came first from Mexico thither, the Chichimecans made little or no resistance against them, but hid themselves amongst the Rocks: yet some of them not long after taking courage, flew to Arms, and had without doubt destroy’d the Tlascallans, had not a subtile Plot sav’d them: for under a shew of Friendship they falling on the unarm’d Chichimecans, kill’d every Man of them.

Joseph de Acosta tells us, that Anno 1586. he saw a Grave in Mexico, wherein a Chichimecan of a Gygantick size lay buried.

After this Conquest gotten by the Tlascallans, the fore-mention’d six Tribes liv’d in Peace and Quiet, and strengthned themselves the more by Marrying into one anothers Families.

The Chichimecæ keeping on the Mountains left the new People in quiet possession of their Lands, nay, learnt some of their Customs, insomuch that they began to build Huts, chuse Governors, and live according to their Laws.

The first March of the Mexicans into New Spain.

The Tlascallans having possess’d New Spain three hundred and two years, a seventh Tribe (a valiant and civiliz’d People) came thither, upon their Dæmon Viztlipuztli’s promise of having the supream Government: wherefore he was carried in an Ark by four chief Priests, whom he inform’d whither and when they should travel or rest, for where ever they stopt, they built a Tent in the middle of their Army for their Idol, whom they set on an Altar; which done, they Sow’d the Ground about them: yet if their Dæmon commanded them to march before Harvest, then they left the Product to the ancient and sick People. But at last Mexi, from whence the Name of Mexico is deriv’d, conducted the Army into Mechaocan, where the pleasant Soil among the Lakes entic’d many to take up their Habitation. But Mexi proceeded on his Journey, yet not without great Crosses, in regard Viztlipuztli’s Sister (some Inchantress probably so call’d) did much hurt to the whole Army by her Sorceries, because they would not honor her as a Goddess, till Viztlipuztli inform’d one of them that carried the Ark, that the Army should march on, and banish the Witch from them: whereupon she accordingly being driven away, built the Village Malinalco, as a Habitation for Conjurers. Mean while, the Army grew weaker and weaker by their leaving so many People behind them in most places; therefore they judg’d it convenient to rest a while in Tula, where a great River water’d the Countrey; which, according to Viztlipuztli’s Commands, being dry’d up, made a large Lake about the Mountain Coatepeck, whose Banks being planted with Willow and Poplar-Trees, were exceeding pleasant, and the more, because of the variety of Birds that made their Nests in the same; which so delighted many of the People, that being tir’d with travelling, they resolv’d to settle there; which Resolution was so ill resented by Viztlipuztli, that he commanded the Bank to be broken, that the Water might have liberty to flow its former Course, and threatned them with heavy punishments: after which in the Night a terrible Cry of Murder was heard in one part of the Army; which being inquir’d after the next Morning, they found divers People lying on the Ground with their Breasts cut open, and their Hearts pull’d out: whereupon those that remain’d went onto Chapultepec, where they fortifi’d themselves in the Mountains against the adjacent People, which Copil, Son to the Malinalcon Witch, had rais’d up against them; and soon after the Tapunecans and Chalcans went against their new Neighbors, with whom they began a bloody Fight, when Vitzilovitli, at that time General of the Mexican Army, pressing in amongst them, broke their Ranks, and made way for all his Army (though with his own Death) to march Conquerors to Culhuacan: The Prince of which Province gave them a Place to settle on, near the white Water Ticaapan, whose Shores swarm’d with Adders and Serpents, upon Design that the Strangers might be destroy’d by them; but it prov’d quite otherwise: for they without regret eat the poysonous Animals; and Dunging the unfruitful Soil, receiv’d a plentiful Harvest: They would willingly have setled here, after their so long ranging up and down, if Viztlipuztli would have approv’d thereof; but he told them, that they must possess themselves by Arms, and make a Culhuacan Maid their Goddess: whereupon they desir’d the Casique’s Daughter of Culhuacan, who was sent them in rich Ornaments, and with a stately Retinue: But she was no sooner entred on the Ticaapan Shore, but they flay’d her alive, and her Skin being stuff’d, and nam’d Tocci, was religiously worshipp’d. But not satisfi’d with this cruelty, they sent for her Father to visit his Daughter in her Dignity; who accordingly coming with great Attendance, was led into a dark Chappel, where by the burning Tapers he knew the Goddess to be no other than his Daughters Skin stuff’d full of Cotton; whereat burning with rage, he afterwards fell upon these Murderers with all his Forces, and drove them to the Place where they afterwards built Mexico.

Viztlipuztli idolum Mexicanorum.

We have often made mention heretofore of the Governor of this Journey, Viztlipuztli, it will therefore be necessary to give an exacter Description of him, as followeth:

Description of the Image Viztlipuztli.

He was a woodden Image like a Man, sitting on a blue Seat in a triumphant Chair; at each end of which was plac’d a Staff with a Serpents Head upon it, from whose Forehead, which was Painted blue, ran a Streak of the same colour, cross his Nose to both his Ears; upon his Head stood a Plume of Feathers, the ends whereof were tipp’d with a golden Varnish; his left Hand held a white Shield, on which stuck five Feathers, and on the top a Laurel Bough; next the Shield lay four Arrows, pretended to be sent from Heaven; in his right Hand a Truncheon, full of blue crooked Streaks like Serpents; behind on his Shoulders appear’d Wings, not unlike those of a Bat, his Eyes large and round, and his Mouth reaching from Ear to Ear, made him terrible to behold, also gaping, and full of Teeth, which stuck out of his Belly; in his Breast also were two fiery Eyes, and under them a shrivell’d Nose; his Feet ended in Claws, hung round about with Precious Jems, golden Boxes and Shields set out with divers colour’d Feathers. The Curtain behind which this Idol sat, was not drawn open except on a Feast-Day.

Next Viztlipuztli stood generally a lesser Image, call’d Tlaboc, and also the Goddess Tocci, Daughter to the Prince of Culhuacan, who (as before mention’d) was flay’d by their Dæmon’s Command. Since which time they suppos’d, that they were never more acceptable to their Gods, than when they appear’d Cloth’d in another Man’s Skin; and accounted no Offering better, than a Heart taken out of their Enemies Breast, since their Spirit destroy’d so many after that manner in the Army at Tula.

Tocci’s Festival.

But Tocci, they say, had also a Son much inclin’d to Hunting, whose Image they carry, attended by a thousand People, with the sound of Horns and Trumpets, to an Arbor on a high Mountain; which being made of green Leaves pleited, had in the middle an Altar, on which they set the Idol, whilst the Multitude surrounded the Foot of the Mountain, and set all the Bushes about the same on Fire; which done, they shouted and hollow’d, and play’d on several Instruments; which frighting the wild Beasts that lay shelter’d in the Woods, made them run to the top of the Mountain, where they were more and more inclos’d by the People, insomuch that many of them were slain for an Offering before Tocci’s Son’s Altar; which done, they carried the Idol back to his Temple, and the People made Merry with the slain Venison.

Description of Tezcatlipuca’s Image.

As great Reverence they shew’d to Tezcatlipuca, because (as they said) he pardon’d their Sins. This Idol was made of a black shining Stone, richly Apparell’d, having Golden Ear-rings; in his undermost Lip a Silver Sheath, in which stuck sometimes a green, and sometimes a blue Plume of Feathers; his Hair was ty’d with an embroider’d String, at the end of which hung a Golden Ear, whereon Smoak was Painted, signifying the Prayers of oppress’d Sinners; moreover, the String hung full of Pearls, and about the Neck in a String hung a Jewel; on his Breast, as also on his Navel, a green Stone; in his left Hand he held a Fan made of a Gold Plate, in which stuck many colour’d Feathers: this Plate glittering like Glass, was in stead of a Mirrour for Tezcatlipuca, to observe all worldly Transactions in the same: and to punish Criminals, he held four Darts in his right Hand. His Feast they kept once in four years.

This Idol also had the Command of Hunger, Drought, Famine, and pestilential Distempers; wherefore he had quite another shape, sat on a Stool behind a red Curtain embroider’d with dead Mens Bones and Sculls; his Body Coal black, his Head stuck full of Quails Feathers, a Quiver with four Arrows in his left, and a Rod in his right Hand, which made the Image seem very terrible.

The Idol Quetzalcoalt, being their Guardian over the Merchants, was plac’d in a high Temple, being shap’d like a Man, his Face onely excepted; for that resembled a Bird’s Head, with a red Bill full of Teeth, a Comb, and a long Tongue; on the hind-part of his Head stood a Mitre, and about his Legs Silk Garters beset with Pearls.

CHAP. IX.
Cibola, Tontonteac, and Nova Granada.

Though the Province of Zuny above-mention’d in the Chapter of New Mexico, in the Voyage of Espejus, be there otherwise call’d, and appear to be the same with Cibola, yet we find it not treated of by any as part of New Mexico, but by some as a distinct Province, by others as a part of California largely taken; for besides that California, properly so call’d, hath formerly been taken rather for a Peninsula than an Island, and still affords to some an Argument of question, whether it be one or the other. The whole extent of the Province generally so term’d, hath been reputed to comprehend the suppos’d Peninsula it self, Cibola, Quivira, and Nova Albion; but since, according to the best Maps and Discoveries, there seems little doubt to be made, that California, strictly taken, is a perfect Island: and since upon that Consideration we have reserved it to be describ’d amongst the Islands of Northern America, we also consequently judge it most requisite to consider those Countreys apart that were included in the extended California.

Situation, Temperature, and Productions of Cibola.

Cibola lieth Southward of Quivira, betwixt it and New Gallicia, to the North and East: on the West it hath Mar Vermiglio, or the Bay of California. The Air of the Province is indifferently temperate, especially if compar’d to the sharp Frosts and Colds of Quivira. The Countrey is for the most part level and plain, as Quivira is, having but few Trees in it, except here and there some Woods of Cedars, which yet do abundantly supply the Natives both with Timber and Fewel. The Ground affords plenty of Maiz, and some small white Pease, of both which they usually make Bread. There is great store of Venison, and a kind of Sheep (as they say, and as it should seem by their Fleece) as big as some little Horses or Oxen, some of their Horns weighing forty or fifty Pound: But perhaps by some mistake of Authors, this Beast may be no other than Taurus Mexicanus, elsewhere describ’d, whose Hair is extreamly thick and shaggy, and of which they make Cloth as of Wool, as hath been said. There are also Lyons, Bears, and Tygers in this Province, in such numbers, that the People of the Countrey are not a little troubled with them, and would gladly destroy them if they knew how. The People are generally well Limb’d, tall of Stature, and seem to be a little more Ingenious than their Neighbors of Quivira; yet they go naked many of them, onely cover’d with Mantles made of Skins, which are many times painted, and that with such Curiosity and Art, as do sufficiently argue, that neither themselves nor their Neighbors of Quivira, from whom they have them in Traffick, do make them, but that they are the Merchandise and Commodity of some other Nations, perhaps of Cathay or China, who, by the North-West Seas, do Trade with the Maritime Parts, and People of Quivira.

This part of the Countrey hath been reasonably well search’d by the Spaniards, but as yet nothing discover’d so considerable, as to perswade them to stay in it.

That which seems most observable, is the great Lake Tonteac, situate almost in the midst of the Province; upon which, or near unto it, they found seven or eight old Towns of the Natives, some whereof contain’d four or five hundred of their Cottages or little Houses, and were fortifi’d also with Ramparts, and other Works of Defence, so as the Spaniards could not become Masters of them, but by Force and Storming: In the attempt whereof Vasquez Coronado, their Commander in chief, was twice beaten down with Stones by the Natives; yet at last carrying the Place, he found in it good plenty of Maiz indeed, which was some refreshment to his Army, but nothing else: whereupon having nam’d the Place Granada, in memory of the Vice-Roy of New Spain, who sent him upon that Expedition, he departed. In his return homeward he fell upon a certain Countrey, which he nam’d Tucayan, of which his Companions report great matters; as first, of a certain River call’d Huex, on the Banks whereof, in the space of twenty Leagues, or thereabouts, there stand no less than fifteen good Burroughs, well built, and furnish’d likewise with Stoves or Hot-houses, against the Cold, as in other Countreys of Europe; as also of a very fruitful and pleasant Valley, which they therefore call’d Aroba de Corazones; of another great Town and Territory, call’d Chichilticala; and lastly, of the Valley of Nuestra Sennora, or Our Ladies Dale, in the South parts of the said Territory, all of them describ’d for such rich and delicious Places, that some take them for the Campi Elisii of America, especially seeing the Spaniards were never known to visit them a second time, the Discoveries that have been made since being onely of the North-West Parts of the Countrey, along the Coasts of Mar Vermiglio, and this no farther than onely to give Name to certain Capes or Promontories which they met with, as namely 1. Porto de St. Clara, near to the Mouth of the River which they call Rio del Nordt. 2. Las Playas. 3. St. Michael. 4. Lago del Oro, which bordereth on Quivira; and lastly, El Rey Coronado, Eastward of that.

Tontonteac.

Tontonteac is mention’d by so few, and by those few so obscurely, that it cannot well be determin’d to be any other than that Countrey which lies about the great Lake Tonteac, above spoken of in Cibola, and which being made Habitable by six or seven Towns not inconsiderable for Habitations of native Indians, might haply pass for a distinct Province. And perhaps the reason why this Province hath been so obscure, and little taken notice of, might be from the ruine of these Towns by War, or some other Accident: and to this purpose are the words of a late Writer, The Province of Tontonteac (saith he) hath five Houses onely left, which stand on the Shore of a salt Lake.

Nova Granada a Province of Northern America.

Nova Granada, besides that it is a generally known and describ’d Province of Southern America, is also nam’d amongst the Provinces of Northern America, particularly by Bertius, Cluverius, and Golnitzius, and in some late Maps of America so conspicuously specifi’d, that it might appear to be all that Tract of Land which contains both New Mexico and the several Provinces adjoyning to it; but since we find it not describ’d by any at large, it will with most verisimility pass for that part of New Mexico where stands the City of St. Foy; and this is most plainly express’d by Monsieur Martini, though there are who confound Cibola with New Granada. Waving which Decision, we shall onely insert a short Description of the Place, according to Cornato, who seems to have been one of the first Discoverers of these Parts, and whose Credit is preferr’d before that of Marcus de Niza.

Its Description.

Nova Granada (saith he) consists of seven Villages, built in the circumference of four Leagues, the chiefest whereof boasts two hundred Houses, which for the most part are four or five Stories high, and built of Stone; the Cellars thereto belonging, being neatly Pav’d, serve for Stoves against the Cold: they ascend to their upper Rooms by Ladders. The Inhabitants go naked, onely some Covering about their Middle, and over their Shoulders Cotton Cloaks, painted with divers Colours. They live on Maiz, white Pease, Hares, Rabbets, and Venison: their Salt wherewith they season the same, they fetch from a neighboring Lake. The Turkies, which they have in great numbers, are kill’d onely for their Feathers, notwithstanding their Flesh is exceeding good Meat. The Soil is for the most part plain, yet hath some high Mountains; and the Pastures flourish with Grass. The Woods abound with Bears, Tygers, Lyons, wild Hogs, Rhinocerots, and the like ravenous Beasts, which make the Ways dangerous for Travellers. Besides large Deer, there are also Sheep, which in bigness may compare with Horses, having exceeding great Horns, and little Tails.

Concerning the abundance of Turkoises, of which Niza makes mention, Cornato could give no certain account, because a little before his Arrival the Granadians had convey’d their Children, which were under fifteen, and the aged People, who were above sixty years of age, with their chiefest Goods, into remote places. However, it is not unknown, that this Countrey affords Turkoises; for Cornato in his Journey to Quivira, Besieg’d a City in these Parts near a great River; the Inhabitants whereof, when they were not able to defend themselves any longer, throwing their Cloaks, Turkoises, and other Riches into the Fire, Sallied out upon the Spaniards, and died not altogether unreveng’d, as shall be specifi’d more at large in the Description of Tignes, which being nam’d among the Towns of Quivira, will upon the comparing of Circumstances, be apparently found to be the same with this.

Lastly, New Granada hath no Fruit-Trees, but little Cedars fit for Building.

CHAP. X.
Quivira.

Quivira is the next Region accounted of California, largely taken; yet appearing by some Charts to lie so vastly remote, that all New Mexico, Gallicia, and other Provinces already mention’d, lie between that and the Island. And whereas New Granada is by several made a part of New Mexico; yet most certain it is, that by some it is confounded with this Countrey, or at least accounted a part thereof, as hereafter shall more plainly appear, according to the Account of those that have most fully and particularly describ’d it.

Situation of Quivira, and Description of the Inhabitants.

Quivira takes up the most Northern and unknown part of America towards the West, reaching as far as the supposed Straight of Anian aforesaid (if there be any such) or else joyning to the Continent of Tartary. It is likewise the least fruitful of all the West-Indies, especially for Corn. Cattel it hath good store, and Pasturage indifferent good, the Countrey being for the most plain and level, and nothing else but Pasturage. The Natives are few and salvage, living in Hoards or great Companies together, after the manner of the Tartars, to whom they are Neighbors, and (as it is not improbably thought) of their Race. The Men Clothe themselves most commonly in that kind of Oxes Hide, elsewhere spoken of under the Name of Taurus Mexicanus. The Women wear little else but their Hair, notwithstanding the Countrey, especially for one half of the year, is excessive cold. Their Cattel, though they are much less than the ordinary Kine of Europe, are the chief Sustenance and Employment of the Natives; by Pasturing huge Herds whereof from place to place, the People live, and maintain a Traffick with other Parts. Yet some of them inhabit Towns, the chief whereof, as yet discover’d, seem to be these which follow:

Towns of chief note.

1. Acus, or Acuco, a small Town, but seated in a strong defensible place, and being a great Staple for Cotton, the Territory about it hath been taken for a distinct Province, and by some call’d The Kingdom of Acuco.

2. Tignes, a Town seated upon the Banks of a River bearing the same Name, and inhabited, it seems, by a stout and resolute People, and whom the Spaniards, coming amongst them in the Year 1540. had much ado to master: for they endur’d a Siege for the space of six Weeks; and at last finding themselves so strongly begirt by their Enemies, that there was no means to escape but by Death, or yielding up themselves, rather than they would fall alive into their hands, they first buried and spoil’d all such Treasure as they had (which were chiefly Saphires, and a few other Gems, that the Countrey afforded) and after that setting on fire their Housholdstuff, they took their Wives and Children with them, and made a desperate Sally out upon the Spaniards; wherein although they were most of them slain, and trod under the Horses Feet, or drown’d in passing the River, yet was it not without some loss to the Spaniards themselves: nor would those few that were left behind deliver up the Town, till it was fir’d about their Ears, and that they could no longer abide in it. This Town, by all Circumstances, must needs be the same with that before mention’d in Nova Granada, which makes good what we have said above, viz. That New Granada is by some confounded with, or at least taken for a part of this Region.

3. Cicuic, another small Town, four days Journey from Tignes. The Countrey about this place, although generally it be all good Pasturage, and maintains abundance of Cattel, yet is it so open and plain, that for almost a hundred Miles together, the Spaniards, in their March hither from New Spain, found neither Stone nor Tree, nor any thing else that could serve them for a Land-mark; so that they were forc’d, as they march’d along, to raise up Heaps of Cow-dung, to serve them for direction in their coming back, which was not long after: for not finding the Commodities they sought for, and fearing to be surpris’d by Winter in those cold Countreys, where they had no kind of accommodation, they made somewhat a hasty Retreat, leaving behind them onely some few Religious Men, of the Order of St. Francis, whose Endeavours to do the People good by Converting them to the true Knowledge and Worship of Almighty God, procur’d them not long after, the Crown of Martyrdom, being murder’d all of them, except one, by the Natives, and he not without much difficulty escaping their Hands.

Nova Albion.

Nova Albion was so denominated by Sir Francis Drake, when he was there Entertain’d by the King of that Countrey; but whether it were in Quivira that he was thus Entertain’d, and left that Denomination, or in the Island of California, appears not either from the Relation, or from the common Consent of Cosmographers, since some there are, who will have Quivira and Nova Albion to be one and the same Province; others reckon it to be the utmost North-West part of California; others make it distinct from Quivira, yet determine it not to the Island California, seeming rather to make it an adjoyning Countrey to Quivira: wherefore finding little else that concerns the Description of the Place, except the said Voyage of Drake, we shall here set it down, and leave the farther Disquisition concerning the Situation of the Place, till we come to describe the Island of California it self.

Sir Francis Drake’s Arrival there.

Captain Francis Drake set Sail from Plymouth Anno 1577. and after much hardship getting through the Straights of Magellan, arriv’d in the Haven Guatulco, having before his coming thither taken as many rich Spanish Ships in the Southern Ocean as he could possibly have wish’d for, so that his onely care now needed to have been how to get safe home; yet he put on a Resolution, not to come short of Ferdinandus Magellanus, who Saild about the World. Which brave Resolution of Drake’s was approv’d of by all his Sea-men; whereupon he set Sail along the North of California the fifth of June; being gotten into forty two Degrees, which was the farthest that Cabrillo went, he came on a sudden out of a warm Air into so frigid a Climate, that the Sea-men were almost kill’d with Cold, and the farther they went, the colder it grew; wherefore falling down three Degrees more Southerly, they got into a convenient Haven, where the Natives who liv’d along the Shore brought them Presents; which Drake left not unrequited, by returning them others, that were to them more novel, and not unuseful.

Nature and Habit of the People.

These People are exceeding hardy; for, notwithstanding the extraordinary coldness of the Climate, the Men go naked; but the Women wear Garments of pleited Flags or Rushes, which being put about their Middle, hang down to their Ancles; on their Stomachs hang the ends of a hairy Skin ty’d together, which hanging also over their Shoulders, cover their hinder Parts. They shew great Respect and Obedience to their Husbands. Each House is surrounded with an Earthen Wall, and all the Corners thereof being close stopp’d, and Fires made in the midst of them, they are very warm. Rushes and Flags strow’d thick on the Ground near the Walls, serve them in stead of Beds.

The Indians coming a second time to Visit the English, brought them Plumes of Feathers, Neckbands of Net-work, and store of Tobacco: Drake pleas’d with this their kindness, built Tents on the Brow of a Hill, on the top of which the Indians stood that brought the Presents, whil’st one of them with a loud voice maintain’d a long Discourse; which he had no sooner ended, but every one laid down his Bowe and Arrows, and walk’d unarm’d down to the Tents to proffer their Gifts: their Wives staying behind on the top, pinch’d their Cheeks, and made sad lamentation; which Drake suppos’d was because they made Offerings there: whereupon he also caus’d all his Men to kneel down and say their Prayers, which made the Indians to look very earnestly upon them, and to return him the Presents which the day before they had receiv’d of him.

Drake’s Entertainment by the King of the Countrey.

The rumour of these Strangers arrival spreading all over the Countrey, made the Inhabitants far and near desirous to see them; the King himself sending Ambassadors to Drake, to inform him that he was on the Way coming to see him; all which the Agents related at large, and desir’d some Presents, as a testimony that their King should be welcome; which he being assur’d of, came with a Retinue of above twelve thousand Men, before whom walk’d one of a Gygantick size, carrying a costly Scepter, on which, by three long Chains made of Bones, hung a great and a small Crown made of Feathers; next follow’d the King himself in a Sute of Cony-Skins; then came a great confus’d company of People, each of them carrying a Present: whereupon Drake putting his Men into good order, march’d to meet the King; at which the Mace-bearer made a long Preamble, and when he had done, Danc’d to the Tune of a Song, which he Sung himself; then the King and his whole Retinue also fell a Singing and Dancing so long, till being weary the King went to Drake, and humbly desir’d of him, that he would accept of the Realm, assuring him, that all the People should be under his Obedience; which said, he put the fore-mention’d Crown on his Head, and hanging three double Chains about his Neck, call’d him Hioh: whereupon Drake took possession of the Countrey in Queen Elizabeths Name. The King staying alone with Drake, his Retinue went amongst the English, every one looking very earnestly upon them, and to those whom they lik’d best, being the youngest, they falling down and crying, proffer’d Offerings, as to Gods, and held their Cheeks to draw Blood out of them; which the English refusing, they desisted; but shew’d them great Wounds, and desir’d some Plaisters of them, which they suppli’d them with.

A Monument erected by Drake before his departure.

The English going up into the Countrey found the same well grown with Woods, which abounded with Coneys, whose Heads differ’d little from the European, but having Feet like Moles, long Tails like Rats, and in their Sides a Bag, wherein when they had fill’d their Bellies they put the remainder. They also saw numerous Herds of Deer, with whose Flesh having been courteously Entertain’d in several Villages, they return’d to the Fleet. Drake, just before he weighed Anchor, caus’d a pillar to be set in the Ground with a Silver Plate on the same, with an Inscription, mentioning the Day of his Arrival, Name and Arms of Queen Elizabeth, and free delivering of that Realm to him by the Indians: he also nail’d a Sixpence with the Queens Effigies on the Plate, under which he caus’d his own Name to be Engraven.

THE
ISLANDS
OF
Northern America.

CHAP. XI.
Terra Nova, or New-found Land, with the Island of Assumption.

Having treated at large of all the several Regions and Provinces of the North part of the Continent of America, we come now to those Islands that lie within the same Degrees of Northern Latitude with that part of the Continent: The first is Terre Neuve, or New-found Land, discover’d together with several other Parts upon the Continent before mention’d by Sir Sebastian Cabott, by the Countenance and Charge of King Henry the Seventh of England; whereupon a rightful Claim thereunto, and Interest therein, hath been own’d by the succeeding Kings of England, as hereafter shall be more particularly related.

Situation and Bounds of New-found Land.

New-found Land is situated betwixt the Degrees of forty six and fifty three of Northern Latitude, and is divided from the Continent of America by an Arm of the Sea, in like distance as England is from France. The Island is as large as England in length, greater in breadth, and lies near the Course that Ships usually hold in their Return from the West-Indies, and is near the mid-way between Ireland and Virginia.

Temperature.

We shall not much need to commend the wholsom temperature of this Countrey, seeing the greatest part thereof lieth above three Degrees nearer to the South, than any part of England doth, so that even in the Winter it is pleasant and healthful as England is.

Nature of the Inhabitants.

The natural Inhabitants of the Countrey, as they are but few in number, so are they something a rude and salvage People, having neither knowledge of God, nor living under any kind of Civil Government. In their Habits, Customs, and Manners, they resemble the Indians of the Continent, from whence it is to be suppos’d they come; they live altogether in the North and West part of the Countrey, which is seldom frequented by the English; but the French and Biscainers (who resort thither yearly for the Whale-fishing, and also for the Cod-fish) report them to be an ingenuous and tractable People (being well us’d) and very ready to assist them with great labour and patience, in the killing, cutting, and boyling of Whales, and making the Trayn-Oyl, without expectation of other Reward than a little Bread, or some such small Hire.

Commodious Harbors.

It hath the most commodious Harbours in the World, and the most safe Seas to Sail to it, there being not any Islands, Rocks or Sands between the Lands-End in England and New-found Land, and for the most part it is not above three or four Weeks Sail thither, and less coming back; and is the most commodiously situated for the discovering of the North-West Passage, and other Inlets into the South Sea; whereby the ordinary Voyages to China, Japan, and the East-Indies, are much eas’d in the expence of Time and Charge; and the most open to Trade to all Parts, of any Island of the West-Indies.

On the East side of the Land, are the Bays of Trinity and Conception, which stretch themselves towards the South-West.

Tor-Bay and Capelin-Bay lying also on the East, stretch themselves towards the West.

The Bays of Trespassey, St. Mary, Borrel, and Plaisance, on the South part of the Land, extend their Arms towards the North.

The great Bay of St. Peters lying on the South-West side of the Land, and Southerly from the great River of Canada, being about twenty Leagues distant, the same stretcheth toward the East.

Trinity Harbour lies in near forty nine Degrees of North Latitude, being very commodiously seated to receive Shipping in seasonable Weather, both to Anchor in, and from thence to Sail towards either the East, West, or South. It hath three Arms or Rivers, long and large enough for many hundred Sail of Ships to moare fast at Anchor near a Mile from the Harbours Mouth. Close adjoyning to the Rivers side, and within the Harbour, is much open Land, well stor’d with Grass sufficient, Winter and Summer, to maintain great store of ordinary Cattel, besides Hogs and Goats, if such Beasts were carried thither; and it standeth North most of any Harbor in the Land, where our Nation practiseth Fishing: It is near unto a great Bay lying on the North side of it, call’d The Bay of Flowers; to which Place no Ships repair to Fish, in regard of sundry Rocks and Ledges lying even with the Water, and full of danger.

The bottom of the Bay of Trinity lieth within four Leagues through the Land South-West, Southerly from Trinity, as by experience is found; and it comes near unto the Bay of Trespassey, and the bottom of some other Bays.

Trespassey in like manner is as commodious a Harbour, lying in a more temperate Climate, almost in forty six Degrees of North Latitude, and is both fair and pleasant, and a wholsom Coast free from Rocks and Shelves; so that of all other Harbours it lies the most South of any in the Land, and most conveniently to receive our Shipping, passing to and from Virginia and the Bermuda Islands; and also any other Shipping that shall pass to and from the River of Canada, and the Coast thereof, because they usually pass, and so return in the sight of the Land of Trespassey, and also for some other purposes, as shall be partly declar’d in the following Discourse.

Fruitful Soil.

The Soil of this Countrey in the Valleys and sides of the Mountains is so fruitful, as that in divers places the Summer naturally produceth without Tillage, great plenty of green Pease, and Fitches, fair, round, full, and as wholsom as ours in England.

Berries and Fruits.

Of Berries and Fruits, there grows Strawberries, red and white, and as fair Raspice-berries and Goose-berries as there be in England; as also Bilberries, which are call’d by some Whortes, and many other delicate Berries peculiar to the Countrey, in great abundance. Likewise small Pears, Cherries, Filberds, &c.

Herbs and Flowers.

There are also Herbs for Sallets and Broth, as Parsly, Alexander, Sorrel, &c. and also Flowers, as the red and white Damask Rose, with other kinds, which are most beautiful and delightful, both to the sight and smell. And questionless, the Countrey is stor’d with many Physical Herbs, though their Vertues are not known.

When Corn was first Sow’n here, it was observ’d to grow very fair, the increase was great, and the Grain very good; and several sorts of Kitchin Plants that have been Set here, have prov’d very well.

Beasts.

In divers parts of the Countrey there is great store of Deer, and some Hares, many Foxes, Squerrils, Beavers, Martins and Otters, yielding excellent Furrs, Wolves and Bears, with other sorts of Beasts, serving as well for Necessity, as for Profit and Delight.

Birds.

Variety both of Land and Water-Fowl is in this Countrey infinite: The chief Land-Fowl, besides a great number of small Birds, that live by scraping their Food from the Earth in the hardest Winter, are Hawks, great and small Partridges, Thrush, and Thrussels abundance, very fat; as also Filladies, Nightingales, and such like, which sing most pleasantly. There are also Birds that live by prey, as Ravens, Gripes, Crows, &c. For Water-Fowl, there is certainly so good, and as much variety, as in any part of the World, as Geese, Ducks, Pigeons, Gulls, Penguins, and many other sorts. These Penguins are as big as Geese, but do not flye, for they have but a little short Wing; and they multiply so infinitely upon a certain flat Island, that men drive them from thence upon a Board into their Boats by hundreds at a time, as if God had made the innocency of so poor a Creature to become such an admirable Instrument for the sustentation of Man: And also Godwits, Curlews, and such like; which Fowl do not onely serve those that Trade thither for Food, but also they are a great furthering to divers Ships Voyages, because the abundance of them is such, that the Fisher-men do bait their Hooks with the quarters of Sea-Fowl on them; and therewith some Ships do yearly take a great part of their Fishing Voyages with such Bait, before they can get others.

Springs.

The fresh Waters and Springs of that Countrey are many in number, and withall so very pleasant, delightful and wholsom, that no Countrey in the World hath better: And Fewel for Fireing, no where more plentiful.

Trees.

In like manner there is great abundance of Trees fit to be employ’d in other serviceable uses: There are Fir and Spruce-Trees, sound, good, and fit to Mast Ships with, and as commodious for Boards and Buildings as those of Norway; and out of these come abundance of Turpentine. Moreover the Pine and Birch-Trees here are scarce to be compar’d for heighth and greatness.

The Rivers also and Harbours are generally stor’d with delicate Fish, as Salmons, Peals, Eels, Herrings, Mackrel, Flounders, Launce, Capelin, Cod, and Trouts, the fairest, fattest and sweetest, that ever were seen in these Parts. The like for Lobsters, Cra-fish, Mussles, and other variety of Shell-fish.

The Seas likewise all along the Coast, do plentifully abound in other sorts of Fish, as Whales, Spanish Mackrel, Dorrel, Pales, Herrings, Hogs, Porposes, Seals, and such like Royal Fish, &c.

But the chief Commodity of New found Land yet known, and which is grown to be a setled Trade, and that it may be much better’d by an ordinary Plantation there, (if the Traders thither will take some better course than formerly they have done, as shall be declared) is the Cod-fishing upon that Coast, by which our Nation and many other Countreys are enrich’d.

Almost incredible is the benefit of the Fish, which the French, Biscainers, and Portuguese fetch yearly from this Coast of New-found Land, and the Bank, which lieth within twenty five Leagues from the South Cape of that Countrey, where the French use to Fish Winter and Summer, usually making two Voyages every year thither. To which Places, and to the Coast of Canada, which lieth near unto it, are yearly sent from those Countreys, more than four hundred Sail of Ships.

This Island of Terra Nova belongs properly and justly to the Crown of England, having been under the sole Jurisdiction of the English from the first Discovery thereof, which was by Sir Sebastian Cabot, Employ’d by King Henry the Seventh, to find out some other part of America, than what had been discover’d by Columbus, as hath been above declar’d in several places.

Afterwards King Henry the Eighth continu’d the English Interest there, and Employ’d one Rutt into that Island, in order to the Plantation thereof.

Queen Elizabeth no less careful to preserve that Plantation, sent Sir Humphrey Gilbert, a Devonshire Knight, to plant a Colony there, the better to secure the same, and to increase Trading there; and accordingly the said Sir Humphrey with two good Ships and a Pinnace in her Name, took possession of that Countrey, in the Harbour of St. Johns. He Sail’d from thence towards Virginia, and by reason of some unhappy direction in his Course, the greatest Ship he had struck upon Shelves on the Coast of Canada, and was there lost, with most part of the Company in her; and he himself, being then in a small Pinnace of twenty Tun, in the company of his Vice-Admiral (Captain Hays) returning towards England, in a great Storm, was overwhelm’d in the Sea, and so perish’d.

In the Year 1608. it was undertaken anew by John Guy, a Merchant of Bristol, and with so good success, that the Colony in a short time were well furnish’d with Wheat, Rye, Barley, and other Grain of their own Sowing, with Turnips, Coleworts, and abundance of other necessary things, not without some probable hopes of Metals, a certain and plentiful Trade of Sables, Musk, and other rich Commodities.

The Province of Avalon in New-found Land.

In the Year 1620. Sir George Calvert Knight, then principal Secretary of State, and a Privy Councellor to King James the First of England, &c. purchas’d a part of New-found Land, which was afterwards in the Year 1623. granted to him and his Heirs by Patent from the said King, under the Great Seal of England, bearing Date the seventh of April, in the One and twentieth Year of his Reign: by which means the said Tract of Land was erected into a Province, and at the Instance of the said Sir George Calvert, call’d Avalon, from Avalon in Sommerset-shire, where Christianity was first Planted in England.

This Province lies in the forty seventh Degree of Northern Latitude, and is thus bounded: It begins Southerly from the middle part of a certain Neck of Land or Promontory, situate between the two Harbours, Fermose and Aquafort; and from thence following the Shore towards the North unto the middle part, or half way over a little Harbour, call’d in that regard Petit Port, or Petit Harbour, which boundeth upon the South part of the Plantation of St. Johns, including the one half of a certain fresh River, that falleth into the said Port of Petit Harbour; and so tending along the South Border of the said Colony of St. Johns, extendeth it self to a certain little Bay, commonly call’d Salmon Cove, lying on the South side of the Bay of Conception, including the one half of the River that falleth into the said Cove, as also one half of the Cove it self; from whence passing along the Shore of the said Bay towards the South, and reaching unto the bottom thereof, where it meets with the Lands of the fore-mention’d John Guy, nam’d Sea-Forrest, is bounded with a certain River or Brook, which there falleth into the Sea, and from the Mouth of the said Brook ascendeth unto the farthest Spring or Head thereof; from thence passing towards the South for six Miles together along the Borders of the said John Guy’s Plantation, and there crossing over Westward in a right Line, reacheth unto the Bay of Placentia, and the space of one League within the said Bay from the Shore thereof; whence turning again towards the South, passeth along the Harbour of Placentia, with the like distance from the Shore, and descending unto New Falkland towards the North and West part thereof, stretcheth it self in a right Line Eastward, continuing the whole Southerly length upon the Bounds of the said New Falkland, unto the middle part or Point of the Promontory, or Neck of Land before mention’d, between the Ports Fermose and Aquafort; at which place is describ’d and finish’d the Perambulation of the whole Precinct, whose Extent may be thus computed, commencing from the Promontory between the Ports Fermose and Aquafort, which is fifty or sixty Miles from South to North distant from Petit Harbour; from whence crossing Westward to the Bay of Placentia, is judg’d to be sixty Miles more or upwards, from East to West.

And thereby was also granted to the said Sir George Calvert and his Heirs, all Islands and Islets, within ten Leagues of the Eastern Shore of the said Region towards the East, together with the Fishing of all sorts of Fish, saving unto the English free liberty of Fishing, as well in the Seas as in the Ports and Creeks of the Province aforesaid, and the Priviledges of salting and drying their Fish upon the Shores of the said Province, as heretofore they reasonably us’d and enjoy’d the same, so as they do no injury or notable loss or detriment unto the Lord Proprietary, his Heirs and Assigns, or to the Inhabitants of the said Province, in the Ports, Creeks, and Shores aforesaid, and especially in the Woods growing within the said Province.

And by the said Patent all Royal Jurisdictions and Prerogatives, both Military and Civil, within the said Province and Islands thereunto belonging, were farther granted to the said Sir George Calvert and his Heirs, and he and they thereby created the true and absolute Lords and Proprietaries of the said Province, saving the Allegiance due to His Majesty, His Heirs and Successors, to be held of them in Capite, yielding and paying unto them therefore a white Horse, when, and as often as any of them shall come into the said Province, and the fifth part of all Gold and Silver Oar which should be found there.

Sir George Calvert, before the obtaining of this Patent, had caus’d a fair House and Fort to be built in the said Province, at a place call’d Ferryland, and in the Year 1624. having obtain’d a Dismission from his Employment of Secretary of State, and being then created Lord Baltemore of Baltemore in Ireland, he did in the Year 1627. Transport himself to Avalon, to inspect his Concerns there in Person; from whence returning the same year, he Embarqu’d himself again, together with his Lady and all his Family, except his eldest Son, for Avalon the year following; at which time (there being then War between England and France) he redeem’d above twenty Sail of English Ships, which had been taken there that year by French Men of War, whereof one Monsieur De la Rade had the chief Command, and shortly after took six French Fishing-Ships upon that Coast, and sent them the same year, with a great many French-men Prisoners, into England. Coming thence, he left a Deputy there, and continu’d the Plantation till his Death, which was in April 1632. After whose Decease it descended of right to his Son and Heir Cecil, now Lord Baltemore; who thereupon sent one Captain William Hill as his Deputy thither, to take possession thereof, and to manage his Interest there for him. Captain Hill, according to his Commission, shortly after repair’d thither, and liv’d some years at the Lord Baltemore’s House at Ferryland above mention’d.

In the thirteenth Year of King Charles the First, of England, &c. about the Year of our Lord 1638. Marquess Hamilton, Earl of Pembroke, Sir David Kirk, and others, under pretence that the Lord Baltemore had deserted that Plantation, obtain’d a Patent of all New-found Land, wherein Avalon was included, and shortly after dispossess’d the Lord Baltemore of his Mansion House in Ferryland, and other Rights there, and during the late Rebellion in England kept possession; but His now Majesty King Charles the Second, immediately after his most happy Restauration in the Year 1660, upon the now Lord Baltemore’s Petition, thought fit to refer the whole Matter to be Examin’d by Sir Orlando Bridgeman, then Lord-Chief-Justice, now Lord Keeper of the Great Seal of England, and others, to report the true state thereof to His Majesty, together with their Opinions thereupon: The Referrees accordingly, upon full hearing of Council on both sides, certifi’d, That they conceiv’d the said Patent to Sir George Calvert, to be a good Patent, in force, and not avoided by the later to Sir David Kirk and others; and that the Title and Interest to the said Province did therefore belong to the Lord Baltemore. Whereupon His Majesty, on the twentieth of March in the same Year, Order’d the Possession thereof to be re-deliver’d to his Lordship, which was accordingly executed: Since which time his Lordship has peaceably enjoy’d the possession thereof, and continues the Plantation to this day, by deputing Lieutenants there from time to time, for the better Government of that Province, the rest of New-found Land remaining still to the aforesaid Proprietors, claiming by the Patent of 13 Car. 1.

The Commodities that are either by Art or Nature produc’d there, are the same with those of the remainder of New-found Land. The Winter there is extream cold, the Summer very hot, but withal pleasant; and during that Season there is great plenty of Pasture for Cattel.

The Coast of this Province is very safe, and as well furnish’d with variety of bold and pleasant Harbors, as any other part of New-found Land; where the English likewise Fish for Cod, the lesser sort whereof is call’d Poor-John, which is there caught in great abundance, especially at Ferryland, and in the Bay of Bulls. Besides these two there are divers other excellent Harbors on the Eastern Shore of Avalon, as Capling Bay, Cape Broyle, Brittus, Isle of Spears, Barrom Cove, Whitburns Bay, and Petit Harbour above mention’d. On the West are the Bay of Placentia, and several other good Harbors.

There are no Indians in Avalon, and but few English, by reason of the excessive Cold in Winter, though Sir David Kirk and his Lady, and also his Family, liv’d in the Lord Baltemore’s House at Ferryland for the space of ten years and upwards.

The Soil seems to promise great store of Mines, which probably may in time be discover’d. The late Lord Baltemore took accidentally a piece of Oar up that lay there upon the surface of the Earth, and brought it with him into England, which was found upon trial to yield a greater proportion of Silver, than the Oar of Potosi in the West-Indies, but hitherto no Mine of it hath been discover’d there.

The Trade of Fishing being of so great concernment to the Nation of England, the same (if it be well manag’d in this Island of Terra Nova) will employ every year above two hundred Sail of English Ships, and ten thousand Mariners, besides the great benefit which may accrue unto the Nation by Imposition upon Strangers there, which would amount to several thousands of Pounds per Annum; with which those Coasts may be Guarded, and Ships Trading thither secur’d: besides the great Customs by the Ships call’d The Sacks (being commonly in great numbers every year) who carry Fish from New-found Land into the Straights, France, Portugal, and Spain, and who bring their Returns into England, as Bullion, and all other native Commodities of those Countreys.

If the Island were well fortifi’d, we might Command all those of other Nations that come to Fish in New-found Land, to pay Contribution in Fish or otherwise, for their Priviledge to Fish there, the said Island being first Planted by English, and pertaining to the Kingdom of England; or if occasion should require, they might be utterly debarr’d of Fishing there.

The Trade of Fishing is of so great concernment to France, Spain, Portugal, the Straights, and other Parts, that they cannot well be without that yearly Supply in Fish which comes from that Island: Neither can the Hollanders, Spaniards, or Portuguese, well set any Ships to the West-Indies, without New-found Land Fish, there being none that will endure to pass the Line sound and untainted, but the Fish of that Countrey, salted and dry’d there. And so long as the Act continues still in force, That no Fish be Transported from the said Island, but in English Bottoms, it will contribute very much to our encrease of Shipping there, and by consequence, of the employment of Mariners; and the Fishing of that part of the Island will be solely appropriated to the English Nation, to whom of right it belongs, which will prove the greatest Ballance of Trade in that part of the World; and that whereas above two hundred Sail do Trade thither yearly to Fish, if a thousand Sail come, if there be but Fisher-men enow, they may all have Fraughtage there.

The French, if once the Island be fortifi’d, will be depriv’d of their Nursery of Mariners, this being the onely place, besides Canada, and one or two adjacent Coasts, where they come for supply of Fish, with which that Nation cannot be furnish’d so well from other Parts.

By well Planting and Fortifying New-found Land, the Trading to Virginia, New England, and those Parts, would be much encourag’d, New England having had of late great Traffick with New-found Land, where they vend the Growth of their Plantation. Besides, New-found Land is a Key to the Gulf of Canada, which if the English had again in their possession, as they had in the Years 1628. and 1632. they might give a Law to all foreign Kings and People interested in any of the parts of America, and a Protection to all the English Plantations upon that Continent, whereby great security, comfort and profit would arise to the Nation and People of it: whereas on the contrary, if the French, Spanish, or Dutch, should possess themselves of the said Plantation, they would not onely deprive this Nation of all the Advantages aforesaid, but would also derive to themselves so great a Power to prejudice all the Plantations of the Coasts of America belonging to this Nation, that the Inconveniences thereof are scarce to be imagin’d or express’d.

After the granting of the Patent aforesaid of 13 Car. 1. Sir David Kirk’s great Pains there, and constant Endeavours, were beyond expectation bless’d with a continuance and preservation of Trade in that Place; in the carrying on of which, he had always a special regard to the real Advantage of this Kingdom, and the particular Service of His Majesty.

The wonderful Bank of Terra Nova.

The Baccaloos.

Before this Island, right over against Cape Ray, at the distance of twenty four Leagues or more, there lieth an huge Bank or Ridge of Land, extending it self in length out of the Sea, above a hundred Leagues, but in breadth not above four or five and twenty, when it is broadest, and in other parts much less, sharpning towards each end into a Conus, or narrow Point. It is accounted one of the Wonders of the Sea, which round about, at some distance, is very deep, and hardly to be sounded, especially betwixt the Bank (for so they commonly call it) and Cape Ray, but drawing nearer, it grows by degrees more and more shallow, insomuch that nigh the Land there is not much more Water than is necessary for the Ships to Ride in. It runneth out in length, as was said, from North to South, from forty one Degrees of Latitude to fifty two; and round about it there lie scatter’d a multitude of lesser Islands, which Sir Sebastian Cabot, when he first discover’d the Place, call’d by one common Name Los Baccaloos, or The Islands of Cod-fish, from the great quantity of that sort of Fish he there found; which was such, that they hindred the passage of his Ships, and lay in such multitudes upon the Coasts, that the very Bears would come and catch them in their Claws, and draw them to Land.

The Isle of Assumption.

In the Gulf of St. Laurence, towards the Mouth of the River Canada, is another less considerable Island, said to have been first discover’d by Quartier, and by him call’d The Island of Assumption; by John Alphonso, The Island of Ascension; by the Natives, Natistcotec: It extends it self from the forty eighth to the fiftieth Degree, between the South-East and North-West.

Quartier makes mention of a strange kinde of Fish, found in the River of Canada, like unto a Sea-Hog, but having the Head of a Hare, it is call’d by the Natives Adhothuys.

Not far from this is a little Island, call’d by the French, Isle de Sable, or The Sandy Island; and another on the West of Terra Nova, call’d Isle de Bretons, or The Island of St. Laurence, besides several little scatter’d Islands in the Gulf of St. Laurence, as Menego, and The Three Islands of Birds; in which are found a kind of amphibious Animal, call’d by the French, Cualrus, and by the Russians, Morsh; somewhat like a Sea-Calf, but more monstrous.

CHAP. XII.
The Bermudas, or Summer-Islands.

Situation of the Bermudas.

The Bermudas, or Summer-Islands (probably so term’d as to the first Appellation from certain black Hogs, by the Spaniards call’d Bermudas, which from a Ship bound with them to some other parts of the West-Indies, and cast away upon that Coast, swam ashore, and there increased; or, as others say, from John Bermudes, a Spaniard, who is said to have been the first Discoverer; or, as to the second, from one George Summers, an English-man, who there suffer’d shipwrack) are situated in thirty two Degrees and twenty five Minutes of Northern Latitude about sixteen hundred Leagues from England, twelve hundred from Madera, four hundred from Hispaniola, and three hundred from the nearest Coast of Virginia. The first that endeavour’d to settle Plantations here was a Spaniard nam’d Hernando Camelo, being design’d Conductor in this Expedition: And this Undertaking was so much the more eagerly prosecuted, upon consideration that the Plate-Fleet Sailing from Havana through the Straights of Bahama, might here have a convenient Harbour; but those who were invited to become Adventurers, with proffers of great Advantage, shewing themselves very slack in the Business, and Charles the Fifth being at that time intangled in War and other troublesom Affairs, the Design came to nothing, and for above sixty years after no farther Attempt was made by any for the Planting of these Islands, till at last the French made a Voyage thither under Captain Barboriere, but by Shipwrack were frustrated of their hopes; nor made they any more Preparations in this Design. In which nevertheless the English were not so easily discourag’d, for first Captain Gosnol and Smith set forth, at the Charges of Mr. Edward Wingfield; next, Captain Nelson; then successively West, Gates, Argal, and Wyat, but all with little or no success, till at length in the Year 1612. a Company was establish’d in London by the King’s Letters Patents, who sent one Mr. Richard Moor with sixty Men to the Bermudas, where he spent three years in fortifying those Islands: but that which put a little stop to this good beginning, was a kind of Misfortune that hapned; for the Rats which were gotten ashore from a Shipwrack increas’d so exceedingly, that they devour’d all the Plants in the Field, and the Provision in the Houses, insomuch that a great Famine proceeded from thence, all means to destroy the Vermine being in vain; till at last Providence sent a Disease amongst them, which kill’d them all in a very short time. Mean while Moor went on in the fortification of the Island, and was ere long supply’d with fresh People. Mr. Barlet was sent over with sixty Men, and carried from thence with him eighty Pound of Ambergreece. And soon after three Ships more, viz. the Blessing, the Star, and the Margaret, convey’d thither four hundred and ten, Men and Women. As soon as Moor was call’d away, Daniel Tuckard coming from Virginia to succeed him, bestirr’d himself very much, Planting all places full of Trees fetch’d from the West-Indian Islands; as also Tobacco, with which he fraighted a Ship to London. Moreover, the Countrey was divided into Acres, that every Planter might have an equal share, and know his own Lands. Anno 1619. Tuckard was succceded by Nathaniel Butler, who in four Ships brought thither five hundred Men and Women, to supply the first Plantation, which was much decay’d since the Rats had devour’d their Provisions, so that it was little look’d after by the Company in London: But now they built a Church and erected a Court of Judicature, and all things were order’d conveniently for the publick good. After which many Noble Persons set Sail thither in the Magazine Frigat; and the Planters being now fifteen hundred in number, inhabited twenty Leagues of Land in length.

Forts built upon the Bermudas.

On the longest Island, call’d St. George, (for the Bermudas consists of several Islands, great and small) they built Warwick and Dover Forts, with other Fortifications and Towers, which had their Denominations from those Noble-men and Gentlemen that were Undertakers in this Plantation, as Cavendish, Paget, Herbert, &c. from the Earl of Devonshire, the Lord Paget, the Earl of Pembroke and others.

Ports and Havens.

Amongst the Havens the eminentest are, Southampton, the Inlet Harrington, and the Great Sound.

All these Islands lying together resemble a Half-Moon, and are surrounded with Rocks, which appear at Low-water, and at High lie but shallow; for it seldom Ebbs or Flows above five Foot. The Shore, for the most part Rocky, and hardned by the Sun and Wind, receives no damage by the Waves which continually beat against the same.

Nature of the Soil.

The Ground it self differs; for in some places it is sandy or clayie, and in others partly black, and partly white, or Ash-colour’d Earth; which last is accounted the worst, and the black the best. Three Foot deep under the Ash-colour’d Earth lie great Slates, and under the black, a white spungie Stone, like the Pumice, in whose moist Crevises Trees take root.

The Pits or Wells, though they Ebb and Flow with the Sea, yet produce a wholsom and sweet Water.

Temperature of the Air.

The Skie is generally serene, but when over-cast with Clouds, is subject to Lightning and Thunder; yet the Air is of a good temper, being neither exceeding cold, nor excessive hot: for which reason the European Fruits grow better there than in their natural Soil.

Their Harvest is twice a year; for that which they Sowe in March, is ripe and gather’d in June; then what they Sowe again in August, they gather in January.

Productions of the Countrey.

These Islands breed no hurtful Creatures; nay, the yellow Spider which spins silken Cobwebs, is free from Poyson.

The Plant Nuchtly, which bears speckled Pears, grows betwixt the Rocks which are drench’d with Sea-water.

The Hogs which above a hundred and fifty years since swam ashore out of the Spanish Wrack, are exceedingly increas’d there, but because of their poorness are scarce eatable, they feeding onely on the sweet Berries which fall from the Palmito-Trees.

About the white and red Mulberries, which grow plentifully there, breed thousands of Silk-worms, which spin Silk according to the colour of the Mulberries.

The Sea produces some quantity of Pearls and Ambergreece.

From the beginning of the year till May, the Whales are seen to swim not far from the Shore.

A strange sort of Sea-Fowl breed in Holes like Rabbets; and amongst other Birds, here are also store of Cranes.

The Tobacco which the English have planted here grows very well.

Tortoises Laying of Eggs.

Here are likewise great Tortoises, which Lay their Eggs in the Sand on the Shore, where they are Hatch’d by the Beams of the Sun, and are taken after this manner: In the Night some are set to watch where they Land, and whilest they are digging a deep Hole in the Ground, are thrown on their Backs, and not being able to get upon their Legs again, they lie and groan very pitifully: some of them having above two Basons full of Eggs in their Bellies; which being about the bigness of a Tennis-Ball, have a thin Shell, which incloseth a Yolk and White. If these Eggs lie buried six years, then the young Tortoises breaking the Shell, come out of the Sand, and instantly creep into the Sea. Their Flesh is not onely wholsom but toothsom. The Oyl made of them is not inferior to Butter.

Cedars of an excellent kind.

Moreover, the Bermudas produce Cedars, the like of which are not to be found in the whole World: The Leaves are douny and prickly at the ends, almost like those of the Juniper Tree: The Wood hath a sweet smell, and the Berries, which are like the Myrtle, of a pale Red, inclose four white Kernels; the outermost Skin whereof is sweet; the innermost, which covers the Kernel, sharp, and the Pulp tartish: The Trees are always flourishing, being at the same time full of Blossoms, green, and ripe Fruit: The Berries, when grown ripe, begin to gape, and fall off in rainy Weather, leaving a round Stalk on the Boughs, which loses not its Rind till two years after; half which time the Berry requires, before it attains to its perfect ripeness, which generally happens in the Winter: The Boughs shoot straight upwards, and become in time so heavy, that they cause the Body of the Tree to bend. This most excellent Wood grows in divers places of the Bermudas.

We shall conclude with the resolute Exploit of five Sea-men, Anno 1616. who, to the great admiration of all People, set Sail from thence in an open Vessel of three Tun through the main Ocean, and after having suffer’d terrible Tempests, arriv’d in the space of seven Weeks safe in Ireland.

These Islands are remarkable for divers sorts of Plants, unknown in other Parts, as the Prickle Pear, Poyson Weed, Red Weed, Purging Bean, Costive Tree, Red Pepper, and the Sea Feather. Also several strange Birds, as the Egg Bird, Cahow, Tropick Bird, and the Pemlico, which presageth Storms.

CHAP. XIII.
Hispaniola.

The Islands call’d De Barlovento, by which are understood Hispaniola, Cuba, Jamaica, and Boriquen, as also the Lucaies, with the Caribes, and lastly the Isles call’d De Sotavento, viz. Margareta, Cabagua, and Tabago, are by some comprehended all under the general Name of The Isles Antilles; though others reckon the Antilles to be the same with the Caribes onely. But leaving this Controversie undecided, we shall begin with the Isles De Barlovento, the chief whereof is Hispaniola.

Bounds and Description of Hispaniola.

Hispaniola, or Little Spain (as Columbus nam’d it) is, though not the largest, yet the fairest and goodliest of all the American Islands, call’d by the Natives anciently Hayti and Quisqueia: It lieth about fifteen Leagues Westward of Porto Rico, and distant from the main Land of America about one hundred and twenty; ’tis of a triangular form, the sharpest Point whereof is that towards Porto Rico, which they call Cabo de Enganno: that towards the West inclines to a Semi-circle, containing a good and convenient Bay betwixt the two Points, viz. St. Nicholas to the North, and Cabo de Donna Maria towards the South. It is not thought to be less than a hundred and fifty Leagues in length, and in breadth from threescore to thirty, and to contain in the compass of the whole, four hundred Leagues at least, lying betwixt eighteen and twenty Degrees of Northern Latitude, having an Air somewhat infested with the Morning Heats, but well cool’d again in the Afternoon, by a constant Wind from the Sea, which they call there Virason. It is, for the fertility of the Soil, one of the richest and most flourishing Countreys in the World; the Trees and all things else there continually clad, as it were, in their Summer Livery, the Meadows and Pastures always green, and of such an excellent Herbage, that Cattel both breed and thrive there beyond belief; both great Cattel and small, as Kine, Sheep, Hogs, &c. brought thither out of Spain, having multiply’d to such numbers, that they live wild now in Herds in several places, and are both hunted and kill’d, like Stags or other Venison, onely for their Hides, which they send yearly into Spain and other parts of Europe, as a great Merchandize and Commodity of huge profit to them.

Wild Hogs also have been formerly seen to feed in the Woods in great multitudes, but the Dogs since they were brought over hither, have made great havock amongst them.

Beasts peculiar to Hispaniola.

The Animals peculiar to this Island are 1. A little Beast call’d Hutias, not much unlike our Coneys. 2. Chemi, almost of the same form, but a little bigger. 3. Mohui, A Beast somewhat less than the Hutias. 4. A Beast call’d Coxi.

The Fly Cuyero.

Likewise amongst other strange sorts of Creatures here, the Cuyero is very observable, being about an Inch big, and having four Wings, of which two are larger than the other: when they flie they shine after such a manner, that in the Night they make a Room as light as day, insomuch that some have made use of them in stead of Candles to Read by.

The Fish Manate.

No less wonderful is the Fish Manate, whose shape hath been describ’d elsewhere: It breeds for the most part in the Sea, yet sometimes swimming up the Rivers, comes ashore and eats Grass. The Casique Caramatexi kept one in the Lake Guaynato, which was so tame, that when call’d by the Name Maton, it us’d to come out of the Water, and go directly to the Casique’s House, where being fed, it return’d to the Lake, accompanied with Men and Boys, who with their Singing seem’d to delight the Fish, which sometimes carried ten Children on its Back over the Water; but at last a Spaniard striking at it with a Pike, it would never come forth again when it espy’d a Cloth’d Man: It liv’d twenty six years in the fore-mention’d Lake, till by accident the River Hayboaic over-flowing into the said Lake, the Fish return’d to the Sea.

The Fish Abacatuaia.

Besides this great Fish, here is also a sort of small Fish, call’d Abacatuaia, with a little Mouth, black Eyes encompass’d with Silver-colour’d Circles, four black Fins, two long ones under its Belly, one on the Back, and one on each side of the Head, the Tail slit and cover’d with a glittering Skin: It is as big as a Flounder, and not ill Meat, but thick and round.

The Insect Nigua.

When the Spaniards first setled on Hispaniola, they were exceedingly tormented with a sort of leaping Insects call’d Nigua, which us’d to eat through their Skin into the Flesh in such a nature, that many of them lost their Arms and Legs; but at last they found out a Remedy against this Evil, viz. the searing the Wounds with hot Irons.

Fruits.

Besides the aforesaid plenty of Flesh, they have many excellent Fruits all the year long, as Banana’s, Pine-Apples, Custud-Apples, Plantens, Papans, Musk-melons, Water-melons, and many other peculiar Plants, as 1. the Auzuba, a fair large Tree, the Fruit whereof is call’d Pinnas, resembling a Malecotoon: Of this Tree there are three sorts, Jaima, Boniama, and Jaiqua; 2. Quauconex; 3. Axi; of which there are also several sorts, as Carive, Huarahuac, Axiblanco, Acafran-Axi, and Axi-Coral; 4. Yuca, the Root of which serves in stead of Corn; 5. Certain Trees call’d Guaibes, besides plenty of Mint and Potato’s.

The Provinces of this Island.

The Island of Hispaniola was formerly divided into several Provinces, amongst which the Mountainous Countrey Hyguey lies towards the Isle of Porto Rico. On the Mountains, which are flat on the top, are great variety of sharp-pointed Stones. The Soil is a sort of colour’d Earth, which produces all sorts of Fruit, especially the Root Casabi, and Melons.

Hyguey also conterminates with Ycayagua; Northward lies Samana; Southward, Yaquimo, where there is store of Brasile Wood: And between the City Domingo and Yaquimo, is the Countrey Baoruco, which with its Mountains extends sixty Leagues in length, and above twenty in breadth, without any Water, Pasture, or Food for Cattel or Mankind.

Next follows the Countrey Xaragua, lying at the great Inlet which divides Hispaniola; for one side extends to the Promontory of St. Nicholas, and the other to the Point Tiburon. This Countrey produces abundance of Cotton.

Lastly, the Provinces Guahaba, Haniguagya and Cahay, are very eminent; as also Cibao, which is full of Gold-Mines; and Lavega Real, with Magnana, which lie between the two great Rivers Neyba and Yagui; the stony Countrey Ciguayos, and the low Coast Darica, where Christopher Columbus built the City Navidad, which he afterwards deserted.

Ginger was formerly brought hither from the East-Indies, but now grows here in such great abundance, that above two and twenty thousand Kintalls are yearly Transported from thence to Spain.

With as good success grow here also the Sugar-Canes and Maiz.

Peter Martyr, a Councellor to the Emperor Charles the Fifth, relates, That Hispaniola produc’d in his time, besides Silver, Copper, and Iron, five hundred thousand Ducats in Gold: Nevertheless the rich Mines lay undisturb’d, because they wanted People to work in them, insomuch that had they not planted their Royal Seat in Domingo, the Island had long since been deserted, notwithstanding the exceeding fruitfulness of the Soil, because the Spaniards exercis’d their Cruelty in such a nature, that of sixty thousand Inhabitants from the Year 1508. to Anno 1514. scarce fourteen thousand of them were left alive; all which is affirm’d by the Bishop De las Casas. Nay, the fore-mention’d Peter Martyr relates, That the Men wearied with working in the Mines, kill’d themselves, despairing of ever being releas’d from their Slavery; and Women with Child destroy’d the Infants in their Wombs, that they might not bear Slaves for the Spaniards. He adds hereunto, That of a hundred and twenty thousand Persons, few were left in a short time.

The Gaiety of the antient Casiques.

These Provinces in former times had each of them their Casique, whose splendor consisted chiefly in Dancing to his Devotion, with a Girdle full of Bells about his Middle, a String of Pearls about his Arms, a Covering over his Privities, and a Plume of Feathers on his Head, with a Drummer before him, and a small Train of Arm’d Men after him.

Ports and Havens.

On the Coast are first the Point of Nisao, ten Leagues to the West of Santo Domingo.

Eighteen Leagues farther is the Port Ocoa, which is a Bay where the Fleets of Nova Hispania take refreshing, when they do not Anchor in the Nook of Sepesepin, which is near unto it, or in another call’d The Fair Haven, two Leagues before you come to Ocoa.

Twenty Leagues beyond Ocoa is the Port of Asua.

Thirty Leagues more Westwardly is a large Point right against the Island of Bola, which lieth five Leagues from the Coast.

The most Westerly Point is call’d Cape Tiburon: It hath an Island three Leagues from it Westward, call’d Caprio; and Sailing along the Coast, you will see an Island call’d Camito, and farther in the Nook of Yaguana another call’d Guanabo of eight Leagues long.

On the North side of the Island, the most Westerly Cape and Port is St. Nicholas, from whence North-East and by East, lieth the Island of Tortuga, near the Coast of Hispaniola: It is of five Leagues length.

Farther along the Coast is Monte Christo, the West Cape of Natividad; to the East of which there is a great Bay call’d Port Real.

This Island is so full of Harbours, that he that will Coast it, cannot well miss of one where he pleaseth, most of which afford fresh Meat and good Water.

Moreover, Hispaniola hath many brave Rivers, the chiefest of which are Hayna; Nizao, along whose Shore the first Sugar-Canes were planted; Neyba, a great River; Yaquimo; Yaqui, which Columbus call’d Rio de Oro, because the Ground thereof glitter’d like Gold; and lastly, the Rivers Nicayagua, amongst whose Sands is Gold; Nigua, which borrows its Denomination from the fore-mention’d leaping Insect; the swift Stream Juno, whose Banks are crown’d with handsom Houses; and Jaquin, which hath many Salt-pans.

The Rivers Itabo, Ocoa, Cepi, Bia, Cazui, Sanate de Plata, and Chiabon, have some one, others more Sugar-Mills upon them.

But the chiefest River is Ozama, broad, and so deep, that the biggest Vessel may lie close by the Shore; and also washes St. Domingo.

Description of the City of St. Domingo.

This City, the Metropolis of all the Isles round about, was built by Bartholomeus Columbus, and was peopled Anno 1494. after which it flourish’d eight years, when, a terrible Storm blowing the same down to the Ground, Nicholas Olanda remov’d it to the Western Shore of Ozama, that the Spaniards, who had for the most part setled towards the West, might not be necessitated to Ferry over: but the first place stood much more conveniently, being not onely provided of a Fountain of sweet Water, but also freed of those unwholsom Vapours which daily rise with the Sun at this new-built City. To prevent the inconvenience of crossing to the foremention’d Fountain, of which the Inhabitants found themselves oftentimes in great want, Olanda went about to lead the neighboring River Hayna into the Ozama, but the Design not being prosecuted, bereav’d Domingo of the onely thing which would have made it able to stand in competition with any City in the World; for it lies on a Plain, the South side whereof is wash’d by the Sea; the East side, by the River; on the North and West are many delightful Fields.

The City, which in a manner is built square, is divided into long straight Streets, full of fair Houses after the Spanish manner: in the middle thereof is a square Market-place, with a handsom Church, the Yard whereof is encompass’d with a high Wall, which upon occasion would serve for a place of great Defence.

The Collectors of the King of Spain’s Revenue dwell in stately Palaces; and the Dominicans, Franciscans, and Monks De la Merced, have brave Cloysters, besides two more for the Nuns.

The Latine School and Hospital belonging to the City, are Endow’d with great yearly Revenues.

The Arch-bishop of St. Domingo hath Command over the Bishoprick of Conception, La Vega, Cuba, Venezuela, and Porto Rico.

The City is surrounded with a Stone Wall, and fortifi’d with a Castle, which with two Bulwarks reaches to the River Ozama, and within them two Half-Moons.

On the utmost Shore stands a round Tower near the Southern Bulwark.

Before the new discover’d Countreys entic’d away many People from St. Domingo, and the Silver Fleet put into Havana, the Inhabitants drove a great Trade in Hides, Tallow, Sugar, Cassia, Horses, and Hogs.

Anno 1586. Sir Francis Drake Landed here with twelve hundred English-men, took the City by Storm, staid a whole Moneth in the same, and upon Composition with the Spaniard, left it undestroy’d.

Other chief Towns of Hispaniola.

Other chief Towns in Hispaniola are 1. Salvaleon, twenty eight Leagues distant from St. Domingo, towards the East.

2. Zeybo. 3. Cotny, formerly inhabited by those that work’d in the Gold-Mines; the last especially was once a rich Town, and much frequented, but now in a manner deserted.

4. Azua, or New Compostella, eight Leagues distant from St. Domingo, famous for the Sugar-Mills not far from it, and one of the Ports before-mention’d.

5. Yaguana, for its brave Harbour also call’d Maria del Puerto, in the more Western parts of the Island; a small Town not above a League distant from the Sea; It was burnt by Captain Christopher Newport.

6. Conception de la Vega, adorn’d with a Cathedral and Cloysters of Fryers, and lying twenty or thirty Leagues Northward of St. Domingo: It was built by Columbus, and from thence he had his Title of Duke de la Vega.

7. Sant Jago de los Cavalleros, a very pleasant Place, ten Leagues Northward of St. Domingo.

8. Puerto de Plata, or The Silver Haven, four Leagues distant from St. Domingo towards the North: It hath been counted the second Place of Trading and Wealth in the whole Island, being commodiously seated on an Arm of the Sea, and fortifi’d with a Castle.

9. Monte Christo, one of the Ports also above-mention’d: It lies fourteen Leagues Westward of Plata, and extends it self along the Northern Coast: it is wash’d by the River Yagui, on whose Banks are many Salt-pans.

The Island dispeopled by the cruelty of the Spaniards.

Their barbarous usage of Guaccanarillo and others.

All those Cities are much decay’d, and thinly inhabited, the Spaniards being most of them drawn by the temptation of new discover’d Gold and Silver Mines in other places, and the first Inhabitants having been miserably destroy’d. The Bishop De las Casas, an Eye-witness, relates, That the King Gauccanarillo secur’d the Goods of a stranded Ship, of which Columbus was Commander, and receiv’d the Spaniards very courteously; but not being able to continue supplying them with that quantity of Gold they requir’d, wanting Men to gather so much out of the Streams and Mines, and seeing no way to rid himself from the Spaniards Oppressions, fled to the Province of Ciguayos, the Casique of which was his Deputy; whereat the Spaniards were so enrag’d, that they burnt all that they could meet with, neither sparing young nor old; and at length taking Guaccanarillo, put him in Irons, and thought to have carried him to Madrid; but the Ship in which he went suffering Shipwrack, he with many others was cast away, being before almost dead with grief for his Consort, who had been Ravish’d by a Spanish Commander, Likewise Anacoana, Sister to the Casique, or Governor of the Province Xarana, and Partner with him in the Government, seeing three hundred of her Councellors burning in a great House, set on fire by the Spaniards, and her Subjects torn by Dogs, or cut in pieces, hung her self out of despair. The same Death died Higuanama, Queen of Huguey. Others say that Anacoana was put to death together with her Brother in a most barbarous and cruel manner, by Nicholas de Olanda, who succeeded Diego de Arana in the Government of this Island. Many Women and Children were kept alive onely to Manure the Ground. The Men dying of their hard Labour in the Gold-Mines, and those which endur’d stoutly the cruel Labour under Ground, were never suffer’d to go to their Wives; from whence proceeded a great decrease of People, the Spaniards seeming purposely to design the destruction of the Natives of Hispaniola, though they receiv’d great benefit by their Service; for Gold in former times was found between the Cracks and split Stones of the Mountains, whose Veins the Mine-workers digg’d for not without great and dangerous Labour.

First original of the People of Hispaniola.

The first Planters of Hispaniola are, according to the common opinion, deriv’d from Matinio, a high and Mountainous Isle, from whence the most eminent Inhabitants were driven by certain Rebels, as formerly the Syrians under the Government of Dido, were driven from Tyre to Lybia, and the Batavians from Hessen to the Countrey between Rhyne and Wall, at present inhabited by the Gelders and Hollanders. These Matininoensians thus expell’d from their native Countrey, setled themselves on Cahonao, near the River Bahaboni: The first House they call’d Camoteia, and afterwards turn’d it into a Temple, to which they shew’d Reverence, and made great Presents: In like manner the Tyema, which stood on a high Rock belonging to one of the Canary Islands, was by the ancient Inhabitants of the Place had in great veneration, insomuch that many leap’d down from the same, being perswaded by the Priests, That the Souls of those which threw themselves off this sacred Break-neck, should immediately be translated into a place of everlasting happiness.

The ancient Name of this Island.

This Island was, as we said before, first call’d Haity which signifies Wild, because in many places it swells with wondrous high Mountains, and in other places is over-grown with great Woods: it was afterwards by the ancient Inhabitants nam’d Xusqueia, that is, Unmeasurably great, because they suppos’d it to be the whole World, and that the Sun shin’d in no other place.

Indian Songs or Ballads call’d Areitos.

The Natives of this Island, though wholly rude of acquir’d Knowledge or Literature, like the generality of the Americans, yet they took care to instruct their Children in the Original and Antiquities of their Countrey, and the Wars and Exploits of their Predecessors, both which they contain’d in Songs call’d Areitos which they us’d to Sing to the sound of Drums and Trumpets; but especially their Persons of chiefest Quality study’d most these Areitos, and exercis’d themselves in Dancing.

Strange Prediction of the Spaniards Arrival.

The most remarkable of these ancient Areitos, were such as pretended to prophesie of things to come, which if of sad consequence, were Sung very mournfully and with many Sighs; nor were they always, however inspir’d, without effect, as appear’d at last by woful event: for long before the Spaniards Landed on Hispaniola, it was foretold by one of them, that Maguacochios, signifying Clothed People, should Land on Hispaniola, who with sharp Weapons should cut off Heads and Arms, and under whose insupportable Yoke their Successors must spend their days without hope of ever being releas’d.

It might be disputed whether these Predictions were dictated by good or evil Spirits; but it is generally believ’d, that all their Oracles, whether hapning true or false, were suggested by diabolical Spirits to the Priests, who commonly convers’d with them; and that these Spirits knew the Design of several People to discover new Countreys.

The Images of their Zemes.

Their Images Zemes, stuff’d full of Cotton, were fashion’d into very frightful Shapes, and might pass for those things which we call Terricula, or Bugbears; of which some were made very small, and those they ty’d on their Foreheads when they went to the Wars. Every Governor had a peculiar Zemes, to whom he shew’d Reverence, in return whereof he expected Rain, fair Weather, and to conquer his Enemies, supposing him to be a Messenger of a perpetual and endless Being, by them call’d Jocauna Guamaonocon; whom nevertheless they suppos’d to have a Mother, to whom they gave five Names, viz. Attbeir, Mamona, Guacarapita, Liella, and Guimazoa.

The Islanders Opinion of the Creation.

Their opinion of Man’s Creation was thus: They say, that out from a Mountain in the Province Cuanana, out of certain small and great Caverns therein, came little and great People: The biggest Hole, call’d Cazibaragua, and the little one, nam’d Amaiauna, were said to be lock’d up every Night, that none might pass the Sentinel Machchael, who out of curiosity leaving the Mountain Cuata, and going up into the Countrey, was discover’d by the Sun, whose Beams he not being able to endure, was turn’d into a Rock. The like Mischance hapned to many others, who in the dark Night going to Fish, in the Morning at their Return were chang’d into Oaken Trees, onely one of the Fishermen was sent away by the chief Commander Vaguoniana, who moved at the Complaint of a Nightingale’s Singing, suffer’d all the Men to go into the Hole, and the Women and Children he Transported to Matinino. But to make short of these non-sensical Stories, in conclusion, the Men being let out of their Caves, saw many strange Beasts amongst the Woods, which being turn’d into Women, were entertain’d by them, and brought forth a numerous Progeny, which spread over all Hispaniola.

Their foolish Opinion of the Original of the Sea.

No less ridiculous an Account do the Priests give concerning the Original of the Sea, viz. That Jaia, a mighty Man, buried the Body of his deceased Son in a Pumpion, which some Moneths after, out of meer affection to the Deceased, he cutting open, abundance of Whales sprung out of it. This Wonder being every where known, amongst others, entic’d four Brothers born at one Birth (whose Mother died in Childbed) to get the Pumpion into their possession; which their Design prov’d successful: but afterwards struck with a pannick fear of Jaia’s coming thither (who oftentimes came to mourn over the Bones of his dead Son) they fled, and threw away the Pumpion, which breaking with the fall, the Sea gush’d out of all places thereof, and cover’d the Plains in such a manner, that nothing of them was seen, onely the tops of the highest Mountains appear’d; at which the four Brothers terribly afrighted, rang’d through barren Desarts, in which they had died of Hunger, had they not come to a Baker’s House, which one of them entring, ask’d for Cazabi; but the Baker denying them Bread, spit on them, which caus’d a mortal Dropsie, which the Brothers upon consultation found no way to cure, but by cutting a hole in the Skin with a sharp Stone, and to let out the Water; but out of each running Wound sprung a Woman, who bare them four Sons and four Daughters.

The Cave Jovana-beina.

There is a certain Cave call’d Jovana-beina, which is adorn’d with a thousand Pictures, in great esteem amongst them; at the Entrance on each side whereof stands a Zemes; that on the right side is call’d Binthaitelles, the other Marohur, to which they come from all places to pay their Devotions, because (they say) the Sun and Moon came out of the said Cave to lighten the World.

Their absurd Opinion of the Deceased.

Much after the same absurd rate is their Opinion of the Deceased; for they suppose that they range through Woods and Forrests in the Night, eat of a Fruit call’d Guannaba, and steal to the Embraces of Women in Moon-shiny Nights. A Traveller, say they, if he be frighted at the appearance of a deceased Person, great inconveniences will certainly attend him, but if he goes stoutly towards it, then the Goblin vanishes.

These Delusions are made great Mysteries amongst them, and contain’d in Songs, which their Priests Boiti Sing to a kind of Tabor made of a piece of hollow Wood, pretending that they have familiar Conversation with the Zemes concerning future things.

Their Ceremonies about their Sick.

Their Ceremonies about their sick, especially if Persons of Quality, are likewise very remarkably odd and conceited: First they chew a strong kind of Herb, call’d Cohobba, with which having sufficiently intoxicated their Brains, they foam at the Mouth, and run with a Stone and a piece of Flesh in their Mouths to the sick Person, whose Family they drive all out of Doors, except one or two, whose presence the Patient requires; then the Boiti walks four times about the sick Person’s Bed, making strange Gestures, pinching his Lips and Nose, blowing upon his Forehead, Throat and Temples, and sucking several parts of his Body, alledging, that thereby he draws the Distemper out of the Veins; after that he chafes and rubs his Shoulders, Thighs and Legs, and ties his Hands and Feet together, then running to the Door, proclaims, That the Sick in a short time shall be restor’d to his former Health; which said, he returns with his Arms stretch’d out towards the sick Person, takes the piece of Flesh out of his Mouth, which he gives him backwards, saying, You shall rise and go forth in Health, for I have taken away your Sickness: But if he judges the Distemper not curable, he makes the Sick believe, that Zemes is displeas’d with him, because he did not build a House for him, or consecrate a Garden to him, or in some respect or other did not worship him as he ought to have done. When the Soul departs out of the Body, they conjure the Body with many Adjurations, to reveal whether it died according to God’s decree, or through neglect of the Boiti, as not having sanctifi’d himself enough by Fasting when he went first to the Sick, or not prescrib’d sufficient Medicines: wherefore if (as they say) the Devil answers them from the Mouth of the Deceased, that the Boiti did not perform his due Office, then the nearest Friends revenge themselves on the Boiti, but if otherwise, then they are highly esteem’d amongst them. The Women taking the Stones which the Boiti kept in his Mouth, wrap them up in a fine Cloth as a holy Relique, supposing that they will much facilitate their Child-birth.

Their manner of Consulting with their Zemes.

The Casiques desirous to know future Events of War, or whether the approaching Years will be fruitful, go into a Chappel consecrated to the Zemes, and snuff the intoxicating Herb Cohobba up their Nostrils; whereupon they break out into loud Exclamations, and some kind of strange extravagant Actions, till the power of the Cohobba begins to decay, and the Frenzie cease; then coming again to their Senses, they bow their Heads, and lay their Elbows on their Knees, in which posture they sit for a considerable time, then lifting up their Eyes they yawn as if they came from sleep; then they mutter to themselves whilest their Retinue which stand about them (for no common Person is suffer’d to be there) thank them with a loud Voice, for the pains they have been at in discoursing with the Zemes; then the Casiques begin to declare what hath been reveal’d to them, viz. whether they shall be fortunate in the Wars or not; whether it will be a fruitful or unfruitful, healthy or sickly Year.

Gossipping.

Moreover, at the Birth of the Casique’s Children, the neighboring Governors visit the Women in Child-bed, and every one gives the Child a peculiar Name, from whence it happens that one Man hath oftentimes forty Names, and is highly incens’d if any one of them chances to be forgot in any Writing directed to him.

Manner of Succession.

Their manner of Succession in Government is not unremarkable; for not the eldest Heir-male of the Family, but first the King or Casique’s Brother, if he have any, and after his Decease the eldest of the Sisters Inherits the Realm or Seigniorie: if the Sisters have no Male-issue, then the Brothers Sons Inherit; and in case they have no Male-heir, then the next of Blood, whether Male or Female: but if the Prince or Casique dies without Children, Nephews, or other near Relations, the next in Power in the Countrey Inherits, and Marries as many Wives as he pleases; of which she that he loves best is burn’d alive in her best Apparel with her Husband when he dies, and near the Corps stands a Cup of Water and some of the Bread Cazabi.

Languages.

There are several Languages in Hispaniola, but differing from each other: for in the Province Bainoa they have a different, both Pronunciation and Dialect from that in Caizimu.

In the said Province of Caizimu is a very remarkable Rock, or vast Stone to be seen, at the Foot of a high Mountain; and underneath the said Stone is a great Cave, into which they go through a large Passage, not unlike a Temple Door; near which conjoyn many deep Rivers, with such a Noise and Foam, that they lose both their Sight and Hearing, whoever approach the same.

An Example of the Bainoan Language.

Of the Language of the Province Bainoa, Peter Martyr gives us this Specimen: “The Wife of a Casique (says he) went to Prayers in a Chappel which was built by the Spaniards; at her Return from whence her Husband desiring to enjoy her, she refusing, said, Teitoca, teitoca, techeta Cynato guammechina, that is to say, Be contented, Be contented, God would be highly incens’d: to which the Casique answer’d, Gnaibba Cynato machabucha guamechyna, that is, What care I if God be angry.”

The taking of St. Domingo by Sir Fran. Drake.

Since the Spaniards had first possession of this Island, it hath been twice Invaded by the English, the first time under the Conduct of Sir Francis Drake, who took the Town of San Domingo, staid in it a good while, and could if he had pleas’d, have totally dispossess’d the Spaniards; the second time under Colonel Venables, sent thither by Oliver Cromwell during his usurp’d Dominion; at which time it might as easily have been taken as at first, had not the Business been rashly and indiscreetly manag’d, as shall presently be declar’d more at large. The first Expedition of Sir Francis Drake hath been already hinted, but for the memorableness of that bold Exploit, we shall give a particular Account of it from a late Writer, who hath set forth the Life of that brave English Heroe. In the Year of our Lord 1580. about the end of February setting Sail from St. Christophers for Hispaniola, by the Way they met with a small Frigat bound for San Domingo, and the Men of her being Examin’d, one assur’d them that the Haven of it was a barr’d Haven, and the Shore well fortifi’d, so that there was no convenient Landing within ten English Miles of the City, whither this Man undertook to conduct them. January the first they Landed ten Miles from the City, and marching thither under the Command of the Lieutenant General, arriv’d about one a Clock in the Afternoon; when they came near, about a hundred and fifty Gentlemen well Mounted, presented themselves against them; but the small Shot playing upon them, they departed, and the English proceeded towards the two Gates of the City that lay towards the Sea, both which the Spaniards had Mann’d, and planted their Ordnance without the Gates, and some small Shot in an Ambush by the Way-side: The English being about twelve hundred Men, divided themselves; the Lieutenant-General leading the one half to one Gate, and Captain Powel the other half to the other Gate, vowing that with God’s assistance they would not rest till they met in the Market-place: No sooner had the Spaniards discharg’d their Ordnance, doing some little Execution, but the Lieutenant-General hasted, or rather ran upon them, to prevent their Charging again, and notwithstanding their Ambush, entred Pell Mell with them into the Gate, not staying till he came into the Market-place, unto whom shortly after came Captain Powel with his Companies. This Place they strengthned with Barricado’s, the City being too large to be guarded by so small and weary an Army. And after Mid-night they in the Castle, hearing some of the English busie about the Gate, quitted it, some being taken Prisoners, and others escaping by Boats. The next day the English enlarg’d their Quarters, and fortifi’d themselves, and held the Town for a Moneths space. During this time the General sent a Negro Boy with a Flag of Truce to the Spaniards, who by the Way was met by some Officers of the Galley which the English had taken, together with the City, who furiously thrust the poor Boy through the Body; who returning to the General, and having declar’d how barbarously they had us’d him, fell down and died in his Presence. The General being much mov’d herewith, commanded the Provost-Martial to take two Fryers, and to carry them to the same place with a sufficient Guard, and there to hang them; and withal he sent one of the Prisoners to inform the Spaniards why he did it, and to tell them, that till the Party who had thus murder’d his Messenger were deliver’d to him, there should no day pass wherein he would not hang two Prisoners, till all were consum’d. Hereupon the day following the Murtherer was brought, and an Offer made to deliver him to the General, who yet thought it more honorable to make them perform the Execution themselves in the sight of the English, which was done accordingly.

During their abode here, Commissioners oft pass’d between the Spaniards and them about the Ransom of the City, but not agreeing, the English spent every Morning till the heat of the Day in firing and destroying the Houses in the outward part of the City, two hundred Mariners being employ’d therein for divers days; yet were the Houses built so magnificently and strongly of Stone, that they could not consume one third part of the Town all that time; whereupon the General was contented to accept of twenty five thousand Ducats of 5s. 6d. apiece to spare the rest.

Here his Soldiers met with good Pillage, especially of rich Apparel, but Treasure they found none; for the Spaniards by their Cruelties had so destroy’d the Natives, who us’d to work in the Mines of Gold and Silver, that they were wholly given over; and in that Island they were forc’d to use Copper Money: yet they found store of Wine, Oyl, Vinegar, Wheat, Woollen and Linnen Cloth, some Silks, &c. which much reliev’d them: there was but little Plate found, but good store of Porcelane, or China Dishes; yet some they found, and very costly Houshold-stuff.

Venables his Expedition to San Domingo.

Venables his Expedition was in the Year 1654. when Cromwell having gain’d the supream Power under the Title of Protector, and having us’d so many Engines for the getting of Money to maintain his Greatness and usurp’d Authority, that he was almost brought to his last Shifts, bethought himself of this Project, (or, as some suppose, had it put into his Head by Cardinal Mazarine, the then great Minister of State in France, with whom he had intimate Correspondence) thinking thereby to kill two Birds with one Stone: for on the one side, he thought by this notable Exploit to advance his Fame abroad, and gain Credit and Applause with the People at home, by enlarging his Empire, and spreading the Renown of the English Nation, and so consequently to establish himself the more firmly in his new gotten Power; and at the same time by the great Riches he promis’d to himself from this Adventure, to recruit his Stock, which all his griping Exactions, especially from the King’s Party, could scarce supply for the keeping up of his Army, maintaining Intelligence, and other vast Expences: To this end he sets forth a considerable Fleet with extraordinary speed and secrecy, it not being known whither this Fleet was design’d till they were almost upon the very Place, that the Spaniard might not be forewarn’d to provide against them, onely in general terms it was given out, that the Design was both advantageous to the Nation, and would prove a great enrichment to all that went upon it; so that it is no great wonder, if within a short space a good competent Army was got together of such as having neither Estates nor Employments, willingly offer’d themselves, as Men that went from the fear of Iron Grates, to the hopes of Golden Ingots; and many of them were such as having been in the late King’s Army, and disdaining to take any Employment at home under that Government, were easily induc’d to List themselves in this Armada: nor was Oliver a little glad of this occasion of sending out of the Land, and employing upon a desperate Adventure those Men, who he had reason to suspect would, upon any opportunity offer’d, be the first Opposers of his usurp’d Power. This Army being sent to Portsmouth for Embarquation, and there making such Preparations as was convenient, which a Moneths time or thereabouts was thought would accomplish, a Messenger came from Desborough (who was there to set them going) to the General, that he should prepare to Embarque on Christmas-day; which at the first the General receiv’d with great impatience, alledging, That it was not possible so to do, and that he would not set Sail without his Arms and other Necessaries, which were not yet come from London: however, at his going to Desborough he was prevail’d upon to set Sail, with a promise that the Ships with the Arms should immediately follow him to the Barbado’s, where he was to stay till their arrival; so on Christmas-day they set Sail, and about the fourteenth of February arriv’d at Barbado’s with three thousand Men, and a Company of Reformado’s, which there were doubled, and then, and not till then, it was told them, That the reason of their so sudden going away, was because there was a Plot forming in England for restoring the King, and that they were not thought fit to be left there at the Head of their Regiments, to be tempted with the advantage of joyning with any such Party. At Barbado’s they staid till they had almost undone that Place by eating up their Provisions, the Planters there seldom preparing more than they have occasion to spend in their Houses, and for their Servants (having better and more profitable Employments upon their Hands) and the Soldiers not being content with such Provisions as their Servants would be well pleas’d with, so that they were in danger of starving the Island and themselves too: Thereupon a Council of War was call’d, and the necessity of leaving that Island declar’d, and Orders issu’d out to set Sail for Hispaniola, where they might make such Attempt as their Condition would allow, wanting Arms and other Necessaries; when they came within five or six Leagues of Hispaniola the Fleet lay by, and a Council of War was call’d by the Commissioners (for such they had who were never Soldiers) with some few Officers of the Army, where it was resolv’d to attempt San Domingo, and an Order made, That in case it be taken, no Soldier should offer to Plunder, but that satisfaction in lieu thereof should be given by the Commissioners; the Officers of the Army in vain opposing and protesting against it, which occasion’d the Soldiers to say, That the Commissioners should take the Town themselves, for they would not; Lots were there drawn by the several Colonels who should first Land, which fell upon the Black Regiment, who had no Arms but Half-pikes of eight Foot long, made of Cabbage-Tree in the Barbado’s; And Orders were then given out to the several Colonels to Land at the River Hind, within two Leagues of San Domingo; so they steer’d their Course thither, as was thought, by Night, but the next Morning found themselves twenty Leagues at least from the place of Rendezvouz, though one Regiment Landed there, who durst not attempt the Town for want of Orders, though doubtless they might have taken it, had they not staid in expectation of the General and the rest of the Fleet; but when they were thus cast Leeward of the Town, they must Land their Men, who no sooner went on Shore, but the Order against Plundering was read, and the Soldiers in a Mutiny to whom it was read, which made the rest forbear to read it, judging it no time now to disoblige them, who had in their Officers opinion too just a cause of discontent: However this was made known to the rest, and discours’d as they march’d, That they had not thought to be under a Committee here, but they would make them weary of their Employment ere they had done: And this indeed was enough, besides the faintness and unusual Heat of the Countrey, to disanimate Men of good Resolutions, especially the ordinary Soldiers, whose hopes of Plunder is the chiefest prop to their Courage, and expected Gain the spurr to their Valour. After they had Landed their Men, next Morning early they march’d towards San Domingo; but before Noon the Heat and Drought which they felt made them sensible of their first Errour and Inadvertency, in coming from England without their Necessaries; for through want of Bottles, which were left behind, and came not till three Moneths afterwards, the Men fell down dead in the High-ways, every one fainting and languishing, and crying out for Water: shortly after they met with a Field of Oranges, which was no unwelcome sight, with which they stor’d themselves; but ere they had march’d four or five Miles thought they had quench’d their present Thirst, and their Drought began to increase however, they march’d on, leaving some of their Men dead on the place, others fainting, were set upon the Troopers Horses till they came that Night to some Water, which gave them new life, and the Morrow early march’d again till they came within some Miles of the appointed Rendezvouz, where they heard of the other Regiment that Landed at the right place: And now having refresh’d themselves with Rest, Water, and Provision, they march’d to the taking of the Town; the General himself, with a small Party and a Guide, went towards the Town to find out some Water, which he knew the Soldiers would want, (not having Bottles to carry any) but as they were on their March, which was very leisurely by reason of the Heat, they heard a firing of Musquets, then making more speed in their March, supposing an Engagement, in the Highway, about a Mile from the Town, was found one of the General’s Secretaries, with others, dead; and not long after some came back to the General, and told him, That looking for Water with the Guide, an Ambuscade issu’d out, and had kill’d the Guide that should have shew’d them the place of Water, and some others; and although some which Commanded the foremost Regiments were very forward and willing to assault the Town, yet it was not thought fit so to do till the Army came up, by which time it was Night; and though they were then within half a Mile of the Town, yet the Soldiers were so impatient for Water, that they could not stay till the next Morning to assault the Town, but were forc’d to march back to the River Hind about eight Miles; (and this Relater did at that time drink his own Water) there they staid till they had again refresh’d themselves, and then prepar’d for their Return to attaque the Town; and notwithstanding the March it self in a hot Countrey was irksom enough, yet they were forc’d to make the Soldiers to draw the Ordnance and other Carriages for want of Harness and other Necessaries, which were left behind; however, they willingly underwent it by Turns: And now a Forlorn was drawn out, and other Orders given for a March, especially it being taken notice of, that the Enemies manner of Fight was and would be by Ambuscades, a File in every Company were order’d to stand till the other came up, and to face to the Right and Left to the Woods, which were all along as they went, for fear of a Surprize; and the Forlorn marching near an old Fort, call’d Jeronymo, which we had been possess’d of before, but thought not worth the keeping, and fearing they might meet with some small opposition there, began to fortifie themselves, and took a Dram of the Bottle, which as they were drinking, and others eating a bit, suddenly rush’d forth an Ambush of about a hundred and twenty Blacks, with a Spanish Commander in the Head of them, which so amaz’d and surpriz’d them, that some few onely Discharging, the rest immediately fled; the Blacks quickly falling in with their Lances, and doing such Execution as the time would allow them; for presently the Alarm being taken, and Supplies marching out for their relief, the Enemy, who had done more than they could possibly expect to have done, retreated into their Fort, which they had better fortifi’d than before, and had planted some small Drakes there upon it; the Execution was so short, that they had not time either to strip or pick a Pocket, lest they had paid too dear for it. After this Defeat a Council of War was call’d, and there it was agreed the next Morning early to fall on upon that little Fort, and so proceed to the taking of the Town; but very early, as they were in that expectation, Orders came from the General to the Army to march back to the River Hind, for what reason this Relator (though a considerable Person) never yet knew; where after they had staid some time, that Miscarriage was question’d at a Council of War, and one of the chief Officers of the Forlorn order’d to have his Sword broke over his Head, with other disgraceful Impositions, and two Colonels of the Army were order’d to draw up the Causes of this Miscarriage to send to England; which, because ’twas thought would too much reflect on them in Power that were to supply them, was by those Colonels judg’d inconvenient, and so ’twas never done. The number of Men lost by Stragling, Sickness, and this unhappy Engagement, amounted in the whole to about two hundred and thirty. In a short time after this, it was order’d to Ship the Men; which done, after some Debates amongst the Commissioners what was best to be done, Provisions nor Utensils yet coming fit for the Design intended, which was to possess some considerable Place in the Main, it was agreed, That they should steer their Course for the Island of Jamaica; which they did accordingly, and on the tenth day of May 1654. with little opposition possess’d it: where the same Soldiers have shew’d not onely such Courage and Resolution upon all occasions, (in many and frequent Encounters and Invasions made by the Spaniards, not onely with Soldiers of those Parts, but such as have been sent from Spain, Naples, Catalonia, and other Places) as might speak them English-men but such hath been their Patience and Sufferance, as none of this Nation in the memory of Man have ever been put to, the Effects whereof their King and Countrey, ’tis hop’d, will have occasion to remember, to their immortal Honor and Renown.

Hispaniola is surrounded with several other Isles, as 1. Eastward appears Saona, full of pleasant Woods and Pastures, with Cattel feeding on them: in former times it produc’d much Cazabi for the City Domingo; but since the Spaniards murder’d all the Inhabitants Anno 1502. it hath never been inhabited. 2. The Rocky Shelf St. Catalina. 3. Abaque. 4. Navaza. 5. Guanabo. 6. Tortuga, abounding in Hogs, and 7. Beata, famous for the excellent speckled Wood which grows there, and a swift River, which oftentimes detains the Ships there whole Moneths.

CHAP. XIV.
Porto Rico, and Monico.

Bounds and Extent of Porto Rico.

Another of those call’d The Isles of Barlovento, is Boriquen, anciently so nam’d, but now more generally Porto Rico, from St. Juan de Porto Rico, its chief Town, is an Island fifteen Leagues distant from Santa Crux, to the North-West, and about as many from Hispaniola to the South-East, but from the Continent or main Land of Paria (which seems to be the nearest) a hundred and thirty, or a hundred thirty six, as some reckon. It lieth almost in a quadrangular Form, being suppos’d to contain about thirty Leagues in length, and not less than twenty in breadth, in eighteen and nineteen Degrees of Northern Latitude.

The Island on the North, which is less fruitful than the South part, produces Gold, and is generally water’d with many Rivers. There is also Silver, Tin, Lead, Quicksilver, and Azure, us’d by Painters. The Rain generally falls there between May and August. A little before, or in the beginning of Harvest, the Hurricanes breaking forth from the Clouds, rage in such a manner, that it is impossible for any Ships to endure the Sea, and a Northern Blast generally doth great damage to the Plants here.

Sierra del Loquillo.

Ten Leagues towards the South-East beyond Porto Rico, appears Sierra del Loquillo, being a continu’d Ridge of Mountains which runs through the whole Island from East to West, extending both ways to the very Sea-shore.

Rivers.

Twenty three Rivers discharge their Waters also into the Ocean; amongst which the chiefest is Cairabon, particularly noted for ten Sugar-Mills which are erected upon its Banks.

Trees.

The Hills, Plains, and Valleys, are invested with variety of Trees peculiar to this place, as Tabunuco, which affords a medicinal Gum, good against Lameness, and green Wounds: it is also of great use to preserve a Ship’s Keel from the Worms.

Another Tree call’d Maga, is everlasting Wood, and bears a great Flower like a Rose.

The Leaves of the Higillo Pintado-Tree cures all manner of Bruises.

The same power is also in the little Tree Sancta Maria; as likewise in another by the Spaniards call’d Balsamo.

The Body of the Tree Zoyla is so thick, that fifteen Men holding Hands together, cannot encompass the same.

The speckled Wood, and Cassia Fistula grow also here in great abundance.

The poisonous Apple-Tree.

Here is likewise Apple-Trees, which grow by Rivers sides, or on the Sea-shore, whose Fruit is rank Poyson, and who-ever sleeps under the shadow of them, will certainly be Lame: The Fruit eaten generally causes Death; or if Nature be so strong in him that eats of it, to overcome the same, yet he is certain to lose his Hair.

As hurtful is the prickly Herb Quibey, which bears white Flowers like Violets.

The Tree Guiaba.

But this Island receives the greatest prejudice by the Tree Guaiaba, because it grows in most places, and over-runs Plains and Hills, so spoiling all the Grass, between which and the fore-mention’d Tree there is such an antipathy, that none will grow near it. The Tree bears a brown Apple full of Kernels, which are eaten by Beasts and Fowls, and from which falling on the Ground when ripe, grow up in new Trees, which makes the Countrey a meer Wilderness: The Body of it is smooth and of a pale colour, the Leaves hard, and glittering, and grow two and two over one another; the Flowers have also five Leaves, in the middle of which rises a Crown like that on a Peacock’s Head: The Fruit, which is cover’d with a soft Doun, and somewhat longer than the European Apple, when cut through, hath a pale red Pulp, full of eatable Kernels: before it is ripe, it is of a sharp taste, yet good boyl’d, but when ripe, of a most delicious and pleasant rellish; nevertheless too much of it causes a Lask: The Roots, which are red without, and white within, are juicy, sweet, and very long, the Leaves sallow and sowre of taste.

The Beast Javaris.

Amongst the strange Beasts the Javaris, Opassum, and Tatow are the most remarkable. The Javaris are taken for a sort of wild Hogs, and have short Ears and a Navel on their Backs, little Tails, some black, and some spotted white.

The Opassum.

The Opassum is as big as a Cat, hath a sharp Mouth, the upper Jaw-bone hanging over the lower, long, straight, and broad Ears, and a very long Tail, bald at the end, which winds in a Circle; on its Back black Hair sprinkled with grey Spots, and with its sharp Claws climbs up the Trees, where it feeds on Fruit, and sometimes preys on Fowls. Nature hath furnish’d this Beast with a strange Bag under its Belly, whereof the in-side hath a far softer Doun than the out-side, in which the young ones lie and suck, after which the Bag opening, they creep out upon the Ground. The Males have also a Bag, which serves onely to carry their Young in, for they and the Females carry them by turns.

The Tatow.

The Tatow, which is arm’d with sharp Scales, hath the Mouth of a Hog, and at each Foot five sharp Nails: when it is Hunted, or goes to sleep in the Night, it draws its Head, Legs and Tail under its scaly Coat of Mail, like a Tortoise, and in that manner lies secure against all manner of danger.

The Venison taken here is very delicate, but difficult to be got; for this Beast having a breathing-place in its Back, never tires with running, and when encompass’d by the Dogs, falls valiantly on those that are nearest to it, and often tears them in pieces.

Chief Towns and Cities.

The chief Towns in this Island, are 1. Porto Rico it self, commonly call’d St. John de Porto Rico (so term’d by Christopher Columbus, as being the first Land discover’d by him in the Year 1493. at that time when he could not perswade his Seamen, wearied out with continual hardship, from returning, if they discover’d not Land in two days) a strong and neat Town, built by the Command of Philip the Second, King of Spain: It was attempted by Sir Francis Drake in the Year 1595. without success, but a few years after taken by the Earl of Cumberland.

2. St. Germans, in the West part of the Island, three or four Leagues distant from the Sea.

3. Arrecibo, Westward from Porto Rico, where the most noted Haven is of those Parts, for all the others are full of Rocks and Sands.

The antient Inhabitants of this Island maintain’d continual Wars with the Cannibals (probably the Natives of the Islands so call’d) who us’d every year to come thither: those that were conquer’d, as well of the one side as of the other, were eaten by the Conquerors, so that in effect, both sides were but a different sort of Cannibals.

Columbus Landing here, found a great House surrounded with twelve others, but all of them empty and desolate.

This Island (which formerly is said to have been under the absolute Power of one sole King) the Spaniards not much regarded at first, having enough to do with Hispaniola, where they found more Gold than on Porto Rico.

The building of St. Germans.

Anno 1510. John Ponce de Leon obtain’d a Commission from the Court of Spain, to be chief Governor of this Island, and built Caparra, which Place was inhabited twelve years, notwithstanding it stood behind a scraggy Mountain, in a desart place far up in the Countrey; but their thirst after Gold, of which some Veins were discover’d there, made them dispence with all other inconveniences: yet at last beginning to be weary of this desolate and barren place of Settlement, they remov’d to Guanica, water’d by many Rivers, whose Sands had great quantities of Gold-dust. Not staying long there, they went four Leagues farther, and call’d their new Plantation Soto Major. Lastly, returning again, they setled themselves in the former Valley Guanica, and built the fore-mention’d Town St. Germans by the River Guaorabo, which makes an inconvenient Haven.

The Situation, Description and Fate of St. Juan de Porto Rico.

Juan de Porto Rico stands Eastward at the beginning of the North Coast, on a small Peninsula, joyn’d to the Island by an high Isthmus call’d Puente de Aguilar. Near the Mouth of the Haven lies on a rising Hill the Fort Morro Empinado, built triangular by John de Texila and Baptista Antonelli (who also planted there forty Guns), and surrounded with the Sea, which renders it a well fortifi’d place. The Governor Diego Mendez de Valdez had in it fifteen hundred Men and eighty Horses, when the fore-mention’d valiant Duke of Cumberland with a far less number fell upon him in the Year 1597. and not onely took the City Porto Rico, but several other Fortifications; and besides an invaluable mass of Treasure he carried away eighty Guns. Sometime before this Defeat the Spaniards under the Government of Christopher, Son to the Portuguese Duke of Camigna, were Invaded by the Cannibals, and all that were then upon the place utterly destroy’d, none of them escaping but the Bishop and his Servants, who betimes fled away with the Church Ornaments; so that the Islanders from that time were put out of doubt that the Spaniards were mortal, for they suppos’d them immortal when first they saw their great Ships, and heard the noise of their thundering Cannon.

The Casique Yaguara’s Experiment.

Hugh Linschot relates, That the Casique Yaguara threw a Spaniard into the Water, to try whether he would drown or not, and seeing him wholly depriv’d of Life, he concluded by consequence that the rest of them were mortal, and thereupon he set upon them when they were seeking for Gold, and kill’d above a hundred and fifty of them.

Peter Martyr relates farther, That these People, though very expert in Arms, yet were oftentimes beaten by the Cannibals, who at one time carried above five thousand People out of Porto Rico for their Winter Provisions.

The Avarice and Cruelty of the Spaniards.

Nor was their Condition better’d after the Spaniards conquer’d the Island, for those that could not furnish them with Gold, were certain of Death: Nor were their Cruelties in other places undivulg’d to this People before their Arrival; whereupon (as is related by Peter Ordonnez de Carellos) the Casique Hatvey being inform’d of the Spaniards Approach, took an Oath from his Subjects, That they should never discover where the Gold lay, though they should be put to death for it; For (said he) Gold is their God, for which they make so many cursed Blood-baths where-ever they come; therefore throw the Gold into some very deep Waters, for when the Spanish God is sunk, the Spaniards will lose their Courage, and not plague us so much for it.

Ceremonies of the old Natives.

Many were the Idolatrous Ceremonies of the old Natives of this Place, which would be too tedious to relate; but amongst the rest, they annually kept a great Feast, at which the Casiques summon’d all their Subjects to a Temple appointed for that purpose, where the Priests had prepar’d an Idol ready set forth in all its Pageantry; near which the Casique plac’d himself, when upon the beating of a Drum all the Commonalty came also into the Temple; the Men painted with divers Colours, having on their Heads Plumes of Feathers, about their Necks, Legs, and Arms, Strings of Sea-shells. The Married Women had a light Covering about their Middle, but the Maids went stark naked, all of them Dancing and Singing Songs in praise of the Idol; after which having saluted the Casique, they thrust little Sticks down their Throats, so to bring up all they had upon their Stomachs; which done, and sitting down with their Legs under them, they began to Sing anew, often bowing and shewing Reverence to the Casique; whilest some Women carried Baskets of Bread amongst those that Sang, and utter’d certain Prayers, which were answer’d by some of the Men; the Bread being bless’d by the Priests, they gave every one a piece, with which they return’d home very merry and jocund.

But the God of this Island, whoever he was, hath been a long time left without Worshippers; for those that were left by the Invading Cannibals, were cruelly massacred by the Spaniards, insomuch that they have been thereby necessitated to furnish themselves with Negro’s to work in their Mines and Sugar-Mills; and these also not able to endure such hard Entertainment, ran most of them away; for when a Negro did not bring Gold enough home at Night, his Master tying him naked to a Stake or Post, and beat him with Rods or Switches so long, till the Blood ran down his Back, then pour’d boyling Oyl into the Wounds, and then threw Pepper and Salt into them, and so let him lie, or else put him into a Pit, out of which his Head appear’d onely. But those that fled gathering together, sometimes met with the Spaniards, and paid them in their own Coin.

The Islands Mona and Monico.

Eastward of Porto Rico, and betwixt it and Hispaniola, there lieth a little, but fruitful Island call’d Mona; and Westward of that, another call’d Monico, or Monetta; which last the English, when time was, found so admirably stor’d with a sort of wild Fowl, that the huge Flights of them seem’d to darken the Air over their Heads, and upon their Landing found such plenty of their Eggs upon the Shore and Ground thereabouts, that they presently laded two of their Boats with them. But how peopled or possess’d, not so well known.

CHAP. XV.
Cuba.

The several Names of Cuba.

Westward, or rather to the North-West of Hispaniola, lieth Cuba, accounted Its Bounds. one of the four Isles of Barlovento, and by Columbus, upon his first Discovery, call’d Joanna, afterwards Fernandina, then Alpha and Omega, till at last the present Name prevail’d; it is parted from the other by a Frith, or narrow Channel, which runneth betwixt the Capes of St. Nicholas, belonging to Hispaniola, and that call’d Mayzi, belonging to Cuba: On the North it hath a Frie of little Islands call’d The Leucayæ Islands, of which more in their proper place, so many and so thick scatter’d, that they serve for no small Security and Defence of the Island on that side; besides, a part of the Peninsula of Florida, which Coasteth it likewise Northward; on the West it hath the Countrey of Jucatan, which is part of the Continent, but at a distance of forty or fifty Leagues; and on the South, Jamaica. It is reckon’d to be in length from Cape Mayzi, which looks towards Hispaniola to the Cape of St. Anthony, which is upon the Bay of Mexico, two hundred and thirty Leagues; but in breadth in some places not above fifteen or sixteen Leagues over; in the broadest place from Jardines to Lucanaca, not above forty, in others sixty five. But for fertility of Soil, contending with Hispaniola it self, and for temperature and healthiness of Air, much exceeding it; nor less rich formerly in good Mines both of Gold and Silver, and plentifully stor’d at present, not onely with Sugar-Canes of the best Growth, but likewise with abundance of Ginger-Roots, Cassia-Fistula, Mastick, Aloes, Cinamon, Long-Pepper of America, as they call it, and divers other sorts of Spices. The Pastures no less abounding with Cattel of all sorts, especially of European Breed; the Rivers and Coasts of the Sea with good Fish; no scarcity of Fowl, whether wild or tame; good Brass and Iron still found, with some Gold in the Rivers, especially those which fall into the Bay Xagua on the South side of the Island; the chiefest thereof are Arimao, La Luna, De Mares, and Cauto; the biggest of them falls Southward into the Sea; all of them breed store of Crocodiles, which have oftentimes seiz’d both upon Men and Beasts, and carrying them into the Water, devour’d them there.

Trees.

The Cedars breathe forth a most excellent sweet smell, and grow so large, that out of the single Trunks of some of them Boats are said to have been made, capable to hold forty, sometimes sixty Men.

There are also many other very odoriferous Trees, yielding a certain Rozen or Gum, no less precious than the Storax.

Birds.

But nothing grows here more plentifully than Vines, the Bodies or Stocks of which are as thick as a Man’s Middle, and bear excellent Grapes.

Besides Partridges, Turtle-Doves, and other Fowl, the Sea-shore breeds thousands of Cranes, which when young, are white, but when old, become of several Colours; they stand commonly with their Legs in salt Water, which they drink.

Manner of taking Parrots.

The Parrots which breed here us’d to be taken by the Natives after a strange manner: A Boy having a Bundle of Herbs about his Head, climbs up to the top of a Tree, holding a Parrot over his Head, which by griping he forces to make a noise, and thereby draws others to come flying about him; upon which, being expert in this Art, he throws a String with a Noose made fast to a Stick about them, and pulls them to him.

There are a sort of four-footed Serpents, by the Natives call’d Yguanas, of which they us’d to eat.

The Flesh of Tortoises or Turtles, was accounted a great Dainty amongst them, especially those of the biggest size, of which some have been known to weigh a hundred and thirty Pound: The Feet of them are said to cure the Leprosie and Scabs.

Amongst the peculiar Trees of this Countrey, are the Zagua and the Caninga.

The Cotton, which is of the natural Growth of this Place, is exceeding fine.

Here is also the Bird Flamingo, and another sort of Bird call’d Bambayas.

In former times Cuba was Govern’d by several Lords, each Commanding over his own Province.

Chief Provinces of Cuba.

The chiefest of these Provinces are Mayzi, Bayamo, Cueyba, Camguey, Macaca, Xagua, Habana, and Uhima; some of them are plain, others mountainous, and being more or less fruitful, were very populous, before the Spaniards came thither, but since their cruel Massacres, scarce any of the antient Natives are left: Nor are the Spaniards here at present very populous, considering the largeness of the Island.

In the Province of Camaguey is a Valley three Leagues in bigness, where Nature produces a great number of large Stones so exactly round, that no Man with a Compass can make a more exact Circle.

Though the Gold, which is digg’d out of the Mines, and found in Rivers, is none of the purest, yet the Copper which this Countrey affords is accounted excellent.

Serpents.

The Serpents here are about the bigness of a Hare, having Heads like Weezles; they prey on little Beasts call’d Guabiniquinazes, and have been accounted delicious and wholsom Meat.

Antient Customs of the Natives.

The antient Natives went formerly naked. The Men made it a Custom to forsake their Wives when they pleas’d; yet the Women were still oblig’d to be faithful to them, though from the very first day of their Marriage they were taught to Cuckold them, by a certain wicked Ceremony in use amongst them; for the Bridegroom lay not with his Bride the first Night, but suffer’d her to be enjoy’d by one of his Friends of equal Quality with himself, whether he were Lord, Merchant, Laboring-man, or what Estate soever.

The Spaniard at first beaten by the Natives.

This Island was reduc’d under the Spanish Government not without great effusion of Blood; for the Natives having had continual Wars with the Cannibals, as hath been said, were not ignorant in the Exercise of Arms. The first Spanish Commander sent against them was Valdivia, whom they slew with all his Men, and hew’d his Ship in pieces. Little better escap’d Fogeda, whose Men were all cut off, and he himself escaping very miraculously, died not long after of his Wounds in St. Domingo.

St. Jago built by Valasquez.

Within two years after, viz. Anno 1514. Diego Velasquez with better success set forth for Cuba, where the first thing he did was to build a City, which he call’d St. Jago, lying near a Southern Bay, full of Fish, and defended with several small Isles, behind which the Ships in the greatest Storm may Ride very secure; by reason whereof the new City increas’d so much, that in a short time it could shew two thousand Inhabitants, a brave Church, a Cloyster, and was made a Bishop’s See, but subordinate to that of St. Domingo.

The Copper Mountains.

St. Jago taken by the English.

Three or four Leagues from the City are those famous Mountains, by the Spaniards call’d Sierra de Cobre, or The Copper Mountains, from the abundance of that Metal which the Mines in them afforded, and do yet afford; but the City was afterwards almost left desolate, (divers Houses in the same standing empty) having in it scarce two hundred Inhabitants; which made it the easier to be taken by a hundred and sixty English-men, led by Captain Cliff, Anno 1601. who carried from thence a hundred thousand Pieces of Eight, and a Ships Lading of Hides and Sugar.

Baracoa.

2. Besides St. Jago, Valasquez built the Town Baracoa, on the Eastern Shore of Cuba, wash’d by the River Mares, which falls into the Ocean between two Mountains on one side, and a flat Point on the other, and is a most excellent Harbor: Not far from which grows the best Ebony Wood.

St. Salvador.

3. He also built the Town St. Salvador, one of the most healthful Promontories of all Cuba, near the River Bayamo, which produces round Stones, us’d there in stead of Bullets.

Trinidad.

4. He likewise built Trinidad, before which hardly accessible Harbor many a Ship hath been cast away: But this Fort was by a mighty Storm levell’d even with the Ground.

Puerto del Principe.

5. Near the Haven before the Town Puerto del Principe is a Fountain, out of which at certain times flows liquid Pitch.

Villa Sancti Spiritus.

6. The Town call’d Villa Sancti Spiritus, six Leagues from the Ocean, boasts fifty brave Houses, and is wash’d by the River Saaz.

Havana.

7. The chiefest City which the Spaniards possess in the West-Indies, and the present Seat of their Governor, is Christovall de Havana; which stood first on the South side of Cuba, but was afterwards built on the North, opposite to Florida: The Harbor before it is large and safe, for it is able to contain a thousand Ships, without the least endangering of one another, and yet the Entrance so narrow, between a Promontory and a square Fort, that two Ships cannot Sail in together: the shallowest part thereof hath six Fathom Water. On each side the Mouth of the Harbor is a Fort, the one call’d Mesa de Maria, which stands built on a Champain Ground; the other call’d Morro, which lies at the Foot of two Hills, on whose tops several Guns are planted, which Command the Town and Haven.

Betwixt these two Forts is a Tower cover’d, on the top whereof is a round Lantern, wherein stands continually a Watch-man, who puts forth as many Flags as he discovers Ships at Sea, to give notice thereof to the City, which is a Mile from thence.

Before Havana stands a third Castle, well stor’d with Guns, as likewise the rest are, in all to the number of two hundred and forty, and strongly Garrison’d; of which great care was taken by the General Jean de Texeda, and Baptista Antonelli, an Architect, sent thither by Philip the Second, King of Spain, to secure the Place from all foreign Assaults, because the Plate-Fleet, and other Ships that come out of the West-Indies, have their place of Rendezvouz here, and from hence set Sail altogether for Spain. The City stands along the Haven, and hath two Churches with spiry Steeples. The Houses are now built after the Spanish manner.

Havana several times Assaulted and taken.

But Havana was not so strongly fortifi’d in former times, for Anno 1536. it could not resist a mean French Pyrate, who losing the rest of his Fleet was driven hither by Storm, and conquering Havana, had burnt the same, consisting at that time of woodden Houses cover’d with Thatch, had not the Spaniards redeem’d them from the Fire for seven hundred Ducats; with which Money the French set Sail, when the day following three Ships arriv’d from New Spain before Havana, and having unladed their Goods, and preparing themselves for Battel, pursu’d the Pyrate; whom getting sight of, the Admiral, who Sail’d before, durst not venture to Engage him alone, but staid for the other two Ships: from which cowardly Action the French Pyrate taking Courage, fell on the Spanish Admiral, who without firing a Gun ran his Ship ashore, and deserted the same: the next Ship thereby discourag’d Tacking about, made away from the Enemy; on which the third also follow’d, insomuch that at last they were all three taken by the French; who encourag’d with this unexpected Victory, steer’d their Course a second time to Havana, where they got as much more Money from the Inhabitants as before. After this the Spaniards built all their Houses of Stone, and a Fort at the Mouth of the Harbor, yet nevertheless the City lay open on the Land side; of which the English Fleet, Cruising about in those Seas, being inform’d, Landed not far from Havana, and enter’d the City before Day-break: the Spaniards thus suddenly surpriz’d, fled into the Woods, whilest the English plunder’d and ransack’d the City without any resistance. But this was not the last Blow which Havana receiv’d, for during the Wars between the Emperor Charles the Fifth, and the French King Henry the Second, a Ship set Sail with ninety Soldiers from Diep to Cuba, where they made themselves Masters of St. Jago, and carried great Treasure away with them: Thus enrich’d, they set in the Night on Havana, but found their Expectations frustrated, for all the Houses were empty, the Spaniards (being so often Plunder’d) having remov’d all their Goods to their Countrey Houses, which lay scattering about the Island. Whilest the French were searching the Houses, two Spaniards came under pretence of agreeing with them, but their Design was chiefly to take an Account of their Enemies Forces. The French demanded six thousand Ducats of them: to which the two Spaniards reply’d, That all their Goods would not raise so much: then going to their Party, inform’d them of the number of the Enemies, and their Demands; whereupon Consulting, some judg’d it best to comply with a forc’d Necessity, and if they could not get any thing abated, to pay the demanded Sum: but most of them were of another opinion, alledging, That the number of the French was not equivalent to their Demands, and that it would not be for their Credit, to yield up their Estates so tamely, without trying their Title by the Sword: This being judg’d fittest, they march’d to Engage them with a hundred and fifty Men, which about Midnight fell on the French, and at the first Onset slew four of them; but upon the firing of the Gun they were all alarm’d, and after a small Skirmish, put the Spaniards to flight. The Conquerors enrag’d at this treacherous Plot of the Spaniards, set fire on Havana, in which at that time was a good quantity of Pitch and Tarr; with which the Gates, Windows, Roofs, and Pent-houses being all bedaub’d over, were in few hours all in a light Flame; after which the Churches in order for their firing, were also going to be over-laid with the same combustible Matter; at which a Spaniard boldly desir’d, that the Temples erected for Gods Service might be spar’d: to which he was answer’d, That People who keep not their Promise, nor had any Faith, had no need of Churches to profess their Faith in. The French not satisfi’d with burning, pull’d down the Walls, and utterly demolish’d the Fort.

The Haven Xagua.

The Haven Xagua also is not inferior to any, the Mouth thereof being a Boweshot wide, and within, ten Leagues: The Ships are securely shelter’d behind three Islands, and also the Mountains, which rise along the Shore.

The Success of Admiral Peter Hein.

Moreover, the Inlet Matanca is not onely eminent, by reason of the round Mountain Elan de Matancas, which rises from a low Ground; but chiefly for the Expeditions of Admiral Peter Peterson Hein, who being sent out by the West-India Company, to Cruse up and down before Havana with one and thirty Sail, was from thence by a strong Current driven down to Matanca; where he stood from the Shore, when ten Ships came just running amidst his Fleet, and were all taken but one: About Noon they discover’d nine Ships more, which Sailing along the Shore, got into the Inlet Matanca, where they ran aground; whither Hein following, came up to them the next Morning by Break-of-day, and after a small Resistance took them, being valu’d to be worth above a hundred and fifteen Tun of Gold, besides the Musk, Ambergreece, and Bezoar with which two other Ships were laden, and another rich Prize.

This large Island Cuba (as we have before observ’d) formerly divided into so many populous Territories, is now in a manner desolate; for according to the Spaniards Relation to the Admiral Henry Jacobson Lucifer, when he was before Havana, Cuba had upon it not above sixty thousand Persons in all, in Anno 1627. But who-ever Reads that which Bishop Bartholomeo de las Casas hath written in his Book, (Printed first in Sivill in the Spanish Tongue, and afterwards, with the King of Spain’s leave, in French at Antwerp) will easily find the reason, why Cuba and many other Indian Countreys lie so desolate; and how sensible the Indians were of the Spaniards usage, appears by this following Story, related by the said Bishop, of a Casique call’d Hathuey, who before the Spaniards approach’d his Countrey, Anno 1511. fled from Hispaniola to Cuba; where afterwards he was taken by the Spaniards, and condemn’d to be burnt alive with green Wood: whilest he was tying to a Stake, a Franciscan Monk Preach’d to him the Mysteries of the Christian Religion, of which he had never heard; and likewise that he should ascend up to Heaven if he dy’d in that Belief; but if not, burn perpetually in Hell: Whereupon Hathuey asking the Franciscan, If there were any Spaniards in Heaven? and being told there were, answer’d, I will rather converse amongst the Devils in Hell, than amongst the Spaniards, whose Cruelty is such, that none can be more miserable than where Spaniards are.

Before we conclude the Description of Cuba, it will be material to add some Passages of a Letter from Major Smith, Governor of the Isle of Providence, who was taken there in the Year 1665. which will give light to the knowledge of the present State, not onely of Cuba, but of some other parts of America, belonging to the Spaniards; which is as followeth:

Maj. Smith’s Letter concerning Cuba and other Parts.

Cuba is a very good Island, and in it is generally the best Land, for so large a Countrey, as I have seen in America, although I have travell’d the main Continent in several places, and have cross’d from the North Sea to the South Sea, as also the North side of Hispaniola, and most parts of Jamaica.

This great Island is easie to be conquer’d, and would make the best Plantation, besides the prejudice it would be to the Spaniard, and the great advantage to our Nation; for instance, Had we the Port and City of Havana, which might in all probability be reduc’d with two Regiments of good Soldiers from Jamaica, carrying with them two or three Sloops or Shallops for Landing Men, fitted with good Arms and other Necessaries for an Assault, presently after their Armado hath pass’d out of the Indies, which is once in two years, towards the latter part of the Summer. There is good Landing on the West side of the City, where it lies open; and you need fear no Ambuscado’s: but not on the East side on the Harbor, for there you will be gawl’d by the strong Castle of the Moare, until the City be secur’d; but when that is once taken, you may easily reduce that Castle also, there being no danger of their re-taking it, until the next Armado arrives there, which will be almost two years, against which time you will have Planters enough from other of our Islands, to Manure the Land, and assist the Soldiers in defence thereof: This once effected, would utterly ruine the Spaniards, for these Reasons: Our Ships lying both here and at Jamaica, would be at all times ready to gather up their stragling Fleet, which it is difficult to keep imbodied without the help of that Port of Havana, it being impossible for their great unruly Ships to turn up to Windward from the Bay of Mexico, or Puerto Bello, without separation; and on the other side, to pass the Gulf of Florida, is for them as impossible, where they always Rendezvouz, Victual, Water, and provide all things necessary for their Return into Spain; after all which they diligently wait for a convenient Season of Winds and Weather (being much observ’d from the Changes of the Moon) when to pass that dangerous Straight: for to say truly, the Spaniards are neither very fit for Sea nor Land-Service, excepting some Officers and Soldiers bred in Flanders for Land-Service, and a few Biscainers for Sea-Affairs. They are so sensible of their Weakness, and jealous of their Riches in those Parts, that it is very difficult for any ingenious Man to get his Liberty, being once taken, fearing he might give such Intelligence, as to be thereby the cause of their ruine, witness their blind-folding of all Strangers, when they pass their Cities and Castles; for they much dread an old Prophecy amongst them, viz. That within a short time the English will as freely walk the Streets of Havana, as the Spaniards now do; which indeed had been easily perform’d with a third part of the English Army sent to Jamaica, and a far greater advantage to the Nation: for I esteem that Port and Harbor of Havana in the West-Indies, equivalent (against that Nation) to Tangier in the Straights of Gibraltar; and if we were at once Masters of both, it would without doubt so straiten the Spaniards, as absolutely to admit us a free Trade into their Ports of America, where they impart our Commodities, and sell them for ten times more than they first cost in Spain, by reason of the great plenty of Silver: which Trade would not onely be of infinite advantage to us, but also prevent them of their future enslaving of our Nation in Chains as now they do; for being employ’d about their Fortifications, they are worse us’d, all things consider’d, than if they were taken by the Turks.

I have seen other parts of the West-Indies, where the Spaniards might be fleec’d of considerable quantities of Riches, as at Panama, where their Silver Bars lie pyl’d up in Heaps in the open Streets Day and Night without Guard for five or six Moneths together, waiting the arrival of the Armado; which when arriv’d in Puerto Bello, they Transport it thither with so slender a Guard, for so great a Treasure, as would be an easie Prey to a thousand resolv’d Men (although of extraordinary value for so small a Charge;) but here is no resting, nor long remaining, they being so numerous (as in all other places of the main Land) though of great Wealth, and easily gotten with a Catch and away: But to my purpose,

This Island of Cuba hath adjacent to it great Conveniences of Salt and Fishing; and in it are very great plenty of Horses, Neat, Sheep, and Hogs, both wild and tame, of a far larger and better breed than any other parts of America: It hath also many very rich Mines of Copper already open, and is the onely Place that supplies all the West-Indies with Metal for the infinite number of Ordnance they have in all their Ports and Castles, both in the North and South Seas; but whether it hath any Mines of Silver or Gold, I know not; but if there were any such, they would not adventure their opening and discovery, fearing the Invasion of that Island, whereunto is so easie access by Sea, and of so great import to their whole Interest in America: for which reason also they refuse to work any Mines in Florida, that are nigh the North Sea, (although they have there very many) but do rather employ themselves about others farther up in the Countrey, although with greater Labor and Cost, for conveyance of the Product by Land to Mexico. And lastly, (for its full praise) this Island hath many very good Ports and Harbors of great advantage to Ships, for safe passing the Gulf; and should the Spaniards keep three or four Frigats always plying between the Western end of Cuba and that of Havana, off and on, it were impossible for any Ships of ours that came from Jamaica to escape them; the Scales turn’d would be their Case to all America. Neither wants it great Sugar-works, which have Water-mills and Horse-mills, and very many large Cocoa Walks, the most and best Tobacco: and in short, it produceth all other Commodities, that any of our American Islands have knowledge of.

CHAP. XVI.
Jamaica.

Situation and Extent of Jamaica.

The Island of Jamaica lieth North from the Southern Continent of America, in the Sea call’d Mare del Nort; and South from the Isle of Cuba about twelve Leagues; and West from Hispaniola twenty, in eighteen Degrees of Northern Latitude; and beareth from Rio de Hacha North-West, a hundred and fifty Leagues; from Santa Martha North North-West, a hundred and thirty five; from Rio Grande North-West, a hundred and thirty; from Carthagena North, fourteen; from Porto Bello North-East and by North, a hundred and ninety; from the Bay of Darien, North and by East, a hundred and seventy; from the Bay of Mexico, a hundred and fifty. It is of Form something nearly resembling oval, being in length from East to West, about fifty four Leagues, or a hundred and seventy Miles; from North to South in the broadest and middlemost part, about three and twenty Leagues, or seventy Miles over, and so groweth narrower and narrower towards each Extream; in circumference about one hundred and fifty Leagues, or four hundred and fifty English Miles.

Nature of the Country.

This Island is well water’d with Springs and Rivers, and is all over, especially in the Western parts, full of high Hills and Mountains: It is also well Wooded; for the North and South parts chiefly abound with tall and large Woods: Nor are there wanting every where Savanas, or Pastures, which are thought to have been Fields of Indian Maiz, till the Spaniards arriving here, brought in Horses, Cows, Hogs, and Asinego’s to feed.

Temperature of the Air.

The Air in this Place is more temperate, and the Heat more tolerable, than in any of the rest of the Barloventi, by reason of the cool Breezes which constantly blow from the East, and the frequency of Showers of Rain, and refreshing Dews which fall in the Night.

This is also the onely Island of the Barloventi, which is not subject to violent Storms and Hurricanes; and the Diseases which are predominant here, are onely bred by Intemperance, as Surfets, Feavers, and Agues, or occasion’d by ill Diet or Slothfulness.

Commodities of the Island.

The Commodities of this Island are very many; and first for Vegetables, the Sugars are so good, that they now out-sell those of Barbado’s 5 s. per Cent.

Cocoa, of which there are many large Walks; and greater plenty by improvement may easily be produc’d.

Tobacco, so good, that the Merchants give Six pence a Pound for it, and buy it faster than the Planters can make it.

Indigo is producible in great abundance, if there were Hands sufficient employ’d about it.

The Cotton of this Place is accounted very firm and substantial, and preferr’d before any that grows in the neighboring Islands.

Of Tortoise-shell there is also good store, by reason that much of that sort of Tortoise is taken on this Coast.

Here are also great variety of Dye-woods, as Brasiletto, Fustwick, Red-wood, a kind of Log-wood, and several others, besides divers of those that are accounted the most curious and rich sorts of Woods, as Cedar, Mohogeney, Lignum-vitæ, Ebony, Granadilla, and others, which are frequently Exported.

Moreover, there are very probable testimonies, that there are Mines of Copper here, since both there have been those who affirm to have seen the Oar wrought out of one of them, and the Spaniards report the Bells that hang in the great Church, to have been Cast out of this Island Copper. As for Silver, the English are said to have been shew’d a Silver-Mine behind the Mountains, West of Cagway.

Ambergreece the Spaniards report to have been often found on this Coast.

Salt might be made here in great abundance, there being three good Salt-pans; and Salt-petre hath been found in many Parts.

Ginger is reported to grow better here than in most of the Caribbee Islands; and Cod-pepper very plentifully; and also a certain kind of Spice call’d Piemete, being in the form of East-India Pepper, of a very aromatical and curious taste, partaking as it were of divers species together: it grows wild in the Mountains, and is very highly valu’d amongst the Spaniards.

Of Drugs and medicinal Plants there is here a very great abundance, as Guaiacum, China-Root, Cassia-Fistula, Veuillard, Achiotes, Tamarinds, Contrayerva, Ciperas, Adiantum Nigrum, Aloes, Cucumis Agrestis, Sumach, Acacia, Misselto, with several others, both Drugs, Balsoms and Gums.

Cochinele is produc’d by a Plant that grows in this Countrey, but it is not made without much care and curiosity, and the English are not yet well experienc’d in the Husbanding thereof, besides that the Growth of the Plant is much obstructed by Easterly Winds.

Beasts.

There is here greater store of Cattel than in any of the rest of the English Plantations in America, as Horses, which by reason of the great number of them, are bought very cheap.

Cow’s, of a large size, and of which vast numbers are yearly kill’d.

Asinego’s and Mules, both wild and tame, being a very serviceable sort of Cattel in those Countreys.

Sheep, large and tall, and whose Flesh is counted exceeding good, but the Fleece worth little.

Goats in great abundance, being a sort of Cattel very peculiar to that Countrey.

But of all other Cattel, Hogs are here in the greatest plenty, both wild in the Mountains, and tame in the Plantations; and they are more in request for Food than any of the rest, their Flesh being counted both of a better rellish, and more easily digestible than the Hogs-flesh of our Parts.

Fish.

The Fish that is very plentifully caught in these Coasts is of infinite variety, and quite of another kind from what we have in this part of the World, the principal whereof is the Tortoise, which is taken in great abundance both on these Coasts, and in the Islands Camavas.

Birds.

The tame Fowl in this Place, are chiefly Hens, Turkies, and Ducks; but of wild Fowl infinite store, as of Guinee Hens, Flamingo’s, Teal, Ducks, Wigeon, Geese, Pigeons, Snipes, Plovers, Parrots, Turtles, Parachites, Machaw’s, with divers others.

Fruit-Trees and other Plants.

Choice and excellent sorts of Fruits are here in great abundance, as Cocao-Nuts, Mannes, Maumees, Supatas, Suppotillias, Avocatas, Cashuds, Prickle-Apples, Pickle-Pears, Sower-Sops, Custud-Apples, and many others.

For Timber-Trees, Platanes and Pines.

And for Garden-Herbs, Radish, Lettice, Parsley, Cucumbers, Melons, &c.

The antient Inhabitants us’d two sorts of Bread, the one made of stamp’d Roots, and the other of Corn, which is Reap’d thrice every year, and grows with such success, that one Pint sow’n yields two hundred.

They had a strange way to make their Cazari Cakes of the Root Juca, which keep good a year: They first press’d out the Juice with great Weights, which if drunk raw, occasions sudden Death; but boyl’d, is pallatable and good.

Potato’s are here in great abundance, and grow like Artichokes in a moist Soil, and shoot forth Leaves of a dark-green Colour, like Spinage; they spread upon the Earth by Stalks, and bear a Flower like a Bell, at the end of which grows the Seed: the Roots are generally White, but sometimes Red, Marble-colour’d, Yellow, and Violet; they are not onely pleasing to the Pallat, but accounted very wholsom when stew’d in a close cover’d Pot, with a little Water.

But much daintier are the Ananas, which grow on a Stalk of a Foot long, surrounded with sixteen large sharp Leaves, between which grows a Fruit like a Pine-Apple, but much bigger, with an uneven Rind, of a pale Green, and inclining to a Carnation on a yellow Ground; on the top shoots out a red Bunch of Leaves and Flowers; the innermost Pulp melts on the Tongue, and is of so delicious a taste, that it exceeds all other Dainties; the Seed produces Fruit once.

Of this Fruit there are several sorts, the chief whereof is accounted a special Remedy against a bad Stomach, Gravel, Poyson, and Melancholy.

The Drink made of Ananas is no way inferior to Malvasia Wine.

A sort of sensitive Plant.

Here you may observe a remarkable Secret of Nature in a certain ever-green Plant, which grows either on the Bodies of old Trees, on the Rocks, or in the Woods; the Stalk whereof surrounded with Leaves, full of dark red Spots, bears a sweet-smelling Violet-colour’d Flower, the Leaves whereof as soon as touch’d, close up together and die, and according as they are held in the Hand a shorter or longer time, this strange alteration continues.

Ginger.

Since the Spaniards planted Ginger on Jamaica, it hath grown there in great abundance; the Male Plant (for it is divided into Male and Female) hath generally bigger Leaves than the Female; the Stalks, which are without Knots, have more Leaves upwards than downwards, and spreads along the Earth, still take Root anew; when the Leaves wither, then the Ginger is commonly ripe, but it hath not that poinancy whilest green as when dry’d.

Cotton.

The Cotton of this Island (of which the Clothes and Hammocks that are made, are vended in most parts of the Western World) grows on a Tree of equal heighth with a Peach-Tree, with a straight Stem or Body, out of which shoot Boughs of an equal length, and at equal distance; between the Leaves, which are narrow and long, grow red Flowers, and from them, oval Cods, which when ripe, inclose the Cotton, and a Seed like Pepper.

Description of the Alligator.

Of hurtful Creatures here, besides the Manchonele, and a sort of Snakes call’d Guaana’s, wherein ’tis thought there is little or nothing of a poysonous quality; the most observable is the Alligator, with which many Rivers and Ponds abound; it is a very voracious Creature, but is seldom known to prey upon a Man; it moves swiftly and strongly forward, but turns slow; the biggest of them are about twenty Foot long, their Backs scaly and impenetrable, so that they are hardly kill’d but in the Belly or Eye; they have four Feet or Fins, with which they go or swim indifferently; are observ’d to make no kind of noise; their usual course for getting their Prey, is to lie on their Backs as dead, then with a sudden onset to surprize what-ever Fowl or Beast comes fearlesly near them; the best caution other Creatures have of them is from the strong smell that flows from their Bodies: to requite the harm done by them, they have something of vertue, for the Fat or Oyl of their Bodies hath been experienc’d to be an admirable Ointment for all kinds of Pains and Aches; they Lay Eggs no bigger than a Turkies by the Water side, still covering them with Sand, which heated by the Sun-beams, hatcheth the young ones, who naturally creep into the Water.

Muschilli and Merrywings.

In some parts of the Countrey there are also a sort of stinging Flies, call’d Muschilli and Merrywings, but the English Quarters are little infested by them.

Hugh Linschot writes, That the antient Natives of this Place were a subtile and sharp-witted People, skilful in Handicrafts, and expert in warlike Affairs, above all the Americans besides.

First Discovery of the Island.

The Island was discover’d by the Spaniards under the Conduct of Columbus, who first built there the Town of Mellilla; which disliking, he remov’d again to Oristana; and finding that an incommodious and unhealthy Situation, he remov’d again to another Plantation, where he built a very fair Town, first call’d Sevilla, afterwards St. Jago de la Vega, consisting of about seventeen hundred Houses, two Churches, two Chappels, and an Abbey, being the chief, if not the onely Seat of the Spaniards before the arrival of the English, for their Estanchas, or small Plantations, were committed wholly to the custody of their Slaves.

Diego, the Son of Christopher Colonus, (or, as he is vulgarly call’d, Columbus) was the first that was constituted Governor of this Island, and sent Juan de Squibello Commander, who upon their first arrival here committed such horrid Cruelties and Massacres, that (as the fore-mention’d Bartholomeo de las Casas writes) five thousand Inhabitants were in a short time reduc’d to less than three hundred, multitudes being put to death in a most inhumane and barbarous manner, some roasted alive, others torn in pieces by the Spanish Dogs, besides many other studied ways of Butchery, too dreadful to be read with patience; nor were they free from Civil War amongst themselves, which first began in this Island.

Attempts of the English upon his Island.

The first and onely Attempters upon this Island since the Spaniards made themselves Masters thereof, have been the English, who in the Year 1592. under the Conduct of Sir Anthony Shirley Landed upon it, & got clear possession thereof, none of the Spaniards that were then upon the Place daring to make the least resistance; but not thinking it worth the keeping, they soon deserted it, and made Sail back again for England: after which they remain’d unmolested for a long time, till in the Year 1654. a Fleet of English was set out for Hispaniola by Cromwell, under the Command of Colonel Venables, with a Design for the taking of St. Domingo; but meeting with ill success in the Enterprize, and being forc’d to quit that Island with loss of Men, and frustration of their hopes, they steer’d their Course for Jamaica, and on the tenth of May in the Year abovesaid, with little opposition possess’d themselves of it. Upon their approach to St. Jago the Inhabitants thereof deserted it, and betook them to the Mountains, gaining time by a pretence of Treaty, to secure their Women and Goods; and oftentimes making Incursions upon the stragling Parties of the English, slew and took many Prisoners by surprize: but being weary of this wild and irregular kind of living, they betake themselves at last to the Isle of Cuba, where many of them, the Grandees especially, were permitted by favour to continue, the rest being by the Vice-Roy commanded back, with promise of speedy and considerable Supplies; by that time this remnant of the Spaniards was near tir’d out with hardship and necessity, some being very much discourag’d and driven to utter despondence of Mind, others destroy’d out-right, part of the long promis’d and expected Supply arrives, the greatest part being to follow soon after; but finding the Islanders so few in number, and in so sickly and necessitous an Estate, they would not joyn with them, but maugre all the Governor’s Perswasions or Commands, retreat to the North part of the Island, and there fortifie at a place call’d Chireras, expecting every day fresh Recruits; which not coming time enough, and their Quarters being discover’d, they were set upon by the English, and most of them either slain or taken Prisoners: not many Moneths after the rest of the Spanish Forces Land, being in all about thirty Companies, with Ordnance and good store of Ammunition; who falling presently to make strong Fortifications at Rio Novo, are nevertheless in a short time utterly defeated by the English: Upon which, and several other ill Successes, despairing to re-gain the Island, they Ship off their Women and the richest of their Goods; and the Negro Slaves grown Masterless, by the general either slaughter or departure of their Patrons, shake off their Obedience to the Spaniards, and constitute a Governor of their own, a Black, yet submit themselves, and own Subjection to the English Government, the Spaniards from Cuba, both by their Perswasions and monethly Contributions, in vain endeavoring to reduce them; onely some few there were that stood out, whom the rest not onely made it their business to discover, but help’d the English to take them, insomuch that at last the Spanish General not having above fifty Men left him, was forc’d to seek for Peace, and offer’d Terms of Accommodation; which the English General would not be drawn to accept of, unless upon Condition that he should deliver up to Justice as many as were left of those that had barbarously murder’d any of our Men, either in time of Treaty, or after Quarter given.

The English in this Island are setled for above a hundred Miles along the Countrey from the Eastward.

Chief Towns.

Their chief Towns are 1. St. Jago, (built by the Spaniards, as afore mention’d) which lieth six Miles within the Land, North-West from the Harbor of Cagway. Here the English have built a small Fort.

2. Passage, a small Town, built also by the English six Miles from St. Jago, for the convenience of going to Cagway, consisting of about fifty Houses and a Fort, whence cross this Harbor, about three Leagues distant is the Town of 3. Cagway, seated on the Extream end of the Point, containing in it above six hundred Houses, all built by the English, besides the Governor’s Palace, and the Houses where the Stores for the Army are kept.

This is counted the most healthful Place in all the Island, and the very Scale of Trade, where all Merchants, Strangers, and Sailors reside.

Here, upon the utmost Angle of the Point towards the Sea, is a round Tower, built of Lime and Stone; about which is rais’d a strong and regular Fort, containing sixty pieces of Ordnance.

Port Royal.

This Town is now call’d Port Royal, and is thought to contain about sixteen thousand Inhabitants.

Landward.

A Mile from hence is another Fort, call’d Landward, which runs from the Harbor to the Sea, to defend the Town from any Attempt by Land.

Little Island.

Off the Mouth of the Harbor towards the Sea, lie divers small Islands, the most Western of which being within half a League of the Fort, and between which and the Fort every Ship that comes into the Harbor is necessitated to pass: It is call’d Little Island; where a Fort is likewise rais’d, to defend the Mouth of the Harbor, containing eight pieces of Ordnance.

Another Fortification is at Portmorant, which we shall make mention of amongst the Harbors.

Chief Ports and Harbors.

The chief Harbors of this Island, are 1. Port Anthony, on the North, a very safe Land-lock’d Harbor, onely the coming in is somewhat difficult, the Channel being narrow’d by a little Island that lies off the Mouth of the Port.

2. On the East of the Island is Portmorant, a very capacious Harbor, where Ships do conveniently Wood and Water, and Ride safe from all Winds.

3. On the South is Port Cagway, a Harbor wonderfully convenient, secure and capacious, being five Leagues over in some places, in others four, and at the narrowest, three; it is Land-lock’d by a Point of Land that runs twelve Miles South-West from the Main of the Island, having the great River that comes by Los Angelos, and St. Jago running into it, and divers Springs about it, where Ships do conveniently Wood and Water. Here is every where good Anchorage, the Road being so deep, that a Ship of a thousand Tun may lay his sides to the Shore of the Point, and load and unload with Planks afloat.

4. On the West is Point Megrill, a Port very convenient and secure; to Windward from which, a little North-West, is the Seat of the old Town of Mellilla, founded by Columbus, as afore mention’d.

The chief Plantations of this Island, are 1. Portmorant, above the Harbor before mention’d, and by the two Rivers that run into it. Here are good Plantations of Sugars, Cottons, Tobacco’s, &c.

2. Hence about ten Miles lieth Morant, where a thousand Acres of Land have been taken up for my Lord Willoughby, and a Company of Merchants.

3. Hence farther Leeward lieth Yallow, having good Plantations of Cotton, Tobacco, and other Provisions, excellent Savana’s, and some store of tame Cattel.

4. Thirty Miles hence, on the North side of Cagway is Ligonce, where are excellent Plantations of Sugar, Cotton, and Tobacco, very pleasant Savana’s and some store of wild Cattel.

5. Twenty Miles farther West, nine Miles from the Harbor of Cagway, is Los Angelos, having some Plantations of Sugar, Cacao, and Tobacco, all which were old Spanish Plantations, and are less considerable than those made by the English in other places.

6. Eight Miles from hence, North-West, is Guanaboa, where likewise were some Spanish Plantations, since improv’d by the English, who have very many excellent Plantations of Sugar, Cacao, &c.

7. Hence West South-West lieth Guatabacoa, a most pleasant rich and fertile part of the Countrey, abounding with Cattel, and excellent Savana’s. Here the Negro’s setled that revolted from the Spaniards, who are endeavouring to make some Plantations of Tobacco’s and Provisions, and with them are setled some few English, who have divers Walks of Cacao.

The several Governors of the English in Jamaica.

The several Governors of this Island since the taking of it by the English, are as followeth: General Robert Venables staid upon the Place about three Moneths after the taking of it, and at his coming away for England he left the chief Command to Major General Richard Fortescue, who liv’d Governor about three Moneths; after which Lieutenant General Edward Doyly was by the Army elected President; but upon his coming away soon after for England, Lieutenant General William Brain was sent over Governor in his room; who living in the Government about three quarters of a year, did as it were bequeathe it again to Doyly, for he was chosen by vertue of a Blank Commission, wherein Brain had inserted his Name whom he would have succeed, and remain’d Commander in Chief both by Land and Sea till His Majesty’s Restauration, and then by His Majesty’s Letters Patents was confirm’d in the Government, and so was the first that was Governor there for His Majesty: The next that succeeded was the Lord Windsor, upon whose coming away Sir Thomas Muddiford was sent Governor, and after him Sir Thomas Linch, who remains Governor at present.

CHAP. XVII.
The Islands call’d the Lucaies.

Situation and Description of the Lucaies.

Having done with the four Islands of Barlovento, as they are term’d, viz. Hispaniola, Cuba, Porto Rico, and Jamaica, we come next to the Lucaies, so call’d, as some think, from Lucaioneque, one of the biggest of them; they lie over against Florida, Westward from the Bermudas, South-West and North of Hispaniola, and the rest of the Barloventi; and because they are but small ones, and lie so near the Continent, Geographers sometimes describe them as a part, or appertaining to the Continent. The chiefest of these Islands are Lucaioneque afore-mention’d, Bahama, and Guanahani; Lucaioneque is accounted the biggest of them all, and lieth in twenty seven Degrees between Bahama and Guanahani. Bahama lies nearest to the Coast of Florida, and gives Name to the Straights so call’d, which run between the Cape of Florida and it, with such a violent Course and Torrent, that although it be above sixteen Miles broad, yet many times neither Wind nor Oars, can prevail against it; that though the Winds be prosperous, Ships cannot enter it; and if it be cross, they go with the Current; yet those Straights the Spanish Fleet must pass in their Return from the Havana towards Spain. Guanahani was the first piece of American Ground discover’d by Christopher Columbus, and therefore by him call’d San Salvador, or St. Saviour, because that thereby he was deliver’d from the mutinous rage of the Seamen, who threatned to throw him over-board, if they discover’d not Land in such a time. There are besides a number of small Isles scatter’d up and down, which are generally comprehended in the number of the Lucaies; one is Little Island, encompass’d with a company of Shelves call’d the Bimini, so that it is hardly accessible: there goes a Tradition, that it hath been inhabited by very beautiful Women, the fame of whom drew many to attempt to Land there and take up their Habitation; in which Attempt many were cast away: There is said to be a Fountain in the midst of it, of such a Vertue, that whosoever drank of the Waters of it, had their Youth renew’d. Also three Islands, or rather Rocks, call’d Los Martyres, lying to the South-East of Cape Florida, and cover’d for the most part with a whitish Sand and a few Bushes growing on them: they seem at a distance to bear a resemblance of Men, impal’d, or bound to Stakes, as the Martyrs in the primitive Times usually were, which occasion’d the Spaniards so to Name them; ’tis very dangerous to come too near them, but to have sight of them is of great use to Men at Sea; for by passing these Rocks, and leaving them on the South-East, they certainly know, that they are now entred the Straights of Bahama, that is, that they have left the Ocean, and are fall’n in amongst those many Islands, which do, as it were, Barracado and Block up the Eastern Coasts of America, towards Nombre de Dios and Terra Firma, as they call it, through which the Continent is sometimes dangerous, by reason of contrary Winds; and always such, that it requires the skill and care of an experienc’d Pilot to conduct the Ships well thither. The rest are Abacoa, twelve Leagues long; Yuma, twenty Leagues in length, and eight in breadth, between twenty four and twenty five Degrees; Yumeata, fifteen Leagues in length, between twenty three and twenty four Degrees; Jamana, seven Leagues every way; Yabague, ten Leagues likewise, and lying between twenty two and twenty three Degrees; Magaguana, twenty Leagues long, and ten broad; Quagua, ten Leagues every way, and lying between twenty and one and twenty Degrees; Caycos, five Leagues in length, and in the one and twentieth Degree; Mackre, in the twentieth Degree, encompass’d with Shelves; Abreo, environ’d also with Shelves, and fifteen Leagues long; also Guatao, Cigateo, Guanima, Jabaka, Triangulo, and several others.

The Lucaies left desolate by the Spaniards.

On these Islands are no Inhabitants; those that did live there were a harmless simple People, and therefore the easier taken and carried away by the Spaniards that have made them so desolate: Many of them seem of a good Mold, and the Latitude promiseth much fertility. The Air is certainly good and wholsom, and not so extream hot as other Parts of that heighth. There is scarce any Beast on them, save a Coney that hath a Tail like a Rat, but Pigeons and other Birds in great numbers.

There is the Gum Benjoin, of the best and worst sort; Guaiacum, Sasaparilla, and Sassafras; and on some of them Red-wood and Ambergreece.

Our English Sea-men are little acquainted with these Islands, though they Sail round them yearly.

English landing upon them.

In the time of the Rebellion one Captain Sail and others, obtain’d a Patent, making thither on the Coast of an Island, which was call’d Illutheria; his Ship was wrackt, but the People recover’d the Shore with a few Necessaries.

The Coasts of most of them are dangerous, and bad to make, and that Ship that shall be near or amongst them, must keep the Lead always going; but with a wary Pilot, and care in giving the Islands a fair Birth, they are easily recover’d.

The Spaniards know this Place well, and have a yearly Trade thither for the aforesaid Commodities, and amongst the Islands are Wracks of divers of their Ships.

CHAP. XVIII.
The Caribby Islands.

Situation and Names of the Caribbee Islands.

The Caribbee Islands, as they are generally call’d, are a Row or Ridge, as it were, of lesser Islands, which extend themselves almost in fashion of a Bowe, from the Coast of Paria as far as St. John de Porto Rico; they are otherwise call’d The-Caraibes, sometimes The Camercanes, and by some The Islands of Cannibals, or Man-eaters, (though this Appellation cannot in reality be more appropriated to these Islands, than to many other, either Islands, or Parts of the Continent of America;) lastly, whereas all the Islands between Florida and New Spain, and Southern America, are by some comprehended all under the Name of The Antilles; yet the Caribbees and the Antilles are most generally, and, we conceive, most properly accounted the same; and they are so call’d, either as lying like a Bar before the greater Islands, or Quasi Ant-Isles, i. e. Opposites Isles; they lie all under the Torrid Zone, between the eleventh and nineteenth Degrees of Northern Latitude, and are twenty eight in number; but before we come to treat of each of them in particular, we shall take notice of the most observable of those things which are common to them all in general.

Temperature of the Air.

The Air of all these Islands is of a good temperature and healthy, and the Heat not so excessive in them at any time of the year, as might be conjectur’d from their Situation under the Torrid Zone, by reason of a gentle East Wind, which rising in the Morning, continues most commonly till towards the Evening, allaying the scorching heat of the Sun, and refreshing the Air; but the Nights are commonly very cold; and it is observable, that by how much the hotter any Day hath been, so much the colder the Night following happens to be; whereof this reason is given, That the Vapors rais’d in the Day-time by the Sun, and falling down condens’d at Night, do very much cool the Air; but it is never so cold as to Freeze.

For half a year together Day and Night are equal in these Parts, and the rest of the Year the Day fourteen hours long, and the Night ten.

From April to December there commonly fall here great Rains, and all that Season is accounted Winter, and the Drought and Heat of the other Moneths is taken for Summer; but the Woods of these Parts looking ever green, make as it were continual Summer.

Nature of the Soil.

The Soil is generally as fertile as in most places of Europe, and each Island furnish’d with fair Rivers, Brooks, Lakes, Springs, Wells, and other Sources of fresh Water, besides in many places Mineral Waters, which are us’d with good success in the cure of several Diseases; also out of some Mountains store of Brimstone is digg’d, and it is conjectur’d that there are not wanting Mines of Gold and Silver, if they were well look’d after; and there hath been often found Crystal upon the Sands by Rivers sides.

Vines growing naturally in the Caribbees.

The Vine, though wild, and naturally growing in the Woods, yet yields a very large fair Grape; and those which are cultivated in their Gardens or Vineyards, bear excellent Grapes twice a year, but very little Wine is made of them, in regard they find it will keep but very few days.

Wheat not apt to grow there.

Wheat in the Caribbees grows up no farther than the Blade, and the reason is judg’d to be, because through the rankness of the Soil, and for want of Winter, this Grain springs up fast, and hath not substance enough left in the Root to supply it up to maturity; but no doubt but Barley, Rye, and those other Grains, to the ripening of which more Heat is requir’d, would thrive there very well.

Besides Lemmon-Trees, Orange-Trees, Citrons, and Pomegranates, and other Fruit-Trees growing in Europe, there are very many sorts of Trees, Herbs, Pulse, and other Plants, of a different kind from those amongst us, and peculiar for the most part to these Islands.

Fruit-Trees.

Of Fruit-Trees, the most observable are the Goyavier, somewhat resembling the Laurel, onely having a softer Leaf, and of a brighter Green; its Fruit about the bigness of a Pearmain, but full of little Kernels like a Pomegranate.

The Papayer, which is of two kinds, one generally growing in all the Islands, the other proper to Santa Crux; the first hath a Leaf not much unlike that of the Fig-Tree, and the other bears a Fruit about the bigness of a Melon, which by the Portuguese is call’d Mamao, from its resemblance of a Womans Breast: the Tree is hollow and spungy within, and grows up sometimes to the heighth of twenty Foot.

The Monick, call’d by the Islanders Corsot, from the Name of an Island from whence the Seeds were first brought by the Dutch, and bearing a Fruit like a small Cucumber not perfectly ripe.

The Junipa, or Jenipa, by the Portuguese call’d Jenipapo; and by the Brasilians, Jenipaba; having Leaves like those of the Walnut-Tree, Flowers like the Narcissus, and a Fruit like a bak’d Apple, which when it falls from the Tree makes a noise like the Report of a Gun discharg’d, which is said to proceed from the bursting forth of the Seed out of the thin Skin enclosing it, and breaking with a violence; the Juice of it Dyes of a Violet-colour, and the Swine and Birds that feed upon it, are said to have their Flesh and Fat of the same colour.

A sort of Vine commonly call’d The Raisin-Tree and by the Caribbeeans, Ouliem; whose Fruit being like a large Violet-colour’d Grape, hath in stead of the several small Grain-stones which are inclos’d in the Husks of common Grapes, one hard Stone, like that of a Plumb.

The Acajou, bearing for Fruit a kind of Chesnut, in form of a Hares Kidney, which serves for a Crest to a very fair Apple that by degrees grows under it, of which the Islanders make a Drink, very much in esteem amongst them, being of an excellent taste.

The Icaco, a kind of small Plumb-Tree, so much coveted, and held for a Delicacy by some People that live near the Gulf of Hondures, that they are from thence call’d Icacos.

The Monbain, which Fruit being a kind of yellowish Plumb, is chiefly made use of to mix in the Drinks of Ouicon and Maby, to make them taste the better.

The Courbury is by some reckon’d to be but a species of the Monbain, onely more full of Leaves, and growing higher and bigger; but the Fruit of the Courbury is sufficiently different from that of the Monbain.

The Indian Fig-Tree, differing in Leaf from the common Fig-Tree, but whose Fruit both in figure and taste is not much unlike the Fig growing in these Parts: This Tree is commonly of such a vast Bulk, that the Branches of some of them have been seen to afford shelter to two hundred Men.

A kind of Service-Tree, differing from ours, by its exceeding heighth, fair Leaves, and pleasant Fruit.

The Prickly or Thorny Palm, so call’d from its being arm’d all over with Prickles, both Trunk and Leaves; by incision into its Branches a sort of Wine is made, and it is conjectur’d to be the same Tree which the Brasilians call Ayry.

The Franc-Palm, an exceeding high and streight Tree, bearing on the top of its Trunk a whitish marrowy substance, by the French call’d Choude Palmiste, or Palm-Cabbage; for being boyl’d with the thin Leaves that incircle it, and well season’d, it is reckon’d amongst the Delicacies of the Caribbees.

Latanier, another kind of Palm; and Cocoa, which is also reckon’d amongst the several sorts of Palms; this last is a Fruit-Tree famous all over America, and hath been at large describ’d elsewhere.

There are also many other Trees fit for Dying, Joyners Work, and Building, (besides the Acajou before mention’d, of the single Trunks whereof are made those long Shallops call’d Pyrages, which are able to carry fifty Men) as

The Acomas, of the same bulk and heighth with the Acajon, and equally esteem’d by Joyners and Carpenters, and of the Fruit whereof the Woodquists grow fat at a certain time of the year.

The Rose-wood, to be rank’d amongst the chiefest of those Trees that are made use of by Work-men.

Indian Wood, a very precious and useful Tree for several sorts of Materials, and of a very fine scent.

The Iron-Wood, so call’d from its hardness, weight and solidity, above all that have hitherto been spoken of, and beyond either Cypress or Cedar for incorruptibility.

Brasile-Wood, so call’d as growing most plentifully in Brasile.

Yellow-Wood, denominated from its Colour, and much esteem’d for its usefulness in Dying green Ebony, easily taking the lustre of the true Ebony, and being very useful for the making of Cabinets and other curious Pieces of Work; It also Dyes of a very fair Grass-green.

The Roncon, by the Brasilians call’d Urnex, in the Husks, succeeding the Flowers whereof, which grow in little Bushes at the end of the Branches, is enclos’d a most rich Vermilion Dye, of a very soft and viscous Matter.

Here are also many other Trees, either useful in Medicine, or other ways advantageous, as the Cassia-Tree, of the bigness and figure of a Peach-Tree; the long Pipes or Cods whereof, containing the Medicinal Fruit, are well known amongst us by the Name of Cassia-Fistula, and to be had at every Apothecaries.

Medicinal Nuts, each Nut containing three or four Stones in so many Cells, every one of which is inclos’d within a thin white Pellicle, pleasant enough to the taste, and out of which is extracted an Oyl, us’d by the Portuguese in several both Culinarie and Physical occasions.

The Cinamon-Tree, so noted for its aromatick Bark; also Sandal-Wood, Guaiacum, and Sassafras.

Cotton-Tree and Soap-Tree, whose Uses the very Names imply, and which Trees have been touch’d upon elsewhere.

The arch’d Indian Fig-Tree, the Bodies of which Trees have been antiently the sculking Holes and Retreats of the Inhabitants from their Enemies; the Bark is useful for Tanners.

The Gourd-Tree, of the bigness and heighth of a great Apple-Tree, and of which are made most of the Houshold Vessels and Utensils, which are in common use at present amongst the Inhabitants.

The Mahot-Tree, of the Bark of which are made Laces and Points.

The Manyoc, or Mandioque, of whose Root the Cassava Bread is made, and which growing in several places of America, hath been already taken notice of; as likewise the Banana-Tree, and that call’d The Apple-Tree of Paradice, otherwise Adam’s Fig-Tree, the Fruit being reported to be of a very delicious taste.

Other Trees not known in Europe, are the Maposu, divers kinds of Thorny Wood, the Milky Tree, being of a venomous quality, the Mancenilier, and that whose Root beaten to Powder, and thrown into Rivers, intoxicates the Fish, with several others of less note.

Innumerable sorts of Shrubs might here in like manner be reckon’d up, but the chiefest are, That remarkable Plant, anciently known by the Name of Ricinus, and commended for its Vertues by Galen and Dioscorides.

Coral-Wood, so call’d from its little Seeds, which being as red as any Coral, are us’d for Bracelets.

The Jasmin, bearing a Flower of an admirable sweet scent.

The Candle-Wood, so call’d from its combustibleness, by reason of an aromatick Gum which is within.

The Herbs, Flowers, Roots, and Pulse which grow here, are some of them common in all parts of Europe, as Cabbages, Onions, Chibols, Melons, all sorts of Millets, Cucumbers, Citruls, Parsnips, &c.

Others, if not peculiar to this Island, yet growing chiefly there, and in some few parts of America besides, as the Raquettes, so call’d from the resemblance its Leaves have with a Racket, a thorny-spreading Bush, whose Fruit being of a Vermilion colour, makes the Urine of those that eat of it as red as Blood. Some liken this Plant to the Tunas, already describ’d, which yields that rich Scarlet Dye call’d Cochinele.

The Torch, so call’d by the European Inhabitants; by the Native Islanders, Akoulerou; a great Thistle, or thorny Bush, putting forth from the middle of it long streight Stalks like Torches, and bearing Fruit like a great Fig, not unpleasing to the taste.

The Lienes, creeping upon the Earth, and spreading up and down like Ropes, and bearing brown Husks of a Foot long, wherein are enclos’d a Fruit call’d Sea-Chestnuts, of which are made Boxes to keep Snush, Tobacco, or the like.

A sort of Sempervivum, which runs twisting upon Rocks, Trunks of old Trees, like Misseltoe, and sometimes on the Ground.

A sort of sensitive Plant, call’d by the Inhabitants Haestiel, or The Living Herb; of which kind of Plant something hath been already touch’d upon, and which being transplanted, is kept in several Gardens of the Curiosi as a Rarity.

The Sweet-Rush, whose small Root dry’d, and reduc’d to Powder, helps Women in Travail.

The Balisier, whose Leaf apply’d, mollifies and cools inflammations of Wounds.

The Dart-Herb, whose Root bruis’d and apply’d, draws away the Venom of empoyson’d Darts; besides Scolopendria, a sort of Aloes, several kinds of Maidenhair, and other medicinal Herbs.

The Granadilla, or Passion-Flower, growing in several other parts of America, and describ’d elsewhere.

There is also a sort of Pease in some of these Islands, differing from ours, and call’d The Pease of Angola, as first brought from thence. Likewise a sort of Beans call’d The Seven-years Beans, by reason the same Stalk bears seven years one after another.

The Herb call’d The Musk-Herb, from the dusky colour of its Flower, and the sweet scent of the Seed, grows also in these Parts very frequent.

The Pyman, or American Pepper, is the same with that before describ’d under the Name of Axi.

Their Potatoe is a Root not unlike the Topinambous, or Jerusalem-Artichokes, otherwise call’d Saligots, growing plentifully in our Gardens, but more wholsome, and of a better taste.

The Anana’s, or Pine-Apple, accounted a most delicious Fruit, of an admirable sweet scent, and very pleasant to behold, grow not onely plentifully in these Islands, but in most places of America; besides the Sugar-Canes here, and in many other places, but not so generally.

The Plant from which is got the Dying Material call’d Indico, is very different from that which grows in Madagascar, which bears small odoriferous Flowers, of a white and purple Colour mix’d together.

Of these Trees, Herbs, and other Plants, which are produc’d in these Caribbee Islands, some are more peculiarly of the Growth of one Island, some of another; so that we shall have occasion to speak more largely of some of them, when we come to speak of each Island in particular.

The four-footed Beasts found in these Islands, are chiefly the Opassum, the Javaris, the Tatan, the Agouty, and the Musk-Rat, which being all of them no less known in other Parts of the New World, have been already taken notice of, and of which we may have also occasion to treat more at large in the particular Islands, we shall therefore onely name the other Animals, whether Birds, Reptiles, Insects, or Fishes, as partly having been heretofore treated of, and partly to be describ’d hereafter.

The Birds are, the Fregates, Fauves, Craw-fowl, or Grandgawsiers, Flammans, Swallows of America, Arras, Canides, Parrots, Parroquito’s, Tremblo’s, Sparrows of America, Eagles of Orinoca, Manstenys, Colibrys, besides what are common amongst us, as Herons, Coots, or Moor-hens, Black-birds, Feldivars, Thrushes, Turtles, Woodquists, Pintado’s, &c.

Reptiles.

The Reptiles are, Anotis, Zoquets, and Maboujats (of which farther mention will occur in the Isle of St. Christopher) Globe-mouches, nam’d by the Caribbeeans, Oulleouma, Scorpions, and several sorts of Lizards, call’d by the Caribbeeans, Ouamayaca; by the Brasilians, Senembi; and by other Indians, Jaquanas.

Insects.

The Insects are, besides these common with us, as Glow-worms, Palmer-worms, Spiders, Bees, &c. the Cucuyos, mention’d in Hispaniola, and the Flying Tyger.

Fishes.

The Fishes are, Sea-Parrots, the Dorada, by some call’d The Sea-Bream, by others, The Amber-fish; the Bonite, the Needle-fish, the Epadon, or Sword-fish, the Marsovin, the Requiem, the Remora, the Lamantin, the Becune, the Sea-Urchin, the Sea-Woodcock, besides Whales, and a certan Fish call’d, for its hideous shape, The Sea-Devil, and lastly, the Sea-Unicorn, with a particular Description of which we shall conclude, as having it from Monsieur du Montel, who was an Eye-witness thereof.

Description of the Sea-Unicorn.

“This Unicorn (saith he) was pursuing a Carangue, or some other lesser Fish, with such earnestness and impetuosity, that not considering that it needed a greater depth of Water than the other, it stuck with half the Body dry on a Sand-bank, whence it could not recover the deeper Waters ere it was destroy’d by the Inhabitants: It was about eighteen Foot in length, being at the largest part of its Body about the bigness of a Barrel: It had six great Fins like the ends of Galley-Oars, whereof two were plac’d near the Gills, and the other four on the sides of the Belly at equal distances; they were of a Vermilion red colour: All the upper part of the Body was cover’d with great Scales, about the bigness of a Crown-Piece, which were of a blue colour, intermix’d with several Spangles of Silver; near the Neck the Scales were closer, and of a dark colour, seeming as it were a Collar; the Scales under the Belly were yellow, the Tail forked, the Head somewhat bigger than that of a Horse, and near the same figure: It was cover’d with a hard and dark-colour’d Skin; and as the Land-Unicorn hath one Horn in his Fore-head, so this Sea-Unicorn had a very fair one issuing out of the fore-part of his Head, about nine Foot and a half in length; it was as streight as could be, and from the place whence it came out it grew smaller and smaller to the very Point, which was so sharp, that being thrust hard, it would enter into Wood or Stone, or some more solid Substance; it was at the place where it came out of the Head, about sixteen Inches about, and from thence to two thirds of the length it was like a Screw, or, to say better, made waving like a wreath’d Pillar, save that the Channels grew smaller and smaller, till they gently ended in a Point, which was two Inches beyond the fourth Foot: All the lower part had over it an Ash-colour’d Skin, which was all over cover’d with a small soft Hair, short as Plush, and of the colour of a wither’d Leaf, but under that it was as white as Ivory: As to the other part, which seem’d naked, it was naturally polish’d, of a shining Black, mark’d with certain small white and yellow Strokes, and of such solidity, that a sharp File could hardly get a little small Powder from it: It had no Ears standing up, but two spacious Gills, as the other Fishes; the Eyes were about the bigness of a Hens Egg; the Ball, which was of a Skye-colour Enamell’d with Yellow, was encompass’d with a certain Vermilion, which had beyond it another as clear as Crystal: The Mouth was wide enough, and furnish’d with several Teeth, whereof those before were extreamly sharp, and those towards the Throat in both Jaws were broad, and a little knobbed: The Tongue was of a length and thickness proportionable, and cover’d with a rough Skin of a Vermilion colour. What was further remarkable, is, that this Fish had upon the Head a kind of Crown, rising above the Skin about two Inches, and made oval-wise, the Extremities whereof ended in a Point. Above three hundred Persons of that Island did eat of the Meat of it, and that plentifully, and thought it extreamly delicate; It was interlarded with Fat, and being boyl’d it came up in flakes like fresh Cod, but it had a much more excellent taste.

“Those who had seen this rare Fish alive, and had with great Levers broken the Back of it, affirm’d, That he had made prodigious Attempts to thrust them with his Horn, which he turn’d with an inexpressible dexterity and nimbleness, and that if he had had as much Water under him as would have born him up, he would have been too hard for them all. When the Entrails were taken out, it was found that he liv’d by Prey; for there were within him the Scales of several kinds of Fish.

“What could be preserv’d of this miraculous Animal, especially the Head, and the precious Horn fastned in it, hung up near two years at the Guard-house of the Island, till Monsieur Le Vasseur, the Governor of it, presented one Monsieur Des Trancarts (a Gentleman of Xaintonge, who had given him a Visit) with the Horn. Not long after, coming over in the same Ship with the Gentleman, who had that precious Rarity put up in a long Chest, our Ship was cast away near the Island of Payala, one of the Assores, and all the Goods were lost, but nothing so much regretted as the loss of that Chest.”

The Natives how call’d.

The Natives call themselves Cubao-bonon, that is, Inhabitants of the Islands, and Caribbeeans; which last Denomination was not onely receiv’d amongst the American Isles, but also on the Main Continent of the Northern and Southern America, long before the Spaniards coming thither.

Their Original.

The Cofachites come to Terms of Agreement with the Apalachites.

Concerning the original of these People, there are several Opinions; for those who make them to be Extracted from the Jews, have no other testimony, but that they abstain from Swines-flesh: Those that take them for a People fled from the great Islands, Hispaniola, Jamaica, Cuba, and Porto Rico, to save themselves from the Spaniards Cruelty, dispute against a known Truth; for who knows not, that the Indians who escap’d the Spanish Slaughter, have not the least resemblance either in Language or Customs with the Cannibals? nay more, they are mortal Enemies to them; besides that, the Cannibals at that time when Columbus first arriv’d, possess’d those Places which they now inhabit. The Cannibals seem ignorant themselves in this Point: for they affirm their Extraction to be from Guyana, where the Calibites speak the same Language, and also observe the same Customs and Religion: The occasion of their removal they ascribe to the King of the Arovages, who made all the adjacent People about his Court, Slaves to him; which to prevent, they first went to Tabago, where being strengthned by new Comers, they resolv’d to take revenge on him; and Engaging with him in a Field-Battel, utterly defeated him, and spar’d none of his Party alive, except the Women; whence it proceeds, that the Arovage Women have the same Customs and Language with the Caribbeans. But Bristock, an English Knight, by long Conversation experienc’d in the several American Tongues, saith, That the Caribbeeans have their Original from the Apalachites in Florida, who being a valiant People, destroy’d many of the Natives that inhabited Mexico, that so they might Settle themselves there; to which purpose they built a City like that of Apalache. The Cofachites inhabiting Northerly, and spread over a barren and Rocky Countrey, made use of this opportunity to conquer their deserted Habitation: for on a set-time they set fire to all the Villages, and spoyl’d all things which they could not carry away with them, that not the least hopes of returning might be left them; therefore they must either Conquer or Die: which resolv’d upon, they fell unawares on the Apalachites, whose King had nevertheless so much time, that he Guarded the usual Paths which directed to the inhabited Villages: But the Apalachites leaving the common Roads, climb’d over almost inaccessible Mountains, and so got into the heart of the Countrey, which exceedingly amaz’d Paracousis (for so that King was call’d) who lay Encamp’d at the Foot of a Mountain, whether the Van of the Apalachites were marching: whereupon he sending his Army to meet them, they began a most fierce Combat; when at last both Parties wanting Arrows, they fell upon one another with Clubs till the Night parted them; and neither could boast of the Victory. At last this War was turn’d into Peace, and the Articles of Agreement were these, viz.

That the Cofachites should for ever possess the Province Amana, and become one People with the Apalachites, and acknowledge the King of Apalache for their Chief Governor.

They fall off.

Are brought to worship the Sun.

After which the Cofachites were call’d Caribbeeans, which signifies Accidental Subjects: But these two sorts of People did not long agree; for the Caribbeeans sleighted the Customs of the Apalachites in the Countrey Bemarin, and at the same time threw off their Obedience to the King, chose one Ragazin for their Governor, subdu’d the neighboring Province Matika, and at last defi’d the Apalachites; who inferior to them in Strength, and making use of subtilty, suppos’d it the best way to make a Difference amongst the Caribbeeans themselves; to which the Priests freely proffer’d their Assistance, and their Design prov’d also successful; for the Caribbeeans regarding no Religion (onely dreading the angry Deity Mabouya) the Apalachite Priests call’d Jaova’s, took great pains to perswade their Neighbors to the worshipping of the Sun; which so prevail’d, that a considerable number of them ascending the Mountain Olaimi, fell down and shew’d Reverence to that celestial Luminary; which Opportunity Paracousis taking notice of, caus’d the Jaova’s to publish amongst the Caribbeeans, That in the beginning of the Maairims, or March, a great Feast should be held in Reverence to the Sun on the usual place, where the King would Entertain, and give Presents to all the Worshippers thereof.

The Sun generally worshipp’d by the antient Heathens.

How great a Religion this Sun-worship was antiently amongst the Gentiles, appears from the Writings of several authentick Authors.

The Syrians, whose Idolatry the Israelites learn’d, honor the Sun by the Name of Babal, which signifies Lord.

The Phenicians call’d the Sun Beel-samen, Lord of the Heavens; and the Citizens of Accaron, Baal-zebahim, Lord of the Offerings; but God chang’d the Name to Baal-zebub, or The God of Flyes.

Moloch, or Milcom also signifi’d the Sun amongst the Ammonites; in honor of which Children were carried by their Parents, and set between two great Fires, or else by the Priests, upon pretence of cleansing them; and sometimes parch’d to death in an Image of Moloch, which had seven Cavities heated like Ovens.

Macrobius tells us, That the Assyrians ascrib’d the supream Command to the Sun, under the Name of Adad, and to the Goddess Adargatis, representing the Image of Adad with Beams darting downwards, and Adargatis with those that shot upwards: by the first they express’d, that the celestial Power consisted in Sun-beams, which shooting downwards warm the Earth; and by the second, that all things by those Beams were cherish’d and enliven’d.

The most magnificent Temple which Syria Apamena boasted, was Consecrated to the Sun.

The Arabians Offer’d Myrrhe on the tops of their Houses at the Rising of the Sun; who also was the Chamos and Baal-Peor of the Moabites and Medians.

Near the Red-Sea, lay the City Baisamsa, which signifies The House of the Sun, famous for the many Feasts which were kept there in honor of this Planet.

The Persians accounted this Luminary for the greatest God, and Consecrated to him three several Feasts, looking upon him as the Author of Wisdom, Goodness, and Power, and is express’d by three several Operations, viz. Warmth, Light, and Distinction of Time.

The Egyptians honor’d the Name of Osiris, whom some will have to be the same with Misraim, or Chamszoon, the first Founder of the Egyptian Monarchy.

In Egypt also was famous amongst many other Cities that of Heliopolis, which signifi’d The City of the Sun; where the Ox Mnevis or Menapis being Consecrated to the Sun, was religiously worshipp’d. This Image is describ’d by Macrobius.

The Moors made likewise great Offerings to their Assabin, for so they call’d the Sun; and allow’d their Priests onely the priviledge to gather Cinamon, and that with this Proviso, That they should first Offer forty four Oxen, besides Goats and Rams, to Assabin, nor should fetch the least Stick of Cinamon either immediately before or after Sun-set: The Cinamon brought altogether, was to be divided by the Chief Priest, and the rest having each their Portion assign’d, that which remain’d was sold to the Merchants, to Trade with into Foreign Parts; but if the Sun chanc’d to set the Cinamon on fire, then they concluded they had not dealt justly.

The Greeks, according to Proclus, hung a long Pole full of Laurel and Flowers on every seventh day of the Moneth; on the top thereof was a great Copper Ball, from which hung others still lesser and lesser; about the middle of the Pole hung three hundred and sixty five Garlands; and the bottom thereof was cover’d with a Womans Garment of a yellow colour: The uppermost Ball represented the Sun, the lesser the Stars, and the Garlands the Days of the Year; in which manner they worshipp’d the Sun.

Why Divine Worship so generally given to the Sun.

The same Luminary the Massagetes and old Germans ador’d in antient times; and to this day the People in the utmost North, Japanners, Chineses, Tartars, and the East and West-Indians, pay their chief Devotions to the Sun; the reason of which may easily be made out: for it is the common Opinion of all Men, as Aristotle, Simplicius, Themistius, and other Heathens witness, to place the Omnipotent Godhead in the uppermost Orb, which surrounds the Earth; wherefore those that Pray, lift up their Hands to Heaven: but because the rest of the Heavens appear not so resplendent as the Sun, therefore they take the Sun for the onely chief God, whether for its exceeding lustre and glory, or for its being a hundred and sixty times bigger than the Earth; or for its swift Course, in running ten hundred thousand Leagues in so short a time, or for its nourishing and genial Warmth, which gives Life to all things, or for its necessary Light, by which all worldly Affairs are manag’d, or for its measuring the Days by its moving from East to West, and the Seasons of the Year, by a Course from the South to the North; for all these excellent qualities being well consider’d by the most Learned Heathens, or observ’d by those of lesser Judgment, have made them shew that Honor to a visible Creature, which is onely due to the invisible Creator.

These and such like Arguments induc’d the Caribbeeans to go to Bemarin, where the Feast of the Sun was to be kept.

The Apalachites and Caribbeans make an Offering to the Sun on the Mountain Olaimi.

Part of the Caribbeans revolt from the Apalachites.

They people the Caribees and grow powerful.

The Apalachite King also Entertain’d the neighboring People exceeding courteously in the chief City Melilot; from whence he was carried in a Chair on the Shoulders of four Men, with sound of Pipes and Drums, and an innumerable company of People, to the top of the Mountain Olaimi, where he made a stately Offering to the Sun, and afterwards Feasting and Caressing the Caribbeeans with Gifts, he sent them home all well contented and satisfi’d with their Entertainment. This Custom was yearly observ’d, when at last they began to neglect their Duty, wherefore Toltlabin resolv’d to proclaim War against the Caribbeeans, if they did not continue paying their Devotions to the Sun: which Injunction was differently receiv’d; some judg’d it to be inconsistent with their purchas’d Freedom, to receive Laws for Religion from a neighboring King, alledging, That if any Reverence was due to the Sun, it might as well be given on the Mountains of Amana as within Toltlabin’s Realm: others, who lov’d Peace, and had a zeal to the Olaimi Religion, would not be against the Proposals, which occasion’d a Contention amongst themselves, and every one apply’d himself to those that were of his Opinion; nevertheless those that stood upon their Freedom, were of the greatest Party; wherefore the Worshippers of the Sun clos’d with the Apalachites, who going out with their Forces, routed the other Party, and receiv’d those Caribbeeans that joyn’d with them in Religion into Co-partnership also in the Government, so that they united into one People: But those that were routed rally’d again, and not without thousands of Inconveniences made towards the Sea, where Embarquing, they Landed first on the Isle Ajay, now call’d Sancta Crux, and in process of time grew very populous; for from thence by degrees have been peopled all the little Isles which lie before America, and grew so considerable, that they were sought to by the Calabites, to side with them against the Arovaces, Yaos, Sappayos, and other People their Enemies on the Main Continent, where they have taken many large Countreys, extending as far as Brasile, where they are greatly respected and fear’d for their Valor and Policy in warlike Affairs.

But because the memory of antique Passages hath no firm foundation in Books, having been onely taken by Tradition from time to time amongst the Caribbeeans, therefore we cannot give you an exact Account of their Removal from Florida; yet it remains without contradiction, that it hapned above five Ages before the Spaniards Arrival, which time at least was requir’d to the peopling of so many great Islands and Kingdoms.

Original of the Apalachites.

Concerning the Original of the Apalachites, they themselves affirm, that they cannot certainly determine the time when they first Setled here: however, they report that they have peopled the Provinces Bemarin, Amana, and Matika, many Ages ago. That they are Extracted from the Tartars, appears not obscurely, by their Customs, Idolatry, and Language. Amongst other things, they have learn’d from the Tartars religiously to remember those Kings which perform’d any grand Exploits in the Service of their Countrey. Amongst others, the Apalachites make mention in their Areitos, or Songs, of a King call’d Maydo, eminent for his noble Atchievements, and prudent Governing of his People.

Their opinions in Religion.

They believe that the Sun many Ages since was Darken’d or Ecclips’d twenty four Hours together, during which time the Waters over-flow’d the highest Mountains, except that of Olaimi, where there stood a stately Temple, built in honor of the Sun; in which all those that fled thither were preserv’d, and dispers’d afterwards into several parts to re-people the World as soon as the Waters were abated, and the Sun appear’d in his full lustre again: whereupon they imagine, that to this day their Bird Tonatzuli, at the Rising of the Sun congratulates his appearance with great joy, and at his Setting, requests his speedy return from under the Horizon.

The Bird Tonatzuli.

The Tonatzuli is a Bird like a Bull-Finch, onely its Belly and Wings are of a Golden colour, the Back and Tail blue, its Head adorn’d with divers colour’d Feathers, its Claws and Bill like Ivory, and it Sings like a Nightingale.

Description of the Mountain Olaimi.

As for Olaimi, it is a perfect round Mountain; the Way which leads to the top thereof runs winding two Leagues long, and is planted on each side with Cedar, Pine-Trees, Cassine, and Sassafrass, the top of which is a fair Plain a League in circumference; Eastward from it is a Cavern, to which Nature hath afforded more Convenience and Ornament than could be given to the same by Art and Charges: The first Beams of the Rising Sun dart into the Cavern, which being oval, appears like a white Vault, which on the top hath a great Hole for the Air to go in at: The bottom is like the purest Marble; on the Floor stands a Stone Cistern to receive the Moisture which drops out of the Rocks. Whilest the People Danc’d on the fore-mention’d Plain, Feasted and Sung, the Priests Offer’d Myrrhe, and all manner of Perfumes.

The Clothes which the Rich gave to the Sun, were distributed amongst the Poor, according to a List which was taken of them.

The occasion of the Apalachites embracing Christianity.

But in process of time the Apalachites have most of them embrac’d the Christian Religion; the first occasion thereof was this: When John Ribauld had brought a French Colony to Florida, and gain’d a Fort, (which from King Charles the Ninth he nam’d Charles-Fort) the Spanish Commander Peter Melendez fell unawares upon him, and so far impower’d his Men, who had of themselves a natural hatred against the French, that they spar’d neither Man, Woman, nor Child; onely ten Men escaping the bloody Banquet, fled to the Floridan King Zaturiona, where they were kindly receiv’d, and hearing of the Civility and Power of the King of Apalache desir’d that they might go thither; which Zaturiona not onely granted, but also furnish’d the seven French-men (for the other three were dead) with good Guides, who visited Zaturiona’s Relations, living in several Villages along the pleasant Stream Selay, over which they pass’d on large Boughs artificially joyn’d together, and travell’d through Woods, Marshes, and Mountains full of ravenous Beasts, and sometimes Engag’d with the stragling Floridans which lurk’d in the most desolate Wildernesses: having travell’d two days Journey, by an Ambuscade of King Timago’s People, they lost two of their Guides, the rest being dangerously wounded, and through many Difficulties came at last to Avoeka, and from thence to the King of Apalache’s Court, who receiv’d them all with great kindness: Whereupon they resolv’d, being induc’d thereto by their courteous Reception, fruitfulness of the Soil, and good Customs of the Inhabitants, to Settle themselves, all but two of them, who return’d with the Guides to Zaturiona: the rest that stay’d there, endeavor’d by promulgating the Christian Religion, to reduce the Pagans to the belief thereof; which many embrac’d, and also learn’d the French Tongue, notwithstanding their Priests Jaova’s oppos’d the same. After the death of the French (which the Apalachites much bemoan’d) their Idolatry had like to have gotten the upper hand again, had not some English Families, fleeing from Virginia from the Cruelties of the Indians, and not able to reach New England, Landed at Florida, with intention at first onely to get fresh Provisions, but Rowing up the River Selay, and taken with the pleasantness, they chose the Province Bemarin for their Habitation, where accordingly they Setled Anno 1621. Amongst them were several Learned Men, which so effectually perswaded the Heathens to embrace the Christian Faith, that in twenty eight years time the King and most of his Nobles were Converted and Baptiz’d by them in the chief City Melilot.

But since our Design is onely to give you an exact Account of those People which inhabit the Islands lying before America, it is sufficient that we have shew’d you how they are Extracted from the Cosachites and the Apalachites.

As to the Customs of the Caribbeeans, since they are very much alter’d by their long Conversation with the Europeans, we cannot better inform our selves of their antient Customs, than from those which to this day are observ’d on St. Vincent, and some parts of the Main Continent, where the Caribbeeans have learn’d nothing from any Strangers.

Description of the Caribbeeans.

The Caribbeeans are a well proportion’d People with broad Shoulders and Hips, round Faces, without Beards, wide Mouthes, white Teeth, little Eyes like the Tartars, Feet so hard, that they are almost Dart-proof, flat Noses, so made by squeezing them down in their Infancy, and long black Hair. There are few or no deformed People amongst them; all of them go stark naked, and paint their Bodies Red with a Plant call’d Rocou, and Oyl; about their Eyes they draw a black Circle with the Juice of the Apple Junipa. This their Painting serves them both as an Ornament, and to make them strong. Others anoint their Bodies all over with a glewy Stuff, on which they stick all sorts of Feathers. Others use Gum and Flowers. Moreover, they adorn their Head with Plumes, their Ears with Fish-bones, or Scales of the Caret, or pieces of Crystal, which they also hang in their Lips and Noses. The Men wear Armlets near their Shoulders, and the Women about their Wrists; about their Legs they tie for Garters Strings of Seeds: others take a pride in wearing the Bones of their slain Enemies, and the Teeth of the Agouty, Tygers, wild Cats, or Cockle shells. When they appear in greatest lustre, then they wear Armlets under their Arm-pits, and also Scarfs of Feathers, which either hang over their Shoulders, or are girt about their Middle, so that one end thereof touches their Thighs. They set an exceeding value on certain pieces of Copper call’d Caracolis, the least of which they hang in their Ears, and the biggest before their Breasts: and because they are fetch’d out of the Province of the Arovages their Enemies, they are esteem’d as Marks of true Valor, and he is highly esteem’d that wears them.

Their Language.

The Caribbeeans which Converse with the Europeans, speak two sorts of Languages, the oldest of which is smooth, acceptable, fluent, and for the most part spoke between the Lips. According to the several pronunciations one word hath divers significations: but the Mystery of their oldest Language they will discover to none. It is very observable, that the Caribbeean Men speak several words, which though the Women understand, yet are never spoken by them: and also the antient People use several Sayings which the younger never mention, and the Youths such likewise as are never spoken by the Antient, which being spoken apart by each in the time of War, are understood by none but their Soldiers, that so their Designs may the better be kept secret. But their mix’d Language hath many of the European words, especially of the Spanish, which they speak whensoe’re they converse with the Europeans. Moreover, though the Caribbeeans on the least occasion laugh aloud, yet they are of a dull Spirit, stubborn, and nothing to be got out of them but by fair means.

Their Manners.

Their Employment is Hunting, Fishing, Tilling, Building of Houses, and the like. Theft is not known amongst them, so that no Man is suspicious of his Neighbor; wherefore they leave their Huts open both Night and Day. They are also seldom at Variance one with another, but generally Love sways amongst them; yet if a Quarrel doth happen, then the injur’d Person revenges himself to the heighth. Persons that profess Chastity are much honor’d amongst them; and here Youth bears great respect to Age.

Their Ignorance.

They are also very ignorant in natural Knowledge, insomuch that when the Moon is Eclips’d, they suppose that it is devour’d by Maboya; and wheresoe’re they smell any ill scent, they believe the Devil to be not far from thence. Gunpowder they suppose to be a Grain, and are very fearful of Fire-Arms: Though they have many brave Salt-pits, yet they use no Salt, nor eat any Swines-flesh, though all those Islands abound in that sort of Animal, fearing that if they should eat the same, it would cause them to have little Eyes, which they account very homely, though it is a property generally incident to them; neither will they eat any Tortoise, because they would not be so gross as that Creature. Lastly, they know now no greater Number than they reckon on their Fingers and Toes, for what exceeds twenty is to them innumerable: They hold that good Spirits, whom they call Akamoue, residing in Heaven, never trouble themselves with Earthly Affairs.

Their Offerings consist in Cassave and the first of their Fruits, which are set at the end of their Huts in Vessels on small Tables, cover’d with Leaves or Rushes, without uttering any Prayers; for they never Pray but in publick in company of the Boyez or Priests, and that either for revenge against Injuries, or for recovery from Sickness, or that they may know the Events of War, or for Protection against the Maboya.

Each Boye hath his peculiar God, which, Singing with a conjuring Verse, he calls to him in the Night whilst he Smoaks a Pipe of Tobacco.

Their Fear of the Maboya.

Some have been of Opinion, that this Conceit of the Maboya proceeds from the phlegmatick Nature of the Caribbeeans, who in their melancholy Dreams imagine themselves to be grievously beaten by the said Maboya. But there are sufficient testimonies to prove, that these Heathens have often really suffer’d much by this Maboya, often appearing to them in such horrid shapes, that the poor Caribbeeans would sweat and quake at the sight thereof, and inflicting such sad Pinches and bloody Stripes all over their Bodies, that they liv’d in perpetual fear of this evil Spirit: and yet notwithstanding these cruel Sufferings, they shew’d no manner of Worship to Maboya, onely they believ’d that they had some ease, when they wore little Pictures about their Necks, made resembling the Shapes in which Maboya appear’d to them; but their best Remedy was to flye to the Christians.

Their Consultations about the Death of any Relation.

They believe their Boyez able to resolve any Question they ask of them; particularly, when any one dies, the nearest ally’d to him asks the Boye this Question, Who is the occasion of his Death? to which if the Boye names any one, they never rest till they have dispatch’d him to the other World. Concerning their original brutish way of living, they give much credit to an ancient Fable, which is to this effect:

Fabulous Tradition.

The most antient Caribbeeans, living under no other Roof than the Canopy of Heaven, fed on nothing but what the Fields naturally produc’d, which salvage Life an old Man much beamoan’d; when a certain Deity clad in white Apparel descending down on the Earth, said, That he would have come sooner to have shew’n them the way of a civil Life, had they requested it before. Moreover, the Angel shew’d them a place along the Shore where there lay sharp-cutting Stones, with which he told them they might cut down Trees, and with the Timber build themselves Houses, and cover them with the Leaves of the Palm-Tree to keep out the Rain; which said, he broke his Staff into three pieces, which being Planted, soon after produc’d the Root Manioe, which stamp’d and dry’d, made good Bread.

Their Opinion concerning the Soul.

The Caribbeeans have also a strange Opinion concerning the Soul, that is to say, That every one hath as many Souls as he hath Pulses, but the chiefest is the Heart it self, which after Death removes with Jeheizi, (that is every ones peculiar God or Genius) to the Company of the other Deities, where they live after the same manner as here on Earth; wherefore those that are Persons of Quality give Charge at their Deaths, that their Servants may be kill’d and buried with them, that so they may serve them in the other World; That the other Souls, which are the Pulses, are of two sorts, whereof the first call’d Maboya’s, range through Woods and Wildernesses; and the other call’d The Oumekous, reside along the Sea, and over-turn the Ships that Sail by; That the Souls of Heroes remove to pleasant and delightful Islands, where they are serv’d by the Arovages; That Cowards at their Death go behind a high Mountain, where they become perpetual Slaves to the Arovages.

So soon as they hear a clap of Thunder they run into their Huts, and place themselves on little Stools round the Fire, cover their Faces, and laying their Heads on their Knees, make a doleful noise, as supposing that Maboya is exceedingly enrag’d against them.

Their manner of Dwelling.

Their Huts, for the most part built near Rivers and Streams, are of an oval fashion, their Roofs made of Palm-Tree Leaves or Sugar-Canes, the Walls nothing but Boughs set in the Ground and pleited together, and the Floor of sifted Earth or Sand, rammed in and kept very even and smooth; besides a Room wherein they Sleep and Entertain their Friends, they have also a Kitchin to dress their Meat, and a place to lay their Bowes, Arrows, Clubs, and the like, in; they use Mats in stead of Walls, to separate one Apartment from the other. Their Houshold-stuff is little; the richest of them have Hammocks in stead of Beds; the meaner sort use Sticks laid cross one another, and cover’d thick with the Leaves of the Banana-Tree, made fast at the four corners with Cords. Hollow Calabashes, and Earthen Ware call’d Canaris, serve them for their Kitchin Utensils. In the little Canaris they prepare their Tumalis, or Pepper-pottage, and in the biggest their Liquor Ovicou.

Their Cleanliness may appear by this, that when they go to ease Nature, they make a Hole in the Ground with a Stick, and after they have done, stop it up again, burying their Excrement that it may not be seen.

Round about their Huts feed many Hens and Turkies, which they breed not so much for their own use, as to exchange for Iron.

They remove their Habitations very often, either out of fear of being haunted by the Ghost of some deceased Person, or to avoid some Smell which they find noisom and offensive, or because their Hut hath been set on fire by Lightning.

Their Houshold Affairs and Diet.

The Women are always employ’d to keep their Families in good order, to prepare Venison and Fish for the Mens Tables, to spin Cotton, Comb their Husbands, and paint them Red. The Men spend their time in the Wars, Hunting or Fishing. They have also learn’d of the Europeans to burn Train-Oyl in Lamps in the Night, when as before they burnt Twigs of a gummy Shrub before mention’d, which for that reason the Hollanders call’d Candle-Wood. Each hath a little Stool, and a Table call’d Mantoutou, on which he eats his Meat when he pleases, having no set-Meals. The broad Banana-Leaves serve them for Napkins and Table-clothes. Their chiefest Dainty is Crabs roasted in the Shell with the Juice of Lemmon and Pyman. At great Feasts they dress their Meat with the Fat of their Enemies, being the Arovages. Their usual Drink is Mabby, made of Potato’s, which refreshes, and is good against the Phlegm; also another Liquor call’d Oko made of steep’d Cassadar, and is like Beer in taste, strength, and colour. They also by making an incision into the Palm-Trees, tap a Liquor from the same in Calabashes, like White-wine. They use little of the Drink Couscou, because it swells the Body, notwithstanding it is pleasing to the Palate; But the Liquor which is most esteem’d amongst them, is the Wine made of the Sugar-Canes, which are squeez’d in Mills made for that purpose, and then boyl’d in great Kettles. During the dressing of their Meat (which being done leisurely, is sometimes half a day before it is ready), they Sing, and Dance to the Time, which one keeps with a Calabash fill’d full of little Stones, in which they believe the greatest happiness they shall enjoy in the other World consists: But the Caribbeeans never Dance more antique than when they meet in the Carbet, which is a publick House of Entertainment; whether the Women carry a Drink made of Cassave, which makes Drunk as soon as Wine: The Men bring Fish and Hedge-hogs; all of them painted with Roucou, and adorn’d with Plumes of Feathers, commit all manner of Debaucheries. At other times they also keep Feast-days, which is either when they are preferr’d to some Office, or Place of Honor, or when they have defeated their Enemies, or when they mourn for the Death of one of their nearest Relations.

Their Beasts.

Their Boats, which they call Periaquo’s, are made of single hollow Trees, full of Benches, and painted with several strange Shapes, and are able each to carry fifty or sixty Men.

Their Musical Instruments.

Their Musical Instruments in which they take most delight, are Drums, Strings of Silk-grass stretcht upon Calabashes, and Flutes made of the Bones of their Enemies.

Their watchfulness against Enemies.

Their Entertainment of Friends.

They keep Watches on high Hills, to descry the Ships off at Sea, and no sooner have they espy’d one, but they immediately give notice to one another; whereupon those that are most valiant put off to Sea in their Canoos and know by the Languages to distinguish between a Spaniard, French-man, English-man and Hollander. If they find that ’tis an Enemy who Lands on their Coasts, they guard all their Avenues, lie in Ambuscades, and gather together in by-ways, and where they see any advantage they shoot thousands of Arrows; which done, they fall in amongst them with great Clubs: but if they chance to be defeated, then they lurk behind Bramble-bushes, or climb up inaccessible Mountains, or else, if near the Sea, they save themselves by Diving and Swimming under Water above two hundred Paces before they appear again; and if a Party of them chance to meet together afterwards, they venture a second Engagement; But if those that come on their Coasts are Friends, they Swim, or go in their Boats to meet them, climb up their Ships, and carry the Sea-men on their Shoulders ashore, where the Casique in the Name of the whole Island bids them welcome, and conducts them to the Carbet, where an antient Man salutes the old Men, and a Youth the young Men; after which asking their Names, the Couban calls himself by that Name ever after; and desires the Strangers to accept of his Name; during which their changing of Names they use many Ceremonies of Friendship: this done, they proffer them Cotton Hammocks to rest themselves in, and pleasant Fruit to eat, till they have prepar’d other Meat; which is no sooner Ready, but a little Table is set before every one of them, and a Dish of Meat consisting of boyl’d Hedge-hogs, boyl’d Crabs, and Pot-herbs; which if the Guests do not eat heartily, or drink up all the Liquor which they give them, they take it as a great Affront; but if they eat and drink heartily, they take it kindly, and shew great sorrow at their departure.

Their Offices of Government have been usually three; the meanest belong’d to the Tiouboulihauthe, whose Place was to Govern over the Carbet, a House where Strangers were Entertain’d, Matters of War disputed of, and publick Feasts kept. Tiouboutonti Commanded the Canoos in the time of War, that is, under the Nahalene, who Commanded the whole Fleet: But the chiefest Officer of all was the Ouboutou; to which degree of Honor none attain’d, unless he had kill’d several Arovages, or at least a Governor.

When the Caribbeeans drew all their Forces out of the Islands to a Battel, then they chose one out of the Ouboutou, who during their March Commanded the Army as General, which his Office ended with the War, and extended no farther than his own Island.

Their warlike Consultations.

Their warlike Consultations were no less observable for the Ouboutou appointed a Day, on which the Islanders met at a Feast in the Carbet, whither they accordingly came all at the time appointed, and having Eat and Drunk, and Danc’d a considerable time, an ancient Woman with tears in her Eyes, and mournful Countenance enter’d the Carbet, and desir’d Audience; which being granted her, and every one silent, she began to relate the Damages which from antient times the Arovages did to the Caribbeeans; and that in the last Engagement so many valiant Men were slain, and afterwards devour’d by them; therefore it would be a shame not to take Revenge, which being seconded by the Ouboutu, put Valor into the Hearts of all that were present: Whereupon the following day Messengers were sent to the other Islands to acquaint them with their Intentions, that they might prepare their Clubs, make sharp and poyson their Arrows, String their Bowes, prepare Provisions, and fit out their Canoos: They poyson’d their Arrows with the Juice of Manchenillo’s, which made the least Wound mortal. Their Provisions and Arms they laid up in their Canoos, so to preserve their Periaguo’s (which are Boats that can carry fifty Men), if they should chance to over-set, which often happen’d, though they were soon turn’d up again. They went from one Island to another, where they not onely stor’d themselves with fresh Provisions, but increas’d their Fleet with new Assistants; with which approaching the Main, they hal’d their Boats ashore in the Evening, and driving four Stakes into the Ground under the Trees, made fast their Hammocks to the same, in which they slept till Mid-night, and then fell on their Enemies, but if discover’d by them, they retreated to their Boats and return’d home; but if they were not discover’d, they fell upon the Huts of the Arovages; who resisting, they shot Arrows with burning Cotton into them, and so setting them on fire, forc’d the Arovages to venture a Battel in the open Field; where having spent all their Arrows, they Engag’d one another with great Clubs, with which at one Blow they broke either Arms or Legs, or knock’d out their Brains. If the Caribbeeans chanc’d to be defeated, then those that remain’d of their Party made a lamentable noise, howling for those that were kill’d, and mix’d their Tears with the Blood of their slain Friends, whom not without the greatest danger they fetch’d from amongst their Enemies, and carried them aboard their Boats: But returning Victors, the were wont to insult over their Prisoners with all the bitter Taunts imaginable, and then taking advantage of those sharp Upbraidings which their cruel usage extorted from them, to put them to death with most inhumane Tortures, and then to Feast themselves upon their mangled Bodies, all claiming a Right to their several Prisoners, as to so many Beasts appointed to the Slaughter; But of late Ages they have contented themselves to dispatch them speedily with their Clubs, and so assign them to their Shambles.

Their Enmity to the Spaniard.

As the Arovages had been formerly, so the Spaniards at length became the Object of the Caribbeeans irreconcileable Hatred, insomuch that oft-times being Invaded by them, they gave them such rough Entertainment, that they were glad to save themselves by flight; for the Caribbeeans not regarding their Guns, press’d upon them, and many times took Vessels richly laden from them, till of late years that a Peace hath been concluded between them; wherein nevertheless those of the Caribbeeans refuse to be concern’d, that inhabit St. Dominico and St. Vincent, who cannot to this day forget the cruel Outrages committed by the Spaniards.

Their Marriages.

To come to their Marriages, they were allow’d as many Wives as they pleas’d to have, insomuch that their Governors were in esteem according to the number of their Wives; nor were degrees of Consanguinity so regarded, but that an Uncle might take his Neece; whom he no sooner had carried to his House, but the Marriage was finish’d. They seldom Divorc’d their Wives after they had bore them Children, but otherwise the Man would break the Bond of Matrimony when he pleas’d. A young Man that had no Relation might court a Stranger, and if her Parents allow’d of it, the Match was made. One that had behav’d himself valiantly against the Arovages was sure of several good Matches, for he was refus’d by none whom he Courted; and the abundance of Wives was the greatest testimony of their Valor. Each Wife had a peculiar Dwelling, so to prevent all Dissentions: So soon as one of them was with Child, her Husband Lay not with her till after Delivery. If any Woman committed Adultery, her Husband was permitted to knock out her Brains, or rip open her Belly; which done, he acquainted her Father with the Deed, who return’d him thanks for the same. Murderers were either burnt or cut in pieces. Children were born here with little trouble, for the Women were no sooner Deliver’d, but they carried the Infant to wash at the next Brook; which done they return’d home to their Houshold Labor, whilest the Man on the contrary kept his Bed, and ate nothing but a piece of Cassava Bread, which he hollow’d out in the middle, and left the edges till the Feast, which was kept at the Naming of the Child: Moreover, he fed on all manner of Dainties for a whole year after. But this Custom was observ’d onely at the Birth of the first Son, at which time they scratch’d the Father’s Shoulder with a sharp Curry-combe, at which if he flinch’d not, it was accounted a good Omen of the Childs future Valor. At fifteen days old they made Holes in the Childs Ears, Lips, and Nostrils, through which they put a String for the tying on of what-ever Ornamentals. With the like Ceremonies the Child receiv’d a Name, taken from his Predecessors, Trees, Fishes, or some remarkable Passages during the Mothers bearing of the Infant in her Womb, or of the Father’s Lying-in: But this Name was chang’d so soon as they went to War, or kill’d a Commander of the Arovages, whose Name they exchang’d for their own: After which the Mothers took special care in bringing them up, and at six Moneths the Children were able to run alone: When they attain’d to the age of two years, they cut off their Hair, at a great Feast made for that purpose; from which time forward they exercis’d them in Shooting with Bowes and Arrows; to which purpose they hung up pieces of Meat for them to shoot at, which they must either hit down, or Fast.

Initiation of Soldiers.

Their Ceremonies to make Soldiers were very strange, viz. The Father conducted his Son to the Carbet, where he told him the Duties of a Soldier, beat him with a Bird of prey, call’d Mans-fenis, till he had bruis’d the Head of the Bird, and scratch’d his whole Body all over with a Curry-combe till the Blood came, and then put Lemmon Juice into the Wounds, afterwards put him in a Hammock, and hung him up for several days without giving him any Meat; all which Torments and Trials if he endur’d with patience, then he was accounted a good and approved Soldier.

Of their Priests.

Few bred up their Children to be Boyez or Priests; yet those that were brought up to it, abstain’d from certain Food from their Infancy, and before they could be receiv’d into the Order of Priesthood, they were forc’d to draw Blood from every part of their Bodies.

Great age of the Caribbeeans.

The Caribbeeans attain to an exceeding great Age: Charles de Rotchfort witnesseth, That in his time there liv’d Men who remembred the first Arrival of the Spaniards under the Command of Christopher Columbus, which consider’d, they could not be less than each of them a hundred and sixty years old. Many Women also were found there, who bare Children after they were eighty years of age: yet nevertheless they are not free from Sicknesses and Distempers, which cannot justly be attributed to the Climate, that being extraordinary healthful, but to their ill Diet. Besides the troublesom Disease call’d Pyans, which makes their Bodies swell full of great Knobs, they have been much troubled with pestilential Sores, occasion’d by the eating of Crabs, and poysonous Tortoises, Lamantins, and Hedg-hogs. Against which Evils they wanted not Medicines, consisting of Herbs, Roots, Gums, and Oyl. The bitter Bark of the Chipiou-Tree, steep’d in Water, and mix’d with Lanbys, hath a soveraign operation. The like vertue is in the Juyce of the Myby-Tree, which they us’d to take inwardly: and for outward Means, they us’d a Salve made of burnt Cane-ashes, temper’d with a Water press’d out of a certain Tree. To draw the Matter out of the Sores, they us’d the Juice of Junipa. Letting Blood was never customary amongst them, but to cut and scratch the sore part was to them in stead of Phlebotomy. But if all the fore-mention’d Medicines would not help them, they fled for aid to the Boyez, who immediately order’d the Hut wherein the Patient lay to be made clean, the Table call’d Matoutou to be over-spread with Cassave, Ouycou, and Garden Fruits, for an Offering to the evil Spirit Maboya, and as many Stools to be plac’d about the same as there were People to be present at the Ceremony; and after that all the Fire and Candles were put out, the Boye enter’d into the Hut about Midnight with a Lighted Roll of Tobacco, then muttering some words to himself, stamp’d with his left Foot, and blew the Smoak of the Tobacco up into the Air, which done, and tearing the Tobacco in pieces, he threw the same over the Hut, and call’d up his Spirit, who shaking the Roof of the House, made a terrible noise; then the Boye drew near to the Patient, suck’d his Sores, and anointed them with the Juice of Junipa; after which if the sick Person recover’d, he made a great Feast, and an Offering to the aforesaid Spirit: But if the Distemper were mortal, then the Boye inform’d the Patient’s Relations, That his Spirit had compassion upon the Sick, and was resolv’d to carry him above the Stars, to accompany the other Gods which reside there.

Thus much in general of the Inhabitants of the Isles that lie before Northern America; it will next be requisite to give you an Account of them in particular.

The number of the Caribbee Islands.

Their several Names.

There are generally reckon’d of these Islands twenty eight by Name, though there are many more in number; for besides that there are a multitude of small obscure Islands that are not nam’d, there are of the more considerable sometimes two or three that go under one Name; the twenty eight are these following: Anegada, Sombrero, Las Virgines, Anguilla, Saba, St. Crux, St. Martin, St. Bartholomew, Barbouthos or Barboude, Rotonda, Nevis, Eustathius, Antego, Montserrat, Guadalupe, Deseado, Marigalanta, Todos Sanctos, De Aves, Dominico, Martinego, St. Lucia, Barbados, St. Vincent, Bekia, Granada, Tabago, St. Christopher.

Sect. II.
Anegada and Sombrero.

Situation of Anegada and Sombreros.

Towards the North-East of Porto Rico, at eighteen Degrees and thirteen Minutes, The Mansfeny. lies Anegada, seven Leagues long, surrounded with Shoals and The Colibry. Banks, as also the neighboring Sombrero, being in the same Latitude with the other, and so call’d by the Spaniard, because it appears like a Hat: Both of them being uninhabited, harbor abundance of Birds, amongst which is the Mansfeny, a little Eagle, and the remarkable Colibry, whose Body being a little bigger than a Wren, is adorn’d with divers colour’d Feathers, resembling a Rain-bowe; about its Neck is a Carbuncle red Circle; the Belly and ends of the Feathers are of a Golden colour, the Sides of an Emerauld green, the Bill and Legs black like polish’d Ebony, the Eyes glittering like Diamonds, on the Head a curious green tuft of Feathers: the Cocks far exceed the Hens in beauty; they flie swifter than any Bird whatsoever, and the fluttering of their Wings makes a noise like a Whirlwind: they live upon the Juice of Flowers, and especially of Cotton-Flowers; they smell like Amber, and build their Nests amongst the thick Leaves of a little Bough, where they cannot easily be found; the Nest it self open towards the South, is curiously made of the fine Fibres of the Plant Pite, surrounded with pieces of Bark, and within fill’d with Cotton, douny Feathers, and Silk; the Eggs oval, are somewhat bigger than an ordinary Pearl.

Painted Crabs.

In the Moneth of May that sort of Crabs call’d Painted Crabs (for some have Violet-colour’d Shells, others yellow, full of purple Specks, and others tawny, with red Streaks) come creeping down the Hills in good order, eat up all the Herbs and Plants, and go four times one after another into the Water to wash themselves, which done they return to the Woods; but the Females at a set-time betake themselves to the Sea, in which they Lay their Eggs, which afterwards being cast on the sandy Shore, and warm’d by the Beams of the Sun, produce young Crabs in a short time, which no sooner come out of the Shell, but creep towards the Woods, when grown somewhat bigger they climb up the Rocks, where the old ones keep in vast multitudes, and stop up the Entrance of their Holes in such a manner, that they cannot be found out, whilest they cast off their Shell, creeping out backward through an opening at the Tail scarce discernable; thus for a certain time they lie bare, and stript of their Shells, being onely cover’d with a thin Skin, which growing harder and harder, becomes at last a firm Shell like the former.

These Crabs are a wholsom Meat, unless they feed under the Mancheneel-Trees, which commonly are poysonous.

Sect. III.
Las Virgines.

Situation of Las Virgines.

Near Sombrero, at eighteen Degrees, lie also the two Isles Las Virgines, surrounded by ten others (and flat Shelves), without Trees or fresh Water; but the Sea thereabouts abounds with Fish, and chiefly with the Perroket, which hath Scales like a Carp, but greenish; the Eyes surrounded with Silver Circles shine very bright; in stead of Teeth they have strong Jaw-bones, wherewith they Grind all manner of Shell-fish, which are their Prey. These Fish have an excellent Rellish, and weigh generally twenty Pound.

The Fish Dorade.

Here is likewise great plenty of the Dorade, which is a very large Fish, and about five Foot long, full of little Scales, with a prickly Back, two Fins at the parting of the Head, and as many under the Belly. This Fish swimming very swift, oftentimes follows the Ships that Sail that way.

Sect. IV.
Anguilla.

Situation of Anguilla.

Southward at eighteen Degrees and twenty Minutes, on this side of the Line, appears Anguilla, inhabited by the English, containing ten Leagues in length; It makes a pleasant Prospect, because of the many Junipa-Trees which grow upon the same, whose Boughs bend towards the Ground; the Leaves are not unlike those of an Oak; the Flowers both in smell and shape come near the Narcissus; the Wood firm and grey, may be neatly Plan’d; the Tree bears fresh Leaves every Moneth, and a Fruit like Apples, which generally crack in their fall from the Tree, because of their thin Shell, as hath been already describ’d.

Oculiem a sort of Vine

The Oculiem, or Vine, makes the Shore also very pleasant; the Leaf round and thick, hath a mixture of Red and Green; the Bark incloseth a Violet-colour’d Wood; the Boughs whereof are loaded with Violet Grapes, which in stead of Kernels contain hard Stones.

Sect. V.
Saba.

Situation of Saba.

Westward from Anguilla, at seventeen Degrees and thirty five Minutes, lies Saba, which shews at a great distance like a Rock. The Inhabitants of St. Eustathius going thither, found a pleasant Valley, able to maintain many Families.

The Sea about this Island is so clear, that a Stone may be seen lying on the bottom of it.

The Fish Bonito.

Amongst many other sorts of Fish, the Bonito is the most remarkable, which is thick and fleshy, two Foot long, with a dark green Back, and white Belly without Scales; It devours greedily all manner of Carrion.

Sect. VI.
St. Crux.

Situation and first Plantation of St. Crux.

North of St. Christophers, in eighteen Degrees and some Minutes, lies St. Crux, which the Caribbeeans who were beaten by the Apalachites, first inhabiting, call’d Ayay, where Columbus found great opposition, for the Women themselves shot poysonous Arrows at the Spaniards; and before the Islanders submitted to them, they took many Spanish Ships, burnt their Villages, and flay’d many of the Spaniards alive. The Soil, though Hilly, is rich and fruitful.

The English Landing here Anno 1587. found a standing Pool, whose Water made swell the Faces of those who wash’d themselves with the same before Sun-rising, in such a manner, that they were not able to see for several days after; but they at last found a Fountain of wholsom Water.

The several Changes of Dominion in this Island.

Since the Spaniards destroy’d the Inhabitants of this Island, it lay desolate for a considerable time, notwithstanding it hath fourteen Leagues in length, and little less in breadth, till at last the English and Hollanders took possession of the same, each in a peculiar place; but not agreeing together, the English fell upon the Hollanders, and made themselves Masters of the Island in 1649. and not long after they were serv’d in the same kind; for the Spaniard judging them to be weakned by the Hollanders removing from the Island, set Sail thither from Porto Rico, burnt all the Houses, slew the Inhabitants, and brought St. Crux again under the Spanish Government. Mean while the Lord Poincy fitted out two Sail of French Ships, to drive the Spaniards from St. Crux, and succeeded in his Enterprize; for the Spaniards immediately fled to their Ships, left at liberty some Holland Prisoners whom they had taken, and the Island in possession of the French; who straightway sent Captain Auger thither as Governor, who design’d to build a Fort to secure the Harbor, but died before the same was finish’d. Poincy succeeding him, made an end of the Fort, and stor’d the Island with Ammunition and Provision. The Cross-Church built there by the Order, and at the Cost of a Company of Flushing in Holland, was deliver’d also to the French.

Fruit-Trees.

The Trees which grow here are of four beneficial kinds, serving for four several uses; some yield Fruits of a pleasant taste, and wholsom to eat; some excellent Medicines; others Timber for Building; and others Stuff to Dye with.

Granates, Oranges, Lemmons, and Citrons, grow better here than in any place of the World.

The Papaye.

But the Papaye-Tree is particularly worthy of our Description; It grows twenty Foot high, without Boughs, thick and streight, hollow and spungy within, bears three-corner’d Leaves hanging on long Stalks, hollow in the middle, and of a Fingers thickness; on the top round about the Body of the Tree, grow a sort of Fruit like Quinces.

This sort of Papaye-Tree grows on most of the Caribbee Islands; but the second sort call’d Mamoa, is to be found no where but on St. Crux; it hath more Leaves than the first, and a yellow Bark with green Streaks, within full of round and sharp biting Grains; the Blossoms thereof yield a sweet smell; every Moneth the Tree produces new Fruit, not unlike a Womans Breast (whence it hath its Denomination as before observ’d,) and rellishing incomparably well.

Sect. VII.
St. Martin.

Situation of St. Martin.

Not far from St. Crux, at eighteen Degrees and sixteen Minutes, lies St. Martin, which hath seven Leagues in length and five in breadth, and is famous for many excellent Salt-Mines; to preserve which, the Spaniards built a City and Fort there.

The Dutch Land there.

Adrian Peter and Martyn Thyszoon, sent with eleven Sail of Ships from the Texel by the West-India Company, to Cruse for the Spanish Plate-Fleet before the Flemmish Isles, finding their labor lost, Steer’d to the Inlet of Todos los Sanctos; where finding no Enemies Ships, they Sail’d along the Coast of Pernambuck, and from thence (meeting with no Prize) to the Caribbee Islands; and Landing on Granada, receiv’d some damage from the Inhabitants: thence going to Blanca, they got above a thousand Goats, and ten thousand Lemmons from Hispaniola; near Cuba they were surpris’d with continual Thunder, Showers, and Storms, which forc’d them to stand to and again off the Island a considerable time, where they thought to wait for the Spanish Ships that came from Nombre de Dios; but being defeated of their aim, by reason that Fleet was re-inforc’d with a considerable Supply, they set Sail Anno 1629. towards the City and Fort of St. Martin, where coming to an Anchor they found the Place in this condition: On the right side of the City glides a fresh-Water River, with many meandring Streams from the Mountains; on the left side the Ocean makes a great Opening or Bay, which for a little space growing narrower, becomes at last an Inland Lake; from the Countrey opposite to the City on the other side of the fore-mention’d Inlet, runs a Ridge of Hills toward the Sea; on the utmost Point thereof stands a square Fort, defended from the force of the Water with great Stones, pyl’d up at the Foot thereof, cover’d like a House, having on the top of it a Watch-tower, and not far from it a Chappel; moreover, the Mountain Calvaria, rises on each side and behind the City, with high Precipices; not far from the Mouth of the River appears a strong Castle with several Bulwarks, and thereon great Guns; along the Inlet is a fair Market-place; in the middle of the City stands a Church Consecrated to Dominicus, near which there is a large Hospital, which fronts the Sea; the Cathedral stands at the farther end of the City, and on the declivity of a Mountain a fair Chappel; near the great Fort the Governor hath a pretty Palace; nor are the Franciscan Cloysters much inferior to any of the other Structures of this City, which taken altogether bears a good Form, by reason of the uniformity of the Streets.

The Island possess’d by the Dutch.

But Anno 1648. the Spaniard totally deserted this Island, which Michael Adriaenszoon Ruiter hearing of, brought several People from St. Eustathius, and took possession of it in the Name of the States of the United Netherlands: Yet they enjoy’d not long the entire Propriety, for the Spaniards again went and claim’d those Places which were theirs upon the first gaining of the Island; which the Hollanders allowing them, they liv’d peaceably and quietly together, each having their own Churches, Store-houses, Land, and Negro’s. The Dutch Plantation was maintain’d by the Zealand Lords, Lamsen and Van Ree.

There are divers Pools of salt Water in this Island, which afford the Inhabitants store of Fish, and especially Tortoises.

The Woods produce wild Hogs, Pigeons, Turtle-Doves, and Parraquito’s resembling a Parrot, and which though much smaller, are more apt to be taught.

Flammans.

Near the Salt-pools also breed Birds call’d Flammans, not unlike a Jack-daw, onely differing in Feathers, for they are first white, next ash-colour’d, and at last turn red; they seldom flye or sit alone, but for the most part in great Flocks in open places, and Moorish Grounds; when some of them seek for their Food under Water, one of them stands Centinel, and on the least noise or appearance of a Man, gives notice by Chirping to the rest, who hereupon immediately flee away; those that shoot them lie commonly hid under an Ox Hide.

American Swallows.

About the same Pools breed likewise the American Swallows, with crooked Bills, Feet like Ducks, black Bodies, white Bellies, and long Tails.

Sect. VIII.
St. Bartholomew.

Situation and Description of St. Bartholomew.

Near St. Martin, at sixteen Degrees, lies the Island St. Bartholomew, which being about five Leagues in circumference, is surrounded with Rocks, and was first Planted by De Poincy: It makes a delightful Prospect, because of the many Trees which grow on the same; amongst which the most noted are Soap-Trees, whose Wood makes the Water Lather, and washes as well as Soap; but they are of two sorts, for in some this soapy Quality is contain’d in a round yellow Fruit, not unlike a Plumb; in others a white soft Root supplies the office.

The Canopia-Tree.

The little Tree Canopia, out of whose Bark drops a Gum, grows also very pleasant, the Body being divided into several Branches; the Leaves are discolour’d, being underneath of a dark Green, and of a brighter at the top; the Flower consists of five Leaves, and closes at last into a kind of Cherry, full of yellow Juice, and white Pulp; it blossoms generally in October and December, and bears ripe Berries the two following Moneths: a Fire being made about the Tree causeth the Bark to crack, whereby it yields abundance of Gum, chiefly us’d in Medicine for its opening and loosening Quality.

The Paretuve-Tree.

Likewise the Paretuve-Tree, which grows along by the Sea-side and by Pools, is sufficiently remarkable, for the Boughs thereof grow downwards, twin’d and pleited together so thick, that in time of War they serve for Bulwarks, and are the Recesses of wild Swine.

The Calabash-Tree.

Moreover, on this Island, as on all the other hereabouts, grow Calabash-Trees, which have thick Boughs and oval Leaves joyn’d one to another, and bear every Moneth fresh Flowers and Fruit, grey Flowers, mark’d with green Streaks and black Spots, and Fruit with hard Shells, full of juicy Meat and flat Seeds, which being taken out serve for Boxes, Cups, or little Dishes.

Sea-Star.

Along the Shore is also found a sort of Fish call’d the Sea-Star, which is a yellowish Fish, whose hard Skin full of little Knobs shoot forth five Darts or Beams; in stormy Weather they fasten themselves to the Rocks.

Sea-Apple.

No less wonderful is the Fish call’d the Sea-Apple, whose brown Skin is full of Prickles, which when the Fish dies fall off, nothing remaining but a white Shell, curiously embroider’d with little Holes.

On the Banks, and near the Rocks, grow also Sea-Trees, whose thickest Boughs putting forth still lesser and lesser Branches, are pleited together very wonderfully, and being all glaz’d as it were with Salt-petre, seem greyish.

Sect. IX.
Barboude.

Situation of Barbouthos.

Barbouthos, which some call Barboude, others Barbada, being five Leagues in length, lies at seventeen Degrees and thirty Minutes, and North-East from Monserrat, in a shallow Sea.

English molested by the Caribbeeans.

Here the English Planting, have from their first Arrival been much molested by the Caribbeeans of Dominico, who for a great while us’d twice a year to Invade them in the Night, killing and destroying whom and whatsoe’re they met with, onely Women and Children, with some other Booty, they carried to Dominico.

Sect. X.
Rotonda.

Situation of Rotonda.

The Isle Rotonda, which is much lesser, hath receiv’d that Denomination from its round Form, for it rises in the middle into a Hill, which at a distance appears like a Steeple; It lies at seventeen Degrees and ten Minutes. The Sea about the same being very deep, makes a good coming to the Island with Ships.

Sect. XI.
Nevis.

Situation of Nevis.

In sight of Rotonda, at seventeen Degrees and nineteen Minutes, lies Nevis, which hath six Leagues in circumference. Out of the middle of the Island rises a Mountain all over wooddy; round about which the English, who Setled there Anno 1628. have their Plantations, and have increased from a small number to above three thousand, and make a good Advantage of their Sugar, Ginger, Cotton, and Tobacco, which they Plant there.

Good Government of the English there.

They are Govern’d by a peculiar Governor and a Council, who punish Thieves, and all manner of Deboshes very severely.

There are also three Churches, which on the Sabbath-Day are all throng’d with People, who resort thither for the Worship and Service of God.

The Harbor call’d Bath-Bay, and the Store-house built about the same, are secured by a great Fort full of great Guns.

Several Springs on this Island afford the Inhabitants good Water. Here is also a Mineral Spring, a place to Bathe in, which hath been found to cure the same Distempers which the Waters at Bourbon have done.

The Pistick-Nut.

Moreover, this Island abounds with the Pistacie or Pistick-Nuts, which grow on small Trees, with soft long Leaves, round at bottom, and ending in three Points: These Trees being commonly full of thick Boughs, serve commodiously for Hedges; the Wood and Leaves sweat a milky Juice, dropping out of the same with the Rain; the yellow Flowers which grow on the same are like glittering Stars, and the taste of the Nuts like a Hazle; but if the Skin which covers the Kernel be not pull’d off before they are eaten, they purge to Death.

The Musticho.

But the great Profit which Nevis receives by Nature is attended with some Inconveniences, which trouble this and all the other Islands: amongst many may be reckon’d the Musticho’s, a sort of little Bugs, whose poysonous Sting causes such intolerable Itching, that those who are stung by them cannot forbear to scratch themselves till the Blood comes, by which their Sores festering, prove often very dangerous.

The Muringoins.

Also the Muringoins, who are so much the less dangerous, because they make always a great noise before they sting.

Wasps likewise are here very troublesom, but their Stings are cur’d with Rue, as the Stings of Scorpions are with the Juice press’d out of the same Animal.

Wood-Lice.

The Wood-Lice, which are here in great abundance, have a soft and white Body, onely the Head, which is mark’d with a black Speck; their Mouthes are so very hard, that in two hours time they eat through thick Chests. And no less damage do the Banettos.

Chigos.

But the Chigos are a kind of small Fleas, that breed in Dust, Ashes, and the like, and are of all the most pernicious; they first get in under the Nails of the Toes, and from thence run over all the Body, but especially the bottoms of the Feet, where they first occasion an Itching, and then eat Holes through the Skin; they make Blisters as big as Pease in the Flesh, wherein a swarm of young ones breeding, cause Ulcers and rotten Flesh, which must be eaten away with Aqua-fortis and burnt Allom.

Sect. XII.
Eustathius.

Situation of Eustathius.

Eustathius, which is rather a Mountain, rising out of the Ocean like a Sugar-Loaf, than an Island, lies at seventeen Degrees and forty Minutes: It hath scarce five Leagues in circumference, yet receiv’d some while since a Colony of above sixteen hundred People, sent thither from the States of the United Netherlands, under the Command of the Lords Lampsen and Ree. Besides the natural Strength of the Place, whereby a few are able to keep off a great number, it is fortifi’d with a strong Fort, which Commands the Harbor. The Inhabitants are very industrious, and make great profit of the Tobacco which they Plant.

In the midst of this Island is a Mountain over-grown with Trees, which seems to end in a Point, and hath about it a pleasant Plain.

The abundance of Fowls, Hogs and Goats, afford the Inhabitants store of Provisions; for their Store-houses are never so empty, but that they can supply their Neighbors Wants.

The want of fresh-water Brooks they supply with Rain-water, which they preserve in Cisterns.

Terrible Hurricanes.

Though the Air of the Island be wholsom, and the Soil fruitful, yet it is subject to many great Inconveniences; for besides the terrible Thunder-claps and Earthquakes, that rend the Ground, the Inhabitants are exceedingly troubled in August, and September with the Winds, which in twenty four hours blow from all Points of the Compass with such mighty Gusts, as if they would turn all things into their first Chaos. The Caribbeeans call these Tempests Hurricanes, which formerly us’d to happen but once in seven years, but of late every two years, and sometimes twice in a year. What damage these Winds cause is scarce to be express’d; the Sea raising its turbulent Waves up to the Skyes, casts the Ships on the Shore, which though in Harbor, are certain to be wrack’d, whilest the Land seems to labor under a general Ruine, whole Woods being rooted up by the same, or at least bereav’d of Boughs and Leaves; the Corn is beaten down, the Plants blasted, Houses turn’d topsie-turvy, Mountains rent asunder, and sometimes pieces of Rocks blown into the Sea. Before the Hurricanes there are several fore-runners, which give notice of their sudden approach, viz. the Sea on a sudden is so calm, that the least motion is not perceiv’d; the Birds flye from the Mountains into the Valleys, where they lay themselves flat on the Ground; and the Rain which falls is bitter and salt.

Charles de Rochfort observ’d, that in his time some Ships laden with Tobacco being lost in a Hurricane before St. Christophers, soon after the Tempest ceased, thousands of Fishes were seen swimming with their Bellies upwards, intoxicated no doubt with the Tobacco.

Sect. XIII.
Antego.

Situation of Antego.

Between Nevis and Montserrat, at sixteen Degrees and eleven Minutes, lies Antego, being seven Leagues long, and about six broad; It is dangerous to come at with great Ships, because of the many Rocks which lie before it, and remain’d the longer uninhabited, because of the want of fresh Water; yet at last the English taking possession of it, digg’d Pits, and made Troughs to catch and preserve Rain-water in, so that it is now inhabited by at least eight hundred People, who live on Plants, Venison, and Fish.

The Sword-Fish.

Upon the Sea-shore appears often-times the Sword-fish, which hath no Scales, but a grey Skin, and white Belly, rough like a Fyle, a flat Head, two Fins on each side, two on the Back, and one in stead of a Tail, with which it makes a swift motion: the Sword of it is a long Bone, arm’d on each side with twenty seven white and strong Teeth. This Fish striving to be Chief of the Sea, Encounters with all other Fishes whatsoever, even with the Whale himself, whose Belly he often rends open; near his Eyes are two Nostrils, out of which he blows the Water he drinks into the Air.

Sect. XIV.
Montserrat.

Description of Montserrat.

Montserrat, lying just at the seventeenth Degree, is so call’d from a Spanish Hill beyond Barcellona, whose shape this Island represents off at Sea; It is about three Leagues in length, and almost as much in breadth, and is very Mountainous, except a little towards the East, and as much Westward.

The English have a Church here, lin’d in the in-side with Cedar, which this Island produces in great abundance.

The Acajou-Tree.

Also the Acajou-Tree, which grows an exceeding heighth, with mighty Boughs, under which many judge it very wholsom to sleep: But there are two sorts of the Acajou-Tree, the one differing from the other in tallness of Body and Colour; of which the most esteem’d is the red and sweet-smelling, which is not subject to any decay; for that which is white, and yields Gum when cut, is of a less value.

The Acomas-Tree.

The Acomas is also no way inferior in bigness to the Acajou, which bears long swarthy Leaves, and yellow Fruit not unlike a Plumb; but because of their extraordinary bitterness they are not eatable, onely the wild Pigeons at a certain time of the year feed on them, after which their Flesh becomes bitter also; from the Bark when cut, runs a milky Juice.

The Cypress-Tree.

The Cypress-Trees when plan’d, yield a pleasant Marble colour to the Eye, and a delightful fragrance to the Scent.

The Iron-Tree.

The Iron-Tree, with sharp-pointed Leaves, crack’d near the Stalk, blossoms in March and September; after the Violet Blossoms follow a black kind of Fruit like a Cherry, being an excellent Food for Birds; the Wood whilst flourishing is red, but cut down changes its colour, yet is so hard that it never decays.

The Musk-Herb.

Moreover the Musk-Herb yields a sweet smell, and grows like Brambles without Thorns; between long dusky Leaves hang yellow Flowers, which afterwards become Cods full of Seeds, that smell exactly like Musk.

Sect. XV.
Guadalupe.

Situation of Guadalupe.

Guadalupe, or Gardelupe, formerly call’d Carricueira, lying at about sixteen Degrees, and containing sixty Leagues in circumference (for it is the biggest and noblest of the Caribbee Islands,) is divided in two by a narrow Channel; wherefore one part is call’d Grand-Terre, and the other properly Guadalupe; whose Eastern Point, nam’d Cabes-Terre, and its Western, call’d Basse-Terre, are both inhabited by the French.

Mountains.

Several high Mountains, especially towards the Center, start up from very low Grounds, with their barren Crowns towards the Skye, some whereof are overgrown with Trees.

At the Feet of some of the Mountains are large Plains, water’d by sweet Streams which formerly invited the Spanish Fleets thither to water.

There is also a sulphurous Mountain, which smoaking continually gives the taste of Sulphur to the Streams which flow about the same.

This Island boasts likewise several boyling Springs which cure the Dropsie, and all other Distempers proceeding from Colds.

Strange Fish.

Towards each of the two fore-mention’d Points, are large Gulphs that produce abundance of Tortoises, and all manner of Fish, and amongst others one sort not known by Name, which is generally about four Foot long, having a sharp and big Head, with glittering Eyes, a Back streak’d with blue and green, and a Belly half white and half red, eight yellow Fins, and a broad Tail, with which it swims exceeding swift.

The Shark.

Near the Shore swim the Sharks, an ugly Sea Monster, which bites a Man asunder in the Middle at once; their Head is hard and prickly, their flat Mouthes opening discover three rows of Teeth.

The Pilot-Fish.

After this Fish swims generally the Pilot-Fish, or Rambos, which is so curiously speckled, that Nature seems herein to excell what-ever can be represented by the artificial Pencil and move either swifter or slower, according as the Shark leads. The Brain of this Fish is judg’d exceeding good against the Gravel and Stone.

The discovery of Guadalupe.

Guadalupe was first discover’d in the Year of our Lord 1635. by the French, under the Command of the Lords Du Plessis and De Olive, and after them one of the Captains of St. Christophers: Since which the Champain Ground being Till’d and Manur’d, brings forth in great plenty, Rice, Maiz, Manicock, and Potato’s.

Father Raymond Breton got possession of the fruitfullest part of the Island for the Reformed Jacobines, or White-Fryers, and since the present Governor Monsieur De Howell sent also for the Jesuits and Carmelites, to build Cloysters in a new City, which lies in Basse-Terre, and which is also built full of Store-houses and Dwelling-houses two Stories high.

The Castle, which lies near the City, hath four Bulwarks, with great Guns.

The next neighboring Mountain is also crown’d with a Garrison’d Fort.

The Moubane-Tree.

The Countrey hereabouts bears Moubane-Trees, which produce yellow oval Plumbs with great Stones, wherewith the Hogs are exceedingly fatned.

The Corbary.

The Corbary, which grows higher than the Moubane, hath a hard shelly Fruit, in which lies a douny Pulp of a Saffron colour: The Gum which drops out of the Tree is hardned by the Sun, and becomes very clear, wherefore the Caribbeeans make use of it for Arm-rings, and other Ornaments.

Sect. XVI.
Deseado.

Situation of Deseado.

Ten Leagues to the North-West of Guadalupe, and at sixteen Degrees and ten Minutes, appears Deseado, or Desirado, like a Galley, of which the North-East end hath a low Point; to the Northward lie Sand-Hills full of red Veins: It was so call’d by Christopher Columbus in his second Voyage, from obtaining of his Desire, it being the first of the Caribbees which he discover’d, as St. Salvador the first Land in all America.

The Guano.

The Soil is wholly barren, and destitute of Trees, and breeds the amphibious Creatures call’d Guano’s, which in stead of Fins to swim withal, have four Feet; the biggest of them are fifteen Inches long; their Skin full of little Scales shines like Silver, and in the Night they make a loud and shrill noise from the Holes in the Rocks.

The Frigates.

On this desolate Island are an innumerable company of Fowls, call’d Frigates, which have a Body like a Duck, but larger Wings, and flye swifter; so soon as they perceive a Fish in the Water, they falling upon the same, catch them in their Claws, and especially devour abundance of flying Fish.

The Fauves.

But the Fauves, which are much leaner, are no way so swift; they resemble a Moor-Hen, have Feet like Ducks, Bills like a Snipe, and in rainy Nights rest on the Ships in stead of Rocks, so that many times they become an easie prey to the Mariners.

Sect. XVII.
Marigalante.

Situation of Marigalante.

Not far from hence, at fifteen Degrees and forty Minutes, appears Marigalante, like a Wood in the Water.

On the South-East side, about half a League from the Shore, lie black full of white Specks. Westerly the Shore is very plain, whither the Governor Monsieur De Howell sent some People from that Island, of which twenty were kill’d by the Caribbeeans, who had Gardens and Fish-ponds thereon: Not long after which Howell built a Fort here, and Garrison’d the same with French-men.

The Woods afford a delightful sight to the Eye, as also the Cinamon-Trees, whose Leaves never wither, a sweet smell to the Nose.

The Fish Lamantin.

The Ocean hereabouts produces plenty of Lamantins, which are dry’d like Haberdine. This Fish grows eighteen Foot long and seven thick; the Head thereof is like a Cows, with little Eyes, and a thick brown Skin, rough and speckled in some places, and hath two little Feet in stead of Fins; it feeds on Weeds, which grow on the Rocks and Banks; the Females bring two young ones at a time, which suck for some days; their Flesh palatable and wholsom, is streak’d with Fat, which when melted never putrifies; they are oftner taken in the Mouthes of Rivers than in the Ocean.

The Sea-Devils.

About this Isle, as well as the rest of the Caribbees, are Fishes call’d Sea-Devils, four Foot long, and proportionably thick, their Skins rough, their Heads flat, their Backs arm’d with Prickles, little black Eyes, wide Mouthes full of Teeth, and two Tusks that slick out of the same, four Fins, a long slit Tail, with which they swim exceeding swift, above their Eyes slick broad sharp Horns turn’d towards the Back; the Flesh is deadly poyson.

The Becune.

The Becune, which is eight Foot long, falls upon a Fish like a mad Dog, biting great pieces of the Flesh out of the Body, which occasions present Death; its Flesh is likewise poyson.

Sect. XVIII.
Todos Sanctos.

Situation of Todos Sanctos.

Southward from Guadalupe, and at the same Latitude with Marigalante, lie four Curious sorts of Shells. desolate Isles, call’d Todos Sanctos, and on their Shores a sort of Shell-fish call’d Lambis, from the resemblance of a Tongue; the Shells whereof the Indians Sound in stead of Horns when they give an Alarm; as also another sort call’d Porcelenes, of which the most esteem’d are without of a Carnation, and within of a Silver, or Skye-colour mix’d with Golden Beams. The next are the Black, mix’d with a pale Blue, and little Veins. But the most remarkable Shells are those, whose Back Nature hath mark’d in such a manner with Musical Notes, that one might almost express a Tune by them.

Mother-of-Pearl Oysters.

Moreover, it would amaze the Beholder, to see the Mother-of-Pearl Oyster moving at the Foot of a Rock; for at the Rising of the Sun they appear above the Water, and gape for the Dew, of which they have no sooner receiv’d a Drop, but they close their Shells, and fall to the Ground again.

Sect. XIX.
De Aves.

Situation of De Aves.

Westward from Todos Sanctos, at fifteen Degrees and forty five Minutes, lies the Isle De Aves.

Aigrettos.

Besides Ducks, Pluvers, Moor-hens, Geese, and the like Fowls (that suffer themselves to be catch’d by the Hands of Men, which are very strange to them) there are here also many rare sorts of Birds, as the white Birds call’d Aigrettos, which are somewhat bigger than Crows, with red Bills and Feet, and curious Plumes on their Heads; they often flye a great way off at Sea.

Craw-fowl.

The large Bird call’d The Craw-fowl, which feeds on Fish, hath a thick Head, a long flat Bill, hollow Eyes, and a short Neck, under which hangs the Maw, big enough to contain a Pail full of Water: On the Trees along the Sea-side they watch for Fish which swim near the top of the Water, and by their attentiveness on their Prey, are easily shot themselves.

Arras.

Here is likewise the Bird Arras, of the bigness of a Pheasant, but more resembling a Parraquito: their long Tail consists of divers colour’d Feathers, some have shining skye-colour’d Heads, Backs, and Necks, their Bellies and Wings of a pale Yellow; they are so stout, or rather so simple, that if they are not hit with the first Shot, they will stay for a second: They also learn to talk, but not so distinctly as the Canides, which are no way inferior in beauty to the Arras, nay exceed them very much: Monsieur du Montell above mention’d, seeing one at Corassao, describes it after this manner:

Description of the Canides.

“It deserves to be numbred (saith he) amongst the most beautiful Birds in the World: I took so particular notice of it, having had of them in my Hands many times, that I have the Idea’s of it still fresh in my Memory. Under the Belly, Wings, and Neck, it was of a waving Aurora-colour, the Back, and one half of the Wings, of a very bright Skye-colour, the Tail and greater Feathers of the Wings were mix’d with a sparkling Carnation, diversifi’d with a Skye-colour, as upon the Back a Grass-green and shining Black, which very much added to the Gold and Azure of the other Plumage: But the most beautiful part was the Head, cover’d with a Murrey Doun, checquer’d with Green, Yellow, and a pale Blue, which reach’d down wavingly to the Back: The Eye-lids were white, and the Apple of the Eye yellow and red as a Ruby Set in Gold: It had upon the Head a certain Tuft or Cap of Feathers of a Vermilion Red, sparkling like a lighted Coal, which was encompass’d by several other lesser Feathers of a Pearl-colour.

“If it were recommendable for all these extraordinary Ornaments, it was much more for its Familiarity and Innocency; for though it had a crooked Beak, and that the Claws with which it held its Meat and brought it to its Beak, were so sharp as to take away whatsoever it fastned upon, yet was it so tame as to play with little Children and never hurt them; and when one took him into his Hand, he so contracted his Claws, that the sharpness of them could not be felt: He had this Quality of a Dog, That he would Lick with his short and thick Tongue those who made much of him and gave him something he lik’d, put his Head to their Cheeks to Kiss and Caress them, and expressing his Acknowledgments by a thousand pretty Insinuations, he would suffer himself to be put into what posture one would, and took a certain pleasure in diverting those he thought his Friends: But as he was mild and tractable to those who were kind to him, so was he mischievous and irreconcileable to such as had injur’d him, and he could distinguish them from others, and make them feel the sharpness of his Beak and Claws.

“He pratled in the Dutch, Spanish, and Indian Languages, and in the last he sung Airs as a natural Indian: He also imitated the Cries of all sorts of Poultrey and other Creatures about the House; he call’d all his Friends by their Names and Sirnames, flew to them as soon as he saw them, especially when he was hungry; if they had been absent, and that he had not seen them a long time, he express’d his joy at their return by certain merry Notes; when he had sported himself till they were weary of him, he went away, and perch’d himself on the top of the House, and there he talk’d, sung, and play’d a thousand tricks, laying his Feathers in order, and dressing and cleaning himself with his Beak. He was easily kept; for not onely the Bread commonly us’d in that Island, but all the Fruits and Roots growing there, were his ordinary Food; and when he had more given him than he needed, he carefully laid up the remainder under the Leaves wherewith the House was cover’d, and took it when he had need. In a word, I never saw a more loving or more amiable Bird; ’twas a Present for any Prince, if he could have been brought over the Sea. This Bird had been brought from the Caribbee Islands to Monsieur Rodenborck, then Governor of the Fort and Dutch Colony, which is in the Island of Corassao.”

Sect. XX.
Dominico.

Situation of Dominico.

At fifteen Degrees and thirteen Minutes, lies the Island Dominico, so call’d because it was discover’d on a Sunday, about thirty Leagues long, and not much less in breadth, and diversifi’d with high Mountains, and exceeding deep Valleys; of which the Caribbeeans that dwell there relate, That formerly in one of the deepest of them, a huge and monstrous Serpent had an Army of Serpents to defend an invaluable Carbuncle which he had in his Head; which being cover’d with a thin Skin, was onely discernable when he drank or play’d, for then the lustre thereof lightned the whole Valley.

When first the French approach’d this Coast with their Ships, the Islanders going Aboard in their Canoos, barter’d Provisions for Coral, Crystal, and other Trifles.

The Manchenile Tree.

On this Isle also grows the famous Manchenile-Tree, which bears long Leaves, and sweet smelling Fruit, streak’d red, and tasting like a Hazle-Nut, but bringing a deadly Sleep upon those that eat of it; it seldom rots though it fall into the Sea, or any fresh Rivers, but is crusted over with a Shell resembling Salt-petre, and poysons the Water in such a manner, that all the Fish dying, are seen floating upon it; in the Trunk and Boughs thereof is a milky Juice, which dropping upon the Body, causes it to break out in Scabs, and if it chances to touch the Eyes, it takes away the Sight for nine days: and not less hurtful is the Moisture which drops from the Tree.

The Caribbeeans dip their Arrows in this poysonous Juice, against which Nature hath provided an excellent Medicine, being as followeth:

A Medicine against the poison of the Manchenile.

There are amongst the other Reptiles of America a sort of Snails, which creep into the Legs of dead Crabs, to keep themselves from the Weather; when taken they make a noise, and being laid before the Fire they come forth; the Water squeez’d out of them, or the Oyl drawn from them by the Sun, cures the Parts poyson’d by the Manchenile-Tree.

Sect. XXI.
Martinico.

Situation of Martinico.

Opposite to Dominico lies Martinico, by the Indians nam’d Matunina, which lying at fourteen Degrees and thirty Scruples, is forty five Leagues in circumference; It appears at a distance like three Mountains, the highest whereof resembles a Hat, and is seen in all parts of the Island, which, on the North where three Rocks deny access for Landing, seems to be divided into three Isles.

The Caribbeeans have been forc’d, after many bloody Battels, to surrender up this Island to the French: But before they were well setled, the Caribbeeans marching over exceeding high Mountains, deep Concavities, and thick Woods, fell upon them with all the Rage imaginable: the Reasons of which some attribute to Du Parquet, who in prejudice of the Martinican Caribbeeans, sent French-men over to Granada and Alouzia: others suppose, that they took up Arms to revenge the Death of their Countrey-men on St. Vincent, who were destroy’d by the French with poyson’d Brandy. But the French furnish’d with new Supplies, took sufficient Revenge; for they drove the Caribbeeans out of their Houses, and chac’d them into Woods and Deserts.

The Hills that are over-grown with Trees, are Receptacles for wild Beasts, especially Hogs and Serpents. The other Hills are Till’d and Sow’n, though not without great trouble.

The Tobacco which grows on the steep Ascents much exceeds that which grows in the Valleys, or in the Tracts of Land shaded with Trees.

The Island divided into five Wards.

Since the French, Anno 1635. (being sent from St. Christophers by the Lord Desnambuc) Setled themselves on this Island, under the Command of his Deputy Du Pont, they divided it into five Wards, separated from that part of the Isle which was inhabited by the antient Natives: Each Ward hath a Church, or at least a Chappel, Armory, Store-houses, and Dwelling-houses, like an intire Village.

The first Ward is call’d Pyloot, from a Caribbeean Captain, who was very familiar with Du Parquet, and inform’d him of his Peoples Designs.

The second, nam’d Capot, is wash’d by a River of the same Denomination, and hath many fruitful Plains.

The third retains the Caribbeean Name, being Carbet, signifying a Publick Structure, to which they us’d to resort to Feast, or hold Councils of War; not far from which the Governor dwelt in a Stone House: Near the Harbor stood also an Armory in a Valley, water’d by a fresh River which falls out of the Mountains, shaded with Trees and Gardens full of Rarities: But since the Governor gave this and many other fair Buildings to the Jesuits, he remov’d to the fourth Ward, call’d St. Peter, where he built a Castle, and furnish’d the same with Brass and Iron Guns to defend the Harbor.

A Stones-throw from the Governor’s House lies the Jesuits Cloyster, on the Banks of a pleasant Stream, built very artificially of Marble and Free-stone, and having a pleasant Prospect over the River, and adjacent Gardens, beautifi’d with the choicest of Flowers, Fruits, and Trees; and also a Vineyard, out of which they press a considerable quantity of Wine.

The last Ward, call’d Preacheur, extends East and West, some parts whereof swell into high Mountains, at the Feet whereof stand fair Structures; others sink into low Valleys or Savannas.

The Mahot-Tree.

Between the French Settlements and the Caribbeeans, runs an Arm of the Sea, along whose Shores grows abundance of the Mahot-Tree, which is full of Boughs from the top down to the Ground. The Bark of this Tree serves in stead of Ropes, and is also us’d to tie up Tobacco; the Wood it self is durable, and good for Building, wherefore most of the Houses built on Hills are of this Timber.

The best Harbor for Ships is between the Wards Carbet and St. Peter, defended from the Winds by high Hills.

The Diamond.

Not far from the Inlet of the Salt-pits, appears about half a League off at Sea, a Rock call’d The Diamond, being a Receptacle for an innumerable multitude of Birds, and especially wild Pigeons.

Besides the Streams that in the rainy Seasons run through the Dales and Savana’s, there are ten Rivers, which falling from the Mountains, glide through the Valleys into the Sea. Sometimes they swell in such a manner, that over-flowing their Banks, they wash down the Trees and Houses; which Inconvenience hath taught the French to build their Houses on Hills or rising Grounds.

The good Situation of this Island hath invited many Families thither.

Sect. XXII.
St. Lucia.

Situation of St. Lucia.

St. Lucia (by the French, Alouzie) is so call’d because it was discover’d on the thirteenth of December, Dedicated in the Kalendar to the Virgin Martyr Lucia, who was burnt at Syracuse: It lies Southerly from Dominico at thirteen Degrees and forty Minutes, and is ken’d at a great distance by two fiery Mountains; the most Easterly of which is higher than the other.

At the Feet of these two Mountains lie pleasant Valleys, shadow’d by close Woods, and moistned by clear Springs; near which heretofore a small number of Caribbeeans dwelling, maintain’d themselves with Fishing; they went stark naked, and painted their Bodies with red Oker, and drew a Vermilion Stroke from their Ears to their Noses.

An English Ship sent to Guinee to supply the Plantations there, Landed sixty six mutinous Persons here, who were all kill’d by the Inhabitants; but when Henry Jacobson Lucifer putting into the Bay of Lucia to Water there, Anno 1627. Landed to discover the Island, he found neither Man nor House, nor any thing but a barren Soil; yet notwithstanding Du Parquet sent his Deputy Rosselan with a Colony to Plant in this Island.

Sect. XXIII.
Barbados.

Situation of Barbados.

The Island Barbados, which was Planted by the English, Anno 1627. lies between thirteen and fourteen Degrees, and hath twenty five Leagues in circumference, and somewhat more in length than breadth, and is supply’d with a fresh-Water River, and several Pools. The Ground being fruitful in the producing of Tobacco, Cotton, Ginger, and especially Sugar, invited many People to Settle there, insomuch that in a short time it could shew twenty thousand Inhabitants besides Negro Slaves.

The Trees which grow on this Island, are not onely delightful, but profitable; amongst which the Roucou is one, with sharp Leaves, white Carnation Flowers like Stars, which hang by Clusters at the end of the Boughs, and after a while turn to a Cod full of vermilion Kernels: The Juice dry’d in the Sun and kneaded into Balls, is of a great value. Of the Bark of this Tree they make strong Ropes; and the Root is very wholsom, and of a pleasant taste.

The Fly Cayouyou.

Moreover, amongst the Insects that breed here, there are a sort of Flyes worthy of a short Description; the Caribbeeans call them Cayouyou, being about the bigness of a Beetle; they have two strong Wings, and under them thinner, which they never spread abroad but when they flye, and then they carry such a lustre in them, that they give as much Light in the Night as a lighted Candle, (their Eyes also at the same time glittering like Fire) making no noise when they flye; they feed on the Juice of Flowers, and are so smooth, that they are very apt to slip through ones Fingers, and when they find themselves to be taken, they hide their glittering Wings under the other.

The Indians tie these Flies to their Hands and Feet, so to have the benefit of their Light in the Night; and anoint their Bodies all over (at certain Solemnities wherein Candles are forbidden) with the Juice squeez’d out of them, which causes them to shine like a Flame of Fire: They catch them with a piece of Wood which they move in the Air, whereupon the Flyes going to sit, are taken with a Hat; but their Light vanishes if they are kill’d.

But as to what may farther be added concerning this Island, being one of the chief of our Plantations, we cannot better satisfie the curiosity of those who desire a true Information of all things that concern that Place, than by inserting verbatim a Letter from an intelligent Person who hath been long resident there, viz. Colonel Robert Rich, of no older Date than May 31. 1670. by which the present State and Condition of the Island, the Buildings and other Improvements made there by the Planters since they first possess’d it, in what Commodities of the Growth of the Countrey their chief Trade consists, their Strength, Militia, Government, and flourishing Commerce, and what-ever else is material to be imparted, may be clearly understood.

Colonel Rich his Description of the Barbados.

SIR,

I have lately seen your Proposal concerning an English Atlas, and having read Dr. Heylin’s Book of the Chorography and History of the whole World, his third Edition Corrected and Enlarged, Printed Anno 1666. I find him very short and erroneous in his Description of the Caribbee Islands, especially of this Island of Barbados, wherein I have been an Inhabitant more than eleven years. He saith,

1. The Island is seventeen or eighteen Miles in compass.

2. On the South ’tis furnish’d with a large and commodious Harbor.

3. The chief Commodities are Tobacco, and a kind of course Sugar, call’d Barbados Sugar, which must be quickly spent, or ’twill melt to nothing.

4. That this Island is worth all the Plantations made by the English, and yet that we hold it at the Courtesie of the Spaniard, without whose Leave and Liking, not of Force to hold it.

This Description of Dr. Heylin’s, in it self very false, is also much to the Dishonor of the English Nation, which makes me presume to trouble you with my own Observations, wherein having onely aim’d at the Truth, you shall not have cause to doubt of being misguided.

This Island of Barbados is seated in thirteen Degrees and twenty Minutes, length twenty two Miles, and in breadth fourteen and an half; It is naturally fortifi’d with Rocks and Shoals on the North and East side of it, where no Ship may safely Anchor, onely two or three places small Boats may go out and in to Fish. On the South-East and Westerly part, it is all along a Road when Ships may Ride at Anchor, but more especially in four chief Places, Roads and Bays thereof.

The principal Road or Bay is call’d Carlisle Bay, and lieth on the South-West part of the Island near its Center, and is a good Road, where five hundred Ships of any Burthen may Ride safely from all but South and Westerly Winds, which seldom in these Parts happen, they generally blowing Easterly, whence it is that we call the East parts Windward, and the West parts Leeward. Here lies also the chief Town for Trade, call’d formerly the Bridge-Town, but now St. Michaels, and having two Forts, answering each other, and a Platform between, which Commands the Road, and Defends the Town; the first and chiefest Fort is call’d Charles Fort, standing on Nedhams Point, lying out in the Sea to Windward of the Bay and Town, so that an Enemy keeping out of Command of this Fort, cannot (probably) come to do the Ships or the Town injury, for that they must come full in or against the Wind. This Fort is built strong with Stone and Lime; the Platform joyns to the Windward part of the Town; also the other Fort joyns to the Leeward part of the Town, all which are well fortifi’d and stor’d with great Guns. The Town consists of several Streets and Lanes, being about thirty Chain in length, and fifteen in breadth, and hath many fair and large Buildings, whereof the most are of Stone and Lime.

The second Road and Town is lately call’d Charles-Town, situate on Oysters-Bay, and lies about two Leagues to Windward of St. Michaels, having also two Forts and one Platform; the two Forts stand the one to Windward, and the other to Leeward of the Town and Road, and the Platform in the middle, all well furnish’d with great Guns. And although this Town be not a Place of much Resort for Shipping, yet here are many considerable Store-houses for Trade, wherein Monethly are kept the Court of Common-Pleas for that Precinct, and Weekly Markets.

The third Road and Town is lately call’d St. James’s, formerly the Hall, and is about two Leagues to the Leeward of St. Michaels, hath one very large Platform, and is otherwise well fortifi’d with Breast-works; and although few Ships come to Ride here, yet in this Town is maintain’d a great Trade with the Inhabitants adjacent; here also is kept Monethly the Court of Common-Pleas for this Precinct.

The fourth Road and Town is lately call’d Little Bristol, but formerly Sprights-Bay, which lieth about four Leagues to Leeward of St. Michaels, and hath two Forts well built, and strongly fortifi’d. To this Place come many Ships, especially from the City of Bristol, the which here Ride, unload and re-load, it being the next greatest Place of Repute to St. Michaels in the whole Island.

This Island is divided into eleven Parishes, and hath in it fourteen Churches and Chappels, and being subdivided into divers Plantations, small and great, hath Sugar-works accordingly, with fair and large Buildings made of Stone and Brick, the which generally are pleasant Habitations, and delightfully situated, most having pleasant Prospects to the Sea and Land.

The Inhabitants of this Island are English, Scotch, and Irish, and some, but very few of the Dutch and French Nation, who formerly liv’d here a time of Servitude, and now dwell as Free-men, some by their Trades, and others on Plantations; also some few Jews live here and Trade as Merchants, they having obtain’d Licence from His Majesty so to do; besides Mulatto’s and Negro’s which are here kept, and accounted for Slaves, the number of which some years since, upon search, were found to be sixty thousand Persons, viz. forty thousand Whites, and twenty thousand Blacks.

The standing Militia of this Island that are in readiness to meet together on all occasions, and which at other times are often and well Disciplin’d, consist of two Regiments of Horse, and five Regiments of Foot, wherein several Companies have near two hundred in a Company, and in some Troops more than a hundred Horse in a Troop; by all which you may easily apprehend how little of truth there is in that Saying, That we hold this Island at the Courtesie of the Spaniards, when those few English in Jamaica give the Spaniards such work to defend themselves.

The Growth and Manufacture of this Island and parts adjacent, is Sugars of all sorts, viz. Muscovado, Clay’d, and Refin’d; (I suppose I have seen here as good Sugar made as any is in the World) Gingers, Indico, and Cotton-wool; also Tobacco, Logwood, Fustick, green and yellow, and Lignum-vitæ: Of these four last heretofore much, but now no quantities to be had in this Island, onely to the Leeward great store. The first four mention’d Commodities receive prejudice to their Product by abundance of Rains or Droughts not happening their proper Seasons: also violent Winds lodge the Sugar-Canes, whereby the quantity and goodness is lessned. The chief time for Expectation is from January to September, when comes in the wet Season, that makes the Roads not Cartable, and usually puts an end to Making and Transportation of them. We have two Crops of Corn in a year, Planted usually when the Rains first come in, in May and November, which is gather’d in about October, and in March and April following. Wines of all sorts are here Imported, but of Portuguese and French the greatest quantities, viz. of Madera, upwards of fifteen hundred Tun yearly; of Spanish, upward of two hundred Tun; of French-Wines, upward of seven hundred Tun; besides Brandy and English Spirits; but of these latter now no great quantities Imported or spent, by reason of the general use of the Spirit of Sugar-Cane, call’d Rum, which the meaner sort, as Servants and Slaves, do not onely drink in great abundance, but much also is hence Transported into Virginia, Bermudas, and New-England. Here is also Imported great store of Provisions of all sorts, viz. Beef, Pork, Fish, &c. from Ireland, New-England, Virginia, Bermudas, New-found Land, &c. also Pease, Flour, Butter, Cheese, and Bisquet; likewise Timber, Boards, Pipe and Hogshead, Staves, &c. also Negro-Slaves from Guinee, and live Cattel, as Bulls, Cows, Asinego’s, and Horses, from the Cape de Verd Island, New-England; and from England, Servants, and all other Commodities for Plantations, and for Apparel; of all which great quantities are hither brought and sold.

The Shipping that comes to Trade to this Island belongs generally to England; some few Vessels are here built, and pass to and fro to the Leeward Islands; and some belong to New-England, Bermudas, &c. The number of Vessels which come hither to Trade in one year is found upon search to be about two hundred of all sorts, (some years more, some less) as Ketches, Sloops, Barques, &c. containing in Burthen fifteen thousand and five hundred and five Tun, according as they were here Entred, which is at the least a third part less than their true Burthen, by reason every Ship pays one pound of Powder per Tun, the means ordain’d by this Country for storing the Magazine; the greatest part of which Ships re-load with Sugars for England, and many go for New-England, Bermudas, Virginia, Tangier, &c. not always full loaden with this Countreys Growth. The usual Rate for Tunnage from hence to London, is from 4 l. to 5 l. per Tun; sometime when Ships are very plentiful, it is at 3 l. and less, and at other times when scarce, from 6 l. to 7 l. in the late War with the Dutch, it was at 10. 11. and 12 l. per Tun.

The Government is Constituted by the Laws of England, and Laws not repugnant to them, onely some particular Laws are here made, proper for this Place, by the Governor (or Deputy) and his Council, (which usually are from seven to twelve in number) and an Assembly that consists of twenty two Persons, chosen by the Free-holders, two out of every Parish.

Sect. XXIV.
St. Vincent.

Situation of St. Vincent.

The Island of St. Vincent, South-West from St. Lucia, and having sixteen Degrees of North-Latitude, was so call’d by the Spaniards, as having discover’d it on that Saint’s Day, being the fifth of April: It is accounted eight Leagues long and six broad, and rises round about with high Grounds and several Mountains, which are seen at a great distance.

This Island hath a very fruitful Soil, and for the bigness of it hath been long since well peopled with Caribbeeans before the arrival of the Spaniards, possessing here several Villages, to whom they are still sworn Enemies, but Truck’d with the Hollanders for Provisions, Horns, Axes, Knives, and other Trifles. At the West and South sides are convenient Bays to lie at Anchor and take Water in.

The Fruit Momen.

The Inhabitants highly esteem the Momen, growing to the bigness of an Apple-Tree; the Fruit which it bears resembles a green Cucumber, and is of a pleasant Juice, the Skin always green and prickly; the Seed which is in the same about the bigness of a French Bean, is generally black, and streak’d with Golden-colour’d Veins.

The Granadilla.

Here is also that Plant mention’d elsewhere, by the Spaniard call’d Granadilla, by the Dutch Rhang-Apple, and La Fleur de la Passion by the French; and it is so call’d, as being fancied to represent the thorny Crown of our Saviour, together with the Cross, Nails, Hammer and Pillar; the Plant runs along the Ground, unless it meet with a Pole by which it runs up.

Sect. XXV.
Bekia.

Situation of Bekia.

Not far from St. Vincent lies the Island Bekia, which reckons twelves Leagues in circumference, and lies at twelve Degrees and twelve Scruples of Northern Latitude: It hath a secure Harbor against all Winds; but because it is without fresh Water, it is onely frequented by the Caribbeeans that dwell on St. Vincent, who come hither to Fish, and visit certain little Gardens which they have there for their pleasure.

The Soil produces store of Water-melons, whose red juicy Pulp yields, when squeez’d, a great quantity of sweet Liquor, which is very refreshing, and good to create an Appetite; their white Flowers, notch’d at the end of the leaves, afford a delightful smell.

Anno 1633. Captain John Johnson Van Hoorn putting in to Bekia to catch Tortoises, found a fine Inlet on the West, and Eastward a Ridge of Rocks, Cotton growing wild in the Fields, and upon the Shore a kind of Snails call’d Burgun, under whose first Shell appear’d another of a Silver colour with black Specks.

Sect. XXVI.
Granada.

Situation of Granada.

Granada, lying at twelve Degrees and sixteen Scruples, like a Half-moon, from the North to the South, is full of Woods. Towards the South-West runs a fresh River into the Sea. The Shore very low affords good Anchorage at twelve Leagues distance. The Current grows exceeding strong here, and the Water also ebbs and flows in a few hours. Dirick Simonszoon Witgeest Sailing from Tabago, was amaz’d to see with what force the Current drove him to Granada.

The French possess it.

Hither Du Parquet at his own Charge sent three hundred Men from Martinico, who scuffled with the Inhabitants six Moneths before they could possess the same in Peace; and scarce had they obtain’d it at last, but by telling them that the French Assistance would be very advantageous unto them against the Arovages.

The Duke Seryllac in Paris inform’d of the Fertility of this Island, bought it of Du Parquet for a considerable Sum of Money: And indeed Granada is none of the meanest of the Caribbees, the Soil producing very good both Fruit and Timber-Trees, amongst which is the Latine-Tree, of a tall Body, but ordinary thickness, and in stead of Boughs, hang Leaves like Fans in long Stalks, which being ty’d together, serve for Roofs of Houses.

There is also the Tree Cocoa, which yet grows not so high here as in other parts of the West-Indies.

Sect. XXVII.
Tabago.

Situation of Tabago.

The next which comes in view is Tabago, (so call’d, as some think, from the quantity of that Drug there Planted) eight Leagues long and four broad, lying in the eleventh Degree and sixteen Minutes of Northern Latitude, and hath many high Mountains full of Wood, out of which glide eighteen Streams, which watering the Plains fall into the Sea.

Captain Vitgeest coming to an Anchor here, found a convenient Inlet on the East, and fresh Water to fill his Casks. Half a League from the Shore rise five Rocks, through which he Sail’d with his Ships. Within the Cliff opens a Bay, into which runs a River well stor’d with Fish. More Westerly lies a larger Inlet, which receives two delightful Streams. From the Western Promontory runs also a Cliff Northward into the Sea.

This Island is easily known by high Coasts which rise on the East side, and so grows lower by degrees. It is likewise made pleasant by many Walks of Trees.

The Sea produces abundance of those sorts of Fish which are common amongst us, besides Tortoises, that lay their Eggs in the Sand.

Cra-fish.

The Cra-fish thereabouts are not much unlike Lobsters, have white and well tasted Flesh, but hard to digest; they catch them in the Night on sandy Shelves with lighted Torches.

Crabs.

The Crabs get their Food very wonderfully here; for when they observe the Mussles or Oysters to Gape for fresh Air, they put Stones between their Shells, so that they not being able to shut them, they pull out the Fish with their Claws.

The Woods feed an innumerable company of Beasts somewhat resembling Hogs, (whose Navels are on their Backs) Opassums, Javaris’s, and Tatows, as also the Agoutys’s and Musk-Rats.

Agoutys.

The Agoutys’s are of a dark brown colour, and have little Tails, two Teeth in their upper, and as many in their lower Jaw; they make a noise as if they spoke, crying Couye; if hunted by Dogs, they run into hollow Trees, out of which they are routed by Smoak.

Musk-Rats.

The great Musk-Rats are as big as a Rabbet, and like them live in Holes made in the Ground, but resemble an European Rat, onely their Skins are black, except one part of their Bellies which are white; they smell so strong of Musk, that it overcomes those that carry them.

Serpents.

Amongst the Brambles breed also Serpents of a green colour, two yards long, and an Inch thick, feeding on Locusts and Birds, which they take in their Nests, but do no hurt to Mankind.

The Sassafras Tree.

But Tobago boasts chiefly of the Sassafras-Tree, which resembles the Pine-Tree, hath a firm and streight Body, and on the top Boughs spread like a Crown, the Bark of a dark colour and smooth, and smelling very sweet; the Leaves thin, notch’d, and of a deep Green, have also a delicate smell; the thinnest Roots appear above the Ground, and are exceeding good to cure green Wounds, stoppings and shortness of Breath occasion’d by Colds.

The Tobacco, by the Caribbeeans call’d Y-ouli, Planted among the Fruit-Trees, grows very plentifully here; it shoots up from a stringy Root, bitter of taste, with a thick Stalk, which shoots out Boughs with great Leaves, woolly underneath, and bears a kind of Violet Flower, which when dry’d, are succeeded by little Cods full of black Seed; and to prevent the over-growing of it, they cut off the top of the main Stalk.

The Bird Colibry.

The Bird Colibry, which is exceeding beautiful, makes his Nest under the Tobacco-Leaves.

A company of Townsmen of Walcheren, having a Grant from the States of the United Provinces, sent a Colony to Tabago; but they being scarce two hundred in all, were for the most part destroy’d by the Caribbeeans; the rest weak or sickly, fearing the same Entertainment, sought to save themselves; so that the Island has not formerly been frequented but by the French from Martinico, and Guadalupe, who for some time came over onely to catch Turtles and Lamantins there.

The Caribbeeans also either in their March against, or Return from the Arovages, Landed here for necessary Provisions; But of late the Lord Lampsen hath Setled a Plantation in this desolate Island.

Sect. XXVIII.
St. Christophers.

Situation of St. Christophers Island.

St. Christophers, a pretty distance from Tobago, receiv’d its Denomination from Christopher Columbus, invited thereto by the shape of a great Mountain, having as it were another lesser on one of its Shoulders, being fancy’d to represent the Figure of the suppos’d Giant Christopher, who is reported to have carry’d our Saviour in the appearance of a little Child on his Shoulders through a deep Sea.

This Island lying seventeen Degrees and twenty five Minutes Northward of the Equinoctial Line, hath twenty five Leagues in circumference.

The Soil light and sandy, refuses not the production of divers sorts of Fruits common amongst us.

In the middle of the Island rises a high Mountain, out of which run fresh Streams, that sometimes swell so high with sudden Rains, that they drown all the Countrey near them.

The Division of the Island into several Wards.

This Island being jointly the Plantation of both English and French, was divided into four Wards, two whereof have been long since in possession of the French, and the other two in possession of the English, strangely divided one from another; for the English in one Ward cannot go to the other without troubling the French; and so on the contrary: the English have more Rivers and People, the French more plain Land, fitter for Cultivation, and Forts furnish’d with Guns and Soldiers. At the Entrances of the Paths which lead into the several Wards stand Watch-houses, where Sentinels, or Watch-men stand daily in their turns.

In a Bay of the Sea they found a brave Salt-pit, from whence a sandy Cliff runs so far into the Ocean, a that some have swum from the end thereof over to the Island Nevis.

A Silver Mine hath been long since discover’d on this Island, in which the English and French claim equal Interest, but neither Party make any benefit of it for want of Miners.

The high Mountains, the Springs of boyling sulphurous Water, and brambly Woods, hinder all passage through the middle of the Island: The Ground runs more and more sloaping to the Sea-side, and is divided into several High-ways, along which stand convenient Houses, cover’d with red or glaz’d Slate, shaded with Trees, and environ’d with pleasant Gardens, to which there is a delightful Prospect from the Fields, of the green Tobacco-Leaves, the yellow Sugar-Canes, Ginger, and Potato’s.

Basse-Terre the chief Town belonging to the French.

Besides the scatter’d Buildings, the French have built a compleat Town near the convenientest Harbor of their Quarter, call’d Basse-Terre, where the Merchants dwell in fair Houses built of Brick and Free-stone; whither all sorts of People bring their Commodities, and Truck their European Goods for such as St. Christophers produceth. All manner of Trades and Handicrafts live also in this Town, and a Court of Judicature is kept every Week. The Church built of Free-stone, is cover’d with the aforesaid red Slate, and was formerly Govern’d by the Capuchins; but they being dismiss’d Anno 1646. the Government was given to the Jesuits and Carmelites; who also built themselves other stately Edifices: but the Jesuit Henrick du Vivier was the first who bore the chiefest Command over all.

The Sick that have not sufficient Means to maintain them, have an Hospital appointed, where all Necessaries are provided for them; and to which is added a School for the bringing up of poor Children.

Description of the Castle.

But the chiefest Structure is the Castle, on the building whereof the Lord Poincy spar’d no Cost; it is built half a French Mile from the Sea at the Foot of a high Mountain, shadowed with great Trees. In the Way thither stand the Houses of the prime Officers; and a long Walk of Orange and Lemmon-Trees leads to a large Court before the Front of the Castle it self, which is built square with Bricks and Free-stone three Stories high; and the Entrance into it is ascended by a large pair of Stairs; near the Gate which opens to the West, stand great Stone Cisterns, into which they receive the Water through Pipes laid under Ground; the Chambers and Halls are very lightsom and high, and the Walls of them adorn’d with Cedar; a flat Terrace on the top yields a pleasant Prospect all over the Countrey; the Windows in the Front look open not onely upon the Orange Walk, but also upon several delightful Plantations of Sugar-Canes and Ginger.

Westward appear several Mountains, whose high Heads are invested with ever-flourishing Trees; and between the Palace and those Mountains a very large and stately Garden, full of all manner of Flowers and other delightful Plants, as well those commonly known amongst us, as those peculiar to that part of the World; in the middle thereof stands a Fountain, deriving its Source from the Foot of a neighboring Hill.

The Winds which blow from the Hills, and especially those cool Blasts daily coming out of the East, so tempers the hot Climate, that it becomes very tolerable.

When any News arrives here of the French Conquests in Europe, they sound the Trumpets on the top of the Castle, and the Standards and Ensigns formerly taken by the Governor in the Field, are hung out of the Windows.

On one side of the Castle stands a Chappel, and somewhat farther on a rising Plain, a row of Houses, inhabited by certain Retainers to the Governor, and is call’d Angola. The Offices and Lodgings for the Governor’s Servants are built of Brick, about the Castle, which is fortifi’d with five Sconces, whereon are planted several Guns.

The Governor keeps nine hundred Slaves, and a hundred French-men, to work in his three Sugar-Mills, to till his Ground, and for his Houshold-Service.

Several French Gentlemen have also built many fair Houses here; amongst which the chiefest are those on which Poucy, Treval, Benevent, Girand, Auber, de la Roziere, de St. Andant, de l’ Esperance, and de la Loche spent great sums of Money.

The English also are not much inferior to them in their Counties.

The English Plantations in this Island.

Their Churches are five in all; first on the Point of the Palm-Tree stands a fair Church; a second near the great Road, below the English Governor’s House; a third at the Sandy Point; which are all well built, and large enough for a considerable Congregation; the other two at the Inlet Cayoune are short of the three first. The Ministers thereof receiv’d formerly their Benefices from the Bishop of Canterbury, in Cromwell’s time from the Tryers, as they were call’d; but of late, since the King’s Restauration, from the Bishop of Canterbury again.

The best Houses belonging to the English were built by Mr. Warner, Mr. Rich, Mr. Evrard, and Col. Geffreyson all successively Governors of the Place.

Their success at their first Landing.

It was in the Year 1625. that the English and French jointly (Desnambuc Commanding the French, and Thomas Warner the English) Landed on this Island of St. Christophers, at a certain time when the Caribbeeans, perswaded by their Boyez to destroy all Strangers, were ready up in Arms, but they met with such Entertainment, that they soon lost their Courage, and yielded possession to the Assailants: Not long after which Desnambuc and Warner went (the one to Paris, and the other to London) to inform their Kings of the Condition of St. Christophers, and to raise a Company which might promote the Planting of it: Both attain’d their Desires, and had fresh Assistance given them; for both Kings favor’d the Design, in regard of the good Conditions that were propos’d to those that should go Undertakers thither: And to prevent all Contentions between the English and French, they made Boundaries on each side; but Hunting, Harbors, Fishing, Mines, Trees for Wainscoting, and the like, were to remain in common; and each was to assist the other. The English Plantation increased daily more than the French; having constant Supplies from the Company in London; when as on the contrary, the Merchants at Paris grew weary, being desirous first to have a Return for what they had already spent, though the Countrey was not yet Manur’d: wherefore Desnambuc going thither himself, made the Company understand that they could not possibly expect to receive a Return, unless the Countrey were Planted with Tobacco, Indigo, Ginger, and Sugar, which requir’d both Time and People. But whilst the Business seem’d to go on prosperously, a great Accident hapned which threw down the Work to nothing: for the Spanish King set out a Fleet within the fore-mention’d Year, of one and thirty Gallions, three Galeasses, and four Pinnaces, with seventy five hundred Men, under the Command of Frederick de Toledo, Emanuel de Mineses, and John Fajardo, from Cadiz, when before the Island St. Jago there lay at the same time twenty two Portuguese Galleys, fourteen Carvils, carrying four thousand Men, Commanded by Antonio Nunnez Barreio, and Francisco de Almeida, who joyning with the Spaniards, took the City St. Salvador, and went about wholly to chase out of the Caribbee Isles all the English and French: in which Attempt nine English Ships lying before Nevis, were all taken by Toledo, who Sail’d within Cannon-shot of St. Christophers, Commanded at that time by the French Captain Rossey, the Forts cast up by the English and French not being stor’d with Provisions nor Ammunition, and consequently no way able to endure a Siege, and the less, because the Works were not quite finish’d; nevertheless Desnambuc immediately drew up his Soldiers to the Low-land, where he lay Intrench’d along the Coast, to prevent the Enemies Landing; but Rossey suffer’d the Spaniards to Land without the least Resistance: whereupon young Du Parquet Sallying out of the Sconces, fell valiantly upon the first Company, but being forsaken by his Men, was run down by the Multitude and kill’d: In the mean time all their Sloops full of Men Landed, insomuch that Rossey fearing to be surrounded, left his Trench and went up into the High-lands, whereby the Spaniards became Masters of the Fort, but did not pursue their Victory, as suspecting that the French might lie in Ambuscade in the next Wood; and indeed they suspected not in vain, for the French having undermin’d their Forts, had laid Gun-powder in some of the Cellars, which firing, blew up very many of the Spaniards, whilst Desnambuc Embarquing himself, sav’d those which were not slain by the Enemy’s Sword. Mean while the English relying on the League between the King of England and the Spaniard, made no Resistance, (notwithstanding they were inform’d that Frederick Toledo had quite ruin’d the French Plantation, and put them all to the Sword) but sent Agents to Toledo, to put him in mind of the League between Spain and England, which he not taking notice of, alledg’d, That Pope Alexander the Sixth, when a Controversie arose concerning the new Discoveries in the East and West, between the Crowns of Castile and Portugal, had determin’d that Castile had sole Right to the Western World, and therefore that St. Christophers, being a part of the Western World, according to the Pope’s Gift, belong’d to his Master Philip; and insisting upon that Allegation, he commanded them to quit their Right to the Place; to which purpose he restor’d them six of the nine Ships taken at Nevis, on Condition that they should immediately set Sail for England, onely those whom the six Vessels were not able to carry, were permitted to stay on the Island till the next opportunity: After which Toledo weighing Anchor, was scarce out of sight, when the English began to take new Courage, and gathering together to repair their ruin’d Works as well as possibly they could with what Forces they had left; for besides those who went for England in the six Ships, being near two thousand, the Spanish Admiral took six hundred choice English, which he distributed amongst his Fleet; whilest Desambuc suffer’d a great deal of hardship, not onely through ill Weather at Sea, but also for want of Provisions; Having during this time been on the Islands St. Martin, Montserrat, and Antego, thinking to have possess’d himself of some or other of them in stead of St. Christophers, but not finding such a fruitful Soil, and convenient Situation, as what he had been forc’d to forsake, he was not forward to fix there, but rather judg’d it convenient to enquire concerning the Condition of St. Christophers, and at last being inform’d by a Ketch, that the Enemy was gone to Havana, and the English were busie in Tilling their Lands, he return’d to his old Station; where nevertheless their Endeavors to repair what was ruin’d, had been in vain, by reason of the scarcity of Provisions, and want of other Necessaries, had not in their greatest extremity some Netherland Vessels arriving there, furnish’d them with Provisions, Clothes, and other Necessaries, on bare promises of payment: But not long after growing rich with Tobacco, Sugars, Ginger, and Indigo, they made Satisfaction to all their Creditors, and at last attain’d to the Condition before mention’d.

In the late War between Us and the Dutch, the French taking advantage of our Engagement, endeavor’d to destroy our Plantations there, and to make themselves Masters of the whole Island; but the Matter being at last brought to some Agreement, Sir Charles Wheeler hath been very lately sent over thither by His Majesty to re-settle Affairs there, and order the Capitulations between the French and English.

CHAP. XIX.
The Islands Sotavento, and the Isle Trinidado.

In the Division we found to be made of the Islands that lie between Florida and New Spain, and Southern America, the last are the Isles of Sotavento, which are reckon’d to be these three, Margareta, Cubagua, and Tabago, but the last is by most accounted, and hath been mention’d amongst the Caribbees.

Situation of Margareta.

Margareta, so call’d from the abundance of Pearls (of which the Spanish Appellation comes near the Latine Margaritæ) found there by the Spaniards at their first Discovery, lies about the twelfth Degree of Northern Latitude over against the Main Land of Cumana, from which it is distant about seven Leagues: It is accounted sixteen Leagues long, and half as much in breadth, and was discover’d by Columbus in his third Voyage in the Year of our Lord 1498. and was at first in great reputation, in regard of the rich Pearl-fishing upon its Coasts, wherein the Spaniards (more favorable it seems to the Natives of this Place than usual, because of their readiness to discover their Treasures) employ’d Negro’s, brought from the Coast of Guinee, whom by severe Punishments inflicted, they forc’d to such excessive Labor, that many of them, though excellent Divers, were drown’d, others either devour’d, or lam’d by the ravenous great Fish thereabouts, and by destroying the very Seed through their insatiable greediness after Pearl, brought the Trade of Pearl-fishing in a short time to a very small Account, in respect of what it might have been, had it been well husbanded. Nor hath this Island of late Years been much frequented, only in the Year 1601. Captain Parker with a Fleet of English put on Shore here, and took as many Prisoners as he had five hundred pounds of Pearl for the Ransom of, and at his coming away took a Ship he met from off the Coast of Angola, with three hundred and seventy Negro’s aboard her, who were going to be sold for Slaves.

The Soil is not unfruitful, bringing forth several sorts of Fruit, and store of Maiz, and probably if improv’d, would as well bear Wheat, and other usual kinds of Grain; but there is great want of Water, which the Inhabitants are troubled to fetch from the neighboring Continent.

Towns and Places of chief note.

The Places of chief note, are 1. Monpater, a Fort built by the Spaniards in a Nook of the Island, lying Eastward to secure the Pearl-fishing Trade, and to defend the Town where the Governor resides, as also the Treasurer of the King of Spain’s Customs of Pearl, which have been formerly valu’d at 50000 l. yearly.

2. El valle de Santa Lucia, two Leagues from this Town, and as much from the Sea, a Spanish Colony.

3. Macanao, the onely noted Place belonging to the Natives.

Sect. II.
Cubagua.

Situation of Cubagua.

Cubagua lies South-West of Margarita, about the eleventh Degree of North-Latitude, a League or thereabouts distant from Margarita, and six Leagues from the nearest Continent, and about three Leagues in circumference. This is also a very great Place for Pearl-fishing, the benefit whereof hath been so considerable, that the King of Spain’s Fifths are said to have amounted some years to fifteen thousand Ducats; but otherwise of a poor and barren Soil, not onely destitute of Water, but of Fruit, Grain, Herbage, and all manner of Cattel and eatable Beasts, except a few lean Coneys; nevertheless, in respect of the Pearl-fishing Trade, the Spaniards have Planted here a Colony, which they call’d New Cadiz, having plenty of Provisions brought them from the adjoining Coasts, and soon after their first Planting grew in a short time so powerful, that they became Masters of one of the best Ports of those Seas, call’d Maracapana Venezuela; but upon an Alarm of the Salvages of Cumana, for a while deserted the Island, and betook themselves to Hispaniola; from whence nevertheless being remanded back with fresh Supplies, under the Command of James de Castellon, they soon re-instated themselves in their former Plantation, and made it more strong and flourishing than before; in which state they remain’d as long as the Pearl-fishing Trade continu’d, but that decaying, the splendor also of this Colony declin’d: so that at present the onely thing which makes the Place remarkable, is a Fountain on the East part of the Island, not far from the Sea, yielding a liquid bituminous Water, of singular use in Medicine, and sometimes found floating on the Sea at two or three Leagues distance.

The Island Coche.

About four Leagues distant from Cubagua there is an Island call’d Coche, about three Miles in compass; It was discover’d in the Year 1529. and was formerly little less considerable for Pearl-fishing than the other two.

Sect. III.
Trinidado.

Situation of Trinidado.

The Island of Trinidado was first discover’d by Columbus, Anno 1447. in his third Voyage, and by him so call’d, as some guess, from its three Points or Promontories; but that seems not so probable, in regard it is otherwise call’d La Trinidad, or Insula Sanctæ Trinitatis, and therefore is likely to have been denominated upon a religious Account: It lieth nine Degrees or thereabouts distant from the Line, at the Mouth of the River Orenoque, and is separated from the Coast of Paria, over against which it lies by a Straight that is three Miles over, and which for the dangerousness of passing it, Columbus, the first Discoverer of it, call’d Bocca del Draco; the length thereof from the most Southern Angle call’d Punta del Andrada, to the North-East, call’d Punta del Galera, is reckon’d twenty five Leagues, (those that reckon fifty, may be suppos’d to mistake Leagues for Miles) and the breadth about eighteen.

Chief Commodities of the Island.

The Air of this Place is so impure, that it is accounted the unwholsomest Island of all the Indies; nevertheless the Soil is not unfertile, as bringing forth Sugar-Canes, Cotton, Maize, Tobacco of the best kind, with other Commodities of the general growth of the West-Indies, besides store of good Fruit and Cattel; and one part of the Island call’d Terra de Bea, produceth great plenty of Pitch, but not of the best kind; and there have been discover’d several Veins of Gold and other Metals.

The Natives, some say, were antiently call’d Cairi, or Carai, and were distinguish’d into several Clans or Tribes, each under the Government of a Casique, or petty Prince; but most of them dreading the Spaniards Cruelty, deserted the Island, and Setled themselves in Guiana; and at present both this Place, Guiana, and El Dorado, have of Custom one and the same Governor, whose Place of Residence here is St. Josephs, the chief, if not onely Town of the Island; it stands Southward upon the Carone. Here most of that Tobacco is made, which is sold amongst us for Spanish. In the Year 1595. Sir Walter Raleigh possess’d himself of it, being then but a petty Village of about forty Houses, and took Prisoner the then Governor Antonio Berreo, who, in all probability, to ingratiate himself with him, gave him some light towards the discovery of Guiana.

Tabago.

On the North-East of Trinidado, and not above eight Miles distant from it, lies the Island of Tabago, which hath been already treated of, as one of the Caribbees, though some will have it one of the Sotavento; it is otherwise call’d New Walcheren, from a Town of that Name in Zealand, from whence a Colony of Netherlanders was sent to Plant it.

Virgin Gorda.

Amongst others of the small obscure Islands hereabouts, is Virgin Gorda, which is sometimes reckon’d amongst the Caribbee Islands; but since there is nothing considerable to be spoken of it, it is sufficient that it hath been mention’d, though not punctually in its proper place.

CHAP. XX.
California.

California how distinguish’d.

Having before made mention of California, as it is by some taken for that large portion of Northern America which lies most Southward, and also utmost West of all that is known of the New World, and having treated of those several Provinces which are generally reckon’d to be comprehended in it, (excepting California strictly taken, as it is generally granted to be an Island) viz. Quivira, Cibola, and Nova Albion, lying on the Continent (though there want not those who make Nova Albion onely the North part of California) we shall close up our Discourse of these Islands that lie Northward of the Equinoctial Line with the aforesaid California, specially so call’d, which was by many thought and describ’d to be but a Peninsula, or half Island, by reason that the Bay which divides it from Quivira and New Gallicia, towards the North runneth much narrower than it doth Southerly, which made them think, that somewhere or other at the North it was joyn’d to the Main Land of America; But later Discoveries, as hath been said, have found it to be a perfect Island, and altogether separate from the Continent: for about the Year 1620. some Adventurers beating upon those Coasts Northward, accidentally, and before they were aware, fell upon a Straight, the Waters whereof ran with such a Torrent and violent Course, that they brought them into Mar Vermiglio, whether they would or no, and before they knew it, and by that means discover’d that California was an Island, and that the Waters which were observ’d to fall so violently into that Sea towards the North, were not the Waters of any River emptying it self into the Bay from the Main Land, as was formerly thought, but the Waters of the North-West Sea it self, violently breaking into the Bay, and dividing it wholly from the Continent: It lieth North and South, extending it self in a vast length, full twenty Degrees of Latitude, viz. from twenty two to forty two; but the breadth nothing answerable: The most Northern Point of it is call’d Cape Blanche; that to the South, Cape St. Lucas, memorable for that rich and gallant Prize which Captain Cavendish, in the Year 1587. being then in his Voyage about the World, took from the Spaniards near to this Place. As for the Island it self, it is at present little, if at all inhabited by the Spaniards; whether it be that they want Men to furnish new Plantations, or that they find no matter of invitation and encouragement from the Countrey, or perhaps that the access thither be not so easie: for ’tis reported to be wonderfully well peopled by the Natives, and that there were found onely upon the Coasts and along the Shore of Mar Vermiglio, twenty or twenty three Nations, all of different Languages; though from the particular Narrations that have been made of the Voyages of several eminent Persons into these Parts, it appears that the Spaniards have taken great pains in the discovery thereof, and also from the several Spanish Names of Places, that they have had Plantations here formerly, however neglected at present.

The Customs and Manners of the Natives.

The Countrey is abundantly well stor’d with Fish and Fowl, as appears partly by the Natives, who take a huge pride in making themselves gay with the Bones of the one, with which they load their Ears, and sometimes their Noses also; and with the Feathers of the other, which ordinary People wear onely sticking about their Wastes; but Great Persons, and such as will be fine indeed, beset their Heads strangely with them, and have commonly one Bunch of them bigger than ordinary hanging down behind them like a Tail.

Having no knowledge of the true God, they worship what the Devil will have them, that is, the Sun, attributing to it onely the increase of their Plants, healthful Seasons, and most of the other good things they enjoy, or are sensible of.

Their Government.

Their Government is said to be onely Oeconomical, each Father ordering the Affairs of his Family apart, without subjection to any other Superior; yet so well manag’d, that they live in good Peace one with another; not without many good Laws and Customs, viz. That they allow but one Wife to one Man; That they punish Adultery with Death; That they suffer not Maids to talk or converse with Men till they be Married; That Widows may not Marry till they have Mourn’d at least one half year for their Husbands deceased; and divers others of like nature, which perhaps, if the truth were known, do more properly belong to the Natives of Utopia, or New Atlantis, than to these of California.

Places of note.

The Places therein, as yet observ’d, are onely upon the Sea-coasts, 1. The Capes of St. Clara and St. Lucas, the one at the South-East end of the Island, looking towards New Gallicia, the other at the South-West, looking into the Sea, and towards Asia.

2. St. Cruce, so nam’d from its being first discover’d on Holy-Rood-Day, being a large and convenient Haven, not far from Cape St. Clara.

3. Cabo de las Playas, so call’d from a company of little bare Hillocks appearing from the Sea, and is more within the Bay.

4. Cabo Baxo, so term’d, as lying towards the bottom of the Gulf.

5. St. Andrews, another convenient Haven upon an Island of the same Name.

6. St. Thomas, an Island at the Mouth of the Gulf or Bay, of about twenty five Leagues in compass, rising Southerly with an high mountainous Point, under which is a convenient Road for Shipping, and twenty five Fathoms of Water.

On the other side of the Island, towards the Main Sea, there is 1. St. Abad, a good Haven, and almost surrounded with a pleasant and fruitful Countrey.

2. Cape Trinidado, a noted Promontory.

3. Cape de Cedras, so call’d (together with a small Island near it) from the store of Cedars growing thereabouts.

4. Enganno. 5. Puebla de las Canoas, so nam’d from the abundance of those little Boats which the Americans generally use, and do call Canoos, whereof perhaps some store are made there.

6. Cabo de Galera, from its resemblance to a Rat.

It is believ’d there are many more Promontories and Bays on both sides of this Island, besides Rivers and Islets, yet not nam’d, and altogether unknown. Moreover Dr. Heylin hath well observ’d, that those above-mention’d are the Names onely of Places, and not of Towns and Villages, though doubtless there must needs have been some scatter’d Houses, built formerly by the Spaniards in so many Expeditions.

Cortez the first Discoverer of these Parts.

The first Discoverer of these Parts was Ferdinando Cortez, who having in the Year 1534. set out two Ships to that purpose from St. Jago, a Haven of New Spain, and not finding the Success answerable to his Expectation, went next Year himself in Person, and pass’d a good way up the Gulf, but for want of Provisions was forc’d to return without having done any thing to the purpose.

In 1539. one Francisco, a Companion of Cortez in the former Expedition, Set out upon his own Charges, and having Coasted all about, both upon the Eastern and Western Shores, he at last Landed, but not without notable opposition from the Natives, who with much clamour, and many antique Gestures set upon his Men so furiously with Stones and Arrows, that they had met with a shrew’d Repulse, had it not been for the Valor of their Auxiliaries, the Mastiff Dogs, which it seems they us’d to carry along with them in those kind of Voyages; but at last he got footing so far, that he took possession in the Name of the King of Spain with the usual Formalities; and following the Example of Columbus set up a Cross in the Place for a Memorial and Testimony of his having been there.

Marco de Nisa his Relation of these Parts.

Much about the same time Marco de Nisa a Franciscan, undertaking a Voyage into these Parts, reported Wonders at his Return, of the plenty of golden Mines, stately Cities, set out with magnificent Buildings, the very Gates whereof were enrich’d with Turquoises, and other Precious Stones, and whose meanest Inhabitants went glittering in Gold and Mother of Pearl, and of the flourishing Condition of the Kingdoms of Acu, Tonteac, and Marata; whereupon the Governor of New Gallicia was sent by the then Vice-Roy of Mexico, with great hopes of bringing back a Confirmation of these Reports; but whether out of spite to be deceiv’d in his Expectation, or having real cause so to do, he represented all things as mean and despicable, as the Fryer had proclaim’d them rich and glorious.

De Alarcon his Voyage.

The next that went upon this Design was Ferdinando de Alarcon, who is reported to have Sail’d many Leagues up a River call’d Buena Guia, and there to have receiv’d Homage of Naguacatus, one of the Heads of the Californian Tribes.

Cabrillo his Expedition.

One more Attempt was made in the Year 1642. by Roderico Cabrillo, who discover’d the Island of St. Luke, and another call’d The Island of Possession; and this was the last we hear of that thought it worth while to go an Undertaker to these Coasts, and ever since all Undertakings hither have been so wholly laid aside, that what-ever was once discover’d in these Parts, seems rather to be lost and forgotten, than any way improv’d.

As for Nova Albion, whereas many determine it to be onely the utmost Northern part of California, though it doth not absolutely appear to be so from the Relation of Sir Francis Drake’s Discovery of it, we judge it agreeable to Method and Decorum not wholly to omit the mention of it in this place, though it hath been already spoken of, and the aforesaid Relation deliver’d at large amongst the rest of those Provinces of largely-taken California, which were taken for granted to be upon the Continent.

Drakes Account of the Countrey.

Drake and his Company brought home this Description of the Countrey and its Inhabitants, viz. That the Countrey was exceedingly well stor’d with Deer, Grazing up and down the Hills by thousands in a company; That the Men generally went naked all over, the Women using onely a piece of a Mat, or some such thing instead an Apron; That their Houses were built onely of Turf and Osier, yet so wrought together, that they serv’d very well to keep out the Cold; in the midst of it was their Hearth where they made their Fire, and lay all round about it together upon several Beds of Bull-Rushes. What their Towns Were, or whither they had any, is altogether unknown.

The Third Book,
CONTAINING
A DESCRIPTION
OF
PERUANA
OR,
Southern America.

CHAP. I.

Situation and Form of Southern America.

Having compleated our Description of Mexicana, or Northern America, being that great Peninsula which lies Northward of the Isthmus, or Straight of Darien, together with all the Islands on the North side of the Equinoctial Line, we come now to the Southern Part, otherwise call’d Peruana, from Peru the chief Kingdom thereof, being the other great Peninsula, which lies Southward of the aforesaid Straight: It is generally resembled to the form of a Pyramid revers’d; the Basis whereof, that is to say, the more Southerly parts of it towards Magellanica and the Straights, extend themselves largely both East and West, becoming more sharp and streight towards the North, and those parts by which it is joyn’d to Mexicana: in the whole it is suppos’d to contain a Circuit of seventeen thousand Miles at least, and is water’d with four of the greatest Rivers of the World, besides abundance of lesser Streams, which issuing from the Andes and other Mountains of the Countrey, do run from all Parts both into the North and South Sea, much fertilizing the Countreys through which they pass; the four principal are these following:

The chief Rivers thereof.

1. Orellana, so call’d from the first Discovery thereof by Franciscus de Orellana, otherwise the River of Amazons, from a Generation of warlike Women, who (as the Tradition goes) inhabited certain Countreys lying upon the Banks thereof. This riseth in the Province of Peru, and runneth a Course of little less than five thousand Miles, discharging it self at last into the North Sea, through a Channel, as some say, of threescore Leagues broad, and yet with such a violent Current or Stream, that it is said to keep its natural colour and taste almost thirty Miles in the Sea.

2. Orenoque, by some call’d Raliana, from Sir Walter Raleigh, who endeavor’d to discover it, a River of the Province of Guiana, whose Head or Spring is not yet discover’d: It is said to be Navigable a thousand Miles together by the tallest Ships, and no less than two thousand by Pinnaces and smaller Vessels, and dischargeth it self likewise into the North Sea by sixteen several Channels or Mouths, making thereby several Islands; some whereof are said to be of good bigness, and to lie at a distance of a hundred Miles or more one from the other.

3. Maragnon, a River of a yet larger Course than any of the former, being, as ’tis said, no less than six thousand Miles from its Head, which is out of the Andes in Peru, to its Fall, which is likewise into the North Sea about Cape Blanco, by a Channel of seventy Leagues in breadth.

4. Rio de la Plata, otherwise call’d Paraguay, a River of two thousand Miles Course, and falling as the rest into the North Sea, by a Channel of threescore Miles over, and about thirty Degrees Southward of the Line, towards the Straights of Magellane.

The Mountains Andes.

The Andes, or Mountains before mention’d being the most noted, and biggest of all America, and indeed of the whole World, and thought by Cortesius to be the same with Sephar, spoken of in the tenth Chapter of Genesis, run above a thousand Leagues in length from Timama, a Town of New Granada in the Province of Popayan, and are in the narrowest place about twenty Leagues broad; and also of equal heighth with, if not higher than Caucasus it self: the Ascent to them is unpassable, except in very few places, by reason of craggy Precipices, and wild overgrown pathless Woods, serving onely for a shelter to Serpents and other poysonous Animals, which are there so numerous, that a whole Army of one of the Kings of Peru is reported to have been destroy’d by them; and what-ever People there are inhabiting in any of these Woods and Fastnesses, must needs be in the very utmost degree of rude and brutish salvageness.

Some divide Southern America into Peruviana and Brasiliana: Peruviana they subdivide into Terra Firma and Peru; Brasiliana into Brasile and Paraguay: But the most receiv’d and commodious Division is into these particular Provinces following, all of them wealthy and large, viz. 1. Castella Aurea, or Golden Castile, 2. Nova Granada, or The New Kingdom, as they call it. 3. Peru, specially so call’d. 4. Chile. 5. Paraguay. 6. Brasile. 7. Guiana. 8. Lastly Paria, with some lesser Islands adjoyning to all or most of these Provinces, and commonly reckon’d as part of them.

CHAP. II.
Castella Aurea, otherwise call’d Terra Firma.

Description of Castella Aurea.

Castella de Oro, as the Spaniards call it, or Golden Castile, taketh up all the rest of the Isthmus, or Straight of Darien, which hath not been yet spoken of, being bounded Eastward, and to the North-East, with the Atlantick Ocean; and on the West with Mare del Zur, and some part of Veragua; Southward it hath the new Kingdom of Granada. It is call’d sometimes Terra Firma, because it was one of the first parts of firm Land which the Spaniards touch’d upon, after they had pass’d so many Islands, as seem’d for some time to block up, and bar them from the Continent of America: It is subdivided into these inferior Provinces or Countreys, viz. 1. Panama. 2. Darien. 3. Nova Andaluzia. 4. St. Martha. 5. Lastly, the little Province De la Hacha.

Rivers.

The chief Rivers of the Province of Panama are 1: Chagre, as it was antiently call’d, but afterwards from the great number of Crocodiles that harbor in it, Rio de Lagartos, falling into the North Sea between Nombre de Dios and Porto Bellano. 2. Sardinilla. 3. Sardina. 4. Rio de Colubros, so call’d from the abundance of Snakes breeding thereabouts. 5. Rio de Comagre, which falls into the same Sea. 6. Chepo, famous in times past for its Gold-Sands. 7. Rio de Balsas, whose Banks are shaded with good Timber-Trees. 8. Rio de Congo, which falls into St. Michaels Bay.

Sect. II.
Panama.

Description of Panama.

Panama, commonly call’d The District, or Circle of Panama, is bounded Eastward with the Gulf, or Bay of Urraba, by which it is separated from the rest of the Continent of this Southern part of America; on the West it hath Veragua, one of the Provinces of Guatimala; being on both the other sides wash’d with the Sea: It is suppos’d to contain in length from Carthagena and Popayan, to the Confines of Veragua, about eighty or ninety Leagues, in breadth not above threescore in any part; and where it is narrowest, viz. betwixt the City of Panama and Nombre de Dios, if measur’d by a right Line, not above six or seven over from Sea to Sea. It lieth almost under the Equinoctial Line, but a few Degrees Northward of it, and therefore somewhat hot, and by the neighborhood of both Seas subject to a foggy and gross Air, in comparison of some other parts; so that it is not counted generally so healthful a Countrey, especially for Strangers, and in Summer-time.

The antient Division of Panama.

The antient Division of Panama, according to the Lordships of the Casiques that then Govern’d, were these following: Careta, Aila, Comagre, Chiam, Coyba, Chame, Chiru, Nata, Tobre, Trota, Haylia, Burica, and Escotia, where the South Sea with the Spring-Tides flowing over the Plains, at its return being hardned by the Sea, is turn’d into Salt; but as it hath always hapned in all other Countreys of the World, that with the alteration of Government, the Division of the Countrey, and the Names of Places have totally chang’d, so also here the antient Division of Regions and Territories must give place to the Modern.

The Nature and Customs of the antient Inhabitants.

The antient Inhabitants of these Parts were a very warlike People, the Women always accompanying their Husbands in the Wars. They us’d to hang on the tops of their Standards the Bones of their greatest Heroes, thereby to animate their Soldiers. Their Arms consisted of poysonous Arrows, Stone Swords, and Pikes made of the Palm-Trees. They also carried with them the Idol Chiapa, to whom they Offer’d living Children at the beginning of their Wars, and afterwards making Merry with the Flesh, anointed the Image with the Blood: Moreover, if they return’d home Conquerors, they spent several days in all manner of Debaucheries, as Drinking, Singing, Dancing, Cutting their Prisoners Throats, with their Blood also anointing their Image. But if they were conquer’d, then they invented new Offerings to reconcile themselves with their Idol.

Towns and Places of chief note.

The chief Towns and Places which the Spaniards inhabit here, are 1. Panama, the chief City of the Province, being also a Bishop’s See, which is Suffragan to the Arch-bishop of Lima, and the ordinary Residence of the Governor and Courts of Justice for these Parts; It is seated likewise upon the South Sea, and so near, that at High-water the Ships are said to Ride even under the Walls. Through this Town the Wealth both of Peru and Spain passeth once every Year; from Spain by Nombre de Dios and Porto Bello, from whence whatsoever Merchandise or other Commodities come from Spain, are Transported to Panama by Land, and from thence by Sea to all the Parts of Peru; and by Panama whatsoever comes from Peru, is sent into Spain: It hath commonly a strong Garrison of Soldiers in it, and is doubtless a Place otherwise well fortifi’d, being of so great importance. From the Haven Pericos three Ways lead to Panama, the first along a Bridge over a River, whose Banks are great Fortifications to the City, the rather because the River is deep, and next to it a Pool over-grown with Weeds. The Way from Nombre de Dios plain and without Woods, is wash’d by the Brook Levendero. The third runs along over a Stone Bridge and Champain Grounds, that extend from the Haven Pericos to the City. Eastward from Panama appear seven Royal Houses on a Rock, wherein the Courts of Judicature are kept. Five hundred Rods into the Sea lies an Island resembling a Half-Moon, and the Haven wherein the Ships when they unlade cast Anchor, there being else not Water enough for laden Barques, and all lie dry, the Tide being out: At the Mouth thereof stands a woodden Sconce. The Places Venta de Cruze, Chagre, Quebrada, and Ballano, are also fortifi’d against any Invasion, where else an Enemy might easily Land: But the strictest Watch is kept at the River Chagre, which Westward below Nombre de Dios falling into the Northern Ocean, brings the Ships up to Venta de Cruze, from whence a Way scarce five Leagues long leads to Panama. The Spanish Commodities consisting most in Meal, Oyl, Biskets, Cloth and Silk, are all brought from Nombre de Dios along the same Way; or else in Winter when they cannot stem the Current of the River Chagre, then they bring their Goods by Land, not without great danger of being taken by the run-away Negro’s, who set upon them out of the Woods with poyson’d Darts and Arrows; and as many Spaniards as they take, so many several ways they put them to death, because they formerly in the time of their Servitude were us’d with all imaginable Cruelties. The Provisions sold here at a reasonable Rate are Maiz, Peruan-Meal, Poultrey, Honey, Cattel, Swine, Oranges, Lemmons, Cabbage, and all manner of Garden Herbs or Plants. Round about the fore-mention’d Royal Houses lie Bulwarks, with a strong Castle on one side. A fair Cathedral denotes the Place to be a Bishop’s See: And the Franciscans, Dominicans, and Monks of the Order De la Merced, inhabit several fair Cloysters here. Two Leagues Westward is the Haven Pericos, which being secur’d from all Winds by three high Isles that lie before it, is the chief Harbor in which the Peruan Plate-Fleet (consisting most in small Barques) comes to an Anchor before they touch at Panama. The Countrey is for the most part Mountainous, and in many places sends forth stinking Damps out of muddy Pools; yet in some places are Savanna Grounds for Cattel to Graze in. The Air would also be more unhealthful, if it were not clear’d by the Winds which blow from the Sea. From July to October there fall continual Rains, mix’d with terrible claps of Thunder. The Inhabitants often recreate themselves in Hunting wild Hogs, with Nets made of the Brambles call’d Nequen or Henachen, and that after a strange manner: for they set on fire the Bushes all about the place where they suppose the Game to lie, which to shun the fire runs into their Nets; so that the same Bushes are both their shelter and destruction, as affording Material to make the Nets wherein they are taken. Besides other Birds the Woods also abound with Pheasants and Turtle-Doves; and amongst Beasts, those that carry their Young about them in a Bag, as also wildcats. The Sea abounds with Fish, and produces Crocodiles of a large size, by the Spaniards call’d Lagartos. The Trees are seldom without Leaves, but bear little or no Fruit.

2. Nombre de Dios, which hath broad Streets, high woodden Houses, and a fair Church: It extends from East to West along the Northern Ocean, in the middle of a great Wood on Moorish Ground, having a great Fen on the West; being situate under an unwholsom Climate, it hath occasion’d the death of many People. The Merchants which dwelt here had also Habitations in Panama, (the rest of the Houses being most of them Inns for Strangers) from whence as soon as they had gotten an Estate they went to Spain. The Countrey round about lies under Water in many places. The Oranges, Cassada-Roots, and the like, which grow here, occasion many Distempers to those that eat of them. In the Harbor, which hath on each side a Ridge of Rocks, on which lies decay’d Forts, the Sea is often-times so turbulent, that the Ships are forc’d to Ride at six Anchors apiece. Eastward from the City a fresh-Water River falls into the Haven, on whose Banks stand several Garden-Houses and Orchards. Anno 1595. Sir Francis Drake arriving here, found a Mill beyond the City; not far from which on a Hill stood a Watch-house, of which having made himself Master, he set fire on the Town Nombre de Dios, as also on all the Vessels that were in the Harbor. The original of the Name Nombre de Dios was on this occasion, viz. Diego Niquesa setting Sail with three Ships out of the Haven Carthagena to the Golden Countrey Veragua, was surpris’d by a violent Storm, in which two Ketches, Commanded by Lupus de Olano and Peter Umbria were driven out of sight, whilest he suffer’d shipwrack, and getting ashore, rang’d up and down in a desolate Countrey, where he found no other Food but Roots, till at last he met with Olano; when the Famine began to increase amongst them in such a nature, that being scarce able to carry their Arms, many of them were kill’d by the Inhabitants with poyson’d Arrows, insomuch that of seven hundred there remain’d scarce ninety: Niquesa shipp’d as many of them in a new Vessel which they had made as it could possibly carry, and promis’d to fetch the rest off from Veragua as soon as he had discover’d a Place fit to be inhabited: The first Place he Landed at was Puerto Bello; from whence being necessitated by the Indians who gather’d together to Retreat Aboard, not without the loss of several Men, he set Sail to the Promontory Mormor, beyond which he Anchor’d in a secure Haven; where, as he was going ashore he call’d to his Men, saying, Saltiamo in tierra al Nombre de Dios, that is, Let us Land in the Name of God, and calling up a Fort against the Assaults of the Natives, call’d it Nombre de Dios.

3. St. Philip, or Puerto Bello, so denominated by Christopher Columbus from its Haven lying along the North Sea, wonderful convenient and secure, by reason of the good Ground for Anchoring, and a Creek in the same, defended from all sorts of Winds; and which being surrounded with Woods, hath much over-flow’d Land about it, as also abundance of good Gravel for Ballast; for which and several other Reasons, the famous Architect Baptista Antonelli advis’d the Spanish King, to build this City for a Staple of Trade (in stead of Nombre de Dios, which was found unhealthy) having pitch’d upon an excellent Situation for it, viz. on a Plain at the Foot of a Hill, where there are three fresh Rivulets, meeting with a fruitful and hot Countrey: wherefore his Advice being taken, they first built a Fort at the Mouth of the Haven, put five Guns into the same to defend the new City, and on the Shore a strong Tower with eight Drakes: Moreover, the Rocks along the Shore, and close Woods about the Haven prevent the Landing of an Enemy: But at the very time that this City was just begun to be built, Sir Francis Drake having burnt Nombre de Dios, ran into the Haven Puerto Bello, where he found ten Houses, besides the Governors Palace, and a Castle whose Breast-works which the Spaniards had lately rais’d of Timber, Stone, and Earth, were all demolish’d by the English: But the Spaniards have since re-built the same, and fortifi’d the Haven, with two strong Castles, notwithstanding in the Year 1661. it was surpriz’d and taken by the English under the Command of Captain Parker, and the Governor Petro Melendez taken Prisoner.

4. Nata, commonly call’d St. Jago de Nata, situated on the West side of this Province, upon Mare del Zur, or The South Sea, about thirty Leagues distant from Panama, towards the Borders of Veragua.

5. Acla, a Town upon the same Coast, but lying South-East of Nombre de Dios: It was at first onely a Fort built by Peter de Arias, but afterwards grew up into a small City, of which at present there is nothing remaining but the remembrance of the famous Vasquez Nunnez, Beheaded by his Father-in-law Arias.

6. Lastly, La Crux Real, a few Leagues distant from Panama, for the most part inhabited by a sort of Negro’s call’d Simmerones.

Along the North Coast of Panama are two small woody Islands call’d Cattiva and Comagre, lying low in the Water; also the Isle De Pines, which rises high out of the Sea near the Main Land.

The Isles of Pearls.

On the Southern Coast are Isole de las Perlas, or The Isles of Pearls, about twenty five in number, but indeed rather Rocks than Islands, excepting two, viz. Tararequi and Del Rios where in former times the Indians took great store of Pearls, by diving for them to the bottom of the Sea; and they were esteem’d of greater value and excellence than those of Cubagua, and great profit was made of them by the Spaniards, till by their Cruelties exercis’d upon the Natives through excessive greediness, they depopulated the Islands, and lost that altogether of which before they were so insatiable: they are now onely inhabited by a few Moors and other Slaves, who keep Cattel there for their Masters.

Captain Oxenham’s Expedition.

It will not seem amiss to conclude our Description of Panama with a short Account of the English Captain John Oxenham’s Exploits in these Parts: He being incited by the Treasure which Sir Francis Drake fetch’d from hence, resolv’d to Steer for the Northern Coast of Panama, where he hal’d his Ship of a hundred and twenty Tun on Shore, and cover’d the same with Trees, buried his Guns, and march’d with two Field-Pieces and seven Men up into the Countrey, and was by the Indians conducted to a River which falls into the South Sea, where he built a Pinnace of forty five Foot long, and Sailing into the South Sea, Landed on Tararequi, one of the Islands of Pearls; where he soon after took a Peruan Barque with sixty thousand pieces of Gold, store of Wine and Bread, and the day following another which came from Lima, loaden with a hundred thousand Pound in Silver Bars, and some Pearls; with which being enrich’d he return’d to the Main: The Governor of Panama being inform’d of it, put a hundred Soldiers into four Barques, besides a considerable number of Negro Slaves; over which Juan de Ortego having the chief Command, was inform’d at Tararequi what Course the English had steer’d; whereupon he pursu’d them to the River whither they were gone, which falling with three Arms into the Sea, they could not have known which way the English went, unless they had seen some Feathers of Fowls driving in the Mouth of the least Branch, by which they judg’d that they were not far off; therefore Rowing up they found after four days Journey the Pinnace hal’d on Shore, and watch’d by six Men, who were order’d to stand Sentinel, whereof one being shot by the Spaniards, the other five fled; whom Ortega pursuing, found half a League from the Shore a Hut made of Boughs, wherein the Booty lay, which he speedily carried to his Barques; but Captain Oxenham inform’d hereof, fell with two hundred Indians upon the Spaniards, who having a Wood on their Backs made such advantage thereof, that eleven English were slain, and seven taken, and had not the rest fled, they had all been either kill’d or taken Prisoners: Those that were taken inform’d Ortega that they had been at difference amongst themselves about dividing the Booty, which was the reason of their staying so long: moreover, they discover’d where and how their Ship lay; all which the Governor of Panama writ to Nombre de Dios; from whence four Sail were immediately sent to find out the Ship and the buried Guns, as also to take all such English as they should find preparing of Boats or Barques, and bring them to Panama; whereupon very many were taken, who were all miserably slain, except a few Youths.

Sect. III.
Darien.

Description of Darien.

Darien, which by some Authors not being thought considerable enough to make a distinct Province, is reckon’d one and the same with, or at least part of, Panama, hath on the North the District or Circle of Panama; on the South, the new Kingdom of Granada; Eastward it is bounded with the Gulf of Urraba abovesaid, and some part of the River Darien, which giveth Name to the Province; and to the West, with the South Sea; of a more temperate Air by far than that of Panama, and a Soil so admirably fruitful and lusty, that they say Melons, Cucumbers, and generally all other Fruits of the Garden, are ripe and fit to gather within twenty days or less, after their first sowing, but very much infested by noxious Creatures, as Lyons, Leopards, wild Cats, Crocodiles, Serpents, and Bats, after whose Bitings a Man bleeds to death, unless he washes the Wound well with Sea-water, or stop it with hot Ashes; and no less by the unwholsomness of the Air, which is infested by the many stinking Damps that arise from the muddy Pools. The Inhabitants are sickly, and seeming generally to be troubled with the Yellow Jaundice, never attain to a great Age: they go naked, the Men onely covering their Privities with a Shell or Cotton-Cloth: The Women wear a Cloth which reaches from the Middle down to their Knees, but if Women of Quality, to their Feet.

Sebastian and Antiqua, by whom built.

The Spaniards have many years ago made themselves Masters of this Province of Darien, in which Alphonsus Fogeda built the City Sebastian, which was inhabited till a Spanish Knight call’d Ancisius, Anno 1510. built Antiqua, and made it a Bishop’s See, which by reason of the unwholsomness of the Place was remov’d to Panama, when Vasquez Nunnez discover’d the Southern Ocean, Anno 1590. because Antiqua lay on a low Ground between high Mountains, where the Sun burnt exceedingly, and the Way to the South Sea, being three Leagues from thence, it was very troublesom to convey Merchandise thither.

But a worse Accident befell the Town St. Cruiz, which being built by the Spanish Captain Peter de Arias, was ruin’d by the Indians.

Rivers.

The chief Rivers are 1. Darien, which gives Name both to the Province and the Provincial Town, and falls into the Gulf of Urraba, being a large Arm of the Sea, eight Leagues over at the Mouth thereof. 2. Rio de las Redas, which runs in like manner through the Province of Nova Andaluzia, and falls also into the same Gulf. So likewise doth 3. Rio de la Trepadera. 4. Corobaci. 5. Beru, chiefly remarkable upon this Consideration, that some curious Etymologists have endeavor’d to derive the Name of Peru from this River, by the alteration onely of the initial Letter.

Places of chief note.

The chief, and indeed the onely Town of this Tract is Darien, built as aforesaid by Encisus, a Spanish Adventurer, and by him call’d St. Maria Antiqua, and by others The Antique of Darien, being one of the first Towns that were built by the Spaniards on the firm Land; though there are who make mention of two other small Towns or Villages, the one nam’d at least, if not built by the Spaniards, viz. Los Angelos, scarce inhabited at present by any but the Salvages; the other an antient Town of the Natives, call’d Bizu.

Sect. IV.
New Andaluzia.

Description of New Andaluzia.

Eastward of Darien and the Gulf of Urraba, lieth the Countrey of New Andaluzia, otherwise call’d Carthagena, from the Name of its principal City: On the East it hath the Countrey call’d St. Martha; on the North, the Main Ocean; and New Granada towards the South. It is for the most part a Mountainous Countrey, and full of Woods, which they say yield abundance of Rozen, Gums, and some very good Balsams; also a sort of Long-pepper, much sharper than that of East-India. But the Plains, by reason of much Rain, to which the Countrey is subject, especially for some times of the year, of but a spewy and cold Soil. The Spaniards at their first coming found it a rich Countrey, not so much from the Nature and Profits of the Soil (though it be said to have some Mines in it, and those of Gold) but by reason of a certain Opinion and Respect, which the Americans of these Parts are generally said to have born towards this Countrey, insomuch that they would be brought and buried there from other Places very remote; and according to the Custom of the Countrey, not without good store of Gold and other Jewels, according to the Quality and Condition of the Person that was buried; of which the Spaniards soon gain’d Intelligence, and in ransacking the Graves and Monuments of the Dead, are suppos’d to have found an infinite Mass of Treasure: but those Mines are long since exhausted.

Nature and Customs of the antient Inhabitants.

The Inhabitants of old suffer’d great prejudice by Tygers and Serpents; yet nevertheless this Countrey was very populous before the Spaniards arrival here; the Natives wore Cotton Aprons before, and Golden Rings about their Arms and Legs, as also Strings of Pearl, and the like. The Women here, as in the rest of these Parts, went with their Husbands into the Wars, and behav’d themselves valiantly, shooting poyson’d Arrows, insomuch that Martin Ambesus took a Maid, Anno 1509. who had kill’d twenty eight Spaniards.

The Countrey Urraba.

To the Province Carthagena belongs also the Countrey Urraba, which is so fruitful, that all kind of Spanish Trees and Seeds grow better here than in Spain: Besides which it hath its own Fruit, as also abundance of Pine and Palm-Trees, whose Leaves serve for Brooms. The Guaiana-Tree bears a sharp kind of Fruit like a Lemmon, the Guaravana a kind of Cittrons, the Mameisa a Fruit not unlike an Orange, but tasting like a Melon, and the Hovos a great Plum.

Their Gardens abound with the Root Batata, whose Leaves send forth several Strings, which over-spreading the Ground fasten in the Earth, and take new Roots; it is yellow without, and whitish within, and bears pale green Flowers, which at last turn to a Cod full of Seed. These Roots roasted in hot Ashes, exceed our European Turnip; and beaten and put in Water till it works over, makes a Drink, with which the Indians Drink and Carouse till they are Drunk.

A strange Beast.

Moreover, Urraba abounds in Venison, Fish, and all sorts of ravenous Creatures, as Tygers, Lyons, and a particular strange Beast as big as an Ox, having an Elephants Nose, Horses Feet, and hanging Ears.

The Trees likewise swarm with Birds; and especially near Lakes or Pools breed Pheasants and Parrots, of which some are bigger than Capons, others no bigger than Chickens.

The Mountain Abibe.

Against Urraba juts the Mountain Abibe, whose length Westward remains unknown; the breadth thereof in some places is about twenty Leagues; it hath many Ways which cannot be travell’d with Horses. The top of this Mountain is uninhabited; but along the Valleys, which are many and large, dwelt formerly a People that possess’d great Riches in Gold, which they gather’d out of Rivulets that fell Westward from the tops of the Mountains. It Rains here almost all the year long, which makes the Ways very bad for Travellers to pass.

At the Foot of this Mountain, towards the South, lie two small antient Casiquedoms, if we may so call them, formerly inhabited by a valiant People, call’d Tarabe de Zenu, whether chiefly the dead Bodies were brought from all the adjacent Countreys, to be buried in great State, as hath been before intimated.

Towns and Places of principal note.

The Description of Carthagena.

The principal Towns and Places of note are 1. Carthagena, (so call’d either from the resemblance of its Situation with the City Carthagena in the Kingdom of Murcia belonging to Old Spain, or because the first Inhabitants were Citizens of the said City) which was begun to be built Anno 1532. by Peter de Heredia, but fully finished by Georgio Robledo, eight years after the first Foundation thereof was laid. This Episcopal Metropolis is on the North wash’d by the North Sea over a plain shallow Ground; on the Land side the Sea flows through a narrow Bay by the City towards the Lake Canupote, which ebbs and flows equal with the Ocean, and receives and discharges its Water through two Pipes which lie under a long Bridge, joyning Carthagena to the Main Coast. This City boasted long since above five hundred Stone Houses, being divided into twenty six large Streets, whereof four are six hundred and twenty Paces long: behind each House is a Garden; and the Church appears above all the other Buildings: The Dominicans Cloyster is also fairly built; neither is the Franciscans inferior to it, who also possess a second Edifice on the Main Continent over the Bridge. The Custom-house and Court where the Courts for the whole Province of Carthagena are kept, are also stately Structures. The Haven hath two Entrances, the chiefest whereof lies half a League Eastward from the City, and the Western, call’d La Boca, is as far again; both very dangerous, because of the many blind Rocks that lie before them. Anno 1585. when Sir Francis Drake took Carthagena by Storm, the whole was fortifi’d with Sconces, besides two Forts for the better security thereof, whereof one lock’d up the narrow Mouth of the Haven with a strong Chain; not far from which stood an Abbey, Dedicated to the Franciscans, and Wall’d round about; since which they have several Out-works, Forts and Towers, to prevent all foreign Invasions. The City grows wealthy daily by the Peruan Plate-Fleet putting in there before they go to Spain, and especially by the Trade from New Granada along the River Magdalena. The Island before the Haven, antiently call’d Codega, now Carex, inhabited by Fisher-men when the Spaniards Landed there, is now desolate, the remainder of those that were destroy’d by them being fled to wild places from the Spaniards Cruelties; notwithstanding the People hereabouts were valiant enough to Engage with them. But since the Devastation made by Sir Francis Drake, Carthagena hath receiv’d a more fatal Blow; for it was scarce fully repair’d, when five French Privateers burnt the City to Ashes: which Mischief was occasion’d by a Spanish Seaman, who being whipt by Command of the Governor, resolving for Revenge, went from Spain to France, and conducted the fore-mention’d Ships to Carthagena, where he reveng’d himself on the Governor; for finding him asleep, he first wak’d him, and after having told him of his causing him to be Whipt, he kill’d him. The Booty which the Spaniards carried from thence at that time amounted to above a hundred and fifty thousand Ducats.

The Balsam of Tolu very famous.

2. Tolu, by the Spaniards now call’d St. Jago, twelve Leagues distant from Carthagena, a Place memorable for the excellent Balsam which is brought from thence, and commonly call’d The Balsam of Tolu; it is gather’d in a Spoonful of black Wax, stuck under the Hole cut in the Bark of a low Pine-Tree, out of which in hot Weather runs a Golden colour’d Gum, very soveraign, and of an excellent smell.

3. St. Crux de Mopox, a neat Town, seated a little above the confluence of the two Rivers, St. Martha and Magdalena, which waters this Province.

4. Baranca de Nolambo, a Place of great Traffick, especially for all Commodities of the new Kingdom of Granada; it standeth upon the Banks of the River Magdalena, and about six Leagues distant from the Sea.

5. Buena Vista, otherwise call’d St. Sebastian de Buena Vista, a Town commodiously seated upon a rising Ground not far from the Gulf of Urraba, or the Sound of Darien, about a League and a half from the Sea.

6. Villa de St. Maria, thirty Leagues Southward of Carthagena.

Rivers of Carthagena.

The Province of Carthagena is stor’d with many Brooks and great Rivers, amongst which the Stream Cauca falls into the River Magdalena, beyond Popayan near Mopox.

The River Zenu, which gives Denomination to the above-mention’d Territory, makes a very convenient Harbor with its Mouth, where much Salt is to be had.

The Daria, which runs between Panama and Carthagena into the Inlet Urraba, gives its Denomination to the foregoing Province, through which it also runs, as hath been already mention’d.

The River which for its greatness is call’d Rio Grande, or Magdalena, (because it was discover’d on the Day Consecrated to that Saint) falls with such force into the Northern Ocean, about twenty three Leagues Eastward from Carthagena, that running two Leagues broad and ten long into the Sea, it retains its freshness of Water; in which there lying many Rocks, makes the same very dangerous for Ships. In the Mouth of the Haven lies an Island, which is divided by the River, the widest and most frequented Channel of which respects St. Martha, where those that carry the Merchandise up this Stream to New Granada, spend two Moneths in Toeing, whenas they come from thence in three Weeks.

Thunder and Lightning rages here many times after a terrible manner from Midnight till Morning. In January there falls also abundance of Rain, which gliding from the Mountains swells the River exceedingly.

Sect. V.
St. Martha.

Description of St. Martha.

St. Martha, so call’d from the chief City of the Province, is border’d on the West with New Andaluzia; on the East, with Rio de la Hacha; on the North, with the Ocean; and on the South, with New Granada; It is about threescore and ten Leagues in length, and not much less in breadth: It was antiently distributed into several little Seignories, Govern’d by Casiques, or petty Princes, viz. Pozigueica, Betoma, Buritaca, Chimola, inhabited by valiant Men and beautiful Women, and above all the rest, Tairona, (whose People for a long time maintain’d War against the Spaniards) lying at the Foot of the high Mountains Sierras Nevadas, whose snowy Crowns are seen thirty Leagues off at Sea, and run along in a continu’d Ridge through Peru and Chili to the Straights of Magellan.

This Countrey was Discover’d, and part of it Planted, Anno 1524. by Roderic de Bastredas, who afterwards was murder’d in his Sleep by his own People.

The Nature of the Climate, and Commodities of the Countrey.

The Sun shines so exceeding hot near the Sea-coast, that there is no enduring of the same; but up in the Countrey the snowy Mountains occasion great Cold, and in Harvest and October it Rains exceedingly, whereas at other times it is very dry Weather, and the Winds blow generally out of the East or North-East, yet the Land-Breezes coming out of the West bring sometimes Rains with them. From the Mountains, which are stony and barren, fall many Brooks and Rivers, which water divers Plains, the Grass and other Plants of which are often blasted by violent Storms; nevertheless Oranges, Lemmons, Granates, and all sorts of Spanish Garden Fruits grow here in great plenty. The Woods afford likewise Pigeons, Partridges, Venison, and the like; the Rivers all manner of Fish, which are seen to swim in great numbers twenty Yards under the Water, especially in the Haven St. Martha, near which formerly liv’d many Fisher-men, who with Nets made of tough Twigs pleited together, caught such plenty of Fish, that they furnish’d all their Neighbors. The High-ways are made dangerous by Lyons, Tygers, and Bears.

Great plenty of Precious Stones in these Parts.

Peter di Lugo his Treachery to the Natives.

The Welsares Journey.

The Countrey Buritaca affords the Inhabitants Gold; Tairona, excellent Stones against Bleeding and the Gravel, Jasper, Porphyr, and Gold; the Valley Tunia, many rich Emeraulds, which Stones us’d to be in great esteem before America produc’d such great numbers of them. Acosta relates, That a Spaniard desiring to know the Price of an Emerauld, shew’d two to an Italian Jeweller, who valu’d the one at a hundred, the other at three hundred Ducats; but soon after seeing a Chest full of them, said they were scare worth a Ducat apiece; and that the Sute which the Roman Lady wore, being beset with Emeraulds, and valu’d at four hundred thousand Ducats, would not sell now for half so much. This Stone or Jewel exceedingly fortifies the Sight, wherefore the Emperor Nero represented the bloody Encounters of Fencers in an Emerauld. It is also judg’d to be good against the Falling-sickness, wherefore the Indians hang them in their Noses to this day, and adorn their Idols with them; they grow in stony Rocks along Veins, not unlike Crystal, and in time obtain a glittering Greenness; the biggest of them that are found in this Age are most esteem’d of in Genua. The Emerauld Pillar, which as a wonderful Ornament stood in Hercules’s Temple in the City of Tyrus, being very famous amongst the Antients, was without doubt no more than a green Stone; and perhaps of the same Material, was the Pillar erected by the Arabian King Miramamolines, in the Cathedral at Corduba. But the great fame of these Emeraulds incited Gonzalvez Zimenes, Governor of St. Martha, to leave his Place and seek for them; to which end he Sail’d up the Rivulet Gayra with two Ketches and forty five Spaniards, who meeting with the Casique Bagotta, got much Gold of him, and afterwards went to the Valley Tessuca; of which Simandoca being Governor, conducted Ximenez twenty three Leagues farther to an Emerauld Rock, from whence he return’d exceedingly enriched; the rumor of which spreading up and down, made several travel thither; amongst whom was Peter di Lugo, Governor of Terra Firma, who sending for Aid from Carthagena, fought his way to Bagotta, who resisted him for some time, till at last being defeated he made Peace with them for a considerable quantity of Gold; which when Peter di Lugo had receiv’d, not regarding his Word, he plunder’d all the Countrey, and having committed all imaginable Cruelties on the Natives, return’d home with an invaluable Mass of Gold and Emeraulds to St. Martha. Not long after the Welsares, German Knights, came from Venezuela, (which City the Emperor Charles the Fifth Morgag’d to them Anno 1518.) and travell’d through the snowy Mountains of St. Martha with Indian Guides, whose Instructions following, they digg’d many Emeraulds out of the Valley Funia; the Inhabitants of which affrighted at the sight of the Strangers, hang’d themselves out of despair, though naturally valiant, and ingenious in working in Tapestry the shapes of Tygers, Lyons, and other Beasts, and painting on the Walls of their Houses variety of Figures of divers colours, covering their Floors with Mats neatly pleited of Rushes. They fed on Fish, Venison, and Mans-flesh, and also on the Roots Agies, tasting like Chesnuts, Yuca, Maiz, Batata, and Cassada.

Chief Cities and Places of note.

The chief Cities and Places of principal note in this Province are 1. St. Martha, which gives Denomination to the whole Province, it stands built at the North Sea, which makes a large and convenient Harbor, being defended from the Winds by high Mountains and two Isles, is a Bishop’s See, and hath a large Cathedral. The Houses built of Canes are cover’d with Palmito-Trees, and some with woodden Shingles. The Haven hath neither Fort nor Castle to defend it, because there is no Trade but with the Indians, which bring Earthen Ware and Cotton Clothes to sell; and because the Spanish Ships seldom come hither, the Place is much gone to decay, and the more, because it is no way defended against any Assault of an Enemy, which the French, and afterwards the English, under the Command of Sir Francis Drake, and the following Year under Captain Anthony Shirley took advantage of, and plunder’d and burnt the City.

2. Teneriff, built on the Banks of the River Magdalena, forty Leagues from St. Martha.

3. Tamalameque, otherwise call’d Villa de las Palmas, twenty Leagues South of Teneriff, lying on a high stony Ground; between which are plain Pastures for Cattel, surrounded with high Woods, as also Pools made by the over-flowing of the Rivers, whose Banks are inhabited by the Indians, who are much addicted to Sleep and Drinking. The Pools before mention’d produce abundance of Fish, as also Crocodiles, and the terrible Manati before describ’d.

4. Ocanna, which hath an Inland Haven.

5. Ramada, formerly call’d New Salamanca, standing at the Foot of the Mountain call’d Sierras Nevadas. This Town is famous for its Copper and Brass Mines.

6. Cividad de los Reyes, which built in the Valley Upari, stands on the Shore of the mighty River Guataporeya, where from the beginning of January till May the Eastern Breezes moderate the Heat, otherwise intolerable: But the continual Rains thereabout occasions the Quartan Ague, and many such like Distempers. The Natives hereabouts, salvage and valiant, would never submit to the Spaniards.

The Tree Xagua.

The peculiar Plants of this Place are the Tree Xagua, which bears a Fruit like a Raisin, which dry’d and ground yields exceeding good Meal for Bread.

The Root Scorzonera.

The Root Scorzonera, which cures the Bitings of Serpents. The Indians also use the Tail of a Serpent for a Remedy against the same Evil, as they take Tobacco against the Falling-sickness, and snuff the Powder in at their Nostrils, and drink the Juice thereof to cause Loosness.

Chief Rivers.

The chief Rivers of this Province, are 1. Polomino, so call’d from a Spanish Captain, that was drown’d there with his Horse, falling from the Sierras Nevadas.

2. Guatupori, whose Water causes the Bloody-flux and Loosness, which again is cur’d by the same Water drunk with beaten Cinamon. Guatupori reckons many Rivulets, amongst which the Cesar and Budillo are both large, deep, and abounding with Fish.

Near the City Los Reyes are three great Water-pits, triangular between stony Cliffs; nigh which a Tradition goes, That of old there lurk’d a terrible Serpent, which at times devour’d a thousand People; insomuch that none durst dwell thereabouts, till certain Spaniards having the hardiness and curiosity to go seek out this Serpent, heard a great noise in the Pits, but saw nothing like the fore-mention’d Animal.

Here are likewise several Fountains of Pitch and Tar.

Sect. VI.
Rio de la Hacha.

Rio de la Hacha.

Rio de la Hacha is the Name of a little Province lying on the North-East of St. Martha, wash’d on all other parts with the Waters of the Main Ocean, or with the Gulf or Bay of Venezuela.

Chief Towns of this Province.

The chief Towns of this Province, are 1. A small Town call’d De la Hacha, which gives Denomination to the said Province, having no convenient Haven, but otherwise seated in a Soil very rich and fertile, not onely of all sorts of Fruits and Plants, especially such as are brought from Spain, but likewise in many Mines of Gold, Gems of a large size and great value, and many excellent Salt-Wiches, as they call them; It is eight Leagues distant from Salamanca aforesaid, and eighteen from Cape Villa, the most Westerly Point or Foreland of the Bay of Venezuela; and with the rest had the hap to be surpris’d and pillag’d by the English with Sir Francis Drake in the Year 1595. who refus’d twenty four thousand Ducats, which the Governor proffer’d him for the Pearls he had taken.

2. Rancheria, six Leagues Eastward of La Hacha, inhabited chiefly by Pearl-Fishers, or such as get their Living for the most part by Fishing for Pearl, which was wont to be good on these Coasts.

3. Tapia, five Leagues from La Hacha, and considerable, for that the adjacent Parts were laid waste by the English, to revenge the perfidiousness of the Governor of Salamanca, refusing to pay the four thousand Ducats he had promis’d, upon Condition of their sparing the Town.

Abibeca the last King of this Province.

The last King of those that Govern’d in any of these Provinces of Terra Firma, was Abibeca, who could not be won to come down from his Palace, which he had on the top of a Tree, till a Spanish Officer, one Francisco de Vanquez began to lay an Ax to the Root thereof.

After Didaco Niquesa, Alphonso Oreda, and Anciso, had made very large Discoveries in these Provinces, Valboa was the first that discover’d the Way to the South-Sea.

CHAP. III.
New Granada.

First Discovery of New Granada.

The new Kingdom of Granada, as ’tis commonly call’d, was for the most part both discover’d and conquer’d by Gonsalvo Ximenes, about the Year 1536. and with so good success, that in less than a years space, the whole Countrey was quietly setled under the Spaniards Government, and the Captain with his small Company had made shift to gather together such a Mass of Treasure as may seem almost incredible, viz. from the Reguli, or petty Princes of those Countreys, whom he had either destroy’d or made Tributary. But a more particular Relation of Ximenes his Journey take as followeth:

Gustavo Ximenes his Expedition.

Being sent out by Peter Ferdinando de Lugo, to discover the Countreys that lay along the River Magdalena, he travell’d upon the right side of it with great trouble; for not onely the brambly Woods, Moors, and deep Brooks, made the Way exceeding bad to be travell’d, but also the Inhabitants, who fell upon him from their Ambuscades: yet at last he reach’d Tora, which Name he chang’d into Pueblo de los Bracos, because four Rivers unite their Waters there. Here ordering his Brigantines which were come up the River to cast their Anchors, he judg’d it convenient to stay all the Winter, because the swoln Rivers had drown’d the adjacent Countrey. Ximenes observing that the Indians fetch’d Salt from the Sea-side, judg’d that the Countrey was inhabited, and therefore in fair Weather march’d up to the Mountain Opou, behind which he found a Countrey full of Salt-pools, which produc’d Cakes of Salt. And somewhat farther the Province Govern’d by the Casique Bogata, who at first resisting the Spaniards, was soon put to flight, when he heard the noise of the Guns. The Panches divided from Bogata’s Countrey by a small Mountain, also maintaining continual Wars with him, suffer’d the Spaniards unmolested to travel through their Countrey, and the Valley La Trompetta, to a high barren Mountain, on the top of which Ximenes found several Emeraulds; and going from thence fell upon the Casique Tunia, and three days Journey farther, upon the Governors Sagamosa and Diutama; from which three Countreys he carried above a hundred and ninety thousand pieces of fine Gold, fifty five thousand pieces of indifferent Gold, and eighteen hundred Emeraulds; all which the Spaniards left behind with Guards whilest they went back to Bogata whom they found lying dead of his Wounds on a high Hill: But Sagipa, Bogata’s Successor, receiv’d Ximenes with great Civility, to engage his Assistance against his Neighbors the Panches; which he did not refuse him: but afterwards he fell most perfidiously upon the said Sagipa, whom he caus’d to be Executed, because he either could not, or would not discover where those Riches were which Bogata had left behind him. After he had pillag’d the little Region Neyba, and brought into subjection the whole Countrey, he gave it the Name of New Granada, from Granada the place of his Nativity, being the chief City of the Kingdom of Granada in Spain, and built the City Santa Fe; which done, he quitted the Place, upon information that Sebastian de Bevalcazar coming from Popayan, was seeking a Way Northward; and not long after him Nicholas Federman follow’d, each claiming New Granada as their Right, whereas Ximenes alledg’d, That the first Discovery thereof was to be ascribed to him onely: at last Agreeing, they resolv’d that it should be at the King of Spain’s disposal.

The Nature and Custom of the Moxas.

The antient Inhabitants, nam’d Moxas, divided their Countrey into two chief Principalities, viz. Bogota and Tunica, which before the Spaniards Arrival were each under their particular Casique or Prince. The Men were of a good proportion; the Women also handsomer, and of a fairer Complexion than their Neighbors: Their Habit also consisted of black, white, and divers colour’d Cotton Cloaks, and some also had Bonnets of the same. The temperateness of the Climate makes little difference between Winter and Summer. Their Houses were of Planks, and cover’d with long Rushes. Their chiefest Food was Maiz and Cassave, which first grows on Stalks as large as Canes, containing very large and weighty Spikes or Ears, each Ear generally yielding seven hundred Grains, which are Planted in hot and moist Ground; one Bushel Sow’n, generally produces three hundred. But the Maiz is distinguish’d into a courser or finer sort, which last is call’d Moroche, the Leaves and Canes whereof afford a wholsom Provender for Horses, and the Corn, Bread for the Inhabitants, who make it several ways; for sometimes they boyl it in Water, and at other times parch it in Ashes, or grind it to Meal, which kneading into Dough, they make into Cakes, Biskets, and the like: Moreover, Maiz steep’d in Water, and after being boyl’d and set a working, makes a very strong Liquor. They also use Cassada, which they make of the Root Yuca, which being large and thick, is cut in pieces, grated, and all its Juice, which is deadly poyson, being press’d out, is Bak’d in thin Cakes. There is likewise another sort of Yuca, which hath not so poysonous a Juice, keeping good a long time, and is both wholsom, and of a good taste. The Natives of old liv’d much upon the Roots Yomus, and Cubias, all sorts of Venison, Fowls, and Fish, which the Rivers and Lakes afford in great abundance. Those that are left of the Natives, are a deceitful, crafty, and ingenious sort of People, very apt to learn Art, and to Trade with Salt to Rio Grande, and the Mountain Opou.

Besides Copper and Steel-Mines, this Countrey hath also several of Gold; and the Fields produce all manner of Plants.

The Nature of the Panchas.

The Panchas which remain are yet a salvage People, but their Countrey is an indifferent fertile Soil, though not in all places alike; for those which border upon Tunia fed much heretofore on Pismires, of which some being long, have double Wings, others lesser and without Wings; which last sort being roasted, are accounted a great Dainty, and a speedy Remedy against the Distemper of the Gravel. There are also a sort of venomous Pismires, which stinging a Man, cause a swelling and great itching, and these are call’d Tayoques, whose Stings are cur’d by a Plaister of bruis’d Pismires.

The Bounds and Dimensions of Nova Granada.

The Countrey is bounded on the North with Castella Aurea aforesaid; on the West, with Mare del Zur; on the East, with Venezuela; the Southern parts of it being not well discover’d, by reason of certain huge and unpassable Mountains, which block it up wholly on that side, save onely where a Passage is kept open into the Province of Peru, specially so call’d: It containeth in length about a hundred and thirty Leagues, and not much less in breadth, being for the most part a very healthful Countrey, and abounding in Mines of the best sort of Metal, besides others of Brass and Iron. It is subdivided into these two Provinces, viz. Granada and Popayana.

Sect. II.
Granada.

Description of Granada.

Granada, specially so call’d, is a Countrey of a very temperate and good Air, as hath been before observ’d, neither subject to over-much Cold, nor to extremity of Heat; which is the more to be admir’d by reason of its nearness to the Line, from which it is distant Northward but a very few Degrees.

Towns of chief note.

The Towns and Places of chief importance are, 1. St. Foy, commonly call’d St. Foy de Bagota, which was the old Name of this Province, and to distinguish it from another St. Foy, in the Countrey of New Mexico above mention’d. It is the Metropolis and Capital City of this Province, an Arch-bishop’s See, and the ordinary Residence of the Governor, built by the above-mention’d Gonsalvo Ximenes upon the Lake call’d Guatavita, and hath been long since inhabited by above six hundred Families of Spaniards.

2. St. Michael, twelve Leagues Northward of St. Foy, and a well Traded Town. The Indians that dwell about this Place being above five thousand, pay great Tribute yearly. Not far from hence lies the Lake Guatavita, where the Inhabitants in former times Offer’d much Gold to their Idols.

Commodities of the Countrey of Tocaima.

3. Tocaima, fourteen Leagues Westward from St. Foy, within a Territory which antiently belong’d to the Panches, who yet possess the worst part of it, lying still wild and unreduc’d: It is situate on the Banks of the great River Pati, which falls into the Rivulet Magdalena. This City, which enjoys the benefit of a wholsom Climate, is surrounded with Mines of Gold, Copper, Silver, and Lead. And besides the Fruits of the Countrey, all Spanish Plants thrive exceedingly after once Planted; and though Sheep will not breed here, yet Kine, Hogs, and Goats increase daily, but are often devour’d by Tygers, Lyons, and Bears. The Woods produce Nut-Trees, Cedars, Guaiacum, or Pock-Wood, and the wonderful Tree Zeyba, whose Leaves fall off every twelve hours, and grow again. The Fowls of this Countrey are many and several. Near the City are sulphurous Fountains, whose Waters cure Scabs and Leprosie. In the Valleys also flow Springs of salt Water, which thrown on Herbs, turns to Rozen and Pitch, and is good to make Boats tight. The tops of the Mountains are continually cover’d with Snow, notwithstanding some of them vomit forth horrible Flames and Ashes, which are blown several Leagues over the Countrey. The vicissitude of the Weather occasions two Summers and two Winters; the first Summer begins in December, and the second in June; the first Winter accordingly begins in March, and the other in October. This alteration of Seasons is not distinguish’d by any change of Heat or Cold, but the continuance of fair Weather during the Summer, and in the Winter, of such terrible Hurricanes, that blow from North to South, or from South to North, with such Thundering and Lightning, as if the end of the World were at hand. The chiefest Trees that grow here are Cedars, and one that bears exceeding great Almonds. The Quaque also bears a pleasant Fruit about the bigness of a Goose-Egg; and the Fig-Tree, Figs as large as Oranges. The Agnapa which grows here is of such a nature, that an European sleeping under it, swells exceedingly, but an Indian bursts. The Bark and Sprigs of the Hobo, which grows high and round, serve against Swellings and Ulcers, and occasion also Loosness. Sugar-Canes grow also here in great abundance, amongst which feed certain Beasts like Hogs, whose Navels grow on their Backs; and large Stags. The Fountains in most places of this Countrey run with salt Water; and sometimes Salt is found between fresh-Water Brooks. The Natives, who are valiant, subtile, and well proportion’d, are since their giving over eating of Mans-flesh much increas’d, and many of them forsaking their Heathenish Idolatry, have embrac’d the Roman-Catholick Religion.

4. La Palma, built Anno 1572. in a certain Territory, the People whereof were antiently call’d Musi and Colymæ.

5. Trinidad, which is indeed the antient Tudela renew’d, or a City sprung out of the Ruines thereof. This Tudela stood on the Shore of the River Zarbi, which running between high Mountains, makes the Rivulet Turatena, and in the same Territory as La Palma above mention’d, viz. of the Musi & Colymæ, by whom the Spaniards, who had here a Colony, were so exceedingly molested, that they deserted the same, together with their Governor Peter de Orsua: yet not long after the forsaken Place was again re-built by the Name of Trinidad; but that Place proving incommodious, was again abandon’d, and a new Trinidad built, where now it is to be seen on a convenient place Eastward from the high and cold Mountain Paramo. From several rich Gemmaries thereabouts are digg’d store of Emeraulds, Crystal like Diamonds, white Marble, and the Beryl, especially on the Mountains Ytoco and Abipi.

6. Tunia, having a Territory about it, to which it gives Denomination; It lies on a high Hill, from whence the Church and two Cloysters of the Dominican Fryers are seen at a great distance. Here also is kept the greatest Market in New Granada.

7. Pampelona, sixty Leagues distant from St. Foy to the North-East, abounding with Cattel and Gold.

8. Merida, surrounded with Corn-Fields, the farthest Town of this Province North-Eastward towards Venezuela.

9. Belez, which though it suffers great prejudice by a burning a Mountain that vomits Fire and Stones, and also Thunder and Lightning, is the greatest Residence of several Orders of Fryers.

10. Marequita, otherwise call’d St. Sebastian del Oro, which lies under a hot Climate, and hath much Pasture.

11. Ybague, the Habitation chiefly of Dominicans.

12. La Vittoria de los Remedios; and 13. Juan de los Lanos, or St. John of the Plains, seated in a rich Nook of the Countrey, where there are good Silver and Gold-Mines.

The Merchandise that come to these Towns, are brought up the River Magdalena in Canoos of sixty Foot long.

Sect. III.
Popayana.

Situation and Description of Popayana.

Popayana, the other part of this new Kingdom, is border’d on the West with part of Granada last spoken of, from which the River St. Martha divides it for the most part: On the North it hath Nova Andaluzia, or Carthagena; on the West, Mare del Zur; and on the South, Quito, or rather some unreduc’d Countreys lying betwixt them both; It extends in length above a hundred Leagues from North to South, but in breadth, betwixt the River and the South Sea, not much above forty or fifty. The Countrey is said to be a little too much subject to Rain, yet not so, but that the fertility of the Soil answers the industry of the Inhabitants in most places very well.

Sebastian de Bevalcazar, Governor of Quito, marching Anno 1536. with a Company of Spaniards to Otabalo, where the Countrey Popayan begins, was often set upon by the Natives from their Ambuscades, and the many Inconveniences which he suffer’d for want of Provisions, and trouble of travelling over the high Mountains, had necessitated him to return, had he not been resolutely bent to discover the Countrey; to which purpose marching on leisurely, he came into the heart of Popayan, where his wearied People sufficiently resting themselves amidst a fruitful Countrey, where they found pleasant Fruit-Trees, Houses full of Provisions, and fresh Rivers, which glided from the Mountain Andes, and some of the Rivulets also affording Gold, were encourag’d to build several Villages; in which nevertheless they made no Settlement, either because they could not get Gold enough, or else being driven from thence by the valiant Natives.

Cities and Towns of chief note.

The Places of chief note in it, are 1. Popayan, situate on the Banks of a fair River, but not nam’d, and in the midst of a Plain in a place of great Wealth, and enjoying a good Air. The original of the Name Popayan is from the Casique who Govern’d there at the time of the Spaniards first Arrival. It is a Bishop’s See, and the ordinary Residence of the Governor of the Province. The chief Buildings are the Cathedral, and a Monastery of the Fryers De la Merced. The Savanna Grounds towards the North feed many fat Cattel. The Fields produce the best American Maiz. Some of the adjacent Mountains either vomit Smoak, Flames, great Stones, or scalding Water, leaving a Salt behind it. Beyond the City Popayan the great River Magdalena takes its original in the Valley Cali, where several Brooks gliding from the Mountain Andes, inhabited by the Cocunocos, unite their Waters.

2. Antiochia, otherwise call’d St. Fides de Antiochia, on the Borders of New Andaluzia, and about a hundred Leagues from Popayan. In the midst of a small Territory to which it gives Name, in the Valley Nore, between the River Magdalena and Daria, wash’d by Rivulets, whose Sands are Golden, and whose Banks are shaded with all sorts of Fruit-Trees. The Inhabitants white and very rational, sleep in the Night under the open Skye: Their Houses are built a good distance from the Highways; near which the Pastures feed abundance of Sheep. The Pools breed plenty of Fish, and the Mines store of Gold, especially in the Mountain Buritica.

3. Caramanta, seated likewise on the Banks of the River St. Martha, within a little Province also of the same Name; the Inhabitants whereof being valiant and strong go naked, and dwell in little Huts, make white Salt out of a Fountain and a little Lake: they generally go to Antiochia in six hours, which is forty five Leagues, so swift runs the Stream.

4. St. Anne, in the Cantred or Hundred of Anzerma, a Town neatly situate upon the side of an Hill betwixt two Rivers, and in the midst of Plain no less pleasant than fertile: It was so call’d by Bevalcazar, because the Indians of this Place name the Salt Anzer; it is surrounded with Villages and Woods on a high Plain between two Rivers. The Air being exceeding hot, lightens generally every day.

5. The Village Pueblo Llana, which is inhabited by little People, who Trade in Salt, and have also Golden Rivulets. Near this Place is the Valley Aburra, consisting of many fruitful Plains, moistned by several Rivers; the Inhabitants whereof at the Spaniards first coming thither, hang’d themselves, with their Wives and Children.

6. St. Jago de Arma, built in a Wood of Palm-Trees, so nam’d from the Territory in which it standeth, rich and famous for its Mines of Gold, which it is said to have many and very good: The Ground round about being Mountainous, hath several Rivers, the chiefest whereof call’d Di Arma, is dangerous to cross, especially in Winter. The unwholsom Air hereabouts occasions many Sicknesses. Amongst other Fruits that grow in this County, is the Pytahaya, which whoe’re eats, voids Urine as red as Blood. Adjacent to it are the little Provinces Paucuran, Pozo, and Picara, which possess Golden Mines: also the Territory Carrapa which hath high and rugged Land, and many Rivulets: likewise the County Quimbaya, which abounds with thick and long Canes, wherewith the Natives build their Houses; in the hollow Bodies of these Canes the wild Bees gather store of Honey; and amongst them breed also exceeding great Lyons, the four-footed Beast Chuca which carries its Young in a Bag, Stags, Rabbets and Guadaquinajes, which being bigger than Hares, are exceeding good Meat. The Mountain Nevada, wonderful high, and smoaking continually, produces the golden Rivers Tacurumbi & De la Cequo. Twenty Leagues or more distant from St. Jago is, 7. Carthago, the chief City of Quimbayaes, and by which the aforesaid Rivers run. The temperate Climate here gives Health and long Life to the Inhabitants, who have several Fountains of salt Water, and the Fruit Caymito, not unlike a Peach, black within, having little Kernels, and a Juice which Dyes so deep, that it can scarce be wash’d off. Horses and Cows they have likewise very plentiful. Carthago it self stands in a pleasant Plain between two Rivulets; the Ways that lead to the same are very dirty, because of the continual Rain which falls there, with Lightning and Thunder. A League beyond the City flows the Stream Consota; near which lies a Lake, out of which Salt is made.

8. The City Cali, the Residence for the Governor and Collector, lying under a hot Climate in a plain Valley at a River, which falling from the Mountain, glides to the Stream Magdalena. Round about the same dwelt antiently several People, viz. the Gorrones, so call’d, because they nam’d a Fish Gorron, the Chancos, Giants, with long Faces and broad Foreheads, the Aarbacoas, Agnales, and Los Timbas, inhabiting among barren Mountains; but most of them were slain by the Spaniards, or destroy’d by one another, few onely escaping to the tops of the Mountains. The Countrey also swarms with wild Beasts, which have also devour’d many of the Inhabitants, both Indians and Spaniards.

9. The Haven Bonaventure, situate in a deep Inlet, about which live some Families which send the Commodities that come from New Spain to Popayan, Cali, and other Places; and though there be a Way along by the River Dagua, convenient for Mules and Horses to travel, yet it is seldom us’d, because the Cattel are so wearied out with the long Journey, that they cannot go through with their Loads; wherefore they employ the Indians to carry their heavy Burthens over the Mountains, which they do for a small Reward.

10. St. Juan de Pasto, giving Denomination to the Countrey about it, and being built on the pleasant Plains of the Valley Atris, is situate in a wholsom Climate, and is moistned by several Fountains and the River Angasmayo, the Boundary of Peru. The Spaniards have several Houses here, and breed store of Cattel, and especially Hogs. They have likewise Sugar-Mills, with which they make abundance of Sugar. The antient Inhabitants were salvage, deform’d, and of little Reason.

11. Timana, giving Denomination to the Countrey about, is plac’d under a hot Climate, yet the Inhabitants live long; they drive a great Trade with Thred spun out of the Herb Pita; and also with Sweet-meats, Fruits Preserv’d with Honey and Sugar, and especially a Kernel not unlike an Almond. In their Gardens they Plant the Herb Cocoa, which they chew constantly for the strengthning of their Hearts. Near Pita is a Mountain with Load-stones; and somewhat farther the Habitations of the valiant Yalcones in the Valley Aquirya, the Paezes, Pixaos, and Manipos, which so molested the Spaniards, that they forc’d them to forsake the Towns Neyra, St. Vincent, and Ville de los Angelos.

12. Guadalajara de Buga; and 13. Sebastian de la Plata, built on a Plain near the River Guali; the Countrey about which is exceedingly troubled with Earthquakes, and the Inhabitants with their Neighbors the Nineres, who bring the Flesh of their Prisoners to Sale in the publick Shambles.

14. Almague, built on a high Mountain, and lying under a cool Climate, is surrounded with fruitful Fields, which feed store of Cattel, and enrich’d with several Gold-Mines.

15. Juan de Truxillo, which the Indians call Yscance.

16. Madrigall; 17. Chapanchipa; 18. Malaga; and 19. Agreda; the Mountains about which inclose store of Gold.

Between the Promontory De Corrientes and the Island Palmas, are the Rivers Salinas and Balsas, which fall into the Southern Ocean; St. Juan, whose Banks are inhabited by a salvage People which dwell in the tops of the Trees, because the River oftentimes overflows the Countrey. They sowe Pease and Beans, and catch Fish, but buy other Provisions, with Gold.

The Isle Gorgona.

Against the Mouth of this River St. Juan lies the Isle Gorgona, three Leagues in circumference, which is compar’d to Hell, because of the dismal Woods which are upon it, barren Mountains, Millions of Musticho’s, whose Stings are intolerable, and never-ceasing Rain, insomuch that the Sun never shines upon it.

The Isle Del Gallo.

West-South-West from Gorgona lies the round Island Del Gallo, about a League in circumference; it is divided by several Rivers, and round about Planted with Trees, on which the Indians dwell as at the River St. Juan.

CHAP. IV.
Peru.

The Description and Division of Peru.

Peru, so call’d, as some think, from the River Beru afore mention’d, in the Southern part of America, was antiently a great and mighty Kingdom, as Mexico in the Northern, and fell under the Power of the Spaniards much after the same manner that the Kingdom of Mexico did, viz. through the Dissentions and Differences amongst the People themselves, as in the History of this considerable part of the New World will be related at large hereafter.

Commodities of the Countrey.

The Fountain Puchio.

Another strange Fountain.

A most wonderful Rock.

The Kingdom of the Kings of Cusco, which in some sence, and by some Writers upon occasion, is call’d The Kingdom of Peru, was extended by the last Inca or King, Huayna Capac, from North to South above a thousand Leagues together, comprehending not only a great part of the Province of Chile towards the South, but also the new Kingdom of Granada, and divers other Provinces to the North; but Peru, properly so call’d, containeth little more than half so much, viz. six hundred Leagues in length, and about fifty or threescore in breadth, except onely in some places, as in the Countrey of Chacopoyas, where ’tis thought it may be a hundred Leagues from the Andes to the South Sea: It lieth between the first and fifth Degrees of Southern Latitude, and is bounded on the East and North-East with that vast Ridge of Mountains which they call the Andes; on the West it is wash’d with Mare del Zur; on the North it hath the Countrey of Popayan; and on the South, Chile: It is commonly divided into three parts, which they call The Plains, The Hill-Countrey, and The Andes; the Plains are that part of the Countrey which lie along upon the Sea-Coast, being for the most part a meer Level without any Hills at all. The Sierra, as they call it, or Hill-Countrey, is that part of Peru which is partly mountainous and partly plain, fertile and well inhabited in both. The Andes are so high, rocky, and inaccessible, that they are scarce inhabited at all but by Salvages, save onely upon the skirts of them. The Plains from the Sea-shore to the Hill-Countrey, are for the most part about ten Leagues over or broad, upon which it scarce raineth all the year long. The Hill-Countrey is commonly twenty Leagues in breadth where narrowest; and from September to April hath Rain, the rest of the Year generally being fair Weather; but on the Andes, which take up all the rest of the Countrey of Peru, it raineth almost continually all the year long. In the Hill-Countrey their Summer begins in April, as is said, and ends in September; but in the Plains it begins in October, and ends in May; so that in the space of a day a Man may feel both Summer and Winter; be scorch’d with excessive Heat in the Morning, and yet well nipt with Cold before Night. The Andes generally are cover’d with thick Woods and wild Forrests. The Hill-Countrey is for a great space naked and open; the Plains in many places sandy and dry, and would be much more scorch’d with Heat than they are, but for the neighborhood of the Sea, which affords them many cooling Gales from the South and South-West Winds, whose property, although it be natural in other parts to be tempestuous, to bring Rain and foul Weather, yet here there is nothing but Serenity and fair Sun-shine days all the year long, although these Winds blow almost without ceasing upon the Countrey, and no other at any time, whereas the Sierra, or Hill-Countreys have Wind from every Coast, and such as bringeth all sorts of Weather with it, Rain, Hail, Frost, Snow, great claps of Thunder, &c. The Countrey affordeth not so much Cattel of the breed of Europe as some other Provinces of America; but in stead of Kine and Sheep, the Woods and Pastures are replenish’d with multitudes of the Vicugnes and Pacos, which are of no less Profit and Service. The Pacos here are said to be as big as some young Heifers of two years old, bearing a Fleece like Sheep, and their Flesh no less pleasant than the Mutton of Europe. But the great Wealth of this Countrey lies out of sight in the bowels of the Earth, viz. in those rich and (as they may seem) inexhaustible Mines both of Gold and Silver, which, as ’tis well known, the Countrey of Peru affordeth more than any other Province of America besides. The Sierra opens into large Valleys, amongst the chiefest whereof are Xauxa, Andaguailas, and Yucay, all of them well inhabited and fruitful. Below Cusco the Mountains Andes and those of Sierra run a greater distance than elsewhere one from the other, leaving the great Plain Callao in the middle. Moreover, several sandy Wilds, without Water, Herbs, Trees, or any living Creature, except Birds, extend from Tumbez to Taparaca. From the Valleys flow several Rivers into the Southern Ocean. On the Mountain Pira is a Fountain call’d Puchio, which springs in the Night, but is quite dry in the Day-time. Also near the chief City Quito in the Valley Chilo, is a Fountain whose Waters boyl faster or slower according as any one speaks softer or louder; and when not a word is spoken, it stirs not at all. If any thing exceed this for strangeness, it is a Rock in the Province Concuchos, which is all compos’d of black and white Stones, which are so neatly plac’d by Nature, as if Art had done a Master-piece, in the exact placing of them one between another: but the chiefest thing belonging to it worthy of admiration, is a wonderful power either to heal or hurt; for if the black Stones in this Rock be touch’d by any, they cause immediate Death; whenas the white ones cure all manner of Sicknesses, and being digg’d out, leave a Seed behind them, out of which grow new Stones to fill up the empty place.

Iuca Garcilasso, Extracted from the Peruvian Kings, tells us concerning Plants, That he saw a Raddish which a Man with both Arms could scarce embrace, and that under the shade of their Leaves, Horses might stand. But of all the Peruan Fruit the Cocoa is the crown, which grows on Trees of a Fathom long in hot and moist Grounds of the Valleys between Andes and Sierra; from whence it is carried to the Sea-Coast in long Baskets by Companies of three or four thousand at a time on the Backs of the Sheep Pacos. Before the Spaniards coming hither none might chew Cocoa without the Governor’s leave: A handful thereof chew’d and suck’d in the Mouth, enables a Man to travel two days without any other Sustenance, and mix’d with burnt Bones or Chalk, it is accounted an excellent Dish; there is such extraordinary plenty of them, that the Inhabitants spend yearly 90000 Baskets of the Leaves in Pottage. The Peruans also esteem Mamayes, a Fruit which grows round, not unlike a Peach, with two Stones, hard Rinds, and a well-rellish’d Pulp within, which dipt in Sugar is a great Dainty; they grow for the most part in the Islands. The Guaiyavas bears a wholsom and delicious Fruit like a large Plumb. The Palto, a Tree with many Boughs, bears a Fruit resembling a Pear, having a hard Rind, and within the Pulp a great Stone. The Fruit which grows on the Annona hath outwardly the same shape, but white within, and hath many black Kernels, which taste very deliciously. The Fruit Andas, so call’d from the desolate Peruan Mountains on which they grow, resemble the fore-mention’d Cocoa, but differ from the East-Indian, because they are full of hard shell’d Almonds, the like whereof grows on the Tree Cachapoyas, which are not inferior to any European Fruits that grow on Trees; in that part of Peru which hath its Name from that Fruit is the best sort, being exceedingly devour’d by Monkies, who plucking the Cachapoya Almonds from their Stalks, throw them on the Ground to break their prickly Shells, that so they may eat the Kernels without hurt. The Mille-Tree, being a sort of Grapes, furnishes with Wine. But the greatest benefit the Inhabitants receive is by their Sheep Pacos and Moromoros, which carry great Loads, and feed on what they find by the Way; their Flesh is good and wholsom, and being either Smoak’d or Salted, keeps good a considerable time; their Wool dress’d affords Cumbi, of which they make fine Table-clothes and Tapestry, which on both sides is alike. The chiefest Weavers liv’d formerly at Copachica near the great Lake Titicacu: They Dye their Wool with the Juice of boyl’d Herbs. It seems also strange to consider what Loads the foremention’d Sheep carried, for besides all sorts of Merchandise, they convey’d the Silver from Potosi to Arica, a Way of sixty three Leagues; but in former times they brought it as far again to Arequipa; and though they carried two thousand Bars at a time, amounting to above thirty thousand Ducats, yet they had no other Guard but a few Herdsmen, who driving them slept with them in the Nights under the bare Skie, yet lost none of their Riches, but when the bald Sheep call’d Moromoros, being wearied with their Loads, standing still, stretch’d out their Necks, and looking on their Drivers, on a sudden ran up into the Mountains, by which means the Silver was oft-times lost, if they were not suddenly shot. The woolly Sheep Pacos have also strange Tricks, for they often fall down under their Loads, and cannot be got up again, but must be let alone till they rise of themselves. So soon as one of the Sheep hath gotten the Mange (which the Peruvians call T’ecarache,) they bury them alive to prevent farther Infection.

The Customs and Habits of the antient Natives.

Giants antiently in St. Helena.

The antient Natives, though differing in Language and Customs, yet went all Apparell’d after the same fashion, the Men cover’d themselves with a Shirt, which came down below their Knees, and over that a Cotton Cloak, the Women wore woollen Coats down to their Ancles: Their Head-Ornaments were different according to an inviolable Compact between the Natives of several Provinces; for some were wrought, some plain, some divers colour’d Caps, with two, three, or no Feathers, according to the Custom of the Place: They were generally of a middle Stature; but those that were near the Equinoctial Line lesser. Their Histories make mention also of Gyants, who formerly inhabited the Promontory St. Helena, were each four times bigger than an ordinary Man, and fed not onely on the greatest Sea-Monsters, but devour’d each of them thirty Peruvians at a Meal. The Stone Images of these Gyants are at this day to be seen not far from Puerto Viejo. They likewise kept for a longtime Annual Feast-Days, on which they lamented the loss of the Gyants, which (as they say) was as followeth:

A Youth glittering in glory like the Sun descended from Heaven, and breath’d Fire, which rending the Rocks so terrifi’d the Giants, that they fled into a deep Cave, where they were all kill’d.

Helvius finds the Bones of the Giants.

Cornelius Whitefleet relates, That Helvius, Governor of Puerto Viejo being stirr’d up by the Report of the fore-mention’d Images, caus’d all the Graves to be broke open, in some of which he found Bones, which they suppos’d to be Whale-Bones, had not the Sculls manifested the contrary.

The original of the Kingdom of Peru.

The original of the Ingas.

Concerning the original of the Kingdom of Peru the Natives give this Account of it: That the most antient Inhabitants flock’d together like wild Beasts, without constant Abodes, Customs, Laws, or Governors, which salvageness is still retain’d in many Parts, amongst the Brasilians, Chunches, Chiruguanes, Yscayungus, Piloconens, most of the Floridans, Chinchemecos, and others, which degenerate from all Humanity. In time when some kind of Government began to be observ’d, it was rather Popular than Monarchical; yet generally those that were most powerful, valiant and subtile, bore the greatest sway: Amongst whom the first that five Ages since Commanded over the Inhabitants of the Valley Cusco, was Ingaroca, a subtile and politick Person, who built the Fort Pucora, Eastward near the Foot of the Mountain Andes, that so he might bridle the People which inhabited in those Parts between the Rivers, Moors, and Lakes, where the remainders of the Fort are to be seen at this day: Moreover, he conquer’d all the Countrey along the Southern Ocean towards the North and South, giving out that he was extracted from one of the seven Ingas (by which Name the Peruan Kings have been styl’d ever since) which came out of the Cave Pacaritambo, where they were preserv’d against the Deluge (of which the Heathens in America had long since an obscure knowledge,) and restor’d the drowned Families; wherefore every one not onely obey’d, but paid him Tribute, and bound themselves to receive of him the true Religion, which they desir’d he would teach them, as none knowing the same better than he, whom they look’d upon as Extracted from the Ingas. Amongst these Ingas the chiefest was said to be Mangocapa, who, according to their fabulous Tradition, climb’d through the Window Tambo out of the Cave Pacaritambo, and produc’d two Families, viz. Hunan Cusco, and Urin Cusco; from the first whereof Ingaroca affirm’d himself Descended, and having first made himself Master of all the Countreys about Cusco, rais’d the Family Vicaquiquirao, and laid out a great part of his Revenues upon Gold and Silver Utensils, and Ornaments for his Person and House, which he in his last Will charg’d that none of his Successors should inherit, nor dwell in his Palace, but that every one should build a new Habitation for themselves: He also erected divers Golden Idols.

Yaguarguoqu the second Inga.

Viracocha Inga his great Riches.

Some Authors begin this Dynastie of the Kings of Peru in a very different manner, making Mango Capa to be the first thereof, and to have been Succeeded by his Son Chincaroca, which cannot but be the same with this Ingaroca here mention’d. Yaguarguoqu (that is, Crier of Blood, because on a time being Commander, and taken Prisoner, out of vexation and exceeding grief he cried Blood). Succeeding him after his Death, rais’d the Family Aocaillipanaca, and was Succeeded by his eldest Son, the wealthy Viracocha Inga, of whom, when the Spaniards conquer’d Peru, went a Report, that great Riches lay buried in the Earth with him; wherefore Gonzalus Pizarrus tortur’d the Natives after an inhumane manner, to know of them where the Grave of the said Inga was; at last obtaining his Desire, he digg’d for the Body, which he found so well Embalm’d, that it seem’d to live, but no Gold with it; wherefore Pizarrus deceiv’d in his expectation, burnt the Corps; the Ashes whereof the Indians gathering in Urns, worshipp’d, though when he liv’d the Vulgar were much incens’d at him, for taking upon him the Name of Viracocha, who was their supream God and Creator of all things; but he pacifi’d them, saying, That Viracocha appearing to him in a Dream, had commanded him to take that Name upon him.

Yupangui’s Policy to gain an Opinion amongst the People.

Gross superstition.

The fourth Inga, call’d Pachacuto Yupangui succeeded in the Throne after the Death of his eldest Brother, who was slain in a Field-Battel against the Changas, inhabiting the Valley Andaguailas, where the Peruan Army was utterly defeated, few of them onely escaping by flight; among whom was Yupangui, who perswaded the rest to a subtile Design, by alledging, That the Almighty Creator, angry at their Destruction, had reveal’d many Secrets to him, viz. That the Creator in Heaven was call’d Viracocha Pachayachachie; That he resented it very ill; That whereas he formerly made Heaven, Sun, Moon, Stars, and Men, none worshipp’d him for it, but in stead of him they reverenc’d the Sun, Thunder, and the Earth, who had their Beings from him; That he would shew his Power against the victorious Changas by an unexpected Assistance of an invisible Army. This being believ’d of every one, stirr’d up the Peruans far and near, insomuch that in a short time a vast Army being rais’d, presented themselves to Yupangui, who made good use thereof; and also told them that Viracocha had decreed in Heaven, that he Yupangui should be his Vicegerent on Earth; which the Army believing, set the Peruan Crown which they had taken from his Father, on his Head: Thus promoted, he march’d against the Changas, whom in a bloody Battel he Conquer’d, and brought them all under his Obedience: Moreover, he made his Soldiers believe, that they were not the Conquerors, but invisible Men, whom Viracocha had sent, and who could be seen by none but himself; and that after the Battel they were turn’d into Stones, which they must seek for. Whereupon they gathering a great number of Stones on the Mountains, Yupangui call’d them Pururancas, and order’d that they should be worshipp’d, and carried with them into the Field whensoe’re they fought another Battel, hoping thereby to stir up his Soldiers to be couragious, who firmly believ’d, that with the visible Stones walk’d invisible Heroes that would certainly assist them. This Imagination wrought so much, that Yupangui’s Army assur’d of Victory with the help of the Stones, went on undauntedly on all Designs, insomuch that being fear’d by all the adjacent People, he forc’d them all to submission. This Yupangui rais’d the Family Yuaupococa, and plac’d a great Golden Image call’d Indyllapa on a Golden Chariot, which since was religiously worshipp’d, and afterwards carried to Caxamalca, for a Ransom of the Peruvian King Attabaliba, whom the Spanish General Pizarrus kept Prisoner, and at last Strangled. The Councellor Polus opening Yupangui’s Grave, found the Body Embalm’d, and no way defaced, but the Eyes cover’d with thin Golden Plates, and on his Head appear’d the Scar of a Stone which had been thrown at him; and though the Body had lain eighty years in the Grave, yet it seem’d rather living than dead, being onely a little grey. This Corps, as also several other Inga’s, the Marquess Camette brought from Cusco to Lima, so to prevent the Peruvians worshipping of them.

The Greatness and Riches of Guayacava.

Yupangui after his Decease was succeeded by Sopa Inga, and he by his Son of the same Name, who rais’d the Family Ayoac Aillo: The last (for nothing worthy of memory was done by either of them,) was succeeded by Guaynacava, a wealthy and valiant young Man, who was no sooner setled on the Throne, but he manag’d all things with great prudence, maintain’d War with several People, and conquer’d the Kingdom of Quito, four hundred Leagues beyond Cusco, whither after his Death his Body was carried, and buried in the famous Temple of the Sun, but his Entrails were buried in Quito not without many bloody Offerings, thousands of his Servants Sacrificing themselves at his Grave willingly, that so they might serve their Prince in the other World. The invaluable Treasures which he left behind him were carefully hid by the Peruvians till the Spaniards conquer’d that Countrey: The pav’d Ways, magnificent Buildings, and strong Castles, testifie as yet the Power of this Inga; wherefore in his life-time he was honor’d as a God. His Mother Mamaoclo liv’d to see above three hundred of her Children’s Children, all Extracted from her Son Guaynacava.

War between Huascar and his Brother Attabaliba.

Huascar burnt alive.

The chief of the Family Tanebamba were Huascar and Attabaliba, Sons to Guaynacava, (both by the Coya, or lawful Queen, however some have deliver’d to the contrary) who falling at variance betwixt themselves, resolv’d to decide the Quarrel by a Field-Battel, in which Attabaliba, being the youngest, was Conqueror. This Civil War was at the heighth when the Spaniards invaded Peru, which they could never have conquer’d, had not the Realm been so divided. During Attabaliba’s Imprisonment by Pizarrus, his two Generals, Quizaniz and Chilicuchima, took the Inga Huascar (formerly call’d Tito Cusi Gualpa, Attabaliba’s Brother) in Cusco, and carrying him to the Valley Sacsahuana, burnt him alive. It is set down as remarkable, that Huascar after his being vanquish’d, made great Offerings to Viracocha, thereby to gain his assistance in his extremity against Attabaliba; when he was inform’d, that a strange People which came from a remote Place over the Seas, had defeated Attabaliba’s Army, and taken him Prisoner: From which News Huascar taking courage, call’d the Spaniards Viracochas, and judg’d that they were come from Heaven to his Delivery, and the more, because his Brother had spilt so much Blood already: for Attabaliba had not onely slain the Prince Atoco, which led Huascar’s Army, with three thousand two hundred Men, and drank out of Atoco’s Skull tipt with Gold, but had also pluck’d out the Harts of above a thousand Children, which the Cannarites sent with Palm-Boughs to him, to desire Peace.

Mango Inga Settles in the Mountain Vilcabamba.

After Attabaliba’s and Huascar’s Decease, Mango Inga their Brother drove all the Spaniards out of Cusco, whither they not long after coming with new Forces, necessitated Mango, not without the loss of many Men, to take his flight up into the Mountain Vilcabamba, where he Setling, his Successors Reign to this day, secur’d from any Invasion by the natural strength of the Place. But the Inga Saritopa coming from the fore-mention’d Mountain, submitted himself to the Spaniards, who allow’d him the Valley Yucay to dwell peaceably in; but the rest of the Family of the Inga’s that fell into the Hands of the Spaniards, were all of them kill’d in Cusco, not without great grief of the old Inhabitants, to see so antient and noble a Family, by which they had been Govern’d in great State for three hundred years together, put to death by common Executioners.

Cusco the Residence of the Peruvian Kings.

The City Cusco, which was the Royal Seat of all the Peruvian Kings, was made more splendid than ever before, by Guayanacava, of whom Augustine de Tarrate, describing his Magnificence, relates, That when his Queen was Deliver’d of a Son, who was to succeed in the Throne, Guayanacava kept a great Feast for twenty days together, and on that day when the Child was to be Nam’d, a Golden Chain, each Link of which was as big as a Hand, and contain’d in all seven hundred Foot in length, was carried by twenty Peruvians to the Temple.

The manner of the Succession of their Kings.

The Succession of the Inga’s was after this manner: The Inga’s keeping many Concubines had many Children by them, none of which could lay claim to the Peruvian Crown, but onely the Son begotten on the Coya, or Queen, being generally the Kings own Sister, (whom they accounted lawful for them to Marry, as in antient times did the Egyptian Kings) Inherited the Realm, unless the Inga had a lawful Brother, who Inherited before the Son, though born of a Coya; or if the said Brother had a Son, he obtain’d the deceased Uncles Crown before him, who in apparence was the elder Heir.

The same Succession was also observ’d by other Governors, which the Peruvians call Curaca’s.

Their Burials and disposal of their Treasure.

The Burials of their Kings were perform’d with great solemnity; and the Treasures which they left behind were bestow’d in building of magnificent Guaha’s, which were Temples or religious Houses, where a kind of solemn Worship was to be perform’d, to celebrate the Memory of the Deceased. Some part of the Treasure was also distributed amongst the Inga’s Servants; but the Successor inherited not the least Mite of what his Predecessor had gotten, but was forc’d, according to an antient Law, to build himself a new Palace, and purchas’d anew every thing else belonging to it.

Their Crown.

Their Crown or Diadem was onely a fine red woollen Coif with a Tassel, that hung down over their Foreheads, which other meaner Princes wore hanging on their right Ear.

Their Coronations.

Their Coronations were also kept in great Pomp and State, the Nobility and Priests coming from all parts of the Countrey to Cusco, besides an innumerable multitude of common People.

The Noblemens Presents to the Inga’s consisted chiefly of Gold and Silver Vessels, fine Cloth call’d Cumbi, all sorts of Sea-shells, and stately Plumes of Feathers of inestimable value.

Thousands of Sheep differing in colour serv’d for Offerings: moreover, the Chief Priest sacrific’d a Child before the Image of Viracocha, on whom with great Reverence he cry’d, O great God Viracocha, we Offer you this Child, that you may keep our Realm in Peace, aid us in time of War, prosper our Inga in all his Undertakings, make him more powerful and greater than any of his Predecessors, and grant him wisdom to Govern this vast Countrey.

Their exact Form of Government.

No People in the World can be more respective, and shew greater Reverence to their Kings, than the Peruvians: for there were never any heard of in this Countrey that ever Rebell’d against their Prince; the reason of which was chiefly, because they always Govern’d with great Justice and Mildness, placing Governors over the respective Countreys and Provinces, according to their several Divisions, greater or lesser, with subordinate Power one under another, so that they Rul’d with great strictness, punishing with Death both Drunkenness and Theft. Moreover, the Ingas observ’d a prudent way in Government, viz. They kept their Subjects continually employ’d: The ordinary sort of Persons of subdu’d Provinces were sent to remote Countreys, and the Governors thereof kept at the Court in Cusco; and Princes Descended of the Royal Blood sent in their Places to Govern the new gotten Dominions: they divided the Inhabitants into Companies, plac’d one to Command over ten, another over a hundred, and a greater Officer over a thousand, and at last a Prefect or Major-General, over ten thousand; every one of which Officers were to bring in an Account every Week to the supream Governor, who was always of the Inga’s Family, what Men dy’d of their number, or how many were born, a present Estimate of every ones Stock, in Cattel or otherwise, and all remarkable Transactions that hapned. On the high Feast-day they were all to appear at Court, and to bring in the Revenues gather’d out of their Substitute Countreys. The main Division of the Countrey was into four grand Provinces, call’d Tahucantinsuyos, according to the four Ways that went from Cusco through the whole Realm, viz. Chinchasuyo towards the North, Coclasuyo towards the South, Andesuyo towards the East, and Condesuyo towards the West. The Collectors were divided into Hanansayos, Upper-Collectors, and Urinsayos, or Under-Collectors. The Quipocomayos, or Accomptants, could cast up exactly with Buttons, not onely what every Province, but also what each Man was to pay, and that according to the ability of the Countrey and Person.

Their stately Structures.

Many were the stately Temples, invincible Castles, magnificent Palaces, and other wonderful Structures built by the Ingas, the chiefest whereof stood in Cusco, Tiaguanaco, and Tambo; the Builders whereof were sent for by turns out of the adjacent Countreys, from which they brought exceeding great Stones, most of them thirty eight Foot long, eighteen broad, and six thick, which were so neatly joyn’d together with Mortar or Iron-work, that a whole Edifice seem’d to be one entire Stone. Their Bridges that led cross the Rivers were made of Flags and Rushes, fastned to each Shore with great Ropes. The like Bridge lay cross the deep Mouth of the Lake Chicuito, on which great Bundles of the Rushes Toto being ty’d together, and cover’d with Straw, so strengthen’d the Bridge, that great Loads were safely carried over the same.

The great Riches of the Ingas.

No Prince ever possess’d so much Riches and Splendor as an Inga of Peru, each Countrey presenting him with what was most esteem’d amongst them; the Chiches bringing Sweet-woods; the Lucanas, strong Sedan-Carriers; the Chumbibilcas, brave Dancers; and so accordingly every Countrey provided him with what they best esteem’d, besides the usual Tributes which they paid.

Those which digg’d the Gold and Silver out of the Mines, had Meat, Drink, and Clothing from the Inga, though at other times he enjoy’d the Labors of his Subjects for nothing.

Their several sorts of Tribute from conquer’d Countreys.

When at any time he conquer’d a Countrey by force of Arms, he made them pay from three several sorts of Tribute; the first was bestow’d in religious Offices. Each Guaca or Chappel receiv’d also a Revenue from the late conquer’d Countreys, the Fruit of which serv’d for Offerings to their chief God Pachayachachu, the Sun, their Thunderer Chuquilla, and to the Souls of the Deceased, and for Food for the Priests. The Religion through the whole Realm agreed with that which was observ’d in Cusco. But the second Tribute fell to the Inga’s Family, or Relation and Soldiers. Those who Till’d the Inga’s Ground, Sung before him in Festival Clothes. That which could not be spent in the Court was laid up in Store-houses for ten years together, against a scarcity should happen. Aged People, Widows, and such as were decrepid, paid no Tribute. The third part was for the Poor, which had every Year a piece of Ground allow’d them to make use of as they pleas’d. In unfruitful Years they receiv’d an Allowance out of the Store-houses before mention’d.

Their Provision for the Poor.

So likewise the Pasture, Meadows, and Arable Land was order’d for three several Uses, one third for religious Uses, a second for the Inga’s, and the last for the Poor. The Sheep being shorn on a certain Day, yielded the Poor a certain quantity of Wooll to make them Clothes. As soon as any Beast grew Mangy (which the Peruvians call’d Carache) they burnt them alive, so to prevent the spreading of it farther. Those that belong’d to the Inga’s Family, wore all Clothes made of the finest Wooll, and the coursest, call’d Tabasca, was distributed among the Vulgar.

Their Industry.

Besides this good Order of Government, it is wonderful to observe the Peruvians manner of Living, each learning from their Infancy not onely a Trade, but all things which they accounted necessary in House-keeping, as Weaving, Tilling of Land, building of Houses, and making of Tools requisite for both; so that they never made use of one another on any Account. Moreover, Master Artists, who work’d more for Pleasure than Gain, dwelt apart, being Silver-smiths, Painters, Musicians, and Dancers.

Their Habits.

Their Habits were heretofore of one fashion through the whole Realm, onely the Covering of their Heads were several, by which the People of one Countrey were distinguish’d from the other, according to an inviolable Law made many Ages since; some therefore wore thin Caps, others broad Pleits, others little Hats, others round Bonnets, others woven Caps, and the like.

Their Post-Stages.

Their Post-Stages, call’d Chasquis, were little Houses, each standing a League and a half from one another, wherein dwelt certain Officers, who with extraordinary speed convey’d the Inga’s Letters from one Chasquis to the other; after which manner in two days time they convey’d a Letter a hundred Leagues. But since the Spaniards conquer’d this Countrey, that Convenience was lost, till the tenth Peruvian Vice-Roy Martin Enriques re-establish’d the same; for he allow’d a Sallary to those Posts, that they might with speed convey all Letters and Packets from one to the other, being distant, according to his Establishment, four Leagues.

Their severe Laws against Malefactors.

Lastly, the Ingas maintain’d strict Laws in criminal Affairs; for as they did not neglect to encourage noble Atchievements (for whoe’re had done a valiant Act in the Wars, was made Governor of a Countrey, or had a certain quantity of Land given him, or Married one of the Inga’s Family;) so likewise they severely punish’d all Malefactors: for Murderers, Thieves, and Adulterers suffer’d Death without Mercy; yet they allow’d store of Concubines, and it was free for any one to Lie with his Neighbor’s Concubine, but Death to have to do with any Man’s lawful Wife, who were serv’d by the Concubines.

Their Marriages.

When a Bridegroom Betrothed himself to his Bride, he gave her (and put them on himself) a pair of Shoes call’d Ajota, not unlike those of a grey Fryer, which were lin’d with Cotton if she were a Maid, but with Leaves if a Widow, who nevertheless being generally younger than the Man, was to Mourn a whole year in Black for her deceased Husband; till the expiration of which time she was not to Marry another. Governors of Provinces and other Officers of State receiv’d their Wives from the Ingas, who enquiring out the beautifullest and most accomplish’d Virgins they could hear of, put the Ajota on their Feet, and gave them to such Persons as they most fancied; after which if they committed Adultery they were certainly put to death. The Marrying of Brothers and Sisters was also forbid, till the Inga Topa Yupangui, Father to Guaynacava broke that Law, by Marrying his own Sister Mamoello, and made an Order that the Ingas onely should have that liberty; nay, when he lay on his Death-bed, he strictly charg’d his Son Guaynacava to take his own Sister Goya Cuissilmay to Wife; and this incestuous Marriage produc’d Huascar and Attabaliba, (though some say Attabaliba was begotten on a Concubine) in whose time the Peruvian Kingdom went to ruine. Guaynacava also permitted the common People to Marry their Sisters of the Fathers side, but not of the Mothers.

Their manner of living.

The Peruvian Houses were antiently for the most part light and small; and for their Table they made but little preparation, satisfying themselves with a little Beer made of Rice, Bread bak’d of Maiz, dry’d Flesh, Fish, and Roots.

In their Wars they us’d Slings, Darts, Arrows, Lances, Pikes, Halberds, Pole-Axes, and Shields.

Their Funerals.

Their Funerals were also solemnly kept, especially those of Persons of Quality, the Corps was carried out on a brave Chair, from which he was put into the Ground, with two of his Concubines whom he best affected, and also three Servants, Gold and Silver Vessels, Maiz, and the Liquor Chica, which the nearest Relation spurted into his Mouth through a Cane; all which they did that the Deceased might make use thereof in the other World. But before the Funeral the Relations Mourn’d over the Corps several days, and after the Body was Interr’d, they plac’d the Picture of the Deceased upon the Grave: but the meaner sort of People had the Tools belonging to their Trade; and Soldiers their Arms plac’d on the same.

Their Religion.

In their Religion they had various Fancies; their prime God Viracocha bore several Denominations, and amongst others he was call’d Pacachame, or Pachayachachick, by which he was signifi’d to be the Creator of Heaven and Earth; as also Usapu, that is, Wonderful. In honor to this Pacachama stood formerly a magnificent Temple about four Leagues from Lima, where the Ruines still manifest its former glory, it being the Place where the Devil answer’d the Priests, who stood with their Backs towards the Image of Pacochame, bowing their Heads to the Ground, and showing many antick Tricks. The second Temple stood near Cusco, in which the Inga’s had plac’d the Images of all the Gods and Goddesses that were worshipp’d in Peru; and before each Image stood an Altar: the chiefest of them, call’d Puachao, consisting of massie Gold, was Dedicated to the Sun, on whose Forehead the Sun was Engraven on a Plate, which afterwards fell into the Hands of the Spanish Captain Mancius Sierra de Lequizamo; but because he lost the same one Night at Gaming, this Proverb was rais’d upon it, Lequizamo lost the Sun before it rose, because he got the Plate on which the Sun was Engraven in the Afternoon, and lost the same in the Night: The Temple it self, built of great Stones, curiously joyn’d together in Mosaick Work, and within link’d with Golden Plates of a Finger thick, stood full of Golden Chappels and Altars; round about it were several Galleries, into which the Priests and Priestesses Chambers open’d. Near the River Ticiquaque a third Temple, Consecrated to the Sun.

The various Idolatry of the Peruvians.

This kind of Idolatry was common to the Peruvians, with several other Nations of the antient Heathens, as hath been before observ’d, which made them mock at the Spaniards when they told them of a Crucifi’d Saviour, saying they had a splendid God, who appear’d to them in glory every Morning. In the third Temple near the River Taciquaque in Peru, which exceeded the other two, they worshipp’d Thunder by the Name of Chuquilla, Catuilla, and Intillapa, which the Peruvians believ’d to be a Man that Commanded the Air, and who being Arm’d with a Club and Sling, throws down Rain, Hail, and Snow from the Clouds, and shooting Bullets through the lower Region, causes Thunder and Lightning: They worshipp’d him after the same manner as they did Viracocha and the Sun, with holding up of a thing like a Glove, and sometimes Offering, especially in Cusco, living Children: Also they ador’d the Earth of which they made the Goddess Bathamama; also Mamacocha, the God of the Sea. The Rainbowe, which the Ingas carried between two Serpents for their Arms, was also religiously worshipp’d. Amongst the Stars they imagin’d Colca, by us call’d Aries, or the Ram, as chief; yet held several others of peculiar Denomination, in veneration, of which they crav’d such things as they wanted. The Shepherds ador’d the Star Nereuchilla or Capricorn, whom they judge to Rule over the Beasts. Others worshipp’d Machacuay which the European Astronomers call the Serpent, as commanding Serpents and Dragons, that they might receive no hurt from them. Tygers, Lyons, and Bears, were Rul’d by the Star Chuquichinchag; wherefore those who would walk free from those ravenous Beasts, lifted up folded Hands to the Constellations representing the same. They believ’d that there was no Creature living on Earth, whole Likeness the Heavens could not afford; and that those which were on Earth were under the influence of those in Heaven: from hence proceeded the Names of the Stars Chacana, Topatatca, Mamana, Mirma, and others. They likewise attributed a kind of Divinity to Fountains, Rivers, Rocks, Mountains, some kinds of Herbs, Roots, and especially the Papas, of a strange shape, and had a veneration for all manner of Creatures that were of an unusual form. When they travel’d they strew’d Shoes, Plumes of Feathers, and Cocoa in all cross Ways and tops of Hills, by them call’d Apachitas; and if they want the fore-mention’d things, then they throw a Stone for an Offering, from whence it proceeds, that in all cross Ways, and on the tops of Hills, lie heaps of Stones, which are accounted holy.

The like fond veneration of Stones the Saracens are said antiently to have had, upon a Tradition, That Abraham had enjoy’d Agar upon a Stone, and that according to Euthymius and Libanius, he ty’d his Cammel to a Stone when he went to Offer his Son Isaac.

The Images of their deceased Ingas, which they call’d Guaoiqui, were had in great honor, and carried with them to the Wars, and up and down in Processionings, and call’d upon for fruitful Seasons.

The Peruvians believ’d the Immortality of the Soul.

The Immortality of the Soul, the giving of Punishments to the Wicked, and of Rewards to those that do well, was generally believ’d amongst the Peruvians, but not the Resurrection of the Dead. Many suffer’d themselves to be buried with their Friends, that they might accompany them to the other World. When the Inga Guaynacava was buried, above a thousand of his Courtiers Sung several Songs, kept a great Feast, and went with great joy to be buried with him, that so they might serve their King on the other side of the Mountains. They Offer’d likewise a great number of Children, and with their Blood cross’d their Faces from one Ear to another: But this barbarous Offering was never us’d but at the Death of prime Persons of Quality; for the meaner sort of People set onely Meat on the Graves, and gave the Dead two Sutes of Apparel, put Money in their Mouthes and Hands; for they believ’d that the Souls ranging up and down from place to place, suffer’d many inconveniences.

Their Oracle.

Their Nunneries.

Their Offerings.

The Peruvian Images consisted generally of Gold, Silver, Stone, or Wood, all of them strangely deform’d: Some of them were said to give Responces like the Oracle at Delphos and Dodona, chiefly in the Temple Pacachama, whose greatness is sufficiently manifest by the Ruines of its Walls beyond Lima, where Franciscus Pizarrus got an invaluable Treasure. Each Peruvian Province had a Temple, besides which, in the Cities, Villages, and Hamlets, were Chappels of Ease, into which the Priests went at Night with their Backs towards the Idol, bended Heads and Bodies; in which posture they requested to know future Events, and were many times answer’d (if we may believe their Reports) in a terrible Voice. The great Temple at Cusco, wherein the Ingas had plac’d all the Peruvian Idols, is now turn’d into a Dominican Cloyster. In each Province of Peru was also a Nunnery (if we may so term it) or Habitation of devoted Virgins, call’d Allaguau, i.e. A House of the Choicest, over which Was plac’d a Governor nam’d Appopanaca, to whom none durst deny their Daughters; some of which were styl’d Wives of the Sun, and others Servant-Maids to the same: The Wives Cloth’d in Embroyder’d Coats, adorn’d the Temple, whilest the Maids kept clean the Walls and Floor. When they attain’d to fourteen Years of Age, some were chosen out from the rest, and oblig’d to perpetual Virginity and solitude of Life in their Chappels; which sacred Obligation if they broke by suffering any to Lie with them, they were buried alive after the manner of the Vestal Virgins, the Ceremony whereof is related by Plutarch: Others were oblig’d to make daily Offerings; others to make peculiar Sacrifices for the Inga’s Health, and happy Events in War; many also were employ’d in the Court Service to wait upon the Inga’s Wife or Concubines; and those being absolv’d from their Vow, were oft-times Married to Courtiers. These Nunneries were Endow’d with great Revenues from the Chacaras, or Church-Lands. Their Offerings were (for sometimes they Offer’d to their Idols the highly esteem’d Herb Cocoa, Maiz, several colour’d Plumes, Sea-Monsters, Gold and Silver Images of Beasts, fine Clothes call’d Cumbi, Sweet-wood, and Tallow to burn) either to have success in their Journeys, Trades, or for the preservation of Health, or to obtain a plentiful Harvest. But their usual Offerings were Cuces, a sort of Toads, which were eaten by the Peruvians. When they were to do any Business of consequence, then Persons of Quality kill’d their Sheep Pacos, not without strange observation of the colour and number of them, as also of the time; all which things well consider’d, they cook the Sheep and laid it cross their right Arm, turn’d the Face thereof towards the Sun, and mutter’d several words to themselves according to the colour; for if it was spotted grey, they spoke to Chuquilla, or Thunder; if white and short Fleec’d, to the Sun; if well Fleec’d, to Viracocha. In Cusco they Offer’d daily a short-fleec’d Sheep to the Sun in this manner: Making a great Fire call’d Vibbacaronca, the Priests threw the Sheep and four Baskets of Cocoa into it. Their Sacrifices Cozocovicca and Sapovicca, to obtain Conquests, were also very strange: for they gather’d out of Puna (which is a desolate place) several sorts of Brambles and Bushes nam’d Ganilli, which being all set on fire, they went about the Fire with round Stones in their Hands, on which were painted Serpents, Lyons, Toads, and Tygers, crying, Usachum, grant us Conquest, together with this Prayer, Destroy, O Creator, the power of our Enemies Gods; which said, several starv’d Sheep were brought out, which for that reason they call’d Urca; whose Hearts having torn out they began their Prayers afresh, saying, Mighty Viracocha, thus do thou pull out the Hearts of our Enemies. For the prosperity of the Ingas they kill’d in an open Field black Dogs, by them call’d Appurucos, whose Flesh was eaten with many Ceremonies by People appointed for that purpose. They made Offerings also to the Fountains, Rivers, Brooks, and Sea-shells, under pretence that those Shells were Daughters of the Ocean, and the Ocean the Father of Streams and Springs; when they had Sow’n their Fields, their Priests, chose to that Office, went from House to House to gather such Offerings as every one was pleas’d to give; which they laid at the Banks of several Sluces, at the time when the Water began to rise there, thinking by that Oblation to keep them from over-flowing their Lands, and washing away their Seed. In all places where two Rivers joyn’d together they wash’d themselves, having first bedaub’d themselves all over with stamp’d Maiz, and afterwards look’d upon themselves as well purg’d from Sin; which power they ascrib’d to their Baths. To strangle Children between four and ten years of Age was never us’d, unless upon the Inga’s being sick, or when he receiv’d the Royal Tassel, that from the death of the Children he might receive Health, or Reign prosperously. The fore-mention’d Nuns that were chose to attend on the King’s, were also strangled when the Inga was sick; nay, sometimes a Father would Offer his Son to Viracocha, on the Sun-Priest’s suggestion, That by his Son’s death he would recover from his Sickness, Praying to the foremention’d Deity, that they would be pleas’d to save the sick Father, because the Son had with his Death paid for his Fathers.

This kind of Cruelty the Devil seem’d to prompt the Heathens to, by making use of Abraham’s Example, who prepar’d his Son Isaac for a Sacrifice on Mount Moria; and that it was a Practice amongst the antient Ammonites and Moabites, and other Heathens (by which even the Children of Israel were apt to be seduc’d) appears from the Scripture it self: the Ceremonies of which bruitish Customs, with the seven Brazen Chambers of Moloch, may be seen describ’d by Rabbi Solomon.

Their High Feasts.

The high Feast Capacrayne, which the Peruvians kept in the first Moneth Rayme, agreeing with our December, deserves serious observation: for as long as the Feast lasted, no Stranger was suffer’d to Lodge in Cusco, whither they all flock’d again after the Feast was over, to receive Cakes made by the Mamaconas (an Order of Nuns) of Maiz and the warm Blood of a white Ram, and were distributed by certain Priests (Extracted from the Royal Family Iluqui Yupangui) who carrying them up and down in Golden Dishes, gave every one of a Company one, saying at the delivery of it, If you do not Reverence the Sun and Inga, this Food will witness against you to your Ruine; but if you worship them, then their Bodies will by this Pledge be united to yours: after which those that had eaten of the Cakes promis’d Obedience, and thank’d the Sun and Inga for their Food.

Their Manner of Confessions.

Their Penances.

The Esteem of their Soothsayers.

At the fore-mention’d Chasquis a course was taken to carry all that desir’d, to every Temple through the whole Kingdom of Peru, where the Inhabitants receiv’d them with great Reverence, having before confess’d all their sins to their Yaburies, or Father-Confessors, who being chosen to that Office with a great deal of Ceremony, impos’d greater or lesser Penances, according to the sins of the Penitent: those that were suspected to have conceal’d any of their sins, were put to cast Lots, or had the Entrails of the Beasts which they had kill’d to that purpose consulted about them, and thereby were discover’d if they had conceal’d any of their sins; which whenever it hapned, the Priests falling upon the false Penitents, thump’d them with a Stone on their Backs so long, till they had confess’d all their Faults, which the Priest was not to reveal on pain of Death, but to make Expiatory Offerings. The sins about which they were Examin’d, were chiefly Theft, Murder, Adultery, preparing of Poyson, or sleighting their Inga or Gods; for each of which Transgressions they had several kinds of Punishments. When the Inga fell sick, all People in general were forc’d to come and make Confession of their sins; also every one went to his Confessor when he was in trouble, or expected some Misfortune to befall him: The Inga himself Confess’d his sins to none but the Sun, which he desir’d to relate to Viracocha, and to beg pardon of him for the same; which done, he bath’d himself in a running Stream, and cry’d, I have made my sins known to thee, O Sun; do thou, O River, wash away mine Iniquities, and discharge them into the Sea, that they may never be more laid to my charge: which custom of Bathing, call’d Opacuna, was also us’d by all other Penitents. A Father losing his Son by Death, was censur’d for a great Sinner, wherefore he could not be permitted to be Confess’d before he had been whipp’d with Nettles by a certain ill-look’d Officer appointed for that end; after which their Fathers Ychuris enjoyn’d such Penances as they thought fit; some were order’d to last several days; others to pay rich Garments, Silver, Gold, or the like; others receiv’d a certain number of Blows; some were condemn’d to live on the Mountains, excluded from the society of all Men. If their Sorcerers at any time foretold a Fathers Death, then he immediately Sacrifis’d his Son, that with his Death he might buy his own Life. No People were more respected than their Soothsayers, as Men that could discover private Thefts, Accidents that hapned in remote Countreys, and also future Events, and so far their Credit amongst the Vulgar carried them, that they undertook to tell the Spaniards when their Countrey-men should be Conquerors, and when defeated in the War they maintain’d against the Netherlanders. There were also cunning Women, who making themselves dead Drunk with Chica, with which they mix’d the Herb Viloa, and afterwards coming to themselves again, answer’d all the Questions that were proposed to them.

Their monthly Feasts.

The Peruvians kept two sorts of Feasts, the first at certain times, the others on special occasions; the set-Feasts were kept Monethly; on the first Moneth Rayme, agreeing with our last Moneth December, as aforesaid, they kept the great Feast Capacrayme, on which they brought Multitudes of Sheep and Lambs for Burnt-offerings, besides Silver and Gold. Not far from the Fire stood three Carv’d Images of the Sun, and three others representing Thunder; and this was generally the Day of the Installation of the young Inga’s, which was after this manner: The chief Priest boring a Hole through his Ear, cover’d the upper part of his Body with the holy Cloth Guaras, whilest the inferior Priests whipt him with knotted Cords, and painted his Face with the Blood. During these Ceremonies no Stranger was suffer’d to remain in Cusco, but after the Feast was ended they all return’d, and as before, receiv’d Cakes bak’d of Maiz and Blood, as a testimony that they lov’d and honor’d the Inga.

Their Harvest Ceremonies.

Their Feast Ytri.

The three Images of the Sun before-mention’d they call’d Apointi, Churiunti, and Intiquaoqui, that is, Father-Sun, Son-Sun, and Brother-Sun. In like manner they nam’d the three Images of Thunder, Chuquilla, Catuilla, and Intillapa; from which Acosta judges that the Devil had obscurely taught the Peruvians the Mysteries of the holy Sacrament and Trinity, (that their glory might be eclips’d by Idolatrous Errors) especially the last, which seems plainly to be signifi’d by the Peruvian Deity Tangatanga, whom they affirm’d to be One in Three, and Three in One. And that other Nations also had a glimpse of the same may be collected from Philip Cluverius, who endeavors to demonstrate, that the antient Germans and Gauls obscurely ador’d the Trinity in the midst of their Heathenism, under the notion of Sun, Moon, and Fire, the Sun signifying the Father, the Moon the Son, and the Fire the Holy-Ghost; to confirm which he makes use of Cæsar’s Testimony, viz. They onely esteem those Gods whom they see, and those that assist them, viz. the Sun, Vulcan, and the Moon; for they have never heard any thing concerning any other Gods. Diodorus Siculus seems also to ascribe a glimpse of this Mystery to the Egyptians, when he says, That the antientest People in Egypt, when they view’d the World, and were amaz’d at all things on the Earth, they judg’d that two Gods Govern’d them all, viz. the Sun and Moon, by whom all things flourish’d and encreas’d; to whom they added a third, namely Fire, to which they attributed a Divinity, as conducing much to the increase and growth of all things. The Moon, which was also call’d Juno, they judg’d to be the Offspring of God, (for Son and Daughter were promiscuously taken) who, according to Homer, Marrying with Jupiter, brought forth Vulcan, which might haply be to them a Type or Figure of the Holy-Ghost, proceeding from the Father and Son: Vulcan was by her plac’d a President over the Fire, by which the Heathens seem’d to imitate the fiery Power of the Holy-Ghost, purifying and cleansing all things: and this cleansing Power was aim’d at by Romulus, when, according to Dionysius Halicarnassensis, he commanded his Soldiers to leap through a Fire made before his Tent, that so they might be purifi’d from all their Crimes. But it may be thought strange, that the Peruvians, Germans, or Egyptians, lost in a Wood of gross Idolatry, could have any apprehension, though never so obscure, of the holy Trinity, when as the most nice and curious Greek and Roman Wits have made such gross mistakes concerning God. But to return again to the Peruvians: They kept their second Feast in the second Moneth Camay, on which they threw the Ashes of their Offerings into the River, and follow’d them on the Shore for the space of five Leagues, praying the River to carry the Ashes to the Sea, where Viracocha would receive them. In the third and fourth Moneths they kill’d a hundred and ten black spotted and grey Sheep. In the beginning of May (by the Peruvians call’d Hatuncuzqui) they gather’d in their Maiz, and kept the Feast Aymorai; after which they return’d home Singing from their Fields, call’d Chacra, and carried a great heap of Maiz with them, nam’d Perua, wrapping it up in rich Garments; three Nights they continu’d their Ceremonies, imploring the Perua to preserve their Harvest of Maiz from any damage that might chance to come to it, and also to let that grow prosperously which they should Plant next. Lastly, their Sorcerers consulted whether the Perua could last till the next year? to which if they were answer’d No, they carried it into the Fields, and burning it, made a new Perua, which when they knew to be sufficient to last good a year, they carried it to the Granary in great triumph. In the seventh Moneth Ancayacuzqui, they kept the Feast call’d Intraymi, with a hundred Sheep, in honor of the Sun. They also made several Images of the Wood Quimia, which they put in rich Habits, strew’d the Ways with Flowers, Danc’d a strange Dance nam’d Cayo, Singing several Songs. Persons of Quality put Golden Plates about their Knees, as the common People painted them with divers Colours. In the eighth Moneth Chahua they kept the high Feast Huarqui, on which they Offer’d a hundred grey Sheep; the like number, but of a Chesnut colour, they Offer’d the following Moneth Yupaquis, besides a thousand Cuies, that the Air, Water, or Sun, might not spoil their Plants. Their Feast Situa they kept on the tenth Moneth Coyaraymi after this manner: They gather’d all together on the first day before the Moon rose, which no sooner appear’d, but they made a terrible noise, beat one another with lighted Torches, then wash’d the Dirt from their Bodies, and made themselves Drunk for four Days together. The eleventh Moneth Armaraimi, was nam’d Punchaiquis, from the Feast they kept therein, on which (besides the usual Offerings of eight hundred Sheep) they ty’d a black Sheep to a Post without Meat, till such time as there fell store of Dew. Their Feast call’d Raymicantara Raiquis, was kept in the last Moneth Ayamara, on which their Youth were bor’d through the Ears. Amongst the high Feasts which were kept on great occasions, the chiefest was Ytri, against which they all made new Clothes after a peculiar fashion, wearing their Cloaks muffled about their Heads; in which manner they walked leisurely a whole Day and a Night; during which time none durst either Eat or Drink, or open his Eyes: But after this serious Processioning follow’d four days of extravagancy, as Drinking, Dancing, and the like. In their Dances, which were to the sound of Drums, Pipes, and Horns, they imitated all manner of Trades by strange motions of their Bodies, besides divers other Frolicks and May-games which they us’d at such times of Mirth and Festivity: But since the Spaniards conquer’d Peru, all these Heathenish Customs have been laid aside.

The Destruction of the old Empire of Peru foretold.

As to the Prognostications and Fore-runners of the destruction of the old Empire of Peru, it is reported, that Guaynacava, Father of the last King Attabaliba, lying on his Death-bed in Quito, said to his Princes, This Realm, at present rais’d to the highest top of Eminency, is hastning towards its Ruine; and though our Kingdom remain as yet free from foreign Invasion, the Countreys round about are already conquer’d and in Slavery: The Gods have call’d strange People from unknown Regions, who by degrees will reach us also. With me, who am the twelfth Inga, dies the Dominion of the mighty Peru. A People of other Fashions and Religion will subvert our Religion, Laws and Government, and bring us under subjection to them. There were also Signs and Prodigies that portended the Dissolution of this Empire; amongst the rest a great Eruption in the Province of Tacinga, which rending the Earth asunder vomited up Flames of Fire; nor was it long e’re they were fulfill’d, for whilest the Peruvians were making of Offerings to Viracocha for the delivery of their imprison’d King Huascar, News was brought to Cusco of Attabaliba’s being taken; the Particulars whereof, with other Matters touching the Conquest of this Kingdom by the Spaniards, and how they pillag’d the Countrey, murder’d the Inhabitants, and enrich’d themselves with their inestimable Treasures, shall in order be related.

By whom Peru was first discover’d to the Spaniards.

Great Difficulties in the Discovery of Peru.

Pizarro made Governor of Peru.

Pizarro taking Attabaliba Prisoner, puts a vast Ransom upon him.

Huascar burnt by Order of his Brother Attabaliba.

Attabaliba put to death by the Spaniards.

Attabaliba strangled by Almagro’s Order.

The antient Splendor of the Peruvian Ingas.

Quisquis, Attabaliba’s General, stabb’d and cut in pieces.

Mango Inga releas’d out of Prison, sets upon the Spaniards, and is at last put to flight.

Several Parties of the Peruvians set upon the Spaniards and overthrow them.

They are beaten by Alvarado.

The first that gave the Spaniards notice of Peru, was an Indian Prince call’d Panguinaco, who having been taken Prisoner, inform’d Vasquez Nunnez of the abundance or Gold and Silver which was to be had there, who resolv’d to venture through a thousand Dangers into the South Sea. After which Francisco Pizarro, Ferdinand de Lugue, and Diego de Almagro, consulted upon this great Design, Anno 1525. Pizarrus being order’d to Sail before with a Ship carrying a hundred and fourteen Men, and Almagro to follow with a Vessel carrying seventy Men, whilest De Lugue staid to manage the Affairs at home. Fifty Leagues Southward from Panama, Pizarrus found a small Neck of Land nam’d Peru, from which it is most probable that great Kingdom afterwards receiv’d its Denomination, though many deduce it from the River Beru, as before mention’d: Thence Sailing to the main Continent of Peru, and Landing, he lost several of his Men, and being himself desperately wounded, return’d with ill success, whilest Almagro missing of him, Landed afterwards in the same place, and also lost several of his Men, and one of his own Eyes: yet not long after they renew’d their Design, carrying with them in two Ships and three Boats, three hundred stout Men, which all suffer’d extream Hunger, and had they not happily gotten some Sea-Crabs, they had without doubt all of them perish’d: at last Landing on the Coast of Catamez, they were Encountred by a People whose Faces were hung full of Golden Nails, and daily lost more and more of their Men; upon which ill Successes the new American Vice-Roy forbad the farther discovery of Peru, and call’d home the remaining part from the Island Gallo, so that Pizarro kept with him but twelve Men, with whom he went to the desolate Isle Gorgona, where he liv’d on Sea-Snails, till he receiv’d Provisions from Panama; after which they spent two years in making farther Discoveries upon the Coasts of Peru: During which time he visited the Queen Capullana, and discover’d a mighty Palace, where three of the twelve Men were kill’d, whose Memory deserves to live for ever, because the World owes to their unheard-of Valor the Discovery of the mighty Kingdom of Peru; but there are onely left Recorded the Names of those nine Worthies who surviv’d that Exploit, which were these following, Nicholas de Rivera, Peter de Candia, Juan Torre, Alonzo Briseni, Christophero Peralca, Alonzo de Truxillo, Francisco Cuellar, Alonzo Molina, and the Pilot Bartholomeo Ruyz: With these nine Pizarro Landed on the Isle Puna, inhabited by a valiant People, who us’d Bowes, Darts, Silver Knives, and Pikes tipt with Gold: From thence he steer’d his Course unto the Haven Tumbez, where Peter de Candia Landing, was met by forty thousand of the Inhabitants, who conducted him to the Temple of the Sun, built by the Inga Guaynacava, and adorn’d in the in-side with Golden Plates. Not long after which Pizarro was by an Order from the Spanish Court made Governor of Peru, to the great discontent of Almagro; which Difference being decided, Pizarro set out again with two hundred and fifty Foot, besides Horse, with which he Landed a hundred Leagues lower than before, where he got a great Mass of Gold and some Emeraulds of the Casique, all which he sent to Panama, thereby to stir up the People to come to Peru to his assistance; where those that were at present on the Place, besides other great Hardships which they suffer’d, were miserably plagued with Ulcers in their Faces; yet they prosecuted their Conquest as well as they could with what small Power was left them, and had newly taken Puerto Viejo when Captain Bevalcazar and Juan Florez brought fresh Supplies of Men and Horse; with which Recruit Pizarro conquer’d the Valley of Tumbez; from whence they Sail’d over to the Island Punas, where the friendly Entertainment they met with at first, turn’d soon after into a bloody Battel: for the Spaniards not forbearing to prie into every House, and committing many Outrages, were set upon by the Natives, whom having at last subdu’d, and being again supply’d with new Forces by Ferdinando Sotto from Nicaragua, they return’d to Tumbez, where the Countrey was all in Arms upon the Report of the Spaniards Cruelties committed on the Island Puna, insomuch that they Offer’d all those whom they took alive to their Gods, and slew as many as they could conveniently meet with. Pizarro having stay’d about twenty days, went with his Brothers Juan and Gonsalves, the Captains Sotto and Bevalcazar, and fifty Horse over the River Ambato about Mid-night, through a thorny Way betwixt Mountains, and about Break-of-day fell upon the Tumbezan Army, and having setled things pretty well in those Parts, he built the City St. Michael in the Countrey Tangazara, along the River De la Chira, where he was Complemented by two Agents from Cusco, who desiring Aid in Huascar’s Name against his Brother Attabaliba, receiv’d for Answer, That he was going to Caxamalca, as indeed he was, to find Attabaliba there; whose Commands that he should not approach prov’d all in vain: for Pizarro, under pretence of Complementing him in his Catholick Majesty’s Name, was no sooner admitted to his Presence, but he took him Prisoner, and set for a Ransom upon him as much Gold as a Room of fifty four Foot long and nine Foot broad was able to contain, as high as he could just reach with his Hand held up: But the Gold coming slower than was expected, Pizarro was much incens’d thereat, whom Attabaliba endeavoring to pacifie, alledg’d, That it could not possibly come sooner, because the Way between Caxamalca and Cusco, from whence the Gold was to be fetch’d, was at a great distance: The truth whereof Pizarro resolving to try, sent Sotto and Peter del Baro to Cusco in Chairs, carried by Peruvians exceeding swift of Foot, and who if they tir’d were successively reliev’d by others that attended, without so much as setting down the Chair; being got about half way, they met with Attabaliba’s Captain Cilucuchuma, he having taken Huascar Prisoner, who requested Sotto and Baro that they would be pleas’d to deliver him out of the Hands of his blood-thirsty Brother, for which kindness he would pay three times as much Gold as Attabaliba had promis’d, who was not able to give any thing else but the Golden Plates which were in the Temple of the Sun in Cusco; whereas Huascar had all the Treasure that was left by Guaynacava; which indeed was true, for Huascar had caus’d it privately to be buried, and put to death those that did it, that so he might keep the place conceal’d where it lay; insomuch that none could ever find it out to this day, though the Spaniards have tortur’d the Indians with all imaginable cruelty, to make them discover the place. But Attabaliba inform’d by Pizarro of Huascar’s Imprisonment, seem’d to be exceeding sorry, and said, I am much troubled at the News of my Captain’s laying violent Hands on my Brother Huascar, whom I acknowledge my eldest Brother, and both of the same Father and Mother; but I suppose he has no design to kill him, but onely keeps him Prisoner, to bring him to grant me peaceably to enjoy the Kingdom of Quito, of late brought under subjection of the Peruvian Crown. Pizarro not observing Attabaliba’s subtilty (who design’d nothing but Huascar’s Death, out of fear that the Spaniards upon his liberal promises to them, might promote him to the Throne) comforted him as well as he could: whereupon Attabaliba supposing that Pizarro would be little concern’d at the killing of his Brother Huascar, gave speedy Order that he should be burnt alive, which accordingly was put into execution; but before he was brought to the Fire, he foretold his Brother Attabaliba’s cruel death. During which time Almagro came with fresh Supplies from Panama, eager to have a share of the fore-mention’d Ransom, which at last was paid with overplus; for by daily bringing in of Baskets of Gold, the Chamber was fill’d up to the very top; but though Attabaliba had more than perform’d his Promise, yet Sentence of Death was pronounc’d against him presently after he had been Baptiz’d: the Reasons of which wicked and rash Condemnation were two; first the false Accusation of a Peruvian Interpreter call’d Philippillo, who desir’d his Death, that then he might with the more freedom enjoy one of his Wives; for Attabaliba mistrusting the same, had complain’d thereof to Pizarro, saying, That his Imprisonment was not so grievous to him, as the thoughts of the Adultery, acted against the strict Laws of his Countrey; the Defiler of an Inga’s Bed being not onely to be burnt with the Adulterers, but also the whole Families of them, to the least Infant, their Houses to be rac’d to the Ground, and their Land sow’n with Salt, as for ever curs’d. The second cause of Attabaliba’s Death is laid on Almagro, who came to Peru with new Forces, and who fearing that none of the Gold which Attabaliba had the delivery of, would fall to his share, as not having been in the Battel where Attabaliba was taken, therefore order’d him to be suddenly Strangled, that so the Booty might be equally divided. Not long after Pizarro conquering Cusco, got no less Treasure than at Caxamalca. Here the Reign of the Peruvian Inga’s ceased, with which before no Kings that ever Govern’d in the World were able to compare in Riches and Glory. Their Palaces were round about adorn’d with Golden Images; and they never ate but out of Golden Vessels, spitting in the Hands of beautiful young Women of Noble Extract, were worshipp’d like Gods both whilest living and when dead, all their Subjects being their Slaves, and they the sole Lords of the whole Realm. In the interim Bevalcazar march’d from the new City St. Michael, with a hundred and twenty Foot and eighty Horse, to assist the Cannares against one of Attabaliba’s Generals, who having spoil’d the Ways by digging Pits, and covering them over with Bushes, resisted them in several places: then marching to Quito he burnt the City, after having kill’d a hundred of the Natives, because they laughed at the Spaniards Arrival. Afterwards joyning with Almagro, he went back to Cusco, whither on the Way he had News of Quisquis, Attabaliba’s General, and of his Brother Guaypalcon, who making use of a Rock, threw down great Stones, by the Peruvians call’d Galgas, which in their Fall hitting others, brought down a great number with them, by which means he not onely defended the Place for the present, but kill’d fourteen Spaniards; nevertheless distrusting his ability to keep it, he retreated to a steep Mountain about Midnight, at the Foot whereof a Passage led over a deep River, where he burnt all his Luggage that he could not carry with him; also above fifteen thousand Sheep and four thousand Prisoners, became wholly at the Discretion of Almagro, who leaving there Captain Martin Astete, order’d him to build the Town Truxillo: In the mean time Quisquis was put to flight by Pizarro, and went to Quito, where he lost many People, that were kill’d by Bevalcazar’s Guard; yet those that were remaining chose rather to Fight to the last, than flye through Wildernesses, and there be starv’d to death; which Quisquis contradicting, was Stabb’d by his Captain Guappalau, and immediately after cut to pieces. As soon as these Stirs were quieted, Pizarro began to build the City Los Reyos, near a convenient Haven of the Southern Ocean, whilest Almagro marching to Chili with two Troops of Horse, and five hundred Foot, return’d without doing any thing remarkable, except his taking the Interpreter Philippillo, (whom he caus’d to be cut into four pieces) and his maintaining several Battels against the Chileses, clad in Sea-Wolves Skins. In this Journey he lost several of his Men on the Snowy Mountains. About this time a Ship fitted out by Gabriel Carvajal, Bishop of Placentia, Sailing through the Straights of Magellan, ran into the Haven Los Reyos, out of which the first Rats swam ashore that ever were in Peru, by which the Countrey since suffering much damage, the Inhabitants call’d them Ococha, that is, Sinful Creatures. Now all things on the Spaniards side were tending to a quiet possession, when a new Accident arose, which had like to have spoil’d all, for Mango Inga, Attabaliba’s Brother, being releas’d out of Prison by Juan Pizarro, obtain’d leave to go to Yucaya, to fetch the famous Golden Image Machys, representing his Father Guaynacava: but he having now gotten his Liberty slew all the Spaniards which work’d in the Gold-Mines, took the Castle of Cusco by Storm, as also the City, after a Siege of eight Moneths; which nevertheless was by Francisco Pizarro soon re-taken, and Mango forc’d to flye into the Mountains Andes, after he had kill’d several of Almagro’s Men; soon after Almagro about Midnight getting over the Walls, and taking Ferdinando and Gonsalvo Pizarro, and Alphonso Alvarado Prisoners, condemn’d them all three to die, caus’d himself to be proclaim’d Governor, and gave the Royal Tassel to Paulo Inga, whilest Gonsalvo and Alvarado breaking Prison, inform’d Francisco Pizarro thereof (who then had obtain’d the Title of Marquess, and for an Inheritance, the Province Attabillos;) he was exceedingly troubled for his Brother Ferdinand, whose Enlargement he thought would be best procur’d by making Peace with Almagro and the sooner, because the Peruvians began to rebel against the Spaniards in most places, slew divers Companies of them; amongst whom Diego Pizarro was set upon in a narrow Path call’d Laucesta Parcos, and amongst the Mountains lost seventy Horsemen; and Gonsalvo de Tapico sav’d not one of eighty Horse. Also the Peruvians set upon three hundred Troopers, Commanded by the Generals of the Horse, Morgoveio and Gaeti, in a narrow Path, and rowl’d down great Stones from the tops of the Mountains both before and behind them, so killing both Horse and Man before they could put themselves into a posture of Defence, insomuch that none escap’d with Life but two Troopers. Francisco de Godoy, sent out of Los Reyos with forty five Horse, upon Discoveries, return’d also with great loss, being pursu’d twenty Leagues by the Peruvians; against whom Peter de Lerma being sent out with sixty Horse, fought a whole day with them, and though few of his Men were kill’d, yet many were wounded, and several taken: The victorious Peruvians retreating to the top of a sandy Mountain in the Night, Offer’d the Spaniards they had taken Prisoners, as a testimony of thanks, to Viracocha, and afterwards stood drawn up near the City Los Reyos by the General Tyzopangui. The Marquess thus beset round, sent for Aid from New Spain and Truxillo, and also for Alphonso Alvarado to come back, who had been sent to discover the Countrey Chachepoyos, and being gotten into a Desart, would without doubt have perish’d for want of Water, had not some Horsemen riding somewhat out of the Way, found Pits with fresh Water: notwithstanding which, five hundred Inacona’s (for so the Spaniards call’d the Peruvian Slaves) died for Thirst. He was afterwards supply’d by Gomez Tordoya with two hundred Men, by the help of whom, though encompass’d by the Inhabitants near the Bridge Lamucacha, where began a fierce Battel, Alvarado was in the end Conqueror.

Civil War between Pizarro and Almagro.

The Marquess Francisco Pizarro murdered.

His Original and the manner of his Rising.

Whilest the Spaniards found so much to do with the Peruvians, yet they could not forbear more and more Clashing amongst themselves, the Marquess commanding that Almagro should surrender and leave the City Cusco; but he refusing to obey, fortifi’d himself on the top of the Mountain Gaytara, stopt the Ways by cutting down the Trees: but Ferdinando Pizarro getting up to the top along a private Way, made such a confusion amongst them with Bolt-shot, that Almagro, who was sick at that time, was forc’d to flye; which being told Pizarro, he pursu’d him, and had doubtless utterly defeated him at that bout, had not his Men, benumm’d with marching in the deep Snow, been taken with a Distemper which made them as if they had been all Sea-sick, (for such is the property of the Mountain Guaytara) insomuch that they could scarce carry their Arms: Whereupon Almagro was advis’d to oppose his Pursuers, and that he need not doubt of the Victory; but he either following his own Dictates, or being counter-advis’d, fortifi’d himself in Cusco, whither Ferdinand and Gonsalvo Pizarro march’d against him. Rodrigo de Orgonnes Commanded Almagro’s Army, who being sick, lay on the Walls of the City to see the Battel fought. The Peruvians, who on each side were in the Spanish Service, march’d in the Front: on the twenty sixth of April, Anno 1538. the Fight began, in which the Almagrians did much mischief with Cross-bar shot amongst the Pizarrians; yet Almagro’s Horse retreated first, being under the Command of Peter Valdivia; soon after which the rest of his Army, their Courage also failing, fled to the City; into which, as soon as Orgones being shot in the Head and slain, the Conqueror rush’d after them, and took Almagro Prisoner: yet notwithstanding this prosperous beginning, he soon found himself in a great strait, since those which remain’d alive of Almagro’s Party refus’d to serve Pizarro, and murmur’d against him in all places, resolving to take Almagro from him by force, besides that Pizarro’s Soldiers grumbled that they were not paid sufficiently for the many hazards which they had run: wherefore to compose these Troubles as well as possibly he could, he banish’d all whom he thought to be of the opposite Party, sent away the chief of his own mutinous Soldiers with Captain Peter de Candia, to discover new Countreys, put Almagro to death, and march’d to Callao; where being straitned for want of Provision, he made no stay, but got his Army with much ado to Cusco. Gonsalves Pizarro was likewise so set upon by the Natives, that he lost a considerable number of Men: In short, the Pizarrans were defeated in all places, and at length the Marquess, though forewarn’d by his Secretary Antonio Picado, was murder’d in his own House in the City of Lima, otherwise call’d De los Reyos, by a Bastard-Son of Almagro, nam’d Diego, in the Year 1541; his Body dragg’d to the Church-yard, lay there to every ones view and derision, till John de Barbara buried the same. His Father Gonsalvo Pizarro, sir-nam’d The tall Citizen of Truxillo, Commanding a Company of Foot in Navarre, had two lawful Sons, viz. Ferdinand, who was murder’d in the Spanish Castle Motta, and John that was slain in Cusco, when Mango Inga conquer’d the City, the other two, Gonsalvo and Francisco, being both Bastards; the last of which is said to have been expos’d by his Mother in the Church Porch, and kept alive for several days by sucking of a Sow, till his Father afore-mention’d finding him, and acknowledging him for his Son, put him out to Nurse, and when he was grown up set him to keep Swine; which course of Life he soon left, and following Alphonsus de Ojeda, Balboa, and Pedro de Avita in their Expeditions, he quickly grew rich, and at last came to that heighth of Honor and Command we have heard. Francisco Martino de Alcantara was also his Brother by the Mothers side onely. He was a Man who despis’d all Dangers and Hardships, was so well experienc’d in Martial Affairs, that he might well stand in competition with many of the antient Heroes. In Los Reyos he built two very artificial Water-Mills, a Dominican Cloyster, and another for the Monks De la Merced, and likewise a stately Palace for himself: He was both meek and affable; and though he bore the greatest Command in the Emperor’s Name over the mighty Kingdom of Peru, and got more Riches than ever any of the Roman, Persian, Grecian, or Assyrian Monarchs possess’d, yet he went in the same plain kind of Apparel in the heighth of his Grandeur, as when he was but in a low Condition; about his Neck he commonly ty’d a Linnen Hankerchiff, with which he us’d to wipe the Sweat from his Face: in peaceable Intervals he spent whole days in playing at Bowls, without any distinction of Persons, chusing often to play rather with a Sea-man or common Soldier, than a phantastick Gallant: He visited the meanest Citizens, and many times us’d to eat with poor People, to whom he was upon all occasions very noble and liberal; All his Designs he carried on by the strength of meer natural Parts: for he was so very illiterate, that he could neither Write nor Read; his Edicts were Sign’d with his two Marks, betwixt which his Secretary writ Francisco Pizarro; he is said to have had a Son which died young by Attabaliba’s Sister, who came afterwards to be call’d Donna Angelina; he died in a very unfortunate time, for upon his good success the Spanish Power had grounded their whole Designs, thinking with the Peruvian Treasures, as the Sinews of War, to have erected a fifth Monarchy to succeed the fourth of the Romans.

Almagro utterly defeated by Vacca de Castro.

Deliver’d up Prisoner by Salazar, and Beheaded.

Pizarro’s Murderer, though aiming at the Supream Power, he had a considerable Party to countenance and aid him, yet he found resistance in many places, not without the loss of many Men on both sides. In which Juncture the Learned Vacca de Castro Landed in Peru, with a Commission from the Emperor to settle the divided Kingdom of Peru in Peace and Quiet; but the young Almagro mad to see his Ambition thus cross’d, gave Battel to Castro in the Plain of Chupas; the Dispute was long and resolute on both sides, and the Night coming on made the Fight the more terrible, in which the Victory inclin’d to Castro; however the Almagrians stood to it stoutly for a great while, and that chiefly through the valor of the Captains Balboa and Christopher Losa, who breaking in amongst the Castreans, hack’d and hew’d down all they came near, till at last they were forc’d to betake themselves to flight, and had not many of them exchang’d their white Scarfs with the red of the slain Castreans, scarce any of them had escap’d from being kill’d in the pursuit, and most of them that did escape were slain the next Morning by the Peruvians. Rodrigo Salazar, Almagro’s Deputy, deliver’d up his Lord to Castro, who condemn’d him to death, whereupon he was immediately Beheaded with a Sword. This Battel hapned on the twenty sixth of September Anno 1542. when it Froze so hard the following Night, that most of those that were left wounded upon the place, were frozen to death. Thus Castro began his Government with Blood, and made it his first Business to make a Discovery by several of his Captains, whom he sent for that purpose, of the Countreys lying Eastward from Peru, lying upon the great River De la Plata, and the River Marannon, where in most places they met onely with salvage People, and for the most part Man-eaters; and in one place where they Landed, a great Fish resembling a Dog came ashore and kill’d several Arm’d Soldiers. A year and a half Castro had liv’d in Cusco, when at the arrival of the Vice-Roy Blascus Nunnez Vela, all things were turn’d topsie-turvy, he being sent thither by the Emperor Charles the Fifth, accompanied by four Councellors, Diego Sepada, Lison Tejada, Juan Alvarez, and Peter Ortiz, to curb the Spaniards Villanies and Outrages committed against the Peruvians, entred Tumbez, Anno 1544. where he immediately publish’d the Emperor’s Edicts, which were to this effect:

The Emperor’s Proclamation in behalf of the Indians.

All Peruvians are to be releas’d from Slavery; no Spaniard shall the least oppress them, nor make use of their Service without rewarding them for the same, nor take any Provisions of them without paying for it.

Ill resented by the Spaniards.

Pizarro marches against the Vice-Roy Vela.

Vela clashing with the Commissioners, is seiz’d upon.

Being Shipt for Spain, is brought back by Alvaradez.

Is put to flight and pursu’d by Pizarro.

The Vice-Roy slain by Carvayales.

Pizarro’s Luxury, and Tyranny.

Vela Nunnez and La Torre Plotting against Pizarro, are taken and Executed.

This Proclamation was like to put the Spaniards into an uproar: for at that time a Peruvian Lord was forc’d to allow every Foot-Soldier three Slaves, and a Horseman five, besides Hens, Rabbets, Eggs, the Wine Azun, and other Provisions, for nothing. The general Complaints were, Is this the Reward for our Service which we have shewn to the Emperor? Is not this mighty Kingdom of Peru by our Blood and Labor joyn’d to the Imperial Crown? Our Shoulders are grown sore under our Arms, our Bodies made useless with Wounds, and our Limbs lame’d with Bruises. Who shall maintain our Wives and Children, if the Peruvians, who according to the Law of Arms are become our Slaves, should not be forc’d to fish for Pearls in the Sea, and dig us Silver out of the Mines, and do us other Service for to maintain us? But Vela being deaf to these Complaints, resolv’d that the Emperor’s Commands should be fulfill’d, and that those that spake against them should lose their Lives: and that he might terrifie the generality with the punishment of a few, he caus’d Fryer Peter of the Order of the Virgin Mary to be Executed in Truxillo, Castro to be committed to Prison at Lima, because he had put Almagro to death without Examination, and shut the Gates of Cusco when his Agent came before the same. But do what he could, the Spaniards generally making Head, utterly refus’d to obey the Emperor’s Edicts, and chose Gonsalvo Pizarro for their General, who rais’d five hundred Men in compleat Arms in Cusco, from whence he march’d directly with them to Los Reyos, under pretence to deliver a Petition there to the Vice-Roy’s Council, about deferring to put the new Edicts in force till the Emperor was better inform’d of the present Condition of the Peruvian State; twenty great Field-pieces being also order’d to follow Pizarro’s Army, were carried by the Peruvians over craggy Mountains; to each Gun without the Carriage were order’d three hundred Men, of whom twelve at a time carried it in their turns a hundred Paces a piece; though several eminent Persons considering the weightiness of the Affair, forsook Pizarro’s Party, and went privately to the Vice-Roy, as on the other side, many deserting the Vice-Roy joyn’d with Pizarro, who being not a little supply’d by Peter Puelles Governor of Guanaca, took several of those that had deserted him Prisoners, and put them all to death, whilest the Vice-Roy made what Preparations possibly he could, Hanging many innocent Persons onely on suspicion of holding Correspondency with Pizarro, insomuch that there was no end of Murdering on both sides. But Vela clashing with his Councellors, because they would not consent that he should ruine Los Reyos, resolv’d to do it without them; and to that end to remove the Emperor’s Seal, Staple of Trade, and Courts Judicature to Truxillo, and to spoil the Countrey all about; which as he was about to put in Execution, they privately got Captain Martin Robles, and Vela’s Lifeguard, consisting of a hundred Men, on their side, whilest the common People mutinying broke into the Palace, took Vela and carried him to the chief Church in Los Reyos, where the four Councellors were assembled, who order’d that the Prisoner should be Shipt and sent away to Spain, when Alvares Cueto lying in the Harbor with ten Sail, threatned to fall upon the Inhabitants if they would not release the Vice-Roy: whereupon the Councellors well provided with Guns, rais’d several Batteries against his Ships, so that Cueto finding himself too weak, set four of his Vessels on fire, and Sail’d with the rest to the Haven Guavara; where being set upon by Diego Garzias, he was forc’d to deliver the remaining part of his Fleet up to the Councellors, who sent Vela away with the same, under the Command of Didaco Alvaradez. But Pizarro, who till this time had pretended that he sought nothing else but Vela’s Departure, march’d close to the Walls of Los Reyos with twelve hundred Men, Hang’d three Citizens upon a Tree, requir’d the Councellors to grant him Letters Patents, by which he might be acknowledg’d for the Supream Governor of Peru, which if they refus’d, he threatned to put all that were in the City to the Sword; and upon Consultation it was judg’d convenient to grant his Demands, the rather, because they had not above fifty fighting Men in the City. Mean while Didaco Alvaradez making an Agreement with the Vice-Roy, they return’d back with their Ships, and Landed in the Haven Mouth of the River Tumbez, rais’d what Forces they could possibly thereabouts, but were forc’d to retire from thence to Quito, (at the same time that the Councellor Tejada, being sent by Pizarro to the Emperor, came to an Anchor there) where they were courteously Entertain’d; as also in St. Michael, where they got daily more and more Assistants; of which Pizarro being inform’d, went thither with five hundred Men, and forcing the Vice-Roy to flye from thence, pursu’d him above thirty Leagues, Hanging up all those whom he could take of his Party. After many Rencounters and Hardships suffer’d by both Parties, Pizarro exceedingly wearied, return’d to Quito, where he minded nothing but all manner of Debaucheries, not in the least regarding the Vice-Roy’s Designs, which it concern’d him to have narrowly look’d into, for he having got five hundred Men on his side, resolv’d to venture a Battel. It was towards Evening when the two Parties had sight of one another: Pizarro having not onely more Men, but also better Exercis’d in Arms than the Vice-Roy, who being sensible thereof, went silently about Midnight from his Station along a narrow by Path, so to fall behind upon the Rere of the Enemy, who mistrusted nothing, by reason the Vice-Roy’s Dogs kept a continual Barking in his old Station, and the Peruvian Sentinels were heard calling to one another, and making great Fires all the Night long; but because the Way was over-grown, and farther about than it was suppos’d, the Vice-Roy finding the Night too far spent, went back to Quito, out of which he Sallied as soon as he had sight of Pizarro’s Forces; against whom, being clad in a white Riding Coat, through the Slits of which appear’d a Cloth of Tissue Doublet, he came Riding on a Bay Gelding in the Head of his Party; with which breaking in amongst the Enemies Ranks, he made a considerable slaughter amongst them, till Hernand Tores coming near him, gave him a Blow on the Head with a Battel-Ax, that fell’d him to the Ground, which the Lawyer Carvayales seeing, ran immediately, out of desire to revenge his Brother’s Death, whom the Vice-Roy had murder’d, and chopp’d off his Head. Thus Pizarro being absolute Master of the Field, began to shew his tyranny upon the Prisoners, some he took away by Poyson, others he Executed with the Sword and Halter, others he banish’d to the remote Countrey Chili, and spent his time in all manner of Vice in Quito; where, amongst other leud Actions, making Love to another Man’s Wife, he hir’d one Vincent Paul to murder her Husband, which said Vincent was afterwards Hang’d at Valladolid in Spain. The Adulteress also was afterwards Got with Child by her own Father, and both of them put to death for Incest and murdering of their Child. Pizarro being receiv’d as King in Los Reyos, grew every day more proud than other, insomuch that his Friends themselves began to hate and envy him, and wanted onely a convenient opportunity to rid themselves of this high-minded Tyrant. A strange Accident, among others, had done him great hurt, had it not been timely discover’d, viz. Joan de la Torre, a Soldier formerly belonging to the Vice-Roy, found accidentally a Grave in the Valley Hica (which by the Peruvians had been worshipp’d above two Ages before) and in it so much Offer’d Gold and Silver as amounted to above eighty thousand Crowns in Gold, besides many Emeraulds and Turcoises, all which Treasure he was puzled how to carry away and possess securely, partly fearing the Emperor’s Displeasure, if he should arrive thus rich in Spain, the rather because he had sided with Pizarro, and also knowing it was impossible to convey it on Ship-board without one or others knowledge; at last, after many Contrivances, he judg’d it convenient to put the Money in a small Vessel, and Sail with the same to Nicaragua, there to raise Men to oppose Pizarro in those Parts, that so he might re-gain the Emperor’s Favor. This Undertaking seem’d to be threatned by many Dangers, he not having a sufficient Spirit to Command, or at least Experience to officiate the Place of a Captain. In the mean time Vela Nunnez, Brother to the slain Vice-Roy, taken in the Battel at Quito, had so much priviledge allow’d him from Pizarro, that he went a Hunting, and other such Exercises, distant from the Camp, who meeting with La Torre, took him in his arms, and embrac’d him with great joy, which so wrought upon La Torre, that he discover’d the Secret of his discover’d Treasure, took an Oath of him that he would be faithful to him, and take Revenge of Pizarro for all the Injuries receiv’d from him; but before, according to their Agreement, they could set Sail from thence, their Plot being discover’d, both Nunnez and Torre were Executed, and their Riches fell into the Hands of Pizarro.

Peter Gasca sent to settle Affairs in Peru.

Whilest the Peruvian Affairs were in this confusion and disorder, Peter Gasca, impower’d by the Emperor Charles the Fifth, arriving there, endeavor’d to settle all things in Peace and Quiet, and sent by Peter Hernandes, besides the Emperor’s Letter, another which he writ himself to Pizarro, the Contents of which were to this purpose:

Gasca’s Letter to Pizarro.

The Peruvian Soyl hath drunk up the Spanish Blood long enough, and the ruin’d Realm gapes for Rest: The Emperor proffers Pardon for all past Crimes, Repeals the new Laws which the Vice-Roy Vela, during his Government, enjoyn’d the Spaniards to observe. If Pizarro aims at the general Welfare, he may easily see that Arms must first be laid aside, which he now depends on in vain, all his Associates being ready to forsake him, because no Soldier can take up Arms against the Emperor, without being guilty of high Treason.

Pizarro’s Designs against him.

His Party generally fall off to Gasca.

Cusco taken by Centeno.

Pizarro confounded with this Letter, call’d a Council of War, who differ’d very much from one another in their Votes, some judging that it would be best privately to destroy Gasca, others were for an open Engagement, but most thought of another way, viz. to get his Person into their custody, and keep him under a strong Guard on the Island Puna, under pretence that the Peruvian Princes were sent for to come and acknowledge him as supream Governor, which because the Cities lay so remote one from another, could not be done in less than two years. Mean while an Embassy was to be sent to the Court at Madrid, which should enjoyn Gasca to remain in Panama, and not offer to come to Peru till such time as the Emperor commanded the same a second time at the return of the Agents. But Hieronimus Loaisa, chief Bishop of Los Reyos, Thomas Martin, Provincial of the Dominicans, Gomes Solis, Pizarro’s Steward, Laurence Aldana, who were design’d for this Embassy to the Emperor Charles, never went their Journey, but staid in Panama with Gasca, who had also gain’d to his Party Peter Alfonso Ainoiosa, who Commanded Pizarro’s Fleet: Aldana likewise inform’d him of all Pizarro’s private Councels; whereupon Gasca sent privately for Aid to Mexico, Guatimala, Nicaragua, and St. Domingo, and dispatch’d four Ships with three hundred Men, Commanded by Aldana, from the Haven Panama, with Order to Land about Midnight against the City Los Reyos, and so fall unawares on Pizarro. Aldana accordingly falling into the Bay of Malabrige, was reliev’d and supply’d with Provisions by Diego Mora, Governor of Truxillo: On the other side, the Field-Marshal Carvayales being sent for by Pizarro, made a pompous Entrance, with the firing of Guns and Bonfires, into Los Reyos, where all Persons that seem’d to have the least inclination for Gasca, were either stabb’d or poyson’d. In the room of Mora, Pizarro sent the Lawyer Garcias Leon to be Governor of Truxillo, but he being taken by Aldana’s Fleet, joyn’d with Gasca; and thus all things began to conspire the ruine of Pizarro, yet he despair’d not, but being inform’d of the approach of the Ships, caus’d the Drums to be beaten in Los Reyos, forc’d every one that was able to bear Arms, on pain of death to serve him, made several experienc’d Soldiers, Commanders over his Horse and Foot, to whom he gave as much Money as they requir’d, to maintain those whom they had rais’d, and who were to be rais’d, by which means he got a thousand Men in Arms; to which number, according to an Order sent to Cusco, Plata, Arequipa, Lima, Guanuco, and other neighboring Places, new Forces were expected to joyn; but Savedra, Governor of Guanuco, deserting the City, left Pizarro and joyn’d with Mora, who secur’d the Province of Caxamalca for Gasca. Thus Pizarro began to be daily more and more forsaken. Since the destruction of the Vice-Roy Vela, Captain Diego Centeni had hid himself out of fear of Pizarro a whole year, in a Cave under Ground, but now inform’d of Gasca’s Arrival, came forth, and getting forty Men and some Horses together, which also belong’d formerly to the Vice-Roy, resolv’d, though meanly Arm’d, to go upon a bold Design, viz. to take the City Cusco; of which Antonio de Robles, a Man hated and despis’d for his mean Extract and little Wit, had the chief Command, there being therein a Garrison of five hundred Soldiers, besides the Citizens, who were likewise in Arms: Being inform’d of Centeno’s approach, he sent out Francisco Aguierre as a Spye to discover the Enemy; but he joyning with Centeno, advis’d him to march along a By-way, and towards Night to draw up about Cusco, which accordingly he did, and forcing open the Gates, rush’d in with his Horse against the Enemy, who were drawn up in the Market-place, and breaking through their Ranks trampled whole Companies under foot; after which he fell in upon Robles, who having forgotten to give his Men the Word, caus’d a great distraction; for the Men blinded by the darkness of the Night, knew not Friend from Foe, insomuch that Robles’s Party did one another more mischief than Centeno did; who being thus become Master of the City, caus’d Robles to be Beheaded the next day, and distributed a hundred thousand Ducats amongst his Soldiers, and then march’d with a hundred Men to the City Plata, to bring Mendoza, Governor of the same, under the Emperor’s subjection; in which his Design he likewise prov’d successful, being supply’d with a hundred and thirty Foot, which Lucas Martin, had fetch’d from Arequipa for the Service of Pizarro, whom since he had deserted and joyn’d with Gasca’s Party. Mean while the Fleet under the Command of Aldana arriv’d in the Haven before Los Reyos, to the great terror and amazement of the whole City; from whence Pizarro marching, Encamp’d himself with five hundred and fifty Men, so to prevent their Landing, swearing that he would spare none whoe’re fell into his Hands, and sent Order to Peter Martin, whom he had left in the City, immediately to Hang up those which would not follow the Army, or who return’d from thence home; to which purpose Martin went from place to place with an Executioner, and thinking him not quick enough in his Work, stabb’d many Citizens himself: And strict Order was given by Pizarro that all Runaways should be punish’d with Death; notwithstanding all which many of his nearest Friends daily forsook him, taking advantage of the darkness of the Night; nay, the Soldiers themselves would at Noon-day ride away from him, crying aloud, Long live the Emperor, and let the Tyrant Pizarro die: Wherefore he judg’d it most convenient to remove to the Countrey Nasca: During his Journey thither, whole Troops left him, insomuch that he scarce kept a hundred and fifty Men, and those he fear’d every Minute would fall upon him and Murder him.

Los Reyos declares for the Emperor.

Pizarro utterly defeated, surrenders himself into Gasca’s Power.

Carvayales and Pizarro both put to death by Gasca.

With Pizarro’s departure, the whole Scene of Affairs was chang’d in Los Reyos; for there the Imperial Standard was erected, the City Cryer read the Letters of Pardon which Gasca had brought with him from Spain in the corner of every Street. Juan Palimino Landing with fifty Men, receiv’d all those that had deserted Pizarro, whilest Gasca set Sail from Panama with five hundred Men, with whom Landing at Truxillo, he Encamp’d himself in the Valley Xauxa, whither great multitudes flock’d from all places out of malice to Pizarro, who in a short time had destroy’d above five hundred Gentlemen. But Pizarro having quitted Los Reyos, he possess’d the City Arequipa, which he found quite desolate, but meeting afterwards with the Forces Commanded by Juan Acosta, of which one half were also run away, joyn’d with them, and march’d against Centeno, who lay along the Lake Titicaca, with whom he Engag’d in the Plain Guarina: Ludovico Ribera Landing, Centeno’s Party fir’d their Guns before the Pizarrians were within shot of him, of which Carvayales making speedy use, drew up his Pieces close before the Enemy, and made an exceeding slaughter amongst them, killing above a hundred and fifty Men in the first Onset; the Horse amaz’d at the sudden destruction of the Foot, fled, leaving the remaining Foot-Soldiers open to the Enemy, who was gotten behind them with his Musquetteers, and with his Horse before, whilest six Peruvians carried away Centeno out of the Fight, he lying sick on a Chair. Pizarro thus become Victor, kill’d all he met with; of which Gasca being inform’d, resolving upon a private and sudden Revenge, caus’d all Necessaries for War to be made ready, and march’d with a thousand and nine hundred Men out of the Valley of Xauxa to Cusco, where by the Way he was supply’d with the Forces, which the experienc’d Colonel Peter Valdivia had brought from Chili; with which coming to Andagua, he took up his Quarters there for some time, because the mild Winter had with continual Rains made the Ways so dirty, that there was no travelling, and had rotted their Tents and Maiz, and also occasion’d the Bloody-flux amongst the Soldiers. In March, Gasca broke up with his Camp to cross the River Apurima, which he found very troublesom, because Pizarro had broke down all the Bridges: But Gasca caus’d Wood and other Materials to be carried to several places, that the Enemy should not certainly know his Intentions, and at last march’d over deep snowy Mountains to Cotabamba, where suddenly he made a Bridge, over which march’d four hundred Foot, but the Horse suffer’d most damage; for sixty Horses loaden with Arms going to wade over, were carried down by the Stream against sharp Rocks, by which they were desperately gor’d in their sides, and many of them kill’d outright. Pizarro inform’d of the Enemies whole Proceedings by his Spyes, sent Acosta thither with two hundred Musquetteers, to fall upon those that were come over, whom he finding too many, durst not venture to Engage with them. Mean while Gasca’s whole Army getting over on the other side of the River Apurima, march’d up a high Hill, whilest Pizarro Encamp’d himself five Leagues from Cusco, in a Plain call’d Saguisagrana, the Entrance into his Camp being fortifi’d with six Field-Pieces, each side by a River and several Mountains, and the Rere by a deep dry Moat: Gasca stood upon a Hill and view’d the Enemy’s whole Forces lying in the Valley, and being oppress’d with excessive Heat, whilest his Men were so exceedingly pinch’d with Cold in the Night, that they were scarce able to hold their Arms, according to the strange property of the Peruvian Climate; for the tops of Hills generally Freeze, whilest the Valleys about a League from thence are parch’d with Heat: At Break-of-day Gasca descended the Hill; his Horse being divided into two Wings, were Commanded, the left by Juan Savedra, and the right by Balthazar Castro; Mendoza led some Dragoons, Valdivia guarded the Guns, and Gasca himself march’d in the Front of the Musquetteers. On the other side, Pizarro plac’d the Peruvians on his right Wing, Cepeda and Acosta Commanded the Horse, Carvayales and La Torre the Foot, Sebastian Vergara and Peter Soria guarded the Field-Pieces: But the Battel was scarce begun, when Cepedo and a great part of the Horse deserting Pizarro went to joyn with Gasca, and immediately after the right Wing of the Musquetteers; at the same time Centeno and Mendoza fir’d amongst Pizarro’s main Body, of which some ran away to Cusco, others with their Colours to Gasca’s Army. Pizarro seeing himself thus forsaken, cry’d out, Since all are fled to the Imperial Standard, I will also betake my self thither, where perhaps I may find Mercy: Whereupon Acosta answer’d, Let us rather fall in amongst the thickest of the Enemy, and die valiantly: To which Pizarro reply’d, No, now I have lost Honor and Goods, I must take care for my Soul, that that may not be lost also; which said, he lighted from his Horse, Caparison’d in Silver, and deliver’d himself and his Sword into the Hands of the Serjeant Villavicenzo, who found him Habited in curious Armor, a Golden Helmet with a stately Plume of Feathers, and a Corslet incircl’d with Emeraulds about his Neck: Gasca seeing him brought before him in this manner, said thus unto him, Have you not order’d your Business well, to waste so much of the Emperor’s Treasure, and shed so much Blood, and all to confirm your self in your unlawful Usurpation of Peru? To which Pizarro answer’d, saying, I have spent my own Estate in the Service of the Spanish Crown, and might lawfully take upon me the Government of Peru, having with the loss of my Brother’s Life, and the hazard of my own, discover’d the same. Carvayales escaping out of the Fight, had hid himself in a Thicket of Canes, but being discover’d by his own People, was by them brought before Gasca, who the next day after the Battel caus’d him to be Quarter’d alive, and Pizarro’s Head to be cut off in Prison; the other Prisoners were most of them kill’d in cold Blood. Gasca thus become absolute Master of Peru, found an incredible Treasure left by Pizarro, of which he gave to every common Soldier above six thousand Ducats; and with this his victorious Army march’d to Cusco, where he employ’d his Executioners afresh, in Hanging, Drawing, and the like; some that were stigmatiz’d and condemn’d to the Galleys, accounted themselves happy that they had escap’d so. Gasca, though Victor, perceiv’d no small Troubles to threaten him, having twenty five hundred Men in Arms, of which every one for their faithful Service judg’d that they deserv’d some Office or other, there being then above a hundred and fifty to dispose of, Pizarro having Executed the chiefest Officers, and those that bore any Command under him being either fled or kill’d in the last Fight: but the small number of Officers that were wanting, was not to be compar’d to all those that gap’d for Commissions. The Revenues, which yearly amounted to eleven hundred thousand Ducats, went most of it away amongst the Officers, the common Soldiers getting onely a small Snip out of it; wherefore many began to murmur, and were upon the point of Mutinying, if Cianca, the Judge of criminal Causes, taking the chief of them, had not punish’d them in such a manner, that all the rest being terrifi’d, gave over their Complaints. After Gasca had spent above nine hundred thousand Ducats in the War against Pizarro; all which Money he took up upon Interest, which, after having setled the Kingdom in Quietness, he paid for the most part with the Goods taken from the Rebels. Next he made a Law concerning the Peruvians paying of Tribute, which before the Spaniards forc’d from them whensoe’re and howsoe’re they pleas’d, with the greatest Tortures imaginable.

Peru Governed by Vice-Roys.

Gasca having again erected in Los Reyos the high Court of Judicature, in which sat the Imperial Judges, return’d home with an unvaluable Mass of Treasure for Charles the Fifth, and left the Peruvian Government to the Judge Cianca; since which time Peru hath been Govern’d by Vice-Roys, the first whereof, who succeeded Cianca, was Antonio Mendoza, and after him successively Andreas Hurtado Mendoza, Diego Valasco, Lopez Garcias de Castro, Francisco de Toledo, Martin Enriques, Garcias Mendoza, Ludovico Velasco, and Juan Pacheco, under whom the Peruvian Kingdom hath enjoy’d Peace and Quiet, to the considerable enriching of the Spanish Inhabitants.

Thus much of the antient Transactions in Peru, it will now be requisite to give you a brief Account of the several Provinces in this mighty Kingdom.

Division of Peru.

The Countrey is generally divided into three Juridicial Resorts, as they call them, or Courts of Appeal, which are Quito, Lima, and Charcas; but the particular Provinces, as they are commonly observ’d by Geographers, are said to be six, viz. 1. Quito. 2. Los Quixos. 3. Lima. 4. Cusco. 5. Charcas. and 6. Collao.

Sect. II.
Quito.

Situation and Description of Quito.

The first Province of Peru towards the North is Quito, or the new Kingdom of Granada, with which on that side it is bounded, having on the West, Mare del Zur; on the South, Lima; and on the East, Los Quixos. It lieth in a manner right under the Line, and is said to be seventy two Leagues in length, and in some places about twenty five in breadth.

The Winter begins here in October, and continues till March, in which fall mighty Showers, and on the Mountains abundance of Snow, but all the Summer long the Sun is seldom darkned with a Cloud. Many of the Inhabitants die of a Giddiness in the Head about the beginning and end of Summer. The POX also destroys many of the Natives; with which Disease they are often born, and give it to the Spaniards, who are not able to abstain from the Indian Women; they use Sassaparilla and the Wood Guaiacum to cure themselves with.

Here grow also many poysonous Herbs, which the Peruvians make use of to poyson one another.

The Fruit Quaba.

In the farthest parts of Quito grows the salt and cooling Fruit Quaba, two Handfuls long, cover’d with a grey Rind, and within full of white Pulp and hard Kernels.

The Tree Guaiaba.

The Tree Guaiaba hath a pale smooth Bark, thick Boughs, hard and glittering Leaves, Flowers consisting of five Leaves, not unlike a Peacock’s Plume, long Apples, woolly without, and within full of a pale red Pulp and eatable Stones; the Root, which spreads it self very much, is sweet, and when boyl’d cures the Bloody-flux. This Tree grows in most places, especially in low Grounds, the more because the Kernels which the Birds picking out let fall on the Ground, spring up in new Trees.

The Spanish Fruits, as Peaches, Cittrons, Figs, Pomegranates, Pears, Quinces, and Oranges, grow also here in great abundance, but when ripe are subject to rot.

Moreover, the Fields abound with Wheat, Barley, and Maiz; the Pastures afford plenty of Grass for Oxen, Horses and Sheep, which bring forth Lambs twice in fourteen Moneths.

The Ocean and Rivers store of Fish; the Stream Barbara us’d formerly to produce Gold also.

In moist Grounds the Inhabitants find abundance of Salt-petre, the best that is for the making of Gun-powder.

The Inns Tambos.

For the Accommodation of Travellers, Inns call’d Tambos, are built near the High-ways, exactly five Leagues distant one from another, where all sorts of Provisions are sold at a set Price.

The Nature of the People.

The Natives antiently went Cloth’d in a Frock without Sleeves, as wide on the top as at the bottom, and pleited their long Hair. They are strong, well proportion’d in Body, and subtile enough to learn any Art, but treacherous, inconstant, and inclin’d to Drunkenness: They were very hard also to be brought to receive the Roman Religion, so that most of them would not suffer themselves to be Baptiz’d till they lay a dying: They also drove a great Trade in Cotton, Wooll, and Cloth.

Between Pasto and Quito are several Villages, and the famous High-way, by the Ingas cut through the Wildernesses and Mountains, the Wall of an old Castle, and the wonderful Stone-Bridge Lumichaca, which Nature hath made over the swift River Guaca; it consists of a hard Cliff, at the Foot whereof is a great Arch, through which the Water runs with exceeding force.

This Tract of Land produces Maiz, and abundance of Mortuanos, a Fruit resembling Damask Prunes, which eaten in excess cause Drunkenness and Faintness.

The Lake Yaguarcocha, signifying Bloody-Water, because the Inga Guayanacava kill’d and drown’d twenty thousand there.

Towns and Places of chief note.

The chief Towns and Places of Note are, 1. Caranguez, antiently a Royal City, where stood a sumptuous and stately Palace of the Kings of Peru, now almost deserted. The Palace, built of Stone in a little Plain, without either Mortar or Iron-work, manifests its former glory by its Ruines.

2. The Royal Castle of Atabalo, or Ottavallis, in the building of which the Ingas spar’d no Cost nor Charges; and indeed it is a Structure no way inferior to any of the antient Roman Edifices. Between this Castle and Cochequi, a stately House, lies a cold snowy Mountain. Moreover, the Spaniards have several Habitations along the Way to Quito, and especially in the Valley Annaquito, where the Vice-Roy Vela lost the Battel fought against Gonsalvo Pizarro.

3. Quito, commonly call’d St. Francisco de Quito. There stood formerly here certain Palaces, built by the Ingas, but the City was re-built by the Spaniards at the Foot of a certain Ridge of Mountains, which it hath on the North and North-West side of it, and are said by Laet, to cross the whole Countrey of Peru quite over from the South to the North Sea: It was soon after the Building inhabited by five hundred Families of Spaniards at least, besides Natives, and well fortifi’d, and might be thought a Town very well seated in all respects, but for the neighborhood of a Vulcan, which at times annoyeth it very much, as namely in the Year 1560. when it vomited out such abundance of flaming Cinders and other sulphureous Matter, that had it not been for a Shower of Rain unexpectedly falling, would have much damnifi’d, if not destroy’d the Place. The Natives about Quito are more Moraliz’d than other Peruvians. The Valleys which are warm’d by the Sun produce all manner of Fruit-Trees and large Vineyards; and the Root Papas, not unlike Apples. The Quimla, which is of a Mans heighth, hath little Seeds, of which a pleasant Liquor is boyl’d. From Quito the High-way leads to Cusco, along which at every four Leagues distance stands a brave Palace; and from Cusco to Chili, being in all above a thousand Leagues long. The City, built on a sandy Soyl, is divided in the middle by a Moat, over which lead several Bridges: the Streets are large and streight, and full of handsom Houses, and at the ends of the four chief Streets four Market-places. Besides the Cathedral, are two other Churches, Dedicated to the Saints Sebastian and Blasius. The Cloysters of the Franciscans and Dominicans are also no small Ornament to the City. Besides other stately Structures, are the Residences of the Receivers of the Kings Revenues, to which the Peruvians that live about the City, being computed no less than fifty thousand in number, pay Tribute; and to keep them in subjection, the City Quito is always well stor’d with all manner of Ammunition and Instruments of War. The chiefest Trade here consists in Sheep, Goats, and other Cattel, Cotton-Clothes, Cloth, Flax, Hats, Cordage, Sugar and Salt; which Salt, being grey and bitter, springs out of a Fountain in the Countrey Mira. The Oyl, Wine, and Drugs which are us’d here, are fetch’d from the South Sea up the River Ambato, and from thence with Carts into the City.

4. Thomebamba, famous for a Royal Palace, built there by some of the Ingas; It lies Southward from Quito in the Province of Canares, where two Rivers commix their Waters, near a Plain abounding with Venison. There yet remain considerable Ruines of this Palace, in which one may discern the vast Dimensions of divers Rooms, in some of which Arms were kept, and in others Provisions and Clothes; of which kind of Buildings or Magazines the Ingas had erected above a thousand in Peru, especially along the High-way, that they might have their Ammunition ready in all places if need should require. On the left side of Thomebamba appear’d the famous Temple of the Sun, whose Gates were not onely curiously Painted, but also Inlay’d with Emeraulds. Both the Palace and Temple, adorn’d with Gold and costly Images of great Touch-stone and Jasper, contain’d within their Walls an unvaluable Treasure. These magnificent Structures are at this day fall’n quite to decay. The People of this Countrey, who wear long Hair, pleited on the top of their Heads like a Coronet, go Cloth’d in Cotton Coats and Buskins of Hair-cloth. The Women, indifferent fair, and great admirers of the Spaniards, Plough, Sowe, and gather in the Harvest, whilest the Men stay at home, Spinning, Weaving, and doing of other Female-Offices. Anno 1544. they discover’d Mines here, which produc’d as much Gold as Earth.

5. Tacunga, where was formerly another stately Palace, about fifteen Leagues from Cusco, not far from the Mountain which some years since vomited Ashes and Stones into the adjacent Fields. Hereabouts was formerly a Cloyster, inhabited by the Nuns call’d Namaconas, the Ruines whereof are yet to be seen, with several Houses of Stone, but cover’d with Thatch. The Natives in this Place are of a brown Complexion, and of a very affable Nature.

6. Mulambato; 7. Mocha; 8. Rhiobamba, three small Villages, but each of them credited with a stately Palace. Opposite to Rhiobamba lies the Province Chumbo, from which a troublesom Way leads to Guaynacapa over the River Chongo.

9. St. Jago de Puerto Viejo, giving Denomination to the Territory about it, which produces abundance of Potatoe Roots, Maiz, Juca, three sorts of Guayavas, Cerezillas, and the Tree Tunas, which bears wild Figs. The Spanish Fruits grow here likewise in great plenty. The fore-mention’d Beasts like Hogs, whose Navels grow on their Backs, are also very common here. The Woods abound with Deer and all sorts of Fowls, amongst which one resembling a Goose, and call’d Xuta; and another nam’d Maca, somewhat lesser than a Cock, and which feeding about the House, may be reckon’d amongst the Poultrey of this Countrey. The Sea along the Coast affords them abundance of Bonito’s, which eaten in some Seasons cause Agues. The People along the Sea-Coast are generally troubled with Pimples and Sores in their Faces, especially on their Foreheads and Noses, few of them living long, by reason of the unhealthfulness of the Place through excessive Moisture, for the Rain continues eight Moneths together.

10. Manta, lying upon the Southern Ocean, the chief of the Villages, formerly possess’d by the Caranes, betwixt the Promontory Passao and the River Dable. These People are said to this day to carve and cut their Faces from their Ears to their Chins; about their Necks and Arms they wear Chains of Gold and little red Corals, call’d Chaquina, highly esteem’d by the Peruvians. This Town was formerly famous for a great Emerauld, which was religiously worshipp’d there.

11. Guayaquil, otherwise call’d Culata, built at a deep Inlet of the Sea, near the River Anebato, which with great swiftness falls down from the Mountains Quito, is surrounded with a fertile Soyl; and in the hollow Trees is found plenty of Honey. The Water of the fore-mention’d River, being of great vertue in curing the Morbus Gallicus, hath great resort of People from all places; who likewise gather the Sarsaparilla that grows along the Banks. The Bridge which the Inga Guaynacava began to lay cross this River, is also very remarkable, but he dying, it was left unfinish’d. The Guancabilcas were heretofore under the Jurisdiction of this City Guayaquil.

12. Castro, so call’d from a strong Fort built there by a Spanish Captain, and situate in the Valley Vili, not far from Guayaquil.

13. The City Loxa, built in the Countrey of the Paltas, a People that went naked, between two Arms of the River Catamayo under a wholsom Climate, near the High-way that leads to Cusco in the Valley Curibamba, where no poysonous Beast was ever found. The Soil bears abundance of Oaks, Hazles, Ash, Willow, and Cedar-Trees; Maiz, Barley, and Wheat. Not far from the City springs a hot and sulphurous Fountain, which cures all sorts of Sores and Wounds. The Countrey hereabouts is likewise stor’d with Fowls, Venison, Cattel, and Fish. Moreover, the City receives no small lustre from two Dominican, and one Franciscan Cloyster. Eastward from which lie desolate Mountains, whose tops are continually cover’d with Snow. Not far from hence were formerly two noble Palaces, Piedras and Tamboblanco, besides several Villages.

14. Cuenca, wherein are also large Structures for the Monks and Priests: The Countrey about the same hath rich Mines of Gold, Silver, Quicksilver, Copper, Iron, and Sulphur.

15. Zamora, Eastward from the cold Mountains Andes, built in a Marshy Soyl, where the Inhabitants are never visited with Pestilential Distempers, and use no other Physick for such Sicknesses as they are troubled with, than Tobacco, and the Herb Aquacolla. But there is a certain Nut that grows hereabouts, which occasions sudden death, if eaten raw, but being boyl’d, is a wholsom Food. The Mines afford great pieces of Gold, of which one weighing eighteen Pound, was presented to Philip the Second, King of Spain. The briny Springs produce good Salt. Three Rivers falling from the Mountains, are noted for their Golden Sands, and also afford delicious Fish. The Bees being here void of Stings, furnish the Inhabitants with plenty of Honey. The Tygers and little Lyons devour many of the Sheep Pacos, Goats, Hogs, and other Cattel, and sometimes the Natives themselves. The City it self is neatly built with Woodden and Stone Houses, and adorn’d with a Church and Dominican Cloyster, besides a stately Palace, the Residence for the King’s Receiver. The Natives about this Place are a stupid and barbarous People, which before the Spaniards coming thither, would for a small trifle kill one another.

16. The City Yaen, situate in the Countrey Chuiquimayo; it is so call’d from a swift River, cross which the Peruvian Women and Children swim, to the great amazement of the Spaniards. They paint their Bodies black with the Juice of the Root Yaguas, and feed for the most part on the stamp’d Plant Yaca. On the other side of the Mountain, which rises on the Banks of Chuquimayo, lies the Countrey Perico, fruitful and well inhabited, against which juts the Golden Countrey Cherinos. Peru hath also several delightful Valleys, amongst which on the North the chiefest are the Tumbez, Solana, Poechos, and Piura, all of them very fertile, full of stately Buildings, and water’d by several Rivers.

17. San Miguel, the first City that was built by the Spaniards in Peru, situate in a sandy and dry Soyl, being extraordinary dusty in Summer, and very slabby in the Winter, because the hard Ground cannot soak up the Rain. The Ingas made a Way through this Valley fifteen Foot broad, between two Walls, and Planted Trees on each side.

Spilbergen’s Attempt upon Payta.

18. Westward from Miguel appears Payta, near a convenient Haven in the South-Sea, which Anno 1547. was burnt by Thomas Candish; since which it had been re-built twenty eight years, when Joris Spilbergen, after a hard Engagement with the Spanish Admiral Rodrigo Mendoza, arriving in the large Haven before Payta, sent eight Sail with three hundred Armed Men up to the City, where finding the Enemy Encamp’d along the Shore, he return’d without any effect; but two of his Frigats, the Eolus and the Morning-Star, running close to Payta, fir’d whole Broad-sides at the same, whilest Captain De Wit took a Peruvian Fisher-man, who had been two Moneths out at Sea, and taken abundance of Fish. The Guns which the Ships fir’d upon the Town struck such a terror into the Citizens, that they fled with Bag and Baggage into the Mountains, and left the City for a Prize to Spilbergen, who setting fire on the same, in few hours burnt down two Churches, a Dominican Cloyster, and several Alms-houses: But had not the Citizens been cowardly, they might easily have kept off the Hollanders; for the Vice-Roy Ludovico Velasco inform’d of Spilbergen’s Arrival, had stor’d the Place with Ammunition and Men, whose Courage failing, prov’d successful for the Hollanders, who whilest they Rid here at an Anchor, took a very strange Bird on the Island Lobos, lying before Payta, being two Yards high and three thick, in its Bill, Wings, and Claws resembling an Eagle, and having a large Crest on its Head. Not long after Donna Paula being Governess of Payta, a Lady famous in Peru for her Beauty and obliging Nature, sent Cabbages, Oranges, Cittrons, and other Provisions to the Hollanders, and requested the Releasement of some of the Spaniards taken in the Engagement against Mendoza, but could not obtain her Request from the uncourtly Dutchmen.

Sect. III.
Los Quixos.

Description of Los Quixos.

The Province of Los Quixos lieth South, and to the South-East of Quito, being border’d more directly Eastward with a part of the Province of Guiana, call’d by some El Dorada, or The Golden Countrey; on the South it hath Lima and Cusco.

The Canela-Fruit.

This Province is subdivided into several lesser Territories, viz. Canela, Pacomores, and St. Juan de Salinas. Canela is so call’d, because it hath many great Woods, which produce the Fruit Canela in great abundance, the Owners whereof were most inhumanely dealt with by the Spaniards; for Gonsalvo Pizarro supposing to get store of Gold there, found nothing but Trees, bearing a Fruit like Olives, by the Natives call’d Canela, with which they us’d to drive a great Trade, being otherwise poor and simple People, living in Huts, which Pizarro pulling down, caus’d the Inhabitants to be torn in pieces by his Dogs, because they could not furnish him with Gold, nor direct him where it was to be had.

The Granadilla-Apple.

Besides the Canela-Tree, this Countrey also produceth in great plenty the Tree which beareth the Apples Granadilla, exceeding good against burning Feavers; the Leaves are like Ivy, the Blossom resembling the Sun, and the long Leaves speckled with Red and White, open three hours after Sun-rising, and close again before the Evening, just as if Nature took care to preserve the beauty of the Flower.

Towns and Places of chief note.

In this part of the Province the chief are, 1. Baeza, otherwise call’d Quixos, built in the Year 1559. by Ramires de Avila, eighteen Leagues from Cusco.

2. Archidona, twenty Leagues to the South-East of Baeza. 3. Avila. 4. Sevilla del Oro, all of them Spanish Colonies.

The Territories Pacomores and Yguansongo, otherwise call’d The Countrey of Juan de Salinas, are said both to extend above a hundred Leagues in length, and little less in breadth. The Fields afford store of Pasture for Cattel, the Plough’d Lands produce Wheat and all sorts of wholsom Herbs; and in some places are also rich Gold-Mines.

The Governor Layola built four Towns here, viz. 1. Valladolid; 2. Loyola; 3. San Jago de los Montanas; and 4. Caruma.

The Jesuit Acosta relates, That not far from Caruma he found great Stones, some of which were full of Golden Veins, but were hard to be cut from the Rock. Most of the Gold is found in the Sand of several Rivers, the chiefest whereof flow through Quito, New Granada, Valdivia in Chili, and Caravaya in Peru.

On the Point of Quito, the River San Jago falls into the Southern Ocean; the Ground in the Mouth of the River being very uneven, for oftentimes the Ships are fast aground at the Stern, and on Head they have above eighty Fathom Water; yet nevertheless the Shoals are no ways dangerous.

South-West from St. Jago lies the spacious Inlet Mattheo, and the Promontory Francisco, known by its Banks and high Grounds, which shew red and white at a great distance.

Not far from hence, exactly under the Equinox, appears Cape Passao, flat and low; between which and Mattheo, the great Rivers Los Quiximes fall into the Sea.

Behind Passao rises the high Mountain Quaque; and more Westerly the Bay Caraques affords a secure Harbor for all manner of Vessels.

Next you come to the Town Puerto Viejo before mention’d, lying behind the Island Laurenso.

Five Leagues off at Sea, before Laurenzo, lies the Island Plata, formerly famous for a Peruvian Temple, in which the Natives Sacrifis’d Sheep, and sometimes Children, and painted the Figures of divers Persons with the Blood; to which they also Offer’d Jewels, Gold, Silver, Wooll, Cotton Shirts, and Cloaks. Francisco Pizarro arriving here, got an invaluable Mass of Treasure; but at present it lying desolate, affords nothing but Brambles and wild Trees.

The next which come in view are the Havens Callo and Zalango, where there are safe Harbors, good Wood and Water.

The Cape of St. Helena makes also a secure Road on the North, and on its Shore hath a Spring, on the top of whose Waters swims a certain Gum, by the Natives call’d Copey, exceeding good to make Ships tight.

The River Tumbez falls into a large Bay, which on its North-East Point near the Main Land, hath the Island Puna, ten Leagues in circumference: The Soyl whereof produces abundance of Maiz, Fuca, and other good Roots, besides great Woods full of fruitful Trees, and Sarsaparilla. The Inhabitants of a brown Complexion, and middle Stature, wear Cotton Cloaks, and Chains of Chaquira and Precious Stones: They drive a great Trade, and formerly maintain’d Wars with the People inhabiting upon the River Tumbez; their great want is fresh Water in the Summer. Thomas Candish Landing here Anno 1587. found a Ship hal’d ashore, and three Villages, in one of which stood a Palace belonging to a Casique, surrounded with Stone Galleries; and near it a large Store-house full of Tar-pots and Hemp to make Cables of: The Village consisted of two hundred Houses, and a fair Church with a Steeple, in which hung several Bells. The Casique Married to a Spanish Woman being fled with the Villagers, Candish took many Oxen, fat Sheep, Pigeons and Ducks, the Bells, and what else was not convey’d aboard, with him, and, afterwards burnt the whole Town; but whilest he was busie in making havock, a thousand Spaniards, and a considerable number of Peruvians fell upon the English on such a sudden, that they kill’d some, and took others Prisoners.

Somewhat farther off at Sea appears the Isle Clara, where those of Puna formerly buried their Dead.

The Inlet into which falls the River Tumbez, whose Shores are well inhabited, ends Westward at the Promontory Blanco; Southward from which lies the Isle Lobos, where there are several Springs full of the same Gum, or Bitumen, a little above mention’d.

Beyond the Point Agua lie the two Isles Lobos Marinos, opposite to a low Coast; they are desolate, and barren of Grass, Trees, and all kind of Herbs, and destitute of fresh Water; but many Pelicans, Penguins, and other strange Birds.

The discovering of these Coasts belonging to the Jurisdiction of Quito, deserves a short Relation:

Bevalcazar overcoming Ruminagua, takes Quito.

He comes to an Agreement with Alvarado.

Pizarro and his Army driven to great Straights.

Orellana cross’d in his Designs, dies for grief.

The miserable Condition of Pizarro’s Men.

Quito very much defac’d by siding with Vela against Gonsalvo Pizarro.

Whilest Pizarro kept the Inga Attabaliba Prisoner, he sent Captain Bevalcazar to the new Fort St. Miguel, where eighty Horse and a hundred Foot being arriv’d from Panama and Nicaragua, and he being inform’d that there lay a great Treasure in Quito, and that the Canares, the Spaniards Friends, were exceedingly oppress’d by Ruminagua, Attabaliba’s General, immediately march’d thither with the new arriv’d Forces before mention’d, to fetch the Booty, and to assist the Canares; but several things oppos’d him in his Design: for Ruminagua guarded the Way with twelve hundred Indians, digg’d Pits in the same, and filling them with sharp Poles, cover’d them slightly over with Canes and Earth; all which Bevalcazar shunning, went about, fell in upon the Rere of the Enemy, and after a small Resistance conquer’d the City Quito. Mean while Ferdinand Cortesio sent Petro Alvarado from New Spain, who taking Guatimala, receiv’d a Commission from the Spanish Court, to subdue the Northern parts of Peru. Soon after which Garcias Holgua being sent with two Ships to enquire concerning the State of Peru, brought News back, That Francisco Pizarro had gotten an unvaluable Treasure at Caxamalca; which so stirr’d up Alvarado, that he Landed five hundred Men at Puerto Viejo, march’d in great want of Provisions over the Mountains Acabucos, and had he not accidentally found a Pond of sweet Water in a Thicket of Canes, both Men and Horses had all perish’d; at last upon his approaching Quito, the Governor thereof, being Bevalcazar, not enduring to suffer an Equal, drew up all his Men in Battel array; but some Persons interceding between them, they were soon reconcil’d, and Alvarado being bought out with a great sum of Money, deserted Quito; where after Gonsalvo Pizarro, had remain’d a considerable time he march’d Eastward of the Province, which produces abundance of Cinamon; whither he was accompanied by two hundred Spaniards and four thousand Peruvians; against whom the Natives dwelling on the Borders of Los Quixos fought very valiantly, till Night approaching, when they all ran away; after which resting a while, there arose a mighty Tempest of Thunder and Lightning, accompanied with a dreadful Earthquake, which swallow’d above five hundred Houses, whole Woods and Fields, whilest an unknown River burst out of the Earth, and overflow’d all the Countrey, insomuch that Pizarro expected nothing but a speedy Ruine, in regard no Provisions were to be found in all the Countrey: at last getting on the top of the nearest Mountain he lost many of his Men, who were frozen to death with excessive Cold. From thence marching to the County Zumaque, he got plenty of Provision and Cinamon, which grows on great Trees in the Woods; the Leaves thereof resemble the Laurel; the Fruit grows in little Berries; the Root and Bark have a strong odoriferous smell. Thence travelling to the Town Coca, he found a mighty Cataract of Water, falling from a Rock above fifteen hundred Ells high; insomuch that the noise in calm Weather was heard six Leagues off. Pizarro leaving his sick People in Zumaque, went onely with a few Eastward from Coca to the Plain Countrey Guema, full of Moorish Grounds, the Inhabitants whereof went naked: at last he came to the great River Maranon, which falls from the Mountains near Quito, and extends with several windings above eight hundred Leagues in length, and at the Mouth thereof is fifteen Leagues broad, which at that time overflowing all the Countrey, he judg’d it convenient to build a Brigantine, making the Shoes of the dead Horses serve for Iron-work, his Mens Shirts for Sails, and a Gum, which was to be had there, for Tar, and having Lanch’d their Vessel, and put all their Baggage and sick People into the same, they Sail’d close along the Shore, on which Pizarro made his Way through Brambles and Canes, or went over in the Brigantine whensoe’re he espy’d a better Path on the other side; in which manner they were gone two hundred Leagues down the River, with no other Food but wild Fruit and Roots; when Captain Franciscus Orellana, was order’d to Sail away before with five Men, and seek out for Provisions, and at every Stream which fell cross-ways out of the Countrey into the great River, he was to leave a Mann’d Boat: but Orellana in few days drove down so far with the swift River, that he saw no likelihood of getting up again in a whole year, neither could he find any Provisions, but fought daily with the Indians, who came stoutly to Board him in little Boats: amongst whom he was inform’d also, that thereabouts liv’d the Amazon Women, that Warr’d continually against their Neighbors; and at last he came into the Northern Ocean. But Orellana Sailing to Spain, obtain’d a Commission to be Governor of the Amazons Countrey, whither he steer’d his Course with five hundred Men in three Ships; but Landing at the Canaries they all ran away from him, which so incens’d Orellana, that he soon after dy’d with Grief. Mean while Pizarro inform’d by a Spaniard whom Orellana had put ashore, that the Brigantine was by the strong Current carried into the Ocean, knew not what to do, his People since their departure from Quito having travell’d above four hundred Leagues, had eaten most of their Horses: Many dy’d by feeding on unwholsom Herbs; others fell down dead for Hunger, or tir’d out with toilsom Travel; their Clothes, rotted by the Rain, hung upon them like Rags, their Shoes were worn out, their Feet full of Blisters, their Bodies sadly mangled with Brambles and Thorns, for no place afforded them a Boat. Pizarro leaving the River Maranon, went another Way, no less troublesom for steep Rocks and inaccessible Mountains. The Valleys through which they went, began now to be strew’d with dead and sick Bodies, who were not able to follow the Army, which march’d very fast, every one judging to be so much nearer his preservation the farther he could get: Those that fainted call’d continually on their Friends for help, but the Horses were grown too weak to carry them: Every one saw nothing but Death before his Eyes; wherefore, though call’d by their dearest and most intimate Friends that lay a dying, they never look’d back, their compassion towards others being turn’d into fear and care of themselves. The Forsaken implor’d their Saints, and besought Pizarro for aid, but finding their Complaints to be in vain, and raging through despair, they wish’d all the rest the same success, and the like Friends, whenever they should be in the like Condition. Pizarro extreamly griev’d and troubled, that he had brought the People into this Misery, sent a few Horsemen before to Quito, to carry the sad News of his deplorable Condition, that they might immediately send Provisions to him; which he receiving when he was within fifty Leagues from the said City Quito, distributed amongst those that were left alive, who being also almost starv’d, eat so greedily, that several of them were chok’d; the remainder were kept a considerable time in Garrison under the Command of Pizarro in Quito. Which City, built in a pleasant place, grew very populous in the Year 1544. there being several Gold-Mines found about the same in that time. But this lasted not long, for Quito siding with the Vice-Roy Blasco Nunnez Vela against Gonsalvo Pizarro, most of the Citizens were destroy’d by him, and their Houses burnt to Ashes. The like Destruction, and upon the same occasion, befel the three Villages in the Province Bracomoros, discover’d by Juan Parzel and Captain Vergara, together with the Countrey Chichiapoios, where Alphonso Alvarado built the Town Levanto, surrounded with deep Caverns, through which, to the great strengthning of the City, flow several Rivers.

Round about Puerto Viejo the Natives dwelt in Trees, whom the Spaniards had much ado to bring under their subjection; for their Countrey being barren and mountainous, was not onely wanting in Provisions to feed an Army, but the Peruvians also threw great Stones out of their Huts built in Trees, and likewise Javelins and Pots full of boyling Water, with which they did much mischief to their Enemies that Storm’d them, who at last covering themselves with Boards, cut down the Trees, with which they falling were torn in pieces by the Spanish Dogs.

Sect. IV.
Lima.

Situation and Description of the Province of Lima.

Lima, call’d also Los Reyos, hath on the East, Collao, and some part of Cusco; on the North, Los Quixos; and on the South, Charcas. The Countrey extendeth it self in length upon the Coasts of the South Sea two hundred and fifty, some say, full three hundred Leagues in length, viz. from Cape del Aguia Northward, on the Borders of Quito as far as Arequipa towards the South, and runs Eastward to Brasile and Rio de la Palma.

The several Valleys of this Province.

In this Province are several very pleasant Valleys, the first whereof is Motupe, to which a sandy Way leads from St. Miguel de Valverde, between barren Wilds, from whence several Streams falling are immediately drunk up by the Sand; wherefore all Travellers that go that way carry Water and Wine with them in Calabashes for twenty Leagues together, which they Walk or Ride by Night, because of the excessive heat of the Sun.

In the Valley Motupe grow abundance of Trees, which receive nourishment from a River that springs up near the same. Here is also much Cotton.

Not far from hence are the Valleys Xayanca, formerly very populous and full of Palaces: The River which flows through the middle is led in Trenches amongst the neighboring Fields.

The Valley Tuqueme is also very pleasant, and the decay’d Palaces, sufficiently testifie its former splendor.

The next being Cinto, is no way inferior to Tuqueme; and between both lie sandy Hills and barren Rocks, on which grow neither Trees nor Herbs, nor is any living Creature to be found upon them: the Way through which being a whole days Journey, cannot be travell’d without sure Guides.

The Valley Collique, water’d by a River of the same Denomination, and very thick set with Trees, was formerly very populous, but since the Spanish Wars it is become quite desolate; for not onely a considerable number of them were slain by the Spaniards, but also many destroy’d themselves, Wives and Children; of which Peter Martyr, Councellor to the Emperor Charles the Fifth, sets down several terrible Examples, of which two were remarkable above the rest; the first was after this manner:

Two tragical Passages.

The Spanish Captain Olandus Lying with the Daughter of an Indian Casique, question’d when she grew big with Child, Whether she was with Child by him? and that he might know the real truth by Torture, he caus’d her to be ty’d naked to a woodden Spit, and laid to roast against a Fire made of green Wood, so that she died in a most miserable manner; upon which her Father ran in a rage with thirty of his Companions to Olandus’s House, where he kill’d his whole Family, and locking all the Doors about the House, set fire on the same, into which when it was at its greatest heighth, he and his Associates leap’d into the middle thereof.

The second Accident is also very terrible, viz. An Indian Maid being Got with Child by a Spanish Ass-driver, acquainted her Father and Mother with it, withal telling them that she was ready to suffer Death for her Offence; and notwithstanding they freely pardoning, and perswading her to the contrary, she eat raw Juca, which when boyl’d is a wholsom Food, but if eaten raw, certain though languishing Death; which she perceiving, ran to the next River, where after having wash’d her self, she broke off from a large Tree a Bough of five Foot long, and making the end thereof very sharp, fell upon the same, and so kill’d her self. Several other Ravish’d Maids taking example hereby, hang’d themselves upon the Boughs of the same Tree.

But to proceed in our Description, next to Collique lies the Valley Zana, of the like bigness, and famous for the City Miraflores.

The next is Pascayamo, which exceeds all the former in fruitfulness, and populousness of Inhabitants, who before they were destroy’d by the Ingas were much fear’d by their Neighbors. This Valley also was adorn’d with several fair Temples, which are now turn’d into Cloysters. Cattel, Hogs, and Goats breed here in very great numbers. The chief Trade of this Place consists in Cotton and Linnen.

The Valley Chacama, in which the Dominican Monks inhabit a brave Cloyster, produces abundance of Sugar.

Four Leagues farther lies the spacious Valley Chimo, so call’d from an old Peruvian Heroe, which affords a pleasant Prospect, by reason of the many Banquetting-houses built there by the Ingas. No place in Peru is able to stand in competition with this for plenty of Provisions, the Ocean and Rivers producing store of Fish, the Countrey affording Cattel and all manner of Fruit. The Cotton which grows here is Shipp’d to the South Sea.

Chanca is a Valley chiefly considerable for the Town Arnedo, which is situate therein, of which more hereafter.

But the Valley Guanape, not far from Chanca, yields the best Peruvian Liquor Chica, and hath a convenient Harbor for Ships.

The Plain Santa being overflow’d in the Winter, is all overgrown for want of Inhabitants, who were all destroy’d by the Spaniards. The Woods hereabouts swarm with a sort of venomous Bug, which exceedingly torments the Traveller.

Spilbergen’s Attempt.

Next follow in order the Valleys Guambaico, very fruitful, and Guarney, abounding with Horses, Hogs, and other Cattel. Joris Spilbergen Landing here Anno 1615. found the Haven secure against all Winds, and between the Shore and the Village Guarmey a Creek, and somewhat farther a fresh-Water Pool; on one side of which stood a decay’d Castle built of square Stone, whereon the Hollanders set the States Flag, and Garrison’d the same to secure those that fetch’d Water out of the foremention’d Pool. In the aforesaid Village stood a Church with a spiry Steeple; behind which rose high Mountains, and at the Foot thereof a great Wood, into which the Inhabitants fled with all their Goods, so that Spilbergen found nothing but a little Meal, a few Hens, Hogs, and Oranges in their Houses, which whilest he was sending Aboard, a small Body of Horse appear’d, but immediately fled into the Woods. The Hollanders staying here seven days, were inform’d, that the Galley Jesu Maria, Commanded by the Admiral Rodrigo Mendoza, and the Santa Anna, by the Vice-Admiral Peter Alvares Piger, were both lost, not one Man being sav’d.

Not far from thence lies the Valley Parmonga, which though it be fruitful and pleasant, yet it is quite desolate; the Walls of a large Castle still appear, as testimonies of its being formerly inhabited; and within the said Walls also are still to be seen the Ruines of spacious Halls and fair Chambers, whose Walls are painted with wild Beasts and Birds: The Spaniards have digg’d all about, and undermin’d the same, in hopes to find, together with the several dead Bodies, a Treasure buried. Two Leagues Southward from this Valley Parmonga flows the River, Guayman, by the Spaniards call’d Rio del Falcon, from a Hawk which was seen there. When any store of Rain falls here, a great part of the Dale Barrana lies under Water.

Strange manner of Hunting.

Not far from hence lie the Valleys Gaura and Lima; which last exceeds all others in bigness, and was formerly exceeding populous; but since the Marquess Pizarro built the City Los Reyos here, the Citizens have taken the Lands from the Peruvians. The Mines hereabouts produce Gold and Silver. Amongst other things the Inhabitants highly esteem an Herb bearing yellow Flowers, which in a short time cures a putrifi’d Wound, whereas if laid on sound Flesh it eats the same to the Bone. The Natives heretofore us’d to spend their time in Hunting, and caught their Game after this manner, viz. three or four thousand of them would meet together, and by taking Hands make a Ring of three or four Miles in circumference, and at a certain Note or Tune Sung, or loudly Exclaim’d, they drew nearer and nearer, till at last they were within Shot of the inclosed Game, whatsoever it were.

A vast Treasure found by Ferdinando Pizarro.

The Countrey of Collao hath a low Point, from which a long Cliff runs into the Sea, towards the small Island call’d Isla de Collao: On each side of the Point the Coast runs sloaping in, the one side extending North-West from Collao, to the Cliffs Piscadores; the other South-East to the second Promontory; behind which is a large Bay, where the Valley Pachacama appears, famous for its exceeding fruitfulness, and a stately Temple built by the Ingas, where Ferdinando Pizarro found above nine hundred thousand Ducats, besides what the Soldiers and Commanders took, and what the Priests had hid, which none, though miserably tortur’d, would confess.

Opposite to Pachacama lies the Valley Chilca, where it never Rains, nor any Brook or Spring moistens the dry Soil, which nevertheless produces Maiz and Fruit-Trees. The Natives us’d to dig large and deep Pits, in which they Sow’d and Planted, and at every Root laid the Head of a Fish call’d a Sardin, which they caught in Nets on the Sea-shore; wherein nevertheless nothing would have grown, but for the Morning Dews which fell. The Ingas also had curious Banquetting-houses here. In these Parts there grows a sort of Tree call’d Mala, of which Acosta relates a strange Wonder of Nature, very remarkable, viz. That it flourishes and bears Fruit on that side which beholds the South, in that Season when it is Summer on the Mountains; the other which views the Sea, Blossoming and bearing Fruit when it is Summer on the Plains.

The Valley Guarco, spacious and full of Trees, produces especially the pleasant Fruit Guayaves and Guavas, as also the best Wheat in Peru; wherefore it is vended all over the Countrey. Here are also the Ruines of another stately Castle, built by the Ingas, the former lustre whereof is testifi’d by its remaining Walls, which consist of exceeding great Stones, so neatly joyn’d together without Mortar, that it appears like one entire Stone; and by the decay’d Structures of several Halls, much of the curious Painting whereof is yet to be seen; from the Castle a large pair of Stairs led down to the Sea-shore. Two Leagues farther the River Lunagun runs through the fertile Valley of the same Denomination. The fatness of this Soil is chiefly ascrib’d to the Dung of a Fowl call’d Guana, which the Natives fetch in great abundance from the Isles near the Main.

Next follows the Valley Chinca, one of the biggest in all Peru, and before the Spaniards Arrival very populous. In the time of the Ingas it also shew’d a magnificent Temple Dedicated to the Sun, built by Tepaja Jupangue; yet the Inhabitants still remain’d constant in the worshipping of their old Idol Cinciapema. Hither the Ingas sent their conquer’d Princes, who on a certain time were to appear in Cusco. The Dominicans at present possess here a neat Cloyster, from whence leads a plain Road to the Dale Ica, water’d by the River Pisco, which is dry in Summer; wherefore the Natives brought a Ditch from the Mountains, which since the Spaniards destroying the Inhabitants, is choak’d up with Sand.

Next the Valley Nasca comes in view, famous for the Castle Caxamalca, where the Ingas kept all manner of Ammunition for War, besides several Tombs, out of which the Spaniards took great Riches. This Valley is divided into several others, which for the most part produce Sugar-Canes; and through them all runs the Royal High-way, which is Wall’d in on both sides.

Beyond Nasca lie one behind another the Valleys Hacari, Oconna, Camana, and Quilca, all of them affording good Pasture for Cattel, and Fruit, yet are most of them desolate.

The County Los Motilonos, thinly inhabited for want of Provisions, and divided by two Rivers, separates Moyobamba from the Countrey Charasmal.

Southward beyond Caxamalca appear the Countreys Guamachuco, and a little farther Conchucos and Piscobamba, all fruitful and pleasant, and adorn’d with several Structures built by the Ingas.

On the side of Piscobamba the County Guaraz extends it self over barren Mountains, through which the Ingas cut a Royal High-way, and built a strong Castle at the Entrance into the Countrey; the Inhabitants whereof being very laborious, work very diligently in the Gold-Mines.

The Territory Pincos, water’d by a River, and famous for one of the stateliest of the Peruvian Structures, is surrounded by the Countreys Guayalcas, Turama, Bomba, and Conchucos. The Mountains, though dangerous to Travellers by Lyons, great Bears, and other ravenous Beasts, afford abundance of Silver; and the fruitful Soil produces Wheat, Maiz, Grapes, Figs, Oranges, Quinces, Cittrons, Cedars, and; likewise feeds Goats, Horses, and other Cattel.

The Countrey Viticos, being within the Jurisdiction of Guanuco, lies amongst the Mountains Andes, whether Inga Mango fled, when the Spaniards made themselves Masters of Peru.

Chief Towns and Places of note.

The Towns and Places most observable and important in it belonging to the Spaniards, are 1. Miraflores, as the Spaniards call it, a well seated and wealthy Town in the Valley of Zanu, as above mention’d, five Leagues distant from the Sea, where it hath likewise a good Haven or Port.

2. Truxillo, two or three Leagues distant from the Sea; the Haven whereof is said to be large, but not safe. The Town it self is seated in the Valley Chinco, upon the Banks of a pleasant River, whose Water doth not onely run through several Channels to moisten the Fields, but also to accommodate every House in the City: It hath broad Streets, a great Market-place, four Cloysters, two for the Dominicans, one for the Augustines, and the other for the Franciscans; one great Church, five hundred Houses, and a Palace, inhabited by the King’s Collectors, and many Banquetting-houses about it. The good situation and fruitfulness of the Soil, mov’d the Marquess Francisco Pizarro to build this City here Anno 1533. but the Haven belonging to the same lies open to all manner of Winds, so that the Ships Ride here in great danger.

3. La Parilla, otherwise call’d Santa, fourteen Leagues beyond Truxillo Southward, wash’d by the Southern Ocean, and one side by a fresh-water Stream, which being inclos’d between stony Cliffs, makes a secure Harbor.

4. Arnedo, seated ten Leagues Northward from Lima, amongst the Vineyards of the Valley Chancas; otherwise having no great matter in it remarkable, but a fair Dominican Cloyster.

Prizes taken here by Sir Fran. Drake.

Spilbergen attempts the Place in vain.

5. Lima, by the Spaniards commonly call’d La Cividad de los Reyes, or The City of Kings, so nam’d because Pizarro, who built it, laid the first Stone on Twelfth-day, Anno 1553. which they call The Feast of the Kings: It is seated in the Valley of Lima, (from whence the City is also so denominated) one of the fruitfullest Parts of all Peru, and so neatly built, that all the chief Streets of the City open upon a fair Market-place, or Piazza, of such a large Square, that upon the sides thereof are built, in a stately and convenient manner, the Cathedral, the Palace of the Archbishop, the Vice-Roy’s Palace and Courts of Justice, with the Exchequer or Publick Treasury, the Town-house or place where the City Magistrates meet and hold their Courts, the Publick Armory or Magazine, and a Free-School, wherein are taught by the Jesuits all Arts and Sciences, and also the Indian Language, and divers other fair Buildings of the Nobility and better sort of Citizens. No Countrey under the Heavens affords a more fruitful or pleasanter Place than this; the temperate Climate neither troubling the Inhabitants with excessive Heats or great Colds, nor terrifying them with Thunder or Lightning, but having almost perpetual Sun-shine and fair Weather; onely the three Winter Moneths, wherein there falls a sweet-smelling Dew, which cures the Head-ache; and there die but very few of pestilential Distempers. The Countrey about the City is pleasant without exception. The Pigeons which are kept here in curious Houses built on purpose, flie a thousand in a Flight. The Fields abound also with Cattel. The Orchards and Gardens flourish with all sorts of Trees and Plants, whereof those that are brought hither from Spain grow better than in their natural Countrey. The West side of the City is wash’d by a pure & clear Stream, which stores the Market with great plenty of good Fish, it being distant but a Musquet shot, especially when the Water rises. This River is of great consequence, for it not onely waters the whole Valley of Lima with its several Branches, but also runs under every House in the City, being built on Stone Arches; they are onely one Story high, because there is no Wood to be had in the Valley of Lima but what in three years becomes all Woorm-eaten; nevertheless the Houses are very beautiful both within and without; the Walls being very thick and strong, have curious Arbors of green Boughs on the top, in which the Owners shade themselves from the Sun. Most of the Houses built in the high Streets have pleasant Turrets, which face the Market-place, where all sorts of Provisions are brought to Sale, as Oxen, Sheep, Venison, Sugar, Oranges, Cittrons, Grapes, and Wheat, which is ground in Water-Mills built near the River. This City is inhabited by many able Merchants, which often load Ships to Panama, that are valu’d at above two hundred thousand Ducats. To the Arch-bishop’s See of this Place belongs the Bishopricks of Chili, Charcas, Quito, Cusco, Truxillo, Guanuco, Popaian, San Francisco, Panama, Nicaragua, and Rio de la Plata. The City is also adorn’d with two fair Churches, besides the Cathedral, and also other lesser Churches, four stately Cloysters, two Nunneries, and the Jesuits Palace, which is very magnificent. The Haven two Leagues distant from it, and call’d Callao de Lima, is large and secure for Ships. Anno 1579. Sir Francis Drake took twelve Ships from hence, one whereof was laden with Linnen and Silk, besides a great Chest full of Silver: Which Inconvenience to prevent for the future, the Spaniards have built two strong Forts, and fortifi’d them with Brass Guns. Thirty years after Sir Francis Drake’s Exploit, Joris Spilbergen coming to Anchor here, found the Place all inhabited, a Fort well stor’d with Guns, and a strong Castle before the Mouth of the Harbor, from whence they shot Bullets of thirty six Pound weight at the Hollanders, and so shatter’d their Frigat, call’d The Hunter, that she could scarce keep above Water: Fourteen Spanish Merchant-men lying near the Shore, receiv’d little damage, Spilbergen not being able for Shelves to get to them, neither did he judge it convenient to Land, the Vice-Roy having at that time above four thousand Men in Arms, besides several Troops of Horse; wherefore after having fir’d several Guns on the Fort, and against the Church, he set Sail to Guarmey.

6. Cannete, otherwise call’d Guarco, from the Valley wherein it is situate: It was built by the Spaniards out of the Treasure which they found in the Castle afore spoken of in the same Valley.

7. Valverde, situate in a Valley of the same Name, where excellent Fruit may be had for a small Price; it is a well Traded and rich Town, about sixteen Leagues distant from the Sea.

8. Pachacama, situate in a Territory of the same Name, four Leagues Southward of Lima, memorable chiefly for Pizarro’s good fortune here, who is reported to have found in one onely old Temple of the Natives, the quantity of nine hundred thousand Ducats of Gold and Silver, besides what his Soldiers are suppos’d to have seiz’d on, and convey’d away before he came.

9. Castro Verreina, threescore Leagues distant from Lima to the South-East: It lieth in the Valley of Chocolocha, and is a rich Place, by reason of the good Mines of Silver which are about it, and abundance of the best sort of Tobacco.

10. Miguel de la Ribera, in the Valley of Camana. The Inhabitants whereof drive a great Trade in Wine, Figs, and Raisins.

11. The City Arequipa, which extends up towards the Mountains, is built in the Dale Quilca, which runs eleven Leagues from the Sea, under a healthful Climate; but in the Year 1582. it was wholly ruin’d by an Earthquake; the reason whereof is ascrib’d to the wet sulphurous Mountains, which burns continually, and sometimes vomits out Flames and Ashes. The Marquess Pizarro built this City forty six years before the fore-mention’d Earthquake, since which being re-built again, soon attain’d to three hundred Houses, besides a Church and Cloyster; and though it be but a small Town, yet it is of a great resort, because the Gold and Silver is brought hither from the Mines Chancos, Porco, and Potosi, and from thence sent down the River Quilca, which washing the City Walls runs into the South Sea to Los Reyos, and from thence to Panama, Nombre de Dios, and New Spain. The Jurisdiction of this City Arequipa extends it self a vast way, viz. over the spacious Valleys between Hacari and Tampaca, and up in the Countrey beyond the County Condesuyo, full of Hamlets and Villages; the Inhabitants whereof heretofore worshipp’d the Sun. By the Way from Arequipa to Collao lie two great Lakes, out of one of which the River Aparima takes its original.

12. Caxamalca, rather a Fort than a Town, in a Territory of the same Denomination, built at the Foot of a Mountain wash’d with two Rivulets, over which lead several Bridges; near which also were formerly a stately Temple Consecrated to the Sun, wonderful Palaces and Baths for the Ingas, besides other magnificent Structures of Noble-men, which were the more famous for Attabaliba’s Imprisonment and Death. The Soil round about may compare with any part of the World for fertility. The Inhabitants are a peaceable ingenious People, and make curious woollen Hangings.

13. St. Juan de la Frontera, built by the Spaniards North-East and by East from Caxamalca in the County Chiachinpoyas, full of Gold-Mines and Cattel; to which belongs not onely Chiachinpoyas, but also the Countreys Guiancas and Cascainga, out of which above twenty thousand Peruvians pay Tribute to the Spanish King. These People especially the Women, are very comely and beautiful; for which reason the Ingas fetch’d their Wives and Concubines from thence. Eastward from Frontera rise the high Mountains Andes, behind which flows the great River Mayobamba by several poor Villages inhabited by a sottish kind of People.

14. San Jago de las Valles, built in an ill place amongst the Shrubs and overflowing Rivers. In this Countrey grows a Tree which bears a juicy Fruit, not unlike an Almond in prickly Rinds, but resembling those which cover a Chesnut, concerning which Physicians have deliver’d their Opinions, That there is not a wholsomer Fruit in the whole World.

15. Leon de Guanuco, which receiv’d that Denomination from its Builder Vacca de Castro, who call’d it Leon, because he was born in the Spanish City Leon, and Guanuco from the stately Palace of the Ingas which was built here: The Houses are built of Free-stone, and cover’d with Thatch. The Citizens of Los Reyos were much against the building of this Town, because several Lands belonging to them were taken away and given to Guanuco, where the temperate Air grants long Life and Health to the Inhabitants. The High-way, in which stand several Store-houses, formerly full of Ammunition, runs through the middle of this Countrey, where in the time of the Ingas dwelt Astronomers, who by looking on the Stars pretended to tell future Events. Here the Women also us’d to be burnt alive with their Husbands.

Sect. V.
Cusco.

Situation and Description of Cusco.

Cusco is the far greater part of the Province of Peru, containing generally all the Sierra, or Hill-Countreys, and those parts of the Andes likewise which lie Southward of the little Province or Cantred of Guanuco, being Coasted Westward and to the North-West with Lima; Eastward, with Los Quixos, and some part of Guiana; and on the South, with Charcas; enjoying for the most part a temperate and good Air, neither over-heated with the scorching Sun in the day, nor damp’d with any cold Mists or Dews in the Evening, as some parts of the Plains of Peru are, but well water’d with many fresh Rivers, which make the Valleys and lower Grounds of it good Pasturage, able to maintain great Herds of Cattel. The Woods are especially stor’d with the Coca, whose Leaf is accounted restorative, and with much excellent Venison.

The several Valleys, and other Territories belonging to Collao.

In this Province also there are some lesser Divisions of Countreys necessary to be describ’d, viz. the cold and barren Countrey Bambon, jutting against Guanuco, inhabited antiently by a valiant People, especially near the Lake Chincacocha, which is ten Leagues in circumference; in the middle of it are several Cliffs and little Isles: And out of this Lake also the famous River De la Plata hath its original, and runs through the Valley Xauxa, receiving by the way the Streams Parcos, Bilcas, Abancay, Apurima, Yucay, and others.

The next Countreys in order towards the South are Tarana, abounding with Wheat, and the eminent Valley Xauxa, surrounded with snowy Mountains. The Inhabitants by a general Name call’d Guancas, were antiently divided into three sorts, viz. the Maracabilca, Laxapalanga, and Xauxa. Here were also several stately Houses built by the Ingas.

Upon this Valley borders the Village Acos near a Moorish place full of Canes; but before you approach the Village you come near a high Plain, where the Ruines of an antient Structure appear; and somewhat farther the Palace Pico: from whence the High-way directs to the Bridge Angoyaca, which leads cross the River Xauxa; near which the Ingas had several magnificent Structures, and Baths of warm Springs. Not far from hence is the Village Picoy; between which and Angoyaca the Arm of the River Xauxa is cut with a Bridge, because in the Winter it glides so swift that they cannot Ferry over it.

From Picoy you go to the Wild, in whose Center stands the antient Castle Pucara, (which in the Peruvian Tongue signifies Invincible Fort) where the Ingas receiv’d their Tribute from the neighboring People that live amongst the snowy Mountains.

The Banks of the great River Vinaque are crown’d with the Ruines of antient Structures, which (as the Natives relate) were built by foreign People; which Assertion of theirs seems to be confirm’d by the form and manner of Building, differing from the Ingas Structures, which us’d to be long and narrow. Moreover, several sweet Streams, abounding with Fish, especially Crabs, glide through the Plain-Countrey out of the Mountains Andes.

Not far from hence appears the Plain Chapas, and the Palaces Pilcas, of which now nothing remains but a heap of Rubbish, which lies in the Center of Peru. A fresh-water River, which gives the fore-mention’d Palaces their Denomination, glides out of Soras, and washes the High-way and stately Temple of the Sun.

The Countrey Soras, exceeding fertile, and stock’d with Gold and Silver Mines, is inhabited by a People which go Cloth’d in woollen Cloth, and for their Valor formerly much esteem’d by the Ingas.

Those that inhabit the Countrey Uramar are call’d Chancas, whose Neighbors possess a long Tract of Land abounding with Cattel and Fruit, but of late are most of them destroy’d by the Spaniards.

The River Abanca, which takes its original in the Mountainous County Parinacocha, washes several Royal Buildings, and at last discharges its Waters into the River Xauxa.

On each side of the great River Apurima are erected two wonderful Stone Pillars, over which lies a most artificial Bridge built by the Ingas; from whence the Highway, being cut through hard Rocks, leads up into the Countrey; where the stately Buildings of Limatambo shew themselves; and beyond the Mountain Bilcaconga the Valley Xaquixaguana, inclos’d between high Rocks, comes in view, where the Ingas us’d to recreate themselves in their Banquetting-houses; from whence the Highway, which is Wall’d in on both sides, runs directly through deep Moorish Grounds to Cusco.

Peter Anzurez his Journey.

Eastward from Cusco, behind the Andes, are many large Countreys, which to discover the Spaniards spar’d neither trouble, danger, nor charge: between both they found vast Wildernesses, inaccessible Mountains, and overgrown Countreys; yet at last they opened four ways thither: the first whereof runs through the Valley Paquil to Tono, a Village in the middle of the Mountains; from thence to the River Opotazi, along which it is very troublesom travelling, because of the thick Woods and steep Rocks: lastly to the hot and fruitful Valley Abisca, and so to vast Wildernesses, overgrown with Brambles and Bushes, which prevented any farther Discovery. The second Way runs thirty Leagues farther to the Southward, through the Countreys Sandia, Camata and Caravaya, to Zama. Through this Way, Anno 1538. Peter Anzurez travell’d; setting out from Zama, he found many desolate Mountains, barren Wilds, and close Woods, through which he entred into the County Tacana, and from thence to the River Omapalchas, inhabited on both sides by the Cheriabones and Marquires, who oppos’d him in his crossing over the River; but meeting with nothing but barren Commons, he travell’d up along the River, and view’d the Countreys Moios, Cochabamba, and Chuguiabo, from whence he return’d to Collao, having lost most of his People by Hunger and Hardship. But not long after others went over the Andes to the Countreys which extend themselves East and West, some whereof travell’d through Camata, and others through Cochabamba.

Towns and Places of note.

The principal Towns and Places of Trade in it are, 1. Bombon, situate upon the Lake Chinchacocha, said to be ten Leagues in compass, begirt round about almost with Hills, and having neighborhood with many other lesser, but pleasant Villages.

2. Parcos, once a Palace Royal of the Ingas, seated on the top of a little Hill, encompass’d with other Rocky and higher Mountains on all sides.

3. San Juan de Vittoria, which the Marquess Pizarro built Anno 1539. to secure the Way between Lima and Cusco, from the Assaults of the Peruvians, before he absolutely conquer’d this Kingdom: the Walls are wash’d by a sweet Stream, to the great convenience of the Citizens.

4. Guamanga, a City lying in a pleasant Plain under a healthful Climate, built with Stone-houses cover’d with Tyles; the Owners whereof have great store of Land, which they Sowe with Wheat, and also breed plenty of Cattel. To this City, which is adorn’d with three Churches, five Cloysters, and a large Almshouse, above thirty thousand Peruvians bring annual Tribute. The Mines produce Gold, Silver, Copper, Iron, Lead, Sulphur, and Load-stones; near which grows the poysonous Herb Mio, which kills the Cattel that chance to eat thereof. In the Woods also hereabouts feeds a Beast, whose Piss stinks at a Miles distance. This City is by some deliver’d to be the same with San Juan de la Vittoria above mention’d.

5. Bilcas, another Palace of the Ingas, now a good Town of the Natives, and situate, as is suppos’d, in the very midst of the Countrey of Peru.

6. Guancavelica, a new Town, rais’d from the condition of a very poor Village, to a Place of very great Importance and Traffick, onely by the Mines of Quicksilver, which were first discover’d there in the Year 1566. by Amador Cabrera, through the assistance of a Peruvian nam’d Mavincopa: This Cabrera selling his Interest for a hundred and fifty thousand Ducats, Su’d the Buyer, upon pretence that he had sold it above one half under the value: whilest this was depending, Peter Ferdinando de Valasco came from Mexico to Guamanga, to make trial of the cleansing of Silver by Quicksilver, and finding it to succeed according to his expectation, he sent great quantities of it to Arica, and from thence by Land to Potosi. The King of Spain is said to receive from this Mine of Guancavelica, all his Charges defray’d, above a thousand Pound per Annum for his usual fifth part: But the antient Natives regarded not these Mines so much for the Quicksilver as for the Vermilion which is found mix’d with it, wherewith they delighted very much to paint their Bodies: There is great Art now us’d in the separating of the Quicksilver from the Vermilion.

This Town was long since inhabited by two thousand Spaniards at least, and twice as many Natives.

The original of the City Cusco.

7. Cusco, which is the Metropolis of the Kingdom of Peru, built on a hard Ground, surrounded with Mountains, under a cold, yet wholsom Climate, and wash’d by two Rivers, which on the East side of Cusco parting, one runs direct West, and the other Southward. One part of the City antiently bore the Denomination of Haran-Cusco, and the second, Oren-Cusco, where the chief Nobility and most antient Families dwelt. Concerning the original of this Place, the Peruvians say, That several Ages past there appear’d three Men, call’d Ayrache, Aranca, and Ajarmango, and with them three Women, nam’d Mamacola, Mamacona, and Mamaragua, all of them very richly Cloth’d; that Ayrache had a Precious Stone at the end of a Truncheon, which by holding up he rais’d the Mountains to the Skies, and when he let it fall, levell’d them with the lowest Valleys: Aranca and Ajarmango concluded to build a stately City, and sent for People from remote Countries to inhabit it; with which Design the Natives thereabouts seem’d to be well pleas’d: but before they went to work they judg’d it convenient to destroy Ayrache, whose great Power they envy’d: This being resolv’d upon, they invited him to a deep narrow-mouth’d Cave, that there they might worship the Sun his Father (for so Descended he took upon him to be), he was no sooner entred but the rest shut the Mouth of the Cave with great Stones, hoping so to starve him to death; which Ayrache observing, stood amaz’d a while, till at last he threw off all the Stones, and flew with great and divers colour’d Wings up into the Air, crying aloud, Fear not, Aranca and Ajarmango, though you have design’d to take away my Life, but build a City in this place, and call it Cusco; for in it shall stand the Seat of the Ingas, under whose Jurisdiction extending far and near, many great Nations shall bow. The Temple which the Gods have there design’d shall not onely exceed all other Structures in the World, in Art and Costliness, but be famous for strange Offerings to the Sun. If the Citizens build Altars for me, burn Myrrh, and make Offerings to me, they may certainly expect to vanquish all their Enemies, and increase their Power. According to my Example bore Holes through your Ears, as a sign of Obedience. All which Aranca, Ajarmango, and the fore-mention’d Women promis’d to perform. Whereupon Ayrache gave them a rich Diadem with a Tassel, which was to be the Head-Ornament of the succeeding Ingas; which they had no sooner receiv’d, but Ayrache and Aranca were turn’d into Stones, yet retaining their former shape; which Ajarmango observing, fell straight, together with the three Women, upon building the City Cusco. After the Deluge breaking out of the Hole Tambo, he chang’d his Name of Ajarmango for Mangocapa, that is, Mighty Lord, and made himself, as they say, the first Peruvian King. The City Cusco was divided into four Wards, the East call’d Andosayo, the South Callasayo the North, Chinchasuyo, and the West Condesayo, every one so call’d from the Countreys, to which the Gates of the four Wards are oppos’d.

If any one coming out of another Countrey, setled himself in Cusco, as it hapned daily, he was permitted to dwell no where but in that Ward which fronted his native Countrey. The four high Streets, which through these Wards one way fall into the Market-place, being in the middle of the City, are the other way answerable to the four principal High-ways, viz. that which leads to Quito and Pasto, through Chinchasuyo; to Arehuipa, through Condesuyo; to the Mountains Andes, through Andesuyo; and to Chili, through Collasuyo. The two Rivers before mention’d, which part at the East end of the City, are pass’d over with divers Bridges. The narrow Streets are full of Stone Houses, built in good Order. In several places are Vaulted Cellars under Ground, in some of which are buried great Treasures: they had been formerly the Habitations for Necromancers and Soothsayers; for this sort of People were once in great esteem amongst the Inhabitants, who coming from Chili, Pasto, Bocamores, Topona, Bombon, Charcas, Collao, Chiachiapoias, Conchucos, and other Peruvian Countreys, receive great benefit from the fresh Water, and from the Corn-Mills built on the Streets through the City.

The antient Palaces and other stately Structures in Cusco.

The stately Palaces which the Peruvian Nobility have at several times built in Oren-Cusco, being one part of the City, are very wonderful, the Owners whereof were forc’d by the Ingas to appear at Court at Set-times, that so he might prevent all Insurrections: Also he caus’d the Children of the prime Lords to be brought up in Cusco, under pretence that they might learn the Cuscoan Tongue perfectly, in which the Ingas would always be spoken to; whenas their Design was to keep them as Hostages in their own Jurisdictions, that their Fathers might not rebel; by which means it hapned, that in most places of Peru, which amongst the several Tribes and Principalities had several Languages, the Cuscoan Tongue was understood and spoken. But the Spaniards, who are the present Possessors thereof, have alter’d and repair’d most of the ordinary Houses, which are now neatly built of Stone. Above all the old Structures, the Palace of the Ingas, and the Temple of the Sun, are the most magnificent; the Palace lies inclos’d within a square quadruple Wall, each corner whereof is adorn’d and strengthned with a Tower: The Palace it self is built round, and with Arches; but that which chiefly amazes the Beholder, is to see how the Stones, which are so big that forty Horses are not able to stir one of them out of its place, were brought thither by the Labor of the Builders from the neighboring Mountains; for the Peruvians never made use of any laboring Beast, except their Sheep Pacos, not knowing the use of Horses, Camels, Oxen, Elephants, or the like, before the Spaniards coming thither. The Halls within the Palace were Wainscoted with Golden Plates: yet the Inga’s Apparel was not answerable to the rest of his Pomp; for in stead of a Crown they bound their Heads about with a red woollen Sash, with which they almost cover’d their Eyes; at the end of the Sash hung certain Ribbands, which they gave the Governor as occasion offer’d, that by this Sign, as by a Commission, they might exercise their Offices; the sight of which String caus’d such Obedience, that if the Inga had commanded the Inhabitants of a Town or Countrey to murder themselves, none durst deny. The Inga was generally carried by a hundred of his Noble-men, of whom if any one had accidentally chanc’d to stumble, he was immediately put to death. No man durst presume to look him in the Face, or speak to him without a Present.

The Temple Curicanche.

A cruel Battel between two Brothers.

The Temple Curicanche, Dedicated to the Sun, was certainly the most rich and sumptuous that ever the World boasted, it being Govern’d by the Chief Priest Villanoa. The Inga Guainacava spent an invaluable Treasure in the building of this Structure, for he cover’d the Roof and Walls with thick Plates of massie Gold and Silver. At his return home from the Conquest of the Province of Quito, from whence the Inhabitants, according to an antient Custom of the Ingas, were carried to one of the remotest Countreys in Peru. But Guainacava enamor’d of a Quitoan Maid, staid a considerable time in the City Quito, and kept a splendid Wedding at the Marriage of his Bride, who bare unto him the famous Attabaliba, whom he lov’d beyond all his other Children, and a little before his death made him King of Quito. But Huascar after Guainacava’s Decease would not suffer his Brother to live in the late conquer’d Kingdom of Quito, but gave him Battel in the Plain of Tomebamba, which lasted three days and three Nights, and after much Blood-shed, Attabaliba being defeated was taken Prisoner, and not long after making his Escape by the help of an antient Woman (whilest Huascar’s Commanders and Soldiers rejoyc’d with Cups full of Chica for their gotten Victory) he made his Subjects in Quito believe, that he being transform’d into a Serpent, crept through a little Hole out of the Prison; and that he had a Promise from Heaven to obtain Conquest over Huascar; which being believ’d, stirr’d up all his Subjects to take up Arms, and valiantly to go and meet the Enemy, whom they not onely defeated, but took Huascar Prisoner.

Zaires the Son of Mango Inga submits to the Spaniards.

Huascar being destroy’d by Attabaliba, and Attabaliba by Pizarro, Mango Inga their youngest Brother took the Government upon him, made continual Sallies upon the Spaniards from inaccessible Mountains, and at his Decease left the remaining part of Peru to his Son Zaires Topa; who seeing no good to be done by force of Arms, submitted himself freely to the King of Spain’s Jurisdiction in the Year 1557. since which the Spaniards have been sole Masters.

There are at this day four great Churches in Cusco: Also the Dominicans, Franciscans, Augustines, and the Monks De la Merced, have each of them stately Cloysters here: but the Jesuits Structure exceeds all the other.

Above forty thousand Peruvians pay annual Tribute to this City. In the Valley about the City feed abundance of Cattel; also Wheat, and all manner of Herbs grow here in great plenty. The Gold and Silver-Mines have not that resort which they had formerly, most of the Workmen being remov’d to Potosi.

Concerning the Service which they perform’d in the fore-mention’d Temple of the Sun, and their superstitious Opinions about their Idol Con, they are much of the same ridiculous nature with what hath been already Discours’d of in other places. Five Leagues Southwardly from Cusco lies the Valley Yucay between high snowy Mountains, under a temperate Climate and pleasant Soil. Not far from hence the Ingas built a most invincible Castle on a Rock, which was surrounded with many cliffy Walls one above another; these Walls were also Carv’d with Images of Lyons, Tygers, and other wild Beasts, which held Lances in their Paws; the top of the Rock was crown’d with a Royal Structure built of Stone, through which ran Golden Veins, joyn’d together with a certain Gum, by some call’d Jews-Lime. To the Province of Condesuyo belong the valiant People Chumbibalcas and Ubinas. In the County Pomatambo they make Carpets of fine Wooll, curiously Painted.

8. The City Francisco de Vittoria, which lies in the rough Valley Vilcabamba, and is inclos’d by the Mountains Andes, belonging to the Jurisdiction of the Province Andésuyo.

9. The Village Juan del Oro, which is the chief Place of the Countrey Caravaya, and so call’d by the Spaniards from the fine Gold which is found there in great abundance.

Havens, Isles, and Points in Peru.

Along the Sea-Coast of Peru belonging to the Jurisdiction of Los Reyos, lie the following Havens, Isles and Points.

South-East from the Promontory Aguya, rises the Isle St. Roque out of the South-Sea, surrounded with Rocks, and abounds with Birds of prey; through the midst of it runs a River which divides the Island.

The Haven Malabrigo, ill defended against the Winds, cannot be entred by great Vessels, unless in calm Weather.

Next follow the Harbors Guanape and Santa, where the Ships us’d to furnish themselves with Water out of a fresh River; Casuya and Guarmay, both inhabited by Peruvians.

Near the Mouth of the Road Guara stands a large Salt-pan, the Salt about which is found in great hard Pieces. The Island Collao secures the Haven before Lima.

Behind Cape Guarco lies the Lobos; and not far from hence the Harbor Sangallan, being so commodious that the Spaniards consider’d a long time whether they should build the City Los Reyos here.

The Promontory Nasca affords also good shelter for Ships; and the Haven Hacari yields store of Refreshments. Moreover, the Streams Oconna, Camana, and Quilca discharge their Waters into the Sea.

The Haven Arequipa appears at its Mouth like a little Pool, surrounded with Mountains.

Between Quilca and the River Tamboyalla lies the Isle Nuli; and a little more Southward the Haven Paracca and Pisca; and up in the Countrey the Village Yca, where the most and best Peruvian Wine is to be had.

Sect. VI.
Los Charcas.

Situation and Description of Los Charcas.

Los Charcas is the farthest Countrey Southward of the Kingdom of Peru, reaching up as far as Chile, with which on the South it is border’d, having on the North, Lima and Collao; on the West, Mare del Zur; and on the East, some Countreys not yet well discover’d, which lie betwixt it and the Province of Paraguay, or De la Plata. The Countrey is said to be in length about a hundred and fifty Leagues, measuring it directly, or in a right Line from North to South; but measuring it about along the Sea-Coast, much about two hundred: It is not very rich either in Corn or Cattel, although in some parts it wanteth not good Pasturage; but of unparalell’d Wealth, in respect of the Mines of Gold and Silver which are here digg’d, the principal whereof are those of Potosi and Parco.

The Mountains hereabouts are inhabited by the Cavinas, who dwell in Stone Houses. Their Neighbors the Canches are a subtile, good natur’d, and painful People, breed many Sheep, sowe Corn, and catch plenty of Fish out of the Rivers. Next comes in view the cold Countrey Conas. On the right side towards the Southern Ocean, the great Wilderness Parinacocha extends it self a vast way; the Mountains round about are continually cover’d with Snow, and the Dales have many deep Moors.

Potosi.

Principal Towns and Places of note.

Chief Towns and Places of note in this part of Peru are, 1. Plata, otherwise call’d Chuquisaca, the Countrey whose Metropolis it is, situate under a temperate Climate, in a fruitful Soil for the production of all manner of Plants, and especially Wheat, Barley, and Grapes. In this City the High Court of Judicature of Los Charcas is kept, being a principal part of Peru, and inhabited by the richest Spaniards in the whole Kingdom, having gotten an incredible deal of Treasure out of the neighboring Silver-Mines, which from the time of the Ingas, or Kings of Peru, to its Discovery by the Spaniards, held out and continu’d so rich, that ’tis thought Pizarro, if Reason could have rul’d him, might here onely have rais’d himself a Rent of two hundred thousand Ducats per Annum; but his desire and hopes, first to find more at Potosi, and afterwards his ambition and greediness to have and command all, carried him to violent Courses, which proved his Ruine, as hath been said. The Town is conveniently seated in a fruitful Soil, honor’d with the Residence of the Governor of the Province, and with a Bishops See, said to be the richest of Peru, viz. of fourscore thousand Ducats per Annum. The Cathedral and divers Cloysters give also a great lustre to the City. The antient Inhabitants of this Countrey, especially about those parts where now this City stands, were the Charcas and Charanques, both valiant People, who by Command of the Ingas fetch’d invaluable Treasures out of the neighboring Mines of Porco, where a thousand Men were continually kept at work. In La Plata were reckon’d long since, besides Spaniards, above sixty thousand Peruvians which pay annual Tribute.

2. Oropesa, a place of good Metal, as a man may perceive by the Name; It lieth in the rich and pleasant Valley Cochobamba, twenty Leagues distant from La Plata.

3. Potosi, eighteen Leagues Westward from La Plata, by the Spaniards call’d The Imperial City, built at the Foot of a Mountain bearing the same Denomination, on a barren Soil under a cold Climate, though but twenty one Degrees to the Southward of the Equinoctial Line: the Cold proceeds from the high Lands, which lie bare to the bleak and sharp Winds call’d Tomohavi, which blow every year very fiercely from May till September. But though the barren Countrey produces no Fruit, yet no place in Peru hath greater plenty of all Provisions and Dainties than this, the Markets being always full of Fruit, Salt-Meat, Maiz, Papas, Wheat, Sugar, Sweet-meats, and all things that are requisite for the subsistence of Man-kind, which are brought thither from all parts for the Silver, which is there in such plenty. As to what concerns the famous Mountain Potosi in the Countrey of Charcas, it is of an Ash colour, and rises above the adjacent Mountains in the form of a Sugar-Loaf; on the top of it stands a Chappel, to which leads a craggy Path, which with a little care may be rid up with a Horse; the heighth thereof is a thousand six hundred and twenty four Rods, or a quarter of a League: at the Foot thereof appears the Mine call’d Guaina Potosi, that is, The young Potosi; near which the City Potosi stands, being two Leagues in circumference, and is adorn’d with a Church and Cloyster for the Dominicans, and exceedingly resorted to by Traders.

In the time when the Ingas Govern’d Peru, the Silver-Mines at Porco were very famous; but it was not till after the arrival of the Spaniards that Silver was found in Guaina Potosi, and by degrees the Silver Veins which lay hid in the great Potosi; the manner of which Discovery was as followeth:

The occasion of the first Discovery of the Mines in Potosi.

A Peruvian call’d Gualpa, who work’d in the Mines at Porco, going a Hunting, it chanc’d that the Game ran up the steep Mountain of Potosi, which prevented his pursuing of it any farther; but the Mountain being overgrown with Trees, he got hold from one Bough to another to help himself up, and at last taking hold of the Bramble call’d Quinua, he pull’d the same out of the Ground, and finding it heavy, look’d upon it, and espy’d a great lump of Silver hanging at the Root of it; whereupon viewing the Hole, he discover’d a rich Silver Vein; of which taking some pieces home, and melting them, he found that it was the best Silver that ever he had known; wherefore he privately got a greater quantity, and by degrees grew extraordinary rich: but though he carried his Design never so close, yet he was at last suspected, and especially by his Neighbor Guanca, born in the Valley Xauxa, who was the more jealous of him, because he sold greater Bars of Silver than any were cast at Porco; whereupon he resolv’d to speak to him, and getting out the Secret, it came to this Agreement between them, That they should both be Partners and share the Booty; Gualpa was to keep the Vein, since call’d The Rich Vein, and Guanca was to have another, at present nam’d Diego Centeno: but they agreed not long; for Guanca finding much labor upon his Vein, by reason of the hardness, and that he could get no share in what Gualpa got, acquainted his Spanish Master Vilaroel with it, who rested not till he had found out the truth thereof; for which Vilaroel obtain’d (according to the Custom of Porco) several Rods to work for himself, onely paying the King one fifth part of what he got, and so remain’d Owner of the Mine Centeno.

The Mine Potosi, when discover’d.

This Discovery of the rich Mine Potosi is said to have hapned on the twenty fourth of April, Anno 1545. Soon after which they found the Silver Vein Del Estanno, which though it was very rich, was difficult to be digg’d, because of its hardness. The first Vein which Gualpa search’d after stood upright from the bottom of the Mine, and contain’d above three hundred Foot in length, and thirteen in breadth, and continuing good for two hundred Foot in depth, after which the Silver begins to lessen.

The Peruvians relate, That the Ingas first began to dig in Potosi, but gave it over because the Workmen heard a terrible Voice, saying, Leave off doing what you are about; the Treasures which lie hid here, are reserv’d for a People out of foreign Countreys.

These Mines produce yearly for the King’s fifth part, forty thousand Pieces of Silver, each valu’d at thirteen Ryals, each Ryal being four Shillings, besides what he is defrauded of, which is perhaps half as much more.

The Mines of Potosi exceed all other, because the Diggers never meet with any Water, notwithstanding they work above two hundred Fathom under Ground, whereas the other Silver Mines suffer great damage by the Water; which was also the reason why the Spaniards left off digging of Silver in Porco, because they were not onely forc’d to cut through hard Rocks, but ran greater danger, or at least bestow’d extraordinary labor to get out the Water which broke in upon them.

Four Silver Veins, with their several Divisions.

The four Silver Veins of Potosi, viz. The Rich, Centeno, Del Estanno, and Mendieta, lie on the East-side of the Mountain, and extend North and South. The great Veins produce lesser, not unlike the Body of a Tree, from which shoot forth several degrees of Boughs. Each Vein is divided into several parts, possess’d by several Owners; the least part is open’d four Rods, and the biggest eighty; for none are permitted by the Law to open a bigger Hole. In the time of the Jesuit Joseph de Acosta, an Eye-witness, who Anno 1587. went from Peru to Spain, the Rich Vein was reckon’d to contain eighty seven Mines, of which some were digg’d two hundred Fathom deep. The Spaniards judge that at the Root of the Rich Vein is an incredible Treasure, though Experience hath hitherto taught us, that the Silver lessens in price and quantity the deeper they dig in the Ground.

The Socabonos or Trenches, with the manner of Mining.

For the more easie working in the Mines, the Spaniards have digg’d Trenches (which they call Socabonos) at the Foot of the Mountain towards the West, cross through the Mountain to the Mine, each of them being eight Foot broad and a Fathom deep, and lock’d up with Gates, through which the Silver is carried out, whereof the Owner of the Socabon receives a fifth part. The Socabon which leads to the Rich Vein, was begun Anno 1556. and finish’d in twenty nine years, extends it self two hundred and fifty Rods in length. The Miners work by Candle-light both Day and Night by turns; those that work in the Day, sleep in the Night, and those that work in the Night, sleep in the Day. The Oar, which is as hard as a Stone, is cut out with Pick-axes, beaten in pieces with an Iron Crow, and carried upon their Backs on Ladders made of Leather: Each Ladder hath three Fastnings about the thickness of a Cable, stretch’d out by Sticks, so that one goes up on one side, whilest another comes down on the other. Each Ladder being ten Fathom long, is pitch’d upon its several Floor on which the Laborers rest before they go up higher, for they make divers Floors according to the depth of the Mine. The Laborers carry the Oar in Bags fastned before on their Breasts, and falling back over their Shoulders three and three together, the foremost whereof ties a lighted Candle to his Thumb, and thus they help themselves with both Hands. It is a wonderful thing to consider, how the Peruvians are able to scramble up and down continually a hundred and fifty Fathom: But besides many other Inconveniences, the Mines often fall in, or at least great pieces, which bury all the Diggers. The Mines also, being excessive cold, occasion to those that are not us’d to them, a Vertigo in the Head, and Vomiting. The Silver runs for the most part between two Rocks, as it were, in a long Channel, of which one side is as hard as Flint, and the other much softer. This Silver is of different value; the best, call’d Cacilla or Tacana, resembles Amber in colour; the worser sort is blackish, and sometimes of an Ash-colour. The pieces of Oar are carry’d on the Backs of the Sheep Pacos to the Mill, where being ground to Powder, they are put into Furnaces to melt; of which there were once above six thousand on the top of Potosi; but since the Quicksilver was found to cleanse the same, not a third part remains pure.

In former times the Mines at Porco, two Leagues from the little Lake Aulagas, produc’d those vast Treasures gather’d by the Ingas, which afterwards for the most part fell into the Spaniards Hands.

Port-Towns, Rivers, and Havens of Los Charcas.

As concerning the Sea-Coast of Los Charcas, it lies as followeth: Southerly from the River Tambopalla puts forth a three-pointed Rock into the Ocean, and makes the Haven De Ylo, into which falls a fresh River. Next follow the round Hill Morro de los Diabolos, and the Inlet before the Town Arica, secur’d from all except a Westerly Wind, where the Silver that comes from Potosi is Shipp’d for Lima. Since the English Admiral Sir Francis Drake took three Barks out of this Inlet it is fortifi’d with a Castle, which is stor’d with Brass Guns.

Nine Leagues Southward the Pissaqua falls into the Ocean; and next you come to the little Village Hicahic, situate on a high and barren Tract of Land; as also the Haven Terrapaca, which by an Inland is made very secure.

Not far from hence appears the Foot of Piqua, where the Coast begins to rise very high; the Head of Tacama, the Stream Lottoya, otherwise call’d De Loa, whose Banks are inhabited by poor People; the River Montelo, the Promontory Morro Moreno, beyond whose utmost Point opens a Bay, secur’d from all Winds by an Island. The Inhabitants here feed on raw Fish.

Next the River Claru comes in view, which is taken for a Boundary between Peru and Chili.

Eastward up into the Countrey you come to Santa Cruiz, built at the Foot of a Mountain in a Plain near a Brook, which rushing forth from a Rock glides through the City to a Lake full of delicious Fish. The Houses of Stone, are cover’d with Palm-Tree Leaves; and besides the Church there is also a Cloyster, inhabited by the Monks De la Merced. In former times the Peruvian Houses were built of Clay, and were often destroy’d by their Neighbors the Cheriguanacs and Titanes, who made Feasts with as many as they took of them. The People about this Place are meek and poor spirited, and speak besides four Languages, the Diagnitan Tongue, common amongst all of them. Before the Arrival of the Spaniards they went Cloth’d in Ostritches Feathers, but since taught to weave Cotton, they now make their Apparel of the same, and upon the account of Barter, drive a great Trade in it: They Dye their Cotton with the boyl’d Roots and Leaves of a little Tree.

Eastward beyond Santa Cruiz lies the Countrey Paicanos, eminent for the great Calabashes which grow there, exceeding good to keep both wet and dry Meats in.

The Countrey receives a vicissitude of excessive Cold and intolerable Heat; the hard Winters taking beginning in May, and continuing till the beginning of August. In the middle of our Summer a South-wind blows seven Weeks together here, to the great prejudice of all Plants, which are during that time often wash’d away by continual Rains. About Christmas they Sowe, and gather in their Harvest in March. During the rainy Season the Ways cannot be travell’d, being all overflow’d by the Rivers; neither doth the Palm-Wood, which is four days Journey in length, permit any access to the said City Santa Cruiz, because the conflux of Waters makes it a Moor all over; besides which, the Tygers, Bears, and Serpents, make the Ways dangerous, especially at that time.

Through this Countrey the Spanish Captain Nusco de Chavas travell’d, when he discover’d the Taguamacis, a numerous People, which dwell along the great River De la Plata.

The Countrey about Santa Cruiz produces all manner of Fruit, but few Trees, because of the want of Rain; but Corn, Maiz, Wine, Granadillas, Luiumas, and Tucumay, as also the Plant Hachalindi, in the Latine Tongue call’d Mirabile Peruanum, grow here in great abundance; which last shoots up to the bigness of a pretty large Body, full of Juice, and of a yellowish colour, out of which shoot knotty Boughs, and about each Knot two Leaves resembling the Herb Nightshade; the Flowers which hang at the ends of the Boughs are long, and pleasant to the Eye, by reason of their mixture of Purple, White, and Yellow, and also of a sweet smell. It is a strange Secret in Nature, that this Flower opens at Midnight, if any Light come near the same: The Root also is accounted an effectual Medicine against the Dropsie.

Sect. VII.
Collao.

Situation and Description of Collao.

Collao lieth Southward of those Countries, which go under the general Name of the Province of Cusco, having on the West, Lima; on the South, Charcas; but Eastward, and to the North-East, it is shut up by a Ridge of Mountains, running in one Body or continu’d Tract from the Confines of Collao, as far as the City of Cusco, where they divide. The Countrey is generally plain, commodiously water’d in all Parts with fresh Rivers, and consequently affording rich Pasturage and good Herds of Cattel.

Chief Towns and Places of note.

The chief Towns and Places of note are, 1. Chuquinga, a great Town, and held to be naturally almost impregnable, as being environ’d round about either with deep unfordable Waters, or with Mountains unpassable, and having one onely Cawsey leading to it, reported to be for two or three Leagues together no broader than to permit one single Person to march conveniently upon it.

2. The City Pucara, which was formerly well inhabited, but at present nothing remains of it, except the ruin’d Walls of great Houses, and large Images of Stone.

3. Ayavire, by the Spaniards call’d Las Sepulturas, being a Place especially enobled by the stately Monuments of the Peruvian Nobility which were found there.

4. Hatuncolla, the Metropolis or chief Town of this Province, seated upon the Banks of the River Caravaya, whose Streams are very much fam’d for Gold.

The River Caravaya, which glides from the Andes Eastward to the City Juan del Oro, produces much fine Gold, but not without the loss of many People, which are kill’d by the unwholsom Air and Damps that arise here.

The Lake Titicaca.

The Lake Titicaca, which washes the Countrey Collao on the North, the Province of Omasuy on the East, Chaquito on the West, and Chuquiabo on the South, is one of the greatest Lakes of America, being eighty Leagues in circumference, and in several places as many Fathom deep; wherefore it is exceeding rough in windy Weather. Into this Lake ten great Rivers discharge their Waters, which run away again through a narrow, but very deep Channel, in which the Stream runs so strong, that no Boats are able to abide in it.

5. Chinquita, a Colony of Spaniards upon the Banks of Titicaca, having many small Islands in it of a good and fruitful Soil, abounding in Fish and variety of Sea-Fowl; it is suppos’d to be fourscore Leagues distant likewise from the South Sea, having onely one Estuary or Mouth, which is something strait, but of such a deep Water and violent Stream, that (as Acosta testifieth of it) it is not possible to build a Bridge of Stone or Timber over it; but the Natives in stead thereof have laid a Bridge of Straw upon it, which serves as well, viz. so many great Bundles of Straw, Sedge, or such like matter, well and surely made up and fastned together, as will reach from one side or Bank of the Estuary to another; at which likewise having made them sure, they cast some good quantity of more Straw and Sedge upon them, and have a Bridge very convenient, upon which they both securely pass themselves, and also drive Cattel, and do other necessary Business. The Water is neither bitter nor brackish, yet is not drinkable because of its muddiness. Several Islands that lie in the Lake serv’d formerly for Store-houses of the chiefest Goods, which the People thereabouts living near the High-way would not trust in their Villages.

The Plant Totara.

Here grows a certain Broom-Plant call’d Totara, good for many uses, and is also wholsom Food both for Man and Beast; moreover, they cover their Houses with the same, burn it on their Hearths, and make Boats. The Uros, a salvage People, made Floats of Totara, which they ty’d together, and built Villages on the same, which drove to and again, according as the Wind blew.

The Lake also breeds abundance of Fish, and especially two sorts, viz. Suches, which are very pleasing to the Palate, but unwholsom; and the Bogas, which though less, and full of Bones, are a much better Food. There likewise breed plenty of Fowls about the same, especially wild Geese and Ducks.

When the Peruvians intend to Entertain any Person, they go to catching of Fowls (by them call’d Chaco) after this manner: They make a Circle with the Floats nam’d Balsas, and Rowing close to one another, take up the inclos’d Fowl with their Hands.

Moreover, the fore-mention’d Channel, through which the Lake Titicaca discharges its Water, ends in a little Lake call’d Aulagas, likewise full of desolate Isles, but hath no visible place into which to empty its Water, therefore it must needs, according to the course of Nature, fall under Ground, where it commixes with a Stream whose original is unknown, though it be seen to fall into the South Sea.

The Town is a Place of extraordinary Wealth and Trading, and so considerable, that the Governor thereof is always nam’d by the King of Spain himself, and his Place estimated at fifty thousand Ducats per Annum.

6. Tiaguanaco, at the Estuary, or Mouth of the Lake, memorable onely for the Ruines of certain great and stupendious Buildings which antiently have stood there, some of the Stones whereof are said to have been of thirty Foot length apiece, fifteen Foot broad, and six or seven Foot thick. There were likewise found the Statues of certain Men excellently Carv’d and Wrought, of a Gigantick stature or bigness, and likewise veiled in foreign and strange Habits, not at all us’d, nor ever known to have been us’d by the Peruvians themselves, or by any other of the Natives of America.

7. Nuestra Sennora de la Paz, or Our Lady of Peace, otherwise call’d Pueblo Nuevo: It is but a small Town, yet pleasantly seated upon the Banks of a River in a fair and fruitful Plain, full of Springs, Fruit-Trees, Savanas, and Fields of Maiz, having Mountains on either side: It lieth almost in the middle of the Province Chuquinabo, fourteen Leagues distant from Cusco, and as many from Potosi. The Province Chuquinabo it self (which in the Peruvian Tongue signifies Inheritance of Gold) hath many rich Gold-Mines, good Salt-pits, and a temperate Climate, except from the beginning of December till March, in which time the continual Rains cause Feavers and Agues. The Inhabitants being very poor People, us’d to go naked in the Summer Season.

8. Copavana, two and twenty Leagues beyond Lopoz: It is onely inhabited by Peruvians; amongst whom an Image of the Virgin Mary, long since erected there, hath been ever in great veneration, especially by reason of a Tradition of a great Miracle there perform’d: for the Spaniards affirm, That Johannes Anachoreta going a Journey of several Weeks from home, plac’d a lighted Candle before the Image, which during the time of his absence did not at all diminish.

A strange Earthquake at Angoanga.

An Accident which fell out in this Countrey is very remarkable, viz. The Ground of an old Village call’d Angoanga, then inhabited by eminent Necromancers, began on a sudden to swell, and the Earth to run like a broken Wave two Leagues, overwhelming the Houses in Sand, and filling up a neighboring Lake.

The like in Herefordshire in England.

Eight years before this terrible Earthquake here, there hapned in the County of Hereford in England almost the same kind of prodigious Motion: for not far from the Town Ledborough, arose Marcely Hill to an exceeding heighth, and moving along bury’d all whate’re it met with, after which manner it continu’d for the space of three days, to the great terror of all that beheld it.

9. Chilane; 10. Acos; 11. Pomata, and some others, all of them good Towns, but not so considerable as those other.

Roads and High-ways made by the Ingas.

Concerning the Roads or High-ways, it may well be said, That none of the seven Wonders of the World can compare with any one of them; neither was the Way that Appius Claudius made from Rome to Brundusium, upon the repairing of which the Emperors Julius and Augustus spent great sums of Money, fit to stand in competition with the Roads made by the Ingas in Peru: for who cannot but admire at the consideration of so many Valleys fill’d with Mountains, the hardest Rocks cut asunder, Moors damm’d up, great Stone Bridges laid over swift gliding Streams, and through vast Wildernesses a Way made of twenty Foot broad, inclos’d in high Walls, extending from Quito to Chilo, a thousand Leagues, and at the end of every ten Leagues brave Houses or Magazines, stor’d with Bowes, Arrows, Halberds, Axes, Clubs, Clothes, and Provision for twenty or thirty thousand Men. Some relate, that Guainacava, when he return’d Victor from the conquer’d Countrey Quito, suffer’d great Inconveniences on the pathless Mountains, and thereupon Commanded his Subjects to make the fore-mention’d Way. But it is more probable, that this Master-piece was not the work of one Inga, especially since besides the Way from Chili to Quito there leads another through the Mountains over the Plains from Cusco to Quito, forty Foot broad, and five hundred Leagues long, inclos’d within two Walls.

The manner of the Peruvian Registers.

The Peruvians relate from the testimony of the Quipos, much more concerning these High-Ways, and other Buildings on them, made by Guainacava. These Quipos are Rowls of divers colour’d Strings, full of all manner of Knots, which serve in stead of Characters to keep their Chronicles; in which were employ’d the Quipo-Camayos, who being in the nature of our Secretaries, Registred all Transactions, performing the same with the several Strings and Buttons, with which they gave Obligations, Discharges, and the like: but besides the Quipos they also us’d Rings full of little Stones for the same purpose; and knew with Maiz-Seed how to cast up an Account as well as the best Arithmetician with Figures.

Their Account of Time hung on the twelve Pillars Succanga, erected on a Mountain beyond Cusco by the Inga Pachacuma, that is, The Regulator of the Year, to shew the Course of the Sun, and according to that their appointed Feast-days, times of Sowing and Harvest: Their Year begins in December.

The present State of Peru under the Spanish Government.

The Spanish Government in the Kingdom of Peru is setled at present in great tranquility and splendor. The Vice-Roy, who keeps a splendid Court in Lima, otherwise call’d Los Reyos, Commands over Chili and Terra Firma, and never comes abroad without a Guard of forty Halberdeers: when he travels by Land he is accompanied by the Arch-bishop, and guarded by his forty Halberdeers, a hundred Pike-men, and fifty Musquetteers. His Reign is generally not above six or eight years, during which time he receives forty thousand Ducats per Annum out of the King’s Exchequer.

The present flourishing Condition of the City Los Reyos.

The City Los Reyos hath been of late years very much enlarg’d and brought to a most flourishing Condition, being exceeding populous, and extending four Miles in length, and half as much in breadth: In the biggest Market-place is the City Hall and the Exchange, where all things are brought to be sold. Of the other three Markets, two have their Denominations from St. Anne and St. Jacob; the fourth is call’d El Santo de los Cavallos, because nothing but Mules, Asses, and Horses are sold there. The chief Church is Consecrated to St. John the Evangelist; the other Three to Marcellus, Sebastian, and Anna. The Franciscans inhabit three Cloysters; the Dominicans, Augustines, and Monks De la Merced, each of them two, besides two costly Structures for the Jesuits. Other Orders have also five Cloysters here, viz. the Creation, Conception, the Holy Trinity, St. Joseph, and St. Clara; the three first have each of them a Church built hard by the several Cloysters, Dedicated to the Santas Virgines del Montserratto, Del Prado, and De Loretto. Each Cloyster contains above two hundred and fifty either Monks or Nuns. Here are also four large Hospitals, the chiefest whereof call’d Andrias, hath seldom less than four hundred Sick, which are kept and cur’d on Charity. The second is for Peruvians onely, call’d The Hospital of St. Anna. The third, built in honor of the Apostle St. Peter, is for poor old Clergy-men. The fourth, nam’d The House of Love, is for sick Women. Besides these there stands another Structure near the Walls of the City, Consecrated to Lazarus, where those that have the Leprosie are cur’d. The House call’d The Holy-Ghost, receives all sick and wounded Sea-men. The King maintains twenty four Students at his own Charge in the Royal Colledge, and the Arch-bishop as many in the Colledge call’d St. Toronius; but in the Colledge of St. Martin reside above six hundred, which are brought up in all manner of Arts and Sciences. Two hundred Students are also taught in the high School, where they chuse a new Governor every year. Here also is kept the King’s Treasure, and the Court of Inquisition. The River which washes the City Walls runs so exceeding swift, that not long since it carried away a new Stone Bridge with nine great Arches.

Miracles reported to have been done by Ramirez.

The Dominican Monks were the first that Landed on Peru, the first which came thither with Francisco Pizarro being Vincent de Valle Verde, who was follow’d by Sancio Martino, Martino de Esquivele, Dominico de Sancto Thoma, Pedro Ulloa, Alphonso de Montenegro, Reynaldo Pedraza, and many others, who were stirr’d up by the report of the Peruvian Riches; amongst whom were four Franciscans, viz. Pedro Portuguese, Jodoco de los Angelos, De la Cruiz, and De Sant Anna, who were soon after follow’d by twelve Monks of the Augustine Order. Anno 1552. Landed also at Los Reyos, Colonel Andreas Salazar, accompanied with Antonio Lozano, Juan de Sancto Petro, Hieronymo Melendez, Didaco Palamino, Pedro de Espeda, Andreas Ortega, Juan Canto, Juan Chamorro, Francisco de Treyas, Juan Ramirez, and Balthazar Melgarego. Salazar soon after his Arrival sent the Priest Juan Ramirez, and Balthazar Melganego to Guamachuco, where he Baptiz’d and Instructed the Inhabitants in great numbers. Afterwards travelling to Moyabamba, he got a great esteem amongst those Idolaters, and (as it goes for currant amongst them) wrought many Miracles, amongst which this is reported for one: He being inform’d by an old Peruvian, that his Daughter nam’d Curi had hid several Idols; enquiring after it, he tax’d her with what her Father had told him; which she denying, and being rebuk’d by Ramirez, is said to have become immediately dumb, to have foam’d at the Mouth, at last falling down dead like a second Saphira in the presence of many, which caus’d many to forsake their Idolatry. But the Necromancers endeavor’d by all means possible to raise a disesteem on Ramirez, and with the assistance of their Master the Devil, so wrought their Inchantments, that the Tygers came in great Herds out of the Wildernesses to Moyabamba, and devour’d not onely Men, Women and Children in the Highways, but also tore them out of their Houses, yet did not the least hurt to any Spaniard; whereupon Ramirez valiantly went with a Company of his Proselytes to a Herd of Tygers, which when he approached held the Cross to them, which it seems so affrighted the Devil-Tygers, that they climb’d up the Trees. They farther relate (if you will believe them) to make the Miracle the greater, That Ramirez call’d to the Multitude, saying, Go and revenge the Deaths of your devour’d Parents, Children and Relations; whereupon he throwing a Stone, and all the rest following his Example, the Tygers leap’d out of the Trees, stood still, and suffer’d themselves to be kill’d like Lambs. Six years after the fore-mention’d twelve Augustine Monks follow’d eleven others, who set Sail out of the Spanish Haven St. Lucar, and arriving at Peru went to the Village Tauca, where they broke the Image of the Goddess Huarella, being as it were the Peruvian Venus, or Patroness of amorous Delights, reported to have given Responses from the Wood in which she was worshipp’d. They also destroy’d the Idol Chanca in the Countrey Conchucos, which being worshipp’d by the Indians in the shape of a Man, had yearly a fair Maid, aged fourteen years, given to him in Marriage, a solemn Wedding being kept, and several Sheep kill’d.

The Miracle of an Augustine Monk.

The Augustine Monks are believ’d to have wrought also another Miracle in the Province Conchucos, upon this occasion: A Conjurer call’d Chaumango, boasted himself to be God, deny’d our Saviour, in testimony whereof he gave out that he would kick a Mountain to pieces, with his Foot; which Report spreading all over the Countrey, all the adjacent People flock’d to see this strange Wonder on an appointed Day, on which Charimango being, it seems, as good as his word, and kicking the Mountain, caus’d it to rent from the top to the bottom, and the pieces to flie all about the People, who were exceedingly amaz’d; but the Sorcerer upon the Augustine Monk’s rebuking him was (as they affirm) immediately eaten up with Worms.

Many other Stories of Miracles go currant amongst them, as of Marco Garcia and Didaco Ortez driving the Devil from a white Stone which hung over a Fountain in Chiquipalpa, and several others, but it would be very impertinent to dwell too long upon Discourses of this nature, especially since we are not oblig’d to make them a part of our Creed.

To conclude our Description of this famous Kingdom of Peru, the People thereof at the Spaniards first Arrival viewing their Shipping, their Guns, and other Accoutrements, unknown to them before, had them in great admiration, as Men descended from Heaven; but when they began to be oppress’d by their Tyranny, and to be tortur’d by them, they look’d upon them as the Spawn of Hell, and curs’d the Sea that had brought so wicked a People to them.

CHAP. V.
Chile.

Situation and Description of Chile.

Following the Coast of Mare del Zur, or the South Sea, the next great Province pertaining formerly to the Kingdom of Peru, is that of Chile. This is the most Southerly Province of the whole Countrey of America, reaching up as far as the Magellane Straights, with which to the Southward it is bounded; Northward it hath a Desart, and an undiscover’d Countrey lying betwixt it and the Confines of Peru, call’d Atacama; on the West it hath Mare del Zur; and on the East, up to Rio de la Plata, the Atlantick, or North Sea, with some Countreys undiscover’d, which interpose betwixt it and Paraguay to the North-East: It lieth all of it beyond the Tropick of Capricorn, in a temperate Zone, and extendeth it self in length from the Borders of Peru, to the Mouth of the Straights five hundred Leagues or more; but the breadth of it neither equal nor certain: They say ’tis call’d Chile from the word Chil, which signifies Cold it seems in their Language as well as ours, it being generally a cold and bleak Countrey, the Air in many parts of it so extreamly sharp and piercing, that both Horse and Rider sometimes in travelling are frozen to death, as the Spaniards found by experience in their first Search and Discovery of the Countrey, under the Conduct of Diego Almagro, who is said to have left the greatest part of his Men dead behind him: But this is chiefly towards the Andes, and on the Sea-Coast, the more Inland parts of it, though mountainous also in some parts, yet are more temperate, and being also well water’d with Rivers, are much more fruitfull than the other, affording both Wheat and Maiz, and likewise other Grain, excellent Pasturage in many places, and great store of Cattel, Wine, Honey, and not without many and rich Mines both of Gold and Silver.

Pedro Baldivia taken Prisoner and put to death by the Arucans.

The Natives of this Countrey were found to be the most stout and warlike of all the Americans that the Spaniards had hitherto met withal, fighting with them, and oftentimes defeating them in the open Field, surprizing and sacking their Towns, and last of all taking their Captain and Commander in Chief Prisoner: This was Pedro Baldivia, one of those good Men that consented to the death of Attabaliba, the last King of Peru, after a greater Ransom accepted and paid, then perhaps the King of Spain could well raise on a sudden, if he had occasion to use it for himself. The Arucans (for so are the People call’d that had him Prisoner) are said to have Entertain’d him for a while with great Jollity and Feasting, but for his last Draught gave him a Cup of melted Gold, which the poor Man was forc’d to take down, and so died a cruel, though costly Death.

The whole Province generally is divided first into Chile, specially so call’d, and secondly Magellanica, or that part which lieth more Southward down to the Straights of Magellan.

Sect. II.
Chile, properly so call’d.

The Bounds of Chile specially so call’d.

Chile, specially so call’d, is border’d Northward with the Desart and barren Countrey of Atacama above mention’d; on the South, with Magellanica; on the West, with Mare del Zur; Eastward, and to the North-East, with some parts of Paraguay, or rather with some undiscover’d Countreys lying betwixt them both: The length of it from North to South is reckon’d to be little less than three hundred Leagues, and generally of a fruitful Soil, affording besides abundance of Gold and Silver, both Corn, Cattel, Vineyards, and divers sorts of Fruits, equal both for kind and plenty to Spain it self, and sundry other parts of Europe. The Air likewise temperate, and the People in their Manners and Conditions come much nearer to the Civility, and likewise subtilty of the Europeans, than other Americans did; which doubtless may be attributed to the conformity of the Climates under which they lie, agreeable to those of Europe; though otherwise in respect of the Sphere and Seasons of the Year, there be a diametrical difference betwixt us; As for Example, their Spring beginning in September, which is our Autumn, and their Autumn in March, which is our Spring; their longest Day being that of St. Lucy, on the eleventh of December, which is our shortest; and their shortest being St. Barnabas, viz. the eleventh of June, which is our longest, &c.

Towns and Places of Importance.

The Towns of chiefest note and importance in this Province, are 1. Gopiapo, an old Town in the most Northerly parts of this Province towards the Sea, where it hath a very commodious Haven belonging to it.

2. La Serena, a Town situate on the Banks of Coquimbo, a pleasant River a little above its Influx into the Sea, built by Baldivia in the Year 1544. the Countrey about very rich in Mines of Gold, and the Town it self so well Garrison’d for fear of the Natives, that when the English under Sir Francis Drake, about fourscore years since, attempted the gaining of the Place, they found hot Service of it, being stoutly resisted and beaten back again to their Ships, by a Sally of no less than three hundred good Horse and two hundred Foot.

3. St. Jago, the principal Town of the Province, a Bishop’s See, and the ordinary Residence of the Governor, lying on the Banks of the River Tapocalma, in the thirty fourth Degree of Southern Latitude, fifteen Leagues distant from the South Sea, at which it hath a very commodious and much frequented Haven, which they call Valparayso, and where the English met with better fortune, as hath been said already in the report of Sir Francis Drake’s Voyage.

4. La Conception, a strong Town, seated on the Bay call’d Penco, sixty or seventy Leagues distant from St. Jago towards the South, a Place not a little fortifi’d both by Nature and Art, having the Bay and a certain Ridge of high Mountains begirting it almost round about; and where it is otherwise accessible, a Castle, and certain Bulwarks with Ordnance, besides a Garrison of five hundred Soldiers at least continually in it, and all little enough to defend it against the Araucanes, their deadly Enemies, who live thereabouts, and are ever and anon making Incursions almost up to the Walls of it. Over against this Place in Mare del Zur, but very near the Shore, there lieth a certain Island call’d St. Maries, exceeding plentiful in Swine and all sorts of Poultrey, which the Garrison of La Conception make good use of.

5. Los Confines, a Fronteer Town, built by the aforesaid Baldivia, for defence of the rich Mines of Gold at Angol, a Place near adjoyning.

6. La Imperiale, another strong Garrison of this Place on the Banks of the River Cauten, near to which that great Battel was fought, where Baldivia, with divers other Soldiers, were taken Prisoners, who were no otherwise overcome, but by being over-wearied with killing of their Enemies, and by that means not able to make their Retreat.

7. Villarica, another Colony of the Spaniards in these Parts, sixteen Leagues distant from Imperiale, and twenty five from the Sea.

8. Baldivia, so nam’d from the Commander Pedro Baldivia, who built it in the Valley of Guadallanquen, two or three Leagues distant from the Sea, where it hath a good and capacious Port; but nearer to it the best Mines of Peru, so rich, that ’tis said they yielded Baldivia every day so long as he could enjoy them, twenty five thousand Crowns.

9. Osorno, a Town lying in the Bay of Chilue in a barren Soil, but otherwise neither less rich, nor less populous than Baldivia it self.

These three last mention’d Towns, viz. Baldivia, Imperiale, and Osorno, were in the Years 1596, 1699, and 1604, surpriz’d by the Araucanes, and other Salvages confederate with them, sack’d and burnt; and though the Spaniards be said to have recover’d and Garrison’d some of them with fresh Soldiers, yet how long they were able to hold them, or whether they be Masters of them at this day, we cannot say.

10. Castro, the most Southerly Town of the whole Province, built on a certain Island within the Bay of Chilue.

11. Mendoza; and 12. St. Juan de la Frontera, both which lie towards Paraguay and Rio de la Plata, but on the other side of the Andes, forty Leagues distant from any of those we have spoken of, and perhaps more, not above a hundred from Buenos Ayres, and the Atlantick Ocean.

Sect. III.
Magellanica.

Situation and Description of Magellanica.

Magellanica, the other part of this Province, is bounded Northward, with Sea-Port, Towns, Isles, and Straights. Chile abovesaid, and some parts of the Countrey De la Plata; on the South, with the narrow Sea call’d Magellans Straights; having Mare del Zur on the West, and on the East the Atlantick Ocean. It contains in length from the Borders of Chile to the Mouth of the Straights, a hundred Leagues, and in breadth from the North to the South Sea, somewhat more, viz. towards Chile and the North-West parts of it, for towards the South and South-West it straitens still more and more, insomuch that they who resemble the Southern part of America to the form of a Pyramid revers’d, make this part of the Countrey to be the Spire or top thereof. It beareth the Name from Ferdinand Magellan, a Portuguese, who first discover’d that narrow Sea, so famously known by the Name of Magellans Straights. It is a large Countrey, and suppos’d not to be altogether barren of Metals; but as yet no great Discovery hath been made of it, partly by reason of the excessive Cold to which ’tis thought to be subject, and partly perhaps by reason of the difficulty of the Enterprize, it being so far remote, and very hardly passable in many places, by reason of the huge Mountains the Andes, which bar it as it were against all Adventurers; but chiefly by reason of the stoutness and untameableness of the Araucanes and other Natives of Chile, through whose Countrey the March lieth, and who must first be conquer’d, so that very little can be said more of this Countrey, than onely to name the Ports and Places upon the Sea-Coasts, at which the Spaniards, and likewise some other Nations at several times have touched, the chief whereof upon the South Sea are, 1. Cabo de las Islas, a Promontory or Foreland, twenty six Leagues distant from that of St. Felix on the Confines of Chile.

2. Puerto de San Stephano, fifty Leagues from that, towards the South.

3. La Villa de Nuestra Sennora, or Our Ladies Dale, a large and secure Bay, eighteen Leagues Southward of St. Stephens.

4. La Punta Deglada; 5. Puerto de los Reyos; and 6. Ancona Sin Salida, all of them opening towards the Straights. There is also at the opening of the Straights, Cabo de la Vittoria, Cabo Desseado, and some others.

Upon the North Sea, and up towards Rio de la Plata, the chief Places observable, are 1. Rio de la Crux, and the Cape which they call De las Rameras, about thirty Leagues distant from the Straights Mouth.

2. The Bay of St. Julian, forty Leagues Northward of the former.

3. El Puerto Desseado; 4. Puerto de los Leones; 5. The Bay of Anegada, all of them good and capacious Havens for the security of Shipping upon these Coasts, and lying at a distance of thirty or forty Leagues one from another, up towards Rio de la Plata, and the Countrey of Paraguay, of which we are next to speak.

Description of the Magellan Straights.

As for the Straights themselves, so much spoken of, and likewise so necessary to be known by those who frequent these parts of the World, they are a narrow Sea or Frith, by which the Atlantick Ocean, or rather some parts of it, doth fall into Mare de Zur, or the South Sea: the Passage is long, running, as ’tis commonly suppos’d, well nigh a hundred Leagues together, almost in a paralel Line, or in the same Degree of Latitude from one end to the other; and likewise extreamly difficult by reason of the many windings and turnings of the Sea, which force them to be ever and anon altering of their Course, and a mountainous high Countrey on both sides of it, from whence it is almost continually beaten with Storms, both dangerous and terrible: They were first discover’d by Ferdinand Magellan, by Nation a Portuguese, but in the Service of the King of Spain, and by him nam’d Magellan’s Straights; who although himself liv’d not to return into Spain, being slain in the Conquest of the Molucca Islands, yet his Companions did, in the Ship call’d Vittoria, from whence the Cape De la Vittoria abovesaid took its Name. The Mouth or Entrance of them, by the Atlantick Ocean, lies in fifty two Degrees of Southern Latitude, and hath not above fifty three and some Minutes at the Exit or opening into the South Sea.

The Straights of Le Maire.

There is likewise since this, and but of late times, viz. about the Year 1615. another Straight discover’d by the Dutch, and call’d from the Discoverer Fretum Mairi, or The Straights of le Maire, four or five Degrees more to the Southward than those of Magellan, and suppos’d to be a much earlier and safer Passage.

The Intention by the discovery of these Straights, was to have found a shorter Way to the East-Indies and the Kingdoms of Cathay and China, than that which was then onely us’d, viz. by the Cape de Buena Speranza, and the Coast of Africk, but by reason of the great difficulty, as ’tis to be suppos’d, and uncertainty of the Passage, neither the one nor the other is much frequented, the Spaniards for the most part serving themselves of their American Ports upon the South Sea, from whence they make their Voyages and Returns to and from the other Indies, and from thence home to Spain; and the English, with other Nations of Europe, Trading still by the Coast of Africk and Cape of Good Hope, or else by the way of Alexandria and the Persian Gulf, as heretofore.

CHAP. VI.
Paraguay, or Rio de la Plata.

We have seen in Magellanica the farthest, that is, the most Southerly part of the New World, and before it in order all the Western Coasts of America that lie either upon or towards Mare del Zur, viz., from Panama, the first Province of this Southern part down as far as the Straights. We are now to return and take a view of the Eastern Coasts, and those Countreys which lie upon the Atlantick Ocean, steering our Course henceforth Northward, not directly, but as the Coast leads us for a while Eastward and by North, forasmuch as the Land of America, from the Straights of Magellan up as far as Brasile, and almost to the Æquator, runneth out with a long Point, little less than three thousand Leagues together.

Situation and Description of Paraguay, or Rio de la Plata.

The first Province we meet with on this side next to Magellanica, is the Countrey of Paraguay, oftentimes call’d Rio de la Plata, from the Name of an huge River, which runneth for the most part through the midst of it: It is border’d, as we said, to the South and towards the Straights with Magellanica; on the East, with the Atlantick Ocean; more Northward, or to the North-East, it hath Brasile; and on the West those undiscover’d Countreys of the Province of Chile, of which we have spoken.

The Countrey on both sides the River is reported to be a very lusty and fruitful Soil, bearing besides those which are proper and native, all sorts of European Fruits and Grain in great abundance, with Sugar-Canes, both large and good, as any other Province of the New World. Nor is it excell’d by any other for good Pasturage and great Herds of Cattel, Sheep, and Swine; in particular, Horses are said to have multiply’d so here, that of thirty Mares, and about six or seven Stallions, which the Spaniards left there, in forty years the whole Countrey thereabouts was fill’d with the Breed of them, running wild in great Companies together, through all the Woods and Forrests of the Countrey, and being of excellent Mettle and Service if they could be tam’d. It affordeth likewise great store of wild Deer and Stags, some Lyons, Tygers, &c. nor is it without good Mines, some both of Gold and Silver; but chiefly, as to what is yet discover’d, of Brass, and Iron; and the People altogether salvage.

The River De la Plata.

The River De la Plata, which (as we said before) divides this Countrey, is one of the largest of the whole World, rising, as ’tis suppos’d, out of the Lake call’d De los Xarayes, three hundred Leagues or more within Land, and falling into the Atlantick Ocean, or North Sea, in thirty four Degrees of Southern Latitude, with an Estuary or Mouth of thirty, or two and thirty Leagues over.

The whole Countrey is usually subdivided into three inferior Provinces, which are 1. Rio de la Plata properly so call’d. 2. Tucuman. 3. La Crux de Sierra.

Sect. II.
Rio de la Plata, properly so call’d.

Situation of Rio de la Plata, properly so call’d.

Rio de la Plata, properly so call’d, is that part of the Countrey which extendeth it self on both sides the River, in length many Leagues together, but not answerable in breadth.

Towns and Places of note.

The chiefest Towns of note in this Province, are 1. Buenos Ayres, by some call’d La Trinidad, on the Southern Banks of the River De la Plata, sixty four Leagues, as they say, from the Mouth of it: It is seated commodiously at the foot of a little Mountain, and fortifi’d with a Mud-Wall, a little Castle, and some Pieces of Ordnance.

2. San Fe, in English St. Faiths, fifty Leagues above Buenos Ayres, upon the same River, and a richer Place, chiefly by reason of their Cloth, of which there is here one of the greatest Manufactures of all these parts of Peru.

3. Nuestra Sennora de la Assumption, commonly call’d Assumption onely, lying yet higher up the River almost a hundred Leagues, a well built and well frequented Town, long since inhabited by two hundred Families at least of natural Spaniards, besides Mestizos, as they call them, which are the Breed of Spaniards by the American People, Men or Women, and Mulattos, which are likewise their Race, but begotten upon Negro’s, of both which there are reckon’d to be here some thousands.

4. La Cividad Real, or more commonly call’d Ontiveros, fourscore Leagues Northward from Assumption, seated on the Banks of the River Parana in a fruitful Soil, as the Countrey generally is about all these Places; but the Air hereabouts is not so healthful.

5. St. Anne, upon the same River; and 6. St. Salvador.

Sect. III.
Tucuman.

Situation of Tucuman.

Westward of La Plata lieth the Countrey of Tucuman, extending it self as far as the Borders of Chile, a Countrey not yet well discover’d either to the North or the South. That part of it which lieth towards Chile is well Manur’d and Husbanded, and likewise very fruitful; but that towards Magellanica, neither the one, nor the other, remaining altogether untill’d and barren.

Towns and chief Places of note.

The chief Towns and Places of note, are 1. St. Jago de Esteco, the principal Town of the Province, and a Bishop’s See, seated upon the River Esteco, a hundred and fourscore Leagues distant from Buenos Ayres.

2. St. Michael de Tucuman, seated at the foot of a huge rocky Mountain, but otherwise in a Soil the fruitfullest and best, both for Corn and Pasturage, in all this Countrey, twenty eight Leagues distant from St. Jago.

3. Talavera, or Nuestra Sennora de Talavera, as the Spaniards call it, situate upon the Banks of Salado, in a good Soil, and inhabited by an industrious People, grown exceeding rich and wealthy, chiefly by their Manufactures of Cotton-Wooll, whereof they have great plenty, and by which they drive a Trade as far as the Mines at Potosi, and other parts of Peru.

4. Corduba, another rich Town of this Province, and of great Trade, as lying at an equal distance, viz. of fifty Leagues, both From San Fe, as they call it, or St. Faiths in the Province of La Plata abovesaid, and from St. Juan de la Frontera in the Country of Chile, and almost in the Road-way from Potosi and those parts of Peru, to Buenos Ayres and the North Sea.

5. Chocinoca; 6. Sococha; 7. Calebinda; 8. Morata, and others, but belonging for the most part to the reduced Natives.

Sect. IV.
La Crux de Sierra.

Situation of La Crux de Sierra.

La Crux de Sierra is a little Territory (at least in comparison to some others) lying towards Peru, and reckon’d by some for one of the Provinces of Peru: It lieth betwixt the two great Rivers Paraguay and Guapay, a hundred Leagues distant, as ’tis said, from Charcas, to which yet in some Causes it is subordinate.

The Soil of this Countrey is abundantly fertile in all sorts of American Fruits, besides good plenty both of Wheat and Maiz, and scarsity of nothing useful for Man’s Life, unless it be fresh Water in some places.

Chief Towns of this Province.

The chief Towns of this Province, are 1. San Crux, situate at the foot of a great Mountain or Hill, but opening upon a large Plain, whose thirsty driness is well refresh’d by a certain Brook or Torrent, which issueth out of a neighboring Mountain, and a few Leagues distant from the Town maketh a pretty Lake, which supplieth the Countrey thereabouts, both with fresh Water and Fish in good plenty.

2. Barranea, a Town suppos’d to be not above threescore Leagues distant from Potosi.

3. Nova Rioia, once a Colony of Spaniards, but sack’d and spoil’d by the Salvages of these Parts about the Year 1548. and the first Discoverer of the Countrey, namely Nunno de Chaves, treacherously murder’d by a Native, since which time ’tis said to have been deserted.

CHAP. VII.
Brasile.

Situation and Description of Brasile.

Brasile by Capralis call’d San Cruz, because it was discover’d on the Day dedicated Pedro Alvarez Capralis his Expedition to Brasile. to the holy Cross, but generally Brasile, from the red Wood, which it produces in great abundance, extends, according to the Account of the Portuguese, between the Rivers Maranon and De la Plata: But according to the Division which Pope Alexander the Sixth made upon the Approbation of the Kings of Castile and Portuguese, Brasile extends not so far; for it begins in the North along the Stream Para, and ends at the River Capybora, two Leagues beyond the Town St. Vincent: Eastward it is wash’d by the Northern Ocean, and on the West separated from Peru by desolate Mountains: It lies between 4 and 22 Degrees of Southern Latitude. Historiographers differ much concerning the first Discoverer; but without contradiction the first honor belongs justly to Americus Vesputius, who being sent out by Ferdinand, King of Castile, in the Year 1497. arriv’d first with four Sail at Brasile; whither he was follow’d two years after by Vincent Aynez Pinzon, Associate to Christopher Columbus; but with ill success, for two of the Ships were cast away in a Storm, and the other two return’d sadly weather-beaten into the Spanish Haven Palos, yet not before he had made a farther Discovery of Brasile than Americus Vesputius; which so stirr’d up Emanuel, King of Portugal, that he sent Pedro Alvarez Capralis thither with five hundred Men in thirteen Ships, that so he might get sure footing on Brasile; where Landing he erected a Stone Cross, and inform’d the King of his whole Proceedings by Gasper Lemnius, with whom he sent over two Brasilians, a Man a Woman, the strangeness of whose Garb caus’d great admiration in Portugal amongst the Spectators: the Man, having a flat Nose, went stark naked, and in his nether Lip hung a Stone call’d Matara; through each Check there was stuck a piece of Brasile Wood, on his Shoulders he carry’d three long Darts, and on his Head he wore divers colour’d Feathers; the Hair about his Privities was all pluckt out, and his Membrum Virile ty’d about with a String call’d Tacoaynhaa, which he unty’d when he Urin’d; his Body was strong and well proportion’d, and painted with several Colours. The Woman wore a Lappet girt about her Middle, in which Girdle stuck a Cane Tobacco-pipe; the Lappet reach’d just to the top of her Knees, the rest of her Body was also naked; on her Head she wore a broad Hat made of Feathers, on the top of which stuck two Plumes; in her Ears hung Bells, and about her Neck three Strings of Pearl; and her Body was also painted with red and yellow Colours. Lemnius also gave so much Information concerning the fruitfulness of Brasile, that several Portuguese Families went thither, accompanied with some Italian Fryers, which scattering up and down, began to build several Villages, but were soon after most of them kill’d and eaten up by the Indians.

Anno 1549. King John the Third fitted out a great Fleet, which set Sail from Lisbon under the Command of Thomas de Sosa.

Jesuits sent to Brasile by Pope Paulus the Third and Ignatius.

Also the Jesuits Aspilcueta, Antonio Pireo, Leonardo Nonno, Didaco Jacobo, Vincent Roderico, and Emanuel Robrega, were sent thither by Pope Paulus the Third, and Ignatius Loyola, whose Fleet came to an Anchor in the Bay afterwards call’d Bahia de Todos Sanctos, where Sosa built the City Salvador; since which the Portuguese have spread themselves farther and farther over Brasile.

Temperature of the Climate.

The United Netherlands also sent Colonies thither with good success, for they took several vast Countreys from the Portuguese, by force of Arms, and built new Forts and Towns in several places. But we will first give you a general Description of it, that so we may the better render a Relation in particular of every Province thereof, it being a considerable part of the New World, and both pleasant and fruitful, and the Sea-Coasts refresh’d by Easterly Winds, which begin before Day-break, when the North Sea ebbs or flows, for then the Wind rises with the Sun, and continues till Mid-night: Towards the West, where the Mountains divide Brasile from Peru, it is made temperate by Westerly Winds, which though judg’d unwholsom, because they seem to arise out of the Moorish Grounds, yet they hurt not the Inhabitants along that Coast, because they either break against the high Mountains, or are driven by the strong Wind which blows from the Sea.

The difference between Summer and Winter, shorter and longer Days, in the main part of Brasile, is scarce discernable, warm Weather lasting all the year round; and for the length of the Day and Night, the Sun being hid under the Horizon twelve hours, shines for the most part just as long, the greatest difference never being above an hour. Three hours before Day-break the Dew makes it exceeding cold till Sun-rising; wherefore the Brasilians make Fires in the Night near their Hammocks, not onely to keep wild Beasts from them, but also against the Cold. After the coldest Nights follow the fairest Days, and the contrary after sultry Nights; nevertheless (except in the rainy Season, which begins with March and ends about August) the Skye is generally clear, yet it Lightens much towards the Evening. Rainbowes often appear in the Skye, and bout the Moon Halos. The Rain generally falls in great Drops, and with a mighty noise; before which it is generally very sultry hot, or else soon after. The Dew, which is fruitfuller than in Europe, is saltish, which makes it oft to rot things that lie in the open Air. During the rainy Moneths, a South-East Winds blows from a cloudy Skye, much stronger than the Northern in Summer. The South-East Wind drives the Stream to the North, as the North Wind drives it to the South: And more than this, there is little to be discern’d of the Seas ebbing and flowing hereabouts: At the highest Tides the Brasilians go several Leagues from the Shore to Fish, upon Planks made of the spungy Wood call’d Jangada fastned together. The Sea, which seems to burn in the Night, is so clear in the Day, that the Fish may be seen to swim above twenty Fathom deep. A calm Ocean when the Days and Nights are of an exact length, and especially when dark Clouds appear, is a certain sign of a dreadful Storm. At Full or New-Moon the Sea rises twelve Foot, and continues either a longer or shorter time, according as it is more or less turbulent, and the Rivers fall stronger or more gently into the same.

Before most part of the Coast of Brasile lies a Stone Cliff of above twenty or thirty Paces broad, which is never cover’d with Water, though in the time of Spring-floods. In this Cliff Nature in several places hath made a Gap, through which the Ships sail near the Shore, and ride safe at an Anchor.

The whole Countrey of Brasile is divided into thirteen Præfectures, or Lordships, and hath about as many Rivers, which more or less empty themselves into every one of these Countreys. The Eastern part hath several Brooks and Fountains, which afford good Water both for Man and Beast. In some parts the Water is so strong, that the wild Beasts making themselves Drunk therewith, are easily taken. During the Winter Season the Rivers glide with great force, and swell on a sudden, overflowing all the neighboring Countrey, onely the River San Francisco runs strongest and rises highest in the Summer Season, whenas in the Winter it flows low, and poures but little Water into the Ocean. The original of this River is as yet unknown, yet is by most believ’d to come out of a great Lake lying near the Peruvian Mountains: The Hollanders, who sail’d forty Leagues up the same, found it every where broad and deep, and scatter’d full of Isles and Rocks. The Portuguese sailing ten Leagues farther, discover’d the great Rocks Cocoeras, from which the said River falls down with great violence, and extends it self North-West. In the other Brasilian Streams, though wide at the Mouthes, which generally are not above two or three hours walking from their Fountains or Springs, no Barque is able to Row up, they being exceeding shallow, although much Rain falls into them; the reason whereof is because the barren Mountains lying between Brasile and Peru, discharge abundance of Water through the Rivers of Amazones, Maranon, Francisco, La Plata, and the Juaeiro, with such force into the Ocean, that they keep their sweetness for thirty Leagues. Near the Sea side are several Lakes and Pits which are drinkable, and others up in the Countrey that are brackish.

The Nature of the Soil.

The Countrey differs exceedingly, for where it extends in Plains the Soil is fat and clayie, and produces all sorts of Fruit, but especially Sugar-Canes. During the rainy Seasons the Trees flourish most; after which the heat of the Sun, and fertility of the Soil speedily ripen the Fruit: wherefore they Dung not their Land, but on the contrary endeavor to make it lean with Sand, that the Plants might not have too many Leaves, and wither before the Fruit can be ripened. They Sowe in the beginning of the rainy Moneths, and especially take care that the Seed lie not too deep in the Ground, because then the Sun-beams being not able to come at it, suffer it to perish in the cold Ground.

The high Cocoa and Palmito-Trees, are transplanted all the year round, the Roots being onely cover’d with a little Earth, because they can endure no cold.

Several Trees here bear a cooling Fruit, as if kind Nature took care to provide against excessive heat.

Description of the Tamanda.

All manner of Plants and Herbs brought hither from Angola, Portugal, the Netherlands, and the East-Indies, grow here very plentifully. But the Countrey generally would be much better, if some way could be found out to destroy the innumerable company of Pismires, which though three times bigger than the European, resemble them very much, and cover the Paths in Woods and Fields for three or four Miles together; and raising Hillocks, make them hollow, and fill them with Corn: in the Full of the Moon they gather an incredible quantity of Grain, which they bite at each end, because it should not sprout: against the rainy Moneths they stop up their Holes, that the Water may not damnifie their Store. But these Animals have a mortal Enemy of the Tamanda, of which there are two sorts, the bigger call’d Guaca; the lesser Miri; the Guaca, notwithstanding it is no bigger than an ordinary Dog, yet it destroys Tygers, and other wild Beasts, with such a raging fury, that it never lets go what once it hath got hold of, but holds it fast so long till sometimes it dies of Hunger. The Guaca differing from the Miri onely in bigness, hath a broad Tail full of grey and black Bristles, which sticks up when he is vex’d, but when he goes to sleep, covers himself with the same. The Miri winds his long smooth Tail about the Boughs, by which hanging he searches the Holes in the Trees with his Tongue, which being thin and round, hath a Gutter in the middle, in which when it feels any Pismires, it suddenly swallows them down: If he perceives them to have their Nests under Ground, then he scratches up the Earth, and puts his Tongue in at the Holes. Both the Guaca and Miri have a thick Skin, and a broad black Streak from their Breasts on each side up half way their Bodies, and through the black runs also a white Streak. No Beast in the World is hardier than this, for though it fasts twelve days, and is afterwards flay’d alive, yet it will live several hours after.

The Plant Manyle.

Description of the Tree Ibriptanga.

The Tree Tatai-iba.

The Lakes in Brasile are for the most part overgrown with Weeds just like a Field, yet are exceeding full of Fish and Fowl. Where the Sea runs into the Lakes, great multitudes of Crabs are seen crawling along the Ground, and the Oysters hang in Clusters on the Boughs of a Plant call’d Manyle or Mangues, which grow with their Roots either near or in the Water, in such a manner, that new Bodies still shoot from the old Roots, which prevents easie access to the chief Plant, on whose uppermost Leaves after Sun-rising sticks very white Salt, which in the Night, or in a cloudy Day turns to a brackish Dew. Moreover, those places where Brasile rises with Hills and Mountains, are likewise very fruitful, except the barren tops of some, which seem to kiss the Skyes; and though the fruitful Mountains flourish in the time of the rainy Months, yet many of the Trees which grow on them die in Summer, and their Ashes being burnt by the Inhabitants, are us’d in stead of Dung. Some Woods extend themselves three hundred Leagues in length, and are full of Trees, so tall, that an Arrow shot upwards falls short of the top of them, and a Boat may be made out of the Body, which can carry a hundred and fifty Men. On the great Boughs of these mighty Trees grow other excrescent Shrubs after the manner of Misseltoe, which proceed from the Kernels swallow’d and muted upon them by the Birds that light there. In some places also grow also Sweet-wood Trees, which afford either excellent Gums or Wood to Dye with; amongst which the chief is the Ibiripitanga, which yields the Brasile Wood, that gives Denomination of Brasile to this vast Tract of Land. The Tree Ibripitanga is tall and spreading, hath sad colour’d Bark full of short Thorns; the Leaves are green, and differ in form but little from the Box-Tree Leaf; the Boughs shoot forth other lesser, full of yellow and sweet-smelling Flowers, which falling off are succeeded by a flat long Cod, of a dark grey colour, full of little red Pulse; the upper part of the Tree is not good to Dye with, but onely the lower part of the Body, which because the Tree grows far up in the Countrey, is not transportable without much trouble. But the Tatai-iba grows in the Woods along the Shore; the Bark being of an Ash-colour, invests a yellow Wood; the Leaves are sharp and notch’d, the Fruit not unlike Mulberries, pale, juicy, and full of white Seed; the Wood boyl’d Dyes a pure Yellow. It is observable not onely of this Tree, but generally of the Trees of this Countrey, that they neither flourish, nor shed their Leaves all over at once, nor do several Trees of the same kind, and growing here germinate or fade together; for whilest one is fullest of Blossoms, the other is without Leaves; and whilest the same Tree sheds its Leaves on one side, the other side is newly Budded.

The European Plants and Herbs with soft Roots, being once Planted in Brasile, come to be hard and lignifi’d. There is also great difference, according to the Ground in which they are Planted; for such Plants and Trees as in the Plains are but small and tender, grow ten times higher if Planted in the Woods.

All sorts of Indian Pulse grow higher than the tallest Trees, like high Arbors, under which both Men and Beasts may shelter themselves from the Sun or Rain.

We find not upon Record or Tradition, that Brasile was ever troubled with an Earthquake, which is the reason that it hath neither Silver nor Gold-Mines, because sulphurous Fires are found under Ground, which are a cause of the production of Gold and Silver, so likewise they occasion Earthquakes: yet in that part of Brasile call’d Ceara, there are some Mines of Silver, out of which the Hollanders would have got greater Riches, had not they been employ’d in the Wars against the Portuguese.

Far up into the Countrey amongst the Mountains, inhabit Canibals, or Man-eaters. The Europeans that first travell’d that way, found the Countrey very fertile and full of People, especially in the Valleys, but somewhat incommoded by the want of Water, and the excessiveness of the Heat in the Day, and of the Cold in the Night. In some places the Countrey is so over-grown with Brambles, that they are forc’d to cut their way through the same. But there are a sort of Thistles, which having concave Leaves, receive the Dew and Rain for the accommodation of the Natives.

Besides Serpents and Dragons, the Tygers are most of all to be fear’d when hungry, but once satisfi’d are easily taken.

Dogs, Oxen, Sheep, and Horses thrive also exceedingly in most parts of Brasile.

The Nature of the Brasilians.

The Brasilians live to be very old without being Bald or Grey: There are seldom or never to be seen squint-ey’d, lame, decrepid, or any deformed People, notwithstanding the Children are never Swath’d but thrown into cold Water as soon as born. The Men generally have a very near resemblance one with another, as also the Women, so that there is not such a difference betwixt Man and Man there, as amongst other People. There is scarce any Sickness heard of in these Parts; for besides a long Life, they enjoy the benefit of Health so long as they live. They trouble not themselves with much Business; and in one Hut, whose Covering consists of Palm-Leaves, dwell several Families together.

Their manner of Living.

Their several sorts of Drinks.

The general Bread of the Brasilians is the stamp’d Root Mandihoka; besides which they also eat all manner of Fruit and Plants, and many times Flesh, which they either eat boyl’d, broyl’d, or stew’d; their Boyling is after this manner: First they kindle their fire with two Sticks, the one of hard, and the other of soft Wood; the hard they make sharp at the end, and fix the same into the soft, which setting on fire they immediately lay Cotton thereupon, or else dry Leaves, and so boyl the Flesh in round Earthen Pots call’d Camu: but they account that better which is stew’d in a Pot, the bottom whereof is cover’d with Leaves, on which they lay the Flesh, then stopping the same close on the top with Earth and Leaves, they make Fire over it so long till they think the Flesh to be sufficiently stew’d. Their Broyling they perform by fixing forked Sticks into the Ground, over which they lay several others like a Gridiron; and upon them the raw Flesh, cut in long Slices, and Pepper’d and Salted, then make a Fire under the same till it is enough; and their Meat so dress’d keeps good fourteen days. Their Fish either boyl’d or broyl’d is eaten with the Sawce Juquitinga. The little Fish Piaba and Piquitinga they make up in Rolls, and lay them under hot Ashes. Both with their Flesh and Fish they eat for Bread, as hath been said, the Meal of the Root Mandihoka, which they taking up with three Fingers throw into their Mouthes so dexterously, that not the least scrap falls besides. They never observe any set hours to eat, for they make several Meals in the Day, and sometimes in the middle of the Night, if their Appetite serves, and neither drink nor speak whilest they are at their Meat. They sleep in spread Hammocks made fast between two Poles, near which burns a constant Fire with which in the Day-time they dress their Meat, and at Night keep themselves warm, the Nights being there somewhat cold, because of their equal length with the Days. Their usual Liquor is cold Water, taken out of the Fountains, Rivers, or Brooks; but to Carouse they make the Drink Caoi, of the Fruit of the Ocaiiba-Tree, which being stamp’d in a woodden Mortar, is strain’d, and at first looks like Milk, but after a few days standing turns to a darker colour, and is strong enough to make Astronomers of those that drink largely of it, but if long kept, it turns to be excellent Vinegar.

They have another Drink call’d Aipu, which is made two several ways; the first is thus: An old Toothless Woman chews the little cut Root Aipimacaxera to a Pap call’d Caracu, which spitting in a Pot they pour Water on the same, and afterwards boyling it leisurely, stirring it all the time it stands over the Fire. The other way of making this Aipu, which is much the more cleanly, is to boyl the said Root so long, till it comes to be like Butter-milk, and then letting it stand till it hath done working, it will be no unpleasant Drink.

Another sort of Drink amongst them is their Pacobi, made of the Fruit of the Tree Pacobehe and Pacobucu; besides others made of the Tree Abatu, of Indian Barley and Maiz. Also their Liquor call’d Jetici is press’d out of Potato-Roots.

In like manner the Plant Nana, by the Portuguese call’d Ananas, makes the Drink Nanai, which is exceeding strong and heady, but good against Faintness, Vomiting, Gravel, and stoppage of Urine, as also against Poyson.

Their Deboches.

The Tapuiyans, sur-named Cariri, meet at a certain time to make the Liquor Aipu, whereof each takes as much to his Hut as falls to his share, and when it hath done working, they begin in the Morning very early at the first House in the Village, and drink out every drop which they find there, and so from House to House till they have drunk one another drie; and he is look’d upon to be the best Man that hath drunk and evacuated most.

Their manner of Taking Tobacco.

The Brasilians take generally very strong Tobacco, which they first drie in the Sun, and afterwards before the Fire, the better to rub it in pieces: Their Tobacco-pipe is a Cane and a hollow Nut cut off at the top, and a round Hole bor’d in the middle, into which they put the Cane. They forbear not to take Tobacco even in the midst of their religious Ceremonies, which are perform’d with Singing and Dancing in this manner:

Their religious Ceremonies.

The Tapuiyans making a round Ring at an equal distance one from another, all of them being stark naked, tie divers colour’d Plumes of Feathers on their back-sides with a String made fast on their left Shoulders and about their Wastes; about their Legs they have Cotton Garters; each in his turn bowing to the Left, stretches down his left Hand to the Ground, and puts his right Hand in between the Strings which tie the Plume of Feathers, and stamps continually with his right Foot, whilest all the rest begin to Sing a doleful Song, which by degrees they change into a merry one, not without some appearance of understanding the Art of Musick. Their Songs contain first a mournful Relation of a general Deluge, which drowned their Predecessors, all but some few, who escap’d by climbing up high Trees and Mountains; next the Acts of those old Heroes from whom they boast themselves Extracted, who lost their Lives, or valiantly fought for the publick good, and were rewarded with the enjoyment of all pleasures and Delights, of Singing, Playing, Dancing, and the like, in a remote Countrey, whither after their Deaths they hope to be translated: Whilest they thus Sing over all their Songs, three Priests stand in the middle of the Ring, each holding the Idol Maraka (in their left Hand) resembling an old Ostritch’s Egg stuck full of Feathers on the top: about their Wastes they wear a Girdle of rich Plumes, on their Heads also a Crown of Feathers; the middle Priest looks with a stern Countenance, and holds up his left Leg from the Ground, whilest the other two standing on each side of him, hold in their right Hands a Pipe, out of which blowing Tobacco-smoak in one anothers Faces, they utter these words, Receive the Spirit of heroick Strength: The Dance ended, they Entertain their Priests with Meat and Drink eight days together, and also put Meat before their Idol Maraka, who is the chief Deity they adore.

Their Arms.

Their Arms consist of Bowes made of hard Wood, Strung with twisted Cotton Thred; their Arrows they make of the Cane Tacaara, made very sharp at the end, or headed with some Beasts sharp Tooth, or pointed with the Bones of the Fish Iperu. Some of the Tapuiyans use great Darts, and long Clubs of black Wood, broad before, and full of sharp Spikes; the Handles being wound about with Cotton Strings call’d Jatirana, under which hangs a Tuft of the Bird Arara’s Feathers, as also about the middle. Their Trumpets, call’d Canguenca, are the Shin-bones of Men, though they have others also made of great Shells and Canes. They us’d to be continually at War one with another, which they wag’d neither for Lands nor Riches, but either to make themselves eminent, and to be accounted valiant Soldiers, or most especially for the sake of Man’s-flesh to feed upon, which they love beyond all things in the World, wherefore they fatten all their Prisoners for the slaughter. Their Battels are always cruel, for they fight very desperately. Emanuel de Moraes relates, That he saw a Brasilian fight with three Armed Portugueses, who slew him not till after he had wounded them all three.

The Languages of the Brasilians.

The Languages of the Brasilians are several, each Countrey speaking a peculiar Tongue, but so different that they cannot understand one another. The Tabuyans are divided into above eighty Tribes, each speaking a peculiar Language, which have no resemblance one with another; nevertheless they have a general Language which is understood by most of them. The Jesuit Joseph Anchieta publishing a Brasilian Dictionary in Conimbrica, Anno 1595. shewed that the fore-mention’d Language wants the Letters f, l, s, z, r, and hath no double Consonants in any word, except mb, nd, ng, so that the sound of the word falls generally on the last Vowel. The fore-mention’d Moraes well experienc’d in the Brasilian Tongue, writ an Alphabet of all the most familiar words thereof us’d in common Discourse, of which it will not be unnecessary to give this following Extract:

A.

Aba, a Man, also Hair.

Acu, the Left-hand.

Acuabeimae, Sweet.

Amaberaba, Lightning.

Amacuminga, Thunder.

Amandiba, Hail.

Anama, a near Relation.

Anga, the Soul.

Angabara, Lean.

Angaipata, Angry, or Wicked.

Angaturama, Thankful, or Acceptable.

Apara, a Crown.

Apecum, the Tongue.

Apicaba, a Stool.

Ara, the Time, Skye, or Day.

Ara-ibi coquime, Noon.

Araya, Grandmother.

Atapuana, Light.

Atapuatia, Swift.

Atucupe, the Back.

Atyba, the Shoulder.

Ay cig, a Mother.

Ayura, the Neck.

B.

Boya, a Slave.

C.

Cama, a Sucking-Breast.

Canga, a Leg.

Caraibebe, apiabebe, an Angle.

Caruca, the Evening.

Capii, Grass.

Capii goacu, Straw.

Catu, Dainty.

Cay, an Ape.

Ceba, a Loaf.

Cibera, the Buttocks.

Cemiracoaobae, a Widower.

Ceo, a Breast.

Ceteeimibae, a Ghost.

Cig cygra, an Aunt.

Coaraci, a Son.

Cobra, a Serpent.

Coemitanga, the Dawn.

Coriba, Rejoyce.

Coya, Twins.

Cunha, a Wife.

Cunhaiba, a Bride.

Cunumigoacu, a Youth.

Cunumi, a Boy.

E.

Ecatuaba, the right Hand.

Eyruba, a Bee.

G.

Giba, an Arm.

Guaibino, an old Woman.

Guirarupia, an Egg.

I.

Jaci, the Moon, or Month.

Jacitata, a Star.

Iba, a Tree.

Ibiaia, the Heavens.

Ibatinga and Ibitinga, a Witch.

Ibateba, High.

Ibi, the Earth.

Ibitira, a Mountain.

Ibitu, the Wind.

Icapi, the Dew.

Ig, Water.

Iguaba, a Cap.

Ipeca, a Goose.

Igue, the Side.

Ita, Iron, or a Stone.

Itacira, a Spade.

Itapigua, a Nail.

Juba, Yellow.

M.

Maupiara, the Gall.

Mbabeaubora, Sick.

Mbiu, Meat.

Mbo, a Hand.

Membeca, Softly.

Menearaa, a Wedding.

Micu, a Toe.

Mita, the Heel.

Mocu, an Eel.

Mormotara, Angry.

Muapendaba, a Joint.

N.

Nbia, the Heart.

O.

Opacatumba, the World.

P.

Potia, the Breast.

Paranga, Fair.

Porerobiara, Faithful.

Porucuicobora, Poor.

Potivi, a Duck.

Poxi, Ugly.

Pi, a Foot.

Pia, the Liver.

Pira, Fish, or a Skin.

Piquiira, Younger in years.

Pitanga, a Child.

Pua, a Finger.

Pua-guacu, a Thumb.

Purva, the Navel.

Puou, Long.

Putuma, the Night.

R.

Roig, Cold.

T.

Tagica, a Vein.

Tagui, Blood.

Tagira, or Membira, a Daughter. The first of these words is us’d by the Fathers, and the other by the Mothers.

Taira, Children, or a Son.

Tamua, a Grandfather.

Tata, Fire.

Tecoacu, Luck.

Tecoateima, Covetousness.

Temerico, Man or Woman.

Tendiba, a Chin.

Tendi, Spittle.

Tendipia, a Knee.

Tecobecatu, Wholsom.

Tema, a Shin-bone.

Tete, a Body.

Tiaya, Sweet.

Tibira, Younger: for so the Brothers call one another, but the Sisters name their younger Brothers Quibira, and Brothers their younger Sisters Teindira.

Tigue, the Belly.

Tique perg, the Guts.

Tinga, White.

Tipiba, Melancholly.

Tiquera, eldest Sister.

Tiquiera, eldest Brother.

Tuba, Parents.

Tutira, Father’s Brother.

Tubei-ima, an Hospital Boy.

Tuibaem, an old Man.

Tupana, God.

Ty, Piss.

Tyuris, the Bladder.

U.

Uba, the Hip.

Unhapuapem, a Nail.

Y.

Yja, a Fountain.

Ymeneoba, a Widow.

Yyaobuamba, Naked.

The Words for Action, are these following:

A.

Abi, Erring.

Abiqui, Coming.

Acanhem, I die.

Acoy, Covering.

Aei, Missing.

Ami, Squeezing.

Amotareima, Hating.

Anduba, Opinion.

Anguipaba, Sinning.

Abba mandeba, To put on.

Apina, Shaving.

Apition, Binding.

Aroca, a Lesson.

Ayaima, Feigning.

B.

Beraba, Shining.

C.

Coanga, Measuring, Proving, or Speaking.

Cacaba, Passing by.

Cae, Curing.

Capucaya, Calling, or To be vex’d.

Carom, Hoping.

Caruca, Pissing.

Cauccuba, Loving.

Cecaraya, Forgetting.

Cema, Going out.

Cenduba, Hearing.

Cenoya, Naming.

Cepiaca, Seeing, Punishment.

Cerura, Carrying.

Cetuna, Smelling.

Ceyara, Relating.

Cica, Ploughing.

Cipya, Making wet.

Ciquye, Fearing.

Co, Going.

Cobaitim, Meeting.

Coquendaboya, Opening.

Cuaba, Knowing.

Cupira, Performing.

Cuu, Defending.

E.

Ecatu, To be able.

G.

Genonheca, Praying.

Goameenga, Biting.

Guapua, Sitting.

Guata, Walking.

Gueena, Vomiting.

I.

Jababa, To run away.

Jecoacuba, To remember.

Jenumuna, Spitting.

Jerure, Demanding.

Igtaba, Swimming.

Igu, Drinking.

M.

Maenduara, Thinking.

Mano, Dying.

Maramonbanga, Warring.

Mayaoca, Dividing.

Mba-eraca, Buying.

Mbacu, Eating.

Meenga, Delivering.

Menbirara, Barring.

Moaibaba, Bewitching, or Preventing.

Mongueba, Putting out.

Moanga, Thinking.

Moaquima, Making wet.

Mobibua, Sowing.

Moete, Praising, or Honoring.

Moendi, Setting on fire.

Mogiba, Boyling.

Mogyco, Polishing.

Momiya, Moving.

Momita, Lodging.

Monberaba, Bruising.

Monbeu, Delivering of a Message.

Monbuca, To bore through.

Monbuja, Boring.

Mondoca, To cut, take away, or cleave asunder.

Mondoroca, Breaking.

Monguy, Grinding.

Monguya, Making loose.

Monhanga, Doing.

Moperua, Being cold.

Mopotaya, Buttoning.

Moriba, Consenting.

Moropiana, Changing.

Moeyeceara, Mixing.

N.

Nheangeru, Sighing.

Nheenga, Speaking.

Nhemboe, Learning.

Nhengara, Singing.

P.

Paepua, Answering.

Paraboca, Chusing.

Paronduba, Enquiring.

Pea, Abstaining.

Pitu, Remaining.

Pitanga rempi, To cast off.

Pitera, Kissing.

Pitibo, Helping.

Aittiba, Anointing.

Poacema, Mourning.

Pobana, Spinning.

Pocuaba, To use.

Pocaucuba, Dreaming.

Porabiqui, Working.

Porara, Lying.

Potareima, Refusing.

Potara, Desiring.

Puama, Rising.

Puaya, Commanding.

Puca, Laughing.

Pura, Using.

Q.

Quera, Sleeping.

Querara, Waking.

R.

Raba, Untying.

Qereco, Having.

Rura, Coming.

T.

Tara, Catching.

Tecobe, Living.

Tiguioca, Bleeding.

Tiu, Disgracing.

Tima, Ploughing, Warring, or Burying.

Y.

Yaceo, Crying.

Yeaoboca, Pulling off.

Yeupira, Climbing.

Yuca, Killing.

These are of the most usual words of the general Language in Brasile, besides which every distinct Tribe or Division of People hath its peculiar Tongue, as hath been said, of which the chiefest and most eminent are the Tupinambu, Tabaiaras, Potigi-iguaras, Marhuites, Waimoores, Tomonimenos, Waitaquazes, Wainasses, Topinaques, Pories, Molopaques, Motaias, Biheros, Wainawasons, Tamoies, Tocomans, and the Cariogs; of all which the Tupinambu are the most comely, especially their Women, which (according to the testimony of the aforesaid Emanuel Moraes, an Eye-witness) may stand in competition with the European Beauties. These Women accompany their Husbands when they go into the Wars, and carry their Provisions, especially store of Tobacco. In the Lips both of the Men and Women hang little Stones. The Men take as many Wives as they please; and amongst the generality of the fore-mention’d Nations, there is scarce any sign of Religion to be discern’d.

The Tobaras and Potigi-iguaras.

The Tobaras are accounted the best Horsemen; but in Singing and Discourse, the Potigi-iguaras exceed all the other Brasilians: They place twenty or thirty Singers in a Row, which observing Time, Sing the Transactions of their Predecessors with good Voices.

The Waimoores.

The Waimoores are a strong People that inhabit the large Tract of Land between Bahia and Isleos, and having well timber’d Bodies, can keep pace with a Horse running full speed. Five or six of them often set upon a Sugar-Mill, though a hundred Men be at work in the same: They are all over bedaub’d with Dirt, because they lie like Beasts on the Ground: They wear long Hair, and have no certain Abodes.

The Tomonimenos.

The Tomonimenos, living about Spirito Santo, are more civilis’d; they make Walls of Stone about their Huts; and these Walls are full of Holes, through which they shoot Arrows at those that Invade them; their Bodies are Painted red and black, and cover’d with Feathers. The Portuguese taking sixteen thousand of them Prisoners at once, kill’d most of them, and destroy’d the Countrey all along the River Paraiva.

The Waitaquazes.

At the South and North Point of Cape Frio dwell the Waitaquazes, bigger and stronger than the Waimoores; and they also sleep like Hogs on the Ground about a Fire, hold all People for their Enemies, and their Flesh for the greatest Dainty. The Women Arm’d with Bowes and Arrows stand by their Husbands in Battel.

The Wainasses.

The Description of the Plant Vruca.

On Isla Grande reside the Wainasses, a little People, which have very long Bellies, go stark naked, shave the Crown of their Heads, and let the other part of their Hair hang down long on their Shoulders. The Women, which are of gross Bodies, colour themselves Red with Vruca, which is a wild Plant, but much us’d amongst them: the Kernels are inclos’d in Husks full of red Fibres. These Kernels are not onely mix’d with the other Ingredients of the Chocaletta Drink, but also us’d to Dye of a red Colour: The Wood of this Plant is very white, and the Bark grey, like the Hazle; the Leaves being of a deep Green, resemble a Heart; at the end of the Boughs grow several Blossoms, each as big as a Rose, consisting of five Leaves, partly red and partly white, in the middle whereof are yellowish Threds with purple Points, which give little or no smell: after the Flower follows the Fruit, two Fingers long; when it begins to be ripe it grows still redder and redder, each Cod containing thirty or forty round Kernels, which being touch’d leave a red tincture upon the Fingers; the Cod when ripe opens of it self, and shews the Kernels speckled white, which dry’d, pounded, and mix’d with Piss, Dye so strong a Red, that Linnen dipt into the same will never receive any other Colour. This Root also boyl’d in Broth, makes it not onely red, but gives it a pleasant taste.

The Topinaques.

The Topinaques, which dwell about St. Vincent, are a strong and gross People, go stark naked both Men and Women: when they kill any of their Enemies they Paint themselves with the Fruit Janipano, put a great Plume of Feathers on their Head, and two Sticks in their Mouths, Dancing with strange motions of the Body, inclining sometimes towards the right, and sometimes towards the left side, for three day together; during which time they drink a filthy kind of Liquor. The Women, who have well proportion’d Bodies, onely covering their Heads with a Cap, about which they tie a bread of Hair, to which a square Basket being fastned, hangs below their Backs when they travel.

The Pories.

The Mountains along the Ocean, which inclose much Gold, are inhabited by the Pories, a peaceable People, molesting none of their Neighbors; they sleep in Nets of Flags, and have no other Houses than three Poles plac’d triangular, and cover’d with Palm-Leaves; they feed on Pine-Nuts and Eyrires, Apples that have Shells like a Walnut, and have also the precious Balsam-Oyl in great abundance.

The Molopaques.

Along the River Paradiva inhabit the Molopaques; the Men strong and well timber’d, have Beards long enough to cover their Privities. The Women also fair, modest, prudent, and never laughing, tie their Hair, painted with several colours, round about their Middle with a Cord, so that it serves in stead of an Apron. They observe a set-hour for Dinner and Supper, which is not us’d by any other Brasilians. The Mountains in these Parts consisting of a black Mold, have plenty of Gold, but it is of no esteem or regard amongst them, onely that which is wash’d down by the Rain they gather up, but put to no other use than to make Hooks to hang their Nets on.

The Motayas.

The Motayas, being of a low Stature and brown Complexion, shave off the Hair of their Heads, or else pluck it up by the Roots; they are eaters of Man’s-flesh.

Not far from whose Dominions appear the Mountains Pinos up in the Countrey, which abounding with Gold and Precious Stones, are inhabited by the Biheros, otherwise call’d Lopos, which live under the Trees like Beasts.

The Waianawasons.

The Tamoyes.

The Waianawasons have little Villages, built along a nameless River; they are a Gigantick People, but very ignorant. Thirteen Portuguese undertaking some years ago to travel through this Countrey to the South Sea, found on some Mountains abundance of Gold and Precious Stones; and amongst many strange things they saw a Crystal Mountain ten days before they came near it, over which they could not travel because of its steepness; at the foot thereof sprung a broad Stream, making a great noise. From thence travelling forward, they came to the Tamoyes Countrey, the Men whereof, being well proportion’d, wore great Bunches of Feathers on their Heads: The Women, exceeding fair, had carv’d Breasts. The said Portuguese being taken here, were put into Prison, and all slain and eaten, excepting one, who escap’d after this manner: Thirty thousand Tamoyes falling into the Countrey of the Amazons, by the Americans call’d Mandiocuysyams, made a great Feast with three hundred of them, whilest the rest fled to the River La Plata, where they got help from the Portuguese, who kill’d ten thousand of the Tamoyes, made the rest Slaves, and releas’d their imprison’d Countreyman.

The Tocomans, Caryogs, and Maraquites.

The Tocomans, a little People, dwell between La Plata and St. Vincent.

The Caryogs possess much Gold and Precious Stones.

The Maraquites, by the Western Indians sur-named Tapuiyers, that is, Wild People, are divided into seventy six sorts, all differing in their Languages; amongst which the chiefest are the Arodera, Cajau, Maquaru, and Poyme, which all live without Law, Religion, setled Abodes, or Friendship with any Neighbors; and the Women Fight as well as the Men. Jacob Rabbi, who dwelt a considerable time, and convers’d amongst these People, describes their Customs thus:

Their Customs describ’d.

“Their King Jandui, sir-named Otshicayayna, from the River which flows through the Countrey of the Tapuyans, causes (it he thinks fit) to be publish’d through the whole Camp of the Enemy, whither he will go the next Morning, and what he will do all the Day following, having first consulted with his Council of Sorcerers. Before they march they wash their Bodies in the River; rub themselves all over with Sand, and afterwards wash it off again, then stretch themselves till all their Joynts crack, run to the Fire, and when throughly warm, scratch their Bodies with certain Fish-Teeth, insomuch that the Blood gushes out of several places, all which they judge to be good against wearisomness. About a Stones-cast from the King’s Tent lie two thick Logs, a large Stride one from the other, against which the whole Multitude stand divided into two Parties, each of whom chuse the strongest Man accounted amongst them to carry the Log for a Wager, and when these two are tir’d, they are releas’d by others, and he that comes last to the appointed place with the Log, is laugh’d at by the Party to which he belong’d that was there first, where they all stay for the Youths that bring their Arms, which when they have deliver’d, they all fall to work, cutting down Trees, breaking off the Boughs, sticking them in the Ground, and tying them together on the top for Tents, which are built in rows one against another, leaving a broad Path between. Mean while the Women and Children coming with their Baggage, the Men run to Fish and Hunt, or to seek Honey. The old Women dig up Roots, which stamp’d serve them for Bread, whilest the young Women help one another to prepare the Meat in the Huts. Moreover the Men spend their time in several Exercises, as Wrestling and Running, of which two Women, appointed for that purpose, are the Judges. When the Evening draws on upon them, then the Youths dividing themselves into Companies, go Singing from one Tent to another, and are follow’d by the Maids Dancing and Leaping, every one standing behind him whom she loves best; and this is look’d upon as a singular sign of affection. When a young Man is inclin’d to Marry, he carries Honey and Venison to his Mistresses Father, who if he hath more than one Daughter acquaints the Soothsayers with it, who inform the King concerning it; he then causes all the young Men and Maids to be call’d together out of the Camp, sends them into the Woods to Hunt out a wild Beast, which they no sooner see, but they return and acquaint the Multitude therewith, who immediately surrounding the Place, soon catch the Beast, whose Entrails they pull out and throw to the Dogs, and give the Flesh to the Women to roast, which when ready they make merry with, Singing and Dancing after they have eaten; then if the Youth hath behav’d himself well in pursuing of the wild Beast, the King grants him the Maid which he desires for his Wife: Four days before the Wedding they bore a Hole through each of the Bridegrooms Cheeks with a sharp piece of Wood, which done they solemnize the Marriage; at which the King himself distributes the Meat to every Guest as he thinks fit; after Dinner they extol the Mothers Care, in preserving her Daughters Virginity for the Bridegroom in strange Songs. If a Maid be Marriageable, and no Suitor comes to her, then the Mother draws red Strokes under her Eyes, and conducts her to the King, who sets the Maid down by him on a Mat, warms his Hands against the Fire, then stroaks himself and the Maid, and also blows Tobacco-Smoak on her and himself, which done, he performs the part of a Husband with her. But their making Holes through their Ears and Lips is done whilest they are Children, after this manner: The Boys who undergo this Ceremony, come to the Place appointed, where the whole Multitude Dance and Sing, and the Conjurers (who are the onely Priests they have) sit in two rows opposite to one another; one of them starting up, takes a Boy by the Head, ties him Hand and Foot that he cannot stir at all; which done, a second Sorcerer comes to his assistance, and with a sharp-pointed Stick bores Holes through his Ears and Lips, whilest the Mother of the Boy makes a sad Lamentation. Women refuse to have any familiarity with their Husbands as soon as they perceive themselves to be with Child; and as soon as any Woman is Deliver’d, she runs into a neighboring Wood, where with a Shell she cuts off the Childs Navel, which boyling she eats with the After-birth; then washes her self and the Child every Morning and Evening in cold Water; as long as she gives Suck her Husband lies not with her, unless it be a Man that hath but one Wife. If a Woman commit Adultery, her Husband beats her out of his House, but if he takes her in the Act, it is lawful for him to kill both. In the middle of the King’s Tent stands a great Calabash full of Stones call’d Kehnturah, cover’d with the corner of a Mat, which none dares approach without the King’s leave, unless it be to smoak the same with Tobacco, or to lay Venison or Honey before it.”

Strange manner of curing the Sick amongst the Tapuyans.

It is also remarkable how the Sorcerers deal with their Sick; the aforesaid Jacob Rabbi, in Eye-witness relates, That the King Drarugh being extreamly troubled with pains in his Sides and Legs, and finding no help amongst his Sorcerers, who pretended to be Physicians, went to the neighboring King of the Tapuyans, where three undertook to cure him, which they did after this manner: One of them blew Tobacco-smoak on his Body, suck’d his Knees, roar’d like a Lyon, and after much ado vomited a little Eel into his Hand, which he pretended had put the King to so much pain; whilest the second suck’d his Belly, and also roar’d exceedingly, and vomited forth at last a Stone, on which appear’d a Rose; the third suck’d his left Side, till he vomited something like a Root; after which the King is said immediately to have recover’d.

Their Feasting in honor of the Stars.

There is but little Ceremony of Religion to be found amongst the Tapuyans, onely they shew Reverence to the Seven-stars when the Fruits of the Field are ripe, after this manner: First they spend three days in Dancing and Singing, then the Youths prepare themselves to Fight with Lances and Clubs, tie tough Twigs about their Legs, pour Honey on their Heads, tie their Hair behind in Knots after it is powder’d with red Powder, Paint their Faces and Bodies with several Colours, stick a long Feather in their Necks betwixt their Hair, and on their Heads set Garlands of red Feathers pleited, down their Backs hang Bundles of Branches like Tails, and have their Arms adorn’d with the Wings of the Bird Kosetug; thus dress’d they fight three days, at the end whereof the Conquerors shew great joy.

It deserves special observation what the Learned Gerard Vossius relates of them from the Mouth of Christopher Arcisseusky, a Polish Nobleman, famous for his heroick Exploits for the United Netherlands in Brasile.

Arcisseusky’s Relation of the Manners of the new Married.

“The Tapuyans (saith he) are a People that range up and down, never staying long in one place, between Siara and Meranthon, a vast Tract of Land, and go almost naked, having onely a slight Covering about their Middle. When the Hollanders gave them Clothes, they admir’d the strange Fashion thereof, and after two days return’d them again: In their Lips, Nostrils, Ears and Cheeks they hung Ornamentals of Wood, Bones, Feathers, or Stones; a great Club, and a strong Bowe made of hard Wood serve them for Arms; Gold and Silver they esteem’d not, wherefore they barter’d whole Chests full (buried there by the Portuguese and discover’d by them) with the Hollanders for Greyhounds: They judge themselves to be better than other Man-eaters, because they eat not the Flesh of their Enemies, but of their own Relations, and those neither kill’d in the Wars, nor dying a natural Death; by which they pretend to express their exceeding love to the Deceased, who else would, say they, be eaten by the Worms and rot, wherefore they rather chuse to eat them, that they may receive the nourishment themselves.”

The same Author relates also, That he saw a Tapuyan yield up the Ghost not far from the Castle Rio Grande, after which his nearest Relations taking the Body, wash’d the same, together with the Entrails, and cutting the Corps into several pieces, roasted the same on a Spit, preserving the Fat that dropt from it in Pans, and eat the Flesh with a greedy Appetite. None were admitted to this Feast but his chief Relations; and that which they could not eat, as the Hair, Teeth, Nails, and Bones, they burnt to Ashes, which gathering up they mix’d with their Liquor till it was all drunk up.

The Religion of the Tapuyans.

The Tapuyans acknowledge two Deities, the one good and the other bad; to the good they shew no Reverence, because, say they, he is bountiful of himself, and doth them no hurt; whereas on the contrary they zealously call upon their Devil-Deity, because they think he destroys all those who worship him not.

Their foretelling of things to come.

They never Travel nor go to War before they have consulted with their angry God, and that not without great Ceremonies; whereupon they ascribe to themselves the knowledge of future things; and indeed they often foretel future things which are beyond humane apprehension; as a testimony whereof that may serve which Sapo Amama, a Friezland Gentleman, found by experience: for he keeping Guard before Conjahu with a Troop of Horse against the Portuguese, had several Tapuyans in his Service, who foretold, That the following day the Lieutenant Amama and a Trooper should be kill’d by a Shot from a great Gun; which, though slighted, was confirm’d by the exact fulfilling of the Prediction. The like Passages hapned daily, and amongst many Arcisseusky relates one very remarkable Accident, viz. He remov’d a considerable number of Men of the Garrison Rio Grande, to surprize the Spanish Fort Barra-Canium, and nothing could more promote the Design than secrecy; but fifty Tapuyans having joyn’d with the Hollanders, Arcisseusky fear’d they might discover his Plot, wherefore he charg’d them that they should not stir a foot from his Company, which they accordingly promis’d, and having march’d three days through By-ways, they daily perform’d their Devotion in open view, and Arcisseusky desir’d that they would call him when their Devil appear’d, which they granted, on promise that he should not do him any hurt: On the third day the Army being sufficiently refresh’d, he being call’d, found the Tapuyans sitting in a Semi-Circle, with their Feet spread asunder; opposite to them sat their Priest on the Ground, whom they ask’d concerning all manner of Affairs, and he question’d them again, on which they gave their several Answers, but could not be understood for want of Interpreters, for those whom the Hollanders us’d spake only two Languages, one of which is us’d commonly by the Brasilians along the Sea-Coast, and the other by the Portuguese, in which they Interpreted to the Hollanders as much as possibly they could understand of what the Tapuyans said, whose Language differs very much from the vulgar Brasile Tongue, because they live up in the Inland, and are divided into divers Tribes, so that the Interpreters could not understand the Tapuyans, but judg’d their meaning more by nodding of the Head, and the like signs: after the Assembly had done speaking, the Priest rose up and went out of their sights into the Wood, where with a loud voice he call’d three times upon the Devil; but he not answering, the Priest return’d to his Company, who began their Questions and Answers afresh, which could not be understood by the Interpreters; and soon after the Priest (seeming to be commanded by the rest) went again to the Wood, but calling still in vain, return’d; then going a third time, and calling as before, was by a small, but shrill Voice, answer’d from the middle of the Wood, from which the Tapuyans concluded that their Business would come to perfection, and that the Devil would soon appear to them: The Priest hereupon going backwards and forwards three times one after another to his Company, they began to talk as before; at last going into the Wood again, they all spoke louder, and with more vehemency than before, whilest the fore-mention’d shrill Voice approached nearer and nearer, and at last the supposed Dæmon came forth with the Priest, who commanded him to sit opposite to the Congregation, which had a great deal of Discourse, and sometimes the Priest speaking was answer’d by the Devil in his shrill Voice; but some of the People calling aloud, catch’d up their Arms, and threatned to beat the Devil, as they often us’d to do upon the like occasions. At the departure of the Dæmon, the Multitude conducted by the Priest into the Wood, cry’d out in so terrible a manner, that they affrighted the Hollanders, who judg’d it rather to be Lyons and Tygers that roar’d than Men. During these Transactions, a German Soldier in the Rere quitted his Arms and fled, but being miss’d was pursu’d, found in a Hedge, and laid Hold on as a Person suspected to carry Advice to the Spaniards, and being brought before Arcisseusky and Examined, gave such ridiculous Answers as increas’d the suspicion, insomuch that he was led to a Tree to be tortur’d; where as he stood ty’d he solemnly declar’d, That the reason of his running away, was because he had not Pray’d in ten years, so that he was exceedingly afraid, lest when he saw the Devil amongst the Tapuyans, he would have known him, and carry’d him away to the Place prepar’d for all such Wretches.

The Imposture.

The Learned Gerard Vossius made a particular Enquiry after this Story, whether the Spirit’s appearance were a Reality, or an Imposture; and the truth is it was no better than a subtile Cheat, and so it was apprehended by Arcisseusky, who not long after, on a convenient time, ask’d the Tapuyans why they feign’d him to be a Devil that was a Man, whom he had often seen before? which they denying, affirm’d that it was a real Devil; but Arcisseusky knew their pretended Friend, who spake so shrill by reason of a Grass-blade which he held in his Mouth. However, though the main of the Fable was acted by Man, yet the Devil without doubt play’d his part with them, as appear’d by those Predictions, which no Man could possibly know, viz. That the Portuguese Fort should with the loss but of three Men fall into the Hollanders hands; for so accordingly it hapned. But because the Devil cannot foresee all things, therefore they often erre; for they said that the Hollanders should cross the Moat on Boards nail’d together in stead of a Bridge, and that the Enemy should not perceive it; and indeed Arcisseusky had resolv’d so to do, but was discover’d by the Portuguese, who defended themselves with great Guns, which so affrighted the Tapuyans, not us’d to such a noise, that they ran away and never return’d, so that by Morning the Fort was conquer’d, and all things quieted.

A pleasant Story between Arcisseusky and a Tapuyan Priest.

After this Arcisseusky burnt several Portuguese Ships in the River Monguoape, and kept one, carrying ten Demi-Culverins, laden with Sugar and Spanish Wine; which to carry to a safe Harbor a short Way, he requir’d the Tapuyans assistance; but they refus’d to enter, pretending the Ship would perish by some or other unfortunate Accident, which accordingly hapned as they had said; for the Ship was split against a Rock in the Mouth of a narrow Haven, insomuch that nothing of it was sav’d; all which the Tapuyans knew beforehand by the Devil’s information, for they never go upon any Business of consequence before they have consulted with him, and done him worship. Yet, it seems, they cannot secure this Devil of theirs from the Stripes of a Mortal, as appears by this pleasant Story: A Tapuyan Priest was promis’d a Shirt from Arcisseusky, upon condition the Devil should pull the same out of his Hand and carry it up in the Air: The Tapuyan liking the Proposal, promis’d immediately to call the Devil; but when Arcisseusky desir’d leave to Drub him with a Stick which he had in his Hand, he could by no means perswade the Priest to call for his Dæmon; at which every one began to laugh: and to carry on the Mirth farther, Arcisseusky Joking with the Priest, said, I will shew you that I am a greater Artist than you, for to Morrow I will bring it about by my Art, that great Horns shall grow on your Head, so big, that you shall not be able to pass these Doors; which so affrighted the Tapuyans, that all of them fled, onely the Priest return’d the next day with an Interpreter to Arcisseusky, desiring him that he would use him mercifully, and not cause any Horns to grow on his Head.

At the time when Jacob Rabbi convers’d amongst the Tapuyans, they were Govern’d by Janduy, a Man of above a hundred years old, whose chief Seat was on each side of the River Otschunogh, and round about the Lake Igtug, in which none durst Swim, because of the many biting Fishes in the same.

The King Pritigaba having entred into a strict League with Janduy, Warr’d continually against the Kings Arygpoygh, Wanasewasug, Tshering, and Dremenige; and had not the Portuguese taken the four last into their Service to aid them against the Hollanders, they could never have held out long against the Forces sent by Janduy, who destroy’d Man, Beast, and Houses, sparing nothing they met with; for they murther and destroy all things where e’re they come.

Brasile by whom possess’d at present.

The several Nations that now possess Brasile, besides its native Inhabitants, are Portuguese, English, Hollanders, Germans, and French, which the Brasilians by a general Name call Ajuru-juba; otherwise they call all Strangers Caraiba or Pero. But from the commixing of several Nations proceeds a fifth sort, for one that is born of European Parents in Brasile is call’d Mozombo; of an European Father and Brasilian Mother, Mameluc; of an European Father and a Moor, Mulatto; of a Brasilian and Moor, Curiboca, or Cabocles; of two Negro’s, Criolo. But above all others the Portuguese are the strongest along the Sea-Coast, who when first they began to settle on Brasile, found great resistance; and had not the Natives been at Wars amongst themselves, they could never have got so much footing, but now they are sufficiently Masters; for they have either slain all the old Inhabitants, or driven them up into the Inland: However, the Brasilians are so valiant, that they will Encounter a great Army, being brought up in the Wars from their Cradle. When they Engage one with another they shoot their Arrows exceeding thick, Hooting, Hollowing, and Leaping from one side to the other to shun the Arrows with a wonderful dexterity: The Conquerors spare none, but kill all, and Feast on the slain Bodies; but some they hale away Prisoners with a Rope about their Necks, to each of whom they allot a young Maid, who cherishes and fattens them up for five Moneths, at the end of which they make a great Feast, and drink to a pitch beyond Sense or Reason, having first fill’d their Bellies with the Flesh of the slain Prisoners roasted. If the Woman be got with Child by the Slain, they imagine that they can take no greater revenge of their Enemy, than to devour the Child as soon as it comes into the World; but it often happens, that the Woman really loving her Husband the Prisoner, runs away with him, and so bereaves her Friends of a Banquet.

Sect. II.
St. Vincent.

Places of note in the Præfecture of St. Vincent.

The continual Wars which the Portuguese have maintain’d against the Brasilians, have hindred them from Setling any where but along the Sea-side, where their Residences are divided into thirteen Præfectures or Lordships, by them call’d Capitanias; the Southermost whereof being 1. St. Vincent, hath a City of the same Denomination, which lies near a River that coming out of the Ocean runs round in the Countrey, and so returns into the Sea.

2. Sanctos los Leyes, which reckons four hundred Houses and three Sugar-Mills. Here great Ships take in their Lading in the middle of the City.

3. Hitauhacin, the most Southern, is inhabited by the Portuguese. Twelve Leagues from thence up into the Countrey the Jesuits have built the Village St. Paulo, near the Gold-Mines that lie in the Mountains, extending from East to West thirty Leagues. This Village, long since containing eighty Houses, is inhabited by Brasilians and a mix’d People; the Way thither is troublesom, over rough Mountains, and Ways overgrown with Brambles.

On the Island Britioga, at a sandy Inlet which makes a good Harbor, lies a Fort for defence of the Haven St. Vincent: and since the English, Anno 1582. sunk a Ship there, a second Fort hath been built to prevent the coming in up the River; yet notwithstanding Captain Thomas Candish ran by both the Forts, and burnt St. Vincent, but spar’d Sanctos.

Before the River which washes St. Vincent, appears the Island Sebastian, pretty large, wooddy, and well stor’d with Venison; It hath wholsom Water, good Herbage, and a secure Road for Ships against all Winds.

Farther into the Sea appears the high and rocky Isles Alcatraces, as also Victorio des Busires, Porto des Castellanos, Monte de Frigo, Muella, and Queimadas.

The Nature of the Tupinikinsi, Natives of St. Vincent.

The Natives of St. Vincent, which are in League with the Portuguese, are call’d Tupinikinsi, inhabiting the Mountains which extend above twenty eight Leagues up into the Countrey: They maintain continual Wars against the Carioes, a civiliz’d People, and white of Complexion, as also against the Cupin Imbas on the North, and a nameless People bordering on Peru. Moreover, the Miramumins, a very wild People, range all the Countrey over, but are much lessen’d since the Portugueses Arrival.

Sect. III.
Rio de Janeiro.

First Discovery and Possession of Rio de Janeiro.

The second Lordship Rio de Janeiro, formerly by the French call’d Ganabara, was discover’d Anno 1515. by Juan Dias de Solis; but the French first Setled themselves here forty years after Dias de Solis: for setting Sail from Havre de Grace with three well Mann’d Ships, Commanded by Nicholas Durandus Villegagnon, they arriv’d at Rio Janeiro in November, and at the Entrance into the River, which is about half a League broad, built a woodden Fort of a hundred Foot long, and sixty broad, and giving it the Name of the French Admiral Coligni, put several Guns into the same to secure the Entrance, inclos’d on each side by two steep Mountains. In the River, which is very broad, lie several wooddy Isles, on one of which, near the Fort Coligni, Villegagnon Setling himself, suffer’d great Inconveniences for want of Water, because he durst not Land on the Main, for fear of being surpris’d by the Natives. Here he stay’d a year and a half in a deplorable Condition, when Philip Corguileray and Du Pont set Sail with three Ships from the Haven Honfleurs; but they also, though they had many Men, yet were ill stor’d with Provisions, insomuch that Hunger increas’d amongst them daily: wherefore Villegagnon return’d home without any farther Exploits.

Jean Leri his Description thereof.

Jean Leri, who went with Corguileray, describes Rio Janeiro after this manner:

“The River (saith he) lies twenty three Degrees Southward of the Equinoctial Line; the Inlet of the Sea, twenty four thousand Paces broad, and in some places broader, is hemm’d in by hills; the Mouth of the Inlet is somewhat dangerous, by reason of three rocky Isles; beyond the large Bay is a narrow Channel, on the left-hand whereof there rises a high Mountain, which the French call’d Le Pot de Beure, because it resembles a Butter-pot. Somewhat farther lies the Rock Ratier, where Villegagnon thought to build a Fort, but the Water in stormy Weather washing over the Rock, he was forc’d to give over his Design. Half a League farther is an Island a thousand Paces in length, and a hundred and fifty in breadth, surrounded with Rocks, on which the French resided: at each end of the Isle rises a Hill, and from the middle a Rock sixty Foot high; on the Hill Villegagnon pitcht his Tent till he had built him a handsom House on a Rock; the other Houses were built in the Valley. Three Leagues and a half farther lies a fruitful Isle nine Miles in circumference, inhabited by a salvage People call’d Touoebinambauti: there are several other Isles, on which breed good Oysters with little Pearls, which stick so fast to great Stones, that they can scarce be pluckt off. The River Janeiro abounds with Fish.”

Towns and Places of chief note.

The French once possess’d this Island, but were dispossess’d by Emanuel de Sa, Governor of Brasile, for the Portuguese.

The City Sebastian, which contains three hundred Houses, is built on the Southern Point of Janeiro; opposite to which, on the Northern Point, lies the Fort; a large Church, the Jesuits Cloyster, and two Sugar-Mills, give no small lustre to the City, where the chief Trade consists in Brasile Wood and Cotton. The French Storm’d this Town Anno 1581. but march’d off without any success. Dirk Ruiters, an Eye-witness, gives us this Description of Sebastian:

“The Town (says he) lies two Leagues up the River Janeiro, in a Bay, about which it is built like a Semi-Circle in a sandy Soil along the Water, and is about a Mile long; at each end rise steep Mountains, besides which it hath neither Walls nor Gates; but its strength consists of four Forts, the chiefest whereof stands towards the East on a Rock in the Mouth of the River; the second towards the West, an Isle which on the South-East rises with a Mountain resembling a Sugar-Loaf: the third crowns a Rock South-East from the Town; and the fourth, in the North-West, a high Mountain. The Natives, call’d Tououpinambauti, are very serviceable to the Portuguese.”

Besides the fore-mention’d Towns Coligni and St. Sebastian, some make mention of another in this Præfecture, call’d Angra de los Reyes, twelve Leagues distant from St. Sebastian Westward.

The Burroughs of the Natives are populous, but neither strong by Nature, nor fortifi’d, and so not by any one thought worthy the naming.

Sect. IV.
De Spirito Sancto.

Description of the Lordship De Spirito Sancto.

Next to Rio Janeiro lies the Lordship or County De Spirito Sancto, exceeding Several strange sorts of Fish. fruitful, having divers Woods abounding with Venison. The Rivers Parayva, Manangea, Itapemeri, Iritibi, and Guarapari, are stor’d with all sorts of Fish, and amongst others the Fish Piratiapua, which in the Winter Moneths lives in the Rivers, and against the Summer returns to the Rocks wash’d by the Ocean. This Fish hath a wide Mouth full of Teeth, a reddish Tongue, little Fins, except those on their Backs, divers colour’d Scales, yet most of a dark Red, and generally weighs fifty Pound.

Here is also the Fish Paru, full of yellow Scales like Half-Moons over a black Skin; it hath long Fins near the Tail, and a little Head.

No less remarkable is the Guebucu, which hath a long Body, a sharp bonie Snout, the upper Jaw reaching over the other, no Teeth, a Tail divided in the middle, sharp Fins on the Back, and a Skin full of Silver-colour’d Prickles. This Monster not onely devours great Fishes, but also Men; when it is hungry it often runs its Snout through the side of a Ship.

But there is no Fish more deform’d than the Abacatuaja, which being oval and flat, hath two long Fins underneath, and one on the top, a divided Tail, green Fins, a smooth Skin, and fiery Eyes; as soon as it is taken it cries like a Hog.

The Serpent Boiguacu.

In this County stands a Town of the same Denomination, which contains two hundred Houses, a Sugar-Mill, and a Cloyster of Jesuits, and drives a great Trade in Cotton and Brasile Wood. Before the City lies an Inlet full of Isles, the Mouth of which is guarded by a Castle. The Natives, call’d Maigaias, are in League with the Portuguese, but the Tapuyans and Apiapetangas do them all the mischief they can possibly; so that the Portuguese travel in great danger of their lives, when any Business calls them, through the Countrey of these salvage People. But besides these People, the Way is pester’d with strange wild Beasts, especially on the Mountain Mestre Alvaro, which is seen at a great distance off at Sea; on which, amongst other Creatures, breeds the terrible Serpent Boiguacu, whose length is generally twenty four Foot; it is of an Ash colour, with great and small black Spots, with a little white Speck in the middle; when hungry, it leaps out of the Hedges, or from the tops of Trees, raises it self upright on its Tail, and winding about either Man, Beast, or whate’re it be, squeezes it to death, or puts its Tail, which ends in a sharp Point or Sting, in at the Fundament in such a manner, that it kills the Creature on which it seizeth in a moment, and then swallows it up. This Serpent hath strong Ribs inwardly, and more than seventy bonie Joynts; wherefore it turns it self with great ease; the Joynt-bones near the Head are the biggest, and grow smaller and smaller towards the Tail: It also feeds on Pismires.

The Bird Jabicu-guacu.

This County also breeds the Bird Jabicu-guacu, which exceeds the Crane in bigness, and hath a long thick Bill, but no Tongue; on his Head appears a white grisly Crest or Mitre; the Wings and Tail are short, and the Feathers most of them white, except the Pinions, which shine like Rubies; their Flesh is of a good rellish, but somewhat dry.

Near the River which washes the City Spirito Sancto, the Paraibes dwell in Huts, not unlike Ovens.

Sect. V.
Porto Seguro.

Description of Porto Seguro.

Next to the fore-mention’d County borders Porto Seguro, discover’d by Pedro Alvares Capralis, who gave this Countrey the Name of Terra de Santa Cruiz, but afterwards chang’d it to Porto Seguro, because he found a secure Harbor there. The Town, built on the top of a white Rock, gives its Denomination to the whole Countrey, and harbor’d long since two hundred and twenty Families, and hath five Sugar-Mills. The Land on the North side of the Rock rises high, but Southwardly a smooth Coast runs along the Ocean, from which two Leagues off at Sea lie several Cliffs, against which the Waves break with a great force.

The Towns Santa Cruiz and Amaro are left desolate, because the Portuguese were continually Invaded by the salvage Aymures, whom they were not able by any means to repress.

Southward from Porto Seguro appear the Shoals Abrolhos, twenty six Leagues from the Coast; they are of one breadth, but one is longer than the other.

Remakable Wreck of the Ship Batavia.

Corneliszoon: his villainous Attempt.

On this Coast the Ship Batavia was cast away Anno 1629. which Accident is the more remakable for the Murders committed by the Factor, Hieronymus Corneliszoon, who with some Confederates resolv’d to run away with the Ship, and to Sail to some Spanish Haven, or Dunkirk, and so to pillage the Netherland Vessels; but their Design was frustrated by the Ships running against the Abrolhos: Francis Pelsaert, chief Commander, first caus’d the Sick, with the Women and Children, to be put on an Island, or else on two Rocks about three Leagues distant from the place where the Ship lay, in which remain’d seventy Men, whom Pelsaert in vain endeavor’d to carry away; for the Sea was so rough that a Boat was not able to abide in the same, and also the Storm beginning to increase, beat the Ship more and more against the Sands, and the Seamen venturing towards the Isle on pieces of Timber, were some drown’d, others by the Waves, were driven ashore, amongst whom was Hieronymus Corneliszoon, who preserv’d his Life twenty four hours on the Boltsprit after the Ship was stav’d; but not terrifi’d with such an Accident, he continu’d in his fore-mention’d Resolution. On one of the Cliffs were forty Persons with eighty Cans of Water, but on the Island a hundred and eighty with much less; upon which Pelsaert, who when the Storm ceas’d, thought to save somewhat more out of his Wrack, was necessitated to seek for fresh Water on one of the said Cliffs, but not finding enough, trimm’d up his Boat and set Sail homeward, from thence to fetch a new supply of People: During which time Cornelisszoon perform’d his Vilany; for he chose David of Zeevang, Gysbrecht Welderen, Coenraed Huissen, Cornelis Pieterszoon, Rutger Frederickszoon, and Hans Heilwerk, for his Assistants, besides several others, and destroy’d all the People on the Island, except five, who escap’d on pieces of Timber to the Rock where Weyber Hays resided with forty Men, who being inform’d what the aforesaid Villains had done, prepar’d for resistance with sharp-pointed Sticks, those People on the second Rock being also slain by Zeevang, who spared onely some Women and seven Boys; after which Hieronymus Corneliszoon took Lucretia Jans for his Wife; in like manner Huissen took Judith Sebastiaens; the remaining Women serv’d the rest for Concubines. Not long after twenty of them going in Sloops, fell upon Weiber Hays, who valiantly resisted them: but because Hays’s Life was of great consequence, by reason he might give notice of their Actions to the Ship which was expected from Holland, and which they design’d to run away with, therefore they renew’d their Assault with fifteen Men more, and were again beat off; wherefore they resolv’d to make a Peace, which Hieronymus Corneliszoon promis’d to ratifie the next day; nevertheless this Peace was but feigned, for under pretence thereof they deliver’d Letters to several French Soldiers that were under Hays’s Command, promising each six thousand Guilders if they would joyn with them; but they shew’d the Letters to Hays, who keeping it secret, that he might draw on Hieronymus Corneliszoon, not mistrusting the Discovery, to come thither at the appointed time, took him Prisoner, and caus’d Zeevang, Huissen, Welderen, and Cornelis Pieterszoon to be put to death; but Wouter Loos making his escape, was chosen chief of the Rebels, who ventur’d a fourth Assault, but returning without any effect left off making any farther Attempt. Mean while Pelsaert arriving with the Sardam Frigat from Holland, sent a Boat ashore, which by a little Skiff dispatcht by Hays, was inform’d of all the Passages; whereupon the Boat returning, Pelsaert as he was putting himself into a posture of Defence, espy’d a Sloop coming about the Southern Point of the Island, in which were eleven of the Rebels clad in Scarlet with Silver Lace, which making directly towards the Ship, as soon as they came up, were commanded to throw away their Arms over-board; which having done, and coming aboard the Frigat, they were all put in Irons, as also their remaining Party, and condemn’d to die.

Opposite to the Abrolhos on the Main Coast, a plain Countrey extends it self thirty Leagues in length, inhabited by the Ouetacates, a cruel People, who continually either destroy one another, or else make sad slaughters amongst their Neighbors.

The County Porto Seguro belongs to the Spanish Duke of Avero, but is very much decay’d.

The Beast Capybara.

The Rivers Moucuripe, Caruvelas, and Lucuru, breed abundance of Water-Hogs call’d Capybara, which have short Feet, Bristles and Ears, a thick Body and Head, with a bearded Snout, besides two Tusks, and twenty four lesser Teeth in each Jaw, but no Tail; they feed on Grass and Bushes in whole Herds on the Shore, and make a terrible noise; and though they cannot run fast, yet they dive and swim extraordinary quick.

The Tapiirete.

The Tapiirete also resembles a Hog, especially in its Head and Feet, but is as big as a Heifer of six Moneths old, hath a Snout hanging over its under Lip, a Mouth full of Teeth, and on its Skin short and dark colour’d Hair. This Beast is very libidinous, and in the Nights spoils the Fruit-Trees, especially the Sugar-Canes, but in the Day-time it sleeps in Thickets. The Flesh of a young Tapiirete tastes like Beef.

Lastly, the Inhabitants of Porto Seguro are plentifully supply’d with Rabbets, and the more, because there being divers sorts of them, (some say five) they are taken in great abundance, either in Traps, Snairs, or Gins, or by discovering their Holes; for the Hunters stopping the entrance of them, dig a Hole directly over the place where the Coneys lodge, and so kill them with long Pike-staves in the Ground.

Five sorts of Rabbets in Brasile.

Of these five sorts of Rabbets in Brasile, the chiefest, call’d Paca, hath a thick Head, little Ears, their fore-Feet bigger than their hind-Feet, short, hard, and brown Hair, speckled grey on the Sides, but no Tail: The Flesh of this sort of Rabbets is very delicate.

The second sort is the Tupesi, which being like a Hare amongst us, may as well be accounted of that kind.

The Aguti resembles our Rabbets, onely it hath harsh brown Hair, round Ears, bald Feet, gruntles like a Hog, hath two Toes more on their hind-Legs than on the foremost.

The Cavia Cobaya, though less than the European Rabbets, excell them in soft and divers-colour’d Hair, distinguish’d by white, red, and black Spots; their Head and Teeth resemble those of a Rat, but it hath no Tail: No Rabbets can be made tamer than these, and if carry’d to any remote Countrey, breed as well there as in Brasile.

The last of all is the Aparea, which differs little in running from a Hare, as also in respect of the Head and Beard, harbors more in rent Cliffs than in sandy Ground.

The Tree Tucum.

The Soil of Porto Seguro bears two sorts of Palm-Trees, viz. the Tucum and Airi; the Tucum hath small Boughs full of prickly Leaves, and a fruit not unlike the Damask Prune, hanging in Clusters of three or four hundred together; and being excellent Food to fatten Hogs and Apes; also when press’d yielding a clear Oyl, which is highly esteem’d: the Fruit when ripe grows black without, and within hath a white Kernel: of the Leaves the Brasilians spin fine and strong Thred.

The Airi grows much higher than the Tucum, and hath also longer Leaves, a Body full of sharp Thorns, and a round Fruit full of white and oylie Pulp, but not eatable; the Wood hard, heavy and black, sinks in the Water, and the Brasilians make their Clubs of the same.

The Bird Cocoi.

Along the Rivers flie the Birds Cocoi, resembling Herons, though in beauty they far exceed them; they have but little Flesh, long sharp Bills, of a yellowish green colour, and curious Crests of Feathers on their Heads, which fall back over their Necks; their Flesh when young is delicate.

Sect. VI.
Los Isleos.

Situation and Description of Los Isleos.

Next Porto Seguro borders the Countrey Los Isleos, so call’d from its chief Town, which consists of a hundred and fifty Houses, (or perhaps by this time many more) eight Sugar-Mills, a Cloyster for the Jesuits, and a Church. The Inhabitants live by Tillage, and Transporting of Provisions in little Barks to Pernambuco.

Seven Leagues farther in the Countrey, beyond the Town of Isleos, lies a nameless Lake three Leagues long, as many broad, and above ten Fathom deep, and full of the Fish Manati, which are very large and well tasted, besides abundance of Crocodiles; and in windy Weather the Water is as rough as if it were in the Ocean. Out of this Lake flows a River by a Passage so narrow, that a Boat can scarce pass through the same.

Round about this River live the Guaymures, the most salvage People of all America; they are of a Gigantick size, have white Skins, carry exceeding great Bowes and Arrows, live without Houses like Beasts, devour Mans-flesh like Tygers, never Fight in Companies or Armies, but watch to surprize a single Man or Beast; they also eat their own Children, and possess’d formerly all the Land from the River St. Francisco to the Promontory Frio; but beaten from thence by the Tupinambas and Tupinachias, they went to the County Los Isleos, which they Invaded in such a manner, that the Portuguese were not onely forc’d to leave several Sugar-Mills, but also the whole Countrey.

Sect. VII.
Bahia de Todos los Sanctos.

Situation and Description of Todos los Sanctos.

Next to Isleos borders Bahia de Todos los Sanctos, belonging to the Portuguese. The Inlet which borrows its Denomination from all the Saints, gives Name to this eminent County. The Bay great and wide, and in the middle from twelve to eighteen Fathom deep, lies in thirteen Degrees Southward of the Equinoctial Line. The Coast rises white along the Sea side. The Current according to the course of the Sun runs six Moneths towards the South, and as many towards the North. The opening of the Inlet is on the South, but it flows up Northerly, and contains two Leagues and a half in breadth; several fresh Rivers discharge their Waters into the same: The utmost and biggest Island Taperica breaks off the Waves which come rowling in from the Ocean. Those that Sail into the same must have the Island on their left Hand, and the Main Coast on their right, which is known by a Promontory, on which the Fort Antonio, and the old City Villa Veja are built, near a little Bay with a Foreland on the North, from which the Main Coast circling like a Half-Moon ends near the Point Tapagipe, which juts out from Bahia Todos los Sanctos. The Castle Tapesiepe stands on the utmost Point, where the Countrey winding towards the East makes the Inlet larger, from whence a narrow Channel runs up into the Countrey, and there makes a Lake which extends North and South: from the Mouth of the Lake the Coast reaches Northward to the River Pitanga, which comes gliding out of the East, and in its Passage receives several Streams, on whose Banks stand divers Sugar-Mills. From Pitanga the Coast extends a League Northward, then Westerly with a crooked Elbow, in whose circumference lie two nameless Isles close under the Shore; this Elbow ends in a blunt Point, about half a League from which lies the Island Mare, a League long, in the Mouth of the River Pitanga. To the Northward from hence a River disembogues in the said Inlet. More Southerly appears Monks-Isle, from whence the Coast extends it self Northerly, where several Islands appear at an exact distance from the Coast; the first beyond the fore-mention’d blunt Point, is Birapebiara; the next, which lies closer to the Shore, Porto Madero; next comes in view a long Island in the Mouth of a River, from whence the Countrey extends Westward, and fronts the Island De Fuentes, as doth also the River Tambaria, which comes out of the North, but empties it self with a crooked Arm near the rest; from hence the Coast with two little Bays runs North-West to the Stream Geresipe, in whose Mouth, which is pretty large, appear three Isles on a row, the utmost whereof is call’d Caraibe, the middlemost Pycca, the innermost hath no Name, but divides the River into two Channels; from hence the Coast bends with several Inlets, into which fall divers Rivulets towards the South, from the River Cachoera, full of little Isles, opposite to which stand several Sugar-Mills. Against Cachoera appears the Island Meve, and more Southerly Taperica, between the sharp Point Tapagipe and the Castle Antonio. Near the fore-mention’d the City St. Salvador was built by Thomas de Sosa, who weighing Anchor from Lisbon, Anno 1549. Landed safely near Villa Veja, and about half a League from thence pitch’d upon a Hill, and took order forthwith for the erecting of his new City there, giving to each of his Followers a place to build on: the Jesuits chose the large Plain where at present stands the Church Consecrated to the Virgin Mary; the Names of the said Jesuits were Juan Azpilcueta, Antonio Pireo, Leonardo Nonnio, Didaco Jacobeo, Vincentio Roderigo, and Emanuel Nobrega; whilest the common People set themselves to the building of Dwelling-houses: But when John the Third, King of Portugal, sent a Priest thither to Teach in the new Church of Maria, the fore-mention’d Jesuits remov’d from thence to a high Hill, which they call’d The Mountain Calvarien, whither divers Brasilians came flocking, and pitch’d their Tents about the Cloyster, admiring their strange Neighbors.

When Sosa Landed on the fore-mention’d Shore, the Portuguese had but little footing on America; for their Plantations at Isleos, St. Vincent, Pernambuco, Villa Veja, Itamaraca, and Porto Seguro, discover’d by Pedro Alvares Capralis, Anno 1500. were run all to ruine.

Beside the City St. Salvador and the decay’d Town Villa Veja, the City Paripe lies three Leagues farther into the Countrey, consisting of three thousand Families, and eighteen Sugar-Mills: The Countrey about the same produces plenty of Cotton.

The Island Taperica, which is pretty large, hath a fertile Soil for the production of Tobacco, and Grass to fatten Cattel: The Inhabitants boyl much Train-Oyl of the Whales, which come ashore there in considerable numbers.

Twelve Leagues Southward from St. Salvador appears the Village Cacocheira, formerly belonging to a rich Portuguese, who took great pains in reforming the salvage People Guaymures to a civil Life; but seeing he profited but little, he caus’d great Companies of them to be remov’d to Taperica, that they might do less mischief, where the unusual and unwholsom Air kill’d them all in a short time.

The Lordship Bahia hath abundance of Sugar-Mills, which are either turn’d by the Water, or drawn by Oxen.

The manner of Planting Sugar-Canes.

The Worm Guirapeacopa.

The manner of making Sugar in the Sugar-Mills.

The Sugar-Canes, by the Brasilians call’d Viba or Tacomaree, grow better in a clayie and fat Soil, over which the Rivers flowing leave their Mud, than on High-lands, Hills, or Mountains; they are Planted after this manner: They first plough their Fields, weed them, and make Holes at an exact distance one from the other, into which they plant their Canes in such a manner, that the tops touch one another. The Holes before mention’d require more Earth to fill them in Summer than in Winter, that the violent Heat of the Sun may not dry up the Root, and that the Rain may the freelier come at them to moisten them, for the more moisture they have, the better they grow; they attain to their full ripeness in ten, or at most in twelve Moneths; February and March being the two last Winter Moneths, are accounted the best to Plant in, because the Earth softned by Rains, suffers the Root to shoot forth the better. The ripe Canes being cut off, are left in the Field till the following Year; during which time new Canes growing, are often ground in the Mill with the old ones; but if they stand two years, then the sweet Liquor dries up, and the Cane withers. The young Plants carefully planted in good Ground may last forty, nay fifty years; but in a barren Soil they set new every five years. Sometimes in great Droughts and extraordinary hot Seasons, the Canes are scorcht to nothing, which being burnt in the Winter, the Ashes serve to Dung the Ground; and so in like manner when the Water, overflowing the Fields, drowns the young Plants. In moist Grounds the black-wing’d Worm, call’d Guirapeacopa, (by the Portuguese nam’d Pao de Galeuba) gnaws the Roots in such a manner, that the Canes die; and sometimes it happens also that the Weeds choak the young Plants; wherefore the Ground is to be weeded four times a year, till such time as the Canes are strong enough to bear against the Weeds: they cut off the ripe Canes at the lowermost Joynt, and, all the Leaves being first pull’d off, tie them up in Bundles, and bring them to the Mills, which consist of three great Iron Bars, between which the Canes are squeez’d. The Water-Mills are turn’d by the force of the Water, which in great Gutters led from high Mountains falls with exceeding force into Pools made for that purpose; after which manner, though they wind the Canes much faster, yet they get not so much Sugar as when they grind them in the Mills turn’d by Cattel: The places through which the Juice runs must be cleans’d twice in twenty four hours; the Canes put in behind between the first Bar, are turn’d into the second, and thence into the third, which successively squeezes out all the remaining Juice: The Canes thus press’d, serve for Fewel to burn; but they constantly keep such a great Fire both Night and Day, that besides those press’d Canes, they burn forty Fathom of Wood in twenty four hours, insomuch that whole Woods are consum’d in a short time: The Liquor, nam’d Caldo, runs along woodden Gutters into great Kettles, in which it is boyl’d, but if it happen to be over-boyl’d they put Water amongst it, whereby it becomes excellent Food for Horses; then they put the Liquor into a second Kettle, where it is boyl’d afresh, and also scumm’d; and for the better cleansing of it, Lime-Juyce and other things are put amongst it; then they strein it through Clothes, and give the Dross which remains in the same to the Slaves, which work for half a year together Night and Day like Horses. The Dross mix’d with Water makes also good Wine. Out of the great Kettles, by the Portuguese call’d Caldero de Mellar, the Caldo runs into the lesser nam’d Tachas, where it is boyl’d a third time, and continually stirr’d till it comes to be thick like a Syrrup, and at last to the consistence of Sugar: It may be accounted amongst the Mysteries of Nature, that while the Sugar boyls in the Tachas, which are the little Kettles, they must drop Oyl amongst the Liquor, which if they should do whilest it is in the great Kettel, the Liquor would not turn to the consistence of Sugar; as on the contrary, if they should put their Lye into the little Kettles as they do into the great, the Liquor would be quite spoil’d. In their Boyling-houses stand several hundreds of Earthen Pots one by another on Planks full of Holes; which Pots they cover with moist clay, and after fourteen days knocking it out of the Pots, they separate the brown Sugar from the white, both which are laid to dry in the Sun, and put into Chests.

Sect. VIII.
Pernambuco.

Description of Pernambuco.

Northward from Bahia de Todos los Sanctos lies Pernambuco, which extends along the Coast above seventy Leagues, between the River St. Francisco and the Countrey of Hamaraca.

Pernambuco, which signifies Hells-Mouth, is on the East wash’d by the Northern Ocean; in which grows a Weed much like an Oaken Leaf, and so thick, that unless it be cut to make their Way, impedes the Sailing of Ships.

Several sorts of Fish.

The Sea is also very full of Fish, which in calm Weather are visible sixty Fathom deep, and are taken in greater abundance than they are able to spend; for they no sooner let down a Bait, cover’d with Feathers and Tallow, but the Fish immediately swallowing the same, are taken.

Here are in the first place abundance of Hays, a Fish so rank and oylie, that they are not eatable, but their Brains are accounted good against the Stone.

There are also hereabouts a sort of flying Fish like Herrings, but not so big; they have Wings like Bats, which carry them above Water whilest they are wet; they swim in shoals, and are chased by all other Fishes, which endeavoring to escape by flight out of the Water, they become a prey to the Sea-pies.

The Sea-Breams are as well tasted as the flying Fish; the Mariners cover them in Salt, or stuff them within full of Salt and Pepper, and so hang them to dry in the Sun.

Pernambuco it self lying in five Degrees Southward from the Equinox, produces abundance of Brasile Wood and Sugar-Canes, which last is no proper Brasilian Plant, for the first Plants thereof were by the Portuguese first transplanted thither from the Canary Islands.

First Discovery.

This Countrey was first discover’d by Americus Vesputius, who being sent thither by Emanuel, King of Portugal, to discover the Coast between the Promontory before Olinda and the Island Itamaraca, and finding a split Rock and some Brasilian Huts, Landed, and ask’d the Denomination of the Coast, which he was inform’d was call’d Pernambuco, which he found full of steep Mountains, inaccessible Woods, and in some places Plains and pleasant Valleys; but the chiefest thing he could find to lade his Ship with, was Brasile Wood; but being inform’d that the Soil would bear Sugar-Canes, he caus’d Canary Sugar-Plants to be Set there.

Chief Towns and Places of note.

Olinda, formerly the chief City of Pernambuco, had (according to Lopez) above three thousand Houses and seventy Sugar-Mills: It is built on several Hills, which on the North-side are steep and overgrown with Brambles; betwixt which in many places grow Orange-Trees. John Newhof, who arriv’d at Olinda Anno 1642. found a few Netherlanders and Spaniards there, who dwelt in the ruin’d Houses. The Land-side of the City is strengthned by Hills overgrown with Brambles and Thorns, and towards the Sea-side with Earthen Walls, fortifi’d by fourteen Bulwarks and a Stone Castle, able to withstand a considerable force: The Out-works towards the South were maintain’d by Jews, who from the fore-mention’d Hills could see not onely a great way into the Ocean, but also the River Biberibi, which hath a Stone Bridge leading to the City, and Northerly and Westward the Way lies through great Woods and Forrests. Olinda it self is divided into twenty seven large Streets, besides lesser Lanes and several Avenues, and five chief Churches, viz. Misericordia, Nostra Sennora del Emparo, and Nostra Sennora de Guadalupe, San Salvador, and San Pedro, besides two others of lesser note. On the highest Hill stands the Jesuits Cloyster, built square and high, and surrounded with Walls, on which Sebastian King of Portugal, by the perswasion of his Uncle Cardinal Henry, spent a great sum of Money, and endow’d it with annual Revenues, Anno 1571. The Capuchins also built a stately Cloyster towards the East. The Franciscans moreover inhabited a magnificent Building, near which stood the Governors Palace. The Carmelites had also a stately Edifice, whose former lustre still appears by the Ruines, where now Cattel graze; from the Hills about which may be exactly discern’d Reciffa, the Promontory of St. Augustine, and the Castle before the Road of Reciffa: Along the Shore stood the Dominican Cloyster, and in the upper part of the City the Minster, Consecrated to St. Bento, exceeding strong both by Nature and Art; near which stood Conceptio de nostra Sennora. The Fort Juan de Albuquerque stood on the South-side, from whence a Way leads you along the Shore to Reciffa, where hard by the Potter’s House stood a Beacon. But since Olinda fell into the hands of the Netherland East-India Company, they built a strong Fortress on the North near the Sea-side, where formerly a great Trade was driven with Sugar, insomuch that forty Ships have been fraighted in a day therewith from Olinda, and still as much more remain’d in the Store-houses. The Sugar cannot be made without the help of African Slaves, and that in great numbers; for Angola alone provided fifteen thousand four hundred and thirty Moors for the Sugar-Mills about Olinda.

The Expedition of Loncque.

Olinda taken by the Hollanders.

The Fort St. George taken.

In the Years 1601, 1602, and 1623. there was sent to surprize this City Henrick Loncque, who a little before with Peter Peterszoon Hein took the Spanish Plate-Fleet, and brought it away from Matanca. In the middle of June, Anno 1629. Loncque weighed Anchor from the Goerean Road, and between great Canary and Teneriff he was Engag’d (having but eight Sail) with forty Spanish Ships, Commanded by Frederick de Toledo, fought his way through the midst of them, and near St. Vincent (the rest of his Fleet being come up to him, which in all made up twenty seven) he stay’d for a farther promis’d Supply of Ships to assist him, and the longer, because the Men rais’d by the Netherland West-India Company were taken into the States Service, to oppose the Spanish and Imperial Forces, who at that time had gain’d some advantage upon them: But not long after Hartogen-bosch being taken by the Hollanders, the rest of the expected Fleet, with the promis’d Aid, arriv’d at St. Vincent; from whence Loncque, after four Moneths stay, set Sail with these additional Forces, his Fleet then consisting of fifty Sail of Ships, which carry’d above seven thousand Soldiers, besides Seamen; but he was forc’d to lie a considerable time under the Line, being either becalm’d or beaten back by contrary Winds, insomuch that many of his Men perish’d, or were disabled with the Scurvey: At last his Fleet being come to an Anchor upon the Coast of Pernambuco, the first that Landed about two Leagues Northward of Olinda, was Colonel Diederik van Waerdenberg, who by Day-break divided his Men into three Divisions, the Forlorn-Hope consisting of nine hundred and thirty four Men, march’d towards Olinda along the Shore, led by Adolf van der Eltz; the second being a thousand and forty nine, by Stein Callenfels; the third, consisting of nine hundred and sixty five, was led by Fouke Honx: thus drawn out, and marching on, they met with no resistance till they came to the River Dolce, where eight hundred Portuguese Charg’d on them from behind a new Sconce; but Waerdenberg wading up to the Middle through the River with two Field-Pieces, the Enemy left his Works and ran into the Wood; the Forlorn-Hope approaching the City, march’d up towards the right side, up a Way through the Woods, Scal’d the Walls, near which the Jesuits Cloyster stood, over which he got after some resistance. The second Party march’d in a narrow Path along the Shore, and broke into the City between the Franciscans and Jesuits Cloyster, towards the Cathedral Salvador, from whence they discharg’d several Guns, as also from the Castle, which they had taken, whilest Fouke Honx Storm’d the Battlements towards the South; but Stein Callenfels and Eltz being already Masters of Olinda, the Defendants surrendred all. Mean while the Colonel’s Skiff brought five hundred Men more ashore, with which he march’d without any hinderance into the City, where the Conquerors, faint with excessive Heat and want of Water, found but little Booty, because the Inhabitants having notice of the Hollanders coming, had convey’d all their Goods and Wealth to Reciffa, which the Governor Matthias Albuquerque (Brother to the Lord Duarte Albuquerque, to whom Pernambuco properly belong’d) burnt with all the Store-houses, partly out of revenge to the Inhabitants, who fled contrary to his Commands, and partly because he would not enrich the Hollanders. The Portuguese Captain, Correa de Castel Blanco, in his Letter to the King of Spain, values the loss at twenty hundred thousand Ducats. But still the Portuguese had possession of several Forts about the Countrey, whereof the most considerable was St. George, whither Stein Callenfels march’d in the Night with six hundred Men, but his Ladders being too short, and the Hand-Granado’s not easily taking fire, he was forc’d to Retreat; whereupon judging it most convenient to besiege the Castle, he digg’d Trenches about the same; nor was it long ere the Besieged desir’d Quarter, which being granted, they march’d from thence with ninety Men. The Water Castle surrendring in like manner, they found fifteen Brass Guns therein; and in that of St. George four thousand pound of Gun-powder, and twenty four Iron Guns.

When the Netherland Forces Landed on Pernambuco, the Portuguese inhabited eleven Towns, the chiefest whereof being Olinda, was generally Garrison’d by four Companies of Armed Citizens, each containing a hundred Men and three Companies of Soldiers: Amongst the Citizens were two hundred Merchants, some of whom were judg’d to be worth fifty thousand Crusados.

Southward from Olinda, between the River Biberibe and the Ocean, was a narrow Cawsey, at the end of which lay the populous Village Reciffa, where the Ships lade and unlade. About the middle of the Cliff, being a League long, is the Anchoring place for great Ships, call’d Pozo. At the end of the fore-mention’d Cawsey against Pozo, appear’d a round Tower of Fre-stone.

The memorable Exploits of the English under Captain James Lancaster.

The Journal kept by the English Fleet that came hither under the Command of Captain James Lancaster, Anno 1595. makes mention of a Fort which lay at the Mouth of the Haven before Reciffa, which the English valiantly Storm’d, notwithstanding six hundred Men and seven Brass Guns might easily have made it invincible: But they conquering the same, march’d up to Olinda, took the Suburb, consisting of a hundred Houses, without any resistance, as also a great Booty, and the greater, because the Goods of a rich Carak which had some few days before suffer’d Shipwrack, were kept there; they also took fifteen laden Ships, and for thirty days kept the whole Countrey about Olinda restless with continual Alarms. Since this Invasion the Portuguese built a third Fort on Reciffa, so that the Ships must pass in between two Forts, where the Channel is also full of Rocks, and consequently the more dangerous.

From Reciffa the Goods are sent in Barques or Lighters to Olinda, between which and St. Salvador run the two great Rivers Francisco and Real, the first whereof retains its freshness twenty Leagues into the Ocean.

Along the River Popitinga stand many Sugar-Mills; and five Leagues farther Northward beyond Olinda the Portuguese inhabit these Villages, viz. Garasu, Reciffa, Moribeca, Antonio de Cabo, Miguel de Poyuca, Gonsalvo de Una, Povacon de Porto Calvo, Alagoa del Nort, and Alagoa del Zur, besides other Brasilian Hamlets, and above seventy Sugar-Mills.

The nature of the Soil in Pernambuco.

The County of Pernambuco hath for the most part a good Soil, several Plains, low Hills, and fruitful Valleys, abounding with fair Canes, which also grow on the Mountains Masurepe, Zebaatan, Poyuca, and Moribeque.

The Wilds of El Gran Matto, afford the best Wood, with which they drive the greatest Trade in the Village Laurenzo. Whilest Matthias Albuquerque Intrench’d himself a League and a half Westward from Olinda, by the Sugar-Mills belonging to Francisco Montero, with a hundred Portuguese, and three times as many Armed Brasilians, Loncque finding that he could not long keep the City Olinda against the Enemy, caus’d the same to be pull’d down and burnt.

Sergippo del Rey.

Between the Rivers Francisco and Real, lies the Town Sergippo del Rey, up in the Countrey near a small Rivulet, which at Spring-Tydes hath fourteen Foot Water. The Woods round about feed wild Cattel, and the Mountains contain Mines of Gold and Silver.

The first Plantation in Brasile was in the Island Itamaraca, three Leagues long and two broad, but extends its Jurisdiction along the Main Coast, from which it is separated by a narrow River, which runs betwixt both thirty five Leagues. The Countrey is eminent for twenty Sugar-Mills, and abundance of Brasile Wood.

Villa de Conception.

The chief Town of this Island is call’d Villa de Conception near the Sea, which round about the Island is full of Rocks. The French settling themselves here at first, were driven from thence by the Portuguese. The Town it self, built on a Rock, hath a strong Castle on the one side, erected near a shrubby Moor; to the Northward of which Stein Callenfels found a little Isle, scarce a Musquet-shot long, which at High-water is overflown, and being full of small Trees makes a Receptacle for Sea-Fowl, which flock thither about six a Clock in the Evening to Roost on the Boughs, from which, when once setled to take their repose, they will not stir till six of the Clock the next Morning, though you discharge Guns at them all Night; but since Stein Callenfels cut down the Wood to make Pallisado’s for the new Fort against the Town Conception, they were never seen afterwards.

Sect. IX.
Parayba.

Description of Parayba.

Northward from Itamaraca borders the County of Parayba, whence the French Ships carry’d yearly several Ladings of Brasile Wood, till Anno 1585. the Portuguese General Martin Leytam drove them from all places, since when they never recover’d any part thereof.

This Territory of Parayba borrows its Denomination from the chief Town, lying five Leagues from the North Sea near the River Parayba, which in the Summer Season hath but little Water, but in the Winter Season increases to that heighth, that it oftentimes on a sudden overflowing the Countrey sweeps away both People, Cattel, and Houses. The City it self, though small, yet hath several fair Buildings, amongst which three Churches and as many Cloysters, inhabited by Franciscans, Carmelites, and Benedictins, are none of the meanest. The Countrey thereabouts indifferently fruitful, hath twenty Sugar-Mills. The Mountain Cupaguao, formerly very populous with Natives, being exceeding fertile, produces all manner of Fruit; at present it lies desolate, the Brasilians being all destroy’d by the Portuguese. These Mountains produce also curious green Stones, which the Inhabitants wore in their Lips for an Ornament, and which also cures the Griping of the Guts, by being laid upon the Belly.

The Silver-Mine Copaoba.

The French under the Command of Captain Dourmigas, discover’d ninety years ago the Silver-Mine Copaoba, and for considerable time carry’d Silver and Brasile Wood from hence, till the Portuguese made themselves absolute Masters.

Moreover, on the North-side of Parayba, the Salvages call’d Petiguars inhabit sixteen Villages.

Strange Birds.

Amongst the Birds of prey which breed here, are the Ouyaourassou, twice as big as a Crane, with curious Feathers, and so bold and strong, that it devours not onely Sheep, but Deer and Men.

The Bird Mayton is no way inferior in beauty to the Peacock, his whole Body being cover’d with white and black Feathers; on his Head grows a Tuft; the Flesh is also very pleasant to the taste.

The Toucan, another Bird, resembles a Turtle-Dove in all parts, except the Bill and Breast; for the Belly is ten Inches long and three broad, the Breast of an Orange colour, mix’d with Crimson Spots; the remaining part is white, the Back red, and the Tail and Wings Coal-black.

The Plant Yarammacarou.

The Plant call’d Yarammacarou deserves also a peculiar observation, viz. It is thicker than a Man’s Thigh, grows twelve Foot high, with three Branches of equal length and thickness, which you may easily break; it is green without, white within, and without Leaves, leaving red Blossoms streak’d with blue, from whence grows a Fruit about the bigness of an Apple, crimson without and white within, and tasting like a Mulberry.

The Guara-tereba, with other strange Fish.

The River Parayba produces amongst many other Fishes the Guara-tereba, which hath a thick Body, flat Head, crooked Back, split Tail, and triangular Scales, which laid in the Sun, shine like polish’d Gold.

The Sea also hereabouts affords a strange Fish with a very long and thin Tail, the Females whereof Lay every day Eggs like Hens: they are full of poysonous Prickles, and divided into several sorts, amongst which the chiefest are accounted the Naainari and Jabebara.

Description of the Sea Coast of Brasile.

The Sea-Coast of Brasile from St. Vincent to Spirito Santo appears as followeth: Strange Tree. Before the Coast of St. Vincent lie the four little Isles Queimadas, and on one side the Alcatraces and Busios; East North-East from which bears the Island Sebastian: Before the Inlet Ubatuba lies the Isle Dos Porcos, close under a high Shore, where the Haven runs far up in the Countrey. Fourteen Leagues farther the Island Grande, stor’d with fresh Water, with Fish-ponds, Woods, and two good Havens. Before the Road of Garatuba appear several broken Isles, the chiefest whereof is Morambaya. The Ships Sailing along the Brasilian Coast view next the Mouth of the wide River Jenero, without fear of Rocks or Shoals. Moreover, a sandy Ground extends from the Western Point to Cape Frio, which rises out of the Sea like a Rock, with white Streaks, and crack’d on the top, between both which the high Island before Frio makes a safe Harbor. Nine Leagues beyond Frio to the Northward, St. Salvador opens a large Bay, hemm’d in on the South by divers nameless Isles. Lastly, the several Salt-pans along this Coast are very remarkable, as also the Promontory St.Thoma and Parayba, the Inlets Manangea and Itapemeri, and the River Guarapari, famous for the Mountain Pero Cam towards the North, and Guapel to the South. The Island Salvago, round and mountainous, lies before the Mouth of the River Guarapari, where the Main Coast grows uneven and Hilly. On the North-East Point of Spirito Santo a long ridge of Rocks appears above the Sea; and near the Inlet rises three black Hills on the South, and two Leagues up in the Countrey the broken Mountain Mestre Alvaro, which extends along the Sea-Coast. The River Des Reyos Magos encompasses three Mountains severally, and makes three Isles. The Coast on each side of the River Dolce is very plain and even, but Cricare hath a mixture of high and low Lands. In the Mouth of the River Maranipe lies a great company of white Shelves near together, appearing afar off as if all one. Parairepe is remarkable by the high Trees growing on it. The Mouth of the River Caruvelas lies full of Sand-plats. Near the Beacon Tauhaen rises a red Cliff from which a sandy Point reaches to the River Curubabo. Before Porto Seguro lie several dangerous Rocks in the Sea, to the Southward of which rises the High-land Cape Pasqual. Not far from hence Santa Cruiz a good Haven for small Vessels, from whence the Coast extends North North-East, and South South-West, to Rio Grande, where the Shoals call’d Baxos de St. Antonio, making a dangerous Entry, force the Ships for the most part to keep three Leagues from the Shore. Beyond the Arm of Rio Grande appear three high Mountains cover’d with Trees; from whence to Ilheos is a safe Passage free from Shelves. Eight Leagues farther, the River Dos Contas runs between two broken Cliffs into the Sea: in the Mouth of it rises a Rock resembling a high Island. Between Ilheos and Contas the Coast rises also, but falls low again in a Bay, where white Sugar-Mills, formerly belonging to Lucas Giraldes, are seen at a great distance. The Countrey on each side of the River Camanu is plain; the Stream it self hath a wide Mouth, and respects with its Northern Shore the Isle Cayepa, dangerous for the many Shelves which are about the same. The River Tinhare is known by the Mountain Morro de Santo Paulo, which rises like a Galley on the Southern Shore. Twelve Leagues farther opens the Bay of Todos los Sanctos, on whose Eastern Point stands the Castle Antonio, and before the Northern Shore the Island Topoam, to the East and South-East low and strong. The River Das Pedras falls with a wide Mouth into the Ocean. Next you pass by the Streams Tapicuru, Real Vasabaris and Francisco, known by a low Promontory. The Rivers Miguel, Antonio, Camaragili, Porto Calvo, Formoso, and Serinhaem, disembogue also into the Sea. Next the Stream Das Pedras rises the Promontory St. Augustine, all overgrown with Bushes and Brambles. Five Leagues Southward lies the small Isle Alexo. The Coast from St. Augustine to Pernambuco extends North and by East, and South and by West. The Island Tamaraca lies in the Mouth of the Stream Gajana; and fifteen Leagues farther appears Parayba; between which two the Shelf Pedra Furada extends three Leagues along the Coast, and another from the Shore of the Promontory Blanco, where the Road Porto de Franeses affords Seamen secure Anchorage for Shipping. Next to Parayba follow the Havens Treicaon, Pipa, and Basios, the Stream Siara and Maragnan, which washes the Western part of Brasile, and is taken for the Boundary between the Spanish Indies and the Portuguese, according to the Division by Pope Alexander the Sixth, Anno 1502. Lastly, there belongs to Brasile the Island Fernando de Noronho, in three Degrees of Southern Latitude. The Capuchin, Claude de Abbeville, going thither, found the same to be six Leagues in circumference, and extraordinary fruitful; besides good fresh Water, Pease, Beans, Maiz, Potato’s, Melons, Cotton, Cattel, wild Goats, and all sorts of Poultrey, which this Island affords; but it chiefly abounds with great variety of a sort of Birds which suffer themselves to be caught with the Hand. There grows likewise a nameless Tree, not unlike the Laurel, being of a strange Nature, for who e’re touches the Leaves, and afterwards rubs his Eyes, loses his Sight for four hours, with exceeding pain; which pain nevertheless another Tree growing in the same Island cures immediately. The French, who Landed on Noronho Anno 1613. found a Portuguese there, with eighteen Brasilians, Men, Women, and Children, banish’d thither from Pernambuco, whom Baptizing, they carry’d to Maragnan. Near Noronho lies the Isle De Feu.

Sect. X.
Maragnan.

Situation.

Maragnan, forty five Leagues in circumference, lies in two Degrees of Southern Latitude, and a considerable distance from the Bay, which appears between the Rivers Aperegha and Comajamu.

The Eastern Entrance into this Bay hath before the Promontory Arbres Secs, the Isle St. Anna, by the Brasilians call’d Upaonmiri.

Opposite to Maragnan, about half way from the said Inlet, fall three Rivers into the Sea, the most Easterly call’d Mounin, hath a Mouth a Mile wide, and discharges its Water into the Sea; the middlemost Taboucourou, is five hundred Leagues long, and ends with two Mouths, half a League distant one from the other; the most Westerly, call’d Miary, is about six Leagues broad, so falling into the Sea.

The Stream Maracou falls into the Pinare, and thus united they joyn both with the Miary, which runs exceeding swift into the Sea.

Between the Capes Arbres Secs and De la Tortue, the Coast lies full of sandy Banks, some of which extend a League into the Ocean.

On the other side of the Promontory Tapoytapere near Maragnan, towards the River of Amazones, lie so many Isles along the Sea-shore, that no Ship is able to approach the same, because the Spaces between the Isles are overgrown with Trees call’d Apparituriers, whose Boughs shooting down and rooting in the Sea, produce other Trees, which grow so close together, that they seem one entire Tree with many Branches. Besides this Inconvenience there is abundance of drift Sand when the Wind sits from the Shore, which oftentimes swallows the Ships which lie upon the same.

Beyond Maragnan lie two Roads, the first between the Promontory Arbres and the Isle St. Anna, but dangerous; the other, discover’d some years since, reaches to the Fort of Maragnan, and is as dangerous as the first.

This Island hath twenty seven Villages, by the Natives call’d Oc or Tave, each Village consisting of four Houses made of great Stakes, and cover’d with Palm-tree Leaves against the Rain, each House being thirty Foot broad, and from two hundred to five hundred Paces long, according to the greater or lesser number of Inhabitants. The first Village, opposite to St. Anna, is call’d Timbohu; the second, well known for two eminent Fishing-places, is Itapara; but the two biggest are Juniparan and Eussaouap, each having about five or six hundred Inhabitants.

This Island of Maragnan lies under a temperate Climate, being seldom troubled with excessive Colds, Droughts, pestilential Vapors, Wind, Hail, or Thunder, only it Lightens Morning and Evening in serene Weather. When the Sun returns from the Tropick of Capricorn to the North, then it Rains for six Weeks together; but when he declines from Cancer towards the Southern Solstice, the Trade-Wind, or Eastern Breezes rise at seven of the Clock in the Morning, but grow fainter towards Sun-setting.

Fruitful Soil and rich Coast of Maragnan.

The Soil of Maragnan is exceeding fruitful, producing abundance of Brasile Wood, Sugar, Cotton, the red Colour Roucou, Tobacco, Balsam not inferior to the Arabian, Pepper, and all manner of Fruits. On the Coast is often found excellent Amber-greece and Jasper Stones, which the Inhabitants wore in their Lips. In some places along the Sea-shore appear Rocks of red and white Stone Diaphanous, like Crystal, which (some say) are as hard as Diamonds, and call’d Allencon. The Woods produce Timber, and the Shore Stones and Shells, of which they make Mortar. There are also several pleasant Fields and Hills, whose Feet are wash’d by delightful Brooks, along which they pass in Canoos from one Village to another. The Woods consist most of Palm-Trees, amongst which breed all sorts of Fowls and Beasts.

Fruit-Trees.

The chiefest of the Fruit-Trees which grow here is the Accayou, which being much bigger than our Pomewaters, hath Leaves not unlike those of an Oak: and also a Nut resembling a Sheeps Kidney, cover’d with a hard Shell, which incloses an oylie Pith. Out of these the Islanders press a very wholsom and pleasant Liquor; as also out of the Pacoeira and Bannanas, both excellent Plants, which will grow in any Ground. This Plant they pluck up by the Roots wild as soon as it hath put forth three Leaves; which Leaves being rowl’d up hard together like a Twig, are again Set, and then sprout up each with ten green Leaves, which when mov’d by the Wind, rattle like Parchment, and tear very easily: the Stalk is an Inch thick, from which spread several lesser Branches; under the Leaves hang yellowish Flowers of a pleasant smell, at whose Stalks are lesser Leaves resembling little Scoups, full of Juice, in taste like Honey, and in colour like the White of an Egg: after the Flower follows the Fruit, very like a Cucumber, onely they are three square, and have a hardish Shell, which incloses a well tasted and wholsom Pulp, which commonly grows in Clusters. This Plant, when the Fruit is ripe, is pluck’d up, from whence another springs up immediately, which bears the like Fruit the next year; so that this Plant lives as it were by propagation continually.

The Bannanas bear Leaves of a Fathom long and two Foot broad; the Fruit is very like that of the Pacoeira.

The Mangaa is very like the Apricock both in taste and form.

The Tree Jaracaha hath a spread Crown, leaves like those of a Fig-Tree, yellow Flowers, and Pears with Shells, and full of Kernels.

The Ouaieroua is an exceeding sweet-smelling Tree, bears a Fruit much bigger than the greatest Melons.

The Junipap, which is much taller, hath Apples, which whilest they are green are best, yielding a Juice which Dyes Coal-black, and therefore is us’d by the Natives to paint their Bodies with: The Apples when ripe are yellow within and without, very well tasted, and melting in the Mouth.

Besides these fore-mention’d Fruit-Trees there are several others that grow on this Island, amongst which is the Vua-pirup, eminent for its Blossom, which is yellow, blue, and red, and bears delicate Apples, which ripen best in the rainy Season.

Lastly, the Pekey, which three Men cannot Fathom, bears a Fruit of two handfuls bigness, having a hard thick Shell, and within four Kidney-like Kernels, each concealing a prickly Stone, which hurts the Mouths of unwary Eaters.

The Plant Carouata hath Leaves an Ell long, and two Inches broad; they are very thick and thistly from the middle, and about two Foot from the Ground grows an exceeding pleasant Fruit, yellow without and within, three square, a Finger long, and hanging oftentimes sixty in a Cluster.

Vua, a sort of Melons, green without, and within full of white Pulp and black Kernels, and hath a pleasant Juice, dissolves to Water, if cut in the middle, sweeter than Sugar, and very refreshing.

Manioch, a thick Root of the Plant Manicup, Leav’d like a Fig-Tree; being ground to Meal, it serves in stead of Bread.

Besides these already mention’d, there are several other Plants, the most usual are the great flat Beans call’d Commanda-ouassou, and the long Pease Commanda-miry.

Strange Birds.

Here are variety of Birds of several sorts, especially of Parrots, which flye in great Companies, most beautiful to the Eye, and very docible to speak, and also good for Food.

The Partridges Nanbououassou, in bigness no way inferior to a Capon, have blue Feathers, and also Lay blue Eggs.

The Ourou, resembling a Partridge, hath a Combe like a Cock, but mix’d with three Colours, viz. red, black, and white.

The Bats, nam’d Andheura, have a mournful Note in the Night, often biting those they find asleep, and suck their Blood so hard that it can hardly be stopt.

The Ostriches here call’d Yandou, being as tall as a middle-siz’d Man, cannot flye, but run as swift as a Greyhound.

Their Fowl call’d Falian, with long Bills and Cranes Legs, flies very low, but runs so swift that a Horse can scarce overtake them.

Strange sorts of Fish.

The Ocean about Maragnan produces abundance of all sorts of Fish, and amongst others the Pyraon, six Foot long, thicker than a Barrel, and cover’d with black Scales of a hand-breadth.

The Fish Camouroupouy differs not much from the Pyraon, onely in having fewer Scales.

The Ougry, four Foot long, hath a broad Head, and two sharp Fins on the Back, which wound terribly. This Fish also swimming in the River, smells of Musk whilest it stays therein.

The like length hath also the Camboury Ouassou, whose Hog-like Head, and yellow scal’d Tail, makes it seem like a Monster.

The Yauebouyre is a Foot in thickness, in length two Fathom, and a Fathom in breadth, and hath a Tail of half a Fathom long, out of the middle of which flicks a sharp and great Bone, which makes such dangerous Wounds, that if any part of a Man’s Body be touch’d therewith, it must be cut off.

The Narinnary, which is much lesser, wounds with its Sting very dangerously.

The flat Fish Acaraiou hath the length of a Foot, a green Head, thick Scales, a yellow Back, and white Belly.

The Araououa hath a hard Skin, is eight times bigger than the Acaraiou and hath a three-pointed Sword, with which it kills other Fish.

Another sort of Sword-fish is the Panapans, whose Sword is a Foot less than that of the Araououa.

The Picamo and Caramourou resemble the Pilchard, and are taken in great abundance near the Rocks.

The Rivers and Brooks on Maragnan are also very full of Fish, amongst which the Pourake, four Foot long, full of green, blue, red and white Specks and Streaks, the Skin so hard that no Sword can penetrate it; wherefore it regards not a blow, but if it moves, it causes such a pain on the Arm of him that strikes, that he falls down on the Ground.

The Caurimata, which is very like a Carp, is the most delicious Fish that ever was tasted.

The Pyrain, without Scales, colour’d red and yellow, hath sharp Teeth, which cut sloapingly; as also the Opean, Tarehure, Paraty, and Jerou.

The red Crabs Oussa, with hairy Legs, breed about the Roots of the fore-mention’d Trees that grow in the Water.

The white Crabs Aouara-oussa carry the Amber-greece, cast on the Shores to their Holes.

They have also good Mussles, and well rellish’d Oysters sticking on the Boughs of the said Trees.

During the rainy Season there are generally standing Pools, in which yearly breed many Fishes, which are taken up by the Inhabitants when the Pools begin to dry.

Divers kinds of strange Beasts.

Moreover, this Island feeds abundance of four-footed Beasts, amongst which their wild Deer, Rabbets and Hares, differ little from the European. They have also wild Swine call’d Taiassou, who seem to have Navels on their Backs, which cast a sweet Musky smell; besides another sort of Swine, not inferior to the former, but of a stranger shape, being Mouth’d like a Hare, with two long Tusks in their upper Jaws, and two beneath; their Ears like a Mans; the foremost Feet white, and hoof’d like an Ass; the hindermost part of their Body like a Bear, and full of Bristles, half white and half black, three handfuls long: when they creep in their Holes their staring Bristles fall; they keep much amongst Brambles, feed on Apples and Roots; In the Winter Season they Stye themselves up in their Holes.

Here are also Pismire-eaters, call’d Tamandua, with a Boars Head, Dogs Ears, sharp Snout, Horses Hair, and Ox Feet.

The Tapiyre-ete differ little from wild Cows, onely they have shorter Legs and Tails, and wanting Horns, are Arm’d in stead thereof with Teeth; in their Heads are often found a Stone like the Bezoar Stone.

Several sorts of Armadillo’s here differ much in form each from the other.

The wild Cats Margaia are caught for their curious Skin.

The Foxes Janovare, and Leopards Sovassovaran, both curiously mark’d, are very ravenous.

Here is also a deform’d slow creeping Beast call’d Ai, whose Head is like a Mans, and cover’d with rough and grey Hair, on each Foot three Claws close together, and at least a Finger long, sharp Teeth, a smooth high black Nose, little drowsie Eyes, no Ears, a Tail small above and broad at the bottom, long Ash-colour’d Hair over all the Body; and being about the bigness of a Fox, it climbs slowly up the Trees, and comes not down before it hath eaten off all the Leaves; it feeds also on Earth, and sometimes sits on a high Bough without Meat twenty days together; it goes so softly, that it will hardly clear fifty Paces in twenty four hours.

On this Island are likewise all sorts of Apes and Monkies, amongst which is one most remarkable, call’d The Zimme Cayon, hairy all over, with a long white Beard, an old Mans Face, bald Ears, black Eyes and long Tail, which they wind about a Bough, and so hanging, swing themselves from one Tree to another; they are very fierce as well as subtile, for being wounded with an Arrow, they set upon their Enemy without the least fear; when they climb up the Trees, they carry their Mouths and Hands full of Stones to throw at Travellers; and if any one of them chance to be wounded, all the rest that are near come to help him, and stop the Wound with Leaves, and the like; the young ones hang upon the Backs of their Dams, who run very swift with them, and leap from one Tree to another.

Juan Ardenois relates, That the Coyons play at certain Games with the Natives for Money, and spend what they win in publick Houses.

Joseph de Acosta tells us, That one of these kind of Creatures being sent to a Tavern for Wine, would not part with his Money before his Pot was fill’d, which he defended from the Boys that offer’d to take it from him, by throwing Stones at them; and though it lov’d Wine very well, yet brought it always home without tasting.

It is no less wonderful what Peter Martyr relates of one of these Creatures, viz. That observing one ready to fire a Gun at him, before he could discharge, it leap’d from the Tree and snatch’d up a Child, which he held as a Buckler before him.

The Sagovin.

The Sagovin resembles a Lyon in the fore-part of the Body, with shaggy Hair; they are exceeding dainty and tender, yet so stubborn and sullen, that they take pet at the least affront, and often pine themselves away and die with hunger.

The Boyete, and other sorts of Serpents.

The Serpent Boy-ete, two Fathoms long, without Legs, having a bright speckled Skin and four sharp Teeth, wounds also mortally with its Tail; but is the less dangerous, because at the end of the Tail grows a Bladder, which moving rattles as if there were Pease in it, which gives notice to the Traveller, though unwary, by which means he makes his escape.

The other Serpents call’d Jouboy, Tara-gouyboy, and Tarehuboy, serve the Natives for a great Delicacy; as also the great Toads or Frogs, call’d Tourourou.

They have also a sort of Flies call’d Ton, which exceedingly molest them, against which their chiefest Medicine is Palm-tree Oyl, and the Roucou, with which they colour their Skins.

The Natives of this Island of Maragnan, driven out of the pleasant Countrey Cayete by the Portuguese, are a sort of the Toupinambas, who Setled here about a hundred and fifty years ago. The time of their first coming hither us’d formerly to be solemniz’d with the great Feast call’d Caoven; but because a Woman boldly set upon a Commander in his Cups, there arose a great Tumult amongst them, and ever since the Island hath been divided, one Party calling the other Tobaiares, that is, We are Enemies: They are so inveterate against one another, that who e’re they take Prisoners they unmercifully devour: Both are of a middle Stature, have flat Noses, which the Midwives make at the Birth of the Child, they are generally a strong People, and many of them living a hundred years, without being grey, bald, or sick; they live temperate, and under a wholsom Climate: Some of their Women bear Children (as they say) till they are eighty years of age, which being born white, turn to be of a Tawny colour, by being anointed with Suet call’d Roucon, and Oyl; otherwise they are well proportion’d. The Men pluck out all the Hair of their Foreheads, but suffer it to hang pretty long over their Ears, and behind. The Women let their Hair hang down to their Middle, and wear woodden Ear-rings, but the Men hang green Beads in their Lips, and thrust little Bones through their Noses. They go all stark naked, their Legs are colour’d black with the Juice of the Herb Junipap, and upon the other parts of their Body appear Figures of several Representations. Those that will manifest their Valor, and be accounted hardy, gash their Bodies all over with Wounds, which they heal in such a manner, that the Scars may more plainly appear. They never come to their usual Feasts, but dress’d up in various colour’d Feathers; upon the Crown of their Heads they wear Caps stuck with Plumes, which they call Acangoap, or Coronets, call’d Acangerar; about their Necks, the Necklaces Aiouacava; over their Shoulders, the Mantles Assoyave; their Garters they call Tabacoura, at which they hang hollow Nutshells full of little Stones, which gingle and rattle as they go, and about their Arms Armlets call’d Mapouyh-couaychovare; all which are curiously checker’d with various colour’d Feathers.

The Maragnans live not much up in the Countrey, but rather on the Sea-Coast, because of their Fishing, removing every sixth year, calling the Village where they Settle, by the former Name.

They take every Man as many Wives as he pleaseth, but the Women must stick each to one Man, unless she be Divorc’d from him, which often happens upon small occasions.

Their Cotton Hammocks call’d Yu, on which they sleep, hang between two Stakes, in which they lie.

Singular Friends and Relations Feast one another daily; but they are cruel and revengeful against their neighboring Enemies, whom, when they take any of them, they fatten, kill, and eat. The least affront done them, or injurious word spoken to them, or against their Predecessors, makes them take up Arms, which consist of Bowes and Arrows, which they call Ouyrapar and Oune.

Here the French have built the Fort St. Lovis on an Island, from whence Westward may be seen the Cape Tapouytapere, which at High-water seems like an Island, and lies four Leagues from thence; at Low-water they can walk over the Sands from the same to the Main Land.

This fruitful Countrey hath twenty populous Villages.

Westward lies Comma, which gives Denomination to the chief Village, the River, and the rest of that Countrey, wherein are sixteen more handsom Villages, better built, and more populous than Maragnan or Tapouytapere.

Concerning the building of the fore-mention’d Fort on Maragnan, it hapned as followeth:

The occasion of building the Fort Maragnan.

A Colony of French sent over into the Island of Maragnan.

Driven out by the Portuguese.

The French Captain Riffaut, upon the Advice of Ouyrapive, who bore a great sway amongst his Maragnan Subjects, fitted out three Ships; but because of a Contention between the Sea-men, and the loss of his chiefest Vessel, he was forc’d to Sail to France, and leave some of his Men on Maragnan, under the Command of a young Gentleman call’d De Vaux, who carry’d himself so discreetly amongst the Islanders, that they promis’d to embrace the Christian Religion, if new Supplies came from France to assist them against their Enemies; of which De Vaux advis’d the French King Henry the Fourth, who approv’d of it, and sent Monsieur De la Ravardiere to Maragnan, to make a farther Enquiry into the whole Matter, where he spent six Moneths; after which returning he found the King murder’d, wherefore the Business lay dead for a while; but at length Ravardiere took with him the Lord Rosilly, and the Baron of Sansi, desiring some Capuchins of the Queen-Mother, for the promulgating of the Christian Religion in Maragnan; which being granted, they set Sail with three Ships Anno 1612. with which arriving safely there, and Landing, he built next the chiefest Haven the Fort St. Lewis on a Hill, by whose foot two Rivers glide into the Ocean. After which this new Plantation went on for a considerable time, till the Portuguese overpowering them, drove them out of this their new Field, making themselves absolute Masters of the Fort, and also of the great Mountain Ibouyapap, four Leagues high, plain on the top, twenty four Leagues long, and little less in breadth. No Champain under the Sun is more pleasant and fruitful than this; for in some places it is shaded with Trees, in others hath brave Pastures, lies under a wholsom Climate, and abounds with fresh Springs, from whence are deriv’d store of Brooks, and Rivulets full of Fish.

Sect. XI.
The Lordships Tamarica, Rio Grande, Siara, and Para.

Description of the Lordship of Tamarica.

The Præfecture of Tamarica, not above three Leagues in length and two in breadth, so call’d from a little Island lying before it, and part of its Precinct, is counted the first, that is, the most ancient Lordship of Brasile, having otherwise nothing in it that is very considerable, save onely a good Haven or Port, with a Castle for the Security or Command of it, held to be impregnable, and so found by the Dutch, who under Peter Heyn and Stein Callenfels in vain attempted the taking of it, as shall be mention’d hereafter more particularly, but made it useless to the Portuguese, by making a Bulwark at the Mouth of the Haven, and so blocking it up.

This Capatania yielded formerly a Rent of thirty thousand Ducats to the Earls of Montesanto, whose Right it was.

Description of the Lordship of Rio Grande.

The Præfecture of Rio Grande, a small Precinct, so denominated, as lying on the South-side of that great River which the Portuguese call Rio Grande, and the Natives Potingi, where it falls into the Sea, was once possess’d by the French about the Year 1597. who were outed by the Portuguese, and the Place fortifi’d both against them and the Salvages, (of whom they slew and took Prisoners very great numbers) with a Castle, which the Dutch in the Year 1631. found an impregnable piece, and too hard for them to take.

Description of the Lordship of Siara.

The Præfecture of Siara, so denominated from the Haven; it hath long been in the possession of the Portuguese, but they have therein no Towns of note, onely a Castle, and some few Houses for those that attend the gathering of Cotton-Wool, and Manuring of the Sugar-Canes, which are here in great abundance, also the Countrey is said to afford some Crystal and other Precious Stones.

Description of the Lordship of Para.

Lastly, the Præfecture of Para is the most Northerly part of Brasile, bordering upon Guiana, so call’d from the River Para, which runneth through the midst of it, upon which, in a convenient place, and upon rais’d Ground, the Portuguese have built a very strong Castle, well Wall’d on all sides, save onely towards the River, where it is planted with Ordnance: It is built in a quadrangular form, and hath at least three hundred Persons of the Portuguese Nation (besides the Garrison Soldiers) belonging to it, who have all Employment enough about the Cotton-Wool, Sugar-Canes, and Tobacco, which the Countrey is said to afford in great plenty.

A Relation of the Proceedings of the Netherland West-India Company in Brasile to the Year 1658.

The chief Disturbers of the Portuguese in the possession of the Countrey of Brasile, were the United Netherlanders; for they having had good success with their first Fleet, under the Command of John Molenaer, John Dignumszoon, John Schelinger, Simon Mau, and the Merchants Cornelis Woodman, Gerard Beveningen, and Heinier van Hel, Anno 1595. in the East-Indies, where they got such footing, that they took whole Kingdoms, to the great enriching of the Eastern World, where they spread their Trade over the whole Countrey, were thereupon emboldned to venture also to the West, that thereby they might cut off the Sinews of the King of Spain’s Wars, he being continually supply’d with Treasures from America.

A West-India Company erected by the United States.

St. Salvador set upon by the Dutch under Peterszoon and Willekens.

St. Salvador taken by the Dutch.

The grand Promoters of this Design were the Company of Merchants, who hitherto had Traded to Guinee; and the rather, because Guinee brought them but little Profit. But to set upon the Spanish Power, was a Business of no small Consequence; nevertheless they undertaking it, obtain’d Letters Patents from the States of the United Netherlands, Anno 1621. for erecting of a West-India Company, in which it was declar’d, That none without the said Companies leave should drive any Trade to Africa from the Northern Tropick, to the Cape Bonne Esperance; nor to America from Terre-Neuf to the Straights of Magellan, or Le Maire; nor in the South Sea to Anian; which if any attempted, they should forfeit Ship and Goods; besides several other Priviledges and Immunities granted towards the promoting and establishing of the said Company. After a long Consultation which way to steer their Course, it was concluded upon in the Council for the Affairs of the Company, to Invade St. Salvador in the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, whether they sent twenty Men of War and three Ketches, Commanded by Jacob Willekens, and Peter Peterszoon Hein; the Land Forces being under the Command of Colonel John van Dorth. In the beginning of the Year 1624. the Fleet set Sail out of the Texel and the Maes, and in five Moneths arriv’d at St. Salvador. As soon as the Portugueses discover’d the Dutch Fleet, they shot without ceasing from the Fort Philippo with three Brass Guns, as also from the Castle Tapagipe, with four Demi-Canons, but chiefly from the Battlement rais’d threesquare out of the Water before St. Salvador, from whence they play’d at them with twelve great Guns, whilest the Vice-Admiral ran within Musquet-shot of the said Battlement with three Ships, and found fifteen Portuguese Vessels lying near the Shore not far from the Castle Philippo, where there began a sharp Conflict, to the no small advantage of Peter Hein; who thereupon ventur’d with three Boats to Board the fifteen Ships: which resolute Attempt of the Dutch Seamen so amaz’d the Portuguese, that they set their biggest Ships on Fire, and fled ashore: Those Ships that escap’d, being in all ten, the Hollanders took and brought them to the Fleet. This flight of the Portuguese encouraging Peter Hein, he went with fourteen Boats, each Mann’d with two hundred Arm’d Men upon the very Mouths of the Cannons to the fore-mention’d Battlement and took the same, notwithstanding the Stone Wall rose eight Foot out of the Water, and above a hundred Portuguese defended it, whilest the Admiral Willekens sent twelve hundred Soldiers, and two hundred and forty Seamen ashore with Field-Pieces. The Forlorn-Hope consisted of sixty Musquetteers, led by Captain Helmond, who was seconded by Lieutenant La Main, all the Seamen following with Spades and Pick-axes; the Reserve was brought up by Captain Kyf, Ysenach, and William Schouten; thus drawn out, they were led towards the City by the Guides Dirk Colver and Dirk de Ruiter, along a narrow Way, which the Portuguese might have guarded with a few Men, had they not been all struck with a pannick fear, and making use of the dark Night, fled into the Woods. The Dutch found in the City an incredible Booty, because the Governor Diego Mendoza de Furtado had forbid the carrying away of any Goods, that so the Citizens might be the easier perswaded to defend the City; which they might well have done, had they not been surpris’d with the suddenness of the Action; for when Willekens Anchor’d here, there were above sixteen hundred Soldiers, besides a considerable number of Arm’d Citizens in St. Salvador; besides, in the Forts about the City on the Walls lay twenty three Brass, and twenty six Iron Guns.

This Victory was scarce obtain’d, when Colonel Dorth, who had lost the Fleet at Point Vincent, arriv’d here after all was done, and caus’d Edicts to be publish’d, in which the fled Citizens were promis’d greater Priviledges under the Netherlanders Protection, than ever they had under the King of Spain. Whereupon a few Portuguese return’d to the City; but the greatest part of them, and those the most considerable, were partly kept back by Command of the Bishop Teixera, who laid the fault concerning the loss of the City on the Governor Furtado, and partly because they judg’d the Netherlanders unable to defend them against the Spanish Power.

About the same time several rich laden Vessels arriv’d there from Lisbon, Janeiro, Spirito Santo, Angola and other Places, all ignorant of the Conquest of St. Salvador.

Col. Dorth kill’d by an Ambuscade.

Whilest Dorth and Willekens were ordering all things within the City, the outstaying Portuguese at last taking courage, Storm’d the City from Midnight till the next day in the Afternoon, but fearing they should be set upon behind unawares, Retreated; after which Dorth thinking he had been free from all fear of Enemies, and with a small Guard riding out of the City to take a view of the adjacent Countrey, was scarce got a Bowe-shot from the Walls, when a great Body of Brasilians rush’d forth unexpectedly from an Ambuscade, and wounded him so mortally, that he fell dead from his Horse, and had his Head suddenly chopt off, and his Body mangled very terribly.

Allart Schouten being chosen Governor in Dorth’s stead, took no care to fortifie the City; and after his Decease his Brother William Schouten succeeding him, regarded it less, so that all things went to ruine, every one striving onely to enrich themselves. Amongst other Booties, they took the rich laden Vessel which Francisco de Sarmiento, Governor of Chili, brought to St. Salvador, with fifty eight thousand Guilders, and a much greater sum of Gold and Pearls, all which was imbezled away.

Description of St. Salvador.

This City St. Salvador, built by Thomas de Sosa along the Sea-side, runs up broad at the Suburb Carmo, hath four Market-places, into the biggest whereof, being of a long square, run nine Streets, the chief of which being very broad, hath many stately Houses. The second Market-place is of like form, onely it winds a little towards the Right, and at the Entrance stands a strong Prison. The Cloyster St. Francis, inhabited by Jesuits, stands in a Park near the Wall by which the Moat runs. Towards the Sea-side they have a second Structure, much statelier than the Franciscan Cloyster. Near the Prison stands the Armory, and somewhat farther the great Church, which Anno 1624. was not quite finish’d. The Church dedicated to the Virgin Mary appears with a high Spire near the Gate Bento, without which the great Cloyster Bento is built; but the chief Church is St. Salvador. On the utmost Point towards the South-West of the City lies the Fort Antonio, between which and the City stands a very neat Pleasure-house, belonging to the Bishop. Besides Antonio there are four other considerable Forts, viz. Diego, St. Maria, De Gracia, and Vittoria. About half way between Vittoria and the Cloyster Bento, stands the Castle with four Bulwarks; but on the North-side the City is guarded by the Forts St. Peter, Philippo, and Tapecipe.

A great Fleet set out by the King of Spain for the recovery of St. Salvador.

The Spanish King seeming exceedingly concern’d at the loss of so eminent a Place, fitted out a great Fleet for the recovery of what had been taken from him; but the Netherland West-India Company having notice of it, put themselves into a posture of Defence, and in a short time made ready eighteen Men of War and seven Ketches, Mann’d with a thousand six hundred and ninety Seamen, and a thousand three hundred and fifty Land-Soldiers, John Dirkszoon Lam being Admiral: But news coming day after day of the extraordinary Preparations in Spain, it was judg’d convenient to strengthen the Fleet with fourteen Ships and two Ketches more, carrying a thousand four hundred and thirty Seamen, and five hundred eighty Soldiers, under the Command of General Boudewyn Henrickszoon, and Admiral Andries Veron. Moreover, the West-India Company fitted out a third Fleet, consisting of four Frigats and three Ketches, Commanded by Henry Kat, with Orders to Cruise along the Spanish Coast.

In the beginning of the Year 1625. Frederick de Toledo weighed Anchor from Cales with one and thirty Gallions, four Pinnaces, three Tartans, and a Carvel, all carrying seventy five hundred Men. The Soldiers were divided into three Regiments, Commanded by the Colonels Pedro Osorio, Juan Orellana, and the Marquess De Torreclusa.

St. Salvador re-taken by the Spaniards from the Hollanders.

Near St. Jago at the African Cape Verde, Toledo joyn’d with the Portuguese Fleet, consisting of twenty one Gallions and fourteen Carvels and Barques, Mann’d with four thousand Seamen, two Regiments of Soldiers, Commanded by Antonio Nunnez Barreio, and Francisco de Almeida; but the chief Commander of this Fleet was Emanuel Meneses. Which great Fleet being arriv’d at St. Salvador, Toledo himself Landed at the Fort Antonio, leaving the Command of the Fleet to Juan Fajardo: The first thing he did, was to set upon the Cloyster Bento; which having gain’d, he left Serjeant Troppani with two Regiments in the same, whilest he went and Storm’d the Carmelites Minster, and at last took it; but in the mean time four hundred Hollanders Sallying out, made a furious Onset upon the two Regiments, who had possession of the Cloyster Bento, where the Spaniards sustain’d considerable damage; for besides the wounding of three Captains, and the loss of a great number of Soldiers, there were slain the Commanders Emanuel Aquitara, Alonso de Gana, Pedro San Stevan, Diego Espinosa, and Colonel Pedro Osorio; But Toledo no whit dismay’d hereat, but taking fresh courage, brought twenty nine Demi-Culverins ashore, which fir’d so vehemently out of the Carmelites and Bento’s Cloysters, on the seventeen Dutch Ships that lay near the Shore, that several of them were sunk, and others shatter’d beyond hopes of ever being repair’d. After this the Spanish Army was divided into three several Parties, which continually fir’d on the City from three new rais’d Works; the chiefest Party, which was in the Carmelites Minster, had twenty three Brass Guns; the second, plac’d on the great Wall of the Cloyster Bento, fir’d Night and Day with eight Demy-Cannons on the City, in which all things were in a confusion, whilest the Governor William Schouten went unconcern’d from one Tavern to another railing at the Soldiers, who thereupon mutinying and deposing him, chose Serjeant Hans Ernst Kyf in his room, who, as he was calling a Council of War, receiv’d a Summons from Toledo to deliver up the City; at which Kyf being much surpris’d, sent a Drummer with a Letter to Toledo, desiring him to grant the Besieged three Weeks time to repair and make fit their batter’d Vessels to carry them back for Holland; and also that they might, according to Martial Custom, march out with lighted Matches, flying Colours, Bullets in their Mouths, and with Bag and Baggage. To which Toledo return’d Answer, That he was now in his own Countrey, and had gotten possession of four Fortifications about St. Salvador, on which he had planted thirty seven Cannons, and therefore saw no such necessity to grant the Besieged (who could not possibly expect any fresh Supplies) such advantageous and bold Demands; and onely promis’d them their Lives should be at his discretion. Yet at last William Stoop, Hugh Antoniszoon, and Francis du Chesne being sent to the Carmelites Cloyster, agreed with Toledo on these Conditions: That the Hollanders should surrender St. Salvador in the Condition it was then in, march out unarm’d, but with Baggage, and have a free Passage with Provisions and all things necessary allow’d them for their Transportation for Holland. Whereupon on the first of May the City was deliver’d up to the Spaniards in such disorder, that some of them had taken possession of the Gate Bento, before those on the other side of the City knew of any Agreement that was made between Toledo and Colonel Kyf. And thus the Place which had a whole year been under the Jurisdiction of the Netherlanders, fell again under the possession of the Spanish Crown, onely through the indiscreet management of the Commanders; for otherwise it was sufficiently strong, and well stor’d with Ammunition and Men, being able to make out two thousand. Moreover, the Ketch De Haes, was set out before from the Holland Fleet, and brought news of the Forces that were sent from the Netherland Havens to their assistance: But the Ships under Admiral Lam, as also those under Boudewyn Henriczoon, were stay’d a considerable time in their Harbors by contrary Winds, and at last reaching the Line were becalm’d, and through the excessive heat of the Climate many Men lost by raging and mortal Distempers, insomuch that they reach’d not the Bay Todos los Sanctos before the twenty sixth of May, on which they saw the Spanish Flag streaming from the Walls of St. Salvador, and fifty great Ships riding at an Anchor near the Shore.

The City Porto Rico surpriz’d by Henrickszoon.

Capt. Uzeel slain.

The Netherland Fleet, divided into four Squadrons, consisted of thirty four Sail, amongst which Lam carry’d the Flag on the Main-top, the Vice-Admiral Adrian Cheszoon on the Fore-top, the Rere-Admiral Andries Veron on the Main-mast, and the Commander of the fourth Squadron on the Mizne-top: All of them seeing the Spaniards absolute Masters, judg’d it most convenient to put to Sea; but standing a pretty while to the South, they found that the strong Current drove them to the Shelves on the West-side of the Inlet; wherefore Tacking about, they made towards the Enemy, who at first seem’d to meet them with twenty eight great Ships, but returning towards the City, the Hollanders also stood to Sea again, Steering Southerly, though without making much advantage in their Way, the Sea going very hollow, and the strong Current setting them towards the Shore, by which means they were in no small danger before the River Francisco, where many of the Men dy’d for want of fresh Provisions, and the number of the Sick increas’d daily, insomuch that some of the Ships were like to perish for want of Men to guide them: It was also judg’d dangerous to lie longer with such a great Fleet near a Lea-Shore, therefore they put into the Inlet Trayciaon, which lies a League to the Northward of the River Monguapigape, from whence a ridge of Rocks extends to Trayciaon, and being overflow’d at High-water, hath three Openings or Entrances, two for great Ships, and one, the most Northern, for small Vessels to pass through: The Sea also breaking against this Cliff never molests the Ships whatever Winds blow. The Countrey is overgrown with Brambles, and hath a Lake two Leagues long, and a quarter broad, on the opposite Shore of which stood a Village, inhabited by Portugueses and Brasilians; but the Portugueses flying from thence left the Brasilians in absolute possession: The Hollanders going thither found thirty Chests of Sugar in one Hut; after which the Admiral Lam caus’d his sick Men to be brought ashore, whilest the Captains Boshuisen, Swart, Dyke, Stapels, and Uzeel, march’d up into the Countrey, where they got plenty of Oranges and Cattel. In the mean time the Ketch Vosken, Mann’d with thirty six Seamen, Cruising along the Sea-Coast of Brasile, took three Ships, one out of the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, laden with Sugar and Tobacco, another with the same Merchandise from Pernambuco, and the third laden with Wines from Madera. On the first of August the Fleet set Sail again, to the great sorrow of the Brasilians, who out of hopes of being protected by them against the Portuguese, had joyn’d their Forces with theirs; but now being forsaken, they expected nothing but utter Ruine; which to escape, many of them desir’d to be admitted to go along with the Fleet, which had been granted them, had not the Hollanders wanted Provisions for themselves. The Fleet getting off at Sea, the Admiral Veron ran with twelve Sail to the Coast of Africa; and Boudewyn Henrickszoon kept eighteen Ships under his Command, the rest returning home with Admiral Lam: and thus the Fleet left the unfortunate Haven Trayciaon, where above seven hundred Dutch Seamen were bury’d. Boudewyn Henrickszoon refreshing at Cape St. Vincent, steer’d Westerly, when a Storm (which in twenty four hours blew from all Points of the Compass) surprising him, broke his Main-mast, separated the whole Fleet, and sunk the Flushing Frigat; at last getting beyond the Isle Virgin Gorda, the Fleet meeting again, got to Juan de Porto Rico about the latter end of September; into whose Haven Henrickszoon Sail’d with great courage, notwithstanding the narrow Mouth thereof was guarded by a strong Fort full of Brass Guns, which fir’d very fiercely upon him, who on the other side was not idle in discharging his Guns on the Fort; and had not the shallow Water before the City prevented his Landing that day, he had gotten a far greater Booty than afterwards he met with; for the Inhabitants had, during the Low-water, remov’d all their best Goods: but the next Morning before Sun-rising, the Admiral Landed with eight hundred Men, march’d into the City without any resistance, pitch’d the States Flag on the Governor’s House, guarded all Avenues, unhoop’d all the Wine-Casks which he found there, for fear his Men should make themselves Drunk therewith, and so neglect their Duty, fir’d from the Land-side towards the Castle with three Brass Guns, gain’d the Redoubt, built for the security of the Bridge, which unites the small Isle on which Porto Rico is built with the great, rais’d a Platform, from whence he fir’d Day and Night with six Cannons, guarded by Captain Thyene, whilest the Commander Uzeel kept Watch near the Fort; but his Men being most of them sick, he could not do any great Exploits, especially since the Spaniards Sallying out, as they did daily, kill’d many of the Hollanders, and amongst them Captain Uzeel, after he had shot down two Turrets from the Castle, which damage the Enemy repair’d by taking several of the Hollanders Boats; by which means they could not prevent fresh Supplies from going to the Castle; the Besiegers in the mean time beginning daily to be in greater want for Ammunition and Provisions: whereupon Henrickszoon judg’d it convenient to sound a Retreat, after he had set the Ships belonging to the City Porto Rico on fire in four places. In which Retreat he receiv’d so many farewel Shots from the Fort, that they were forc’d to go to the Leeward to stop their Leaks, and leave one of their Ships to the Enemy, in lieu whereof the West-Capel Frigat took a Barque with four Brass Guns, in the little Haven Sierra Gorda; from whence the Fleet ran into the Western Bay of the Island Porto Rico, where whilest they repair’d and took in fresh Provisions, Henrickszoon sent the Ships Hester and Jonas richly laden for Holland; the remaining part of the Fleet meeting with strong contrary Tydes at Porto Rico, were necessitated to put into the Inlet Francisco, where they made several Marches up into the Countrey, to the loss of many of their Men, which were kill’d by the Spaniards, lying in Ambuscade amongst the Brambles that grew along by the Ways.

The Fort of Margarita taken by Henrickszoon.

Henrickszoon dying, is succeeded by Adrian Cheszoon.

In the middle of January, Anno 1626. Henrickszoon Sailing about the North of Porto Rico, steer’d to Dominico, and from thence along the Isles Martinigo, Luzia, and the Promontory De tres Puntas, towards the Island Margarita, where Landing, and Storming the Castle on the Land-side with fifteen Men, he gain’d the first Breastworks; but the Spaniards stopping up the Way along which they were to return, they had without doubt been all slain, had not the Captains Stapel and Estienne come to their assistance; for the Spaniards seeing them climbing up the Bulwarks, betook them to their Heels, after they had kill’d nine of the fore-mention’d fifteen, amongst whom were the Captains Urk and Molkman: of those that leap’d over into the Ditch most part escap’d; those few that were taken inform’d the Hollanders, That the Way towards the Village, inhabited by Spaniards, was every where stopt up with Barricado’s, through which none were able to pass. Henrickszoon thus become Master of the Fort, sent the Booty which he had gotten there, together with three Brass, and five Iron Guns, aboard of his Ship, blew up the Fort, burnt all the Houses, and ran into the Haven Muchina, to which he gave the Denomination of Port Maurice; where, besides a great number of dry’d Fish, he took forty Tun of Salt out of one Salt-pit. After this he taking in fresh Provisions at St. Fe, discover’d Aves, a low Isle full of high Trees, took above two hundred Sheep, and abundance of red Wood on Bonaire, and before the Coast a Spanish Frigat richly laden, made Inspections into the Havens of Hispaniola and Jamaica; from whence he fell back on the Coast of Porto Rico, about the Island Mona, where discovering four Spanish Ships, he took three of them, and burnt the fourth; he also got abundance of Tortoises and Crocodiles on the great Caiman, and took a new Ship between the little sandy Isles Caios, as also before Cuba a Barque, which inform’d him, That the Fleet from the Honduras, as also that from New Spain, was daily expected at Havana: Thence Sailing into the Haven Cabannas, he took a new Vessel of a hundred Tun, and abundance of Timber and Carpenters Tools on the Shore; he Landed also with seven hundred Men on the East-side of the Haven, from whence he march’d along a narrow Path a League up into the Countrey, where he found a running Stream, Pastures full of Cattel, and a Village, the Inhabitants whereof being warn’d by the Barking of their Dogs, fled, and left all manner of fresh Provisions to the Hollanders, viz. above two thousand Oranges, abundance of Lemmons, Bananas, Hogs, Calves, and Bacon; all which having sent aboard, they burnt the Village: After this they took a Spanish Barque before Havana, as also a Ship laden with Timber, another Barque with Poultry, Cochenile, Money, and Haberdashery Ware, one Vessel with live Tortoises, and another, full of Salt, dry’d Fish, and some Merchandise. While the Fleet was thus Cruising up and down before Havana, the Admiral Henrickszoon dy’d; a Man of most approv’d Valor, and of great Conduct: After which Adrian Cheszoon carry’d the Flag; but the Men mutinying about the dividing of the Provisions, which began to grow very scarce, all things fell into great disorder; the Seamen rebell’d against their Commanders, saying, That they had been out long enough, and that they would not stay waiting any longer for the Fleet from New Spain or Honduras: Wherefore steering Home, they all arriv’d safe at the Texel and other places in Holland.

In our foregoing Relation we have given you an Account of the Fleet which came to assist the City of St. Salvador, divided into two Squadrons; eighteen Sail Boudewyn Henrickszoon kept under his Command, and twelve Sail remain’d in the Admiral Veron’s Squadron, who Sail’d to the Inlet Serre Leona, where he found the Admiral John Dirkszoon Lam with three Ships, which had lay’n there above two Moneths, by reason of the Sickness amongst the Seamen.

A strange kind of Baboon.

Frambore, King of this Place, granted Lam and Veron free liberty to Hunt, and to gather as many Oranges and Lemmons as they pleas’d, with which the Seamen were so refresh’d, that they set Sail again, and amongst many other things carry’d a Baboon with them from Sierra Leona, which so exactly resembled a Man, that it was wonderful to behold, having a Body, Hands, Eyes, Ears, Feet, and Actions like a Man, smoak’d Tobacco amongst the Seamen, made a noise like a Child when beaten. The Inhabitants of Sierra Leona, where these Monsters run in great Companies through the Woods, believe that the Souls of the Deceased reside in them.

John de Laet, in his annual Journal of the Transactions of the West-India Company, affirms, That he saw a Female of these monstrous Creatures, which usually had her monethly Flowers.

The Hollanders ill success before the Castle Del Mine.

The Fleet, as is before mention’d, Sailing from Sierra Leona, came to an Anchor at Commany, and Landed twelve hundred Men at Poquena, besides a hundred and fifty Negro’s; which Regiment Andries Veron and Arend Jacobszoon carry’d to the Castle Del Mine, whither they before sent a Company, Commanded by Hans Gryf, to prevent the Sallies of the Enemy. The Hollanders tir’d and thirsty, Encamp’d themselves near the Fort, and whilest some of the Men were seeking for Water, others smoaking Tobacco, and lying without their Arms and in disorder on the Ground, and the Commanders were taking a view of the Fort from a neighboring Hill, two hundred Negro’s fell upon the scatter’d Army with great rage and fury, and so much the greater, in regard the Portuguese had promis’d them great sums of Money for every Hollander they kill’d: never any Army was in such a distraction, they being dispers’d and kill’d like so many Sheep, the Admiral Veron and all the Officers slain, and in a short time four hundred and forty Men cut off; and had not Captain Arend Jacobszoon been in League with the Inhabitants of Commany, whither the routed Regiments fled, not one Man had escap’d that bloody Slaughter: Nor was it to much purpose to Besiege the Castle Del Mine, because the Bullets hitting against the Walls of the Castle, built all of Rock-stones, did no Execution. But the four Ships inform’d of this miserable destruction, fell down to Commany, to fetch those that were left alive, and return’d home with the other eleven.

During the unfortunate Expedition of this Fleet, the West-India Company fitted out nine great Ships and five Ketches in the beginning of the Year 1626. under the Command of Peter Peterszoon Hein, to Cruise for the Spanish Ships that were expected from New Spain and Honduras.

The Fox Frigat being sent before to inform Henrickszoon of Heyn’s coming, reach’d about the latter end of May beyond the Isles Dominico, Guadalupa, Mevis, St. Christophers, and by Santa Crux; there not finding a Harbor on the South-side, because of the Rocks, she Sail’d from Mona over to the Main Coast, where seven Leagues Westward of Carakess, he discover’d a high broken Land, whose Mountains seem’d to reach to the Clouds; from thence she steer’d to the Promontory Caldera, the Isles Margareta and Coche, on which last he took abundance of Goats, not without the loss of forty six Men, kill’d by the Spaniards and Indians.

Mean while the Admiral Peter Heyn, in the beginning of June, Sail’d to the Southward of Barbados, an Island pretty mountainous, as hath been formerly mention’d, and full of Woods, and by Martinino, whose Hills are very high and overgrown with Trees. Here Peter Heyn could get nothing else but sweet Water, and a Fruit resembling a green Grape, which grew on a round Leav’d Tree, whose Juice cur’d the Scurvey. Sailing from hence, and Landing on Guadalupa, he found a Canoo seven Fathom long and one broad, and cut out of one Tree. The Inhabitants, a well timber’d People, went stark naked, and desir’d to be excus’d, that they could not furnish the Hollanders with more Provisions, because the French and English, Inhabitants of St. Christophers, had pillag’d them.

Success of the Dutch against the Portuguese Fleet.

Near Mona the Fox Frigat joyn’d with the Fleet, with information, that he could hear no tydings of Henrickszoon; wherefore Peter Heyn judg’d it convenient to Sail along the South-Coast of Hispaniola with a separated Fleet, which was to joyn again near the great Caiman. Near Cape de Corientes the Dutch took a Spanish Ship laden with Sarsaparilla; after that another with Salt and Fish, and on the Shelves before Coche before the Promontory Antonio, a Fly-boat with Tallow and Hides, and at the same places two Vessels more with Ballast, the Men whereof inform’d him, that the Fleet from New Spain had about a Moneth before weigh’d Anchor from the Haven Juan de Ulva, and set Sail to Havana, so that without doubt they were arrived there; wherefore Peter Heyn steer’d towards Tortugos, in hopes, if he could, to overtake some of the heavy Sailers. Before the Promontory De Florida he discover’d seven Sail, and coming up nearer, above thirty, which, had Henrickszoon been united with Peter Heyn, had without doubt fallen into the hands of the Netherlanders; but it being judg’d a madness to set upon so great a Fleet with so small a number of Ships, they Sail’d away undisturb’d. Peter Heyn steer’d his Course along Florida, where he met three Canoos with strange Men in them, who came aboard of him, their Bodies being naked, were painted with several colours, onely Mats of Rushes about their Middle, and on their Backs long Tassels hanging down: their Merchandise consisted of a sort of Gum of little value. The Netherlanders in this Place took also a Vessel with Sina Leaves, and some pounds of Ambergreece: but the Scurvey increasing daily amongst them, they Tack’d about, and ran to an Anchor at Sierra Leona, where they stay’d till the latter end of January 1627. and then set Sail to Brasile, and overtook a Vessel from Madera laden with a hundred and fifty Pipes of Wine, and other rich Goods, and ran into the Inlet Todos los Sanctos with undaunted courage, not regarding the Guns that were fir’d from the Fort and Battlements of the City St. Salvador, near which lay thirty Sail of Ships, to which he making up, steer’d between the Portuguese Admiral and Rere-Admiral, whom sinking, he forc’d the Admiral to surrender, whilest the Hollandia and Gelria Frigats fell upon the rest, which were forsaken by the Seamen, who leap’d over-board; then several Mann’d Boats of the Hollanders (notwithstanding the Enemy’s continual firing) went and fetch’d off twenty two Sail of the Portuguese Vessels; all which they did in three hours time, onely with the loss of fifty Men, besides some that were wounded, amongst whom was the Admiral, being shot with a Bullet through the Arm, and wounded in the Legs with a Splinter; his Ship also was, with the Gelria Frigat, driven with the Spring-Tide on a Bank, whence, after the Gelria had receiv’d above sixty Shot from the Enemy, they both got off at last; but the Admiral’s Frigat being shot in a manner to a Wreck, was set on fire, which Misfortune ended not there, for the Orange-tree Frigat blew up, with sixty Men, fourteen whereof, though miserably scorch’d, had their Lives sav’d. Soon after which the Admiral sent into Holland the Ship St. Peter, the Hoop, Nostra Sennora de la Vittoria, and the Black-Lyon, which besides their Lading of Hides, Silver, Gold, and Precious Stones, were most of them full of Sugar; which safely arriving, did not a little encourage the West-India Company. After this Heyn took two Ships with Slaves from Angola, which because the Governor of St. Salvador would not redeem, were put ashore on Taperica. On the last of March he set Sail from the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, pass’d by Morro Pablo, and on Easter Eve with a strong Gale by the Abrolhos: before the Highland between Cape Frio and the River De Jenero, he discover’d two Sail, one whereof being laden with Sugar was taken, but the other escap’d in the Night; then Sailing on to the meandring Stream Spirito Sancto, he digg’d Pits on some of the River-Isles to get fresh Water, because it was not safe to Land on the Continent on each side, because the Inhabitants shot frequent showers of Arrows from the Thickets, in which they lay ambuscaded. Moreover the Town Spirito Sancto sent off several Fire-ships at the time of Flood, but they being easily quench’d did no harm. Here also a Vessel laden at Lisbon with Wines and Piece-Goods, was taken by Heyn, who setting Sail again divided the Fleet into three Squadrons, the Vice-Admiral Cornelis Oole keeping three Ships to Cruise withal before the River La Plata, Henrick Best had one Frigat, a Ketch, and a Carvel, to guard the Mouth of the Stream Jenero, whilest the Admiral himself Sail’d with four Frigats, three Ketches, and a Barque, towards the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, where two Ships riding near the Shore by the Fort Tapecipe, were by him set on fire. Also taking a Barque he was inform’d, that six laden Vessels lay in the River Tapecipe, whither he sending some Boats to explore the truth, they found a great Ship without Men in the Mouth of the Stream, and half a League farther six Portuguese Vessels lying near the Shore; bringing back news thereof to the Admiral, he went aboard of the Fox Ketch the next Morning, and taking two Ketches and several Boats with him, Sail’d up the River, and perceiv’d that the fore-mention’d six Ships were gotten up higher, and were Mann’d with a hundred and fifty Soldiers, Commanded by Captain Padilha; the Portuguese Admiral lying in Ambuscade, no sooner perceiv’d the Netherlanders Boats, but he let flie a whole Volley of small Shot at them, insomuch that it made them Retreat, and their whole Design had been fruitless, had not Heyn animated his Men to board the Vice-Admiral; which encouragement prov’d so successful that they master’d the same, killing all those that fell into their hands; which so amaz’d the two Vessels that lay by, that all the Men swam ashore, and left their rich Lading to the disposal of the Hollanders, besides which the vanquish’d Party lost above a hundred and fifty Men, and the Conquerors but fifteen. Somewhat farther up lay three Ships more, but the River being dry there at Low-water, and so narrow that the Trees on each Shore could touch one another, Heyn judg’d it convenient to prosecute the Design no farther, but to return with the three fore-mention’d Prizes, which he did not without great difficulty; for the Portuguese had rais’d Battlements on each side of the Mouth of the River Tapecipe, and stopt the same with a sunk Vessel, which Heyn himself set on fire at Low-water, and return’d untouch’d through thick Volleys of Shot, which flew about his Ears to the Fleet, leaving the three Ships to be fetcht off afterwards; to which end he commanded that they should hang some of the taken Hides about the Fox Ketch’s Pinnace, the Carvel and Boats, that so the Men which were in them might stand secure from the small Shot, and the rather, because the Ships could not be got out of the shallow and narrow River but by Toeing. Mean while the Governor of St. Salvador lay with a considerable number of Citizens and Soldiers behind the fore-mention’d Battlements, not doubting but to take revenge for the Losses sustain’d by Heyn; who nevertheless coming down thither Toed out the three Prize-ships with Boats hung about with Hides, firing into the Enemies Battlements with his great Guns, which he had put aboard of the Fox Ketch. About the middle of June he took in the Prize-goods in view of the City St. Salvador, where seven Netherland Ships from several places lay at an Anchor. Setting Sail from hence on the fourteenth of July, and reaching Noronho, known by a Mountain which appears like a Steeple, he met with Cornelis Oole’s Fleet, (who had been Cruising before La Plata) with whom he arriv’d safe in the Texel, having in their Way thither from Noronho taken a Prize, laden with Sugar, Tobacco, and Brasile Wood.

Thomas Sickes his Expedition.

Henrick Lucifer set out by the West-India Company.

During Peter Heyn’s Expedition Thomas Sickes, fitted out by the West-India Company, weighed Anchor out of the Texel with two Sail, and coming to St. Vincent he found a Spanish Vessel burnt down to the Hulk, took a Portuguese Pink with Slaves from Angola: Near the Inlet Todos los Sanctos he sunk a Barque, having first taken several Pots of Oyl and Packs of Linnen out of the same: Before Pernambuco he took a Carvel with a hundred and eighty Pipes of Wine, and a Vessel with Sugar and Hides, and drove another ashore against the Promontory St. Augustine. But Sickes being supply’d and strengthned by three Ships from the Texel, and four taken Vessels, ran with four to Todos los Sanctos, sent two to Cruise about Cape St. Augustine, and two more to the North of Pernambuco; At the Isle Noronho they were order’d to stay a Moneth one for another, from whence, after much hardship, they return’d home with so many rich Prizes, that they pay’d their Charges ten times double; which so encourag’d the Adventurers, that the Chamber of the West-India Company in Zealand fitted out three Sail under the Command of Henrick Lucifer, who weighing Anchor from Flushing Anno 1627. steer’d along the Coast of Africa to the Amazone River, and from thence North North-West to the Stream Wiapoco, to settle a Colony there; to which purpose Rowing up the River with Sloops, they came in the Night to two empty Houses, built at a place call’d Wacogenive, which they judg’d fit for their purpose; wherefore they carry’d all things ashore which they had brought out of Zealand with them for the new Planters, who while they were all busie building of Huts, a Negro was taken Prisoner, who being ask’d why the Inhabitants fled? reply’d, That it was occasion’d from a guilty Conscience; for two years before a Barque and two Sloops with Christians coming thither from the Amazone River, had stay’d thirty days on Wacogenive, when unawares they were set upon by the Natives, and all kill’d except three, who were yet living. Upon which Lucifer, having four Indians, three Men and one Woman, aboard of his Vessel, threatned to put them all to the Sword, unless they would produce the three foremention’d Christians: Whereupon the next day a German came to the Water side, of whom they could get little Information, he having in a manner forgot his native Tongue; but at length the other two coming thither, the eldest of them, nam’d John Hendricszoon, related to him, That the Portuguese in great numbers fell upon the Plantations near the Amazone River, Govern’d by Captain Oudaen, who after he had fought valiantly a whole day, being overpower’d by number, retreated to his Barque, and Sail’d into the Creek inhabited by the English, whither the Portuguese following in Canoos, cut off not onely Oudaen, but the English also, forty six Men onely escaping in a Barque under the Command of Lieutenant Peter de Bruine to the River Wiapoco; where they had stay’d about three days, when Sergeant Matruit treacherously shot Lieutenant Bruine: after which the forty six divided themselves into four Parties; but the Inhabitants to rid themselves of these Strangers, under the shew of great friendship, made them Drunk with the Liquor call’d Pernau, and then murder’d them all, except himself and two Germans. Which villanous act Lucifer judg’d worthy of punishment; but his Orders being to shew Kindness and Civility to the Inhabitants, he suffer’d the Murder to go unpunish’d, but built a triangular Fort near the River Wiapoco, on a Hill eight Fathom above the Shore, to prevent the passing by of Sloops; which done, he went to visit the Island Blanco, where he caught three hundred Goats. From thence he went to the Bay of Honda, the Inhabitants whereof are a valiant People, tall of Stature, having long Beards, and wearing Copper Rings through their Ears. Near the Sea-side is a Salt-pan, of which the Inhabitants make great benefit. Lucifer setting Sail again from hence, met with three Ketches sent out by the West-India Company at Amsterdam, before Corientes. The Commander Dirk Simonszoon van Uitgeest, steering his Course towards the Promontory St. Anton, took a Frigat laden with Meal, Silk, and other rich Goods, and within view of Cuba near the River Poros, descrying two brave Gallions from Honduras, bore up to them with his three Ketches; one of which, call’d The Lyon, being got betwixt both the Gallions, was in no small danger, the Netherlanders not being able to get up out of their little Vessel into the high Gallions, in which the Spaniards stood pushing them down with their Pikes; but no sooner did the Netherlanders throw their Hand-Granado’s amongst them, but Uitgeest got aboard of the Gallion, and carry’d her off, whilest the other by nimble Sailing got away. With this Prize Uitgeest thinking himself sufficiently enrich’d, steer’d homewards.

Joost Johnson and Claes Henrickszoon, Commanding each of them a Ketch, took a Ship coming from Lisbon before Pernambuco, laden with Meal, Salt, Wine, and thirty Monks; and not long after a Pink with six hundred Negro’s, a Barque with Salt and Iron, a Ketch with Wine, and a Frigat with Brasile Wood, Sugar and Tobacco: Before Itamerica they took two Prizes more; with all which they return’d to the Texel.

Peter Adrianszoon’s Expedition.

The West-India Company thus enrich’d by the Spoil taken from their Enemies, fitted out twelve Ships again under the Command of Peter Adrianszoon Ita, which set Sail in the beginning of the Year 1628. and anchor’d first before Blanca, an Isle abounding with Goats, the Ground stonie, and in some places Rocky, and having a small, but very convenient Haven, from whence Ita ran beyond Porto Rico, where he took a Vessel with seven thousand weight of Ginger, and Landed opposite to Hispaniola on the stonie Isle Catalina, where he took in fresh Water, and then Cruis’d to and again before Cuba, took six Barques, the Prisoners whereof inform’d him, That the Honduras Traders were on their Way coming thither, and that they had two small Men of War for their Convoy: Not long after Ita discover’d them Sailing along the Shore towards the Haven of Havana, but before they could get in, Captain John Peters, whose Ketch carry’d two Brass, and fourteen Iron Guns, boarded the Vice-Admiral, but having no Graplings to take hold with, the Spanish Ship ran aground, as likewise John Peterszoon in the pursuit of him; which the Admiral seeing, came to assist his Vice-Admiral, and ran aground on one side of John Peters, which drove the Netherlanders Ketch in great danger, she not being able to do Execution with her small Guns, whilest the Spaniards with their Demy-Cannon play’d vehemently upon her; neither was Ita, by reason of calmness and contrary Tide, able to come up with them, but was forc’d to stand Northerly, that so he might get an Easterly Wind, which about Noon always blows fresh here, and so by degrees got near the Spanish Fleet, till at last coming up with the Vice-Admiral, call’d St. Jago, he threw Fire-pots into her, and presently after boarding her, enter’d with that Valor, that of three hundred Spaniards above a hundred and fifty were slain; for those that leapt over-board were kill’d in the Water, whilest Joachim Guyszoon, John Braems, and Anthony Gonde fell upon the Admiral Sennora de los Remedios, and took her. In both these Ships Ita took Two thousand five hundred Chests of Indigo, above Six thousand Hides, Two thousand five hundred Packs of Sarsaparilla, several Pots of Balsam Oyl, Seventy thousand Pound of Ginger, One and twenty Bars of Silver, Twelve Brass, and Twenty eight Iron Guns; all which having taken out, he set fire in both the Ships.

A little before this Victory, the Fortune Frigat weighed Anchor from Flushing, with sixty three Men of War, to be Landed on the Island Tabago. At St. Vincent they found two Men that were left of seven, who having setled along the River Wiapow, under Captain John Van Ryen, were forc’d by the salvage Natives to remove, two whereof dyed by the way, the remaining five landing on the Isle Trinidad, had three of their Companions kill’d by the Indians of Granada, they being French-men, to whom the Natives bore an inveterate Hatred, so that they left onely the two Hollanders alive. The Fortune assisted by the South-star Ketch, took a rich Barque near the Isles des Virgines.

Vitgeest’s Exploits.

Not long after the West-India Company set out twelve Ships more, under the Command of Derick Simonszon Uitgeest, (who had the year before brought home the two fore-mention’d great Prizes,) who setting Sayl and getting into the large Bay of the Rocky Island Vincent, catch’d several Goats and Tortels. Before the Coast of Brasile he took two rich Carvels, one from Pernambuco, and another from the Inlet Todos los Sanctos; which Prizes having sent home with three Ketches, he sayl’d towards Sierra Leona, known by high and thick Woods, which grow on a high Coast; from whence returning again to Pernambuco, he took six rich laden Vessels, amongst which was one Gallioon from Goa, with a great Treasure of Diamonds.

Peter Hein’s Expedition.

He gives chace to the Spanish Plate-Fleet, & takes several of them.

These successful Expeditions of the Fleets set out from time to time by the West-India Company, enabled and encourag’d them to undertake Matters of greater consequence, viz. They fitted out one and thirty Sail, which carryed four thousand Men, one hundred and thirty Brass Guns, and five hundred fifty eight Iron Guns; of which Peter Peterszoon Hein being Admiral, took near the Soundings of Tortuga, two Barques from Havana, the Men whereof inform’d him, that the Plate-Fleet was not yet arriv’d there, nor that from Terra Firma, but were both expected every day. The strong Current drove Peter Hein farther Eastward beyond Havana than he expected, insomuch that he got sight of Matanca, where he overtook a Barque sent out by Landronce de Cabrera, Governor of Havana, to give notice to the Plate Fleet of the Hollanders Ships, which he had seen from the Castle Morro before Havana: Mean while John Van Hoorn took a Vessel which was sent out before by the Plate Fleet, the Men whereof inform’d him that the Fleet it self was near at hand; which Peter Hein found to be true, when the next Morning before Sun-rising he descry’d ten Sayl, of which some had ignorantly sayled to Leeward, and others to Windward of the Dutch Fleet; nine of them which were Laden with Hides, Meal, Campeche-Wood, Cochinele, Indigo, and other rich Goods, were taken by several Mann’d Sloops, because the Ships were not able to come up to them by reason of the Calm. About Noon Peter Hein discovering nine Gallions more, made sudden Chace after them; which they perceiving, made toward the Shore, and about Twilight in the Evening they ran aground in the Bay of Matanca, where the Commanders Landing saved themselves, each carrying with him what Jewels they could. About Break of Day Peter Hein made all the Sayl he could possible to come up with them, and seeing them fast aground, leapt into a Boat and Rowed up to the Admiral, who fired eight Guns, whilest his Men got ashore: Hein approaching the Gallioon, saw no way to get up, till at last one of his Men spying a Rope, climb’d up the same, and made fast other Ropes for his Companions to get up by, the Spaniards standing still gaping upon him, as if their feet and hands had been ty’d, which made Peter Hein grant them their Lives; which the other Gallions seeing, surrender’d themselves upon promise of Quarter; by which the Spanish Crown lost, besides the Musk, Bezoar, Ambergreece, and the Cargo of two Gallioons and a rich Prize, above One hundred and fifty Tun of Gold.

The Night succeeding this great Victory being somewhat Tempestuous, drove the Gallioons from the Bank on which they stuck the Day before, into deeper Water: Five Days they spent in unlading of the taken Vessels, after which Peter Hein set Sayl with four Gallioons, a new Spanish Merchant-Man, and his own Fleet, out of the Bay of Matanca, on the Seventh of September, Anno 1628. for Holland, where in a short time he safely arriv’d.

The Expedition of Lucas Pol.

The Tyger Frigat sent from Zealand, and Commanded by Lucas Pol, Anchor’d before Blanca, where he brought away above five hundred Goats: This Island which is six Leagues in circumference, hath on the West a Sandy Inlet, fit for great Ships to Ride at Anchor; Moreover, it is deep and Rocky, in the Valleys the Grass grows above half a Mans length. The Woods are overgrown with Thorns; the Soyl also would produce much more fruit, did not the Rats, Leguanes, Hedge-hogs, and other Animals, devour and spoil the Plants.

Pol leaving this Island ran to Tortuga, a low Isle, except on the West side; it produces Guaiacum, or Pock-wood, in great abundance, and nourishes great Flocks of Goats, and hath an eminent Salt-Pan; in all which things it is parallel’d with the Island Orchilla, known by its high Mountains on the East and West; the other part thereof not being above six Foot above the Water: Pol Landing here, carry’d off above two hundred Goats near the Western Shore, whose bryny Soil produces neither Grain, nor Grass. The Trees which are on the same are so dry and weak, that they may be pusht down with one hand; Neither are there any Birds to be found here, except Owls; nor Beasts, except Goats and great Hedge-hogs. Pol sayling from hence, steer’d by the nine Wooddy Isles call’d Roccas, and the three call’d Aves, to Bonaire, a pretty large rising Isle, which on the North-West hath a convenient Road, a fresh Water-spring, store of Sheep, on which the Spaniards live; Pock-wood, and Cotton Trees: Then steering to the Isle Mona, he found the same to be surrounded with Rocks, and full of Horned Cattel difficult to be catch’d because of the thick Woods, in which grow exceeding good Oranges. Pol leaving this Isle, set sayl and steer’d for Flushing, where he safely arriv’d without having perform’d any remarkable Exploits.

Adrian Pater his Expedition.

Mean while the West-India Company fitted out twelve Sayl more, under the Command of Adrian Johnzon Pater, who set sayl in the middle of August, and Cruised in vain about the Flemmish Isles for Spanish Ships: About the beginning of the Year 1629. he sent away three Ships under the Command of Martin Landrode, from the Island of St. Vincent, whilest he himself ran with the rest of the Fleet into the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, within a League from the City Salvador, where there lay onely seven Barques near the Shore, which he judging not worth the while to hazard his Ships and Men for, steer’d to Pernambuco, took a rich Laden Barque in his Voyage, and was inform’d by a Brasilian that came aboard of him on floating Pieces of Timber, that three Sayl of Ships full of Goods were return’d to Reciffa, so soon as they heard of the Dutch Fleet: But Pater judging no good to be done there, return’d back to the Caribbee Islands, where near Granada he found three Dutch Vessels, which had likewise Cruis’d in vain before the Coast of Brasile. Moreover, the Pegasus, Raven, and Hart Frigats, parted from the Fleet to Cruise about Monges, touching at Blanca, they took above a thousand Goats, and between the Cliffs of the little Isles Monges, abundance of Fish; but descrying no Spanish Ships, they Sail’d to the Island De Vacca, which hath a brave Harbor, delightful Woods, pleasant Pastures, fresh-water Brooks, and abundance of wild Horses, Hogs, and Lyons, of which the Sea-men took an infinite number. Before the low Promontory Corientes, overgrown with Trees, they got two Prizes laden with Campeche Wood.

These three fore-mention’d Frigats, as also the Walcheren and South-star from Zealand, joyn’d with Pater’s Fleet, when he receiv’d Information, that a considerable number of Spanish Ships were suddenly expected from Campeche: Whereupon Paters divided his Fleet into three Squadrons, whereof the Forlorn consisted of three Sail, the Reserve of the like number, and the Admiral kept five under his own Command: Thus divided, they stood to and again before Cape Corientes, when Captain John Stapel brought three, and John van Hoorn four Netherland Ships to their assistance.

Hoorn’s Expedition.

Hoorn having set Sail from the Texel about the latter end of April, was beaten off from Granada with poyson’d Arrows, and took a Prize before the Promontory St. Anthony, the Men whereof inform’d him, that the Governor Gabriel de Chaves Osorio, an old Soldier, had great trouble in repairing the Walls, Forts and Houses in the City, which two years before had been blown down by a great Storm, and that six great Ships were lading to go for Carthagena with the Gallions for Spain, because they durst not Steer by Porto Rico for fear of the Netherlanders; moreover, that abundance of Ginger was spoyl’d for want of Vessels to carry it away; and that the Citizens were in great want for Stuffs, none having come in a long time from Spain; in like manner there went none but Copper Coin, so that nothing was to be got there. The Silver and Gold Mines were not look’d after, the Spaniards not caring to work, and the old Natives were long since cut off, insomuch that if the Imperial Court was not kept in St. Domingo, to which belong’d Cumana and Coro, that City and Island, and Hispaniola it self, would soon be left desolate. Hoorn therefore Sail’d by the Promontory St. Cruiz, being a low Point overgrown with Trees, into the Bay, twenty Leagues from the Mouth whereof lie the Isles Jardin de la Reyna. Before Corientes he took a Barque with three hundred and six Guns, sent from Havana, the Men whereof inform’d him, That the Governor of Havana, call’d Laurence de Cabrera, having Intelligence of the Dutch Fleets approach, rais’d many Men, and gave notice to the Ships in all the Harbors thereabouts; after which he took another rich Prize, and joyn’d at last with Paters Fleet, which now consisted of twenty Sail, with which he Steer’d for the Soundings of Tortugas, where the Fleet met with a dreadful Tempest, wherein a Thunderbolt splitting the Main-Yard of the Hunter Frigat, fell down by the Mast, and rowl’d out at one of the Port-holes, kill’d the Purser, and wounded two more in the Head: great showers of Rain fell daily, when Samuel Lucas and Captain Outger Minne brought seven Sail of Ships more to the Fleet, with which Paters put in for fresh Provisions into the spacious and secure Haven De Cabannas, where several Isles lie, formerly inhabited by Shepherds and Carpenters.

From hence Paters Sail’d by Havana, mended the Port-holes of his lower Deck, and took off the Top-gallant Masts, because in September the usual Storms begin here; and seeing that he could not do any Exploit with so great a Fleet, he sent nine Ships home, and with the rest went to Barbados, where at that time there were about fifteen hundred English that Planted Tobacco.

Paters Sailing from hence, ran to the Main Continent of America, inspected the River Oronoque, where he quenched the Town St. Thomas, that had been set on fire by the fled Inhabitants, and brought aboard all what they had left.

Henrick Lonque’s Expedition.

Takes Olinda.

During his fruitless Expedition, the West-India Company Rigg’d out twenty seven Sail under the Command of Henrick Lonque, Peter Ita, and Joost Bankart; the Land-Soldiers being Commanded by Diederick Van Waerdenberg. Lonque coming to St. Vincent, stay’d a long time at Anchor there; for in regard the Spaniard in the Low Countreys rang’d on the Veluwe, and had taken Amersfoort, the States of the United Netherlands were forc’d to keep those Men in their Service which the West-India Company had rais’d; but so soon as Wesel was re-taken, and the Hartogen-Bosch won by Frederick Henrick, Prince of Orange, thirty six Sail were sent to Lonque’s assistance; of which some came sooner to him than others at St. Vincent, where he had stay’d four Moneths without doing any remarkable Exploit. On St. Steven’s Day he set Sail with fifty two Ships, thirteen Sloops, and two Prizes, all Mann’d with seven thousand Men, which meeting with contrary Winds and Calms, lay a great while under the Line, the Scurvey began to encrease amongst them daily, insomuch that above twelve hundred lay sick, and three hundred dy’d since they set Sail from St. Vincent; yet at last Lonque getting sight of Olinda, sent Waerdenberg on the fourth of February with sixteen Ships, carrying three thousand Men to Pavo Morello, a Wood, lying two Leagues Northward from Olinda, where he suddenly Landed, notwithstanding the Portuguese guarded the Shore with two thousand Men, whom Waerdenberg, after a short Skirmish, putting to flight, was the whole Night in Arms, and the next day became Master of Olinda, by breaking in on the North at the same time, when Colonel Schutte Storm’d on the South. Moreover, the Enemy surrendred the two Forts on Reciffa, and forsook the Island.

About the middle of March nine Ships which were wanting to make up Lonque’s Fleet, came to an Anchor by him, having brought him above six hundred Soldiers, many Guns, all manner of Ammunition under the Command of Lieutenant Colonel Alexander Seton, and the three Adjutants John de Bruine, Philip Serooskerken, and Horatius Calandryn, who immediately order’d the Cloyster on Antonio Vaes to be fortifi’d, and built a Fort with four Bulwarks at the Entrance of Pozo in the Countrey Reciffa. Seton also set fire on the Suburbs of Olinda, in which the Enemy had Lodg’d the Night before, and endeavor’d to poyson the fresh Water on Antonio Vaes, when on a sudden the Netherlanders fell upon them; two which drank of the Water dy’d, and others fell into great Fits of Sicknesses, and it wanted little but that the Admiral Lonque, with a Company of fifty Musquetteers, had been kill’d returning from Reciffa to Olinda, he being unawares set upon by two Companies of Portugueses and Brasilians, who kill’d above thirty six of his Men, and dangerously wounded six more, so that he brought off but eight Men unhurt. The like Misfortune befell the Wood-cutters on Antonio Vaes, surpris’d by the Portuguese from an Ambuscade.

Whilest Affairs stood thus about Olinda, there first arriv’d two Ships from the United Netherlands at Reciffa, not long after four more, Commanded by John Walbeek, and eight more under the Admiral Dirik Van Uitgeest, who was follow’d by the Noahs Ark.

About the same time Dirk de Ruiter set Sail with six Ships, and Peter Ita with ten, to Cruise at Sea.

Ita being set upon by the Enemy, escapes very narrowly.

About the beginning of February, Lonque having put all things in good order, prepar’d to return home, and weigh’d Anchor with nine Ships. But Ita going from Reciffa to Olinda, to take his leave of the Council there, was suddenly surpris’d after a strange manner; he had ninety Musquetteers for his Guard, whose Matches were all put out, and their Arms all wet by a great shower of Rain, which they perceiving from their Ambuscades, immediately got cross the River, and kill’d thirty of the Netherlanders, the rest running away, left Ita to defend himself, which he did for some time with his Sword, but had absolutely been slain, had he not receiv’d Aid from Olinda.

Because the Portuguese made several Attempts upon the Netherlanders, not without damage on both sides, the West-India Company often sent Ships to their assistance; and likewise many Brasilians deserting the Portuguese, joyn’d with the Netherlanders, who built a five-corner’d Fort with Bulwarks about the Cloyster on Antonio Vaes; which to prevent, the Portuguese ventur’d many a Sally, though not without considerable loss on their part. They also reported, that Frederick de Toledo was making thither with a great Fleet, to drive the Netherlanders out of Brasile; at which they taking the Alarm, put themselves all into a posture of Defence, rais’d new Works about the Castle on Reciffa, whilest the Ships which Cruis’d on that Coast brought in several Prizes.

John Walbeek being chosen General by the West-India Company over Brasile, had a Design on the Promontory St. Augustine; but it came to no effect, because the Sea beat so vehemently against the Shore.

Great Supplies sent to Brasile by the Netherland West-India Company.

The Report of the great preparation of a Fleet which was making ready in Spain, mov’d the West-India Company to raise more Men, and to send out Admiral Paters with seventeen Ships, which all arriv’d safe, except the Black Lyon Frigat, which carrying the Lieutenant-Colonel Eltz and Captain Uitgeest, was never heard of.

Joost Bankart was also sent out in March with eight Ships to St. Helena, to Cruise there for the rich Carraks which us’d to Water there; but though he stay’d till August before this fruitful Island, yet saw not one Ship at Sea, nor a Man on the Island, but great numbers of Sea-pies, which are so tame, that they suffer themselves to be taken up with the Hand, or knock’d on the Head with Sticks.

Near this Isle Ita took a Ketch Prize, and rallying his whole Fleet together, Steer’d for the Caimans; the most Eastern Isle whereof being about three Leagues long, is full of Rocks, with a high Point on the East; the other part thereof is plain. Then dividing his Fleet into seven Squadrons, he made them all ready for an Engagement, when he was inform’d by an English-man before Corientes, that Frederick de Toledo had set Sail with eighty Ships from Havana to Spain, of which he had sent back eight Gallions to Carthagena: Hereupon bending his Course near Havana, he put the whole Countrey to an Alarm, burnt a rich laden Vessel, and another that carry’d a Flag on the Fore-top, and a third laden with Ballast.

Joachim Guysen being made Commander of the Dolphin Frigat, and sent to joyn with Admiral Pater’s Squadron, was driven below Jamaica, and at last strook against the great Caiman, where his Vessel was all shatter’d to pieces; but all his Men and Goods being sav’d, he spent sixteen Weeks in making a Ketch of the pieces of the Dolphin, and brought a hundred and twenty Men, four Brass, and two Iron Guns to the Fleet, having buried the rest on Caiman.

Five Leagues beyond Havana, a Spanish Ship laden with Campeche Wood and Sarsaparilla, being chased against the Shore, was set on fire by her own Men, which the Hollanders attempted twice in vain to put out.

After this Ita’s Fleet lay long upon the Coast of Cuba, but finding no Spanish Vessels, and their Provisions growing scarce, return’d back to the Texel, where they arriv’d without doing any farther Exploits.

St. Martha taken by the Dutch.

In the mean while Pater lying before Punta del Gallo, intending to Invade the City built on the Shore of the Island Trinidad; but the Fort built at the Mouth of the River, and contrary Current preventing his Design, he ran through the middlemost Hole of Boccas to Blanca, where he caught two thousand Goats and a Bonaire, set several Towns on fire, whilest the Spaniards made a Smother of dry Stubble all along the Fields, through which the Hollanders were to return, that so they might be choak’d with the Smoak; which their Invention had prov’d successful, had not the Hollanders forc’d a Way through a Wood. At last the Fleet leaving Hispaniola, Steer’d for St. Martha, a Town built on the Main Coast between Carthagena, and the River La Hacha, being instigated thereto by a Letter (taken by the Hollanders in a Prize) writ by the Governor Hieronymo de Quero to the Spanish King; which Letter set forth the present Condition of St. Martha, whereby they conceiv’d great hopes of a possibility of taking it, and of the Advantages that would accrue thereby: nor did it happen contrary to their expectation; for the Admiral Landing his Men, took the City without the least resistance; and though the great Fort fir’d some Guns, yet it soon surrendred on promise of Quarter; the City also was sav’d from being burn’d, by paying fifty five hundred Pieces of Eight, after they had plunder’d the same, and carry’d away whatsoe’re they thought good. Mean while the Provisions growing scarce in the Fleet, Pater judg’d it convenient to return home, where he arriv’d safely with all his Prizes.

The valiant Exploit of John Lichthart.

Notable Exploits were perform’d by John Lichthart, one of which, amongst others ought not to be omitted, viz. he setting Sail homewards from Reciffa about the beginning of October Anno 1630. chanc’d to fall with his Ship, the Over-yzel, amongst five Biscayan Pyrats, Cruising between the French and English Coast, which thought to clap him aboard on a sudden; but they seeing him bear up to them, were afraid to venture, and Tack’d about: after which he was set upon about three Leagues to the Northward of the Lizard, by three Frigats belonging to Dunkirk, the biggest whereof carry’d thirty six Guns, the second twenty eight, and the last twelve; with which three he maintain’d a Fight eight hours, in which he had fourteen Men kill’d, and thirty two wounded; his Ship resembled a Wreck, the Main-mast being shot overboard, the Rudder hung by pieces at the Stern, and the Tackling all shatter’d and torn, besides seven Shot under Water, and not less than four hundred through the sides above, but not without sufficient marks of retribution on the Dunkirkers side; but Lichthart getting into Plymouth, mended his Ship, and from thence Sail’d to Amsterdam, where he was Presented with a Gold Chain in recompence of his Valor.

The Expedition of the Brown-Fish Frigat.

The Expedition of the Brown-Fish Frigat is also remarkable, which Sailing beyond Cape de Verd, Steer’d by Cape Roxo along the Shore to the River Catchieu, at whose Mouth lie two Shelves, and between them ran a Channel through which the Ships pass’d. The Brown-Fish Sailing about a League up the River, which is a Mile in breadth, took a Portuguese Barque. The Seamen also Landing on the Isle Bissis, spake Portuguese with the Natives, who are Coal-black, and have strong Bodies, go Arm’d with Darts, Bowes, Arrows, Symiters, and were Baptiz’d by a Priest sent thither from Portugal, who with a few Countrey-men had built a Chappel and some Houses there.

From hence the Brown-Fish Sail’d to the most Northern Isle Bisegos, which is continually at Wars with Bissis. The King of this Isle receiving some Presents from the Netherlanders, gave leave to his Subjects, shie at first, to go aboard of them.

Steering from hence to Noronho, they found the Inhabitants carry’d away, and their Gardens and Houses ruin’d, so that they could get nothing but wild Pumpions to refresh themselves with; therefore leaving the Isle they anchor’d at Reciffa.

In the interim, whilest these Expeditions were carry’d on as hath been related, Captain John Boon-eter (who parted from the Admiral Ita’s Fleet with eight Sail of Ships) Cruis’d to and again before Hispaniola till May Anno 1631. near Mona he took a rich Vessel coming from Porto Rico, another before the Island Vacca, and a third full of Ginger, with which he Steer’d to the Tortugas, being seven in number, resembling rather sandy Flats than Isles. Before Havana he also chased several Vessels, but lost sight of them in the Night. Mean while their Provisions growing short, the Seamen were desirous to return; which Boon-eter would no way yield to, because the time began to approach in which the Spanish Ships came from all places to Havana; but the Men mutinying forc’d him to Steer to the Texel, where they arriv’d without doing any considerable Exploit advantageous to the West-India Company.

The Fort of Tamarica assault’d by the Dutch in vain.

But at the same time fourteen Ships, three Sloops, and seven great Pinnaces, weighed Anchor from Reciffa with a thousand two hundred and sixty Men, divided into twelve Companies, under the Command of Hartman Godefrid and Stein Callenfels; who Landing on the Island Tamarica, march’d along a bad and narrow Path, partly craggy and partly sandy, to a Fort built on a high Ascent overgrown with Brambles in such a manner, that it was impossible for them to break through, whilest they in the Fort fir’d continually upon Stein Callenfels, who judg’d it convenient to draw off, and Storm the Castle on another side.

The Admiral Pater newly come from the Texel to Olinda, sent three Ketches, a Sloop, and two Pinnaces, beyond the Town Tamarica, to prevent the Enemies crossing over to the Main, and keep off their Fire-ships. They also receiv’d Information from three Portuguese and five Brasilian Prisoners, That the Castle, surrounded with Fens and Brambles, had sixteen Guns; and that Albuquerque had sent eight hundred Men to assist the three hundred that lay in Garrison there before. The Captains Le Grand and Arcisseusky found two other Ways that led to the Fort, but altogether unfit to march along with their Men and Guns. Pater also Row’d round the Island with Sloops, and fathom’d the Water, whilest Arcisseusky Sailing up the River to Garasi, suppos’d that he had found a much better place to make an Onset on the Castle in, than had been found out yet; but the Council of Olinda and Stein Callenfels look’d upon it as too great a hazard to Storm a Fort, to which the Ways lay so much to the Enemy’s advantage, a small number in the same being able to beat off a considerable Party; therefore it was judg’d best, and concluded upon, to build a Fort on a little Isle near Tamarica, at the Mouth of the River; to which purpose the Engineer Buuren contriv’d a square Castle with a long Horn-work, which was call’d Orange; in which the Captains Arcisseusky, Mellingen, and Beyer, were left in Garrison with their Companies, whilest the rest of the Regiment return’d to Reciffa.

Mean while Antonio de Oquendo brought a great Fleet to St. Salvador; and Callenfels drew four Companies of Musquetteers, and a great company of Seamen with Pick-axes and Spades out of the Fort Frederick Henrick into the Field, and marching Southward along private Ways, he found the River strongly fortifi’d near the Forts Affogados, having above and below a row of strong Pallisado’s; yet the Portuguese that guarded these Works after a small resistance fled, and left all: But because a general Alarm drew many People in Arms out of Real, and several other places, Callenfels drew off in good order, and was inform’d by a Prisoner call’d Peter Alves, that the Fort Affogados receiv’d that Denomination from the River on which it was built; that there lay generally a hundred and fifty Men in Garrison there; that about a Mile farther was the Fort Pirange. that Peter de Acunha bore the chief Command next to Albuquerque over the Militia, who us’d few Musquets but what had Fire-locks; and that they wanted no Ammunition, for six great Carvels loaden with the same had not long since stor’d them with great plenty thereof. The Netherlanders also understanding by Letters which they had taken, that the Tapuyans were very much incens’d against the Portuguese, who stood in great fear of these salvage People, it was judg’d convenient by the Council at Olinda, to invite the Tapuyans to be their Friends.

Fight between the Dutch and Spanish Fleet.

Admiral Pater drown’d.

On the eleventh of September Anno 1631. Admiral Pater and Vice-Admiral Martin Thyszoon, whose joint Forces were fifteen Men of War and three Ketches, carrying nine Companies of Foot, Commanded by Captain Engelbert Schutte, descrying the Spanish Fleet about an hour before Sun-set, animated all the Officers and Captains to regard their Honor and Oath which they had taken; telling them, That on this Engagement would depend the Welfare or Ruine of the West-India Company. But his Men were not so much heartned by his Speech, as daunted at the sight of the Spanish Fleet, which consisted of twelve Castilian and five Portuguese Gallions, and twenty six other Vessels, as Pinks, Fly-boats and Carvels, all well Mann’d and full of Guns, the Gallions carrying whole and Demi-Cannons; the Admiral, call’d Antonio de Oquendo, carrying forty eight great Guns in his Gallion, call’d St. Jago; whereas they had receiv’d Information but of four Gallions and eighteen lesser Vessels; nevertheless Pater no whit discourag’d, boarded him about ten a Clock the next Morning, whilest Captain John Mast boarded him on the other side, which occasion’d a bloody Engagement; and it would have prov’d fatal to the Spaniard, had not Pater’s Stern taken fire, which he endeavoring in vain to put out, and none coming to his assistance, after he had hung a good while by a Rope at the Spanish Admiral’s Bowe, he was forc’d through faintness to let go and fall into the Water, whilest his Ship was blown up, a few of his Men onely being sav’d by Oquendo. In the mean time Martin Thyszoon boarded the Gallion Antonio de Padua, Commanded by the Vice-Admiral Francisco de Vallezilla on one side, and the Utrecht Frigat on the other, which after half an hours Engagement lost her Main-mast, and after a sharp Fight of four hours the Fire took hold of her Sails; which the Netherlanders not being able to quench, leap’d desperately over into the Spanish Vice-Admiral; but he having two hundred and sixty Men aboard, beat them off, forcing them to leap into the Water, or sell their Lives at a dear rate. But Captain Thyszoon had better success, for he not onely sunk the Vice-Admiral, but took the Bonaventura Gallion, and likewise gave the Gallion John Baptista so many shot under Water, that she sunk likewise. The Night approaching ended this bloody Engagement; and the Netherlanders Fleet much damnifi’d stood Northwards, with intention to return to Reciffa. The next Morning Oquendo had lost sight of them, but descry’d them again on the fifteenth of September, and kept in view of them the six following days, five Leagues from him to the East, or East South-East, Martin Thyszoon coming to an Anchor before Reciffa on the twenty second of September.

About the same time the Amsterdam Frigat set Sail from thence for St. Salvador, with intention to joyn with Pater’s Fleet there, but not finding the Admiral, return’d, and near Cape St. Augustine discover’d the Spanish Fleet; wherefore running close behind them she receiv’d four Guns from Oquendo, which she answer’d, and kept at a distance from them the whole Night, in hopes to meet with one single Vessel or other belonging to the Fleet; but the Spanish Vice-Admiral bearing little Sail, guarded the Rere, and fir’d continually at the Amsterdam Frigat, who fearing an unlucky Bullet, made all the Sail she could possible, and brought news of the approach of the Spanish Fleet to Reciffa. Soon after which the Elephant came from the Dutch Fleet thither, with a full Account of the fore-mention’d Engagement, viz. That besides the Admiral Pater, there were slain Captain Thomas Sickes, Cormillion, and Lieutenant Steenbergen, also that two Ships, the Prince William and the Province of Utrecht, were sunk: In lieu of which they had taken the Gallion call’d The Bonaventura, with twenty six Brass Guns, weighing above sixty four thousand Pound, two hundred and forty Castilians, and a great parcel of Sugar and Tobacco; Amongst the Prisoners was one call’d Francisco de Fuentes, who being Examin’d, gave this Information, viz. That the Fleet carry’d two Regiments of Spaniards and one of Italians; in which three Regiments were four thousand Men, under the Command of Conde del Bangniola; and that upon the setting out of Ferdinand, the King’s Brother, to the Netherlands, all the chiefest Gallions and Dunkirk Ships were sent for, and English Vessels hir’d, to convey him safe to the Flemmish Coast, which made Oquenda set Sail with so much the lesser number to St. Salvador; that the sunk Gallion, call’d Antonio de Padua, had fourteen Brass Guns in her Hold, besides twenty six that were mounted.

Two Tapuyan Kings offer their Service to the Hollanders.

Soon after a Brasilian that had pass’d by Albuquerque’s Army to Olinda, brought Information, That he was sent by Jandui and Oquenou, two Kings belonging to the Tapuyans, to enquire if the Topatingas (for so they call’d the Netherlanders that belong’d to the West-India Company) did yet reside in Pernambuco, with Proffers to assist them with their Forces. Moreover, he inform’d them, That since his departure from Boudewyn Henrickszoon, a great many of the Tapuyans Petivares were kill’d by the Portuguese near the River Grande and Inlet Trajiciaon, because they had assisted Henrickszoon, who had left them helpless at his departure. He added also, That if the West-India Company would give the other Brasilians any assurance to assist the Tapuyans, it would be necessary to Consult about it near the River Grande.

This Proposal was found to be of so weighty a Concern, that Ellert Smient being sent with the Ship call’d The New Netherland, and a great Sloop, to Siara, to make farther enquiry into the Business, was accompanied by a Renegado Portuguese call’d Samuel Cochin, and several Brasilians (whom Henrickszoon upon their Request carry’d with him from the Inlet Trajiciaon to Holland) who went, under pretence of visiting their Relations at the River Grande and Siara, to invite their Countrey-men to joyn with the Netherlanders.

Olinda deserted and demolish’d by the Hollanders.

During Smient’s absence many Consultations were held about the demolishing or defending of the City Olinda, about which there had formerly been many Contests; but at last the Voices carry’d it, which were for the demolishing thereof, in regard it was of little Consequence; and could not be kept without many Men and great Charges, because of its bad Situation, whenas their Men might do greater Service in other places: Wherefore they began to carry all things necessary from Olinda to Reciffa, and on the twenty fourth of November the City was set on fire with Barrels of Pitch and Tar, being in a light flame at every corner, whilest Stein Callenfels drew off the Garrison in good order to Reciffa; and immediately sixteen hundred Men under his Command were put aboard of sixteen Vessels, with intention to go to Parayba; but the Enemy having a fortnight before had notice of this Design, had fortifi’d himself all along the River. Callenfels approaching, espy’d twelve Portuguese Standards, and the Men ready on the Breast-works to prevent his Landing; yet nevertheless he not regarding their Bullets, press’d in amongst them, and forc’d the Enemy from his Works.

Near the Water stood a Stone Castle, and on one side of it a large Store-house; on the Mountain near the City appear’d the Franciscan Cloyster; the Fort rais’d of Earth had four Bulwarks, and twenty six Guns, according to the Information of the Eye-witnesses Drevis and Berster, who were sent thither as Spies.

Callenfels attempts to take the City, but without success.

Callenfels Landed not so carefully but that he lost forty Men, either kill’d from behind the Breastworks, or out of a neighboring Wood. Being inform’d by a Portuguese Prisoner, of the ill Condition of the Town, and how slenderly it was provided, he immediately rais’d a Sconce, two Watch-houses, and a Pallisado, from which he fir’d with two Guns on the Castle, and made several Trenches; but the Besieged were stronger in People and Guns than the Besiegers, who being scarce able, by reason of their small number, to keep Guards in all places, were also tir’d out under a hot Climate, and fainted for want of Provisions, insomuch that in two days there dy’d and fell sick above two hundred; wherefore Callenfels judg’d it best to draw off in time; which that they might do securely, they made a Redoubt, and the six Companies Commanded by the Captains Redincheven, Meppelen, Cloppenburg, Schenk, Byma, and Cook, resolv’d upon a desperate Attempt, as followeth: Marching privately through a Wood behind the Enemy’s Works, they fell in at one side upon the Portuguese Trenches, from whence they drove them after a small resistance, and forc’d them to flie towards the Fort, whither they were pursu’d with such eagerness, that those who were in the Fort, lest the Hollanders might get in with them, lock’d up the Avenues against their own Men; at which they were so amaz’d, that some of them climb’d up by the Walls of the Fort, but were either kill’d by the Assailants, or knock’d on the Head by their own People, because several Hollanders went to climb up amongst the Portuguese; the rest running about the Fort, fell into the midst of the Netherlanders, where they were all cut off, being in number above a hundred. The Hollanders also in this resolute Design, had about twenty Men kill’d, and fifty wounded; after which they put lighted Matches on Sticks in their Enemy’s Works, as if they had never made any Attempt on the City Parayba.

Whilest this Expedition fell out so unfortunately, Smient performing his Voyage, found in the Inlet Trajiciaon a Portuguese Vessel hal’d near the Shore under the protection of two Pallisado’s; wherefore supposing it best not to make any Attempt on the same, he ran to an Anchor before Ubranduba, twenty Leagues below the River Grande; where the Natives Marcial, Tacou, Ararova, and Matauwe, who had been in Holland, Landing, went to see, and speak with their Countrey-men to joyn with the Netherland West-India Company: and some days after the Seamen Landing again in the same place, met with Tacou, together with eight more stout Men, and seventeen Women and Children, who carry’d a slain Portuguese call’d Juan Perera, to the River Grande, about whom they had found Letters containing the whole Condition of Siara; which the Brasilians imparting to Smient, he sent a Ketch thither before, and follow’d after himself; they Steer’d along the Shore beyond the Shelves Guamare, by the Mountains Sailinas and Porto de Mel, the Haven De Onces, and River Juaguarive, to the White Point, where the Brasilians Landing spake with their People, and towards the Evening brought good tydings, and desir’d that they might be Landed at Siara, where they would put their Design in practice: Smient following their Advice, receiv’d them aboard the New Netherland, and Sail’d along by the square Fort Siara towards a smooth Shore on each side, hedg’d in by thick Woods, where the Brasilians intended to Land; but the Portuguese, and Brasilians belonging to their Party, being gotten into the Wood before, fir’d so vehemently, that they were forc’d to Retreat, and Sail five Leagues farther beyond the Cape Opese, made dangerous by the many blind Cliffs that lie about the same. Smient anchoring here, Landed the Brasilians, on promise that they would return in two days; but the Seamen seeing sometimes ten, sometimes fifteen Arm’d Portugueses ashore, judg’d that the Brasilians had been slain by them, and therefore weighed Anchor to the great dislike of the West-India Company.

Since this unsuccessful Design on Parayba, the Council at Reciffa were no whit discourag’d, but resolv’d to make an Attempt on the River Grande with twelve Ships and two Sloops, carrying ten Companies of Soldiers, besides Seamen; but by reason of the difficulty of Landing (because the Coast being very Rocky, makes the Sea go very hollow), the strength of the Place, both in respect of its Fortification and number of Defendants, and the joyning of the Brasilians with them, they were forc’d to return without effecting their Design.

The Expedition of Nekker, Houte-been, and others.

The Marquess Salinas murther’d for his Jewels.

About the same time eight Sail arriv’d at Reciffa from Holland, and Jonathan de Nekker, Cornelis Corneliszoon, alias Houte-been, and Reinier Peterszoon, set out with three Frigats from the Texel to the Isle Vacca, where with Hunting, Fishing, and gathering of Fruit, they refresh’d themselves, and afterwards Steer’d to the River Magdalena, discernable at three Leagues distance by the thick yellow Water it discharges into the Sea through three Mouths. Between the Western and middlemost Mouth lies an Isle in the middle of the River, behind which Houte-been came to an Anchor, whilest Nekker and Peterszoon kept Guard near Punto Verde; where though the Wind blew very fresh in the Night, yet the Water remain’d smooth: About Day-break Nekker discovering a Sail, made chase after the same, but not able to come up with her, lost her the following Night, and in the Morning saw a Barque, which running ashore was set on fire by Peterszoon; after which Nekker chased two other Ships, which likewise getting from him, he stood off at Sea out of sight of the Isles Zamba, which are low on the West, and Hilly at the East-end, where the Sea beats vehemently against a Promontory, and chased a Barque ashore, whither he sent a Boat with eight Men; which being beaten to pieces by the Waves, drowned four of them, and the rest getting ashore were kill’d by the Spaniards. Soon after which four Spanish Ships set Sail after Nekker and Peterszoon, and had not the Night favor’d them they had been but in a bad Condition; for they were not able to get their Sea-men aboard, who having taken some Wine ashore, had made themselves Drunk; about Day-break they descry’d the four Spanish Vessels, which were gotten so far from them, that they could but just discern them from the Main-top. Not long after they took two Barques, and came to an Anchor behind Zamba by Houte-been, who being driven by a Storm out of the River Magdalena to Jamaica, had chased a Barque ashore there, and a Ship with four hundred Negro’s against St. Martha, and since took a rich laden Barque near the River Magdalena. In like manner Nekker and Peterszoon took a Ship coming from Caraques, leaving Houte-been alone before Magdalena, who not long after discover’d eighteen Spanish Ships near the High-land St. Martha, which were Steering to Carthagena; one whereof belonging to Carthagena he made Prize of, but was forc’d to forsake her in a great Storm; after the ceasing of which he took another Frigat, the Men whereof inform’d him, That the Admiral Thomas de Caspure was going with eleven Ships from Cape Antonio to Porto Belo, to lade the Peruvian Silver there. The Ship with Angolan Negro’s, taken by Houte-been, he set free, but kept a Frigat laden with Tallow, Hides, Tobacco, and Flesh, which he had taken just before the Coast of Rio Grande; and thus he went Privateering up and down, when the Plate-Fleet from New Spain weighed Anchor from Juan de Lua, the like of which in Riches had never set Sail before, for it carry’d 2169340 Ryals of Eight for the Merchants, an unvaluable Treasure for the King, besides many rich Commodities which several bought upon their own Accounts, that were not entred in the Custom-house: all which Treasure, laden in nine Gallions, besides a considerable number of Frigats and small Vessels, was committed to the Charge of Miguel de Echacareta; but he dying before the Fleet set Sail, Manuel Serano de Ribera was chosen Admiral; but a dreadful Storm arising as they were Sailing before the Coast of Campeche in their Way to Havana, the whole Fleet was in a manner utterly destroy’d, with a most unvaluable Treasure: The Admiral, Vice-Admiral, Gallion Teresia, and several other Gallions, sunk, with at least two thousand Men, a great number of Persons of Quality, and amongst the rest the Marquess Salinas, who was most treacherously slain by thirty Persons, who made themselves Masters of a Sloop, into which he went for safety out of the sinking Admiral Juseppe: That which instigated them to this horrid Act, was the sight of a small Trunk of Jewels which he carry’d into the Sloop: Not long after falling out amongst themselves about dividing the Spoil, several of them were discover’d, apprehended, and put to death.

This Fleet weighed Anchor the day after their Admiral Miguel de Echacareta was buried, who dy’d so suddenly that he could make no Will. A few days after the departure of the Fleet, a hundred and seventy Houses were burnt at Juan de Lua. It appears that the Spaniards out of fear of the Netherlanders, set Sail on the tenth of October, notwithstanding it was at an inconvenient time, because about that Season the Hurricanes rage most terribly in the Bay of Vera Crux.

By a Letter from the Treasurer Franciscus Suarez it appears, that the two Regiments in the City St. Salvador, the one Commanded by Christopher Mexia Bocanegra, consisting of nine Companies, each of sixty Men, and the other Commanded by Vasco de Mascarennas, consisting of thirteen Companies, cost the King of Spain yearly 21515 l. to maintain them.

Walbeck’s Exploits.

The Netherland Council at Reciffa no way discourag’d by their successless Attempts made the last Year on Rio Grande, sent thirteen Companies of Soldiers aboard of seventeen Vessels, to build a Fort at the River Formosa, where the Portuguese being too weak to resist them, set fire on a Store-house with three hundred Chests of Sugar, and fled: Walbeck was Commander in Chief in this Design, who Landing on Formosa found no fit place to build a Fort in, because the Shore, not being above a Musquet-shot broad, was inclos’d with Woods, behind which lay high Mountains that Commanded the Shore; therefore marching to Serinhain he burnt several Houses and a new Sugar-Mill, near which in a Store-house he took twelve hundred Chests of Sugar, which for want of Carts he could not carry to his Ships. Also before Porto Calvo he burnt a Carvel, and took a great number of Cattel on Camarigibi, and return’d without any farther Exploits to Reciffa, where the Cruisers had brought in several Prizes during his absence.

The Council resolving not to sit idle, set out another Fleet of eighteen Ships under the Command of Martin Thyszoon, with a Regiment of fourteen Companies under Stein Callenfels.

The Expedition of Martin Thyszoon and Stein Callenfels.

This Fleet approaching Cape Augustin, they found a ridge of Rocks along the Shore, against which the Sea beat with great vehemency; at length they came before a small Inlet, at whose Mouth lay a small Fort from which the Enemy fir’d upon the Mann’d Boats which Row’d by the same: at some distance they discern’d two Breastworks, one rais’d above the other near the Shore; on which when the Hollanders thought to Land, three hundred Portugueses fir’d at once upon them; and on a Hill not far from thence appear’d more Men, which amaz’d the Council of War, for the Inlet was so narrow, that not above six Boats could Land at once; and it was evident, that though the Enemy should chance to be beaten from behind his Breastworks, yet the Hollanders would lie expos’d to the Enemy’s Guns from the Fort Nazareth built on the Mountain; besides, Nazareth, if gain’d, could scarce be defended, unless the whole Mountain were Intrench’d round, which would not onely be very chargeable, but also impossible, because of the red Earth, altogether unfit for Fortifications; and the barren Mountain afforded neither Wood, nor any thing else; besides, the Storming of it would be very dangerous: The Entrance into the Haven was difficult, because a stonie Bank before the same suffer’d no Passage but betwixt small Openings; the chiefest whereof was guarded by a WaterCastle, and farther within by the Fort Puntael. Along the Sea-shore their Landing was prevented by the violent beating of the Waves, and a great square Tower on the Way up to the Fort Nazareth, whose Church is seen at a great distance off at Sea. All which consider’d, they judg’d it best to draw off their Men again, and so they return’d without having effected any thing to the purpose, onely Captain Schuppe took two Carvels with five hundred Chests of Sugar in the River Formosa.

The City of Garasu surprised by the Hollanders.

Soon after Martin Thyszoon being sent out with twenty two Sail, sent four Ships for Holland with the Lieutenant-Colonel Stein Callenfels, and the Councellor Serooskerken; yet thirteen Sail remain’d still before the Coast of Brasile, under the Command of Captain John Mast, who whilest he stood to and again from the Shore, and Cruising up and down, the Governor of Reciffa and Colonel Rembach march’d with five hundred Men and forty Negro’s, from Reciffa about six a Clock at Night, by Olinda along the Shore: Whereupon the Portuguese Horse-watch ran instantly to Real, two Leagues from Olinda, to give notice thereof to Albuquerque; but they surmounted all the Difficulties they met with by the Way (which were the greater in regard of the abundance of Rain that had lately fall’n,) and on the first of May 1632, came to the City Garasu about Noon; where whilest Rembach stood still in good order with three Companies, the Governor of Reciffa fell upon the Town with three Companies. The Inhabitants had not the least thoughts of being molested by the Netherlanders there, because they judg’d the Ways which led thither could not be pass’d in that rainy Season. In the first Onset a hundred Portugueses, most of them great Merchants, were slain, they being come thither with their Goods from Olinda; and amongst the Prisoners which they took, were six Franciscans.

This Victory the Hollanders obtain’d with the loss but of eight Men, and twenty five wounded, besides Captain Rembach, who was also wounded. The Governor of Reciffa entering the City, stav’d two hundred Pipes of Wine, to keep his Soldiers from over-drinking; and because there were many fair Women there, he caus’d them all to be lock’d up in the Church of St. Cosmo, to preserve them from the Soldiers outrages.

Description of Garasu.

The Priest Duarte Mendez Serraon (a Letter of whose John de Laet quotes) values the Booty carry’d away by the Hollanders from Garasu, at 9000 l. Sterl. besides the damage which the Place suffer’d, being almost ruin’d. He relates farther, That the City call’d Villa de Santo Cosmo de Garasu lay five Leagues to the Northward from Olinda; and that in it were three Churches, viz. Cosmus, Misericordia, and Heremitage de Santa Crux; as also two Cloysters, viz. Invocation de Antonio, inhabited by Capuchins, and another dedicated to Franciscus, inhabited by Persons of his Order; That the chief Church Cosmus, built like a flat-roof’d House, had a fair Entrance, before which stood two Turrets, and in them hung Bells; That the Franciscan Cloyster was inclos’d within a great Wall in the middle of a pleasant Garden, and had on each side a Tower; That most of the People who kept the Feast of St. Philip and St. Jacob, were at Mass when the Hollanders came thither, and though they saw the Soldiers out of their Windows, judg’d them to be Portugueses, who (as it was reported) had a Design upon Tamarica.

The Governor of Reciffa marching with his Booty from Garusa, set several Houses on fire, and march’d towards the Fort Orange, on the Island Tamarica. Albuquerque inform’d thereof, dispatch’d a Spanish Regiment, Commanded by Colonel Ferdinand Ludovico Barbalho, and Paulo de Perado, with a considerable Body of Volunteers; but they all came too late: Whereupon the Portugueses, being thus kept in continual Alarms ashore, and sustaining every day more and more Losses at Sea, began to desire Peace, and the rather, because they could not hear of any Fleet coming from Spain to their assistance; and hearing a Report, that the West-India Company were making great Preparations. To which purpose Peter Alvares (acquainted with the Dutch Commanders, as having been their Prisoner) was sent by Duarte de Albuquerque (to whom the Lordship of Pernambuco properly belong’d) and by his Brother (being General of all the Forces in Brasile) to Reciffa, to Treat about the deciding of the Differences between them and the Netherland West-India Company: But the Council in Reciffa weighing the many Disadvantages that would ensue, if they should upon easie Terms patch up a Peace with the Portugueses, return’d Alvares this Answer: “That the West-India Company was resolv’d, to the utmost of their power, to keep all those Places which they had taken by force of Arms; but that if he could move Albuquerque to deliver up the Countrey to them, he should be bountifully rewarded.”

After this the Hollanders Landing at Barra Grande, took great quantities of Wine and Tobacco, and burnt two Villages; as also the Sugar-Cane Fields, and Sugar-Mills on Catuwanha, also one at Barra Grande, and three at Porto Francisco.

At the same time the Hollanders also scatter’d Letters amongst the Portuguese, signifying their trouble for the great effusion of Blood in those Parts, which was occasion’d by their own stubborn and unreasonable Proceedings; likewise intimating the great Preparations that were making on their own part, and on the other side the great unlikelihood, and indeed impossibility, as things then stood, of receiving farther Succors from Spain.

The Hollanders Counsels betray’d to the Portuguese by Leonard van Lom.

These things being powerfully urg’d, had perhaps taken greater effect with the Portugueses, had not the secret Counsels of the Netherlanders been betray’d by Leonard van Lom, Overseer of the Prizes, and Translater of the Portuguese Letters, who confess’d that he was perswaded to that villanous Action in Amsterdam by a Portuguese Merchant, call’d Duarte Rodrigues Delves, with whom he had made some Agreement; and for the better confirmation had receiv’d the Sacrament upon it of an Amsterdam Priest: His Agreement was, “That he should go to Reciffa, enquire after all Concerns, and give speedy advice thereof to Rocque de Barros; which he did by a Mulatto, who carry’d Letters between them.”

This Villain the Council judging worthy of Death, first caus’d his two fore-Fingers to be cut off, next his Head, and afterwards his Body to be divided into four Quarters. The Mulatto was likewise Beheaded.

About this time the Treasurer Ceulen viewing the Isle Mayo, found the same to be surrounded with steep Rocks, abounding with Horses, Asses, Partridges and Goats, besides two Salt-pans. The Inhabitants, which go Arm’d with Half-pikes and rusty Hangers, are said to be a sort of out-law’d Portugueses, to the number of thirty, amongst whom was one Woman. They had a Governor, call’d Amaro, to whom they gave yearly eight thousand Goat-skins.

Ceulen Sailing from hence Steer’d by the Island Del Fogo, known by a great Mountain, whose high top vomits Fire. Not far from which he took the Ship St. Peter laden with Wine, with which he return’d safe to Reciffa, where a while after Gysselling arriv’d also, and was no sooner Landed, but four Ships, two Sloops, six Cock-boats, a Barque and a Hoy, set Sail under the Conduct of John Mast with four or five Companies of choice Musquetteers, Commanded by Colonel Schuppe, who Landed behind the stonie Bank of the River Alexio, surpris’d some Portuguese and Negro’s in their Houses, and march’d in the Night so fast, that by Day-break they were got to the Shore of the River Formosa, where they took two rich laden Fly-boats and a Carvel; and afterwards Landing in the Road Camarigibi, they took fifty Portuguese in a Village, as also a Store-house full of Chests with Sugar and Tobacco, burnt all the Buildings thereabouts, and amongst others a brave Sugar-Mill: Captain Byma burnt also an eminent Sugar-Mill near the Brook Maria Farinha. Martin Thyszoon lay a long time under the Line; but at last getting to the Isle Vacca he gave each Captain his Orders, and divided the Fleet, which joyn’d again before Havana, pass’d through the Straights Bahama (where he met with great Storms, and many other Inconveniences) to Holland. But Galeyn van Stapels, who parted with a Frigat from Thyszoons Fleet near Bonaire, Steer’d by the Promontory Cotoche to Sisal; which Village having plunder’d, he set it on fire, fetch’d a Barque in the Night from the Road of Campeche (whose City is seen at a great distance off at Sea, by the white Cloyster Francisco) and so set Sail for Zealand. Houte-been arriv’d also about the middle of June with a rich Booty in the Texel.

Schuppe and Lichthart take the Fort Formosa.

Not long after Houte-been weighing Anchor with the Otter Frigat, return’d to Reciffa, and in his Way thither took a Ship laden with Wine. Colonel Schuppe immediately upon his arrival had a Command given him of five hundred Men, and John Lichthart of three Sail of Ships, a Pinnace and five Sloops; with which they set Sail to the River Formosa. Schuppe Landing his Men there, march’d up to the Fort Formosa, fortifi’d with Moats, steep high Walls, and four Guns, Storm’d and took the same, killing all those that were in the Garrison, except the Governor Peter Albuquerque: In which Victory nevertheless the Hollanders lost the valiant Captain Philbert du Basson, who being shot in at the Throat with a Bullet, which came out behind the Ear, dy’d of the same, the Wound immediately festering, to which all Wounds are very subject in Brasile. The Hollanders also burnt four laden Barques, a Store-house full of Sugar, and pull’d down the Fort they had taken.

Setting Sail again, they Landed to the Northward of the River Antonio Grande, where they gain’d a Platform with five Guns, destroy’d six Ships, and took two more in the Haven Camarigibi; from whence they return’d to Reciffa, after having spoil’d and taken thirteen of the Portuguese Ships, several Sugar-Mills, Store-houses, and a Castle.

The Swol Frigat came also in a shatter’d condition to Reciffa, having been Engag’d with a Spanish Gallion carrying twenty eight great Guns, and full of Men, which nevertheless she would have master’d, had not an unfortunate Shot spoil’d all her Rigging.

About the same time the Captains Byma, Everwyn, and Rinking, set Sail with their Companies in three Ships to Porto Francisco, where Landing, they burnt three Sugar-Mills, besides several other brave Buildings, and brought away a rich Carvel, whilest Laurence van Rembach was made Colonel in Waerdenberg’s place, and Sigismond Schuppe Lieutenant-Colonel.

The Proffers which the Tapuyan Agent made to the Hollanders had been very advantageous, had not the Summer Season been too far spent: for he had promis’d, That if they would Land a considerable Party of Men two Leagues Southward from the River Grande, all the Tapuyans should joyn with them, and assist them in driving the Portuguese out of Brasile.

After this Schuppe and Lichthart went with thirteen Companies of Soldiers, and two hundred Seamen, to fall upon the Enemy’s Camp at the Afogados, where Albuquerque had rais’d several Works, partly for the securing of Verga, the best Spot of Land in all Pernambuco, where there are likewise more Sugar-Mills than in the whole Countrey, and partly to keep an open Way between Arryal and the Promontory St. Augustine: To which purpose they march’d by the Fort Æmilia along the plain Countrey, to the Stream Capivaribi, which they had cross’d before the Portuguese knew any thing of their approach, who being but a hundred and thirty, forsook their Works and ran into the Woods; but assisted with four Companies of Italians, they Sally’d out of Real and fell with great eagerness on the Seamen, who being guarded by forty Musquetteers were raising of Works in the Road which leads to Real, and put them to flight; but being rally’d, and seconded by Colonel Redburgh, they drove the Enemy into a By-way, guarded by Byma and Bongarson; where being stopt, and Captain Cloppenburgh from another side falling in amongst them with his Musquetteers, they became encompass’d, and had been all slain, had not Le Grande, by making way for Cloppenburgh, given them an opportunity of getting away between them.

The Council at Reciffa, to secure the footing which they had got on the other side of the River Capavaribi, took order about the building of a Fort, which requir’d the greater Labor, because the Earth was very stonie: not far from whence Captain John Smith walking, was shot by a Party of Portuguese lying behind some Chests of Sugar; the Blow whereof giving notice to his Ensign, he speedily march’d thither, and surprising the Portuguese, kill’d most part of them. The like success had Le Grande, Cloppenburgh, and Bongarson, who marching out upon a Design, surpris’d unawares in John de Mendoza’s Sugar-Mill, two Companies of Portuguese, who having watch’d there the whole Night, and composing themselves in the Morning to sleep, were set upon, and most of them kill’d, and the old Commander Antonio Ortizo de Mendoza taken, who not long before came thither with a Regiment of Portugueses; the Sugar-Mill was also set on fire.

These successful Expeditions still adding to the Hollanders fresh Courage, they follow’d the career of their Successes, and placing three Companies in the Works of the Afogados, drew their Army into three Divisions; Colonel Rembach was to Command the Forlorn; Schuppe, the main Body; and Byma, the Reserve; in which Order they waded through the River Capivaribi, placing some Musquetteers in a House built near the High-way, to secure their Return that way, and came without any resistance to the Arryal; where they found a long Street, with Shops on each side full of all sorts of Goods, which they pillag’d, notwithstanding the Enemy fir’d furiously from the Castle upon them, and wounded Colonel Rembach and Captain Redburgh. To the Northward before the Castle lay a Redoubt with two Guns, which Schuppe mastering, kill’d all that were in the same; but being too weak to carry away the Guns, he nail’d up the Touch-holes, and march’d off with his Men, but in such disorder, that the Portuguese Sallying out of their Garrison, fell in amongst them in that manner, that they were not able to bring away their wounded Men, amongst whom was Captain Redburgh; and it had been worse, had not Rembach (who though he was shot in at the Shoulder, under the Blade-bone whereof lay the Bullet) kept them off till such time as the Hollanders were got over the River Capivaribi, near the fore-mention’d House, guarded by a Company of Musquetteers, who kill’d above fifty of the Portugueses, besides fifty that had been slain in the former Skirmishes; the Hollanders themselves also had lost a hundred and thirty Men: yet notwithstanding they ceased not, but march’d in Parties through all parts of Verga, where they met with no opposition, but found the Sugar-Mills full of Sugar, left to be kept by a few Negro’s. Rembach also sent a Drummer to Real, to demand the Wounded, especially Colonel Redburgh, with a Letter from the Prisoner Antonio Mendoza, requesting the Governor Albuquerque and Duke of Bagnola, that they would be pleas’d to release the Hollanders on Exchange, or else upon Ransom. The Drummer being civilly Entertain’d by Albuquerque, brought back with him a strange Oyl call’d Aury, for the wounded Mendoza; with which a Wound made by a Bullet being anointed about three fingers breadth, it draws out the same. Bagnola afterwards sent it to Rembach, in requital for his kindness in sending Mendoza in a Hammock to Real. Mean while the Hollanders still fortifi’d their Works at the Afogados with Pallisado’s and Platforms, on which they put five Guns. They likewise work’d daily on the fore-mention’d Castle, whilest Schuppe march’d with four hundred Men in the Night over the River Jangada to Moribeca; which approaching, he perceiv’d the Way stopt up with fell’d Trees; wherefore he march’d about to the Village, which he found forsaken by the Inhabitants, and all the Houses left empty, onely five hundred Chests of Sugar that had been brought thither from Verga which Schuppe Commanded to be set on fire with the Village, leaving onely the Church, and at his Return burnt also a Sugar-Mill.

Articles between the West-India Company and the King of Spain.

The Governor Albuquerque having formerly never spar’d any Hollanders which fell into his hands, began now to be better advis’d; and it was also Agreed upon between the King of Spain and States of the United Netherlands, That they should burn no Church, unless the one, or the other Party made resistance in the same; That the Victor should be oblig’d, upon request of Quarter, to spare his Enemies, and release the Prisoners for an indifferent sum of Money; That both Parties should forbear to use chew’d or poyson’d Bullets.

Schuppe being chosen Chief over the Militia in Rembach’s Place (who dy’d of his Wound,) lay not long still, but setting Sail with eleven Ships to the Isle Tamarica, Landed seven Companies before the Castle Nostra Sennora de Conception; which, though well provided and fortifi’d, the Governor Pignioro surrendred, on Condition that he might depart with all his Men and the Church Ornaments.

Matthias Van Ceulen and Schuppe Rowing up the Stream Goiana with Sloops and Boats, put to flight Laurence Cavalcanti, burnt divers Sugar-Mills, and took abundance of rich Merchandize: Ten days they made havock in the middle of their Enemies Countreys without any resistance; for all of them fled to the Aldas, (so they call the Brasilian Villages): At last they return’d home with great Booty, especially of Sugar and Brasile Wood; whilest those at Reciffa were not idle, doing the Portuguese great mischief by their continual Sallies, Tourlong burning a Fishers Village, and Bongarson a stately Banquetting-house belonging to Cavalcant near Arryal; as also Pedro Acunha de Andada’s Sugar-Mill, from whence he took great Booty.

The Portuguese begin to fall off to the Hollanders.

Jacob Huigen slain.

About the same time the Portuguese of several Parts, terrifi’d by continual Alarms and Losses, began to incline to the West-India Company, believing that they should utterly be ruin’d, if they continu’d to joyn with Albuquerque’s Party (who claim’d Pernambuco wholly to himself) and therefore car’d not whether he or the Hollanders were Masters, so they might live peaceably. Mean while the Hollanders march’d from the Afogados to Arryal: Schuppe marching before with two hundred and fifty Seamen, was follow’d by the Lieutenant-Colonel De Vries, and he by a Company of Negro’s that carry’d Provisions; next Byma march’d with the Reserve. The Treasurer John Gyseling also accompanied the Army, which Encamp’d near Francisco Brito Machado’s Wind-Mill, and Garrison’d the half-finish’d Fort near the Sugar-Mill belonging to Marcus Andre, whilest three Companies Commanded by Captain De Vries march’d to Monteroos-Mills to take the same; but the Portuguese lying in an Ambuscade had given them a shrewd Rebuke, had not Schuppe, hearing the Guns, sent away the Captains Picard and Garstman, who coming out from amongst the Sugar-Canes, put the Enemy to flight; yet the Portuguese to increase daily, insomuch that they got above two thousand Men together at Arryal, whilest the Dutch Army began to want Provisions, wherefore Jacob Huigen was order’d to fetch a Supply from Reciffa; but as he was coming up the River with the Exeter Ketch, and a Boat hung about with Hides to secure his Men from the Bullets, and being within Musquet-shot from the Works where Captain Schuppe lay, the Enemy’s whole Power shot so vehemently upon him from the top of a Hill, that both the Ketch and Boat were sunk; Huigen himself receiv’d two mortal Wounds, and most of his Men were kill’d, a few wounded onely escaping with Life. Schuppe therefore was forc’d to return for want of Provisions, and the rather, because he was inform’d that Bagnola was coming with a Supply of seven hundred Men.

Mean while the two Captains, Smient and Dunkirken perform’d a valiant Exploit, viz. they went with a few Men in a Boat, and took a great Portuguese Vessel richly laden, having no more than four Blunderbusses and their Swords in the Boat with them.

A notable Victory of Byma over Francisco Almeda.

Byma also fell upon the Village Moriwere, where he found most of the People at Church. Albuquerque inform’d thereof, sent two hundred Men immediately, Commanded by Francisco Almeda, to intercept him in his Return; but he marching on to Tamarica, they pursu’d him; he marching but slowly, because the narrow Way was stopt up with fell’d Trees, they overtook him half a League beyond Garasu, near Peter Rocha’s Sugar-Mill; where after a sharp Encounter between them, a great slaughter was made amongst the Spaniards, Almeda and many other Persons being slain, and the rest put to flight. Byma having obtain’d this Victory, march’d to Garusa and burnt the same, sparing onely the Churches and Cloysters, according to the Articles made between Albuquerque and Rembach.

Schuppe prevented from crossing the River Jangada by the many muddy Creek, return’d back to Reciffa with great Booty, which he had taken out of a Store-house. The Dutch Cruisers also brought in many Prizes.

Van Hoorn’s Exploits.

The Exploits perform’d by John Johnszoon van Hoorn, with four Ships, three Ketches, and a Sloop, are likewise very remarkable; for with this Fleet in the first place he took the City Truxillo, and from thence Sailing towards the City Campeche, and Storming the same valiantly, soon became Master of it; the Booty of which two Places being brought aboard, increas’d considerably the West-India Companies Stock.

In regard Albuquerque understood the Situation of Pernambuco better than the Hollanders, and had all the Natives to assist him, and by consequence was the better able to defend himself against their continual Alarms, the Council at Reciffa therefore judg’d it convenient to make a farther Voyage to the South, that the Portuguese, who were highly discontented about the Losses which they had sustain’d, might be the sooner induc’d to submit to their Government: To which purpose ten Ketches, Mann’d with seven hundred Soldiers, besides Seamen, set Sail on the tenth of October, under the Command of John Gyseling, Schuppe, and Servaes Carpentier, who first ran into the River Porto de Piedras, where they took a considerable number of Chests of Sugar, out of Mills, Barques, and Store-houses, waded through the little Scream Tatona Mansa, burnt a Village of the same Denomination, and Sail’d to the River Camarigibi, which they Rowing up in the Night, were got not above four Leagues by Day-break, the contrary Tide, and the Plants call’d Mangues having hindred them from getting farther; but being inform’d by certain Portuguese Prisoners, that abundance of Sugar lay in Porto Francisco, they marching thither, found under a Straw Roof in a Wood, seventy four Chests of Sugar, and a great deal more in several Store-houses. They also pillag’d the whole Countrey towards Alagoa del Noort, St. Miguel, and Alagoa del Zur. Not far from which Schuppe falling upon the Village Sennora de Conception, burnt the same, as also a Ship upon the Stocks, the Houses at the Mouth of the Stream Alagoa, and the Tackling belonging to the two Ships, and carry’d away with them a very great Booty.

Tourlon also march’d with four Companies from Tamarica to Mangianguape, where the Garrison from Garasu; and some Jesuits lay, to disswade the People from submitting themselves to the West-India Company, to which they were much inclin’d. But Tourlon march’d not so privately, but that the Enemy had notice thereof, and fled; wherefore he finding Mangianguape empty, offer’d the same to the Flames, as also several Sugar-Mills, but spar’d the Lives of all those who begg’d Quarter.

Byma’s bold Attempt.

Byma about the same time with a hundred and forty Musquetteers, besides two Companies of Seamen, leaving the Afogados in the Night, march’d to Amaro by Daybreak, which he set on fire, with a Sugar-Mill and a Store-house full of Sugar, after every Soldier had taken as much as he could carry: upon which the Enemy taking Alarm, plac’d their Ambuscades so cunningly, and fell upon them so furiously, that they had undoubtedly kill’d every Man of them, had not a Party come in timely to their assistance, and forc’d the Portuguese to fly to a neighboring Sugar-Mill built on a Hill, from whence they fir’d with great eagerness, and made a mighty noise, blowing their Trumpets and beating their Drums. Byma being forced to pass by the Mill within the reach of the Enemy’s Guns, resolv’d upon a bold Attempt, and commanding his Men to throw away their Sugar, and other Booty with which they burthen’d themselves, on a sudden ran up to the top of the Hill; which Action so amaz’d the Portuguese, that they fled without offering the least resistance. Byma thereupon proceeded on his Way to the Afogados, leaving behind him above seventy slain, and divers wounded.

Prizes taken by Smient and Lichthart.

During these Exploits on Shore, the Commander Smient Cruis’d with six Sail before Paraiba; two Ships belonging to his Fleet steering towards the Haven of Formosa, discover’d five Carvels, a Pink carrying twenty six, and a great Fly-boat eighteen Guns, both Dunkirkers; one of the Carvels ran aground, and was stav’d to pieces, two of them got into Rio Grande, and the other two were taken.

About the same time Lichthart with two Sloops pass’d into the River Conayou, set upon seven Barques of the Portuguese, Mann’d with seventy Seamen, and ply’d them with his Brass Guns after such a manner, that few escap’d with their Lives: he took what he thought fit out of the Barques, and afterwards set them on fire.

Van Ceulen’s Expedition.

The Treasurer Matthias van Ceulen weighed Anchor with four Ships and seven Ketches, Mann’d with eight hundred Men, with which he set Sail to Rio Grande, with intention to fall upon the Fort Tres Reyes. In the River he took two Carvels, though they lay close under the Castle, Landed a Company of Soldiers, and a hundred and fifty Seamen on the Southern Shore, guarded the fresh River with Boats, march’d directly to Tres Reyes, and Encamp’d himself near the Redoubt which lay before the Castle, being follow’d by Byma, Garstman, and Cloppenburgh, who in their Way took a House built on a Hill, and considerable Booty in it. Byma getting about Noon to the Village Natall, left some of his Men there, whilest he march’d with the rest to the Castle Tres Reyes. Ceulen sending to demand the Castle, receiv’d at first a resolute denyal from the Governor Peter Mendez de Govea; but when the Besieged saw the Hollanders resolutely bent upon a Storm, they sent to desire a Treaty, and after some small Capitulation the Castle was surrendred upon Articles. Garstman being made Commander of the Castle, had a hundred and fifty Soldiers allow’d him. The Fleet set Sail again, after they had pull’d down and destroy’d all the Works which had been rais’d, and made the Inhabitants take an Oath to be faithful to Garstman, who chang’d the Name of the Castle from Tres Reyes to that of Ceulen, being the Name of the Treasurer, who bore the chiefest Command in the Siege, and when the Brasilian King Jandui came with a great Train to congratulate the Companies success, receiv’d him with great civility.

In the beginning of the Year 1634. twenty six Sail weighed Anchor from Reciffa, to Cruise up and down in Squadrons before the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, the Promontory St. Augustine, the Rivers Francisco and Parayba. Schuppe and Lichthart also set Sail with two Ships, a Ketch, two Pinnaces, and a Sloop, carrying two hundred Soldiers besides Seamen.

Lichthart drives the Portuguese out of the Puntael.

Mean while fresh Forces were sent from the Texel, the Maes and Zeland, to Reciffa, where the Council undertook another notable Design, viz. to surprize the Forts along the River Parayba: whither coming with twenty Sail, they divided themselves into two Squadrons under the Command of the Treasurer John Gyseling, Schuppe, Servaes Carpentier, and Lichthart. Having receiv’d some repulse at the Fort Nazaretta, they resolv’d upon Action in some other place, and to that purpose Steer’d towards the Point St. Augustine; by Day-break a part of the Fleet ran into the Mouth of the Haven, notwithstanding the Portuguese fir’d upon them with great Guns from the Castle, and all their Works, without doing any considerable damage, onely the Sea-knight Ketch running aground was Shatter’d all to pieces; whilest the Hollanders Commanded by Captain Lichthart Landed near Puntael, and fell upon the Portuguese in such a manner, that they forc’d them to forsake the Place, burnt above two thousand Chests of Sugar, several Store-houses, and a great Ship, besides two Barques.

They endeavor in vain to regain the Puntael.

Lichthart being Master of the Puntael, was very busie in finishing a Stone Redoubt which the Enemy had begun, and secur’d it by a Wall and Pallisado’s. Here he plac’d two Companies, and rais’d several Works, whilest the Portuguese receiving Aid from all the neighboring Places, set upon the recovery of the Puntael, being the rather encourag’d thereunto, in regard the Hollanders Forces were still in their Ships. Fifteen hundred Portugueses were divided into two Parties, the greatest of which came through behind the adjacent Morasses, and forc’d in on the side of the place near which the fifteen Ships taken by Lichthart lay at an Anchor, whilest the other Party fell upon the Out-works; where though the Hollanders defended themselves valiantly at first, yet they were forc’d to Retreat to the Redoubt, where both Parties fought with great eagerness; but the Hollanders Ketches haling near the Shore, and firing in amongst the Portuguese with their great Guns, forc’d them to flye, and contrary to their Custom, to leave their dead Bodies behind them.

Soon after, whilest Gysseling, Schuppe, and Lichthart stay’d at the Puntael, the Portuguese, designing to take Reciffa, kept the Afogados and the Fort on Antonio Vaes in continual Alarm; which made the Hollanders send most of their Militia thither, and to fortifie yet more strongly than before. The Castle De Bruin first discovering the Portuguese wading through the Water, fir’d great Guns at them, upon the hearing of which Waerdenburgh and St. George fir’d also. The Treasurer Ceulen and Lieutenant-Colonel Byma march’d with a Company of Soldiers to the Stone Redoubt, from whence they fir’d stoutly upon the Enemy; yet thirty of them got by the Pallisado’s and Stone Redoubt: wherefore Ceulen march’d in with some of his Men to assist the Citizens, and keep the woodden Battery, where the Portuguese were stopt, and with great and small Shot put to flight. The Prisoners which the Hollanders took inform’d them, That Martin Suares, chief Commander over the Portuguese that made this Attempt, had divided his Men into three Parties; the Reserve, which consisted of three hundred Men, was to march on upon the making of a sign when the other Parties were past, one along the River Bibiriba, and the other along the Shore by the Stone Redoubt into Reciffa, to burn the Place, as also all manner of Provision and Ammunition.

Byma attempts the taking of Real, but without success.

Whilest this Design of the Portuguese fell out so unfortunately, being discover’d to Ceulen by a Renegado, the Hollanders at Reciffa receiv’d two Companies from their Regiment at the Puntael, and a considerable number of Men rais’d in Holland by the West India Company. Ceulen and Byma thus supply’d, went continually out in Parties, burnt in view of the Garrison in Arryal the Sugar-Mills belonging to Francisco Montero and Lewis Ramires, and were inform’d by five Italian Renegado’s, That there were not three hundred Men in Garrison in Arryal; which so encourag’d Byma, that he resolving to fall upon the same, march’d thither in the Night with a thousand Men from Reciffa, and by Day-break shot sixteen Granado’s from a neighboring Hill, of which seven fell into Arryal, but did little Execution; besides, the Strength of the Place was such, and the number of Men so considerable, that his Design had no other success, than that a Hand-granado falling short amongst the Houses before the Fort, set fire on them, and in a short time burnt a whole Street with rich Shops, and the Habitations of the Italians.

The Portuguese at the Puntael being inform’d, that Byma had Besieg’d Arryal with a thousand Men, judg’d that most of the Hollanders were gone thither from the Puntael; which they were the apter to believe, because the Hollanders coming but little abroad stay’d within their Redoubts, which Lichthart had joyn’d to a Battery; wherefore they made another Attempt with a hundred and twenty Men on the Puntael; but a Carvel with two Brass Guns, and a Company of Soldiers lying at Anchor near the Place by which the Portuguese were to pass, and they not expecting to meet with any resistance there, they were, as soon as they approached the Carvel, fir’d upon by the Hollanders, who killing several of their Men, so affrighted them, that they return’d without making any farther Attempt.

Overtures of Peace from the Portuguese.

Whilest every day more and more Prizes were taken by the Hollanders, and brought into Reciffa, and fresh Supplies sent them from Holland, there began to be some Overtures of Peace from the Portuguese; wherein also the King of Spain, by reason of the several Damages he had sustain’d from the Dutch, began to concern himself, and to menace them with the great Forces he was able to raise, by reason of the late safe arrival of two rich Plate-Fleets, if they came not to reasonable Terms. But answer was return’d from Byma, “That if they were minded to Treat about giving of Quarter, or any such like Point in difference between them, they should find him ready; but that the West-India Company would never resign those Places taken in Brasile with the Sword, either for Money or Goods, but would defend them to the utmost of their Power.”

The Hollanders also chang’d the Names of several Places taken from the Portuguese; for the Castle near the Promontory St. Augustine was call’d Gysseling; the Town on Tamarica, Schuppen-stadt; the Fort at the Afogados, Prince William; and the Puntael, The Fortress Vander Dussen.

Ceulen and Gysseling return home.

Jandur’s great service to the Netherlanders.

Notwithstanding the Requests of the States of the Netherlands and West-India Company, to the Commissioners Ceulen and Gysseling, to stay longer in the West-Indies, yet they prepar’d for their Voyage home, and the speedier, because they expected great scarcity of Provisions, unless a sudden Supply came from Holland. During their two years Government here, they had taken five thousand five hundred and nineteen Chests of Sugar, a hundred fifty nine thousand nine hundred thirty and nine Pound of Brasile Wood, one and thirty Ships laden with several Goods, which amounted to 230000 l. besides the value of the Ships and Guns, the taken Forts, destroy’d Sugar-Mills, and other Buildings. They left at their going away above four thousand Soldiers, divided into thirty two Companies, to guard Brasile, under the Command of Schuppe and Arcisseusky, and carry’d with them a hundred Soldiers, besides one and fifty sick and maimed: Moreover, thirty two Sail of Ships, Mann’d with a thousand and eighty seven Seamen, were order’d to Cruise up and down before the Coast of Brasile, besides four Ketches before the Promontory of St. Augustine, and six Ships in the Haven of Pernambuco.

After Ceulen and Gysseling had set Sail for Holland, divers Prizes were brought into Reciffa, as also several Ships arriv’d there from the Texel and the Maes. The Hollanders went out continually in Parties, whilest Schuppe and Lichthart set Sail also with eight Ships, Mann’d with six Companies of Soldiers, besides Seamen, to plunder and pillage all the Havens to the South, where several Portuguese Vessels lay laden with Sugar. But Janduy, who with his Subjects the Tapuyans, joyn’d with the Governor Garstman, kill’d at one time thirty seven Portugueses, and not long after two hundred and sixty more; taking his leave of Garstman, went home with six Hollanders, leaving his Son, the young Janduy, and his Brother Caracara, together with his Nephew Copun, to his care.

Janduy made it his Business to perswade the adjacent Tapuyans to joyn their Forces with his, and so by the Hollanders assistance to fall upon the Portuguese. Mean while the young Janduy and Copun went to Reciffa, which was the rather permitted, that they might be able to damp the Reports which the Portuguese had spread amongst the Tapuyans, viz. That the Hollanders were very ill provided, and therefore made all possible Preparations to defend Reciffa, and consequently the whole Countrey of Brasile, and so leave those Tapuyans that joyn’d with them to the mercy of the Spaniards.

Ambassadors sent to consult with him about carrying on their Designs.

Not long after were dispatch’d from thence the Councellors Jacob Stackhower, and Colonel Arcisseusky, with the Interpreter Antonio Parapoavo, to Treat with Janduy about the Design which they had upon the Portuguese, and also what Advantages he should receive, if he would assist the West-India Company with his Forces, whenever he should be sent to.

His Power, Enemies, and Allies.

King Janduy bore Command over sixteen hundred Men, whose Wives carry’d their Hammocks after them to sleep on in the Night, having no setled Habitations, but ranging in Parties up and down from place to place to get their Food; the young People went commonly along with Beretiawa, and the old with Janduy; round about whose Countrey dwelt the poor Natives Aciki, as also Juckerijou, Ocioneciou, Pajoke, and Aponorijou: the first are Commanded by King Coctaculy; the second, by Marakou, a Friend of the Portugueses; the third, by Nonhu; the fourth, by Kidoa; and the last, by Jarepo: which two last are no way inferior in Power to Janduy, but the others much weaker.

Four sorts of People continually Warr’d against Janduy, viz. the Jenho, who live so far up in the Countrey, that no Christians ever came to the knowledge of them; the other three are the Woyana, Carivy, and Caririwassu, who assist the Portuguese.

The fore-mention’d Interpreter Parapoavo was met in his Journey by a Company of Tapuyans, led by Commendaoura, Janduy’s Sisters Son, who was to succeed him after his death, according to the Custom of the Tapuyans, whose Sons do not succeed their Fathers in the Throne, but their Sisters Sons. Commendaoura told him, That he was impower’d by his Uncle to Treat with the Hollanders; to which purpose coming with forty Men before the Castle Ceulen, he inform’d them, That Jandouy could not come to them with his whole Power, because there was no fresh Water in the Mountains Mitiapa in the Summer; Moreover, that he Mourn’d for his deceased Wife. Janduoy was also requested to go to Parayba, where he should get great store of Booty, and that the Hollanders would follow them with a considerable Power.

The Fort Conayou taken by Arcisseusky.

Arcisseusky being inform’d of the Condition of Conayou by two, who having been taken Prisoners by the Portuguese, leap’d over-board from a Carvel, bound from thence to Portugal, and swam ashore, march’d from the Fort Ceulen in the Night with two hundred Men, besides forty Tapuyans, who kill’d more Venison for the Hollanders than they were able to eat; and coming within two Cannons-shot of Conayou, he divided his Men into four Parties, that so they might Storm the four Corners of the Fort at once; which having done by swimming over the Moat, and climbing up the Walls, which were a Pikes length, they got into the Fort, in which they found eleven dead Bodies, ten Iron Guns, two Hooks, and several Chests of Sugar; and amongst other Prisoners they took the Captain Alvares Fragoso d’ Albuquerque.

Stackhower also setting Sail when Arcisseusky left the Castle Ceulen, intending to meet him again at an appointed time before Conayou, was kept back by contrary Winds.

After this Arcisseusky set Sail to Mongoangape, where Rowing up the River, he took a Ketch with two hundred Chests of Sugar, as also a Carvel and a Boat, and Landed where the River bends about a Mountain, which so affrighted the Portuguese, that they quitted Antonio Marino’s Sugar-Mills. Soon after the Fleet took a Barque with Wine, and return’d to Reciffa.

Mean while Schuppe was not idle, for going up the River Camarigibi, he burnt divers Houses, as also on each side of the River Alagoa; where he also took four rich Sugar-Mills, whilest many Vessels from the United Netherlands brought several Ships into the Haven of Pernambuco, which they had taken on the Coast of Brasile.

The Fort Santa Margareta attempted by the Hollanders.

About the latter end of November 1634. thirty two Sail, divided into two Squadrons (the first carrying in one and twenty Ships, a thousand nine hundred forty and five Soldiers, the second on eleven Ketches, four hundred and nine) under the Command of Schuppe, Arcisseusky, Carpentier, and Stackhower, weigh’d Anchor to go to Parayba; where Schuppe Landing first with six hundred Men, fell upon the Enemy in such a manner, that he put them to flight, and forc’d them to leave a great part of their Arms, Hats and Coats behind; and it wanted little but the Governor Antonio d’ Albuquerque had been taken in the pursuit: Mean while the rest of the Hollanders Landed, and Casper Ley march’d along a Cart-Road with three Companies directly to the Fort Santa Margareta, and Encamp’d himself behind a Hill, about a Musquet-shot from the Walls of the Fort: Schuppe going along the Shore, found divers forsaken Works, and Intrench’d along the River on the East-side of the Castle. Arcisseusky march’d on the Right-hand along the Sea-shore in view of the Portuguese in Garrison. In the River lay an Isle, on which was built the Castle Restinga, which could receive constant Aid from the Castle Margareta on the Main.

The Fort Margareta taken by Schuppe.

The Fort Antonio taken by Lichthart.

Lichthart going in between the Island and the Castle Margareta with six well Mann’d Boats, took two Barques and a Boat behind the Island, and march’d through a Wood to Restringa; where he found that the Fort separated from the Island, was surrounded with Water, wherefore he withdrew into the Wood till the Water was fall’n down, and then Storm’d the Fort Restringa, and notwithstanding the Portuguese fir’d continually upon him with two Brass Guns, he soon became Master of it, and cut off all those whom he found had born Arms; whilest Schuppe fir’d upon the Fort Margareta from a Platform, and also threw Granado’s into the same. Arcisseusky likewise approach’d nearer and nearer with his Trenches, on which the Portuguese discharged many Guns; but after the Breastworks were most of them spoil’d, the Governor, Simon de Albuquerque, surrendred the Fort to Schuppe, who permitted a hundred and fifty Men that were in Garrison there, to go to their several Dwellings up in the Countrey, the rest were Transported to other places, on promise that they would not bear Arms against the West-India Company during the space of six Moneths. In the Castle the Hollanders found six Brass Demi-Culverins and fifteen Drakes, besides other Ammunition, with which the Victors pursu’d their Conquest, putting themselves in a posture to go up a Creek which runs two Leagues along a River to Parayba, and to fall upon that City, when two French Renegado’s coming from the Northern Fort Antonio brought information, That that Fort was guarded but by a few Men, and had but little Gun-powder, and if the Hollanders would but once make a shew of Storming the same, it would soon be deliver’d to them, though for its Situation it is invincible; but Schuppe suppos’d that there might be a Plot in this Information, and the rather, because he heard that the Duke of Bagnola was coming thither with six hundred Men; nevertheless, to be better assur’d thereof, he sent a Drummer to demand Antonio: The Governor thereof, call’d Magaglianes desir’d three days time to consider, which was utterly deny’d him, and he had onely leave to carry away the King’s Standard, and his Request granted, That the Hollanders should make a shew of Storming the Castle, that it might not be said he had surrendred such a Fortress without a Gun being fir’d; after which Lichthart went into the Castle, wondring at such a Victory; for the Fort, on which no Charges had been spar’d, lay upon an inaccessible place, and had five Brass Culverins and nineteen Iron Guns.

The City Parayba deserted by Bagnola.

The Hollanders encourag’d by their good Success, went the same Night up the River Parayba to the Creek Tambia Grande; where Landing, they found all the Works empty, three Iron Guns lying dismounted on the Ground, the City Parayba without People, and the Guns about the same either made useless, or sunk in the Haven. A Hamburgher that had liv’d a considerable time in Parayba, otherwise call’d Philippea, inform’d the Hollanders, That Bagnola seeing no means to defend Parayba, was gone to Goyana with two Companies, one of Italians, and the other Spaniards, who were march’d into the Woods, after they had burnt three Ships, and two Store-houses full of Sugar, in which there were consum’d near upon three hundred Chests.

Before this Design upon Parayba was undertaken, the West-India Company sent out four Vessels under the Command of John Walbeek, to the Isle Curacao; the Situation of which John Otzon knew exactly, having been a long time a Prisoner there: Walbeek getting through a narrow Mouth between several Rocks into a convenient Harbor before Curacao, Landed seventy five Musquetteers who were Encountred by seventy Brasilians Arm’d with Clubs, which the Spaniards had animated to fight, by making them half Drunk. The Hollanders having march’d all over the Island, burnt the Village Maria, and at last agreed with the Governor Alonso Lopes de Morla to leave the Isle.

Schuppe chang’d the Name of Parayba, or Nossa Sennora das Nieves, or Philippea, into Frederick-Stadt, in honor to the Prince of Orange, nam’d Frederick Henrick.

Parayba, or Henrick-stadt describ’d.

This City hath two great Market-places, twelve Streets, and a large Franciscan Cloyster, built near a Lake, and inclos’d within a Wall by a broad Bay, which the River Parayba makes before the City; the Countrey about which is mountainous: In other places, especially along the River, lie many fruitful Plains, abounding in some places with the Grain Mandihoca, which is ground to Meal, Potato’s, Lemmons, Cabbages, Cucumbers, Bananas, Cocoa-Nuts, Ginger, Araba, very delicious when Preserv’d with Sugar, and Cacious, somewhat like Chesnuts, of which the Natives make an intoxicating Liquor.

Whilest all things were put in good order at Parayba, Colonel Picard march’d with eight Companies to the House Validaris, if possible, there to take the Governor Antonio Albuquerque Prisoner; but he being forsaken by all the Brasilians (who came back with Picard and their Commander, the Jesuit Emanuel de Morais) absconded himself; not long before which a Proclamation had been publish’d in the Name of the States of the United Netherlands and the West-India Company, promising great Civilities and Advantages to all the Inhabitants of Parayba, whether Natives or others, that would come in and submit to their Government.

This Invitation was so well receiv’d, that many who were kept back so long as Albuquerque appear’d, as soon as they heard of his obscuring himself, came in to the Hollanders, as Duarte Gomes, and several eminent Portugueses, with a considerable number of indifferent quality; as also the Inhabitants of the Province of Rio Grande came to Frederick-Stadt, to claim the benefit of the Proclamation.

Rebellino forced to flye from place to place.

Arcisseusky and Stackhower marching to Goyana with seven hundred and fifty Men, took up their Quarters in the Village Capivaribi, lying at a River of the same Name; where all the Inhabitants of Goyana being fully satisfi’d with the Hollanders Proposals, own’d their Government, and fell off from the King of Spain. But the Spanish Captain Rebellino, animated by the Jesuits in the Village Mosuick, got three hundred Soldiers together, besides a considerable company of Brasilians, Commanded by Camaron, and burnt all the Sugar-Canes and Brasile Wood in Goyana; whither Arcisseusky marching, soon put them to flight, and burnt the Village Mosuick, with the Church and Jesuits Cloyster, from whence the Enemy ran to the strange Mountain Miritbi, which in the rainy Season, especially when great Showers fall, makes a noise like claps of Thunder, or like great Guns. The same Wonder is observ’d of the Mountain Pasayra, in a Wood behind Girgolio Barro’s Sugar-Mills; the mystery whereof we leave to Philosophers to enquire into. Arcisseusky follow’d Rebellino, who had ambuscado’d himself about half a League from Mosuick; from whence he being also driven, his Men began more and more to desert him, whilest Schuppe with a considerable number of Men came to Arcisseusky; Encamping themselves about Musarope, they sent eighty Musquetteers, Commanded by Lieutenant Metting, to an adjacent Wood, where Rebellino Quartering, Engag’d with Metting, till Schuppe coming to his assistance, he fled to Nazaretta. After which the Countrey thereabouts enjoy’d the happiness of Peace.

The Castle Real taken by Arcisseusky.

Arcisseusky staying to settle all things in good order in Parayba, took up his Quarters near the Castle Real, about a Cannon-shot from the River Afogados, and a League and a half from the Hollanders Fort so call’d; yet his Design was not to lay close Siege to the same, but to prevent all manner of Aid from coming to it, the rather, because he was inform’d, that there were not above sixty six hundred Cans of Meal, and sixty five Head of Cattel in the Fort, for three hundred Portuguese and seven hundred Brasilians; to which purpose he built several Redoubts, Batteries and Platforms: after he had lay’n before it three Moneths it was surrendred upon these following Articles, viz. “That the Besieged should march out with lighted Matches, Bullets in their Mouths, flying Colours, and with Bag and Baggage, and be Transported either to Tercera or Madera.” The Church Ornaments they had also leave to carry away with them, but the Guns and other Ammunition were to remain in the Fort. Hereupon the Governor Andreas Marini march’d out with five hundred choice Soldiers, besides a hundred and fifty which he had out of the Countrey; and two hundred Families that dwelt about Real, ransom’d their Goods for 5000 l. In the Fort the Hollanders found fifteen Brass, and five Iron Guns.

Mean while Lichthart set Sail with six Ships and five little Ketches, carrying five Companies; with which Landing on Barra Grande, he march’d two Leagues along the Shore to the Church of St. Bento, built on a high Hill, round about which he Encamp’d himself, and fortifi’d the same with Pallisado’s.

Hither the Inhabitants of Porto Calvo came in great numbers to take the Oath of Allegiance to the West-India Company.

Bagnola routed by Lichthart.

Lichthart assisted by Captain Cornelis Exel’s Company, march’d directly to Porto Calvo, notwithstanding he had but three hundred and twenty seven Men, with which he went along a troublesom Way, up Hill and down Hill, and coming near Porto Calvo, was inform’d by a Portuguese, That the Duke Bagnola possess’d a Church there full of Port-holes, with two hundred choice Men, besides a Company newly arriv’d there from Serinhain; and that he had a strong Fortification near the River; nevertheless Lichthart marching towards him, discover’d his Forces rank’d on a steep Mountain, whither he running with his Men, forc’d Bagnola to quit the Church, as also those that lay in Ambuscade near the High-way, whilest eighty Brasilians, some Portugueses, and a Company of Neopolitans, thought to have fall’n upon the Barques of the Hollanders, but seeing the States Flag upon the Church, and Bagnola routed, they soon Retreated. This Victory cost the Hollanders but seven Men, besides eighteen wounded; for which the Portuguese lost many more.

The Inhabitants of Camarigibi, Antonio, and about Porto Calvo, accepting of the Articles propos’d in Parayba, took the Oath of Allegiance to the Hollanders.

In the interim after Arcisseusky had taken the Fort Real, and given Command thereof to Verdoes, he set forth with ten Companies and three hundred Brasilians, to joyn with Schuppe, who Besieg’d the Fort Nazaretta near the Promontory St. Augustine; but the Governor Albuquerque fearing he should be surpris’d, fled from thence with three hundred Men, and left Peter Correa de Gamba, and Lewis Barbalho Bizerra in his stead. But Schuppe approach’d so near with his Trenches and Granado’s, that Correa inform’d of Arcisseusky’s coming, surrendred the Castle upon advantageous Articles.

Porto Calvo surpris’d by Albuquerque.

After this Success Schuppe march’d along the Shore, and Arcisseusky up into the Countrey, both with intention to fall upon the Enemy in Serinhain. Arcisseusky marching along a troublesom Way, came to Miguel de Poyaca with six Companies, where the Councellor Schotte had fortifi’d a Church; and somewhat farther he met with a brave Franciscan Cloyster, where he was inform’d, that the Governor Albuquerque had again surpris’d the Fort Porto Calvo; which prov’d too true; for Schuppe hastening to his assistance through Serinhain, Una, and Barro, staid at Furicoso, a League from Porto Calvo, for Arcisseusky, who was coming thither with seven Companies over the deep and crooked Stream Serinhain; and before Villa Foamosa, a pleasant Village, in which stood an old Jesuits Cloyster and a little Church, both their Forces joyn’d together, making up seventeen Companies of Foot, and one Troop of Horse; but they came too late: for after a long and stout Assault, and no less Resistance from the Besieged, the Place was surrendred to Albuquerque, who caus’d Domingo Calabar to be Quarter’d; a Man not inferior for Strength and Activity to that Milo Crotoniates, so famous amongst the ancient Grecians: Amongst other proofs of his Strength it is related, that he took a Stag running full speed by the Horns, and turning its Neck, pull’d the Tongue out of its Mouth. The reason why Albuquerque caus’d him to be put to that death, was because he had once joyn’d with the Hollanders, and done the Portuguese much hurt. But Schuppe and Arcisseusky marching to Porto Calvo, to Engage with Albuquerque, who was eight hundred Portuguese and a thousand Brasilians strong, found the Place ruin’d, and about a hundred Hollanders unbury’d, and Albuquerque march’d away, driving the Inhabitants about Porto Calvo before him, with three hundred Prisoners: The Hollanders following him, built a Fort at Praipuera, to prevent the Portuguese from returning to Porto Calvo. Schuppe also demanded three Companies more to supply the places of the sick and slain Men, as also those who were so miserably plagued by the Bicios, that they were not able to go. These Bicios are little Animals, which creeping in at the Pores, cause an insufferable pain. Schuppe’s Request was the sooner granted, because the Councel at Reciffa judg’d it convenient to pull down the Forts Real and Nazaretta, being already much decay’d and unserviceable, and that those who were in Garrison in them, should Encamp in the Fields. Schuppe had long before this time fall’n upon the Enemy in the Afogados, but that he wanted Provisions, and little Vessels, which were requir’d for that Expedition. But marching up into the Countrey, he left the Command to Arcisseusky, who much forwarded the building of the Fort on Paripuera.

A great Fleet of Spaniards appears before Reciffa.

The Year 1635. being almost expir’d, one Morning about Day-break thirty two Sail were seen to Steer directly towards Reciffa; two Ships of an extraordinary bigness were follow’d by nine Gallions, and these by the rest of the Fleet, consisting of Pinks, Carvels, and Barques; all which approaching, were known to be Spaniards, which struck no small amazement to the Inhabitants of Reciffa, most of their Ships being Cruising abroad before the Coast of Brasile and their Men a great distance off in the Field; onely five Ships fitted for an Engagement being at Anchor, and five more deeply laden: Mean while the Spanish Admiral approach’d within a Cannon-shot of the Fame Ketch, discharg’d one Gun, and stood off to Sea again, being inform’d that Real and Nazaretta were taken by the Hollanders. On the other side, all the Places in their possession had notice of this Fleet, which Lichthart follow’d with six Ships and two Ketches, carrying two Companies of Soldiers, besides Seamen, and keeping just within sight of them, saw them at last come to an Anchor before Paripuera (where a part of the Dutch Forces lay under the Command of Arcisseusky,) and make preparation to Land their Men: Whereupon Lichthart Landed also, with the Councellor Carpentier, and joyning with Arcisseusky, took up a valiant Resolution, to Sail close up to the Spanish Fleet with his eight Ships, whilest Arcisseusky march’d in the Night with six hundred Men to Jaragoa, to prevent the Enemy’s Landing; but having a Portuguese for his Guide, was led a wrong Way; wherefore returning, he secur’d the Way to Paripuera, whilest the Portuguese Inhabitants, contrary to their Oath, refused to carry or bring Provisions to the Dutch Forces, and joyning together combin’d with the Spanish Seamen, and kill’d all the Hollanders which they could meet either on the High-ways, or in their Houses, making use of the Negro’s to carry the Spaniards what Intelligence they could give them of the Hollanders Proceedings: Wherefore they thought it the best way to be rid of such Villains, to destroy them all that dwelt in the Countrey between Paripuera and Porto Calvo, and for the space of ten Leagues burnt all their Sugar-Canes in the Fields, their Mills and Houses. Arcisseusky caus’d Edicts to be put upon every Church Door, That all the Inhabitants should remove from Porto Calvo, where the Dutch Army was to Encamp, to keep them from the Spanish Oppression.

That Summer having been so dry, that no man ever remembred the like, had dry’d up all the Morasses, so that the Spaniards marching over them and high Mountains, got a back Way into the Countrey. In the mean time John Walbeck made a Fort with five Bulwarks on the Island Curacao, near the Haven Santa Cruz.

Houte-been taken by Dunkirkers.

Houte-been also ran with two Ketches, the Otter and Brack, to Anchor before Curacao, and from thence to the Haven St. Jago de Cuba, where the Watch made no Alarm, because he carry’d Burgundy Colours, by which also several others, both Portuguese and Spaniards were deceiv’d. Not long after he burnt one Barque with Tortoises, sunk another, and set a third a Drift; after which having refresh’d at Jamaica, he Engag’d with several Spanish Men of War and took them, besides a great number of Prizes, in one of which he found such abundance of Copper, Indigo, Money, Canaster, Tobacco, and Piece-Goods, that the two Ketches were not able to load the same; but at last Steering for Holland, he was set upon by seven Dunkirkers, Commanded by Colaert, and after long and stout resistance was taken.

Captain Abraham Roosendael setting Sail from the Texel, met with a Frigat carrying forty six Chests full of Ryals of Eight, being in number eighty six thousand, design’d to pay the Forces at Porto Rico; besides a quantity of Plate, which amounted to a considerable sum of Money; with all which he arriv’d safe in his desired Port.

Arcisseusky fortifi’d himself along the crooked River Paripuera, full of Crocodiles, which hurt none, unless provok’d. This River runs five Leagues to the Northward of Punta de Jaragoa, where the Spanish Forces Landed.

Southward from Jaragoa lie the Alagoas del Nort and Zul, distinguish’d by a high Tract of Land; where the Spanish General Lewis Rochas Borgia left his Guns and a thousand Men, under the Command of the Duke Bagnola, whilest with three times as many more he went to Porto Calvo to be there before the time which the Hollanders had in their Edicts set the Inhabitants for their removal.

Borgia’s Army defeated by Arcisseusky and himself slain.

Arcisseusky had by this time built on the North part of the Mouth of Paripuera a Redoubt like a Castle, out of the middle whereof rose a woodden Tower, fill’d with Earth, and secur’d by a Half-Moon; on one side whereof he lay Encamp’d with fifteen Companies. On the South side of the River stood also two strong Forts. Arcisseusky having not the least thought that Borgia would come over the Mountains, and through inaccessible Woods and Morasses, a back Way into Porto Calvo, receiv’d news on the thirteenth of January 1636. by a Renegade Negro, that the Spanish Army, consisting of three thousand Men, were come to Rodrigo de Barros his Sugar-Mills, about five Leagues from Paripuera, and was suddenly expected to fall upon Colonel Schuppe in Porto Calvo; whereupon Arcisseusky immediately set forth with twelve hundred Men and two Field-pieces, burnt all the Houses, Sugar-Mills and Canes he could meet with. Mean while Borgia (upon whose Approach Schuppe had left Porto Calvo) observing by the Smoak in the Countrey, that Arcisseusky had put his Edicts in Execution, leaving a considerable Garrison in Porto Calvo, went to meet Arcisseusky with the choicest Men. Arcisseusky being got between Camarigibi and Porto Calvo, without having any notice of the Enemy’s being so near, and his Forlorn being unawares Engag’d, and running back in great disorder, drew up his Men into a posture of Defence about a Musquet-shot from the Enemy; but the darkness of the Night made a great confusion in both Armies, being as it were mingled pell-mell one with another. Arcisseusky was much inferior in number to the Spaniards, but considering it was impossible to march back, in regard the Enemy was as well behind them as before, and that thousands of Brasilians lay watching for them in the Woods, in case they should be dispers’d, he saw there was no way but to stand to the hazard of Battel. About Day-break both Armies stood an hour looking upon one another; the place where they stood being surrounded with Woods and deep Valleys. Borgia drew out his Men on a Hill, overgrown with Bushes. Arcisseusky had drawn out his Men on somewhat a lower Ground. Borgia at last sent some of his Musquetteers down the Hill, who fir’d with a full Volley upon the Dutch, whilest Arcisseusky onely discharg’d a Field-piece at a Tree, under which Borgia stood to take a view of the Hollanders Forces; upon the firing of which Gun Borgia began to come down the Hill with all his Army, against whom Arcisseusky drew out his first and second Division, whilest Captain Vanden Brande led his Companies within two Pikes length from the Enemy, before he discharg’d, which was no sooner done, but contrary to Order they broke into the left Wing of Borgia’s Army, and put his Musquetteers to flight, who were soon follow’d by the whole Spanish Army, some running into the Woods, others into the Morasses, but most of them along the narrow Way which leads to Porto Calvo. Among the Slain was Borgia himself, who was Descended from the greatest Families of the Dukes of Lerma and Borgia; he was about forty eight years of Age, and had serv’d the Spanish King a considerable time in the Netherlands. This Victory cost the Hollanders about forty Men, besides as many more wounded. Amongst the Spanish Prisoners was a Neapolitan Gentleman, call’d Hector de la Calce, who upon Examination inform’d the Hollanders, That with the last Spanish Fleet there Landed two thousand four hundred Men in Alagoa, with twenty Brass Field-pieces, abundance of Wheelbarrows, Spades and Pick-axes, which cost in Portugal eight hundred thousand Crusado’s; with which great warlike Preparations Borgia made no doubt to have got fast footing in the Countrey, and to have cut off all manner of Assistance from the Hollanders; That the Spanish King rais’d a great many Men both in Spain, Italy, and Germany, that with the first opportunity he might fit out a Fleet, which was to be conducted by four thousand two hundred Seamen, to whom the Castilians were to add eight thousand five hundred Soldiers and two hundred Seamen, and the Portuguese the like number, to serve ashore, and to drive all Strangers out of Brasile; That this Design had long since been put in Execution, had not the Albuquerquers continually deceiv’d the King of Spain, under pretence that Brasile was in no danger; That Albuquerque would be forc’d to resign up the Interest which he had in Brasile, for which the King would give him a Dukedom in Portugal in exchange.

Schuppe and Arcisseusky judging it no way convenient to fall upon the Enemy in Porto Calvo, Garrison’d Paripuera with four hundred Men, under the Command of the Captains Day and Philip Andrews, whom they furnish’d with Provisions for five Moneths, and left Order to defend the Countrey against the Incursions of the Enemy; which done, they went aboard with eleven hundred Men, and took in two Companies of Brasilians at Barra Grande; with whom Landing behind the Isle Alexio, they came to Serinhain before Day-light, and found all the Inhabitants fled into the Woods, fearing they would take Revenge on them for murdering of their Sick which they had left there. They were no sooner Encamp’d here, but they receiv’d Information from John Talibon, that the Spanish Army intended to Besiege the Redoubt in Barra Grande, which therefore, as lying on an ill place, and not able to resist long, they flighted: After which being furnish’d with Provisions out of some Ketches Commanded by the Admiral Lichthart, they return’d, with Intentions to take up their Quarters in Serinhain during the Winter Season, whilest the Enemy lay in Cockau, on one side of Una and Serinhain, and kept private Correspondence with some of the Portuguese that had taken the Oath of Allegiance to the Hollanders; but Arcisseusky fell so fiercely upon them, that they all fled to Porto Calvo, and took three Monks Prisoners, who had been the chief Authors of this private Correspondence.

Soon after twenty eight Ships arriving at Reciffa, brought fresh Supplies of Men thither from the Maes and Zealand, with Ammunition and Provisions, which was much wanted; also two Councellors, Henrick Schild and Paulus Serooskerken.

This Fleet was scarce got in, when in the Evening news was brought, that eight hundred Spaniards were broke in through Poyuca, and had taken John Paez Baretto’s Sugar-Mill, and destroy’d all they came at; but that the Hollanders defending the Church with great Valor, obtain’d Quarter upon the surrendring of it.

The Spaniards under Rebellino routed by Stackhower and Litchthart.

This raging Army, led by Colonel Rebellino and Madurera, march’d to Laurenzo and Massiapi, whither there resorted daily more Men to them, which put the Council at Reciffa to a great Dilemma, foreseeing, that if they should send for Schuppe from Serinhain, the Enemy from Una and Porto Calvo would hem him in, neither had they sufficient Forces to withstand Rebellino; therefore it was judg’d convenient to send to Arcisseusky to joyn with Schuppe’s Army, that they might both unawares fall upon the Enemy. In the interim a hundred and twenty Tapuyans, sent by Janduy, came to Reciffa, with information that Janduy was coming himself, with several other neighboring Kings, to their Assistance. Schuppe, according to the Councels Order, march’d in the Night through the Sugar-Mills of Rio Formoso, rested the next day in the Valley Orekinda, and guarded all the Avenues: Whilest he went about to Storm the Village Una, Mansveld was to Engage with a hundred Spaniards on one side of Iletta’s Sugar-Mills, and Arcisseusky was to fall upon the Village; whither marching early in the Morning, they saw onely a few of the Inhabitants, the Enemy being gone with his Forces over to Manbucava, nor could they pass any farther, finding the River too deep to wade through: But it had like to have gone worse with Stackhower and Litchthart, who with Maulpas making twelve hundred Men, were surpris’d by Rebellino, rushing forth of an Ambuscade near Laurenzo, where Maulpas receiving a Wound dy’d of the same. This rough Entertainment at first much daunted the Hollanders; but regaining their Courage, they press’d upon the Spanish Army in such a manner, that Rebellino being wounded in his Shoulder, fled in great disorder through the Sugar-Fields to Porto Calvo, and of fifteen hundred Men sav’d not above four hundred, the rest being either kill’d, or scatter’d up and down the Countrey; twelve taken Hollanders were also released by this means. The Portuguese Design on Paripuera also succeeded not much better.

Cameron put to flight by Arcisseusky.

Arcisseusky receiving Letters of Advice from the Councellor Serooskerken, that Camaron lay Encamp’d with fifteen hundred Men about the Fortress Capavaribi in Goyana, and that the Besieged could not hold out above four days longer, and that the Enemy had also taken two Barques full of Provisions and Ammunition, sent thither to relieve the Besieged, march’d with excessive toyl through uncouth and intricate Ways, which were rendred unpassable by the great Rains that had lately fall’n, and came about an hour after Sun-set to Capavaribi; from whence Camaron being fled two hours before, had left Ammunition in three Carriages, secur’d from small Shot by thick Planks, which were drawn close under the Walls; also a Burgundian Flag, two Field-pieces, and two Barques which he had taken with Provisions. The Enemy fled to Tapiserica, and from thence to Terra Nova. Whilest Arcisseusky view’d the Works, and his Men stood in good order, great numbers of Brasilians Sally’d out of the Redoubt, took the Provisions which Camaron had left, spread themselves up in the Countrey, robb’d the Portuguese Houses, and kill’d the People. As soon as Arcisseusky had put all things in good order, he left the Brasilians in Goyana under the Command of the Councellor Eyssens, and pursu’d the fled Enemy, notwithstanding there fell great Showers of Rain, rested a little in the deserted Village Tapiserica, formerly inhabited by three thousand People, who possess’d several fair Structures, brave Walks, a large Jesuits Cloyster, and a Church. The sweet Water and pleasant Pastures invited the Hollanders to stay here a Night. The next Morning marching forward to Terra Firma, they saw a strong Fortification newly rais’d, but without People, and heard the Enemy’s Sentinels fire; whereupon Arcisseusky appointing part of the Army to follow at a distance, march’d before with the rest, and being fir’d upon from an Ambuscade by Camaron’s Party, he order’d Captain Talibon to press in upon the Ambuscade; but because it was perform’d in great disorder, he fell in himself on the right-hand of the Enemy, whilest Lichthart’s second Division stood still; which so affrighted the Enemy, that without making the least resistance he fled into the Woods, leaving many dead behind him. The next day Captain Bohart’s Party tracking the flying Enemy, fell in amongst them, and gave them a total Rout.

Arcisseusky resolv’d to stay some time in Terra Firma to wait for Camaron, but he not appearing, he laid waste the Countrey thereabouts.

Eyssens: slain in a great Fight with Rebellino.

Rebellino and Lewis de Sosa falling upon the Councellor Eyssens, Governor of Parayba, routed him, and set fire on the Sugar-Mills belonging to Emanuel Pirez, which forc’d them with their Swords in their Hands to break through Flame and Smoak upon the Enemy, who kill’d nine of them upon the Spot (amongst whom Eyssens and his Secretary) the rest being either taken or fled.

Rebellino put to flight by Arcisseusky.

Immediately after Arcisseusky being inform’d by two Prisoners, that the Spanish Forces Commanded by Sosa, Dias, and Rebellino, were all joyn’d together in the Wood Antonio, where Camaron was also expected, he march’d away presently with half his Army, and as soon as the Captains Metting and Tourlon, whom he commanded to follow him the next day, were come up to him, he fell upon the Enemy, who lay on a Hill, at whose Foot was a deep Valley, through which he climb’d to the top; which valorous Attempt so amaz’d the Spaniards, that without firing a Gun they fled into the Wood: After which Metting and Tourlon went back to Laurenzo; and Arcisseusky destroy’d the Rossas, of which the Farinha is made, that so by scarcity of Provisions he might prevent the Enemy from so often joyning together in Parties: In the mean time ten Ships from Holland arriv’d with fresh Forces, Ammunition, Provisions, and two taken Prizes, at Reciffa.

Several Prizes taken by Houte-been after his Releasement.

An unlucky Accident.

Houte-been being releas’d from his Imprisonment in Dunkirk, set Sail from Holland with three Ships, and took ten Iron Guns out of one Ship, and several Pipes of Wine out of another before Matanca; after that a Tartan from Havana, two Frigats with Meal, one full of Wood with two Guns, two Barques carrying Bananas, a rich laden Pink, two Ships with Hides, and one with Sugar. Near the Island Baru he heard several great Guns shoot off, whereupon making thither, he found the Zealand Privateer Martman Engag’d with a Ketch carrying ten Brass and six Iron Guns, which was run ashore; whereupon Houte-been went to his assistance with a well Mann’d Boat; which the Spaniards seeing, set fire on their Ketch and fled; but the Flame having onely hurt the Stern, fifty Men were order’d to get her afloat, who having begun to unlade the Tobacco, and to take out the Brass Guns, the Gun-Room took fire, and blew up both Men and Goods; of which twenty four being sadly hurt, dy’d, the rest escaping miraculously. Not long after Houte-been took a Ship with Hides, fraighted the Alcmaer Pink with his Prizes for the Texel, ran close by Carthagena, and kept a considerable time in sight of the Plate-Fleet, of which he carry’d one of the heaviest Sailers away with him; Being thus enrich’d, he return’d home.

Grave Maurice sent by the United States to govern Brasile.

Whilest Businesses were carry’d on after this manner both by Land and Sea in Brasile, the West-India Company resolv’d to send some Person of Quality thither as President or supream Governor; and after no long Consultation who should be the Person, Grave Maurice of Nassaw was pitch’d upon, as being not only eminent for his Noble Alliance by Marriage to Emperors and Kings, but also for his excellent skill in Martial Affairs, the proofs whereof were known to all Men, as his marching to the Paltz against Spinola, his being in the great Siege of Grol, Hertogen-Bosch, Maestricht, Venlo, Rhynberk, and Schenkenschans, at all which he receiv’d great Honor; all which consider’d, they made him chief Governor of Brasile, giving him a Commission Sign’d by the States of the United Netherlands and West-India Company, to Govern with absolute Power, as well in Civil as Martial Affairs, to the best advantage of that State. At first they resolv’d to send a Fleet of thirty two Sail thither, but they afterwards reduc’d that number to twelve, which they Mann’d with two thousand seven hundred Men. Grave Maurice set Sail on the twenty fifth of October 1636. onely with four Sail, whereof the Admiral Ship call’d The Zutfen, carry’d but three hundred and fifty Men: about the Sorlings they met with blustering Weather, insomuch that the Fleet was forc’d to put in at Falmouth, and after forty days stay there, weigh’d Anchor, and Steer’d for Cape Verd, and refresh’d at the Isle of May, famous for Salt-pans, and inhabited by a few Negro’s, and banish’d Portugueses.

He is joyfully receiv’d at Reciffa.

On the twenty third of January 1637. Grave Maurice arriving at Reciffa, was by every one receiv’d with great joy; as also Adriaen vander Dussen: and soon after Matthias van Ceulen, Servaes Carpentier, and John Gysseling, were chosen to be of his Privy Council; whose first Work was exactly to know their Forces, which were either Inhabitants that were to guard Towns and Fortresses, or Soldiers that march’d into the Field, two thousand six hundred whereof were appointed to defend Reciffa, the Afogados, the Promontory St. Augustine, Tamarica, and Parayba: the greatest Party, which lay in the Field, consisted of two thousand nine hundred Men, and another lesser Party of six hundred; which last flying Regiment was to be continually employ’d to make work for the Enemy. They also took an Account of what Provision and Ammunition they had in store, and found that there was want of both, especially of Match. Next he enquir’d after the Enemy’s Condition and Power.

He marches against the Portugueses.

Povacon taken by the Hollanders.

From Porto Calvo the Portuguese made continual Sallies out into the Countrey, which they spoil’d and pillag’d, insomuch that the Brasilians being oppress’d by them, deserted their Villages, and came for refuge to the Hollanders. The Garrison in Serinhain was also much too weak to withstand the Incursions of the Enemy, the rather, because the Portuguese came along private, and to the Hollanders unknown Ways. All which Grave Maurice considering, caus’d a Fast-day to be proclaim’d, on which they desir’d Gods assistance in the carrying on of their Designs. After which he march’d with the Army to Serinhain, from thence cross the River Una to Barra Grande, and thence to meet with Bagnola, who though he was four thousand Men strong, besides Negro’s and Brasilians, had stopt up all the Ways with fell’d Trees, and fortifi’d others. On a Mountain, a League from Porto Calvo, Bagnola kept his Station. At the foot of the Mountain flow’d a Brook, whose Shore was overgrown with Rice and young Trees, before which lay a high Bank; opposite to which Grave Maurice Encamp’d himself towards the Evening, with intentions to fall upon him the next Morning, notwithstanding his Army consisted not of above fifteen hundred Men, of which there were six hundred Brasilians. Grave Maurice’s Guard marching before were follow’d by Schuppe and Arcisseusky, and they by Lichthart, whose Men were all Seamen; all of them firing their Guns amaz’d the Enemy, whilest two Companies of Brasilians, and three of Hollanders crept through the overgrown part on the right-hand of the Mountain, and as many more on the left, fell unawares upon him; but Maurice’s Guard Engaging with a thousand Portugueses, ran through the Water up against the Works with such undaunted Courage, that Bagnola Retreated, leaving four hundred Men slain, besides three Brass Guns, and a great number of Prisoners; those which escap’d fled to Porto Calvo: But Bagnola fearing to be Besieged there, left Povacon, which Castle, built on one side of Porto Calvo, lies twenty five Leagues from Reciffa, on a Plain, partly surrounded with Mountains and Pastures. The River Porto Calvo runs so crooked, that it almost surrounds the Castle and Town. The Countrey hereabouts is full of Pools. Two Forts, each built on a Hill near Povacon, Bagnola had caus’d to be undermin’d and fill’d up with Gun-powder; but they taking fire, were blown up before the Hollanders came thither, who found them smoaking, and lying like a heap of Rubbish. Maurice marching forward, Besieg’d Povacon; and Encamping himself below the Hill where one of the Forts had stood, he rais’d a Redoubt, and with a Trench approach’d the Moat. Whilest Schuppe lay along the Town from the Church, Lichthart made a Battery to the North, and somewhat farther Arcisseusky another; then firing from four Batteries on Povacon, the Besieged answer’d them again from their Walls, and on the thirteenth day the Governor Michael Giberton surrendred the Castle upon honorable Articles: for those in Garrison being Italians, Portugueses, and Castilians, to the number of five hundred, besides the Wounded and Sick, were to be Transported to Tercera. Maurice entring the Castle, took two and twenty Brass, and five Iron Guns, four Mortar-pieces, a great many Bullets, Matches, Gun-powder, and other Ammunition, this being the King of Spain’s Magazine.

Near Moribeca, and before St. Laurenzo, the Enemy receiv’d a shrew’d Repulse by the flying Regiment, led by Stackhower; but Lieutenant Helmich obtain’d special Honor herein.

Grave Maurice after these Exploits took Shipping in Barra Grande, at a great Inlet near Porto Calvo, and Landed again at the Promontory Sergoa, from whence he pursu’d the Enemy to the River Francisco; the Inhabitants about which desir’d, and obtain’d free Conduct. Bagnola lay on the other side of the River Francisco, in the Town Openeda; wherefore Schuppe, who was sent to the Afogados to be near the Enemy, was afterwards commanded to go to Openeda to secure Grave Maurice’s Passage over thither; but he coming thither after him, Maurice cross’d to the Shore on which Openeda lay with Boats, and got great Booty; and the more, because the Natives had not secur’d any thing, Bagnola assuring them that the Castle Povacon could endure at least a Siege of four Moneths.

Openeda belong’d properly to the Lord Melchior Albes. Near the Town rose a stonie Rock out of the deep River Francisco, eighty Foot high; from which Rock there jutted out like Redoubts five Points, and it was call’d Maurice Castle. Along the Shore of the fore-mention’d Stream lay several very pleasant Isles. Bagnola escaping privately from hence, was follow’d by his Men kneeling on floating pieces of Timber, which with Sticks they Row’d over to the Northern Shore, notwithstanding the Stream glides so swift, and is so broad, that a six-pound Bullet cannot be shot over the same; at the Mouth thereof Maurice built another Castle. A League from his Camp seven hundred Tapuyans (a great salvage and strong People, whose Language the Portuguese, Brasilians, and Tapuyans that belong’d to Jandui, could not understand) had Ambuscado’d themselves, and with signs and motions of their Bodies they gave the Hollanders to understand, that they would kill the Portuguese if they offer’d to cross the Rivers.

Maurice advising Prince Frederick Henrick of his Transactions, desir’d that he would send over Planters thither, whether they were banish’d Germans or Vagabonds, out of their Houses of Correction; for without them the fruitful Countrey of Brasile would render but a slender Account to the West-India Company, nor be able to prevent the Invasions of the Spaniards.

Grave Maurice begins his Government with the making of good Laws.

The fruitfulness of this Tract of Land was not inferior to any Countrey in the whole World, Cattel grazing up and down in Herds of five, six, and seven thousand. Moreover, Maurice advis’d them about the scarcity of Provisions, without which they were not able to maintain War. He also setled the Traders in a good Order, dividing all those free People which bore no Offices, into four Companies, under Captains, Ensigns, and Lieutenants. The Customs and Tributes were Farm’d, Marriages were order’d to be perform’d by the Netherland Priests, the Jews had leave not to Watch on their Sabbath, all manner of Debosheries were strictly forbid from being acted on the Lords-Day, and Punishments ordain’d for Drunkards and other Deboshees; several Schools were also erected for Youth, and for the instruction of the Brasilians in the Christian Religion; and lastly, it was permitted to any that would, to build in the ruin’d City Olinda, or else to repair those Houses that were fall’n to ruine.

Some of the Portugueses fill’d Maurice his Ears with a Report of the Silver-Mines at Couhaou, Copaou, Terra Nova, and about Cape St. Augustine; but he not regarding them, plac’d Sheriffs over the Villages, and Overseers over the Alms-houses and Hospitals, issuing out Orders also for the delivering of the Provisions, which being very scarce, every Man had a certain Allowance, that so it might last the longer; but when in this Distribution the meaner sort began to be scanted, the Peoples Complaints were such, that an Insurrection was like to ensue, if not carefully and speedily prevented: whereupon the decay’d and deserted Sugar-Mills of the Portugueses were put to Sale, and sold some for three, others for six and seven thousand Pound, insomuch that the West-India Company got above 200000 l. for them all. Soon after they fortifi’d their Castles and other strong Holds, and broke down those that were judg’d useless. The Brasilians obtain’d liberty also to inhabit their Villages and till their Land, that they might make Provision for themselves, and not oppress the Planters that liv’d near them. The Portuguese that had submitted themselves to the Government of the Hollanders, had free leave granted them to exercise the Roman-Catholick Religion, onely they were not to send for any Priests from St. Salvador, which if they did, they should be dealt with as Plotters of Murders and Treasons; they had liberty also to re-build their Houses in Olinda, paying Tribute with the Hollanders: Moreover, they were promis’d that they should live free from all Oppressions of the Hollanders. There was also order taken about paying the tenth part of the Sugar and Farinha. The Income also of Fishing and Fowling, amounted to a considerable sum of Money. And to prevent deceit in Trade, Measures and Weights were made according to those of Amsterdam. For the Converting of Pagans, Jews, and Roman Catholicks, able Teachers were sent into the Countrey to promulgate the Gospel.

About this time there went a Report, as if the West-India Company were inclin’d to remove their Seat from Reciffa to the Island Tamarica; but Maurice advising them that it would not be so convenient for them, they chang’d their Resolution.

Isleos taken by Lichthart.

Whilest Lichthart Cruis’d a considerable time before the Haven Todos los Sanctos, he Crain’d his Ship in the Bay of Camaniu, took the Town Isleos, with a hundred and fifty Men. In the Town, which is built on a Promontory, he took but little Booty, and sav’d the Houses, which were built most of Stone, as also the four Churches and Jesuits Cloyster, and return’d to Reciffa.

Colonel Latan slain.

About this time the invincible Castle Mina, afterwards call’d St. Joris, was taken by the Hollanders, upon the Advice of Nicholas van Yperen, Commander of Guinee, who sent word to Grave Maurice, that the said Castle might easily be conquer’d, if any Forces could be sent him from Reciffa: Whereupon Maurice immediately sent John Coin thither with nine Ships, which set Sail on the twenty fifth of June, Anno 1637. who in the Road Commendo joining with Yperen, soon after he was set down before it, and was preparing to Storm, had it surrendred to him upon Terms no less advantageous to the Hollanders, than dishonorable to the Besieged, yet not without the loss of many Men; for in their March thither they were fiercely set upon by the Negro’s inhabiting the Village near the Castle; in which Conflict Colonel Latan amongst others was slain. The Fort might very well have endur’d a longer Siege, it being surrounded with double Moats, each twenty five Foot deep, and high Bulwarks, which could not be undermin’d because of the Rocky Ground on which they were built; and to make it yet more stronger, Coin after he had taken it rais’d a Fort on the Hill, from whence he had fir’d on the Castle, in which he found thirty Brass Demi-Culverins; and leaving Walraeven Malburg as Governor, he return’d to Reciffa.

During these Proceedings of the Dutch in Guinee, the Duke of Bagnola ransack’d the Countrey about Seregippa del Rey; Maurice not able to go himself, having had a Feaver three Moneths, sent Schuppe and Gyseling with two thousand three hundred Soldiers, four hundred Brasilians, and two hundred and fifty Seamen, whilest Lichthart Steer’d to Todos los Sanctos, that so he might draw the Enemy down to the Sea-Coast. Bagnola flying to Terra Gracia d’ Avila, Schuppe demolish’d the Town Seregippa, the Sugar-Mills, and all manner of Fruit-Trees, and march’d with incredible speed to the Stream Francisco; where Encamping on the Southern Shore, he drove three thousand Head of Cattel before him, that so he might starve the Enemy.

The Brasilians offer their assistance to the Dutch for the taking the Fort Siara.

In the interim the Brasilians in Siara desir’d Aid against the Portuguese, offering, That if the Hollanders could conquer the Fort there, they would soon destroy all the Portuguese; that the Charges of the Siege might easily be made good, the Countrey producing abundance of Amber-greece, Crystal, Cotton, Pearls, Salt, and other Merchandise. In confirmation of this their Resolution, the Brasilians left two eminent Persons Children of Siara in Reciffa: Whereupon George Garstman being sent thither, was no sooner Landed, but he made his Arrival known to the Brasilian Governor Algodoi; who came to meet him with two hundred Men, bearing white Flags in token of Peace: Thus assisted, he set upon Siara, which is a square Fort, built at the foot of a Hill, hath within its Walls six Houses, two Redoubts full of Port-holes, one on the North, and the other on the South, jutting half way out from the Wall; as also two Gates, secur’d with large Portcullises: without the Fort appears the Governor’s House, about which were several Huts for Portugueses.

This Lordship, already spoken of, is reckon’d amongst the Northern parts of Brasile, and hath onely twelve Leagues in circumference. The Haven before the Castle, which the River Hacu makes, is of little consequence: The Ground in some places rises with high Mountains, in others, especially on one side, it is overgrown with Wood: hath also several brave Pastures, especially along the River.

The Fort taken by Garstman.

Garstman approaching the Castle Siara, found little resistance, so that he took it with small expence of Blood, most of the Portuguese being taken Prisoners, a few onely escaping by flight.

After this Grave Maurice took great care of the Civil Affairs, building a Guild-Hall at his own Cost and Charge; sent all manner of Minerals, digg’d out of the Brasilian Mines, to the Netherlands; laid great Penalties on those that stole the Custom of Goods, and punish’d with Death Murders, Robberies, and such like Capital Offences, besides several wholsom Laws relating both to the Civil and Ecclesiastical Government; and as soon as he was recover’d from his tedious Sickness, he march’d up into the Countrey to the Rivers Grande and Parayba, to take care to furnish the Forts with Provision and Ammunition. Near the Castle Ceulen he was receiv’d by the Tapuyan Agents, and Presented by them with Bowes, Arrows, and brave Ostrich Feathers, us’d by them when they go to the Wars: in return for which they receiv’d Linnen Shirts, Knives, Shells, Bugles, Fishhooks, and Nails. Maurice caus’d a deeper and wider Moat to be digg’d about the decay’d Castle Cabo Dello, rais’d the Works, and call’d it by the Name of his Sister Margareta; he also pull’d down the Fort Antonio, keeping onely a Tower to defend the High-way. Restringa was likewise strengthned with Pallisado’s, and the Cloyster near the Town Parayba fortifi’d against an Assault, and Elias Harkmans made Governor of the same.

Whilest these things were transacted on the Land, Captain Schuppe at Sea Engaging alone between Todos los Sanctos and Terre Garcie d’ Avila with three Spanish Ships, drove one of them aground, and brought another away with him to Reciffa. The Letters found in the taken Vessel made mention, that in the River of Lisbon lay ten Galleys, and twenty more before Cales, to which were to joyn thirty Pinks; which Fleet some suppos’d was coming for Brasile; others, that it was onely a Plot of the King of Spain to get Money from his Subjects, according to the Custom of several other Princes.

Hereupon Maurice wrote to the West-India Company, that they would Rig out a Fleet with all possible speed, which might fall upon the fore-mention’d Spanish Fleet, and fetch those Sugars which lay ready in Brasile to be Laden.

About the same time a Party of the Portugueses crossing the River Francisco, came to the Stream Miguel, whither Picard marching, put them all to flight.

Grave Maurice sets forth with a Fleet for the re-taking of St. Salvador.

Grave Maurice is forc’d to leave the Siege of St. Salvador.

Grave Maurice having a Design on St. Salvador, the Portuguese Metropolis in Brasile, formerly taken by Peter Hein and Jacob Willekens, and not long after lost by the faint-heartedness of William Schouten and Hans Kyf, though in all likelihood not strong enough to undertake so weighty a Design, yet considering if he should stay longer, the Season would not permit him, therefore he went aboard, hoping that he should receive some Aid from the Netherlands; his Army consisted of three thousand four hundred Netherlanders, and a thousand Brasilians. He had the greater hopes of Victory, because he receiv’d information from St. Salvador, that the Soldiers in Garrison there mutiny’d for want of Pay, and that the Governor and Duke of Bagnola were at difference concerning the management of the War. But before he set Sail he had secur’d all Places against any Invasion, and got ready twenty two Sail, furnish’d with Ammunition and Provision, with which on the eighteenth of August Anno 1638. he weigh’d Anchor, and met with six Ships at Sea, which he took, and arriv’d on the sixth day following before the Mouth of the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, which he could not enter by reason of contrary Winds, but Cruis’d up and down before the River Vermelho and the Isle Tapoam; whereupon the Governor of St. Salvador and Bagnola drew the Portuguese Forces down thither to prevent his Landing: About Noon the Wind coming about fair for the Hollanders, brought Maurice within Shot of the Ships, Forts, Walls and Batteries of the City St. Salvador, so that he thundred with his Cannon against them, and Landed on a Promontory near the Sconce Bartholomew, without the least resistance, in a convenient place about a League and a half from the City; where Encamping himself, he was inform’d by the Prisoners which he had taken, that about half a League farther was a narrow Bank, border’d with Morasses, so that none could pass along the same but at Low-water, and then onely at a certain time. Tourlon being sent before with three hundred Musquetteers to discover the Place, found the Way not onely as the Prisoners had inform’d, but also fortifi’d by the Enemy; against whom Maurice drew out his Men, ordering Captain John vander Mast in the mean time to run with ten Sail directly upon the City, and to drop his Anchors just without shot of it. Having beaten the Enemy from his Works, he broke through all the Paths, Hedges and Banks, till at last he came and Intrench’d himself near the Out-works of the City, by which his Army was secur’d from any Assaults from the Sea-side. Colonel Brand also with little trouble took the Fort Philippo, built on the Shore, and fortifi’d with five Guns. The next day Maurice Storming the Castle Philippo, soon became Master of it, notwithstanding it was well Garrison’d, and had thirteen Brass Demi-Culverins. The taking of this Castle afforded the Besiegers a free Passage to their Fleet. They also rais’d two Batteries, from one of which they shot night and day with seven great Guns, and from the other with the like number of Field-pieces, on the Castle Rosario, which the Portuguese forsook; but going about to take a Horn-work on the top of the Carmelites Cloyster, he lost many Men in the Attempt, and amongst the rest the Captains Howin, Echbrecht, Boward, Hollinger, and the Engineer Berchem; and in the end, after many bold and resolute Attaques, what with the strength of the Place, both for number of Defendants, and well fortifi’dness thereof, and what with the want of his expected Supplies, and lastly the sickliness of his Army, by reason of the extraordinary Rains that fell, to the loss of many Officers of note as well as common Soldiers, besides what were slain by the Enemy, he made as honorable a Retreat as he could, so that this Expedition prov’d altogether unsuccessful.

Mean while the Provincial States of Holland and Zealand differ’d about allowing of a free Trade to Brasile, and sending of Colonies thither: Whereupon Grave Maurice writing to them his Opinion, demonstrated with good Reasons, that a free Trade, and fresh Colonies, would be much to the Companies advantage; which was approv’d of by the States of the United Netherlands and West-India Company, who onely engross’d the Trade of Negro’s and Brasile Wood; and on the Imported and Exported Goods they put a certain Custom.

Houte-been Engages the Spanish Fleet.

The West-India Company considering what Treasure Peter Hein had brought from Matanca to Holland, they resolv’d to venture another Expedition thither; and to that purpose set out fourteen Sail under the Command of Cornelis Houte-been, who weigh’d Anchor out of the Texel on the fourteenth of August Anno 1638. and arriv’d safe at Reciffa; where Houte-been having spent some days in Consulting with Grave Maurice, went aboard again, and at his entring into the Ship, bruis’d his Leg between the Boat and the sides thereof, which some superstitious Persons look’d upon as very ominous; but this Wound was not so great as to keep him back from whatsoever Service came in his way: for discovering the Spanish Fleet from Terra Firma near Cuba, before the Rocky Isle Organes, which consisted of eight great Gallions, and six lesser Ships, whose Lading was valu’d at two hundred Tun of Gold, and Commanded by Carel Dievaro, he clapt the Admiral aboard, threw in his Grapling-Irons, and made him self fast, with a Resolution either to take him or die, whilest the Dutch Vice-Admiral Abraham Michaelzoon Roosendael boarded the Spanish Vice-Admiral, and the Rere-Admiral John vander Mast the Enemy’s Rere-Admiral; and doubtless, had not the Vice-Admiral and Rere-Admiral been slain, together with Verdoost, Captain of the Orange-Tree, and other eminent Officers, and those that surviv’d fail’d in their Duty to him for want of Courage, he had given them a signal Overthrow; but whilest with much ado he had prevail’d with his Captains to renew the Combat (having been forc’d by the coming on of the Spanish Vice and Rere-Admirals to quit his hold) and was preparing for a second Onset, the Sea began to be rough, and the Enemy was gotten to the Windward. Some few days after being inform’d, that the Spanish Fleet lay before the Flats of Cuba and the Rocky Organes, Steer’d thither, resolving to venture once more; but when he came there, the Spaniards were gone; whereupon he sent some of his Ships to Brasile, others to Cruise before Cuba, whilest he himself went for the Netherlands.

Whilest this Expedition fell out so unfortunately, Cameron, General of the Brasilians, sent three Agents to Grave Maurice, desiring to enter into League with the West-India Company, upon some Differences that were risen between him and the Duke of Bagnola. Grave Maurice seeming much inclin’d to his Offer, treated the Agents very nobly; who not long after, oblig’d by his Civility, inform’d him, that Cameron, an inconstant Man, had made Peace again with Bagnola. But that which chiefly obstructed Grave Maurice’s Designs, was the want of Provisions, Ammunition and Men, notwithstanding his continual Complaints to the Company.

About the beginning of the Year 1639. the Spanish Fleet, consisting of twenty eight Sail, most of them Gallions, appear’d in sight of Reciffa, but Steer’d Southwardly; Grave Maurice hereupon sent out the best Sailers to follow them, and see whither they were bound, or if they intended to Land, whilest himself march’d along to Porto Calvo; but inform’d that they were gone into the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, he return’d to Reciffa, after he had stor’d the Forts Porto Calvo, Una, Serinhain, and that at the Promontory St. Augustine, with all Necessaries.

Arcisseusky Impeaches Grave Maurice and his Council.

Is sent back into Holland.

About the same time Arcisseusky arriving from Holland with a Commission to be General over the Forces there, imparted to some Friends the Copy of a Letter that he intended to send to the Amsterdam Burgomaster Albert Coenraedszoon vander Burgh, containing many Accusations against Grave Maurice and his Council; of which he being inform’d, call’d a general Assembly, to whom he makes a large Speech, wherein he declar’d how faithful a Servant he had been to the States of the United Netherlands for the space of twenty years, complain’d of the malice of Arcisseusky in wrongfully aspersing him, both in the aforesaid Letter and otherwise, answer’d particularly to every thing which was laid to his Charge, (as he did afterwards in a Letter also from himself to Vander Burgh) and lastly made it his peremptory Request, that he might return home, and leave Arcisseusky in Power, or that Arcisseusky might be sent home, and he remain undisturb’d in his Government; and so withdrew, leaving them to their own Consultations. It exceedingly perplex’d them, and took up a long Debate what Judgment to give in this Matter, which before they concluded on, they propos’d several Expedients of Reconciliation between them; but seeing it was all in vain, they unanimously judg’d it convenient, that Arcisseusky should return; who not long after accordingly weigh’d Anchor from Parayba for Holland.

Several Judgments concerning him.

Arcisseusky arriving in Holland, appear’d unexpectedly before the States of the United Netherlands and West-India Company, where several Judgments were pass’d upon him; some said he deserv’d severe punishment, for his misbehavior to Grave Maurice; others seem’d to have compassion of him, because he had done so many noble Exploits; most laid the blame on the Company, who rashly sent him with a Commission as Chief over the Militia, not without impairing Grave Maurice’s Power; but these Discourses fell amongst those who were not call’d to give their Opinion of this Case.

Coin sent Field-Marshal in his stead.

John Coin was chosen Field-Marshal in Arcisseusky’s stead, whilest the Councellors Matthias Ceulen, Adrian vander Dussen, John Guiseling, and Servaes Carpentier, were ready to come for Holland, and on the twenty ninth of October 1639. they set Sail from Parayba, Vander Dussen bringing with him an exact Relation of the Condition of Brasile, so far as concerns the West-India Company, which being material, we shall reserve it for a more fit place.

It being fear’d that the Spanish Fleet in the Harbor of Todos los Sanctos might undertake some Design or other against the Hollanders, Grave Maurice kept a watchful Eye upon them, repair’d all decay’d Forts, rais’d new Forces, sent out some Vessels to watch the Fleet, and prohibited the Transporting of Provisions, animated the Brasilian Commanders to fight against the Portuguese, and forc’d the Owners of Sugar-Mills to Plant store of Mandihoka, that so his Provisions might last the longer.

A Party of the Enemy, consisting of about twelve hundred Men, having pass’d the River Francisco, was soon after oppos’d by Colonel Donker.

A Spanish Fleet lies before St. Salvador.

The Spanish Fleet having lay’n a whole Year before St. Salvador (because they had lost near three thousand Men, who on the Coast of Africa dy’d of several Distempers, and therefore waited for a fresh Supply) set Sail on the ninteenth of November Anno 1639. with eighty seven Sail, carrying sixteen thousand Men, of which thirty seven were great Gallions. Ferdinand Mascarenhas, Duke of Torre, being chief Admiral, carry’d the Flag and sixty Brass Guns in the Ship Domingo; the Portuguese Admiral, Roderigo Lobo, carry’d fifty two Guns in the Gallion Bernardo; of all which, with the number of the Enemy’s Forces, Grave Maurice was inform’d by a Letter taken out of a Pink laden with Sugar; and also that the Spaniards were in great hopes of the Portuguese deserting the West-India Company, with whom they were forc’d to joyn; that this great Fleet was order’d to Cruise two years before the Coast of Brasile, and to Land divers Men under the Command of Bagnola, Francisco de Moro, Antonio Roderigo, Nunno de Mello, Jacob Pirezio, Francisco Pezam, and Lopes Barbalio; all which made Maurice write continually for Aid, “Which the West-India Company must send speedily, unless they were resolv’d to lose what they had gotten in Brasile, as also the People, who had hitherto defended the same with the loss of their Lives and Fortunes.”

A Negro that serv’d a Spanish Captain, call’d Henrick Dias, being taken, inform’d the Hollanders, That the Spanish Fleet was much weakned by a poysonous Air on the Coast of Africa; and that they had left a considerable number of their Men in the Hospital at St. Salvador; that the Admiral was resolv’d with divided Forces to burn all Places he came at, and to receive the Negro’s, Mamolucks, Mulatto’s, and Brasilians, under his Jurisdiction. But Grave Maurice gave little credit to this Relation, because the Spaniard doubted not in the least, but that he should take Brasile from the Netherlanders with his fore-mention’d Forces, why then should he ruine what he hop’d to possess? None knew whither the Spanish Fleet intended to go; for setting Sail under the Command of Antonio Oquendo, under pretence of falling upon the Netherlands, they Steer’d their Course to Brasile, and at last from the Inlet Todos los Sanctos to Goyana; but four days before they weigh’d Anchor, William Corneliszoon Loos, who had some time been Cruising before the said Inlet, came back to Reciffa with thirteen Sail of Ships, which wanted all manner of Necessaries.

Corneliszoon Loos with his small Power sets out to Engage the great Spanish Fleet.

Admiral Loos slain.

Huigens chaseth the Spanish Fleet.

Alderick’s valiant Exploit.

The West-India Company had now been in a mean Condition, had there not happily arriv’d first eight, next two, and at last nine Ships from the Texel, the Maes, and Zealand, with Provisions, and a Supply of Men; which Maurice had no sooner taken out, and unladen the Ships, but he fitted them for an Engagement, and made up the number of forty one Sail, who yet were not to be compar’d to the Spaniards, whose smallest Vessels carry’d more Men and Guns than the biggest of the Hollanders, which in all had but two thousand one hundred and ninety six Men, and one Ship with another under twenty Iron Guns: With this small Power the Admiral William Corneliszoon Loos went to meet the Enemy, and before the River Michael took four Spanish Ships, which carry’d Ammunition and Provisions for the Army, which Lopes Barbalio commanded ashore. On the twelfth of January, Anno 1640. he descry’d the Spanish Fleet between Itamaraca and Goyana; not far from which Mascarenhas thought to Land seven thousand Men at Paomorello; and they were already gotten into little Vessels when the Hollanders Fleet made towards them, and about three a Clock in the Afternoon began a bloody Engagement for four hours, in which Loos Engaging with the Spanish Admiral and four Gallions, was kill’d in the middle of the Fight, which ended in the Evening. Jacob Huigens carrying the Flag the next day in sight of the Promontory Blanco, chearing up his Men, went to renew the Fight with Mascarenhas, and with a few small Ships Engag’d several great ones, of which they had an advantage onely in their nimble turning and winding. In this Engagement Huigens lost the Ship call’d The Sun, which sunk with Colonel Mortimer and forty four Men, thirty four being sav’d in the Boat. The Hollanders Loss was the less, because the Spanish great Gallions fir’d over Huigens’s Ships, which fir’d in the midst of the Spaniards Vessels. Huigens not being tir’d with two days Engagements, fell upon them a third time before Parayba, and firing at the Spanish and Portuguese Admirals, pursu’d their Fleet to the Northermost Coast of Brasile, where by a strong Current they were driven Westerly; and the Swan, Commanded by Jacob Alderick, losing her Main-mast, was cut off from the Fleet by twelve Gallions; and three hundred Spaniards were already Masters of the Deck, when Alderick breaking from the Enemy, drove towards the Shore, and either kill’d the Spaniards that were in his Ship, or forc’d them to leap overboard, whilest Antonio Cunha de Andrada, not knowing that Alderick was aground, making up to him, ran also aground, which occasion’d a new Fight, and at last Andrada was made to surrender his Gallion, and with it three thousand Pound of coin’d and uncoin’d Silver, besides other rich Goods, and two hundred and thirty Men, who were all sent Prisoners to Reciffa.

The Spanish Fleet again put to flight by Huigens.

January the seventeenth Huigens ventur’d a fourth Engagement between Rio Grande and Conyaou, where approaching the Spanish Fleet, a sudden Calm prevented him from coming within shot of them, till against the Evening the Wind began to rise, but the Night approaching, it was not judg’d worth while to Engage for so few hours, therefore they referr’d the bloody work till the next day; when about Daybreak Huigens ran through the midst of the Enemy’s Fleet, and fir’d so fiercely on Mascarenhas, that he Tacking about, stood away right before the Wind, and not being able to get beyond the Shelves Baxios de Rochas, nor to get Water on the Coast, because the Hollanders Ketches guarded the same, he Sail’d into the Offin towards the Line with a South-East Wind. After which Huigens lay eight days before Rio Grande to refresh and rest himself, and on the first of February he arriv’d at Reciffa, where Maurice caus’d a Thanksgiving Day to be kept for this wonderful Victory, whilest the Enemy was exceedingly abash’d.

Several Disadvantages occurr’d towards the overthrow of the Spanish Fleet; for first it was much weakned by the Disease which rag’d in the same on the Coast of Africa, insomuch that it lay still a whole year in Todos los Sanctos to gather fresh Forces, whilest Maurice put himself in a posture of Defence: Secondly, they lay becalm’d, and met with contrary Winds for several Moneths, whenas the Voyage between St. Salvador and Pernambuco is commonly not above twelve days; which tedious Passage occasion’d also a Distemper and faint-heartedness amongst the Spaniards, whilest divers Ships arriv’d at Reciffa from the Netherlands, without which it had been impossible to have Engag’d with the Enemy, in regard till then all manner of Ammunition and Provisions were wanting. Huigens also had continually the advantage or benefit of the Wind, and lost in the Engagement but two Ships, a hundred and twenty four Men, besides twelve wounded: Moreover, but twelve Ships onely of the Dutch Engag’d with this great Spanish Fleet, the rest never coming within shot; wherefore the two Commanders, John Coopman Ryk, and Peter Jacob, were condemn’d to be Beheaded; Cornelis Johnszoon and Peter Dirkszoon had their Swords broke over their Heads by the common Hangman; Cornelis Lucifer, Dirk Eger, and Jacob Clavor, were banish’d; and others came off by paying great Fines: but the Spanish Fleet lost in the four Engagements twenty Ships, and some thousands of Men, the Joseph alone having four hundred slain in her. Lastly, anchoring near the Island Margareta, the Portuguese Admiral Cosmo de Couto, and the Captain-General Francisco Pimentello, falling out, the Spaniards Steer’d to Tercera, and from thence to Cales, where there Landed but few Men, most of them dying of Hunger and Thirst in their Return home: Four Gallions, with two Pinks, got into the Spanish Harbors, the rest being either stranded before New Spain, sunk, or return’d to the Inlet Todos los Sanctos.

Cameron’s Forces and Barbalio’s put to flight by Coin.

Portugueses Plot against the Netherlanders discover’d.

Before the foremention’d Fleet weigh’d Anchor from St. Salvador, two thousand Portugueses, besides Tapuyans and other Brasilians, march’d under the Command of Cameron, Vidal, and Barbalio, with divided Forces into the Countrey, partly to get Provision, and partly to do what mischief they could to the Hollanders, far and near: their Orders were to joyn in the Village St. Laurence, seven Leagues beyond Paomarello, that there they might make way for the Seamen to Land, if the Netherland Forces should chance to guard the Sea-Coast thereabouts, and to joyn with them as soon as they were Landed. But Grave Maurice encourag’d by his late Victory at Sea, immediately sent the Field-Marshal Coin against Cameron, who dividing his Army into small Companies, had distributed them through the Woods; in which Coin follow’d his Example, and with divided Forces pursu’d Cameron’s Army, and overtook his Captain Tak and two hundred Men at Poyuca, (whereof Lopes Barbalio was Governor) who fled, notwithstanding he Commanded six hundred Men. Soon after which the Muster-master Mansveld met him near the Village St. Laurence, Engag’d him, and putting him to flight, found several Papers of Concern that he had left behind, and amongst others a Letter, in which Barbalio was commanded to spare neither Brasilians nor Netherlanders alive, but to kill all, without regard either to their Age or Quality, except the Portuguese. Moreover, Andries Vidal urg’d the Owners of the Sugar-Mills in the Netherlanders Brasile, immediately to take up Arms, to regain their ancient Freedom, as soon as Mascarenhas appear’d with the Spanish Fleet on the Coast of Brasile: Thus Vidal, by Letters and private Conferences, prevail’d so much, that most of the Portuguese were ready against their Oaths to root out the Netherlanders: The sign when they should be ready, was the burning of some Sugar-Mills, Vidal imagining thereby to have drawn the Netherlanders from the Sea-side, and so made the Sea-Coast free for the Spaniards to Land securely in. But the Garrison under Coin along the Sea-shore near Alexis, not ignorant of the Enemy’s Plot, kept their Stations, and suffer’d the Mills to burn. The like did Craey at the Promontory of St. Augustine, Picard at Paomarello, Captain Day at Cantolaria, and Donker on Goyana; Hoogstraet kept Guard up in the Countrey; Tourlon also sent out by Maurice against Francisco Sosa and Henrick Dias, who had pillag’d all the Countrey about the River Conajou, fell upon them in such a manner, that he destroy’d eighty seven of them, and wounded a considerable number more of them, made the rest flie to St. Salvador.

Two Moneths before the Spanish Fleet set Sail from Todos los Sanctos, three thousand Tapuyans came to Rio Grande with their Wives and Children, from an unknown Countrey remote from the Sea. Grave Maurice requested their King John de Wy, that he would please to keep Watch along the Sea-Coast, and prevent the Landing of the Spanish Seamen: Whereupon De Wy sent his Son to the Castle Ceulen, making solemn Protestations, that he was ready to lose his Life and Fortune for the Netherlanders, in helping them to drive the Portuguese out of Brasile. Maurice also joyn’d two thousand Brasilians, and Colonel Garstman with sixty Netherlanders, to the Tapuyans, that so he might train them up in Martial Discipline, whilest the Tapuyans Wives and Children were plac’d on the Island Tamarica.

About the beginning of the Year 1640. Houte-been and Lichthart brought a considerable Fleet from the Netherlands to an Anchor at Reciffa, where a Consultation was held, whither these Ships might be sent to do most Service: every one had an Eye on St. Salvador, not long since Storm’d in vain; but Maurice judg’d that they had not Forces enough to undertake so grand a Design, but thought it would be better to Land some fresh Forces near St. Salvador, that there they might burn the Sugar-Mills, and destroy all things they could find, in revenge of what the Enemy had done at Parayba. Whereupon Tourlon and Lichthart set Sail with twenty Ships, Mann’d with two thousand five hundred Men, to the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, where they burnt all the Portuguese Sugar-Mills, Houses and Villages; neither did their Swords spare any alive but Women and Infants: The Cattel which they found they carry’d aboard of their Ships, and burnt all other Provisions.

Capt. Brand taken Prisoner.

Coin unsuccessfully Storms Spirito Sancto.

In the mean time Houte-been and Coin fell upon Porto Franco, where they ruin’d all things, to no other end, but that the Enemy might call home his Forces out of the Netherlanders Brasile, to defend the Province Todos los Sanctos. But Captain Brand going up too far into the Countrey with his Army, was suddenly set upon, had a hundred of his Men slain on the Spot, and was himself taken Prisoner, together with many more. Also the Storming of the Town Spirito Sancto by Coin prov’d unsuccessful, because he led an undisciplin’d Company, and wanted little Vessels to Land in on a sudden; for the Enemy having had timely notice, immediately rais’d a Sconce about the Town, and with five Brass Guns fir’d stoutly on him, who endeavor’d to climb up the Hill, but was forc’d to sound a Retreat, his Men failing in their Courage; yet at last breaking into the Town, he set some of the Houses on fire, which being built of Stone, resisted the Flame; so burning onely four hundred and fifty Chests of Sugar, he left sixty Men kill’d, and brought back eighty wounded. Lichthart in the mean time made great havock about St. Salvador.

Woods of Brasile set on fire by Peter Vist.

In this Conjuncture the West-India Company suffer’d much by Robberies and Spoils committed up and down the Countrey, by the setting their Woods of Brasile on fire by a company of Negro’s, the chief Ring-leader of whom was one call’d Peter Vist, who from Caves and almost inaccessible Ways came forth in the Night, and set fire on whatsoever places he came to, notwithstanding a hundred Negro’s of his crew were soon after caught, which he at several times had by force taken out of their Masters Sugars-Mills; which Grave Maurice prevented as much as possible, by keeping Soldiers up and down in Arms. He also us’d the Portuguese very civilly, who though they promis’d Obedience, because they liv’d under the Jurisdiction of the West-India Company, yet were ready on all occasions to shew the contrary; wherefore Grave Maurice sending for the chief of them to Reciffa from Pernambuco, Itamaraca, and Parayba, told them before the Privy Council, that they might easily see how vainly they expected that the Spanish Crown should take Brasile from the Netherlanders; that formerly they depended on the Spanish Fleet Commanded by Mascarenhas, but that being destroy’d by a small Force, that hope was lost; therefore if henceforward they would Trade on their own Accounts, they might be assur’d they should not suffer in the least, either in their Goods, Religion, or Persons.

Hector de Calce taken Prisoner.

The Neopolitan Field-Marshal Hector de la Calce, setting Sail from the Haven Todos los Sanctos with an old Ship carrying six hundred Men, was forc’d to run aground in the Haven of Parayba, where he and the chief Commanders were taken Prisoners, whilest the Common Soldiers by reason of the scarcity of Provisions, were set at liberty.

Houte-been and Lichthart weigh’d Anchor with twenty four Ships, carrying two thousand Soldiers and seven hundred Seamen to Havana, to Cruise for the Plate-Fleet, but the Spanish Ships keeping within their Harbors, and their own being dispers’d and scatter’d by ill Weather, their Voyage prov’d in vain.

Not long after Grave Maurice sent some Ships under Lichtharts Command to Cruise before the River Januarius, and others for the same purpose to Angola; but he effected little, for he onely took two Ships, one whereof being laden with Wine, was sold for 9400 l. Sterl.

The news of the Portuguese Crowning the Duke of Bragancia, and casting off the Castilian Yoke, which very much chang’d the face of Affairs in Brasile, was about this time brought over by the Jesuit Francisco Vilhent, and the Under-Field-Marshal Peter Corera de Gama, who were by Bragancia sent to St. Salvador, not onely to bring the tidings of the Portugueses Revolt, but also to take the Oath of Allegiance from Montalvan to the new King, which he made no scruple of; so that from thenceforth all but the Castilian and Neopolitan Soldiers, cast off their Obedience to the Crown of Spain. Whereupon Montalvan desir’d Grave Maurice to allow a Cessation of Arms, till such time as they might both receive information what Tristan Mendoza, in the new King of Portugal’s Name, had Treated with the States of the United Netherlands about; and to make the Request seem the fairer, several Dutch Prisoners were set at liberty, and the Companies with which Paulo Acunhas was marching to Pernambuco, were call’d back.

Grave Maurice desir’d by the States and West-India Company to continue in his Government of Brasile.

Grave Maurice desiring in his Letters to be releas’d from his Employment in Brasile, receiv’d for Answer from the States, “That it would be very disadvantageous for the States for him to come home, now he throughly understood the Intreagues of the New World, in which he might do much good, especially since the Portuguese being revolted, would in all probability assist them in destroying the King of Castile’s Forces; therefore it was now the most proper time to prepare for Action.”

To this Request of the States was added that of the West-India Company, who also sent earnest Letters to the same purpose; which made Maurice defer his Return, and prepare himself for some grand Undertaking: And first he joyn’d the Province of Seregippe Del Rey to the Netherland Brasile, built a Fort and Armory in the same, and built a Wall about the Town; which Work was the more follow’d, because Seregippe, which border’d upon the Province of Todos los Sanctos, fed abundance of Cattel, and gave great hopes of Silver-Mines.

Loando taken by Houte-been.

Grave Maurice likewise observing what great Profit proceeded from the Angolan Negro’s, and that the Spanish Sugar-Mills could not work without them, undertook to ingross that Trade wholly into the West-India Companies hands; to which purpose Loando St. Paulo being judg’d a fit Place for a Factory, Houte-been was sent thither with twenty Ships, Mann’d with nine hundred Seamen, two thousand Land-Soldiers, and two hundred Brasilians: the Land-Men were Commanded by Hinderson, who arriving with the Fleet on the twenty fourth of August 1640. before Loando St. Paulo, ran in between the Enemy’s Castles, St. Crux, Bento, Sibylla, Vincent, Velho, and against five Batteries along the Water side, all full of Guns, and fir’d so vehemently upon the Enemy, that being forc’d to leave his Works, he made room for Hinderson to Land; who immediately march’d to the Town, which Peter Cæsar Meneses defended with nine hundred Portugueses, and some thousands of Negro’s, who stood the first Onset; but Hinderson falling upon them again, so affrighted them, that they fled; which Meneses perceiving, soon follow’d, and left him Master of the City, in which he found onely a few drunken Soldiers, decrepid old People, twenty nine Brass Guns, besides several Iron ones, and great plenty of Provisions and Ammunition. Mean while Houte-been took thirty Ships hal’d near the Shore.

Description of the City.

This City is built on a Hill, and hath several fair Buildings and Cloysters, amongst which the Jesuits and Capuchins are the best. Along the Sea-shore at the foot of the Mountain, stands also a long Row of Houses, near which Hinderson immediately cast up Bulwarks against any Assault, and likewise two Sconces, the biggest whereof is on the utmost Point of Loando near the Fort Sibylla.

Meneses in vain Expostulates.

Twelve companies being left here in Garrison, quite contrary to Meneses his expectation, who thinking that the Netherlanders came onely for Booty, and not to take or keep the City by force of Arms, made his Complaints therefore by Letters to Houte-been, alledging, That there was Peace made between the King of Portugal and the United Netherlands, and that the former Acts of Hostility were chang’d to friendly Correspondencies. But Houte-been answer’d, “That he knew not of any such Agreement between Portugal and the Netherlands; and if he had known it, how should he be sure whether Meneses held with the Castilians or Portugueses? If Meneses knew of this Agreement, and was of the Portuguese Party, why did he receive those as Enemies, whom he must acknowledge as Friends? His Complaints were now too late, since the Hollanders had obtain’d the Victory with the loss of their Blood.”

Meneses therefore seeing no hopes to regain Loando, either by Complaints or Force, desir’d eight days Cessation of Arms, that in that time he might fit himself to go from thence to another Place; which the Netherlanders in Garrison would not hearken to, but commanded him to march away immediately sixteen Leagues from Loando.

Great Profit of the Negro-Trade.

Mean while the Angolan Princes joyning with the Netherlanders fell upon the Portuguese where-e’re they met them. Moreover, several Citizens return’d to Loando, and proffer’d half their Negro’s, if they might but have liberty to be Transported to St. Salvador with the other half; but it was judg’d more convenient to keep them, and by fair means also to invite the rest, because it appear’d by the Angolan Accounts, that the profit of the Negro-Trade amounted yearly to sixty six Tuns of Gold, the Charges of the Garrison, and fitting out of the Ships being deducted from it. The Spanish King had yearly above fifteen thousand Negro’s from hence to employ in his American Mines.

The Isle of St. Thomas taken by Houte-been.

Great Mortality among the Dutch on the Island St. Thomas, by reason of the unwholsomness of the Place.

Houte-been Sailing over from Loando to the Isle of St. Thomas, Landed some of his Men over against the Sugar-Mills of St. Juna, and ran with his Fleet to an Anchor near a square Castle, with intention to use no Hostility, unless provok’d; which the Portuguese did by firing their Guns, and were answer’d by Houte-been, one of whose Ships call’d the Enchuisen was blown up; those that Landed also met with some resistance from divers Negro’s; yet at last they gain’d the Fort, in which they found six Guns, and soon after march’d into the Town Pavaosa, where the Inhabitants had left nothing but empty Houses; the great Castle they were forc’d to let alone, because the Scaling-Ladders would not reach to the top of the Walls, which were twenty eight foot high: But Houte-been coming ashore, rais’d a Battery behind the Church, from whence he fir’d with six Demi-Cannons, and threw sixty five Granado’s amongst the Besieged, twenty whereof burst with such violence, that all things about them were beaten to pieces; and those in Garrison march’d out, notwithstanding they might easily have endur’d a long Siege, having twenty Brass, and sixteen Iron Guns, besides all manner of Ammunition. Houte-been thus become Master of all things on the Island of St. Thomas, sent for the fled Portugueses into the City on reasonable Proffers, embrac’d by many of the Inhabitants and Negro’s. But whilest Houte-been put all things in good order here, the Countrey Disease began to rage amongst the Seamen, for those who but a little before climb’d up the Walls couragiously, grew faint, and fell down in a Swoon; those who fought valiantly against their Enemies, were now put into their Graves; in short, of a thousand Men, a hundred were scarce left in health, the rest being departed, or lying Bedrid: the unwholsom Air without any difference infected both great and small; for the Commanders Mastmaker, Valett, Dammert, Claudius, Teer, Tack, and the chief in this Expedition, Houte-been, were all taken off, and Interr’d in the chief Church of Pavoasa, after the finishing of so much bloody Work. Most complain’d of intolerable Head-ache, even to Distraction, others also of horrible Gripings; and all those who were afflicted either of these two ways, most certainly dy’d in four days time. The occasion of this deadly Distemper was by divers, according to their different Judgments, imputed to several Accidents; but doubtless it was chiefly to be ascrib’d to the poysonous Damps or Fogs, which often rise in this Island, at which times every one us’d to keep close in their Huts or Houses; which the Netherlanders being ignorant of, neglected.

The first Colony sent thither by John the Third, King of Portugal.

The Portuguese that dwelt on this Island inform’d the Netherlanders, that few liv’d above fifty years there, yet notwithstanding the great Gain tempted them to tarry, several of them having two or three hundred Negro’s that work’d in the Sugar-Mills; that John the Third, King of Portugal, sent a Colony thither above two hundred years before, whom though the unwholsom Air destroy’d, yet the Place was not left desolate; for he sent new Inhabitants, who first Setled in Guinee, next in Angola, and lastly on the Island St. Thomas, that so they might be the better us’d to the Air; that the said King sold all those Jews for Slaves that refus’d to embrace the Roman Religion, and caus’d their Children to be Baptiz’d, from whom (coming thither in great numbers) most of the present Inhabitants were descended.

Twice a year, viz. in March and September, the Sun is in the Zenith here, being right perpendicular, and by that means makes no Shadow at Noon; but the Heat is somewhat mollifi’d in these two Moneths by the Rains which fall, and in the Summer by a West, or South Wind; for there never blow neither East nor Northerly Winds.

The Description of the Island.

The white People that dwell here have commonly a Feaver every eighth day; first they grow chill, next cold, and at last very hot, which lasts onely two hours. They commonly Let Blood four times a year to prevent this Distemper. The Negro’s generally attain to a great Age, many times to above a hundred years. The Island bears the Name of St. Thomas from the Saint on whose Day the Portuguese discover’d the same. From the middle of it rises a Hill, overgrown with Trees, and cover’d on the top with Snow, which dropping down into certain Brooks, runs through the Woods, and moistens the Cane-Fields. The Ground it self is tough, and Ash-colour’d; in it breed blue Crabs like Moles, which hurt all manner of Roots and Plants. The City of Pavaosa is the Metropolis of the Island, and a Bishop’s See; it lies near a clear and pleasant Brook, and is flank’d on one side with Hills, fruitful in the production of Sugar-Canes, but partakes of the unwholsom Air of the Island, which therefore can scarce be defended by Netherlanders, because they being unaccustom’d to the Climate, generally die: Wherefore Grave Maurice advis’d the States to people this Place with Malefactors, who might either live here to the Publick good, or die with less Disgrace than in a Prison.

The City St. Lodowick taken by Coin.

Towards the latter end of the Year 1641. Lichthart and Coin weigh’d Anchor with eight great, and six lesser Ships, and Sail’d to the Island of Maragnon; where Coin Landing near the City St. Lodowick, march’d immediately to the Fort, wash’d on both sides with one River, which there divides it self into two Branches: the Governor of it being too weak to hold out a Storming, sent two eminent Persons to Coin, with Proffers that they would surrender on reasonable Articles: whereupon Coin granted them their Lives, and free possession of their Goods, and gave leave to the Soldiers to stay in the City St. Lodowick, provided they had no Arms, till Orders came from Grave Maurice and his Council at Reciffa. The Hollanders entring the Fort found fifty five great Guns, abundance of all manner of Provisions, and left six hundred Men in Garrison. But the new King of Portugal complain’d by his Agent Mendoza to the States of the United Netherlands, concerning the Transactions of the West-India Company, who had taken the Loando, and the Isles St. Thomas and Maragnan, from him. But he was answer’d, That those Places were taken either before the ten years Peace was concluded with the Portuguese, or before the King approv’d of it, or at least before it was publish’d.

Grave Maurice finding that he could not prevail by fair means with the Portuguese in Brasile, sought to do something by force of Arms, because the welfare of the West-India Company depended solely upon the fortune of War; his Design lay towards the South Sea, whither the Ships might the easier Sail from Brasile through the Straights of Magellan or Le Maire, because in the Summer there blow for the most part Northern Winds along the Coast of America. There were likewise many good Conveniences in the Southern Ocean, not onely to surprize the rich Manilha Traders but also to meet with the Peruvian Plate-Fleet; besides which, Enquiries might be made with little Charges, if any Place were fit to Settle on for Trade in the unknown South Land.

A great Deluge in Brasile.

This Year 1641. was not onely remarkable for the Portugueses revolting from the Spaniards, but also for a great Deluge, which did much hurt in Brasile; for the Rains fell so exceeding hard without ceasing, that the swoln Rivers every where overflow’d their Banks and Dams; the Plants were either wash’d away, or were eaten up by little Worms, which bred as soon as the Water began to fall. Besides this Plague, the Small-pox also rag’d amongst the People, of which many dy’d, and others lay lingring a great while. The Sugar-Mills likewise stood still for want of Negro’s, which the Distemper had for the most part destroy’d, and the Sugar-Canes rotted in the Ground.

A Peace agreed on between the States of Holland and the King of Portugal.

Man while Grave Maurice receiv’d news of the Agreement between the King of Portugal and the States of the United Netherlands, according to which every one was to keep what they had gotten by the War; Trading was free for all; against all the Castles and Fortresses in America, under the King of Spain’s Dominion, Hostility was to be acted alike by both; the Countrey which lay between the utmost Borders of the Portuguese and Netherlanders, were to be divided, that each might know their just Limits; all manner of Trade to the Spanish America was forbidden to both; each Owner was to remain in possession of the Goods which he had on the Day when this ten years Peace was proclaim’d.

Tolner gives the West-India Company an Account of the state of Affairs in Brasile.

Grave Maurice seeing he could not get the States Consent to return home, sent his Secretary Tolner to Holland, to inform the West-India Company of the Condition of Brasile, and to request such things as were wanting there: Tolner accordingly arriving in Holland, acquainted them with the Extent of their Dominions in Brasile, which reach’d from Maragnan to the River Real; with the necessity of keeping the Soldiery undisbanded, in regard the Portuguese were ready to take all advantages, notwithstanding the Articles of Agreement; with the discontent of their own Men, and their readiness to mutiny upon the report that they were to be Disbanded; with the great Inconveniences of altering the Government of the West-India Company; with the number of Soldiers wherewith every Place belonging to the Company was at that present furnish’d, which amounted in all to near five thousand Men; and with the impossibility of keeping those Places, unless a speedy Supply of Men and Provisions were sent.

Grave Maurice receiv’d a Letter from Mascarenhas, wherein he made great complaint of the Netherlanders Actions on Loando, St. Thomas, and Maragnan, during the time of the Treaty, and us’d many Arguments for the delivering back of the Places then taken; but Maurice took little notice of the said Letter, being busie about setling all Affairs in this quiet Juncture of time: He freed all new Planters from the paying of Tenths for seven years, sold several Fields to be Cultivated, repair’d all decay’d Forts, kept the Catholicks in strict awe, ordain’d good Orders for Schools, Alms-houses, and payment of Money, and gave particularly Liberty to the Portuguese both in Spiritual and Temporal Affairs.

The Fort Calvaria taken by the Maragnans and others.

In the mean time sad news was brought, viz. That the Maragnans, assisted by the Portugueses and Brasilians, had taken the Fort of Calvaria near the River Tapicuru, destroy’d all those that were in Garrison, and Storm’d the City Lodowick: Whereupon Hinderson was dispatch’d thither immediately with three hundred Netherlanders, and two hundred Brasilians from Siara; which the Enemy hearing, though there were seven hundred Portugueses, and three thousand Brasilians, left the Island Maragnan, and went over to the Main Continent.

The occasion of this Plot was imputed to the fault of the sottish Governor of St. Lodowick, and his Secretary William Negenton, who by their Folly and Misgovernment provok’d the Natives to Rebellion.

Grave Maurice his Design upon Buenos Aires diverted by Pirez his taking of Pavaosa.

In the interim Grave Maurice had a Design upon the City Buenos Aires in the Southern parts of Brasile, near the River La Plata, where a Way leads by Land to Peru; and whither the Silver and Negro’s were often brought, especially when any Ships were suspected to block up the Channel of Panama.

Whilest Maurice was preparing for this Expedition, news was brought that two Ships had Landed their Men on the Island St. Thomas, under the Command of Laurence Pirez, who had driven the Netherland Garrison out of Pavaosa, and Besieg’d the Fort, out of which many for want of Water ran to the Enemy; and it was fear’d that the same Misfortune would suddenly befall the City Loando and Seregippe del Rey; which prevented Henrick Borer’s Expedition to Chili, and Lichthart’s to Buenos Aires, and so alarm’d Grave Maurice, that he thought it expedient to give speedy notice thereof, to warn the Netherlanders on Angola, that they should keep strict Watches, and beware of the treacherous Portuguese, who affirm’d, That it was lawful for them during the ten years Peace, to re-take those Places which had been taken from them during the Treaty of Peace in the Hague.

Description of the Palmares.

These Proceedings forc’d Grave Maurice to Disarm most of them; and because the Negro’s did much mischief from the Palmares, especially to the Husbandmen in the Alagoas, Maurice gave order to destroy their Habitations. The Palmares were two Villages, built along the River Gungohuby under close Woods, six Leagues Northwardly from Parayba: The Inhabitants of them, being then about six thousand in number, were most of them fled Negro’s, who gathering together in a Head, destroy’d all the Countrey thereabouts: They dwelt in Huts of Boughs and Straw interwoven; behind which were Gardens and Orchards of Palm-Trees, and conform’d to the Religion and Government of the Portuguese.

Grave Maurice countersollicited by Agents from the king of Congo and Duke of Sonho.

Whilest three hundred Musquetteers, a hundred Mameluks, and seven hundred Brasilians were fitting to go to the Palmares, there arriv’d Agents at Reciffa from the King of Congo, who brought as a Present to Grave Maurice, two hundred Negro’s, a Golden Collar and Pot, besides many Negro’s for the West-India Company. These Agents desir’d Aid against the Duke of Sonho, who treacherously Plotted to drive the King out of Congo; which Plot was discover’d by scatter’d Letters, Sign’d by the Governors and Bishop at Loando, a little before Loando was taken by the Hollanders. Maurice courteously Entertaining the Agents, proffer’d himself to be a Mediator to decide the Difference, and gave them a long Velvet Coat Lac’d with Gold and Silver Lace, a Silk Coat and Scarf, and a Beaver Hat with a Golden Edging.

Not long after there came Agents from Sonho, to beseech Grave Maurice that he would not assist the King of Congo; one of whom went to the Hague, and was follow’d by two from the King of Congo, who open’d their Letters before the Prince of Orange.

The Agents from Congo, what kind of Men.

The two Agents from Congo were strong and black Men, very active, and having grim Countenances; they Danc’d after a strange manner; and showing the Picture of their King sitting in great State, acted the Postures in which his Nobles and other Subjects shew’d him Reverence: their Strength was such, that they were able with ease to carry each of them two hundred thirty five Pound weight: their Ornamentals consisted of Elephants Tails.

Meneses surpris’d by Niewland after they were come to terms of Agreement.

Alvares de la Benho his Complaint to Grave Maurice of his Country-men.

In Loando the Governor for the Dutch, nam’d Cornelis Niewland, and the Portuguese Governor Peter Cæsar de Meneses, came to this Agreement, That since the ten years Peace was concluded on between the Portuguese and Netherlanders, Meneses should possess the Countrey wash’d by the River Bengo, and call in the ancient Natives to live and Trade as formerly; all which was faithfully perform’d: nay, Meneses furnish’d Niewland with as much Meal as he requir’d, towards the maintaining of a thousand Negro’s, whom he had bought; and the Hollanders and Portugueses began now to be every day more and more friendly and familiar with each other, when on a sudden Niewland not onely remembring what was done lately on the Islands Maragnan and St. Thomas, but also stirr’d up by other later Actions, which gave him occasion of jealousie, sent two hundred Musquetteers in the Night from Loando, to take the Governor Meneses, with some others, who he fear’d might make an Insurrection. The Soldiers accordingly about Day-break fell unawares upon the sleeping Portugueses, kill’d forty of them, and carry’d Meneses and many other Persons of Quality away Prisoners, together with a Booty valu’d at above ten thousand Ducats, and sent a hundred and sixty Portugueses in an old leaky Vessel to St. Salvador; but they being toss’d to and again at Sea for a considerable time, eight of them dy’d, the rest almost starv’d, Landed on Pernambuco; where Simon Alvares de la Benho being amaz’d to see his Countrey-men thus hardly dealt with, complain’d of Niewland, Mols, and Cross, who were the chief of Loando, that they had broke the Laws, and the sworn Articles of Peace; urging that it would be very unjust that the poor Portugueses should not have Satisfaction for the Wrong which they had sustain’d, as also for the loss of their Goods. To which Grave Maurice answer’d, “That Loando belong’d to the West-India Company, and that for his part he had nothing to do with that City, but that if the States were acquainted therewith, they would without doubt be highly concern’d at it.”

Christopher Santches, a free Negro, gave information of the sad Condition of the Island St. Thomas, viz. That the greatest part of the Hollanders that had been left upon that Island being dead, Pirez hereupon with the King’s Consent fitted out two Ships, and setting Sail from Lisbon about the beginning of July 1642. first refus’d to pay the usual Custom at the Island St. Thomas, afterwards fell upon the Hollanders, whom he Besieg’d in the Castle, and against the Law of Arms poyson’d all the Waters.

To prevent the future Inconveniences that were likely to arise from a Famine which about this time afflicted the whole Countrey of Brasile, Grave Maurice judg’d it convenient to sell the Lands in the Alagoas to new Planters; to which purpose Henrick Moucheron was chosen Overseer, to take care that all the Fields about Porto Calvo, and along the River Francisco, as also in the Alagoas, should be Sow’n with Bread-Corn.

Grave Maurice takes his leave of the several Governors in Brasile.

Grave Maurice obtaining leave at last to go home, took Leave by Letters of the Governors of Serinhain, Porto Calvo, Iguarazua, Itamaraca, Parayba, Rio Grande, and in Person of the Council at Reciffa, who all thank’d him for his prudent Government, manifesting their hearty sorrow for his departure, Which without doubt would produce many Inconveniences. But though the Council of the West-India Company had order’d him to return home about the beginning of March 1643. yet he went not so soon, because he was to reduce the number of Militia to eighteen Companies, and also to settle the Revenues, and dispose of Offices, in which he found much trouble; wherefore before his departure he wrote to the States of the United Netherlands, assuring them how impossible it was to defend Brasile, which extended some hundreds of Leagues, with so small a number of Men, since the Portuguese cover’d inward malice under a feigned shew of kindness, and at the same time watch’d all opportunities to drive the Netherlanders from their Plantations, being very much exasperated by the priviledge of Religion granted to the Jews, whilest their Monks and Jesuits were banish’d. Moreover, in regard they ow’d the West-India Company above fifty nine Tuns of Gold, they sought to cancel that Obligation, by making themselves Masters of whatsoever their Creditors had in Brasile, so that there was no way but to keep them under by force of Arms.

He leaves the Government and returns home.

After Grave Maurice had sent this Letter to Holland, he left the Government of Brasile to the chief Council, the Militia to Henrick Hoes, Captain of his Life-guard, with Directions for Governing after his departure. Having setled all things in good order, he went from Maurice-stadt through Paratibi and Iguarazu to Parayba; where Janduy sent him three of his Sons, with twenty Tapuyans, desiring him not to go away; two of them with several Carapates and Waypebarans, (a People who made themselves Masters of the great Palmares) and five other Brasilians went aboard with him on the twentieth of May 1644.

The Fleet, consisting of thirteen Ships, and Mann’d with fourteen hundred Men of all sorts, was laden with so many Merchandizes as were valu’d at twenty six Tuns of Gold; with which Grave Maurice arriving at the Texel, Landed at the Helder, and gave an Account of his Government in Brasile, and of the then present state of that part of it which belong’d to the West-India Company.

Ill management of Affairs after Maurice his departure.

Viera’s Treachery.

After Grave Maurice’s departure, Hamel, Bassi, and Bullestraet, bore the chief Command in Brasile: The Charges made by the War were mitigated, and the number of the Soldiers in Garrison reduc’d to sixteen hundred; some Forts lay without a Man in them, whilest the King of Portugal watch’d for such an opportunity; for he seem’d to be as much concern’d for that Countrey, as for his Kingdom of Portugal, and the rather, because his Predecessor Sebastian receiv’d above forty hundred thousand Ducats yearly out of the same, besides the Presents and other Gains made by the Portuguese; wherefore he gave order to the Governor of St. Salvador to be very vigilant, and assur’d him, that in a short time he would send him both Men and Provisions. A Mulatto call’d John Fernandes Viera, did not a little assist the Portuguese in their Design; for he having liv’d a considerable time in a Councellors House in Reciffa, had narrowly observ’d all Passages, and insinuated himself into several Statesmens Affairs, by Presenting them now and then with some Rarities, insomuch that he came in time to Farm the Rents which the West-India Company receiv’d from the Sugar-Mills; but at length being discontented because the Council would not make any abatement upon the same, when he complain’d that he lost by Farming the fore-mention’d Tax, he held private Correspondence with Andreas Vidal, that when a convenient opportunity presented it self for the Portuguese to fall on the Hollanders, he might be assisting; to which end he had gotten several Arms and Ammunition together.

In this Plot a Jew nam’d Moses Accoignes, living in Viera’s House, a League from Reciffa, to keep him from Arrests, was perswaded to joyn, which he seemingly promis’d to do; but went away by Day-break, and discover’d the Design to the Privy-Council, who being rock’d asleep by the Portugueses fair Pretences, gave no credit to the Relation.

A Plot against the Netherlanders to be carry’d on by a Wedding.

The Plot discover’d by some of the Conspirators.

For the better carrying on of this Design, Cavalcantelca, Provost-Marshal in Maurice-stadt made a great Wedding for his Daughter in Viera’s House, to which the chiefest Persons of Quality, both of the Portuguese, and also all the Privy-Councellors and Military Officers belonging to the West-India Company were invited: and the Plot was so contriv’d, that whilest they were all at Dinner, the Portuguese were suddenly to fall upon the Netherlanders and kill them, both Servants and Masters; this done, some were to go to Reciffa or Maurice-stadt, with news that the Wedding People were coming; whereupon part were to press into the City, others to keep the Gates, till all their Forces were come thither, which then might easily secure and seize upon the Magazine: some Barques also under pretence of loading Sugar, were in the mean time to set upon the Haven and Fort near the Shore. All things were accordingly prepar’d for the Wedding, nothing being wanting that could be purchas’d with Money, and near the Forts of Rio Grande and Parayba were Stage-plays to be Acted in publick, it being concluded that the Soldiers in Garrison would certainly be there to see them; the Actors being privately Arm’d with Pistols and Ponyards. And to oblige one another the more for the carrying on of this bloody Design, Viera had caus’d the chief Conspirators to take an Oath before the high Altar. The twenty fourth of June 1645. was the Day on which this Tragedy was to be acted; but a few days before two Portugueses and five Jews, who had been sworn Confederates, their Consciences checking them for so villanous an Undertaking, made an ingenuous Discovery of the Plot. The Councellor Moucheron was also inform’d, that the Portuguese Colonel Camaron and Diez were coming with great Forces from St. Salvador.

Viera flies into the Wood.

The Council when they might easily have apprehended Viera, sent for him by a Jew call’d Abraham Coing, under pretence of Treating about some Business concerning the West-India Company; he promis’d to come in the Evening, but suspecting he was betray’d, fled into the Woods, and gave speedy notice to all his Accomplices, who follow’d him in great numbers. The Soldiers sent to search Viera’s House, found none but old Men and Children.

The Councellor Van Houten went immediately with seven Sugar-Vessels to Parayba, fortifi’d the Forts Margareta, Restringa, and Antonio, and made room for the Brasilians that had remov’d thither from their Villages, in the Houses deserted by the Portuguese in Frederick-stadt. On the other side, Amador da Rouge, one of the Conspirators, went with a Company from Poiouca through the Countrey, kill’d seven Dutch Seamen, with three Jews, and erected Gibbets, on which he threatned to hang all those who did not take up Arms for the King of Portugal. Colonel Hous inform’d hereof march’d with five hundred Men to Poiuca to meet the Portuguese, who were scatter’d up and down the neighboring Woods. He also publish’d an Edict, in which every one was Licens’d to return to their Habitations, with promise of pardon for their Rebellion, if they would take the Oath of Allegiance anew, onely Viera, Cavalcantelca, and Da Rouge, were excluded, and nine thousand Guilders promis’d to those that brought them dead or alive, which made two hundred Inhabitants in Reciffa march into the Countrey under the Command of Captain Blar, to find the fore-mention’d Traitors; and at last joyning with Hous, they pursu’d the fled Portuguese.

Hoogenstraet sent to Treat with Antonio Silva, is privately tempted by him to deliver up the Fort St. Augustine.

In the mean time the Council sent the Captains Vander Voort and Hoogenstraet, to Antonio Silva, Governor of St. Salvador, to acquaint him with the treacherous Insurrection of the Portuguese, and of Camaron and Diez coming from St. Salvador to their assistance, urging, that these treacherous Proceedings and breach of Oath, could not but redound to the dishonor of the Crown of Portugal. Whereto Silva answer’d, “That Camaron and Diez were not under any Obligation of Oath, but that he would check the Insurrection in Pernambuco, and take care that the Authors thereof should make Satisfaction to the West-India Company.” Notwithstanding which fair Pretences, he so wrought with Hoogenstraet, that after a private Conference between them it was agreed, that for a certain sum of Money he should surrender him the Promontory of St. Augustine, of which he was Governor; but at his Return to Reciffa being made chief Commander of the Castle there, and being jealous what might follow his private Treating with Silva, he declar’d to the Council, that Silva had desir’d him to surrender the Fort St. Augustine, which he had granted, for no other end, but to catch the false Portuguese in their own Nets, and to trapan all such as should be sent to take possession of it; and that if the Council had any suspicion of him, they might make use of his Service in some other place.

About this time a hundred and fifty Tapuyans, led by a German Soldier call Jacob Rabbi, Sallying out of their Woods, fell upon the great Village Conyahou, under the Jurisdiction of Rio Grande, broke into the Church, murder’d all the Portuguese, and eating their raw Flesh, demolish’d the Place.

Hous also unfortunately Storm’d the Mountain Santantan, where the Enemy lay Intrench’d, being forc’d to Retreat with the loss of above a hundred Men, amongst whom was Captain Lo.

Grave Maurice his stately Palace demolish’d.

The Privy Council caus’d a part of Maurice-stadt to be pull’d down, as also the stately Palace Freyburgh, for which the Jews proffer’d Grave Maurice 6000 l. together with the stately Garden, which were thought to exceed the famous Gardens in Thessalia; but on the other side they kept Men at work Night and Day in repairing the decay’d Castle at Reciffa.

Bonavides appears with a great Fleet before Reciffa, but pretends Friendship.

About the same time the Admiral Salvador Correo de Bonavides, brought thirty four great Sail of Ships to an Anchor before Reciffa, the Gallion which he Commanded carrying sixty Brass Guns. The Admiral Lichthart ran to meet him with five Vessels, and sent him word, that if he fell down to Leeward, since he was got to the Windward, he should soon find, that five Ships durst Engage with a Fleet six times as strong. Whereupon Bonavides sent two Messengers to Lichthart to tell him, that he came as a Friend to damp the Portuguese Insurrection in Pernambuco; to which purpose he had already Landed some Companies at Tamandera. Lichthart sending the two Messengers to the Council at Reciffa, they sent two of their own Members to Bonavides, desiring to know of him what call’d him thither with so great a Fleet, and without giving the least notice, contrary to the concluded Peace of ten years?

The Names of the Ships both of the Dutch and Portuguese Fleet.

A. The Portuguese Admiral.
B. Their Vice-Admiral.
C. The rest of their Ships.
D. Three of their Barques.
E. Three Carvels, which lay to watch in the Bay.
F. The Enemy’s Battery.
G. The Utrecht, being the Dutch Admiral.
H. The Ter Veer.
I. The Zealand Vice-Admiral.
K. The Over-Ysel.
L. Salt-Land Pink.
M. The Golden Deer Frigat.
N O. The Leyden Pink, and Unicorn Frigat.
P Q. A Dogger and three Netherland Barques.

Whilest the two Commissioners went with the fore-mention’d Orders to the Portuguese Fleet, a Netherland Vessel endeavor’d, notwithstanding the Wind was contrary, to get out to Lichthart’s assistance; which Bonavides observing, stood away Northerly before the Wind: but Lichthart overtook a Ketch belonging to the Portuguese Fleet.

Serinhain taken by Vidal and others.

Mean while the Portuguese upon Land being two thousand strong, under the Command of Vidal, Diez, Camaron, and Acoignes, Storm’d the Fort Serinhain, where the French Captain Montagne could make but little resistance, not having above forty Men, and being unprovided of Ammunition and Provision; yet he resisted nine days, and at last got two Barques to convey him to Reciffa.

Soon after this the Portuguese Fleet falling out amongst themselves, Bonavides Steer’d back for Lisbon with a few Ships, the rest coming to an Anchor again near Reciffa; where the Seamen whom Lichthart had taken inform’d him, that their Fleet came the first time to Reciffa for no other end, but to stir up the Portuguese by their Presence to take up Arms, according to a private Contract, having to that purpose Landed twelve hundred Men at Tamandera, besides the Army led by Camaron and Diez from St. Salvador to Pernambuco.

Colonel Hous about this time being sent for back to Reciffa, and staying with five hundred Men for Captain Blaek’s coming, who was sent to fetch all the Portuguese Women within three Leagues about Reciffa, was set upon in the Night by Vidal with two thousand Portugueses; the Brasilians, who were above half his Forces, flying into the Woods, leaving onely two hundred Netherlanders to fight with Vidal, by whom being so much over-power’d, they were forc’d to submit to his mercy, and suffer themselves to be all carry’d Prisoners to St. Salvador.

By this time at Reciffa all things were in a confusion, the Pits digg’d about Maurice-stadt afforded nothing but brackish Water, which occasion’d Sickness.

The Fort St. Augustine treacherously surrendered by Hoogenstraet to the Portuguese.

Vidal encourag’d by his Victory, march’d to St. Augustine, where without doubt he had stopt, if Hoogenstraet, who had the chief Command of the Fort, had not been Disloyal; for this Traitor thought it not enough to surrender this invincible Fort to the Enemy, but also bereav’d Reciffa of Provisions and Ammunition, which he did very subtilly, sending earnestly thither for Souldiers, Bullets, Powder and Shot, in lieu whereof he sent thither two Barques full of old Men, Women and Children, that so he might deprive Reciffa of stout Men, and supply their room with unable People. For this treacherous and villanous Act the Portuguese were to give him 1800 l. and make him a Colonel: Moreover, all the Soldiers in Garrison, consisting of three hundred Men, receiv’d 3 l. a Man, and were sent to joyn with a Regiment of six hundred and fifty Men, over which Hoogenstraet was made chief Commander.

Lichthart gains a noble Victory over the Portuguese Fleet.

The day before this eminent Castle was to be deliver’d up to the Enemy, Admiral Lichthart obtain’d a brave Victory at Sea; for the Portuguese Fleet (consisting of seventeen Sail, the rest being gone with Bonavides to Portugal) anchoring before Tamandera, were valiantly set upon by Lichthart, who Engag’d with them on the ninth of September 1645. with the Utrecht, being the Admiral Ship, the Zealand, Ter Veer, Over-Ysel, the Pinks Salt-Land and Leyden, a Dogger and three Barques. In the Hole of the Haven Tamandera three Portuguese Carvels kept Watch, and near a Battery full of Guns lay three Barques, and the other Ships a little farther nigh the Shore. The Enemy at first shot very fiercely from the Battery, whilest the Ships drove to the Shore, and the Men leaping overboard swam ashore, onely the Admiral Jeronymo Serao de Payva made some resistance, but at last surrendred up his Ship, the Netherlanders in their Barques killing above seven hundred Portugueses in the Water. Lichthart burnt the whole Fleet, except the Admiral and Vice-Admiral, which he carry’d to Reciffa.

But this Victory was not comparable to the Loss which the East-India Company sustain’d by the selling of the Promontory of St. Augustine, and the taking of the Forts Porto Calvo and Rio Francisco; to the last whereof the Barques coming too late to carry the Soldiers off, they were all made Prisoners by the Portuguese, as also the Planters, in all to the number of five hundred.

Bouilloux put to Death by the Governor of Parayba.

Vidal marching to Tamarica, Storm’d Schuppen-stadt, but found such resistance from George Garstman (who supply’d the Prisoner Hous his Place) that he lost three hundred Men: After which he endeavor’d by means of Fernandes Bouilloux, to purchase the Fort Margareta for 1500 l. Sterl. of the Governor of Parayba, who immediately without any farther Examination, caus’d Bouilloux that proffer’d the Money to be put to death.

A Dutch Sergeant in Olinda dealt very treacherously; for he sold the Fort to a Portuguese Ensign for 100 l. and also most basely betray’d all his Soldiers Lives to the merciless Enemy.

The distressed Condition of Reciffa.

By these means Reciffa was round about in jeopardy, as also within; for the great Thirst of the Inhabitants under a scorching Climate, augmented by the Hollanders salt Meat, could not be quench’d with brackish Water, for fresh was not to be had; Famine also increas’d daily, insomuch that the Poor threatned to fall upon the Rich, which made the Magistrates go Arm’d from House to House, to enquire what Store every one had, which being writ down was carry’d away and put into the Store-houses, where each receiv’d alike share, without respect of Persons. Fewel also grew very scarce, which made many eat their Meat raw, or half dress’d. In the interim every one that was able, was forc’d to work at the Forts of Reciffa, which were beaten down by the Rains; and the Soldiers continually alarm’d by the Enemy, were forc’d to be Night and Day up in Arms. The People dy’d more and more daily, when two Fly-Boats arriv’d there with Provisions, and News, that a Fleet was coming to their assistance.

The Captains Rhynbag and Montagne went in the Night, each with a Company, to fall upon the Enemy, who being two thousand five hundred strong, drove them back, and pursu’d them within shot of the Afogados, where forty Portugueses were kill’d.

About the same time a Terra Neuf Sailor, laden with the dry’d Fish Bocraillo, came to Reciffa.

In Parayba three hundred Netherlanders Sallying out of the Forts, fell so valiantly upon nine hundred Portugueses, that they forc’d them to flye, not without a considerable loss. After which a Party of Brasilians surpris’d eighty Portugueses, as they were at Mass in Andreas Diez de la Figuereda’s Sugar-Mills, where they spar’d none but Figuereda’s Daughter, whose Beauty so charm’d them, that they comforted her mourning for her Father’s Death, and deliver’d her undefil’d to the Governor of Parayba.

The barbarous Cruelty of Vidal.

Vidal raging for madness because now and then some of his Prisoners escap’d, caus’d several of them to be cruelly murder’d, tying some of them Back to Back, and then cutting them in pieces; others he threw with Stones ty’d about their Necks into the Rivers; others he ty’d by their Privities, and hung them upon Trees; and also knock’d out the Brains of others.

The Soldiers at Reciffa mutiny for want of Provision.

In Reciffa the Soldiers, consisting of divers Nations, began likewise to mutiny, crying, They should be all starv’d; and saying, They had better be slain in the Field fighting against the Enemy, than die of Hunger in the City. They also complain’d, The Commissioners themselves betray Brasile; and threatned by force to fetch the Provisions out of the publick Stores, saying, They had long enough endur’d Thirst and Hunger.

A new Fleet sent by the States to Brasile.

The Dutch Fleet set out for Brasile.

These Transactions in Brasile were very ill resented in Holland, the common People in the Hague being ready to pull down the Portuguese Ambassador’s House, in revenge of the Cruelties exercis’d upon the Netherlanders in Brasile, had they not been hindred by the Prudence of Prince Henrick. The Ambassador pretending to be ignorant of the fore-mention’d Passages, proffer’d to make what Satisfaction the West-India Company should require. But the States not satisfi’d with Excuses, when the Actions plainly manifested what their Intentions were, Complain’d to the French King of the unthankful and malicious Dealings of the Portuguese Crown; and meeting but with small Redress, they prepar’d to right themselves by force of Arms, and to that end rais’d several Regiments of Land-Soldiers, besides Seamen, to send to Brasile. The Fleet design’d thither, consisting of twenty two Sail, after it had been frozen up before Flushing three Moneths, set Sail at last in the beginning of February, Anno 1646. with the Lord Schonenburgh, a Member of the States, the Councellor Goch, and Treasurer Beaumond, Men very well experienc’d in Governing of Countreys: To these were added the eminent Merchants of Amsterdam, Haeks and Trovire, to keep the West-India Companies Accounts, and Le Heremiet for their Secretary. Sigismond Schuppe bore the chief Command over the Militia, and the Admiral Bankert over the Fleet, which suffer’d the greatest hardship imaginable; for being driven by tempestuous Winds into the Downs, two of them driving from their Anchors were cast away on the Flats. The Fleet getting out again, was once more forc’d by a Storm to put in at the Isle of Wight; from whence by reason of continual Gusts they could not stir in nine Weeks time. During this tedious waiting for a fair Wind, the Brasile Frigat, valu’d at 20000 l. was split in pieces against a Rock of the Island, and of three hundred Men thirty onely were sav’d. A Pink, which came in two Moneths from Reciffa, brought also sad tydings to the Fleet, viz. That the Town was in such a Condition, that without doubt the Fleet would come too late to their assistance: whereupon they making the more haste, endeavor’d, not without great trouble, to weigh Anchor again, whilest the Wind rose higher and higher, and the Waves going very hollow, drove the Ships down towards Portland Coast, full of Rocks, to which they were so near, that they saw a Scotchman split in pieces against them; and had not the Wind come about, and abated of its fury, the Fleet had undoubtedly perish’d. No sooner was this Danger past, but another succeeded; for the Soldiers in the Admirals Ship complaining of the small allowance they had of Cheese, Brandy, and Tobacco, had made themselves Masters of the Store-room, and threatned to kill the Lords Goch and Beaumond; but they, assisted with Men from the other Ships, who came in at the Cabbin Windows, so order’d the Mutineers, that they ask’d forgiveness, which for many Reasons was granted, onely they were distributed by seven in a Ship throughout the whole Fleet. After a great Contest between Goch and Beaumond about carrying the Flag, which could not be decided, Goch was left by the rest of the Fleet, who Steer’d another Course, and getting near the Line, lay becalm’d six days; in which time he lost very many of his Men by a strange kind of Scorbute which rag’d amongst them; at last Sailing along the Promontory of St. Augustine, he came to an Anchor before Reciffa, which he found in the greatest Exigency imaginable, insomuch that it was resolv’d upon, the next day to surrender the Place up to the Portuguese, on promise of Quarter onely: which Resolution none oppos’d more than the Jews; for the Portuguese swore that they would burn them alive, if ever they became Masters of Reciffa, which made them resolve to die with the Sword in their Hands, and sell their Lives at a dear rate. Six Weeks after Gochs Arrival, the remaining part of the Fleet, escaping many dreadful Storms, in which, besides the two that were lost in the Downs, they lost five Ships and five hundred Men, arriv’d also at Reciffa; where the Commissioners appointed Officers to distribute to every one their certain allowance of Victuals. The prime Councellor Schonenburgh also decided the Difference between Beaumond and Goch, as also between Haeks and Trovire, about their Places in the Assembly, viz. that they should sit above one another by Turns. The old Governors, Hamel, Bassi, and Bullestraet, were blam’d by every one for the decay of Brasile; and being sent to Holland, were receiv’d with frowning Looks, and rail’d against in Pamphlets as faithless Persons, who sought nothing but their own advantage, and were threatned to be call’d to an Account. It was also laid to their charge, that they had not given a true Account of the State and Condition of Brasile; that the State was much more decay’d than they had made known, by which means the present Power prov’d too weak to do any thing to the Enemy.

Garstman Fin’d and Disgrac’d upon King Dary’s Complaint.

Amongst other Misfortunes which befell the West-India Company, the Revolt of the Tapuyans and other Brasilians was not the least, which hapned upon the occasion of Garstman’s putting to Death of Jacob Rabbi, a German, and indeed their chief Ringleader in all Robberies and Villanies; but Dary their then King alledging that Rabbi was wrongfully Executed by Garstman, and that his Tryal belong’d to him as King, prosecuted Garstman so vigorously, that he and his Ensign Jacob Boulan, his Accessory in the Fact, had their Goods and Salary confiscated, and they themselves were sent home in disgrace.

The Portuguese Invitation prevails above the Netherlanders.

Mean while the Council seeing that there was not much good to be done by force of Arms, endeavor’d by mild ways to invite the revolted Portugueses, who were all promis’d Pardon for their Insurrection in an Edict which was publish’d in all places, onely Viera, Almado, De Rouche, Antonio Calvantelca, and Hoogenstraet, for whom great sums of Money were offer’d, were excepted. The Portuguese on the contrary publish’d, That they would receive all those Netherlanders into favor that would come over to them, and pay the Debts which they ow’d to the West-India Company, and also Transport them whither they pleas’d. These Promises, written in English, Dutch, French, and Portuguese, and hung every where on the Boughs of Trees, and other publick Places, operated much more than the Privy-Councils Edicts; for in stead of one Portuguese that came to them, several ran to the Portuguese from Reciffa, notwithstanding a strict Guard was kept to prevent them, besides the great mortality amongst the Soldiers and Inhabitants through several raging Distempers, and want of fresh Provisions: Which general Calamity, it seems, very much cow’d the Spirits of those that were left; for in a Sally meeting with five hundred Portugueses, notwithstanding they were equal in number, yet they made a shameful Retreat; yea, though Schuppe came with eight hundred Men to their assistance, yet he could not prevail with them to face about either by fair means or foul, for with his own hand he Ran-through an Ensign, Sergeant, and two Soldiers, who ran away first. Yet notwithstanding this base and cowardly Retreat, it was resolv’d on to set upon Olinda and the Promontory St. Augustine; and at the same time Hinderson was sent to make himself Master of Rio Francisco with fifteen hundred Men, and to harrase all the Countrey thereabouts with Fire and Sword, that so he might force the Portuguese to leave Reciffa.

Revolt of the Tapuyans.

Though John Dary, King of the Tapuyans, seem’d well enough contented with the punishment of Garstman, yet a great Party of his Subjects were not satisfi’d, but went and joyn’d with the Portuguese, because Garstman had not been deliver’d to them in Siara, where they kill’d all the Netherlanders they could meet with, and sent Presents to their King Dary, if possible, to oblige him to joyn with the Portuguese: But he reply’d, That he had more reason to punish them for their ill usage of the Inhabitants in Siara, than to have any thing to do with the Portuguese.

The Council inform’d hereof, sent the Interpreter Ralph Baron, who had a long time Convers’d with the Tapuyans, with a Present of Axes, Knives, Looking-glasses, Shirts, Combs, and the like Trifles, to King Dary, desiring him to continue his former kindness towards the Hollanders; which Dary promis’d, provided he might receive Assistance from Reciffa against those whom he had made his Enemies for the Netherlanders sake; which Baron promis’d should be done as soon as the fresh Forces which were daily expected from the Texel, Maes, and Zealand, came to Brasile.

The Fort of Rio Grande taken by Hinderson.

Capt. Montagne overpower’d by the Enemy, and slain.

Hinderson Landing at Rio Grande, took the Fort without firing a Gun, the Portuguese at his first coming flying into the Woods. He found here abundance of Cattel; for no place in the World breeds more than this, several Husbandmen having fifteen thousand Head of Beasts, of which many were taken to supply the want of Provisions at Reciffa. As soon as he had taken the Fort, he caus’d it to be pull’d down to the Ground, because it stood in an inconvenient place, and immediately rais’d another, which was much better to be defended, by reason of the rising Ground; but he could neither bring that Work, nor any other Design to any perfection, because of the treachery of his Soldiers, who being most of them Roman-Catholicks, were so inclin’d to the Portuguese Interest, that they daily more and more deserted the Companies Service, and gave Intelligence to the Enemy of their Transactions. Amongst others, an Antwerper was apprehended for an Intelligencer, and being Hang’d on a Gibbet, fell three times one after another on his Feet, the Halter breaking like a burnt Thred, which gave him so many times of respit and opportunity of supplicating for Life; but his Crime was too hainous to admit of Pardon. Mean while the fled Portugueses being supply’d with fresh Supplies from all Places, especially from St. Salvador, to the number of twelve hundred Men, they kill’d the Out-watches, consisting of twenty Men: The next Sentinel being warn’d by the noise, alarm’d the new Fort, which was scarce finish’d, because a mighty Shower of Rain had wash’d away the Walls. Hinderson being wounded in the Leg, sent Captain Montagne against the Enemy, of whose Power he was sensible; yet going to the place where the Watch that was kill’d had kept their Station, he met with two hundred Portugueses, divided into three Companies, and drawn out for Battel, who running away were pursu’d by Montagne, till coming up to their Regiment, which consisted in all of a thousand Men, divided into five Companies, they fell on all sides upon Montagne, who fighting valiantly, was overpower’d and kill’d, with three hundred of his Men, and almost as many more taken Prisoners; amongst whom was the Minister Astette, four hundred onely escaping into the Fort, where Hinderson stay’d expecting the event of Montagne’s Exploits.

This Defeat spoil’d Schuppe’s Design, who by his marching to Rio Francisco thought to draw the Enemy from Reciffa; but now being forc’d to think of some other way, he thought it convenient to invade St. Salvador by Sea, as the Enemy had done Reciffa by Land. Wherefore Hinderson receiv’d order to stay with six hundred Men (being all that were left of fifteen hundred,) on Rio Grande, whither a Barque with Provisions being sent, was taken, and the Men in cool Blood kill’d by the Portuguese.

Schuppe’s Victory on the Island Taperica.

Lichthart’s Death.

At the same time it was given out, that Schuppe was going with the Admiral Bankert to Hinderson’s assistance; and to delude the Portuguese the more, Schuppe went with two thousand five hundred Men to Rio Francisco, where he lay some days at an Anchor; upon which the Governor of St. Salvador sending several Companies thither, Schuppe Sail’d with all speed to St. Salvador, and Landing on the Island Taperica, four Leagues in circumference, he got a rich Booty, and spar’d none whome’re he met with, insomuch that two thousand were destroy’d, some by the Sword upon the place, others by their haste to get over to St. Salvador; for most of the Vessels being too full, sunk with them. Amongst the Prisoners that were taken and sent to Reciffa, were two Monks, who were design’d the same Entertainment as the Minister Astette should receive in St. Salvador; whereupon they immediately wrote to their Fraternity, to take care that Astette should not be burnt alive, as the Portuguese had threatned, because they were to expect the same usage: whereupon Astette was set at liberty, and had leave to walk up and down the Streets of St. Salvador. Schuppe fortifi’d himself on Taperica, near an Inlet under the new Works, and together with Lichthart watch’d for all Portuguese Vessels: But Lichthart dying here, was carry’d to Reciffa, and there bury’d. On the other side, the Governor of St. Salvador sent fifteen hundred Men in the Night to the other side of Taperica, where with all speed they Intrench’d themselves, and Sally’d daily out of their Works upon Schuppe, so that many Men were lost on both sides; but Schuppe was in the worst Condition, in regard his Soldiers ran over in great numbers to St. Salvador, where they were well Entertain’d; of which he advertis’d the Privy-Council, who were the less able to give him Redress, as having the same cause of Complaint.

A pitiful Example of a young Soldiers Execution.

Amongst others there hapned a sad Accident of a young Soldier, scarce sixteen years old, and born at Roan, who having robb’d his Father’s Cash, went in a Ship to Holland; where he lavishly spending the Money, was forc’d at last to List himself in the West-India Companies Service, and coming with the fore-mention’d Fleet to Reciffa, endeavor’d with two Companies to run to the Portuguese; but overtaken, was Try’d for the Fact, and Condemn’d to be Hang’d, for none of his Excuses which he made, of going over the River onely to fetch some Oranges and Lemmons to refresh himself, would save him, nor his protesting that he had no intention of going to the Enemy, nor the Promise that his Father should release him for ten thousand Crowns, nor his Minority, which ought chiefly to have been consider’d, but that Necessity stopt the Ears of the Compassionate; so that his Execution drew pity from the Beholders a few Weeks after.

A notable Passage of a Portuguese, Executed for Treason.

A very astonishing Passage hapned at Reciffa upon another Sentence of Death pronounc’d against a Portuguese, who after the publication of the Act of Pardon came to Reciffa, and there hir’d a Seaman for two hundred Crowns, to carry a Letter, made up in a Leaden Box, to the Governor of the Promontory of St. Augustine, with order that if he was set upon any where, he should throw the Box into the Water. The Letter written in strange Characters, contain’d a Declaration of the small number of Men in Reciffa, most of the Netherlanders Forces lying on the Island Taperica, so that if Reciffa were Storm’d along the Bank, and from Maurice-stadt, it might easily be taken. This Letter being intercepted, the Portuguese was taken and Condemn’d, and as he was carrying to the Place of Execution cry’d aloud, You People take delight in my Death, but you shall be interrupted; and indeed it hapned accordingly: for when the Executioner began to scorch the half-strangled Criminal with Straw, there sprung up a strange Spirit of Contention amongst the Spectators, who began to justle and strike one another; and soon after a Whirlwind rose in the midst of the Market-place, which in a moment caus’d them all to stagger like drunken People, their Hats and Caps were blown up into the Air, the whole multitude tumbling confusedly on the Ground, the Arm’d Soldiers flying to the next Houses, and the Executioner falling down in a Trance from the Scaffold: A full quarter of an hour this Confusion had lasted, when the People came to themselves again, and the Hangman return’d to his Business, cutting off the Portuguese’s Nose, Ears, Privy-Members, and tearing out his Heart, which he threw to two Dogs, who devour’d the same; then dividing the Body into Quarters, which were set up at the four Corners of the City for an Example.

The same Punishment receiv’d a Mulatto, who endeavor’d to fire two of the Hollanders best Ships in the Haven.

Notwithstanding these Punishments, the Soldiers ran away daily; the blame whereof might justly be laid on the Magistrates, who took no notice of the Soldiers just Complaints of their Officers, cheating them of a third part of their Provision, and inflicting severe Punishments upon them as Mutineers, when they had real cause of Complaint.

Schuppe was at the same time shrewdly put to it for want of Men, who either dy’d of the then reigning Disease, or ran away to the Enemy; so that he was forced to leave the Island Taperica, and inclose himself within his new rais’d Sconce.

Admiral Bankert gains a great Victory over the Portuguese Fleet.

The Admiral Bankert had better success; for Cruising up and down before the Inlet Todos los Sanctos, after the taking and sinking of several Ships as they came in his way, he at last set upon the Portuguese Fleet, consisting of seven great Ships, of which one got to St. Salvador, another was sunk, and the other five were taken, being valu’d at twenty Tuns of Gold, or 200000 l. Sterl. In this Engagement were kill’d above four hundred Portugueses, besides two hundred and fifty who were taken Prisoners, and sent Shackled to Reciffa. Amongst them was the new Vice-Roy of Brasile, the Admiral, Vice-Admiral, three Monks, and several other Persons of note.

Marshal Hous arrives at Reciffa with a fresh Supply.

This Victory began to give some Breath to Reciffa, when at the same time Marshal Hous arriv’d there with seven Ships, Mann’d with five hundred Soldiers. This Hous on the seventeenth of August, Anno 1645. had been taken Prisoner at the Engenho having fought so long till all his Powder was spent, so that he was forc’d to surrender himself upon promise of Quarter to Vidal, who after he had taken an Oath upon the Bible, to spare the Lives of all the Hollanders and Brasilians fell upon the Brasilians and slew them, being a hundred in all, in Cold-blood, who yet sold their Lives at no easie rate. Being carry’d Prisoner, together with Captain Bristow, Listry, Wildschut, Blar, and two hundred more, by Viera to Casa de Prugar, he was thence sent to Portugal, where being releas’d, he brought News to the States of the mean Condition of the West-India Company, and that all things must needs be lost, if they did not speedily take the Business into Consideration: Whereupon he was furnish’d with a Supply of Ships and Men, with which he set Sail for Brasile; where being arriv’d, most part of the Soldiers he brought with him were Transported to Taperica, to assist Schuppe; who as soon as they came to him, march’d into the Countrey; where being set upon by a thousand Portugueses, he lost sixty Men.

Soon after Hoogenstraet receiving Orders from the Governor of St. Salvador, who was inform’d by some Prisoners, that Schuppe had not above twelve hundred fighting Men, to fall upon him with three thousand, made a furious Assault upon the Sconce in two places, and Storming the same for two hours together, lost four hundred Men, which made him draw off a little before Day-break.

In the interim nine Privateers, fitted out by several Merchants of Holland and Zealand, came to Cruise up and down before the Coast of Brasile; which the States the rather allow’d of, because the West-India Company was not able to send any more Supplies thither: Nor was it long ere they took five Portuguese Prizes, and afterwards (joyning with Bankert) four more laden full of Sugar, in the Haven Todos los Sanctos, where they threw a hundred and twenty Portuguese, and fifty revolted Hollanders overboard.

The Council of Reciffa send over Messengers to represent the sad condition of the Place.

Bankert’s Death and Character.

Reciffa being at that time reduc’d to very great straits, earnestly implor’d Aid from the States, but to little purpose, by reason of the Differences amongst themselves, which hapned upon this occasion: The Spanish King by his Agent in the Hague made Overtures of Peace, and proffer’d to fall upon the Portuguese in Brasile: to which Proposition, whenas the rest of the States seem’d inclinable, those of Zealand would no ways hearken, being resolv’d to have nothing to do with Spain. The news of this Dissention exceedingly perplex’d the Council at Reciffa, especially when to that news was added, that Bankert, the onely terror to the Enemy at Sea, was Commanded home by the States of Zealand, which yet the General States strictly forbad. Whereupon they thought fit to send one of their Assembly to the Hague, to make the States acquainted with the miserable Condition of Brasile, and to Expostulate with them for their insensibility of their Condition, and to let them understand, that ten thousand Men would not restore Brasile to its former Condition: Every one strove to be the Messenger of these sad tydings, but especially their President Schonenbergh wish’d it might be his lot to leave the unhappy Countrey of Brasile; but because his departure would not have been without great murmuring of the People, Haeks was sent in his stead. Together with him went Hinderson (who was in no esteem since the Destruction on Rio Grande;) they both Embarqu’d on Bankert’s Ship and five others, which in stead of being laden with rich Commodities, and ballasted with Sugar, as heretofore, were fraught with discontented Seamen, decrepid and sick Soldiers, unserviceable Jews, poor Travellers, Portuguese Prisoners, and onely ten Weeks Provisions; whereas all other Vessels at their Return from Brasile us’d to have Provision for three Moneths, which at this time could not be spar’d. The Council also made Orders what Persons should go with the fore-mention’d Ships, viz. None but those whose Names were written in the Lists which had stuck six Weeks at every Church Door, that by that means no Creditor might suffer by his Debtors going away, nor any Criminal escape his deserved punishment. Bankert had scarce been a Week at Sea, when he dy’d of the Palsie: he was a Man, who for his valiant Exploits was from a Fore-mast Man preferred to be Captain; which Office he perform’d with great Prudence and Valor; but that which first made him most eminently taken notice of, was his Engaging with thirteen Dunkirkers, of which he sunk three, and being boarded by three more, and fir’d at by the rest, he refus’d to surrender his Ship on promise of Quarter, but plac’d his eldest Son with a lighted Match in the Powder-room, commanding him on pain of Death to blow up the Ship with the three Dunkirkers as soon as he gave the Word; which valorous Resolution so amaz’d the Enemy, that they let him go. He also behav’d himself bravely in the Downs against the Spanish Admiral Oquendo. His two Sons that were present when he gave up the Ghost, would not have his Body thrown overboard, notwithstanding it stunk so intolerably, that all the Provisions in the Ship were tainted by it; therefore taking out his Entrails, they Salted the Body, wrapt it up in four Sail-cloths, and nailing the same up in a pitchy Chest, bury’d it under the Ballast. Mean while the Fleet approaching the Flemmish Isles, was surpris’d by a terrible Storm, in which the Vice-Admiral’s old Ship split asunder, but most of the People were sav’d. Between Calice and Dover they met with eight Ostenders, against whom they made themselves ready to Fight; but they, according to the King of Spain’s Order, instead of Hostility shew’d them Friendship. All their Provisions were spent, when they happily Anchor’d before Flushing, where Bankert’s Body was Interr’d with great Solemnity.

Overtures of Peace from the Portuguese refus’d by the Netherlands.

In the interim the United Netherlands had fitted out another Fleet to assist Reciffa, the West-India Company having first demanded of the King of Portugal two hundred and eighty Tuns of Gold, to the value of which they affirm’d themselves to have been damag’d by the Insurrection of the Portuguese. On the other side, the King of Portugal was in a quandary about the Business of Brasile; for first, he had no other thoughts but that Brasile would have fall’n into his hands within the space of three Moneths, because the Plot there was so subtilly laid; neither did he think the States would have concern’d themselves with the West-India Companies Business, which now it was manifest they did. Besides this, there was a third Inconvenience, viz. that the Spanish Crown endeavor’d to conclude a Peace with the United Netherlands; wherefore that he might put a stop to the sending of the Fleet to Brasile, he dealt with the French Ambassador to make very advantageous Proffers in his behalf, viz. That he would surrender all the conquer’d Places, and make good all the Damages that had been sustain’d thereby. The Fleet appointed to go to Brasile was hereupon stopt, till the States had Consulted about an Answer on the fore-mention’d Propositions; but when Haeks brought news of the falshood of the Portuguese, the Scale was immediately turn’d, insomuch that the Portuguese Ambassador went in danger of his Life, till the Mutineers were put into Custody. Moreover the Fleet was order’d to Sail with all speed possible to Reciffa, with promise that another Fleet should soon follow with six thousand Men; but the many disconsolate tydings that had been brought of late, of the hardships and sufferings of those that went before, through the unwholsomness of the Climate, the want of Provisions, the Strength and Cruelty of the Enemy, made the Seamen and Soldiers very unwilling to go so fatal a Voyage, insomuch that as many as could, made their escape: yet at last, on the last day of December, Anno 1647. the Fleet set Sail under the Command of Corneliszoon de Wit; some Weeks before which Schuppe was forc’d to desert the Island Taperica, to go and aid Reciffa, which the Portuguese from a rais’d Battery on the other side of the River Biberibi shot at so incessantly, that none were safe either in their Houses or in the Streets.

Mean while the Portuguese Agent, Francisco de Sousa Continho, proffer’d the States to go to Brasile himself, and cause to be restor’d all those Places which had been taken from the West-India Company, particularly the City St. Salvador and Tercera, besides Reparation for all other Damages.

Grave Maurice his high Demands.

At the same time Grave Maurice was Treated with to go to Brasile again, but his Demands were so high, that it came to nothing; for he requir’d 4000 l. yearly to spend at his Table, and 5000 l. besides during his Life; also 2000 l. to set him out, and twelve thousand Men to Besiege St. Salvador, which was always guarded by four thousand, and thirty Carvels lay ready before Lisbon to carry four thousand more thither.

Angola and Loando taken by the Portuguese.

All things went very ill on the Hollanders side at this present; for besides that the fore-mention’d Fleet had not its wish’d success, most of the Men being destroy’d by the immoderate Heat of the Climate, Angola and Loando were also taken by the Portuguese.

These Misfortunes made the West-India Company begin to be very forward to come to a Treaty with the Portuguese Agent, who before seem’d rather to court them, having offer’d to Engage for the restoration of whatever they possess’d at that time, when the ten years Peace was concluded; but when they came to insist upon that Point, he answer’d, That he must expect new Orders from Lisbon concerning Loando, because the taking of that Place caus’d an alteration in the state of Affairs. But the States no way satisfi’d with Delays, that were like to prove both hurtful and disgraceful, resolv’d to put into Execution what they had before agreed upon, viz. The East-India Company was impower’d to make Prize of all Portuguese Ships towards the payment of the fifteen Tuns of Gold ordain’d for the West-India Company, to help them against the Portuguese Oppression. The West-India Company also receiv’d Commissions to Cruise for Portuguese Vessels before Brasile.

Schuppe and Coche miserably defeated as they were Besieging Gararapes.

On the seventeenth of February, Anno 1649. three thousand Soldiers that came over in the fore-mention’d Fleet, besides two hundred Negro’s, and as many Seamen, marching to Besiege Gararapes under the Command of Schuppe and Coche, were so furiously set upon by the Sallying Enemy, that they were forc’d to break up the Siege in great disorder, whilest the Portuguese being in number two thousand five hundred, fell upon the Rere; and though the Dutch Officers us’d all the care they could possible to bring their Men to face about, yet they were not able to keep them from running away; in which flight great slaughter of them was made by the Portuguese Horse, consisting of a hundred and thirty, Arm’d with Lances, insomuch that in the flight and the pursuit, a thousand Netherlanders were slain, and nineteen Ensigns or Colours were left behind as Trophies for the Portuguese; the chief of the Slain were Colonel Brink and Houteryve.

The Zealanders were much concern’d at the improsperous Affairs of Brasile, in regard a fifth part of the West-India Companies Stock belong’d to Middleburg, Flushing, and Veer, insomuch that the Complaints of Widows and Orphans that shar’d in the common loss, mov’d the States to fit out six great Ships, and as many Ketches, Mann’d with two thousand eight hundred Men, for Brasile, where all things ran to ruine, the Grandees both of the Council, Army, and Fleet, being at variance, and impeaching one another.

The rest of the Provinces, especially Friesland, being less inclin’d to the West-India Company, were somewhat colder in the pursuit of this Business; nevertheless, upon a fresh Letter of Complaint from Walter Schonenbergh, President of the Brasilian Council, they held a Consultation together, how to raise Moneys for the fitting out of twenty Ships and five Ketches for the Relief of Brasile.

De Wit releas’d from Prison, justifies his Return.

The Admiral De Wit returning home, was, upon the accusation of the Council in Brasile, and the General, Sigismond Schuppe, made Prisoner in the Hague; and together with him the other five Captains that went with him were Committed by the Admiralty, for returning without the Consent of the Council; but they were soon releas’d by the Magistrates of Amsterdam, who upon the Admiralties refusing to deliver them, commanded their Provost-Marshal to break open their Prison Doors. De Wit after his Releasement justifi’d what he had done before a full Assembly of the States, and alledg’d that it was according to the Orders he receiv’d when he undertook this Expedition.

The Portuguese Agent, Sousa Macede, obtaining Audience of the States, told them how ready the King his Master had been to come to a perfect Agreement of Peace with them, but that their own Acts of Hostility had been the occasion of the breach of that Treaty of Peace that had been concluded on; that the Robberies and Insolencies committed by those Portugueses under their Jurisdiction, was not any way authoris’d or countenanc’d by him; lastly, he offer’d them free Trade to Brasile eighty Tun of Gold to the West-India Company, 800000 l. to the Orphans and Widows in Zealand, and payment of all private Debts. But making no mention of restoring the Places in Brasile, he seem’d to mock the States; who resented it so much, that they would admit of no farther Conference with him.

Schuppe, Haeks, and Schonenbergh declare the Reasons of the loss of Reciffa.

Mean while the West-India Companies Business in Brasile went daily more and more to ruine, insomuch that in the Year 1654. they lost all their Forts and Places of Strength and Habitation, and amongst them Reciffa, the chief Residence of the Council of Brasile, who returning home, brought nothing but a doleful Relation of their unfortunate Proceedings. Schuppe, Haeks, and Schonenbergh, made each of them a long Oration, setting forth the sad Condition of the Place, and the Miseries they had endur’d a long time before they left it; also excusing their total quitting thereof to the Enemy by the great want of Provisions and other Supplies, which they so often had written for in vain, at least receiv’d short of what their Necessities requir’d, and by the Clamours of the Soldiers, who were ready upon all occasions to Mutiny or Revolt, as appear’d by their crying out upon the discovery of a Fleet of Portuguese upon the Coast, Behold our Deliverers from the Netherlanders Tyranny; lastly, by the growing Power of their Enemies, which they could not have resisted, though they themselves had been much stronger than they were.

They are try’d at a Council of War.

But the West-India Company sensibly touch’d at the thoughts of their Losses, were not satisfi’d with the Relation of Schonenbergh, Haeks, and Schuppe, but requir’d a Journal of every days Transactions, or Testimonies to confirm the truth of their Relation: They also demanded an Account of the Condition of the Store-houses when Reciffa was surrendred, and fell upon them with several Interrogatories, viz. Why the Fort Afogados was forsaken? Why the Garrisons were not drawn in from the North to Reciffa? Why they did not keep footing on the Land, and guard those Places they had left when Reciffa was lost? Why they made such ado for want of Provisions and Ammunition to dishearten the People? Why the Money proffer’d by several Citizens was not taken? Why they did not burn the Enemy’s Fleet, since, according to the opinion of several, it might easily have been done? How they could testifie the Sedition of the Soldiers, since none of their Commanders complain’d of it? Whether they us’d any Means to encourage the Besieged? Who did, and who did not consent to the Surrender? Whether no better Terms could have been made? In fine, they prevail’d with the States to secure Schonenbergh, Haeks, and Schuppe, in their Houses, and on the ninth of September, Anno 1654. brought them before a Council of War in the Hague, where the chief things objected against them were, That the Portuguese had gotten by the Conquest of Reciffa, above two hundred Brass Guns, most of them Demi-Culverins, and four hundred Iron Guns, valu’d together at ten hundred thousand Rixdollars; That the Store-houses were sufficiently stock’d with Provision and Ammunition; That they took care to secure their own Goods, but left what belong’d to the West-India Company as a Prey to the Enemy.

Their Pleas.

Schuppe condemn’d at a Council of War to lose his Salary.

Schuppe on his part alledg’d, that he could do nothing of himself, as being under the Command of the Brasilian Council. Haeks and Schonenbergh pleaded the want of Men, by reason of the many that daily dropt from them, either by Death or Defection, to the Enemy, and those that remain’d, unsafe to be trusted, as consisting of so many different Nations, also their being block’d up at the Sea by the Portuguese Fleet, the great want of Ammunition, especially Instruments of Fortification; lastly, the head-strong Resolutions of the Soldiers, to deliver up the Place, whatever their Officers should determine to the contrary; notwithstanding which, to shew that it was not quitted upon disadvantageous terms, they produc’d the Articles of Agreement upon which it was surrendred to Francisco, Governor of Pernambuco. In conclusion, the Council of War pass’d their Sentence on Schuppe, viz. That he should lose all the Sallary that was due to him from the West-India Company since the twenty sixth of January 1654. when he Sign’d the Agreement with Baretto for the delivering up of Reciffa.

Thus the Portuguese recover’d full and absolute possession of Brasile, yet not without fear of an afterclap of War; wherefore the Portuguese Agent, upon condition of an absolute Peace to be concluded, proffer’d the States General in the Hague, Satisfaction for the Damages which the West-India Company had sustain’d in Brasile, eighty Tun of Gold, a free Trade to Brasile, and payment of the Debts due to them from several Portugueses in Brasile; but told them, that to surrender them any Places there, was not in the power of the Portuguese Crown. On the other side, the Spaniard proffer’d to assist them in the total Conquest of Brasile, and to restore them those Places they formerly possess’d, as soon as they had subdu’d the Portuguese; to which the Zealanders began to hearken, who being great Losers by the Portugueses Treachery, wish’d for nothing more than Revenge; but Holland having a great Trade to Portugal, was more inclin’d to Peace: Whereupon His Majesty of great Britain proffer’d himself to be Mediator between the Portuguese Crown and the United Netherlands; and accordingly on the sixth of August, Anno 1661. a Peace was concluded with Portugal on these Terms:

Articles of Peace between Portugal and the United Netherlands.

I. That Portugal was to pay to the United Netherlands eighty Tun of Gold, either in ready Money, Sugar, Tobacco, or Salt, or deduct the same out of the Customs payable in the Portuguese Harbors.

II. That the Guns on Reciffa were to be restor’d to the West-India Company.

III. That the Salt-Trade at St. Uves and other Places under the Portuguese Jurisdiction, whether in Africa or Brasile, should be granted to the Netherlands, paying the Customs as the Portuguese do themselves.

IV. That the conquer’d Places gotten on both sides, should remain in the hands of the present Possessors.

V. That the King of Portugal should not lay an Embargo on any Netherland Vessel, on any pretence whatsoever, though they should carry all manner of Ammunition to his Enemies, provided it were not out of any of the Portuguese Havens.

VI. That no Netherlander should ever be call’d before any Judge about any Difference in Religion, but should have freedom thereof granted him, either in his House or Ship, and also a convenient Burying-place.

VII. That if any Difference should chance to arise between Portugal and the Netherlands, they should not extend it to prejudice the Trade, but every Merchant should be free to call in his Debts, and send Ships without hinderance.

VIII. That this present Agreement should not be broken by any Misdemeanors acted by any Subjects, either in the East or West-Indies, who were to be punish’d by their lawful Judges.

IX. That the Havens belonging to both Parties were to be free for either Men of War or Merchant-Men.

X. That the Netherlanders Trading in Portugal, might go Arm’d, take Houses and Store-houses.

XI. That the Goods laden in an Enemy’s Ship might be declar’d free Prize.

XII. That the Portuguese in Brasile should pay their Debts which they ow’d to the West-India Company, or any other Person or Persons; to which purpose three appointed Commissioners were to Sit at Lisbon, to hear and determine the Causes that should be brought before them, and without the usual Circumstances, pass their Sentence, which was to be Executed by a higher Power.

A few days after this Agreement was concluded, the Portuguese Ambassador, Henrico Sousa Tovares, went for Lisbon, where he arriv’d on the last day of September.

The States of Groningen and others, disapprove the Peace with Portugal, and condemn Schulenbergh.

Not onely Guelderland and Zealand, were much dissatisfi’d with this Agreement, but also Groningen accus’d their Deputy Schulenbergh, that contrary to Orders he had been too forward in concluding the Peace with Portugal, and that he had consented to that which the States of Groningen had not permitted him; for they resolv’d to make Peace on no other account, but that Portugal should pay the eighty Tun of Gold in ready Money, and that in a short time; whenas on the contrary, he had allow’d of the payment in Merchandise, and that in a long time. Wherefore the States of Groningen (who for this Fact and several Accusations brought against Schulenbergh, condemn’d him to be Beheaded, which Sentence had been Executed upon him, had he not made his Escape) together with those of Omeland, and others, who disapprov’d of the Peace concluded with Portugal, drew up many Reasons why they dissented, and look’d upon it as both dishonorable and disadvantageous; however, the Articles being Sign’d, and the States General, taking into consideration how impossible a Work it would have been to have gone about to renew a War with the Portuguese in Brasile, being at that time in firm possession of all, and that for the Interest of a few, in respect of the whole Common-wealth, they were forc’d to rest satisfi’d, and together with the West-India Company, to sit down with the loss of those Places in Brasile, which had cost so much Blood and Treasure to gain.

The West-India Companies Memorial deliver’d in to the States.

Nevertheless the West-India Company put in a Memorial at the Hague, of all that had been done them from time to time, wherein they themselves had been great Sufferers, and the Common-wealth very much advantag’d, as namely, That at first they put in a Stock of seventy four Tun of Gold, sent out divers Fleets under the Admirals Willekens, John Dirkszoon Lam, Boudewyn, Henrickszoon, Peter Hein, Adrian Pater, Henrick Lonk, Dirk Uitgeest, Peter Ita, Loos, Cornelis Houte-been, Lichthart, Bankert, and others, at several times, which had much weakned the Spanish Power, to the great advantage of the United Netherlands, because the Spaniard was not onely forc’d to disperce his Power to defend America, but also lost great Riches on the Coast thereof, which being the Sinews of his War, prevented him from oppressing that State; That to their loss they suffer’d their Forces to stop the Enemy, when he broke into the Veluwe, at that time when the United Netherlands seem’d to hang by a silken Thred; That it would probably have been the ruine of Holland, if the mighty Spanish Fleet which Engag’d with Martin Tromp in the Downs, had been assisted by sixty six Sail, which La Torre was forc’d to send to the Coast of Brasile, against the West-India Company; That this Companies Concern was so great a Nursery of Mariners in the Year 1629. that they had above a hundred Ships at Sea, and fifteen thousand Men in their Service; which the United Netherlands considering, and judging that Charge too great for the Company to maintain, had resolv’d to contribute a certain Sum towards it yearly, which had not yet been paid; which made them take up Money upon Interest, and put in a Supply of thirty Tun of Gold for the payment of the same; That the Expedition of Henrick Brewer to Chili had put them very much behind-hand, because the Enemy having notice of it, secur’d himself, yet was often terrifi’d with it; for Brewer having found out a Way to go from Reciffa to the Province of Chili in two Moneths, and accordingly to do great mischief to the Spanish Power, whose Riches lay bare all along the South Sea; this and many other things forc’d to make that honorable Peace with the Netherlands, concluded on in Munster, Anno 1648.; That their Losses, computed and deliver’d in to the States General, amounted to sixty six Tun of Gold, and forty three thousand two hundred and ninety Guilders, which forc’d them to take up Money to pay Interest for what they had before, yet that they still kept fifty great Ships at Sea, and were resolv’d to prosecute their Trade with fresh vigor, as soon as Satisfaction should be given from the Portuguese Crown, as was promis’d them in the Articles of Agreement, and they could obtain of their Lordships, to have their Patent prolong’d for a considerable time; That they were still indebted to those Orphans and Widows who furnish’d them with Money to set out their Forces, which in the first twelve years did the Spaniard so much hurt, that the Damage is reckon’d to amount to one thousand one hundred and eighty Tun of Gold.

These things being taken into consideration by the States General, they granted the Company their Request, and gave them a new Patent, by virtue of which they now Trade to Africa and the Caribbee-Islands, since they were forc’d to quit all they had possess’d in Brasile.

Sect. XII.
The Journey of Rodulphus Baron, with the Description of the Customs and Manners of the Tapuyans.

Rodulphus Baron, to make a Discovery of the Countrey, upon the Encouragement of Grave Maurice, who allow’d him to that purpose a yearly Revenue, undertook a remarkable Journey, accompany’d with three Tapuyans; who going out of the Village Caneri without any store of Provisions, left the Mountains Cupaeva on the right-hand, and went seventy Leagues into the Countrey, without meeting with any People, onely he found one Mountain of Fossile Glass; from whence he went Southward to the Villages of the Waripebares and Caripati, who having courteously Entertain’d him, appointed certain Persons to accompany him from one Village to another, with Orders to Complement Grave Maurice, who sent them home with several Gifts.

The Waripebares and Caripati inhabit fourteen Villages on the Mountains which Bound Brasile Westward, live by Hunting and Fishing, eat wild Honey and all manner of Fruit, and maintain continual Wars against a mighty People which inhabit the Western Plains.

The Customs and Manners of the Tapuyans.

As for the Tapuyans, they range up and down between the Rivers Grande, Quoauguho, Ocioro, Upameoma, and Voiroguo, without having any setled Abodes; they are a strong People, stern of Countenance, and black Hair’d: In stead of Circumcising their Children, they cut them, which is done after this manner: The Priests stand on a row, Dancing and Singing, whilest one of them swings the Child round about his Head before all the Multitude, and then runs away with it; at last returning, sets it in his Lap, whilest another Priest cutting a Hole in the Ears and Lips thereof, puts little Bones into the same, and the Mother cries and howls after a terrible manner. At these Ceremonies, which end with Dancing and Singing, their King is always present.

The Virgins are kept by their Parents till the Mothers perceive them to have their Monethly Courses, which they immediately reveal to the Priests, who acquaint the King therewith, before whom the Maid, being Painted red, is brought; whom having smoak’d with Tobacco, he throws an Arrow at a Garland, which she wears on her Head, and if he chances to hit it, he gives her his Benediction, by licking certain parts of her Body, from which she hopes to receive long Life.

So soon as a Woman is gotten with Child by her Husband, she lies no more with him, but he is permitted to enjoy his other Wives, whose number is either more or less, according to every ones pleasure. The Women after Delivery eat their After-birth.

Adultery is free for Men, but if Women be taken in the Act, they are immediately put to Death.

After they have done Soweing and Planting, the King calls all his People and Subjects together, and appears to them hung round with Garlands; and all of them have their Bodies Painted and stuck full of divers colour’d Feathers.

Strange kind of Prognostication.

The Priests when they go about to foretel future Events, either Sing or Pipe, and at the same time hold up their Heads towards the Skie, and stand gazing, as if they saw some strange Vision in the Air; on some of their Backs hangs a Bundle of Ostriches Feathers; some throw Feathers in the Air, to see which way the Wind blows. When the Waters overflowing Brasile did much harm, Anno 1641. the Priests being Consulted, brought forth the King’s Calabash, in which lay their sacred Stones call’d Cohuterak and Titscheyouh, and began to Dance and Sing; next six Priests were plac’d in a row, which were to Prognosticate: whereupon the first taking up a Stone, said, The Netherlanders have given Battel to those in St. Salvador, but are now about an Agreement: The second held up a Blossom of Indian Wheat, and foretold that there would be plenty of that Grain: The third holding a white Pebble-stone, promis’d store of Milk: The fourth grasp’d a Stone like Bread, telling them that the Countrey should produce much Bread: The fifth holding up a Bowe and Arrow hung full of Feathers, cry’d aloud, This is a Gift of the Angels, Birds shall flie thicker than these Feathers hang together: The sixth, having a lump of Wax, foretold that there would be plenty of Honey made by the Bees that year.

They worship the Constellation Ursa Minor.

They observe a very strange way of Purging; for with a Stick they thrust sharp Leaves down their Throats into their Stomach, which they turn so long till they vomit Blood.

Their manner of Wrestling.

In the Summer they have a general Meeting for Wrestling, and other Exercises, which lasts three days. The Wrestlers are strangely attir’d; for they are all over their Bodies beset with divers sorts of Feathers, and in stead of Boots or Buskins, wear the Barks of Trees about their Legs; their Hair besmear’d with Honey, and ty’d in a Tuft, hangs down behind; on their Crowns they wear a Plume of Feathers, about their Necks a Band or Gorget of Feathers; at their Arms they tie the Wings of the Birds Kohitub, and on their Backs a green Bough; their whole Bodies Painted with divers Colours, and their Hair all Red: Thus accoutred, they Engage one with another, and if there be an old Grudge between them, then they Fight in earnest, and often kill one another: The Victor with strange Actions upbraids the Vanquish’d with Cowardise, and ever after enjoys his Wife and Children.

They eat the Serpent Manuah, being four Yards long, and on the Tail having a Horn, which with a push it thrusts into Man or Beast, as it lights, then winds it self about the Body, and sucks till it hath suck’d the last drop of Blood.

Here are also Serpents which are so poysonous, that the least Wound receiv’d by them is mortal, unless the part bitten be either immediately cut out, or off.

The Priests cut the deceased Bodies into pieces, which are roasted by old Women; the Bones are taken out, and at the next publick Feast are stamp’d, mix’d with Water, and Drank: But the Bodies of Noblemen are to be eaten by none but Persons of that Rank.

Their manner of Crowning their Kings.

They also Crown their Kings after a strange manner, viz. The Priests, who are beset with Feathers, anoint him with sweet-smelling Oyl, or Balsam, and put a Crown of divers colour’d Feathers on his Head, after which they all fall a Singing and Dancing; but if any one happen to speak a word of the deceased King, they all begin to howl and cry. The Kings Authority consists more in Advising than Commanding.

Their Opinions concerning the Soul.

They believe that the Souls of those who die a natural Death are immortal; but those that are kill’d by their Enemies, devour’d by ravenous Beasts, or poyson’d, are totally extinguish’d both Soul and Body for ever. They say likewise that Hell is Westward near a dark Pool, where the Devil Examines every Soul how they liv’d on Earth, and what Death they dy’d; the Good are Ferry’d over to a delightful Valley, where there is plenty of Fish, Honey, and Flesh; but the Wicked are miserably tormented.

The Natives live peaceably amongst themselves, their Law being for those that have not, to ask, and for those that have, to give.

They never Travel in the Night for fear of Serpents and other ravenous Beasts, neither do they go any whither till the Sun has dry’d up the Dew.

King Janduy his subtile Plot.

King Janduy before-mention’d, being above a hundred years of age, desir’d the Prince of Juckers fair Daughter to Wife, but being deny’d, contriv’d a subtil Plot, viz. he invited Jucker, with his Courtiers, to a Wresting; whither he coming with his whole Train, was earnestly minding the Sport, when a considerable number of Janduy’s Women falling upon Jucker’s Men, destroy’d a great many of them, and got the desir’d Maid for Janduy, who at that time had fourteen Wives and sixty Children, but had formerly enjoy’d fifty Wives and Concubines.

Their Arms.

Not onely amongst the Tapuyans, but generally amongst the rest of the Brasilians, their Arms are great Clubs call’d Tacapes; also sharp Darts, and strong Bowes call’d Orapares, with Shields, which are made of the Skin of a Beast call’d Tapiroussous.

The Women wear long Chains of Snail-shells, which hang down over their Shoulders; their Faces are Painted with divers colour’d Rings, surrounded with Specks; their Necks and Arms they adorn with Necklaces and Armlets of little Bones: They carry their Husbands Provisions in time of War.

Their Army they order by blowing on the Horn Inubia; others play on Mens Bones kill’d a little before: for going by Water they use Boats made of the Barks of Trees, each whereof being able to carry fifty Men, go exceeding swift: The strongest Men always march before, and as many as they take, whether Men, Women, or Children, they are all kill’d and roasted in their Boucans.

Their manner of Fighting.

Their Villages consist of Houses of eighty, ninety, or a hundred Paces long; those that lie near the Enemy are fenc’d with Walls and Pallisado’s against any Attempt. Their Field-Battels are very terrible; for as soon as they get sight of one another, they howl like Wolves; which Tone they raise as they approach nearer and nearer, and with their Horns and Pipes make also a mighty sound; then shaking their former Enemies Teeth (which they wear about their Necks) at one another, they cry, That they shall immediately fall into each others hands for Food: whereupon they throw their Darts at one another, which are adorn’d with all sorts of Feathers, and if any one be wounded, he pulls out the Dart, and bites the same like a mad Dog; next falling to their Clubs, they knock one anothers Brains out: which manner of Fighting lasts commonly some hours before the one or other Party leave the Field. All their Prisoners they fatten, and eat them at a Merry-meeting; at which when they have Danc’d seven hours together, three Men lead the Prisoner, ty’d with a Rope made of the Bark of a Tree call’d Juira, through their Village, whilest the Prisoner looking to and again, saith in a scornful manner thus unto them, You, do ye hear? I have eaten your Fathers: and to others, I have roasted your Brother; your Nephew also tasted very well; my Death will be sufficiently reveng’d: Having carry’d him about for some time, they put the Rope so strait about his Middle, that he can neither stir one way nor other; then they give him Stones in his Hands, and lay others at his Feet, saying, Now take Revenge for your Death before you die: then he immediately throws at those who are nearest him; and when Stones are wanting, he throws with Earth: at last comes the Executioner, adorn’d with Feathers, with a black Club in his Hand, and asks, Have not you at several times eaten of our Relations? to which the Prisoner undauntedly answers, Pa che tan tan, ajouca, atoupave, that is, Yes, I am he that have eaten several of your People, and laying his Hands upon his Head, cries out, O how valiantly did I behave my self therein! The Executioner replies, And therefore shall you be kill’d by me, and serve for Food for these Spectators: Then the Prisoner answers again, What care I, since I know my Death will be reveng’d: which said, his Brains are dash’d out, and falling on the Ground, he is carry’d away by his Wife (for the Conqueror commonly betroths his Sister or Daughter to the Prisoner,) who seemingly bemoans the Body, of which she hath the first Cut when it is Dress’d; then the old Women put the Corps into scalding Water, in which they let it lie till the Skin comes off; then the Owner of the Prisoner quartering the Body, distributes it amongst the Guests; the pieces laid on their Gridirons call’d Boucans, are turn’d by the old Women, who lick up the Dripping, desiring the By-standers to bring more such Food, and with the Blood anoint the Childrens Faces; the Meat being broyl’d every one takes a piece, and eats it up to the Bones, which are kept as Trophies.

Brasilians molested by an evil Spirit.

The Brasilians do not onely thus plague one another, but they are likewise tormented by an evil Spirit, which they call Aygnan and Caagerrel, if credit may be given to John Leerius a Burgundian, who relates, that he hath often seen them sweat out of fear; and striking their Hands upon their Thighs, cry out, Mair autourassap, acequerey, Aygnan atoupave, that is, O my Fool, my Companion, I fear the Devil above all Evils.

Diseases peculiar to Brasile.

Amongst several Diseases to which Brasile is subject, there is one call’d Pians, as malignant as the French POX, proceeding from libinousness, the whole Body being full of Carbuncles, each about the bigness of a Man’s Thumb.

Strangers in Brasile are also much troubled with a Giddiness, occasion’d by the extream Cold in the Night; as also with sore Eyes, which they get by going abroad before Sun-rising, or after Sun-setting.

The Palsie is also very common there, taking People so suddenly, that falling down stiff on the Ground, they are often in danger of losing their Breath.

Besides these there are several other Distempers that very much infest Brasile, as the Bloody-flux, Dropsie, Rising of the Gall, Worms, Meazles, and St. Anthony’s Fire.

Brasilians success in curing of several Distempers by their knowledge in Herbs.

The aged Brasilians have for the most part great skill in Herbs, which they gather in the Woods, and apply them to the Sick both inwardly and outwardly; and chiefly they know how to expel Poyson. None can perswade them against the Medicines which they have learn’d from their Predecessors; nay, they will rather chuse to lose their Lives than use any other: and indeed they do not always succeed amiss, but often manifest that they understand the Vertue of Herbs better than our European Physicians. The Learned Guilielmus Piso relates, That he hath seen several times in the Army which Grave Maurice sent against the Portuguese in Brasile, that the Brasilians in a short time cur’d those Wounds with fresh Gums and healing Herbs, which the Netherland Chirurgeons judging past Cure, presently advis’d the cutting off either the Arm or Leg of the wounded Person. Piso adds moreover, That he himself us’d some of Hippocrates’s and Galen’s Prescriptions in Wine, for the curing of Cancers and Swellings, which the Brasilians have made well onely with the Juice of Tobacco. They also in a moment recover’d a Person given over by all European Physicians, with the Juice of the Root call’d Jaborandi: Wherefore he always desir’d their Company when he went to visit sick or wounded Men.

Their manner of curing the Sick, and bewailing the Dead.

The Distempers in America differ much from the European, not onely in the Signs of any Distemper, but also in the Cure; for when a Distemper cannot be cur’d by the prescribed Medicines, a Father or Mother sends for the Neighbors, to know if they can find any means to cure the Disease: Which Custom was anciently observ’d amongst the Greeks. They also strictly observe a Rule in their Diet, and take care to keep the Patient out of the Sun in the Day, and cold Winds in the Night: However, if their Fathers and Mothers be sick, nevertheless they leave not off their usual Dancing and Singing; but if the sick Person die, especially a Father, they lament and cry over the Corps like Wolves, calling to one another with a quavering Voice, and uttering these Expressions, The strong Man is deceas’d, who carry’d so many Prisoners for a brave Dinner to his House. Oh what a quick Hunter and subtil Fisher hath Death bereav’d us of! we shall see him no more till our Souls are carry’d beyond the high Mountains, where our valiant Predecessors Dance in Rings. The Women make the greatest noise, and in the midst of their howling embrace one another, which lasts six hours, and then they put the Body upright into a Grave made like a Hogshead, hanging about it divers colour’d Feathers, and other things in which the Deceased delighted most when living; upon the Grave the nearest Relations place Dishes of Meat, both Flesh and Fish, and the Liquor Cauou-in, that their evil Spirit call’d Aygnan, may be reconcil’d by these Offerings, and not carry away the Body; but when they remove from thence they cover the Grave with the Herb Pindo. This Custom is not observ’d by all Brasilians, for some eat up their deceased Relations.

Sect. XIII.
Grave Maurice his Account of Brasile, so far as it concern’d the West-India Company.

Brasile, so far as it concerns the West-India Company, extends from the River Real, which divides Seregippa and the Lordship of St. Salvador, to Maragnan: Seregippa it self reaches along the Sea-Coast thirty two Leagues, and was first brought under the King of Spain’s Jurisdiction by Christovan de Barros Cardoso, who being order’d by the King of Spain to Plant this new Countrey, invited many People from St. Salvador, who built four Sugar-Mills, and a Town consisting of a hundred Houses, and four hundred Sheds for Cattel; but the Town being destroy’d, hath nothing left but Heaps of Rubbish; and the Cattel either fell into the Netherlanders hands, or were devour’d by Tygers; the Inhabitants fled back to St. Salvador: Many troubles have prevented the re-building of it.

The fertility of Pernambuco.

Pernambuco may for its fruitfulness stand in competition with any Place in the World, except in those parts where the Soil is sandy and stonie. The Fields feed abundance of excellent Cattel; the Woods, Deer and Fowl; the Ocean and Rivers, all manner of good Fish. It is inhabited but eight Leagues into the Countrey, because the nearer the Sea, the more convenient it is for Importing and Exporting of Goods; neither could the Portuguese, by reason of their small number, spread themselves farther, as also in regard they found great resistance from the Brasilians. The Negro’s that work in the Sugar-Mills between the River Grande and Francisco, amount to four thousand. The Cape Verde, Mina, Angola, Ardra, and Calabaria, generally provide three thousand in a year, to supply the number of the Sick, or those that run away.

Sect. XIV.
The Councellor Dussen’s Relation of so much of Brasile as concerns the West-India Company.

That part of Brasile which the West-India Company have subdu’d by force of Arms on the Continent of America, is divided into six Counties, viz. Seregippa, Pernambuco, Itamarica, Parayba, Rio Grande, and Siara.

The Expedition undertaken by Gysseling and Schuppe made Seregippa desolate, the Inhabitants whereof remov’d to the Coast Todos los Sanctos.

Also Siara, which the Portuguese formerly possess’d, was thinly inhabited, and had a mean Fortress there, whither some few Brasilians came now and then to the Netherlanders assistance.

Pernambuco, lying between the Rivers Francisco and Tamarica, excells the other Countrey in fruitfulness and pleasantness. The Brasilians compare it to a hollow Rock, under which fresh Water flows.

Havens of Pernambuco.

Moreover, Pernambuco hath several Havens, viz. the outermost Road before Reciffa, which being in the open Sea, is somewhat dangerous, but the innermost is secure against all Storms; also at the Promontory St. Augustine, where the Mouth of the Haven is narrow and dangerous, by reason of the Rocks and shallow Grounds; the Island Alexio is very fit to Crain Ships in; Barra Grande hath a large and safe Inlet, convenient for all manner of Vessels, yet it is inferior to Cororipa; lastly, the Havens Jaragoa and Franco are very eminent.

Rivers.

Amongst the Rivers, the chief are Jangades, Serinhain, Formosa, Porto Calvo, Camarigibi, Antonio, Michael, and Francisco.

Pernambuco also is divided into six Jurisdictions; the first and most ancient is Igarazu; the second and biggest, Olinda; the third, Serinhain; the fourth, Porto Calvo; the fifth, the Alagoas; and the sixth, Rio Francisco, which is the Boundary of Pernambuco on the South.

Towns of Pernambuco.

Pernambuco also boasts five Towns, viz. Garasu, Olinda, Maurice-stadt, to which also belongs Reciffa, Bella Pojuca, and Formosa. The Villages Moribeca, St. Laurence, Antonio, Amaro, and others are also not inferior to little Towns.

The Countrey is for the most part Hilly, but is exceeding fruitful in the Valleys, and near the Rivers, especially in Sugar-Canes.

Here are also a hundred and twenty Sugar-Mills, of which a great number stand still for want of Negro’s.

Next Pernambuco lies Tamarica, which hath onely one Haven, one City, and twenty three Sugar-Mills, of which thirty are onely employ’d. This Island produces excellent Grapes and Melons, yet is for the most part barren, by reason of the Pismires.

The Countrey Parayba hath its Denomination from the River which washeth it, being deep, and without any Rocks or Sands; on the Banks thereof stand twenty Sugar-Mills, two of which are still standing.

In the Lordship of Rio Grande stands the Town Puntael, whose Buildings were ruin’d in the Wars; after which the Inhabitants had leave to build them another City on a fruitful Soil.

The Countrey hereabouts us’d formerly to be very full of Cattel, but was not onely bereav’d thereof by the Hollanders and Portuguese, but also for the most part made desolate.

The River which washes the Castle Ceulen, affords a convenient and safe Harbor for all sorts of Vessels.

This Lordship of Rio Grande boasts onely two Sugar-Mills, of which one is decay’d; so that in all those Parts in Brasile which belong to the West-India Company, are a hundred and sixty Sugar-Mills constantly employ’d, besides forty six which are about repairing. It is scarce to be reckon’d how much Sugar they make yearly, in regard, through the alterations of the annual Seasons, as also the more or less fruitful Fields, they produce one year, and in one place, more than in another.

The Inhabitants are of two sorts, viz. free People, and Slaves; the Slaves are African Negro’s, and the others, Netherlanders, Portugueses, or Brasilians; which last came in of their own accords, or else were absolv’d from their Oaths, and acquitted from their Martial Offices; yet are ready to venture their Lives and Estates, and to Serve either on Foot or Horseback for their Freedom against their Enemies. Those that went from the Netherlands to Brasile on their own Accounts, drive a Trade, or Serve the Traders, or else keep Inns, and follow Handicraft Faculties; some of which, when grown rich, buy Parts in Sugar-Mills; others live on Tilling: by all which several sorts of People Reciffa is very well inhabited, and full of Houses, which yield great Rents, and are held at high Prices: wherefore Grave Maurice thought good to mark out pieces of Ground on the Isle Antonio Vaes, which were sold for a considerable Sum of Money, insomuch that in a short time a new City call’d Maurice-stadt was built on the same, and inclos’d within strong Bulwarks; yea, notwithstanding the Rumor of a great Spanish Fleet in some measure abated the Courage of the Builders, yet the City was extended down to the Fort Frederick Henrick, and a brave Bridge laid over the Stream Biberibi, cross which they go from Reciffa to Antonio Vaes, where no People were in greater esteem than Handicraftsmen, who could get their ten or twelve Shillings a day. The Labor which is requir’d in the Sugar-Mills, no Men are able to undergo but the Negro’s. Of the Portuguese some have liv’d here a considerable time; others lately came hither, being most of them Jews, of whom there live a great many at Reciffa, and are very diligent in promoting of Trade: They possess several Sugar-Mills, and are kept very much under; their whole study and contrivance is for Gain; they conceal their Hatred against the Christians, as also their Covetousness, yet are mortal Enemies to the Hollanders. The Brasilians, who are the ancient Inhabitants, live apart from other People in their Villages, consisting of long Straw Huts, forty or fifty of them under one Roof sleeping on woven Hammocks; they esteem no Houshold-stuff but Nets and Calabashes, using the first to fish with, and the other to drink out of; about their Huts they plant Mandihoka and Brasile Trees; when they are not employ’d in the Wars, they spend most of their time in Hunting, but many in Idleness; they esteem wild Fruits better than those which are Planted; they Drink night and day, making their Liquor of the chew’d Root Mandihoka, or the Apples Tajovis; they esteem nothing so much as strong Drink, and to wear Linnen next their Skins; they would not value Money, could they but get Brandy and Spanish Wine without it; if they are not promis’d a Reward, they will not work. Each Village, nay House, hath its peculiar Governor; but besides him there is a Hollander, who stirs up the Idle to work, and takes care that the Owners of the Sugar-Mills do them no injury: They never suffer themselves to be Hir’d for above twenty days, at the end whereof they demand their Wages; they are commonly employ’d to chop Wood to boyl the Sugar with; but by reason of the scarcity of Negros, they are often made use of for other Business, which to avoid they hide themselves; as also when they are to go to Fight; they are hard to be kept in Ranks, for they will run out of their own Fyle into another on the least occasion; but if they put their Enemy to flight, they pursue him, and spare none alive. They little regard the Christian Religion, yet some of them have learn’d the Lord’s-Prayer and the Creed of the Roman Priests. The Minister Davil having learn’d the Brasilian Tongue, Converted very many of them, and Baptiz’d them in their Villages.

The Brasilian Women and Children usually go to Wars with their Husbands and Fathers.

The Brasilian Slaves were some years since bought of the Tapuyans, or made Slaves, because they assisted Boudewyn Henrickszoon, when he Landed in the Inlet Traluson; but they have since obtain’d their Freedom of the Portuguese. The Angolan Slaves can undergo greater Labor than any other.

The Brasile Wood grows generally ten or twelve Leagues up in the Countrey from the Sea, not in particular Woods, but amongst other Trees.

The Negro’s, when the Sugar-Mills work not, are employ’d in pulling off the white Bark, three Fingers thick, from the Tree, which bears dark-green Leaves, small and prickly at the ends, and hanging on thin Stalks, but bearing neither Blossoms nor Fruit.

Osnabrig Linnen is highly esteem’d amongst the Brasilians, as also colour’d Wax, Copper, Tin, Wine, Beer, Butter, Cheese, Meal, Stock-fish, Pork, Hung-beef, and Gammons of Bacon.

The Papists Teach and observe their Religion in publick, their Spiritual Men being divided into Priests and Monks; the Monks consist of Franciscans, Carmelites, and Benedictines; the Franciscans being the most eminent, possess six fair Cloysters, besides which they have neither Land nor other Revenues, but live on what is given them daily; their Cloysters stand in Frederick-stadt, Iguaraca, Olinda, Pojuca, Serinhain, and Antonio Vaes. But the Carmelites have three Structures at Parayba, and as many more in Frederick-stadt and Olinda, where they live plentifully on what they reap from Tillage, Rents of Houses, and Legacies of deceased Persons. The Benedictins, though they possess onely two Cloysters, one in Frederick-stadt, and the other at Olinda, yet they have the greatest Income from the Sugar-Mills of Muserapa, and the Countrey about Parayba, as also Cattel and Cane-Fields.

Reciffa, the Seat of War, hath two Horn-works towards Olinda; the first rais’d with Stone, defends the Haven with seven Brass Demi-Culverins; the other lies opposite to the River Biberi, and hath five Brass and two Iron Guns. Reciffa also hath a strong Rail about it, and many Guns plac’d in good order. Near the Powder-house stand two Batteries with Guns.

On the Shore towards Olinda, lies the Stone Castle St. Joris, on a Hill opposite to the Haven, fortifi’d with a Bulwark and thirteen Iron Guns.

The Water-Castle, built round, rises out of the Sea, and stands at the end of the Stone Cliff, which makes an Inlet, through which the Ships Sail that come to, and go from Reciffa.

The Fort Bruine hath four Points, seven Brass Guns, and Pallisados round about.

Somewhat farther is the Redoubt call’d The Lady Bruine, which hath two Brass Guns.

The Castle Waerdenbergh, built before the Mouth of the River Capivaribi, in the Bay made by the River Biberibi, hath three Points, each rais’d square, because the fourth Bulwark towards Antonio Vaes, cannot be finish’d, by reason the Earth is sunk away.

The Fort Ernestus stands on the North-side of Maurice-stadt, on the Island Antonio Vaez. That part of the City which respects the Fort, lies open, with five Points and a double Horn-work; it is the more secure from any Invasion, because the Countrey round about is overflow’d at High-water. On the Horn-work stand eight Brass Guns; but the four Redoubts along the River Capivaribi are decay’d.

The square Fort Prince William, standing in a low Ground not far from the River Afogados, hath four Bulwarks, and is inclos’d with a high Wall and strong Pallisado’s: the Church appearing above all other Houses in the Castle, may be seen at Olinda.

Description of Maurice-stadt.

Maurice-stadt lies pleasantly along the River Biberibi, and is wash’d behind by the River Capivaribi; It hath a large Wharf, a brave Magazine, a French Church, and a Guild-hall: The Buildings are not altogether so high as those in Reciffa, where they are commonly three Stories, because the Ground is very dear.

Grave Maurice’s Court lying opposite to Reciffa, on the Shore of Biberibi, rises from the middle of a Garden with two high Towers.

Not far from the Castle Ernestus is a Potters Kiln, and on the other side, near the Fort Frederick Henrick seven Wells, and some Morasses, and towards the Water-side, a Stone Battery.

Forts of Brasile.

The Fort Orange at the Southern Mouth of the Haven, hath, by reason of its dry Moats, a strong Pallisado, four Bulwarks, and twelve Guns. The Bulwarks about the Church, and the Battery before the Haven, also secures Schuppen-stadt against the Portuguese. On the Battery stand nine Iron and two Brass Guns. At the Northern Entrance of the Haven appears a Tower with three Guns.

The Fort Margareta hath two Brass and forty Iron Guns.

Restringa, surrounded with Pallisado’s, rises near a sandy Point in the middle of the River.

The Castle Antonio, wash’d by the Sea, hath onely one Tower, but that sufficiently strong to defend it against an Enemy.

The Franciscan Cloyster, strengthned by a Wall and Earthen Works, serve in stead of a Castle to Frederick-stadt, and is the more secure by reason of a Half-Moon, Moats, Rails, and a Battery at the Mouth of the Haven.

The stonie Fortification of Ceulen lies near the Sea. All these are the Fortresses of the Northern Brasile.

To the Southward of Reciffa appears the Promontory St. Augustine, where the Haven is secur’d by the Forts Vander Dussen, Domburgh, and a Stone Battery.

Porto Calvo is fortifi’d by a Castle, built on a steep Hill forty Foot high.

The Fort Maurice Commands the Ferry of Rio Francisco, and is built on a high and steep Hill, with five Bulwarks; the lowermost Plain is overflow’d by the River in the Summer Season. The Store-houses hereabouts are ill furnish’d, and if not suddenly supply’d, ’tis to be fear’d, that a great Famine will follow, as already it is begun, and we may thank the faint-heartedness of the Enemy that it hath increas’d no more.

The Militia is distributed into all the Forts or Villages, that so they may the better procure their Provisions, watch the approach of the Spaniards, and prevent all Incroach-ments of the Enemy. In Maurice Castle are five hundred and forty Men in Garrison; in the Afogados, two hundred ninety three; in Camarigibi and Porto Calvo, four hundred and eighty; in Serinhain, seven hundred and eighty; in Pojuca, twenty five; in the Mills Panterra, ninety seven; at the Promontory Antonio, two hundred and forty; in the Castle Vander Dussen, a hundred and seventy; the like number is in Amaro and Moribeca; in the Village St. Laurence, four hundred and twenty two; in the Fort Prince William, two hundred and sixty three; in Frederick Henrick, hath two hundred and thirty; in Ernestus, two hundred and eighty; in Reciffa, two hundred and seventy seven; in the Castle Bruine, a hundred and twenty five; in Olinda, a hundred and ninety three; in Iguaraza, ninety three; in Orange, a hundred and eighty two; in Goyana, a hundred and sixty five; in Frederick-stadt, a hundred and one; in the Fort Margareta, three hundred and sixty; in the Castle Ceulen, eighty eight; in Antonio Vaes lies Grave Maurice’s Guard; Siara is defended by forty; so that the whole Power consists of six thousand one hundred and eighty Men, too weak a number to resist the Enemy both by Land and Sea; nay, had he had Courage, the West-India Companies Concerns in Brasile would long since have been in a low Condition; for the Spanish Fleet which came lately from Cadis, carry’d three thousand Men, besides seven hundred which they brought from St. Salvador; the Duke of Bagnola was also ready with two thousand Portugueses, and a thousand Brasilians, to joyn with the Seamen, and expected also as great a number from Parayba, Pernambuco, Seregippa, Itamarica, Rio Grande, and Siara, contrary to the Oath taken in Reciffa: But the Spanish Fleet keeping close to the Bay Todos los Sanctos, hath hitherto done nothing, except the sending of several Companies into the Countrey, to rob and pillage the Brasilian Villages. Moreover, the Mulatto’s and Negro’s do great mischief up and down, and so much the more, because they go and come along private Ways, through which none can follow them. Most of the Ships being badly fitted, are scarce able to keep the Sea; and the Soldiers want Clothes exceedingly. The City St. Salvador keeps the Countrey in a continual Alarm, so that five thousand Men are requir’d to conquer it: Eighteen great Ships, and as many Ketches, besides lesser Vessels, ought to be sent thither, the Sea being full of Pyrats. The common Treasury is so much behind-hand, that none can receive any Pay. The Owners of the Sugar-Mills will not deliver any Sugar without ready Money, because of the Netherlanders removal from thence.

This Relation of the Affairs of the Netherland West-India Company in Brasile, was deliver’d to them in Writing by Vander Dussen.

A Description, of the Palace Freyburgh, two Bridges, and a Banquetting-house, all built by Grave Maurice.

Grave Maurice before his coming away from Brasile, built a pleasant Palace along the River Biberibi, before the Fort Ernestus on Antonio Vaes; the outmost Work whereof was shaded by a double Row of Coco-Trees, and had a Pond full of all sorts of Fish; and not far from thence, on one side, a second encompass’d a Coney-Warren, which respected a pell-mell; near it a Garden, curiously divided into round Parterres, which led into a long Park of Bakkoven-Trees; and at the end a great Dove-house. Next the River stood a large Stable, on one side whereof was a Field to whiten Linnen in, and a Kitchin-Garden wherein was a large Spot full of Orange-Trees, a row of Vines, which bore Grapes every three Moneths, and a delightful Walk, beset on each side with Lime-Trees. On the other side of this Palace stood a Banquetting-house, near a row of Pome-granate-Trees, and another of Fig and Cittron-Trees. Behind the Palace was a Fish-pond with two Iles, for the Swans. A Dove-house also appear’d near the Fort Ernestus, where the Negro’s watch’d the Horses, and led them to Water in a Fishpond in a large Wood. Before the Palace appear’d a Stone Pallisado, which like a Half-Moon ran into the River. The Palace it self rose with two Towers, one of which serv’d for a Sea-mark.

Moreover, Grave Maurice extended his new City to the Fort Frederick Henrick, divided the Morassie Grounds by several Moats, and laid a Bridge cross the River Biberibi, between Reciffa and the City Maurice, another cross the Stream Capivaribi, between the said City Maurice and the Main Land.

In the time when Albuquerque Govern’d Brasile for the King of Spain, it was Disputed among the Portuguese, whether it were not requisite to desert the City Olinda, and causing the Inhabitants to remove to Reciffa, joyn the same with a Bridge to the Isle Antonio Vaes, because those Places are almost invincible, and much more convenient for Ships than Olinda? But the Hollanders surpris’d them on a sudden, before they could bring the Business to pass, and after a while prosecuted the same Design themselves.

Grave Maurice his stately Bridge over the River Biberibi.

Grave Maurice spent twenty four thousand Guilders in laying a Bridge over the River Biberibi, between Reciffa and Antonio Vaes. Having rais’d just fifteen Stone Columns from the Ground, they came to the deepest part of the River Antonio Vaes, when the Architect began to despair of accomplishing the same, because the Ground lay deep under Water, and the Stream ran very swift: Those which dwelt at Reciffa cry’d, That they had undertaken a Business which was not in the power of Man to effect, and that there was above ten thousand Pound already spent in vain on fifteen Pillars: In this sort they began to clamor against Grave Maurice, especially the Owners of Houses in Reciffa, who foresaw that many would remove from thence to the pleasant Isle Antonio Vaes, as soon as the Bridge was finish’d; after which the Houses in Reciffa would be at low Rates. But Grave Maurice judging that the Disgrace would fall upon him, if the Bridge should be left half finish’d, caus’d at his own proper Charge, huge pieces of lasting Timber to be cut, forty and fifty Foot long, and so ramm’d into the Ground, some streight, others sloaping, to support the rest, and in two Moneths finish’d the same. On the first day after this new Bridge was compleated, there went so many People over it, that the Toll which they paid, amounted to above 60 l. Sterl. and was after that Farm’d for twenty eight thousand Guilders yearly, a Citizen that pass’d over the same being to pay 2 d. and a Negro or Soldier 1 d. but a Horseman paid 4 d. and a Cart or Wayn 7 d.

Another over the River Capivaribi.

Since this Grave Maurice built a second Bridge cross the River Capivaribi, which joyn’d Antonio Vaez to the Main Continent. This Bridge being eighty six Rods long of durable Timber, was finish’d in seven Weeks.

His Pleasure-house Bonavista.

Moreover Grave Maurice built a pleasant Banquetting-house, call’d Bonavista, at his own Charge before the said Bridge, from whence he could see the Palace Freyburgh, Olinda, the Fort Ernestus, Maurice-stadt, Reciffa, the French Church, the Ships in the Harbors, and also the Castle Frederick Henrick. This Banquetting-house hath at each corner a Turret, and in the middle thereof a spacious Room, crown’d with a fair Terrace.

CHAP. VIII.
Guiana.

Situation and Description of Guiana.

Northward of Brasile, over against Maragnan, the Countrey of Guiana, not improbably suppos’d to be so call’d from the River Wia, one of the principal Rivers of the Province, which yet is said to have more and fairer than any other part of America besides: It is by some call’d The Wild Coast, for what reason is uncertain, it being found to be a very fruitful and pleasant Countrey: It is Bounded on the East with the Atlantick Ocean, or Mare del Nordt; on the West, with some undiscover’d mountainous Countreys, which lie on that side of the Andes, on the North it hath the great River Orenoque; and on the South that of the Amazons, or Orellana; which last Name, as we have said before, it derives from Francisco Orellana, who is said to have first discover’d it in the Year 1543. It was anciently call’d Tobo, Topoi, and Tapera.

This Countrey lieth on both sides of the Æquator, extended from the fourth Degree of Southern Latitude, to the eighth Degree of Northern, yet enjoyeth a temperate and good Air, not oppressed with any excessive Heat; which is chiefly attributed to the Breezes or Easterly Winds, almost perpetually about Noon blowing upon it. Towards the Sea-side it is for the most part a flat and level Countrey, in the more Inland parts mountainous and swell’d with Hills, but in all it is generally of such a rich and fertile Soil, that for Fruits, or any outward Commodities of the Earth, it yields not to any other Province of the New World, but rather far excelleth the most, having as it were a continual Summer, without Winter or Autumn, the Trees never uncloth’d or made bare, Fruits always ripe, or growing to maturity, the Meadows and Pastures always verdant and green, and, as we said, so excellently well water’d with Rivers, that no Countrey in the World seems comparable to it in this respect. But since the several Occurrences of Orellana’s Expedition will give much light to the more particular knowledge of these Parts, we thought good to insert this following Relation thereof.

Sect. II.
A Relation of the Journey of Francisco Orellana.

Francisco Orellana travelling with Gonsalvo Pizarro from Quito, to find out the Countrey Cundirumarca (where the Natives, according to the information of a strange American, went Arm’d with Golden Plates) he came after a great deal of hardship to the River Maranon, where Pizarro building a Brigantine, put all his sick and maimed Men into the same, as also all his Baggage under the Command of Orellana, whom he commanded to forage for some Provisions, of which the Army, that was to follow along the Shore, had great want; but Orellana was in few days driven down so far, that he saw no hopes of getting up again in a years time, and Engag’d daily with the Indians, which came aboard of him in little Boats; at last he went ashore and conquer’d a Village, in which he found Provisions, some Gold, and Gems of great value: Not long after which he was in great danger, by reason of a River, which with great force fell into the Channel in which he Sail’d, and for the space of two hundred Leagues saw neither Man nor House: Next Landing at a Village, he was by the Governor thereof Presented with Turtles, Partridges, Fish, and other Provisions, and also forewarn’d of the valiant Women, the Amazones, which they call’d Camapuyara. Going from hence, he met for eighty Leagues together, nothing but steep and craggy Mountains on each side of the Shore, insomuch that he could not Land any where for Provisions. Next coming to the inhabited Province Machiparo, he was fiercely assaulted for two days and two nights, by the Casique Aomagua, who pursu’d him with several Boats: Not long after having conquer’d a Village, out of which ran several trodden Paths into the Countrey, he came to a River, in the Mouth whereof there lying three Isles, he gave it the Denomination of La Trinidad, which washeth a fruitful Coast, along which Sail’d divers small Vessels. Somewhat farther in the River Trinidad stood a Village and Banquetting-house, where Orellana took abundance of Provisions, Silver, Gold, and Earthen Ware curiously Glaz’d and Painted, but judg’d it very hazardous to travel far into the Countrey by the common High-ways, in regard of the multitudes of People that frequented them, to whose Civility he durst not trust; therefore Sailing from hence a hundred Leagues farther, he came to the Countrey belonging to the Lord of Paguana, who civilly Entertain’d him, and Presented him with Sheep, not unlike the Peruvians, and all manner of good Fruit, which the Countrey affords in great abundance. After this on his Lar-board side he discover’d a River, whose being black like Ink, and disemboguing into another, discolour’d the Water thereof for the space of twenty Leagues; he also saw several Villages, and at last found the Stream to be so broad, that he could not see from one Shore to the other: he took one of the Villages without any resistance, there being none but Women in the Huts, whither the Men came towards the Evening. Near another Village he espy’d seven Heads sticking upon Poles, from whence the Province receiv’d the Denomination De las Picotas, from whence ran several pav’d Ways, on each side planted with Trees, into the Countrey; where Landing, he furnish’d himself with Maiz, Turtles, Geese, and Parrots, and at Can Island took an American Prisoner, who inform’d him, that he was in the Amazones’ Jurisdiction, and that up in the Countrey liv’d a People not unlike the Spaniards, amongst whom were two white Women, brought thither up the River by a Lord. Going farther he saw divers Villages on each side of him, and at last Landing in a little Town, he found plenty of Oats, Liquor made of Oats, Cotton, Linnen, a Temple hung round about with Arms, and two Episcopal Miters of divers colours. Near a Promontory jutting out into the River, the Tide went so strong, that he was not able to Land; upon the Point stood several fair Buildings, where were also white Women, of a big stature, with long Hair, who animated the Men to fight. This Countrey, which extends it self a hundred and fifty Leagues along the Shore, with Hills, Pasture-Grounds, and Champain, and well inhabited, being discover’d on St. John’s Day, was call’d The Province De San Juan; which leaving, he came to several Isles, the biggest whereof extended fifty Leagues in length, all of them standing on high Ground, pleasant, and full of People, who in Boats, by them call’d Periagues, valiantly Engag’d with the Spaniards; but one of them not long after being taken Prisoner, inform’d them, that the Amazones dwelt in Stone Houses, Wall’d Towns, had plenty of Silver and Gold, and four stately Temples enrich’d with Plates, Dedicated to the Sun. But Orellana Sailing a hundred Leagues farther, along a Coast belonging to the Lord of Caripuna, according to the Prisoner’s Relation, the Inhabitants hereabouts shot abundance of poyson’d Arrows at the Spaniards, but they made a shift to escape them, and Sailing within sight of Land into the Bay of Paria, they came to an Anchor before the Island Cubugua, Anno 1541. after they had been eight hundred Leagues.

The Expedition of Orellana.

He dies with Grief.

Orellana informing the Spanish Court of his Adventures, desir’d the chief Command of the Province of the Amazones, which after earnest Sollicitations he obtain’d, and accordingly setting Sail from St. Lucar, he went to the Island Teneriff with three Ships and five hundred Men, where he stay’d three Moneths, and two on Cape de Verd. On Teneriff several of his Men ran from him, and on Cape de Verd he bury’d ninety eight, and left fifty sick behind him; yet he Steer’d to Brasile, where, meeting with contrary Winds, he had undoubtedly perish’d for lack of Water, if the great Showers of Rain had not supply’d his Wants, one of his Ships carrying seventy Men and eleven Horses, was never heard of, with the other two he Sail’d by Baxos de San Roque, and from thence a hundred Leagues Northwardly beyond Maragnan, where a great way off at Sea they found fresh Water, in which Orellana Steering, got between the Isles into the River De las Amazones, where he Barter’d for Provisions, Sail’d two Leagues up the River, and came to an Anchor before a few Huts, but slenderly stor’d with Provisions, where he spent three Moneths in breaking up one of his Ships, and building a Ketch. In the mean time fifty seven of his Seamen dy’d. Sailing twenty Leagues farther, he lost his best Ship; whereupon he gave order to build a Barque of the Wreck. Thus he spent thirty days in vain to find the fore mention’d Arm of the River Amazones: the Barque being finish’d in ten Weeks, and going beyond the Isles Maribique and Contan, found the three great Rivers to disembogue into the River Amazones, which there was twelve Leagues broad; but wanting Provisions, and the Men being too weak to go farther, they came back to the fruitful Island Comao, where a hundred Spaniards setled themselves, the rest going down with the Barque to find out Orellana, who, as his Wife inform’d them, dy’d with Grief.

The English and Netherlanders, who Sail’d hither after the Spaniards left off, ascribe a Breadth of fifty or sixty Leagues to the Mouth of the Amazone River, which discharges its Water with such force into the Northern Ocean, that it keeps its colour and taste above thirty Leagues, according to the ocular testimony of Captain Harcourt. The Western Point, by the Netherlanders call’d The North Cape, runs with a long Slip of low Land into the Sea, into which more North-Westerly fall the Streams Taponnowyny, Arowary, Arykary, Cassepouri, and Wiapoca; some of them wash great Wildernesses full of Trees; others glide between pleasant Meadows.

Eighty Leagues up the Amazone River the Vlussingers have built a Fort call’d Nassaw, on the narrow Island Cogemines, which is twenty Leagues long, and separated from the Shore by a Creek, and seven Leagues farther, on another Isle, the Fort Orange; from which two Forts they Trade with the Natives, Arowaccas and Apehous, bartering European Trifles for Tobacco, Cotton, Sugar, Gums, and several Tinctures.

Sir Walter Raleigh sends Fisher to discover Cooshebery Province.

Sir Walter Raleigh, Anno 1595. sending Captain Fisher from Wiapoco to Leonard Ragapo, some years before Baptiz’d in England, and then Governor of the Province Cooshebery, lying between the Amazone River and Wapoco, he receiv’d Fisher very civilly, and conducted him fifty Leagues up into the Countrey, to the Mountain Cowob, on whose top is a deep Pool, full of well tasted Fish, and surrounded with the glittering Stones Topaz; which Raleigh took the more notice of, because the same Ground in the East-Indies where these Stones are found, incloses also Diamonds. Moreover, the Province Cooshebery rises with pleasant Hills, but consists most in delightful Fields and Woods.

The River Arocawo, falling into the Inlet Wiapoco, disembogues also with the same between the Capes Orange and Comariboo, into the Northern Ocean.

Most of the Rivers in Guiana lie full of Isles, and cannot be Navigated far, by reason of the great Water-falls.

The Yayos.

The Yayos, who inhabit on the Banks of the fore-mention’d River, are People of a good Disposition, and go naked: they catch Fish after a strange manner; for they onely throw the strong smelling Wood Ayaw in the Water, which works so upon the Fish, that they suffer themselves to be caught with the Hand. The well-known American Root Cassavi serves them for Bread, being bak’d in round Cakes on hot Stones: of the Cakes they also make the Liquor Perrinoe, which tastes almost like stale Beer, and is prepar’d by old Women and little Children, which chew the Cassavi, and spit the same into a Pot full of Water, which having stood a while, they strain the same through a Cloth, and set it a working with Potato-Roots.

They are troubled with no Vermine, not so much as the little Fleas Niquas, by the Spaniards call’d Chigos, which creep in between the Nails.

On the Sea-Coast are many Tortoises, whose Flesh is of a delicious taste, but heavy to digest.

Sheep and Oxen will not thrive here, but Swine would thrive exceedingly, if their Dugs were not bit off in the Night by the Bats.

The River Wiapoco hath many dangerous Water-falls, the one much higher than the other; a little way beyond the first of them the Stream Army falls into Wiapoco.

The Marashewaccas.

Three days Journey Westerly dwell the Marashewaccas, whose Ears hang down on their Shoulders; they worship for their Deity, an Image representing a Man, who sitting flat on the Ground, with his Legs stretch’d out, leans with his Elbows on his Knees, and holding up his Hands, gapes and stares up towards Heaven.

North-West from Wiapoco rises the Mountain Gomeribo, which produces Maiz, Tobacco, Cotton-Trees, and Vines.

In the same place the Creek Wainary runs Westwardly with fresh Water a days Journey into the Countrey; and from the said Creek a high Mountain, fit for the production of Sugar and Tobacco, extends it self to the River Apurwaca, where the Wiopocaries inhabit a great Tract of Land.

The Harrithiahans.

North-West from Wiapoco flows the River Aperwacque, whose mountainous Shores bear Brasile Wood and wild Cinamon. The Stream it self takes its original out of a large Lake, in the middle whereof lies a three-corner’d Isle. South-East from the Lake dwell the Harrithiahans, beyond whose Countrey are the Rivers Cauwo, Wia, and Cajani. On the Banks of the first dwelt, Anno 1596. according to the Relation of Laurence Keymis, a People call’d Jaos, driven by the Spaniards from Moruga, and who formerly possess’d the greatest part of Guiana; they distinguish themselves from other People, by pricking their Faces full of Holes with the Tooth of a Beast not unlike a Rat: But at present, the Jaos being departed from hence, the Countrey lies desolate.

The Wia, which springs a great way up in the Countrey, hath a wide Mouth, and near several Islands convenient Harbors: The biggest of the Isles, inhabited by the Shebaios, is full of Provisions, viz. Fowl, Fish, excellent Fruit, wild Hogs, and other Beasts.

The triangular Isles, lying more Westerly, are also very fruitful, but not comparable to Gowatery. So far as the Coast extends it self with high Mountains, it is overgrown with Brasile Wood, but the lower Grounds produce Cotton, Pepper, Silk, Balsam, and the Root Wiapassa, tasting like Ginger, and exceeding good against a Lask, or the Head-ache.

Before the Mouth of Cajani appears the high Island Mattoory, surrounded by the lesser Isles Sannawony, Epenesari, and Eponeregemeræ.

Between the Rivers Cajani and Maccaria, lies the low Island Muccumbro, out of whose Center rise two Mountains, and which is inhabited, as the Main Coast by Caribbeeans, whose General Arrawicary shew’d great friendship to the Netherlanders: They observe no certain Laws for Government; Adultery and Murder they punish with Death; they are very tyrannical towards their Wives, who for the least act of incivility have their Brains beat out; they esteem one another according to the number of their Wives, the eldest of which performs all Houshold-Offices.

Caribbeeans the Inhabitants of Guiana.

The Caribbeeans are accounted to have been the first Inhabitants of this Countrey, for the Jaos, Sappaios, Arowaccas, and Paragotos, were driven hither by the Spaniards from Trinidad or Oronoque.

The wild Caribbeeans live farther up into the Countrey, and often fall with great rage upon the other; but since the Netherlanders have furnish’d them with Arms, they have not been so much molested by them.

Rivers.

Beyond Macavia lies the River Caurora, which is very narrow and deep; and next in order the Rivers Manamonary, Sinamary, Cunanama, Juraca, Mawary, Amana, and Marawyny, full of Isles, and four Leagues broad at the Mouth; along the Shore grow little Trees, whose Leaves wither as soon as touch’d by Mankind, but revives again within half an hour.

Next follow the Rivers Sorrenam, Sorrenamme, Copanama, Marateca, and Curetiny, where the Netherlanders, by virtue of a Patent granted by the States General, drove a Trade for several years.

Somewhat farther the Berbice, Apari, Maycawini, Mabeyca, Mirara and Essekebe, discharge their Waters into the Ocean, twenty days Journey from their Spring-Head, where a great Lake (by the Jaos call’d The Roponowini, and by the Caribbeeans, Parime) spreads it self a great way; and on its Northern Shore hath the Town Manoa.

Along the River Essebeke is an excellent sort of Wood, the Dye call’d Orellano, and abundance of Cassavi: In the Mouth of the River also lies the Isle Ottoma.

Lastly, between Essebeke and the great River Orinoque, glide the lesser Streams Iwapoi, Pauroma, Gayni, Moruga, Ammacoura, and Parima, before which lie several nameless Isles.

The Discovery of these Parts begun by Columbus.

Diego de Ordas his Expedition.

Christopher Columbus, in his third Voyage to the West-Indies, discover’d the great Island Trinidad, where before the Mouth of the Bay Vallena he was in great danger, as also the Ship Commanded by Alonso de Ojeda, by reason of the Waves, with which the great River Yuyapar, otherwise call’d Orinoque, coming out of the High-lands of Paria, falls into the Sea, which made him call the said Mouth Bocca del Drago; so that Columbus, Anno 1599. discover’d the Main Coast of America to the Northward of Guiana, as far as the Promontory De la Vela, before Americus Vesputius; whither Diego de Ordas Steer’d with three Ships, Mann’d with four hundred Castilians, in the Year 1531. and before Guiana took four Caribbeeans Prisoners in a Canoo, and finding an Emerauld about them as big as a Man’s Hand, they inform’d him, that up the River was a Rock all of such Stones, and a Mountain on which grew high Trees, yielding store of Myrrh; but the strong contrary Tides and Water-falls prevented Ordas from going thither; and being troubled at the loss of one of his Ships, he ran along the Shore to Paria, and took the Fort which Antonio Sedenno, Governor of Trinidad, had cast up there, and left the Command thereof to Juan Gonsalvez, Ordas pretending that Sedenno had built it contrary to the Emperor’s Order, and that he had made Slaves of the Natives. Martin Jannez Tafur stay’d in the conquer’d Fort according to Ordas his appointment, who went up the River Orinoque not without great hardship; for his Provisions were not onely short, but he was tormented in the Day by the Muschitoes, and in the Night by the Bats; at last coming to a Village Commanded by Viapari, he was kindly Entertain’d, which made Ordas contrary to the will of his Men, who would willingly have gone farther into the Countrey, stay there all the Winter; but as soon as the rainy Moneths were over, Ordas went farther up the River Orinoque, where his Ship was stav’d against a sandy Shelf, which forc’d him with two hundred Foot and forty Horse, to travel along the Shore, where he was much scanted of Provisions, and for forty days together met none but a few poor wild Fishermen, and at last stopt at an unknown River, which fell into the Orinoque. The Guianian Guide which Viapari had given Ordas, advis’d him to go along the Shore of the new River; because it would lead them to a well Cloth’d and rich People: But Ordas went along by the River Oronoque till he came where the Water falling from the Mountains makes it so terrible rough, that Ordas his Vessels, which were Toed along, were not able to be got any farther, so that after two hundred Leagues advance, he was necessitated, by reason of the fore-mention’d Water-falls, to go aboard and Sail down the Stream: His Men being weary’d with so troublesom a Journey, forsook him on the Island Cubagua, which made him return over Hispaniola to Spain, where not long after he dy’d with Grief.

The Expedition of Hieronimo Ortall.

This unsuccessful Expedition of Ordas no way daunted Hieronimo Ortall from prosecuting the same Design; for setting Sail from St. Lucas, Anno 1533. to the Fort which Ordas had taken from Juan Gonsalves, he Steer’d from thence over to Cubagua, to fetch some Men, and sent the Lieutenant Alonso Herrera with five Ketches, carrying two hundred Men, the same way which Ordas had been. Herrera coming to the fore-mention’d Water-falls where Ordas return’d, caus’d his Vessels to be unladen, then Toed them by meer force over the Water-falls, where he discover’d plain Fields without any Inhabitants, extending themselves to the Mouth of the River Meta, where he quitted his Vessels, and with no small trouble got over Morasses and Pools to the fruitful Countrey of the Xaguas, a People both cruel and valiant; whom after a sharp Conflict vanquishing, he became Master of their Village, in which he found plenty of Provisions, as also in another neighboring Town, where his tir’d, and almost starv’d Army began to take Breath, being exceedingly refresh’d with the delicious Meat of a sort of wild Dogs, which were here in great abundance. Having spent the Winter Season here, they were often set upon by the Caribbeeans, by whose poyson’d Arrows several of them being shot, dy’d Distracted, and amongst the rest Herrera himself; after which his Successor Alvaro Ordas return’d to the Vessels, which were left at the Mouth of the River Meta, from whence he Sail’d back without any other success, the Design being to find out the Golden City Manoa, on the Banks of the great Lake Parime.

Is follow’d by Hermandes and others.

Not long after Peter Hermandez de Serpa undertook the same Work with three hundred Spaniards, several Brasilians and Negro’s; but before he could reach the River Orinoque, he was destroy’d by the salvage People Wikiri, eighteen of his Men onely escaping to bring the news of this sad Disaster.

Peter de Orsua following the footsteps of Gonsalvo Pizarro, went to seek for Gold in Guiana; but being kill’d by Lopes Agira near the Amazone River, that Expedition also prov’d fruitless.

Berreo’s Relation of his Adventures to Sir Walter Raleigh.

With the same desire of finding Gold in Guiana, Antonio Berreo went from New Granada thither; but being taken by Sir Walter Raleigh, was interrupted in his Design; however, he gave him an Account of his Adventures, so far as he had gone, viz. That he went to find out a Way along the River Cassanor, between New Granada and New Guiana, went from Cassanor to the Stream Meta, and from thence to Orinoque, where he was in great danger, by reason of sharp Rocks, over which the Stream flowing, washes several Isles; That he spent a whole year before he came to the utmost Borders of Amapaia; near which he lost several of his Barques, and on the Shore, not onely divers Horses, but also many of his Men, who either dy’d of hardship, or were kill’d by the Natives with poysonous Arrows, so that sixty of his Men were kill’d in the Countrey of Amapaia, which extends along the River Orinoque, besides a great many that dy’d there by drinking the Water, which was full of poysonous Animals, and glided over a slimy and muddy Ground, which made it thick and troubled: Six Moneths he stay’d in the Countrey Amapaia, where he made Peace with the Inhabitants of Anebas, who gave him ten curious Images of massie Gold. The River Orinoque is about four Leagues broad here, and about seven hundred Miles long, before it fall into the Ocean, and is every where enrich’d with the Waters of many Rivers which fall into it from the North and South: He added moreover, that he endeavor’d to go down Southerly to Guiana, but was prevented by steep Mountains, and therefore went on Easterly till he came to the Countrey Emeria, where he found a courteous People, and plenty of Provisions; that the Governor of Caripana, being about a hundred years of age, had a long time Convers’d with the Christians on the Islands Trinidad and Margareta, and learn’d a Form of Civil Government; that Sailing down the River Orinoque between many Isles lying at the Mouth of the River to Trinidad, and from thence to Margareta, he took sixty Men into his Service; but that he himself, being tir’d with so great a Journey, and staying to refresh himself at Trinidad, fell into the hands of another Party of the English; that before he was taken he sent several of his Men to Caripana, to find the King of Morequito, who three years before had been with abundance of Gold at Cumana and Margareta, and inform’d a Spaniard call’d Vides so much concerning the Golden Countrey Guiana, that he obtain’d a Patent at the Spanish Court to discover Guiana; but that Vides, jealous that he might be there before him, had not onely incens’d Morequito against him, but so instructed him, that he suffer’d his Men to pass through the Countrey to fetch Gold from the City Manoa, and as they return’d, set upon them and slew them on the Borders of Aromaia, together with a Monk that was in their Company, one Man onely escaping; by whom being inform’d of the Murder, he immediately sent divers Soldiers to take Revenge of Morequito, who flying to the Governor Vides, was nevertheless, upon his demanding him in the King’s Name, deliver’d to him; and notwithstanding he proffer’d a great Sum of Money for his Ransom, was cruelly put to Death; but not satisfi’d with that Revenge, he over-run all the Countrey of Aromaia, took Morequito’s Uncle, call’d Topiawari, Prisoner, who bought his Life for a hundred Plates of Gold, and some Precious Stones; That Listing many Men in Spain for the Gold which he sent thither, he Row’d with Barques up the Rivers Barema, Pattroma, and Dessequebe, where he barter’d Trifles for Men, Women, and Children, of whom he made great Sums of Money on the Island Margareta.

This Information which Sir Walter Raleigh got from his Prisoner Berreo, made him desirous to make an Expedition to Guiana; to which purpose he sent Captain George Gifford with a Ketch and a Barque to the River Capuri, where the Water fell before the Vessels could get beyond the Sands in the Mouth of the River.

John Donglas had better success, being likewise sent out by Sir Walter Raleigh, for he with his Boats found that Orinoque had nine Arms to the North Sea, and seven to the South, which embrace divers Isles, of which those on the right side are call’d Pallamos, and those on the left, Horotomaca. The Mouth of the River gapes a hundred Leagues. On the fore-mention’d Isles dwell the Titiriras, a modest People, who speak a bald Language; in the Summer they live under the open Skie upon the bare Earth, and in the Winter (being there between May and September) on the tops of the Trees, because during that time the River Orinoque rising thirty Foot higher, overflows all the Isles thereabouts, which are very high and mountainous. But Raleigh himself Rowing up the River Amana, endur’d great hardship, his Men being most of them sweltred with the Heat, and great want of Provisions; and had not their Indian Pilot shew’d them another Stream much easier to Navigate, he would have been forc’d to return successless; but being stor’d with Provision out of a Village built along the Shore, he chased four Canoos, of which he took one, and also an Atwaccas, which in fifteen days time brought him into the River Orinoque, where he saw the high Mountains of Guiana; afterwards Anchoring before a fair sandy Bank, which lay near the Mouth of three Rivers, he took abundance of Tortoises, and was furnish’d with plenty of all sorts of Provisions, sent him from the Governor Toparimaca, who inhabited the pleasant Village Arowocay, built on a little Hill, surrounded with delightful Gardens, and Fields till’d by the Negro’s; who accommodating Raleigh with an experienc’d Pilot, he set Sail with a fresh Easterly Wind, and Westward saw the Isles Assapana, twenty five Leagues long, and six broad, and Iwana, of the same bigness. The River Orinoque hath here thirty Leagues in breadth, and receives the Rivers Arrawopana and Europa: He Sail’d next by the Isles Ocaywita and Putayma, opposite to which on the Main Land appears the Mountain Oecope, whose top reacheth the Clouds; on the right side a Plain Countrey discover’d it self a vast way, which the Pilot said was call’d The Plain of Sayma, extending Northerly a hundred and twenty Leagues to Cumana and Caracas, inhabited by four sorts of People, viz. the Saymas, Assaways, Wikeries and Aroras; which last, being a Coal-black People, us’d poyson’d Arrows. Raleigh passing between the two Mountains Aroami and Aio, came to an Anchor near the Island Murscolima, and from thence into the Haven Morequito, where the King Topiawari, a hundred and ten years of age, brought all sorts of Fruit, Poultrey, Fish and Flesh, and gave him an Account of the Condition of Guiana, viz. That the whole Countrey from the Mountains Waccarima to Emeria, bore the Name of Guiana, the Inhabitants calling themselves Orinoque Poni; on the other side of the said Mountains lies the spacious Valley Amariocapana, where the Guianiatas reside. Southerly the Oreiones and Epuremei, who coming out of a strange Countrey, have destroy’d the ancient Inhabitants, leaving onely the Awaawaqueri and Cassipagoios. The Epuremei built the stately City Macurewarai there. But Raleigh going on his Journey saw the Island Caiama, and came to the Mouth of the River Caroli, whose strong Current he was not able to stem, wherefore he desir’d Aid from Wanuretona, Governor of Canuria, who furnish’d him with Provisions, and Men to Toe him up the fore-mention’d Stream; and inform’d him that the River Caroli, which sprung out of the Lake Cassipa, was inhabited on one side by the Iwarawakeri, and the Lake Cassipa by three powerful People, viz. the Cassiapagotos, Eparagotos and Arawogotos, all mortal Enemies to the Spaniards: whereupon Raleigh sent some of his Men thither, who return’d with great hopes of finding rich Gold-Mines. The fore-mention’d Lake also produces the Rivers Aroi, Atoica, and Caora, near which dwell the Ewaipanoma, who have neither Necks nor Chins, but their Mouthes just upon their Shoulders. Towards the North the River Cari falls into the Orinoque, and on the West the Stream Limo; between both which the Cannibals reside, whose Metropolis call’d Acamacari is very famous for their strange way of Trading; for there the Women are brought to Market, and bought by the Arwaccas: But because great Showers of Rain fell daily, and the Stream Caroli glided downwards with extraordinary force, Raleigh return’d to Morequito; from whence Putima, King of Warapana, conduced him to a rich Golden Mountain in his Countrey, and along the Rivers Mana, Oiana, and Cumaca, to the place where the Orinoque divides it self into three excellent Streams, the chiefest whereof, call’d Cararoopana, washes the Province Emeria, out of whose Mountains the Rivers Waracayari, Coirama, Akaniri, and Iparoma, glide to the Northern Ocean; as also the Araturi, Amacura, Barima, Wana, Morooca, Paroma, and Wyni, all Branches of the River Orinoque: From whence Raleigh return’d home to England.

Not long after he sent Laurence Keymes and Thomas Masham back to Guiana: Keymes found out all the Rivers between the Amazones and the Orinoque, and Masham the Stream Wiapoco; from whence both return’d without any farther success.

Sir Walter Raleigh condemn’d for Treason.

He is Repriev’d and sent again to Guiana.

Raleigh upon Gundamor’s Accusation Beheaded.

After this the Business lay still for a while, in regard Sir Walter Raleigh being (together with Grey, Cobham, and the Romish Priests, Watson and Clark) found guilty of High Treason, was Condemn’d to die; but being Repriev’d by the King, was kept a Prisoner in the Tower for the space of fourteen years; during which time he wrote a Description of Guiana; which the King perusing, was so well pleas’d with it, especially since he undertook to make out by several Reasons, that England might make it self Master of divers Gold-Mines there, to which Spain could lay no manner of Claim, that he discharg’d him out of Prison, and permitted him to make a second Expedition: Whereupon with ten Ships, Anno 1617. he set Sail for Guiana again; being toss’d with divers Storms, he at last came with five Sail to the River Calliana, where he fell dangerously sick, and therefore sent Captain Keymes with five Sail to the River Orinoque, to conduct the Men to the Gold-Mines; each Ship carrying fifty Men, and the other Captains being Parker, North, Thornap, and Sir Walter Raleigh’s Son. The Spaniards having a Garrison at Orinoque, fir’d very fiercely at the English, who suffer’d great damage, and amongst divers others, Captain Raleigh himself was slain, whilest the other five Sail lay near the Island Trinidad, under John Pennington’s Command, who daily fear’d the Spanish Fleet. But Keymes found it very difficult to Land in Orinoque, by reason of the Banks along the Shore, which Diego de Palameque from Puerto Rico kept strongly guarded; therefore going to an even Shore with intention to Land, he was so sharply receiv’d by a Body of Spanish Musquetteers, that divers of his Men were mortally wounded; yet breaking in amongst them, he went towards the Gold-Mines, to which the Way led through a Wood where the Spaniards lay in Ambuscade; but he judg’d himself too weak to do any good upon the Mines, one of which belong’d to Peter Rodrigo de Parama, a second to Herviano Frontino, and the third to Francisco Fashardo: The English also were fearful, by reason of the Spaniards Cruelties, who not long before had flay’d several Merchants alive; so that Keymes contented himself with pillaging and burning the Town St. Thomas, which the Spaniards had deserted. Soon after which Captain Whitby ran away with a Ship from the Fleet, whilest Keymes return’d back to Raleigh, who laid several things to his Charge concerning the unnecessary Expence and shame of such an unsuccessful Voyage; which so wrought upon Keymes, that he offer’d to lay violent hands on himself in his Cabbin. At length Raleigh returning to London, was accus’d by the Spanish Ambassador Gundamor for the burning St. Thomas, urging that his Master resented it so ill, that he threatned to wage a War with England if Raleigh was not Executed; who notwithstanding he alledg’d, That the Spaniards shew’d the first Acts of Hostility against the English, who onely defended themselves; and that St. Thomas was burnt without his knowledge or Order; and that Keymes had not observ’d his Command in the discovering of the Gold-Mines, (which Apologies were generally look’d upon as real Truths) yet the King esteeming the Peace with Spain of more value than one Man’s Life, without taking notice of Gundemor’s Accusations, commanded that the Sentence formerly pass’d on him for Treason should be Executed, and accordingly in the sixtieth year of his Age he was Beheaded, discovering himself, by his Christian Behavior and Profession at his Death, to be a far other kind of Person than what the World had censur’d him to be.

Since this last Expedition of Sir Walter Raleigh, we find not that there hath been any great Resort or Trade unto this Countrey, except by a few Netherland Merchants, who have yearly sent eight or nine Ships to the River Orinoque for Tobacco.

The temperature of the Air.

As for the Air or Climate of Guiana, it is very differing, for about the Amazone River, dry Weather begins about August, and the windy and rainy Season about February; but Westward towards Orinoque, the Summer takes beginning in October, and the Winter in April; the Days and Nights are almost of an equal length, and the difference of Heat and Cold is but little.

Burning-Feavers, Dropsie, and the Jawnes, destroy many People here; which last is not unlike the POX, and proceeds from carnal Copulation with the Guianian Women, who are naturally subject to this Disease.

The Nature of the Inhabitants.

The Inhabitants are divided into several sorts, the chiefest whereof being the Caribbees go naked, covering onely their Privities with a Lappet. The Women, though yellow, are very comely; and both Men and Women paint their Bodies with Netto, which grows on little Trees in Cods: They make Holes through their Noses, Lips and Ears, and hang Glass, Bells, pieces of Copper, or any other Trifles that they get from the English and Netherlanders, in them: About their Necks, Arms and Legs, they wear Strings of Beads, or Cockle-shells.

Their Houses with low Roofs, serve them onely to sleep in the Night upon Cotton Hammocks, for in the day-time they sit under high Arch’d open places, that the Wind may blow full upon them. Their Houshold-stuff consists of Earthen Pots and Dishes neatly painted. They live in Tribes or Families together in a Town, which is Govern’d by the eldest of them; and their Militia is Commanded by one that is able to endure most Stripes with Switches without any shew of pain. The chiefest of their Families have commonly three or four Wives, whereas others are contented with one. The Men seldom do any toilsom Work, but make their Wives do all, insomuch that as soon as a Woman is Deliver’d of a Child, she must immediately go about her usual Employment, whilest her Husband lies lozelling out his Moneth on a Hammock.

Their Language sounds not unpleasantly, but is hard to learn, because many words differ but little in the pronunciation, and yet have quite another signification.

When they march into the Field against their Enemies, then the General sends a Stick to all the Villages under his Jurisdiction, on which are cut so many Notches as there are Days appointed before he intends to set forth, which they cut out again as the Days expire, and on the last they repair to the appointed place.

A not much unlike Custom they observe in all Promises and Bargains; for they give one another as many Sticks as they desire Days to perform the same in, and so throw away every day one, till they have onely one remaining, and then they begin to think of performing their Promise or Bargain.

They know no word whereby to express any greater number than Ten; Twenty they express by laying their ten Fingers on their Toes, and all that exceeds Twenty, they compare to the Hairs of their Head, crying Ounsa awara.

Some of the painted Canoos made of the Trunks of Trees, will carry five or six Tuns.

Their manner of Fighting, Religion, &c.

In their Wars they use Bowes, poyson’d Arrows, short Truncheons of speckled Wood, and Shields full of carv’d Images, and Fight without any Order. They go upon no Design but in the Night, and upon certain advantages. All Women and Children which they take Prisoners, are sold for Slaves, but the Men are cruelly put to death.

There is but little of Religion that can be ascrib’d to these People, onely that some shew Reverence to the Sun and Moon, which they believe are both living Creatures; but they make no Offerings to them.

Their Funeral-Feasts for great Persons are strangely kept, viz. all the Men making themselves Drunk with the Liquor Parranoro, Dance three or four days one after another, and he that drinks most, and is worst Drunk, gains the greatest Honor, whilest the Women lament and mourn for the Deceased.

Their Priests, call’d Peeaios, are in great esteem amongst them, because they pretend that they Converse with the Spirits Wattipa and Yarakin, which the Guianians exceedingly fear, apprehending themselves often beaten black and blue by them.

The Peeaios also profess themselves to be Chirurgeons and Doctors, but if they cure not their Patients, they go in danger of their Lives, unless they speedily get away.

They burn their dead Bodies, together with those things the Deceased affected most in his Life-time. A Prince or Governor also hath his Slaves put to death at the time when he is burn’d, that they may serve him in the other World.

Their Bread-Corn.

The Cassavi-Root press’d, boyl’d with Pepper, dry’d and bak’d on hot Stones, serves the Natives for Bread.

Each Grain that is Sown here produces in Harvest above fifteen hundred.

Their Corn makes wholsom and well tasted Beer, call’d Passiaw, and of their stamp’d Cassavi they make the Liquor Parranow.

In hollow Trees, and Caves under Ground, they find abundance of Honey; and their Vines afford them excellent Grapes twice a year.

No Plant is ever seen here without either Leaf, Blossom, or Fruit, except the European Apple-Tree, which never changes its nature, but blossoms and bears Fruit at the same time of the year as in Europe.

The wild Hogs Pokkiero, whose Navels grow on their Backs; and the Pangio, not unlike our Swine, afford the Inhabitants excellent Food.

Here are also Water-hogs, of a very delicious taste; but because they are very apprehensive, and dive at the least noise, they are seldom taken.

The Woods are full of Baboons and Apes, as also the slothful Beast Ai.

The Hares here, being of a brown Colour, with white Specks, and the red Rabbets, are accounted great Delicacies.

There is no Countrey in America, which breeds greater Armadillo’s than Guiana, some of them weighing eighty Pound.

Here are also Bears, which live on nothing but Pismires; they have long hairy Tails, with which they cover their Bodies in rainy Weather; they put their Tongues a Foot deep into the Pismires Nests, and so pulls them out.

The Tygers here are either black, spotted, or red; but the black exceed the other in cruelty, yet are seldom seen near inhabited places; the spotted and red devour abundance of Cattel, but will seldom set upon a Man, especially in the day-time.

The Woods are also full of Land-Turtles, which the Inhabitants take, and keep till they have occasion to make use of their Flesh.

The Eagles that are here with their Claws, Engage with those that go about to take them.

The Catamountains make such an exceeding noise at a certain hour, both in the Night and in the Day, that it is heard two Leagues off.

The Marmozets, a little Beast, biting the Catamountains and Apes in the Ears, forces them to leap from one Tree to another.

The black Beast Quotto hath a Face like an old Woman, and hanging by the Tail, swings from one Tree to another.

The Cuscary is a brown four-footed Creature, about the bigness of a little Dog, but hath the shape of a Lyon.

Birds.

Moreover, Guiana produces Teal, Geese, Crains, Phesants, Partridges, Pigeons, Marlins, Snipes, Falcons, Plovers, and Parrots of all sorts, besides many other strange Fowls; amongst which the chiefest are a sort whose Feathers glitter like Scarlet, and walk along in Rank and Fyle like Soldiers.

Fish.

The Sea produces abundance of Turbots, Soals, Thornback, yellow Salmon, Sturgeon, Black-fish, Gurnets, Crabs, and Oysters.

Amongst other Fishes, the Cassoorwa, which is somewhat bigger than an Eel, is very strange, having two Sights in each Eye, of which it always holds one above, and the other underneath the Water when it swims.

Here are also the great Fishes call’d Manati and Num-eel, by which if any part of a Man be touch’d, it immediately becomes stiff.

Vermin.

There are likewise divers Vermine, which trouble the Countrey Guiana, among which are Serpents, of thirty Foot long, that come out of the Water and feed on the Land; they do little hurt, as not being poysonous: but there are many of a lesser size, whose biting is so venomous, that it causes the Flesh of a Man to rot in twenty four hours time: others there are which have forked Tails, and Tusks in the Roof of their Mouthes.

The Crocodiles here also devour abundance of Cattel.

Strange kind of Scorpions.

The Scorpions, which are black, and resemble a Lobster, breed under dry Wood or Corn; their Stings are hid in their Tails, with which if any one be touch’d, he is sure to endure an intolerable pain, but without danger of losing his Life for the present, yet nothing can perfectly cure the same, except the Scorpion kill’d and laid on the Wound.

The Bats here are as big as Pigeons, and they suck the Blood of Men and Beasts so gently, that they seldom perceive the same.

The Pismires also do great mischief, especially in sandy Grounds; and likewise the Musketo’s, whose Stings cause painful Swellings; but these most of all trouble them that inhabit near the Sea side on low Lands, insomuch that the Fisher-men bury themselves in the Night in Sand, leaving onely Holes to breathe at.

Frogs and Toads also make a terrible noise here, and especially after Rain.

Commodities of the Countrey.

The Soil is inferior to none in the World, for the production of Sugar; but the general Commodities of the Countrey are Flax, Cotton, Hemp, the Berry Annoto, which Dyes an excellent Orange colour, another Berry which Dyes a deep Blue, a Tree whose Leaves Dye a Red, and the Wood of another Tree whose Juice Dyes a Purple and Crimson.

Moreover, Guiana produces the Gums Lemnia, Barattu, and Carriman, which being black and prickly, smells very pleasantly, and cures the Head-ache, Bruises, Pains in the Limbs, Gouts, and green Wounds. The same operation hath the Gum Baratta.

Here are also good Sena, Bolus Armenius, Cassia-Fistula, Terra-Lemnia, the Berry Kelette, very effectual against the Bloody-flux, the Juice of the Leaf Upee, which cures the Wounds of poyson’d Arrows, and a sort of somniferous Apples, whereof the least bite occasions a deadly Sleep.

There is also a Tree, generally growing about the Houses of the Natives, the Boughs whereof bruis’d between two Stones, and thrown into the Creeks of deep Water full of Fish, cause them to swim above Water upon their Backs.

The Letter-Wood call’d Pira timinere, turns also to a good account, much more the excellent Stones, Jasper and Porphyr.

Nor are there wanting Gold and Silver-Mines, which doubtless would yield great profit, were they open’d.

The Grain of the Countrey grows on Stalks seven Foot long, on the tops whereof hang two Ears full of Kernels as big as Pease, which ripens in four Moneths.

The Sugar-Canes, being of the bigness of a Man’s Arm, and about six Foot long, are at the years end cut off, broken and press’d in a Mill; after which the Juice boyl’d in Copper Kettles to a certain Substance, is put into woodden Tunnels, square at the top, and narrow at bottom, with a small Hole, which is open’d as soon as the Sugar is sufficiently hardned, to let out the Syrrup; after which it is put into Hogsheads, and so Transported.

The Negro’s which are brought from Angola and Guinee, are so cruelly us’d, that they oftentimes through despair destroy themselves.

The whole Countrey of Guiana is by several modern Writers methodically divided into these inferior or lesser Provinces, 1. Rio de las Amazones. 2. Wiapoco, or Guiana, properly so call’d. 3. Orenoque; and 4. The Islands of Guiana.

Rio de las Amazones.

Rio de las Amazones, or the Countrey of the Amazones, contains all that part of Guiana which lieth on both sides of the River Orellano, of a rich and good Soil, generally, abounding with all sorts of Fruits, and especially with those which the Americans call Totok, and love it extreamly, out of an opinion, they say, that it excites them to Venery, whereunto they are of themselves but too much inclin’d; and another which they call Pita, of a taste far more delicious and pleasing, and not so hurtful as the other. The Countrey was first discover’d by the fore-mention’d Francisco Orellana, a Spaniard from Quito, but it was onely by the River Orellana; and though he be credibly reported to have Sail’d no less than eighteen hundred Leagues down the Stream, and to have discover’d a rich and fair Countrey on both sides the River, well peopled with Natives, and giving in divers places no small Arguments of greater Wealth and Riches more within Land; yet such was the bad success of his second Endeavors, and likewise of those that follow’d him, as is evident from what hath been before related, that, as yet, there seems no farther Report to be given, at least not of any thing special, concerning that part of the Countrey.

Wiapoco, or Guiana, properly so call’d.

Wiapoco, or Guiana, properly so call’d, taketh up the middle part of this Province, being divided, as the other, almost into two equal parts, by the River Wiapoco, which runs through the midst of it. The Countrey on both sides of the River is very rich and fertile, and so naturally apt, both for Sugar-Canes, Cotton-Wooll, and Tobacco, that they are said to grow here (all of them very good) without Planting, or any art of Husbandry. In this Countrey likewise should be the famous Dorada, as the Spaniards call it, or City of Gold (if it could be found) with the reports and hopes whereof some of our own Nation seem to have been not a little possess’d as well as the Spaniards: nor can we much blame them; for if the Stories of it had prov’d true, it must have been one of the goodliest and fairest Cities in the World (not to speak of the Wealth.) Diego de Ordas, the Spaniard of whom we have lately had occasion to make frequent mention of, being reported by some to have travell’d one whole day, and half another in it, before he could arrive at the King’s Palace; which yet must be suppos’d to have stood but in the midst of the City. Places of less Magnificence, but more Certainty, are 1. Caripo, which was once a Colony of English, setled there by Captain Robert Harcourt, Anno 1608. upon the Banks of Wiapoco, and not far from the Mouth of it; being a place, by the advantage of a Rock, which it hath on the one side of it, of great strength and very difficult access; the Air about it sound, and said to be very agreeable to English Bodies. 2. Gomaribo, a Colony formerly of the Dutch, on the North-West side of the Bay of Wiapoco, but since deserted by them. 3. Woyemon. 4. Crewinay, both of them Towns of the Natives, not far distant from the other.

Orinoque.

Orinoque, or the third Division of this Province, comprehendeth the most Northerly parts of Guiana, lying upon, or towards the Banks of this famous River: a Countrey likewise reported to be very rich, and comparable to Peru it self for hidden Treasure, which, they say, is not yet discover’d, onely for want of diligent and industrious searching. The Places in it already known are onely 1. Coniolaba, as they call it, which seems to be some Town of the Natives, lying a few Leagues distant from the Orinoque, towards the South. 2. Morequito, a known Port or Haven-Town upon a Branch of the Orinoque, much frequented, and of great use to the English when they discover’d these Coasts. 3. Wenicapora: and 4. St Thomas, the onely Town which the Spaniards hold upon this part of the Continent, situate upon the principal Channel of the Orinoque, and consisting of two hundred Families, or thereabouts: It is now a fortifi’d Place, and was taken by Sir Walter Raleigh, in that unfortunate Action of 1617. above related more at large.

Islands belonging to Guiana.

The Islands that belong to, and are commonly reckon’d as parts of Guiana, are either such as lie scatter’d about the Shore of the Province, or such as are found at the Mouth, and sometime far within the Channel of those great Rivers, which empty themselves at several parts of this Countrey into the Sea, viz. Orinoque, Wiapoco, Rio de las Amazones, &c. There are many of them, but of any great name or esteem, onely two, viz. Trinidado and Tabago, the Description whereof we shall here omit, as having already taken notice of them amongst the Sotaventi and Caribbee Islands.

CHAP. IX.
Paria, or New Andalusia.

Situation and Description of Nova Andalusia.

VVestward of Guiana lieth the Countrey of Paria, so call’d from its chief River: It hath also the Denomination of New Andalusia, but for what resemblance with Andalusia of Old Spain, they do not tell us.

This Countrey lying as it doth, brings us back again by the Eastern Coast to the Isthmus or Strait, which, as we have often said, joyns the two parts of the Continent of America together, at least to those Countreys that lie next upon it to the South, viz. the Kingdom of Granada, &c. It hath on the East Guiana, and those Islands which lie about the Mouth of Orinoque; on the West, the Gulf or Bay of Venezuela, with some part of the new Kingdom abovesaid; on the North it is wash’d with the Atlantick Ocean; and on the South hath some Countreys yet undiscover’d, toward the Andes. The whole consisteth partly of Continent, and partly of Islands near adjoyning to it, and is commonly divided into five several Precincts or Parts, which are 1. Cumana. 2: Venezuela, being upon the Continent, 3. Margareta. 4. Cubagua, two Islands above-mention’d, famous for Pearl-fishing; and lastly, some lesser islands.

Sect. II.
Cumana.

Bounds and Description of Cumana.

Cumana is bounded Eastward with the Gulf of Paria and the River Orinoque; on the West, with Venezuela; Northward it hath the Atlantick; and on the South, those undiscover’d Countreys above mention’d; extending along the Northern Ocean, over against Margareta two hundred Leagues or more, as some say, in length, and not much less than a hundred in breadth.

The Coast of this Countrey, as well as of the Islands Margareta and Cabagua, hath formerly been much fam’d for the rich Trade of Pearls and Pearl-fishing; which failing, its principal esteem now is for an excellent Vein of Salt, which they dig here as out of a Mine, and gather it naturally made ready to their Hands, not half a Mile from the Sea side, on the back side of the Promontory or Cape, by some call’d Punto de Araya, and by others for this reason Cape de Salinas.

Towns and Places of note.

Places of chiefest consideration here, are 1. Cumana it self, a Colony of Spaniards seated on the Banks of a little River two Miles distant from the Sea, where it hath a good Harbor.

2. St. Jago, a very strong Fortress, which the Spaniards of late years have built, for the defence and security of the Salt-works against the Dutch, who began to Trade much that way, and in the Year 1622. had a Design to have made themselves Masters of the Place.

3. St. Michael de Neveri, another Fortress of theirs, standing upon a River bearing the same Name.

4. Guaniba, a Town of the Natives.

This Countrey of Cumana, being generally infested with terrible Crocodiles, hath a large Inlet call’d Cariaco, which flows fourteen Leagues into the Countrey.

Manners and Customs of the People.

The Men of this Countrey wear Cotton Cloaks, and anointing their Bodies with Gum, stick the same full of Feathers.

When they go to Wars, or to a general Feast, then they shave their Hair off above their Ears, pull out their Beards, and black their Teeth with a certain Herb.

Their Princes and Grandees take as many Wives as they please, and give to those of their Guests whom they intend most to oblige, their choice of the fairest of them to lie with.

Whoring is accounted no shame, except amongst Marry’d Women, who generally live very Chaste, unless their Husbands consent to their Adultery.

The Women also Hunt, Fish, Shoot, and Swim, and are diligent in Tilling their Lands, and other Houshold Affairs. Most of them have sore Eyes, occasion’d not so much (as some wrongfully suppose) by their drinking of the Water out of the Stream Cumana, but proceeding rather from their unwholsom Food, as Spiders, and the like.

Amongst the several sorts of Trees that grow here, there are some that yield a white well scented Gum, or delicious Juice like Milk, and produce a Fruit not unlike a Mulberry, which may be boyl’d to an excellent Syrrup; the Wood also strikes Fire: There are others, whose Timber is good for Shipping.

The Soil also produces Cassia-Fistula, Roses, and other strong smelling Flowers and Herbs.

Beasts.

For Beasts, besides Lyons, Tygers, and wild Hogs, there are several strange kinds here, as the Cappa, which is bigger than an Ass, having shaggy and black Hair; it runs away from Mankind, but devours whatsoever else it meets with.

The Aranata, which hath a Goats Beard, and is of the bigness of a Greyhound; it howls very dreadfully, and feeds on Fruits.

The wild Cats which breed here, leap, though great with Young, from one Tree to another.

In the Evening a Beast like a lean Dog comes to their Huts, cries like a Child, and devours all those it meets abroad; wherefore every one that goes out in the Night carries a lighted Stick with him, for this Beast dreads the sight of Fire.

The Trees give Harbor to great numbers of Parrots, and other fine Feather’d Birds.

The Bats here are very large and hurtful, sucking the Blood from Men and Beasts.

The Muschito’s also do very much plague and vex the Inhabitants.

The Spiders, much bigger than those of Europe, and of divers colours, make very strong Cobwebs.

Along the Sea-Coast, and in the Rivers is plenty of delicious Fish.

Dominicans put to death by the Natives.

Alonzo de Ojeda slain by Gonzales.

Anno 1513. two Dominican Fryers went over from Terra Fiona to Cumana, where the Natives kindly Entertain’d them, till a Spanish Ship Anchoring there for the Pearl-Trade, carry’d away by violence the Governor and seventeen of his Servants; whereupon the Natives threatned, that unless their Lord was restor’d, they would put the two Dominicans to death; the Spaniards promising restauration of him in four Moneths time, inform’d the Council at Hispaniola of it, who not consenting to his Releasement, the two Monks were, according the former threatning, presently put to death. Yet after this the Franciscans and Dominicans built each of them a Cloyster in the Province of Chiribichi, where they kept friendly Correspondence with the Cumana’s, till Anno 1520. when Alonso de Ojeda coming to an Anchor before Maracapana, under pretence of bartering Maiz for Spanish Goods with the Tagarez, who came about fifty from the Mountains on which they liv’d, being three Leagues up in the Countrey, and brought Maiz down to the Shore, the Spaniards took thirty six of them Prisoners, and kill’d or wounded the rest: Whereupon the Governor Gonzales being complain’d unto by the neighboring Prince Maraguey, and his assistance desir’d in taking Revenge of the Dominicans and Franciscans, who had urg’d and perswaded Ojeda to the fore-mention’d Act, Gonzales hereupon made an Agreement with Maraguey, that he should destroy the Monks, whilest he himself would kill Ojeda, which they accordingly perform’d. The Council in St. Domingo inform’d hereof, immediately sent three Ships, Mann’d with three hundred Men, under the Command of Gonzalvo de Ocampo, who Anchoring in the Haven of Maracapana, feign’d as if he came newly from Spain, and that he knew nothing of the Business between Ojeda and Gonzales, that so he might entice the Natives into his Ship, and accordingly when divers of them came aboard, the Armed Spaniards started from under the Decks, and hung them up at their Yard-arms, burnt the Village Maracapana, and ruin’d the Countrey far and near with Fire and Sword.

Soto with all his Men destroy’d by the Indians.

Ocampo also built the Town Toledo, about half a League farther into the Countrey, where the Bishop Bartholomew de las Casas, making his Visitation, commanded Ocampo to forbear his cruelty against the Natives, he having daily either burnt, hang’d, beheaded, or made Slaves of some or other of them. Casas also caus’d a little Fort to be built at the Mouth of the River Cumana, to be near to prevent the inhumane Murders and Oppressions committed by his Countrey-men; but because the Inhabitants of Cubagua bereav’d him of his chief Builder, his Fort was left half unfinish’d; wherefore Casas leaving the Command of this Countrey to Francisco de Soto, went back to Hispaniola, where in St. Domingo he made his Complaints to the High Court of Justice of the Spaniards Cruelties; but being little regarded, he went into the Dominicans Cloyster, till he was call’d out and made Bishop of Chiapa. Mean while Soto, contrary to Casas his order, had fitted out two Ships to Trade along the Coast of Paria; but the Expedition prov’d very unsuccessful, for he and all his Men were destroy’d by the Natives; not without just reason, for the Spaniards (according to the Relation of Casas from an Eye-witness) destroy’d this Countrey after such a manner, that a Ship Sail’d between Lucago and Hispaniola sixty Leagues without any Compass, finding the Way onely by the floating of dead Bodies, thrown out of the Spanish Ships. Moreover, the Prisoners fainting, were set ashore on Hispaniola, and divided into Companies, each Company consisting of twenty; Parents separated from their Children, and Husbands from their Wives, and Lots cast for them: those that had either sick, decrepid, or old People fall to their share, us’d to cry (as Casas testifies he hath often heard,) What do I do with this sick, decrepid old Dog? give him to the Devil; I will not put my self to the trouble to kill and bury him.

But Soto’s Death was not left unreveng’d; for not long after Jacob Castellon setting Sail from St. Domingo, left several Companies on Cubagua, to re-build the Town Cadiz, and rais’d a Fort at the Mouth of Cumana, which hath ever since been kept by the Spaniards, who made great slaughter amongst the Natives.

Hieronymo Ortall deserted by his Men.

Hieronymo Ortall Sailing up the Stream Negeri, sent his Lieutenant Augustine Delgado through the populous Provinces Guacharuco and Parimatuotu to the River Unare, where, not without a sharp Conflict, he took abundance of Provisions in a Village. In the mean time Ortall travell’d to Meta, acting inhumane Cruelties all the way; but approaching Guiana (where Delgado was kill’d) he was deserted by his mutinous Men, who ran over to Nicholas Federman; so that he was forc’d to return back to the new Fort Miguel de Neveri, and from thence to St. Domingo with ten Soldiers, fearing that Antonio Sedenno (who judg’d himself wrong’d by Ortall, because Cumana belong’d to his Lordship) would fall upon him.

Sedenno being five hundred Men strong discover’d the Sea-Coast all along to Patigutaro; where Setling himself, he regarded no Discipline; which the Natives observing, kill’d many a Spaniard, and others the Tygers also devour’d, especially in the Night, they being forc’d to keep lighted Fires about them against the wild Beasts.

The Death of Sedenno and Juan Fernandez.

About the beginning of the Year 1537. Sedenno travell’d to the Countrey Anapuya and Orocomay, to the Province Goioguaney, where the Inhabitants defended themselves very valiantly in a woodden Fort, before which many Spaniards were kill’d with poyson’d Arrows, and those who were not mortally wounded, had no way to escape but by burning the Poyson out with hot Irons; yet at last the Defendants were forc’d to flie with their Wives and Children up to the Mountains, overgrown with Brambles. Sedenno marching through barren Fields, and over troublesom Rivers, came to the mountainous Countrey Catapararo, where he found abundance of Maiz, and some little pieces of Gold, and was advanc’d about a League and a half in Cumana, when dying, he made room for his Successor Juan Fernandez, who surviv’d him not long; yet the Expedition was not left unprosecuted: for Sedenno’s Men, after the Decease of him and Fernandez, went farther, and discover’d a low Land, which in the Winter being overflow’d, forc’d the Inhabitants to remove to the Mountains: But at last the Spaniards, being weary with travelling, fell out amongst themselves, and dividing into several Parties, went several ways, some to Venezuela, others to Maracapana, and the rest to Cubagua.

Sect. III.
Venezuela.

Situation and Description of Venezuela.

The principal part of the Province of Venezuela is border’d on the East with Towns and principal Places of Venezuela. Cumana; on the West, with a great Gulf or Bay, call’d The Bay of Venezuela, with the Lake Maracabo, and some part of New Granada; Northward it hath the Ocean, or Atlantick Sea; Southward, some undiscover’d Countreys, which, as we said, lie betwixt the Andes and it. It stretches out in length from East to West, a hundred and thirty Leagues, or thereabouts, but in breadth little more than half so much; it was nam’d Venezuela, or Little Venice, by Alonso de Ojeda, a Spaniard, who at his first discovery of the Countrey fell upon a Town of the Natives, which stood like another Venice, all upon the Water, and having no passage to it but by Boats. It is a Countrey extraordinary rich in all sorts of Commodities, affords good Pasture for Cattel, and abundance of fair Herds of them, Oxen, Sheep, Swine, &c. plenty of Corn, and other Grain, great store of Venison in the Woods, of Fish in the Rivers, Gold in the Mines, and therefore not likely but to be well peopled and inhabited, especially by the Spaniards, whose Towns and Places of chief importance are these, 1. Venezuela, at the most Westerly Confines of the Countrey, built upon the Sea, with the advantage of a double Haven, in a temperate and good Air, and the Soil round about it the best in the whole Province: It is now a Bishop’s See, who is Suffragan to the Arch-bishop in Hispaniola, and the ordinary Residence of the Governor.

2. Caravalleda, call’d by the Spaniards, Nuestra Sennora de Caravalleda, fourscore Leagues distant from Venezuela towards the East, upon the Sea.

3. St. Jago de Leon, in the Countrey of Caracas, four or five Leagues Southward of Caravalleda, and six or seven distant from the Sea.

4. New Valentia, twenty five Leagues distant from St. Jago.

5. New Xeres, a Town but lately built, fifteen Leagues Southward of New Valentia.

6. New Segovia, but one League distant from Xeres.

7. Tucuyo, a Place well known and frequented, for the abundance of Sugar that is made there, and in the Countrey round about it.

8. Truxillo, or Our Lady de la Paz, eighteen Leagues Southward of the Lake Maracabo, a Place of great resort, and much frequented for Trade both by Spaniards and Natives.

9. Laguna, a Town lying more towards the bottom of the Lake, said to be much haunted with Tygers; and more than this, not much is said of it.

According to the ancient Division of the Natives, this Province contains the Countreys Curiana, Cuycas, Caracas, Bariquicemeto, Tucuyo, and Carora; in which there are estimated to be about a hundred thousand Inhabitants that pay Taxes; which Charge, according to a Law made at the Spanish Court, all Men above fifty, and Youth under eighteen, are freed from: yet this Countrey had formerly much more People, great numbers of them being destroy’d by the Germans, Anno 1529. for the Bishop Bartholomeus de las Casas relates, That above fifty hundred thousand of the Inhabitants were kill’d by them; nay, they rooted out whole Countreys, notwithstanding the Natives were ready to Entertain them with all Civility imaginable; the Particulars of the Story are as followeth:

The Expedition of Alfinger and Sayltar to Venezuela.

Alfinger’s horrid Cruelties upon the Natives.

When the Emperor Charles the Fifth Marry’d with Isabella, Daughter to the King of Portugal, Anno 1526. the Welsares, being Dutch Gentlemen in Augsburgh, made an Agreement with him for a Sum of Money, to Conquer Venezuela; whither they sent Ambrosius Alfinger, and Bartholomeus Sayltar, with four hundred Foot and eighty Horse: These Forces Landing at Venezuela, drove away Juan de Ampues, who Sailing from St. Domingo thither, had discover’d the Coast along Coriano, and already made an Agreement with a mighty Prince of that Countrey, call’d Manaure. But Alfinger marching to the Lake Maracabo, destroy’d all the Inhabitants of the Countrey Axaguas, though they came to meet him Dancing, with rich Presents of Gold; which he not regarding, kill’d them, drove some into a House, and there cut them in pieces, and burnt those that were got upon the Roof. From hence going towards the Pocabuyes, who dwelt on the West side of Maracabo, amongst high Mountains, he was Entertain’d by them a considerable time very courteously, and Presented with rich Gifts, for which at his departure he shut up both Men, Women, and Children, into a high Wall’d Park, where they were all to perish, if they did not every one pay a certain quantity of Gold to be releas’d, which not being able to raise, they all dy’d for want of Food. After the same manner he dealt with the neighboring People Alcoholados, of whom he got much Gold, but not without unheard of Cruelties, for he burnt all their Villages and Houses, ruin’d the Countrey with Fire and Sword from Thamaleque to the River Lebrixa, carry’d away many of the Natives coupled together with Chains about their Necks, and each of them loaded with at least a hundred pound weight of pillag’d Goods; and as soon as any of them began to faint under their Burthens for want of refreshment, their Heads were immediately cut off. But Alfinger coming to certain cold Mountains, was resisted by a valiant People; in which Conflict he receiv’d a Wound, of which he dy’d at his return to Coro, Anno 1532. Upon which the Welsares sent John Aleman to succeed him; but he also dying, made place for George de Espoira, and Nicholas Federman, of which two Espoira being the chief, spent three years in ranging up and down the Countrey, without any remarkable Transactions, being continually at variance with his Lieutenant Federman.

The afore-mention’d City Venezuela, otherwise call’d Caro, and by the Natives Corana, was, Anno 1559. taken and burnt by the English.

The Provinces Paragoana and Bariquicemeto.

Northward from the City, the Promontory St. Roman, in the Province of Paragoana, runs into the Sea, opposite to the Islands Aruba and Quuracao.

The Countrey Paragoana is low and full of Venison; out of the middle of it rises a high Mountain, the Inhabitants whereof are very hospitable and courteous.

The Lyons that breed in this Countrey run away from Men; but on the contrary, the Tygers are exceeding cruel.

From Coro there leads a Way up into the Countrey over the Mountain Xizaezaras, to the Province Bariquicemeto.

Between both these Provinces very fruitful Valleys, which produce Maiz in great abundance, are surrounded by wooddy Mountains, inhabited by Man-eaters, call’d Axaguas.

Segovia built by Juan de Villegas.

Anno 1552. Juan de Villegas discovering the Province Tucuyo, he found several rich Gold-Mines near the Mountain Pedro, out of which springs the River Burio. Near this place he built the Town Segovia, which, by reason of the unwholsom Air, was soon after transplanted, and built on the Shore of the River Bariquicemeto, so call’d, because the Water when touch’d, turns to an Ash-colour. The Plain Countrey round about would be intolerable hot, did not the cool Winds that blow from the Mountains temper the same.

The Natives of the Province Bariquicemeto, their manner of living.

The Natives divided into Tribes that understand not one another, live on Callibashes, Deers-flesh, Rabbets, and the Juice of the Cocuy.

In the Rivers Hacarigua and Boraute, they throw the stamp’d Root Barbasco, which causes the Fish to appear above the Water, and suffer themselves to be caught with the Hand.

In the Summer they all store themselves with Venison, which they catch after this manner: They set the dry Bushes and Brambles on fire, which makes the wild Hogs, Goats, Deer, Armadillo’s, Tygers, the great Serpents Bobas, and other wild Creatures, to leap forth from their Holes and Receptacles to shun the same, whilest the Hunters standing ready with their Bowes and Arrows, seldom miss one of them.

In the hollow Trees near the Rivers, the Bees make abundance of Honey for them.

Most of the Rivers here fall into the Stream Huriapari, which glides from the Peruvian Mountains to the Northern Ocean.

The Province Chioas produces plenty of Gold.

Also of the Natives about Segovia.

The Natives about Segovia go naked, are very ignorant, and much addicted to Drunkenness; in which humor they kill one another: They live without care, feeding on Roots till their Maiz is ripe, which in some places comes to its full maturity in forty days time, and in others in three Moneths.

Close by Segovia glides the Rivulet Claro, whose clear Water goes but a small Course from its Fountain Head, before it sinks into the Ground; in the Summer it is very high, and in the Winter almost destitute of Water.

The Commodities of the Countrey hereabouts.

This Countrey breeds all sorts of Fowls, but especially Quails and Turtle-Doves.

Cattel, Sheep, Goats and Hogs, increase wonderfully here, insomuch that many of them are driven to be sold at New Granada.

The Cotton-Clothes that are woven here, also turn to a good account.

From Segovia runs a Way through a Valley twelve Leagues long, to the Town Tucuyo, which stands low, but in a healthful Climate, and surrounded with Mountains.

The Countrey hereabouts produces plenty of Corn, Pot-herbs, Sugar, and Cotton; and feeds Oxen, Cowes, Horses, Sheep, Deer, and Goats, to which the Tygers and Lyons do great mischief.

Here are Gold-Mines, but they are not open’d by reason of the great want of Men.

There is likewise plenty of the Bezoar-Stones to be had here.

The Cuycas, in whose Countrey stands the Town Truxillo, are a valiant, but very cruel People.

The Lake Maracabo, running forty Leagues up into the Countrey, is ten Leagues broad, Ebbs and Flows, and feeds the great Fish Manati.

Westward dwell the Pocabuyes, and Alcoholados, both quiet and rich People.

The Province Xuruara.

The Province Xuruara lies towards the South behind high Mountains, inhabited by the valiant Coromochos; and towards the North from Xuruara, the Bobures, hard by the City Merida; the Countrey about which is unhealthful and Morassy, and the Inhabitants exceedingly plagu’d by the Muschito’s.

Havens of Venezuela.

The Haven Maracapana is the best in Venezuela, and lies in the Eastern part of the Province, where the Mountains are inhabited by the wild Chiugotos, who kill and eat all the Spaniards they can get.

The other Havens Westward, not comparable to Maracapana, are Flechado, Sardinas, and Burburute, where some Spanish Families have a Salt-pit.

Islands and Promontories.

Six Leagues up in the Countrey you come to the fresh Lake Tocarigua, full of little inhabited Isles; the People whereof live quietly, and barter Gold.

Towards the North-West the Ocean makes the great Inlet Triste, before which lies the Island Bonaire, very full of Cattel, and on each side appear the Aves and Quaraco, which abound with Fowl.

The Promontory St. Roman runs twenty Leagues into the Sea, and the Cape Coquibocoa extends farther. Between both these runs the Channel of Venezuela, which touches the Lake Maracapabo.

Before Coquibocoa are seen the four low Islands Monjes, with white sandy Creeks, and full of Trees: out of the middlemost rises a high Mountain.

On the Main Continent also the Mountains De Azieyto appear with scraggy tops beyond the Point: And the Bay Honda affords a safe Road.

The Cape De la Vela hath on one side the Inlet Portete, and on the other, the Villages Rancheria and Nostra Sennora de los Remedios; between both which runs the Stream La Hacha.

The German Commander, Nicholas Federman, intended to have built a City on Cape Vela, Anno 1535. but finding the Ground too low and unfruitful, the Pearls hereabouts very small, and the Natives living onely on Fish and wild Herbs, he chang’d his Resolution.

Sect. IV.
The Islands Margareta, Cubagua, and Coche.

Notwithstanding we have already spoken something of the Islands Margareta, and Cubagua, in regard they are by some reckon’d amongst the Isles of Northern America; yet because they are by many accounted to make up a part of the Division of New Andalusia, we shall add in this place what we have found most worthy of Re-mention, though much to the same purpose as before.

The Island Margareta, discover’d by Christopher Columbus, Anno 1498. contains thirty two Leagues in circumference, hath many Woods and Pastures, yet little fresh Water. To the Eastward of it lie the Cliffs Testigos, where it is very mountainous, as also on the East. Round about the same are delicious Fish, without which the Natives could not live, because the brackish Soil produces but little Provision.

The Pearl-Fishing of Margareta.

The chiefest thing for which this Island Margareta is famous, is the Pearl-Fishing, for which in times past a great Trade was driven, though of late it is come to little or nothing. The Spaniards, with inhumane cruelty, taught the Negro’s to Dive for the Pearls, for those that were not nimble or dextrous enough, they beat unmercifully, dropt scalding Wax or scalding Oyl upon them, or stigmatiz’d them with hot Irons. The Pearl-Banks were cover’d with five, six, seven, or eight Fathom Water; from whence the Negro’s pull’d the Oysters with such force, that the Blood gush’d out of their Mouths and Noses when they came above Water to breath; after which, to refresh them, they receiv’d a Glass of Wine and a Pipe of Tobacco. The Spanish Kiay receiv’d a fifth part of the best Pearls that were taken here; but whether the Oysters have forsaken this Place, or their growth hinder’d by often Fishing for them, we know not, but however it is, few Pearls are found here of late years, which makes Margareta to be more and more deserted.

The Nature of the Island of Cubagua.

Between the Main Continent of Paria lie the Islands Cubagua and Coche; the first whereof hath an unfruitful and sultry Soil, without either Trees, Birds, and four-footed Beasts, except Pock-Wood, Sea-Fowls, or Parrots; and Castilian Hogs being carry’d thither, change their Nature strangely; for in a short time their Claws grow long and crooked.

The City Nova Cadiz built there, but at length totally deserted.

The King of Spain us’d formerly to receive fifteen thousand Ducats yearly for his fifth part of the Pearls that were taken; which Gain invited many thither, who built the Town Nova Cadiz on Cubagua in the Year 1521. but when the Arayans demolish’d the Monks Cloyster on Paria, the Spaniards, being three hundred in number, fled from Nova Cadiz to Hispaniola, where the High Court, displeas’d at their cowardly deserting the Place, gave them but cool Entertainment, and sent five Ships under the Command of Jacomo de Castellan to Cubagua, to build new Store-houses in Nova Cadiz, which was afterwards re-inhabited; but when the Pearl-Fishing ceased, the Island and Town was at once deserted.

Opposite to Margareta lies the Promontory Araya, behind which lies a salt Lake, in which is found abundance of Salt, not onely above, but under the Water; with which the English, Spanish, and Dutch Ships are fraighted.

Du Verne’s Description of the Salt-pans on Araya.

Isaac du Verne describes the Salt-pans on Araya thus: “Round about the same (saith he) the Ground is craggy, barren, and of a brackish taste, and destitute of fresh Water, which is therefore fetch’d three Leagues farther out of a Brook, flowing from the Mountain Bordones into the Bay of Comena; likewise all manner of Provisions are brought from other Parts. Westward from the Point Araya there is a convenient Harbor where the Ships take in their Salt. Three hundred Paces from the Shore lies a great Salt-pan, where the Salt being first beat in pieces, is carry’d in Wheel-barrows to the Ships. The little Salt-pan produces less Salt, and lies also out of the way, which makes few Ships take in their Lading from thence.”

The Countrey is every where overgrown with Brambles and Bushes, in which breed Tygers and very poysonous Serpents. There are likewise abundance of Stags, Bucks, Hares, and Coneys, besides other strange Beasts.

The Netherlanders beaten out of their Salt-Trade here by the Spaniards.

Till Anno 1605. the Netherlanders came hither unmolested for Salt, when eight Spanish Gallions falling unawares upon them, strangely misus’d their Seamen; but afterwards the United Netherlands having made an Agreement with Spain for a certain time, renew’d their Trade to Araya, till the King of Spain, having for the better security of the Place, built the Fort St. Jago, which Commanded the great Salt-pan, forbad the Netherlanders from lading any more Salt; who thereupon Storm’d the Fort, though to their cost, for several of them were kill’d, and the rest return’d home empty.

Sect. V.
Of the Islands of Southern America.

The chiefest islands of note in the Southern part of America, that is to say, those that lie remote from the Continent in Mare del Zur, are Los Ladrones, and the Islands Fernandinas; for the rest being, as we may call them, Mediterranean Islands, fall naturally under the Description of the Continent.

The Isles Los Ladrones.

1. Los Ladrones, in English, The Islands of Thieves, lie as it were in the mid-way betwixt the Main Land of America and the Philippine Islands, but some hundreds of Leagues distant from either, in the fourth Degree of Northern Latitude; so nam’d by Ferdinand Magellan, from the pilfering disposition he observ’d in the Natives, when he Sail’d that way for the Moluccæ Islands. They were a nimble and active sort of People, yet light-finger’d, tall of stature, and going for the most part naked, excellent Swimmers and Divers, and have not much more to be said in their commendation.

The Isles Fernandinæ.

2. The Fernandinæ are onely two Islands of no great bigness, lying over against the Coast of Chile, in the three and thirtieth Degree of Southern Latitude, and about a hundred Leagues, or three hundred English Miles from the Continent, yet well stor’d with some lesser sorts of Cattel, as Goats, &c. good plenty likewise of Venison in the Woods, and Fish upon the Coasts; for which reason, though lying at some distance, yet are they not a little frequented by the Spaniards of Peru, who find many good Harbors and Roads for Shipping belonging to, and about these Islands.

An Appendix,

CONTAINING

Partly a farther prosecution of the Descriptions of some Provinces already treated of in the foregoing Book, partly an Account of some other Discoveries than what have hitherto been deliver’d in any Description of the NEW WORLD.

CHAP. I.
Rio de la Plata.

The River De la Plata, by the Natives call’d Paranaguazu, is next to the River of the Amazones, the greatest in the World, and falls into the Northern Ocean between the Capes Antonio and Maria, lying thirty Leagues one from another: It receives from East and West divers Rivers as far as the Lake Xarays, lying three hundred Leagues up in the Countrey from the Mouth of La Plata. Also into the fore-mention’d Lake fall several Streams, which spring out of the Peruvian Mountains Andes.

The first that Sail’d into this great River, Anno 1515. to an Island lying in the middle of it, was John Dias de Solis, who rashly going ashore, was kill’d and eaten, together with several Portugueses.

Sebastian Gabottus his Expedition.

Eleven years after this Accident, Sebastian Gabottus set Sail from Spain to go to the Spicy Islands through the Straights of Magellan, but was forc’d, for want of Provisions, and the unwillingness of his Seamen, to put into the River La Plata; in which being advanc’d thirty Leagues, he Anchor’d near an Island, which he call’d St. Gabriel: from whence going seven farther, he discover’d a Stream which fell into La Plata. This River he call’d St. Salvador, and cast up a Fort at the Mouth of it, where an Inlet afforded a convenient Harbor for Shipping; he found the River La Plata to be generally ten Leagues broad, and full of Isles; and to the Westward of it, the River Zaracaranna, inhabited on the South side by a subtil People call’d Diagnitas. At the place where Zaracaranna disembogues into La Plata he built a Castle, and calling the same Castello di Santo Spirito, went up farther, leaving on the West side the People Tenbues, Mequaretas, Mepenes, and Aigais; to the Eastward, the Quiloacas and Santana, and struck up out of the River La Plata, North-East into the Stream Parana, in which he had gone, two hundred Leagues, and pass’d by many Isles, when he went out of the same into the Stream Paraguay; where being set upon by the Countrey People, who were busie in Tilling the Ground, he lost so many of his Men, that he was forc’d, without any farther Exploit, to return with the Portuguese Pilot, Diego Garcia, who Sailing up the same River, had met with Gabottus in Paria; and because both had gotten some Silver, they call’d the River, from that Metal, De la Plata. The farther Discovery whereof lay neglected nine years after, when Peter Mendoza Sailing with eleven Ships, carrying eight hundred Men, to the Island Gabriel, built the Fort Buenos Ayres, on the South side of it, where many People dying of Hunger, little was done.

Alvares Cabeca not long after following Mendoza’s footsteps, discover’d and peopled the Province Rio de la Plata. The Mouth of the River La Plata Laurence Bikker describes thus:

Laurence Bikker’s Description of Rio de la Plata.

“Beyond the Cape Santa Maria (saith he) lies the flat Island Castilhos, having scarce a Tree upon it; but on the North side a Rock, not unlike a decay’d Castle; to the Southward of which appear two other Cliffs; directly before the Mouth lies the stonie Island De Lobos, on which nothing is to be found but Sea-Wolves; towards the East a stonie Bank runs a good way into the River, known by the breaking of the Water upon the same.”

The Promontory Maria is low and barren, but within the same the Land rises high before the Isles Flores and Maldonado, which last hath a good sandy Shore, Harbor, and fresh Water between the Rocks; but Flores rising with two Hills, produces nothing but Brambles.

The Stream Solis also discharges its Waters in La Plata, near the Place where the Mountain Seredo lies.

The left Shore of La Plata begins at the Promontory Antonio, and is cut through by the Rivers Ortis and Los Sanctos, where the Town Buenos Ayres is built on a smooth Shore.

Martin del Barco’s Description of the same.

Martin del Barco proceeding in the Description of La Plata, saith that it is dangerous by reason of the many Shelves that are in the same. The Isles in the River are as followeth: those that bear the Name of St. Gabriel are five in number; Garcia Isle is full of Trees, and for its fertility was peopled by Peter de Mendoza, and afterwards by Juan Ortiz Carate: But less fruitful are the Isles De Lazaro, where the River Vrayg unites with La Plata, being before fill’d with the Waters of Salvador, which receives the black Stream Negro, which gliding slowly from Morasses, is very full of Fish. Moreover, La Plata hath eleven Arms, each very deep and full of Isles, inhabited by the Guaranins.

About a hundred Leagues farther the Cherandies have setled themselves on pleasant Isles, lying not far from the City St. Fe, built on the Point which makes the River Bermeio, where it falls into La Plata.

Farther up lies the Province Ana, partly well inhabited for its fertility, and partly overflow’d.

Next appears the Rock Pennapobre, and not far from the Town Guayra, La Plata falls very high from the Rocks.

The several People of this Countrey.

But as concerning the Natives of this Countrey, it is inhabited by divers sorts of People, differing from one another both in Customs and Language. On the South side of the fore-mention’d River, from the Promontory Antonio to Buenos Ayres, dwell the Quirandies, a stout, but cruel People, who with the Flesh of many a Spaniard oftentimes keep a merry Feast. Farther into the Countrey run the Juries and Diagnitas. Along La Plata lie also scatter’d the Tenbues, a civil People, who live by Fishing. Near the River Paraguay the Ameguaes observe the same manner of Life; But the Carioes keep Cattel, and Till their Lands. A hundred Leagues farther dwell the Payaguaes; and yet farther into the Countrey the Chames and Carcares possess much Gold and Silver, with which Juan d’ Ayola having enrich’d himself here, was destroy’d with all his Men by the Chames, Anno 1541.

Nunnez Cabeca his Journey.

Alvarez Nunnez Cabeca came from Spain to be Governor here, but was not able, by reason of contrary Winds and Tydes to reach La Plata; wherefore Landing at the River Itabucu, and spending nine days in cutting a Way through thick Brambles, he came to the Jurisdiction of Armiriri, and a days Journey farther to Cipoyay; and not long after to Tocanguazu, where the Guaranies, who are the Natives, have two Harvests every year of Maiz and Cassavi, and breed and keep Geese, Hens and Parrots in their Houses: They are Man-eaters, and very revengeful. Cabeca having given this Countrey the Name of Vera, he proceeded on his Journey over the Rivers Ignazu, Tibagi, and Taquari, on whose Shore appears the Village Abangobi, and somewhat farther Tocanguzir. The Countrey hereabouts is very fruitful, and hath many delightful Plains, pleasant Rivers, and Woods; but beyond appear Hills, Mountains, deep Morasses, dangerous Cane-Fields, Receptacles for wild Beasts, and great Wildernesses. Cabeca having pass’d through them all, came into the fruitful Countrey of the Guaranies, who are a wild People, and possess many large Fields of Maiz and Potato’s, also several Silver Mines. From hence travelling Westwardly over the River Piqueri, he spent eighteen days before he came to the Stream Ignazu, which falls into the Parana, and at last came to the River Paraguay; along whose Shore he found a People of a gigantick Stature, call’d The Agazes, who regarded no manner of Husbandry, but went out continually a robbing in their Canoos. These People, as Martin del Barco relates, were not long after all destroy’d by the Spaniards.

Not far from the Agazes dwell the Guaycurues, a valiant People; and somewhat farther the Cacoves, whose Countrey produces Gold and Silver; and yet farther in the Countrey reside the Guaxarapos, who remove yearly to the Paraguay to Fish there when the Water is low; for in the beginning of January the River swells so exceedingly, that the Countrey about it being overflow’d, is cover’d with above six Fathom Water. The Paraguay discharges its Waters into the great Lake Xarayes, full of Islands.

Amongst other Rivers that spring out of the Mountains Andes, the Ignazu, along whose Shore the People Xacoaes, Xaquesses, and Chanesses dwell, falls also into the foremention’d Lake. Somewhat farther lies a great piece of drown’d Land, beyond which the Xarayes have convenient Habitations, plant Maiz, and spin Cotton: Their Countrey borders a great Wilderness, which ends about the Province Tapuaguazu, the Inhabitants whereof, call’d Tarapecocies, are furnish’d with plenty of all sorts of Provisions. The Payzunoes, dwelling on one side of them, are not well known as yet.

Beyond the Town Assumption dwell the Mayaes, in the Way to Peru, and border at the Tamacoaes, both which possess Silver-Mines.

Between Buenos Ayres and Corduba lies the Plain-Countrey Despoplado, ninety Leagues long, without Trees or Houses, but is most Pasture-Ground, which feed many thousands of wild Horses. From hence glide the Streams Luchan, Los Arrechivos, Arreca, Zaracaranna, and others, into La Plata. It is very dangerous for a small Company to travel through this Countrey, because the ranging Furies spare none alive they meet with.

Moreover, the River Grande flows with a wide Mouth into the Sea, and spreads it self within against the Countrey Patos. Also the Rivers Tamandabug, Ararungo, and the Lake Alagoa, disembogue into the Ocean.

North-East beyond Alagoa lie the Islands Catharina and Gale; and in the Bay Tojuqua appear several Isles.

The Streams Tajahu and Ytabuca spring out of high Mountains, inhabited by the People Anniriri and Cipopoy.

Lastly, the Countrey wash’d by the Stream Ararapira, produces all sorts of Provisions.

CHAP. II.
Chili.

The Cammel-Sheep.

There are in this Countrey both tame and wild Sheep; the tame ones are call’d Cammel-Sheep, being cover’d with long fine Wool, having Necks four Foot long, their fore Feet cloven into four parts, their hindermost into two, their Mouths very wide, which they open at those that vex them, and make such a stink, that no body is able to abide near them; when tir’d, they fall under their Burdens, and will not rise, though beaten never no much: Their Flesh is tough like that of Horses. The wild Mountain-Sheep are red, and have soft glossy Wool, which makes a Stuff like that of a Chamlet: These Sheep run swifter than a Horse; the Chileses lead them by a Rope put through their Ears.

The Grain Teca.

This Countrey of Chili not onely produces Wheat, Barley, Maiz, and all manner of Fruit, but also the Teca, which growing half a Yard high, is not unlike Barley; the Grain thereof being dry’d in the Sun, is thresh’d, and parch’d in hot Sand, then ground on a square flat Stone with a round Rowler. This Meal, which is both exceeding wholsom and very nourishing (for a small Measure thereof sufficeth a Man a whole Week,) serves also both for Meat and Drink: for being infus’d in a greater quantity of Water, it becomes a pleasant Drink, and kneaded with a lesser proportion, it is made into Cakes or Loaves.

The Fruit Unni.

The Fruit Unni, by the Spaniards call’d Murtilla, is like a little red Grape, and hath a tart taste. The Wine press’d out of this Fruit is clear to the Eye, pleasing to the Palate, and good for the Stomach, never causing any Head-ache: It also makes good Vinegar.

But the chiefest Benefit of Chili is the rich Gold-Mines. The Countrey for the most part lies desolate, occasion’d by the continual Wars which the valiant People Arauco maintain’d against the Spaniards after such a manner, that in no place of America they met with such resistance, or sustain’d such Losses. They speak an elegant Language, according to the testimony of Elias Herkmans, who having committed to Writing all the most significant Words thereof which were taught him by the Chileses, it will not be altogether amiss to set down some of them, which are these following:

A View of the Chilesian Language.

Tepanto, A Year.

Tien, A Moneth, or the Moon.

Toninco, A Week.

Ante, The Day, or Sun.

Paun, The Night.

Tabuyo, The Evening.

Eppoun, The Morning.

Rangiante, Noon.

Eppoe, The next Day after to Morrow.

Vya, Yesterday.

Putey, The Day before Yesterday.

Buchiante, To Day.

Mintay, Now.

Weytiva, At that time.

Wantarulei, In the Morning betimes.

Biliante, Always.

Chumel, When.

Chemchuem, Also.

Hueno, The Heavens.

Quereb, The Air or Wind.

Tomo, The Clouds.

Wangelen, The Stars.

Pillan, Thunder.

Gualio, Lightning.

Puta que quereb, A Storm.

Maoni, Rain.

Piren, Snow.

Veaquumao, Dew.

Pillingei, Ice.

Quetal, Fire.

Ko, Water.

Tue, The Earth.

Mappo, The Land.

Pele, Clay.

Cura, Stone.

Maviel, Wood.

Aluven, Timber.

Millia, Gold.

Lien, Silver.

Paila, Brass.

Titi, Tin.

Pavillue, Iron.

Quatal-cura, A Pebble-stone.

Chadi, Salt.

Lyl, A Rock.

Milla-mappen, A Golden Vein.

Aliquen, A Tree.

Cahu, Herbs.

Nebo, Nuts.

Pino, Grass.

Cayron, Hay.

Wento, A Man.

Domo, A Wife.

Quiduugen, A Youth.

Yecho, A Maiden.

Penien, A Boy.

Domo-penien, A Girl.

Chou, A Father.

Nenque, A Mother.

Cheche, A Grandfather.

Domo-cheche, A Grandmother.

Wenco, Mothers Brother.

Mama, Mothers Sister.

Pelchuchan, A Stepfather.

Caulla, A Stepmother.

Botum, A Son.

Neaque, A Daughter.

Penu, A Brother.

Lamoen, A Sister.

Guempo, A Father-in-law.

Vilca, A Mother-in-law.

Choupa, A Son-in-law.

Weuro-pencho, A Kinsman.

Buytha, An old Man.

Cude, An old Woman.

Cunewa, An Hospital Child.

Peneinboe, A Guardian.

Apo-curaca, A Governor.

Curaca, A Lord.

Apo, A supream Commander.

Nentoque, A Ruler.

Ulmen, A Person of Quality.

Pulmen, A Gentleman.

Machi, A Chirurgeon.

Cona, A Soldier.

Retave-caman, A Smith.

Guito-wok, A Weaver.

Challo-acaman, A Fisher-man.

Nilla-caboe, A Merchant.

Turnitave, A Dyer.

Chumpiro-caman, A Cap-maker.

Tultunca-caman, A Drummer.

Inchetaniweni, A Servant.

Voerquin, A Messenger.

Langamcheboe, A Murderer.

Chiquiboe, A Thief.

Illuiboe, A Beggar.

Alvee, The Devil.

Ruca, A House.

Ullin, A Door.

Chaquana, A pair of Stairs.

Pylca, A Wall.

Wana-ruca, The Roof.

Pithe-ruca, A Hut.

Colcura, A Cupboard.

Cawyto, A Bedstead.

Depotuarica, A Prison.

Weltelve, A Gibbet.

Pengal, A Grave.

Lonquen, The Sea.

Leva, The River.

Buta-wampo, A Ship.

Aliwen, A Mast.

Mou, Ropes.

Dolio, A Canoo.

Wampo, A Boat.

Vela, Sails.

Wyta, An Oar.

Tubquen, Ashes.

Cuju, A dead Coal.

Ale, The Flame.

Aypel, A burning Coal.

Wietum, Smoak.

Catila, a Candle.

Wyno, A Knife.

Witi, A Spoon.

Guidi, A Pot.

Lepoboruwe, A Tooth-picker.

Pavilla-lonco, An Helmet.

Waiqui, A Pike.

Pylqui, A Dart.

Pulque-tuboi, A Bowe.

Tultunca, A Trumpet.

Mecane, An Iron Club.

Cachal, An Awl.

Wita, A Spade.

Juisue, A Sieve.

Chilca, A Letter.

Charavilla, A pair of Breeches.

Icha, A Woman’s Garment.

Domo-ruida, A Coat.

Couchon, A Bag.

Pino-chompiro, A Straw Cap.

Congi, Food.

Cobque, Bread.

Nul-cobque, The Crumb.

Liquangue, Light.

Dumingei, Darkness.

Quemeiquen, Dainties.

Medda, Pap.

Core, Broth.

Ilon, Flesh.

Cuichalon, Mutton.

Wara-ilon, Beef.

Chuchi-ilon, Pork.

Chuchi-chain, A Gammon of Bacon.

Chaditues-ilon, Salt.

Caucan, Roast-meat.

Avaun, Boyl’d-meat.

Puytscha, The Guts.

Curam, An Egg.

Quecuram, The Yolk of an Egg.

Lycuram, The White of an Egg.

Iwyn, Butter.

Ylu, Milk.

Puuloo, Drink,

Vino, Wine.

Chiche, Beer.

Cutan, Pain or Sickness.

Aren-cutan, A Feaver.

Towongen, The Head.

Cancocultano, The Head-ache.

Veno-aren, Scabs.

Albungien, A Wound.

Molbuen, Blood.

Touma, A blind Man.

Cawinto, A Meal.

Colchou, The Small-pox.

Wocubu, A wild Beast.

Pangy, A Lyon.

Naguel, A Tyger.

Cuchy, A Swine.

Michun, A Calf.

Dewe, A Mouse.

Waren, A Rat.

Twe-dewe, A Mole.

Tewa, A Dog.

Pulpeo, A Fox.

Guetaltuange, A Hare.

Noquen, A She-bear.

Lame, A Sea-Dog.

Lemo-cuchi, A wild Swine.

Chumam, A Bear.

Puedo, A Sea-Goat.

Quelen, A Tail.

Chiliweki, A Sheep.

Zuneu, a Bird.

Lyppe, A Plume.

Mepoiinem, A Wing.

Dani-inem, A Nest.

Achawal, a Hen.

Alchahawal, a Cock.

Pylken, A Duck.

Jeca, A Raven.

Guereo, A Magpye.

Cogo, A Cuckow.

Nullyn, A Bee.

Pulli, A Flye.

Vulgumusky, The King of Bees.

Petar, A Louse.

Perem, A Flea.

Piro, A Worm.

Vilo, A Serpent.

Bylcum, A Hedghog.

Ponono, A Toad.

Challua, A Fish.

Cawel, A Dolphin.

Iene, A Whale.

Vouqui, A Grigg.

Vilochalva, An Eel.

Chadituel-chalva, Salt-fish.

Anquen-chalva, Dry’d-fish.

Quinpilon, Oysters.

Chapes, Mussles.

Coinow, A Crab.

Quichiquinchio, a Falcon.

Manco, A Crane.

Choroi, A Parrot.

Pilo, Dead.

Hilca, A one-ey’d Person.

Topilgen, To squint.

Topil, Lame.

Poo, A Bough.

Kempomamel, Dry Wood.

Bopemamel, Wither’d Wood.

Nobue, An Acorn.

Nido-iwas, A Vineyard.

Nidu, A Pole.

Vanguen, Strawberries.

Couchow, Black-berries.

Litue, Toad-stools.

Pilun-proque, Plantain.

Calicai, Clover-grass.

Curi, Stinking Nettles.

Pragyn, Flowers.

Manen, Seed.

Methen, Meal.

Chiquelen, To gather.

Gueli-vanca, Coral.

Kispi, Glass.

Cudi, A Milstone.

Pel, Mud or Dirt.

Tassaquido, A Treasure.

Guengu, A Marriage-Portion.

Deren-culyn, A Debt.

Culyn, A Reward.

Willawyn, Single-money.

Guyn, One.

Eppo, Two.

Quila, Three.

Meli, Four.

Quechu, Five.

Cuyn, Six.

Regli, Seven.

Pura, Eight.

Culla, Nine.

Maripataco, A hundred.

Marama, A thousand.

Guiltui, A Kernel.

Tapel, Leaves.

Nil, The Bark.

Pelli, The Smell.

Oaliel, The Body.

Lai-calel, A dead Corps.

Ven, Flesh.

Molvin, Blood.

Boro, A Leg.

Telqui, The Skin.

Vel, The Sinews.

Ven-molvin, A Vein.

Congo, The Head.

Tol, The Forehead.

Lenglen, The Scull.

Lonco, The Hair.

Teren-lonco, Grey.

Lolo, The Brain.

Angen, The Face.

Taun, The Jaws.

Ne, The Eyes.

Tacune, The Members.

Denen, The Eye-brows.

Ju, The Nose.

Peloju, The Nostrils.

Merum, Snot.

Pilum, The Ears.

Oun, A Mouth.

Adem, Sweat.

Quewen, The Tongue.

Melbue, The Lips.

Boru, The Teeth.

Ilga, The Gums.

Bida-bida, The Roof of the Mouth.

Cain, Spittle.

Mewe, The Throat.

Neen, The Breath.

Quette, The Chin.

Paion, The Beard.

Pel, The Neck.

Lipan, The Shoulders.

Puilpa, An Arm.

Cue, A Hand.

Mancue, The Right-hand.

Melecoe, The Left-hand.

Puley-cue, The Palm of the Hand.

Changel-cue, The Fingers.

Buta-changel, The Thumb.

Wili, The Nails.

Zevo, The Breast.

Moju, The Nipples.

Pue, The Belly.

Weddo, The Navel.

Cadi, The Ribs.

Buri, The Back.

Anca, The Sides.

Quichio, The Buttocks.

Penem, A Man’s Genital Parts.

Metu, A Womans.

Chan, The Thighs.

Lucu, The Knees.

Metunthoy, The Knee-Bone.

Hemum, The Calves.

Kamon, The Feet.

Pinque, The Heart.

Mocun, The Lungs.

Que, The Maw.

Curique, The Liver.

Vaca, The Milt.

Quelche, The Guts.

Villin, The Bladder.

Momay, To Stink.

Pelengsley, A Spider.

Inche, I.

Tubei, He.

Eimi, You.

Inchen, We.

Tecengen-eimen, You People.

Liengen, Those People.

Emma, So.

Muh, No.

Pichumei, Hard by.

Averlugei, Far.

Taymen, Against.

Woecun, Without.

Compay, Within.

Pulon, Below.

Wono, Above.

Buri, Behind.

Junengen, Before.

Quelleb, Near.

Munai, Enough.

Alengei, Too much.

Munalai, Too little.

Chemibla, Wherefore.

Venibla, Therefore.

Vei-mai, Let it be so.

Wei, These.

Temunei, Fair.

Woranei, Ugly.

Newonei, Strong.

Leptungei, Swift.

Chouwo, Lazie.

Alilonconei, Very wise.

Wentannei, Valiant.

Queunei, Proud.

Culenei, Rich.

Cunewal, Poor.

Toucou, Foolish.

Molgei, Naked.

Ilungei, Clothed.

Queten, Narrow.

Anqueu, Dry.

Prequin, Bountiful.

Buta, Great.

Pichi, Little.

Montingei, Fat.

Toutau, Lean.

Pettun, Colour’d.

Queli, Red.

Calbu, Blue.

Carel, Green.

Choot, Yellow.

Curi, Black.

Lye, White.

Nilla-caju, To change.

Illawyn, Giving.

Tuignei, To be merry.

Umatum, Sleeping.

Limen, To wake out of Sleep.

Bemgne, To Build.

Playn, To find.

Vangen-lyn, To lose.

Necul, To run.

Amon, To go.

Utalegen, To stand.

Jucheleyn, To lie down.

Tecanen, To dance.

Padenatum, To fall.

Utalenen, To rise.

Avinge, To sit.

Dimgne, To speak.

Temelenge, To be silent.

Puronge, To Sing.

Pylcunge, To call.

Quipay, To come.

Ien, To eat.

Butum, To drink.

Mepai, To go to Stool.

Willam, To Urine.

Cudepain, To play.

Locatum, To scold.

Mecowyn, To carry.

Chuquin, To steal.

Guallulueno, To restore.

Pelteney, To pay.

Lay, To die.

Rengalgei, To be buried.

Quedau capay, Working.

Intunge millo, To dig for Gold.

Nilla-teubyn, To sell.

Nilla-vin, To buy.

Quimli wi tami piel, I cannot understand you.

Chu pipaimi, What do you?

Champaila, Nothing.

Juei pingeimi, What is your Name?

Juan pingen, I am call’d John.

Cheo ruaimi, Whither do you go?

Moppo muruam, I go into the Countrey.

Cheo tui mi, From whence came you?

Miro comotoun, I came from home.

Chumel quipai, tuai mi, When shall you come?

Chumel pratuai mi, When shall you go?

Ale prungi tamruca, Is your Habitation far from hence?

Picherungei, It is hard by.

Aleprungei, It is farther.

Inchi quiparum camappumu, I intend to go into another Countrey.

Chemnibla qui parui cammappumu, Why will you go into another Countrey?

Merelya tiva mappumu, Here is no Provision.

Aleibelay twachi tipanto, benebliaale geniep ayn, The year hath been unfruitful, and therefore we want.

Cheo mappungen tamichau, In what Province dwells your Father?

Alu ei ei, The Devil hath fetch’d him away.

At eimi ruaju inchio, Will you keep him company?

Ailan, No, I will not.

Bien, I will.

Chuben quecken neieimi tania, Have you any thing to give us to eat?

Cancan achawal, Yes, I have roasted Hens.

Mu wy, How many?

Munalei enchintavia, There will be enough for us.

Chuben putuayn, Where shall we Drink?

Aile Mangunmeinis, I thank you.

Chuben domo trivo, What Woman is this?

Inchi tan curi, It is my Wife.

Ni nave, My Daughter.

Ni domo, My Concubine.

Alei teminigei vei domo, It is a handsomWoman.

Qua pangnei, Come hither.

Amotunge, Run away.

Umatuayn, Let us go to Bed.

Utajuca, Let us rise.

Wira cuchai compay tan mappumu, The Spaniards are fall’n into this Countrey.

Quipa waicha laimi, Shall we Fight together?

Waiquenagelan, I have no Arms.

Ima en pea in Waiqui, Follow me, and I will get Arms.

Ali teum inche, I am contented.

The Seamen who went under Hendrick Brewer’s Command, Anno 1643. from Brasile to Chili, brought the fore-mention’d Vocabulary along with them.

Chili is look’d upon as no way inferior to any Countrey in America, enjoying a wholsom Air, fruitful Soil, and abundance of Inhabitants, who often furnish Peru with Provisions; which are the speedier convey’d thither, because the South-Winds always blow along the Coast.

The Peruvian Vice-Roy keeps a Deputy to Govern here. It hath two Bishopricks, viz. St. Jago and L’ Imperial.

The Nature, Customs, and Manners of the Chileses.

Some of the Chileses are under the Spaniards Jurisdiction, and live in Huts; others being wilder, defend their Freedom with the Sword. They have great Heads and flat Noses: The Men continually pull out the Hair on their Faces and Privities with Shells, which they carry about their Necks for that purpose, having beforehand rubb’d the Hair with warm Ashes; the Hair of their Heads hanging downwards is cut close as far as their Ears, the rest growing long, is ty’d with the Ribbon Tariwelonco, to which Persons of Quality fix Silver Plates and Turkoises: Some also cover their Heads with the Skins of Weazels, or the like Beasts, putting the Head over their Foreheads, and the Tail down their Neck; which kind of Covering they call Maniewelonco: Others wear Caps made after some strange manner or other.

The Chileses are not the tallest, but strong and well set, betwixt a white and sallow colour: Those that are in the Spaniards Service, wear long Hair, by which they are distinguish’d from the shorn Ucais, who do the Spaniards all the mischief imaginable. The Women are for the most part low of stature, but of a strong Constitution, they go bare-headed, letting their Hair hang loose over their Shoulders, except when they are indispos’d, and then they tie it up: But those that dwell about Castro wear Locks like our English Ladies. In Coquimbo and Loquimbo they go after the same manner as the Peruvian Women: All of them have thick black Hair.

Their Apparel, though mean, is neat: The Men wear wide Breeches girt about their Wastes, and a piece of woollen Cloth, three Yards long and two broad, which having a Hole in the middle, they put over their Heads, and so let it hang on their Shoulders, leaving their Arms and Legs bare; but on Festival Days they wear curious embroider’d Stockings. The Women likewise cover themselves with the same piece of Cloth, but after another manner, tying it first about their Middle, then let it down to the Ground, pinn’d before with Silver or Golden Pins; their Heads, Breasts and Legs are uncover’d; the Cloth it self is strip’d with red, white, blue, and yellow, and fring’d at the edges. For an Example of their quick and easie Labor, Hendrick Brewer relates, That a Woman being Deliver’d in his Ship, within an hour after walk’d up and down the Deck, and gave the Child suck. Some of them have such great Breasts, that throwing them over their Shoulders they suckle their Children, being ty’d at their Backs.

Their Huts being low, are made of Straw, Canes, and Boughs, and not built for one single Family; for often thirty, fifty, a hundred, or a hundred and twenty dwell under one Roof, and have a Governor, by them call’d Caruca.

Their Housholdstuff is little and mean, viz. two or three Cans to keep their Liquor Chica in, Horn Cups, a Stone whereon they grind their Corn, and one or two woodden Stools: The chiefest of them also use Sheep-skins, which they spread on the Ground before their Guests. They live without care, for they neither Sowe nor Plant any more than will serve them a Year.

Their Riches consist in Cattel, of which they have no great plenty.

About the beginning of October a whole Town meets together to Plough and to Sowe, which the Men perform in two days time, the rest of the Work being left to the care of the Women; for the Men never meddle with Reaping or Harvest.

They eat and drink from Morning to Evening, when they do not travel, for then they eat at set-times. Their Liquor is made of Barley-Meal, or Wheat boyl’d in Water. On Festival Days they drink Chica, Brew’d of Maiz chew’d by the Teeth of old Women. They likewise make a Liquor of the Fruit Unni, which tastes like Madera Wine.

Their Marriages.

Every Man Marries as many Wives as he can buy and maintain, for Maids and Widows must be sold by the Parents, who set not a Price upon them according to their Beauty or Quality, but their skill in managing Houshold Affairs. Their Marriages are perform’d after a strange manner: A Son having no Inheritance, lives on the Charity of his nearest Relations, who Present him, one with a Hog, another with a Cow, a third with a Sheep, and a fourth with somewhat else: thus enrich’d, he goes to his Mistresses Father, and hangs some Turkoises and Plates of Silver about his Neck, and acquainting him with what Estate he can make his Wife, he agrees as well as he can with his intended Father-in-law, to whom he gives ten, fifty, or a hundred Sheep, Oxen, Cows, Hogs, Horses, Poultrey, a Coat, and some Vessels full of Chica; which done, the Father leads his Daughter to the Bridegroom’s House, where he is Entertain’d with Meat, but finds the Drink at his own Cost. Some days after the Celebration of the Wedding, the nearest Relations come to congratulate the young Marry’d Woman, and at Dinner sing an Epithalamium to their Nuptial Deity Maruapeante, all of them sitting on the Ground on Sheep-skins. The Allies often take away a Woman from her Husband, especially when he misuses her; and if a Man kill his Wife, her Death is reveng’d by her Relations. Persons of Quality build a Hut for every one of their Wives, sending word to her whom they have a mind to enjoy: They respect one above the rest, who are in a manner but Slavesses, being forc’d to do all the Drudgery. The Men are exceeding jealous and chollerick, cruelly beating their Wives, if they chance but to look on another Man; and if they take them in the Act of Adultery, they immediately kill them; yet for all this they are not Chaste, but very Libidinous. As soon as a Woman is Deliver’d of a Child, she washes her self and the Child in cold Water; then kills a Lamb call’d Chiluraque, makes a Feast; at which she her self eats and drinks freely amongst the rest, and the next day goes about her usual Employment.

The Spaniards tell us, that their Women, if they continue long in this Countrey, are more and more hardned by the Air, and are as little concern’d at the Birth of a Child as the Natives.

A Widow hath free leave to Marry again, provided she hath given to her Children part of what she hath; but if she Marry not, but return to her Parents, then she is highly esteem’d of.

Both Men and Women wash themselves in the Rivers in the coldest Weather.

Their Religion, and manner of burying their Dead.

They adore chiefly their Deity Pillan, and the Devil, who doth them much hurt. They acknowledge no Resurrection, accounting long Life in this World the greatest Good; wherefore when any one dies, the Friends and Relations make a doleful Cry, and suffer the dead Body to lie three, nay, four Moneths before they bury them, stuffing them full of strong smelling Herbs, to keep them from putrifying: Three days before their Interrment the nearest Allies meet, kill a Sheep, make Merry, and throw the Body into a Hole near the Hut in which the Deceased dwelt, putting also a piece of the slain Sheep, and a Jug full of the Liquor Chica, into the Grave.

Concerning their Idol Pillan, to whom with strange Gestures they Sing divers Songs, they believe that he is a Spirit of the Air, and Governs all things on Earth. Some suppose him to be Thunder, and therefore they worship him in a most particular manner when they hear it Thunder; for then they stick an Arrow and Stone Ax into the Ground, and take Arms into their Hands, putting themselves into a posture as if they should suddenly be set upon by a mighty Enemy, and look’d upon it heretofore as a fore-running of the Spaniards approach, whose Cruelties they exceedingly dreaded.

They call all their Hero’s Pillans, and ascribe Divine powers to them.

They take very much strong Tobacco, the Smoak whereof puffing in the Air with strange Gestures, they cry, Receive this, O Pillan.

Their cruel usage of Prisoners.

When they return home Conquerors from any Victory, they put a Stone Ax into the Ground, and standing Arm’d round about the same, Drink exceedingly, and sing a Song in honor of Pillan. They use their Prisoners very cruelly, for forcing them to Dance and make Merry amongst them, they on a sudden cleave their Heads with an Ax, pull their Hearts out of their Bodies, and bite the same with their Teeth. After the same manner they punish their Robbers and Traitors; but those that have good store of Chica to Present the Governors with, escape the Execution: Yet this cannot buy off Sorcerers or Witches, who are without mercy burnt alive, with all they enjoy’d.

They have no Priests, nor any that pretend to any religious Function; onely those that can Sing the Pawary well, are in great esteem amongst them.

Their second Deity Maruapeante (they say) informs them in a Dream when they must Marry; but he doth not do them this kindness before they have made themselves Drunk, and sung Sonnets to his praise.

The manner of chusing the Nentoque.

This Countrey is Govern’d by prime Persons, call’d Ulmen, or peculiar Lords, call’d Curacen. The Ulmens and Curacens Command twenty five, sometimes fifty, a hundred Families: Their Power consists in calling all the People together, and consulting with them about State-Affairs, which they dare not do with any particular Person, nor Levy any Tax without extraordinary occasion. They are bound to march in the Front of their Subjects against an Enemy, and are under a Governor-General call’d Apocurace, or under a Nentoque. Other lesser Offices are dispos’d of by the Curaces, or Pulmenes; but their Netonques are chosen after this manner, viz. When that honorable Place is vacant, then whoever aims at it, computes with himself whether his Means will extend so far as to treat the Curaces and Pulmenes with a noble Treat; which if he is able to do, then he sends for them to an appointed place, whither they all go Arm’d, and whilest they are eating and drinking, he that desires the Place begins to tell them of his noble Extract, valiant Exploits, Riches, and eminent Relations, and therefore desires the Place of the deceased Nentoque: then the Curace rising, the intended Nentoque hangs a Chain of Turkoises, or Cockle-shells about his Neck; whereupon the Curace moves the rest to the Election, without any Articles, the new Nentoque onely promising to Govern all things for the best advantage and benefit of the common State: which done, the Curace takes the Chain of Turkoises, and distributes them amongst the primest Persons of Quality, and so they end the Day in Drinking, Dancing and Singing.

After the same manner they chuse an Apocurace or prime Governor; which of late the Uca’s, that they may enjoy the more Priviledge themselves, have not elected.

Their Arms.

The Chileses Arms consist of Lances as long again as the Europeans, made sharp at the Points. They all use Clubs plated with Iron, and Spanish Swords. The Pulches, who dwell behind the high Mountains Cordilbra, use poyson’d Arrows, make Helmets and Breastplates of Ox-hides, which neither Sword nor Arrow can enter: they all know how to manage a Horse, and the use of a Lance, but are very much afraid of Musquets or Fire-locks.

Because they can neither write nor read, the Governor by a faithful Messenger sends to his inferior Officers such Commands as he judges may tend to the most advantage of the Publick both in Peace and War. This Messenger carries an Arrow with a Ribbon, as a Sign of his Employment; the Arrow is held in the Right-hand, and if he who receives it will answer the Message, then he sends back the same Arrow with another; but if he judges it convenient to acquaint any other Curaces and Pulmenes with the same Message, then he sends one of his own Servants to them with the same Arrow.

A particular Account of Chili.

As touching the Climate and Production of Chili, this Account is given by an Eye-witness: “The Winter Season (saith he) is so tempestuous, that sometimes the Trees are not onely blown up by the Roots, but the Earth it self is rent asunder; some Valleys being fill’d with Snow, swell the Rivers exceedingly when it melts, which overflowing part of the Countrey, makes the same very fruitful. It is also extream cold here, because such sharp Winds blow from the Mountains, that they pierce through the Skin and Flesh of a Man: and indeed these Winds would make the whole Countrey desolate, were not the Mountains overgrown with great Oaken Trees, against which the Wind breaks. Moreover, the Valleys produce Coals, which serve the Inhabitants for Fewel. The Winter bereaves the Trees of Leaves; but not those which grow in the Wildernesses. In March the Fields are full of innumerable sorts of sweet-smelling Flowers; out of some whereof are boyl’d the Angel-Water, so call’d for its smell and wholsom taste. The Grass grows in November and December as high as our standing Corn. Turnips, Mint, Clover, and Mustard-seed, grow naturally for several Leagues together. Likewise excellent Physical Herbs grow here, whose power and operation their Doctors, call’d Maci, keep from the Spaniards. These Maci are in great esteem, not onely amongst the Chileses, but also the Spaniards, for their great skill in Physick. Amongst these Herbs the chiefest is call’d Quincia-mali which grows but half a hands-breadth above the Ground, and spreads into several Stalks like a Nosegay; and on each Stalk is a Saffron-colour’d Flower. This Herb pull’d Up with the Root, and boyl’d, and the Decoction given to any one that is bruis’d within, works most wonderfully, for it draws out the putrifi’d Blood, though sunk never so deep in the Wound. Moreover the Juice of Culen is also very healing, if us’d for an Ointment, or pour’d on any Wound. This Herb, by the Spaniards call’d Albaciga, hath sweet-smelling Leaves, and a tall Body. In some places also grows an Herb, not unlike Grass, which boyl’d in Water, immediately cures the Feaver and Spleen, and cleanses the Blood. There are likewise Medicines here, which dissolving the Stone in the Bladder or Kidneys, cause it to be urin’d forth. The Plant Luce, which grows out of rented Rocks which are often overflow’d by the Sea, makes a sort of well tasted Bread.”

The Wilderness Atacama, which makes a Boundary betwixt Peru and Chili, extends Northward ninety Leagues, is dry and barren in Summer, and in the Winter exceeding cold, and cover’d with Snow. No Provision is to be found upon it, except a few wild Sheep, call’d Guanacos. About the middle thereof the Brook La Sal rising in the Eastern Mountains, flows Westward through a deep Valley to the Southern Ocean.

Troublesom Passage from Peru to Chili.

The Water of the fore-mention’d Brook put into any Vessel, immediately turns to Salt, and all along the Shore lie greater or lesser pieces of Salt; so that the Way from Peru to Chili through Atacama is very troublesom: but that which leads thither over the snowy Mountains Andes, is much worse, because it is farther about, and threatens the Traveller with Destruction, if he observe not the right Season of the Year; for in the Winter there blows such a cold Wind on these Mountains, that a Man, being suddenly benumm’d, falls down dead on the Ground, and grows stiff against all putrefaction. Joseph de Acosta tells us, that Bodies have been found there as firm and sound, as if they had been living, which had some years before breath’d their last on the said Mountains.

The Valley Copayapo.

But Diego Almagro, who first discover’d Chili, Anno 1536. went thither with two Companies of Horse, and five hundred Foot, through the Countreys Charcas, Chicas, Xuxayes, and Chaquana, and having pass’d over a craggy Soil and the snowy Mountains Andes, he entred into the first Chilean Valley Capayapo, having lost no small number of Men and Horses with Hardship and Cold; the inconvenience therefore of both the fore-mention’d Ways between Peru and Chili, forc’d Travellers to go along the Shore wash’d by the Southern Ocean. Copayapo bears that Denomination from the Turkoises which a Mountain produces there in great abundance. The Valley it self is the fruitfullest of all Chili; for in no place the Maiz grows better, and in greater abundance than here, the Ears being half a Yard long, and the Stalks the length of a Lance; each Grain that is Sow’n, yields at least three hundred in Harvest. All Spanish Fruits grow better here than in Spain.

Through the midst of Copayapo runs a River of the same Denomination, and twenty Leagues in length from the Andes, and at its Mouth hath a convenient Harbor before the South Sea.

The South part of Copayapo borders the Valley Guasco, which is less fruitful than the first, but hath a convenient Haven, into which falls a fresh River, penn’d in by Sluces for the watering of the Cane-Fields. Moreover, there are plenty of Partridges; also wild Sheep and grey Squirrel-skins are of a great value. To the Southward flow also the Rivers Maypo, Chacha Pool, Loro, and Moule.

Beyond these Streams Eastward, the Promouca’s dwell near the Mountains Andes.

In the Valley Chili, which gives Denomination to the whole Countrey, were formerly the famous Gold-Mines Quillatas, from whence Valdivia, Anno 1544. carry’d an invaluable Treasure. The South Sea makes here a large and convenient Harbor for all manner of Vessels, built two Leagues below the City Serena, at a little River, which so moistens the low Countrey, that it produces all manner of Plants. It rains here not above three times a year.

From the Entertainment which Sir Francis Drake met withal here, may sufficiently be conjectur’d the Power of Serena; for when the English Landed here for Water, they were driven away not without great loss by three hundred Castilian Horse, and two hundred Foot that Sally’d out of the City. The Mines, though they inclose much Gold, yet they produce but little, because the Spaniards, according to the testimony of a Chilean Pilot, whom Oliver Van Noort took Prisoner, destroy’d all the ancient Inhabitants that should have help’d them to dig the Gold.

The City St. Jago, lying near the Stream Topocalma, receives great benefit by the Haven Valparayso, which makes the fore-mention’d River, because in that Haven all Goods that come from Lima are unladen, and the Goods shipp’d aboard. The Countrey about the same produces plenty of Wines, Apples, Corn, and all sorts of Cattel, and especially Horses in such abundance, that thousands of them run wild.

In Valparayso Sir Francis Drake took a Ship from Valdivia, laden with two thousand five hundred Bars of fine Gold. But the Netherland Admiral, Joris Spilbergen, had not such good success, who Sailing thither with five Ships, Anno 1615. discover’d a Spanish Ship in the Harbor; where sending his Boats well Mann’d to fetch off a Vessel that lay hal’d on the Shore, they found it burning, and thereupon Steer’d their Course into a little Inlet full of Rocks, which serv’d the Spaniards in stead of Breast-works; for lying behind them, they fir’d continually on the Hollanders; yet Spilbergen Landing with two hundred Men, met a considerable number of Spanish Soldiers, and Horses drawn out on the Shore, from whom they soon fled.

Before the City La Conception lies the Island Quiriquyna, whose Straw Huts Spilbergen laid in Ashes.

At the time when Oliver Van Noort came to an Anchor here, the Governor Franciscus de Quinones Commanded seven hundred Spanish Soldiers to reduce the revolted Chileses.

Four Leagues from Conception lie the rich Gold-Mines Quilacoya, which formerly produc’d great Riches.

Over against the Valley Arauco, which rises out of the Sea, lies the Island Maria, in a large Inlet made by the force of the Waves.

Here grows abundance of Wheat and Barley. The Rivers also afford plenty of Fish, amongst which there is one call’d The Lake-Spider, in whose Eyes are to be seen little Specks, which would exceed Pearl, if they were but hard enough.

Two Spaniards Command forty Natives on Maria, and keep them in such slavery, that they may neither eat Apples, Pears, Grapes, Poultrey, or Sheep, though they are there in great abundance.

Elias Herkmans was once in probability to have taken possession of this Island for the Netherland State, had he not been prevented by an extraordinary occasion.

Between the Towns Conception and Imperial lie the Provinces Arauco, Tucapel, and Puren, inhabited by a valiant People, that often alarm the Spaniards. In each Province Valdivia built a Fort in the Year 1551. eight Leagues distant from one another. He also discover’d the rich Gold-Mines De Ongol, and built the Fort Confines there.

Valdivia taken Prisoner and cruelly put to death by the Indians.

The Natives hereabouts being exceedingly opprest by the Spaniards, fell upon the Fort in Puren, where those in the Garrison, unable to defend themselves, went to Tucapel and from thence to Arauco, to Settle there. Valdivia marching with three hundred Men to the Castle in Tucapel, was so fiercely assaulted at the River Leto, that all his Men were kill’d, and he himself being taken Prisoner, had melted Gold pour’d down his Throat: One Boy onely escaping, brought the news to those in Garrison in the Fort Arauco, who fled to La Conception, as those from Puren to Imperial. Not long after the Lieutenant Francisco de Villagra went with a hundred and sixty Soldier’s to Raquetta, a Promontory against the South Sea in Arauco, to take Revenge for the Death of his General Valdivia; but he also had like to have follow’d the same fate, for he left ninety six Men behind him, and with much ado recover’d La Conception: By which means the victorious Chileses came to be so much fear’d, that the Spaniards forsook the Towns Rica, St. Jago, and Confines, and fortifi’d themselves strongly in Imperial.

Description of Arauco.

Concerning Arauco, it is a small County, twenty Leagues long and seven broad. The Inhabitants thereof are strangely valiant; those that inhabit the Mountains are call’d Pulches, and are generally of a duller Spirit than those that dwell in the Valleys; all of them use long Pikes, Halberds, Bowes and Arrows, Helmets, and Breastplates of Deer-skins, in the Wars; they know when to close and open their Ranks, and stand in good order according to Martial Discipline, which makes the Spanish King receive little benefit from Arauco, though it is full of rich Mines, because those in Garrison being five hundred in number, dare not come out of their Fort.

To Arauco belongs the Island La Mocha, low on the North side, and rocky on the South; against which the Ocean breaks its Billows: in the middle of it rises a split Mountain, out of whose Gap flows a fresh Brook; the fruitful Soyl produces abundance of Pumpcons, Maiz, Potato’s, and all manner of delicious Fruit, as also Oxen, Sheep, and other Cattel, which go grazing up and down in great Herds; the Village that is upon it boasts about fifty Huts, built long of Straw, with a Door in the middle, and round like an Arch on the top.

Van Noon’s and Spilbergen’s Entertainment in Mocha.

Sir Francis Drake and Candish were formerly somewhat roughly Entertain’d here by the Inhabitants: but they shew’d themselves somewhat more civil to the Dutch Admirals, Oliver Van Noort and Joris Spilbergen: The first coming to an Anchor here Anno 1600. put one John Claeszoon (Condemn’d for some great Crime to be Landed on some strange Place) ashore on La Mocha, with a few Trifles; for which being kindly Entertain’d, the Seamen resolv’d to go ashore the next day, who were likewise civilly Treated. The Governor of Mocha coming aboard, Lodg’d a Night in the Ship, and afterwards conducted the Admiral through the Village, but forbad the Seamen from entring any of the Huts; out of which the Women upon the hearing of a sudden noise, came running out, and kneel’d down on the Ground in three Parties, whilest an old Matron came forth with a Pitcher full of Chica, and gave each of the Netherlanders a Cup full to drink, sitting on Blocks in the Fields.

A Man Marries as many Wives here as he can maintain. They all live peaceably one with another, and go Cloth’d with a pair of Breeches, and Frock without Sleeves. The Women tie their Hair in Braids about their Heads, but the Men let it hang down carelesly.

Fifteen years after Spilbergen Landing here with four well Mann’d Boats, found the Shore full of People, who had brought all manner of Provisions to barter against Axes and Knives. The Islanders going aboard, wondred to see the Soldiers drawn out in order, and much more when a Gun was fir’d: They furnish’d the Hollanders with a hundred Sheep, amongst which was one with an extraordinary long Neck, and Legs, Hair, Mouth, and Back like a Cammel.

The Netherland Admiral, Hendrick Brewer, coming to an Anchor on the Coast of Guadalanquen, Anno 1643. was inform’d by the Chileses, that about four years before they had burnt Baldivia, murder’d the Spaniards that were in Garrison, and pour’d melted Gold down the Governor’s Throat and into his Ears, and made a Drinking-Cup of his Scull, and Trumpets of his Shin-bones. Brewer also found some Ruines of the City, which formerly boasted four hundred and fifty Houses, and was not yet so utterly defac’d, but that the two Markets and cross Streets were plainly to be seen, and the Walls gave sufficient testimony of its ancient lustre. The Countrey round about produces Wheat and Barley; neither are there any Mines to be found that produce finer Gold than those which are hereabouts. In the Mouth of the River which runs to Baldivia, lies a small Isle, the Men whereof are gross and fat, and spend their time in Drinking and Dancing, whilest the Women do all the Work.

About the City Osorno, though lying under a cold Climate, is a Soil full of Gold-Mines, where above two thousand Chileses are under the subjection of the Spaniards.

Since Teunis Swarte-Teun conquer’d and ruin’d this Place with small Forces under Spilbergen’s Command, it hath not yet repair’d its Losses: The Ruines of great Buildings are sufficient testimonies of its former splendor.

On the utmost Point of the Island, on which Osorno is built, lies the Village Carel-Mappo, burnt by H. Brewer, An. 1643. for he Landing sixty six Men here, under the Command of the Ensign Blauewenhaen, they Engag’d with ninety Spaniards who betook themselves to the Woods, leaving six Men and fifteen Horses behind them.

Description of the Sea-Coast of Chili.

The Sea-Coast of Chile lies as followeth: It begins on the North with the Valley Copayapo, runs Southerly to the Haven Coquimba, and makes the large Inlet Atongayo; the convenient Harbor Quintero, at the Mouth of the River Concagua, is also to the Southward.

Next Quintero follow the Havens Valparaysa, Topocalma, and Penco, known by several Mountains cover’d with Snow.

The Stream Labapi disembogues also in the Bay Arauco, where the Sea washing over the Shore, makes good Salt.

On the Shore of the River Lebo, Garcias Mendoza built the Town Canete, which not long after was deserted, by reason of the Wars with the Chileses.

From the Haven Carnero a Channel runs to the City Confines: also the River Cauten makes a convenient Harbor before the City Imperial.

Next appear the Streams Tolten, Queule, Valdivia, Chabin and Bueno; and near the Promontory Gallego, Chili ends to the South.

The Province Tucuman.

Eastward up into the Countrey lies the great Province Tucuman, inhabited by three sorts of People, viz. Juries, Diagnitas, and Tucumans, from whom the Countrey receives its Denomination, and juts Northward against the Chicas, belonging to the rich Plate-Countrey Potosi, Eastward towards the Province La Plata, and Westward towards the South Sea.

The Ground about the City St. Jago del Estero, formerly call’d Vares, being the Bishop’s See, and Residence of the Governors, is brackish and sandy. The Citizens are most of them Weavers; the Natives go Cloth’d, and are of an affable Temper and Disposition.

The River Estera yearly overflows the Countrey, which being dung’d with Mud, produces abundance of Maiz, Barley, Wheat, and all manner of Fruits.

The Stream Salado runs the same Course as the Estera, from the West to the East through a Plain-Countrey, but hath brackish Water, and abundance of Fish. Between both these Rivers the Inhabitants get plenty of Honey, Wax, Cotton, and Cochenile. Cattel also increases in abundance, as likewise Deer, and other Venison; and for Fowl, Partridges, Pigeons, and the like; but the Tygers and Lyons do much mischief to the Inhabitants. Their chief Commodities for Trade and Merchandise are Cloth, Cotton and Salt.

Garcias Mendoza built the Towns Neuva Londres in the Province Calchaqui, and Gorduba in the Territory of the Juries, but they were both of them soon deserted.

Behind Peru and La Plata the Plains Omaguaza extend themselves along the Rivers Paraguay and Bermeio, under a temperate Climate, where the Inhabitants go Clothed, and keep abundance of Cattel.

Productions of the Countrey, and Nature of the People.

In most places hereabouts breed wonderful large Baboons, with long Tails and Beards; which being wounded, pull the Arrows out of the Wound, and throw back the same with a grim Countenance at those that shoot them.

The Serpents are likewise so big here, that they swallow whole Deer.

The Rivers breed horrid Crocodiles, and the Woods, Lyons and Tygers.

The Inhabitants differ both in their Customs and Language: the generality of them are continually Drunk. They keep yearly a great Feast, to reconcile the Souls of their Predecessors to them; to which purpose they bring as many roasted Ostriches as they have Souls to Offer to; then Drink three days after, and on the last they carry the Head of a fair Virgin (who freely offers her self to be kill’d) about the Town, making a sad and lamentable noise for the space of an hour; at the end of which they all begin to laugh, and oftentimes fall a killing one another: which Custom is most observ’d amongst the Matarani.

The Abipones go naked in Summer, and in the Winter Clothe themselves with Furrs; they Paint their whole Bodies with Spots like the Tygers, Carve their Bodies all over, making Cut-work of their Skins, into which they stick Ostriches Feathers, as also through their Nostrils, Lips, and Ears, and account Baldness the greatest Beauty. They honor those for their Gods, who patiently endure unsufferable Tortures. The Women hang their Faces and Breasts full of Pearls: They never bring up above two Children, for they kill all above that number.

The Planies range up and down without Habitations under the open Skie.

The Giants Tobae speak a curious Language, but are very salvage and cruel. Anno 1571. Erouaca, a prime Man amongst them, devour’d his own Sister, Wife, Mother, and Children. When they design to go a Journey, they roast their Sons and Daughters, to serve them for Provisions in stead of other Flesh; and their Sick are upon the least Complaint bury’d alive.

The Caaguiaares, who dwell in Huts in great Woods, feed on Woorms, Mice, Apes, Tygers, and wild Honey; most of them are bunch-back’d, and go clad with the Skins of wild Beasts.

CHAP. III.
Magellanica.

Several Voyages to Magellanica.

Northward against Chili and Rio de la Plata juts the Countrey, which from Ferdinand Magaglianus is wrongly call’d Magellanica; to which several Voyages have been made by sundry People from the North-Sea to the Southern Ocean, divers Steering still new Courses: for some follow’d the Straights of Magellan; others Sail’d more or less South-West: By which means Le Mair open’d a new Passage between Mauritius and the States-Island; and H. Brewer, a Way below the States-Island; yet all Steer’d their Course Westerly, so that none of them return’d the same Way, except Elias Herkmans and Capt. Ladrillero, the last of whom coming from Chili to go to the North-Sea, met with such Storms, that he was forc’d to Tack about, and stand back again to Chili, as Herkmans did from Chili to Brasile.

Pedro Sarmiento’s Expedition.

Anno 1579. Peter Sarmiento weigh’d Anchor with two Ships, and Sailing from Callao de Lima through the Straights of Magellan to Spain, ran by the Isles Felix and Amber, discover’d in one Inlet eighty five Isles, most of them desolate, sounded all the Havens, found abundance of Oysters with Pearls in them, call’d an Inlet Francisco, and a Mountain on the right-hand, Punta de la Gente Rubra, because the Inhabitants thereof painted their Bodies red, found the Havens Misericordia and Candelaria, and the Island Sataynes, where five of the Natives gave him an Account of Sir Francis Drake, for whom he Cruis’d, and had sight of a snowy Mountain, whose top vomited Fire. On the Promontory Ana he erected a woodden Cross, and laid a Writing under the same, wherein he advertis’d all Persons to take notice, that Pope Alexander the Sixth had freely given the King of Spain all the Countreys thereabouts. Not long after he Steer’d through the Straights of Magellan along the Coast of Brasile, to Spain.

The Sea-Coast from Chili to Magellanica.

Concerning the Sea-Coast, which extends from Chili to Magellanica, it is as followeth: Next to the Promontory Felis lie Cypriaen, Clara, Cabo de las Islas, the Island Socora, the Haven Domingo, the Point Gallego, the Road Stevan, the Cape Andres, and Ochavario, and the Valley Nuestra Sennora, between two Hills. Along the Southern Ocean lie Abra de San Guillen, Punta del Gada, Los Reyes, Innocentes, Augustine, Roia, Catalina, Amaro, and Victoriano; before which the three Isles call’d The Sorlings, are seen in the Mouth of the Straights against the South Sea.

Magaglianus Steering hither, Winter’d within the Straights in an Inlet call’d St. Julian, stay’d two Moneths before the Mouth of the River Santa Cruiz, where he took abundance of Fish, and from thence ran along the Shore to the Promontory Las Virgines, which receiv’d that Denomination, because it was discover’d on the Day Consecrated to St. Ursula and her eleven thousand Virgins: Going a League up into the Countrey, he found a Hut, in which above two hundred dead Bodies were bury’d after a strange manner, and on the Shore a great Whale, driven on the Sands by a Storm. He nam’d the Countrey to the Southward, Terra del Fuego, because from the Promontory Severino in the Night he espy’d several Fires. He was exceedingly delighted with the pleasant Coasts on each side of the Straights, which were the more pleasant, by reason of several Hills overgrown with sweet-smelling Trees, whose tops lay cover’d with Snow.

The Expedition of Garcias Loaysa, Alcazova, and others.

Magaglianus was follow’d, Anno 1525. by Garcias Loaysa, who Sailing into the Straights near the Promontory Virgines, endur’d great Colds; in the Haven St. George he found store of green Cinamon: The People he reported to be of so monstrous a stature, that they might well be accounted Giants; some of whom went naked, others wore a Net of Feathers made fast about their Wastes, and others a loose Garment all over their Bodies. Loaysa gave this Countrey, inhabited by Giants, the Denomination of Terra del Patagoni. He judg’d the Straights of Magellan to be a hundred and ten Spanish Miles long between the two Promontories, Virgines at the North Sea, and Deseado at the Southern Ocean. Within lie three Inlets, which have seven Leagues in breadth.

Simon Alcazova Sailing hither nine years after Loaysa, shunn’d the Land on the left-side of the Straights, because it lay most under Water, and was forc’d by his Men to return to the Haven Leones, where he and all his Seamen were put to death.

Not long after the Bishop of Placentia fitted out three Sail, which entring the Straights, Anno 1540. lost their Admiral; the Vice-Admiral Wintering at the Inlet Las Zorras, (so call’d, because they took many Foxes on a Champain Countrey without Trees) return’d to Spain without any farther success: the third Ship with much ado arriv’d also at Arequipa.

The Voyages of Hawkins, Drake, and Candish.

The English Captain, Richard Hawkins, also Sailing hither, found the Land on the South side of the Straights, most broken, and in some places a few Huts.

Anno 1578. Sir Francis Drake Sailing hither along the Coast of Brasile, Landing on an Island in the Mouth of the Straights, kill’d above three thousand Birds. Sailing from hence he was miserably toss’d in the South Sea, and discover’d about the middle of the Straights, that the Current out of the Southern and Northern Ocean met at the place where a great Bay bends Southwardly: To three Isles he gave the Name of Elizabeth, Bartholomew, and George, and drove three Weeks without making any Sail, in snowy, misty, and rainy Weather, falling amongst dangerous Rocks, and at last Anchor’d in the Haven Health, which he so call’d, because his sick and wearied Men being refresh’d there, he set Sail from thence and return’d home.

Captain Thomas Candish following Sir Francis Drake eight years after, found near a Creek within the City Philip-stadt, built there by the Spaniards, to secure the Passage out of the Northern to the Southern Ocean for themselves; to which purpose they held four hundred Men in Garrison in the said City, which lying near a pleasant Wood, was defended by four Bulwarks, each fortifi’d with a Brass Gun: But the Spaniards not being able to endure the Cold, nor get in their Harvest, which was continually spoil’d by the Natives, were so pinch’d with Hunger, that after three years stay many of them dy’d in their Houses, which caus’d a filthy Stink, and consequently a vile Distemper, not unlike the Small-pox; at last twenty three of them, amongst whom were two Women, judg’d it convenient to bury their great Guns, and march away with their Musquets; a whole Year they travell’d in great want, feeding on the Leaves of Trees, wild Roots, and Fowls which they now and then kill’d; at last they resolv’d to travel by Land to Rio de la Plata, but never any news was heard what became of them, onely one Spaniard, call’d Ferdinand, being stray’d from the rest, was taken by Candish, to whom he gave the foremention’d Relation. Candish entring Philip-stadt, found a Gibbet, on which hung a Malefactor in Chains, a Church, the Houses full of famish’d Bodies, and four Brass Guns, which he digg’d out of the Ground. From hence he ran to a fresh-water River (which disembogues into the Straights,) whose Banks are inhabited by cruel Cannibals, and the Countrey all about plain Pasture Grounds, whereas most part of the Shore in the Straights is very mountainous. Candish Landing, found Spanish Knives and Stilletto’s amongst the Man-eaters, and lay a whole Moneth at Anchor in the western Mouth of Magellanica, by reason of great Storms, feeding on Mussles, Cockles, and Fowl; and from thence Sail’d about the World, returning home at last with a Booty of twenty Tun of Gold.

Anno 1599. Simon de Cordes Commanding five Netherland Vessels, entring the Straights of Magellan, found in the green Bay, Mussles of a Span long, abundance of Ducks and Geese, and a great many Trees not unlike Laurel, they being onely bigger, and had a sharp biting Shell. The Wind blew exceeding hard here over the Rocks, insomuch that they were sometimes driven from four Anchors.

The Bird Pinguyn.

A few Moneths after Oliver van Noord follow’d Cordes, and Anchor’d near the Pinguyn Isles, the biggest whereof is call’d Castemme, and the least Talke; the Inhabitants thereof dwell in Caverns under Ground, and feed on the Birds Pinguyns, of whose Skins they make Mantles. These Birds weigh generally fifteen or sixteen Pound, have black Backs, white Bellies, very thick Skins, long Bills like Ravens, short thick Necks, two plum’d Fins in stead of Wings, black Feet like a Goose, and delicate Flesh, notwithstanding they feed on Fish, after which they swim very swift with the fore-mention’d Fins, which hang down on each side along their Bodies when they walk upright on the Shore; they sit generally four together in their Holes, made after such a manner, that a Man which knows not of them, may ere he be aware, sink up to the Knees in the same, and be bitten terribly by the Legs. Cordes his Seamen got in two hours time above nine hundred of these Birds, whilest he discover’d the salvage People Enoo, which inhabit the Countrey Cossi, and are divided into the Families Kemenetes, Kennekas, and Caraike; the first inhabited the Territory Carray; the second Caramay; and the third, Morine: all of them Paint their Cheeks and Forehead. Farther into the Countrey dwell the Trimenes, a gigantick sort of People, eleven Foot high, who maintain continual Wars with their Neighbors.

Great Discoveries of the Netherlanders about the Magellan Straights.

Moreover, Noord discover’d several Inlets full of Ice and fresh Water in the Straights of Magellan, whither the United Netherlands have since sent the Admirals William Schouten, Joris Spilbergen, and Jaques le Heremite. The common opinion, that the Countrey on the South side of Magellan is of the Main Continent, Experience hath manifested; for Schouten found the same, Anno 1616. who Sailing from Porto Desire, left the Straights of Magellan on the right-hand, and Sail’d Southerly through whitish Water, and in fifty four Degrees discover’d a Channel eight Leagues broad, through which ran a strong Current. The Coast rose with high Mountains, whose tops were cover’d with Snow. The utmost Point was call’d Mauritius, from the Prince of Orange; the broken Coast on the other side, The States-Island; and the Straights it self, Le Maire, upon the Request of the Merchant Jacob Le Maire, whose Father Isaac was chief owner of the two Ships of which Schouten was Commander, who found so many Whales here, that he could scarce Steer clear of them, they swimming by hundreds in a Shoal. The Sea-pies, much bigger than Swans, suffer’d themselves to be caught by the Hands of the Sea-men. Moreover he call’d the barren grey Rocks, and others lesser, lying North-East from the Promontory Hoorn, Barnevields Isles. Sailing beyond the Point Hoorn, he was toss’d by the vast Billows that came rowling out of the West.

It was no sooner nois’d abroad, that the Netherlanders had found the Straights Le Maire, but the Spanish King Philip immediately sent two Carvels thither, under the Command of Garcias de Nodal, who took an exact Account of the Heads, Roads, and Inlets belonging to the fore-mention’d Straights, and return’d without performing any other Exploits.

Diego Flores his unsuccessful Voyage to the Straights of Magellan.

Diego Flores Steer’d four years before Candish to the Straights of Magellan with twenty three Sail of Ships, Mann’d with three thousand five hundred Seamen, besides five hundred old Netherland Soldiers, with which he unhappily weigh’d Anchor from Cales; for before he got out of sight of the Spanish Coast, he lost five of his Ships and eight hundred Men; yet prosecuting his Voyage, he stay’d during the Winter Season on the Coast of Brasile and was surpris’d by so vehement a Storm, near the Island Catalina, that a company of Women, sent under the Charge of Peter Sarmiento to Settle in the Straights of Magellan, were all cast away, with the greatest part of the Ammunition and Provisions. The English Admiral Fenton took three Ships of this Fleet from Flores, two were cast away in the River La Plata, and one ran back to Spain, whilest Flores came into the Straights of Magellan on the last day of March, at which time the whole Countrey lay cover’d with Snow; wherefore seeing no hopes of finding out any place to Settle Sarmiento upon, he stood back with eight Sail to Brasile, and in his Return burnt three French Ships, took two more, and Sail’d home. But his Lieutenant Diego Ribera, and the Governor Peter Sarmiento, Landed the Year after Flores his departure, with four hundred Men, thirty Women, and Provisions for eight Moneths, in the Straights of Magellan; from whence Ribera Sail’d back, whilest Sarmiento built on the North side of the Mouth of the Straights, the Town Nombre de Jesus; and fifty Leagues farther in the narrowest place, Philip-stadt, with four Bulwarks; the Inhabitants of which (as is before related) were destroy’d by Famine.

Description of Terra del Fuego.

Terra del Fuego, already mention’d, opposite to the Countrey of the Patagones, lying the South between the Straights of Magellan, is a broken Countrey, with high Mountains full of Trees, and wash’d by pleasant Rivulets: four Foot deep in the Ground it begins to be all Rocky. The Air is troubled with exceeding great Winds out of the West. The Inhabitants are pale Countenanc’d, but Paint their Bodies with divers Colours; they have long, thick, and black Hair, and very sharp Teeth; the Men go stark naked; the Women cover their secret Parts with a piece of Leather, and wear Strings full of Shells about their Necks; some also Mantle themselves with the Skins of wild Beasts, which affords but little warmth against the Cold that is here in Winter. Their Huts consist of Trees, and are made round at bottom, and sharp on the top like a Tent, having onely a Hole for the Smoak to go out at; they are digg’d three Foot deep into the Ground, and also heap’d round with Earth; within the Huts nothing is to be found but Baskets with Fishing Utensils and Stone Hooks. Their offensive Arms the Men always carry about with them, because they always maintain Wars with their Neighbors. They handle a Quarter-staff very dexterously, are good Slingers and Bowemen; they also use Lances with sharp Stone Points. Moreover they make Boats of the Bark of Trees, which they first cut out into a Form, then sewing it together, bow the same after the manner of a Boat, which rises before and behind, and being fifteen or sixteen Foot long, can carry eight Men, going exceeding swift. These People are not onely beastial in their Practices, but also Murderers.

Lastly, besides the Straights of Le Maire, Henrick Brewer hath found a new Passage to the Eastward above the States-Island, out of the Northern Ocean to the South Sea.

CHAP. IV.
The unknown South-Land.

The unknown South-Land extends with several Points to the Southern Ocean, which have been more seen than discover’d by divers Nations.

Opposite to the East-India Island Gilolo, lies Terra des Papous, to which Jacob Le Maire gave the Denomination of New Guinee.

The English Commander, Richard Hawkins, Sailing to the Southward behind Papou, found the Inhabitants black like Negro’s: round about appear several Isles and convenient Harbors. Herrera places here on the East, the Countrey Agnanda, the Road St. Jago, the Island Los Crespos, the Haven Andreas, the River Virginum, and the little Isle La Vellena, before the Mouth of the Stream Augustine. Next you meet Easterly with the Rivers St. Peter and St. Paul, the Havens Hieronymus, the Isles Punta Salida, Abrigo, Malagente, and Maure de Dios, inhabited by white People.

Discoveries in Terra Australis incognita.

The first that discover’d New Guinee, Anno 1529. was Alvares de Savedra, who, as also several others besides him, suppos’d that some of the Islands Solomons border New Guinee.

Eighteen of the many Solomon Isles exceed the rest, of which some are three hundred Leagues in circumference, some two hundred, others one hundred, and some fifty: All that are inhabited have a fruitful Soil, producing all manner of Provisions, particularly Hogs and Poultrey. The Natives differ very much one from another, for some are black, others white or tawny.

The fore-mention’d Hawkins in his Voyage towards the Straights of Magellan, supposing it by estimation to be fifty Leagues from the Main Coast of America, discover’d forty Degrees to the Southward of the Equinoctial Line, with a Westerly Wind, the unknown South-Land; which he found to consist of low Land, and to be inhabited, by reason of the many Fires which he saw ashore in the Night.

The Spanish Commander, Peter Fernandes de Quiro, and the Admiral Lodowick Paes de Torres, have made a farther Discovery of this Countrey; for Landing on the South-Land, they met with several People, some whereof were brown, others white, and others sallow; some had long and lank, others short and curl’d Hair: They acknowledg’d no King or supream Governor, nor were Govern’d by any Laws, neither had they any Wall’d Towns or Forts; but being divided amongst themselves, they continually Encountred one another with Darts, Clubs, and Staves. Their Houses built of Wood, were cover’d with the Leaves of Palm-Trees. Their Housholdstuff consisted in Earthen Dishes, Pots, Ropes, Fish-nets, Flutes, Drums, and varnish’d Spoons. Their Gardens were neatly kept. Near their Temples were Burying-places. They Row’d very swift in little Boats. Their Bread, well tasted, was made of long thick Roots, either roasted or boyl’d.

Fertility, Plenty, and Riches of the Countrey.

Here also grow sorts of Platano’s, great abundance of Almonds, Oranges, Citrons, thick Sugar-Canes, Palm-Trees, which yield Wine, Cocoa’s, and Obos, in taste not much unlike Quinces; but the greatest benefit which they receive, is from the Cocoa Nuts, the Pulp whereof is delicious Meat and Drink; the outermost Shells whereof serve for Cups or Dishes, the inner for Ropes and Cordage; of the Leaves they make Sails and Mats, and cover their Houses with the same; of the Body, Oars, Clubs, Pikes, and Props for their Houses.

Besides several sorts of Pot-herbs, here grow very high Coleworts and Bledo’s.

The Countrey also abounds with Pigeons, Partridges, Ducks, Goats, Hogs, and other ordinary Cattel and Fowls.

The Rivers afford them Souls, Salmon, Thornback, Sea-Cocks, Eels, Gurnets, and several other unknown Fishes, very delicate and wholsom.

This Countrey also produces Nutmegs, Mastick, Peppers, Ginger, Cinamon, Gold, Silver, Pearls, Silk, Sugar, Anniseed, Honey, Wax, Ebony-wood, Turpentine, Lime-pits, and Marble.

Philips-Bay bends twenty Leagues into the Countrey, hath a safe Harbor, and excellent Ground, consisting of black Sand. Two great Rivers discharge their Waters into the said Bay, round about which are pleasant Woods, full of Quails, Parrakito’s, Parrots, Nightingales, and Bulfinches, which Sing very sweetly. The Blossoms, especially of Orange-Trees, and the Herb Alvaca, yield an odoriferous smell. The wholsom Air adds vigor to aged People.

Abel Tasman’s Expedition to Terra Australis Incognita.

The Southlander’s desperate Attempt upon Tasman’s Ships.

Fernandes de Quir delivering the fore-mention’d Account to Philip the Second, King of Spain, mov’d him to Plant the unknown South-Land, and the rather, because he had not found any snowy Mountains, drown’d Land, Crocodiles, Muschito’s, or any hurtful Creature, yet was not regarded; so that no Spaniard hath since that time set Foot on the unknown South-Land. But the East-India Company undertaking the Design with great eagerness, sent thither two Ships, viz. the Hemskerk and Sea-Cock, under the Command of Abel Tasman, to make a farther Discovery of the said South-Land: Anno 1642. on the twelfth of August, they weigh’d Anchor from Batavia, Sail’d through the Straights of Sunda to Maurice-Island, where they Anchor’d in the North-West Haven before the Castle Frederick-Henrick, on the fifth of September in the fore-mention’d Year. On the eighth of Octob. Tasman stood over to the South-Land, near which he was surpris’d by a violent Storm; afterwards, on the twenty fifth of November, he discover’d a barren Shore, against which the Sea beat very furiously; and Steering along this Coast, he found a convenient Inlet, but was forc’d by the hard Weather to stand off to Sea again; yet not long after approaching the Shore, he saw great hollow Trees, and round about them abundance of Mussle-shells, and from the Wood heard a shrill noise of People Singing: Going to the same place again, he put the Orange Flag on a Pole, Carv’d with the East-India Companies Arms, and call’d the Inlet Frederick-Henrick, the whole Coast, Anthony van Diemen. Sailing from thence Eastward, he on the eighteenth of December discovered a convenient Haven, where sending his Sloop to discover the Shore, he came back in the Evening, being follow’d by a Boat, which approach’d nearer and nearer, but Night coming upon him, he could not well discern what they were that pursu’d him, but heard the cry of hoarse Voices, and a shrill noise like that of a Trumpet, which the Netherland Seamen answer’d by hollowing, and blowing on their Trumpets, and at last firing a Gun, the Southlanders made a hideous noise, and blowing their Horns, return’d ashore. Tasman hereupon call’d his Watch, laid Hangers, Pikes, and Musquets ready Charg’d, upon the Decks. The next day the Southlanders came in several Boats, two and two ty’d together, and cover’d with Planks, towards the Ships; the Gunner of the Hemskerk going with six Men in a Boat to help mount some Guns in the Sea-Cock, were betwixt both Ships set upon by the Southlanders, who approacht with a hideous noise, kill’d four of the Hollanders with long Poles, and forc’d the other three to save themselves by swimming; which they had no sooner done, but they Row’d with incredible swiftness towards the Shore, insomuch that they were out of the reach of their Guns before they could make ready to fire at them. Tasman finding that there was no good to be done here, since he hazarded the Lives of his Seamen against a company of wild People, he set Sail, but was follow’d by divers Boats, at which he fir’d his After-Guns with pieces of Iron and Stones, which killing some of them, made the rest return. In the midst of the Boats, which were ty’d two and two together, sat the Commander, who encourag’d the Rowers; they all us’d Clubs without Points.

These People were gross of Body, undaunted, strong, and of a tawny colour; the Hair of their Heads stroak’d up round, was ty’d up on their Crown, on which stuck a stiff white Feather; about their Necks hung a square Plate; they wore in stead of Cloaks, square pieces of Cloth, made fast before on their Breasts.

Tasman, by reason of his rough Entertainment call’d this Harbor, Murderers-Bay, and afterwards Sail’d along the Shore till the fifth of January 1643. on which Day he dropt Anchor near a little Rocky Island, from which fell two Streams, with a great noise into the Sea. The Inhabitants, a strong People, beckned to the Seamen to come on Shore; some lean’d on thick Clubs, others Fenc’d one with another. Tasman sending his Sloop ashore for Water with two Drakes, return’d without any, not being able to Land, by reason of the hollow Sea near the Shore; wherefore Sailing from thence he discover’d two low Isles, which were full of Woods of very tall Trees; from the biggest whereof came a little Boat, sharp before and behind, in which three sallow Men, sitting behind one another, Row’d with great swiftness towards the Hemskerk; whereupon Tasman commanded all his Men to go under the Hatches, that the three Southlanders might not be afraid to come aboard; he also threw a piece of Linnen out of his Cabbin Window, which one of them, leaping into the Sea, took up, and as a sign of thankfulness, laid the same on his Head, and being hereby emboldned, they came nearer the Rudder, where they took up a Knife, ty’d to a piece of Wood, out of the Water, and return’d the Seamen a Fishhook of Mother-of-Pearl, ty’d to a Cotton Line. Approaching the Shore, they saw abundance of People running along, with two little Flags on Sticks. Some of the Natives came in their Boats close up with Tasman’s Ship; and one more bold than the rest entring the same, was found to be a tall Man with a broad black Beard, and green Leaves about his Neck, who sat down on the Deck with his Legs under him, and bow’d down his Head oftentimes very low: Tasman returning his Civility, took him by the Hand to Treat him in his Cabbin, but a Dog which was in the Ship Barking, he grew fearful, and went into his Boat again. Several other Southlanders swam aboard, and others brought Pisang and Clappes in their Boats. Against the Evening a great Vessel, surrounded with lesser Boats, came Rowing towards the Hemskerk, the Men making a great noise; the Seamen fearing some Design, ran all to their Arms, but were convinc’d of their Friendship by the Gifts they Presented them with from the Governor of the Island. The next day a strange Boat came near the Sea-Cock, viz. two Sloops, which being ty’d together, and cover’d with Boards, carry’d several Men, Commanded by a Captain, by them call’d Orangkay: On the midst of the Boards which cover’d the two Boats, stood a Hut made of Rushes, and cover’d over with Pisang Leaves; the Sails being made of Mats, caus’d it to Sail very swiftly. Round about this Sloop Row’d lesser Boats, out of which loud Acclamations were heard, every one crying out, Hael, Hael: during which noise, those Southlanders which were already come aboard, sat still on the Decks, which made Tasman think that their King himself was coming to give him a Visit, which accordingly fell out, for he came and Presented him with several Hogs, Poultrey, Clappes and Pisang, all cover’d with white Cloths.

Interview between Tasman and the Southlander King.

This Southlandish King was Habited in a Suit, the Stuff whereof resembled Chinese Paper, doubled and pasted together, and was attended by a great Train of Men, Women, and Children, all of them as black as a Coal; some of them swam after, and others follow’d him in Boats.

These Southlanders barter’d their Clothes and Necklaces, which consisted of Mother-of-Pearl and white Cockles, and Fishhooks made also of Mother-of-Pearl, against Nails, Knives, and the like Trifles.

Tasman caus’d a Shirt, Breeches, Doublet, and Hat, to be put on an old Orangkay; who being thus Cloth’d, stood a considerable time admiring of himself, and was also much wonder’d at by his Subjects; but going into the Countrey, he came back without his Clothes.

Another Orangkay being Presented with a Rummer of Wine, pour’d out the Wine, and setting the Rummer on his Head, went away with great joy.

Some of the Governors view’d the Ships, not onely above, but also below the Decks, and being brought to the Guns, they desir’d to know the use of them; whereupon one being Discharg’d, it so affrighted them, that had they not been held, they had all leap’d overboard.

Provisions were daily brought by the Southlanders to the Hollanders in great Vessels, surrounded by many lesser; still as they put their Oars into the Water, they made a hideous noise.

Tasman bringing some empty Vessels upon the Deck, thereby to make them understand that he wanted fresh Water, the Orangkays pointed to the Shore; whither they went with two Boats, which return’d without Water, the Inhabitants themselves being forc’d to dig Pits to get the same.

Mean while other Southlanders coming aboard, the Pilot and Boatswain’s Boy blow’d on their Trumpets, another play’d on a Flute, and a fourth on a Violin, whilst some of the Seamen Dancing, so amaz’d the Natives, that they stood like senseless Creature, gaping with open Mouth upon them.

Tasman looking into a Grammar which contain’d the Language of the Solomons Isles, found that many words which were us’d by these People, had a great similitude with those of that Language.

Besides these Men, there came likewise a great many Women aboard, all of them extraordinary tall, especially two, who might justly be stil’d Giantesses; one whereof had Mustacho’s; both ran, and embracing the Chirurgeon Henrick Haelbos, desir’d carnal Copulation with him, and seem’d to quarrel one with another about him: Others confidently put their Hands into the Hollanders Breeches, their Husbands giving consent thereunto: All of them had thick, curl’d, black Hair, which they colour’d red, and comb’d with ten little round Sticks ty’d together on the top, and left wide like Teeth at the bottom; yet some of them let their Hair hang down in long braided Locks; they shave their upper Lips, but keep a square Beard on their Chin; yet amongst the old People there were some whose Cheeks were overgrown with Hair: Their manner of shaving is with the Teeth of certain Fish made fast to a Stick; they all went bare-headed, except some few, who ty’d a square piece of Stuff, wrought of Leaves or Feathers, above their Eyes against the Sun; the upper parts of their Bodies were all naked, but about their Middle some wore a Girdle, others a Mat of Clappes Leaves, others a Cloth not unlike Chinese Paper, about the lower parts of their Bodies. The Womens Apparel differ’d little from the Mens, excepting that their Aprons reach’d farther down, viz. to their Knees. They barter’d their Clothes against Nails. Some of the Orangkays, being Entertain’d in the Cabbin, wonder’d to see a Bullet that was Discharg’d from the Quarter deck, fall into the Water at so great a distance. They wore about their Necks Mother-of-Pearl, white Cockles, sweet-smelling Flowers, green Leaves, or the Nails which they had gotten of the Hollanders: Some of the aged Women wanted both their little Fingers, and the young ones the upper Joints of them, which the old Men also wanted: Haelbos pointing at the Stump, ask’d the reason of it, but one of them laying his Hand under his Chin, made strange Signs, out of which he could apprehend nothing.

On the twenty third of January, a second time Tasman went ashore for Water, carrying Spades and Pick-axes with him, to dig Pits with. Two of the Hollanders Boats going close together, in each of which were three Southlanders, Tasman call’d to his Rowers to pull stoutly; which the Southlanders in Tasman’s Boat observing to tend to their Rowing the swifter, laugh’d and hooted at their Countrey-men that were in the Sea-Cocks Boat, when they chanc’d to get beyond them. Tasman in his going ashore discover’d several Isles at a distance, was kindly Entertain’d, and towards the Evening carry’d by four Men through the Water, on a Mat made fast betwixt two Poles, to his Sloop, whither they also brought nine Hogs, and fresh Water digg’d out of Pits.

Tasman being got about the Point of the Island, saw the Hemskerk under Sail; wherefore Rowing aboard the Sea-Cock, he was inform’d that she had slipt her Anchor; whereupon following her, he got sight of another green Island the next day, along the Shore whereof ran several People with Sticks, on which hung white Cloths: some of them came aboard, and brought with them what Provisions the Island afforded. The Inhabitants barter’d Clappes, Pisang, Fowls, Hogs, Mother-of-Pearl Fish-hooks, Stone Axes, little Stools, great Clubs, with a black Point as long as a Man’s Arm, and hooked, against Trifles. The Hollanders were also stor’d here with fresh Water. The People both in Language, Habit, and Customs, were very like those of the first Island, but were not altogether so courteous. One of the Southlanders stealing a Half-pike out of the Boat was forc’d by his Companions to restore the same.

The fore-mention’d Haelbos relates, That going ashore with some Soldiers, he saw their Houses, which he found to be built after a strange manner, viz. some of them were round like Towers, Wider at top than at bottom, and without any Holes for Air, but all built close of Canes, which were stuck in the Ground; other Huts were cover’d with a long Roof of Pisang or Clappes Leaves, resting on Posts; under which kind of Building Haelbos shelter’d himself against a mighty Shower of Rain, found divers young Men and Women sitting on Mats, and an old Woman, blind through Age, lying by them on the Ground, and Fanning her self with Pisang Leaves: The Men going away, signifi’d thereby a kind of Invitation to the Hollanders to go to the Women, who not receiving the Entertainment they expected, rose altogether on a sudden, and Singing, Danc’d about the Hollanders. The Men had on their Shoulders and Breasts, Scars of half an Inch deep, and an Inch long; upon some of which, being fresh and bleeding, the Flyes sat. They eat after a strange manner, for stripping off the outmost Rinds of the Clappes with their Teeth, and breaking the hard Shell against their Elbows, they pull out the Kernel, and eat the same. Whatever Flesh-meat they eat, they never throughly boyl or roast it, but make it onely just warm. They sleep on the Ground upon Mats, and lay their Heads on a little woodden Cricket with four Feet. They take great pride in their Hair, and those that have not long Hair of their own, use Perukes.

Tasman steering his Course towards the high Coast that lay before this Island, was follow’d by several small Vessels from the adjacent Shore, of which some carry’d a Bough of Clappes or Pisang, with white Veins at the ends; but seeing the Ships Sail from them, they threw the same overboard. Tasman standing Westerly, discover’d three Isles, near the last whereof the Sea broke exceedingly, which the Hollanders not without great danger had approached in the Night: after which they discover’d to Leeward of them, a high Coast, which extended it self a great way, but the Sea went so rough, that they durst not venture near the Land; besides, the Sea went very high on a Bank, first ten, then five, three and a half, and again ten, fourteen, and seven Fathom deep; and oftentimes a Man might see the Ground, insomuch that they kept out the Boats belonging to the Hemskerk, which was in most danger, to carry them aboard of the Sea-Cock, if the first should chance to split. Lastly, getting over the Bank, they saw very high Land to Windward, and many hilly Isles to Leeward; the Sea also was full of blind Rocks and Shelves, so that they were in danger every hour, and the rather, because the Wind blew hard every day; yet at last losing sight of Land, they steer’d their Course Westerly in five Degrees Southward of the Line, towards New Guinee. On the two and twentieth of March they discover’d low Land full of Woods of tall Trees, surrounded with a company of Isles, against some of which the Sea brake with great violence, insomuch that they were again in great danger, especially when they were got amongst eighteen Isles, between which the Water being shallow, and the Current running very strongly, drove the Ships towards the Shore: Whilest they were Tacking to and again to get beyond the Shelves, a little Vessel, carrying a great Weathercock on her Star-board, came from the Shore, Row’d by seven Men, who sat on Boards which lay over the same; they were of a brown Complexion, onely girt about with a hairy Girdle, made fast on the top of their Heads; under their Feet they also wore something in stead of Shoes, about their Necks hung Flowers, and their Bodies were Painted black: Among the seven, one who was very fat, and whose Head was adorn’d with two Feathers, stood up and proffer’d the Seamen two Clappes, in return whereof Tasman gave them a Box of Nails and a piece of Sail-cloth, which sinking under Water, an aged Man div’d for the same, and bringing it up, gave it to his six Companions, who made no shew of thankfulness. Their Arms consisted in Bowes and Arrows. Their Clappes they call’d Anieuw, as the other Islanders had done.

Sailing from hence, they discover’d two low Islands full of Trees; and three Leagues from them, on their Star-board, a high Coast, and on the other side a great Island, whither they drove with a small Gale; approaching the same, two very small Boats came towards the Hemskerk; the biggest of the two carry’d six Men, and the least three, all of them very deform’d; they went stark naked, onely their Yards were ty’d up with a String on their Bellies, and about their Arms hung Chains of Mother-of-Pearl; they were Coal-black, onely red about the Mouth, which redness was occasion’d by the chewing of Pisang; in their Hair stuck woodden Combs, and on their Foreheads green Leaves; but in each Boat was one who had a bruised Reed made fast in his Neck like a Plume; the biggest Vessel was Painted with strange Shapes of Men and Beasts; they us’d red Bowes and Arrows, and having call’d to the Seamen, they Row’d back again to the Shore; which Tasman left a Stern of him, and ran between the Main Coast (by all suppos’d to be New Guinee) and several great Islands, that lay scatter’d along before the Main Coast; from whence came four small Boats, adorn’d with Imagery like Serpents, but kept without Gun-shot from the Ships; at last one leaping overboard, swam to the smallest Boat, out of which one swam back in his stead to the other, and afterwards came to the Hemskerks side; he was a black Man, wore Leaves before his Privities, and Armlets about his Elbows; through the Gristle of his Nose stuck a white Bone Bodkin, sharp at the ends, and of a Fingers length, and about his Neck a String full of Cockle-shells.

Tasman Sailing on along the Main Coast, met with eighteen Boats more, the Rowers whereof laid their Oars upon their Heads, and not without strange Gestures call’d aloud, and invited the Hollanders to come ashore: On the Sterns and Heads of these Boats were likewise divers Shapes Painted, upon a white Ground; in some were two, and in others three, four, and five Men; eight of them going into the Hollanders Boats, were made Drunk with Arrack. These Southlanders went stark naked, some onely covering their secret Parts with Leaves; their Skins were black, onely on their Foreheads they drew a red Stroke, which reach’d to their Ears; their brown curl’d Hair was by some colour’d grey, by some red, some let it hang loose over their Sholdiers, others ty’d the same in a Tuft on their Crown, cover’d with a Cap of Pisang Leaves, others wore their Hair scarce two Fingers long, and through the Gristle of their Nose, a piece of Cane or Quill, and a broad Beard without Mustacho’s; they had nothing to barter but large Snail-shells, on which they made a strange noise; and whatsoe’re they receiv’d, they first smell’d on it like Dogs: they fancy’d not Nails, as all the other Southlanders had done. Their manner of Fishing was thus: They ty’d several half Clappes-shells, made fast like a Chain, to a long Reed, shook the same to and again on the Water, to gather the Fish together. In the Boats lay Planks of an oval fashion, which by Ropes ty’d in the middle they held before them in stead of Shields. When these Southlanders went from the Ships, one of them threatned to beat the Seamen, shaking his great Club at them; whereupon they all Row’d with great speed to the Shore, whilest one in every Boat knockt with a Staff against the sides, just as if they had beat an Alarm. Amongst them one had barter’d for an old Doublet, with which he shew’d many antick Tricks, putting it on the wrong way, sometimes on his Head, then his Feet into the two Arm-holes, and anon the Button-holes behind on his Back.

The Ships Sailing from hence, ran along a broken Coast, and on the twelfth of April were so terribly shaken by an Earthquake, which lasted an hour and a half, that they seem’d shivering to pieces in the Water, as if they had ran against a Rock, notwithstanding they could not fathom Ground with their longest Line. Somewhat farther they discover’d a burning Mountain on an Island, between which and the Main (on which stood also a very high Mountain) they steering their Course, came into a white Water, mov’d by a strong River from the Continent; and coming to an Anchor before the Island Jamna, they saw the Isles Moa and Arimoa before them. The Jamneans calling New Guinee by the Name of Belah, inform’d the Hollanders, that they Warr’d continually with the Inhabitants thereof. These People being also Coal-black, some of them had loose curl’d Hair, hanging down over their Shoulders in long Braids, and others had onely two thick Locks, which cover’d their Ears; all of them wore four Feathers on their Heads: the Men pull’d out their Beards, and hung a great Bone Ring through their Ears, at which also hung a Shell like a Spur; most of them had red Roses ty’d about their Heads, and a Necklace of Hogs Teeth about their Necks; under their Navels they wore Girdles, a handful and a half broad, and about their Wastes Strings full of Shells, or Sea-Cockles, to which a small Lappet was ty’d, and hung down before their Privities; but because it was but two Fingers broad, and mov’d to an again by the Wind, their Nakedness appear’d to those that took notice thereof; through the Gristle of their Noses they wore a Hogs Tooth, or the Splinter of a Cane. Upon the Stern of their small Boats was the Shape of a little Lyon. One of these Islanders imitated the Hollanders when they spoke, endeavoring to repeat their words after them, and therefore was call’d Parrot.

Tasman Sailing from hence to Moa, came to an Anchor before the Coast, ten Leagues beyond Jamna, where a great Boat, carrying seventeen Men, coming near the Ship, let flie a great many Arrows at the Seamen; but the next Morning being better reconcil’d, they came aboard, where the Chirurgeon of the Ship gave a Cap to one of the Jamneans, who, as a testimony of his thankfulness for the Present, requested him to sit down; which done, he began to braid his Hair from his Forehead to his Neck, tying the same with a String.

Tasman weighing Anchor, Sail’d between New Guinee and the Island Insou, having got nothing but a few Jamnean words from the Islanders, who call’d a Bone, Vertilia; a Hog, Paro; a Knife, Sapera; Beads, Sassera; a Nail, Tortor; Sleep, Moeni; and a Rat, Asphoo. So steering his Course along Arimoa, which is both higher and larger than the neighboring Amoa, and resembles a Seaman’s Cap, he left New Guinee a Stern of him, and Steering on Northerly, Sail’d by Schoutes-Island, where eight large Boats came within Gun-shot of him, each of which had on each side a Wing, under which sat four Rowers, two and two together, with their Feet hanging in the Water; at their approaching near the Ship they put out a long Pole, with a white Flag upon it; whereupon Tasman also commanded his white Ensign to be put forth, and threw a String of Beads, ty’d to a piece of Wood, out of his Cabbin Window; which the Southlanders had no sooner taken up, but in testimony of thankfulness they all broke their Arrows over their Heads, and kept near the sides of the Ship, till such time as the Boatswain thereof sounded a Trumpet, upon the hearing of which they all Row’d away with as much speed as they could possibly. These People were of a sallow Complexion; they broke their Arrows with great Ceremony; for first they pointed with them towards the Skie, then put them into the Water, and breaking each Arrow in two pieces on their Heads, they threw one over the Larboard, and the other over the Starboard; he that broke the Arrow, made a long Speech to the Hollanders, who took the same for an Oath of their Fidelity toward them. In every one of these Boats were twenty eight or thirty Men.

Tasman’s farther Voyage into New Guinee.

Tasman prosecuting his Voyage farther, discover’d the following day another Island, and a crooked Arm of New Guinee, near which he judg’d might be an Opening betwixt New Guinee and Gilolo; then leaving on his Starboard a great many blind Cliffs, dangerous Shelves, and uneven Grounds, he cast Anchor near a Rock, which at high Water was overflow’d. A Boat coming near the Ship, in which were six Men, whose long Hair hung down their Backs, one of them amongst the rest standing up, call’d to the Hollanders in the Ternaren Language, saying, What People? to which a Seaman, who understood and spake the said Language, answer’d, Spaniards: whereupon he ask’d, From what Countrey, and whither bound? to which he was answer’d, From Moa to Ternata: The Southlander hereupon reply’d, You are Deceivers, the Ship is not Spanish, but Holland make; whereupon Tasman caus’d the Prince of Orange’s Flag to be put out, which the Southlander no sooner saw, but he cry’d, It appears by your Flags that you are Hollanders, who are always more welcom to us than Spaniards: However, though the Seaman acknowledg’d his mistake, in saying they were Spaniards; yet the Southlanders would not stay within shot of them, but at their Rowing away cry’d aloud, Here is abundance of Pisang, Clappes, Potato’s, Sugar-Canes, and other Fruits on Shore.

From hence Tasman Sail’d Northerly between many Isles, and a Channel that separates New Guinee from Gilolo, by Cerani, Manipe, Bolao, and Burro, to a narrow Opening, where Pangesane being on his Larboard, rose with exceeding high Rocks, as Botton on the Starboard. These Rocks are most of them overgrown with Trees and Brambles. In the middle of this Channel also lies a Rock, for its shape call’d A Galley, by which Tasman Sailing, bent his Course homeward, and at last, on the fifteenth of June, Anno 1643. cast Anchor before Batavia.

CHAP. V.
Terra Borealis, or The Artick Region.

Having spoken something of the Terra Australis Incognita, or Unknown South-Land, there remains something to be said of the opposite part, namely, the Terra Borealis, or the Artick Region; which is call’d Incognita in like manner as the Terra Australis, in regard, though very much, as well of the one as of the other, hath been search’d into, and in part discover’d by several Voyagers, yet doubtless there is a very vast Tract of Land, in the Artick Region especially (if it be not rather Sea,) which is altogether unknown, and those parts which have been discover’d, as Groenland, Iseland, Nova Zembla, Spilbergen, Hudson’s Straights and Bay, &c. so imperfectly known, that they may well deserve the Title of Unknown.

The several parts of this Artick Region are, 1. Terra Subpolaris Incognita, or that part which lies directly under the Pole, and is otherwise call’d Orbis Arcticus. 2. Groenland. 3. Spilbergen, or Nieuland. 5. Iseland. 6. Nova Zembla.

A Description of Terra Subpolaris.

The Terra Subpolaris is describ’d by a certain Seaman of Bosleduc, to be a great black Rock, about thirty five Leagues in compass, and of an extraordinary heighth; through the Land adjoyning to which the Sea violently breaking, makes four great and violent Euripi, or Whirlpools, whose Waters driving Northward with so forcible a Stream, that no Ship, though carry’d by never so strong a Gale, is able to stem the Current, are at last swallow’d up in the Earth. It is also reported, that between two of these Euripi, namely that made by the Scythick Ocean, and that on the back side of Groenland, there lieth an Island Northward of Lappia and Biarmia, inhabited by Pygmies. Much more to this purpose is related of the Subpolar Region, but since it is very improbable that any one could come so near as to make any discovery thereof, to say more of this Matter, would be but to insist upon things favoring more of Fables than Reality.

Bounds and Situation of Groenland.

Groenland is that part of Terra Septentrionalis, which winds about from South to East, and decline Northward from Cape Faruel, in the Deucaledonian Sea; however, Groenland hath been generally taken for an Island; yet many late Navigators think it joyns with the Continent of Tartary, and others leave it in doubt whether it be Island or Continent: It is bounded towards the East with the Deucaledonian Ocean; towards the West, with Hudson’s Straights and Bay, which separate it from America; towards the North its Bounds are altogether unknown, and is not without reason suppos’d to be the utmost part of the World towards the North Pole. There are who believe it to be one Continent with America, and that upon this ground, because several who have attempted to pass through the Straight commonly call’d The Straight of Davis, into the East-Indies, affirm, that they found it to be a Gulph; but one Captain John Monk, who was also a great Undertaker in the North-West Passage through this Straight, or Gulf of Davis, alledges great Probabilities of this Lands being divided by Sea from the Continent of America.

The Topography of Groenland from the Danish and Iseland Chronicles.

This Countrey hath anciently been divided into two Regions, East-Groenland and West-Groenland; answerable to which Division Errick, surnam’d The Ruddy, the Son of Torvalde, is reported by the Danish Chronicle to have built two Forts or Lodges, Ostrebug and Westrebug, in the Eastern part. The first Planters of Christianity built the City Garde, which became, as the said Chronicle mentions, a City of great Repute and Traffick, and not long after, the Town Albe, and towards the Sea-Coast, a Monastery, dedicated to St. Thomas. The City Garde was a Bishop’s See, to which belong’d a Cathedral Church, by the Title of St. Nicholas, built in the same City, though a certain Iseland Chronicle makes mention of the Church of Strosnes, as the chief Metropolitan and Bishop’s See of Groenland. The Bishop assisted oftentimes in the Assembly of the Estates of Denmark, and held of the Bishop of Nidrosia or Drunthen in Norway, as the Temporal Estate of Groenland held of the Crown of Norway, the Norwegians being the onely known Planters of this Countrey, deriving their Original from the aforesaid Errick, according to the testimony of Mr. Vormius, and also of Angrimus Jonas, in his Specimen Islandicum, and the Vice-Roy of Norway, the Nomophylax (as the said Angrimus calls him,) or Sovereign Judge of the Countrey. The Inhabitants of Westreburg, or the Western Coast of Groenland, are by some call’d Skreglinguers. According to the Iseland Chronicle, the Towns and Places of chief note are Skageford, in the most Eastern part; a little farther West the Port of Funchebuder, so call’d from a Page of St. Olaus King of Norway, who together with several others were cast away upon that place; a little higher, the Roansen, full of white Bears, and other wild Beasts. In the Western Coast, Kindelfiord, an Arm of the Sea; on the right Shore whereof stands Korsekirk, i. e. a Church built cross-ways; also the Town Vandalebug, and not far off a Monastery, dedicated to St. Olaus and St. Augustine; the next Place is Rumpesinfiord, where there is a religious Convent, and divers little Islands, in which are Springs of Water, warm in the winter, and temperate in the Summer, which are accounted Medicinal and of great Vertue in the curing of divers Maladies; upon the same Coast lies Etsnatsfiord; between which and Rumpesinfiord is the Palace Fos, and a great Church, dedicated to St. Nicholas; near the Promontory Clining is another great House call’d Daller, and beyond Eynatsfiord, a great Island denominated Reynatsen, from the abundance of Rein-Deer which breed there: In the same Island is a Quarry of the Stone Talguestin, not consumable by Fire, and yet soft enough to be cut into any form, insomuch that Vessels have been made of it, containing twelve Tun. More Westerly lies the Island Langen, and another Royal House call’d Hellestad, then Erricksfford, another Arm of the Sea, and at the Entrance thereof, the Island Herrieven, part whereof belongs to the Dome, or Cathedral, and the other part to the Church of Dunes, the principal Church of Groenland, next to the Cathedral. North-West from Erricksfiord is Midfiord, and farther Northward, Bondeford; near which are several little Isles and Ports. Between Ostrebug and Westrebug is a large Desart, altogether uninhabited.

This Description of the Countrey, Extracted from the Iseland Chronicle, is look’d upon by a late French Writer of note, as the most particular and faithful; however, the Danish Chronicle differs in many things, and amongst others in this, that not the hundredth part of Groenland is possess’d by the Norwegians, but that there inhabit several different sorts of People, of different Fashions and Governments, altogether unknown to the Norwegians.

Temperature of Groenland.

Groenland, notwithstanding its Northerly Situation, is reported to be a Countrey not unfertile of Corn, and other Productions of the Earth; and in respect of its verdant Aspect at some Seasons of the Year, above the rest of those Septentrional Regions, it is concluded to have merited the Name of Groenland, i.e. Greenland; nay, so great is the Heat that is said to be there during the Moneths of June, July, and August, by reason of the reverberation of the Sun-beams from the Rocks, that many times there is but six Weeks space betwixt Seed-time and Harvest.

What sort of Animals breed there.

The Beasts, which are said to breed here in great numbers, are Horses, Deer, Foxes, Hares, Bears, both black and white, common Wolves, and a sort of Beast between a Deer and a Wolf, besides great store of Beavers and Martins, as the Iseland Chronicle testifies, whose Furr in fineness may compare with the Sables of Russia. There are also Gerfalcons in abundance, both white and grey, of so delicate a kind, that they were in ancient times sent to the Kings of Denmark as Presents of great rarity.

The Seas about Greenland abound in very many sorts of Fish, as Sea-Wolves, Sea-Dogs, Sea-Calves, and above all, incredible numbers of Whales of a vast bigness.

Strange kind of Horn found there.

But the most remarkable Commodity of this Countrey, is a kind of Horn, commonly call’d the Licornes, or Unicorns-Horn, which is found there in great quantities, and great store of it is to be seen in Denmark, some whole, some in great pieces, sometimes onely the Ends or Stumps; but since it appears very different from all other kind of Horn, there is great Question made amongst Naturalists, whether it be Horn or Tooth? and if Horn, whether the Horn of a Beast or Fish? but it is discover’d of late to be the Horn, or rather Tusk of a certain Fish, which the Islanders call Narhual, being indeed a kind of Whale, as the Name seems to imply; signifying a Whale which feeds upon Carcases.

The chief Voyagers thither.

This Countrey is call’d by the Natives, Secanunga; who was the first Discoverer thereof is not certainly known, but the first chief Voyagers thither were, of the Dutch, William Barents, or Barentson, of Amsterdam, who set forth towards those Parts in the Year 1594. and before him, Dithmar Blefkens, in the Year 1563. of the English, Mr. James Hall, who set out from Copenhagen in Denmark, Anno 1605. and in a second Voyage was slain by a Salvage of the Countrey.

The Coastings, Havens, and Creeks of Groenland.

The Coastings, Courses, Havens and Creeks of Groenland, according as Barentson receiv’d an Account of them from Iver Boty, a Groenlander written in the Norsh Language, as it is call’d, are as followeth: From Stad in Norway, to Hornness, the East part of Groenland, it is seven days Sailing. Between Iseland and Groenland lieth a Riff call’d Gombornse-skare, the Ice lying upon which, hindreth the Passage. Those that Sail from Bergen in Norway South of Rokeness in Iseland, come under Swafster, a Promontory, or high Land in the East part of Groenland, and within sight of the high Mount Whitsark; between which and Groenland lieth a Headland, call’d Hernoldus Hook, not far from Sound-Haven, formerly much frequented by the Norway Merchants. Those that Sail from Iseland to Groenland, Steer to Snoffness, West of Rokeness, and after South-West. East of Hernoldus Hook lieth the Village of Skagenford, the most Easterly Village of the Island; East of Skagenford, the Haven Bearford, inaccessible by Ships, by reason of a great Riff lying at the Mouth thereof. This Place is chiefly remarkable for the Whale-fishing, the Whales upon the going back of the Tide running into a great Swalth, as they call it, which is in the Haven. East of Bearford is the Haven call’d Allabong Sound, full of little Isles. East from the Icy Mountain, the aforemention’d Haven Fendobothes. Farther East is the Highland Corse Hought, where they Hunt white Bears. West from Hernoldus Hook is the Village Codosford, and hard by the Sea-Coast, a fair Church, which we conceive to be the same with Korsekirk above spoken of, as Codosford may also probably be the same with Kindelfiord. A little farther West lieth the Boy, or Town of Wartsdale (for in the Norsh Language Boy signifies a Town,) belonging to Petresuik, or Peterswike Church: Near this Boy or Town standeth a Cloyster, or Abbey of Canons Regular, dedicated to St. Olafe and St. Augustine. Next to Codosford is Rompnesford, the same questionless with the above-mention’d Rumpesinfiord, where there is a Cloyster of Nuns of the Order of St. Benedict: In this Ford lie many small Isles. Between Rompness and the next Sound lieth a great Garden call’d Vose, belonging to the King of the Countrey, as also St. Nicholas Church before mention’d. At the entrance into Emnestnesford is the Inlet Southwoderswike, and somewhat higher on the same side, the little Cape Bloming, beyond the Inlet Granwike; above that, the Garden call’d Daleth, belonging to the Cathedral Church; and on the right-hand to those that Sail out of the said Sound, a great Wood belonging to the same Church, where they feed their Oxen, Kine, and Horses. The Highland lying by Emestnesford, is call’d The Ramas Hayth, from the Rain-Deer which use to be there Hunted: And hereabouts is that sort of Stone of which they make large Fats or Cisterns, as hath been before intimated; it is by some call’d the Zevell-Stone, being a sort of Marble, or (as some will have it) Load-stone, of all colours. West from this lieth another Highland, call’d Long-Highland. The next Sound is call’d Swalterford, having a Church belonging to it of the same Name, and where there is also a Garden belonging to the King, call’d St. Hentelstad. Next to that lieth Erricksford, and at the entrance thereof the Highland Erricks Hought, belonging to Deverskirk, the first Parochial Church in Groenland. North-West from Erricksford, is Megdenford. Farther out is a Church call’d Scogelkirk; and farther in the Sound, Leadenkirk. Beyond Erricksford is another Ford or Sound, by the Name of Fossa, belonging to the Cathedral Church; and to the North of it, two Villages, Ever-boy and Forther-boy. From thence farther North lieth Bredaford; and after that Lormontford; and from thence Westward, Icedeep. To the North of the Westland lieth a spacious Wilderness, call’d Hemel Hatsfelt, and Edg’d with massie Rocks and Cliffs towards the Sea side; beyond which the Sea is innavigable, by reason of the many Swalgen, or Whirlpools thereabouts.

In Groenland there are divers Hills, wherein are Silver-Mines, multitudes of white Bears, with red Patches on their Heads; also white Hawks, and all sorts of Fish. There are moreover in the Countrey divers Rivers, frozen up for the most part of the Year, and cover’d with Ice; yet it is generally affirm’d, that it is not so cold there as in Norway or Iseland. On the Hills are said to grow Acorns and Nuts, very well tasted, and as big as Apples; also as good Wheat as is commonly produc’d in other Parts.

An Account of Groenland from Dithmar Blefkens his Journal.

In the Journal of Dithmar Blefkens’s Voyage, mention is made of a certain blind Monk, brought up in the Monastery of St. Thomas, who reported several memorable things concerning this Countrey, as that it was call’d Groenland antiphrastically, or by contrariety of Speech, as appearing seldom or never green; and that it abounded with Bears and white Foxes, and was not without Pygmies and Unicorns, which never appear’d till after the Sun was entred into Aries; that in the said Monastery of St. Thomas there was a Fountain of scalding Water, which was convey’d through Pipes of Stones to the Monks several Cells, and serv’d them not onely for Stoves, but for the dressing of their Meat, which was as well boyl’d by means of this Water, as if it had been over a real Fire, and that the Walls of the Monastery were made of a kind of Pumice-stone, upon which if Water were pour’d, it would produce a slimy Matter, commonly us’d in stead of Lime for Mortar, like the Stone of Mount Hecla in Iseland; that two of these Pygmies, a Male and a Female, were kept by the Abbot, and were both endu’d with perfect humane Shape, and overgrown with Hair, even to the outermost Joynts of their Fingers, the Male especially, who had a Beard reaching down to his Knees, but that they seem’d wholly devoid of Reason and Understanding, nor had any distinct use of Speech, onely made a semblance of Hissing of the manner of Geese; lastly, he reported the duration of the Lives of these Creatures to be answerable to the shortness of their Stature; but that concerning their Wars with the Cranes, he had no other knowledge than by Tradition.

From Mr. James Hall’s Description.

The Description of Groenland left by Mr. James Hall, renders it a high, mountainous, and craggy Region, sufficiently water’d with Rivers, and provided with good Harbors, of a Soil not unfertile in all places where he came, having between the Mountains fruitful Valleys and pleasant Plains, abounding with several sorts of Fowl, as Partridges, Pheasants, Sea-mews, Gulls, Crows, &c. but of Beasts, chiefly black Foxes, and (as was conjectur’d by the plenty of Harts-horns found about their Tents) Rein-Deer, yet not destitute of other Beasts, the Vestigium of one whereof was found to be not less than eight Inches over.

As for the Manners and Customs of the Natives, they are by the said Description represented to be a kind of Samoid, or wandring People, still moving from place to place, warlike and active, using Slings and Darts with marvellous dexterity, of a brown Complexion for the most part, and of an indifferent Stature, eating their Meat either quite raw, or onely a little parboyl’d, Clothing themselves with the Skins of such Beasts, or other Creatures, as they kill, especially Seals, or some of the largest size of Fowls, which they Dress very smooth and soft, turning the Feather or Hair side outwards in Summer, and inward in Winter. Their Weapons Bowes, Slings, and Bone or Iron-headed Darts; their Religion Idolatrous, but chiefly Sun-Worship, as was gather’d from their manner of Accost, when any of the English first approach’d them, for they us’d to point up to the Sun, as chief Author of their felicity, and then beat their Breasts, crying, Iliont, which seem’d to signifie as much as I mean no harm, and would not come near till those that met them did the like. Their Houses built of Whales Bones, and the Baulks thereof with Whales Ribs, and cover’d with Earth, but the best sort with Seal-Skins, having Vaults or Rooms under Ground, four-square, and two Yards deep in the Earth. Their manner of Burial, a Pile of Stones thrown over the Corps, being first wrapt up in Seal-Skins.

First Discovery of Spilbergia or Greenland.

Spilbergia, so call’d by the Hollanders, from Spilbergen, whom probably they reckon to have been the first Discoverer of it, is the same that we vulgarly call Greenland, and which Sir Hugh Willoughby (if not the first of all, yet at least the first of the English that discover’d any thing of these Parts) nam’d King James’s New-Land. The said Sir Hugh Willoughby set forth Anno 1553. in the Bona Esperanza, accompany’d with two Ships more, viz. the Bonaventure, Richard Challoner Captain, and the Bona Confidentia, and after some time of Coasting up and down those Northern Seas, he Landed with his Company upon the Place, where staying a few days, he sent three Men three days Journey into the Countrey South-West, and three more as far full West, who all, after much hardship in their Travelling, return’d without having met any People by the Way, or seen the least appearance of any Habitation. Sailing hence back for Lapland, they were all frozen to death in the Haven Arzina.

Fotherby’s Description of Greenland.

A Description of Greenland by one Mr. Robert Fotherby, represents the Nature of this Place contradictory to its Name, as before was observ’d of Groenland: “For certainly (saith he) no part of the World, yet known and discover’d, is less Green than this, both the Mountains and Low-lands being cover’d with Snow till the beginning of June. The Countrey, which is for the most part mountainous, bearing neither Grass nor Tree, save onely Heath or Ling, as it is call’d in the North parts of England, which grows upon the Moors or Heathy Grounds when the Snow begins to melt, and on which in Summer the Deer feed themselves fat in one Moneth; but how they live in the Winter, is a thing beyond any Man’s skill to comprehend, especially during the Sun’s absence under the Horizon, which in the Latitude of seventy seven Degrees continues from the eighteenth of October to the fourth of February.”

This Countrey is by many suppos’d never to have been inhabited by Men, yet not altogether uncapable of affording Habitation to such as would bring with them sufficient defensive Weapons against Hunger and Cold: For other Animals, it is found, by the testimony of those that have been upon the Place, not to be destitute; for besides Deer before mention’d, there have been seen Bears and Foxes; and of wild Fowl, Cuthbert Ducks, Willocks, Stints, Sea-Pigeons, Sea-Parrots, Gulls, Noddies, &c.

The Southermost part of Greenland, call’d Point Look-out, stands in seventy six Degrees and thirty Minutes. The West side of the Land was discover’d by the first Voyagers Northward as far as eighty Degrees and odd Minutes, and in that compass six or eight good Harbors for the Whale-fishing; the East side as far as seventy eight Degrees, with divers Islands, both great and small, yielding good Harbors, and store of Whales and Sea-Horses.

The Voyages of Jonas Pool and others to Greenland.

In the Year 1610. Jonas Pool, Master of the Amity fell in with this Land in May, and continu’d upon the Coast, discovering of Harbors, and killing of Morses, till June following: and he is said to have been the first that gave this Countrey the Name of Greenland. The next year he set out again, accompany’d with Thomas Edge, Commander of the Mary Margaret; And since many other Voyages have been made as to a Place known, and a great Trade driven in catching of Whales, not without several Contests with the Dutch and Danes, but nothing of late discover’d considerable more than in the first Voyages. The Harbors, Sounds and Coastings most taken notice of, are Fair Foreland, Cape Cold, Black-Point, Horn-Sound, Knotty-Point, Bell-Sound, Lowness, Cross-Road, Deer-Sound, Fowl-Sound, Close-Cove, Gurnet-Nose, Ice-Sound, and Green-Haven.

Cherry-Island.

There are few that have Sail’d to Greenland, but make great mention of Cherry Island, so call’d, as having been first discover’d at the Charges of Sir Francis Cherry, an eminent Merchant; by others Bear-Island, from the multitude of Bears found there; it lies in the Latitude of seventy four Degrees, and is noted for store of Fowl, Foxes like Dogs, and upon the Coasts great store of Whales, Sea-Horses, and Morses: It is also said to be furnish’d with Lead-Mines, and Pits of Sea-Coal.

Situation and first Discovery of Iseland.

Iseland, so call’d from the continual Ice which is upon it, is a craggy mountainous Countrey; and not onely the Hills, but a great part of the Low-land cover’d with perpetual Snow: It is of a Form somewhat oblong, lying between the fifty fourth and fifty ninth Degree of Northern Latitude, having Norway on the East, the Orcades and Scotland on the South, Grenland on the West, and the Hyperborean, or frozen Sea on the North. It is by Olaus Magnus suppos’d to be twice as big as Sicily, that is to say, about a hundred Leagues in length. It is the most known, and most througly discover’d of all the Countreys of the Artick Region, and is said to have been first found out and peopled in the Year of our Lord 900. by certain of the Nobility of East-Frisia in the Countrey of Breme, in the time of Alebrand, Bishop of that Countrey; but whether or no utterly unpeopled till that time, is a Question not easie to be determin’d, though in all probability so obvious a Place to be found out, could not lie so long totally uninhabited. Not long after several Colonies of Norwegians Setled themselves, some in Hitland, some in Ferow, others (following the Example of these Bremers) in Iseland. The Countrey is full of Rocks and Stones, and (as is credibly reported) not a cultivated Field or Garden in the whole Island, and by consequence no sort of Corn, yet the People living without either Bread or Salt, are very strong, and of a good Complexion: Neither is there a Tree to be seen, except the Birch, which likewise grows but in one place, and exceeds not the heighth of a Man, by reason of the violence of the Winds; yet there is said to be great plenty of Butter, the Grass being so fat, that the Oxen are not suffer’d to stay long at a time in the Pastures for fear of bursting. Till of late there was neither Town, nor any thing that could be call’d a Village, in the whole Island, but stragling Cottages here and there, not above three or four together in a place, most by the Sea side for the convenience of Fishing; they were built pretty deep in the Ground, but artificially fram’d of Whales Bones, with Seats, Benches, and other Utensils of the same; now sometimes they use Fir to the same purpose, which is cast upon the Coast by the force of the Sea from Tartary or elsewhere. For want of Vessels, they lay their Butter in Heaps in the Corners of their Houses like Mortar. In the Winter, wanting Fodder, they feed their Cattel with Fish. Besides these Cattel, which are Kine without Horns, Horses onely fit for carrying of Burthens, and very large Sheep, there are store of white Foxes, and huge Bears of the same colour, and a sort of rough Dogs, very well known, and frequent amongst us by the Name of Shocks, which the Islanders esteem not a little, and will part with their Children at a far easier rate: They keep neither Hogs nor Poultrey, for want of Grain to feed them.

Many Rivers in Iseland.

The Rivers belonging to this Island are many, and those not unpleasant, affording to the Inhabitants plenty of Fish, especially Sturgeon, Trouts, and Salmons; and one is especially remarkable for a Bridge made over it, which being the onely Bridge of the Countrey, is made of the great Bones of a Whale. The whole Island is one continu’d Desart, without any trodden Path or Road from one end to the other; so that all that have occasion to travel to any part thereof by Land, make use of the Compass, as if they were Voyaging by Sea.

Strange Fish on the Coast of Iseland.

The Coast of Iseland hath many strange and monstrous Fish worth observation, as first the Orca, which though nothing near so big as the Whale, yet is able to be the death of it; for being of the shape of a Ship turn’d upside-down, and having sharp long Fins on its Back, it pricks the Belly of the Whale therewith till it kills.

The next is the Hackfall, which is very fat, and about twelve Inches long.

Then the Dog-Fish, which lifting up its Head out of the Sea, Barks, and letting forth its young ones, receives them into her Belly again, when they have sported a while in the Sea.

Lastly, another Monster, of a most frightful shape, mention’d by Olaus Magnus, but not by any particular Name.

Strange Fountains.

In divers Parts of the Island are Fountains of scalding Water, which as soon as taken from the Fountain begins to cool, and when cold, hath a sulphury Substance swimming on the top.

At the West end is a smoaky Fountain, very cold, and turning all that is cast into it into Stone.

At the place upon the Sea call’d Turlocks Haven, are two Fountains of different quality, the one hot, the other cold, which by Pipes being brought together into one place, make a Bath of an excellent temperature, and of a medicinal Vertue.

Not far from Haven Halneford is a Cliff in a Rock of an unknown depth, and no Water to be discern’d by those that look down into it, but if a Stone be cast in, it shall make a noise for half an hour together, as if it were striking against a Brazen Vessel, and all this while the Water will be rising till it comes up to the brim, and then will be so long sinking again as the Stone was falling.

Mountains of Iseland.

There are also three Mountains in Iseland not to be left unmention’d, the Mountain of the Cross, the Mountain Snenelstockel, and the Mountain Hecla; the two first are chiefly considerable for their wonderful heighth, and for the dreadful noise of Thunder which is heard on the top of them, when in the adjacent parts below, the Air is calm and clear; the third lying in the North of the Island, and not very high, is one of the most prodigious Vulcans in the World, for the casting forth of Flames, black Ashes, and Pumice-Stones, insomuch that there is no possibility of Habitation within six Miles of it round about; and it is a receiv’d Opinion of the Inhabitants, that it is the place of Torment for the Souls of the Damned; from whence there hath risen such a company of strange Stories and Fables, that it would make up a Volume of it self to relate them. The occasion of the great Eruption of this Mountain is not without much reason imputed to the inflammation of the Sulphur, of which there are several Mines or Pits in the Countrey, though none of any sort of Metal.

First planting of Christian Religion here.

Waldemarus, King of Denmark and Norway, being consequently Master of this amongst the other Norwegian Colonies, Planted the Christian Religion in this Island in the Year of Christ 1398. and Ordain’d two Bishops, one in Schalholden, in the East part, another in Hollen, in the West; and after the Reformation was begun, Christianus, King of Denmark, took care to propagate the Reformed Doctrine there, as well as in other parts of his Dominions; and to that end sent over a Printer thither, that the BIBLE, together with the Works of Philip Melancthon and Urbanus Regius, might be publish’d in the Vulgar Tongue of the Countrey. But these Proceedings were mainly oppos’d by the Bishop of Schalholden, who animating the People to Rebellion, they slew the King’s Lieutenant: Whereupon the next Year Paul Holfelt, a Knight of the Danish Order, being sent over with an Army, overthrew the Rebels, and taking off the chief Heads of the Rebellion, committed the Charge of the Government to another Nobleman of Denmark, whom he left upon the Place. But one Tadde Bonde, a great Man of the Countrey, meditating a Revolt, drew divers Persons of principal note into Conspiracy with him, and was advancing to a formidable Power, had not the Bishop given continual Intelligence of their Proceedings to the King’s Lieutenant, who thereupon employ’d Agents to the chief Accomplices of the Faction, and what with fair Means and threatnings so wrought with them, that they return’d to their Obedience, and forsook Todde, insomuch that he flying with a small Party, betook himself to a fastness at the Foot of Heckelveld, where being hemm’d in, those about him were slain, and he himself taken Prisoner; and because no Man to whose safe custody he was offer’d durst receive him, so much dreaded was his Power, one Jonas, a bold courageous Fellow, slew him with his own Hand, and thereby put an end to all farther Tumults and Seditions.

The People Iseland addicted to Sorcery and Superstition.

So much have the People of this Island been ever addicted to Sorcerie and Superstition, that notwithstanding the Profession of Christianity, and the frequent Preaching against those Sins, especially since the Reformation, the generality of them are still wedded to many of those old diabolical Customs, which were practis’d there in time of Paganism; and amongst other things they are said to be serv’d, many of them, by Spirits, which constantly attend them, and as Olaus Magnus writes of the Finlanders, they are oftentimes dealt with by Strangers, to sell them prosperous Winds for Money, and (doubtless by the help of the Devil) perform the same; as also on the contrary, they are said by their Enchantments to stop the Course of a Ship, and make it as it were immovable, though in the Stream of never so prosperous a Gale. They are a proud, haughty People, and for the most part endu’d with vast strength of Body; their Habit so promiscuous, that neither Sex can be distinguish’d by it. They are not onely forward to prostitute their Daughters to those Germans that Trade with them at Hafnefords, but that Virgin who hath had to do with a German, shall be sure to be so much the more esteem’d and Courted.

Towns and Places of note.

The onely Towns and Buildings of note here, and those created but of late Ages, are 1. Hafnefords, a Haven Town, chiefly frequented by Dutch Merchants for Traffick with the Natives.

2. Bedstede, the Residence of the Lord Lieutenant or Governor for the King of Denmark.

3. The Bishops See of Halsar, having four Monasteries belonging to it, viz. Pingore, Remestede, Modor, and Monkeniere.

4. The Bishops See of Schalholt, to which also doth belong four Monasteries, viz. Vedey, Pernebar, Kirkebar, and Schirde.

Their Place and manner of Judicature.

The Nobles of Iseland are call’d Bonden; their Justiciaries or Judges, being twelve in number, Lochmaders, that is, Men of Law or Justice, who are said to meet once a year on the twenty ninth of June, to administer Justice in a place ordain’d for that purpose in the midst of the Island, appearing like some feigned Paradice, so pleasant a place it is represented to be at that time of the year, being (as the Tradition goes) from a high burning Mountain like Hecla, consum’d to a Plain, and so environ’d with Rocks, that there was left but a small Passage for one at a time to enter. Here the Governor having first given the Charge, leaves the Trial of all Matters to the Lochmaders, who having diligently heard every Cause argued on both sides, withdraw for a while to Consult together, and then proceed to Sentence, the same Persons being both Jury and Judge; but if any Case of difficulty or scruple arise, they consult the Governor.

Angrimus Jonas’s Relation of Iseland.

Angrimus Jonas’s Relation of Iseland differing much from what hath been deliver’d by Blefkens, is not to be omitted. He saith it was first discover’d by one Naddocus, a Pyrate, who going towards the Farensian Islands, was cast by Tempest upon the Shore of East-Iseland, near the Mountain Reidarfial; and as he departed from the Coast, perceiving the tops of the highest Mountains cover’d with a very deep Snow, call’d the Island Snælandia, that is, Snowy Countrey.

Gardarus’s Voyage to Iseland.

Upon the fame of Naddocus’s Discovery, one Gardarus, the Son of Suavarus, a Swede, was desirous to make a Voyage thither, and arriving near the Eastern Shore, Winter’d in the Bay of Skialfanda, or North-Island, in the Year of our Lord 864. and call’d the Haven Huscawick, from the Houses or Wintering-places built there, as the next Haven to it was call’d Nartarawick, from Natrare, an eminent Mariner in this Expedition. Gardarus returning home about the beginning of the Spring, call’d the Countrey from his own Name Gardarsholm.

Flocco’s Voyage to the same Place.

The next that follow’d his Example, was one Flocco, a famous Pyrate, whose Daughter Geirhilda being drown’d upon the Coast of Schetland (anciently Hietland,) gave the Name of Geirhildarwata to the Sea thereabouts: Not having the use of the Mariners Compass, he made use of Ravens for the steering of his Course, and having sent forth two without success, by the guidance of the third he had sight of the Eastern side of the Island; and Steering Southward, he found a very wide Bay, between the Promontories Renkanes and Snæfesness; which Bay, from Faxa a Scottish Mariner that accompany’d him, he nam’d Faxaos, that is, The Mouth of Faxa, though from its many Havens it came afterwards to be term’d Hafnafiordur. Sailing along the West side of the Island, he entred the Bay Bredafiord, and took up his Quarters at Watnesfiordur, a Haven in the Province Bardostraund (for by these Names these Places came afterwards to be known:) Having stay’d here two Winters, he return’d back into Norway, and is said to have been the first that gave this Countrey the Name of Iseland, from the great quantities of Ice which fill’d the Seas thereabouts, he also gave it the Name of Rafnaflock, from the Ravens which serv’d him in stead of a Compass.

A Plantation setled in Ise by Ingulphus and Hiorleifus.

The last and most considerable Adventurer was Ingulfus, the Son of Orn, Duke of Fyrdafilace in Norway, who, together with his Cousin Hiorleifus, that Marry’d his Sister Helca, being adjudg’d to Banishment by Halsten (to the Award of whose Judgment they had submitted themselves) upon the slaughter of his two Brethren, Holmsten and Hersten, (these three Brethren were the Sons of Atlas, one of the prime Noblemen of Norway) in a Quarrel, wherein Halsten was chosen Umpire; and also detesting the Tyranny of Haraldus Pulchricomus, King of Norway, went over Gonfaloniere, or chief Leader of a great Colony of People, whom he rais’d for the setling of a Plantation in some foreign Countrey: Accompany’d with his Cousin Hiorleifus, he took Shipping for Iseland in the Year of our Lord 854. having been over to visit it about four years before; he Landed at a Promontory on the South Shore, which from him took the Name of Ingulfholde, and at Reicharwick setled his Habitation, while Hiorleifus seated himself at the Promontory by him call’d Hiorleifholda, where he built two very large Houses, each being about a hundred and thirty Foot long; then he set himself to Manure and Till the Ground, employing in that Work ten Slaves, whom he brought with him for that purpose out of Norway; but it was not long ere they traiterously set upon him and slew him by an Ambuscade which they had laid for him; after which they betook themselves to certain little Isles, which were nam’d Westmafyar, where before they had well nestled themselves, the whole Race of them were rooted out by Ingulphus, in revenge of his Kinsman’s Death. After this the Island grew daily more and more populous by the coming over of new Families from Norway; so that at this day it is a Place not the least considerable belonging to the Kings of Denmark.

The ancient Inhabitants of this Place (for it is to be suppos’d that there were People here before the coming over of Ingulfus) were call’d Papæ or Pappæ, and the East side of the Island, Papey, which agrees very well with the Names of two little Islands on the Coast of Scotland, Pappa and Westrepappa, from which many conjecture, as also from several Crosses and Bells found upon the Place, that there hath been in former Ages a resort of the Irish, and of the People of the North-West parts of Scotland.

The Division of Iseland.

The Eastern Bound of Iseland is call’d Austurhorn; the Western, Randesandur; the Northern, Langanes; and the Southern, Reicranes. The Island being divided according to the four Quarters of the World, North-Island is sever’d from East-Island by the aforesaid Promontory of Langanes; from West-Island by Rutafiordur Bay; from South-Island, by vast and unpassable Desarts. Between South-Island and East-Island runneth the River Jocolsu, through the Desarts of Solseimasande. Between South-Island and West-Island a famous River nam’d Albis, which emptieth it self into the Bay of Bargarfiord.

Schetland the Thule of the Ancients.

’Tis a vulgar Opinion, that this Island is the same which the Ancients call’d Thule; but upon consideration it will appear, that by the Ultima Thule taken notice of by Virgil, Claudian, Statius, Pythias Massiliensis, Pliny, Seneca, Solinus, Tacitus, and others, is meant one of the British Isles, amongst which were comprehended the Isles on the North of Scotland, as the Orcades, and some others, the utmost of which we call Schetland, and is very probable to be this Ultima Thule of the Ancients.

Nova Zembla, when first discover’d.

Nova Zembla, lying under seventy six Degrees of Northern Latitude, and a hundred and twelve Degrees and twenty five Minutes of Longitude, and being reckon’d above two hundred Miles in length, was, together with the River Puora, and Straights of Weygats, discover’d, (and, as it is thought, first of all) by Stephen Burrough, who was sent out by the Muscovia Company in the Year 1556. to find out a Way to Cathay by the North-East.

Afterwards one Oliver Bunel, a Dutch-man, mov’d with the hope of Gain, went from Enkhuissen to Pecora; where (having first discover’d Costinfarca in Nova Zembla) he lost all by Shipwrack.

The States-General nothing discourag’d with the little success of these two Voyagers, sent forth two Ships under the Command of Hugo Linschot, to the Straights of Weygats, and two others under William Barrents, who were to go directly Northwards for Nova Zembla: Linschot went fifty Miles beyond the Straights, but the Northerly Winds and late Season of the year forc’d him to hasten back with all possible speed. William Barents and his Company were necessitated in the Year 1596. being not able to get off, in regard the Ice increas’d upon them more and more, to take up their Winter Quarters there in a Cottage, which they made a shift to cast up for their present necessity, having much ado to defend themselves against the Bears, that continually assaulted them.

Description of the Countrey.

This Countrey is generally deliver’d to be a barren and desart Countrey, full of Wood indeed, but the Boughs as bare of Leaves, as the Ground of Grass; also very incommodious to be travell’d through, by reason of its desartness, and the danger of Bears, great fierce Foxes, and such like ravenous Beasts, which feed onely upon Flesh, and which are the onely Beasts this Countrey harbors.

In a Journal of Mr. Henry Hudson, there is to be found a much more favorable Description of the Countrey: “Generally (saith he) the Land of Nova Zembla that we have seen, is to a Man’s Eye a pleasant Land, much Main High-land with no Snow on it, looking in some places green, and Deer feeding thereon, and the Hills partly cover’d with Snow, and partly bare.”

It should seem to have been a receiv’d Opinion from the first Discovery of Nova Zembla, that it was inhabited by Pygmies, it being several times, in the Journals of some Voyages, mention’d particularly by the Name of The Land of Pygmies, but upon what certain Ground cannot in the least be discover’d; for we find not from the Russians (to whom the Place, by reason of its Vicinity, is probable to have been first known) any other Account of the Inhabitants, but that they are a People wholly destitute of civil Manners, and unlimited by Law or Religion, saving that they seem to give some kind of Adoration to the Sun, Moon, and North-star, and have some Qualities which speak them rational Creatures; whereas the Pygmies (if there be any such Creatures) are thought to have nothing of Humane but their Shape onely.

Willoughby-Island.

Besides Nova Zembla there is not far from it another Island, known by the Name of Willoughby-Island, from Sir Hugh Willoughby, the first Discoverer; they both are of the Dominions of the Czar of Russia.

Several Attempts for the discovery of the North-West Passage.

What hath been discover’d of Sea in the North or South parts of the World, is of no less Consequence than what hath been discover’d of Land, and the Straight of Hudson Northward, is no less considerable than the Straight of Magellan South; we shall therefore compleat this Discourse of the Artick Region with a brief Mention of what Capes, Bays, Sounds, &c. have been found out by those that have attempted to find a Passage by the North-West to the East-Indies.

Not to insist upon the fabulous Stories of King Arthur’s first conquering Ireland, and then Sailing into the Northern Seas, and subduing Scantia, Iseland, Groenland, and (as the Story saith) many other Islands beyond Norway even under the Pole, or of Malgo’s subduing Ireland, Iseland, the Orcades and Norway, or Octher’s Reports to King Alfred of his Voyages to the North-East parts beyond Norway, or the Voyages of the two famous Venetian Brethren, Nicolo and Antonio Zeni, or of Marcus Paulus Venetus, Odoricus and Vertomannus; the first English-man we hear of, that made an Expedition into those Northern Seas, was Sir Hugh Willoughby, before taken notice of for the Discovery of King James’s Newland and Willoughby-Island, in the Year of our Lord 1553.

Stephen Burroughs (as hath been intimated) discover’d amongst other Places, about the Year 1556. the Straight of Vaigats.

Queen Elizabeths Foreland.

Forbisher’s Straight.

In the Year 1576. Sir Martin Forbisher setting forth with two Barques, after he had been out about five Weeks, had sight of a High-land, which he nam’d Queen Elizabeths Foreland: Thence Sailing more Northerly to the heighth of about sixty two Degrees, he descry’d a great Sea or Inlet, which he entred, and thence it took the Appellation of Forbisher’s Straight. About two years after proceeding to a farther discovery of it, he entred a good way into it, and took possession of the utmost Place he went to for Queen Elizabeth, who thereupon gave it the Name of Meta Incognita.

Anno 1580. Arthur Pett and Charles Jackman were sent out by the Russian Company, to make a Discovery of the River Ob, and passing the Straight of Waigats, took particular observation of the Islands and Places there, but not being able to pass much farther, by reason of the Ice, towards the latter end of the year they return’d.

Davis’s Straight.

In prosecution of this Discovery to the North-West, Captain John Davis of Sandruge in Devonshire, made three Voyages; his first Anno 1585. his second, 1587. in which he met with many strange Adventures; but the main thing that accru’d from these Voyages, was the finding of a mighty Through-let between vast and desart Islands, to which his Name gave the Appellation of Fretum Davis, or Davis’s Straight.

The next that went upon this Design was Captain George Weymouth, who from the Year 1585 to 1602 made several Expeditions, which produc’d large Relations of strange Accidents that befell them, but little of Discovery farther than what had been made before.

Cape Christianus.

Mr. James Hall, very noted for his Voyages to Groenland, (which before was by Captain Davis call’d Desolation) at his falling in with that Place nam’d a Head-land from the then King of Denmark, Cape Christianus, which some think to be no other than Cape Farewel.

Anno 1606. Mr. John Knight was set out by the King of Denmark, of the Passages of whole Voyage little or nothing memorable is recorded.

Hudson’s Straight and Bay.

The next and most famous Attempter in the discovery of the North-West Passage, was Henry Hudson, who is said to have discover’d farther Northward to the Pole than any before him. From the Year 1607 to 1610 he made several Voyages, being set out by Sir Thomas Smith, Sir Dudley Diggs, and Mr. John Wostenholm, with others that were his great Friends, and Advancers of such publick Designs. In his last Voyage the Isles of Gods Mercy, Prince Henry’s Foreland, King James’s Cape, Queen Annes Cape, Diggs’s Island, Cape Wostenholm, The King’s Foreland, Mount Charles, Cape Salisbury, &c. were first taken notice of and nam’d, and, which were his principal Discoveries, and therefore worthily retaining his Name, Hudson’s Straight and Bay; but in his return homeward he was set upon in his Cabbin by one Green, Wilson, and others of their Conspiracy, and together with his Son John Hudson, Tho. Widdows, Arn. Ludlow, Sidrach Faner, and two or three more, was put over into a small Shallop, in which they were forc’d to seek their Fortune, and in all likelihood perish’d, for they were never heard of after. Not long after Green going on Shore upon a strange Island, was shot from an Ambuscade of Salvages into the Heart; the like End had Wilson, and three more of the Conspirators dy’d of their mortal Wounds, the rest with much ado got home in a very sick and weak Condition, through the Hardships they had sustain’d, and want of Provisions.

There was also another Hudson, who Anno 1608. went to the heighth of eighty one Degrees, and gave Names to certain Places, which continue to this day, as Whale-Bay, Hackluit’s Headland, and Hudson’s Touches.

Button’s Bay.

By the Assistance of Prince Henry, and those other Noble Persons above mention’d, Captain Thomas Button set out in the Year 1612. and is said to have pass’d Hudson’s Straight, and leaving Hudson’s Bay to the South, to have Sail’d two hundred Leagues South-Westward over a Sea above eighty Fathoms deep, which at length he discover’d to be another great Bay, since call’d Button’s Bay; He is said also to have discover’d a great Continent, which he call’d New Wales.

Baffin’s Bay.

Several other Voyagers there were in this great Attempt of the North-West Passage, as Captain Gibbons, Robert Bylot, William Baffins, and Captain William Hawkridge, who though they all came short of the main Enterprize, yet every one found out some new Cape, Bay, or Promontory, or open’d a farther Passage than had been before, as Bylot made known Cape Comfort; Baffin, the Inlet call’d from him Baffins Bay, as also Sir James Lancaster’s Sound; Hawkridge, a farther Passage into Lumly’s Inlet.

From the Year 1616. to 1631. the Business slept, and then a Voyage was undertaken by Captain Luke Fox, who at his Return gave very good hopes and encouragement, that the Work, so long in prosecution, was not impossible to be effected; nevertheless, by reason of the late troublesom Times it was again wholly laid aside for almost forty years; but in the Year 1668. several Persons of Honor undertook to revive the Work, and so that purpose furnish’d out two Ships, which set forth in June, and return’d about the beginning of October the Year following, giving so satisfactory an Account of their Voyage, that in the Year 1670. the same Adventurers thought fit to send out two Ships more, so furnish’d, as to endure a Wintering there, which they did, with greater hopes than ever of finding out the North-West Passage, besides a handsom Cargo of rich Furrs, which made it more than a saving Voyage; so that ’tis suppos’d this will not be the last Attempt, but that another will suddenly follow. And it may well be observ’d, that nothing considerable hath been done, in this grand Enterprize, but by the English.

A brief View of what Places are posses’d at this day in the West-Indies by the English, Spaniards, French, Portuguese, and Dutch.

The English possess in Northern America, New England, the Bay of Trinity, Chincet, and a part of Terra Nova, or New-found Land; Virginia, part of Florida, now call’d Carolina, the Bermudas, or Summer-Islands, New Holland, which they took from the Dutch An. 1664. with New Amsterdam and Fort Orange; Terra Mariæ, or Mary-Land, part of the Isles call’d Lucaies; among the Antillæ or Caribbee-Islands, Barbados, Anguilla, part of St. Christophers, Montserrat, Nieves or Mevis, Antego, Dominico, and St. Vincent; the Isle of St. Catherine, otherwise call’d Providence, Jamaica, the Isles of Curacao and Trinity, several Colonies at Surinam and Sinamari, with several Forts upon the Coast of Guiana; and lastly, the Haven Porto Bello, once the Spaniards.

The Spaniards possess the greatest and best part of America, wherein they have a vast number of very considerable Towns. In Northern America they have 1. New Spain, in which are the Audiences of Mexico, Guadalajara, and Guatimala. 2. The Islands Cuba and Hispaniola (excepting some parts towards the West, which are in possession of the French), Boriquen, &c. also St. Augustine and St. Matthew in Florida, and a part of New Mexico. In Southern America, Castilla d’ Oro or Golden Castile, otherwise call’d Terra Firma, in which are the Audiences of Panama, and the new Realm of Granada; next Peru, in which are the Audiences of Quito, Lima, and La Plata; lastly, Chili and Paraguay, which comprehends the Countreys of Tucuman and La Plata.

The French have in Canada, or Nova Francia, Montreal, the Rivers Quebeck, Tadousack, and some Places upon the great River of St. Lawrence; also Accadie, or Nova Scotia, the Isle of Cape Breton, with the Fort St. Peter, from whence they Traffick to Nepigiquit, with the Salvages of that Coast; part of the Isle of Terre-Neuve, Pemptagoet, St. Jean, Port-Royal, and other Fortresses. Among the Caribbee-Islands, part of St. Christophers, St. Bartholomew, St. Crux, St. Martin, Guadalupe, Deseado, Marigalante, Todos los Sanctos, Martinico, St. Alousie and Granada; likewise some Colonies on the West of Hispaniola. Upon the Continent of Southern America, on the Coast of Guiana, the Isle Cayene, where stands the Fort of St. Michael de Ceperoux, now Fort Louis; also the Colonies of Mathouri and Armire, Courrou, Coonama and Comaribo.

The Portuguese possess all the Coast of Brasile in Southern America, with several Capitania’s or Præfectures thereof.

The Dutch have onely the Isles of St. Eustace and Saba, the Town of Coro in Terra Firma, the Colonies Boron, Esquib, Berebie, Aperwaque, and others, on the Coast of Guiana.

FINIS.

TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES

1. Added closing quotes to all quoted passages.

2. The Section numbering was irregular. Corrected the numbers which were obvious. Appended an "a" to the second of a duplicate. There were no section ones. And a few items did not get section numbers.

3. There seemed to be no clear distinction between why some topics were Chapters and others just sections Sections.

4. P. 15, changed “In v.ta Heliogabali” to “In vita Heliogabali”.

5. P. 35, changed “Consutius” to “Confutius”.

6. P. 74, changed “Aso” to “Also”.

7. P. 123, changed “Chineses” to “Chileses”.

8. P. 230, changed “and the rather” to “and he rather”.

9. P. 396, changed “next it” to “next to it”.

10. P. 611, changed “Year 1231.” to “Year 1531.”

11. Silently corrected typographical errors and variations in spelling.

12. Retained anachronistic, non-standard, and uncertain spellings as printed.

*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AMERICA: BEING THE LATEST, AND MOST ACCURATE DESCRIPTION OF THE NEVV VVORLD ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works provided that:

- • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”

- • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.

- • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of receipt of the work.

- • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™

Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility: www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

Table of Contents

AMERICA: BEING THE LATEST, AND MOST ACCURATE DESCRIPTION OF THE NEVV VVORLD; CONTAINING The Original of the Inhabitants, and the Remarkable Voyages thither. THE CONQUEST OF THE VAST EMPIRES OF Mexico and Peru, AND OTHER LARGE PROVINCES and TERRITORIES, WITH THE SEVERAL EUROPEAN PLANTATIONS IN THOSE PARTS. ALSO Their Cities, Fortresses, Towns, Temples, Mountains, and Rivers. Their Habits, Customs, Manners, and Religions. Their Plants, Beasts, Birds, and Serpents. WITH An APPENDIX, containing, besides several other considerable Additions, a brief Survey of what hath been discover’d of the Unknown South-Land and the Arctick Region.

A Catalogue of the Authors, which are either mention’d, or made use of in this Volume of America.

THE CONTENTS of the several CHAPTERS and SECTIONS.

AN ACCURATE DESCRIPTION OF AMERICA.

- CHAP. I. America, unknown to the Antients.

- CHAP. II. Of the Original of the Americans, whence they came, when, how, and from what People Planted.

- Sect. I.

- Sect. II.

- CHAP. III. First Discoverers of America. Christopher Colonus his Expedition.

- Sect. III.

- Sect. IV. Pietro Alponso Nigno his Voyage.

- Sect. V. The Voyage of Vincent Agnes Pinzon.

- Sect. VI. The Expedition of Americus Vesputius.

- Sect. VII. The Expedition of Alphonso, Fogeda, Diego Nicuesa, Ancisus, and Roderick Colmenares.

- Sect. VIII. Peter Arias his Expedition, and remarkable Passages of Vascus Nunnez.

- Sect. IX. The Expeditions of Francisco Fernandez, Lupus Caizedus, Christophero Morantes, Bernardo Igniguez, and Juan Grisalva.

- Sect. IXa. The Expedition of Ferdinand Magaglian, commonly call’d Magellane.

- Sect. X. Ferdinando Cortez his Voyage.

- Sect. XI. Diego Gottierez his Expedition.

- Sect. XIa. The Expeditions of Peter Alvarado, Francisco and Gonzalvo Pizarro, and Diego de Almagro.

- Sect. XII. The Expeditions of John Stade, and Nicholas Durando Villegagnon.

- Sect. XIII. The Expeditions of John Ribald, Renatus Laudonier, and Gurgie.

- Sect. XIV. Four English Expeditions, under the Conduct of our Famous Sea-Captains Martin Forbisher, Sir Francis Drake, Thomas Candish, and John Smith.

- Sect. XV. Netherland Expedition by Jaques Mahu, and Simon de Cordes.

- Sect. XVI. The Expedition of Oliver van Noord.

- Sect. XVIa. The Expedition of George Van Spilbergen.

- Sect. XVII. The Expedition of William Corneliszon Schouten, and Jacob Le Maire.

- Sect. XVIII. Voyage of the Nassavian Fleet, under the Command of Jaques L’Heremite, and Geen Huigo Schapenham.

- Henry Brewer his Voyage.

The Second Book, CONTAINING A DESCRIPTION OF NORTHERN AMERICA

CHAP. I. Of the Bounds of America, and of the Division of the Mexican or Northern part thereof.

- Sect. II. Estotiland.

- Sect. III. Terra Laboratoris.

- Sect. IV. Canada, or New France.

- Sect. V. Accadia, or Nova Scotia.

- Sect. VI. Norumbegua.

CHAP. II. New England.

- Sect. II. New Netherland, now call’d New York.

A NEW DESCRIPTION OF MARY-LAND.

- SECT. III.

- Sect. IV. Virginia.

- The Relation of Captain Smith’s being taken Prisoner by Powhatan, and of his being deliver’d from Death by his Daughter Pocahonta.

- Sect. V. Carolina.

CHAP. III. Florida.

- Sect. II. Jucatan.

CHAP. IV. Guatimala.

- Sect. II. Vera Paz.

- Sect. III. Honduras.

- Sect. IV. Nicaragua.

- Sect. V. Costarica.

- Sect. VI. Veragua.

- Sect. VII. Guatimala, properly so call’d.

CHAP. V. The Kingdom of Mexico, or New-Spain.

- Sect. II. Mechoacan.

- Sect. III. Tlascalla.

- Sect. IV. Guaxata.

- Sect. V. Panuco.

- Sect. VI. Tabasco.

CHAP. VI. New Gallicia.

- Sect. II. Guadalajara.

- Sect. III. Xalisco.

- Sect. IV. Chiametla.

- Sect. V. Couliacan.

- Sect. VI. Cinoloa.

- Sect. VII. Zacatecas.

CHAP. VII. New Biscay.

- Sect. II.

CHAP. VIII. New Mexico.

CHAP. IX. Cibola, Tontonteac, and Nova Granada.

CHAP. X. Quivira.

CHAP. XI. Terra Nova, or New-found Land, with the Island of Assumption.

CHAP. XII. The Bermudas, or Summer-Islands.

CHAP. XIII. Hispaniola.

CHAP. XIV. Porto Rico, and Monico.

CHAP. XV. Cuba.

CHAP. XVI. Jamaica.

CHAP. XVII. The Islands call’d the Lucaies.

CHAP. XVIII. The Caribby Islands.

- Sect. II. Anegada and Sombrero.

- Sect. III. Las Virgines.

- Sect. IV. Anguilla.

- Sect. V. Saba.

- Sect. VI. St. Crux.

- Sect. VII. St. Martin.

- Sect. VIII. St. Bartholomew.

- Sect. IX. Barboude.

- Sect. X. Rotonda.

- Sect. XI. Nevis.

- Sect. XII. Eustathius.

- Sect. XIII. Antego.

- Sect. XIV. Montserrat.

- Sect. XV. Guadalupe.

- Sect. XVI. Deseado.

- Sect. XVII. Marigalante.

- Sect. XVIII. Todos Sanctos.

- Sect. XIX. De Aves.

- Sect. XX. Dominico.

- Sect. XXI. Martinico.

- Sect. XXII. St. Lucia.

- Sect. XXIII. Barbados.

- Sect. XXIV. St. Vincent.

- Sect. XXV. Bekia.

- Sect. XXVI. Granada.

- Sect. XXVII. Tabago.

- Sect. XXVIII. St. Christophers.

CHAP. XIX. The Islands Sotavento, and the Isle Trinidado.

- Sect. II. Cubagua.

- Sect. III. Trinidado.

CHAP. XX. California.

The Third Book, CONTAINING A DESCRIPTION OF PERUANA OR, Southern America.

- CHAP. I.

- CHAP. II. Castella Aurea, otherwise call’d Terra Firma.

- Sect. II. Panama.

- Sect. III. Darien.

- Sect. IV. New Andaluzia.

- Sect. V. St. Martha.

- Sect. VI. Rio de la Hacha.

- CHAP. III. New Granada.

- Sect. II. Granada.

- Sect. III. Popayana.

- CHAP. IV. Peru.

- Sect. II. Quito.

- Sect. III. Los Quixos.

- Sect. IV. Lima.

- Sect. V. Cusco.

- Sect. VI. Los Charcas.

- Sect. VII. Collao.

- CHAP. V. Chile.

- Sect. II. Chile, properly so call’d.

- Sect. III. Magellanica.

- CHAP. VI. Paraguay, or Rio de la Plata.

- Sect. II. Rio de la Plata, properly so call’d.

- Sect. III. Tucuman.

- Sect. IV. La Crux de Sierra.

- CHAP. VII. Brasile.

- Sect. II. St. Vincent.

- Sect. III. Rio de Janeiro.

- Sect. IV. De Spirito Sancto.

- Sect. V. Porto Seguro.

- Sect. VI. Los Isleos.

- Sect. VII. Bahia de Todos los Sanctos.

- Sect. VIII. Pernambuco.

- Sect. IX. Parayba.

- Sect. X. Maragnan.

- Sect. XI. The Lordships Tamarica, Rio Grande, Siara, and Para.

- A Relation of the Proceedings of the Netherland West-India Company in Brasile to the Year 1658.

- Sect. XII. The Journey of Rodulphus Baron, with the Description of the Customs and Manners of the Tapuyans.

- Sect. XIII. Grave Maurice his Account of Brasile, so far as it concern’d the West-India Company.

- Sect. XIV. The Councellor Dussen’s Relation of so much of Brasile as concerns the West-India Company.

- A Description, of the Palace Freyburgh, two Bridges, and a Banquetting-house, all built by Grave Maurice.

- CHAP. VIII. Guiana.

- Sect. II. A Relation of the Journey of Francisco Orellana.

- CHAP. IX. Paria, or New Andalusia.

- Sect. II. Cumana.

- Sect. III. Venezuela.

- Sect. IV. The Islands Margareta, Cubagua, and Coche.

- Sect. V. Of the Islands of Southern America.

An Appendix,

- CHAP. I. Rio de la Plata.

- CHAP. II. Chili.

- A View of the Chilesian Language.

- CHAP. III. Magellanica.

- CHAP. IV. The unknown South-Land.

- CHAP. V. Terra Borealis, or The Artick Region.

- Several Attempts for the discovery of the North-West Passage.

- A brief View of what Places are posses’d at this day in the West-Indies by the English, Spaniards, French, Portuguese, and Dutch.

TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE